User's Manual 16 RL78/ F13, F14 User's Manual: Hardware 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcontrollers All information contained in these materials, including products and product specifications, represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by Renesas Electronics Corp. without notice. Please review the latest information published by Renesas Electronics Corp. through various means, including the Renesas Electronics Corp. website (http://www.renesas.com). www.renesas.com Rev.2.10 Dec 2015 Notice 1. Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples. You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits, software, and information in the design of your equipment. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software, or information. 2. Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document, but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein. 3. Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted hereby under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others. 4. You should not alter, modify, copy, or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product, whether in whole or in part. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from such alteration, modification, copy or otherwise misappropriation of Renesas Electronics product. 5. Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following two quality grades: "Standard" and "High Quality". The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product's quality grade, as indicated below. "Standard": Computers; office equipment; communications equipment; test and measurement equipment; audio and visual equipment; home electronic appliances; machine tools; personal electronic equipment; and industrial robots etc. "High Quality": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.); traffic control systems; anti-disaster systems; anticrime systems; and safety equipment etc. Renesas Electronics products are neither intended nor authorized for use in products or systems that may pose a direct threat to human life or bodily injury (artificial life support devices or systems, surgical implantations etc.), or may cause serious property damages (nuclear reactor control systems, military equipment etc.). You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application. You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended. Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for which the product is not intended by Renesas Electronics. 6. You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics, especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges. 7. Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Further, Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures. Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or systems manufactured by you. 8. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product. Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances, including without limitation, the EU RoHS Directive. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations. 9. Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture, use, or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations. You should not use Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military, including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction. When exporting the Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document, you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations. 10. It is the responsibility of the buyer or distributor of Renesas Electronics products, who distributes, disposes of, or otherwise places the product with a third party, to notify such third party in advance of the contents and conditions set forth in this document, Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties as a result of unauthorized use of Renesas Electronics products. 11. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. 12. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics products, or if you have any other inquiries. (Note 1) "Renesas Electronics" as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majorityowned subsidiaries. (Note 2) "Renesas Electronics product(s)" means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics. (2012.4) NOTES FOR CMOS DEVICES (1) VOLTAGE APPLICATION WAVEFORM AT INPUT PIN: Waveform distortion due to input noise or a reflected wave may cause malfunction. If the input of the CMOS device stays in the area between VIL (MAX) and VIH (MIN) due to noise, etc., the device may malfunction. Take care to prevent chattering noise from entering the device when the input level is fixed, and also in the transition period when the input level passes through the area between VIL (MAX) and VIH (MIN). (2) HANDLING OF UNUSED INPUT PINS: Unconnected CMOS device inputs can be cause of malfunction. If an input pin is unconnected, it is possible that an internal input level may be generated due to noise, etc., causing malfunction. CMOS devices behave differently than Bipolar or NMOS devices. Input levels of CMOS devices must be fixed high or low by using pull-up or pull-down circuitry. Each unused pin should be connected to VDD or GND via a resistor if there is a possibility that it will be an output pin. All handling related to unused pins must be judged separately for each device and according to related specifications governing the device. (3) PRECAUTION AGAINST ESD: A strong electric field, when exposed to a MOS device, can cause destruction of the gate oxide and ultimately degrade the device operation. Steps must be taken to stop generation of static electricity as much as possible, and quickly dissipate it when it has occurred. Environmental control must be adequate. When it is dry, a humidifier should be used. It is recommended to avoid using insulators that easily build up static electricity. Semiconductor devices must be stored and transported in an anti-static container, static shielding bag or conductive material. All test and measurement tools including work benches and floors should be grounded. The operator should be grounded using a wrist strap. Semiconductor devices must not be touched with bare hands. Similar precautions need to be taken for PW boards with mounted semiconductor devices. (4) STATUS BEFORE INITIALIZATION: Power-on does not necessarily define the initial status of a MOS device. Immediately after the power source is turned ON, devices with reset functions have not yet been initialized. Hence, power-on does not guarantee output pin levels, I/O settings or contents of registers. A device is not initialized until the reset signal is received. A reset operation must be executed immediately after power-on for devices with reset functions. (5) POWER ON/OFF SEQUENCE: In the case of a device that uses different power supplies for the internal operation and external interface, as a rule, switch on the external power supply after switching on the internal power supply. When switching the power supply off, as a rule, switch off the external power supply and then the internal power supply. Use of the reverse power on/off sequences may result in the application of an overvoltage to the internal elements of the device, causing malfunction and degradation of internal elements due to the passage of an abnormal current. The correct power on/off sequence must be judged separately for each device and according to related specifications governing the device. (6) INPUT OF SIGNAL DURING POWER OFF STATE : Do not input signals or an I/O pull-up power supply while the device is not powered. The current injection that results from input of such a signal or I/O pull-up power supply may cause malfunction and the abnormal current that passes in the device at this time may cause degradation of internal elements. Input of signals during the power off state must be judged separately for each device and according to related specifications governing the device. How to Use This Manual Readers This manual is intended for user engineers who wish to understand the functions of the RL78/F13, F14 and design and develop application systems and programs for these devices. Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions described in the Organization below. Organization The RL78/F13, F14 manual is separated into two parts: this manual and the software edition (common to the RL78 family). RL78/F13, F14 RL78 family User's Manual User's Manual Hardware Software Pin functions CPU functions Internal block functions Instruction set Interrupts Explanation of each instruction Other on-chip peripheral functions Electrical specifications How to Read This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electrical engineering, logic circuits, and microcontrollers. To gain a general understanding of functions: Read this manual in the order of the CONTENTS. How to interpret the register format: For a bit number enclosed in angle brackets, the bit name is defined as a reserved word in the assembler, and is defined as an sfr variable using the #pragma sfr directive in the compiler. To know details of the RL78/F13, F14 Microcontroller instructions: Refer to the separate document RL78 Family User's Manual: Software (R01US0015E). Conventions Data significance: Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representations: (overscore over pin and signal name) Note: Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution: Information requiring particular attention Remark: Supplementary information ... or B Numerical representations: Binary ... Decimal Hexadecimal Related Documents ...H The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions. However, preliminary versions are not marked as such. Documents Related to Devices Document Name Document No. RL78/F13, F14 User's Manual: Hardware R01UH0368E RL78 Family User's Manual: Software R01US0015E Documents Related to Flash Memory Programming Document Name PG-FP5 Flash Memory Programmer User's Manual Document No. R20UT0008E Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice. Be sure to use the latest version of each document when designing. Other Documents Document Name Renesas MPUs & MCUs RL78 Family Document No. R01CP0003E Semiconductor Package Mount Manual Note Quality Grades on NEC Semiconductor Devices C11531E Guide to Prevent Damage for Semiconductor Devices by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) C11892E Semiconductor Reliability Handbook R51ZZ0001E Note See the "Semiconductor Package Mount Manual" website (http://www.renesas.com/products/package/manual/index.jsp). Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice. Be sure to use the latest version of each document when designing. All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. EEPROM is a trademark of Renesas Electronics Corporation. Windows, Windows NT and Windows XP are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. SuperFlash is a registered trademark of Silicon Storage Technology, Inc. in several countries including the United States and Japan. Caution: This product uses SuperFlash(R) technology licensed from Silicon Storage Technology, Inc. CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 Features ........................................................................................................................................... 1 1.1.1 Applications ........................................................................................................................................ 2 1.2 Product Lineup ............................................................................................................................... 3 1.3 Function Overview ......................................................................................................................... 4 1.3.1 RL78/F14 Functions List .................................................................................................................... 4 1.3.2 RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) Functions List ....................................................................... 6 1.3.3 RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) Functions List ....................................................................................... 8 1.4 Block Diagram .............................................................................................................................. 10 1.4.1 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PPn (n = E, F, G, H, J) 100-pin Products ................................. 10 1.4.2 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PMn (n = G, H, J) 80-pin Products ........................................... 11 1.4.3 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PLn (n = G, H, J) 64-pin Products ........................................... 12 1.4.4 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PGn (n = G, H, J) 48-pin Products ........................................... 13 1.4.5 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PMn (n = E, F) 80-pin Products ............................................... 14 1.4.6 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PLn (n = E, F) 64-pin Products ................................................ 15 1.4.7 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PGn (n = D, E, F) 48-pin Products ........................................... 16 1.4.8 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PBn (n = D, E) 32-pin Products ............................................... 17 1.4.9 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PAn (n = D, E) 30-pin Products ............................................... 18 1.4.10 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10BMn (n = E, F, G) (CAN and LIN incorporated) 80-pin Products .............................................................................................................................. 19 1.4.11 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10BLn (n = C, D, E, F, G) (CAN and LIN incorporated) 64-pin Products .............................................................................................................................. 20 1.4.12 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10BGn (n = C, D, E, F, G) (CAN and LIN incorporated) 48-pin Products ......................................................................................................................................... 21 1.4.13 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10BBn (n = C, D, E, F, G) (CAN and LIN incorporated) 32-pin Products ......................................................................................................................................... 22 1.4.14 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10BAn (n = C, D, E, F, G) (CAN and LIN incorporated) 30-pin Products .............................................................................................................................. 23 1.4.15 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10AMn (n = E, F, G) (LIN incorporated) 80-pin Products ........... 24 1.4.16 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10ALn (n = F, G) (LIN incorporated) 64-pin Products ................ 25 1.4.17 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10AGn (n = F, G) (LIN incorporated) 48-pin Products ............... 26 1.4.18 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10ALn (n = C, D, E) (LIN incorporated) 64-pin Products........... 27 1.4.19 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10AGn (n = A, C, D, E) (LIN incorporated) 48-pin Products ...... 28 1.4.20 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10ABn (n = A, C, D, E) (LIN incorporated) 32-pin Products ....... 29 1.4.21 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10AAn (n = A, C, D, E) (LIN incorporated) 30-pin Products ....... 30 1.4.22 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10A6n (n = A, C, D, E) (LIN incorporated) 20-pin Products ....... 31 Index-1 1.5 Pin Configurations ....................................................................................................................... 32 1.5.1 RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 100-pin Products ............................................................................ 32 1.5.2 RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 80-pin Products .............................................................................. 33 1.5.3 RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 80-pin Products .............................................................................. 34 1.5.4 RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 64-pin Products .............................................................................. 35 1.5.5 RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 64-pin Product ................................................................................ 36 1.5.6 RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 48-pin Products .............................................................................. 37 1.5.7 RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 48-pin Products .............................................................................. 38 1.5.8 RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 32-pin Products .............................................................................. 39 1.5.9 RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 32-pin Products .............................................................................. 40 1.5.10 RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 30-pin Products ............................................................................ 41 1.5.11 RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 30-pin Products ............................................................................ 42 1.5.12 RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 20-pin Products ............................................................................ 43 1.6 Order Information ......................................................................................................................... 44 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................... 47 2.1 Pin Function List .......................................................................................................................... 47 2.1.1 RL78/F14 100-pin products .............................................................................................................. 49 2.1.2 RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) 80-pin products ................................................................... 51 2.1.3 RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) 80-pin products .................................................................................. 53 2.1.4 Pins for each product (pins other than port pins) .............................................................................. 55 2.2 Description of Pin Functions ...................................................................................................... 68 2.2.1 P00 to P03 (Port 0) ........................................................................................................................... 68 2.2.2 P10 to P17 (Port 1) ........................................................................................................................... 68 2.2.3 P30 to P34 (Port 3) ........................................................................................................................... 70 2.2.4 P40 to P47 (Port 4) ........................................................................................................................... 71 2.2.5 P50 to P57 (Port 5) ........................................................................................................................... 72 2.2.6 P60 to P67 (Port 6) ........................................................................................................................... 73 2.2.7 P70 to P77 (Port 7) ........................................................................................................................... 75 2.2.8 P80 to P87 (Port 8) ........................................................................................................................... 76 2.2.9 P90 to P97 (Port 9) ........................................................................................................................... 77 2.2.10 P100 to P107 (Port 10) ................................................................................................................... 77 2.2.11 P120 to P127 (Port 12) ................................................................................................................... 78 2.2.12 P130, P137 (Port 13) ...................................................................................................................... 79 2.2.13 P140 (Port 14) ................................................................................................................................ 79 2.2.14 P150 to P157 (Port 15) ................................................................................................................... 80 2.2.15 VDD, EVDD0, EVDD1, VSS, EVSS0, EVSS1 ................................................................................ 80 2.2.16 RESET ........................................................................................................................................... 81 2.2.17 REGC ............................................................................................................................................. 81 2.3 Recommended Connection of Unused Pins.............................................................................. 82 Index-2 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE ...................................................................................................... 88 3.1 Memory Space .............................................................................................................................. 88 3.1.1 Internal program memory space..................................................................................................... 114 3.1.2 Mirror area ...................................................................................................................................... 118 3.1.3 Internal data memory space ........................................................................................................... 120 3.1.4 Special function register (SFR) area .............................................................................................. 121 3.1.5 Extended special function register (2nd SFR: 2nd Special Function Register) area ...................... 121 3.1.6 Data memory addressing ............................................................................................................... 122 3.2 Processor Registers................................................................................................................... 140 3.2.1 Control registers ............................................................................................................................. 140 3.2.2 General-purpose registers .............................................................................................................. 143 3.2.3 ES and CS registers ....................................................................................................................... 145 3.2.4 Special function registers (SFRs) ................................................................................................... 146 3.2.5 Extended special function registers (2nd SFRs: 2nd Special Function Registers) ......................... 151 3.3 Instruction Address Addressing............................................................................................... 184 3.3.1 Relative addressing ........................................................................................................................ 184 3.3.2 Immediate addressing .................................................................................................................... 184 3.3.3 Table indirect addressing ............................................................................................................... 185 3.3.4 Register direct addressing .............................................................................................................. 186 3.4 Addressing for Processing Data Addresses ........................................................................... 187 3.4.1 Implied addressing ......................................................................................................................... 187 3.4.2 Register addressing ....................................................................................................................... 187 3.4.3 Direct addressing ........................................................................................................................... 188 3.4.4 Short direct addressing .................................................................................................................. 189 3.4.5 SFR addressing .............................................................................................................................. 190 3.4.6 Register indirect addressing ........................................................................................................... 191 3.4.7 Based addressing ........................................................................................................................... 192 3.4.8 Based indexed addressing ............................................................................................................. 196 3.4.9 Stack addressing ............................................................................................................................ 197 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................................... 201 4.1 Port Functions ............................................................................................................................ 201 4.2 Port Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 203 4.2.1 Port 0 .............................................................................................................................................. 204 4.2.2 Port 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 209 4.2.3 Port 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 220 4.2.4 Port 4 .............................................................................................................................................. 226 4.2.5 Port 5 .............................................................................................................................................. 236 4.2.6 Port 6 .............................................................................................................................................. 246 4.2.7 Port 7 .............................................................................................................................................. 256 Index-3 4.2.8 Port 8 .............................................................................................................................................. 270 4.2.9 Port 9 .............................................................................................................................................. 280 4.2.10 Port 10 .......................................................................................................................................... 283 4.2.11 Port 12 .......................................................................................................................................... 288 4.2.12 Port 13 .......................................................................................................................................... 295 4.2.13 Port 14 .......................................................................................................................................... 298 4.2.14 Port 15 .......................................................................................................................................... 300 4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function ........................................................................................ 307 4.3.1 Port mode registers (PMxx) ............................................................................................................ 319 4.3.2 Port registers (Pxx) ......................................................................................................................... 320 4.3.3 Pull-up resistor option registers (PUxx) .......................................................................................... 322 4.3.4 Port input mode registers (PIM1, PIM3, PIM5 to PIM7, PIM12) ..................................................... 323 4.3.5 Port output mode registers (POM1, POM6, POM7, POM12) ......................................................... 324 4.3.6 Port mode control registers 7, 9, 12 (PMC7, PMC9, PMC12) ........................................................ 325 4.3.7 A/D port configuration register (ADPC) .......................................................................................... 326 4.3.8 Port input threshold control register (PITHL1, PITHL3 to PITHL7, PITHL10, PITHL12, PITHL15)........................................................ 328 4.3.9 Peripheral I/O redirection register 0 (PIOR0).................................................................................. 330 4.3.10 Peripheral I/O redirection register 1 (PIOR1)................................................................................ 331 4.3.11 Peripheral I/O redirection register 2 (PIOR2)................................................................................ 332 4.3.12 Peripheral I/O redirection register 3 (PIOR3)................................................................................ 333 4.3.13 Peripheral I/O redirection register 4 (PIOR4)................................................................................ 334 4.3.14 Peripheral I/O redirection register 5 (PIOR5)................................................................................ 336 4.3.15 Peripheral I/O redirection register 6 (PIOR6)................................................................................ 337 4.3.16 Peripheral I/O redirection register 7 (PIOR7)................................................................................ 338 4.3.17 Peripheral I/O redirection register 8 (PIOR8)................................................................................ 339 4.3.18 Port output slew rate register (PSRSEL) ...................................................................................... 340 4.3.19 SNOOZE status output control register 0 (PSNZCNT0) ............................................................... 341 4.3.20 SNOOZE status output control register 1 (PSNZCNT1) ............................................................... 342 4.3.21 SNOOZE status output control register 2 (PSNZCNT2) ............................................................... 343 4.3.22 SNOOZE status output control register 3 (PSNZCNT3) ............................................................... 344 4.3.23 Port mode select register (PMS) .................................................................................................. 345 4.4 Port Function Operations .......................................................................................................... 346 4.4.1 Writing to I/O port ........................................................................................................................... 346 4.4.2 Reading from I/O port ..................................................................................................................... 346 4.4.3 Operations on I/O port .................................................................................................................... 346 4.4.4 Connecting to external device with different potential (3 V) ............................................................ 347 4.5 Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function ........... 349 4.6 Cautions When Using Port Function ........................................................................................ 360 4.6.1 Cautions on 1-bit manipulation instruction for port register n (Pn) .................................................. 360 4.6.2 Notes on specifying the pin settings ............................................................................................... 361 Index-4 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR .................................................................................................... 362 5.1 Functions of Clock Generator ................................................................................................... 362 5.2 Configuration of Clock Generator ............................................................................................ 365 5.3 Registers Controlling Clock Generator .................................................................................... 369 5.3.1 Clock Operation Mode Control Register (CMC) ............................................................................. 369 5.3.2 System Clock Control Register (CKC) ............................................................................................ 372 5.3.3 Clock Operation Status Control Register (CSC) ............................................................................. 374 5.3.4 Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC) ..................................................... 375 5.3.5 Oscillation Stabilization Time Select Register (OSTS) ................................................................... 377 5.3.6 Peripheral Enable Registers 0, 1, 2 (PER0, PER1, PER2)............................................................. 379 5.3.7 Operation Speed Mode Control Register (OSMC) ......................................................................... 385 5.3.8 High-Speed On-Chip Oscillator Frequency Select Register (HOCODIV) ....................................... 386 5.3.9 High-Speed On-Chip Oscillator Trimming Register (HIOTRM)....................................................... 387 5.3.10 CAN Clock Select Register (CANCKSEL) .................................................................................... 388 5.3.11 LIN Clock Select Register (LINCKSEL) ........................................................................................ 389 5.3.12 Clock Select Register (CKSEL) .................................................................................................... 390 5.3.13 PLL Control Register (PLLCTL).................................................................................................... 391 5.3.14 PLL Status Register (PLLSTS) ..................................................................................................... 393 5.3.15 fMP Clock Division Register (MDIV) ............................................................................................. 394 5.4 System Clock Oscillator ............................................................................................................ 395 5.4.1 X1 Oscillator ................................................................................................................................... 395 5.4.2 XT1 Oscillator ................................................................................................................................. 395 5.4.3 High-Speed On-Chip Oscillator ...................................................................................................... 399 5.4.4 PLL Circuit ...................................................................................................................................... 399 5.4.5 Low-Speed On-Chip Oscillator ....................................................................................................... 399 5.4.6 WDT-Dedicated Low-Speed On-Chip Oscillator ............................................................................. 399 5.5 Clock Generator Operation ....................................................................................................... 400 5.6 Controlling Clock........................................................................................................................ 402 5.6.1 Example of Setting High-Speed On-Chip Oscillator ....................................................................... 402 5.6.2 Example of Setting X1 Oscillator .................................................................................................... 404 5.6.3 Example of Setting XT1 Oscillator .................................................................................................. 405 5.6.4 Examples of Setting PLL Circuit ..................................................................................................... 406 5.6.5 Example of Setting Low-Speed On-Chip Oscillator ........................................................................ 408 5.6.6 CPU Clock Status Transition Diagram ........................................................................................... 409 5.6.7 Conditions before Changing CPU Clock and Processing after Changing CPU Clock .................... 413 5.6.8 Time Required for Switchover of CPU Clock, Main System/PLL Select Clock, and Main System Clock ....................................................................................................................... 420 5.6.9 Conditions Before Clock Oscillation Is Stopped ............................................................................. 422 5.7 Usage Notes ................................................................................................................................ 423 5.7.1 CPU/Peripheral Hardware Clock .................................................................................................... 423 5.7.2 High-Speed On-Chip Oscillator ...................................................................................................... 423 Index-5 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT ...................................................................................................... 424 6.1 Functions of Timer Array Unit ................................................................................................... 426 6.1.1 Independent channel operation function ........................................................................................ 426 6.1.2 Simultaneous channel operation function ....................................................................................... 427 6.1.3 8-bit timer operation function (channels 1 and 3 only) .................................................................... 428 6.1.4 LIN-bus supporting function (channel 7 of unit 0 only) ................................................................... 429 6.2 Configuration of Timer Array Unit ............................................................................................ 430 6.2.1 Timer count register mn (TCRmn) .................................................................................................. 436 6.2.2 Timer data register mn (TDRmn).................................................................................................... 438 6.3 Registers Controlling Timer Array Unit.................................................................................... 439 6.3.1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) ............................................................................................... 440 6.3.2 Timer clock select register m (TPSm) ............................................................................................ 441 6.3.3 Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) ................................................................................................. 444 6.3.4 Timer status register mn (TSRmn) ................................................................................................. 450 6.3.5 Timer channel enable status register m (TEm)............................................................................... 451 6.3.6 Timer channel start register m (TSm) ............................................................................................. 452 6.3.7 Timer channel stop register m (TTm) ............................................................................................. 453 6.3.8 Timer input select register 0 (TIS0) ................................................................................................ 454 6.3.9 Timer input select register 1 (TIS1) ................................................................................................ 455 6.3.10 Timer input select register 2 (TIS2) .............................................................................................. 456 6.3.11 Timer output enable register m (TOEm) ....................................................................................... 457 6.3.12 Timer output register m (TOm) ..................................................................................................... 458 6.3.13 Timer output level register m (TOLm) ........................................................................................... 459 6.3.14 Timer output mode register m (TOMm) ........................................................................................ 460 6.3.15 Noise filter enable registers 1, 2 (NFEN1, NFEN2) ...................................................................... 461 6.3.16 Port mode registers 1, 3, 4, 7, 12 (PM1, PM3, PM4, PM7, PM12) .............................................. 464 6.3.17 PWM output delay control register 1 (PWMDLY1) ....................................................................... 466 6.3.18 PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) ....................................................................... 467 6.4 Basic Rules of Timer Array Unit ............................................................................................... 468 6.4.1 Basic rules of simultaneous channel operation function ................................................................. 468 6.4.2 Basic rules of 8-bit timer operation function (channels 1 and 3 only) ............................................. 470 6.5 Operation Timing of Counter .................................................................................................... 471 6.5.1 Count clock (fTCLK) ....................................................................................................................... 471 6.5.2 Start timing of counter .................................................................................................................... 473 6.5.3 Operation of counter ....................................................................................................................... 474 6.6 Channel Output (TOmn pin) Control ........................................................................................ 479 6.6.1 TOmn pin output circuit configuration ............................................................................................. 479 6.6.2 TOmn Pin Output Setting ............................................................................................................... 480 6.6.3 Cautions on Channel Output Operation ......................................................................................... 481 6.6.4 Collective manipulation of TOmn bit ............................................................................................... 486 6.6.5 Timer Interrupt and TOmn Pin Output at Operation Start ............................................................... 487 Index-6 6.7 Independent Channel Operation Function of Timer Array Unit ............................................. 488 6.7.1 Operation as interval timer/square wave output ............................................................................. 488 6.7.2 Operation as external event counter .............................................................................................. 494 6.7.3 Operation as frequency divider....................................................................................................... 499 6.7.4 Operation as input pulse interval measurement ............................................................................. 503 6.7.5 Operation as input signal high-/low-level width measurement ........................................................ 508 6.7.6 Operation as delay counter ............................................................................................................ 513 6.8 Simultaneous Channel Operation Function of Timer Array Unit .......................................... 518 6.8.1 Operation as one-shot pulse output function .................................................................................. 518 6.8.2 Operation as PWM function............................................................................................................ 526 6.8.3 Operation as multiple PWM output function ................................................................................... 533 6.9 Cautions When Using Timer Array Unit ................................................................................... 542 6.9.1 Cautions When Using Timer output ................................................................................................ 542 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ......................................................................................................................... 543 7.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 543 7.2 I/O Pins ........................................................................................................................................ 544 7.3 Registers ..................................................................................................................................... 545 7.3.1 Peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) ............................................................................................... 546 7.3.2 Operation speed mode control register (OSMC) ............................................................................ 547 7.3.3 Clock Select Register (CKSEL) ...................................................................................................... 547 7.3.4 Timer RJ Counter Register 0 (TRJ0), Timer RJ Reload Register ................................................... 548 7.3.5 Timer RJ Control Register 0 (TRJCR0) .......................................................................................... 549 7.3.6 Timer RJ I/O Control Register 0 (TRJIOC0) ................................................................................... 551 7.3.7 Timer RJ Mode Register 0 (TRJMR0) ............................................................................................ 553 7.3.8 Timer RJ Event Pin Select Register 0 (TRJISR0) .......................................................................... 554 7.3.9 Port mode registers 1, 4 (PM1, PM4) ............................................................................................. 555 7.4 Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 556 7.4.1 Reload Register and Counter Rewrite Operation ........................................................................... 556 7.4.2 Timer Mode .................................................................................................................................... 557 7.4.3 Pulse Output Mode ......................................................................................................................... 558 7.4.4 Event Counter Mode ...................................................................................................................... 559 7.4.5 Pulse Width Measurement Mode ................................................................................................... 561 7.4.6 Pulse Period Measurement Mode .................................................................................................. 562 7.4.7 Coordination with Event Link Controller (ELC) ............................................................................... 563 7.4.8 Output Settings for Each Mode ...................................................................................................... 563 7.5 Notes on Timer RJ ...................................................................................................................... 564 7.5.1 Count Operation Start and Stop Control ......................................................................................... 564 7.5.2 Access to Flags (Bits TEDGF and TUNDF in TRJCR0 Register) ................................................... 564 7.5.3 Access to Counter Register ............................................................................................................ 564 7.5.4 When Changing Mode .................................................................................................................... 564 Index-7 7.5.5 Procedure for Setting Pins TRJO0 and TRJIO0 ............................................................................. 565 7.5.6 When Timer RJ is not Used............................................................................................................ 565 7.5.7 When Timer RJ Operating Clock is Stopped .................................................................................. 565 7.5.8 Procedure for Setting STOP Mode (Event Counter Mode) ............................................................. 565 7.5.9 Functional Restriction in STOP Mode (Event Counter Mode Only) ................................................ 566 7.5.10 When Count is Forcibly Stopped by TSTOP Bit ........................................................................... 566 7.5.11 Digital Filter .................................................................................................................................. 566 7.5.12 When Selecting fIL as Count Source ............................................................................................ 566 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD ........................................................................................................................ 567 8.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 567 8.2 Registers ..................................................................................................................................... 569 8.2.1 Peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) ............................................................................................... 570 8.2.2 Clock Select Register (CKSEL) ...................................................................................................... 571 8.2.3 Timer RD ELC Register (TRDELC) ................................................................................................ 572 8.2.4 Timer RD Start Register (TRDSTR) ............................................................................................... 573 8.2.5 Timer RD Mode Register (TRDMR) ............................................................................................... 574 8.2.6 Timer RD PWM Function Select Register (TRDPMR) .................................................................... 575 8.2.7 Timer RD Function Control Register (TRDFCR) ............................................................................ 576 8.2.8 Timer RD Output Master Enable Register 1 (TRDOER1) .............................................................. 578 8.2.9 Timer RD Output Master Enable Register 2 (TRDOER2) .............................................................. 579 8.2.10 Timer RD Output Control Register (TRDOCR) ............................................................................. 580 8.2.11 Timer RD Digital Filter Function Select Register i (TRDDFi) (i = 0 or 1) ....................................... 583 8.2.12 Timer RD Control Register i (TRDCRi) (i = 0 or 1) ....................................................................... 585 8.2.13 Timer RD I/O Control Register Ai (TRDIORAi) (i = 0 or 1) ............................................................ 590 8.2.14 Timer RD I/O Control Register Ci (TRDIORCi) (i = 0 or 1) ........................................................... 592 8.2.15 Timer RD Status Register i (TRDSRi) (i = 0 or 1) ......................................................................... 594 8.2.16 Timer RD Interrupt Enable Register i (TRDIERi) (i = 0 or 1) ......................................................... 598 8.2.17 Timer RD PWM Function Output Level Control Register i (TRDPOCRi) (i = 0 or 1)..................... 599 8.2.18 Timer RD Counter i (TRDi) (i = 0 or 1).......................................................................................... 600 8.2.19 Timer RD General Registers Ai, Bi, Ci, and Di (TRDGRAi, TRDGRBi,TRDGRCi, TRDGRDi) (i = 0 or 1) ..................................................................................................................................... 602 8.2.20 PWM Output Delay Control Register 0 (PWMDLY0) .................................................................... 611 8.2.21 Port mode registers (PM1, PM3, PM12) ....................................................................................... 612 8.3 Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 613 8.3.1 Items Common to Multiple Modes .................................................................................................. 613 8.3.2 Input Capture Function ................................................................................................................... 624 8.3.3 Output Compare Function .............................................................................................................. 628 8.3.4 PWM Function ................................................................................................................................ 633 8.3.5 Reset Synchronous PWM Mode .................................................................................................... 637 8.3.6 Complementary PWM Mode .......................................................................................................... 640 Index-8 8.3.7 PWM3 Mode................................................................................................................................... 644 8.4 Timer RD Interrupt ...................................................................................................................... 647 8.5 Notes on Timer RD ..................................................................................................................... 649 8.5.1 SFR Read/Write Access ................................................................................................................. 649 8.5.2 Mode Switching .............................................................................................................................. 649 8.5.3 Count Source ................................................................................................................................. 650 8.5.4 Input Capture Function ................................................................................................................... 650 8.5.5 Procedure for Setting Pins TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi (i = 0 or 1) ..................... 650 8.5.6 External clock TRDCLK0 ................................................................................................................ 650 8.5.7 Reset Synchronous PWM Mode .................................................................................................... 651 8.5.8 Complementary PWM Mode .......................................................................................................... 651 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK ......................................................................................................... 656 9.1 Functions of Real-time Clock .................................................................................................... 656 9.2 Configuration of Real-time Clock ............................................................................................. 656 9.3 Registers Controlling Real-time Clock ..................................................................................... 658 9.3.1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) ............................................................................................... 659 9.3.2 Operation speed mode control register (OSMC) ............................................................................ 660 9.3.3 Timer input select register 1 (TIS1) ................................................................................................ 661 9.3.4 Timer input select register 2 (TIS2) ................................................................................................ 662 9.3.5 RTC clock select register (RTCCL) ................................................................................................ 663 9.3.6 Real-time clock control register 0 (RTCC0) .................................................................................... 664 9.3.7 Real-time clock control register 1 (RTCC1) .................................................................................... 665 9.3.8 Second count register (SEC) .......................................................................................................... 667 9.3.9 Minute count register (MIN) ............................................................................................................ 667 9.3.10 Hour count register (HOUR) ......................................................................................................... 668 9.3.11 Day count register (DAY).............................................................................................................. 670 9.3.12 Week count register (WEEK)........................................................................................................ 671 9.3.13 Month count register (MONTH) .................................................................................................... 672 9.3.14 Year count register (YEAR) .......................................................................................................... 672 9.3.15 Watch error correction register (SUBCUD)................................................................................... 673 9.3.16 16-bit watch error correction register (SUBCUDW) ...................................................................... 674 9.3.17 Alarm minute register (ALARMWM) ............................................................................................. 675 9.3.18 Alarm hour register (ALARMWH) ................................................................................................. 675 9.3.19 Alarm week register (ALARMWW) ............................................................................................... 675 9.4 Real-time Clock Operation ........................................................................................................ 677 9.4.1 Starting operation of real-time clock ............................................................................................... 677 9.4.2 Shifting to HALT/STOP mode after starting operation .................................................................... 678 9.4.3 Reading/writing real-time clock ....................................................................................................... 679 9.4.4 Setting alarm of real-time clock ...................................................................................................... 681 9.4.5 1 Hz output of real-time clock ......................................................................................................... 682 Index-9 9.4.6 Example of watch error correction of real-time clock ...................................................................... 683 CHAPTER 10 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER ............................................... 686 10.1 Functions of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller .......................................................... 686 10.2 Configuration of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller .................................................... 688 10.3 Registers Controlling Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller ........................................... 688 10.3.1 Clock output select register 0 (CKS0) .......................................................................................... 688 10.3.2 Clock Select Register (CKSEL) .................................................................................................... 690 10.3.3 Port mode register 14 (PM14) ...................................................................................................... 691 10.4 Operations of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller ........................................................ 692 10.4.1 Operation as output pin ................................................................................................................ 692 10.5 Notes on Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller ................................................................ 692 CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER ..................................................................................................... 693 11.1 Functions of Watchdog Timer ................................................................................................. 693 11.2 Configuration of Watchdog Timer .......................................................................................... 694 11.3 Register Controlling Watchdog Timer.................................................................................... 695 11.3.1 Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) ...................................................................................... 695 11.4 Operation of Watchdog Timer ................................................................................................. 696 11.4.1 Controlling operation of watchdog timer ....................................................................................... 696 11.4.2 Setting overflow time of watchdog timer ....................................................................................... 697 11.4.3 Setting window open period of watchdog timer ............................................................................ 698 11.4.4 Setting watchdog timer interval interrupt ...................................................................................... 699 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER ......................................................................................................... 700 12.1 Function of A/D Converter ....................................................................................................... 701 12.2 Configuration of A/D Converter .............................................................................................. 703 12.3 Registers Used in A/D Converter ............................................................................................ 705 12.3.1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) ............................................................................................. 706 12.3.2 A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) ........................................................................................ 707 12.3.3 A/D converter mode register 1 (ADM1) ........................................................................................ 716 12.3.4 A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2) ........................................................................................ 717 12.3.5 10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR) ............................................................................... 720 12.3.6 8-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH) .............................................................................. 721 12.3.7 Analog input channel specification register (ADS)........................................................................ 722 12.3.8 Conversion result comparison upper limit setting register (ADUL) ............................................... 725 12.3.9 Conversion result comparison lower limit setting register (ADLL) ................................................ 725 12.3.10 A/D test register (ADTES) .......................................................................................................... 726 12.3.11 A/D port configuration register (ADPC)....................................................................................... 727 12.3.12 A/D converter trigger select register 0 (ADTRGS0) (RL78/F13 only) ......................................... 728 Index-10 12.3.13 A/D converter trigger select register 1 (ADTRGS1) (RL78/F13 only) ......................................... 729 12.3.14 Port mode control registers 7, 9, and 12 (PMC7, PMC9, PMC12) ............................................. 730 12.3.15 Port mode registers 3, 7 to 10, and 12 (PM3, PM7 to PM10, PM12) .......................................... 731 12.4 A/D Converter Conversion Operations .................................................................................. 733 12.5 Input Voltage and Conversion Results .................................................................................. 735 12.6 A/D Converter Operation Modes ............................................................................................. 736 12.6.1 Software trigger mode (select mode, sequential conversion mode) ............................................. 736 12.6.2 Software trigger mode (select mode, one-shot conversion mode) ............................................... 737 12.6.3 Software trigger mode (scan mode, sequential conversion mode) ............................................... 738 12.6.4 Software trigger mode (scan mode, one-shot conversion mode) ................................................. 739 12.6.5 Hardware trigger no-wait mode (select mode, sequential conversion mode) ............................... 740 12.6.6 Hardware trigger no-wait mode (select mode, one-shot conversion mode).................................. 741 12.6.7 Hardware trigger no-wait mode (scan mode, sequential conversion mode) ................................. 742 12.6.8 Hardware trigger no-wait mode (scan mode, one-shot conversion mode) ................................... 743 12.6.9 Hardware trigger wait mode (select mode, sequential conversion mode) .................................... 744 12.6.10 Hardware trigger wait mode (select mode, one-shot conversion mode) ..................................... 745 12.6.11 Hardware trigger wait mode (scan mode, sequential conversion mode) .................................... 746 12.6.12 Hardware trigger wait mode (scan mode, one-shot conversion mode) ...................................... 747 12.7 A/D Converter Setup Flowchart .............................................................................................. 748 12.7.1 Setting up software trigger mode.................................................................................................. 749 12.7.2 Setting up hardware trigger no-wait mode .................................................................................... 750 12.7.3 Setting up hardware trigger wait mode ......................................................................................... 751 12.7.4 Setup when using temperature sensor (example for software trigger mode and one-shot conversion mode) ........................................... 752 12.7.5 Setting up test mode .................................................................................................................... 753 12.8 SNOOZE Mode Function .......................................................................................................... 754 12.8.1 If an interrupt is generated after A/D conversion ends ................................................................. 755 12.8.2 If no interrupt is generated after A/D conversion ends ................................................................. 756 12.9 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table ............................................................... 757 12.10 Cautions for A/D Converter ................................................................................................... 759 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) ............................................................................. 763 13.1 Function of D/A Converter ....................................................................................................... 763 13.2 Configuration of D/A Converter .............................................................................................. 764 13.3 Registers of D/A Converter ..................................................................................................... 765 13.3.1 A/D Port Configuration Register (ADPC) ...................................................................................... 766 13.3.2 Peripheral Enable Register 1 (PER1) ........................................................................................... 767 13.3.3 D/A Converter Mode Register (DAM) ........................................................................................... 768 13.3.4 D/A Converter Mode Register 2 (DAM2) ...................................................................................... 769 13.3.5 D/A Conversion Value Setting Register 0 (DACS0) ..................................................................... 770 13.3.6 Port Mode Register 8 (PM8) ......................................................................................................... 771 Index-11 13.4 Operations of D/A Converter ................................................................................................... 773 13.4.1 Operation in Normal Mode ........................................................................................................... 773 13.4.2 Operation in Real-Time Output Mode ........................................................................................... 774 13.5 Cautions for D/A Converter ..................................................................................................... 775 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) ................................................................................. 776 14.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 776 14.2 Registers to Control the Comparator ..................................................................................... 778 14.2.1 Peripheral Enable Register 1 (PER1) ........................................................................................... 778 14.2.2 Comparator Control Register (CMPCTL)...................................................................................... 779 14.2.3 Comparator I/O Select Register (CMPSEL) ................................................................................. 781 14.2.4 Comparator Output Monitor Register (CMPMON) ........................................................................ 782 14.2.5 A/D port configuration register (ADPC) ........................................................................................ 783 14.2.6 D/A converter mode register 2 (DAM2) ........................................................................................ 784 14.2.7 Port mode register 4 (PM4) .......................................................................................................... 785 14.2.8 Port mode register (PM8) ............................................................................................................. 786 14.3 Operation ................................................................................................................................... 787 14.3.1 Noise Filter ................................................................................................................................... 788 14.3.2 Comparator Interrupts .................................................................................................................. 789 14.3.3 Comparator ELC Event Output..................................................................................................... 789 14.3.4 Comparator Pin Output ................................................................................................................ 789 14.3.5 Stopping or Supplying Comparator Clock..................................................................................... 789 14.3.6 Comparator Setting Flowchart ...................................................................................................... 790 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT .................................................................................................. 792 15.1 Functions of Serial Array Unit................................................................................................. 793 15.1.1 3-wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) ........................................................................... 793 15.1.2 UART (UART0, UART1) ............................................................................................................... 794 15.1.3 Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) .................................................................................... 795 15.2 Configuration of Serial Array Unit .......................................................................................... 796 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.................................................................................. 802 15.3.1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) ............................................................................................. 803 15.3.2 Serial clock select register m (SPSm) .......................................................................................... 804 15.3.3 Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) ............................................................................................... 805 15.3.4 Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) ..................................................... 807 15.3.5 Higher 7 bits of the serial data register mn (SDRmn) ................................................................... 810 15.3.6 Serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn) ................................................................................ 812 15.3.7 Serial status register mn (SSRmn) ............................................................................................... 813 15.3.8 Serial channel start register m (SSm) ........................................................................................... 815 15.3.9 Serial channel stop register m (STm) ........................................................................................... 816 15.3.10 Serial channel enable status register m (SEm) .......................................................................... 817 Index-12 15.3.11 Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ..................................................................................... 818 15.3.12 Serial output register m (SOm) ................................................................................................... 819 15.3.13 Serial output level register m (SOLm) ........................................................................................ 820 15.3.14 Serial slave select enable register m (SSEm) ............................................................................ 821 15.3.15 Input switch control register (ISC) .............................................................................................. 822 15.3.16 Noise filter enable register 0 (NFEN0) ........................................................................................ 823 15.3.17 Port input mode registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, 12 (PIM1, PIM3, PIM5 to PIM7, PIM12).......................... 824 15.3.18 Port output mode registers 1, 6, 7, 12 (POM1, POM6, POM7, POM12) .................................... 825 15.3.19 Port mode registers 1, 3 to 7, 12 (PM1, PM3 to PM7, PM12)..................................................... 826 15.4 Operation stop mode ............................................................................................................... 828 15.4.1 Stopping the operation by units .................................................................................................... 829 15.4.2 Stopping the operation by channels ............................................................................................. 830 15.5 Operation of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) Communication ................... 832 15.5.1 Master transmission ..................................................................................................................... 834 15.5.2 Master reception ........................................................................................................................... 844 15.5.3 Master transmission/reception...................................................................................................... 854 15.5.4 Slave transmission ....................................................................................................................... 864 15.5.5 Slave reception ............................................................................................................................. 874 15.5.6 Slave transmission/reception........................................................................................................ 881 15.5.7 Calculating transfer clock frequency ............................................................................................. 891 15.5.8 Procedure for processing errors that occurred during 3-wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) communication ............................................................................ 893 15.6 Clock Synchronous Serial Communication with SPI Function ........................................... 894 15.6.1 Master transmission ..................................................................................................................... 898 15.6.2 Master reception ........................................................................................................................... 908 15.6.3 Master transmission/reception...................................................................................................... 918 15.6.4 Slave transmission ....................................................................................................................... 928 15.6.5 Slave reception ............................................................................................................................. 938 15.6.6 Slave transmission/reception........................................................................................................ 945 15.6.7 Calculating transfer clock frequency ............................................................................................. 955 15.6.8 Procedure for processing errors that occurred during clock synchronous serial communication with SPI function ........................................................................................................................... 957 15.7 Operation of UART (UART0, UART1) Communication ......................................................... 958 15.7.1 UART transmission ...................................................................................................................... 960 15.7.2 UART reception ............................................................................................................................ 970 15.7.3 Calculating baud rate ................................................................................................................... 977 15.7.4 Procedure for processing errors that occurred during UART (UART0, UART1) communication .. 981 15.8 LIN Communication Operation ............................................................................................... 982 15.8.1 LIN transmission ........................................................................................................................... 982 15.8.2 LIN reception ................................................................................................................................ 985 15.9 Operation of Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) Communication.............................. 991 Index-13 15.9.1 Address field transmission............................................................................................................ 994 15.9.2 Data transmission ....................................................................................................................... 1000 15.9.3 Data reception ............................................................................................................................ 1005 15.9.4 Stop condition generation ........................................................................................................... 1010 15.9.5 Calculating transfer rate ............................................................................................................. 1012 15.9.6 Procedure for processing errors that occurred during simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) communication ........................................................................................................................... 1015 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA ......................................................................................... 1016 16.1 Functions of Serial Interface IICA ......................................................................................... 1016 16.2 Configuration of Serial Interface IICA .................................................................................. 1019 16.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface IICA .......................................................................... 1022 16.3.1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) ........................................................................................... 1022 16.3.2 IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) ............................................................................................ 1023 16.3.3 IICA status register 0 (IICS0)...................................................................................................... 1028 16.3.4 IICA flag register 0 (IICF0).......................................................................................................... 1030 16.3.5 IICA control register 01 (IICCTL01) ............................................................................................ 1032 16.3.6 IICA low-level width setting register 0 (IICWL0) ......................................................................... 1034 16.3.7 IICA high-level width setting register 0 (IICWH0) ....................................................................... 1034 16.3.8 Port mode register 6 (PM6) ........................................................................................................ 1035 16.3.9 Port output mode register (POM6) ............................................................................................. 1036 2 16.4 I C Bus Mode Functions ........................................................................................................ 1037 16.4.1 Pin configuration ......................................................................................................................... 1037 16.4.2 Setting transfer clock by using IICWL0 and IICWH0 registers.................................................... 1038 2 16.5 I C Bus Definitions and Control Methods ............................................................................ 1040 16.5.1 Start conditions ........................................................................................................................... 1040 16.5.2 Addresses .................................................................................................................................. 1041 16.5.3 Transfer direction specification ................................................................................................... 1041 16.5.4 Acknowledge (ACK) ................................................................................................................... 1042 16.5.5 Stop condition............................................................................................................................. 1043 16.5.6 Wait ............................................................................................................................................ 1044 16.5.7 Canceling wait ............................................................................................................................ 1046 16.5.8 Interrupt request (INTIICA0) generation timing and wait control................................................. 1047 16.5.9 Address match detection method ............................................................................................... 1048 16.5.10 Error detection .......................................................................................................................... 1048 16.5.11 Extension code ......................................................................................................................... 1048 16.5.12 Arbitration ................................................................................................................................. 1049 16.5.13 Wakeup function ....................................................................................................................... 1051 16.5.14 Communication reservation ...................................................................................................... 1054 16.5.15 Cautions ................................................................................................................................... 1058 16.5.16 Communication operations ....................................................................................................... 1059 Index-14 16.5.17 Timing of I2C interrupt request (INTIICA0) occurrence ............................................................. 1066 16.6 Timing Charts ......................................................................................................................... 1087 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) ....................................................................................... 1102 17.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 1102 17.2 Register Descriptions ............................................................................................................ 1107 17.2.1 LIN Registers for Master Mode................................................................................................... 1109 17.2.2 LIN Registers for Slave Mode..................................................................................................... 1137 17.2.3 Registers for UART .................................................................................................................... 1165 17.3 Modes ...................................................................................................................................... 1195 17.3.1 LIN Reset Mode ......................................................................................................................... 1197 17.3.2 LIN Mode .................................................................................................................................... 1198 17.3.3 UART Mode................................................................................................................................ 1200 17.3.4 LIN Self-Test Mode .................................................................................................................... 1200 17.4 LIN Mode ................................................................................................................................. 1201 17.4.1 Operation Overview .................................................................................................................... 1201 17.4.2 Data Transmission/Reception .................................................................................................... 1209 17.4.3 Transmission/Reception Data Buffering ..................................................................................... 1211 17.4.4 Wake-up Transmission/Reception .............................................................................................. 1214 17.4.5 Status ......................................................................................................................................... 1216 17.4.6 Error Status ................................................................................................................................ 1218 17.5 UART Mode ............................................................................................................................. 1224 17.5.1 Operation Overview .................................................................................................................... 1224 17.5.2 Data Transmission/Reception .................................................................................................... 1239 17.5.3 Buffer Processing of Transmission Data .................................................................................... 1241 17.5.4 Status ......................................................................................................................................... 1242 17.5.5 Error Status ................................................................................................................................ 1243 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode ................................................................................................................. 1244 17.6.1 Change to LIN Self-Test Mode ................................................................................................... 1245 17.6.2 Transmission in LIN Master Self-Test Mode............................................................................... 1246 17.6.3 Reception in LIN Master Self-Test Mode .................................................................................... 1247 17.6.4 Transmission in LIN Slave Self-Test Mode................................................................................. 1248 17.6.5 Reception in LIN Slave Self-Test Mode ...................................................................................... 1249 17.6.6 Terminating LIN Self-Test Mode ................................................................................................. 1250 17.7 Baud Rate Generator.............................................................................................................. 1251 17.7.1 LIN Master Mode ........................................................................................................................ 1251 17.7.2 LIN Slave Mode .......................................................................................................................... 1253 17.7.3 UART Mode................................................................................................................................ 1255 17.8 Noise Filter .............................................................................................................................. 1256 17.9 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................. 1258 Index-15 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) .............................................................................. 1259 18.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 1259 18.2 Input/Output Pins ................................................................................................................... 1262 18.3 Register Descriptions ............................................................................................................ 1263 18.3.1 CANi Bit Configuration Register L (CiCFGL) (i = 0) .................................................................... 1285 18.3.2 CANi Bit Configuration Register H (CiCFGH) (i = 0)................................................................... 1286 18.3.3 CANi Control Register L (CiCTRL) (i = 0) ................................................................................... 1288 18.3.4 CANi Control Register H (CiCTRH) (i = 0) .................................................................................. 1290 18.3.5 CANi Status Register L (CiSTSL) (i = 0)..................................................................................... 1292 18.3.6 CANi Status Register H (CiSTSH) (i = 0) ................................................................................... 1294 18.3.7 CANi Error Flag Register L (CiERFLL) (i = 0) ............................................................................. 1295 18.3.8 CANi Error Flag Register H (CiERFLH) (i = 0) ........................................................................... 1298 18.3.9 CAN Global Configuration Register L (GCFGL) ......................................................................... 1299 18.3.10 CAN Global Configuration Register H (GCFGH) ...................................................................... 1301 18.3.11 CAN Global Control Register L (GCTRL) ................................................................................. 1302 18.3.12 CAN Global Control Register H (GCTRH) ................................................................................ 1303 18.3.13 CAN Global Status Register (GSTS) ........................................................................................ 1304 18.3.14 CAN Global Error Flag Register (GERFLL) .............................................................................. 1305 18.3.15 CAN Global Transmit Interrupt Status Register (GTINTSTS) ................................................... 1306 18.3.16 CAN Timestamp Register (GTSC) ........................................................................................... 1307 18.3.17 CAN Receive Rule Number Configuration Register (GAFLCFG) ............................................. 1308 18.3.18 CAN Receive Rule Entry Register jAL (GAFLIDLj) (j = 0 to 15) ............................................... 1309 18.3.19 CAN Receive Rule Entry Register jAH (GAFLIDHj) (j = 0 to 15) .............................................. 1310 18.3.20 CAN Receive Rule Entry Register jBL (GAFLMLj) (j = 0 to 15) ................................................ 1311 18.3.21 CAN Receive Rule Entry Register jBH (GAFLMHj) (j = 0 to 15) ............................................... 1312 18.3.22 CAN Receive Rule Entry Register jCL (GAFLPLj) (j = 0 to 15) ................................................ 1313 18.3.23 CAN Receive Rule Entry Register jCH (GAFLPHj) (j = 0 to 15) ............................................... 1314 18.3.24 CAN Receive Buffer Number Configuration Register (RMNB) ................................................. 1315 18.3.25 CAN Receive Buffer Receive Complete Flag Register (RMND0) ............................................. 1316 18.3.26 CAN Receive Buffer Register nAL (RMIDLn) (n = 0 to 15) ....................................................... 1317 18.3.27 CAN Receive Buffer Register nAH (RMIDHn) (n = 0 to 15) ...................................................... 1318 18.3.28 CAN Receive Buffer Register nBL (RMTSn) (n = 0 to 15) ........................................................ 1319 18.3.29 CAN Receive Buffer Register nBH (RMPTRn) (n = 0 to 15) ..................................................... 1320 18.3.30 CAN Receive Buffer Register nCL (RMDF0n) (n = 0 to 15) ..................................................... 1321 18.3.31 CAN Receive Buffer Register nCH (RMDF1n) (n = 0 to 15) ..................................................... 1322 18.3.32 CAN Receive Buffer Register nDL (RMDF2n) (n = 0 to 15) ..................................................... 1323 18.3.33 CAN Receive Buffer Register nDH (RMDF3n) (n = 0 to 15) ..................................................... 1324 18.3.34 CAN Receive FIFO Control Register m (RFCCm) (m = 0, 1) ................................................... 1325 18.3.35 CAN Receive FIFO Status Register m (RFSTSm) (m = 0, 1) ................................................... 1327 18.3.36 CAN Receive FIFO Pointer Control Register m (RFPCTRm) (m = 0, 1) .................................. 1329 18.3.37 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mAL (RFIDLm) (m = 0, 1)............................................... 1330 Index-16 18.3.38 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mAH (RFIDHm) (m = 0, 1) ............................................. 1331 18.3.39 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mBL (RFTSm) (m = 0, 1)............................................... 1332 18.3.40 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mBH (RFPTRm) (m = 0, 1) ............................................ 1333 18.3.41 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mCL (RFDF0m) (m = 0, 1) ............................................. 1334 18.3.42 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mCH (RFDF1m) (m = 0, 1)............................................. 1335 18.3.43 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mDL (RFDF2m) (m = 0, 1) ............................................. 1336 18.3.44 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mDH (RFDF3m) (m = 0, 1)............................................. 1337 18.3.45 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Control Register kL (CFCCLk) (i = 0) (k = 0) ............................. 1338 18.3.46 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Control Register kH (CFCCHk) (i = 0) (k = 0) ............................ 1340 18.3.47 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Status Register k (CFSTSk) (i = 0) (k = 0)................................. 1342 18.3.48 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Pointer Control Register k (CFPCTRk) (i = 0) (k = 0) ................ 1344 18.3.49 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kAL (CFIDLk) (i = 0) (k = 0) ............................ 1345 18.3.50 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kAH (CFIDHk) (i = 0) (k = 0) ........................... 1346 18.3.51 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kBL (CFTSk) (i = 0) (k = 0) ............................. 1347 18.3.52 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kBH (CFPTRk) (i = 0) (k = 0) .......................... 1348 18.3.53 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kCL (CFDF0k) (i = 0) (k = 0) ........................... 1349 18.3.54 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kCH (CFDF1k) (i = 0) (k = 0) .......................... 1350 18.3.55 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kDL (CFDF2k) (i = 0) (k = 0) ........................... 1351 18.3.56 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kDH (CFDF3k) (i = 0) (k = 0) .......................... 1352 18.3.57 Receive FIFO Message Lost Status Register (RFMSTS)......................................................... 1353 18.3.58 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Message Lost Status Register (CFMSTS) (i = 0) ...................... 1354 18.3.59 CAN Receive FIFO Interrupt Status Register (RFISTS) ........................................................... 1355 18.3.60 CAN Transmit/Receive FIFO Receive Interrupt Status Register (CFISTS) .............................. 1356 18.3.61 CANi Transmit Buffer Control Register p (TMCp) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) ........................................ 1357 18.3.62 CANi Transmit Buffer Status Register p (TMSTSp) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) ..................................... 1359 18.3.63 CANi Transmit Buffer Transmit Request Status Register (TMTRSTS) (i = 0) .......................... 1360 18.3.64 CANi Transmit Buffer Transmit Complete Status Register (TMTCSTS) (i = 0)......................... 1361 18.3.65 CANi Transmit Buffer Transmit Abort Status Register (TMTASTS) (i = 0) ............................... 1362 18.3.66 CANi Transmit Buffer Interrupt Enable Register (TMIEC) (i = 0) .............................................. 1363 18.3.67 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pAL (TMIDLp) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) ............................................. 1364 18.3.68 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pAH (TMIDHp) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) ............................................ 1365 18.3.69 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pBH (TMPTRp) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) ........................................... 1366 18.3.70 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pCL (TMDF0p) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) ............................................ 1367 18.3.71 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pCH (TMDF1p) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) ........................................... 1368 18.3.72 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pDL (TMDF2p) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) ............................................ 1369 18.3.73 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pDH (TMDF3p) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) ........................................... 1370 18.3.74 CANi Transmit History Buffer Control Register (THLCCi) (i = 0) .............................................. 1371 18.3.75 CANi Transmit History Buffer Status Register (THLSTSi) (i = 0) .............................................. 1372 18.3.76 CANi Transmit History Buffer Access Register (THLACCi) (i = 0) ............................................ 1373 18.3.77 CANi Transmit History Buffer Pointer Control Register (THLPCTRi) (i = 0) ............................. 1374 18.3.78 CAN Global RAM Window Control Register (GRWCR) ............................................................ 1375 Index-17 18.3.79 CAN Global Test Configuration Register (GTSTCFG) ............................................................. 1376 18.3.80 CAN Global Test Control Register (GTSTCTRL) ..................................................................... 1377 18.3.81 CAN Global Test Protection Unlock Register (GLOCKK) ......................................................... 1378 18.3.82 CAN RAM Test Register r (RPGACCr) (r = 0 to 127) ............................................................... 1379 18.4 CAN Modes ............................................................................................................................. 1380 18.4.1 Global Modes ............................................................................................................................. 1380 18.4.2 Channel Modes .......................................................................................................................... 1382 18.5 Reception Function ................................................................................................................ 1387 18.5.1 Data Processing Using the Receive Rule Table ......................................................................... 1387 18.5.2 Timestamp.................................................................................................................................. 1389 18.6 Transmission Functions ........................................................................................................ 1390 18.6.1 Transmit Priority Determination .................................................................................................. 1390 18.6.2 Transmission Using Transmit Buffers ......................................................................................... 1391 18.6.3 Transmission Using FIFO Buffers .............................................................................................. 1392 18.6.4 Transmit History Function........................................................................................................... 1394 18.7 Test Function .......................................................................................................................... 1395 18.7.1 Standard Test Mode ................................................................................................................... 1395 18.7.2 Listen-Only Mode ....................................................................................................................... 1395 18.7.3 Self-Test Mode (Loopback Mode) .............................................................................................. 1396 18.7.4 RAM Test ................................................................................................................................... 1396 18.8 Interrupt ................................................................................................................................... 1397 18.9 RAM Window ........................................................................................................................... 1401 18.10 Initial Settings ....................................................................................................................... 1402 18.10.1 Clock Setting ............................................................................................................................ 1404 18.10.2 Bit Timing Setting ..................................................................................................................... 1404 18.10.3 Communication Speed Setting ................................................................................................. 1405 18.10.4 Receive Rule Setting ................................................................................................................ 1407 18.10.5 Buffer Setting............................................................................................................................ 1408 18.11 Reception Procedure ........................................................................................................... 1410 18.11.1 Receive Buffer Reading Procedure .......................................................................................... 1410 18.11.2 FIFO Buffer Reading Procedure ............................................................................................... 1412 18.12 Transmission Procedure ..................................................................................................... 1415 18.12.1 Procedure for Transmission from Transmit Buffers .................................................................. 1415 18.12.2 Procedure for Transmission from Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffers ........................................... 1418 18.12.3 Transmit History Buffer Reading Procedure ............................................................................. 1421 18.13 Test Settings ......................................................................................................................... 1422 18.13.1 Self-Test Mode Setting Procedure ........................................................................................... 1422 18.13.2 Protection Unlock Procedure .................................................................................................... 1423 18.13.3 RAM Test Setting Procedure .................................................................................................... 1424 18.14 Notes on the CAN Module ................................................................................................... 1425 Index-18 CHAPTER 19 DTC ............................................................................................................................... 1426 19.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 1426 19.2 Registers ................................................................................................................................. 1428 19.2.1 Allocation of DTC Control Data Area and DTC Vector Table Area ............................................. 1430 19.2.2 DTC Control Data Allocation ...................................................................................................... 1431 19.2.3 DTC Vector Table ....................................................................................................................... 1432 19.2.4 Peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) ........................................................................................... 1436 19.2.5 DTC Activation Enable Register i (DTCENi) (i = 0 to 5) .............................................................. 1437 19.2.6 DTC Base Address Register (DTCBAR) .................................................................................... 1440 19.2.7 DTC Control Register j (DTCCRj) (j = 0 to 23) ........................................................................... 1441 19.2.8 DTC Block Size Register j (DTBLSj) (j = 0 to 23) ....................................................................... 1442 19.2.9 DTC Transfer Count Register j (DTCCTj) (j = 0 to 23)................................................................ 1442 19.2.10 DTC Transfer Count Reload Register j (DTRLDj) (j = 0 to 23) ................................................. 1443 19.2.11 DTC Source Address Register j (DTSARj) (j = 0 to 23) ............................................................ 1443 19.2.12 DTC Destination Address Register j (DTDARj) (j = 0 to 23) ..................................................... 1443 19.2.13 High-speed DTC Channel Select Register 0 (SELHS0) ........................................................... 1444 19.2.14 High-speed DTC Channel Select Register 1 (SELHS1) ........................................................... 1445 19.2.15 High-speed DTC Control Register m (HDTCCR0/1) (m = 0, 1) ................................................ 1446 19.2.16 High-speed DTC Transfer Count Register m (HDTCCT0/1) (m = 0, 1) .................................... 1447 19.2.17 DTC Transfer Count Reload Register m (HDTRLD0/1) (m = 0, 1) ........................................... 1448 19.2.18 High-speed DTC Source Address Register m (HDTSAR0/1) (m = 0, 1)................................... 1448 19.2.19 High-speed DTC Destination Address Register m (HDTDAR0/1) (m = 0, 1) ............................ 1448 19.3 Operation ................................................................................................................................. 1449 19.3.1 Activation Sources ...................................................................................................................... 1449 19.3.2 Normal Mode .............................................................................................................................. 1451 19.3.3 Repeat Mode .............................................................................................................................. 1453 19.3.4 Chain Transfers .......................................................................................................................... 1457 19.3.5 High-Speed Transfer Operation ................................................................................................. 1459 19.4 Notes on DTC .......................................................................................................................... 1460 19.4.1 Setting DTC Registers and Vector Table.................................................................................... 1460 19.4.2 Allocation of DTC Control Data Area and DTC Vector Table Area ............................................. 1460 19.4.3 DTC Pending Instruction ............................................................................................................ 1461 19.4.4 Operations when an Instruction which Accesses an SFR Register that Requires a Wait is Executed..................................................................................................................................... 1461 19.4.5 Operation when Accessing Data Flash Memory Space ............................................................. 1461 19.4.6 Number of DTC Execution Clock Cycles .................................................................................... 1462 19.4.7 Number of High-speed DTC Execution Clock Cycles ................................................................. 1463 19.4.8 DTC Response Time .................................................................................................................. 1464 19.4.9 DTC Activation Sources ............................................................................................................. 1464 19.4.10 Operation in Standby Mode Status ........................................................................................... 1465 19.4.11 Notes When the RAM Area Is the Source of the Data for Transfer .......................................... 1465 Index-19 19.4.12 Vector Address for High-Speed Transfer.................................................................................. 1465 CHAPTER 20 EVENT LINK CONTROLLER (ELC) (RL78/F14 Only) ............................................... 1466 20.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 1466 20.2 Registers ................................................................................................................................. 1467 20.2.1 Event Output Destination Select Register n (ELSELRn) (n = 00 to 25) ...................................... 1468 20.2.2 Timer input select register 0 ....................................................................................................... 1471 20.2.3 A/D converter mode register 1 (ADM1) ...................................................................................... 1471 20.2.4 D/A converter mode register (DAM) ........................................................................................... 1471 20.3 Operation ................................................................................................................................. 1472 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS........................................................................................... 1473 21.1 Interrupt Function Types ....................................................................................................... 1473 21.2 Interrupt Sources and Configuration ................................................................................... 1474 21.3 Registers Controlling Interrupt Functions ........................................................................... 1484 21.3.1 Interrupt request flag registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H, IF2L, IF2H, IF3L) ................................ 1490 21.3.2 Interrupt mask flag registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H, MK2L, MK2H, MK3L)..................... 1492 21.3.3 Priority specification flag registers (PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR03L, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H, PR12L, PR12H, PR13L) ........................................................ 1494 21.3.4 External interrupt rising edge enable registers (EGP0, EGP1), external interrupt falling edge enable registers (EGN0, EGN1) .................................................. 1497 21.3.5 Interrupt source determination flag register 0 (INTFLG0) ........................................................... 1499 21.3.6 Interrupt mask register (INTMSK) ............................................................................................... 1502 21.3.7 Input switch control register (ISC) .............................................................................................. 1503 21.3.8 Program status word (PSW) ....................................................................................................... 1504 21.4 Interrupt Servicing Operations ............................................................................................. 1505 21.4.1 Maskable interrupt request acknowledgment ............................................................................. 1505 21.4.2 Software interrupt request acknowledgment .............................................................................. 1508 21.4.3 Multiple interrupt servicing .......................................................................................................... 1508 21.4.4 Interrupt servicing during division instruction .............................................................................. 1512 21.4.5 Interrupt request hold ................................................................................................................. 1514 CHAPTER 22 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION ................................................................................... 1515 22.1 Functions of Key Interrupt .................................................................................................... 1515 22.2 Configuration of Key Interrupt .............................................................................................. 1516 22.3 Register Controlling Key Interrupt ....................................................................................... 1517 22.3.1 Key return mode register (KRM)................................................................................................. 1517 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION ................................................................................................ 1518 23.1 Standby Function and Configuration ................................................................................... 1518 Index-20 23.1.1 Standby function......................................................................................................................... 1518 23.2 Registers controlling standby function ............................................................................... 1519 23.2.1 Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) ...................................................... 1520 23.2.2 Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) ................................................................... 1521 23.2.3 STOP status output control register (STPSTC) .......................................................................... 1522 23.3 Standby Function Operation ................................................................................................. 1523 23.3.1 HALT mode ................................................................................................................................ 1523 23.3.2 STOP mode................................................................................................................................ 1530 23.3.3 SNOOZE mode .......................................................................................................................... 1536 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION...................................................................................................... 1541 24.1 Register for Confirming Reset Source ................................................................................. 1552 24.1.1 Reset control flag register (RESF) .............................................................................................. 1552 24.1.2 POR/CLM reset confirmation register (POCRES) ...................................................................... 1553 CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT .................................................................................... 1555 25.1 Functions of Power-on-reset Circuit .................................................................................... 1555 25.2 Configuration of Power-on-reset Circuit .............................................................................. 1556 25.3 Operation of Power-on-reset Circuit .................................................................................... 1556 25.4 Cautions for Power-on-reset Circuit..................................................................................... 1559 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR ................................................................................................ 1561 26.1 Functions of Voltage Detector .............................................................................................. 1561 26.2 Configuration of Voltage Detector ........................................................................................ 1562 26.3 Registers Controlling Voltage Detector ............................................................................... 1562 26.3.1 Voltage detection register (LVIM)................................................................................................ 1563 26.3.2 Voltage detection level register (LVIS) ........................................................................................ 1564 26.4 Operation of Voltage Detector .............................................................................................. 1567 26.4.1 When used as reset mode.......................................................................................................... 1567 26.4.2 When used as interrupt mode .................................................................................................... 1569 26.4.3 When used as interrupt and reset mode .................................................................................... 1571 26.5 Cautions for Voltage Detector ............................................................................................... 1577 26.5.1 Checking reset source ................................................................................................................ 1577 26.5.2 Delay from the time LVD reset source is generated until the time LVD reset has been generated or released ................................................................................................................ 1578 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................. 1579 27.1 Overview of Safety Functions ............................................................................................... 1579 27.2 Registers Used by Safety Functions .................................................................................... 1581 27.3 Operation of Safety Functions .............................................................................................. 1582 Index-21 27.3.1 Flash memory CRC operation function (high-speed CRC) ......................................................... 1582 27.3.2 CRC operation function (general-purpose CRC) ........................................................................ 1586 27.3.3 RAM-ECC function ..................................................................................................................... 1590 27.3.4 CPU stack pointer monitor function ............................................................................................ 1596 27.3.5 Clock monitor ............................................................................................................................. 1599 27.3.6 RAM guard function .................................................................................................................... 1600 27.3.7 SFR guard function .................................................................................................................... 1601 27.3.8 Invalid memory access detection function .................................................................................. 1602 27.3.9 Frequency detection function ..................................................................................................... 1605 27.3.10 A/D test function ....................................................................................................................... 1608 27.3.11 Digital output signal level detection function for I/O ports ......................................................... 1613 CHAPTER 28 REGULATOR ............................................................................................................... 1614 28.1 Regulator Overview ................................................................................................................ 1614 CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE ............................................................................................................. 1615 29.1 Functions of Option Bytes .................................................................................................... 1615 29.1.1 User option byte (000C0H to 000C2H/020C0H to 020C2H)....................................................... 1615 29.1.2 On-chip debug option byte (000C3H/ 020C3H) .......................................................................... 1616 29.2 Format of User Option Byte .................................................................................................. 1617 29.3 Format of On-chip Debug Option Byte................................................................................. 1621 29.4 Setting of Option Byte............................................................................................................ 1622 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY ........................................................................................................ 1623 30.1 Serial Programming Using Flash Memory Programmer .................................................... 1625 30.1.1 Programming Environment ......................................................................................................... 1627 30.1.2 Communication Mode ................................................................................................................ 1627 30.2 Serial Programming Using External Device (that Incorporates UART) ............................ 1629 30.2.1 Programming Environment ......................................................................................................... 1629 30.2.2 Communication Mode ................................................................................................................ 1630 30.3 Connection of Pins on Board ................................................................................................ 1631 30.3.1 P40/TOOL0 pin .......................................................................................................................... 1631 30.3.2 RESET pin.................................................................................................................................. 1631 30.3.3 Port pins ..................................................................................................................................... 1632 30.3.4 REGC pin ................................................................................................................................... 1632 30.3.5 X1 and X2 pins ........................................................................................................................... 1632 30.3.6 Power supply .............................................................................................................................. 1632 30.4 Serial Programming Method ................................................................................................. 1633 30.4.1 Serial programming procedure ................................................................................................... 1633 30.4.2 Flash memory programming mode ............................................................................................. 1634 Index-22 30.4.3 Selecting communication mode .................................................................................................. 1635 30.4.4 Communication commands ........................................................................................................ 1636 30.5 Processing Time for Each Command when PG-FP5 Is in Use (Reference Value) ........... 1637 30.6 Self-Programming .................................................................................................................. 1638 30.6.1 Self-programming procedure ...................................................................................................... 1639 30.6.2 Boot swap function ..................................................................................................................... 1640 30.6.3 Flash shield window function ...................................................................................................... 1642 30.7 Security Settings .................................................................................................................... 1643 30.8 Data Flash ............................................................................................................................... 1645 30.8.1 Data flash overview ..................................................................................................................... 1645 30.8.2 Register controlling data flash memory ...................................................................................... 1646 30.8.3 Procedure for accessing data flash memory .............................................................................. 1647 CHAPTER 31 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION ................................................................................... 1648 31.1 Overview of On-chip Debug Function .................................................................................. 1648 31.1.1 Hot Plug-in.................................................................................................................................. 1648 31.1.2 Real-time RAM Monitor (RRM) and Dynamic Memory Modification (DMM) by DTC .................. 1648 31.2 Connecting E1 On-chip Debugging Emulator to RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 .......................... 1650 31.3 On-Chip Debug Security ID ................................................................................................... 1651 31.4 Securing of User Resources ................................................................................................. 1651 31.4.1 Securement of memory space.................................................................................................... 1651 CHAPTER 32 BCD CORRECTION CIRCUIT ................................................................................... 1654 32.1 BCD Correction Circuit Function .......................................................................................... 1654 32.2 Registers Used by BCD Correction Circuit ......................................................................... 1654 32.3 BCD Correction Circuit Operation ........................................................................................ 1655 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET...................................................................................................... 1657 33.1 Conventions Used in Operation List .................................................................................... 1658 33.1.1 Operand identifiers and specification methods ........................................................................... 1658 33.1.2 Description of operation column ................................................................................................. 1659 33.1.3 Description of flag operation column .......................................................................................... 1660 33.1.4 PREFIX instruction ..................................................................................................................... 1660 33.2 Operation List ......................................................................................................................... 1661 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) ............................................................ 1679 34.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................................................. 1680 34.2 Oscillator Characteristics ...................................................................................................... 1682 34.2.1 Main System Clock Oscillator Characteristics ............................................................................ 1682 34.2.2 On-chip Oscillator Characteristics .............................................................................................. 1683 Index-23 34.2.3 Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics ............................................................................... 1684 34.2.4 PLL Circuit Characteristics ......................................................................................................... 1685 34.3 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................................. 1686 34.3.1 Pin Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 1686 34.3.2 Supply Current Characteristics ................................................................................................... 1692 34.4 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................................. 1697 34.4.1 Basic Operation .......................................................................................................................... 1697 34.5 Peripheral Functions Characteristics................................................................................... 1700 34.5.1 Serial Array Unit ......................................................................................................................... 1700 34.5.2 Serial Interface IICA ................................................................................................................... 1719 34.5.3 On-chip Debug (UART) .............................................................................................................. 1720 34.5.4 LIN/UART Module (RLIN3) UART Mode .................................................................................... 1720 34.6 Analog Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 1721 34.6.1 A/D Converter Characteristics .................................................................................................... 1721 34.6.2 Temperatures Sensor Characteristics ........................................................................................ 1725 34.6.3 D/A Converter Characteristics .................................................................................................... 1725 34.6.4 Comparator Characteristics ........................................................................................................ 1725 34.6.5 POR Circuit Characteristics ........................................................................................................ 1726 34.6.6 LVD Circuit Characteristics......................................................................................................... 1727 34.7 Power Supply Voltage Rising Time ...................................................................................... 1728 34.8 STOP Mode Memory Retention Characteristics .................................................................. 1728 34.9 Flash Memory Programming Characteristics ...................................................................... 1729 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) ............................................................ 1730 35.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................................................. 1731 35.2 Oscillator Characteristics ...................................................................................................... 1733 35.2.1 Main System Clock Oscillator Characteristics ............................................................................ 1733 35.2.2 On-chip Oscillator Characteristics .............................................................................................. 1734 35.2.3 Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics ............................................................................... 1735 35.2.4 PLL Circuit Characteristics ......................................................................................................... 1736 35.3 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................................. 1737 35.3.1 Pin Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 1737 35.3.2 Supply Current Characteristics ................................................................................................... 1743 35.4 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................................. 1748 35.4.1 Basic Operation .......................................................................................................................... 1748 35.5 Peripheral Functions Characteristics................................................................................... 1751 35.5.1 Serial Array Unit ......................................................................................................................... 1751 35.5.2 Serial Interface IICA ................................................................................................................... 1770 35.5.3 On-chip Debug (UART) .............................................................................................................. 1771 35.5.4 LIN/UART Module (RLIN3) UART Mode .................................................................................... 1771 35.6 Analog Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 1772 Index-24 35.6.1 A/D Converter Characteristics .................................................................................................... 1772 35.6.2 Temperatures Sensor Characteristics ........................................................................................ 1776 35.6.3 D/A Converter Characteristics .................................................................................................... 1776 35.6.4 Comparator Characteristics ........................................................................................................ 1776 35.6.5 POR Circuit Characteristics ........................................................................................................ 1777 35.6.6 LVD Circuit Characteristics......................................................................................................... 1778 35.7 Power Supply Voltage Rising Time ...................................................................................... 1779 35.8 STOP Mode Memory Retention Characteristics .................................................................. 1779 35.9 Flash Memory Programming Characteristics ...................................................................... 1780 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) ............................................................ 1781 36.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................................................. 1782 36.2 Oscillator Characteristics ...................................................................................................... 1784 36.2.1 Main System Clock Oscillator Characteristics ............................................................................ 1784 36.2.2 On-chip Oscillator Characteristics .............................................................................................. 1785 36.2.3 Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics ............................................................................... 1786 36.2.4 PLL Circuit Characteristics ......................................................................................................... 1787 36.3 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................................. 1788 36.3.1 Pin Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 1788 36.3.2 Supply Current Characteristics ................................................................................................... 1794 36.4 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................................. 1799 36.4.1 Basic Operation .......................................................................................................................... 1799 36.5 Peripheral Functions Characteristics................................................................................... 1802 36.5.1 Serial Array Unit ......................................................................................................................... 1802 36.5.2 Serial Interface IICA ................................................................................................................... 1821 36.5.3 On-chip Debug (UART) .............................................................................................................. 1822 36.5.4 LIN/UART Module (RLIN3) UART Mode .................................................................................... 1822 36.6 Analog Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 1823 36.6.1 A/D Converter Characteristics .................................................................................................... 1823 36.6.2 Temperatures Sensor Characteristics ........................................................................................ 1827 36.6.3 D/A Converter Characteristics .................................................................................................... 1827 36.6.4 Comparator Characteristics ........................................................................................................ 1827 36.6.5 POR Circuit Characteristics ........................................................................................................ 1828 36.6.6 LVD Circuit Characteristics......................................................................................................... 1829 36.7 Power Supply Voltage Rising Time ...................................................................................... 1830 36.8 STOP Mode Memory Retention Characteristics .................................................................. 1830 36.9 Flash Memory Programming Characteristics ...................................................................... 1831 APPENDIX A RELATED PRODUCTS ................................................................................................ 1840 A.1 List of Analog and Power Devices ......................................................................................... 1840 Index-25 APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY .................................................................................................... 1842 Major Revisions in This Edition ..................................................................................................... 1842 Index-26 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 RL78/F13, F14 RENESAS MCU Dec 10, 2015 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.1 Features Minimum instruction execution time can be changed from high speed (0.03125 s: @ 32 MHz operation with highspeed on-chip oscillator clock or PLL clock) to ultra low-speed (66.6 s: @ 15 kHz operation with low-speed on-chip oscillator clock) General-purpose register: 8 bits 32 registers (8 bits 8 registers 4 banks) ROM: 16 to 256 KB RAM: 1 to 20 KB Data flash memory: 4 KB/8 KB High-speed on-chip oscillator clock Selectable from 32 MHz (Typ.), 24 MHz (Typ.), 16 MHz (Typ.), 12 MHz (Typ.), 8 MHz (Typ.), 4 MHz (Typ.), and 1 MHz (Typ.) (Selectable from 64 MHz (Typ.) and 48 MHz (Typ.) when using Timer RD) Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock: 15 kHz 2 channels (one for WWDT and one for CPU and peripherals other than WWDT) On-chip PLL (3, 4, 6, 8) On-chip single-power-supply flash memory (with prohibition of block erase/writing function) Self-programming (with boot swap function/flash shield window function) On-chip debug function On-chip power-on-reset (POR) circuit and voltage detector (LVD) On-chip watchdog timer (operable with the dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator clock) Multiply/divide/multiply & accumulate instructions are supported 16 bits 16 bits = 32 bits (Unsigned or signed) 32 bits 32 bits = 32 bits (Unsigned) 16 bits 16 bits + 32 bits = 32 bits (Unsigned or signed) On-chip key interrupt function On-chip clock output/buzzer output controller On-chip BCD adjustment I/O ports: 16 to 92 (including one input-only pin) Timer 16-bit timer array unit: 8 to 16 channels 16-bit timer RD: 2 channels (six triangle-wave outputs; sawtooth wave/triangle-wave modulation) 16-bit timer RJ: 1 channel Watchdog timer: 1 channel Real-time clock: 1 channel Serial interface CSI UART/UART (LIN-bus supported) LIN module (master/slave supported) I2C/simplified I2C CAN interface (RS-CAN lite) 8/10-bit resolution A/D converter (VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V): 4 to 31 channels DTC (Max. 52 sources) ELC (Max. 26 channels for event link source, Max. 9 channels for event link destination) Note Safety functions (CRC calculation, PLL lock detection, AD test, SFR guard, etc.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 8-bit D/A converter Note On-chip comparator: 1 channel (input pin: 4 channels) Note Power supply voltage: VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Operating ambient temperature: TA = -40 to +105C (grade L)/TA = -40 to +125C (grade K)/TA = -40 to +150C (grade Y) Note Only available in the RL78/F14. 1.1.1 Applications General automotive electrical applications (motor control, door control, headlight control, etc.), motorcycle engine control R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 2 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.2 Product Lineup Table 1-1. RL78/F14 Lineup Code Data Flash Flash RAM Pin Count 100 pins 80 pins 64 pins 48 pins 48 pins (QFN) (QFP) 32 pins 30 pins 4 KB R5F10PGD R5F10PGD R5F10PBD R5F10PAD 64 KB 6 KB R5F10PPE R5F10PME R5F10PLE R5F10PGE R5F10PGE R5F10PBE R5F10PAE 96 KB 8 KB R5F10PPF R5F10PMF R5F10PLF R5F10PGF R5F10PGF 10 KB R5F10PPG R5F10PMG R5F10PLG R5F10PGG R5F10PGG 192 KB 16 KB R5F10PPH R5F10PMH R5F10PLH R5F10PGH R5F10PGH 256 KB 20 KB R5F10PPJ R5F10PMJ R5F10PLJ R5F10PGJ R5F10PGJ 48 KB 128 KB 4 KB 8 KB Table 1-2. RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) Lineup Code Data Flash Flash 32 KB 4 KB RAM Pin Count 80 pins 64 pins 48 pins (QFN) 48 pins (QFP) 32 pins 30 pins 2 KB R5F10BLC R5F10BGC R5F10BGC R5F10BBC R5F10BAC 48 KB 3 KB R5F10BLD R5F10BGD R5F10BGD R5F10BBD R5F10BAD 64 KB 4 KB R5F10BME R5F10BLE R5F10BGE R5F10BGE R5F10BBE R5F10BAE 96 KB 6 KB R5F10BMF R5F10BLF R5F10BGF R5F10BGF R5F10BBF R5F10BAF 128 KB 8 KB R5F10BMG R5F10BLG R5F10BGG R5F10BGG R5F10BBG R5F10BAG Table 1-3. RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) Lineup Code Data Flash Flash RAM Pin Count 80 pins 64 pins 48 pins 48 pins (QFN) (QFP) 32 pins 30 pins 20 pins 1 KB R5F10AGA R5F10AGA R5F10ABA R5F10AAA R5F10A6A 32 KB 2 KB R5F10ALC R5F10AGC R5F10AGC R5F10ABC R5F10AAC R5F10A6C 48 KB 3 KB R5F10ALD R5F10AGD R5F10AGD R5F10ABD R5F10AAD R5F10A6D 64 KB 4 KB R5F10AME R5F10ALE R5F10AGE R5F10AGE R5F10ABE R5F10AAE R5F10A6E 96 KB 6 KB R5F10AMF R5F10ALF R5F10AGF R5F10AGF 128 KB 8 KB R5F10AMG R5F10ALG R5F10AGG R5F10AGG 16 KB 4 KB R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 3 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.3 Function Overview 1.3.1 RL78/F14 Functions List Table 1-4. RL78/F14 Functions List (1/2) Series Name Pin Count Code flash Data flash RAM Supply voltage range Maximum operation frequency Main system System clock clock oscillator High-speed onchip oscillator Low-speed onchip oscillator R5F10PP R5F10PM R5F10PL R5F10PG R5F10PB R5F10PA 100 pins 80 pins 64 pins 48 pins 32 pins 30 pins 64 to 256KB 8KB/4KB 6 to 20KB Crystal/ceramic/ square wave Normal high accuracy 32 MHz (typ.) For low-speed operation 15 kHz (typ.) 32.768 kHzNote 7 LVD Safety functions None PLL multiplication factor: 3/4/6/8 15 kHz (typ.) PLL POR For peripherals other than WDT For WDT When power supply is rising When power supply is falling When power supply VDD voltage is rising detection When power supply is falling WWDT (window watchdog timer) Illegal instruction execution detection function Flash memory CRC operation function RAM1 bit error correction function RAM2 bit error detection function Invalid memory access detection function Frequency detection function Clock monitor function Stack pointer monitor function Low-speed onchip oscillator 15 kHz (typ.) 1.56 V (typ.) 1.55 V (typ.) 2.81 V (typ.) to 4.74 V (typ.) (in 6 steps) 2.75 V (typ.) to 4.64 V (typ.) (in 6 steps) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes I/O port output signal level detection function I/O ports A/D test function Input/Output CMOS Output CMOS Input 86ch 68ch 52ch Multiply/divide and multiplyaccumulate functions Serial I/F EVDD0, EVSS0 EVDD1, EVSS1 2ch EVDD0, EVSS0 None VDD, VSS (AVREFP, AVREFM: For AD) 16 bits 16 bits (signed) 16 bits 16 bits (unsigned) 32 bits 32 bits (unsigned) 16 bits 16 bits + 32 bits (signed) Divide Multiply-accumulate RTC Timer RJ Timer RD CSI/simplified I2C /UART SPI Multimaster I2C LIN/UART module (RLIN3) CAN interface (RS-CAN lite) 23ch None 1ch VDD, VSS, REGC For analog circuits (AD, DA, COMP) Multiply Arithmetic instructions (extended instruction set) Vectored External Products with at least interrupt 128 Kbytes of code flash sources memory Products with up to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Internal Products with at least 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Products with up to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Key return detection DTC Timer TAU 25ch 4chNote 7 Shared with oscillator pins For internal circuits For I/O ports 38ch 1ch Input only Power supply pins 48KB, 64KB 4KB 48KB, 64KB 4 to 20KB 2.7 V to 5.5 V 32 MHz (grade L), 24 MHz (grade K, grade Y) 1 to 20 MHz (operating at 2.7 V to 5.5 V) Subsystem clock oscillator Clock for peripherals 48 to 256KB 16 bits 16 bits + 32 bits (unsigned) Yes 16ch Notes 4, 6 48ch Note 4 44 sources 16 bits (8ch 2) 16ch Notes 4, 6 15ch Notes 3, 6 14ch Note 2 14ch Notes 3, 5 14ch Notes 3, 5 13ch Note 2 48ch Note 4 48ch Note 3 48ch Note 2 41ch Note 3 41ch Note 3 41ch Note 2 8ch 44 sources/38 sources 16 bits (8ch 2/8ch + 4ch) 9ch Note 1 41ch Note 1 40ch Note 1 6ch 8ch 37 sources 16 bits (8ch + 4ch) 1ch 16 bits 1 16 bits 2 4ch/4ch/2ch 3ch/3ch/2ch Yes 2ch 1ch 2ch/1ch None 1ch 1ch (Notes and Caution are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 4 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW Table 1-4. RL78/F14 Functions List (2/2) Series Name Pin Count A/D converter 10-bit SAR R5F10PP R5F10PM R5F10PL R5F10PG R5F10PB R5F10PA 100 pins 80 pins 64 pins 48 pins 32 pins 30 pins 24ch 7ch 18ch/16ch 7ch/4ch 17ch/16ch 3ch 13ch 5ch/2ch 8ch VDD EVDD Internal 8-bit D/A converter Comparator ELC Link source: 26ch Link destination: 9ch PCLBUZ 2ch 1ch 1ch Link source: 26ch/20ch Link destination: 9ch/7ch 1ch Self-programming On-chip debug Trace Hot plug-in Option byte Notes 1. 10ch 2ch Link source: 20ch Link destination: 7ch None Yes Yes Yes Yes The following pairs of internal and external sources are each counted as a single source in this number: INTP4 and INTSPM, INTP5 and INTCMP0. 2. The following pairs of internal and external sources are each counted as a single source in this number: INTP4 and INTSPM, INTP5 and INTCMP0, INTP6 and INTTM11H, INTP7 and INTTM13H, INTP8 and INTRTC, INTP9 and INTTM01H. 3. The following pairs of internal and external sources are each counted as a single source in this number: INTP4 and INTSPM, INTP5 and INTCMP0, INTP6 and INTTM11H, INTP7 and INTTM13H, INTP8 and INTRTC, INTP9 and INTTM01H, INTP10 and INTTM03H. 4. The following pairs of internal and external sources are each counted as a single source in this number: INTP4 and INTSPM, INTP5 and INTCMP0, INTP6 and INTTM11H, INTP7 and INTTM13H, INTP8 and INTRTC, INTP9 and INTTM01H, INTP10 and INTTM03H, INTP13 and INTCLM. 5. INTP11 and INTLIN0WUP are counted as a single source because using them at the same time is not possible. 6. Both sources in the following pairs are counted as a single source in this number: INTP11 and INTLIN0WUP, INTP12 and INTLIN1WUP. 7. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. Caution For details, see 1.5 Pin Configurations. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 5 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.3.2 RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) Functions List Table 1-5. RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) Functions List Series Name Pin Count Code flash Data flash RAM Supply voltage range Maximum operation frequency System clock Main system clock oscillator High-speed onchip oscillator Low-speed onchip oscillator Clock for peripherals POR LVD Safety functions R5F10BM R5F10BL R5F10BG R5F10BB R5F10BA 80 pins 64 pins 48 pins 32 pins 30 pins 64 to 128KB 32 to 128KB 4KB 4 to 8KB 2 to 8KB 2.7 V to 5.5 V 32 MHz (grade L), 24 MHz (grade K, grade Y) 1 to 20 MHz (operating at 2.7 V to 5.5 V) Crystal/ceramic/ square wave Normal high accuracy 32 MHz (typ.) For low-speed operation 15 kHz (typ.) 32.768 kHzNote 5 PLL multiplication factor: 3/4/6/8 15 kHz (typ.) Subsystem clock oscillator PLL For peripherals other Low-speed onthan WDT chip oscillator For WDT When power supply is rising When power supply is falling VDD voltage When power supply detection is rising When power supply is falling WWDT (window watchdog timer) Illegal instruction execution detection function Flash memory CRC operation function RAM1 bit error correction function RAM2 bit error detection function Invalid memory access detection function Frequency detection function Clock monitor function Stack pointer monitor function 15 kHz (typ.) 1.56 V (typ.) 1.55 V (typ.) 2.81 V (typ.) to 4.74 V (typ.) (in 6 steps) 2.75 V (typ.) to 4.64 V (typ.) (in 6 steps) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 38ch I/O port output signal level detection function I/O ports A/D test function Input/Output CMOS Output CMOS Input Shared with oscillator pins 68ch 52ch 1ch 4chNote 5 Multiply/divide and multiplyaccumulate functions 23ch 1ch VDD, VSS, REGC For internal circuits For I/O ports For analog circuits (AD, DA, COMP) Multiply EVDD0, EVSS0 None VDD, VSS (AVREFP, AVREFM: For AD) 16 bits 16 bits (signed) 16 bits 16 bits (unsigned) 32 bits 32 bits (unsigned) 16 bits 16 bits + 32 bits (signed) Divide Multiply-accumulate 16 bits 16 bits + 32 bits (unsigned) Yes Arithmetic instructions (extended instruction set) External Internal Vectored interrupt sources Key return detection DTC Timer TAU RTC Timer RJ Timer RD Serial I/F CSI/simplified I2C /UART SPI Multimaster I2C LIN/UART module (RLIN3) CAN interface (RS-CAN lite) A/D converter VDD 10-bit SAR EVDD Internal D/A converter 8-bit Comparator ELC PCLBUZ Self-programming On-chip debug Trace Hot plug-in Option byte 25ch None 2ch Input only Power supply pins None 14ch Notes 3, 4 40ch Note 3 13ch Note 2 40ch Note 2 8ch 37 sources 9ch Note 1 40ch Note 1 39ch Note 1 6ch 8ch 36 sources 16 bits (8ch + 4ch) 1ch 16 bits 1 16 bits 2 4ch/4ch/2ch 3ch/3ch/2ch Yes 1ch 16ch 4ch 16ch 3ch None 1ch 1ch 13ch 8ch 2ch 10ch 2ch None None None 1ch None Yes Yes Yes Yes (Notes and Caution are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 6 RL78/F13, F14 Notes 1. CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW The following pairs of internal and external sources are each counted as a single source in this number: INTP4 and INTSPM. 2. The following pairs of internal and external sources are each counted as a single source in this number: INTP4 and INTSPM, INTP6 and INTTM11H, INTP7 and INTTM13H, INTP8 and INTRTC, INTP9 and INTTM01H. 3. The following pairs of internal and external sources are each counted as a single source in this number: INTP4 and INTSPM, INTP6 and INTTM11H, INTP7 and INTTM13H, INTP8 and INTRTC, INTP9 and INTTM01H, INTP10 and INTTM03H. 4. INTP11 and INTLIN0WUP are counted as a single source because using them at the same time is not possible. 5. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. Caution For details, see 1.5 Pin Configurations. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 7 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.3.3 RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) Functions List Table 1-6. RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) Functions List (1/2) Series Name Pin Count Code flash Data flash RAM Supply voltage range Maximum operation frequency System clock Main system clock oscillator High-speed onchip oscillator Low-speed onchip oscillator Clock for peripherals POR LVD Safety functions R5F10AM R5F10AL R5F10AG R5F10AB R5F10AA R5F10A6 80 pins 64 pins 48 pins 32 pins 30 pins 20 pins 64 to 128KB 32 to 128KB 16 to 128KB 4 to 8KB 2 to 8KB 4KB 1 to 8KB 1 to 4KB 2.7 V to 5.5 V 32 MHz (grade L), 24 MHz (grade K, grade Y) 1 to 20 MHz (operating at 2.7 V to 5.5 V) Crystal/ceramic/ square wave Normal high accuracy 32 MHz (typ.) For low-speed operation 15 kHz (typ.) 32.768 kHzNote 6 Subsystem clock oscillator PLL For peripherals other Low-speed onthan WDT chip oscillator For WDT When power supply is rising When power supply is falling VDD voltage When power supply detection is rising When power supply is falling WWDT (window watchdog timer) Illegal instruction execution detection function Flash memory CRC operation function RAM1 bit error correction function RAM2 bit error detection function Invalid memory access detection function Frequency detection function Clock monitor function Stack pointer monitor function None PLL multiplication factor: 3/4/6/8 15 kHz (typ.) 15 kHz (typ.) 1.56 V (typ.) 1.55 V (typ.) 2.81 V (typ.) to 4.74 V (typ.) (in 6 steps) 2.75 V (typ.) to 4.64 V (typ.) (in 6 steps) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes I/O port output signal level detection function I/O ports A/D test function Input/Output CMOS Output CMOS Input Shared with oscillator pins 68ch 52ch 1ch 4chNote 6 38ch Multiply/divide and multiplyaccumulate functions For internal circuits For I/O ports For analog circuits (AD, DA, COMP) Multiply EVDD0, EVSS0 Products with up to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory 23ch None 2ch 13ch None VDD, VSS (AVREFP, AVREFM: For AD) 16 bits 16 bits (signed) 16 bits 16 bits (unsigned) 32 bits 32 bits (unsigned) 16 bits 16 bits + 32 bits (signed) 16 bits 16 bits + 32 bits (unsigned) Yes Divide Multiply-accumulate Arithmetic instructions (extended instruction set) Vectored External Products with at least interrupt 96 Kbytes of code flash sources memory Products with up to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Internal Products with at least 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Products with up to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Key return detection DTC Products with at least 96 Kbytes of code flash memory 25ch 1ch VDD, VSS, REGC Input only Power supply pins 16 to 64KB 13ch Note 4, 5 13ch Note 4, 5 10ch Note 2 35ch Note 4 8ch Note 2 7ch Note 2 35ch Note 3 35ch Note 4 26ch Note 2 8ch 36 sources 36 sources 12ch Note 3 30 sources 6ch 8ch 29 sources 2ch 28 sources (Notes and Caution are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 8 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW Table 1-6. RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) Functions List (2/2) Series Name Pin Count TAU R5F10AM R5F10AL R5F10AG R5F10AB R5F10AA R5F10A6 80 pins 64 pins 48 pins 32 pins 30 pins 20 pins Products with at least 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Products with up to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory RTC Timer RJ Timer RD CSI/simplified Products with at least I2C /UART 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Products with up to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory SPI Multimaster I2C Products with at least 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Products with up to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory LIN/UART module (RLIN3) CAN interface (RS-CAN lite) VDD Products with at least 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Products with up to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory EVDD Products with at least 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Products with up to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Internal 8-bit Timer Serial I/F A/D converter 10-bit SAR 16 bits (8ch + 4ch) 2. 16 bits (8ch) 1ch 16 bits 1 Note 1 16 bits 2 4ch/4ch/2ch 4ch/4ch/2ch 2ch/2ch/1ch Yes 1ch 1ch None 1ch None 16ch 16ch 13ch 16ch 12ch 12ch 4ch 3ch 2ch 8ch 10ch 4ch 4ch D/A converter Comparator ELC PCLBUZ Self-programming On-chip debug Trace Hot plug-in Option byte Notes 1. 16 bits (8ch + 4ch) None 2ch None None None 1ch None Yes Yes Yes Yes The 20-pin products do not have TRJIO0 and TRJO0 pins. The following pairs of internal and external sources are each counted as a single source in this number: INTP4 and INTSPM. 3. The following pairs of internal and external sources are each counted as a single source in this number: INTP4 and INTSPM, INTP6 and INTTM11H, INTP7 and INTTM13H, INTP8 and INTRTC, INTP9 and INTTM01H. 4. The following pairs of internal and external sources are each counted as a single source in this number: INTP4 and INTSPM, INTP6 and INTTM11H, INTP7 and INTTM13H, INTP8 and INTRTC, INTP9 and INTTM01H, INTP10 and INTTM03H. 5. NTP11 and INTLIN0WUP are counted as a single source because using them at the same time is not possible. 6. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. Caution For details, see 1.5 Pin Configurations. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 9 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4 Block Diagram 1.4.1 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PPn (n = E, F, G, H, J) 100-pin Products Figure 1-1. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 ch00 TI01 TO01 ch01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 ch02 PORT0 4 P00 to P03 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 8 P40 to P47 PORT5 8 P50 to P57 PORT6 8 P60 to P67 PORT7 8 P70 to P77 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 8 P90 to P97 PORT10 8 P100 to P107 ELC ch03 TI04 TO04 ch04 TI05 TO05 ch05 TI06 TO06 ch06 TI07 TO07 ch07 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD CODE FLASH DATA FLASH TAU1 (8ch) TI10 TO10 ch10 TI11 TO11 ch11 TI12 TO12 ch12 TI13 TO13 ch13 TI14 TO14 ch14 TI15 TO15 ch15 TI16 TO16 ch16 TI17 TO17 ch17 OCD BCD INT RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM 4 P120, P125 to P127 4 P121 to P124 PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 PORT14 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 RESET RESOUT Low-speed OCO (for WDT) PORT15 P140 8 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (14ch) 14 INTP0 to INTP13 Sub OSC Clock Generator + Reset Generator IIC01 XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 P150 to P157 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 SSI10 CSI10 SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 CRXD0 CTXD0 CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) RTC1HZ Main OSC CLM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO 10-bit ADC (31ch) 31 AV AV 8-bit DAC (1ch) Voltage REGULATOR STANDBY REFM VCOUT0 IVCMP00 IVCMP01 IVCMP02 IVCMP03 IVREF0 IICA0 (1ch) REGC REFP ANO0 Comparator 0 (1ch) High-Speed OCO ANI0 to ANI30 SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STOPST CRC LRXD1 LTXD1 LIN1 (1ch) Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 10 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.2 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PMn (n = G, H, J) 80-pin Products Figure 1-2. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 ch00 TI01 TO01 ch01 TI02 TO02 ch02 TI03 TO03 ch03 TI04 TO04 ch04 TI05 TO05 ch05 TI06 TO06 ch06 TI07 TO07 ch07 ch10 TI11 TO11 ch11 TI12 TO12 ch12 TI13 TO13 ch13 TI14 TO14 ch14 TI15 TO15 ch15 TI16 TO16 ch16 TI17 TO17 ch17 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD CODE FLASH DATA FLASH INT ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 P00 to P02 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 8 P40 to P47 PORT5 8 P50 to P57 PORT6 8 P60 to P67 PORT7 8 P70 to P77 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 8 P90 to P97 OCD BCD RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 3 ELC TAU1 (8ch) TI10 TO10 PORT0 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM 3 P120, P125 to P126 4 P121 to P124 PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 RESET RESOUT Low-speed OCO (for WDT) KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (14ch) 14 INTP0 to INTP13 Sub OSC Clock Generator + Reset Generator IIC01 XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 SSI10 CSI10 SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 CRXD0 CTXD0 CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) LRXD1 LTXD1 LIN1 (1ch) RTC1HZ Main OSC CLM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO 10-bit ADC (25ch) 25 REFP REFM 8-bit DAC (1ch) ANO0 VCOUT0 IVCMP00 IVCMP01 IVCMP02 IVCMP03 IVREF0 Comparator 0 (1ch) High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR ANI0 to ANI17, ANI24 to ANI30 AV AV IICA0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STOPST CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 11 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.3 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PLn (n = G, H, J) 64-pin Products Figure 1-3. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 ch00 TI01 TO01 ch01 TI02 TO02 ch02 TI03 TO03 ch03 TI04 TO04 ch04 TI05 TO05 ch05 TI06 TO06 ch06 TI07 TO07 ch07 PORT0 ch10 TI11 TO11 ch11 TI12 TO12 ch12 TI13 TO13 ch13 TI14 TO14 ch14 TI15 TO15 ch15 TI16 TO16 ch16 TI17 TO17 ch17 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD CODE FLASH DATA FLASH BCD TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 4 P40 to P43 PORT5 4 P50 to P53 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT7 8 P70 to P77 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 7 P90 to P96 2 P120, P125 4 P121 to P124 RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) ch0 8 OCD INT TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 PORT1 ELC TAU1 (8ch) TI10 TO10 P00 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 RESET RESOUT Low-speed OCO (for WDT) KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (13ch) 13 INTP0 to INTP12 Sub OSC Clock Generator + Reset Generator IIC01 XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 SSI10 CSI10 SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 CRXD0 CTXD0 CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) RTC1HZ Main OSC CLM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO 10-bit ADC (20ch) 20 REFP REFM 8-bit DAC (1ch) ANO0 VCOUT0 IVCMP00 IVCMP01 IVCMP02 IVCMP03 IVREF0 Comparator 0 (1ch) High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR ANI0 to ANI16, ANI24 to ANI26 AV AV IICA0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STOPST CRC LRXD1 LTXD1 Cautions 1. LIN1 (1ch) Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 12 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.4 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PGn (n = G, H, J) 48-pin Products Figure 1-4. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 ch00 TI01 TO01 ch01 TI02 TO02 ch02 TI03 TO03 ch03 TI04 TO04 ch04 TI05 TO05 ch05 TI06 TO06 ch06 TI07 TO07 ch07 PORT0 ch10 TI11 TO11 ch11 TI12 TO12 ch12 TI13 TO13 ch13 TI14 TO14 ch14 TI15 TO15 ch15 TI16 TO16 ch16 TI17 TO17 ch17 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD CODE FLASH DATA FLASH BCD TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 2 P40, P41 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT7 4 P70 to P73 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 3 P90 to P92 2 P120, P125 4 P121 to P124 RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) ch0 8 OCD INT TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 PORT1 ELC TAU1 (8ch) TI10 TO10 P00 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 RESET RESOUT Low-speed OCO (for WDT) KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (10ch) 10 INTP0 to INTP9 Sub OSC Clock Generator + Reset Generator IIC01 XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 SSI10 CSI10 SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 CRXD0 CTXD0 CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) RTC1HZ Main OSC CLM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO 10-bit ADC (18ch) 18 REFP REFM 8-bit DAC (1ch) ANO0 VCOUT0 IVCMP00 IVCMP01 IVCMP02 IVCMP03 IVREF0 Comparator 0 (1ch) High-Speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR ANI0 to ANI12, ANI24 to ANI28 AV AV IICA0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STOPST CRC LRXD1 LTXD1 LIN1 (1ch) Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 13 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.5 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PMn (n = E, F) 80-pin Products <R> Figure 1-5. Block Diagram TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 ch00 TI01 TO01 ch01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 ch02 PORT0 3 P00 to P02 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 8 P40 to P47 PORT5 8 P50 to P57 PORT6 8 P60 to P67 PORT7 8 P70 to P77 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 8 P90 to P97 ch03 TI04 TO04 ch04 TI05 TO05 ch05 TI06 TO06 ch06 TI07 TO07 ch07 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD CODE FLASH DATA FLASH TAU1 (8ch) TI10 TO10 ch10 TI11 TO11 ch11 TI12 TO12 ch12 TI13 TO13 ch13 OCD BCD INT RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM 4 P120, P125, P126 4 P121 to P124 PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 RESET RESOUT Low-speed OCO (for WDT) KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (12ch) 12 INTP0 to INTP11 Sub OSC Clock Generator + Reset Generator IIC01 XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 SSI10 CSI10 SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 CLM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO 10-bit ADC (20ch) 20 High-speed OCO LIN0 (1ch) ANI0 to ANI15, ANI24 to ANI27 AV AV REFP REFM 8-bit DAC (1ch) ANO0 VCOUT0 IVCMP00 IVCMP01 IVCMP02 IVCMP03 IVREF0 Comparator 0 (1ch) Voltage REGULATOR LRXD0 LTXD0 RTC1HZ Main OSC IICA0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STOPST CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 14 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.6 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PLn (n = E, F) 64-pin Products Figure 1-6. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 ch00 TI01 TO01 ch01 TI02 TO02 ch02 TI03 TO03 ch03 TI04 TO04 ch04 TI05 TO05 ch05 TI06 TO06 ch06 TI07 TO07 ch07 PORT0 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD CODE FLASH DATA FLASH TAU1 (8ch) TI10 TO10 ch10 TI11 TO11 ch11 TI12 TO12 ch12 TI13 TO13 ch13 BCD TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 4 P40 to P43 PORT5 4 P50 to P53 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT7 8 P70 to P77 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 7 P90 to P96 2 P120, P125 4 P121 to P124 RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) ch0 PORT1 OCD INT TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 P00 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 RESET RESOUT Low-speed OCO (for WDT) KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (12ch) 12 INTP0 to INTP11 Sub OSC Clock Generator + Reset Generator IIC01 XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 SSI10 CSI10 SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 CRXD0 CTXD0 CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) RTC1HZ Main OSC CLM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO 10-bit ADC (19ch) 19 REFP REFM 8-bit DAC (1ch) ANO0 VCOUT0 IVCMP00 IVCMP01 IVCMP02 IVCMP03 IVREF0 Comparator 0 (1ch) High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR ANI0 to ANI15, ANI24 to ANI26 AV AV IICA0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STOPST CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 15 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.7 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PGn (n = D, E, F) 48-pin Products Figure 1-7. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 TI01 TO01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 TI04 TO04 TI05 TO05 TI06 TO06 TI07 TO07 PORT0 ch01 ELC ch02 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 2 P40, P41 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT7 4 P70 to P73 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 3 P90 to P92 ch03 ch04 ch05 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD ch06 ch07 CODE FLASH DATA FLASH TAU1 (4ch) TI10 TO10 TI11 TO11 TI12 TO12 TI13 TO13 P00 ch00 OCD ch10 ch11 BCD ch12 ch13 INT RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM 2 P120, P125 4 P121 to P124 PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 RESET RESOUT Low-speed OCO (for WDT) KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (10ch) 10 INTP0 to INTP9 Sub OSC Clock Generator + Reset Generator IIC01 XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 CSI10 10-bit ADC (15ch) 15 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 CRXD0 CTXD0 CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LIN0 (1ch) PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO REFM 8-bit DAC (1ch) ANO0 VCOUT0 IVCMP00 IVCMP01 IVCMP02 IVCMP03 IVREF0 Comparator 0 (1ch) High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR ANI0 to ANI12, ANI24 to ANI25 AV AV REFP CLM SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 LTXD0 RTC1HZ Main OSC IICA0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STOPST CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 16 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.8 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PBn (n = D, E) 32-pin Products Figure 1-8. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 ch00 TI01 TO01 ch01 TI02 TO02 ch02 TI03 TO03 ch03 TI04 TO04 ch04 TI05 TO05 ch05 TI06 TO06 ch06 TI07 TO07 ch07 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD CODE FLASH DATA FLASH TAU1 (8ch) TI10 TO10 ch10 TI11 TO11 ch11 TI12 TO12 ch12 TI13 TO13 ch13 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 3 P30, P33, P34 PORT4 8 P40, P41 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT8 6 P80 to P85 2 P120, P125 2 P121, P122 ELC OCD BCD INT RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ PORT13 P137 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 IIC01 RESET Low-speed OCO (for WDT) Clock Generator + Reset Generator X1 KEY RETURN (6ch) 6 KR0 to KR5 External INT (6ch) 6 INTP0 to INTP5 X2/EXCLK RTC1HZ RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 SCL10 SDA10 Main OSC UART1 CLM 10-bit ADC (10ch) 10 ANI0 to ANI07, ANI24, ANI25 AV AV REFP REFM CSI10 PLL IIC10 POR/ LVD CRXD0 CTXD0 CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) Low-speed OCO 8-bit DAC (1ch) ANO0 VCOUT0 IVCMP00 IVCMP01 IVCMP02 IVCMP03 IVREF0 Comparator 0 (1ch) High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR IICA0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 4 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT3 CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 17 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.9 RL78/F14: Block Diagram of R5F10PAn (n = D, E) 30-pin Products Figure 1-9. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 ch00 TI01 TO01 ch01 TI02 TO02 ch02 TI03 TO03 ch03 TI04 TO04 ch04 TI05 TO05 ch05 TI06 TO06 ch06 TI07 TO07 ch07 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD CODE FLASH DATA FLASH TAU1 (4ch) TI10 TO10 ch10 TI11 TO11 ch11 TI12 TO12 ch12 TI13 TO13 ch13 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 P10 to P17 PORT3 3 P30, P33, P34 PORT4 2 P40, P41 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 3 P90 to P92 2 P120, P125 2 P121, P122 BCD RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) ch0 8 OCD INT TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 PORT1 ELC Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ PORT13 P137 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 IIC01 RESET Low-speed OCO (for WDT) Clock Generator + Reset Generator X1 KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (6ch) 6 INTP0 to INTP5 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 CSI10 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 CLM PLL POR/ LVD CRXD0 CTXD0 CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) RTC1HZ Main OSC Low-speed OCO 10-bit ADC (12ch) 12 8-bit DAC (1ch) ANO0 VCOUT0 IVCMP00 IVCMP01 IVCMP02 IVCMP03 IVREF0 Comparator 0 (1ch) High-speed OCO ANI0 to ANI9, ANI24, ANI25 AVREFP AVREFM Voltage REGULATOR REGC STANDBY 4 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT3 CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 18 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.10 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10BMn (n = E, F, G) (CAN and LIN incorporated) 80-pin Products <R> Figure 1-10. Block Diagram TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 ch00 TI01 TO01 ch01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 ch02 PORT0 3 P00 to P02 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 8 P40 to P47 PORT5 8 P50 to P57 PORT6 8 P60 to P67 PORT7 8 P70 to P77 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 8 P90 to P97 ch03 TI04 TO04 ch04 TI05 TO05 ch05 TI06 TO06 ch06 TI07 TO07 ch07 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD CODE FLASH DATA FLASH TAU1 (8ch) TI10 TO10 ch10 TI11 TO11 ch11 TI12 TO12 ch12 TI13 TO13 ch13 OCD BCD INT RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM 3 P120, P125 to P126 4 P121 to P124 PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 RESET RESOUT Low-speed OCO (for WDT) KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (12ch) 12 INTP0 to INTP11 Sub OSC Clock Generator + Reset Generator IIC01 XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 SSI10 CSI10 SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 CRXD0 CTXD0 CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) RTC1HZ Main OSC CLM 10-bit ADC (20ch) 20 ANI0 to ANI15, ANI24 to ANI27 AVREFP AVREFM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR IICA0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STOPST CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 19 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.11 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10BLn (n = C, D, E, F, G) (CAN and LIN incorporated) 64-pin Products Figure 1-11. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 TI01 TO01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 TI04 TO04 TI05 TO05 TI06 TO06 TI07 TO07 PORT0 ch01 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 4 P40 to P43 PORT5 4 P50 to P53 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT7 8 P70 to P77 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 7 P90 to P96 ch02 ch03 ch04 ch05 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD ch06 ch07 CODE FLASH DATA FLASH TAU1 (4ch) TI10 TO10 TI11 TO11 TI12 TO12 TI13 TO13 P00 ch00 OCD ch10 ch11 BCD ch12 ch13 INT RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM 2 P120, P125 4 P121 to P124 PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 IIC01 RESET RESOUT Low-speed OCO (for WDT) KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (12ch) 12 INTP0 to INTP11 Sub OSC Clock Generator + Reset Generator XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 10-bit ADC (19ch) SCK10 SI10 SO10 SSI10 CSI10 SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 CRXD0 CTXD0 CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LIN0 (1ch) LTXD0 RTC1HZ Main OSC 19 ANI0 to ANI15, ANI24 to ANI26 AVREFP AVREFM CLM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR REGC IICA0 (1ch) STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STOPST CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 20 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.12 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10BGn (n = C, D, E, F, G) (CAN and LIN incorporated) 48-pin Products Figure 1-12. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 TI01 TO01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 TI04 TO04 TI05 TO05 TI06 TO06 TI07 TO07 PORT0 ch01 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 2 P40, P41 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT7 4 P70 to P73 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 3 P90 to P92 ch02 ch03 ch04 ch05 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD ch06 ch07 CODE FLASH DATA FLASH TAU1 (4ch) TI10 TO10 TI11 TO11 TI12 TO12 TI13 TO13 P00 ch00 OCD ch10 ch11 BCD ch12 ch13 INT RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM 2 P120, P125 4 P121 to P124 PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 RESET RESOUT Low-speed OCO (for WDT) KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (10ch) 10 INTP0 to INTP9 Sub OSC Clock Generator + Reset Generator IIC01 XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 CSI10 10-bit ADC (15ch) 15 CLM SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 CRXD0 CTXD0 CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LIN0 (1ch) LTXD0 RTC1HZ Main OSC ANI0 to ANI12, ANI24, ANI25 AVREFP AVREFM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR IICA0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STOPST CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 21 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.13 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10BBn (n = C, D, E, F, G) (CAN and LIN incorporated) 32-pin Products Figure 1-13. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 ch00 TI01 TO01 ch01 TI02 TO02 ch02 TI03 TO03 ch03 TI04 TO04 ch04 TI05 TO05 ch05 TI06 TO06 ch06 TI07 TO07 ch07 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD CODE FLASH DATA FLASH TAU1 (8ch) TI10 TO10 ch10 TI11 TO11 ch11 TI12 TO12 ch12 TI13 TO13 ch13 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 3 P30, P33, P34 PORT4 8 P40, P41 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT8 6 P80 to P85 4 P120, P125 2 P121, P122 OCD BCD INT RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ PORT13 P137 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 IIC01 RESET Low-speed OCO (for WDT) Clock Generator + Reset Generator X1 KEY RETURN (6ch) 6 KR0 to KR5 External INT (6ch) 6 INTP0 to INTP5 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 CSI10 SCL10 SDA10 CLM POR/ LVD CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) 10-bit ADC (10ch) 10 ANI0 to ANI07, ANI24, ANI25 AV AV REFP REFM PLL IIC10 CRXD0 CTXD0 RTC1HZ Main OSC Low-speed OCO High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR IICA0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 4 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT3 CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 22 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.14 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10BAn (n = C, D, E, F, G) (CAN and LIN incorporated) 30-pin Products <R> Figure 1-14. Block Diagram TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 TI01 TO01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 TI04 TO04 TI05 TO05 TI06 TO06 TI07 TO07 ch00 ch01 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 3 P30, P33, P34 PORT4 2 P40, P41 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 ch03 ch04 ch05 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD ch06 ch07 CODE FLASH DATA FLASH TAU1 (4ch) TI10 TO10 TI11 TO11 TI12 TO12 TI13 TO13 PORT1 ch02 OCD ch10 ch11 BCD ch12 ch13 INT RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM 2 P120, P125 2 P121, P122 PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ PORT13 P137 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 IIC01 RESET Low-speed OCO (for WDT) Clock Generator + Reset Generator X1 KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (6ch) 6 INTP0 to INTP5 X2/EXCLK RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 CSI10 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 RTC1HZ Main OSC 10-bit ADC (12ch) 12 CLM PLL POR/ LVD CRXD0 CTXD0 CAN (1ch) LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) ANI0 to ANI9, ANI24, ANI25 AVREFP AVREFM Low-speed OCO High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR REGC STANDBY 4 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT3 CRC R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 23 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.15 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10AMn (n = E, F, G) (LIN incorporated) 80-pin Products Figure 1-15. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 ch00 TI01 TO01 ch01 TI02 TO02 ch02 TI03 TO03 ch03 TI04 TO04 ch04 TI05 TO05 ch05 TI06 TO06 ch06 TI07 TO07 ch07 TOOL TOOL TOOL0 TXD RXD CODE FLASH DATA FLASH TAU1 (8ch) TI10 TO10 ch10 TI11 TO11 ch11 TI12 TO12 ch12 TI13 TO13 ch13 BCD TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 ch1 P00 to P02 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 8 P40 to P47 PORT5 8 P50 to P57 PORT6 8 P60 to P67 PORT7 8 P70 to P77 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 8 P90 to P97 RL78 CPU CORE TRD (2ch) ch0 3 OCD INT TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 PORT0 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator DTC RAM 3 P120, P125 to P126 4 P121 to P124 PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 WWDT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 RESET RESOUT Low-speed OCO (for WDT) KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (12ch) 12 INTP0 to INTP12 Sub OSC Clock Generator + Reset Generator IIC01 XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC1HZ RTC SAU1 (2ch) RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 SSI10 CSI10 SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) Main OSC CLM 10-bit ADC (20ch) 20 ANI0 to ANI15, ANI24 to ANI27 AVREFP AVREFM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR IICA0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STOPST CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 24 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.16 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10ALn (n = F, G) (LIN incorporated) 64-pin Products Figure 1-16. Block Diagram <R> PORT0 TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 TI01 TO01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 TI04 TO04 TI05 TO05 TI06 TO06 TI07 TO07 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 4 P40 to P43 PORT5 4 P50 to P53 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT7 8 P70 to P77 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 7 P90 to P96 2 P120, P125 4 P121 to P124 ch00 ch01 ch02 TOOL0 ch03 TOOL TOOL TXD RXD ch04 ch05 CODE FLASH DATA FLASH ch06 OCD ch07 BCD TAU1 (4ch) TI10 TO10 TI11 TO11 TI12 TO12 TI13 TO13 P00 ch10 ch11 ch12 ch13 INT TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 RL78 CPU CORE ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator ch1 DTC RAM PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 WWDT RESET RESOUT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 Low-speed OCO (for WDT) KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (12ch) 12 INTP0 to INTP11 Sub OSC SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 IIC01 Clock Generator + Reset Generator XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC RTC1HZ Main OSC 10-bit ADC (19ch) SAU1 (2ch) CLM RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 SSI10 CSI10 SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 Voltage REGULATOR LIN0 (1ch) REGC LRXD0 LTXD0 19 ANI0 to ANI15, ANI24 to ANI26 AVREFP AVREFM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO IICA0 (1ch) High-speed OCO STANDBY SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 RTC1HZ CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 25 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.17 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10AGn (n = F, G) (LIN incorporated) 48-pin Products Figure 1-17. Block Diagram <R> PORT0 TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 TI01 TO01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 TI04 TO04 TI05 TO05 TI06 TO06 TI07 TO07 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 2 P40, P41 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT7 4 P70 to P73 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 3 P90 to P92 2 P120, P125 4 P121 to P124 ch00 ch01 ch02 ch03 TOOL0 TOOL TOOL TXD RXD ch04 ch05 CODE FLASH DATA FLASH ch06 OCD ch07 TAU1 (4ch) TI10 TO10 TI11 TO11 TI12 TO12 TI13 TO13 P00 BCD ch10 ch11 ch12 ch13 INT TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 RL78 CPU CORE ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator ch1 DTC RAM PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 WWDT RESET RESOUT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 UART0 Low-speed OCO (for WDT) CSI00 KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (10ch) 10 INTP0 to INTP9 Sub OSC CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 IIC01 Clock Generator + Reset Generator XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC RTC1HZ Main OSC 10-bit ADC (15ch) SAU1 (2ch) CLM RXD1 TXD1 UART1 SCK10 SI10 SO10 CSI10 SCK11 SI11 SO11 SSI11 CSI11 SCL10 SDA10 IIC10 SCL11 SDA11 IIC11 Voltage REGULATOR LIN0 (1ch) REGC LRXD0 LTXD0 15 ANI0 to ANI12, ANI24, ANI25 AVREFP AVREFM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO IICA0 (1ch) High-speed OCO SCLA0 SDAA0 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STANDBY STOPST CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 26 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.18 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10ALn (n = C, D, E) (LIN incorporated) 64-pin Products Figure 1-18. Block Diagram <R> PORT0 TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 TI01 TO01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 TI04 TO04 TI05 TO05 TI06 TO06 TI07 TO07 P00 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 4 P40 to P43 PORT5 4 P50 to P53 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT7 8 P70 to P77 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 7 P90 to P96 2 P120, P125 4 P121 to P124 ch00 ch01 ch02 TOOL0 ch03 TOOL TOOL TXD RXD ch04 ch05 CODE FLASH DATA FLASH ch06 OCD ch07 BCD INT TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 RL78 CPU CORE ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator ch1 DTC RAM PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 WWDT RESET RESOUT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 Low-speed OCO (for WDT) KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (8ch) 8 INTP0 to INTP7 Sub OSC SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 IIC01 Clock Generator + Reset Generator XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC RTC1HZ Main OSC 10-bit ADC (12ch) 12 ANI0 to ANI11 AVREFP AVREFM CLM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY 8 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 RTC1HZ CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 27 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.19 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10AGn (n = A, C, D, E) (LIN incorporated) 48-pin Products Figure 1-19. Block Diagram <R> PORT0 TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 TI01 TO01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 TI04 TO04 TI05 TO05 TI06 TO06 TI07 TO07 P00 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 5 P30 to P34 PORT4 2 P40, P41 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT7 4 P70 to P73 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 PORT9 3 P90 to P92 2 P120, P125 4 P121 to P124 ch00 ch01 ch02 ch03 TOOL0 TOOL TOOL TXD RXD ch04 ch05 CODE FLASH DATA FLASH ch06 OCD ch07 BCD INT TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 RL78 CPU CORE ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator ch1 DTC RAM PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ P130 PORT13 P137 PORT14 P140 PCL/BUZ PCLBUZ0 WWDT RESET RESOUT SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 UART0 Low-speed OCO (for WDT) CSI00 KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (8ch) 8 INTP0 to INTP7 Sub OSC CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 IIC01 Clock Generator + Reset Generator XT1 XT2/EXCLKS X1 X2/EXCLK RTC RTC1HZ Main OSC 10-bit ADC (12ch) 12 ANI0 to ANI11 AVREFP AVREFM CLM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR LRXD0 LTXD0 8 LIN0 (1ch) REGC SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT7 STANDBY STOPST CRC Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 28 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.20 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10ABn (n = A, C, D, E) (LIN incorporated) 32-pin Products Figure 1-20. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 TI01 TO01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 TI04 TO04 TI05 TO05 TI06 TO06 TI07 TO07 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 3 P30, P33, P34 PORT4 2 P40, P41 PORT6 4 P60 to P63 PORT8 6 P80 to P85 2 P120, P125 2 P121, P122 ch00 ch01 ch02 TOOL0 ch03 TOOL TOOL TXD RXD ch04 ch05 CODE FLASH DATA FLASH ch06 OCD ch07 BCD INT TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 RL78 CPU CORE ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator ch1 DTC RAM PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ PORT13 P137 WWDT RESET SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 IIC01 Low-speed OCO (for WDT) Clock Generator + Reset Generator X1 KEY RETURN (6ch) 6 KR0 to KR5 External INT (6ch) 6 INTP0 to INTP5 X2/EXCLK RTC RTC1HZ Main OSC CLM 10-bit ADC (8ch) 8 ANI0 to ANI7 AV AV REFP REFM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR 4 SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT3 STANDBY LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) REGC STOPST CRC R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 29 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.21 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10AAn (n = A, C, D, E) (LIN incorporated) 30-pin Products Figure 1-21. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 TI01 TO01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 TI04 TO04 TI05 TO05 TI06 TO06 TI07 TO07 PORT1 8 P10 to P17 PORT3 3 P30, P33, P34 PORT4 2 P40, P41 PORT8 8 P80 to P87 2 P120, P125 2 P121, P122 ch00 ch01 ch02 TOOL0 ch03 TOOL TOOL TXD RXD ch04 ch05 CODE FLASH DATA FLASH ch06 OCD ch07 BCD INT TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 RL78 CPU CORE ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator ch1 DTC RAM PORT12 TRJO0 TRJIO0 TRJ PORT13 P137 WWDT RESET SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 IIC01 Low-speed OCO (for WDT) Clock Generator + Reset Generator X1 KEY RETURN (8ch) 8 KR0 to KR7 External INT (6ch) 6 INTP0 to INTP5 X2/EXCLK RTC RTC1HZ Main OSC CLM 10-bit ADC (10ch) 10 ANI0 to ANI9 AVREFP AVREFM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR LRXD0 LTXD0 4 LIN0 (1ch) REGC SNZOUT0 to SNZOUT3 STANDBY STOPST CRC R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 30 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.4.22 RL78/F13: Block Diagram of R5F10A6n (n = A, C, D, E) (LIN incorporated) 20-pin Products Figure 1-22. Block Diagram <R> TAU0 (8ch) TI00 TO00 TI01 TO01 TI02 TO02 TI03 TO03 TI04 TO04 TI05 TO05 TI06 TO06 TI07 TO07 PORT1 5 P13 to P17 PORT3 3 P30, P33, P34 ch00 ch01 ch02 TOOL0 ch03 TOOL TOOL TXD RXD ch04 PORT4 ch05 CODE FLASH DATA FLASH ch06 P40 OCD ch07 BCD PORT8 2 P80, P81 2 P120, P125 2 P121, P122 INT TRD (2ch) TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDIOB0 TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 RL78 CPU CORE ch0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOD1 Multiplier, Divider and MultiplyAccumulator ch1 DTC RAM PORT12 PORT13 P137 WWDT RESET SAU0 (2ch) RXD0 TXD0 UART0 SCK00 SI00 SO00 SSI00 CSI00 SCK01 SI01 SO01 SSI01 CSI01 SCL00 SDA00 IIC00 SCL01 SDA01 IIC01 Low-speed OCO (for WDT) Clock Generator + Reset Generator X1 KEY RETURN (2ch) 2 KR0 to KR1 External INT (5ch) 5 INTP0 to INTP4 X2/EXCLK RTC RTC1HZ Main OSC CLM 10-bit ADC (4ch) 4 ANI0 to ANI3 AV AV REFP REFM PLL POR/ LVD Low-speed OCO High-speed OCO Voltage REGULATOR LRXD0 LTXD0 LIN0 (1ch) REGC STANDBY 2 SNZOUT0, SNZOUT1 CRC R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 31 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.5 Pin Configurations 1.5.1 RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 100-pin Products RL78/F14: 100-pin Plastic QFP (Fine Pitch) (14 x 14) P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/INTP3 P80/ANI2/ANO0 P34/AVREFM/ANI1 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 P104/ANI22 P105/ANI23 P106/(LTXD1) P107/(LRXD1) P57/(TI17)/(TO17)/(SNZOUT0) P56/(TI15)/(TO15)/(SNZOUT1) P55/(TI13)/(TO13) P54/(TI11)/(TO11)/SSI10 P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/LTXD1/CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/RXD1/LRXD1/CRXD0 P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/LRXD0 P53/(SI01)/INTP10 P52/(SCK01)/(STOPST) P51/(SO01)/INTP11 P50/SSI01/(INTP3) P31/TI14/TO14/STOPST/(INTP2) P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ EVDD1 Figure 1-23. RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 100-pin Products 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/SNZOUT0 P32/TI16/TO16/INTP7 P03/(RTC1HZ) P70/ANI26/KR0/TI15/TO15/INTP8/SI11/SDA11/SNZOUT4 P71/ANI27/KR1/TI17/TO17/INTP6/SCK11/SCL11/SNZOUT5 P72/ANI28/KR2/(CTXD0)/SO11/SNZOUT6 P73/ANI29/KR3/(CRXD0)/SSI11/SNZOUT7 EVSS1 P74/ANI30/KR4/(SO10)/(TXD1) P75/KR5/(SI10)/(RXD1) P76/KR6/(SCK10) P77/KR7/(SSI10)/INTP12 P130/RESOUT P140/PCLBUZ0 P157/(SNZOUT4) P156/(SNZOUT5) P00/(TI05)/(TO05)/INTP9 P155/(SNZOUT6) P154/(SNZOUT7) P67/(TI02)/(TO02) P66/(TI00)/(TO00) P65/(TI16)/(TO16)/(SNZOUT2) P64/(TI14)/(TO14)/(SNZOUT3) P63/(SSI00)/SDAA0 P62/(SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 P153/(SCK11) P152/(SI11) P151/(SO11) P150/(SSI11) P47/INTP13 P46/(TI12)/(TO12) P45/(TI10)/(TO10) P44/(TI07)/(TO07) P43/(LRXD0) P42/(LTXD0) P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/VCOUT0/SNZOUT2 P40/TOOL0 RESET P124/XT2/EXCLKS P123/XT1 P137/INTP0 P122/X2/EXCLK P121/X1 REGC VSS EVSS0 VDD EVDD0 P60/(SCK00)/(SCL00) P61/(SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) P81/ANI3/IVCMP00 P82/ANI4/IVCMP01 P83/ANI5/IVCMP02 P84/ANI6/IVCMP03 P85/ANI7/IVREF0 P86/ANI8 P87/ANI9 P90/ANI10 P91/ANI11 P92/ANI12 P93/ANI13 P94/ANI14 P95/ANI15 P96/ANI16 P97/ANI17 P100/ANI18 P101/ANI19 P102/ANI20 P103/ANI21 P02/(TI06)/(TO06) P127/(TI03)/(TO03) P126/(TI01)/(TO01) P01/(TI04)/(TO04) P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 32 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.5.2 RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 80-pin Products RL78/F14: 80-pin Plastic QFP (Fine Pitch) (12 x 12) P34/AVREFM/ANI1 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 P57/(TI17)/(TO17)/(SNZOUT0) P56/(TI15)/(TO15)/(SNZOUT1) P55/(TI13)/(TO13) P54/(TI11)/(TO11)/SSI10 P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/LTXD1/CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/RXD1/LRXD1/CRXD0 P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/LRXD0 P53/(SI01)/INTP10 P52/(SCK01)/(STOPST) P51/(SO01)/INTP11 P50/(SSI01)/(INTP3) P31/TI14/TO14/STOPST/(INTP2) P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/SNZOUT0 Figure 1-24. RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 80-pin Products 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 P80/ANI2/ANO0 P81/ANI3/IVCMP00 P82/ANI4/IVCMP01 P83/ANI5/IVCMP02 P84/ANI6/IVCMP03 P85/ANI7/IVREF0 P86/ANI8 P87/ANI9 P90/ANI10 P91/ANI11 P92/ANI12 P93/ANI13 P94/ANI14 P95/ANI15 P96/ANI16 P97/ANI17 P02/(TI06)/(TO06) P126/(TI01)/(TO01) P01/(TI04)/(TO04) P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 P32/TI16/TO16/INTP7 P70/ANI26/KR0/TI15/TO15/INTP8/SI11/SDA11/SNZOUT4 P71/ANI27/KR1/TI17/TO17/INTP6/SCK11/SCL11/SNZOUT5 P72/ANI28/KR2/(CTXD0)/SO11/SNZOUT6 P73/ANI29/KR3/(CRXD0)/SSI11/SNZOUT7 P74/ANI30/KR4/(SO10)/(TXD1) P75/KR5/(SI10)/(RXD1) P76/KR6/(SCK10) P77/KR7/(SSI10)/INTP12 P130/RESOUT P140/PCLBUZ0 P00/(TI05)/(TO05)/INTP9 P67/(TI02)/(TO02) P66/(TI00)/(TO00) P65/(TI16)/(TO16)/(SNZOUT2) P64/(TI14)/(TO14)/(SNZOUT3) P63/(SSI00)/SDAA0 P62/(SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 P61/(SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) P60/(SCK00)/(SCL00) P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 P47/INTP13 P46/(TI12)/(TO12) P45/(TI10)/(TO10) P44/(TI07)/(TO07) P43/(LRXD0) P42/(LTXD0) P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/VCOUT0/SNZOUT2 P40/TOOL0 RESET P124/XT2/EXCLKS P123/XT1 P137/INTP0 P122/X2/EXCLK P121/X1 REGC VSS EVSS0 VDD EVDD0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Cautions 1. : Shaded pins are not available in the R5F10PME or R5F10PMF. Note, however, that the functions of pins 75 and 76, to which ANI16 and ANI17 are assigned, differ depending on the product, as follows: * R5F10PMG, R5F10PMH, R5F10PMJ: P96/ANI16 (pin 75) P97/ANI17 (pin 76) * R5F10PME, R5F10PMF: P96/ANI26 (pin 75) P97/ANI27 (pin 76) 2. The available pins and functions differ depending on the product. Refer to CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS for details. 3. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 33 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.5.3 RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 80-pin Products RL78/F13: 80-pin Plastic QFP (Fine Pitch) (12 x 12) P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/SNZOUT0 P34/AVREFM/ANI1 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 P57/(SNZOUT0) P56/(SNZOUT1) P55/(TI13)/(TO13) P54/(TI11)/(TO11)/SSI10 P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/RXD1/CRXD0 P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/LRXD0 P53/(SI01)/INTP10 P52/(SCK01)/(STOPST) P51/(SO01)/INTP11 P50/(SSI01)/(INTP3) P31/STOPST/(INTP2) Figure 1-25. RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 80-pin Products 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 P80/ANI2 P81/ANI3 P82/ANI4 P83/ANI5 P84/ANI6 P85/ANI7 P86/ANI8 P87/ANI9 P90/ANI10 P91/ANI11 P92/ANI12 P93/ANI13 P94/ANI14 P95/ANI15 P96/ANI26 P97/ANI27 P02/(TI06)/(TO06) P126/(TI01)/(TO01) P01/(TI04)/(TO04) P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 P32/INTP7 P70/KR0/INTP8/SI11/SDA11/SNZOUT4 P71/KR1/INTP6/SCK11/SCL11/SNZOUT5 P72/KR2/(CTXD0)/SO11/SNZOUT6 P73/KR3/(CRXD0)/SSI11/SNZOUT7 P74/KR4/(SO10)/(TXD1) P75/KR5/(SI10)/(RXD1) P76/KR6/(SCK10) P77/KR7/(SSI10) P130/RESOUT P140/PCLBUZ0 P00/(TI05)/(TO05)/INTP9 P67/(TI02)/(TO02) P66/(TI00)/(TO00) P65/(SNZOUT2) P64/(SNZOUT3) P63/(SSI00)/SDAA0 P62/(SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 P61/(SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) P60/(SCK00)/(SCL00) P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 P47 P46/(TI12)/(TO12) P45/(TI10)/(TO10) P44/(TI07)/(TO07) P43/(LRXD0) P42/(LTXD0) P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/SNZOUT2 P40/TOOL0 RESET P124/XT2/EXCLKS P123/XT1 P137/INTP0 P122/X2/EXCLK P121/X1 REGC VSS EVSS0 VDD EVDD0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Cautions 1. : Shaded pins are not available in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products (R5F10AME, R5F10AMF, R5F10AMG). 2. The available pins and functions differ depending on the product. Refer to CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS for details. 3. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 34 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.5.4 RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 64-pin Products RL78/F14: 64-pin Plastic QFP (Fine Pitch) (10 x 10) P34/AVREFM/ANI1 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/LTXD1/CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/RXD1/LRXD1/CRXD0 P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/LRXD0 P53/(SI01)/INTP10 P52/(SCK01)/(STOPST) P51/(SO01)/INTP11 P50/(SSI01)/(INTP3) P31/TI14/TO14/STOPST/(INTP2) P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/SNZOUT0 Figure 1-26. RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 64-pin Products 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 49 32 50 31 51 30 52 29 53 28 54 27 55 26 56 25 57 24 58 23 59 60 61 62 63 64 22 21 20 19 18 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 P32/TI16/TO16/INTP7 P70/ANI26/KR0/TI15/TO15/INTP8/SI11/SDA11/SNZOUT4 P71/KR1/TI17/TO17/INTP6/SCK11/SCL11/SNZOUT5 P72/KR2/(CTXD0)/SO11/SNZOUT6 P73/KR3/(CRXD0)/SSI11/SNZOUT7 P74/KR4/(SO10)/(TXD1) P75/KR5/(SI10)/(RXD1) P76/KR6/(SCK10) P77/KR7/(SSI10)/INTP12 P130/RESOUT P140/PCLBUZ0 P00/(TI05)/(TO05)/INTP9 P63/(SSI00)/SDAA0 P62/(SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 P61/(SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) P60/(SCK00)/(SCL00) P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 P43/(LRXD0) P42/(LTXD0) P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/VCOUT0/SNZOUT2 P40/TOOL0 RESET P124/XT2/EXCLKS P123/XT1 P137/INTP0 P122/X2/EXCLK P121/X1 REGC VSS EVSS0 VDD EVDD0 P80/ANI2/ANO0 P81/ANI3/IVCMP00 P82/ANI4/IVCMP01 P83/ANI5/IVCMP02 P84/ANI6/IVCMP03 P85/ANI7/IVREF0 P86/ANI8 P87/ANI9/(KR0) P90/ANI10/(KR1) P91/ANI11/(KR2) P92/ANI12/(KR3) P93/ANI13/(KR4) P94/ANI14/(KR5) P95/ANI15/(KR6) P96/ANI16/(KR7) P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 Cautions 1. : Shaded pins are not available in the R5F10PLE or R5F10PLF. Note, however, that the functions of pin 63 to which ANI16 is assigned, differ depending on the product, as follows: * R5F10PLG, R5F10PLH, R5F10PLJ: P96/ANI16/(KR7) * R5F10PLE, R5F10PLF: P96/ANI26/(KR7) 2. The available pins and functions differ depending on the product. Refer to CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS for details. 3. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 35 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.5.5 RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 64-pin Product RL78/F13: 64-pin Plastic QFP (Fine Pitch) (10 x 10) P34/AVREFM/ANI1 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/RXD1/CRXD0 P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/LRXD0 P53/(SI01)/INTP10 P52/(SCK01)/(STOPST) P51/(SO01)/INTP11 P50/(SSI01)/(INTP3) P31/STOPST/(INTP2) P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/SNZOUT0 Figure 1-27. RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 64-pin Products 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 49 32 50 31 51 30 52 29 53 28 54 27 55 26 56 25 57 24 58 23 59 60 61 62 63 64 22 21 20 19 18 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 P32/INTP7 P70/KR0/INTP8/SI11/SDA11/SNZOUT4 P71/KR1/INTP6/SCK11/SCL11/SNZOUT5 P72/KR2/(CTXD0)/SO11/SNZOUT6 P73/KR3/(CRXD0)/SSI11/SNZOUT7 P74/KR4/(SO10)/(TXD1) P75/KR5/(SI10)/(RXD1) P76/KR6/(SCK10) P77/KR7/(SSI10) P130/RESOUT P140/PCLBUZ0 P00/(TI05)/(TO05)/INTP9 P63/(SSI00)/SDAA0 P62/(SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 P61/(SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) P60/(SCK00)/(SCL00) P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 P43/(LRXD0) P42/(LTXD0) P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/SNZOUT2 P40/TOOL0 RESET P124/XT2/EXCLKS P123/XT1 P137/INTP0 P122/X2/EXCLK P121/X1 REGC VSS EVSS0 VDD EVDD0 P80/ANI2 P81/ANI3 P82/ANI4 P83/ANI5 P84/ANI6 P85/ANI7 P86/ANI8 P87/ANI9/(KR0) P90/ANI10/(KR1) P91/ANI11/(KR2) P92/ANI12/(KR3) P93/ANI13/(KR4) P94/ANI14/(KR5) P95/ANI15/(KR6) P96/ANI26/(KR7) P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 Cautions 1. : Shaded pins are not available in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products (R5F10ALC, R5F10ALD, R5F10ALE). CTXD0, CRXD0, (CTXD0), and (CRXD0) pins are not available in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products (R5F10ALF, R5F10ALG). 2. The available pins and functions differ depending on the product. Refer to CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS for details. 3. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 36 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.5.6 RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 48-pin Products RL78/F14: 48-pin Plastic QFP and QFN P90/ANI10/(KR5) P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 P91/ANI11/(KR6) P92/ANI12/(KR7) P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/LRXD0 P31/TI14/TO14/STOPST/(INTP2) P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/SNZOUT0 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 37 23 38 22 39 21 40 20 41 19 42 18 43 17 44 16 45 15 46 14 47 13 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 P32/TI16/TO16/INTP7 P70/ANI26/KR0/TI15/TO15/INTP8/SI11/SDA11/SNZOUT4 P71/ANI27/KR1/TI17/TO17/INTP6/SCK11/SCL11/SNZOUT5 P72/ANI28/KR2/(CTXD0)/SO11/SNZOUT6 P73/KR3/(CRXD0)/SSI11/SNZOUT7 P130/RESOUT P140/PCLBUZ0 P00/(TI05)/(TO05)/INTP9 P63/(SSI00)/SDAA0 P62/(SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 P61/(SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) P60/(SCK00)/(SCL00) P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/VCOUT0/SNZOUT2 P40/TOOL0 RESET P124/XT2/EXCLKS P123/XT1 P137/INTP0 P122/X2/EXCLK P121/X1 REGC VSS VDD P80/ANI2/ANO0 P81/ANI3/IVCMP00 P82/ANI4/IVCMP01 P83/ANI5/(KR0)/IVCMP02 P84/ANI6/(KR1)/IVCMP03 P85/ANI7/(KR2)/IVREF0 P86/ANI8/(KR3) P87/ANI9/(KR4) P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 P34/AVREFM/ANI1 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/LTXD1/CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/RXD1/LRXD1/CRXD0 Figure 1-28. RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 48-pin Products Cautions 1. : Shaded pins are not available in the R5F10PGD, R5F10PGE, or R5F10PGF. 2. The available pins and functions differ depending on the product. Refer to CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS for details. 3. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 37 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.5.7 RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 48-pin Products RL78/F13: 48-pin Plastic QFP and QFN P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 P91/ANI11/(KR6) P92/ANI12/(KR7) P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/LRXD0 P31/STOPST/(INTP2) P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/SNZOUT0 P32/INTP7 P70/KR0/INTP8/SI11/SDA11/SNZOUT4 P71/KR1/INTP6/SCK11/SCL11/SNZOUT5 P72/KR2/(CTXD0)/SO11/SNZOUT6 P73/KR3/(CRXD0)/SSI11/SNZOUT7 P130/RESOUT P140/PCLBUZ0 P00/(TI05)/(TO05)/INTP9 P63/(SSI00)/SDAA0 P62/(SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 P61/(SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) P60/(SCK00)/(SCL00) RESET P124/XT2/EXCLKS P123/XT1 P137/INTP0 P122/X2/EXCLK P121/X1 REGC VSS VDD P90/ANI10/(KR5) 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 37 23 38 22 39 21 40 20 41 19 42 18 43 17 44 16 45 15 46 14 47 13 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/SNZOUT2 P40/TOOL0 P80/ANI2 P81/ANI3 P82/ANI4 P83/ANI5/(KR0) P84/ANI6/(KR1) P85/ANI7/(KR2) P86/ANI8/(KR3) P87/ANI9/(KR4) P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 P34/AVREFM/ANI1 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/RXD1/CRXD0 Figure 1-29. RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 48-pin Products Cautions 1. : Shaded pins are not available in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products (R5F10AGA, R5F10AGC, R5F10AGD, R5F10AGE). CTXD0, CRXD0, (CTXD0), and (CRXD0) pins are not available in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products (R5F10AGF, R5F10AGG). 2. The available pins and functions differ depending on the product. Refer to CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS for details. 3. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 38 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.5.8 RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 32-pin Products RL78/F14: 32-pin Plastic QFN P33/AVREFP/ANI0 P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/RXD1/CRXD0 P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/LRXD0 P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD Figure 1-30. RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 32-pin Product 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/SNZOUT0 P63/(SSI00)/SDAA0 P62/(SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 P61/(SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) P60/(SCK00)/(SCL00) VDD VSS P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/VCOUT0/SNZOUT2 P40/TOOL0 RESET P137/INTP0 P122/X2/EXCLK P121/X1 REGC P34/AVREFM/ANI1 P80/ANI2/(KR0)/ANO0 P81/ANI3/(KR1)/IVCMP00 P82/ANI4/(KR2)/IVCMP01 P83/ANI5/(KR3)/IVCMP02 P84/ANI6/(KR4)/IVCMP03 P85/ANI7/(KR5)/IVREF0 P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 39 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.5.9 RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 32-pin Products RL78/F13: 32-pin Plastic QFN P33/AVREFP/ANI0 P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/RXD1/CRXD0 P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/LRXD0 P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD Figure 1-31. RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 32-pin Products 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/SNZOUT0 P63/(SSI00)/SDAA0 P62/(SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 P61/(SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) P60/(SCK00)/(SCL00) VDD VSS P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/SNZOUT2 P40/TOOL0 RESET P137/INTP0 P122/X2/EXCLK P121/X1 REGC P34/AVREFM/ANI1 P80/ANI2/(KR0) P81/ANI3/(KR1) P82/ANI4/(KR2) P83/ANI5/(KR3) P84/ANI6/(KR4) P85/ANI7/(KR5) P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 Cautions 1. : Shaded pins are not available in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products (R5F10ABA, R5F10ABC, R5F10ABD, R5F10ABE). 2. The available pins and functions differ depending on the product. Refer to CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS for details. 3. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 40 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.5.10 RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 30-pin Products RL78/F14: 30-pin Plastic SSOP Figure 1-32. RL78/F14 Pin Configuration for 30-pin Products P84/ANI6/(KR4)/IVCMP03 P85/ANI7/(KR5)/IVREF0 P86/ANI8/(KR6) P87/ANI9/(KR7) P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/VCOUT0/SNZOUT2 P40/TOOL0 RESET P137/INTP0 P122/X2/EXCLK P121/X1 REGC VSS VDD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 P83/ANI5/(KR3)/IVCMP02 P82/ANI4/(KR2)/IVCMP01 P81/ANI3/(KR1)/IVCMP00 P80/ANI2/(KR0)/ANO0 P34/AVREFM/ANI1 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/RXD1/CRXD0 P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/LRXD0 P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/SNZOUT0 Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 41 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.5.11 RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 30-pin Products RL78/F13: 30-pin Plastic SSOP Figure 1-33. RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 30-pin Products P84/ANI6/(KR4) P85/ANI7/(KR5) P86/ANI8/(KR6) P87/ANI9/(KR7) P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/SNZOUT2 P40/TOOL0 RESET P137/INTP0 P122/X2/EXCLK P121/X1 REGC VSS VDD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 P83/ANI5/(KR3) P82/ANI4/(KR2) P81/ANI3/(KR1) P80/ANI2/(KR0) P34/AVREFM/ANI1 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/RXD1/CRXD0 P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/LRXD0 P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/SNZOUT0 Cautions 1. : Shaded pins are not available in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products (R5F10AAA, R5F10AAC, R5F10AAD, R5F10AAE). 2. The available pins and functions differ depending on the product. Refer to CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS for details. 3. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 42 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.5.12 RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 20-pin Products RL78/F13: 20-pin Plastic SSOP Figure 1-34. RL78/F13 Pin Configuration for 20-pin Products P125/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 P120/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 P40/TOOL0 RESET P137/INTP0 P122/X2/EXCLK P121/X1 REGC VSS VDD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 P81/ANI3/(KR1) P80/ANI2/(KR0) P34/AVREFM/ANI1 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/LRXD0 P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/SNZOUT0 Caution Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 43 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1.6 Order Information Tables 1-7 to 1-9 show the order information for RL78/F14, RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated), and RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated). Table 1-7. Order Information for RL78/F14 Package 30-pin plastic SSOP 32-pin plastic VQFN 48-pin plastic LQFP Device Order Name Grade L R5F10PADLSP, R5F10PAELSP Grade K R5F10PADKSP, R5F10PAEKSP Grade Y R5F10PADYSP, R5F10PAEYSP Grade L R5F10PBDLNA, R5F10PBELNA Grade K R5F10PBDKNA, R5F10PBEKNA Grade Y R5F10PBDYNA, R5F10PBEYNA Grade L R5F10PGDLFB, R5F10PGELFB, R5F10PGFLFB, R5F10PGGLFB, R5F10PGHLFB, R5F10PGJLFB Grade K R5F10PGDKFB, R5F10PGEKFB, R5F10PGFKFB, R5F10PGGKFB, R5F10PGHKFB, R5F10PGJKFB Grade Y R5F10PGDYFB, R5F10PGEYFB, R5F10PGFYFB, R5F10PGGYFB, R5F10PGHYFB, R5F10PGJYFB 48-pin plastic VQFN Grade L R5F10PGDLNA, R5F10PGELNA, R5F10PGFLNA, R5F10PGGLNA, R5F10PGHLNA, R5F10PGJLNA Grade K R5F10PGDKNA, R5F10PGEKNA, R5F10PGFKNA, R5F10PGGKNA, R5F10PGHKNA, R5F10PGJKNA Grade Y R5F10PGDYNA, R5F10PGEYNA, R5F10PGFYNA, R5F10PGGYNA, R5F10PGHYNA, R5F10PGJYNA 64-pin plastic LQFP Grade L R5F10PLELFB, R5F10PLFLFB, R5F10PLGLFB, R5F10PLHLFB, R5F10PLJLFB Grade K R5F10PLEKFB, R5F10PLFKFB, R5F10PLGKFB, R5F10PLHKFB, R5F10PLJKFB Grade Y R5F10PLEYFB, R5F10PLFYFB, R5F10PLGYFB, R5F10PLHYFB, R5F10PLJYFB 80-pin plastic LQFP Grade L R5F10PMELFB, R5F10PMFLFB, R5F10PMGLFB, R5F10PMHLFB, R5F10PMJLFB Grade K R5F10PMEKFB, R5F10PMFKFB, R5F10PMGKFB, R5F10PMHKFB, R5F10PMJKFB Grade Y R5F10PMEYFB, R5F10PMFYFB, R5F10PMGYFB, R5F10PMHYFB, R5F10PMJYFB 100-pin plastic LQFP Grade L R5F10PPELFB, R5F10PPFLFB, R5F10PPGLFB, R5F10PPHLFB, R5F10PPJLFB Grade K R5F10PPEKFB, R5F10PPFKFB, R5F10PPGKFB, R5F10PPHKFB, R5F10PPJKFB Grade Y R5F10PPEYFB, R5F10PPFYFB, R5F10PPGYFB, R5F10PPHYFB, R5F10PPJYFB R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 44 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW Table 1-8. Order Information for RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) Package 30-pin plastic SSOP Device Grade L Order Name R5F10BACLSP, R5F10BADLSP, R5F10BAELSP, R5F10BAFLSP, R5F10BAGLSP Grade K R5F10BACKSP, R5F10BADKSP, R5F10BAEKSP, R5F10BAFKSP, R5F10BAGKSP Grade Y R5F10BACYSP, R5F10BADYSP, R5F10BAEYSP, R5F10BAFYSP, R5F10BAGYSP 32-pin plastic VQFN Grade L R5F10BBCLNA, R5F10BBDLNA, R5F10BBELNA, R5F10BBFLNA, R5F10BBGLNA Grade K R5F10BBCKNA, R5F10BBDKNA, R5F10BBEKNA, R5F10BBFKNA, R5F10BBGKNA Grade Y R5F10BBCYNA, R5F10BBDYNA, R5F10BBEYNA, R5F10BBFYNA, R5F10BBGYNA 48-pin plastic LQFP Grade L R5F10BGCLFB, R5F10BGDLFB, R5F10BGELFB, R5F10BGFLFB, R5F10BGGLFB Grade K R5F10BGCKFB, R5F10BGDKFB, R5F10BGEKFB, R5F10BGFKFB, R5F10BGGKFB Grade Y R5F10BGCYFB, R5F10BGDYFB, R5F10BGEYFB, R5F10BGFYFB, R5F10BGGYFB 48-pin plastic VQFN Grade L R5F10BGCLNA, R5F10BGDLNA, R5F10BGELNA, R5F10BGFLNA, R5F10BGGLNA Grade K R5F10BGCKNA, R5F10BGDKNA, R5F10BGEKNA, R5F10BGFKNA, R5F10BGGKNA Grade Y R5F10BGCYNA, R5F10BGDYNA, R5F10BGEYNA, R5F10BGFYNA, Grade L R5F10BLCLFB, R5F10BLDLFB, R5F10BLELFB, R5F10BLFLFB, R5F10BGGYNA 64-pin plastic LQFP R5F10BLGLFB Grade K R5F10BLCKFB, R5F10BLDKFB, R5F10BLEKFB, R5F10BLFKFB, R5F10BLGKFB Grade Y R5F10BLCYFB, R5F10BLDYFB, R5F10BLEYFB, R5F10BLFYFB, R5F10BLGYFB 80-pin plastic LQFP R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Grade L R5F10BMELFB, R5F10BMFLFB, R5F10BMGLFB Grade K R5F10BMEKFB, R5F10BMFKFB, R5F10BMGKFB Grade Y R5F10BMEYFB, R5F10BMFYFB, R5F10BMGYFB 45 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW Table 1-9. Order Information for RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) Package 20-pin plastic SSOP 30-pin plastic SSOP 32-pin plastic VQFN 48-pin plastic LQFP Device Order Name Grade L R5F10A6ALSP, R5F10A6CLSP, R5F10A6DLSP, R5F10A6ELSP Grade K R5F10A6AKSP, R5F10A6CKSP, R5F10A6DKSP, R5F10A6EKSP Grade Y R5F10A6AYSP, R5F10A6CYSP, R5F10A6DYSP, R5F10A6EYSP Grade L R5F10AAALSP, R5F10AACLSP, R5F10AADLSP, R5F10AAELSP Grade K R5F10AAAKSP, R5F10AACKSP, R5F10AADKSP, R5F10AAEKSP Grade Y R5F10AAAYSP, R5F10AACYSP, R5F10AADYSP, R5F10AAEYSP Grade L R5F10ABALNA, R5F10ABCLNA, R5F10ABDLNA, R5F10ABELNA Grade K R5F10ABAKNA, R5F10ABCKNA, R5F10ABDKNA, R5F10ABEKNA Grade Y R5F10ABAYNA, R5F10ABCYNA, R5F10ABDYNA, R5F10ABEYNA Grade L R5F10AGALFB, R5F10AGCLFB, R5F10AGDLFB, R5F10AGELFB, R5F10AGFLFB, R5F10AGGLFB Grade K R5F10AGAKFB, R5F10AGCKFB, R5F10AGDKFB, R5F10AGEKFB, R5F10AGFKFB, R5F10AGGKFB Grade Y R5F10AGAYFB, R5F10AGCYFB, R5F10AGDYFB, R5F10AGEYFB, Grade L R5F10AGALNA, R5F10AGCLNA, R5F10AGDLNA, R5F10AGELNA, R5F10AGFYFB, R5F10AGGYFB 48-pin plastic VQFN R5F10AGFLNA, R5F10AGGLNA Grade K R5F10AGAKNA, R5F10AGCKNA, R5F10AGDKNA, R5F10AGEKNA, R5F10AGFKNA, R5F10AGGKNA Grade Y R5F10AGAYNA, R5F10AGCYNA, R5F10AGDYNA, R5F10AGEYNA, R5F10AGFYNA, R5F10AGGYNA 64-pin plastic LQFP Grade L R5F10ALCLFB, R5F10ALDLFB, R5F10ALELFB, R5F10ALFLFB, R5F10ALGLFB Grade K R5F10ALCKFB, R5F10ALDKFB, R5F10ALEKFB, R5F10ALFKFB, R5F10ALGKFB Grade Y R5F10ALCYFB, R5F10ALDYFB, R5F10ALEYFB, R5F10ALFYFB, R5F10ALGYFB 80-pin plastic LQFP R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Grade L R5F10AMELFB, R5F10AMFLFB, R5F10AMGLFB Grade K R5F10AMEKFB, R5F10AMFKFB, R5F10AMGKFB Grade Y R5F10AMEYFB, R5F10AMFYFB, R5F10AMGYFB 46 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.1 Pin Function List Pin I/O buffer power supplies depend on the product. Table 2-1 shows the relationship between these power supplies and the pins. EVDD indicates EVDD0 and EVDD1. Table 2-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies (1) 20-pin, 30-pin, 32-pin, and 48-pin products Power Supply VDD Corresponding Pins All pins (2) 64-pin products Power Supply Corresponding Pins EVDD0 Port pins other than P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P96 Note, P121 to P124, and P137 VDD P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P96 Note, P121 to P124, and P137 Pins other than port pins Note In R5F10PLE, R5F10PLF, R5F10BLC, R5F10BLD, R5F10BLE, R5F10BLF, R5F10BLG, R5F10ALF, and R5F10ALG, the power supply for P96 is EVDD0. In R5F10ALC, R5F10ALD, and R5F10ALE, the power supply for P92 to P97 is EVDD0. (3) 80-pin products Power Supply Corresponding Pins EVDD0 Port pins other than P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97 Note, P121 to P124, and P137 VDD P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97 Note, P121 to P124, and P137 Pins other than port pins Note In R5F10PME, R5F10PMF, R5F10BME, R5F10BMF, R5F10BMG, R5F10AME, R5F10AMF, and R5F10AMG, the power supply for P96 and P97 is EVDD0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 47 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (4) 100-pin products Power Supply EVDD0, EVDD1 Corresponding Pins Port pins other than P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97, P100 to P105, P121 to P124, and P137 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97, P100 to P105, P121 to P124, and P137 VDD Pins other than port pins The products are classified into the following five groups according to the product type, pin count, and code flash memory size. Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group D: RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory This subchapter describes the 100-pin products of RL78/F14 and the 80-pin products of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) as examples. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 48 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.1.1 RL78/F14 100-pin products (1/2) Function Name P00 I/O I/O Function Port 0 After Reset Input port Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P01 (TI05)/(TO05)/INTP9 (TI04)/(TO04) P02 (TI06)/(TO06) P03 P10 Alternate Function (RTC1HZ) I/O Port 1 Input port Input of P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, and P17 can be set to TTL input buffer. P11 TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/ SDA10/RXD1/LRXD1/CRXD0 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P12 Output from P10 to P17 can be set to N-ch open-drain output. P13 For input to P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, and P17, the threshold level can be specified. TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/ LTXD1/CTXD0 TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/ SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/ SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14 TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/ SCL01/LRXD0 P15 TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/ (TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/ TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16 TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/ SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17 TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/ SCL00/INTP3 P30 I/O Port 3 P31 For input to P30 to P32, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P32 P33 For input to P30, the threshold level can be specified. P34 P40 Input port Input of P30 can be set to TTL input buffer. P33 and P34 can be set to analog input. I/O Port 4 TI14/TO14/STOPST/(INTP2) TI16/TO16/INTP7 Analog input port Input port Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P41 TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/ INTP2/SNZOUT0 AVREFP/ANI0 AVREFM/ANI1 TOOL0 TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/VCOUT0/ SNZOUT2 For input to P43, the threshold level can be specified. P42 (LTXD0) P43 (LRXD0) P44 (TI07)/(TO07) P45 (TI10)/(TO10) P46 (TI12)/(TO12) P47 P50 INTP13 I/O Port 5 Input port (SSI01)/(INTP3) P51 Input of P54 can be set to TTL input buffer. (SO01)/INTP11 P52 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. (SCK01)/(STOPST) For input to P50 and P52 to P54, the threshold level can be specified. P53 (SI01)/INTP10 P54 (TI11)/(TO11)/SSI10 P55 (TI13)/(TO13) P56 (TI15)/(TO15)/(SNZOUT1) P57 P60 P61 P62 P63 P64 (TI17)/(TO17)/(SNZOUT0) I/O Port 6 Input of P62 and P63 can be set to TTL input buffer. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Output from P60 to P63 can be set to N-ch open-drain output. For input to P60 to P63, the threshold level can be specified. Input port (SCK00)/(SCL00) (SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) (SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 (SSI00)/SDAA0 (TI14)/(TO14)/(SNZOUT3) P65 (TI16)/(TO16)/(SNZOUT2) P66 (TI00)/(TO00) P67 (TI02)/(TO02) Remark Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR). Only the STOPST function of P52 can be assigned via settings in the STOP status output control register (STPSTC). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 49 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (2/2) Function Name P70 I/O I/O P71 P72 P73 Function Port 7 Input of P70, P71, and P73 can be set to TTL input buffer. P70 to P74 can be set to analog input. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Output from P70 to P72 can be set to N-ch open-drain output. For input to P70, P71, P73, and P75 to P77, the threshold level can be specified. After Reset Analog input port ANI26/KR0/TI15/TO15/INTP8/ SI11/SDA11/SNZOUT4 ANI27/KR1/TI17/TO17/INTP6/ SCK11/SCL11/SNZOUT5 ANI28/KR2/(CTXD0)/SO11/ SNZOUT6 ANI29/KR3/(CRXD0)/SSI11/ SNZOUT7 P74 ANI30/KR4/(SO10)/(TXD1) P75 Input port P76 KR5/(SI10)/(RXD1) KR6/(SCK10) P77 P80 Alternate Function KR7/(SSI10)/INTP12 I/O P81 Port 8 P80 to P87 can be set to analog input. Analog input port ANI2/ANO0 ANI3/IVCMP00 P82 ANI4/IVCMP01 P83 ANI5/IVCMP02 P84 ANI6/IVCMP03 P85 ANI7/IVREF0 P86 ANI8 P87 P90 ANI9 I/O P91 Port 9 P90 to P97 can be set to analog input. Analog input port ANI10 ANI11 P92 ANI12 P93 ANI13 P94 ANI14 P95 ANI15 P96 ANI16 P97 P100 ANI17 I/O P101 P102 P103 Port 10 P100 to P105 can be set to analog input. For P106 and P107, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. For input to P107, the threshold level can be specified. Analog input port ANI20 ANI21 P104 ANI22 P105 ANI23 P106 Input port P107 I/O P121 Input P122 P123 P124 I/O Port 12 Input of P125 can be set to TTL input buffer. P120 and P125 can be set to analog input. For P120 and P125 to P127, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Output from P120 can be set to N-ch open-drain output. For input to P125, the threshold level can be specified. P126 Analog input port Input port X1 XT1 XT2/EXCLKS Analog input port ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/ SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 Input port (TI01)/(TO01) (TI03)/(TO03) P130 Output P137 Input P140 I/O P150 I/O P152 ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/ SO01/INTP4 X2/EXCLK P127 P151 (LTXD1) (LRXD1) P120 P125 ANI18 ANI19 Port 13 Output port RESOUT Input port INTP0 Port 14 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Input port PCLBUZ0 Port 15 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. For input to P150, P152, and P153, the threshold level can be specified. Input port (SSI11) (SO11) (SI11) P153 (SCK11) P154 (SNZOUT7) P155 (SNZOUT6) P156 (SNZOUT5) P157 Remark (SNZOUT4) Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 50 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.1.2 RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) 80-pin products (1/2) Function Name P00 I/O I/O Function Port 0 After Reset Input port Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P01 (TI05)/(TO05)/INTP9 (TI04)/(TO04) P02 P10 Alternate Function (TI06)/(TO06) I/O Port 1 Input port Input of P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, and P17 can be set to TTL input buffer. P11 Output from P10 to P17 can be set to N-ch open-drain output. TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/ SDA10/RXD1/CRXD0 For input to P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, and P17, the threshold level can be specified. TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/ SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P12 TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/ CTXD0 P13 TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/ SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14 TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/ SCL01/LRXD0 P15 TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/ (TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/ TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16 TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/ SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17 TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/ SCL00/INTP3 P30 I/O Port 3 P31 For input to P30 to P32, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P32 P33 For input to P30, the threshold level can be specified. P34 P40 Input port Input of P30 can be set to TTL input buffer. P33 and P34 can be set to analog input. I/O Port 4 TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/ INTP2/SNZOUT0 STOPST/(INTP2) INTP7 Analog input port Input port AVREFP/ANI0 AVREFM/ANI1 TOOL0 P41 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/SNZOUT2 P42 For input to P43, the threshold level can be specified. (LTXD0) P43 (LRXD0) P44 (TI07)/(TO07) P45 (TI10)/(TO10) P46 (TI12)/(TO12) P47 P50 I/O Port 5 Input port (SSI01)/(INTP3) P51 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. (SO01)/INTP11 P52 For input to P50 and P52 to P54, the threshold level can be specified. (SCK01)/(STOPST) Input of P54 can be set to TTL input buffer. P53 (SI01)/INTP10 P54 (TI11)/(TO11)/SSI10 P55 (TI13)/(TO13) P56 (SNZOUT1) P57 P60 P61 P62 P63 (SNZOUT0) I/O Port 6 Input of P62 and P63 can be set to TTL input buffer. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Output from P60 to P63 can be set to N-ch open-drain output. For input to P60 to P63, the threshold level can be specified. Input port (SCK00)/(SCL00) (SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) (SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 (SSI00)/SDAA0 P64 (SNZOUT3) P65 (SNZOUT2) P66 (TI00)/(TO00) P67 Remark (TI02)/(TO02) Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR). Only the STOPST function of P52 can be assigned via settings in the STOP status output control register (STPSTC). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 51 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (2/2) Function I/O Function After Reset Alternate Function Name P70 I/O P71 P72 Port 7 Input port SNZOUT4 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. KR1/INTP6/SCK11/SCL11/ Output from P70 to P72 can be set to N-ch open-drain output. SNZOUT5 For input to P70, P71, P73, and P75 to P77, the threshold level can be KR2/(CTXD0)/SO11/SNZOUT6 specified. P73 KR0/INTP8/SI11/SDA11/ Input of P70, P71, and P73 can be set to TTL input buffer. KR3/(CRXD0)/SSI11/SNZOUT7 P74 KR4/(SO10)/(TXD1) P75 KR5/(SI10)/(RXD1) P76 KR6/(SCK10) P77 KR7/(SSI10) P80 I/O P81 Port 8 Analog input ANI2 P80 to P87 can be set to analog input. port ANI3 P82 ANI4 P83 ANI5 P84 ANI6 P85 ANI7 P86 ANI8 P87 ANI9 Port 9 Analog input P91 P90 to P97 can be set to analog input. port P92 For P96 and P97, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a P90 I/O ANI11 ANI12 software setting. P93 ANI10 ANI13 P94 ANI14 P95 ANI15 P96 ANI26 P97 ANI27 P120 P121 I/O Input Analog input ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/ Input of P125 can be set to TTL input buffer. port SO01/INTP4 P120 and P125 can be set to analog input. Input port X1 For P120, P125, and P126, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be P122 X2/EXCLK specified by a software setting. P123 XT1 Output from P120 can be set to N-ch open-drain output. P124 P125 Port 12 I/O For input to P125, the threshold level can be specified. P126 P130 Output P137 Input P140 I/O Port 13 Port 14 XT2/EXCLKS Analog input ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/ port SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 Input port (TI01)/(TO01) Output port RESOUT Input port INTP0 Input port PCLBUZ0 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Remark Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 52 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.1.3 RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) 80-pin products (1/2) Function I/O Function After Reset Alternate Function Name P00 I/O Port 0 Input port Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P01 (TI04)/(TO04) P02 P10 (TI05)/(TO05)/INTP9 (TI06)/(TO06) I/O Port 1 Input port Input of P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, and P17 can be set to TTL input buffer. P11 TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/ SDA10/RXD1 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P12 Output from P10 to P17 can be set to N-ch open-drain output. P13 For input to P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, and P17, the threshold level can be specified. TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10 TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/ SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/ SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 P14 TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/ SCL01/LRXD0 P15 TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/ (TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/ TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ P16 TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/ SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD P17 TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/ SCL00/INTP3 P30 I/O Port 3 P31 For input to P30 to P32, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. P32 P33 For input to P30, the threshold level can be specified. P34 P40 Input port Input of P30 can be set to TTL input buffer. P33 and P34 can be set to analog input. I/O Port 4 TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/ INTP2/SNZOUT0 STOPST/(INTP2) INTP7 Analog input port Input port AVREFP/ANI0 AVREFM/ANI1 TOOL0 P41 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/SNZOUT2 P42 For input to P43, the threshold level can be specified. (LTXD0) P43 (LRXD0) P44 (TI07)/(TO07) P45 (TI10)/(TO10) P46 (TI12)/(TO12) P47 P50 I/O Port 5 Input port (SSI01)/(INTP3) P51 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. (SO01)/INTP11 P52 For input to P50 and P52 to P54, the threshold level can be specified. (SCK01)/(STOPST) Input of P54 can be set to TTL input buffer. P53 (SI01)/INTP10 P54 (TI11)/(TO11)/SSI10 P55 (TI13)/(TO13) P56 (SNZOUT1) P57 P60 P61 P62 P63 (SNZOUT0) I/O Port 6 Input of P62 and P63 can be set to TTL input buffer. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Output from P60 to P63 can be set to N-ch open-drain output. For input to P60 to P63, the threshold level can be specified. Input port (SCK00)/(SCL00) (SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) (SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 (SSI00)/SDAA0 P64 (SNZOUT3) P65 (SNZOUT2) P66 (TI00)/(TO00) P67 (TI02)/(TO02) Remark Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR). Only the STOPST function of P52 can be assigned via settings in the STOP status output control register (STPSTC). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 53 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (2/2) Function I/O Function After Reset Alternate Function Name P70 I/O Port 7 Input port KR0/INTP8/SI11/SDA11/SNZOUT4 Input of P70, P71, and P73 can be set to TTL input buffer. KR1/INTP6/SCK11/SCL11/ Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. SNZOUT5 P72 Output from P70 to P72 can be set to N-ch open-drain output. KR2/SO11/SNZOUT6 P73 For input to P70, P71, P73, and P75 to P77, the threshold level can be KR3/SSI11/SNZOUT7 P71 specified. P74 KR4/(SO10)/(TXD1) P75 KR5/(SI10)/(RXD1) P76 KR6/(SCK10) P77 KR7/(SSI10) P80 I/O P81 Port 8 Analog input ANI2 P80 to P87 can be set to analog input. port ANI3 P82 ANI4 P83 ANI5 P84 ANI6 P85 ANI7 P86 ANI8 P87 ANI9 Port 9 Analog input P91 P90 to P97 can be set to analog input. port P92 For P96 and P97, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a P90 I/O ANI11 ANI12 software setting. P93 ANI10 ANI13 P94 ANI14 P95 ANI15 P96 ANI26 P97 ANI27 P120 P121 I/O Input Analog input ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/ Input of P125 can be set to TTL input buffer. port SO01/INTP4 P120 and P125 can be set to analog input. Input port For P120, P125, and P126, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be P122 XT1 Output from P120 can be set to N-ch open-drain output. P124 I/O For input to P125, the threshold level can be specified. P126 P130 Output P137 Input P140 I/O Port 13 Port 14 X1 X2/EXCLK specified by a software setting. P123 P125 Port 12 XT2/EXCLKS Analog input ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/ port SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 Input port (TI01)/(TO01) Output port RESOUT Input port INTP0 Input port PCLBUZ0 Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a software setting. Remark Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 54 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.1.4 Pins for each product (pins other than port pins) This subchapter shows the pins other than the ports shown in tables 2-2 to 2-4 for each product. indicates the pin that is provided in the product and indicates the pin that is not provided. Table 2-2. List of RL78/F14 Pins Other than Port Pins (1/5) Pin Function I/O ANI0 Input ANI1 ANI2 Function Pin Count 100pin 80pin 64pin 48pin 32pin 30pin Input Input ANI3 Input ANI4 Input ANI5 Input ANI6 Input ANI7 Input ANI8 Input A/D converter analog input (VDD connection) ANI9 Input ANI10 Input ANI11 Input ANI12 Input ANI13 Input ANI14 Input ANI15 Input ANI16 Input Note 1 ANI17 Input Note 1 ANI18 Input ANI19 Input ANI20 Input ANI21 Input ANI22 Input ANI23 Input ANI24 Input ANI25 Input ANI26 Input Note 1 ANI27 Input Note 1 ANI28 Input Note 1 Note 1 ANI29 Input Note 1 ANI30 Input Note 1 IVCMP00 Input IVCMP01 Input IVCMP02 Input IVCMP03 Input IVREF0 Input A/D converter analog input (EVDD connection) Comparator analog voltage input Comparator reference voltage input Note 1 Note 1. Provided only in Group E products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 55 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-2. List of RL78/F14 Pins Other than Port Pins (2/5) Pin I/O Function Function Pin Count 100- 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin pin KR0 Input Key interrupt input KR1 Input KR2 Input KR3 Input KR4 Input KR5 Input KR6 Input KR7 Input ANO0 Output VCOUT0 Output Comparator output TI00 Input 16-bit timer 00 input TI01 Input 16-bit timer 01 input (8-bit mode available) TI02 Input 16-bit timer 02 input TI03 Input 16-bit timer 03 input (8-bit mode available) TI04 Input 16-bit timer 04 input TI05 Input 16-bit timer 05 input TI06 Input 16-bit timer 06 input TI07 Input 16-bit timer 07 input TI10 Input 16-bit timer 10 input TI11 Input 16-bit timer 11 input (8-bit mode available) TI12 Input 16-bit timer 12 input TI13 Input 16-bit timer 13 input (8-bit mode available) TI14 Input 16-bit timer 14 input TI15 Input 16-bit timer 15 input TI16 Input 16-bit timer 16 input D/A converter output Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 TI17 Input 16-bit timer 17 input TO00 Output 16-bit timer 00 output TO01 Output 16-bit timer 01 output (8-bit mode available) TO02 Output 16-bit timer 02 output TO03 Output 16-bit timer 03 output (8-bit mode available) TO04 Output 16-bit timer 04 output TO05 Output 16-bit timer 05 output TO06 Output 16-bit timer 06 output TO07 Output 16-bit timer 07 output TO10 Output 16-bit timer 10 output TO11 Output 16-bit timer 11 output (8-bit mode available) TO12 Output 16-bit timer 12 output TO13 Output 16-bit timer 13 output (8-bit mode available) TO14 Output 16-bit timer 14 output TO15 Output 16-bit timer 15 output TO16 Output 16-bit timer 16 output TO17 Output 16-bit timer 17 output Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1. Provided only in Group E products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 56 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-2. List of RL78/F14 Pins Other than Port Pins (3/5) Pin I/O Function Function Pin Count 100- 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin pin TRJIO0 I/O TRJO0 Output TRDCLK0 Input TRDIOA0 I/O Timer RJ input/output Timer RJ output Timer RD external clock input Timer RD0 input/output TRDIOB0 I/O TRDIOC0 I/O TRDIOD0 I/O TRDIOA1 I/O TRDIOB1 I/O TRDIOC1 I/O TRDIOD1 I/O RXD0 Input Timer RD1 input/output Serial data input to UART0 RXD1 Input Serial data input to UART1 TXD0 Output Serial data output from UART0 TXD1 Output Serial data output from UART1 Clock input/output for IICA0 Clock output from simplified I2C SCLA0 I/O SCL00 Output SCL01 Output SCL10 Output SCL11 Output SDAA0 I/O Serial data input/output for IICA0 SDA00 I/O Serial data input/output for simplified I2C SDA01 I/O SDA10 I/O SDA11 I/O SCK00 I/O Clock input/output for CSI00 SCK01 I/O Clock input/output for CSI01 SCK10 I/O Clock input/output for CSI10 SCK11 I/O Clock input/output for CSI11 SI00 Input Serial data input to CSI00 SI01 Input Serial data input to CSI01 SI10 Input Serial data input to CSI10 SI11 Input Serial data input to CSI11 SO00 Output Serial data output from CSI00 SO01 Output Serial data output from CSI01 SO10 Output Serial data output from CSI10 SO11 Output Serial data output from CSI11 SSI00 Input Slave select input to CSI00 (SPI00) SSI01 Input Slave select input to CSI01 (SPI01) SSI10 Input Slave select input to CSI10 (SPI10) SSI11 Input Slave select input to CSI11 (SPI11) CRXD0 Input Serial data input to CAN CTXD0 Output Serial data output from CAN R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 57 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS able 2-2. List of RL78/F14 Pins Other than Port Pins (4/5) Pin I/O Function Pin Count Function 100- 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin pin LRXD0 Input LRXD1 Input LTXD0 Output LTXD1 Output Serial data input to LIN Serial data output from LIN Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 INTP0 Input INTP1 Input INTP2 Input INTP3 Input INTP4 Input INTP5 Input INTP6 Input INTP7 Input INTP8 Input INTP9 Input INTP10 Input INTP11 Input INTP12 Input Note 1 Note 1 INTP13 Input External interrupt input Note 1 PCLBUZ0 Output Clock output/buzzer output 0 RESOUT Output Reset output STOPST Output STOP status output SNZOUT0 Output SNOOZE status output SNZOUT1 Output SNZOUT2 Output SNZOUT3 Output SNZOUT4 Output SNZOUT5 Output SNZOUT6 Output SNZOUT7 Output RTC1HZ Output EXCLK Input EXCLKS Input X1 X2 Note 3 XT1 XT2Note 3 RESET Input REGC Real-time clock correction clock (1 Hz) output External clock input for main system clock External clock input for subsystem clock Resonator connection for main system clock Resonator connection for subsystem clock External reset input Regulator output stabilization capacitance connection for internal operation. Connect to Vss via the capacitor (0.47 to 1 F). VDD Positive power supply for the P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97 , Note 2 P100 to P105, P121 to P124, P137, and RESET pins Notes 1. Provided only in Group E products. 2. In products of Groups A to D, the positive power supply for P96 and P97 is EVDD0. 3. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 58 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-2. List of RL78/F14 Pins Other than Port Pins (5/5) Pin I/O Function Function Pin Count 100- 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin pin EVDD0 Positive power supply for the pins that are not connected to VDD EVDD1 AVREFP Input A/D converter reference voltage (+ side) input AVREFM Input A/D converter reference voltage (- side) input VSS Ground potential for the P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97, P100 to P105, P121 to P124, P137, and RESET pins EVSS0 EVSS1 TOOLRXD Input Ground potential for the pins that are not connected to VSS UART reception pin for the external device connection used during flash memory programming TOOLTXD Output UART transmission pin for the external device connection used during flash memory programming TOOL0 I/O Data input/output for flash memory programmer/debugger R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 59 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-3. List of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) Pins Other than Port Pins (1/4) Pin I/O Function Function A/D converter analog input (VDD connection) Pin Count 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin ANI0 Input ANI1 Input ANI2 Input ANI3 Input ANI4 Input ANI5 Input ANI6 Input ANI7 Input ANI8 Input ANI9 Input ANI10 Input ANI11 Input ANI12 Input ANI13 Input ANI14 Input ANI15 Input ANI24 Input ANI25 Input ANI26 Input ANI27 Input KR0 Input KR1 Input KR2 Input KR3 Input KR4 Input KR5 Input KR6 Input KR7 Input TI00 Input 16-bit timer 00 input A/D converter analog input (EVDD connection) Key interrupt input TI01 Input 16-bit timer 01 input (8-bit mode available) TI02 Input 16-bit timer 02 input TI03 Input 16-bit timer 03 input (8-bit mode available) TI04 Input 16-bit timer 04 input TI05 Input 16-bit timer 05 input TI06 Input 16-bit timer 06 input TI07 Input 16-bit timer 07 input TI10 Input 16-bit timer 10 input TI11 Input 16-bit timer 11 input (8-bit mode available) TI12 Input 16-bit timer 12 input TI13 Input 16-bit timer 13 input (8-bit mode available) TO00 Output 16-bit timer 00 output TO01 Output 16-bit timer 01 output (8-bit mode available) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 60 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-3. List of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) Pins Other than Port Pins (2/4) Pin I/O Function Function Pin Count 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin TO02 Output 16-bit timer 02 output TO03 Output 16-bit timer 03 output (8-bit mode available) TO04 Output 16-bit timer 04 output TO05 Output 16-bit timer 05 output TO06 Output 16-bit timer 06 output TO07 Output 16-bit timer 07 output TO10 Output 16-bit timer 10 output TO11 Output 16-bit timer 11 output (8-bit mode available) TO12 Output 16-bit timer 12 output TO13 Output 16-bit timer 13 output (8-bit mode available) TRJIO0 I/O TRJO0 Output TRDCLK0 Input Timer RJ input/output Timer RJ output Timer RD external clock input Timer RD0 input/output TRDIOA0 I/O TRDIOB0 I/O TRDIOC0 I/O TRDIOD0 I/O TRDIOA1 I/O Timer RD1 input/output TRDIOB1 I/O TRDIOC1 I/O TRDIOD1 I/O RXD0 Input Serial data input to UART0 RXD1 Input Serial data input to UART1 TXD0 Output Serial data output from UART0 TXD1 Output Serial data output from UART1 SCLA0 I/O Clock input/output for IICA0 SCL00 Output SCL01 Output SCL10 Output 2 Clock output from simplified I C SCL11 Output SDAA0 I/O Serial data input/output for IICA0 SDA00 I/O Serial data input/output for simplified I2C SDA01 I/O SDA10 I/O SDA11 I/O SCK00 I/O Clock input/output for CSI00 SCK01 I/O Clock input/output for CSI01 SCK10 I/O Clock input/output for CSI10 SCK11 I/O Clock input/output for CSI11 SI00 Input Serial data input to CSI00 SI01 Input Serial data input to CSI01 SI10 Input Serial data input to CSI10 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 61 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-3. List of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) Pins Other than Port Pins (3/4) Pin I/O Function Function Pin Count 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin Serial data input to CSI11 Output Serial data output from CSI00 SO01 Output Serial data output from CSI01 SO10 Output Serial data output from CSI10 SO11 Output Serial data output from CSI11 SSI00 Input Slave select input to CSI00 (SPI00) SSI01 Input Slave select input to CSI01 (SPI01) SSI10 Input Slave select input to CSI10 (SPI10) SSI11 Input Slave select input to CSI11 (SPI11) CRXD0 Input Serial data input to CAN CTXD0 Output Serial data output from CAN LRXD0 Input Serial data input to LIN LTXD0 Output Serial data output from LIN External interrupt input SI11 Input SO00 INTP0 Input INTP1 Input INTP2 Input INTP3 Input INTP4 Input INTP5 Input INTP6 Input INTP7 Input INTP8 Input INTP9 Input INTP10 Input INTP11 Input PCLBUZ0 Output Clock output/buzzer output 0 RESOUT Output Reset output STOPST Output STOP status output SNZOUT0 Output SNOOZE status output SNZOUT1 Output SNZOUT2 Output SNZOUT3 Output SNZOUT4 Output SNZOUT5 Output SNZOUT6 Output SNZOUT7 Output RTC1HZ Output Real-time clock correction clock (1 Hz) output EXCLK Input External clock input for main system clock EXCLKS Input External clock input for subsystem clock X1 Resonator connection for main system clock X2 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 62 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-3. List of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) Pins Other than Port Pins (4/4) Pin I/O Function Function XT1Note XT2Note RESET Input REGC Pin Count 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin External reset input Regulator output stabilization capacitance connection for internal operation. Positive power supply for the pins that are not connected to VDD Resonator connection for subsystem clock Connect to Vss via the capacitor (0.47 to 1 F). VDD Positive power supply for the P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P95, P121 to P124, P137, and RESET pins EVDD0 AVREFP Input A/D converter reference voltage (+ side) input AVREFM Input A/D converter reference voltage (- side) input VSS Ground potential for the P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P95, P121 to P124, P137, Ground potential for the pins that are not connected to VSS UART reception pin for the external device connection used during flash memory and RESET pins EVSS0 TOOLRXD Input programming TOOLTXD Output UART transmission pin for the external device connection used during flash memory programming TOOL0 Note I/O Data input/output for flash memory programmer/debugger Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 63 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-4. List of RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) Pins Other than Port Pins (1/4) Pin I/O Function Function A/D converter analog input (VDD connection) Pin Count 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin 20-pin ANI0 Input ANI1 Input ANI2 Input ANI3 Input ANI4 Input ANI5 Input ANI6 Input ANI7 Input ANI8 Input ANI9 Input ANI10 Input ANI11 Input ANI12 Input Note 1 ANI13 Input ANI14 Input ANI15 Input ANI24 Input ANI25 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Input Note 1 Note 1 ANI26 Input Note 1 ANI27 Input A/D converter analog input (EVDD connection) KR0 Input KR1 Input KR2 Input KR3 Input KR4 Input KR5 Input KR6 Input KR7 Input TI00 Input 16-bit timer 00 input Key interrupt input TI01 Input 16-bit timer 01 input (8-bit mode available) TI02 Input 16-bit timer 02 input TI03 Input 16-bit timer 03 input (8-bit mode available) TI04 Input 16-bit timer 04 input TI05 Input 16-bit timer 05 input TI06 Input 16-bit timer 06 input TI07 Input 16-bit timer 07 input TI10 Input 16-bit timer 10 input TI11 Input 16-bit timer 11 input TI12 Input 16-bit timer 12 input TI13 Input 16-bit timer 13 input Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1. Provided only in the products with 96 Kbytes or 128 Kbytes of ROM. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 64 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-4. List of RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) Pins Other than Port Pins (2/4) Pin I/O Function Function Pin Count 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin 20-pin TO00 Output 16-bit timer 00 output TO01 Output 16-bit timer 01 output (8-bit mode available) TO02 Output 16-bit timer 02 output TO03 Output 16-bit timer 03 output (8-bit mode available) TO04 Output 16-bit timer 04 output TO05 Output 16-bit timer 05 output TO06 Output 16-bit timer 06 output TO07 Output 16-bit timer 07 output TO10 Output 16-bit timer 10 output Note 1 Note 1 TO11 Output 16-bit timer 11 output (8-bit mode available) Note 1 Note 1 TO12 Output 16-bit timer 12 output Note 1 Note 1 TO13 Output 16-bit timer 13 output (8-bit mode available) Note 1 Note 1 TRJIO0 I/O Timer RJ input/output Timer RJ output Timer RD external clock input Timer RD0 input/output I/O TRDIOC0 I/O TRDIOD0 I/O TRDIOA1 I/O TRJO0 Output TRDCLK0 Input TRDIOA0 I/O TRDIOB0 Timer RD1 input/output TRDIOB1 I/O TRDIOC1 I/O TRDIOD1 I/O RXD0 Input Serial data input to UART0 RXD1 Input Serial data input to UART1 Note 1 Note 1 TXD0 Output Serial data output from UART0 TXD1 Output Serial data output from UART1 SCLA0 I/O Clock input/output for IICA0 Note 1 Note 1 2 Clock output from simplified I C Note 1 Note 1 SCL00 Output SCL01 Output SCL10 Output Note 1 Note 1 SCL11 Output Note 1 Note 1 SDAA0 I/O Note 1 Note 1 Serial data input/output for IICA0 2 SDA00 I/O SDA01 I/O SDA10 I/O SDA11 I/O SCK00 I/O Clock input/output for CSI00 SCK01 I/O Clock input/output for CSI01 Note 1. Serial data input/output for simplified I C Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Provided only in the products with 96 Kbytes or 128 Kbytes of ROM. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 65 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-4. List of RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) Pins Other than Port Pins (3/4) Pin I/O Function Function Pin Count 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin 20-pin SCK10 I/O Clock input/output for CSI10 Note 1 Note 1 SCK11 I/O Clock input/output for CSI11 SI00 Input Serial data input to CSI00 Note 1 Note 1 SI01 Input Serial data input to CSI01 SI10 Input Serial data input to CSI10 Note 1 Note 1 SI11 Input Serial data input to CSI11 Note 1 Note 1 SO00 Output Serial data output from CSI00 SO01 Output Serial data output from CSI01 SO10 Output Serial data output from CSI10 Serial data output from CSI11 SO11 Output SSI00 Input Slave select input to CSI00 (SPI00) SSI01 Input Slave select input to CSI01 (SPI01) SSI10 Input Slave select input to CSI10 (SPI10) SSI11 Input Slave select input to CSI11 (SPI11) Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Serial data input to LIN Serial data output from LIN External interrupt input Input INTP2 Input INTP3 Input INTP4 Input INTP5 Input INTP6 Input INTP7 Input INTP8 Input INTP9 Input INTP10 INTP11 PCLBUZ0 Output RESOUT Output LRXD0 Input LTXD0 Output INTP0 Input INTP1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Input Note 1 Input Note 1 Clock output/buzzer output 0 Reset output STOPST Output STOP status output SNZOUT0 Output SNOOZE status output SNZOUT1 Output SNZOUT2 Output SNZOUT3 Output SNZOUT4 Output SNZOUT5 Output SNZOUT6 Output SNZOUT7 Output RTC1HZ Output Real-time clock correction clock (1 Hz) output Note 1. Provided only in the products with 96 Kbytes or 128 Kbytes of ROM. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 66 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-4. List of RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) Pins Other than Port Pins (4/4) Pin I/O Function Function Pin Count 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin 20-pin EXCLK Input External clock input for main system clock EXCLKS Input External clock input for subsystem clock X1 Resonator connection for main system clock X2 XT1Note XT2Note RESET Input External reset input REGC Regulator output stabilization capacitance connection for internal Resonator connection for subsystem clock operation. Connect to Vss via the capacitor (0.47 to 1 F). VDD Positive power supply for the P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97, P100 to P105, P121 to P124, P137, and RESET pins EVDD0 Positive power supply for the pins that are not connected to VDD AVREFP Input A/D converter reference voltage (+ side) input AVREFM Input A/D converter reference voltage (- side) input VSS Ground potential for the P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97, P100 to Ground potential for the pins that are not connected to VSS UART reception pin for the external device connection used during flash P105, P121 to P124, P137, and RESET pins EVSS0 TOOLRXD Input memory programming TOOLTXD Output UART transmission pin for the external device connection used during flash memory programming TOOL0 Note I/O Data input/output for flash memory programmer/debugger Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 67 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.2 Description of Pin Functions The pins provided depend on the product. See 1.5 Pin Configurations, for details. This subchapter describes the pin functions of the 100-pin products of RL78/F14 and the 80-pin products of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) as examples. 2.2.1 P00 to P03 (Port 0) P00 to P03 function as an I/O port. These pins also function as external interrupt request input, timer I/O, and real-time clock correction clock output. P03 is provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 0 (PU0). The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P00 to P03 function as an I/O port. These pins can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 0 (PM0). (2) Control mode P00 to P03 function as external interrupt request input, real-time clock correction clock output, and timer I/O. (a) INTP9 This is an external interrupt request input pin for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified. (b) RTC1HZ This is a real-time clock correction clock (1 Hz) output pin. (c) TI04 to TI06 These are pins for inputting an external count clock/capture trigger to 16-bit timers. (d) TO04 to TO06 These are timer output pins of 16-bit timers. 2.2.2 P10 to P17 (Port 1) P10 to P17 function as an I/O port. These pins also function as external interrupt request input, real-time clock correction clock output, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, timer I/O, programming UART I/O, SNOOZE status output, LIN serial data I/O, and CAN serial data I/O. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 1 (PU1). For input to the P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, and P17 pins, a CMOS input buffer or a TTL input buffer can be selected using the port input mode register 1 (PIM1). For output from the P10 to P17 pins, CMOS output or N-ch open-drain output can be selected using the port output mode register 1 (POM1). For the P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, and P17 pins, the input threshold level can be specified using the port input threshold control register 1 (PITHL1). The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P10 to P17 function as an I/O port. These pins can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 1 (PM1). (2) Control mode P10 to P17 function as external interrupt request input, real-time clock correction clock output, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, timer I/O, programming UART I/O, SNOOZE status output, LIN serial data I/O, and CAN serial data I/O. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 68 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (a) INTP3, INTP5 These are external interrupt request input pins for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified. (b) RTC1HZ This is a real-time clock correction clock (1 Hz) output pin. (c) TXD0, TXD1 These are serial data output pins of the UART0 and UART1 serial interface. (d) RXD0, RXD1 These are serial data input pins of the UART0 and UART1 serial interface. (e) SCK00, SCK01, SCK10 These are serial clock I/O pins of the CSI00, CSI01, and CSI10 serial interface. (f) SI00, SI01, SI10 These are serial data input pins of the CSI00, CSI01, and CSI10 serial interface. (g) SO00, SO10 These are serial data output pins of the CSI00 and CSI10 serial interface. (h) TI00, TI02, TI04 to TI06, TI11 to TI13 These are pins for inputting an external count clock/capture trigger to 16-bit timers. (i) TO00, TO02, TO04 to TO06, TO11 to TO13 These are timer output pins of 16-bit timers. (j) SDA00, SDA01, SDA10 These are serial data I/O pins of the simplified I2C serial interface. (k) SCL00, SCL01, SCL10 These are serial clock I/O pins of the simplified I2C serial interface. (l) TRDIOA0, TRDIOB0, TRDIOC0, TRDIOD0, TRDIOA1, TRDIOB1, TRDIOC1 These are timer I/O pins of timer RD. (m) TRDCLK0 This is an external clock input pin of timer RD. (n) TRJO0 This is a timer output pin of timer RJ. (o) LTXD0, LTXD1 These are serial data output pins for the LIN. LTXD1 is provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (p) LRXD0, LRXD1 These are serial data input pins for the LIN. LRXD1 is provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 69 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (q) CTXD0 This is a serial data output pins for the CAN. (r) CRXD0 This is a serial data input pins for the CAN. (s) TOOLTXD This is a UART serial data output pin for the external device connection used during flash memory programming. (t) TOOLRXD This is a UART serial data input pin for the external device connection used during flash memory programming. (u) SNZOUT3 This is a SNOOZE status output pin. 2.2.3 P30 to P34 (Port 3) P30 to P34 function as an I/O port. These pins also function as A/D converter analog input, A/D converter reference voltage input, external interrupt request input, serial interface slave select input, timer I/O, SNOOZE status output, and STOP status output. Only for P30 to P32, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 3 (PU3). For input to the P30 pin, a CMOS input buffer or a TTL input buffer can be selected using the port input mode register 3 (PIM3). For the P30 pin, the input threshold level can be specified using the port input threshold control register 3 (PITHL3). The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P30 to P34 function as an I/O port. These pins can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 3 (PM3). (2) Control mode P30 to P34 function as A/D converter analog input, A/D converter reference voltage input, external interrupt request input, serial interface slave select input, timer I/O, SNOOZE status output, and STOP status output. (a) ANI0, ANI1 These are analog input pins of the A/D converter. For details, see 12.10 (5) Analog input (ANIn) pins. (b) AVREFP This is a reference voltage (+ side) input pin of the A/D converter. (c) AVREFM This is a reference voltage (- side) input pin of the A/D converter. (d) INTP2, INTP7 These are external interrupt request input pins for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified. (e) SSI00 This is a slave select input pin of the CSI00 (SPI00) serial interface. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 70 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (f) TI01, TI14, TI16 These are pins for inputting an external count clock/capture trigger to 16-bit timers. TI14 and TI16 are provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (g) TO01, TO14, TO16 These are timer output pins of 16-bit timers. TO14 and TO16 are provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (h) SNZOUT0 This is a SNOOZE status output pin. (i) TRDIOD1 This is a timer output pin of timer RD. (j) STOPST This is a STOP status output pin. 2.2.4 P40 to P47 (Port 4) P40 to P47 function as an I/O port. These pins also function as data I/O for a flash memory programmer/debugger, timer I/O, comparator output, external interrupt request input, SNOOZE status output, and LIN serial data I/O. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 4 (PU4). For the P43 pin, the input threshold level can be specified using the port input threshold control register 4 (PITHL4). The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P40 to P47 function as an I/O port. These pins can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 4 (PM4). (2) Control mode P40 to P47 function as data I/O for a flash memory programmer/debugger, timer I/O, comparator output, external interrupt request input, SNOOZE status output, and LIN serial data I/O. (a) TOOL0 This is a data I/O pin for a flash memory programmer/debugger. Be sure to pull up this pin externally when on-chip debugging is enabled (pulling it down is prohibited). (b) TI07, TI10, TI12 These are pins for inputting an external count clock/capture trigger to 16-bit timers. (c) TO07, TO10, TO12 These are timer output pins of 16-bit timers. (d) TRJIO0 This is a timer I/O pin of timer RJ. (e) VCOUT0 This is a comparator output pin. This pin is provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 71 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (f) INTP13 This is an external interrupt request input pin for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified. This pin is provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (g) SNZOUT2 This is a SNOOZE status output pin. (h) LTXD0 This is a serial data output pin for the LIN. (i) LRXD0 This is a serial data input pin for the LIN. Caution After reset release, the relationships between P40/TOOL0 and the operating mode are as follows. For details, see 30. 5 Programming Method. Table 2-5. Relationships Between P40/TOOL0 and Operation Mode After Reset Release P40/TOOL0 Operating Mode EVDD Normal operation mode 0V Flash memory programming mode 2.2.5 P50 to P57 (Port 5) P50 to P57 function as an I/O port. These pins also function as external interrupt request input, serial interface slave select input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, timer I/O, SNOOZE status output, and STOP status output. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 5 (PU5). For input to the P54 pin, a CMOS input buffer or a TTL input buffer can be selected using the port input mode register 5 (PIM5). For the P50 and P52 to P54 pins, the input threshold level can be specified using the port input threshold control register 5 (PITHL5). The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P50 to P57 function as an I/O port. These pins can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 5 (PM5). (2) Control mode P50 to P57 function as external interrupt request input, serial interface slave select input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, timer I/O, SNOOZE status output, and STOP status output. (a) INTP3, INTP10, INTP11 These are external interrupt request input pins for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified. (b) SSI01 This is a slave select pin of the CSI01 (SPI01) serial interface. (c) SSI10 This is a slave select pin of the CSI10 (SPI10) serial interface. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 72 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (d) SCK01 This is a serial clock I/O pin of the CSI01 serial interface. (e) SI01 This is a serial data input pin of the CSI01 serial interface. (f) SO01 This is a serial data output pin of the CSI01 serial interface. (g) TI11, TI13, TI15, TI17 These are pins for inputting an external count clock/capture trigger to 16-bit timers. (h) TO11, TO13, TO15, TO17 These are timer output pins of 16-bit timers. TO15 and TO17 are provided only in 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (i) SNZOUT0, SNZOUT1 These are SNOOZE status output pins. (j) STOPST This is a STOP status output pin. 2.2.6 P60 to P67 (Port 6) P60 to P67 function as an I/O port. These pins also function as serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, slave select input, timer I/O, and SNOOZE status output. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 6 (PU6). For input to the P62 and P63 pins, a CMOS input buffer or a TTL input buffer can be selected using the port input mode register 6 (PIM6). For output from the P60 to P63 pins, CMOS output or N-ch open-drain output can be selected using the port output mode register 6 (POM6). For the P60 to P63 pins, the input threshold level can be specified using the port input threshold control register 6 (PITHL6). The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P60 to P67 function as an I/O port. These pins can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 6 (PM6). (2) Control mode P60 to P67 function as serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, slave select input, timer I/O, and SNOOZE status output. (a) SCLA0 This is a serial clock I/O pin of the IICA0 serial interface. (b) SDAA0 This is a serial data I/O pin of the IICA0 serial interface. (C) SSI00 This is a slave select input pin of the CSI00 (SPI00) serial interface. (d) SCK00 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 73 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS This is a serial clock I/O pin of the CSI00 serial interface. (e) SI00 This is a serial data input pin of the CSI00 serial interface. (f) SO00 This is a serial data output pin of the CSI00 serial interface. (g) TXD0 This is a serial data output pin of the UART0 serial interface. (h) RXD0 This is a serial data input pin of the UART0 serial interface. (i) SCL00 This is a serial clock I/O pin of the simplified I2C serial interface. (j) SDA00 This is a serial data I/O pin of the simplified I2C serial interface. (k) TI00, TI02, TI14, TI16 These are pins for inputting an external count clock/capture trigger to 16-bit timers. TI14 and TI16 are provided only in 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (l) TO00, TO02, TO14, TO16 These are timer output pins of 16-bit timers. TO14 and TO16 are provided only in 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (m) SNZOUT2, SNZOUT3 These are SNOOZE status output pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 74 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.2.7 P70 to P77 (Port 7) P70 to P77 function as an I/O port. These pins also function as A/D converter analog input, external interrupt request input, key interrupt input, serial interface slave select input, data I/O, clock I/O, timer I/O, SNOOZE status output, and CAN serial data I/O. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 7 (PU7). For input to the P70, P71, and P73 pins, a CMOS input buffer or a TTL input buffer can be selected using the port input mode register 7 (PIM7). For output from the P70 to P72 pins, CMOS output or N-ch open-drain output can be selected using the port output mode register 7 (POM7). For the P70, P71, P73, and P75 to P77 pins, the input threshold level can be specified using the port input threshold control register 7 (PITHL7). Input to the P70 to P74 pins can be specified as digital input or analog input in 1-bit units, using the port mode control register 7 (PMC7). The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P70 to P77 function as an I/O port. These pins can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 7 (PM7). (2) Control mode P70 to P77 function as A/D converter analog input, external interrupt request input, key interrupt input, serial interface slave select input, data I/O, clock I/O, timer I/O, SNOOZE status output, and CAN serial data I/O. (a) ANI26 to ANI30 These are analog input pins of the A/D converter. These pins are provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. For details, see 12.10 (5) Analog input (ANIn) pins. (b) INTP6, INTP8, INTP12 These are external interrupt request input pins for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified. INTP12 is provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (c) KR0 to KR7 These are key interrupt input pins. (d) SSI10, SSI11 These are slave select input pins of the CSI10 (SPI10) and CSI11 (SPI11) serial interface. (e) SI10, SI11 These are serial data input pins of the CSI10 and CSI11 serial interface. (f) SO10, SO11 These are serial data output pins of the CSI10 and CSI11 serial interface. (g) TXD1 This is a serial data output pin of the UART1 serial interface. (h) RXD1 This is a serial data input pin of the UART1 serial interface. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 75 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (i) SCK10, SCK11 These are serial clock I/O pins of the CSI10 and CSI11 serial interface. (j) SCL11 This is a serial clock I/O pin of the simplified I2C serial interface. (k) SDA11 This is a serial data I/O pin of the simplified I2C serial interface. (l) TI15, TI17 These are pins for inputting an external count clock/capture trigger to 16-bit timers. They are provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (m) TO15, TO17 These are timer output pins of 16-bit timers. They are provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (n) CTXD0 This is a serial data output pin for the CAN. (o) CRXD0 This is a serial data input pin for the CAN. (p) SNZOUT4 to SNZOUT7 These are SNOOZE status output pins. 2.2.8 P80 to P87 (Port 8) P80 to P87 function as an I/O port. These pins also function as A/D converter analog input, D/A converter output, comparator reference voltage input, and comparator analog voltage input. (1) Port mode P80 to P87 function as an I/O port. These pins can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 8 (PM8). (2) Control mode P80 to P87 function as A/D converter analog input, D/A converter output, comparator reference voltage input, and comparator analog voltage input. (a) ANI2 to ANI9 These are analog input pins of the A/D converter. For details, see 12.10 (5) Analog input (ANIn) pins. (b) ANO0 This is a D/A converter output pin. It is provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (c) IVCMP00 to IVCMP03 These are analog voltage input pins of the comparator. It is provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (d) IVREF0 This is a reference voltage input pin of the comparator. It is provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 76 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.2.9 P90 to P97 (Port 9) P90 to P97 function as an I/O port. These pins also function as A/D converter analog input. The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P90 to P97 function as an I/O port. These pins can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 9 (PM9). (2) Control mode P90 to P97 function as A/D converter analog input. (a) ANI10 to ANI17 (100-pin products of RL78/F14) These are analog input pins of the A/D converter. For details, see 12.10 (5) Analog input (ANIn) pins. (b) ANI10 to ANI15, ANI26, ANI27 (80-pin products of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated)) These are analog input pins of the A/D converter. For details, see 12.10 (5) Analog input (ANIn) pins. 2.2.10 P100 to P107 (Port 10) P100 to P107 function as an I/O port. These pins are provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. These pins also function as A/D converter analog input and LIN serial data I/O. For P106 and P107, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 10 (PU10). For the P107 pin, the input threshold level can be specified using the port input threshold control register 10 (PITHL10). The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P100 to P107 function as an I/O port. These pins can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 10 (PM10). (2) Control mode P100 to P107 function as A/D converter analog input and LIN serial data I/O. (a) ANI18 to ANI23 These are analog input pins of the A/D converter. For details, see 12.10 (5) Analog input (ANIn) pins. (b) LTXD1 This is a serial data output pin for the LIN. LTXD1 is provided only in 100-pin products of RL78/F14. (c) LRXD1 This is a serial data output pin for the LIN. LRXD1 is provided only in 100-pin products of RL78/F14. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 77 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.2.11 P120 to P127 (Port 12) The 100-pin products of RL78/F14 has P120 and P125 to P127 I/O port pins, and the 80-pin products of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) has P120, P125, and P126 I/O port pins. P121 to P124 are input port pins and provided in both products. These pins also function as A/D converter analog input, external interrupt request input, resonator connection for the main system clock, resonator connection for the subsystem clock, external clock input for the main system clock, external clock input for the subsystem clock, serial interface slave select input, serial interface data output, timer I/O, and SNOOZE status output. Only for the P120 and P125 to P127 pins, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 12 (PU12). For input to the P125 pin, a CMOS input buffer or a TTL input buffer can be selected using the port input mode register 12 (PIM12). For output from the P120 pin, CMOS output or N-ch open-drain output can be selected using the port output mode register 12 (POM12). For the P125 pin, the input threshold level can be specified using the port input threshold control register 12 (PITHL12). Input to the P120 and P125 pins can be specified as digital I/O or analog input in 1-bit units, using port mode control register 12 (PMC12). The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P120 and P125 to P127 function as I/O port pins. These pins can be set to input or output port using port mode register 12 (PM12). P121 to P124 function as input port pins. (2) Control mode P120 to P127 function as A/D converter analog input, external interrupt request input, resonator connection for the main system clock, resonator connection for the subsystem clock, external clock input for the main system clock, external clock input for the subsystem clock, serial interface slave select input, serial interface data output, timer I/O, and SNOOZE status output. (a) ANI24, ANI25 These are analog input pins of the A/D converter. For details, see 12.10 (5) Analog input (ANIn) pins. (b) INTP1, INTP4 These are external interrupt request input pins for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified. (c) X1, X2 These are resonator connection pins for the main system clock. (d) EXCLK This is an external clock input pin for the main system clock. (e) XT1, XT2 These are resonator connection pins for the subsystem clock. (f) EXCLKS This is an external clock input pin for the subsystem clock. (g) SSI01 This is a slave select input pin of the CSI01 (SPI01) serial interface. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 78 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (h) SO01 This is a serial data output pin of the CSI01 serial interface. (i) TI01, TI03, TI07 These are pins for inputting an external count clock/capture trigger to 16-bit timers. (j) TO01, TO03, TO07 These are timer output pins of 16-bit timers. (k) SNZOUT1 This is a SNOOZE status output pin. (l) TRDIOB0, TRDIOD0 These are timer I/O pins of timer RD. 2.2.12 P130, P137 (Port 13) P130 functions as an output port. P137 functions as an input port. These pins also function as external interrupt request input and reset output. (1) Port mode P130 functions as an output port. P137 functions as an input port. (2) Control mode P130 and P137 function as external interrupt request input and reset output. (a) INTP0 This is an external interrupt request input pin for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be specified. (b) RESOUT This is a reset output pin. 2.2.13 P140 (Port 14) P140 functions as an I/O port. This pin also functions as clock/buzzer output. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 14 (PU14). The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units. (1) Port mode P140 functions as an I/O port. This pin can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 14 (PM14). (2) Control mode P140 functions as clock/buzzer output. (a) PCLBUZ0 This is a clock/buzzer output pin. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 79 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.2.14 P150 to P157 (Port 15) P150 to P157 function as an I/O port. These pins also function as serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, timer I/O, slave select input, and SNOOZE status output. These pins are provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 15 (PU15). For the P150, P152, and P153 pins, the input threshold level can be specified using the port input threshold control register 15 (PITHL15). (1) Port mode P150 to P157 function as an I/O port. These pins can be set to input or output port in 1-bit units using port mode register 15 (PM15). (2) Control mode P150 to P157 function as serial interface slave select input, data I/O, clock I/O, and SNOOZE status output. (a) SSI11 This is a slave select input pin of the CSI11 (SPI11) serial interface. (b) SI11 This is a serial data input pin of the CSI11 serial interface. (c) SO11 This is a serial data output pin of the CSI11 serial interface. (d) SCK11 This is a serial clock I/O pin of the CSI11 serial interface. (e) SNZOUT4 to SNZOUT7 These are SNOOZE status output pins. 2.2.15 VDD, EVDD0, EVDD1, VSS, EVSS0, EVSS1 (1) VDD, EVDD0, EVDD1 VDD is a positive power supply pin for the P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97 Note, P100 to P105, P121 to P124, P137 and the pins other than ports. EVDD0 and EVDD1 are positive power supply pins for ports other than P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97 Note, P100 to P105, P121 to P124, and P137. EVDD1 is provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. Note In products with 48 or fewer pins, VDD is the positive power supply pin for all port pins. In products with 64 or more pins, VDD and EVDD0 are the positive power supply pins for P92 to P95 of products of groups B to E and of group A, respectively. In products with 64 or more pins, VDD and EVDD0 are the positive power supply pins for P96 and P97 of products of group E and of groups A to D, respectively. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 80 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS (2) VSS, EVSS0, EVSS1 VSS is a ground potential pin for P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97 Note, P100 to P105, P121 to P124, P137 and the pins other than ports. EVSS0 and EVSS1 are ground potential pins for ports other than P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97 Note, P100 to P105, P121 to P124, and P137. EVSS1 is provided only in the 100-pin products of RL78/F14. Note In products with 48 or fewer pins, Vss is the ground potential pin for all port pins. In products with 64 or more pins, Vss and EVss0 are the ground potential pins for P92 to P95 of products of groups B to E and of group A, respectively. In products with 64 or more pins, Vss and EVss0 are the ground potential pins for P96 and P97 of products of group E and of groups A to D, respectively. Remark Use bypass capacitors (about 0.1 F) as noise and latch-up countermeasures with relatively thick wires at the shortest distance to VDD to VSS, EVDD0 to EVSS0 and EVDD1 to EVSS1 lines. 2.2.16 RESET This is an active-low system reset input pin. When the external reset pin is not used, connect this pin directly or via a resistor to VDD. When the external reset pin is used, design the circuit based on VDD. 2.2.17 REGC This is the pin for connecting regulator output stabilization capacitance for internal operation. Connect this pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1 F). Use a capacitor with good characteristics because it is used to stabilize internal voltage. REGC VSS Caution Keep the wiring length as short as possible for the broken-line part in the above figure. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 81 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS 2.3 Recommended Connection of Unused Pins Tables 2-6 and 2-7 show the recommended connections of unused pins taking the 100-pin products of RL78/F14 and the 80-pin products of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) as examples. Table 2-6. Connection of Unused Pins (100-Pin Products of RL78/F14) (1/3) Pin Name P00/(TI05)/(TO05)/INTP9 P01/(TI04)/(TO04) P02/(TI06)/(TO06) I/O I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins Input: Independently connect to EVDD0 and EVDD1, or EVSS0 and EVSS1 via a resistor. Output: Leave open. P03/(RTC1HZ) P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/ LTXD1/CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/ RXD1/LRXD1/CRXD0 P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/ TXD1/SNZOUT3 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/ SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/ LRXD0 P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/ (TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/ RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/ RXD0/TOOLRXD P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/ INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/ SNZOUT0 P31/TI14/TO14/STOPST/(INTP2) P32/TI16/TO16/INTP7 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 Input: Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor. P34/AVREFM/ANI1 Output: Leave open. P40/TOOL0 Input: Independently connect to EVDD0 and EVDD1, or EVSS0 and EVSS1 via P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/VCOUT0/ a resistor. SNZOUT2 Output: Leave open. P42/(LTXD0) P43/(LRXD0) P44/(TI07)/(TO07) P45/(TI10)/(TO10) P46/(TI12)/(TO12) P47/INTP13 Remark Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 82 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-6. Connection of Unused Pins (100-Pin Products of RL78/F14) (2/3) Pin Name P50/(SSI01)/(INTP3) P51/(SO01)/INTP11 P52/(SCK01)/(STOPST) I/O I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins Input: Independently connect to EVDD0 and EVDD1, or EVSS0 and EVSS1 via a resistor. Output: Leave open. P53/(SI01)/INTP10 P54/(TI11)/(TO11)/SSI10 P55/(TI13)/(TO13) P56/(TI15)/(TO15)/(SNZOUT1) P57/(TI17)/(TO17)/(SNZOUT0) P60/(SCK00)/(SCL00) P61/(SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) P62/(SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 P63/(SSI00)/SDAA0 P64/(TI14)/(TO14)/(SNZOUT3) P65/(TI16)/(TO16)/(SNZOUT2) P66/(TI00)/(TO00) P67/(TI02)/(TO02) P70/ANI26/KR0/TI15/TO15/INTP8/ SI11/SDA11/SNZOUT4 P71/ANI27/KR1/TI17/TO17/INTP6/ SCK11/SCL11/SNZOUT5 P72/ANI28/KR2/(CTXD0)/SO11/SNZOUT6 P73/ANI29/KR3/(CRXD0)/SSI11/ SNZOUT7 P74/ANI30/KR4/(SO10)/(TXD1) P75/KR5/(SI10)/(RXD1) P76/KR6/(SCK10) P77/KR7/(SSI10)/INTP12 P80/ANI2/ANO0 Input: Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor. P81/ANI3/IVCMP00 Output: Leave open. P82/ANI4/IVCMP01 P83/ANI5/IVCMP02 P84/ANI6/IVCMP03 P85/ANI7/IVREF0 P86/ANI8 P87/ANI9 P90/ANI10 P91/ANI11 P92/ANI12 P93/ANI13 P94/ANI14 P95/ANI15 P96/ANI16 P97/ANI17 Remark Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 83 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-6. Connection of Unused Pins (100-Pin Products of RL78/F14) (3/3) Pin Name P100/ANI18 I/O I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins Input: Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor. Output: Leave open. P101/ANI19 P102/ANI20 P103/ANI21 P104/ANI22 P105/ANI23 P106/(LTXD1) Input: Independently connect to EVDD0 and EVDD1, or EVSS0 and EVSS1 via a P107/(LRXD1) resistor. Output: Leave open. P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/ INTP4 P121/X1 Input Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor. P122/X2/EXCLK P123/XT1 P124/XT2/EXCLKS P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/ I/O Input: Independently connect to EVDD0 and EVDD1, or EVSS0 and EVSS1 via a SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 resistor. P126/(TI01)/(TO01) Output: Leave open. P127/(TI03)/(TO03) P130/RESOUT Output Leave open. P137/INTP0 Input Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor. P140/PCLBUZ0 I/O Input: Independently connect to EVDD0 and EVDD1, or EVSS0 and EVSS1 via a resistor. P150/(SSI11) Output: Leave open. P151/(SO11) P152/(SI11) P153/(SCK11) P154/(SNZOUT7) P155/(SNZOUT6) P156/(SNZOUT5) P157/(SNZOUT4) RESET Input Connect to VDD directly or via a resistor. REGC Connect to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1 F). Remark Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 84 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-7. Connection of Unused Pins (80-Pin Products of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated)) (1/3) Pin Name P00/(TI05)/(TO05)/INTP9 P01/(TI04)/(TO04) I/O I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins Input: Independently connect to EVDD0 or EVSS0 via a resistor. Output: Leave open. P02/(TI06)/(TO06) P10/TI13/TO13/TRJO0/SCK10/SCL10/ CTXD0 P11/TI12/TO12/(TRDIOB0)/SI10/SDA10/ RXD1/CRXD0 P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/INTP5/SO10/ TXD1/SNZOUT3 P13/TI04/TO04/TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/SI01/ SDA01/LTXD0 P14/TI06/TO06/TRDIOC0/SCK01/SCL01/ LRXD0 P15/TI05/TO05/TRDIOA1/(TRDIOA0)/ (TRDCLK0)/SO00/TXD0/TOOLTXD/ RTC1HZ P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/SI00/SDA00/ RXD0/TOOLRXD P17/TI00/TO00/TRDIOB1/SCK00/SCL00/ INTP3 P30/TI01/TO01/TRDIOD1/SSI00/INTP2/ SNZOUT0 P31/STOPST/(INTP2) P32/INTP7 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 Input: Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor. P34/AVREFM/ANI1 Output: Leave open. P40/TOOL0 Input: Independently connect to EVDD0 or EVSS0 via a resistor. P41/TI10/TO10/TRJIO0/SNZOUT2 Output: Leave open. P42/(LTXD0) P43/(LRXD0) P44/(TI07)/(TO07) P45/(TI10)/(TO10) P46/(TI12)/(TO12) P47 Remark Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 85 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Table 2-7. Connection of Unused Pins (80-Pin Products of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated)) (2/3) Pin Name P50/(SSI01)/(INTP3) P51/(SO01)/INTP11 I/O I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins Input: Independently connect to EVDD0 or EVSS0 via a resistor. Output: Leave open. P52/(SCK01)/(STOPST) P53/(SI01)/INTP10 P54/(TI11)/(TO11)/SSI10 P55/(TI13)/(TO13) P56/(SNZOUT1) P57/(SNZOUT0) P60/(SCK00)/(SCL00) P61/(SI00)/(SDA00)/(RXD0) P62/(SO00)/(TXD0)/SCLA0 P63/(SSI00)/SDAA0 P64/(SNZOUT3) P65/(SNZOUT2) P66/(TI00)/(TO00) P67/(TI02)/(TO02) P70/KR0/INTP8/SI11/SDA11/SNZOUT4 P71/KR1/INTP6/SCK11/SCL11/SNZOUT5 P72/KR2/(CTXD0)/SO11/SNZOUT6 P73/KR3/(CRXD0)/SSI11/SNZOUT7 P74/KR4/(SO10)/(TXD1) P75/KR5/(SI10)/(RXD1) P76/KR6/(SCK10) P77/KR7/(SSI10) P80/ANI2 Input: Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor. P81/ANI3 Output: Leave open. P82/ANI4 P83/ANI5 P84/ANI6 P85/ANI7 P86/ANI8 P87/ANI9 P90/ANI10 P91/ANI11 P92/ANI12 P93/ANI13 P94/ANI14 P95/ANI15 P96/ANI26 Input: Independently connect to EVDD0 or EVSS0 via a resistor. P97/ANI27 Output: Leave open. P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/ INTP4 Remark Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR). Table 2-7. Connection of Unused Pins (80-Pin Products of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated)) (3/3) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 86 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS Pin Name P121/X1 I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins Input Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor. I/O Input: Independently connect to EVDD0 or EVSS0 via a resistor. P122/X2/EXCLK P123/XT1 P124/XT2/EXCLKS P125/ANI24/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/ INTP1/SNZOUT1 Output: Leave open. P126/(TI01)/(TO01) P130/RESOUT Output Leave open. P137/INTP0 Input Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor. P140/PCLBUZ0 I/O Input: Independently connect to EVDD0 or EVSS0 via a resistor. Output: Leave open. RESET Input Connect to VDD directly or via a resistor. REGC Connect to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1 F). Remark Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 87 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.1 Memory Space Products in the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 can access a 1 MB memory space. Figures 3-1 to 3-17 show the memory maps. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 88 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-1. Memory Map (R5F10AmA (m = 6, A, B, G)) 03FFFH FFFFFH 03FFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH Program area General-purpose register 32 bytes Notes 1, 2 RAM 1 KB FFB00H FFAFFH 020CEH 020CDH Reserved F4000H F3FFFH Mirror 8 KB F2000H F1FFFH Data flash memory 4 KB F1000H F0FFFH 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 1 CALLT table area 64 bytes 02080H 0207FH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Vector table area 128 bytes Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Data memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes F0000H EFFFFH 02000H 01FFFH Program area 000CEH 000CDH Reserved 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Program memory space 04000H 03FFFH 00000H Code flash memory 16 KB 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 89 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-2. Memory Map (R5F10AmC (m = 6, A, B, G, L)) 07FFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes Notes 1, 2 RAM 2 KB Program area FF700H FF6FFH Reserved F8000H F7FFFH Mirror 24 KB F2000H F1FFFH 03FFFH Data flash memory 4 KB F1000H F0FFFH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Data memory space F0000H EFFFFH 020CEH 020CDH 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Reserved Program area 000CEH 000CDH 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 08000H 07FFFH Program memory space Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 32 KB 00000H On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 90 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-3. Memory Map (R5F10BmC (m = A, B, G, L)) 07FFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes Notes 1, 2 RAM 2 KB Program area FF700H FF6FFH Reserved F8000H F7FFFH Mirror 24 KB F2000H F1FFFH 03FFFH Data flash memory 4 KB F1000H F0FFFH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Data memory space F0000H EFFFFH 020CEH 020CDH 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Reserved Program area 000CEH 000CDH 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 08000H 07FFFH Program memory space Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 32 KB 00000H On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 91 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-4. Memory Map (R5F10AmD (m = 6, A, B, G, L)) 0BFFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes RAM Notes 1, 2, 5, 6 3 KB Program area FF300H FF2FFH Reserved FC000H FBFFFH F2000H F1FFFH Mirror 40 KB 03FFFH Data flash memory 4 KB F1000H F0FFFH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Data memory space F0000H EFFFFH 020CEH 020CDH 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Reserved Program area 000CEH 000CDH 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 0C000H 0BFFFH Program memory space Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 48 KB 00000H On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). 5. The debugger uses the area FF300H to FF37FH to store the result of tracing when the tracing function for onchip debugging is in use. Accordingly, use of this area is prohibited while the tracing function is in use. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 92 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 6. The debugger uses the area FF400H to FF42FH as a working area when the hot plug-in function is in use or when the DTC is in use for the real-time RAM monitor (RRM) or dynamic memory modification (DMM) function. Accordingly, use of this area is prohibited while the hot plug-in function is in use or the DTC is in use for the RRM or DMM function. Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 93 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-5. Memory Map (R5F10BmD (m = A, B, G, L)) 0BFFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes RAM Notes 1, 2 3 KB Program area FF300H FF2FFH Reserved FC000H FBFFFH F2000H F1FFFH Mirror 40 KB 03FFFH Data flash memory 4 KB F1000H F0FFFH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Data memory space F0000H EFFFFH 020CEH 020CDH 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Reserved Program area 000CEH 000CDH 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 0C000H 0BFFFH Program memory space Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 48 KB 00000H On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 94 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-6. Memory Map (R5F10PmD (m = A, B, G)) 0BFFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes RAM Notes 1, 2 4 KB Program area FEF00H FEEFFH Reserved FC000H FBFFFH F2000H F1FFFH Mirror 40 KB 03FFFH Data flash memory 4 KB F1000H F0FFFH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Data memory space F0000H EFFFFH 020CEH 020CDH 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Reserved Program area 000CEH 000CDH 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 0C000H 0BFFFH Program memory space Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 48 KB 00000H On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 95 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-7. Memory Map (R5F10AmE (m = 6, A, B, G, L)) 0FFFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes Program area RAM Notes 1, 2, 5, 6 4 KB FEF00H FEEFFH Mirror 51.75 KB 03FFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH F0800H F07FFH Data flash memory 4 KB 020CEH 020CDH Reserved 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Data memory space F0000H EFFFFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Reserved Program area 000CEH 000CDH 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 10000H 0FFFFH Program memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 64 KB 00000H 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. Also, use of the area FEF00H to FF2FFH is prohibited, because this area is used for each library. However, the area to which this prohibition applies may vary with the version of the library. For details, refer to the manual for the individual library. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 96 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). 5. The debugger uses the area FF300H to FF37FH to store the result of tracing when the tracing function for onchip debugging is in use. Accordingly, use of this area is prohibited while the tracing function is in use. 6. The debugger uses the area FF400H to FF42FH as a working area when the hot plug-in function is in use or when the DTC is in use for the real-time RAM monitor (RRM) or dynamic memory modification (DMM) function. Accordingly, use of this area is prohibited while the hot plug-in function is in use or the DTC is in use for the RRM or DMM function. Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 97 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-8. Memory Map (R5F10AME, R5F10BmE (m = A, B, G, L, M)) 0FFFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes Program area Notes 1, 2 RAM 4 KB FEF00H FEEFFH Reserved FDF00H FDEFFH 03FFFH Mirror 47.75 KB F2000H F1FFFH 020CEH 020CDH Data flash memory 4 KB F1000H F0FFFH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Data memory space Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH F0000H EFFFFH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Program area 000CEH 000CDH Reserved 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 10000H 0FFFFH Program memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 64 KB 00000H 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 98 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-9. Memory Map (R5F10PmE (m = A, B, G, L, M)) 0FFFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes Program area RAM Notes 1, 2 6 KB FE700H FE6FFH Reserved FDF00H FDEFFH 03FFFH Mirror 47.75 KB F2000H F1FFFH 020CEH 020CDH Data flash memory 4 KB F1000H F0FFFH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Data memory space Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH F0000H EFFFFH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Program area 000CEH 000CDH Reserved 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 10000H 0FFFFH Program memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 64 KB 00000H 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 99 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-10. Memory Map (R5F10PPE) 0FFFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes Program area Notes 1, 2 RAM 6 KB FE700H FE6FFH Reserved FAF00H FAEFFH 03FFFH Mirror 31.75 KB F3000H F2FFFH 020CEH 020CDH Reserved F2000H F1FFFH Data flash memory 4 KB F1000H F0FFFH Data memory space 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB F0000H EFFFFH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Program area 000CEH 000CDH Reserved 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 10000H 0FFFFH Program memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 64 KB 00000H 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 100 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-11. Memory Map (R5F10AmF (m = G, L, M), R5F10BmF (m = A, B, G, L, M)) 17FFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes Program area Notes 1, 2 RAM 6 KB FE700H FE6FFH Reserved FDF00H FDEFFH 03FFFH Mirror 47.75 KB F2000H F1FFFH 020CEH 020CDH Data flash memory 4 KB F1000H F0FFFH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Data memory space Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH F0000H EFFFFH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Program area 000CEH 000CDH Reserved 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 10000H 0FFFFH Program memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 96 KB 00000H 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 101 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-12. Memory Map (R5F10PmF (m = G, L, M)) 17FFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes Program area RAM Notes 1, 2, 5, 6 8 KB FDF00H FDEFFH Mirror 47.75 KB F2000H F1FFFH 03FFFH Data flash memory 4 KB F1000H F0FFFH 020CEH 020CDH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB F0000H EFFFFH 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH Data memory space Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Reserved Program area 000CEH 000CDH 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 18000H 17FFFH Program memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 96 KB 00000H 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. Also, use of the area FDF00H to FE2FFH is prohibited, because this area is used for each library. However, the area to which this prohibition applies may vary with the version of the library. For details, refer to the manual for the individual library. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 102 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 5. The debugger uses the area FE300H to FE4FFH to store the result of tracing when the tracing function for on-chip debugging is in use. Accordingly, use of this area is prohibited while the tracing function is in use. 6. The debugger uses the area FE500H to FE52FH as a working area when the hot plug-in function is in use or when the DTC is in use for the real-time RAM monitor (RRM) or dynamic memory modification (DMM) function. Accordingly, use of this area is prohibited while the hot plug-in function is in use or the DTC is in use for the RRM or DMM function. Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 103 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-13. Memory Map (R5F10PPF) 17FFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes Program area RAM Notes 1, 2 8 KB FDF00H FDEFFH Reserved FAF00H FAEFFH 03FFFH Mirror 31.75 KB 020CEH 020CDH F3000H F2FFFH Reserved F2000H F1FFFH Data flash memory 4 KB F1000H F0FFFH Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH Reserved Data memory space 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes F0800H F07FFH Vector table area 128 bytes Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB F0000H EFFFFH 02000H 01FFFH Program area 000CEH 000CDH Reserved 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 18000H 17FFFH Program memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 96 KB 00000H 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 104 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-14. Memory Map (R5F10AmG (m = G, L, M), R5F10BnG (n = A, B, G, L, M)) 1FFFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes Program area RAM Notes 1, 2, 5, 6 8 KB FDF00H FDEFFH Mirror 47.75 KB F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH F0800H F07FFH 03FFFH Data flash memory 4 KB 020CEH 020CDH Reserved 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Data memory space F0000H EFFFFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Reserved Program area 000CEH 000CDH 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 20000H 1FFFFH Program memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 128 KB 00000H 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. Also, use of the area FDF00H to FE2FFH is prohibited, because this area is used for each library. However, the area to which this prohibition applies may vary with the version of the library. For details, refer to the manual for the individual library. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 105 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 5. The debugger uses the area FE300H to FE4FFH to store the result of tracing when the tracing function for on-chip debugging is in use. Accordingly, use of this area is prohibited while the tracing function is in use. 6. The debugger uses the area FE500H to FE52FH as a working area when the hot plug-in function is in use or when the DTC is in use for the real-time RAM monitor (RRM) or dynamic memory modification (DMM) function. Accordingly, use of this area is prohibited while the hot plug-in function is in use or the DTC is in use for the RRM or DMM function. Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 106 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-15. Memory Map (R5F10PmG (m = G, L, M, P)) 1FFFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes Program area Notes 1, 2 RAM 10 KB FD700H FD6FFH Reserved FAF00H FAEFFH F3000H F2FFFH 020CEH 020CDH Data flash memory 8 KB F1000H F0FFFH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Data memory space 03FFFH Mirror 31.75 KB Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH F0000H EFFFFH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Program area Reserved 000CEH 000CDH 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes 00080H 0007FH 20000H 1FFFFH Program memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 128 KB 00000H 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 107 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-16. Memory Map (R5F10PmH (m = G, L, M, P)) 2FFFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes RAM Notes 1, 2 16 KB Program area FBF00H FBEFFH Reserved FAF00H FAEFFH 03FFFH F3000H F2FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Mirror 31.75 KB 020CEH 020CDH Data flash memory 8 KB 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Data memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH F0000H EFFFFH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Reserved Program area 000CEH 000CDH 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes 00080H 0007FH 30000H 2FFFFH Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 192 KB Program memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes 00000H 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 108 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-17. Memory Map (R5F10PmJ (m = G, L, M, P)) 3FFFFH FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes Program area RAM Notes 1, 2, 5, 6 20 KB FAF00H FAEFFH Mirror 31.75 KB F3000H F2FFFH F1000H F0FFFH F0800H F07FFH 03FFFH Data flash memory 8 KB 020CEH 020CDH Reserved 020C4H 020C3H 020C0H 020BFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Data memory space F0000H EFFFFH On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes CALLT table area 64 bytes Boot cluster 1 02080H 0207FH Vector table area 128 bytes 02000H 01FFFH Reserved Program area 000CEH 000CDH 000C4H 000C3H 000C0H 000BFH 00080H 0007FH 40000H 3FFFFH Program memory space On-chip debug security ID setting area Note 3 10 bytes Option byte area Note 3 4 bytes Boot cluster 0 Note 4 CALLT table area 64 bytes Vector table area 128 bytes Code flash memory 256 KB 00000H 00000H Notes 1. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. Also, use of the area FAF00H to FB2FFH is prohibited, because this area is used for each library. However, the area to which this prohibition applies may vary with the version of the library. For details, refer to the manual for the individual library. 2. Instructions can be executed from the RAM area excluding the general-purpose register area. 3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H, and the on-chip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH. When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 000C0H to 000C3H and 020C0H to 020C3H, and the onchip debug security IDs to 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH. 4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 30.6 Security Settings). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 109 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 5. The debugger uses the area FB300H to FB4FFH to store the result of tracing when the tracing function for on-chip debugging is in use. Accordingly, use of this area is prohibited while the tracing function is in use. 6. The debugger uses the area FB500H to FB52FH as a working area when the hot plug-in function is in use or when the DTC is in use for the real-time RAM monitor (RRM) or dynamic memory modification (DMM) function. Accordingly, use of this area is prohibited while the hot plug-in function is in use or the DTC is in use for the RRM or DMM function. Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 110 RL78/F13, F14 Remark CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE The flash memory is divided into blocks (one block = 1 KB). For the address values and block numbers, see Table 3-1 Correspondence between Address Values and Block Numbers in Flash Memory. 1FFFFH Block 7FH 1FC00H 1FBFFH 007FFH 00400H 003FFH Block 01H Block 00H 1 KB 00000H (R5F10BMG) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 111 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Correspondence between the address values and block numbers in the flash memory are shown below. Table 3-1. Correspondence between Address Values and Block Numbers in Flash Memory (1/2) Address Value Block Address Value Number Block Address Value Number Block Address Value Number Block Number 00000H to 003FFH 00H 08000H to 083FFH 20H 10000H to 103FFH 40H 18000H to 183FFH 60H 00400H to 007FFH 01H 08400H to 087FFH 21H 10400H to 107FFH 41H 18400H to 187FFH 61H 00800H to 00BFFH 02H 08800H to 08BFFH 22H 10800H to 10BFFH 42H 18800H to 18BFFH 62H 00C00H to 00FFFH 03H 08C00H to 08FFFH 23H 10C00H to 10FFFH 43H 18C00H to 18FFFH 63H 01000H to 013FFH 04H 09000H to 093FFH 24H 11000H to 113FFH 44H 19000H to 193FFH 64H 01400H to 017FFH 05H 09400H to 097FFH 25H 11400H to 117FFH 45H 19400H to 197FFH 65H 01800H to 01BFFH 06H 09800H to 09BFFH 26H 11800H to 11BFFH 46H 19800H to 19BFFH 66H 01C00H to 01FFFH 07H 09C00H to 09FFFH 27H 11C00H to 11FFFH 47H 19C00H to 19FFFH 67H 02000H to 023FFH 08H 0A000H to 0A3FFH 28H 12000H to 123FFH 48H 1A000H to 1A3FFH 68H 02400H to 027FFH 09H 0A400H to 0A7FFH 29H 12400H to 127FFH 49H 1A400H to 1A7FFH 69H 02800H to 02BFFH 0AH 0A800H to 0ABFFH 2AH 12800H to 12BFFH 4AH 1A800H to 1ABFFH 6AH 02C00H to 02FFFH 0BH 0AC00H to 0AFFFH 2BH 12C00H to 12FFFH 4BH 1AC00H to 1AFFFH 6BH 03000H to 033FFH 0CH 0B000H to 0B3FFH 2CH 13000H to 133FFH 4CH 1B000H to 1B3FFH 6CH 03400H to 037FFH 0DH 0B400H to 0B7FFH 2DH 13400H to 137FFH 4DH 1B400H to 1B7FFH 6DH 03800H to 03BFFH 0EH 0B800H to 0BBFFH 2EH 13800H to 13BFFH 4EH 1B800H to 1BBFFH 6EH 03C00H to 03FFFH 0FH 0BC00H to 0BFFFH 2FH 13C00H to 13FFFH 4FH 1BC00H to 1BFFFH 6FH 04000H to 043FFH 10H 0C000H to 0C3FFH 30H 14000H to 143FFH 50H 1C000H to 1C3FFH 70H 04400H to 047FFH 11H 0C400H to 0C7FFH 31H 14400H to 147FFH 51H 1C400H to 1C7FFH 71H 04800H to 04BFFH 12H 0C800H to 0CBFFH 32H 14800H to 14BFFH 52H 1C800H to 1CBFFH 72H 04C00H to 04FFFH 13H 0CC00H to 0CFFFH 33H 14C00H to 14FFFH 53H 1CC00H to 1CFFFH 73H 05000H to 053FFH 14H 0D000H to 0D3FFH 34H 15000H to 153FFH 54H 1D000H to 1D3FFH 74H 05400H to 057FFH 15H 0D400H to 0D7FFH 35H 15400H to 157FFH 55H 1D400H to 1D7FFH 75H 05800H to 05BFFH 16H 0D800H to 0DBFFH 36H 15800H to 15BFFH 56H 1D800H to 1DBFFH 76H 05C00H to 05FFFH 17H 0DC00H to 0DFFFH 37H 15C00H to 15FFFH 57H 1DC00H to 1DFFFH 77H 06000H to 063FFH 18H 0E000H to 0E3FFH 38H 16000H to 163FFH 58H 1E000H to 1E3FFH 78H 06400H to 067FFH 19H 0E400H to 0E7FFH 39H 16400H to 167FFH 59H 1E400H to 1E7FFH 79H 06800H to 06BFFH 1AH 0E800H to 0EBFFH 3AH 16800H to 16BFFH 5AH 1E800H to 1EBFFH 7AH 06C00H to 06FFFH 1BH 0EC00H to 0EFFFH 3BH 16C00H to 16FFFH 5BH 1EC00H to 1EFFFH 7BH 07000H to 073FFH 1CH 0F000H to 0F3FFH 3CH 17000H to 173FFH 5CH 1F000H to 1F3FFH 7CH 07400H to 077FFH 1DH 0F400H to 0F7FFH 3DH 17400H to 177FFH 5DH 1F400H to 1F7FFH 7DH 07800H to 07BFFH 1EH 0F800H to 0FBFFH 3EH 17800H to 17BFFH 5EH 1F800H to 1FBFFH 7EH 07C00H to 07FFFH 1FH 0FC00H to 0FFFFH 3FH 17C00H to 17FFFH 5FH 1FC00H to 1FFFFH 7FH R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 112 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-1. Correspondence between Address Values and Block Numbers in Flash Memory (2/2) Address Value Block Address Value Number Block Address Value Number Block Address Value Number Block Number 20000H to 203FFH 80H 28000H to 283FFH A0H 30000H to 303FFH C0H 38000H to 383FFH E0H 20400H to 207FFH 81H 28400H to 287FFH A1H 30400H to 307FFH C1H 38400H to 387FFH E1H 20800H to 20BFFH 82H 28800H to 28BFFH A2H 30800H to 30BFFH C2H 38800H to 38BFFH E2H 20C00H to 20FFFH 83H 28C00H to 28FFFH A3H 30C00H to 30FFFH C3H 38C00H to 38FFFH E3H 21000H to 213FFH 84H 29000H to 293FFH A4H 31000H to 313FFH C4H 39000H to 393FFH E4H 21400H to 217FFH 85H 29400H to 297FFH A5H 31400H to 317FFH C5H 39400H to 397FFH E5H 21800H to 21BFFH 86H 29800H to 29BFFH A6H 31800H to 31BFFH C6H 39800H to 39BFFH E6H 21C00H to 21FFFH 87H 29C00H to 29FFFH A7H 31C00H to 31FFFH C7H 39C00H to 39FFFH E7H 22000H to 223FFH 88H 2A000H to 2A3FFH A8H 32000H to 323FFH C8H 3A000H to 3A3FFH E8H 22400H to 227FFH 89H 2A400H to 2A7FFH A9H 32400H to 327FFH C9H 3A400H to 3A7FFH E9H 22800H to 22BFFH 8AH 2A800H to 2ABFFH AAH 32800H to 32BFFH CAH 3A800H to 3ABFFH EAH 22C00H to 22FFFH 8BH 2AC00H to 2AFFFH ABH 32C00H to 32FFFH CBH 3AC00H to 3AFFFH EBH 23000H to 233FFH 8CH 2B000H to 2B3FFH ACH 33000H to 333FFH CCH 3B000H to 3B3FFH ECH 23400H to 237FFH 8DH 2B400H to 2B7FFH ADH 33400H to 337FFH CDH 3B400H to 3B7FFH EDH 23800H to 23BFFH 8EH 2B800H to 2BBFFH AEH 33800H to 33BFFH CEH 3B800H to 3BBFFH EEH 23C00H to 23FFFH 8FH 2BC00H to 2BFFFH AFH 33C00H to 33FFFH CFH 3BC00H to 3BFFFH EFH 24000H to 243FFH 90H 2C000H to 2C3FFH B0H 34000H to 343FFH D0H 3C000H to 3C3FFH F0H 24400H to 247FFH 91H 2C400H to 2C7FFH B1H 34400H to 347FFH D1H 3C400H to 3C7FFH F1H 24800H to 24BFFH 92H 2C800H to 2CBFFH B2H 34800H to 34BFFH D2H 3C800H to 3CBFFH F2H 24C00H to 24FFFH 93H 2CC00H to 2CFFFH B3H 34C00H to 34FFFH D3H 3CC00H to 3CFFFH F3H 25000H to 253FFH 94H 2D000H to 2D3FFH B4H 35000H to 353FFH D4H 3D000H to 3D3FFH F4H 25400H to 257FFH 95H 2D400H to 2D7FFH B5H 35400H to 357FFH D5H 3D400H to 3D7FFH F5H 25800H to 25BFFH 96H 2D800H to 2DBFFH B6H 35800H to 35BFFH D6H 3D800H to 3DBFFH F6H 25C00H to 25FFFH 97H 2DC00H to 2DFFFH B7H 35C00H to 35FFFH D7H 3DC00H to 3DFFFH F7H 26000H to 263FFH 98H 2E000H to 2E3FFH B8H 36000H to 363FFH D8H 3E000H to 3E3FFH F8H 26400H to 267FFH 99H 2E400H to 2E7FFH B9H 36400H to 367FFH D9H 3E400H to 3E7FFH F9H 26800H to 26BFFH 9AH 2E800H to 2EBFFH BAH 36800H to 36BFFH DAH 3E800H to 3EBFFH FAH 26C00H to 26FFFH 9BH 2EC00H to 2EFFFH BBH 36C00H to 36FFFH DBH 3EC00H to 3EFFFH FBH 27000H to 273FFH 9CH 2F000H to 2F3FFH BCH 37000H to 373FFH DCH 3F000H to 3F3FFH FCH 27400H to 277FFH 9DH 2F400H to 2F7FFH BDH 37400H to 377FFH DDH 3F400H to 3F7FFH FDH 27800H to 27BFFH 9EH 2F800H to 2FBFFH BEH 37800H to 37BFFH DEH 3F800H to 3FBFFH FEH 27C00H to 27FFFH 9FH 2FC00H to 2FFFFH BFH 37C00H to 37FFFH DFH 3FC00H to 3FFFFH FFH R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 113 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.1.1 Internal program memory space The internal program memory space stores the program and table data. The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 products incorporate internal ROM (flash memory), as shown below. Table 3-2. Internal ROM Capacity Part Number Internal ROM Structure R5F10AmA (m = 6, A, B, G) Flash memory R5F10AmC (m = 6, A, B, G, L) Capacity 16 Kbytes (00000H-03FFFH) 32 Kbytes (00000H-07FFFH) R5F10BmC (m = A, B, G, L) R5F10AmD (m = 6, A, B, G, L) 48 Kbytes (00000H-0BFFFH) R5F10BmD (m = A, B, G, L) R5F10PmD (m = A, B,G) R5F10AmE (m = 6, A, B, G, L, M) 64 Kbytes (00000H-0FFFFH) R5F10BmE (m = A, B, G, L, M) R5F10PmE (m = A, B, G, L, M, P) R5F10AmF (m = G, L, M) 96 Kbytes (00000H-17FFFH) R5F10BmF (m = A, B, G, L, M) R5F10PmF (m = G, L, M, P) R5F10AmG (m = G, L, M) 128 Kbytes (00000H-1FFFFH) R5F10BmG (m = A, B, G, L, M) R5F10PmG (m = G, L, M, P) R5F10PmH (m = G, L, M, P) 192 Kbytes (00000H-2FFFFH) R5F10PmJ (m = G, L, M, P) 256 Kbytes (00000H-3FFFFH) The internal program memory space is divided into the following areas. (1) Vector table area The 128-byte area 00000H to 0007FH is reserved as a vector table area. The program start addresses for branch upon reset or generation of each interrupt request are stored in the vector table area. Furthermore, the interrupt jump address is a 64 K address of 00000H to 0FFFFH, because the vector code is assumed to be 2 bytes. Of the 16-bit address, the lower 8 bits are stored at even addresses and the higher 8 bits are stored at odd addresses. To use the boot swap function, set a vector table also at 02000H to 0207FH. Table 3-3 lists the vector table. "" indicates an interrupt source which is supported. "" indicates an interrupt source which is not supported. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 114 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-3. Vector Table (1/2) Vector Table Address Interrupt Source 100-pin 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin 20-pin 0000H RESET, POR, LVD, WDT, TRAP, IAW, CLM 0004H INTWDTI 0006H INTLVI 0008H INTP0 000AH INTP1 000CH INTP2 000EH INTP3 0010H INTP4/INTSPM 0012H INTP5/INTCMP0 0014H INTP13 INTCLM 0016H INTST0 INTCSI00 INTIIC00 INTSR0 INTCSI01 INTIIC01 001AH INTTRD0 001CH INTTRD1 001EH INTTRJ0 0020H INTRAM 0022H INTLIN0TRM 0024H INTLIN0RVC 0026H INTLIN0STA/INTLIN0 0028H INTIICA0 002AH INTP8 INTRTC 002CH INTTM00 002EH INTTM01 0030H INTTM02 0032H INTTM03 0034H INTAD 0036H INTP6 INTTM11H INTP7 INTTM13H 003AH INTP9 INTTM01H 003CH INTP10 INTTM03H 003EH INTST1 INTCSI10 INTIIC10 0018H 0038H R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 115 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-3. Vector Table (2/2) Vector Table Interrupt Source 100-pin 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin 20-pin INTSR1 - INTCSI11 - - - INTIIC11 - - - 0042H INTTM04 0044H INTTM05 0046H INTTM06 0048H INTTM07 004AH INTP11 - - - - INTLIN0WUP 004CH INTKR 004EH INTCAN0ERR - 0050H INTCAN0WUP - 0052H INTCAN0CFR - 0054H INTCAN0TRM - 0056H INTCANGRFR - 0058H INTCANGERR - 005AH INTTM10 - 005CH INTTM11 - 005EH INTTM12 - 0060H INTTM13 - 0062H INTFL 0064H INTP12 - - - - INTLIN1WUP - - - 0066H INTLIN1TRM - - - 0068H INTLIN1RVC - - - 006AH INTLIN1STA/INTLIN1 - - - 006CH INTTM14 - - - 006EH INTTM15 - - - 0070H INTTM16 - - - 0072H INTTM17 - - - 007EH BRK Address 0040H (2) CALLT instruction table area The 64-byte area 00080H to 000BFH can store the subroutine entry address of a 2-byte call instruction (CALLT). Set the subroutine entry address to a value in a range of 00000H to 0FFFFH (because an address code is 2 bytes). To use the boot swap function, set a CALLT instruction table also at 02080H to 020BFH. (3) Option byte area A 4-byte area of 000C0H to 000C3H can be used as an option byte area. Set the option byte at 020C0H to 020C3H when the boot swap is used. For details, see CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 116 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE (4) On-chip debug security ID setting area A 10-byte area of 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C4H to 020CDH can be used as an on-chip debug security ID setting area. Set the on-chip debug security ID of 10 bytes at 000C4H to 000CDH when the boot swap is not used and at 000C4H to 000CDH and at 020C4H to 020CDH when the boot swap is used. For details, see CHAPTER 31 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 117 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.1.2 Mirror area The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 mirror the code flash area of 00000H to 0FFFFH, to F0000H to FFFFFH. The products with 96 KB or more flash memory mirror the code flash area of 00000H to 0FFFFH or 10000H to 1FFFFH, to F0000H to FFFFFH (the code flash area to be mirrored is set by the processor mode control register (PMC)). By reading data from F0000H to FFFFFH, an instruction that does not have the ES register as an operand can be used, and thus the contents of the code flash can be read with the shorter code. However, the code flash area is not mirrored to the SFR, extended SFR, RAM, data flash memory, and use prohibited areas. See 3.1 Memory Space for the mirror area of each product. The mirror area can only be read and no instruction can be fetched from this area. The following show examples. Example R5F10AmE (m = 6, A, B, G, L) (Flash memory: 64 KB, RAM: 4 KB) FFFFFH Special-function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FEF00H FEEFFH General-purpose register 32 bytes RAM 4 KB Mirror (same data as 02000H to 0EEFFH) F2000H F1FFFH Data flash memory F1000H F0FFFH F0800H F07FFH Reserved Special-function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB F0000H EFFFFH Mirror Reserved For example, 0E789H is mirrored to FE789H. Data can therefore be read by MOV A, !E789H, instead of MOV ES, #00H and MOV A, ES:!E789H. 10000H 0FFFFH Code flash memory 0EF00H 0EEFFH Code flash memory 02000H 04FFFH 00000H R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Code flash memory 118 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE The PMC register is described below. Processor mode control register (PMC) This register sets the flash memory space for mirroring to area from F0000H to FFFFFH. The PMC register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Figure 3-18. Format of Configuration of Processor Mode Control Register (PMC) Address: FFFFEH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0> PMC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MAA MAA Selection of flash memory space for mirroring to area from F0000H to FFFFFH 0 00000H to 0FFFFH is mirrored to F0000H to FFFFFH 1 10000H to 1FFFFH is mirrored to F0000H to FFFFFH Note Note This setting is prohibited in products with 64 KB or less flash memory Cautions 1. In products with 64 KB or less flash memory, be sure to clear bit 0 (MAA) of this register to 0 (default value). 2. Set the PMC register only once during the initial settings prior to operating the data transfer controller (DTC). Rewriting the PMC register other than during the initial settings is prohibited. 3. After setting the PMC register, wait for at least one instruction and access the mirror area. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 119 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.1.3 Internal data memory space The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 products incorporate the following RAMs. Table 3-4. Internal RAM Capacity Part Number Internal RAM R5F10AmA (m = 6, A, B, G) 1 Kbyte (FFB00H to FFEFFH) R5F10AmC (m = 6, A, B, G, L) 2 Kbytes (FF700H to FFEFFH) R5F10BmC (m = A, B, G, L) R5F10AmD (m = 6, A, B, G, L) 3 Kbytes (FF300H to FFEFFH) R5F10BmD (m = A, B, G, L) R5F10PmD (m = A, B, G) 4 Kbytes (FEF00H to FFEFFH) R5F10AmE (m = 6, A, B, G, L, M) R5F10BmE (m = A, B, G, L, M) R5F10PmE (m = A, B, G, L, M, P) 6 Kbytes (FE700H to FFEFFH) R5F10AmF (m = G, L, M) R5F10BmF (m = A, B, G, L, M) R5F10PmF (m = G, L, M, P) 8 Kbytes (FDF00H to FFEFFH) R5F10AmG (m = G, L, M) R5F10BmG (m = A, B, G, L, M) R5F10PmG (m = G, L, M, P) 10 Kbytes (FD700H to FFEFFH) R5F10PmH (m = G, L, M, P) 16 Kbytes (FBF00H to FFEFFH) R5F10PmJ (m = G, L, M, P) 20 Kbytes (FAF00H to FFEFFH) The internal RAM can be used as a data area and a program area where instructions are written and executed. Four general-purpose register banks consisting of eight 8-bit registers per bank are assigned to the 32-byte area of FFEE0H to FFEFFH of the internal RAM area. However, instructions cannot be executed by using the general-purpose registers. The internal RAM is used as a stack memory. Cautions 1. It is prohibited to use the general-purpose register (FFEE0H to FFEFFH) space for fetching instructions or as a stack area. 2. Do not allocate RAM addresses which are used as stack area, data buffers used by the libraries, branch destinations for vectored interrupt servicing, or DTC transfer destinations/transfer sources to the area FFE20H to FFEDFH when performing self-programming and rewriting the data flash memory. 3. Using the listed RAM areas in the corresponding products below is prohibited since the respective libraries use them in self-programming and overwriting of the data flash memory. However, the area to which this prohibition applies may vary with the version of the library. For details, refer to the manuals for the individual libraries. R5F10AmE (m = 6, A, B, G, L): FEF00H to FF2FFH R5F10PmF (m = G, L, M): FDF00H to FE2FFH R5F10AmG (m = G, L, M), R5F10BnG (n = A, B, G, L, M): FDF00H to FE2FFH R5F10PmJ (m = G, L, M, P): FAF00H to FB2FFH R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 120 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.1.4 Special function register (SFR) area On-chip peripheral hardware special function registers (SFRs) are allocated in the area FFF00H to FFFFFH (see Table 3-5 SFR List in 3.2.4 Special function registers (SFRs)). Caution Do not access addresses to which SFRs are not assigned. 3.1.5 Extended special function register (2nd SFR: 2nd Special Function Register) area On-chip peripheral hardware special function registers (2nd SFRs) are allocated in the area F0000H to F07FFH (see Table 3-6 Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List in 3.2.5 Extended special function registers (2nd SFRs: 2nd Special Function Registers)). SFRs other than those in the SFR area (FFF00H to FFFFFH) are allocated to this area. An instruction that accesses the extended SFR area, however, is 1 byte longer than an instruction that accesses the SFR area. Caution Do not access addresses to which extended SFRs are not assigned. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 121 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.1.6 Data memory addressing Addressing refers to the method of specifying the address of the instruction to be executed next or the address of the register or memory relevant to the execution of instructions. Several addressing modes are provided for addressing the memory relevant to the execution of instructions for the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14, based on operability and other considerations. For areas containing data memory in particular, special addressing methods designed for the functions of the special function registers (SFR) and general-purpose registers are available for use. Figures 3-19 to 3-35 show correspondence between data memory and addressing. For details of each addressing, see 3.4 Addressing for Processing Data Addresses. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 122 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-19. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10AmA (m = 6, A, B, G)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FFB00H FFAFFH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 1 KB Reserved F4000H F3FFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Mirror 8 KB Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB F0000H EFFFFH Direct addressing Register indirect addressing Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 04000H 03FFFH Code flash memory 16 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 123 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-20. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10AmC (m = 6, A, B, G, L)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FF700H FF6FFH F8000H F7FFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 2 KB Reserved Mirror 24 KB Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Direct addressing Register indirect addressing F0000H EFFFFH Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 08000H 07FFFH Code flash memory 32 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 124 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-21. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10BmC (m = A, B, G, L)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FF700H FF6FFH F8000H F7FFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 2 KB Reserved Mirror 24 KB Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Direct addressing Register indirect addressing F0000H EFFFFH Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 08000H 07FFFH Code flash memory 32 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 125 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-22. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10AmD (m = 6, A, B, G, L)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FF300H FF2FFH FC000H FBFFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH F0800H F07FFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes SFR addressing Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 3 KB Reserved Mirror 40 KB Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB F0000H EFFFFH Direct addressing Register indirect addressing Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 0C000H 0BFFFH Code flash memory 48 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 126 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-23. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10BmD (m = A, B, G, L)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FF300H FF2FFH FC000H FBFFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH F0800H F07FFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes SFR addressing Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 3 KB Reserved Mirror 40 KB Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Direct addressing Register indirect addressing F0000H EFFFFH Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 0C000H 0BFFFH Code flash memory 48 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 127 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-24. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10PmD (m = A, B, G)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FEF00H FEEFFH FC000H FBFFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH F0800H F07FFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes SFR addressing Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 4 KB Reserved Mirror 40 KB Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Direct addressing Register indirect addressing F0000H EFFFFH Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 0C000H 0BFFFH Code flash memory 48 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 128 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-25. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10AmE (m = 6, A, B, G, L)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FEF00H FEEFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 4 KB Mirror 51.75 KB Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB F0000H EFFFFH Direct addressing Register indirect addressing Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 10000H 0FFFFH Code flash memory 64 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 129 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-26. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10AmE, R5F10BmE (m = A, B, G, L, M)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FEF00H FEEFFH FDF00H FDEFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 4 KB Reserved Mirror 47.75 KB Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Direct addressing Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB F0000H EFFFFH Register indirect addressing Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 10000H 0FFFFH Code flash memory 64 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 130 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-27. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10PmE (m = A, B, G, L, M)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FE700H FE6FFH FDF00H FDEFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 6 KB Reserved Mirror 47.75 KB Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Direct addressing Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB F0000H EFFFFH Register indirect addressing Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 10000H 0FFFFH Code flash memory 64 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 131 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-28. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10PPE) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FE700H FE6FFH FAF00H FAEFFH F3000H F2FFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes SFR addressing Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 6 KB Reserved Mirror 31.75 KB Reserved F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Direct addressing Register indirect addressing Based addressing Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Based indexed addressing F0000H EFFFFH Reserved 10000H 0FFFFH Code flash memory 64 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 132 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-29. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10AmF (m = G, L, M), R5F10BnF (n = A, B, G, L, M)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 6 KB FE700H FE6FFH Reserved FDF00H FDEFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Mirror 47.75 KB Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Direct addressing Register indirect addressing Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB F0000H EFFFFH Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 18000H 17FFFH Code flash memory 96 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 133 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-30. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10PmF (m = G, L, M)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FDF00H FDEFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 8 KB Mirror 47.75 KB Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Direct addressing Register indirect addressing F0000H EFFFFH Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 18000H 17FFFH Code flash memory 96 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 134 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-31. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10PPF) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 8 KB FDF00H FDEFFH Reserved FAF00H FAEFFH Mirror 31.75 KB F3000H F2FFFH Reserved F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Direct addressing Register indirect addressing Based addressing Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Based indexed addressing F0000H EFFFFH Reserved 18000H 17FFFH Code flash memory 96 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 135 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-32. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10AmG (m = G, L, M), R5F10BnG (n = A, B, G, L, M)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FDF00H FDEFFH F2000H F1FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 8 KB Mirror 47.75 KB Data flash memory 4 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Direct addressing Register indirect addressing F0000H EFFFFH Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 20000H 1FFFFH Code flash memory 128 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 136 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-33. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10PmG (m = G, L, M, P)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FD700H FD6FFH FAF00H FAEFFH F3000H F2FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 10 KB Reserved Mirror 31.75 KB Data flash memory 8 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Direct addressing Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB F0000H EFFFFH Register indirect addressing Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 20000H 1FFFFH Code flash memory 128 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 137 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-34. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10PmH (m = G, L, M, P)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FBF00H FBEFFH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 16 KB Reserved FAF00H FAEFFH F3000H F2FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Mirror 31.75 KB Data flash memory 8 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Direct addressing Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Register indirect addressing Based addressing F0000H EFFFFH Based indexed addressing Reserved 30000H 2FFFFH Code flash memory 192 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 138 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-35. Correspondence between Data Memory and Addressing (R5F10PmJ (m = G, L, M, P)) FFFFFH FFF20H FFF1FH FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH FFE20H FFE1FH FAF00H FAEFFH F3000H F2FFFH F1000H F0FFFH Special function register (SFR) SFR addressing 256 bytes General-purpose register 32 bytes Register addressing Short direct addressing RAM 20 KB Mirror 31.75 KB Data flash memory 8 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB Direct addressing Register indirect addressing F0000H EFFFFH Based addressing Based indexed addressing Reserved 40000H 3FFFFH Code flash memory 256 KB 00000H Caution When executing instructions from the RAM area, be sure to initialize the used RAM area + 10 bytes with any desired value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 139 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.2 Processor Registers The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 products incorporate the following processor registers. 3.2.1 Control registers The control registers control the program sequence, statuses and stack memory. The control registers consist of a program counter (PC), a program status word (PSW) and a stack pointer (SP). (1) Program counter (PC) The program counter is a 20-bit register that holds the address information of the next program to be executed. In normal operation, PC is automatically incremented according to the number of bytes of the instruction to be fetched. When a branch instruction is executed, immediate data and register contents are set. Reset signal generation sets the reset vector table values at addresses 0000H and 0001H to the program counter. Figure 3-36. Format of Program Counter 19 0 PC (2) Program status word (PSW) The program status word is an 8-bit register consisting of various flags set/reset by instruction execution. Program status word contents are stored in the stack area upon vectored interrupt request is acknowledged or PUSH PSW instruction execution and are restored upon execution of the RETB, RETI and POP PSW instructions. Reset signal generation sets the PSW register to 06H. Figure 3-37. Format of Program Status Word 7 PSW IE 0 Z RBS1 AC RBS0 ISP1 ISP0 CY (a) Interrupt enable flag (IE) This flag controls the interrupt request acknowledge operations of the CPU. When 0, the IE flag is set to the interrupt disabled (DI) state, and all maskable interrupt requests are disabled. When 1, the IE flag is set to the interrupt enabled (EI) state and interrupt request acknowledgment is controlled with an in-service priority flag (ISP1, ISP0), an interrupt mask flag for various interrupt sources, and a priority specification flag. The IE flag is reset (0) upon DI instruction execution or interrupt acknowledgment and is set (1) upon EI instruction execution. (b) Zero flag (Z) When the operation result is zero, this flag is set (1). It is reset (0) in all other cases. (c) Register bank select flags (RBS0, RBS1) These are 2-bit flags to select one of the four register banks. In these flags, the 2-bit information that indicates the register bank selected by SEL RBn instruction execution is stored. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 140 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE (d) Auxiliary carry flag (AC) If the operation result has a carry from bit 3 or a borrow at bit 3, this flag is set (1). It is reset (0) in all other cases. (e) In-service priority flags (ISP1, ISP0) This flag manages the priority of acknowledgeable maskable vectored interrupts. Vectored interrupt requests specified lower than the value of ISP0 and ISP1 flags by the priority specification flag registers (PRn0L, PRn0H, PRn1L, PRn1H, PRn2L, PRn2H, PRn3L) (see 21.3.3 Priority specification flag registers (PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR03L, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H, PR12L, PR12H, PR13L)) can not be acknowledged. Actual request acknowledgment is controlled by the interrupt enable flag (IE). Remark n = 0, 1 (f) Carry flag (CY) This flag stores overflow and underflow upon add/subtract instruction execution. It stores the shift-out value upon rotate instruction execution and functions as a bit accumulator during bit operation instruction execution. (3) Stack pointer (SP) This is a 16-bit register to hold the start address of the memory stack area. Only the internal RAM area can be set as the stack area. Figure 3-38. Format of Stack Pointer 15 0 SP SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 The SP is decremented ahead of write (save) to the stack memory and is incremented after read (restored) from the stack memory. Each stack operation saves data as shown in Figure 3-39. Cautions 1. Since reset signal generation makes the SP contents undefined, be sure to initialize the SP before using the stack. 2. It is prohibited to use the general-purpose register (FFEE0H to FFEFFH) space as a stack area. 3. The internal RAM in the following products cannot be used as stack memory when using the self-programming and data flash function. However, the area to which this prohibition applies may vary with the version of the library. For details, refer to the manual for the individual library. R5F10AmE (m = 6, A, B, G, L): FEF00H to FF2FFH R5F10PmF (m = G, L, M): FDF00H to FE2FFH R5F10AmG (m = G, L, M), R5F10BnG (n = A, B, G, L, M): FDF00H to FE2FFH R5F10PmJ (m = G, L, M, P): FAF00H to FB2FFH 4. The internal RAM in the following products cannot be used as stack memory when using the tracing function of on-chip debugging. R5F10AmE (m = 6, A, B, G, L), R5F10AnD (n = 6, A, B, G, L): FF300H to FF37FH R5F10AmG (m = G, L, M), R5F10BnG (n = A, B, G, L, M): FE300H to FE4FFH R5F10PmF (m = G, L, M): FE300H to FE4FFH R5F10PmJ (m = G, L, M, P): FB300H to FB4FFH 5. The internal RAM in the following products cannot be used as stack memory when the hot plugin function is used or when the DTC is in use for the RRM or DMM function. R5F10AmD, R5F10AmE (m = 6, A, B, G, L): FF400H to FF42FH R5F10AmG (m = G, L, M), R5F10BnG (n = A, B, G, L, M): FE500H to FE52FH R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 141 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE R5F10PmF (m = G, L, M): FE500H to FE52FH R5F10PmJ (m = G, L, M, P): FB500H to FB52FH Figure 3-39. Data to Be Saved to Stack Memory PUSH PSW instruction PUSH rp instruction SPSP-2 SP-2 SP-1 SP Register pair lower Register pair higher CALL, CALLT instructions (4-byte stack) SPSP-4 SP-4 SP-3 SP-2 SP-1 SP R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 PC7 to PC0 PC15 to PC8 PC19 to PC16 00H SPSP-2 SP-2 SP-1 SP 00H PSW Interrupt, BRK instruction (4-byte stack) SPSP-4 SP-4 SP-3 SP-2 SP-1 SP PC7 to PC0 PC15 to PC8 PC19 to PC16 PSW 142 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.2.2 General-purpose registers General-purpose registers are mapped at particular addresses (FFEE0H to FFEFFH) of the data memory. The generalpurpose registers consists of 4 banks, each bank consisting of eight 8-bit registers (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, and H). Each register can be used as an 8-bit register, and two 8-bit registers can also be used in a pair as a 16-bit register (AX, BC, DE, and HL). These registers can be described in terms of function names (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H, AX, BC, DE, and HL) and absolute names (R0 to R7 and RP0 to RP3). Register banks to be used for instruction execution are set by the CPU control instruction (SEL RBn). Because of the 4register bank configuration, an efficient program can be created by switching between a register for normal processing and a register for interrupts for each bank. Caution It is prohibited to use the general-purpose register (FFEE0H to FFEFFH) space for fetching instructions or as a stack area. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 143 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-40. Configuration of General-Purpose Registers (a) Function name 16-bit processing 8-bit processing FFEFFH H Register bank 0 HL L FFEF8H D Register bank 1 DE E FFEF0H B BC Register bank 2 C FFEE8H A AX Register bank 3 X FFEE0H 15 0 7 0 (b) Absolute name 16-bit processing 8-bit processing FFEFFH R7 Register bank 0 RP3 R6 FFEF8H R5 Register bank 1 RP2 R4 FFEF0H R3 RP1 Register bank 2 R2 FFEE8H R1 RP0 Register bank 3 R0 FFEE0H 15 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 0 7 0 144 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.2.3 ES and CS registers The ES register is used for data access and the CS register is used to specify the higher address when a branch instruction is executed. The default value of the ES register after reset is 0FH, and that of the CS register is 00H. Figure 3-41. Configuration of ES and CS Registers ES CS R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 ES3 ES2 ES1 ES0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 CS3 CP2 CP1 CP0 145 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.2.4 Special function registers (SFRs) Unlike a general-purpose register, each SFR has a special function. SFRs are allocated to the FFF00H to FFFFFH area. SFRs can be manipulated like general-purpose registers, using operation, transfer, and bit manipulation instructions. The manipulable bit units, 1, 8, and 16, depend on the SFR type. Each manipulation bit unit can be specified as follows. 1-bit manipulation Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 1-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfr.bit). This manipulation can also be specified with an address. 8-bit manipulation Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 8-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfr). This manipulation can also be specified with an address. 16-bit manipulation Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 16-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfrp). When specifying an address, describe an even address. Table 3-5 gives a list of the SFRs. The meanings of items in the table are as follows. Symbol This item indicates the address of a special function register. It is a reserved word in the assembler, and is defined as an sfr variable using the #pragma sfr directive in the compiler. When using the assembler, debugger, and simulator, symbols can be written as an instruction operand. R/W This item indicates whether the corresponding SFR can be read or written. R/W: Read/write enable R: Read only W: Write only Manipulable bit units "" indicates the manipulable bit unit (1, 8, or 16). "" indicates a bit unit for which manipulation is not possible. After reset This item indicates each register status upon reset signal generation. Caution Do not access addresses to which SFRs are not assigned. Remark For extended SFRs (2nd SFRs), see 3.2.5 Extended special function registers (2nd SFRs: 2nd Special Function Registers). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 146 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-5. SFR List (1/4) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit After Reset FFF00H Port register 0 P0 R/W - 00H FFF01H Port register 1 P1 R/W - 00H FFF03H Port register 3 P3 R/W - 00H FFF04H Port register 4 P4 R/W - 00H FFF05H Port register 5 P5 R/W - 00H FFF06H Port register 6 P6 R/W - 00H FFF07H Port register 7 P7 R/W - 00H FFF08H Port register 8 P8 R/W - 00H FFF09H Port register 9 P9 R/W - 00H FFF0AH Port register 10 P10 R/W - 00H FFF0CH Port register 12 P12 R/W - Undefined FFF0DH Port register 13 P13 R/W - Undefined Note FFF0EH Port register 14 P14 R/W - 00H R/W - 00H R/W - 0000H - - - 0000H - - - - 0000H 00H FFF0FH Port register 15 P15 FFF10H Serial data register 00 SDR00L FFF11H FFF12H - Serial data register 01 FFF13H FFF18H SDR00 SDR01L SDR01 R/W - Timer data register 00 TDR00 Timer data register 01 TDR01L R/W FFF19H FFF1AH FFF1BH FFF1EH FFF1FH <R> TDR01 R/W TDR01H 10-bit A/D conversion result register 8-bit A/D conversion result register - - 00H ADCR R - - 0000H ADCRH R - - 00H FFF20H Port mode register 0 PM0 R/W - FFH FFF21H Port mode register 1 PM1 R/W - FFH FFF23H Port mode register 3 PM3 R/W - FFH FFF24H Port mode register 4 PM4 R/W - FFH FFF25H Port mode register 5 PM5 R/W - FFH FFF26H Port mode register 6 PM6 R/W - FFH FFF27H Port mode register 7 PM7 R/W - FFH FFF28H Port mode register 8 PM8 R/W - FFH FFF29H Port mode register 9 PM9 R/W - FFH FFF2AH Port mode register 10 PM10 R/W - FFH FFF2CH Port mode register 12 PM12 R/W - FFH FFF2EH Port mode register 14 PM14 R/W - FFH FFF2FH Port mode register 15 PM15 R/W - FFH FFF30H A/D converter mode register 0 ADM0 R/W - 00H FFF31H Analog input channel specification register ADS R/W - 00H FFF32H A/D converter mode register 1 ADM1 R/W - 00H FFF34H D/A conversion value setting register 0 DACS0 R/W - - 00H Note P130 bit depends on the setting of User Option Byte (000C2H/020C2H). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 147 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-5. SFR List (2/4) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit After Reset FFF36H D/A converter mode register DAM R/W - 00H FFF37H Key return mode register KRM R/W - 00H FFF38H External interrupt rising edge enable EGP0 R/W - 00H EGN0 R/W - 00H EGP1 R/W - 00H EGN1 R/W - 00H R/W - 0000H - - - 0000H - - register 0 FFF39H External interrupt falling edge enable register 0 FFF3AH External interrupt rising edge enable register 1 FFF3BH External interrupt falling edge enable register 1 FFF48H Serial data register 10 FFF49H FFF4AH SDR10L SDR10 - Serial data register 11 FFF4BH SDR11L SDR11 R/W - FFF50H IICA shift register 0 IICA0 R/W - - 00H FFF51H IICA status register 0 IICS0 R - 00H FFF52H IICA flag register 0 IICF0 R/W - 00H FFF54H 16-bit watch error correction register SUBCUDW R/W - - 0000H Timer RD general register C0 TRDGRC0 R/W - - FFFFH Note Timer RD general register D0 TRDGRD0 R/W - - FFFFH Note Timer RD general register C1 TRDGRC1 R/W - - FFFFH Note Timer RD general register D1 TRDGRD1 R/W - - FFFFH Note Timer data register 02 TDR02 R/W - - 0000H Timer data register 03 TDR03L R/W - 00H - FFF55H FFF58H FFF59H FFF5AH FFF5BH FFF5CH FFF5DH FFF5EH FFF5FH FFF64H FFF65H FFF66H FFF67H FFF68H TDR03 TDR03H 00H Timer data register 04 TDR04 R/W - - 0000H Timer data register 05 TDR05 R/W - - 0000H Timer data register 06 TDR06 R/W - - 0000H Timer data register 07 TDR07 R/W - - 0000H FFF69H FFF6AH FFF6BH FFF6CH FFF6DH FFF6EH FFF6FH Note The timer RD SFRs are undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 148 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-5. SFR List (3/4) Address FFF70H Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol Timer data register 10 TDR10 Timer data register 11 TDR11L R/W Manipulable Bit Range After Reset 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit R/W - - 0000H R/W - 00H - R/W - - 0000H R/W - 00H - FFF71H FFF72H FFF73H FFF74H TDR11 TDR11H Timer data register 12 TDR12 Timer data register 13 TDR13L 00H FFF75H FFF76H FFF77H TDR13 TDR13H 00H Timer data register 14 TDR14 R/W - - 0000H Timer data register 15 TDR15 R/W - - 0000H Timer data register 16 TDR16 R/W - - 0000H Timer data register 17 TDR17 R/W - - 0000H FFF92H Second count register SEC R/W - - 00H FFF93H Minute count register MIN R/W - - 00H FFF94H Hour count register HOUR R/W - - 12H Note 1 FFF95H Week count register WEEK R/W - - 00H FFF96H Day count register DAY R/W - - 01H FFF97H Month count register MONTH R/W - - 01H FFF98H Year count register YEAR R/W - - 00H FFF99H Watch error correction register SUBCUD R/W - - 00H FFF9AH Alarm minute register ALARMWM R/W - - 00H FFF9BH Alarm hour register ALARMWH R/W - - 12H FFF9CH Alarm week register ALARMWW R/W - - 00H FFF9DH Real-time clock control register 0 RTCC0 R/W - 00H FFF9EH Real-time clock control register 1 RTCC1 R/W - 00H FFFA0H Clock operation mode control register CMC R/W - - 00H FFF78H FFF79H FFF7AH FFF7BH FFF7CH FFF7DH FFF7EH FFF7FH FFFA1H Clock operation status control register CSC R/W - C0H FFFA2H Oscillation stabilization time counter status OSTC R - 00H register FFFA3H Oscillation stabilization time select register OSTS R/W - - 07H FFFA4H System clock control register CKC R/W - 00H FFFA5H Clock output select register 0 CKS0 R/W - 00H FFFA8H Reset control flag register RESF R - - Undefined Note 2 FFFA9H Voltage detection register LVIM R/W - 00H Note 3 Notes 1. The value of this register is 00H if the AMPM bit (bit 3 of real-time clock control register 0 (RTCC0)) is set to 1 after reset. 2. The reset value of the RESF register varies depending on the reset source. 3. The reset value of the LVIM register varies depending on the reset source. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 149 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-5. SFR List (4/4) Address FFFAAH Special Function Register (SFR) Name Voltage detection level register Symbol R/W LVIS R/W Manipulable Bit Range 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit - Undefined 00H/01H/ 81H Note 1 FFFABH Watchdog timer enable register WDTE R/W - - 1AH/ 9AH Note 2 R/W - - 00H R/W 00H IF2H R/W Interrupt request flag register 3L IF3L R/W - FFFD4H Interrupt mask flag register 2L MK2L R/W FFFD5H Interrupt mask flag register 2H MK2H R/W FFFD6H Interrupt mask flag register 3L MK3L R/W - FFH FFFD8H Priority specification flag register 02L PR02L R/W FFH FFFD9H Priority specification flag register 02H PR02H R/W FFFDAH Priority specification flag register 03L PR03L R/W - FFH FFFDCH Priority specification flag register 12L PR12L R/W FFH FFFDDH Priority specification flag register 12H PR12H R/W FFFDEH Priority specification flag register 13L PR13L R/W - FFH FFFE0H Interrupt request flag register 0L IF0L R/W 00H FFFE1H Interrupt request flag register 0H IF0H R/W FFFE2H Interrupt request flag register 1L IF1L R/W FFFE3H Interrupt request flag register 1H IF1H R/W FFFE4H Interrupt mask flag register 0L MK0L R/W FFFE5H Interrupt mask flag register 0H MK0H R/W FFFE6H Interrupt mask flag register 1L MK1L MK1 R/W FFFE7H Interrupt mask flag register 1H MK1H R/W FFFE8H Priority specification flag register 00L PR00L PR00 R/W FFFE9H Priority specification flag register 00H PR00H R/W FFFEAH Priority specification flag register 01L PR01L R/W FFFEBH Priority specification flag register 01H PR01H R/W FFFECH Priority specification flag register 10L PR10L R/W FFFEDH Priority specification flag register 10H PR10H R/W FFFEEH Priority specification flag register 11L PR11L R/W FFFEFH Priority specification flag register 11H PR11H R/W FFFF0H Multiply and accumulation register (L) MACRL R/W - Multiply and accumulation register (H) MACRH R/W Processor mode control register PMC R/W FFFACH CRC input register CRCIN FFFD0H Interrupt request flag register 2L IF2L FFFD1H Interrupt request flag register 2H FFFD2H IF2 MK2 PR02 PR12 IF0 IF1 MK0 PR01 PR10 PR11 00H 00H FFH FFH FFH FFH 00H 00H 00H FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH - 0000H - - 0000H - 00H FFH FFFF1H FFFF2H FFFF3H FFFFEH Notes 1. The reset value of the LVIS register varies depending on the reset source and the setting of the option byte. 2. The reset value of the WDTE register is determined by the setting of the option byte. Remark For extended SFRs (2nd SFRs), see Table 3-6 Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 150 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.2.5 Extended special function registers (2nd SFRs: 2nd Special Function Registers) Unlike a general-purpose register, each extended SFR (2nd SFR) has a special function. Extended SFRs are allocated to the F0000H to F07FFH area. SFRs other than those in the SFR area (FFF00H to FFFFFH) are allocated to this area. An instruction that accesses the extended SFR area, however, is 1 byte longer than an instruction that accesses the SFR area. Extended SFRs can be manipulated like general-purpose registers, using operation, transfer, and bit manipulation instructions. The manipulable bit units, 1, 8, and 16, depend on the SFR type. Each manipulation bit unit can be specified as follows. 1-bit manipulation Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 1-bit manipulation instruction operand (laddr16.bit). This manipulation can also be specified with an address. 8-bit manipulation Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 8-bit manipulation instruction operand (laddr16). This manipulation can also be specified with an address. 16-bit manipulation Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 16-bit manipulation instruction operand (laddr16s). When specifying an address, describe an even address. Table 3-6 gives a list of the extended SFRs. The meanings of items in the table are as follows. Symbol This item indicates the address of an extended SFR. It is a reserved word in the assembler, and is defined as an sfr variable using the #pragma sfr directive in the compiler. When using the assembler, debugger, and simulator, symbols can be written as an instruction operand. R/W This item indicates whether the corresponding extended SFR can be read or written. R/W: Read/write enable R: Read only W: Write only Manipulable bit units "" indicates the manipulable bit unit (1, 8, or 16). "" indicates a bit unit for which manipulation is not possible. After reset This item indicates each register status upon reset signal generation. Caution Do not access addresses to which extended SFRs are not assigned. Remark For SFRs in the SFR area, see 3.2.4 Special function registers (SFRs). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 151 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (1/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range After reset 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit F0010H A/D converter mode register 2 ADM2 R/W - 00H F0011H Conversion result comparison upper limit setting register ADUL R/W - - FFH F0012H Conversion result comparison lower limit setting register ADLL R/W - - 00H F0013H A/D test register ADTES R/W - - 00H F0016H Peripheral I/O redirection register 0 PIOR0 R/W - - 00H F0017H Peripheral I/O redirection register 1 PIOR1 R/W - - 00H F0018H Peripheral I/O redirection register 2 PIOR2 R/W - - 00H F0019H Peripheral I/O redirection register 3 PIOR3 R/W - - 00H F001AH Peripheral I/O redirection register 4 PIOR4 R/W - - 00H F001BH Peripheral I/O redirection register 5 PIOR5 R/W - - 00H F001CH Peripheral I/O redirection register 6 PIOR6 R/W - - 00H F001DH Peripheral I/O redirection register 7 PIOR7 R/W - - 00H F001EH Peripheral I/O redirection register 8 PIOR8 R/W - - 00H F0021H Port input threshold control register 1 PITHL1 R/W - 00H F0023H Port input threshold control register 3 PITHL3 R/W - 00H F0024H Port input threshold control register 4 PITHL4 R/W - 00H F0025H Port input threshold control register 5 PITHL5 R/W - 00H F0026H Port input threshold control register 6 PITHL6 R/W - 00H F0027H Port input threshold control register 7 PITHL7 R/W - 00H F002AH Port input threshold control register 10 PITHL10 R/W - 00H F002CH Port input threshold control register 12 PITHL12 R/W - 00H F002FH Port input threshold control register 15 PITHL15 R/W - 00H F0030H Pull-up resistor option register 0 PU0 R/W - 00H F0031H Pull-up resistor option register 1 PU1 R/W - 00H F0033H Pull-up resistor option register 3 PU3 R/W - 00H F0034H Pull-up resistor option register 4 PU4 R/W - 01H F0035H Pull-up resistor option register 5 PU5 R/W - 00H F0036H Pull-up resistor option register 6 PU6 R/W - 00H F0037H Pull-up resistor option register 7 PU7 R/W - 00H F0039H Pull-up resistor option register 9 PU9 R/W - 00H F003AH Pull-up resistor option register 10 PU10 R/W - 00H F003CH Pull-up resistor option register 12 PU12 R/W - 00H F003EH Pull-up resistor option register 14 PU14 R/W - 00H F003FH Pull-up resistor option register 15 PU15 R/W - 00H F0041H Port input mode register 1 PIM1 R/W - 00H F0043H Port input mode register 3 PIM3 R/W - 00H F0045H Port input mode register 5 PIM5 R/W - 00H F0046H Port input mode register 6 PIM6 R/W - 00H F0047H Port input mode register 7 PIM7 R/W - 00H F004CH Port input mode register 12 PIM12 R/W - 00H F0051H Port output mode register 1 POM1 R/W - 00H F0056H Port output mode register 6 POM6 R/W - 00H F0057H Port output mode register 7 POM7 R/W - 00H R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 152 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (2/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit After reset F005CH Port output mode register 12 POM12 R/W - 00H F0067H Port mode control register 7 PMC7 R/W - FFH F0069H Port mode control register 9 PMC9 R/W - FFH F006CH Port mode control register 12 PMC12 R/W - FFH F0070H Noise filter enable register 0 NFEN0 R/W - 00H F0071H Noise filter enable register 1 NFEN1 R/W - 00H F0072H Noise filter enable register 2 NFEN2 R/W - 00H F0073H Input switch control register ISC R/W - 00H F0074H Timer input select register 0 TIS0 R/W - - 00H F0075H Timer input select register 1 TIS1 R/W - - 00H F0076H A/D port configuration register ADPC R/W - - 00H F0077H Port mode select register PMS R/W - 00H F0078H Invalid memory access detection control IAWCTL R/W - - 00H register F0079H Interrupt source determination flag register 0 INTFLG0 R/W - - 00H F007AH Timer input select register 2 TIS2 R/W - - 00H F007BH LIN channel select register LCHSEL R/W - - 00H F007CH Interrupt mask register INTMSK R/W - - FFH F0090H Data flash control register DFLCTL R/W - 00H F00A0H High-speed on-chip oscillator trimming register HIOTRM R/W - - Note F00A8H High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select HOCODIV R/W - - Undefined register F00D8H SPM control register SPMCTRL R/W - - 00H F00DAH SP overflow address setting register SPOFR R/W - - FFFEH SP underflow address setting register SPUFR R/W - - 0000H F00F0H Peripheral enable register 0 PER0 R/W - 00H F00F3H Operation speed mode control register OSMC R/W - - 00H F00FEH BCD correction result register BCDADJ R - - Undefined F0100H Serial status register 00 SSR00L R - 0000H - - - 0000H - - - 0000H - - - 0000H - - F00DBH F00DCH F00DDH F0101H F0102H - Serial status register 01 F0103H F0104H Serial flag clear trigger register 00 SSR01 R SIR00L SIR00 R/W - Serial flag clear trigger register 01 F0107H Note SSR01L - F0105H F0106H SSR00 SIR01L - SIR01 R/W The reset value differs for each chip. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 153 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (3/32) Address F0108H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit After reset Serial mode register 00 SMR00 R/W - - 0020H Serial mode register 01 SMR01 R/W - - 0020H Serial communication operation setting register 00 SCR00 R/W - - 0087H Serial communication operation setting register 01 SCR01 R/W - - 0087H Serial channel enable status register SE0L SE0 R 0000H - - SS0 R/W 0000H - - 0000H 0000H F0109H F010AH F010BH F010CH F010DH F010EH F010FH F0110H F0111H F0112H - Serial channel start register 0 F0113H F0114H - Serial channel stop register 0 ST0L Serial clock select register 0 SPS0L F0115H F0116H ST0 R/W - - SPS0 R/W - - - R/W - - 0303H R/W 0000H - - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H - F0117H F0118H SS0L - Serial output register 0 SO0 Serial output enable register 0 SOE0L F0119H F011AH F011BH F0120H - Serial output level register 0 SOL0L Serial slave select enable register 0 SSE0L F0121H F0122H Serial status register 10 SSR10L Serial status register 11 SSR11L Serial flag clear trigger register 10 SIR10L Serial flag clear trigger register 11 SIR11L - - SSE0 R/W - - - SSR10 R - - - SSR11 R - - - SIR10 R/W - - - SIR11 R/W - - - - F0147H F0148H - F0145H F0146H - - F0143H F0144H R/W - F0141H F0142H SOL0 - F0123H F0140H SOE0 - Serial mode register 10 SMR10 R/W - - 0020H Serial mode register 11 SMR11 R/W - - 0020H Serial communication operation setting register 10 SCR10 R/W - - 0087H Serial communication operation setting register 11 SCR11 R/W - - 0087H Serial channel enable status register 1 SE1L R 0000H - - F0149H F014AH F014BH F014CH F014DH F014EH F014FH F0150H F0151H R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 - SE1 154 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (4/32) Address F0152H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Serial channel start register 1 SS1L Serial channel stop register 1 ST1L F0153H F0154H Serial clock select register 1 SPS1L Serial output register 1 SO1 Serial output enable register 1 SOE1L Serial output level register 1 SOL1L Manipulable Bit Range After reset 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit 0000H 0000H 0000H SS1 R/W - - ST1 R/W - - R/W - - - R/W - - 0303H SOE1 R/W 0000H - - SOL1 R/W - 0000H - - R/W - 0000H - F0157H F0158H R/W - F0155H F0156H Symbol SPS1 - F0159H F015AH F015BH F0160H - F0161H F0162H - Serial slave select enable register 1 SSE1L - - Timer counter register 00 TCR00 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 01 TCR01 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 02 TCR02 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 03 TCR03 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 04 TCR04 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 05 TCR05 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 06 TCR06 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 07 TCR07 R - - FFFFH Timer mode register 00 TMR00 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 01 TMR01 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 02 TMR02 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 03 TMR03 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 04 TMR04 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 05 TMR05 R/W - - 0000H F0163H F0180H SSE1 - F0181H F0182H F0183H F0184H F0185H F0186H F0187H F0188H F0189H F018AH F018BH F018CH F018DH F018EH F018FH F0190H F0191H F0192H F0193H F0194H F0195H F0196H F0197H F0198H F0199H F019AH F019BH R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 155 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (5/32) Address F019CH Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit After reset Timer mode register 06 TMR06 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 07 TMR07 R/W - - 0000H Timer status register 00 TSR00L TSR00 R - 0000H - - Timer status register 01 TSR01L TSR01 R - 0000H - - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H F019DH F019EH F019FH F01A0H F01A1H F01A2H - F01A3H F01A4H - Timer status register 02 TSR02L Timer status register 03 TSR03L F01A5H F01A6H Timer status register 04 TSR04L Timer status register 05 TSR05L Timer status register 06 TSR06L Timer status register 07 TSR07L Timer channel enable status register 0 - - TSR04 R - - - TSR05 R - - - TSR06 R - - - TSR07 R - - - TE0L - - - - R/W - - R/W - - 0000H TO0 R/W - 0000H - - TOE0 R/W 0000H - - - 0000H - - - 0000H - - TE0 R TS0L TS0 R/W - Timer channel stop register 0 TT0L Timer clock select register 0 TPS0 Timer output register 0 TO0L Timer output enable register 0 TOE0L F01B5H F01B6H - Timer channel start register 0 F01B3H F01B4H - - F01B1H F01B2H - R - F01AFH F01B0H - TSR03 - F01ADH F01AEH - F01ABH F01ACH - - F01A9H F01AAH R - F01A7H F01A8H TSR02 TT0 - F01B7H F01B8H F01B9H F01BAH - F01BBH F01BCH - Timer output level register 0 TOL0L Timer output mode register 0 TOM0L F01BDH F01BEH R/W TOM0 R/W - F01BFH F01C0H TOL0 - Timer counter register 10 TCR10 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 11 TCR11 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 12 TCR12 R - - FFFFH F01C1H F01C2H F01C3H F01C4H F01C5H R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 156 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (6/32) Address F01C6H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit After reset Timer counter register 13 TCR13 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 14 TCR14 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 15 TCR15 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 16 TCR16 R - - FFFFH Timer counter register 17 TCR17 R - - FFFFH Timer mode register 10 TMR10 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 11 TMR11 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 12 TMR12 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 13 TMR13 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 14 TMR14 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 15 TMR15 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 16 TMR16 R/W - - 0000H Timer mode register 17 TMR17 R/W - - 0000H Timer status register 10 TSR10L R - 0000H - - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H F01C7H F01C8H F01C9H F01CAH F01CBH F01CCH F01CDH F01CEH F01CFH F01D0H F01D1H F01D2H F01D3H F01D4H F01D5H F01D6H F01D7H F01D8H F01D9H F01DAH F01DBH F01DCH F01DDH F01DEH F01DFH F01E0H F01E1H F01E2H - Timer status register 11 TSR11L Timer status register 12 TSR12L F01E3H F01E4H Timer status register 13 TSR13L Timer status register 14 TSR14L Timer status register 15 TSR15L Timer status register 16 TSR16L - - TSR12 R - - - TSR13 R - - - TSR14 R - - - TSR15 R - - - TSR16 R - - - - - - - F01EDH F01EEH - F01EBH F01ECH - - F01E9H F01EAH R - F01E7H F01E8H TSR11 - F01E5H F01E6H TSR10 - Timer status register 17 F01EFH R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 TSR17L - TSR17 R 157 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (7/32) Address F01F0H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Timer channel enable status register 1 TE1L Timer channel start register 1 TS1L F01F1H F01F2H Timer channel stop register 1 TT1L Timer clock select register 1 TPS1 Timer output register 1 TO1L Timer output enable register 1 TOE1L Manipulable Bit Range After reset 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit 0000H - - 0000H - - R/W 0000H - - R/W - - 0000H TO1 R/W - 0000H - - TOE1 R/W 0000H - - - 0000H - - - 0000H - - TE1 R TS1 R/W - F01F5H F01F6H R/W - F01F3H F01F4H Symbol TT1 - F01F7H F01F8H F01F9H F01FAH - F01FBH F01FCH - Timer output level register 1 TOL1L Timer output mode register 1 TOM1L F01FDH F01FEH TOL1 R/W TOM1 R/W - F01FFH - Error address storage register ERADR R - - 0000H F0202H 1-bit error detection interrupt enable register ECCIER R/W - - 00H F0203H Bit error detection register ECCER R/W - - 00H F0204H ECC test protect register ECCTPR R/W - - 00H F0205H ECC test mode register ECCTMDR R/W - - 00H F0206H Write data inversion register ECCDWRVR R/W - - 0000H F0220H Port output slew rate select register PSRSEL R/W - 00H F0222H SNOOZE status output control register 0 PSNZCNT0 R/W - 00H F0223H SNOOZE status output control register 1 PSNZCNT1 R/W - 00H F0224H SNOOZE status output control register 2 PSNZCNT2 R/W - 00H F0225H SNOOZE status output control register 3 PSNZCNT3 R/W - 00H F0227H D/A converter mode register 2 DAM2 R/W - 00H F0228H PWM output delay control register 0 PWMDLY0 R/W - - 0000H PWM output delay control register 1 PWMDLY1 R/W - - 0000H PWM output delay control register 2 PWMDLY2 R/W - - 0000H F0230H IICA control register 00 IICCTL00 R/W - 00H F0231H IICA control register 01 IICCTL01 R/W - 00H F0232H IICA low-level width setting register 0 IICWL0 R/W - - FFH F0233H IICA high-level width setting register 1 IICWH0 R/W - - FFH F0234H Slave address register 0 SVA0 R/W - - 00H F0200H F0201H F0207H F0229H F022AH F022BH F022CH F022DH R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 158 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (8/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit After reset F0240H Timer RJ control register 0 TRJCR0 R/W - - 00H F0241H Timer RJ I/O control register 0 TRJIOC0 R/W - 00H F0242H Timer RJ mode register 0 TRJMR0 R/W - 00H F0243H Timer RJ event pin select register 0 TRJISR0 R/W - 00H F0260H Timer RD ELC register TRDELC R/W - 00H Note F0263H Timer RD start register TRDSTR R/W - - 0CH Note F0264H Timer RD mode register TRDMR R/W - 00H Note F0265H Timer RD PWM function select register TRDPMR R/W - 00H Note F0266H Timer RD function control register TRDFCR R/W - 80H Note F0267H Timer RD output master enable register 1 TRDOER1 R/W - FFH Note F0268H Timer RD output master enable register 2 TRDOER2 R/W - 00H Note F0269H Timer RD output control register TRDOCR R/W - 00H Note F026AH Timer RD digital filter function select register 0 TRDDF0 R/W - 00H Note F026BH Timer RD digital filter function select register 1 TRDDF1 R/W - 00H Note F0270H Timer RD control register 0 TRDCR0 R/W - 00H Note F0271H Timer RD I/O control register A0 TRDIORA0 R/W - 00H Note F0272H Timer RD I/O control register C0 TRDIORC0 R/W - 88H Note F0273H Timer RD status register 0 TRDSR0 R/W - 00H Note F0274H Timer RD interrupt enable register 0 TRDIER0 R/W - 00H Note F0275H Timer RD PWM function output level control TRDPOCR0 R/W - 00H Note Timer RD counter 0 TRD0 R/W - - 0000H Note Timer RD general register A0 TRDGRA0 R/W - - FFFFH Note Timer RD general register B0 TRDGRB0 R/W - - FFFFH Note F0280H Timer RD control register 1 TRDCR1 R/W - 00H Note F0281H Timer RD I/O control register A1 TRDIORA1 R/W - 00H Note F0282H Timer RD I/O control register C1 TRDIORC1 R/W - 88H Note F0283H Timer RD status register 1 TRDSR1 R/W - 00H Note F0284H Timer RD interrupt enable register 1 TRDIER1 R/W - 00H Note F0285H Timer RD PWM function output level control TRDPOCR1 R/W - 00H Note Timer RD counter 1 TRD1 R/W - - 0000H Note Timer RD general register A1 TRDGRA1 R/W - - FFFFH Note Timer RD general register B1 TRDGRB1 R/W - - FFFFH Note register 0 F0276H F0277H F0278H F0279H F027AH F027BH register 1 F0286H F0287H F0288H F0289H F028AH F028BH Note The timer RD SFRs are undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 159 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (9/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit After reset CMPCTL R/W - 00H Comparator I/O switch register CMPSEL R/W - 00H Comparator output monitor register CMPMON R - 00H F02C0H Peripheral enable register 1 PER1 R/W - 00H F02C1H Peripheral enable register 2 PER2 R/W - 00H F02C2H CAN clock select register CANCKSEL R/W - 00H F02C3H LIN clock select register LINCKSEL R/W - 00H F02C4H Clock select register CKSEL R/W - 00H F02C5H PLL control register PLLCTL R/W - 00H F02C6H PLL status register PLLSTS R - - 00H F02C7H fMP clock division register MDIV R/W - - 00H F02C8H RTC clock select register RTCCL R/W - 00H F02C9H POR/CLM reset confirmation register POCRES R/W - Note 1 F02CAH STOP status output control register STPSTC R/W - 00H F02D0H High-speed DTC control register 0 HDTCCR0 R/W - 00H F02D2H High-speed DTC transfer number register 0 HDTCCT0 R/W - 00H F02D3H High-speed DTC transfer number reload register 0 HDTRLD0 R/W - 00H F02D4H High-speed DTC source address register 0 HDTSAR0 R/W - - 0000H High-speed DTC destination address register 0 HDTDAR0 R/W - - 0000H F02A0H Comparator control register F02A1H F02A2H F02D5H F02D6H F02D7H F02D8H High-speed DTC control register 1 HDTCCR1 R/W - 00H F02DAH High-speed DTC transfer number register 1 HDTCCT1 R/W - 00H F02DBH High-speed DTC transfer number reload register 1 HDTRLD1 R/W - 00H F02DCH High-speed DTC source address register 1 HDTSAR1 R/W - - 0000H High-speed DTC destination address register 1 HDTDAR1 R/W - - 0000H F02E0H DTC base address register DTCBAR R/W - - FDH F02E1H High-speed DTC channel select register 0 SELHS0 R/W - 3FH F02E2H High-speed DTC channel select register 1 SELHS1 R/W - 3FH F02E8H DTC activation enable register 0 DTCEN0 R/W - 00H F02E9H DTC activation enable register 1 DTCEN1 R/W - 00H F02EAH DTC activation enable register 2 DTCEN2 R/W - 00H F02EBH DTC activation enable register 3 DTCEN3 R/W - 00H F02ECH DTC activation enable register 4 DTCEN4 R/W - 00H F02EDH DTC activation enable register 5 Note 2 DTCEN5 R/W - 00H F02DDH F02DEH F02DFH F02F0H Flash memory CRC control register CRC0CTL R/W - 00H F02F2H Flash memory CRC operation result register PGCRCL R/W - - 0000H F02F9H CRC operation mode control register CRCMD R/W - - 00H F02FAH CRC data register CRCD R/W - - 0000H F02F3H F02FBH Notes 1. When a reset source other than POR occurs, bit 0 (the POCRES0 bit) retains a value right before reset. 2. Only in the RL78/F14. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 160 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (10/32) Address F0300H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name CAN0 bit configuration register L F0301H F0302H CAN0 bit configuration register H C0CTRLL CAN0 control register H C0CTRHL CAN0 status register L C0STSLL CAN0 status register H CAN0 error flag register L C0ERFLLL CAN0 error flag register H C0ERFLHL CAN global configuration register L GCFGLL F0326H CAN global control register L GCTRLL CAN global control register H GCTRHL F032AH CAN global status register GSTSL CAN global error flag register GERFLL F032EH CAN timestamp register GTSC F0331H F0332H CAN receive rule number configuration register GAFLCFGL RMNBL RMND0L F0335H CAN receive buffer receive complete flag register F0338H CAN receive FIFO control register 0 RFCC0L F0334H F0339H F033AH CAN receive FIFO control register 1 F0340H CAN receive FIFO status register 1 RFSTS1L CAN receive FIFO pointer control register 0 RFPCTR0L F0341H F0342H F0348H F0349H R Note 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0005H Note 0000H 000DH - - C0ERFLL R/W - - C0ERFLH R - - - - GCFGL GCFGH R/W R/W - - GCTRL R/W - - GCTRH R/W - - R - - GSTS - GAFLCFG RMNB - - 00H R - - 0000H - - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0001H Note 0001H Note 0000H R/W R/W - - - - - R/W - - RFCC0 R/W - - RFCC1 R/W - - RFSTS0 R/W - R - RFSTS1 R/W - R - W - - RFPCTR0 Note R/W RMND0 RFSTS1H RFPCTR0H RFSTS0H F0343H 0000H - RFCC1H RFSTS0L RMND0H CAN receive FIFO status register 0 0005H Note - RFCC1L - RFCC0H F033BH 0000H - GAFLCFGH CAN receive buffer number configuration register F0333H - R F032FH F0330H 0005H Note C0STSL GSTSH F032CH - GCTRHH F032BH 0000H - GCTRLH F0329H - GCFGHH F0327H F0328H GCFGHL 0000H - GCFGLH CAN global configuration register H - - R/W C0ERFLHH F0325H 16-bit C0CTRH C0STSH After reset 8-bit R/W C0ERFLLH F0323H F0324H C0STSHL Manipulable Bit Range 1-bit C0CTRL C0STSHH F030FH F0322H R/W C0STSLH F030DH F030EH C0CFGH C0CTRHH F030BH F030CH R/W C0CTRLH F0309H F030AH C0CFGHL CAN0 control register L F0307H F0308H C0CFGL C0CFGHH F0305H F0306H C0CFGLL R/W C0CFGLH F0303H F0304H Symbol When the CAN0EN bit in the PER2 register is 0, the read value is undefined. When the CAN0EN bit in the PER2 register is 1, the read value is the initial value listed above. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 161 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (11/32) Address F034AH Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name CAN receive FIFO pointer control register 1 F034BH F0350H F0351H F0352H F0353H Symbol RFPCTR1L W RFPCTR1H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO control register 0L CFCCL0H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO control register 0H CFCCH0H CFCCL0L CFCCH0L CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO status register 0 CFSTS0L CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO pointer control register 0 CFPCTR0L F0360H Receive FIFO message lost status register RFMSTS F0361H CAN0 transmit//receive FIFO message lost status register CFMSTS F0362H CAN receive FIFO interrupt status register F0363H F0358H RFPCTR1 R/W CFCCL0 CFCCH0 R/W After 1-bit 8-bit 16-bit reset - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0001H - - - - R/W - R - W - - - R - R - RFISTS R CAN transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt status register CFISTS F0364H CAN0 transmit buffer control register 0 F0365H F0366H F0359H F035CH CFSTS0 R/W Manipulable Bit Range CFSTS0H 0000H - 00H - 00H - - 00H R - - 00H TMC0 R/W - - 00H CAN0 transmit buffer control register 1 TMC1 R/W - - 00H CAN0 transmit buffer control register 2 TMC2 R/W - - 00H F0367H CAN0 transmit buffer control register 3 TMC3 R/W - - 00H F036CH CAN0 transmit buffer status register 0 TMSTS0 R/W - - 00H F035DH CFPCTR0 Note - F036DH CAN0 transmit buffer status register 1 TMSTS1 R/W - - 00H F036EH CAN0 transmit buffer status register 2 TMSTS2 R/W - - 00H F036FH CAN0 transmit buffer status register 3 TMSTS3 F0374H CAN0 transmit buffer transmit request status register TMTRSTSL CAN0 transmit buffer transmit complete status register TMTCSTSL CAN0 transmit buffer transmit abort status register TMTASTSL TMIECL F037BH CAN0 transmit buffer interrupt enable register TMIECH F037CH CAN0 transmit history buffer control register THLCC0L CAN0 transmit history buffer status register THLSTS0L F0375H F0376H F0377H F0378H F0379H F037AH F037DH F0380H 00H 0000H - TMTCSTS R - 0000H - TMTASTS R - 0000H - TMIEC R/W - 0000H - THLCC0 R/W - 0000H - THLSTS0 R/W - 0001H - - TMTASTSH THLSTS0H THLPCTR0H F0388H CAN global transmit interrupt status register GTINTSTSL CAN global RAM window control register GRWCRL F0389H THLPCTR0L THLPCTR0 W - GTINTSTS R - - R/W - - - - GTINTSTSH F038BH GRWCR GRWCRH CAN global test configuration register F038DH Note - TMTCSTSH F0385H F038CH - TMTRSTSH CAN0 transmit history buffer pointer control register F038AH - R THLCC0H F0381H F0384H R/W TMTRSTS GTSTCFGL GTSTCFGH GTSTCFG R/W Note 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H When the CAN0EN bit in the PER2 register is 0, the read value is undefined. When the CAN0EN bit in the PER2 register is 1, the read value is the initial value listed above. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 162 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (12/32) Address F038EH Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name CAN global test control register GTSTCTRL CAN global test protection unlock register GLOCKK CAN receive rule entry register 0AL Note 1 GAFLIDL0L F038FH F0394H Symbol - R/W 16-bit R/W - - 00H - - W - - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H - F03A1H F03A0H GAFLMH0L RMIDH0 - R - GAFLML0 - R/W - RMTS0 - R - - R/W - - RMPTR0 R - - GAFLPL0 R/W - - RMDF00 R - - GAFLPH0 R/W - - RMDF10 R - GAFLMH0 RMPTR0L GAFLPL0L RMDF00L GAFLPH0L RMDF10L RMDF10H CAN receive rule entry register 1AL Note 1 GAFLIDL1L GAFLIDL1 - R/W - - R - - - - - - - - GAFLIDL1H CAN receive buffer register 0DL Note 2 RMDF20L RMDF20 RMDF20H CAN receive rule entry register 1AH Note 1 GAFLIDH1L GAFLIDH1 R/W GAFLIDH1H CAN receive buffer register 0DH Note 2 F03AFH F03B0H - GAFLPH0H CAN receive buffer register 0CH Note 2 F03AFH F03AEH - R/W RMDF00H CAN receive rule entry register 0CH Note 1 F03ADH F03AEH GAFLIDH0 GAFLPL0H CAN receive buffer register 0CL Note 2 F03ADH F03ACH RMPTR0H CAN receive rule entry register 0CL Note 1 F03ABH F03ACH - GAFLMH0H CAN receive buffer register 0BH Note 2 F03ABH F03AAH - R RMTS0H F03A9H F03AAH GAFLML0L CAN receive rule entry register 0BH Note 1 F03A9H F03A8H RMIDH0L RMTS0L F03A7H F03A8H RMIDL0 GAFLML0H F03A7H F03A6H GAFLIDH0L CAN receive buffer register 0BL Note 2 F03A5H F03A6H RMIDL0L RMIDH0H CAN receive rule entry register 0BL Note 1 F03A5H F03A4H GAFLIDH0H CAN receive buffer register 0AH Note 2 F03A3H F03A4H - - RMIDL0H CAN receive rule entry register 0AH Note 1 F03A3H F03A2H - R/W GAFLIDL0H CAN receive buffer register 0AL Note 2 F03A1H F03A2H GAFLIDL0 RMDF30L RMDF30 R GAFLML1 R/W RMDF30H CAN receive rule entry register 1BL Note 1 F03B1H GAFLML1L GAFLML1H After reset 8-bit F0395H F03A0H Manipulable Bit Range 1-bit Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 163 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (13/32) Address F03B0H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name CAN receive buffer register 1AL Note 2 F03B1H F03B2H CAN receive rule entry register 1BH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 1AH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 1CL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 1BL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 1CH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 1BH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 2AL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 1CL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 2AH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 1CH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 2BL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 1DL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 2BH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 1DH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 2CL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 2AL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 2CH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 2AH Note 2 RMPTR1L RMPTR1 R GAFLIDL2L GAFLIDL2 R/W RMDF01L RMDF01 R GAFLIDH2L GAFLIDH2 R/W RMDF11L RMDF11 R GAFLML2L GAFLML2 R/W RMDF21L RMDF21 R GAFLMH2L GAFLMH2 R/W RMDF31L RMDF31 R GAFLPL2L GAFLPL2 R/W RMIDL2L RMIDL2 R GAFLPH2L GAFLPH2 R/W RMIDH2L RMIDH2 R RMIDH2H CAN receive rule entry register 3AL Note 1 F03C5H F03C4H R/W GAFLPH2H F03C3H F03C4H GAFLPH1 RMIDL2H F03C3H F03C2H GAFLPH1L GAFLPL2H F03C1H F03C2H R RMDF31H F03C1H F03C0H RMTS1 GAFLMH2H F03BFH F03C0H RMTS1L RMDF21H F03BFH F03BEH R/W GAFLML2H F03BDH F03BEH GAFLPL1 RMDF11H F03BDH F03BCH GAFLPL1L GAFLIDH2H F03BBH F03BCH R RMDF01H F03BBH F03BAH RMIDH1 GAFLIDL2H F03B9H F03BAH RMIDH1L RMPTR1H F03B9H F03B8H R/W GAFLPH1H F03B7H F03B8H GAFLMH1 RMTS1H F03B7H F03B6H GAFLMH1L GAFLPL1H F03B5H F03B6H R RMIDH1H F03B5H F03B4H RMIDL1 GAFLMH1H F03B3H F03B4H RMIDL1L R/W RMIDL1H F03B3H F03B2H Symbol GAFLIDL3L GAFL1DL3 R/W GAFLIDL3H CAN receive buffer register 2BL Note 2 F03C5H RMTS2L RMTS2H RMTS2 R 1-bit Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 164 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (14/32) Address F03C6H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name CAN receive rule entry register 3AH Note 1 F03C7H F03C6H CAN receive buffer register 2BH Note 2 GAFLML3L CAN receive buffer register 2CL Note 2 RMDF02L CAN receive rule entry register 3BH Note 1 GAFLMH3L CAN receive buffer register 2CH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 3CL Note 1 GAFLPL3L CAN receive buffer register 2DL Note 2 RMDF22L CAN receive rule entry register 3CH Note 1 GAFLPH3L F03D0H CAN receive rule entry register 4AL Note 1 RMIDL3L CAN receive rule entry register 4AH Note 1 GAFLIDH4L F03D2H F03D3H F03D4H CAN receive rule entry register 4BL Note 1 GAFLML4L CAN receive buffer register 3BL Note 2 RMTS3L F03D6H CAN receive rule entry register 4BH Note 1 GAFLMH4L F03D6H F03D7H F03D8H CAN receive rule entry register 4CL Note 1 GAFLPL4L CAN receive buffer register 3CL Note 2 RMDF03L RMDF03H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H - - - - - - - RMDF12 R GAFLPL3 R/W RMDF22 R GAFLPH3 R/W RMDF32 R GAFLIDL4 RMIDL3 GAFLIDH4 RMIDH3 GAFLML4 RMTS3 GAFLMH4 RMPTR3 - - - - R/W - - R - R/W R - - - - - R/W - - R - R/W R - - - - - GAFLPL4 R/W - - RMDF03 R - - GAFLPL4H F03D9H 0000H - RMPTR3H F03D9H F03D8H RMPTR3L - GAFLMH4H CAN receive buffer register 3BH Note 2 0000H - R/W GAFLMH3 RMTS3H F03D7H - GAFLML4H F03D5H 0000H RMIDH3H F03D5H F03D4H RMIDH3L - GAFLIDH4H CAN receive buffer register 3AH Note 2 - RMIDL3H F03D3H - - R GAFLIDL4H CAN receive buffer register 3AL Note 2 F03D1H F03D2H GAFLIDL4L After reset RMDF02 RMDF32H F03D1H F03D0H RMDF32L 16-bit GAFLPH3H F03CFH 8-bit - RMDF22H CAN receive buffer register 2DH Note 2 Manipulable Bit Range R/W GAFLPL3H F03CFH F03CEH RMDF12L 1-bit GAFLML3 RMDF12H F03CDH F03CEH R GAFLMH3H F03CDH F03CCH RMPTR2 RMDF02H F03CBH F03CCH R/W GAFLML3H F03CBH F03CAH RMPTR2L CAN receive rule entry register 3BL Note 1 F03C9H F03CAH GAFLIDH3 RMPTR2H F03C9H F03C8H GAFLIDH3L R/W GAFLIDH3H F03C7H F03C8H Symbol Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 165 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (15/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 1-bit F03DAH CAN receive rule entry register 4CH Note 1 F03DBH F03DAH CAN receive buffer register 3CH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 5AL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 3DL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 5AH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 3DH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 5BL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 4AL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 5BH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 4AH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 5CL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 4BL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 5CH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 4BH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 6AL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 4CL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 6AH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 4CH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 6BL Note 1 GAFLML5 R/W RMIDL4L RMIDL4 R GAFLMH5L GAFLMH5 R/W RMIDH4L RMIDH4 R GAFLPL5L GAFLPL5 R/W RMTS4L RMTS4 R GAFLPH5L GAFLPH5 R/W RMPTR4L RMPTR4 R GAFLIDL6L GAFLIDL6 R/W RMDF04L RMDF04 R GAFLIDH6L GAFLIDH6 R/W RMDF14L RMDF14 R GAFLML6L GAFLML6 R/W GAFLML6H CAN receive buffer register 4DL Note 2 F03EDH F03EEH GAFLML5L RMDF14H F03EDH F03ECH R GAFLIDH6H F03EBH F03ECH RMDF33 RMDF04H F03EBH F03EAH RMDF33L GAFLIDL6H F03E9H F03EAH R/W RMPTR4H F03E9H F03E8H GAFLIDH5 GAFLPH5H F03E7H F03E8H GAFLIDH5L RMTS4H F03E7H F03E6H R GAFLPL5H F03E5H F03E6H RMDF23 RMIDH4H F03E5H F03E4H RMDF23L GAFLMH5H F03E3H F03E4H R/W RMIDL4H F03E3H F03E2H GAFLIDL5 GAFLML5H F03E1H F03E2H GAFLIDL5L RMDF33H F03E1H F03E0H R GAFLIDH5H F03DFH F03E0H RMDF13 RMDF23H F03DFH F03DEH RMDF13L GAFLIDL5H F03DDH F03DEH R/W RMDF13H F03DDH F03DCH GAFLPH4 GAFLPH4H F03DBH F03DCH GAFLPH4L RMDF24L RMDF24 R RMDF24H CAN receive rule entry register 6BH Note 1 F03EFH GAFLMH6L GAFLMH6H GAFLMH6 R/W - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 166 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (16/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 1-bit F03EEH CAN receive buffer register 4DH Note 2 F03EFH F03F0H CAN receive rule entry register 6CL Note 1 F03F1H F03F0H RMIDL5L CAN receive rule entry register 6CH Note 1 GAFLPH6L CAN receive buffer register 5AH Note 2 RMIDH5L CAN receive rule entry register 7AL Note 1 RMTS5L CAN receive rule entry register 7AH Note 1 GAFLIDH7L CAN receive buffer register 5BH Note 2 RMPTR5L CAN receive rule entry register 7BL Note 1 RMDF05L CAN receive rule entry register 7BH Note 1 GAFLMH7L CAN receive buffer register 5CH Note 2 RMDF15L CAN receive rule entry register 7CL Note 1 RMDF25L CAN receive rule entry register 7CH Note 1 GAFLPH7L - - R/W R GAFLML7 RMDF05 GAFLMH7 RMDF15 GAFLPL7 CAN receive buffer register 5DH Note 2 RMDF35L RMIDL6L CAN receive rule entry register 8AH Note 1 GAFLIDH8L - R - - R/W - - R - - R/W - - R - - R/W F0403H RMIDH6H - R - - GAFLPH7 R/W - - RMDF35 R - - GAFLIDL8 R/W RMIDL6 R GAFLIDH8 RMIDH6 - - - - R/W - - R - - GAFLIDH8H RMIDH6L - RMDF25 RMIDL6H CAN receive buffer register 6AH Note 2 GAFLIDL8H CAN receive buffer register 6AL Note 2 - - RMDF35H GAFLIDL8L - GAFLPH7H CAN receive rule entry register 8AL Note 1 - - R/W RMDF25H F0403H F0402H GAFLPL7L CAN receive buffer register 5DL Note 2 F0401H F0402H - R GAFLPL7H F0401H F0400H RMPTR5 RMDF15H F03FFH F0400H GAFLIDH7 - GAFLMH7H F03FFH F03FEH RMTS5 - RMDF05H F03FDH F03FEH GAFLML7L CAN receive buffer register 5CL Note 2 F03FDH F03FCH GAFLIDL7 - - GAFLML7H F03FBH F03FCH RMIDH5 - R/W RMPTR5H F03FBH F03FAH GAFLPH6 GAFLIDH7H F03F9H F03FAH R RMTS5H F03F9H F03F8H GAFLIDL7L CAN receive buffer register 5BL Note 2 F03F7H F03F8H RMIDL5 GAFLIDL7H F03F7H F03F6H R/W RMIDH5H F03F5H F03F6H GAFLPL6 GAFLPH6H F03F5H F03F4H R RMIDL5H F03F3H F03F4H GAFLPL6L CAN receive buffer register 5AL Note 2 F03F3H F03F2H RMDF34 GAFLPL6H F03F1H F03F2H RMDF34L RMDF34H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 167 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (17/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - - 0000H - - 0000H - - 0000H - - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 1-bit F0404H CAN receive rule entry register 8BL Note 1 F0405H F0404H CAN receive buffer register 6BL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 8BH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 6BH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 8CL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 6CL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 8CH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 6CH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 9AL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 6DL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 9AH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 6DH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 9BL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 7AL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 9BH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 7AH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 9CL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 7BL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 9CH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 7BH Note 2 R/W RMDF16L RMDF16 R GAFLIDL9L GAFLIDL9 R/W RMDF26L RMDF26 R GAFLIDH9L GAFLIDH9 R/W RMDF36L RMDF36 R GAFLML9L GAFLML9 R/W RMIDL7L RMIDL7 R GAFLMH9L GAFLMH9 R/W RMIDH7L RMIDH7 R GAFLPL9L GAFLPL9 R/W RMTS7L RMTS7 R GAFLPH9L GAFLPH9 R/W RMPTR7L RMPTR7 R RMPTR7H CAN receive rule entry register 10AL Note 1 F0419H F0418H GAFLPH8 GAFLPH9H F0417H F0418H GAFLPH8L RMTS7H F0417H F0416H R GAFLPL9H F0415H F0416H RMDF06 RMIDH7H F0415H F0414H RMDF06L GAFLMH9H F0413H F0414H R/W RMIDL7H F0413H F0412H GAFLPL8 GAFLML9H F0411H F0412H GAFLPL8L RMDF36H F0411H F0410H R GAFLIDH9H F040FH F0410H RMPTR6 RMDF26H F040FH F040EH RMPTR6L GAFLIDL9H F040DH F040EH R/W RMDF16H F040DH F040CH GAFLMH8 GAFLPH8H F040BH F040CH GAFLMH8L RMDF06H F040BH F040AH R GAFLPL8H F0409H F040AH RMTS6 RMPTR6H F0409H F0408H RMTS6L GAFLMH8H F0407H F0408H R/W RMTS6H F0407H F0406H GAFLML8 GAFLML8H F0405H F0406H GAFLML8L GAFLIDL10L GAFLIDL10 R/W GAFLIDL10H CAN receive buffer register 7CL Note 2 F0419H RMDF07L RMDF07H RMDF07 R - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 168 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (18/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 1-bit F041AH CAN receive rule entry register 10AH Note 1 F041BH F041AH CAN receive buffer register 7CH Note 2 F041BH F041CH CAN receive rule entry register 10BL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 7DL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 10BH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 7DH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 10CL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 8AL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 10CH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 8AH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 11AL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 8BL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 11AH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 8BH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 11BL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 8CL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 11BH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 8CH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 11CL Note 1 GAFLPL10L GAFLPL10 R/W RMIDL8L RMIDL8 R GAFLPH10L GAFLPH10 R/W RMIDH8L RMIDH8 R GAFLIDL11L GAFLIDL11 R/W RMTS8L RMTS8 R GAFLIDH11L GAFLIDH11 R/W RMPTR8L RMPTR8 R GAFLML11L GAFLML11 R/W RMDF08L RMDF08 R GAFLMH11L GAFLMH11 R/W RMDF18L RMDF18 R GAFLPL11L GAFLPL11 R/W GAFLPL11H CAN receive buffer register 8DL Note 2 F042DH F042EH R RMDF18H F042DH F042CH RMDF37 GAFLMH11H F042BH F042CH RMDF37L RMDF08H F042BH F042AH R/W GAFLML11H F0429H F042AH GAFLMH10 RMPTR8H F0429H F0428H GAFLMH10L GAFLIDH11H F0427H F0428H R RMTS8H F0427H F0426H RMDF27 GAFLIDL11H F0425H F0426H RMDF27L RMIDH8H F0425H F0424H R/W GAFLPH10H F0423H F0424H GAFLML10 RMIDL8H F0423H F0422H GAFLML10L GAFLPL10H F0421H F0422H R RMDF37H F0421H F0420H RMDF17 GAFLMH10H F041FH F0420H RMDF17L RMDF27H F041FH F041EH R/W GAFLML10H F041DH F041EH GAFLIDH10 RMDF17H F041DH F041CH GAFLIDH10L GAFLIDH10H RMDF28L RMDF28 R RMDF28H CAN receive rule entry register 11CH Note 1 F042FH GAFLPH11L GAFLPH11H GAFLPH11 R/W - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 169 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (19/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 1-bit F042EH CAN receive buffer register 8DH Note 2 F042FH F0430H CAN receive rule entry register 12AL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 9AL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 12AH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 9AH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 12BL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 9BL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 12BH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 9BH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 12CL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 9CL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 12CH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 9CH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 13AL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 9DL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 13AH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 9DH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 13BL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 10AL Note 2 RMTS9 R GAFLMH12L GAFLMH12 R/W RMPTR9L RMPTR9 R GAFLPL12L GAFLPL12 R/W RMDF09L RMDF09 R GAFLPH12L GAFLPH12 R/W RMDF19L RMDF19 R GAFLIDL13L GAFLIDL13 R/W RMDF29L RMDF29 R GAFLIDH13L GAFLIDH13 R/W RMDF39L RMDF39 R GAFLML13L GAFLML13 R/W RMIDL10L RMIDL10 R RMIDL10H CAN receive rule entry register 13BH Note 1 F0443H F0442H RMTS9L GAFLML13H F0441H F0442H R/W RMDF39H F0441H F0440H GAFLML12 GAFLIDH13H F043FH F0440H GAFLML12L RMDF29H F043FH F043EH R GAFLIDL13H F043DH F043EH RMIDH9 RMDF19H F043DH F043CH RMIDH9L GAFLPH12H F043BH F043CH R/W RMDF09H F043BH F043AH GAFLIDH12 GAFLPL12H F0439H F043AH GAFLIDH12L RMPTR9H F0439H F0438H R GAFLMH12H F0437H F0438H RMIDL9 RMTS9H F0437H F0436H RMIDL9L GAFLML12H F0435H F0436H R/W RMIDH9H F0435H F0434H GAFLIDL12 GAFLIDH12H F0433H F0434H GAFLIDL12L RMIDL9H F0433H F0432H R GAFLIDL12H F0431H F0432H RMDF38 RMDF38H F0431H F0430H RMDF38L GAFLMH13L GAFLMH13 R/W GAFLMH13H CAN receive buffer register 10AH Note 2 F0443H RMIDH10L RMIDH10H RMIDH10 R - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 170 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (20/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Manipulable Bit Range 1-bit F0444H CAN receive rule entry register 13CL Note 1 F0445H F0444H CAN receive buffer register 10BL Note 2 F0445H F0446H CAN receive rule entry register 13CH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 10BH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 14AL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 10CL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 14AH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 10CH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 14BL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 10DL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 14BH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 10DH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 14CL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 11AL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 14CH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 11AH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 15AL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 11BL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 15AH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 11BH Note 2 GAFLIDH14 R/W RMDF110L RMDF110 R GAFLML14L GAFLML14 R/W RMDF210L RMDF210 R GAFLMH14L GAFLMH14 R/W RMDF310L RMDF310 R GAFLPL14L GAFLPL14 R/W RMIDL11L RMIDL11 R GAFLPH14L GAFLPH14 R/W RMIDH11L RMIDH11 R GAFLIDL15L GAFLIDL15 R/W RMTS11L RMTS11 R GAFLIDH15L GAFLIDH15 R/W RMPTR11L RMPTR11 R RMPTR11H CAN receive rule entry register 15BL Note 1 F0459H F0458H GAFLIDH14L GAFLIDH15H F0457H F0458H R RMTS11H F0457H F0456H RMDF010 GAFLIDL15H F0455H F0456H RMDF010L RMIDH11H F0455H F0454H R/W GAFLPH14H F0453H F0454H GAFLIDL14 RMIDL11H F0453H F0452H GAFLIDL14L GAFLPL14H F0451H F0452H R RMDF310H F0451H F0450H RMPTR10 GAFLMH14H F044FH F0450H RMPTR10L RMDF210H F044FH F044EH R/W GAFLML14H F044DH F044EH GAFLPH13 RMDF110H F044DH F044CH GAFLPH13L GAFLIDH14H F044BH F044CH R RMDF010H F044BH F044AH RMTS10 GAFLIDL14H F0449H F044AH RMTS10L RMPTR10H F0449H F0448H R/W GAFLPH13H F0447H F0448H GAFLPL13 RMTS10H F0447H F0446H GAFLPL13L GAFLPL13H GAFLML15L GAFLML15 R/W GAFLML15H CAN receive buffer register 11CL Note 2 F0459H RMDF011L RMDF011H RMDF011 R - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 171 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (21/32) Address F045AH Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name CAN receive rule entry register 15BH Note 1 F045BH F045AH CAN receive buffer register 11CH Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 15CL Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 11DL Note 2 CAN receive rule entry register 15CH Note 1 CAN receive buffer register 11DH Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 12AL Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 12AH Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 12BL Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 12BH Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 12CL Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 12CH Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 12DL Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 12DH Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 13AL Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 13AH Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 13BL Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 13BH Note 2 CAN receive buffer register 13CL Note 2 RMIDL12L RMIDL12 R RMIDH12L RMIDH12 R RMTS12L RMTS12 R RMPTR12L RMPTR12 R RMDF012L RMDF012 R RMDF112L RMDF112 R RMDF212L RMDF212 R RMDF312L RMDF312 R RMIDL13L RMIDL13 R RMIDH13L RMIDH13 R RMTS13L RMTS13 R RMPTR13L RMPTR13 R RMDF013L RMDF013 R RMDF013H CAN receive buffer register 13CH Note 2 F047BH F047CH R RMPTR13H F0479H F047AH RMDF311 RMTS13H F0477H F0478H RMDF311L RMIDH13H F0475H F0476H R/W RMIDL13H F0473H F0474H GAFLPH15 RMDF312H F0471H F0472H GAFLPH15L RMDF212H F046FH F0470H R RMDF112H F046DH F046EH RMDF211 RMDF012H F046BH F046CH RMDF211L RMPTR12H F0469H F046AH R/W RMTS12H F0467H F0468H GAFLPL15 RMIDH12H F0465H F0466H GAFLPL15L RMIDL12H F0463H F0464H R RMDF311H F0461H F0462H RMDF111 GAFLPH15H F045FH F0460H RMDF111L RMDF211H F045FH F045EH R/W GAFLPL15H F045DH F045EH GAFLMH15 RMDF111H F045DH F045CH GAFLMH15L R/W GAFLMH15H F045BH F045CH Symbol RMDF113L RMDF113 R RMDF113H CAN receive buffer register 13DL Note 2 F047DH RMDF213L RMDF213H RMDF213 R 1-bit Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 172 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (22/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 1-bit F047EH CAN receive buffer register 13DH Note 2 F047FH F0480H CAN receive buffer register 14AL Note 2 RMIDL14L CAN receive buffer register 14AH Note 2 RMIDH14L CAN receive buffer register 14BL Note 2 RMTS14L CAN receive buffer register 14BH Note 2 RMPTR14L CAN receive buffer register 14CL Note 2 RMDF014L CAN receive buffer register 14CH Note 2 RMDF114L CAN receive buffer register 14DL Note 2 RMDF214L CAN receive buffer register 14DH Note 2 RMDF314L CAN receive buffer register 15AL Note 2 RMIDL15L CAN receive buffer register 15AH Note 2 RMIDH15L CAN receive buffer register 15BL Note 2 RMTS15L CAN receive buffer register 15BH Note 2 RMPTR15L CAN receive buffer register 15CL Note 2 RMDF015L CAN receive buffer register 15CH Note 2 RMDF115L CAN receive buffer register 15DL Note 2 RMDF215L CAN receive buffer register 15DH Note 2 RMDF315L RPGACC0L CAN RAM test register 1 Note 1 RPGACC1L F0581H F0582H F0584H RPGACC2L CAN RAM test register 3 Note 1 RPGACC3L F0585H F0586H R - - RMDF214 R - - RMDF314 R - - RMIDL15 R - - RMIDH15 R - - - - RMTS15 R RMPTR15 R CAN RAM test register 4 Note 1 RPGACC4L CAN RAM test register 5 Note 1 RPGACC5L RPGACC5H - R - - RMDF115 R - - RMDF215 R - - RMDF315 R - - - - RPGACC0 R/W RPGACC1 R/W RPGACC2 R/W RPGACC3 R/W RPGACC4 R/W RPGACC5 R/W RPGACC4H F058BH - RMDF015 RPGACC3H F0589H F058AH - RMDF114 RPGACC2H F0587H F0588H RPGACC1H CAN RAM test register 2 Note 1 - RPGACC0H F0583H - R RMDF315H CAN RAM test register 0 Note 1 - RMDF014 RMDF215H F049FH F0580H R RMDF115H F049DH F049EH - RMPTR14 RMDF015H F049BH F049CH R RMPTR15H F0499H F049AH - RMTS14 RMTS15H F0497H F0498H RMIDH15H F0495H F0496H - RMIDL15H F0493H F0494H - RMDF314H F0491H F0492H R RMDF214H F048FH F0490H - RMIDH14 RMDF114H F048DH F048EH RMDF014H F048BH F048CH - RMPTR14H F0489H F048AH R RMTS14H F0487H F0488H RMIDL14 RMIDH14H F0485H F0486H R RMIDL14H F0483H F0484H RMDF313 RMDF313H F0481H F0482H RMDF313L - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 173 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (23/32) Address F058CH Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name CAN RAM test register 6 Note 1 F058DH F058EH CAN RAM test register 7 Note 1 RPGACC7L CAN RAM test register 8 Note 1 RPGACC8L CAN RAM test register 9 Note 1 RPGACC9L CAN RAM test register 10 Note 1 RPGACC10L CAN RAM test register 11 Note 1 RPGACC11L CAN RAM test register 12 Note 1 RPGACC12L CAN RAM test register 13 Note 1 F05A1H F05A2H F05A3H F05A4H CAN RAM test register 16 Note 1 RPGACC16L F05A5H F05A6H F05A7H F05A8H CAN receive FIFO access register 0AL Note 2 CAN RAM test register 17 Note 1 F05A9H F05AAH CAN receive FIFO access register 0AH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 18 Note 1 F05ABH F05ACH R/W RPGACC12 R/W RPGACC13 R/W RPGACC14 R/W RFIDL0L RFIDH0L CAN receive FIFO access register 0BL Note 2 CAN RAM test register 19 Note 1 RFTS0L CAN receive FIFO access register 0BH CAN RAM test register 20 Note 1 RFPTR0L CAN receive FIFO access register 0CL CAN RAM test register 21 Note 1 RFDF00L CAN receive FIFO access register 0CH CAN RAM test register 22 Note 1 F05ADH RFDF10L RPGACC22H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - R - - R/W - - R - - R/W - - R - - R/W - - R - - R/W - - - - RFIDL0 RPGACC17 RFIDH0 RPGACC18 RFTS0 RPGACC19 RFPTR0 RPGACC20 RFDF00 R RPGACC21 R/W - - RFDF10 R - - R/W - - RFDF10H RPGACC22L 0000H - RPGACC21H Note 2 - RFDF00H RPGACC21L 0000H - RPGACC20H Note 2 - - R/W RFPTR0H RPGACC20L After reset RPGACC16 RPGACC19H Note 2 16-bit RFTS0H RPGACC19L 8-bit - RFIDH0H RPGACC18L Manipulable Bit Range R/W RFIDL0H RPGACC17L 1-bit RPGACC15 RPGACC18H F05ABH F05AAH RPGACC11 RPGACC17H F05A9H F05A8H R/W RPGACC16H F05A7H F05A6H RPGACC10 RPGACC15H F05A5H F05A4H RPGACC14L RPGACC15L F05A3H F05A2H RPGACC13L CAN RAM test register 15 Note 1 F05A1H F05A0H R/W RPGACC14H F059FH F05A0H RPGACC9 RPGACC13H CAN RAM test register 14 Note 1 F059DH F059EH R/W RPGACC12H F059BH F059CH RPGACC8 RPGACC11H F0599H F059AH R/W RPGACC10H F0597H F0598H RPGACC7 RPGACC9H F0595H F0596H R/W RPGACC8H F0593H F0594H RPGACC6 RPGACC7H F0591H F0592H RPGACC6L R/W RPGACC6H F058FH F0590H Symbol RPGACC22 Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 174 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (24/32) Address F05ACH Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name CAN receive FIFO access register 0DL Note 2 F05ADH F05AEH CAN RAM test register 23 Note 1 RPGACC23L CAN receive FIFO access register 0DH Note 2 RFDF30L CAN RAM test register 24 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 25 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 26 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 27 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 28 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 29 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 30 Note 1 RFPTR1L RPGACC28L RFDF01L RPGACC29L RFDF11L RPGACC30L RFDF21L RFDF31L RFIDH1 R RPGACC26 R/W RFTS1 R RPGACC27 R/W RFPTR1 R RPGACC28 R/W RFDF01 R RPGACC29 R/W RFDF11 R RPGACC30 R/W RFDF21 R RPGACC31 R/W RPGACC31H RFDF31 R RFDF31H CAN RAM test register 32 Note 1 RPGACC32L CAN RAM test register 33 Note 1 RPGACC33L RPGACC34L CAN RAM test register 35 Note 1 RPGACC35L RPGACC35H 8-bit 16-bit After reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - RPGACC33 R/W - - RPGACC34 R/W - - RPGACC35 R/W - - RPGACC34H F05C7H Manipulable Bit Range R/W RPGACC33H CAN RAM test register 34 Note 1 1-bit RPGACC32 RPGACC32H F05C5H F05C6H RPGACC27L CAN receive FIFO access register 1DH Note 2 F05C3H F05C4H RFTS1L RPGACC31L F05C1H F05C2H RPGACC26L CAN RAM test register 31 Note 1 F05BFH F05C0H RFIDH1L RFDF21H F05BFH F05BEH R/W RPGACC30H CAN receive FIFO access register 1DL Note 2 F05BDH F05BEH RPGACC25 RFDF11H F05BDH F05BCH RPGACC25L RPGACC29H CAN receive FIFO access register 1CH Note 2 F05BBH F05BCH R RFDF01H F05BBH F05BAH RFIDL1 RPGACC28H CAN receive FIFO access register 1CL Note 2 F05B9H F05BAH RFIDL1L RFPTR1H F05B9H F05B8H R/W RPGACC27H CAN receive FIFO access register 1BH Note 2 F05B7H F05B8H RPGACC24 RFTS1H F05B7H F05B6H RPGACC24L RPGACC26H CAN receive FIFO access register 1BL Note 2 F05B5H F05B6H R RFIDH1H F05B5H F05B4H RFDF30 RPGACC25H CAN receive FIFO access register 1AH Note 2 F05B3H F05B4H R/W RFIDL1H F05B3H F05B2H RPGACC23 RPGACC24H CAN receive FIFO access register 1AL Note 2 F05B1H F05B2H R RFDF30H F05B1H F05B0H RFDF20 RPGACC23H F05AFH F05B0H RFDF20L R/W RFDF20H F05AFH F05AEH Symbol Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 175 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (25/32) Address F05C8H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name CAN RAM test register 36 Note 1 F05C9H F05CAH CAN RAM test register 37 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 38 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 39 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 40 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 41 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 42 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 43 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 44 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 45 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 46 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 47 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 48 Note 1 CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access register 0AL Note 2 F05E2H CAN RAM test register 49 Note 1 F05E3H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access register 0AH Note 2 F05E4H CAN RAM test register 50 Note 1 F05E5H R/W RPGACC41L RPGACC41 R/W RPGACC42L RPGACC42 R/W RPGACC43L RPGACC43 R/W RPGACC44L RPGACC44 R/W RPGACC45L RPGACC45 R/W RPGACC46L RPGACC46 R/W RPGACC47L RPGACC47 R/W RPGACC48L RPGACC48 R/W CFIDL0L CFIDL0 R/W CFIDL0H RPGACC49L RPGACC49 R/W CFIDH0L CFIDH0 R/W CFIDH0H RPGACC50L RPGACC50 R/W RPGACC50H F05E5H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access register 0BL Note 2 F05E6H CAN RAM test register 51 Note 1 F05E7H F05E6H RPGACC40 RPGACC49H F05E3H F05E4H RPGACC40L RPGACC48H F05E1H F05E2H R/W RPGACC47H F05E1H F05E0H RPGACC39 RPGACC46H F05DFH F05E0H RPGACC39L RPGACC45H F05DDH F05DEH R/W RPGACC44H F05DBH F05DCH RPGACC38 RPGACC43H F05D9H F05DAH RPGACC38L RPGACC42H F05D7H F05D8H R/W RPGACC41H F05D5H F05D6H RPGACC37 RPGACC40H F05D3H F05D4H RPGACC37L RPGACC39H F05D1H F05D2H R/W RPGACC38H F05CFH F05D0H RPGACC36 RPGACC37H F05CDH F05CEH RPGACC36L R/W RPGACC36H F05CBH F05CCH Symbol CFTS0L CFTS0 R CFTS0H RPGACC51L RPGACC51 R/W RPGACC51H F05E7H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access register 0BH Note 2 F05E8H CAN RAM test register 52 Note 1 F05E9H CFPTR0L CFPTR0 R/W CFPTR0H RPGACC52L RPGACC52H RPGACC52 R/W 1-bit Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 176 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (26/32) Address F05E8H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name F05E9H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access register 0CL Note 2 F05EAH CAN RAM test register 53 Note 1 F05EBH F05EAH CFDF00L CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access register 0CH Note 2 F05ECH CAN RAM test register 54 Note 1 F05EDH RPGACC53L CFDF10L RPGACC54L CFDF20L F05EEH CAN RAM test register 55 Note 1 RPGACC55L F05EFH CFDF30L CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access register 0DH Note 2 CFDF30H F05F0H CAN RAM test register 56 Note 1 RPGACC56L F05F1H CAN RAM test register 57 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 58 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 59 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 60 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 61 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 62 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 63 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 64 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 0AL Note 2 RPGACC57L RPGACC57 R/W RPGACC58L RPGACC58 R/W RPGACC59L RPGACC59 R/W RPGACC60L RPGACC60 R/W RPGACC61L RPGACC61 R/W RPGACC62L RPGACC62 R/W RPGACC63L RPGACC63 R/W RPGACC64L RPGACC64 R/W TMIDL0L TMIDL0 R/W TMIDL0H CAN RAM test register 65 Note 1 F0603H RPGACC65L RPGACC65 R/W RPGACC65H CAN0 transmit buffer register 0AH Note 2 F0603H TMIDH0L TMIDH0 R/W TMIDH0H CAN RAM test register 66 Note 1 F0605H F0606H R/W RPGACC64H F0601H F0604H RPGACC56 R/W RPGACC63H F0601H F0602H CFDF30 RPGACC62H F05FFH F0602H R/W RPGACC61H F05FDH F0600H RPGACC55 R/W RPGACC60H F05FBH F0600H CFDF20 RPGACC59H F05F9H F05FEH R/W RPGACC58H F05F7H F05FCH RPGACC54 RPGACC57H F05F5H F05FAH R/W RPGACC56H F05F3H F05F8H CFDF10 RPGACC55H F05EFH F05F6H R/W RPGACC54H CFDF20H F05F4H RPGACC53 CFDF10H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access register 0DL Note 2 F05F2H R/W CFDF00H F05EDH F05EEH CFDF00 R/W RPGACC53H F05EBH F05ECH Symbol RPGACC66L RPGACC66 R/W RPGACC66H CAN RAM test register 67 Note 1 F0607H RPGACC67L RPGACC67H RPGACC67 R/W 1-bit Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 177 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (27/32) Address F0606H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name CAN0 transmit buffer register 0BH Note 2 F0607H F0608H CAN RAM test register 68 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 0CL Note 2 CAN RAM test register 69 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 0CH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 70 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 0DL Note 2 CAN RAM test register 71 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 0DH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 72 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 1AL Note 2 CAN RAM test register 73 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 1AH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 74 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 75 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 1BH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 76 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 1CL Note 2 CAN RAM test register 77 Note 1 TMDF20L TMDF20 R/W RPGACC71L RPGACC71 R/W TMDF30L TMDF30 R/W RPGACC72L RPGACC72 R/W TMIDL1L TMIDL1 R/W RPGACC73L RPGACC73 R/W TMIDH1L TMIDH1 R/W RPGACC74L RPGACC74 R/W RPGACC75L RPGACC75 R/W TMPTR1L TMPTR1 R/W RPGACC76L RPGACC76 R/W TMDF01L TMDF01 R/W RPGACC77L RPGACC77 R/W RPGACC77H CAN0 transmit buffer register 1CH Note 2 F061BH F061CH R/W TMDF01H F061BH F061AH RPGACC70 RPGACC76H F0619H F061AH RPGACC70L TMPTR1H F0619H F0618H R/W RPGACC75H F0617H F0618H TMDF10 RPGACC74H F0617H F0616H TMDF10L TMIDH1H F0615H F0616H R/W RPGACC73H F0613H F0614H RPGACC69 TMIDL1H F0613H F0612H RPGACC69L RPGACC72H F0611H F0612H R/W TMDF30H F0611H F0610H TMDF00 RPGACC71H F060FH F0610H TMDF00L TMDF20H F060FH F060EH R/W RPGACC70H F060DH F060EH RPGACC68 TMDF10H F060DH F060CH RPGACC68L RPGACC69H F060BH F060CH R/W TMDF00H F060BH F060AH TMPTR0 RPGACC68H F0609H F060AH TMPTR0L R/W TMPTR0H F0609H F0608H Symbol TMDF11L TMDF11 R/W TMDF11H CAN RAM test register 78 Note 1 F061DH RPGACC78L RPGACC78H RPGACC78 R/W 1-bit Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 178 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (28/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 1-bit F061CH CAN0 transmit buffer register 1DL Note 2 F061DH F061EH CAN RAM test register 79 Note 1 F061FH F061EH CAN0 transmit buffer register 1DH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 80 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 2AL Note 2 CAN RAM test register 81 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 2AH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 82 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 83 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 2BH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 84 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 2CL Note 2 CAN RAM test register 85 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 2CH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 86 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 2DL Note 2 CAN RAM test register 87 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 2DH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 88 Note 1 TMIDH2L TMIDH2 R/W RPGACC82L RPGACC82 R/W RPGACC83L RPGACC83 R/W TMPTR2L TMPTR2 R/W RPGACC84L RPGACC84 R/W TMDF02L TMDF02 R/W RPGACC85L RPGACC85 R/W TMDF12L TMDF12 R/W RPGACC86L RPGACC86 R/W TMDF22L TMDF22 R/W RPGACC87L RPGACC87 R/W TMDF32L TMDF32 R/W RPGACC88L RPGACC88 R/W RPGACC88H CAN0 transmit buffer register 3AL Note 2 F0631H F0632H R/W TMDF32H F0631H F0630H RPGACC81 RPGACC87H F062FH F0630H RPGACC81L TMDF22H F062FH F062EH R/W RPGACC86H F062DH F062EH TMIDL2 TMDF12H F062DH F062CH TMIDL2L RPGACC85H F062BH F062CH R/W TMDF02H F062BH F062AH RPGACC80 RPGACC84H F0629H F062AH RPGACC80L TMPTR2H F0629H F0628H R/W RPGACC83H F0627H F0628H TMDF31 RPGACC82H F0627H F0626H TMDF31L TMIDH2H F0625H F0626H R/W RPGACC81H F0623H F0624H RPGACC79 TMIDL2H F0623H F0622H RPGACC79L RPGACC80H F0621H F0622H R/W TMDF31H F0621H F0620H TMDF21 RPGACC79H F061FH F0620H TMDF21L TMDF21H TMIDL3L TMIDL3 R/W TMIDL3H CAN RAM test register 89 Note 1 F0633H RPGACC89L RPGACC89H RPGACC89 R/W - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 179 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (29/32) Address F0632H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name CAN0 transmit buffer register 3AH Note 2 F0633H F0634H CAN RAM test register 90 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 91 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 3BH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 92 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 3CL Note 2 CAN RAM test register 93 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 3CH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 94 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 3DL Note 2 CAN RAM test register 95 Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 3DH Note 2 CAN RAM test register 96 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 97 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 98 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 99 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 100 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 101 Note 1 CAN RAM test register 102 Note 1 RPGACC93L RPGACC93 R/W TMDF13L TMDF13 R/W RPGACC94L RPGACC94 R/W TMDF23L TMDF23 R/W RPGACC95L RPGACC95 R/W TMDF33L TMDF33 R/W RPGACC96L RPGACC96 R/W RPGACC97L RPGACC97 R/W RPGACC98L RPGACC98 R/W RPGACC99L RPGACC99 R/W RPGACC100L RPGACC100 R/W RPGACC101L RPGACC101 R/W RPGACC102L RPGACC102 R/W RPGACC102H CAN RAM test register 103 Note 1 F064FH F0650H R/W RPGACC101H F064DH F064EH TMDF03 RPGACC100H F064BH F064CH TMDF03L RPGACC99H F0649H F064AH R/W RPGACC98H F0647H F0648H RPGACC92 RPGACC97H F0645H F0646H RPGACC92L RPGACC96H F0643H F0644H R/W TMDF33H F0641H F0642H TMPTR3 RPGACC95H F063FH F0640H TMPTR3L TMDF23H F063FH F063EH R/W RPGACC94H F063DH F063EH RPGACC91 TMDF13H F063DH F063CH RPGACC91L RPGACC93H F063BH F063CH R/W TMDF03H F063BH F063AH RPGACC90 RPGACC92H F0639H F063AH RPGACC90L TMPTR3H F0639H F0638H R/W RPGACC91H F0637H F0638H TMIDH3 RPGACC90H F0637H F0636H TMIDH3L R/W TMIDH3H F0635H F0636H Symbol RPGACC103L RPGACC103 R/W RPGACC103H CAN RAM test register 104 Note 1 F0651H RPGACC104L RPGACC104H RPGACC104 R/W 1-bit Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notes 1. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 180 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (30/32) Address F0652H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name CAN RAM test register 105 Note F0653H F0654H CAN RAM test register 106 Note RPGACC106L CAN RAM test register 107 Note RPGACC107L CAN RAM test register 108 Note RPGACC108L CAN RAM test register 109 Note RPGACC109L CAN RAM test register 110 Note RPGACC110L CAN RAM test register 111 Note RPGACC111L CAN RAM test register 112 Note RPGACC112L CAN RAM test register 113 Note RPGACC113L CAN RAM test register 114 Note RPGACC114L CAN RAM test register 115 Note RPGACC115L CAN RAM test register 116 Note RPGACC116L CAN RAM test register 117 Note RPGACC117L CAN RAM test register 118 Note RPGACC118L CAN RAM test register 119 Note RPGACC119L CAN RAM test register 120 Note RPGACC120L CAN RAM test register 121 Note RPGACC121L CAN RAM test register 122 Note RPGACC122L CAN RAM test register 123 Note RPGACC123L CAN RAM test register 124 Note RPGACC124L CAN RAM test register 125 Note RPGACC125L CAN RAM test register 126 Note RPGACC126L CAN RAM test register 127 Note RPGACC127L RPGACC115 R/W RPGACC116 R/W RPGACC117 R/W RPGACC118 R/W RPGACC119 R/W RPGACC120 R/W RPGACC121 R/W RPGACC122 R/W RPGACC123 R/W RPGACC124 R/W RPGACC125 R/W RPGACC126 R/W RPGACC127 R/W RPGACC126H F067FH Note R/W RPGACC125H F067DH F067EH RPGACC114 RPGACC124H F067BH F067CH R/W RPGACC123H F0679H F067AH RPGACC113 RPGACC122H F0677H F0678H R/W RPGACC121H F0675H F0676H RPGACC112 RPGACC120H F0673H F0674H R/W RPGACC119H F0671H F0672H RPGACC111 RPGACC118H F066FH F0670H R/W RPGACC117H F066DH F066EH RPGACC110 RPGACC116H F066BH F066CH R/W RPGACC115H F0669H F066AH RPGACC109 RPGACC114H F0667H F0668H R/W RPGACC113H F0665H F0666H RPGACC108 RPGACC112H F0663H F0664H R/W RPGACC111H F0661H F0662H RPGACC107 RPGACC110H F065FH F0660H R/W RPGACC109H F065DH F065EH RPGACC106 RPGACC108H F065BH F065CH R/W RPGACC107H F0659H F065AH RPGACC105 RPGACC106H F0657H F0658H RPGACC105L R/W RPGACC105H F0655H F0656H Symbol RPGACC127H 1-bit Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - These registers are allocated to the RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rule and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 181 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (31/32) Address Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name Symbol R/W Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - R/W - - 00H R/W - R/W - 1-bit F0680H F0681H CAN0 transmit history buffer access register Note THLACC0L THLACC0 R THLACC0H F06C1H LIN wakeup baud rate select register LWBR0/LWBR1 F06C2H LIN/UART baud rate prescaler 0 register LBRP00/LBRP10 F06C3H LIN/UART baud rate prescaler 1 register LBRP01/LBRP11 F06C4H LIN self-test control register LSTC0/LSTC1 R/W - - 00H F06C5H UART standby control register LUSC0/LUSC1 R/W - - 00H LBRP0/ LBRP1 00H 00H F06C8H LIN/UART mode register LMD0/LMD1 R/W - - 00H F06C9H LIN/UART break field configuration register/ UART configuration register LBFC0/LBFC1 R/W - - 00H F06CAH LIN/UART space configuration register LSC0/LSC1 R/W - - 00H F06CBH LIN wakeup configuration register LWUP0/LWUP1 R/W - - 00H F06CCH LIN interrupt enable register LIE0/LIE1 R/W - - 00H F06CDH LIN/UART error detection enable register LEDE0/LEDE1 R/W - - 00H F06CEH LIN/UART control register LCUC0/LCUC1 R/W - - 00H F06D0H LIN/UART transmit control register LTRC0/LTRC1 R/W - - 00H F06D1H LIN/UART mode status register LMST0/LMST1 R - - 00H F06D2H LIN/UART status register LST0/LST1 R/W - - 00H F06D3H LIN/UART error status register LEST0/LEST1 R/W - - 00H F06D4H LIN/UART data field configuration register LDFC0/LDFC1 R/W - - 00H F06D5H LIN/UART ID buffer register LIDB0/LIDB1 R/W - - 00H F06D6H LIN checksum buffer register LCBR0/LCBR1 R/W - - 00H F06D7H UART data buffer 0 register LUDB00/LUDB10 R/W - - 00H F06D8H LIN/UART data buffer 1 register LDB01/LDB11 R/W - - 00H F06D9H LIN/UART data buffer 2 register LDB02/LDB12 R/W - - 00H F06DAH LIN/UART data buffer 3 register LDB03/LDB13 R/W - - 00H F06DBH LIN/UART data buffer 4 register LDB04/LDB14 R/W - - 00H F06DCH LIN/UART data buffer 5 register LDB05/LDB15 R/W - - 00H F06DDH LIN/UART data buffer 6 register LDB06/LDB16 R/W - - 00H F06DEH LIN/UART data buffer 7 register LDB07/LDB17 R/W - - 00H F06DFH LIN/UART data buffer 8 register LDB08/LDB18 R/W - - 00H 00H F06E0H UART operation enable register LUOER0/LUOER1 R/W - - F06E1H UART option register 1 LUOR01/LUOR11 R/W - - 00H F06E4H UART transmit data register LUTDR0L/ LUTDR1L R/W - 0000H - - 0000H - F06E5H F06E6H LUTDR0H/ LUTDR1H UART receive data register F06E7H Note LUTDR0/ LUTDR1 LURDR0L/ LURDR1L LURDR0H/ LURDR1H LURDR0/ LURDR1 R These registers are allocated to the RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 182 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Table 3-6. Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List (32/32) Address F06E8H Special Function Register (2nd SFR) Name UART wait transmit data register F06E9H F06F0H Symbol LUWTDR0L/ LUWTDR1L R/W LUWTDR0/ LUWTDR1 R/W LUWTDR0H/ LUWTDR1H 1-bit Manipulable Bit Range 8-bit 16-bit After reset - 0000H - Timer RJ counter register 0 TRJ0 R/W - - FFFFH F0780H Event output destination select register 00 ELSELR00 R/W - 00H F0781H Event output destination select register 01 ELSELR01 R/W - 00H F0782H Event output destination select register 02 ELSELR02 R/W - 00H F0783H Event output destination select register 03 ELSELR03 R/W - 00H F0784H Event output destination select register 04 ELSELR04 R/W - 00H F0785H Event output destination select register 05 ELSELR05 R/W - 00H F0786H Event output destination select register 06 ELSELR06 R/W - 00H F0787H Event output destination select register 07 ELSELR07 R/W - 00H F0788H Event output destination select register 08 ELSELR08 R/W - 00H F0789H Event output destination select register 09/ A/D converter trigger select register 0 Note ELSELR09/ADTRGS0 R/W - 00H F078AH Event output destination select register 10 ELSELR10 R/W - 00H F078BH Event output destination select register 11 ELSELR11 R/W - 00H F078CH Event output destination select register 12 ELSELR12 R/W - 00H F078DH Event output destination select register 13/ A/D converter trigger select register 1 Note ELSELR13/ADTRGS1 R/W - 00H F078EH Event output destination select register 14 ELSELR14 R/W - 00H F078FH Event output destination select register 15 ELSELR15 R/W - 00H F0790H Event output destination select register 16 ELSELR16 R/W - 00H F0791H Event output destination select register 17 ELSELR17 R/W - 00H F0792H Event output destination select register 18 ELSELR18 R/W - 00H F0793H Event output destination select register 19 ELSELR19 R/W - 00H F0794H Event output destination select register 20 ELSELR20 R/W - 00H F0795H Event output destination select register 21 ELSELR21 R/W - 00H F0796H Event output destination select register 22 ELSELR22 R/W - 00H F0797H Event output destination select register 23 ELSELR23 R/W - 00H F0798H Event output destination select register 24 ELSELR24 R/W - 00H F0799H Event output destination select register 25 ELSELR25 R/W - 00H F06F1H Note Remark Note Note RL78/F13 only. For SFRs in the SFR area, see Table 3-5 SFR List. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 183 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.3 Instruction Address Addressing 3.3.1 Relative addressing [Function] Relative addressing stores in the program counter (PC) the result of adding a displacement value included in the instruction word (signed complement data: -128 to +127 or -32768 to +32767) to the program counter (PC)'s value (the start address of the next instruction), and specifies the program address to be used as the branch destination. Relative addressing is applied only to branch instructions. Figure 3-42. Outline of Relative Addressing PC Instruction code OP code DISPLACE 8/16 bits 3.3.2 Immediate addressing [Function] Immediate addressing stores immediate data of the instruction word in the program counter, and specifies the program address to be used as the branch destination. For immediate addressing, CALL !!addr20 or BR !!addr20 is used to specify 20-bit addresses and CALL !addr16 or BR !addr16 is used to specify 16-bit addresses. 0000 is set to the higher 4 bits when specifying 16-bit addresses. Figure 3-43. Example of CALL !!addr20/BR !!addr20 Instruction code PC OP code Low Addr. High Addr. Seg Addr. Figure 3-44. Example of CALL !addr16/BR !addr16 PC PCS PCH PCL Instruction code OP code 0000 Low Addr. High Addr. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 184 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.3.3 Table indirect addressing [Function] Table indirect addressing specifies a table address in the CALLT table area (0080H to 00BFH) with the 5-bit immediate data in the instruction word, stores the contents at that table address and the next address in the program counter (PC) as 16-bit data, and specifies the program address. Table indirect addressing is applied only for CALLT instructions. In the RL78 microcontrollers, branching is enabled only to the 64 KB space from 00000H to 0FFFFH. Figure 3-45. Outline of Table Indirect Addressing OP code High Addr. 00000000 10 0 Low Addr. Table address Memory 0000 PC R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 PCS PCH PCL 185 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.3.4 Register direct addressing [Function] Register direct addressing stores in the program counter (PC) the contents of a general-purpose register pair (AX/BC/DE/HL) and CS register of the current register bank specified with the instruction word as 20-bit data, and specifies the program address. Register direct addressing can be applied only to the CALL AX, BC, DE, HL, and BR AX instructions. Figure 3-46. Outline of Register Direct Addressing Instruction code OP code rp CS PC R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 PCS PCH PCL 186 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4 Addressing for Processing Data Addresses 3.4.1 Implied addressing [Function] Instructions for accessing registers (such as accumulators) that have special functions are directly specified with the instruction word, without using any register specification field in the instruction word. [Operand format] Implied addressing can be applied only to MULU X. Figure 3-47. Outline of Implied Addressing Instruction code OP code A register Memory (register area) 3.4.2 Register addressing [Function] Register addressing accesses a general-purpose register as an operand. The instruction word of 3-bit long is used to select an 8-bit register and the instruction word of 2-bit long is used to select a 16-bit register. [Operand format] Identifier Description r X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H rp AX, BC, DE, HL Figure 3-48. Outline of Register Addressing OP code Register Memory (register bank area) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 187 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.3 Direct addressing [Function] Direct addressing uses immediate data in the instruction word as an operand address to directly specify the target address. [Operand format] Identifier Description !addr16 Label or 16-bit immediate data (only the space from F0000H to FFFFFH is specifiable) ES:!addr16 Label or 16-bit immediate data (higher 4-bit addresses are specified by the ES register) Figure 3-49. Example of !addr16 MOV !addr16, A FFFFFH <1> Instruction code Target memory OP-code Low Addr. <1> High Addr. F0000H A 16-bit address <1> in the 64-Kbyte area from F0000H to FFFFFH specifies the target location (for use in access to the 2nd SFRs etc.). Memory Figure 3-50. Example of ES:!addr16 ES: !addr16 <1> FFFFFH <2> Instruction code Target memory OP-code Specifies the address in memory Low Addr. <2> High Addr. ES X0000H Specifies a 64-Kbyte area The ES register <1> specifies a 64-Kbyte area within the overall 1-Mbyte space as the four higher-order bits, X, of the address range. A 16-bit address <2> in the area from X0000H to XFFFFH and the ES register <1> specify the target location; this is used for access to fixed data other than that in mirrored areas. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Area from X0000H to XFFFFH 00000H Memory 188 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.4 Short direct addressing [Function] Short direct addressing directly specifies the target addresses using 8-bit data in the instruction word. This type of addressing is applied only to the space from FFE20H to FFF1FH. [Operand format] Identifier SADDR Description Label, FFE20H to FFF1FH immediate data, or 0FE20H to 0FF1FH immediate data (only the space from FFE20H to FFF1FH is specifiable) SADDRP Label, FFE20H to FFF1FH immediate data, or 0FE20H to 0FF1FH immediate data (even address only) (only the space from FFE20H to FFF1FH is specifiable) Figure 3-51. Outline of Short Direct Addressing Instruction code OP code FFF1FH saddr saddr FFE20H Memory Remark SADDR and SADDRP are used to describe the values of addresses FE20H to FF1FH with 16-bit immediate data (higher 4 bits of actual address are omitted), and the values of addresses FFE20H to FFF1FH with 20-bit immediate data. Regardless of whether SADDR or SADDRP is used, addresses within the space from FFE20H to FFF1FH are specified for the memory. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 189 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.5 SFR addressing [Function] SFR addressing directly specifies the target SFR addresses using 8-bit data in the instruction word. This type of addressing is applied only to the space from FFF00H to FFFFFH. [Operand format] Identifier SFR SFRP Description SFR name 16-bit-manipulatable SFR name (even address) Figure 3-52. Outline of SFR Addressing Instruction code OP code FFFFFH SFR FFF00H SFR Memory R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 190 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.6 Register indirect addressing [Function] Register indirect addressing directly specifies the target addresses using the contents of the register pair specified with the instruction word as an operand address. [Operand format] Identifier Description [DE], [HL] (only the space from F0000H to FFFFFH is specifiable) ES:[DE], ES:[HL] (higher 4-bit addresses are specified by the ES register) Figure 3-53. Example of [DE], [HL] FFFFFH [DE], [HL] <1> <1> <1> Instruction code <1> rp(HL/DE) OP-code Target memory Specifies the address in memory F0000H Either pair of registers <1> specifies the target location as an address in the 64-Kbyte area from F0000H to FFFFFH. Memory Figure 3-54. Example of ES:[DE], ES:[HL] ES: [DE], ES: [HL] <1> <1> <2> Instruction code OP-code <2> FFFFFH <2> Specifies the <2> Target memory address in memory Area from X0000H to XFFFFH rp(HL/DE) X0000H <1> Specifies a <1> ES 64-Kbyte area The ES register <1> specifies a 64-Kbyte area within the overall 1-Mbyte space as the four higher-order bits, X, of the address range. Either pair of registers <2> and the ES register <1> specify the target location in the area from X0000H to XFFFFH. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 00000H Memory 191 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.7 Based addressing [Function] Based addressing uses the contents of a register pair specified with the instruction word or 16-bit immediate data as a base address, and 8-bit immediate data or 16-bit immediate data as offset data. The sum of these values is used to specify the target address. [Operand format] Identifier Description [HL + byte], [DE + byte], [SP + byte] (only the space from F0000H to FFFFFH is specifiable) word[B], word[C] (only the space from F0000H to FFFFFH is specifiable) word[BC] (only the space from F0000H to FFFFFH is specifiable) ES:[HL + byte], ES:[DE + byte] (higher 4-bit addresses are specified by the ES register) ES:word[B], ES:word[C] (higher 4-bit addresses are specified by the ES register) ES:word[BC] (higher 4-bit addresses are specified by the ES register) Figure 3-55. Example of [SP+byte] FFFFFH Instruction code <1> <2> <2> byte Target memory Offset Stack area Specifies a SP <1> stack area SP (stack pointer) <1> indicates the stack as the target. By indicating an offset from the address (top of the stack) currently pointed to by the stack pointer, "byte" <2> indicates the target memory (SP + byte). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 F0000H Memory 192 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-56. Example of [HL + byte], [DE + byte] [HL + byte], <1> [DE + byte] <2> <1> <2> FFFFFH Instruction code OP-code <2> Offset Target memory <2> byte Target array of data <1> Address of an array rp(HL/DE) Either pair of registers <1> specifies the address where the target array of data starts in the 64-Kbyte area from F0000H to FFFFFH. "byte" <2> specifies an offset within the array to the target location in memory. Other data in the array F0000H Memory Figure 3-57. Example of word[B], word[C] word [B], <1> <2> word [C] <1> <2> FFFFFH Target memory Instruction code OP-code Low Addr. <2> <2> r(B/C) Offset Address of a word <1> within an array F0000H High Addr. "word" <1> specifies the address where the target array of word-sized data starts in the 64-Kbyte area from F0000H to FFFFFH. Either register <2> specifies an offset within the array to the target location in memory. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Array of word-sized data Memory 193 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-58. Example of word[BC] word [BC] <1> <2> FFFFFH Instruction code Target memory <2> <2> Offset OP-code rp(BC) Low Addr. <1> High Addr. <1> Array of word-sized data Address of a word within an array F0000H "word" <1> specifies the address where the target array of word-sized data starts in the 64-Kbyte area from F0000H to FFFFFH. A pair of registers <2> specifies an offset within the array to the target location in memory. Memory Figure 3-59. Example of ES:[HL + byte], ES:[DE + byte] ES: [HL + byte], ES: [DE + byte] <1> <2> <3> <1> <2> <3> XFFFFH Instruction code <2> Target memory <3> OP-code Offset <3> byte <2> Address of rp(HL/DE) <1> ES an array R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Other data in the array X0000H X0000H Specifies a <1> 64-Kbyte area The ES register <1> specifies a 64-Kbyte area within the overall 1-Mbyte space as the four higher-order bits, X, of the address range. Either pair of registers <2> specifies the address where the target array of data starts in the 64-Kbyte area specified in the ES register <1>. "byte" <3> specifies an offset within the array to the target location in memory. Target array of data Memory 194 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-60. Example of ES:word[B], ES:word[C] ES: word [B], ES: word [C] <1> <2> <3> <1> <2> <3> XFFFFH Instruction code <3> <3> Low Addr. <2> Array of word-sized data Target memory Offset OP-code r(B/C) <2> Address of a word within an array High Addr. X0000H X0000H Specifies a <1> 64-Kbyte area <1> ES The ES register <1> specifies a 64-Kbyte area within the overall Memory 1-Mbyte space as the four higher-order bits, X, of the address range. "word" <2> specifies the address where the target array of word-sized data starts in the 64-Kbyte area specified in the ES register <1>. Either register <3> specifies an offset within the array to the target location in memory. Figure 3-61. Example of ES:word[BC] ES: word [BC] <1> <2> XFFFFH <3> Instruction code OP-code Low Addr. <2> Target memory <3> <3> Offset rp(BC) <2> Address of a word within an array High Addr. X0000H X0000H <1> Specifies a <1> ES 64-Kbyte area The ES register <1> specifies a 64-Kbyte area within the overall 1-Mbyte space as the four higher-order bits, X, of the address range. "word" <2> specifies the address where the target array of word-sized data starts in the 64-Kbyte area specified in the ES register <1>. A pair of registers <3> specifies an offset within the array to the target location in memory. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Array of word-sized data Memory 195 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.8 Based indexed addressing [Function] Based indexed addressing uses the contents of a register pair specified with the instruction word as the base address, and the content of the B register or C register similarly specified with the instruction word as offset address. The sum of these values is used to specify the target address. [Operand format] Identifier Description [HL+B], [HL+C] (only the space from F0000H to FFFFFH is specifiable) ES:[HL+B], ES:[HL+C] (higher 4-bit addresses are specified by the ES register) Figure 3-62. Example of [HL+B], [HL+C] [HL +B], [HL+C] <1> <2> <1> <2> FFFFFH Target memory Instruction code r(B/C) OP-code rp(HL) <2> Offset of <1> Address an array A pair of registers <1> specifies the address where the target array of data starts in the 64-Kbyte area from F0000H to FFFFFH. Either register <2> specifies an offset within the array to the target location in memory. Other data in the array Target array of data F0000H Memory Figure 3-63. Example of ES:[HL+B], ES:[HL+C] ES: [HL +B], ES: [HL +C] <1> <2> <3> <1> <2> <3> XFFFFH <3> Instruction code r(B/C) <2> OP-code Target memory <3> rp(HL) <3> byte <1> ES Offset Address of <2> the array R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Other data in the array X0000H X0000H Specifies a <1> 64-Kbyte area The ES register <1> specifies a 64-Kbyte area within the overall 1-Mbyte space as the four higher-order bits, X, of the address range. A pair of registers <2> specifies the address where the target array of data starts in the 64-Kbyte area specified in the ES register <1>. Either register <3> specifies an offset within the array to the target location in memory. Target array of data Memory 196 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE 3.4.9 Stack addressing [Function] The stack area is indirectly addressed with the stack pointer (SP) contents. This addressing is automatically employed when the PUSH, POP, subroutine call, and return instructions are executed or the register is saved/restored upon generation of an interrupt request. Only the internal RAM area can be set as the stack area. [Operand format] Identifier Description PUSH PSW AX/BC/DE/HL POP PSW AX/BC/DE/HL CALL/CALLT RET BRK RETB (Interrupt request generated) RETI Each stack operation saves or restores data as shown in Figures 3-64 to 3-69. Figure 3-64. Example of PUSH rp PUSH rp <1> <2> <1> Instruction code OP-code <2> SP SP SP - 1 <3> SP - 2 Higher-order byte of rp Lower-order byte of rp rp Stack addressing is specified <1>. The higher-order and lower-order bytes of the pair of registers indicated by rp <2> are stored in addresses SP - 1 and SP - 2, respectively. The value of SP <3> is decreased by two (if rp is the program status word (PSW), the value of the PSW is stored in SP - 1 and 0 is stored in SP - 2). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Stack area F0000H Memory 197 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-65. Example of POP POP rp <1> <2> <1> Instruction code OP-code <2> SP SP SP+ 2 SP+ 1 SP (SP+1) (SP) Stack area F0000H rp Stack addressing is specified <1>. The contents of addresses SP and SP + 1 are stored in the lower-order and higher-order bytes of the pair of registers indicated by rp <2>, respectively. The value of SP <3> is increased by two (if rp is the program status word (PSW), the content of address SP + 1 is stored in the PSW). Memory Figure 3-66. Example of CALL, CALLT CALL <1> Instruction code <1> SP OP-code SP SP - 1 SP - 2 SP - 3 <3> SP - 4 00H PC19 - PC16 PC15 - PC8 PC7 - PC0 <2> F0000H PC Stack addressing is specified <1>. The value of the program counter (PC) changes to indicate the address of the instruction following the CALL instruction. 00H, the values of PC bits 19 to 16, 15 to 8, and 7 to 0 are stored in addresses SP - 1, SP - 2, SP - 3, and SP - 4, respectively <2>. The value of the SP <3> is decreased by 4. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Stack area Memory 198 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-67. Example of RET RET <1> <1> Instruction code SP OP-code SP SP+4 SP+3 SP+2 SP+1 <3> SP (SP+3) (SP+2) (SP+1) (SP) <2> Stack area F0000H PC Stack addressing is specified <1>. The contents of addresses SP, SP + 1, and SP + 2 are stored in PC bits 7 to 0, 15 to 8, and 19 to 16, respectively <2>. The value of SP <3> is increased by four. Memory Figure 3-68. Example of Interrupt, BRK PSW Instruction code SP <1> OP-code or SP Interrupt <2> SP - 1 SP - 2 SP - 3 <3> SP - 4 PSW PC19 - PC16 PC15 - PC8 PC7 - PC0 <2> F0000H PC Stack addressing is specified <1>. In response to a BRK instruction or acceptance of an interrupt, the value of the program counter (PC) changes to indicate the address of the next instruction. The values of the PSW, PC bits 19 to 16, 15 to 8, and 7 to 0 are stored in addresses SP - 1, SP - 2, SP - 3, and SP - 4, respectively <2>. The value of the SP <3> is decreased by 4. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Stack area Memory 199 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE Figure 3-69. Example of RETI, RETB RETI, RETB PSW <1> Instruction code <1> SP OP-code SP SP+4 SP+3 SP+2 SP+1 <3> SP (SP+3) (SP+2) (SP+1) (SP) <2> F0000H PC Stack addressing is specified <1>. The contents of addresses SP, SP + 1, SP + 2, and SP + 3 are stored in PC bits 7 to 0, 15 to 8, 19 to 16, and the PSW, respectively <2>. The value of SP <3> is increased by four. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Stack area Memory 200 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.1 Port Functions Pin I/O buffer power supplies depend on the product. The relationship between power supplies and the pins is shown in table 4-1. EVDD indicates EVDD0 and EVDD1. Table 4-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies (1) 20-pin, 30-pin, 32-pin, 48-pin products Power Supply VDD Corresponding Pins All pins (2) 64-pin products Power Supply Corresponding Pins EVDD0 Port pins other than P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P96 Note, P121 to P124, and P137 VDD P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P96 Note, P121 to P124, and P137 Pins other than port pins Note In R5F10PLE, R5F10PLF, R5F10BLC, R5F10BLD, R5F10BLE, R5F10BLF, R5F10BLG, R5F10ALF, and R5F10ALG, the power supply for P96 is EVDD0. In R5F10ALC, R5F10ALD, and R5F10ALE, the power supply for P92 to P97 is EVDD0. (3) 80-pin products Power Supply Corresponding Pins EVDD0 Port pins other than P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97 Note, P121 to P124, and P137 VDD P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97 Note, P121 to P124, and P137 Pins other than port pins Note In R5F10PME, R5F10PMF, R5F10BME, R5F10BMF, R5F10BMG, R5F10AME, R5F10AMF, and R5F10AMG, the power supply for P96 and P97 is EVDD0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 201 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (4) 100-pin products Power Supply Corresponding Pins EVDD0, EVDD1 Port pins other than P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97, P100 to P105, P121 to P124, and P137 VDD P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97, P100 to P105, P121 to P124, and P137 Pins other than port pins The products are classified into the following five groups according to the product type, pin count, and code flash memory size. Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group D: RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 microcontrollers are provided with digital I/O ports, which enable variety of control operations. In addition to the function as digital I/O ports, these ports have several alternate functions. For details of the alternate functions, see CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 202 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2 Port Configuration Ports include the following hardware. Table 4-2. Port Configuration Item Configuration Port mode registers (PM0, PM1, PM3 to PM10, PM12, PM14, PM15) Control registers Port registers (P0, P1, P3 to P10, P12 to P15) Pull-up resistor option registers (PU0, PU1, PU3 to PU7, PU9, PU10, PU12, PU14, PU15) Port input mode registers (PIM1, PIM3, PIM5 to PIM7, PIM12) Port output mode registers (POM1, POM6, POM7, POM12) Port mode control registers (PMC7, PMC9, PMC12) A/D port configuration register (ADPC) Peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIOR0 to PIOR8) Port input threshold control registers (PITHL1, PITHL3 to PITHL7, PITHL10, PITHL12, PITHL15) Port output slew rate select register (PSRSEL) SNOOZE status output control registers 0 to 3 (PSNZCNT0 to PSNZCNT3) Port mode select register (PMS) 20-pin products Port Total: 16 (CMOS I/O: 13, CMOS input: 3) 30-pin products Total: 26 (CMOS I/O: 23, CMOS input: 3) 32-pin products Total: 28 (CMOS I/O: 25, CMOS input: 3) 48-pin products Total: 44 (CMOS I/O: 38, CMOS input: 5, CMOS output: 1) 64-pin products Total: 58 (CMOS I/O: 52, CMOS input: 5, CMOS output: 1) 80-pin products Total: 74 (CMOS I/O: 68, CMOS input: 5, CMOS output: 1) 100-pin products Total: 92 (CMOS I/O: 86, CMOS input: 5, CMOS output: 1) Caution Most of the following descriptions in this chapter use the 100-pin products as an example. In addition, the products are classified into the following five groups according to the product type, pin count, and code flash memory size. Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group D: RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 203 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Caution Most of the following descriptions in this chapter use the 100-pin products as an example. 4.2.1 Port 0 Port 0 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 0 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 0 (PM0). When the P00 to P03 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 0 (PU0). This port can also be used for timer I/O, real-time clock correction clock output, and external interrupt request input. Reset signal generation sets this port to input mode. Table 4-3. Settings of Registers When Using Port 0 PM0x Alternate Function Setting Note 5 Input 1 Output 0 (TO05 output = 0) Note 1, 3 Pin Name Name I/O P00 P01 P02 P03 Notes 1. Remark Input 1 Output 0 (TO04 output = 0) Note 1, 3 Input 1 Output 0 (TO06 output = 0) Note 1, 3 Input 1 Output 0 (RTC1HZ output = 0) Note 2, 4 When a pin sharing a timer output function of the timer array unit is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the TOmn bit of the timer output register m (TOm) and the TOEmn bit of the timer output enable register m (TOEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as in the initial state (m = 0, 1, n = 0 to 7). 2. When a pin sharing the output (1-Hz) function of the RTC1HZ pin is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the RCLOE1 bit of the real-time clock control register 0 (RTCC0) must have the same setting as its initial value. 3. When a pin sharing a timer output function of the timer array unit is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, operation of the corresponding timer output must be stopped. 4. The RCLOE1 bit of the real-time clock control register 0 (RTCC0) must have the same setting as its initial value. 5. Functions in parentheses can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers 1, 8 (PIOR1, PIOR8). Remark : Don't care PM0x: Port mode register 0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 204 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS For example, figures 4-1 and 4-4 show block diagrams of port 0 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-1. Block Diagram of P00 EVDD WRPU PU0 PU00 P-ch Alternate function INTP9/(TI05) Internal bus Selector RD WRPORT P0 Output latch P00 P00/INTP9/ (TI05)/(TO05) WRPM PM0 PM00 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO05) P0: Port register 0 PU0: Pull-up resistor option register 0 PM0: Port mode register 0 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 205 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-2. Block Diagram of P01 EVDD WRPU PU0 PU01 P-ch Alternate function (TI04) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P0 Output latch P01 P01/(TI04)/(TO04) WRPM PM0 PM01 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO04) P0: Port register 0 PU0: Pull-up resistor option register 0 PM0: Port mode register 0 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 206 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-3. Block Diagram of P02 EVDD WRPU PU0 PU02 P-ch Alternate function (TI06) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P0 Output latch P02 P02/(TI06)/(TO06) WRPM PM0 PM02 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO06) P0: Port register 0 PU0: Pull-up resistor option register 0 PM0: Port mode register 0 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 207 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-4. Block Diagram of P03 EVDD WRPU PU0 PU03 P-ch Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P0 Output latch P03 P03/(RTC1HZ) WRPM PM0 PM03 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (RTC1HZ) P0: Port register 0 PU0: Pull-up resistor option register 0 PM0: Port mode register 0 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 208 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.2 Port 1 Port 1 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 1 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 1 (PM1). When the P10 to P17 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 1 (PU1). Input to the P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, and P17 pins can be specified through a normal input buffer or a TTL input buffer in 1-bit units using port input mode register 1 (PIM1). Output from the P10 to P17 pins can be specified as N-ch open-drain output (EVDD tolerance) in 1-bit units using port output mode register 1 (POM1). Input to the P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, and P17 pins can be specified through an input buffer in 1-bit units using the port input threshold control register 1 (PITHL1). This port can also be used for data I/O and clock I/O for serial interfaces (simplified IIC, CSI, and UART), serial data I/O for LIN, serial data I/O for CAN, real-time clock correction clock output, programming UART I/O, timer I/O, external interrupt request input, and SNOOZE status output. Reset signal generation sets this port to input mode. Table 4-4. Settings of Registers When Using Port 1 (1/3) Pin name Name I/O P10 Input PM1x PIM1x POM1x PITHL1x Alternate Function Setting Remark Note 11 1 0 x 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) 1 Output 0 x x x 0 1 x x TTL input x SCK10/SCL10 output = 1 x Note 2 TO13 output = 0 Note 1 CMOS output N-ch O.D output TRJO0 output = 0 Note 3 LTXD1 output = 1 Note 8 CTXD0 output = 1 Note 9 P11 Input 1 0 x 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) 1 Output 0 x x x 0 1 x x x x TTL input SDA10 output = 1 TO12 output = 0 Note4 Note2 CMOS output N-ch O.D output (TRDIOB0 output = 0) Note5 P12 Input 1 - x - x Output 0 - 0 - TO11 output = 0 Note 2 - 1 - SO10/TxD1 output = 1 SNZOUT3 output = 0 Note 4 CMOS output N-ch O.D output Note 7 (TRDIOD0 output = 0) Note 5 (Notes and Remark are listed on the bottom of Table 4-4 Settings of Registers When Using Port 1 (3/3).) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 209 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-4. Settings of Registers When Using Port 1 (2/3) Pin name Name I/O P13 Input PM1x PIM1x POM1x PITHL1x Alternate Function Setting Remark Note 11 1 0 x 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output 0 1 x x x TTL input x 0 x TRDIOA0 output = 0 Note 5 CMOS output x 1 x SDA01 output = 1 Note 4 N-ch O.D output TO04 output = 0 Note 2 LTXD0 output = 1 Note 8 P14 Input 1 0 x 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) 1 Output 0 x x x 0 1 x x x x TRDIOC0 output = 0 TTL input Notes 5, 10 SCK01/SCL01 output = 1 Note 1 CMOS output N-ch O.D output TO06 output = 0 Note 2 P15 Input 1 - x - x Output 0 - 0 - TRDIOA1 output = 0 Note 5 - 1 - TO05 output = 0 Note 2 CMOS output N-ch O.D output SO00 output/TXD0 output = 1 Note 4 RTC1HZ output = 0 Note 6 (TRDIOA0 output = 0) Note 5 P16 Input 1 0 x 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output 0 1 x x x TTL input x 0 x SDA00 output = 1 Note 4 CMOS output x 1 x TRDIOC1 output = 0 Note 5 N-ch O.D output TO02 output = 0 Note 2 (Notes and Remark are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 210 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-4. Settings of Registers When Using Port 1 (3/3) Pin name Name I/O P17 Input PM1x PIM1x POM1x PITHL1x Alternate Function Setting Note 7 Remark 1 0 x 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output 1 1 x x x TTL input 0 x 0 x TRDIOB1 output = 0 Note 5 CMOS output x 1 x SCK00/SCL00 output = 1 Note 1 N-ch O.D output TO00 output = 0 Note 2 Notes 1. When a pin sharing the serial array unit function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the CKOmn bit of the serial output register m (SOm), the SOEmn bit of the serial output enable register m (SOEm), and the SEmn bit of the serial channel enable status register m (SEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as its initial value (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1). 2. When a pin sharing a timer output function of the timer array unit is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the TOmn bit of the timer output register m (TOm) and the TOEmn bit of the timer output enable register m (TOEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as in the initial state (m = 0, 1, n = 0 to 7). 3. When a pin sharing the timer output function of the timer RJ is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the bit 2 (TOENA) of the timer RJ I/O control register 0 (TRJIOC0) must have the same setting as its initial value. 4. When a pin sharing the serial array unit function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the SOmn bit of the serial output register m (SOm), the SOEmn bit of the serial output enable register m (SOEm), and the SEmn bit of the serial channel enable status register m (SEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as its initial value (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1). 5. When a pin sharing a timer RD function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the target bit for TRDIOij pin output control in the timer RD output master enable register 1 (TRDOER1) must have the same setting as its initial value (i = A, B, C, D, j = 0, 1) 6. The RCLOE1 bit of the real-time clock control register 0 (RTCC0) must have the same setting as its initial value. 7. When a pin sharing the SNOOZE status output function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the OUTEN0 to OUTEN7 bits of the SNOOZE status output control registers 0, 1, 2, 3 (PSNZCNT0, 1, 2, 3) must have the same setting as its initial value. 8. When a pin sharing the serial data output function of the LIN is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, operation of the corresponding LIN must be stopped. 9. When a pin sharing the serial data output function of the CAN is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, operation of the corresponding CAN must be stopped. 10. When the SNOOZE status output is in use, output from TRDIOC0 is stopped. 11. Functions in parentheses can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register 7 (PIOR7). Remark : Don't care PM1x: Port mode register 1 PIM1x: Port input mode register 1 POM1x: Port output mode register 1 PITHL1X: Port input threshold control register 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 211 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figures 4-5 to 4-12 show block diagrams of port 1 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-5. Block Diagram of P10 WRPITHL PITHL1 PITHL10 WRPIM PIM1 EVDD PIM10 WRPU PU1 PU10 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT CMOS (Schmitt3) TTL P1 Output latch P10 WRPOM POM1 P10/TI13/TO13/ TRJO0/SCK10/ SCL10/LTXD1/ CTXD0 POM10 WRPM PM1 PM10 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function SCK10/SCL10 /LTXD1/CTXD0 Alternate function TO13/TRJO0 P1: Port register 1 PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1 PM1: Port mode register 1 PIM1: Port input mode register 1 POM1: Port output mode register 1 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL1: Port input threshold control register 1 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 212 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-6. Block Diagram of P11 WRPITHL PITHL1 PITHL11 WRPIM PIM1 PIM11 EVDD WRPU PU1 PU11 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT CMOS (Schmitt3) TTL P1 Output latch P11 WRPOM POM1 P11/TI12/TO12/ SI10/SDA10/RXD1/ LRXD1/CRXD0/ (TRDIOB0) POM11 WRPM PM1 PM11 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function SDA10 Alternate function TO12/(TRDIOB0) P1: Port register 1 PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1 PM1: Port mode register 1 PIM1: Port input mode register 1 POM1: Port output mode register 1 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL1: Port input threshold control register 1 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 213 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-7. Block Diagram of P12 EVDD WRPU PU1 PU12 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT WRPOM P1 Output latch P12 POM1 P12/TI11/TO11/ INTP5/SO10/ TXD1/SNZOUT3/ (TRDIOD0) POM12 WRPM PM1 PM12 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function SO10/TXD1 Alternate function TO11/SNZOUT3 /(TRDIOD0) P1: Port register 1 PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1 PM1: Port mode register 1 POM1: Port output mode register 1 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 214 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-8. Block Diagram of P13 WRPITHL PITHL1 PITHL13 WRPIM PIM1 PIM13 EVDD WRPU PU1 PU13 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT CMOS (Schmitt3) TTL P1 Output latch P13 WRPOM P13/TI04/TO04/ TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0/ SI01/SDA01/LTXD0 POM1 POM13 WRPM PM1 PM13 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function SDA01/LTXD0 Alternate function TRDIOA0/TO04 P1: Port register 1 PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1 PM1: Port mode register 1 PIM1: Port input mode register 1 POM1: Port output mode register 1 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL1: Port input threshold control register 1 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 215 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-9. Block Diagram of P14 WRPITHL PITHL1 PITHL14 WRPIM PIM1 PIM14 EVDD WRPU PU1 PU14 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD CMOS (Schmitt3) TTL WRPORT P1 Output latch P14 WRPOM P14/TI06/TO06/ TRDIOC0/SCK01/ SCL01/LRXD0 POM1 POM14 WRPM PM1 PM14 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function SCK01/SCL01 Alternate function TO06/TRDIOC0 P1: Port register 1 PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1 PM1: Port mode register 1 PIM1: Port input mode register 1 POM1: Port output mode register 1 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL1: Port input threshold control register 1 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 216 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-10. Block Diagram of P15 EVDD WRPU PU1 PU15 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P1 Output latch P15 WRPOM POM1 P15/TI05/TO05/ TRDIOA1/SO00/ TXD0/TOOLTXD/ RTC1HZ/(TRDIOA0) POM15 WRPM PM1 PM15 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function TXD0/SO00 Alternate function TO05/TRDIOA1 /RTC1HZ/(TRDIOA0) P1: Port register 1 PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1 PM1: Port mode register 1 POM1: Port output mode register 1 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 217 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-11. Block Diagram of P16 WRPITHL PITHL1 PITHL16 WRPIM PIM1 PIM16 EVDD WRPU PU1 PU16 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD CMOS (Schmitt3) TTL WRPORT P1 Output latch P16 WRPOM POM1 P16/TI02/TO02/ TRDIOC1/SI00/ SDA00/RXD0/ TOOLRXD POM16 WRPM PM1 PM16 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function SDA00 Alternate function TO02/TRDIOC1 P1: Port register 1 PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1 PM1: Port mode register 1 PIM1: Port input mode register 1 POM1: Port output mode register 1 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL1: Port input threshold control register 1 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 218 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-12. Block Diagram of P17 WRPITHL PITHL1 PITHL17 WRPIM PIM1 PIM17 EVDD WRPU PU1 PU17 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function RD Internal bus Selector CMOS (Schmitt3) WRPORT TTL P1 Output latch P17 WRPOM P17/TI00/TO00/ TRDIOB1/SCK00/ SCL00/INTP3 POM1 POM17 WRPM PM1 PM17 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function SCK00/SCL00 Alternate function TO00/TRDIOB1 P1: Port register 1 PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1 PM1: Port mode register 1 PIM1: Port input mode register 1 POM1: Port output mode register 1 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL1: Port input threshold control register 1 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 219 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.3 Port 3 Port 3 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 3 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 3 (PM3). When the P30 to P32 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 3 (PU3). Input to the P30 pin can be specified through a normal input buffer or a TTL input buffer in 1-bit units using port input mode register 3 (PIM3). For the P30 pin input, the threshold of the input buffer can be specified in 1-bit units using the port input threshold control register 3 (PITHL3). This port can also be used for external interrupt request input, timer I/O, serial interface slave select input, SNOOZE status output, and STOP status output. P33 and P34 can also be used for A/D converter analog input and reference voltage input (+side and - side). To use P33/ANI0 and P34/ANI1 as digital input pins, set them in the digital I/O mode by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and in the input mode by using the PM3 register. Use these pins starting from the upper bit. To use P33/ANI0 and P34/ANI1 as digital output pins, set them in the digital I/O mode by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and in the output mode by using the PM3 register. Use these pins starting from the upper bit. To use P33/ANI0 and P34/ANI1 as analog I/O pins, set them in the analog I/O mode by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and in the input mode by using the PM3 register. Use these pins starting from the lower bit. Reset signal generation sets P30 to P32 to input mode and P33/ANI0 and P34/ANI1 to analog input mode. Table 4-5. Settings of Registers When Using Port 3 (P30 to P32) (1) Pin name Name I/O P30 Input PM3x PIM3x PITHL3x Alternate Function Setting Note 5 Remark 1 0 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) 1 Output 0 x x x x TRDIOD1 output = 0 TTL input Note 1 TO01 output = 0 Note 2 SNZOUT0 output = 0 Note 3 P31 Input 1 - - x Output 0 - - TO14 output = 0 Note 2 STOPST output = 0 Note 4 P32 Input 1 - - x Output 0 - - TO16 output = 0 Note 2 Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. When a pin sharing a timer RD function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the target bit for TRDIOij pin output control in the timer RD output master enable register 1 (TRDOER1) must have the same setting as its initial value (i = A, B, C, D, j = 0, 1) When a pin sharing a timer output function of the timer array unit is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the TOmn bit of the timer output register m (TOm) and the TOEmn bit of the timer output enable register m (TOEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as in the initial state (m = 0, 1, n = 0 to 7). When a pin sharing the SNOOZE status output function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the OUTEN0 to OUTEN7 bits of the SNOOZE status output control registers 0, 1, 2, 3 (PSNZCNT0, 1, 2, 3) must have the same setting as its initial value. When a pin sharing the STOP status output function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the STPOEN bit of the STOP status output control register (STPSTC) must have the same setting as its initial value. Functions in parentheses can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers 0 to 8 (PIOR0 to PIOR8). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 220 RL78/F13, F14 Remark CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS : Don't care PM3x: Port mode register 3 PIM3x: Port input mode register 3 PITHL3x: Port input threshold control register 3 Table 4-6. Settings of Registers When Using Port 3 (P33 and P34) (2) Pin Name PM3x ADPC Alternate Function Setting Remark Input 1 01 to n-2H To use P3n as a port, use these pins Output 0 01 to n-2H Name P3n I/O from the upper bit. Remarks 1. PM3x: Port mode register 3 ADPC: A/D port configuration register 2. n = 3 or 4 Table 4-7. Setting Functions of P33/ANI0 and P34/ANI1 Pins ADPC Register Digital I/O selection Analog input selection PM3 Register ADS Register P33/ANI0 and P34/ANI1 Pins Input mode Digital input Output mode Digital output Input mode Output mode Selects ANI. Analog input (to be converted) Does not select ANI. Analog input (not to be converted) Selects ANI. Setting prohibited Does not select ANI. Reset signal generation sets P33/ANI0 and P34/ANI1 to analog input mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 221 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figures 4-13 to 4-16 show block diagrams of port 3 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-13. Block Diagram of P30 WRPITHL PITHL3 PITHL30 WRPIM PIM3 PIM30 EVDD WRPU PU3 PU30 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT CMOS (Schmitt3) TTL P3 Output latch P30 WRPM P30/TI01/TO01/ TRDIOD1/SSI00/ INTP2/SNZOUT0 PM3 PM30 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function TO01/TRDIOD1/ SNZOUT0 P3: Port register 3 PU3: Pull-up resistor option register 3 PM3: Port mode register 3 PIM3: Port input mode register 3 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL3: Port input threshold control register 3 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 222 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-14. Block Diagram of P31 EVDD WRPU PU3 PU31 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P3 Output latch P31 P31/TI14/TO14/ STOPST/(INTP2) WRPM PM3 PM31 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function TO14/STOPST P3: Port register 3 PU3: Pull-up resistor option register 3 PM3: Port mode register 3 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 223 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-15. Block Diagram of P32 EVDD WRPU PU3 PU32 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P3 Output latch P32 P32/TI16/ TO16/INTP7 WRPM PM3 PM32 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function TO16 P3: Port register 3 PU3: Pull-up resistor option register 3 PM3: Port mode register 3 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 224 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-16. Block Diagram of P33 and P34 WRADPC 0: Analog input 1: Digital I/O ADPC ADPC4-ADPC0 Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P3 P33/AV REFP/ANI0 P34/AV REFM/ANI1 Output latch P33, P34 WRPM PM3 PM33, PM34 WRPMS PMS PMS0 A/D converter ADS P3: Port register 3 PM3: Port mode register 3 PMS: Port mode select register ADS4 to ADS0 ADPC: A/D Port configuration register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 225 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.4 Port 4 Port 4 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 4 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 4 (PM4). When the P40 to P47 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 4 (PU4). For the P43 pin input, the threshold of the input buffer can be specified in 1-bit units using the port input threshold control register 4 (PITHL4). This port can also be used for external interrupt request input, timer I/O, comparator output, SNOOZE status output, LIN serial data I/O, and data I/O for a flash memory programmer/debugger. Reset signal generation sets this port to input mode. Table 4-8. Settings of Registers When Using Port 4 Pin name PM4x PITHL4x Alternate Function Setting Note 6 Name I/O P40 Input 1 - x Output 0 - x Input 1 - x Output 0 - TRJIO0 output = 0 Note 1 P41 Remark TO10 output = 0 Note 2 VCOUT0 output = 0 Note 3 SNZOUT2 output = 0 Note 4 P42 P43 Input 1 - x Output 0 - (LTXD0 = 1) Note 5 Input 1 0 x 1 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) P44 P45 P46 P47 Output 0 x x Input 1 - x Output 0 - (TO07 output = 0) Note 2 Input 1 - x Output 0 - (TO10 output = 0) Note 2 Input 1 - x Output 0 - (TO12 output = 0) Note 2 Input 1 - x Output 0 - x Notes 1. When a pin sharing a timer input/output function of the timer RJ is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the TMOD2 to TMOD0 bits of the timer RJ mode register 0 (TRJMR0) must have the same setting as their initial value or have a setting other than 001B. 2. When a pin sharing a timer output function of the timer array unit is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the TOmn bit of the timer output register m (TOm) and the TOEmn bit of the timer output enable register m (TOEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as in the initial state (m = 0, 1, n = 0 to 7). 3. When a pin sharing the comparator output function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the COE bit of the comparator control register (CMPCTL) must have the same setting as its initial value. 4. When a pin sharing the SNOOZE status output function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the OUTEN0 to OUTEN7 bits of the SNOOZE status output control registers 0, 1, 2, 3 (PSNZCNT0, 1, 2, 3) must have the same setting as its initial value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 226 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 5. When a pin sharing the serial data output function of the LIN is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, 6. Functions in parentheses can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers 1, 3, 4 operation of the corresponding LIN must be stopped. (PIOR1, PIOR3, PIOR4). Remark : Don't care PM4x: Port mode register 4 PITHL4x: Port input threshold control register 4 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 227 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figures 4-17 to 4-24 show block diagrams of port 4 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-17. Block Diagram of P40 EVDD WRPU PU4 PU40 P-ch Alternate function Selector WRPORT P4 Output latch P40 WRPM Selector Internal bus RD P40/TOOL0 PM4 PM40 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function TOOL0 P4: Port register 4 PU4: Pull-up resistor option register 4 PM4: Port mode register 4 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 228 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-18. Block Diagram of P41 EVDD WRPU PU4 PU41 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P4 Output latch P41 WRPM P41/TI10/TO10/ TRJIO0/VCOUT0/ SNZOUT2 PM4 PM41 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function TO10/VCOUT0/ SNZOUT2 P4: Port register 4 PU4: Pull-up resistor option register 4 PM4: Port mode register 4 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 229 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-19. Block Diagram of P42 EVDD WRPU PU4 PU42 P-ch Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P4 Output latch P42 WRPM P42/(LTXD0) PM4 PM42 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (LTXD0) P4: Port register 4 PU4: Pull-up resistor option register 4 PM4: Port mode register 4 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 230 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-20. Block Diagram of P43 WRPITHL PITHL4 PITHL43 EVDD WRPU PU4 PU43 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT CMOS (Schmitt3) P4 Output latch P43 P43/(LRXD0) WRPM PM4 PM43 WRPMS PMS PMS0 P4: Port register 4 PU4: Pull-up resistor option register 4 PM4: Port mode register 4 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL4: Port input threshold control register 4 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 231 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-21. Block Diagram of P44 EVDD WRPU PU4 PU44 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P4 Output latch P44 WRPM P44/(TI07)/(TO07) PM4 PM44 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO07) P4: Port register 4 PU4: Pull-up resistor option register 4 PM4: Port mode register 4 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 232 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-22. Block Diagram of P45 EVDD WRPU PU4 PU45 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P4 Output latch P45 WRPM P45/(TI10)/(TO10) PM4 PM45 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO10) P4: Port register 4 PU4: Pull-up resistor option register 4 PM4: Port mode register 4 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 233 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-23. Block Diagram of P46 EVDD WRPU PU4 PU46 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P4 Output latch P46 WRPM P46/(TI12)/(TO12) PM4 PM46 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO12) P4: Port register 4 PU4: Pull-up resistor option register 4 PM4: Port mode register 4 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 234 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-24. Block Diagram of P47 EVDD WRPU PU4 PU47 P-ch Alternate function Internal bus Selector RD WRPORT P4 Output latch P47 P47/INTP13 WRPM PM4 PM47 WRPMS PMS PMS0 P4: Port register 4 PU4: Pull-up resistor option register 4 PM4: Port mode register 4 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 235 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.5 Port 5 Port 5 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 5 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 5 (PM5). When the P50 to P57 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 5 (PU5). Input to the P54 pin can be specified through a normal input buffer or a TTL input buffer in 1-bit units using port input mode register 5 (PIM5). For the P50 and P52 to P54 pin input, the threshold of the input buffer can be specified in 1-bit units using the port input threshold control register 5 (PITHL5). This port can also be used for external interrupt request input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, slave select input, timer I/O, STOP status output, and SNOOZE status output. Reset signal generation sets this port to input mode. Table 4-9. Settings of Registers When Using Port 5 (1/2) Pin Name Name I/O P50 Input PM5x PIM5x PITHL5x Alternate Function Setting Note 6 Remark 1 - 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) P51 P52 Output 0 - x x Input 1 - - x Output 0 - - (SO01 output = 1) Note 1 Input 1 - 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output 0 - x (SCK01 output = 1) Note 2 (STOPST output = 0) Note 5 P53 Input 1 - 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) P54 Output 0 - x x Input 1 0 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output 0 1 x x x x (TO11 output = 0) Note 3 TTL input (Notes and Remark are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 236 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-9. Settings of Registers When Using Port 5 (2/2) Pin Name PM5x PIM5x PITHL5x Alternate Function Setting Note 5 Name I/O P55 Input 1 - - x Output 0 - - (TO13 output = 0) Note 3 Input 1 - - x Output 0 - - (TO15 output = 0) Note 3 P56 Remark (SNZOUT1 output = 0) Note 4 P57 Input 1 - - x Output 0 - - (TO17 output = 0) Note 3 (SNZOUT0 output = 0) Note 4 Notes 1. When a pin sharing the serial array unit function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the SOmn bit of the serial output register m (SOm), the SOEmn bit of the serial output enable register m (SOEm), and the SEmn bit of the serial channel enable status register m (SEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as its initial value (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1). 2. When a pin sharing the serial array unit function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the CKOmn bit of the serial output register m (SOm), the SOEmn bit of the serial output enable register m (SOEm), and the SEmn bit of the serial channel enable status register m (SEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as its initial value (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1). 3. When a pin sharing a timer output function of the timer array unit is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the TOmn bit of the timer output register m (TOm) and the TOEmn bit of the timer output enable register m (TOEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as in the initial state (m = 0, 1, n = 0 to 7). 4. When a pin sharing the SNOOZE status output function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the OUTEN0 to OUTEN7 bits of the SNOOZE status output control registers 0, 1, 2, 3 (PSNZCNT0, 1, 2, 3) must have the same setting as its initial value. 5. When a pin sharing the STOP status output function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the STPOEN bit of the STOP status output control register (STPSTC) must have the same setting as its initial value. 6. Functions in parentheses can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers 3, 4, 6 (PIOR3, PIOR4, PIOR6). The STOPST function can be assigned via settings in the STOP status output control register (STPSTC). Remark : Don't care PM5x: Port mode register 5 PIM5x: Port input mode register 5 PITHL5x: Port input threshold control register 5 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 237 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figures 4-25 to 4-32 show block diagrams of port 5 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-25. Block Diagram of P50 WRPITHL EVDD PITHL5 PITHL50 WRPU PU5 PU50 CMOS (Schmitt1) P-ch Alternate function Internal bus Selector RD CMOS (Schmitt3) WRPORT P5 Output latch P50 P50/(SSI01)/ (INTP3) WRPM PM5 PM50 WRPMS PMS PMS0 P5: Port register 5 PU5: Pull-up resistor option register 5 PM5: Port mode register 5 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL5: Port input threshold control register 5 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 238 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-26. Block Diagram of P51 EVDD WRPU PU5 PU51 P-ch Alternate function Internal bus Selector RD WRPORT P5 Output latch P51 WRPM P51/INTP11/ (SO01) PM5 PM51 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (SO01) P5: Port register 5 PU5: Pull-up resistor option register 5 PM5: Port mode register 5 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 239 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-27. Block Diagram of P52 WRPITHL PITHL5 PITHL52 EVDD WRPU PU5 PU52 CMOS (Schmitt1) P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD CMOS (Schmitt3) WRPORT P5 Output latch P52 WRPM P52/(SCK01)/ (STOPST) PM5 PM52 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (SCK01) Alternate function (STOPST) P5: Port register 5 PU5: Pull-up resistor option register 5 PM5: Port mode register 5 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL5: Port input threshold control register 5 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 240 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-28. Block Diagram of P53 WRPITHL EVDD PITHL5 PITHL53 WRPU PU5 PU53 CMOS (Schmitt1) P-ch Alternate function Internal bus Selector RD CMOS (Schmitt3) WRPORT P5 Output latch P53 P53/INTP10/ (SI01) WRPM PM5 PM53 WRPMS PMS PMS0 P5: Port register 5 PU5: Pull-up resistor option register 5 PM5: Port mode register 5 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL5: Port input threshold control register 5 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 241 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-29. Block Diagram of P54 WRPITHL PITHL5 PITHL54 WRPIM PIM5 PIM54 EVDD WRPU PU5 PU54 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function CMOS (Schmitt3) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT TTL P5 Output latch P54 WRPM P54/SSI10/ (TI11)/(TO11) PM5 PM54 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO11) P5: Port register 5 PU5: Pull-up resistor option register 5 PM5: Port mode register 5 PIM5: Port input mode register 5 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL5: Port input threshold control register 5 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 242 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-30. Block Diagram of P55 EVDD WRPU PU5 PU55 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P5 Output latch P55 WRPM P55/(TI13)/(TO13) PM5 PM55 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO13) P5: Port register 5 PU5: Pull-up resistor option register 5 PM5: Port mode register 5 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 243 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-31. Block Diagram of P56 EVDD WRPU PU5 PU56 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P5 Output latch P56 WRPM P56/(TI15)/(TO15)/ (SNZOUT1) PM5 PM56 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO15)/ (SNZOUT1) P5: Port register 5 PU5: Pull-up resistor option register 5 PM5: Port mode register 5 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 244 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-32. Block Diagram of P57 EVDD WRPU PU5 PU57 P-ch Alternate function Internal bus Selector RD WRPORT P5 Output latch P57 WRPM P57/(TI17)/(TO17)/ (SNZOUT0) PM5 PM57 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO17)/ (SNZOUT0) P5: Port register 5 PU5: Pull-up resistor option register 5 PM5: Port mode register 5 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 245 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.6 Port 6 Port 6 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 6 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 6 (PM6). Input to the P62 and P63 pins can be specified through a normal input buffer or a TTL input buffer in 1-bit units using port input mode register 6 (PIM6). When the P60 to P67 pins are used as an input port, use of an onchip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 6 (PU6). Output from the P60 to P63 pins can be specified as N-ch open-drain output (EVDD tolerance) in 1-bit units using port output mode register 6 (POM6). For the P60 to P63 pin input, the threshold of the input buffer can be specified in 1-bit units using the port input threshold control register 6 (PITHL6) This port can also be used for serial interface data I/O and clock I/O, slave select input, timer I/O, and SNOOZE status output. Reset signal generation sets this port to input mode. Table 4-10. Settings of Registers When Using Port 6 (1/2) Pin Name Name I/O P60 Input PM6x PIM6x POM6x PITHL6x Alternate Function Setting Note 6 Remark 1 - x 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output P61 Input 0 1 - - 0 x 1 x x 0 (SCK00/SCL00 output = 1) Note 1 CMOS output N-ch O.D output x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output P62 Input 0 1 - 0 0 x 1 x x 0 SDA00 output = 1 Note 2 CMOS output N-ch O.D output x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) 1 Output 0 x x 0 1 x x x x SCLA0 output = 0 TTL input Note 3 (SO00/TXD0 output = 1) Note 2 CMOS output N-ch O.D output (Notes and Remark are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 246 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-10. Settings of Registers When Using Port 6 (2/2) Pin Name Name I/O P63 Input PM6x PIM6x POM6x PITHL6x Alternate Function Setting Note 6 Remark 1 0 x 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output P64 0 1 x x x TTL input x 0 x SDAA0 output = 0 Note 3 CMOS output 1 x N-ch O.D output Input 1 - - - x Output 0 - - - (TO14 output = 0) Note 4 (SNZOUT3 output = 0) Note 5 P65 Input 1 - - - x Output 0 - - - (TO16 output = 0) Note 4 (SNZOUT2 output = 0) Note 5 P66 Input 1 - - - x Output 0 - - - (TO00 output = 0) Note 4 Input 1 - - - x Output 0 - - - (TO02 output = 0) Note 4 P67 Notes 1. When a pin sharing the serial array unit function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the CKOmn bit of the serial output register m (SOm), the SOEmn bit of the serial output enable register m (SOEm), and the SEmn bit of the serial channel enable status register m (SEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as its initial value (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1). 2. When a pin sharing the serial array unit function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the SOmn bit of the serial output register m (SOm), the SOEmn bit of the serial output enable register m (SOEm), and the SEmn bit of the serial channel enable status register m (SEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as its initial value (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1). 3. When a pin sharing the serial interface IICA function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, operation of the corresponding serial interface IICA must be stopped. 4. When a pin sharing a timer output function of the timer array unit is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the TOmn bit of the timer output register m (TOm) and the TOEmn bit of the timer output enable register m (TOEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as in the initial state (m = 0, 1, n = 0 to 7). 5. When a pin sharing the SNOOZE status output function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the OUTEN0 to OUTEN7 bits of the SNOOZE status output control registers 0, 1, 2, 3 (PSNZCNT0, 1, 2, 3) must have the same setting as its initial value. 6. Functions in parentheses can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers 1, 3, 4, 6 (PIOR1, PIOR3, PIOR4, PIOR6). Remark : Don't care PM6x: Port mode register 6 PIM6x: Port input mode register 6 POM6x: Port output mode register 6 PITHL6x: Port input threshold control register 6 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 247 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figures 4-33 to 4-40 show block diagrams of port 6 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-33. Block Diagram of P60 WRPITHL PITHL6 PITHL60 EVDD WRPU PU6 PU60 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P6 Output latch P60 WRPOM CMOS (Schmitt3) P60/(SCK00)/ (SCL00) POM6 POM60 WRPM PM6 PM60 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (SCK00)/(SCL00) P6: Port register 6 PU6: Pull-up resistor option register 6 PM6: Port mode register 6 POM6: Port output mode register 6 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL6: Port input threshold control register 6 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 248 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-34. Block Diagram of P61 WRPITHL PITHL6 PITHL61 EVDD WRPU PU6 PU61 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT CMOS (Schmitt3) P6 Output latch P61 WRPOM POM6 P61/(SI00)/ (SDA00)/ (RXD0) POM61 WRPM PM6 PM61 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (SDA00) P6: Port register 6 PU6: Pull-up resistor option register 6 PM6: Port mode register 6 POM6: Port output mode register 6 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL6: Port input threshold control register 6 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 249 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-35. Block Diagram of P62 WRPITHL PITHL6 PITHL62 WRPIM PIM6 PIM62 EVDD WRPU PU6 PU62 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) RD Selector Internal bus Alternate function TTL WRPORT P6 Output latch P62 WRPOM CMOS (Schmitt3) POM6 P62/SCLA0/ (SO00)/(TXD0) POM62 WRPM PM6 PM62 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (SO00)/(TXD0) Alternate function SCLA0 P6: Port register 6 PU6: Pull-up resistor option register 6 PM6: Port mode register 6 PIM6: Port input mode register 6 POM6: Port output mode register 6 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL6: Port input threshold control register 6 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 250 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-36. Block Diagram of P63 WRPITHL PITHL6 PITHL63 WRPIM PIM6 PIM63 EVDD WRPU PU6 PU63 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD CMOS (Schmitt3) TTL WRPORT P6 Output latch P63 WRPOM P63/SDAA0/ (SSI00) POM6 POM63 WRPM PM6 PM63 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function SDAA0 P6: Port register 6 PU6: Pull-up resistor option register 6 PM6: Port mode register 6 PIM6: Port input mode register 6 POM6: Port output mode register 6 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL6: Port input threshold control register 6 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 251 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-37. Block Diagram of P64 EVDD WRPU PU6 PU64 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P6 Output latch P64 WRPM P64/(TI14)/(TO14)/ (SNZOUT3) PM6 PM64 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO14)/ (SNZOUT3) P6: Port register 6 PU6: Pull-up resistor option register 6 PM6: Port mode register 6 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 252 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-38. Block Diagram of P65 EVDD WRPU PU6 PU65 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P6 Output latch P65 WRPM P65/(TI16)/(TO16)/ (SNZOUT2) PM6 PM65 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO16)/ (SNZOUT2) P6: Port register 6 PU6: Pull-up resistor option register 6 PM6: Port mode register 6 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 253 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-39. Block Diagram of P66 EVDD WRPU PU6 PU66 P-ch Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P6 Output latch P66 P66/(TI00)/(TO00) WRPM PM6 PM66 WRPMS PMS PMS0 (TO00) P6: Port register 6 PU6: Pull-up resistor option register 6 PM6: Port mode register 6 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 254 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-40. Block Diagram of P67 EVDD WRPU PU6 PU67 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P6 Output latch P67 WRPM P67/(TI02)/(TO02) PM6 PM67 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO02) P6: Port register 6 PU6: Pull-up resistor option register 6 PM6: Port mode register 6 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 255 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.7 Port 7 Port 7 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 7 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 7 (PM7). When used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 7 (PU7). Input to the P70, P71, and P73 pins can be specified through a normal input buffer or a TTL input buffer in 1-bit units using port input mode register 7 (PIM7). For the P70, P71, P73, and P75 to P77 pin input, the threshold of the input buffer can be specified in 1-bit units using the port input threshold control register 7 (PITHL7). Output from the P70 to P72 pins can be specified as N-ch open-drain output (EVDD tolerance) in 1-bit units using port output mode register 7 (POM7). To use P70 to P74 as input pins, set them in the digital mode or analog mode in 1-bit units by using the port mode control register 7 (PMC7). This port can also be used for A/D converter analog input, key interrupt input, data I/O for serial interfaces, clock I/O, slave select input, timer I/O, external interrupt request input, SNOOZE status output, and serial data I/O for CAN. <R> To use P70/ANI26 to P74/ANI30 as digital input pins, set them in the digital I/O mode by using the port mode control register 7 (PMC7) and in the input mode by using the PM7 register. Use these pins starting from the upper bit. To use P70/ANI26 to P74/ANI30 as digital output pins, set them in the digital I/O mode by using the port mode control register 7 (PMC7) and in the output mode by using the PM7 register. To use P70/ANI26 to P74/ANI30 as analog input pins, set them in the analog input mode by using the port mode control register 7 (PMC7) and in the input mode by using the PM7 register. Use these pins starting from the lower bit. Reset signal generation sets P70 to P74 to analog input mode and P75 to P77 to input mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 256 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-11. Settings of Registers When Using Port 7 (1/2) Pin Name Name I/O P70 Input PM7x PIM7x POM7x PMC7x PITHL7x Alternate Function Remark Setting Note 6 1 0 x 0 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output 0 1 x 0 x x TTL input x 0 0 x SDA11 output = 1 Note 1 CMOS output x 1 0 x TO15 output = 0 Note 2 N-ch O.D output SNZOUT4 output = 0 Note 3 P71 Input 1 0 x 0 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output 0 1 x 0 x x TTL input x 0 0 x SCK11 output = 1 Note 4 CMOS output x 1 0 x TO17 output = 0 Note 2 N-ch O.D output SCL11 output = 1 Note 4 SNZOUT5 output = 0 Note 3 P72 Input 1 - x 0 - x Output 0 - 0 0 - SO11 output = 1 Note 1 CMOS output - SNZOUT6 output = 0 N-ch O.D output - 1 0 Note 3 (CTXD0 output = 1 Note 5 P73 Input 1 0 - 0 0 ) x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 x CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output 0 1 - 0 x x TTL input x - 0 x SNZOUT7 output = 0 CMOS output Note 3 P74 Input 1 - - 0 - x Output 0 - - 0 - (SO10 output = 1) Note 1 (TXD1 output = 0) Note 1 (Notes and Remark are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 257 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-11. Settings of Registers When Using Port 7 (2/2) Pin Name PM7x Name I/O P75 Input PIM7x POM7x PMC7x PITHL7x Alternate Function Remark Setting 1 - - - 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 x CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output 0 - - - x x Input 1 - - - 0 x P76 CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 x CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output 0 - - - x Input 1 - - - 0 P77 (SCK10 output = 1 x Note 4 ) CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 x CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) Output Notes 1. 0 - - - x x When a pin sharing the serial array unit function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the SOmn bit of the serial output register m (SOm), the SOEmn bit of the serial output enable register m (SOEm), and the SEmn bit of the serial channel enable status register m (SEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as its initial value (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1). 2. When a pin sharing a timer output function of the timer array unit is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the TOmn bit of the timer output register m (TOm) and the TOEmn bit of the timer output enable register m (TOEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as in the initial state (m = 0, 1, n = 0 to 7). 3. When a pin sharing the SNOOZE status output function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the OUTEN0 to OUTEN7 bits of the SNOOZE status output control registers 0, 1, 2, 3 (PSNZCNT0, 1, 2, 3) must have the same setting as its initial value. 4. When a pin sharing the serial array unit function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the CKOmn bit of the serial output register m (SOm), the SOEmn bit of the serial output enable register m (SOEm), and the SEmn bit of the serial channel enable status register m (SEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as its initial value (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1). 5. When a pin sharing the serial data output function of the CAN is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, operation of the corresponding CAN must be stopped. 6. Remark Functions in parentheses can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register 4 (PIOR4). : Don't care PM7x: Port mode register 7 PIM7x: Port input mode register 7 POM7x: Port output mode register 7 PMC7x: Port mode control register 7 PITHL7x: Port input threshold control register 7 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 258 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-12. Setting Functions of P70/ANI26 to P74/ANI30 Pins ADPC Register Digital I/O selection Analog input selection PM7 Register ADS Register P70/ANI26 to P74/ANI30 Pins Input mode Digital input Output mode Digital output Input mode Output mode Selects ANI. Analog input (to be converted) Does not select ANI. Analog input (not to be converted) Selects ANI. Setting prohibited Does not select ANI. Reset signal generation sets P70/ANI26 to P74/ANI30 to analog input mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 259 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figures 4-41 to 4-48 show block diagrams of port 7 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-41. Block Diagram of P70 WRPITHL PITHL7 PITHL70 WRPIM PIM7 PIM70 EVDD WRPU PU7 PU70 P-ch WRPMC PMC7 PMC70 CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function TI15/SI11/SDA11 /INTP8/KR0 CMOS (Schmitt3) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT TTL P7 P70/TI15/SI11/ INTP8/TO15/ KR0/SDA11/ SNZOUT4/ANI26 Output latch P70 WRPOM POM7 POM70 WRPM PM7 PM70 WRPMS PMS PMS0 A/D converter ADS ADS4 to ADS0 Alternate function SDA11 Alternate function TO05/SNZOUT4 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 260 RL78/F13, F14 P7: CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Port register 7 PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7 PM7: Port mode register 7 PIM7: Port input mode register 7 POM7: Port output mode register 7 PMC7: Port mode control register 7 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL7: Port input threshold control register 7 ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 261 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-42. Block Diagram of P71 WRPITHL PITHL7 PITHL71 WRPIM PIM7 PIM71 EVDD WRPU PU7 PU71 P-ch WRPMC PMC7 PMC71 CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function TI17/SCK11/SCL11 /INTP6/KR1 CMOS (Schmitt3) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT TTL P7 P71/INTP6/TO17/ KR1/SCK11/TI17/ SCL11/SNZOUT5/ ANI27 Output latch P71 WRPOM POM7 POM71 WRPM PM7 PM71 WRPMS PMS PMS0 A/D converter ADS ADS4 to ADS0 Alternate function SCK11/SCL11 Alternate function TO17/SNZOUT5 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 262 RL78/F13, F14 P7: CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Port register 7 PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7 PM7: Port mode register 7 PIM7: Port input mode register 7 POM7: Port output mode register 7 PMC7: Port mode control register 7 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL7: Port input threshold control register 7 ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 263 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-43. Block Diagram of P72 EVDD WRPU PU7 PU72 P-ch WRPMC PMC7 PMC72 Alternate function (KR2) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P7 Output latch P72 WRPOM P72/ANI28/KR2/ (CTXD0)/SO11/ SNZOUT6 POM7 POM72 WRPM PM7 PM72 WRPMS PMS PMS0 A/D converter ADS ADS4 to ADS0 Alternate function SO11/(CTXD0) Alternate function SNZOUT6 P7: Port register 7 PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7 PM7: Port mode register 7 POM7: Port output mode register 7 PMC7: Port mode control register 7 PMS: Port mode select register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 264 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-44. Block Diagram of P73 WRPITHL PITHL7 PITHL73 WRPIM PIM7 PIM73 EVDD WRPU PU7 PU73 P-ch WRPMC PMC7 PMC73 CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function SSI11/KR3/ (CRXD0) CMOS (Schmitt3) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT TTL P7 Output latch P73 P73/KR3/SSI11/ SNZOUT7/(CRXD0)/ ANI29 WRPM PM7 PM73 WRPMS PMS PMS0 A/D converter ADS ADS4 to ADS0 Alternate function SNZOUT7 P7: Port register 7 PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7 PM7: Port mode register 7 PIM7: Port input mode register 7 PMC7: Port mode control register 7 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL7: Port input threshold control register 7 ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 265 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-45. Block Diagram of P74 EVDD WRPU PU7 PU74 P-ch WRPMC PMC7 PMC74 Alternate function (KR4) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P7 Output latch P74 P74/KR4/ (SO10)/(TXD1)/ ANI30 WRPM PM7 PM74 WRPMS PMS PMS0 A/D converter Alternate function (SO10)/(TXD1) P7: ADS ADS4 to ADS0 Port register 7 PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7 PM7: Port mode register 7 PMC7: Port mode control register 7 PMS: Port mode select register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 266 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-46. Block Diagram of P75 WRPITHL PITHL7 PITHL75 EVDD WRPU PU7 PU75 CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function P-ch KR5/(SI10) /(RXD1) Selector Internal bus RD CMOS (Schmitt3) WRPORT P7 Output latch P75 P75/KR5/ (SI10)/(RXD1) WRPM PM7 PM75 WRPMS PMS PMS0 P7: Port register 7 PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7 PM7: Port mode register 7 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL7: Port input threshold control register 7 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 267 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-47. Block Diagram of P76 WRPITHL PITHL7 PITHL76 EVDD WRPU PU7 PU76 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function KR6/(SCK10) CMOS (Schmitt3) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P7 Output latch P76 WRPM P76/KR6/ (SCK10) PM7 PM76 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (SCK10) P7: Port register 7 PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7 PM7: Port mode register 7 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL7: Port input threshold control register 7 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 268 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-48. Block Diagram of P77 WRPITHL PITHL7 PITHL77 EVDD WRPU PU7 PU77 CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function P-ch KR7/INTP12/ /(SSI10) Selector Internal bus RD CMOS (Schmitt3) WRPORT P7 Output latch P77 P77/KR7/INTP12/ (SSI10) WRPM PM7 PM77 WRPMS PMS PMS0 P7: Port register 7 PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7 PM7: Port mode register 7 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL7: Port input threshold control register 7 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 269 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.8 Port 8 Port 8 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 8 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 8 (PM8). This port can also be used for analog input for A/D converter. P80 to P85 can also be used for D/A converter output, and analog voltage input and reference voltage input for comparator. To use P80/ANI2 to P87/ANI9 as digital input pins, set them in the digital I/O mode by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and in the input mode by using the PM8 register. Use these pins starting from the upper bit. To use P80/ANI2 to P87/ANI9 as digital output pins, set them in the digital I/O mode by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and in the output mode by using the PM8 register. Use these pins starting from the upper bit. To use P80/ANI2 to P87/ANI9 as analog input pins, set them in the analog I/O mode by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and in the input mode by using the PM8 register. Use these pins starting from the lower bit. Table 4-13. Settings of Registers When Using Port 8 Pin Name PM8x ADPC Remark Setting Name I/O P8n Input 1 03 to n+3H Output 0 03 to n+3H Remarks 1. Alternate Function - To use P8n as a port, use these pins from the upper bit. PM8x: Port mode register 8 ADPC: A/D port configuration register 2. n = 0 to 7 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 270 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-14. Setting Functions of P80/ANI2/ANO0 Pin <R> ADPC Register PM8 Register Digital I/O Input mode DAM Register DAM2 Register ADS Register Enables analog Functions of ANO0/ANI2/P80 Pin Setting prohibited output Disables analog Digital input output Output mode Enables analog Setting prohibited output Disables analog Digital input output Analog I/O Input mode Enables D/A Enables analog Selects ANI Setting prohibited conversion output Does not selects ANI Analog output (D/A conversion output) Disables analog Selects ANI Analog input (to be converted) Does not selects ANI Analog input (not to be converted) Note operation output Stops D/A Enables analog Selects ANI Setting prohibited conversion output Does not selects ANI Setting prohibited Disables analog Selects ANI Analog input (to be converted) output Does not selects ANI Analog input (not to be converted) operation Output mode Note Setting prohibited This is a setting that the D/A converter is used for internal reference voltage of comparator. In this case, set CVRS1, CVRS0 bits of CMPSEL register to 10b (internal reference voltage (DAC output) is selected). Table 4-15. Setting Functions of P81/ANI3 to P87/ANI9 Pins ADPC Register Digital I/O selection Analog input selection PM8 Register ADS Register P81/ANI3 to P87/ANI9 Pins Input mode Digital input Output mode Digital output Input mode Output mode Selects ANI. Analog input (to be converted) Does not select ANI. Analog input (not to be converted) Selects ANI. Setting prohibited Does not select ANI. Reset signal generation sets P80/ANI3 to P87/ANI9 to analog input mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 271 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figures 4-49 to 4-56 show block diagrams of port 8 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-49. Block Diagram of P80 WRADPC ADPC 0: Analog input 1: Digital I/O ADPC4 to ADPC0 Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P8 Output latch P80/ANI2/ ANO0 P80 WRPM PM8 PM80 WRPMS PMS A/D converter PMS0 ADS ADS4 to ADS0 WRDAM2 DAM2 D/A converter ANO0EN P8: Port register 8 PM8: Port mode register 8 PMS: Port mode select register ADPC: A/D port configuration register DAM2: D/A converter mode register 2 ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 272 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-50. Block Diagram of P81 WRADPC 0: Analog input 1: Digital I/O ADPC ADPC4 to ADPC0 Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P8 Output latch P81 P81/ANI3/ IVCMP00 WRPM PM8 PM81 WRPMS PMS A/D converter PMS0 ADS ADS4 to ADS0 Analog voltage input for comparator P8: Port register 8 PM8: Port mode register 8 PMS: Port mode select register ADPC: A/D port configuration register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 273 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-51. Block Diagram of P82 WRADPC 0: Analog input 1: Digital I/O ADPC ADPC4 to ADPC0 Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P8 P82/ANI4/ IVCMP01 Output latch P82 WRPM PM8 PM82 WRPMS PMS A/D converter PMS0 ADS ADS4 to ADS0 Analog voltage input for comparator P8: Port register 8 PM8: Port mode register 8 PMS: Port mode select register ADPC: A/D port configuration register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 274 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-52. Block Diagram of P83 WRADPC 0: Analog input 1: Digital I/O ADPC ADPC4 to ADPC0 Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P8 Output latch P83 P83/ANI5/ IVCMP02 WRPM PM8 PM83 WRPMS PMS A/D converter PMS0 ADS ADS4 to ADS0 Analog voltage input for comparator P8: Port register 8 PM8: Port mode register 8 PMS: Port mode select register ADPC: A/D port configuration register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 275 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-53. Block Diagram of P84 WRADPC 0: Analog input 1: Digital I/O ADPC ADPC4 to ADPC0 Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P8 Output latch P84 P84/ANI6/ IVCMP03 WRPM PM8 PM84 WRPMS PMS A/D converter PMS0 ADS ADS4 to ADS0 Analog voltage input for comparator P8: Port register 8 PM8: Port mode register 8 PMS: Port mode select register ADPC: A/D port configuration register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 276 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-54. Block Diagram of P85 WRADPC 0: Analog input 1: Digital I/O ADPC ADPC4 to ADPC0 Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P8 P85/ANI7/ IVREF0 Output latch P85 WRPM PM8 PM85 WRPMS PMS A/D converter PMS0 ADS ADS4 to ADS0 Analog voltage input for comparator P8: Port register 8 PM8: Port mode register 8 PMS: Port mode select register ADPC: A/D port configuration register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 277 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-55. Block Diagram of P86 WRADPC 0: Analog input 1: Digital I/O ADPC ADPC4 to ADPC0 Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P8 Output latch P86 P86/ANI8 WRPM PM8 PM86 WRPMS PMS A/D converter PMS0 ADS P8: ADS4 to ADS0 Port register 8 PM8: Port mode register 8 PMS: Port mode select register ADPC: A/D port configuration register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 278 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-56. Block Diagram of P87 WRADPC 0: Analog input 1: Digital I/O ADPC ADPC4 to ADPC0 Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P8 Output latch P87 P87/ANI9 WRPM PM8 PM87 WRPMS PMS A/D converter PMS0 ADS P8: ADS4 to ADS0 Port register 8 PM8: Port mode register 8 PMS: Port mode select register ADPC: A/D port configuration register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 279 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.9 Port 9 Port 9 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 9 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 9 (PM9). This port can also be used for A/D converter analog input. To use P90/ANI10 to P97/ANI17 as digital input pins, set them in the digital I/O mode by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and in the input mode by using the PM9 register. Use these pins starting from the upper bit. To use P90/ANI10 to P97/ANI17 as digital output pins, set them in the digital I/O mode by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and in the output mode by using the PM9 register. Use these pins starting from the upper bit. To use P90/ANI10 to P97/ANI17 as analog input pins, set them in the analog input mode by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and in the input mode by using the PM9 register. Use these pins starting from the lower bit. Reset signal generation sets this port to analog input mode. Table 4-16. Settings of Registers When Using Port 9 Pin Name Name PM9x Alternate Function Setting 1 I/O P90 Input Output 0 P91 Input 1 Output 0 Input 1 Output 0 Input 1 Output 0 P94 Input 1 Output 0 P95 Input 1 Output 0 Input 1 Output 0 Input 1 Output 0 P92 P93 P96 P97 Remark Remark : Don't care PM9x: Port mode register 9 Table 4-17. Settings of Registers When Using Port 9 Pin Name Name P9n PM9x ADPC Alternate Function Remark Setting I/O Input 1 0C to n+0CH Output 0 0C to n+0CH To use P9n as a port, use these pins from the upper bit. Remarks 1. PM9x: Port mode register 9 ADPC: A/D port configuration register 2. n = 0 to 7 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 280 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-18. Setting Functions of P90/ANI10 to P97/ANI17 Pins ADPC Register Digital I/O selection Analog input selection PM9 Register ADS Register P90/ANI10 to P97/ANI17 Pins Input mode Digital input Output mode Digital output Input mode Output mode Selects ANI. Analog input (to be converted) Does not select ANI. Analog input (not to be converted) Selects ANI. Setting prohibited Does not select ANI. Reset signal generation sets P90/ANI10 to P97/ANI17 to analog input mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 281 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-57 shows a block diagram of port 9 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-57. Block Diagram of P90 to P97 WRADPC 0: Analog input 1: Digital I/O ADPC ADPC4 to ADPC0 Internal bus Selector RD WRPORT P9 Output latch P90 to P97 P90/ANI10, P91/ANI11, P92/ANI12, P93/ANI13, P94/ANI14, P95/ANI15, P96/ANI16, P97/ANI17 WRPM PM9 PM90 to PM97 WRPMS PMS A/D converter PMS0 ADS P9: ADS4 to ADS0 Port register 9 PM9: Port mode register 9 PMS: Port mode select register ADPC: A/D port configuration register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 282 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.10 Port 10 Port 10 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 10 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 10 (PM10). When the P106 and P107 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 10 (PU10). For the P107 pin input, the threshold of the input buffer can be specified in 1-bit units using the port input threshold control register 10 (PITHL10). This port can also be used for A/D converter analog input and LIN serial data I/O. To use P100/ANI18 to P105/ANI23 as digital input pins, set them in the digital I/O mode by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and in the input mode by using the PM10 register. Use these pins starting from the upper bit. Reset signal generation sets this port to input mode. To use P100/ANI18 to P105/ANI23 as digital output pins, set them in the digital I/O mode by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and in the output mode by using the PM10 register. Use these pins starting from the upper bit. To use P100/ANI18 to P105/ANI23 as analog input pins, set them in the analog input mode by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and in the input mode by using the PM10 register. Use these pins starting from the lower bit. Reset signal generation sets this port to analog input mode. Table 4-19. Settings of Registers When Using Port 10 PM10x PITHL10x Alternate Function Setting Note 2 Input 1 -- Output 0 -- Input 1 -- Output 0 -- Input 1 -- Pin Name Name Remark I/O P100 Note 3 P101 Note 3 P102 Note 3 P103 Note 3 P104 Note 3 P105 Note 3 P106 P107 Output 0 -- Input 1 -- Output 0 -- Input 1 -- Output 0 -- Input 1 -- Output 0 -- Input 1 -- Output 0 -- (LTXD1 output = 1) Note 1 Input 1 0 CMOS input 1 CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) (Schmitt3 input) Output Notes 1. 0 When a pin sharing the serial data output function of the LIN is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, operation of the corresponding LIN must be stopped. 2. 3. Functions in parentheses can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register 4 (PIOR4). These are the settings of registers in the case where setting of the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) is to select "D" (digital I/O) for the target pin. See Table 4-20 when using this pin as an analog input. Remark : Don't care PM10x: Port mode register 10 PITHL10x: Port input threshold control register 10 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 283 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-20. Settings of Registers When Using Pins of Port 10 as Analog Inputs Pin Name Name P10n PM10x ADPC Alternate Function I/O Input Remark Setting 1 14 to n + 14H To use P10n as an analog input, use these pins from the (n = 0 to 4), lower bit. 00H (n = 5) Remarks 1. PM10x: Port mode register 9 ADPC: A/D port configuration register 2. n = 0 to 5 Table 4-21. Setting Functions of P100/ANI18 to P105/ANI23 Pins ADPC Register Digital I/O selection Analog input selection PM10 Register ADS Register P100/ANI18 to P105/ANI23 Pins Input mode Digital input Output mode Digital output Input mode Output mode Selects ANI. Analog input (to be converted) Does not select ANI. Analog input (not to be converted) Selects ANI. Setting prohibited Does not select ANI. Reset signal generation sets P100/ANI18 to P105/ANI23 to analog input mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 284 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figures 4-58 to 4-60 show block diagrams of port 10 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-58. Block Diagram of P100 to P105 WRADPC 0: Analog input 1: Digital I/O ADPC ADPC4 to ADPC0 Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P10 Output latch P100 to P105 P100/ANI18, P101/ANI19, P102/ANI20, P103/ANI21, P104/ANI22, P105/ANI23 WRPM PM10 PM100 to PM105 WRPMS PMS A/D converter PMS0 ADS P10: Port register 10 PM10: Port mode register 10 PMS: Port mode select register ADS4 to ADS0 ADPC: A/D port configuration register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 285 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-59. Block Diagram of P106 EVDD WRPU PU10 PU106 P-ch Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P10 Output latch P106 P106/(LTXD1) WRPM PM10 PM106 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (LTXD1) P10: Port register 10 PM10: Port mode register 10 PMS: Port mode select register PU10: Pull-up resistor option register 10 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 286 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-60. Block Diagram of P107 WRPITHL PITHL10 EVDD PITHL107 WRPU PU10 PU107 P-ch CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function (LRXD1) CMOS (Schmitt3) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P10 Output latch P107 P107/(LRXD1) WRPM PM10 PM107 WRPMS PMS PMS0 P10: Port register 10 PM10: Port mode register 10 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL10: Port input threshold control register 10 PU10: Pull-up resistor option register 10 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 287 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.11 Port 12 P120 and P125 to P127 are I/O ports with an output latch. Port 12 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 12 (PM12). When the P120 and P125 to P127 pins are used as an input port, use of an onchip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 12 (PU12). Input to the P125 pin can be specified through a normal input buffer or a TTL input buffer in 1-bit units using port input mode register 12 (PIM12). For the P125 pin input, the threshold of the input buffer can be specified in 1-bit units using the port input threshold control register 12 (PITHL12). Output from the P120 pin can be specified as N-ch open-drain output (EVDD tolerance) in 1-bit units using port output mode register 12 (POM12). When P120 and P125 are used as input pins, specify analog input or digital input in 1-bit units using port mode control register 12 (PMC12). This port can also be used for A/D converter analog input, resonator connection for main system clock, resonator connection for subsystem clock, external clock input for main system clock, external clock input for subsystem clock, timer I/O, serial interface data output, slave select input, external interrupt request input, and SNOOZE status output. Reset signal generation sets P120 and P125 to analog input mode and P121 to P124 to input mode. Table 4-22. Settings of Registers When Using Port 12 (1/2) Pin Name PM12x PIM12x POM12x PMC12x PITHL12x Alternate Function Setting Note 5 Name I/O P120 Input 1 - x 0 - x Output 0 - 0 0 - TRDIOD0 output = 0 Note 1 0 P121 Input - - - 1 - 0 - - - TO07 output = 0 Note 2 SO01 output = 1 Note 3 Remark CMOS output N-ch O.D output OSCSEL bit of CMC register = 0 or EXCLK bit = 1 P122 Input - - - - - OSCSEL bit of CMC register = 0 P123 Input - - - - - OSCSELS bit of CMC register = 0 or EXCLKS bit = 1 or SELLOSC bit of CKSEL register = 1 P124 Input - - - - - OSCSELS bit of CMC register = 0 or SELLOSC bit of CKSEL register = 1 P125 Input 1 0 - 0 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) 1 Output 0 1 x - - 0 0 x x x TRDIOB0 output = 0 TTL input Note 1 TO03 output = 0 Note 2 SNZOUT1 output = 0 Note 4 (Notes, Caution, and Remark are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 288 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-22. Settings of Registers When Using Port 12 (2/2) Pin Name PM12x PIM12x POM12x PMC12x PITHL12x Alternate Function Setting Note 5 Name I/O P126 Input 1 - - - - x Output 0 - - - - (TO01 output = 0) Note2 Input 1 - - - - x Output 0 - - - - (TO03 output = 0) Note2 P127 Notes 1. Remark When a pin sharing a timer RD function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the target bit for TRDIOij pin output control in the timer RD output master enable register 1 (TRDOER1) must have the same setting as its initial value (i = A, B, C, D, j = 0, 1) 2. When a pin sharing a timer output function of the timer array unit is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the TOmn bit of the timer output register m (TOm) and the TOEmn bit of the timer output enable register m (TOEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as in the initial state (m = 0, 1, n = 0 to 7). 3. When a pin sharing the serial array unit function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the SOmn bit of the serial output register m (SOm), the SOEmn bit of the serial output enable register m (SOEm), and the SEmn bit of the serial channel enable status register m (SEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as its initial value (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1). 4. When a pin sharing the SNOOZE status output function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the OUTEN0 to OUTEN7 bits of the SNOOZE status output control registers 0, 1, 2, 3 (PSNZCNT0, 1, 2, 3) must have the same setting as its initial value. 5. Functions in parentheses can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register 1 (PIOR1). Caution The function setting on P121 to P124 is available only once after the reset release. The port once set for connection to a resonator or an oscillator cannot be used as an input port unless the reset is performed. Remark : Don't care PM12x: Port mode register 12 PIM12x: Port input mode register 12 POM12x: Port output mode register 12 PMC12x: Port mode control register 12 PITHL12x: Port input threshold control register 12 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 289 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figures 4-61 to 4-65 show block diagrams of port 12 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-61. Block Diagram of P120 EVDD WRPU PU12 PU120 P-ch WRPMC PMC12 PMC120 Alternate function TI07/TRDIOD0 /INTP4 Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P12 Output latch P120 P120/ANI25/TI07/ TO07/TRDIOD0/ SO01/INTP4 WRPM PM12 PM120 WRPMS PMS PMS0 A/D converter WRPOM POM12 ADS ADS4 to ADS0 POM120 Alternate function TO07/TRDIOD0 Alternate function SO01 P12: Port register 12 PU12: Pull-up resistor option register 12 PM12: Port mode register 12 POM12: Port output mode register 12 PMC12: Port mode control register 12 PMS: Port mode select register ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 290 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-62. Block Diagram of P121 and P122 Clock generator CMC OSCSEL RD Internal bus P122/X2/EXCLK CMC EXCLK, OSCSEL RD P121/X1 CMC: Clock operation mode control register RD: Read signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 291 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-63. Block Diagram of P123 and P124 Clock generator CMC OSCSELS RD Internal bus P124/XT2/EXCLKS CMC EXCLKS, OSCSELS RD P123/XT1 CMC: Clock operation mode control register RD: Read signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 292 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-64. Block Diagram of P125 WRPITHL PITHL12 PITHL125 WRPIM PIM12 PIM125 EVDD WRPU PU12 PU125 P-ch WRPMC PMC12 PMC125 CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function INTP1/SSI01/ TI03/TRDIOB0 CMOS (Schmitt3) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT TTL P12 P125/TI03/INTP1/ TO03/TRDIOB0/ SSI01/SNZOUT1/ ANI24 Output latch P125 WRPM PM12 PM125 WRPMS PMS PMS0 A/D converter Alternate function TRDIOB0, SNZOUT1/TO03 P12: ADS ADS4 to ADS0 Port register 12 PU12: Pull-up resistor option register 12 PM12: Port mode register 12 PIM12: Port input mode register 12 PMC12: Port mode control register 12 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL12: Port input threshold control register 12 ADS: Analog input channel specification register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 293 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-65. Block Diagram of P126 and P127 EVDD WRPU PU12 PU126, PU127 P-ch Alternate function (TI01), (TI03) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P12 Output latch P126, P127 WRPM P126/(TI01)/(TO01), P127/(TI03)/(TO03) PM12 PM126, PM127 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (TO01), (TO03) P12: Port register 12 PU12: Pull-up resistor option register 12 PM12: Port mode register 12 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 294 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.12 Port 13 P130 is a 1-bit output-only port with an output latch. P137 is a 1-bit input-only port. P130 is fixed to output mode, and P137 is fixed to input mode. This port can also be used for external interrupt request input and reset output. The RESOUT output can be set by an option byte. Table 4-23. Settings of Registers When Using Port 13 Pin Name Name Alternate Function Setting I/O P130 Output P137 Input R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Remark RESOUT x 295 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figures 4-66 and 4-67 show block diagrams of port 13 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-66. Block Diagram of P130 Internal bus RD WRPORT P13 Output latch P130 P130/RESOUT Alternate function RESOUT P13: Port register 13 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal Remark When reset is effected, P130 outputs a low level. If P130 is set to output a high level before reset is effected, the output signal of P130 can be dummy-output as the CPU reset signal. Reset signal P130 Set by software R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 296 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-67. Block Diagram of P137 Internal bus RD P137/INTP0 Alternate function RD: Read signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 297 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.13 Port 14 Port 14 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 14 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 14 (PM14). When the P140 pin is used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 14 (PU14). This port can also be used for clock/buzzer output. Reset signal generation sets P140 to input mode. Table 4-24. Settings of Registers When Using Port 14 Pin Name Name PM14x Alternate Function Setting Input 1 Output 0 PCLBUZ0 output = 0 Note Remark I/O P140 Note To use a pin multiplexed with the clock/buzzer output function as a general-purpose port, set the PCLOE0 bit in clock output select register 0 (CKS0) to the default value. Remark : Don't care PM14x: Port mode register 14 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 298 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-68 shows a block diagram of port 14 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-68. Block Diagram of P140 EVDD WRPU PU14 PU140 P-ch Alternate function Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P14 Output latch P140 P140/PCLBUZ0 WRPM PM14 PM140 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function PCLBUZ0 P14: Port register 14 PU14: Pull-up resistor option register 14 PM14: Port mode register 14 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 299 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.2.14 Port 15 Port 15 is an I/O port with an output latch. Port 15 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register 15 (PM15). When the P150 to P157 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 15 (PU15). For the P150, P152, and P153 pin input, the threshold of the input buffer can be specified in 1-bit units using the port input threshold control register 15 (PITHL15). This port can also be used for data I/O and clock I/O for serial interface (CSI), slave select input, and SNOOZE status output. Reset signal generation sets P150 to P157 to input mode. Table 4-25. Settings of Registers When Using Port 15 Pin Name Name I/O P150 Input PM15x PITHL15x Alternate Function Setting Note 4 Remark 1 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 x CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) P151 P152 Output 0 x x Input 1 - x Output 0 - (SO11 output = 1) Note 1 Input 1 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 x CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) P153 Output 0 x x Input 1 0 x CMOS input (Schmitt1 input) 1 x CMOS input (Schmitt3 input) P154 P155 P156 P157 Notes 1. (SCK11 output = 1) Note 3 Output 0 x Input 1 - x Output 0 - (SNZOUT7 output = 0) Note 2 Input 1 - x Output 0 - (SNZOUT6 output = 0) Note 2 Input 1 - x Output 0 - (SNZOUT5 output = 0) Note 2 Input 1 - x Output 0 - (SNZOUT4 output = 0) Note 2 When a pin sharing the serial array unit function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the SOmn bit of the serial output register m (SOm), the SOEmn bit of the serial output enable register m (SOEm), and the SEmn bit of the serial channel enable status register m (SEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as its initial value (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1). 2. When a pin sharing the SNOOZE status output function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the OUTEN0 to OUTEN7 bits of the SNOOZE status output control registers 0, 1, 2, 3 (PSNZCNT0, 1, 2, 3) must have the same setting as its initial value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 300 RL78/F13, F14 3. CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS When a pin sharing the serial array unit function is to be used as a general-purpose port pin, the CKOmn bit of the serial output register m (SOm), the SOEmn bit of the serial output enable register m (SOEm), and the SEmn bit of the serial channel enable status register m (SEm) corresponding to the target unit and channel must have the same setting as its initial value (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1). 4. Functions in parentheses can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection registers 4, 6 (PIOR4, PIOR6). Remark : Don't care PM15x: Port mode register 15 PITHL15x: Port input threshold control register 15 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 301 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-69 to 4-73 show block diagrams of port 15 for 100-pin products. Figure 4-69. Block Diagram of P150 WRPITHL PITHL15 PITHL150 EVDD WRPU PU15 PU150 CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function P-ch (SSI11) Selector Internal bus RD CMOS (Schmitt3) WRPORT P15 Output latch P150 P150/(SSI11) WRPM PM15 PM150 WRPMS PMS PMS0 P15: Port register 15 PU15: Pull-up resistor option register 15 PM15: Port mode register 15 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL15: Port input threshold control register 15 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 302 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-70. Block Diagram of P151 EVDD WRPU PU15 PU151 P-ch Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P15 Output latch P151 P151/(SO11) WRPM PM15 PM151 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (SO11) P15: Port register 15 PU15: Pull-up resistor option register 15 PM15: Port mode register 15 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 303 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-71. Block Diagram of P152 WRPITHL PITHL15 PITHL152 EVDD WRPU PU15 PU152 CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function P-ch (SI11) CMOS (Schmitt3) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P15 Output latch P152 P152/(SI11) WRPM PM15 PM152 WRPMS PMS PMS0 P15: Port register 15 PU15: Pull-up resistor option register 15 PM15: Port mode register 15 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL15: Port input threshold control register 15 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 304 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-72. Block Diagram of P153 WRPITHL PITHL15 PITHL153 EVDD WRPU PU15 PU153 CMOS (Schmitt1) Alternate function P-ch (SCK11) CMOS (Schmitt3) Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P15 Output latch P153 P153/(SCK11) WRPM PM15 PM153 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (SCK11) P15: Port register 15 PU15: Pull-up resistor option register 15 PM15: Port mode register 15 PMS: Port mode select register PITHL15: Port input threshold control register 15 RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 305 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-73. Block Diagram of P154 to P157 EVDD WRPU PU15 PU154 to PU157 P-ch Selector Internal bus RD WRPORT P15 Output latch P154 to P157 WRPM PM15 P154/(SNZOUT7), P155/(SNZOUT6), P156/(SNZOUT5), P157/(SNZOUT4) PM154 to PM157 WRPMS PMS PMS0 Alternate function (SNZOUT4 to SNZOUT7) P15: Port register 15 PU15: Pull-up resistor option register 15 PM15: Port mode register 15 PMS: Port mode select register RD: Read signal WRxx: Write signal R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 306 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function Port functions are controlled by the following registers. Port mode registers (PMxx) Port registers (Pxx) Pull-up resistor option registers (PUxx) Port input mode registers (PIMxx) Port output mode registers (POMxx) Port mode control registers (PMCxx) A/D port configuration register (ADPC) Peripheral I/O redirection registers (PIORx) Port input threshold control register (PITHLxx) Port output slew rate select registers (PSRSEL) SNOOZE status output control registers 0 to 3 (PSNZCNT0 to PSNZCNT3) Port mode select register (PMS) Table 4-26. Port Configuration of Group A Products (64-pin products) (1/4) Port Port Bit Name PORT0 PORT1 PORT2 Remark Output I/O Mode Pull-up Input Type Output Operating Input Latch Control Control Control Type Mode Threshold Control Control Control 0 P0.0 PM0.0 PU0.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 P1.0 PM1.0 PU1.0 1 P1.1 PM1.1 PU1.1 2 P1.2 PM1.2 PU1.2 3 P1.3 PM1.3 PU1.3 PIM1.3 POM1.3 PITHL1.3 4 P1.4 PM1.4 PU1.4 PIM1.4 POM1.4 PITHL1.4 5 P1.5 PM1.5 PU1.5 POM1.5 6 P1.6 PM1.6 PU1.6 PIM1.6 POM1.6 PITHL1.6 7 P1.7 PM1.7 PU1.7 PIM1.7 POM1.7 PITHL1.7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 : Not provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 307 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-26. Port Configuration of Group A Products (64-pin products) (2/4) Port Output I/O Mode Pull-up Input Type Output Operating Input Latch Control Control Control Type Mode Threshold Control Control Control 0 P3.0 PM3.0 PU3.0 PIM3.0 PITHL3.0 1 P3.1 PM3.1 PU3.1 2 P3.2 PM3.2 PU3.2 3 P3.3 PM3.3 4 P3.4 PM3.4 5 6 7 0 P4.0 PM4.0 PU4.0 1 P4.1 PM4.1 PU4.1 2 P4.2 PM4.2 PU4.2 3 P4.3 PM4.3 PU4.3 PITHL4.3 4 5 6 7 0 P5.0 PM5.0 PU5.0 PITHL5.0 1 P5.1 PM5.1 PU5.1 2 P5.2 PM5.2 PU5.2 PITHL5.2 3 P5.3 PM5.3 PU5.3 PITHL5.3 4 5 6 7 0 P6.0 PM6.0 PU6.0 POM6.0 PITHL6.0 1 P6.1 PM6.1 PU6.1 POM6.1 PITHL6.1 2 P6.2 PM6.2 PU6.2 POM6.2 3 P6.3 PM6.3 PU6.3 POM6.3 PITHL6.3 4 5 6 7 0 P7.0 PM7.0 PU7.0 1 P7.1 PM7.1 PU7.1 PITHL7.1 2 P7.2 PM7.2 PU7.2 3 P7.3 PM7.3 PU7.3 4 P7.4 PM7.4 PU7.4 5 P7.5 PM7.5 PU7.5 6 P7.6 PM7.6 PU7.6 7 P7.7 PM7.7 PU7.7 Port Bit Name PORT3 PORT4 PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 Remark : Not provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 308 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-26. Port Configuration of Group A Products (64-pin products) (3/4) Port Output I/O Mode Pull-up Input Type Output Operating Input Latch Control Control Control Type Mode Threshold Control Control Control 0 P8.0 PM8.0 1 P8.1 PM8.1 2 P8.2 PM8.2 3 P8.3 PM8.3 4 P8.4 PM8.4 5 P8.5 PM8.5 6 P8.6 PM8.6 Port Bit Name PORT8 PORT9 PORT10 PORT11 PORT12 Remark 7 P8.7 PM8.7 0 P9.0 PM9.0 1 P9.1 PM9.1 2 P9.2 PM9.2 PU9.2 3 P9.3 PM9.3 PU9.3 4 P9.4 PM9.4 PU9.4 5 P9.5 PM9.5 PU9.5 6 P9.6 PM9.6 PU9.6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 P12.0 PM12.0 PU12.0 POM12.0 1 P12.1 2 P12.2 3 P12.3 4 P12.4 5 P12.5 PM12.5 PU12.5 PIM12.5 PITHL12.5 6 7 : Not provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 309 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-26. Port Configuration of Group A Products (64-pin products) (4/4) Port Output I/O Mode Pull-up Input Type Output Operating Input Latch Control Control Control Type Mode Threshold Control Control Control 0 P13.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P13.7 0 P14.0 PM14.0 PU14.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Port Bit Name PORT13 PORT14 PORT15 Remark 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 : Not provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 310 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-27. Port Configuration of Products of Groups B to D (80-pin products) (1/4) Port Port Bit Name PORT0 PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 PORT4 Remark Output I/O Mode Pull-up Input Type Output Operating Input Latch Control Control Control Type Mode Threshold Control Control Control 0 P0.0 PM0.0 PU0.0 1 P0.1 PM0.1 PU0.1 2 P0.2 PM0.2 PU0.2 3 4 5 6 7 0 P1.0 PM1.0 PU1.0 PIM1.0 POM1.0 PITHL1.0 1 P1.1 PM1.1 PU1.1 PIM1.1 POM1.1 PITHL1.1 2 P1.2 PM1.2 PU1.2 POM1.2 3 P1.3 PM1.3 PU1.3 PIM1.3 POM1.3 PITHL1.3 4 P1.4 PM1.4 PU1.4 PIM1.4 POM1.4 PITHL1.4 5 P1.5 PM1.5 PU1.5 POM1.5 6 P1.6 PM1.6 PU1.6 PIM1.6 POM1.6 PITHL1.6 7 P1.7 PM1.7 PU1.7 PIM1.7 POM1.7 PITHL1.7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 P3.0 PM3.0 PU3.0 PIM3.0 PITHL3.0 1 P3.1 PM3.1 PU3.1 2 P3.2 PM3.2 PU3.2 3 P3.3 PM3.3 4 P3.4 PM3.4 5 6 7 0 P4.0 PM4.0 PU4.0 1 P4.1 PM4.1 PU4.1 2 P4.2 PM4.2 PU4.2 3 P4.3 PM4.3 PU4.3 PITHL4.3 4 P4.4 PM4.4 PU4.4 5 P4.5 PM4.5 PU4.5 6 P4.6 PM4.6 PU4.6 7 P4.7 PM4.7 PU4.7 : Not provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 311 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-27. Port Configuration of Products of Groups B to D (80-pin products) (2/4) Port Port Bit Name PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8 PORT9 Remark Output I/O Mode Pull-up Input Type Output Operating Input Latch Control Control Control Type Mode Threshold Control Control Control 0 P5.0 PM5.0 PU5.0 PITHL5.0 1 P5.1 PM5.1 PU5.1 2 P5.2 PM5.2 PU5.2 PITHL5.2 3 P5.3 PM5.3 PU5.3 PITHL5.3 4 P5.4 PM5.4 PU5.4 PIM5.4 PITHL5.4 5 P5.5 PM5.5 PU5.5 6 P5.6 PM5.6 PU5.6 7 P5.7 PM5.7 PU5.7 0 P6.0 PM6.0 PU6.0 POM6.0 PITHL6.0 1 P6.1 PM6.1 PU6.1 POM6.1 PITHL6.1 2 P6.2 PM6.2 PU6.2 PIM6.2 POM6.2 PITHL6.2 3 P6.3 PM6.3 PU6.3 PIM6.3 POM6.3 PITHL6.3 4 P6.4 PM6.4 PU6.4 5 P6.5 PM6.5 PU6.5 6 P6.6 PM6.6 PU6.6 7 P6.7 PM6.7 PU6.7 0 P7.0 PM7.0 PU7.0 PIM7.0 POM7.0 PITHL7.0 1 P7.1 PM7.1 PU7.1 PIM7.1 POM7.1 PITHL7.1 2 P7.2 PM7.2 PU7.2 POM7.2 3 P7.3 PM7.3 PU7.3 PIM7.3 PITHL7.3 4 P7.4 PM7.4 PU7.4 5 P7.5 PM7.5 PU7.5 PITHL7.5 6 P7.6 PM7.6 PU7.6 PITHL7.6 7 P7.7 PM7.7 PU7.7 PITHL7.7 0 P8.0 PM8.0 1 P8.1 PM8.1 2 P8.2 PM8.2 3 P8.3 PM8.3 4 P8.4 PM8.4 5 P8.5 PM8.5 6 P8.6 PM8.6 7 P8.7 PM8.7 0 P9.0 PM9.0 1 P9.1 PM9.1 2 P9.2 PM9.2 3 P9.3 PM9.3 4 P9.4 PM9.4 5 P9.5 PM9.5 6 P9.6 PM9.6 PU9.6 PMC9.6 7 P9.7 PM9.7 PU9.7 PMC9.7 : Not provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 312 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-27. Port Configuration of Products of Groups B to D (80-pin products) (3/4) Port Port Bit Name PORT10 PORT11 PORT12 PORT13 PORT14 Remark Output I/O Mode Pull-up Input Type Output Operating Input Latch Control Control Control Type Mode Threshold Control Control Control 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 P12.0 PM12.0 PU12.0 POM12.0 PMC12.0 1 P12.1 2 P12.2 3 P12.3 4 P12.4 5 P12.5 PM12.5 PU12.5 PIM12.5 PMC12.5 PITHL12.5 6 P12.6 PM12.6 PU12.6 7 0 P13.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P13.7 0 P14.0 PM14.0 PU14.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 : Not provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 313 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-27. Port Configuration of Products of Groups B to D (80-pin products) (4/4) Port Port Bit Name PORT15 Remark Output I/O Mode Pull-up Input Type Output Operating Input Latch Control Control Control Type Mode Threshold Control Control Control 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 : Not provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 314 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-28. Port Configuration of Group E Products (100-pin products) (1/4) Port Port Bit Name PORT0 PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 PORT4 Remark Output I/O Mode Pull-up Input Type Output Operating Input Latch Control Control Control Type Mode Threshold Control Control Control 0 P0.0 PM0.0 PU0.0 1 P0.1 PM0.1 PU0.1 2 P0.2 PM0.2 PU0.2 3 P0.3 PM0.3 PU0.3 4 5 6 7 0 P1.0 PM1.0 PU1.0 PIM1.0 POM1.0 PITHL1.0 1 P1.1 PM1.1 PU1.1 PIM1.1 POM1.1 PITHL1.1 2 P1.2 PM1.2 PU1.2 POM1.2 3 P1.3 PM1.3 PU1.3 PIM1.3 POM1.3 PITHL1.3 4 P1.4 PM1.4 PU1.4 PIM1.4 POM1.4 PITHL1.4 5 P1.5 PM1.5 PU1.5 POM1.5 6 P1.6 PM1.6 PU1.6 PIM1.6 POM1.6 PITHL1.6 7 P1.7 PM1.7 PU1.7 PIM1.7 POM1.7 PITHL1.7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 P3.0 PM3.0 PU3.0 PIM3.0 PITHL3.0 1 P3.1 PM3.1 PU3.1 2 P3.2 PM3.2 PU3.2 3 P3.3 PM3.3 4 P3.4 PM3.4 5 6 7 0 P4.0 PM4.0 PU4.0 1 P4.1 PM4.1 PU4.1 2 P4.2 PM4.2 PU4.2 3 P4.3 PM4.3 PU4.3 PITHL4.3 4 P4.4 PM4.4 PU4.4 5 P4.5 PM4.5 PU4.5 6 P4.6 PM4.6 PU4.6 7 P4.7 PM4.7 PU4.7 : Not provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 315 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-28. Port Configuration of Group E Products (100-pin products) (2/4) Port Port Bit Name PORT5 PORT6 PORT7 PORT8 PORT9 Remark Output I/O Mode Pull-up Input Type Output Operating Input Latch Control Control Control Type Mode Threshold Control Control Control 0 P5.0 PM5.0 PU5.0 PITHL5.0 1 P5.1 PM5.1 PU5.1 2 P5.2 PM5.2 PU5.2 PITHL5.2 3 P5.3 PM5.3 PU5.3 PITHL5.3 4 P5.4 PM5.4 PU5.4 PIM5.4 PITHL5.4 5 P5.5 PM5.5 PU5.5 6 P5.6 PM5.6 PU5.6 7 P5.7 PM5.7 PU5.7 0 P6.0 PM6.0 PU6.0 POM6.0 PITHL6.0 1 P6.1 PM6.1 PU6.1 POM6.1 PITHL6.1 2 P6.2 PM6.2 PU6.2 PIM6.2 POM6.2 PITHL6.2 3 P6.3 PM6.3 PU6.3 PIM6.3 POM6.3 PITHL6.3 4 P6.4 PM6.4 PU6.4 5 P6.5 PM6.5 PU6.5 6 P6.6 PM6.6 PU6.6 7 P6.7 PM6.7 PU6.7 0 P7.0 PM7.0 PU7.0 PIM7.0 POM7.0 PMC7.0 PITHL7.0 1 P7.1 PM7.1 PU7.1 PIM7.1 POM7.1 PMC7.1 PITHL7.1 2 P7.2 PM7.2 PU7.2 POM7.2 PMC7.2 3 P7.3 PM7.3 PU7.3 PIM7.3 PMC7.3 PITHL7.3 4 P7.4 PM7.4 PU7.4 PMC7.4 5 P7.5 PM7.5 PU7.5 PITHL7.5 6 P7.6 PM7.6 PU7.6 PITHL7.6 7 P7.7 PM7.7 PU7.7 PITHL7.7 0 P8.0 PM8.0 1 P8.1 PM8.1 2 P8.2 PM8.2 3 P8.3 PM8.3 4 P8.4 PM8.4 5 P8.5 PM8.5 6 P8.6 PM8.6 7 P8.7 PM8.7 0 P9.0 PM9.0 1 P9.1 PM9.1 2 P9.2 PM9.2 3 P9.3 PM9.3 4 P9.4 PM9.4 5 P9.5 PM9.5 6 P9.6 PM9.6 7 P9.7 PM9.7 : Not provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 316 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-28. Port Configuration of Group E Products (100-pin products) (3/4) Port Port Bit Name PORT10 PORT11 PORT12 PORT13 PORT14 Remark Output I/O Mode Pull-up Input Type Output Operating Input Latch Control Control Control Type Mode Threshold Control Control Control 0 P10.0 PM10.0 1 P10.1 PM10.1 2 P10.2 PM10.2 3 P10.3 PM10.3 4 P10.4 PM10.4 5 P10.5 PM10.5 6 P10.6 PM10.6 PU10.6 7 P10.7 PM10.7 PU10.7 PITHL10.7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 P12.0 PM12.0 PU12.0 POM12.0 PMC12.0 1 P12.1 2 P12.2 3 P12.3 4 P12.4 5 P12.5 PM12.5 PU12.5 PIM12.5 PMC12.5 PITHL12.5 6 P12.6 PM12.6 PU12.6 7 P12.7 PM12.7 PU12.7 0 P13.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P13.7 0 P14.0 PM14.0 PU14.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 : Not provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 317 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-28. Port Configuration of Group E Products (100-pin products) (4/4) Port Port Bit Name PORT15 Remark Output I/O Mode Pull-up Input Type Output Operating Input Latch Control Control Control Type Mode Threshold Control Control Control 0 P15.0 PM15.0 PU15.0 PITHL15.0 1 P15.1 PM15.1 PU15.1 2 P15.2 PM15.2 PU15.2 PITHL15.2 3 P15.3 PM15.3 PU15.3 PITHL15.3 4 P15.4 PM15.4 PU15.4 5 P15.5 PM15.5 PU15.5 6 P15.6 PM15.6 PU15.6 7 P15.7 PM15.7 PU15.7 : Not provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 318 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.1 Port mode registers (PMxx) These registers specify input or output mode for the port in 1-bit units. These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH. When port pins are used as alternate-function pins, set the port mode register by referencing 4.5 Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function. Figure 4-74. Format of Port Mode Register (100-pin products) Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After reset R/W PM0 1 1 1 1 PM03 PM02 PM01 PM00 FFF20H FFH R/W PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10 FFF21H FFH R/W PM3 1 1 1 PM34 PM33 PM32 PM31 PM30 FFF23H FFH R/W PM4 PM47 PM46 PM45 PM44 PM43 PM42 PM41 PM40 FFF24H FFH R/W PM5 PM57 PM56 PM55 PM54 PM53 PM52 PM51 PM50 FFF25H FFH R/W PM6 PM67 PM66 PM65 PM64 PM63 PM62 PM61 PM60 FFF26H FFH R/W PM7 PM77 PM76 PM75 PM74 PM73 PM72 PM71 PM70 FFF27H FFH R/W PM8 PM87 PM86 PM85 PM84 PM83 PM82 PM81 PM80 FFF28H FFH R/W PM9 PM97 PM96 PM95 PM94 PM93 PM92 PM91 PM90 FFF29H FFH R/W PM10 PM107 PM106 PM105 PM104 PM103 PM102 PM101 PM100 FFF2AH FFH R/W PM12 PM127 PM126 PM125 1 1 1 1 PM120 FFF2CH FFH R/W PM14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PM140 FFF2EH FFH R/W PM15 PM157 PM156 PM155 PM154 PM153 PM152 PM151 PM150 FFF2FH FFH R/W Pmn pin I/O mode selection PMmn (m = 0, 1, 3 to 10, 12, 14, 15; n = 0 to 7) 0 Output mode (output buffer on) 1 Input mode (output buffer off) Caution Be sure to set bits for pins that are not present to their initial values. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 319 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.2 Port registers (Pxx) These registers set the output latch value of a port. If the data is read in the input mode, the pin level is read. If it is read in the output mode, the output latch value is read Note. These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Even when PMxx is set to 0 (output mode), the pin level can be read from Pxx by setting PMS.0 (port mode select) to 1. Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H. Note When P33, P34, P70 to P74, P80 to P87, P90 to P97, P100 to P105, P120, and P125 are set up as analog inputs of the A/D converter, P80 is set up as D/A converter output, or P81 to P85 are set up as analog inputs of the comparator, if a port is read while in the input mode, 0 is always returned, not the pin level. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 320 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Figure 4-75. Format of Port Register (100-pin products) Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address P0 0 0 0 0 P03 P02 P01 P00 FFF00H 00H (output latch) R/W P1 P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10 FFF01H 00H (output latch) R/W P3 0 0 0 P34 P33 P32 P31 P30 FFF03H 00H (output latch) R/W P4 P47 P46 P45 P44 P43 P42 P41 P40 FFF04H 00H (output latch) R/W P5 P57 P56 P55 P54 P53 P52 P51 P50 FFF05H 00H (output latch) R/W P6 P67 P66 P65 P64 P63 P62 P61 P60 FFF06H 00H (output latch) R/W P7 P77 P76 P75 P74 P73 P72 P71 P70 FFF07H 00H (output latch) R/W P8 P87 P86 P85 P84 P83 P82 P81 P80 FFF08H 00H (output latch) R/W P9 P97 P96 P95 P94 P93 P92 P91 P90 FFF09H 00H (output latch) R/W P10 P107 P106 P105 P104 P103 P102 P101 P100 FFF0AH 00H (output latch) R/W P12 P127 P126 P125 P124 P123 P122 P121 P120 FFF0CH Undefined R/W Note 1 P13 P137 0 0 0 0 0 0 P130 FFF0DH Undefined Note 2 R/W Note 1 P14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P140 FFF0EH 00H (output latch) R/W P15 P157 P156 P155 P154 P153 P152 P151 P150 FFF0FH 00H (output latch) R/W Pmn Notes 1. 2. R/W m = 0, 1, 3 to 10, 12 to 15; n = 0 to 7 Output data control (in output mode) <R> After reset Input data read (in input mode) 0 Output 0 Input low level 1 Output 1 Input high level P121 to P124 and P137 are read-only. P130 bit depends on the setting of User Option Byte (000C2H/020C2H). RESOUTB = 0 (Selects P130 as the RESOUT pin): P130 = 1 RESOUTB = 1 (Selects P130 as a general port pin): P130 = 0 Caution Be sure to set bits for pins that are not present to their initial values. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 321 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.3 Pull-up resistor option registers (PUxx) These registers specify whether the on-chip pull-up resistors are to be used or not. On-chip pull-up resistors can be used in 1-bit units only for the bits set to input mode (PMmn = 1 and POMmn = 0) for the pins to which the use of an on-chip pull-up resistor has been specified in these registers. On-chip pull-up resistors cannot be connected to bits set to output mode and bits used as alternate-function output pins or analog pins, regardless of the settings of these registers. These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H (only PU4 is set to 01H). Figure 4-76. Format of Pull-up Resistor Option Register (100-pin products) Note Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After reset R/W PU0 0 0 0 0 PU03 PU02 PU01 PU00 F0030H 00H R/W PU1 PU17 PU16 PU15 PU14 PU13 PU12 PU11 PU10 F0031H 00H R/W PU3 0 0 0 0 0 PU32 PU31 PU30 F0033H 00H R/W PU4 PU47 PU46 PU45 PU44 PU43 PU42 PU41 PU40 F0034H 01H R/W PU5 PU57 PU56 PU55 PU54 PU53 PU52 PU51 PU50 F0035H 00H R/W PU6 PU67 PU66 PU65 PU64 PU63 PU62 PU61 PU60 F0036H 00H R/W PU7 PU77 PU76 PU75 PU74 PU73 PU72 PU71 PU70 F0037H 00H R/W PU9 PU97 PU96 PU95 PU94 PU93 PU92 0 0 F0039H 00H R/W PU10 PU107 PU106 0 0 0 0 0 0 F003AH 00H R/W PU12 PU127 PU126 PU125 0 0 0 0 PU120 F003CH 00H R/W PU14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PU140 F003EH 00H R/W PU15 PU157 PU156 PU155 PU154 PU153 PU152 PU151 PU150 F003FH 00H R/W Pmn pin on-chip pull-up resistor selection PUmn (m = 0, 1, 3 to 7, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15; n = 0 to 7) 0 On-chip pull-up resistor not connected 1 On-chip pull-up resistor connected Note Group E products do not have the PU9 register (products of Groups A to D have the PU9 register). Caution Be sure to set bits for pins that are not present to their initial values. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 322 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.4 Port input mode registers (PIM1, PIM3, PIM5 to PIM7, PIM12) These registers set the input buffer of P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, P17, P30, P54, P62, P63, P70, P71, P73, and P125 in 1-bit units. TTL input buffer can be selected during serial communication with an external device of the different potential. These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H. Figure 4-77. Format of Port Input Mode Register (100-pin products) Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After reset R/W PIM1 PIM17 PIM16 0 PIM14 PIM13 0 PIM11 PIM10 F0041H 00H R/W PIM3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PIM30 F0043H 00H R/W PIM5 0 0 0 PIM54 0 0 0 0 F0045H 00H R/W PIM6 0 0 0 0 PIM63 PIM62 0 0 F0046H 00H R/W PIM7 0 0 0 0 PIM73 0 PIM71 PIM70 F0047H 00H R/W PIM12 0 0 PIM125 0 0 0 0 0 F004CH 00H R/W Pmn pin input buffer selection PIMmn (m = 1, 3, 5 to 7, 12; n = 0 to 7) 0 Normal input buffer 1 TTL input buffer Caution Be sure to set bits for pins that are not present to their initial values. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 323 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.5 Port output mode registers (POM1, POM6, POM7, POM12) These registers set the output mode of P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 in 1-bit units. N-ch open-drain output (EVDD tolerance) mode can be selected for the SDA00, SDA01, SDA10, and SDA11 pins during serial communication with an external device of the different potential or during simplified IIC communication with an external device of the same potential, and it can be also selected for the SDAA0 and SCLA0 pins during IIC communication. These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H. Figure 4-78. Format of Port Output Mode Register (100-pin products) Symbol 7 POM1 POM17 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After reset R/W POM16 POM15 POM14 POM13 POM12 POM11 POM10 F0051H 00H R/W POM6 0 0 0 0 POM63 POM62 POM61 POM60 F0056H 00H R/W POM7 0 0 0 0 0 POM72 POM71 POM70 F0057H 00H R/W POM12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 POM120 F005CH 00H R/W Pmn pin output mode selection POMmn (m = 1, 6, 7, 12; n = 0 to 7) 0 Normal output mode 1 N-ch open-drain output (EVDD tolerance) mode Cautions 1. The on-chip pull-up resistor cannot be used when POMmn is set to 1. 2. Be sure to set bits for pins that are not present to their initial values. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 324 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.6 Port mode control registers 7, 9, 12 (PMC7, PMC9, PMC12) These registers set the P70 to P74, P96, P97, P120, and P125 digital I/O or analog input in 1-bit units. These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears these registers to FFH. Figure 4-79. Format of Port Mode Control Register (100-pin products) Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Address After reset R/W PMC7 1 1 1 PMC74 PMC73 PMC72 PMC71 PMC70 F0067H FFH R/W Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F0069H FFH R/W PMC125 1 1 1 1 PMC120 F006CH FFH R/W PMC9 PMC12 PMC97 PMC96 Note 2 Note 2 1 1 Pmn pin digital I/O or analog input selection PMCmn (m = 7, 9, 12; n = 0 to 7) <R> 0 Digital I/O (alternate function other than analog input) 1 Analog input Notes 1. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. PMC71 to PMC74 bits in the RL78/F14 products with 64 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory. PMC73 bit in the RL78/F14 products with 48 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory. 2. The ADPC and PMC9 registers are used to select the digital I/O or analog input functions for the P96/ANI16 and P97/ANI17 pins and for the P96/ANI26 and P97/ANI27 pins, respectively. For details on pin functions allocated to each product, see 1.5 Pin Configurations. <R> Cautions 1. Be sure to set bits for pins that are not present to their initial values, and see Note 1 for PMC71 to PMC74. 2. Set port pins specified as analog input pins to input mode by using port mode register x (PMx). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 325 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.7 A/D port configuration register (ADPC) This register is used to switch the P33/ANI0/AVREFP, P34/ANI1/AVREFM, P80/ANI2/ANO0, P81/ANI3/IVCMP00 to P84/ANI6/IVCMP03, P85/ANI7/IVREF0, and P86/ANI8 to P105/ANI23 pins to digital I/O of port or analog input of A/D converter. This register is also used to switch the P80/ANI2/ANO0 pins to digital I/O of port or analog output of D/A converter. This register is also used to switch the P81/ANI3/IVCMP00 to P84/ANI6/IVCMP03 and P85/ANI7/IVREF0 pins to analog input of comparator or digital I/O of port. The ADPC register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 4-80. Format of A/D Port Configuration Register (ADPC) (100-pin products) Address: F0076H After reset: 00H R/W ADPC4 to ADPC0 ANI6/P84 ANI5/P83 ANI4/P82 ANI3/P81 ANI2/P80 ANI1/P34 ANI0/P33 ADPC0 ANI7/P85 ADPC1 ANI8/P86 ADPC2 ANI9/P87 ADPC3 ANI10/P90 ADPC4 ANI11/P91 0 ANI12/P92 0 ANI13/P93 0 ANI14/P94 ADPC ANI15/P95 0 ANI16/P96 1 ANI17/P97 2 ANI18/P100 3 ANI19/P101 4 ANI20/P102 5 ANI21/P103 6 ANI22/P104 7 ANI23/P105 Symbol 0 0 0 0 0 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 0 0 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 0 0 0 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A 0 0 0 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A 0 0 1 0 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A 0 0 1 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A 0 0 1 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A 0 0 1 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A 0 1 0 0 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A 0 1 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A 0 1 0 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A 0 1 0 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 0 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 0 0 D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 1 0 D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 1 1 D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 0 0 D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 0 1 D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 1 0 D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 1 1 D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 1 0 0 0 D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Other than above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Setting prohibited 326 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Cautions 1. Set the channel used for A/D conversion to the input mode by using port mode registers 3, 8, 9, 10 (PM3, PM8, PM9, PM10). 2. Set the channel used for D/A conversion or comparator to the input mode by using port mode registers 3, 8 (PM3, PM8). 3. Do not set the pin set by the ADPC register as digital I/O by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). 4. Do not set the pin set by the ADPC register as digital I/O by D/A converter mode register (DAM) as D/A conversion operation enable. 5. Do not set the pin set by the ADPC register as digital I/O by the comparator I/O select register (CMPSEL). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 327 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.8 Port input threshold control register (PITHL1, PITHL3 to PITHL7, PITHL10, PITHL12, PITHL15) These registers are used to specify the threshold value of the input buffers for P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, P17, P30, P43, P50, P52 to P54, P60 to P63, P70, P71, P73, P75 to P77, P107, P125, P150, P152, and P153 in 1-bit units. These registers can set VIL to 0.5 EVDD for the serial communications interface and some external interrupts. The PITHL1, PITHL3 to PITHL7, PITHL10, PITHL12, and PITHL15 registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H. Figure 4-81. Format of Port Input Threshold Control Register (100-pin products) Address: F0021H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PITHL1 PITHL17 PITHL16 0 PITHL14 PITHL13 0 PITHL11 PITHL10 Address: F0023H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PITHL3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PITHL30 Address: F0024H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PITHL4 0 0 0 0 PITHL43 0 0 0 Address: F0025H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PITHL5 0 0 0 PITHL54 PITHL53 PITHL52 0 PITHL50 Address: F0026H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PITHL6 0 0 0 0 PITHL63 PITHL62 PITHL61 PITHL60 Address: F0027H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PITHL7 PITHL77 PITHL76 PITHL75 0 PITHL73 0 PITHL71 PITHL70 Address: F002AH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PITHL10 PITHL107 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Address: F002CH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PITHL12 0 0 PITHL125 0 0 0 0 0 Address: F002FH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PITHL15 0 0 0 0 PITHL153 PITHL152 0 PITHL150 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 328 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS PITHLmn Selection of the input buffer threshold for Pmn pins (m = 1, 3 to 7, 10, 12, 15; n = 0 to 7) 0 Schmitt1 input 1 Schmitt3 input PIMmn PITHLmn Selection of the input buffer threshold for Pmn pins (m = 1, 3 to 7, 10, 12, 15; n = 0 to 7) 0 0 Schmitt1 input 0 1 Schmitt3 input 1 0 TTL input 1 1 Setting prohibited Caution Be sure to set bits for pins that are not present to their initial values. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 329 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.9 Peripheral I/O redirection register 0 (PIOR0) This register is used to specify whether to enable or disable the peripheral I/O redirect function. PIOR0 enables or disables redirection of the timer array unit functions; that is, it specifies which I/O port is assigned to each input pin of timer array unit 0. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 4-82. Format of Peripheral I/O Redirection Register 0 (PIOR0) Address: F0016H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIOR0 PIOR07 PIOR06 PIOR05 PIOR04 PIOR03 PIOR02 PIOR01 PIOR00 Bit Function 100-pin 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 PIOR07 TI07 P120 P44 P120 P44 P120 P120 PIOR06 TI06 P14 P02 P14 P02 P14 P14 PIOR05 TI05 P15 P00 P15 P00 P15 P00 P15 P00 PIOR04 TI04 P13 P01 P13 P01 P13 P13 PIOR03 TI03 P125 P127 P125 P125 P125 PIOR02 TI02 P16 P67 P16 P67 P16 P16 PIOR01 TI01 P30 P126 P30 P126 P30 P30 PIOR00 TI00 P17 P66 P17 P66 P17 P17 Caution The 32-, 30-, and 20-pin products do not have the PIOR0 register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 330 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.10 Peripheral I/O redirection register 1 (PIOR1) This register is used to specify whether to enable or disable the peripheral I/O redirect function. PIOR1 enables or disables redirection of the timer array unit functions; that is, it specifies which I/O port is assigned to each output pin of timer array unit 0. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 4-83. Format of Peripheral I/O Redirection Register 1 (PIOR1) Address: F0017H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIOR1 PIOR17 PIOR16 PIOR15 PIOR14 PIOR13 PIOR12 PIOR11 PIOR10 Bit Function 100-pin 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 PIOR17 TO07 P120 P44 P120 P44 P120 P120 PIOR16 TO06 P14 P02 P14 P02 P14 P14 PIOR15 TO05 P15 P00 P15 P00 P15 P00 P15 P00 PIOR14 TO04 P13 P01 P13 P01 P13 P13 PIOR13 TO03 P125 P127 P125 P125 P125 PIOR12 TO02 P16 P67 P16 P67 P16 P16 PIOR11 TO01 P30 P126 P30 P126 P30 P30 PIOR10 TO00 P17 P66 P17 P66 P17 P17 Caution The 32-, 30-, and 20-pin products do not have the PIOR1 register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 331 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.11 Peripheral I/O redirection register 2 (PIOR2) This register is used to specify whether to enable or disable the peripheral I/O redirect function. PIOR2 enables or disables redirection of the timer array unit functions; that is, it specifies which I/O port is assigned to each input pin of timer array unit 1. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 4-84. Format of Peripheral I/O Redirection Register 2 (PIOR2) Address: F0018H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIOR2 PIOR27 PIOR26 PIOR25 PIOR24 PIOR23 PIOR22 PIOR21 PIOR20 Bit Function PIOR27 TI17 100-pin 80-pin Setting value Setting value 0 1 0 1 P71 P57 P71 Note 1 P57 Note 1 Note 1 P65 Note 1 PIOR26 TI16 P32 P65 P32 PIOR25 TI15 P70 P56 P70 Note 1 P56 Note 1 PIOR24 TI14 P31 P64 P31 Note 1 P64 Note 1 PIOR23 TI13 P10 P55 P10 Note 2 P55 Note 2 PIOR22 TI12 P11 P46 P11 Note 2 P46 Note 2 PIOR21 TI11 P12 P54 P12 Note 2 P54 Note 2 PIOR20 TI10 P41 P45 P41 Note 2 P45 Note 2 Notes 1. Group E products only 2. Products of Groups B to E only Caution The 64-, 48-, 32-, 30-, and 20-pin products do not have the PIOR2 register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 332 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.12 Peripheral I/O redirection register 3 (PIOR3) This register is used to specify whether to enable or disable the peripheral I/O redirect function. PIOR3 enables or disables redirection of the timer array unit functions; that is, it specifies which I/O port is assigned to each output pin of timer array unit 1. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 4-85. Format of Peripheral I/O Redirection Register 3 (PIOR3) Address: F0019H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIOR3 PIOR37 PIOR36 PIOR35 PIOR34 PIOR33 PIOR32 PIOR31 PIOR30 Bit Function PIOR37 TO17 100-pin 80-pin Setting value Setting value 0 1 0 1 P71 P57 P71 Note 1 P57 Note 1 Note 1 P65 Note 1 PIOR36 TO16 P32 P65 P32 PIOR35 TO15 P70 P56 P70 Note 1 P56 Note 1 PIOR34 TO14 P31 P64 P31 Note 1 P64 Note 1 PIOR33 TO13 P10 P55 P10 Note 2 P55 Note 2 PIOR32 TO12 P11 P46 P11 Note 2 P46 Note 2 PIOR31 TO11 P12 P54 P12 Note 2 P54 Note 2 PIOR30 TO10 P41 P45 P41 Note 2 P45 Note 2 Notes 1. Group E products only 2. Products of Groups B to E only Caution The 64-, 48-, 32-, 30-, and 20-pin products do not have the PIOR3 register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 333 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.13 Peripheral I/O redirection register 4 (PIOR4) This register is used to specify whether to enable or disable the peripheral I/O redirect function. PIOR4 enables or disables redirection of the serial communication functions; that is, it specifies which I/O port is assigned to each serial data I/O pin of CAN, serial data I/O pin of LIN, serial data I/O pin of the serial array unit, clock I/O pin, and slave select input pin. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 4-86. Format of Peripheral I/O Redirection Register 4 (PIOR4) Address: F001AH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIOR4 0 PIOR46 PIOR45 PIOR44 PIOR43 PIOR42 PIOR41 PIOR40 Bit Function 100-pin 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value 0 PIOR46 PIOR45 PIOR44 PIOR43 PIOR42 PIOR41 PIOR40 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 CRxD0 P11 P73 1 P11 Note 1 P73 Note 1 P11 Note 1 P73 Note 1 P11 Note 1 P73 Note 1 P11 Note 2 CTxD0 P10 P72 P10 Note 1 P72 Note 1 P10 Note 1 P72 Note 1 P10 Note 1 P72 Note 1 P10 Note 2 Note 3 LRxD1 P11 P107 P11 LTxD1 P10 P106 P10 Note 3 P11 Note 3 P10 Note 3 P11 Note 3 P10 Note 3 Use prohibited LRxD0 P14 P43 P14 P43 P14 P43 P14 P14 LTxD0 P13 P42 P13 P42 P13 P42 P13 P13 SI11/ SDA11 P70 SO11 P72 SCL11/ SCK11 P71 SSI11 P73 P152 Note 6 P70 Note 4 P70 Note 4 P70 Note 4 P72 Note 4 P72 Note 4 P72 Note 4 Note 4 P71 Note 4 P71 Note 4 P73 Note 4 P73 Note 4 Note 4 P11 Note 5 P151 P153 Note 6 P150 Note 6 P71 P73 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4, 6 Note 4 Note 4, 6 Use prohibited SI10/ SDA10/ RxD1 P11 P75 SO10/ TxD1 P12 P74 P12 Note 4 P12 Note 4 P12 Note 5 SCL10/ SCK10 P10 P76 Note 6 P10 Note 4 P76 Note 4, 6 P10 Note 4 P76 Note 4, 6 P10 Note 4 P10 Note 5 SSI10 P54 P77 P54 Note 4 SI01/ SDA01 P13 P53 SO01 P120 P51 SCL01/ SCK01 P14 P52 SSI01 P125 SI00/ SDA00/ RxD0 Note 6 Note 6 P11 P75 P74 Note 4 P77 Note 4 P13 P53 P120 P51 P14 P52 P50 P125 P16 P61 SO00/ TxD0 P15 SCL00/ SCK00 SSI00 Note 6 Note 6 P11 P12 Note 4 P75 P74 Note 4 P77 Note 4 P13 P53 P120 P51 Note 6 Note 6 P11 P13 P13 P120 P120 P14 P14 P125 P14 P52 P50 P125 P50 P125 P16 P61 P16 P61 P16 P61 P16 P61 P62 P15 P62 P15 P62 P15 P62 P15 P62 P17 P60 P17 P60 P17 P60 P17 P60 P17 P60 P30 P63 P30 P63 P30 P63 P30 P63 P30 P63 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 334 RL78/F13, F14 Notes 1. CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Products of Groups C to E only 2. Products of Groups C and D only 3. Group E products only 4. Products of Groups B to E only 5. Products of Groups B to D only 6. The simplified IIC function (SDA and SCL) cannot be used when PIOR is 1. Cautions 1. The 30- and 20-pin products do not have the PIOR4 register. 2. Set the bit the use of which is prohibited to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 335 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.14 Peripheral I/O redirection register 5 (PIOR5) This register is used to specify whether to enable or disable the peripheral I/O redirect function. PIOR5 enables or disables redirection of the external interrupt input and key interrupt input; that is, it specifies which I/O port is assigned to each external interrupt input pin or key interrupt input pin. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Bits 7 to 4 and 1 are read-only because no functions are assigned to them. The other bits can be read or written to. After reset cancellation, this register can always be read or written to. Any reset source clears this register to 00H. Figure 4-87. Format of Peripheral I/O Redirection Register 5 (PIOR5) Address: F001BH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIOR5 0 0 0 0 PIOR53 PIOR52 0 PIOR50 Bit Function 100-pin 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin 20-pin Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 PIOR53 INTP3 P17 P50 P17 P50 P17 P50 P17 P17 P17 P17 PIOR52 INTP2 P30 P31 P30 P31 P30 P31 P30 P31 P30 P30 P30 PIOR50 KR7 P77 P77 P77 P96 P92 P87 KR6 P76 P76 P76 P95 P91 P86 KR5 P75 P75 P75 P94 P90 P85 P85 KR4 P74 P74 P74 P93 P87 P84 P84 KR3 P73 P73 P73 P92 P73 P86 P83 P83 KR2 P72 P72 P72 P91 P72 P85 P82 P82 KR1 P71 P71 P71 P90 P71 P84 P81 P81 P81 KR0 P70 P70 P70 P87 P70 P83 P80 P80 P80 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 336 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.15 Peripheral I/O redirection register 6 (PIOR6) This register is used to specify whether to enable or disable the peripheral I/O redirect function. PIOR6 enables or disables redirection of the SNOOZE status output functions; that is, it specifies which I/O port is assigned to each SNOOZE status output pin. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. After reset cancellation, this register can always be read or written to. Any reset source clears this register to 00H. Figure 4-88. Format of Peripheral I/O Redirection Register 6 (PIOR6) Address: F001CH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIOR6 PIOR67 PIOR66 PIOR65 PIOR64 PIOR63 PIOR62 PIOR61 PIOR60 Bit Function 100-pin 80-pin Setting value Setting value 0 1 0 1 PIOR67 SNZOUT7 P73 P154 P73 PIOR66 SNZOUT6 P72 P155 P72 PIOR65 SNZOUT5 P71 P156 P71 PIOR64 SNZOUT4 P70 P157 P70 PIOR63 SNZOUT3 P12 P64 P12 P64 PIOR62 SNZOUT2 P41 P65 P41 P65 PIOR61 SNZOUT1 P125 P56 P125 P56 PIOR60 SNZOUT0 P30 P57 P30 P57 Caution The 64-, 48-, 32-, 30-, and 20-pin products do not have the PIOR6 register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 337 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.16 Peripheral I/O redirection register 7 (PIOR7) This register is used to specify whether to enable or disable the peripheral I/O redirect function. PIOR7 enables or disables redirection of the timer RD I/O functions; that is, it specifies which I/O port is assigned to each I/O pin of timer RD0. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Bits 7 to 4 and 2 are read-only. The other bits can be read or written to. After reset cancellation, this register can always be read or written to. Any reset source clears this register to 00H. Figure 4-89. Format of Peripheral I/O Redirection Register 7 (PIOR7) Address: F001DH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIOR7 0 0 0 0 PIOR73 0 PIOR71 PIOR70 Bit Function 100-pin 80-pin 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin 20-pin Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value Setting value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 PIOR73 TRDIOD0 P120 P12 P120 P12 P120 P12 P120 P12 P120 P12 P120 P12 P120 PIOR71 TRDIOB0 P125 P11 P125 P11 P125 P11 P125 P11 P125 P11 P125 P11 P125 PIOR70 TRDIOA0/ P13 P15 P13 P15 P13 P15 P13 P15 P13 P15 P13 P15 P13 P15 TRDCLK0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 338 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.17 Peripheral I/O redirection register 8 (PIOR8) This register is used to specify whether to enable or disable the peripheral I/O redirect function. PIOR8 enables or disables redirection of the real-time clock correction clock (1 Hz) output function; that is, it specifies which I/O port is assigned to the real-time clock correction clock (1 Hz) output pin. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Bits 7 to 1 are read-only. Bit 0 can be read or written to. After reset cancellation, this register can always be read or written to. Any reset source clears this register to 00H. Figure 4-90. Format of Peripheral I/O Redirection Register 8 (PIOR8) Address: F001EH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIOR8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PIOR80 Bit Function 100-pin Setting value 0 1 PIOR87 PIOR86 PIOR85 PIOR84 PIOR83 PIOR82 PIOR81 PIOR80 RTC1HZ P15 P03 Caution The 80-, 64-, 48-, 32-, 30-, and 20-pin products do not have the PIOR8 register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 339 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.18 Port output slew rate register (PSRSEL) This register is used to select the slew rate for the port output. It can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Any reset source clears this register to 00H. Caution The slew rate of target pins including the alternate functions is changed. Figure 4-91. Format of Port Output Slew Rate Register (PSRSEL) Address: F0220H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PSRSEL 0 0 PSR140 PSR14 PSR120 PSR30 PSR12 PSR10 PSR140 Control target output port: P140/PCLBUZ0 0 Normal slew rate 1 Special slew rate (slower than normal slew rate) Caution PSR140 is not provided in the 32-, 30-, or 20-pin products. PSR14 Control target output port: P14/SCK01/SCL01/TO06/TRDIOC0 0 Normal slew rate 1 Special slew rate (slower than normal slew rate) PSR120 Control target output port: P120/SO01/TO07/TRDIOD0 0 Normal slew rate 1 Special slew rate (slower than normal slew rate) PSR30 Control target output port: P30/TO01/TRDIOD1/SNZOUT0 0 Normal slew rate 1 Special slew rate (slower than normal slew rate) PSR12 Control target output port: P12/SO10/TO11/(TRDIOD0)/TXD1/SNZOUT3 0 Normal slew rate 1 Special slew rate (slower than normal slew rate) Caution PSR12 is not provided in the 20-pin products. PSR10 Control target output port: P10/SCK10/TO13/TRJO0/SCL10/LTXD1/CTXD0 0 Normal slew rate 1 Special slew rate (slower than normal slew rate) Caution PSR10 is not provided in the 20-pin products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 340 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.19 SNOOZE status output control register 0 (PSNZCNT0) This register is used to output signals indicating that the SNOOZE mode has been entered through external pins. It can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Bits 7, 6, 3, and 2 are read-only because no functions are assigned to them. The other bits can be read or written to. Any reset source clears this register to 00H. Cautions 1. Set the target port pin to the output mode and the output latch to 0 before using the SNOOZE status output function. 2. Stop the output from peripheral functions assigned to output-enabled port pins and make the register settings at the time of SNZOUT output. 3. Set WUTMMCK0 to 1 at the time of SNZOUT output. Figure 4-92. Format of SNOOZE Status Output Control Register 0 (PSNZCNT0) Address: F0222H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PSNZCNT0 0 0 SNZACT1 OUTEN1 0 0 SNZACT0 OUTEN0 SNZACT1 0 SNZOUT1 active level When PIOR61 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P125 is "H". When PIOR61 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P56 is "H" (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). 1 When PIOR61 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P125 is "L". When PIOR61 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P56 is "L" (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). OUTEN1 0 SNZOUT1 enable/disable When PIOR61 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P125 is disabled. When PIOR61 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P56 is disabled (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). 1 When PIOR61 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P125 is enabled. When PIOR61 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P56 is enabled (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). SNZACT0 0 SNZOUT0 active level When PIOR60 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P30 is "H". When PIOR60 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P57 is "H" (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). 1 When PIOR60 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P30 is "L". When PIOR60 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P57 is "L" (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). OUTEN0 0 SNZOUT0 enable/disable When PIOR60 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P30 is disabled. When PIOR60 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P57 is disabled (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). 1 When PIOR60 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P30 is enabled. When PIOR60 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P57 is enabled (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 341 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.20 SNOOZE status output control register 1 (PSNZCNT1) This register is used to output signals indicating that the SNOOZE mode has been entered through external pins. It can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Bits 7, 6, 3, and 2 are read-only because no functions are assigned to them. The other bits can be read or written to. Any reset source clears this register to 00H. Cautions 1. Set the target port pin to the output mode and the output latch to 0 before using the SNOOZE status output control register. 2. Stop the output from peripheral functions assigned to output-enabled port pins and make the register settings at the time of SNZOUT output. 3. Set WUTMMCK0 to 1 at the time of SNZOUT output. Figure 4-93. Format of SNOOZE Status Output Control Register 1 (PSNZCNT1) Address: F0223H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PSNZCNT1 0 0 SNZACT3 OUTEN3 0 0 SNZACT2 OUTEN2 SNZACT3 0 SNZOUT3 active level When PIOR63 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P12 is "H". When PIOR63 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P64 is "H" (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). 1 When PIOR63 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P12 is "L". When PIOR63 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P64 is "L" (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). OUTEN3 0 SNZOUT3 enable/disable When PIOR63 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P12 is disabled. When PIOR63 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P64 is disabled (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). 1 When PIOR63 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P12 is enabled. When PIOR63 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P64 is enabled (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). SNZACT2 0 SNZOUT2 active level When PIOR62 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P41 is "H". When PIOR62 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P65 is "H" (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). 1 When PIOR62 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P41 is "L". When PIOR62 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P65 is "L" (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). OUTEN2 0 SNZOUT2 enable/disable When PIOR62 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P41 is disabled. When PIOR62 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P65 is disabled (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). 1 When PIOR62 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P41 is enabled. When PIOR62 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P65 is enabled (only in 100-pin or 80-pin products). Caution The 20-pin products do not have the PSNZCNT1 register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 342 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.21 SNOOZE status output control register 2 (PSNZCNT2) This register is used to output signals indicating that the SNOOZE mode has been entered through external pins. It can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Bits 7, 6, 3, and 2 are read-only because no functions are assigned to them. The other bits can be read or written to. Any reset source clears this register to 00H. Cautions 1. Set the target port pin to the output mode and the output latch to 0 before using the SNOOZE status output control register. 2. Stop the output from peripheral functions assigned to output-enabled port pins and make the register settings at the time of SNZOUT output. 3. Set WUTMMCK0 to 1 at the time of SNZOUT output. Figure 4-94. Format of SNOOZE Status Output Control Register 2 (PSNZCNT2) Address: F0224H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PSNZCNT2 0 0 SNZACT5 OUTEN5 0 0 SNZACT4 OUTEN4 SNZACT5 0 SNZOUT5 active level When PIOR65 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P71 is "H". When PIOR65 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P156 is "H" (only in 100-pin products). 1 When PIOR65 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P71 is "L". When PIOR65 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P156 is "L" (only in 100-pin products). OUTEN5 0 SNZOUT5 enable/disable When PIOR65 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P71 is disabled. When PIOR65 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P156 is disabled (only in 100-pin products). 1 When PIOR65 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P71 is enabled. When PIOR65 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P156 is enabled (only in 100-pin products). SNZACT4 0 SNZOUT4 active level When PIOR64 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P70 is "H". When PIOR64 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P157 is "H" (only in 100-pin products). 1 When PIOR64 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P70 is "L". When PIOR64 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P157 is "L" (only in 100-pin products). OUTEN4 0 SNZOUT4 enable/disable When PIOR64 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P70 is disabled. When PIOR64 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P157 is disabled (only in 100-pin products). 1 When PIOR64 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P70 is enabled. When PIOR64 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P157 is enabled (only in 100-pin products). Caution The 20-pin, 30-pin, and 32-pin products do not have the PSNZCNT2 register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 343 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.22 SNOOZE status output control register 3 (PSNZCNT3) This register is used to output signals indicating that the SNOOZE mode has been entered through external pins. It can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Bits 7, 6, 3, and 2 are read-only because no functions are assigned to them. The other bits can be read or written to. Any reset source clears this register to 00H. Cautions 1. Set the target port pin to the output mode and the output latch to 0 before using the SNOOZE status output control register. 2. Stop the output from peripheral functions assigned to output-enabled port pins and make the register settings at the time of SNZOUT output. 3. Set WUTMMCK0 to 1 at the time of SNZOUT output. Figure 4-95. Format of SNOOZE Status Output Control Register 3 (PSNZCNT3) Address: F0225H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PSNZCNT3 0 0 SNZACT7 OUTEN7 0 0 SNZACT6 OUTEN6 SNZACT7 0 SNZOUT7 active level When PIOR67 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P73 is "H". When PIOR67 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P154 is "H" (only in 100-pin products). 1 When PIOR67 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P73 is "L". When PIOR67 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P154 is "L" (only in 100-pin products). OUTEN7 0 SNZOUT7 enable/disable When PIOR67 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P73 is disabled. When PIOR67 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P154 is disabled (only in 100-pin products). 1 When PIOR67 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P73 is enabled. When PIOR67 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P154 is enabled (only in 100-pin products). SNZACT6 0 SNZOUT6 active level When PIOR66 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P72 is "H". When PIOR66 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P155 is "H" (only in 100-pin products). 1 When PIOR66 = 0: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P72 is "L". When PIOR66 = 1: Active level of SNOOZE status output to P155 is "L" (only in 100-pin products). OUTEN6 0 SNZOUT6 enable/disable When PIOR66 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P72 is disabled. When PIOR66 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P155 is disabled (only in 100-pin products). 1 When PIOR66 = 0: SNOOZE status output to P72 is enabled. When PIOR66 = 1: SNOOZE status output to P155 is enabled (only in 100-pin products). Caution The 20-pin, 30-pin, and 32-pin products do not have the PSNZCNT3 register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 344 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.3.23 Port mode select register (PMS) This register is provided to support IEC60730. It selects whether to read the output latch value or the pin output level when the port is set to output mode. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Any reset source clears this register to 00H. Figure 4-96. Port Mode Select Register (PMS) Address: F0077H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PMS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PMS0 PMS0 Data read from Pmn when PMmn = 0 (m = 0 to 15; n = 0 to 7) 0 Initial setting. When PMmn = 0 (output mode), the value of Pmn (output latch) is read. 1 When PMmn = 0 (output mode), the pin level is read. PMmn PMS0 0 0 Value of the Pmn register (output latch) 0 1 Pin output level 1 0 Pin input level 1 1 Pin input level R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Data read from Pmn 345 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.4 Port Function Operations Port operations differ depending on whether the input or output mode is set, as shown below. 4.4.1 Writing to I/O port (1) Output mode A value is written to the output latch by a transfer instruction, and the output latch contents are output from the pin. Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again. The data of the output latch is cleared when a reset signal is generated. (2) Input mode A value is written to the output latch by a transfer instruction, but since the output buffer is off, the pin status does not change. Accordingly, data can be written in byte units to a port having both input and output pins. Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again. The data of the output latch is cleared when a reset signal is generated. 4.4.2 Reading from I/O port (1) Output mode The output latch contents are read by a transfer instruction. The output latch contents do not change. When the PMS0 bit in the port mode select register is set to 1, the pin level can be read from Pxx. (2) Input mode The pin status is read by a transfer instruction. The output latch contents do not change. 4.4.3 Operations on I/O port (1) Output mode An operation is performed on the output latch contents, and the result is written to the output latch. The output latch contents are output from the pins. Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again. The data of the output latch is cleared when a reset signal is generated. (2) Input mode The pin level is read and an operation is performed on its contents. The result of the operation is written to the output latch, but since the output buffer is off, the pin status does not change. Accordingly, data can be written in byte units to a port having both input and output pins. The data of the output latch is cleared when a reset signal is generated. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 346 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.4.4 Connecting to external device with different potential (3 V) It is possible to connect to an external device with a different potential (3 V) by changing EVDD to accord with the power supply of the connected device. In products in which EVDD cannot be specified independently or if EVDD cannot be changed to accord with the power supply of the connected device for some reason, I/O connection with an external device operating on 3 V when the system is operating on VDD = 4.0 V to 5.5 V is still possible via the serial interface by using ports 1, 6, 7, and 12. Regarding inputs, CMOS/TTL switching is possible on a bit-by-bit basis by the port input mode registers 1 and 7 (PIM1, PIM7). Moreover, regarding outputs, different potentials can be supported by switching the output buffer to the N-ch open-drain (EVDD tolerance) by the port output mode registers 1, 6, 7, and 12 (POM1, POM6, POM7, and POM12). (1) Setting procedure when using I/O pins of UART0, UART1, CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, and CSI11 functions (a) Use as 3 V input port <1> If pull-up is needed, externally pull up the pin to be used (on-chip pull-up resistor cannot be used). In case of UART0: P16 In case of UART1: P11 In case of CSI00: P16, P17 In case of CSI01: P13, P14 In case of CSI10: P11, P10 In case of CSI11: P70, P71 <2> After reset release, the port mode is the input mode (Hi-Z). <3> Set the corresponding bit of the PIM1 and PIM7 registers to 1 to switch to the TTL input buffer. <4> VIH/VIL operates on 3 V operating voltage. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 347 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS (b) Use as 3 V output port <1> Pull up externally the pin to be used (on-chip pull-up resistor cannot be used). In case of UART0: P15 In case of UART1: P12 In case of CSI00: P15, P17 In case of CSI01: P14, P120 In case of CSI10: P10, P12 In case of CSI11: P71, P72 <2> After reset release, the port mode is the input mode (Hi-Z). <3> Set the output latch of the corresponding port to 1. <4> Set the corresponding bit of the POM1, POM6, POM7, and POM12 registers to 1 to set the N-ch opendrain output (EVDD tolerance) mode. <5> Set the output mode by manipulating the PM1, PM6, PM7, and PM12 registers. At this time, the output data is high level, so the pin is in the Hi-Z state. <6> Communication is started by setting the serial array unit. (2) Setting procedure when using I/O pins of simplified IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, and IIC11 functions <1> Externally pull up the pin to be used (on-chip pull-up resistor cannot be used). In case of simplified IIC00: P16, P17 In case of simplified IIC01: P13, P14 In case of simplified IIC10: P10, P11 In case of simplified IIC11: P70, P71 <2> After reset release, the port mode is the input mode (Hi-Z). <3> Set the output latch of the corresponding port to 1. <4> Set the corresponding bit of the POM1 and POM7 registers to 1 to set the N-ch open-drain output (EVDD tolerance) mode. <5> Set the corresponding bit of the PIM1 and PIM7 registers to 1 to switch to the TTL input buffer. <6> Set the corresponding bit of the PM1 and PM7 registers to the output mode (data I/O is possible in the output mode). At this time, the output data is high level, so the pin is in the Hi-Z state. <7> Enable the operation of the serial array unit and set the mode to the simplified IIC mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 348 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.5 Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function To use the alternate function of a port pin, set the port mode register, and output latch as shown in Table 4-29. Table 4-29. Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function (1/8) Pin Name PIORXX POMXX PMCXX PMXX PXX PIMXX PITHLXX Input 0 - - 1 x - - (TI05) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO05) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - (TI04) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO04) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - P02 (TI06) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO06) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - P03 (RTC1HZ) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - P10 TI13 Input 0 x - 1 x 0 0/1 Alternate Function Function Name P00 P01 P11 INTP9 I/O TO13 Output 0 0 - 0 0 x x TRJO0 Output x 0 - 0 0 x x SCK10 Input 0 x - 1 x 0/1 0/1 Output 0 0/1 - 0 1 x x SCL10 Output 0 0/1 - 0 1 x x LTXD1 Output 0 0 - 0 1 x x CTXD0 Output 0 0 - 0 1 x x TI12 Input 0 x - 1 x 0 0/1 SI10 Input 0 x - 1 x 0/1 0/1 TO12 Output 0 0 - 0 0 x x SDA10 I/O 0 1 - 0 1 0/1 0/1 RXD1 Input 0 x - 1 x 0/1 0/1 LRXD1 Input 0 x - 1 x 0 0/1 CRXD0 Input 0 x - 1 x 0 0/1 (TRDIOB0) Input 1 x - 1 x 0 0/1 Output 1 0 - 0 0 x x Remarks 1. 2. 3. : Don't care PIORxx: Peripheral I/O redirection register POMxx: Port output mode register PMCxx: Port mode control register PMxx: Port mode register Pxx: Port output latch The relationship between pins and their alternate functions shown in this table indicates the relationship when a 100-pin product is used. In other products, alternate functions might be assigned to different pins, but even in this case, the PIORxx, POMxx, PMCxx, PMxx, and Pxx set in the same way. Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR). (The notes are described after the last table.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 349 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-29. Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function (2/8) Pin Name Alternate Function Function Name P12 P13 PMCXX PMXX PXX PIMXX PITHLXX I/O Input 0 x - 1 x - - INTP5 Input x x - 1 x - - TO11 Output 0 0 - 0 0 - - SO10 Output 0 0/1 - 0 1 - - TXD1 Output 0 0/1 - 0 1 - - SNZOUT3 Output 0 0 - 0 0 - - (TRDIOD0) Input 1 x - 1 x - - Output 1 0 - 0 0 - - TI04 Input 0 x - 1 x 0 0/1 SI01 Input 0 x - 1 x 0/1 0/1 TRDCLK0 Input 0 x - 1 x 0 0/1 Output 0 0 - 0 0 x x Input 0 x - 1 x 0 0/1 TO04 Output 0 0 - 0 0 x x SDA01 I/O 0 1 - 0 1 0/1 0/1 LTXD0 Output 0 0 - 0 1 x x TI06 Input 0 x - 1 x 0 0/1 TO06 Output 0 0 - 0 0 x x TRDIOC0 P15 POMXX TI11 TRDIOA0 P14 PIORXX Input x x - 1 x 0 0/1 Output x 0 - 0 0 x x SCK01 Input 0 x - 1 x 0/1 0/1 Output 0 0/1 - 0 1 x x SCL01 Output 0 0/1 - 0 1 x x LRXD0 Input 0 x - 1 x 0 0/1 TI05 Input 0 x - 1 x - - TO05 Output 0 0 - 0 0 - - TRDIOA1 Input x x - 1 x - - Output x 0 - 0 0 - - SO00 Output 0 0/1 - 0 1 - - TXD0 Output 0 0/1 - 0 1 - - RTC1HZ Output 0 0 - 0 0 - - (TRDIOA0) (TRDCLK0) Remarks 1. 2. 3. Input 1 x - 1 x - - Output 1 0 - 0 0 - - Input 1 x - 1 x - - : Don't care PIORxx: Peripheral I/O redirection register POMxx: Port output mode register PMCxx: Port mode control register PMxx: Port mode register Pxx: Port output latch The relationship between pins and their alternate functions shown in this table indicates the relationship when a 100-pin product is used. In other products, alternate functions might be assigned to different pins, but even in this case, the PIORxx, POMxx, PMCxx, PMxx, and Pxx set in the same way. Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR). (The notes are described after the last table.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 350 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-29. Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function (3/8) Pin Name Alternate Function Function PIORXX POMXX PMCXX PMXX PXX PIMXX PITHLXX I/O Name P16 TI02 Input 0 x - 1 x 0 0/1 SI00 Input 0 x - 1 x 0/1 0/1 TRDIOC1 P17 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 Input x x - 1 x 0 0/1 Output x 0 - 0 0 x x TO02 Output 0 0 - 0 0 x x SDA00 I/O 0 1 - 0 1 0/1 0/1 RXD0 Input 0 x - 1 x 0/1 0/1 TI00 Input 0 x - 1 x 0 0/1 INTP3 Input 0 x - 1 x 0 0/1 TRDIOB1 Input x x - 1 x 0 0/1 Output x 0 - 0 0 x x SCK00 Input 0 x - 1 x 0/1 0/1 Output 0 0/1 0 1 x x SCL00 Output 0 0/1 - 0 1 x x TO00 Output 0 0 - 0 0 x x TI01 Input 0 - - 1 x 0 0/1 INTP2 Input 0 - - 1 x 0 0/1 TRDIOD1 Input x - - 1 x 0 0/1 Output x - - 0 0 x x SSI00 Input 0 - - 1 x 0/1 0/1 TO01 Output 0 - - 0 0 x x SNZOUT0 Output 0 - - 0 0 x x TI14 Input 0 - - 1 x - - TO14 Output 0 - - 0 0 - - STOPST Output x - - 0 0 - - (INTP2) Input 1 - - 1 x - - TI16 Input 0 - - 1 x - - INTP7 Input 0 - - 1 x - - TO16 Output 0 - - 0 0 - - ANI00 Input x - - 1 x - - AVREFP Input x - - 1 x - - ANI01 Input x - - 1 x - - AVREFM Input x - - 1 x - - Remarks 1. 2. 3. : Don't care PIORxx: Peripheral I/O redirection register POMxx: Port output mode register PMCxx: Port mode control register PMxx: Port mode register Pxx: Port output latch The relationship between pins and their alternate functions shown in this table indicates the relationship when a 100-pin product is used. In other products, alternate functions might be assigned to different pins, but even in this case, the PIORxx, POMxx, PMCxx, PMxx, and Pxx set in the same way. Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR). (The notes are described after the last table.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 351 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-29. Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function (4/8) Pin Name Alternate Function Function Name PIORXX POMXX PMCXX PMXX PXX PIMXX PITHLXX I/O P40 TOOL0 I/O x - - x x - - P41 TI10 Input 0 - - 1 x - - TO10 Output 0 - - 0 0 - - TRJIO0 Input x - - 1 x - - Output x - - 0 0 - - VCOUT0 Output x - - 0 0 - - SNZOUT2 Output 0 - - 0 0 - - P42 (LTXD0) Output 1 - - 0 1 - - P43 (LRXD0) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 P44 (TI07) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO07) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - P45 (TI10) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO10) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - (TI12) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO12) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - P46 P47 INTP13 Input x - - 1 x - - P50 (SSI01) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 (INTP3) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 INTP11 Input x - - 1 x - - (SO01) Output 1 - - 0 1 - - (SCK01) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 P51 P52 Output 1 - - 0 1 - x Output x - - 0 0 - 0/1 INTP10 Input x - - 1 x - 0/1 (SI01) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 SSI10 Input x - - 1 x 0/1 0/1 (TI11) Input 1 - - 1 x 0 0/1 (TO11) Output 1 - - 0 0 x x P55 (TI13) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO13) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - P56 (TI15) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (STOPST)Note P53 P54 P57 (TO15) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - (SNZOUT1) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - (TI17) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO17) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - (SNZOUT0) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - Note The STOPST function can be assigned via settings in the STOP status output control register (STPSTC). Remarks 1. : Don't care PIORxx: Peripheral I/O redirection register POMxx: Port output mode register PMCxx: Port mode control register PMxx: Port mode register Pxx: Port output latch R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 352 RL78/F13, F14 2. 3. CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS The relationship between pins and their alternate functions shown in this table indicates the relationship when a 100-pin product is used. In other products, alternate functions might be assigned to different pins, but even in this case, the PIORxx, POMxx, PMCxx, PMxx, and Pxx set in the same way. Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR). (The notes are described after the last table.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 353 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-29. Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function (5/8) Pin Name Alternate Function PIORXX POMXX PMCXX PMXX PXX PIMXX PITHLXX Input 1 x - 1 x - 0/1 Output 1 0 - 0 1 - x Function Name P60 P61 P62 (SCK00) I/O (SCL00) Output 1 0/1 - 0 1 - x (SI00) Input 1 x - 1 x - 0/1 (SDA00) I/O 1 1 - 0 1 - 0/1 (RXD0) Input 1 x - 1 x - 0/1 SCLA0 I/O x 1 - 0 0 0/1 0/1 (SO00) Output 1 0 - 0 1 x x (TXD0) Output 1 0 - 0 1 x x P63 SDAA0 I/O x 1 - 0 0 0/1 0/1 (SSI00) Input 1 x - 1 x 0 0/1 P64 (TI14) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO14) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - P65 (SNZOUT3) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - (TI16) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO16) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - (SNZOUT2) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - P66 (TI00) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO00) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - P67 (TI02) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO02) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - P70 ANI26 Input x x 1 1 x x x TI15 Input 0 x 0 1 x 0 0/1 SI11 Input 0 x 0 1 x 0/1 0/1 INTP8 Input x x 0 1 x 0 0/1 TO15 Output 0 0 0 0 0 x x KR0 Input 0 x 0 1 x 0 0/1 SDA11 I/O 0 1 0 0 1 0/1 0/1 SNZOUT4 Output 0 0 0 0 0 x x Remarks 1. 2. 3. : Don't care PIORxx: Peripheral I/O redirection register POMxx: Port output mode register PMCxx: Port mode control register PMxx: Port mode register Pxx: Port output latch The relationship between pins and their alternate functions shown in this table indicates the relationship when a 100-pin product is used. In other products, alternate functions might be assigned to different pins, but even in this case, the PIORxx, POMxx, PMCxx, PMxx, and Pxx set in the same way. Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR). (The notes are described after the last table.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 354 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-29. Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function (6/8) Pin Name Alternate Function Function Name P71 P72 P73 P74 P75 P76 P77 P80 P81 PIORXX POMXX PMCXX PMXX PXX PIMXX PITHLXX I/O ANI27 Input x x 1 1 x x x TI17 Input 0 x 0 1 x 0 0/1 INTP6 Input x x 0 1 x 0 0/1 TO17 Output 0 0 0 0 0 x x KR1 Input 0 x 0 1 x 0 0/1 SCK11 Input 0 x 0 1 x 0/1 0/1 Output 0 0/1 0 0 1 x x SCL11 Output 0 0/1 0 0 1 x x SNZOUT5 Output 0 0 0 0 0 x x ANI28 Input x x 1 1 x - - KR2 Input 0 x 0 1 x - - SO11 Output 0 0/1 0 0 1 - - SNZOUT6 Output 0 0 0 0 0 - - (CTXD0) Output 1 0 0 0 1 - - ANI29 Input x - 1 1 x x x KR3 Input 0 - 0 1 x 0 0/1 SSI11 Input 0 - 0 1 x 0/1 0/1 SNZOUT7 Output 0 - 0 0 0 x x (CRXD0) Input 1 - 0 1 x 0 0/1 ANI30 Input x - 1 1 x - - KR4 Input 0 - 0 1 x - - (SO10) Output 1 - 0 0 1 - - (TXD1) Output 1 - 0 0 1 - - KR5 Input 0 - - 1 x - 0/1 (SI10) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 (RXD1) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 KR6 Input 0 - - 1 x - 0/1 (SCK10) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 Output 1 - - 0 1 - x INTP12 Input x - - 1 x - 0/1 KR7 Input 0 - - 1 x - 0/1 (SSI10) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 ANI02 Input x - - 1 x - - ANO0 Output x - - 1 x - - ANI03 Input x - - 1 x - - IVCMP00 Input x - - 1 x - - Remarks 1. 2. : Don't care PIORxx: Peripheral I/O redirection register POMxx: Port output mode register PMCxx: Port mode control register PMxx: Port mode register Pxx: Port output latch The relationship between pins and their alternate functions shown in this table indicates the relationship when a 100-pin product is used. In other products, alternate functions might be assigned to different pins, but even in this case, the PIORxx, POMxx, PMCxx, PMxx, and Pxx set in the same way. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 355 RL78/F13, F14 3. CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR). (The notes are described after the last table.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 356 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-29. Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function (7/8) Pin Name Alternate Function Function Name P82 P83 PIORXX POMXX PMCXX PMXX PXX PIMXX PITHLXX I/O ANI04 Input x - - 1 x - - IVCMP01 Input x - - 1 x - - ANI05 Input x - - 1 x - - IVCMP02 Input x - - 1 x - - P84 ANI06 Input x - - 1 x - - IVCMP03 Input x - - 1 x - - P85 ANI07 Input x - - 1 x - - IVREF0 Input x - - 1 x - - P86-P87 ANI08 to ANI09 Input x - - 1 x - - P90-P95 ANI10 to ANI15 Input x - - 1 x - - P96-P97 ANI16 to ANI17 Input x - - 1 x - - ANI26 to ANI27 Input x - 1 1 x - - ANI18 to ANI23 Input x - - 1 x - - P106 (LTXD1) Output 1 - - 0 1 - - P107 (LRXD1) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 P120 ANI25 Input x x 1 1 x - - TI07 Input 0 x 0 1 x - - INTP4 Input x x 0 1 x - - Note P100P105 TRDIOD0 SO01 P125 Input 0 x 0 1 x - - Output 0 0 0 0 0 - - Output 0 0/1 0 0 1 - - TO07 Output 0 0 0 0 0 - - ANI24 Input x - 1 1 x x x TI03 Input 0 - 0 1 x 0 0/1 INTP1 Input x - 0 1 x 0 0/1 TO03 Output 0 - 0 0 0 x x TRDIOB0 Input 0 - 0 1 x 0 0/1 Output 0 - 0 0 0 x x SSI01 Input 0 - 0 1 x 0/1 0/1 SNZOUT1 Output 0 - 0 0 0 x x P126 (TI01) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO01) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - P127 (TI03) Input 1 - - 1 x - - (TO03) Output 1 - - 0 0 - - P130 RESOUT Output x - - - 0 - - P137 INTP0 Input x - - - x - - Note In the products of Groups B to D. Remarks 1. : Don't care PIORxx: Peripheral I/O redirection register POMxx: Port output mode register PMCxx: Port mode control register PMxx: Port mode register Pxx: Port output latch R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 357 RL78/F13, F14 2. 3. CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS The relationship between pins and their alternate functions shown in this table indicates the relationship when a 100-pin product is used. In other products, alternate functions might be assigned to different pins, but even in this case, the PIORxx, POMxx, PMCxx, PMxx, and Pxx set in the same way. Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR). (The notes are described after the last table.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 358 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS Table 4-29. Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function (8/8) Pin Name Alternate Function Function Name PIORXX POMXX PMCXX PMXX PXX PIMXX PITHLXX I/O P140 PCLBUZ0 Output x - - 0 0 - - P150 (SSI11) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 P151 (SO11) Output 1 - - 0 1 - x P152 (SI11) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 P153 (SCK11) Input 1 - - 1 x - 0/1 Output 1 - - 0 1 - x P154 (SNZOUT7) Output 1 - - 0 0 - x P155 (SNZOUT6) Output 1 - - 0 0 - x P156 (SNZOUT5) Output 1 - - 0 0 - x P157 (SNZOUT4) Output 1 - - 0 0 - x Remarks 1. 2. 3. : Don't care PIORxx: Peripheral I/O redirection register POMxx: Port output mode register PMCxx: Port mode control register PMxx: Port mode register Pxx: Port output latch The relationship between pins and their alternate functions shown in this table indicates the relationship when a 100-pin product is used. In other products, alternate functions might be assigned to different pins, but even in this case, the PIORxx, POMxx, PMCxx, PMxx, and Pxx set in the same way. Functions in parentheses in the above table can be assigned via settings in the peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR). (The notes are described after the last table.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 359 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.6 Cautions When Using Port Function 4.6.1 Cautions on 1-bit manipulation instruction for port register n (Pn) When a 1-bit manipulation instruction is executed on a port that provides both input and output functions, the output latch value of an input port that is not subject to manipulation may be written in addition to the targeted bit. Therefore, it is recommended to rewrite the output latch when switching a port from input mode to output mode. <Example> When P10 is an output port, P11 to P17 are input ports (all pin statuses are high level), and the port latch value of port 1 is 00H, if the output of output port P10 is changed from low level to high level via a 1-bit manipulation instruction, the output latch value of port 1 is FFH. Explanation: The targets of writing to and reading from the Pn register of a port whose PMnm bit is 1 are the output latch and pin status, respectively. A 1-bit manipulation instruction is executed in the following order in the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14. <1> The Pn register is read in 8-bit units. <2> The targeted one bit is manipulated. <3> The Pn register is written in 8-bit units. In step <1>, the output latch value (0) of P10, which is an output port, is read, while the pin statuses of P11 to P17, which are input ports, are read. If the pin statuses of P11 to P17 are high level at this time, the read value is FEH. The value is changed to FFH by the manipulation in <2>. FFH is written to the output latch by the manipulation in <3>. Figure 4-97. Bit Manipulation Instruction (P10) 1-bit manipulation instruction (set1 P1.0) is executed for P10 bit. P10 Low-level output P11 to P17 P10 High-level output P11 to P17 Pin status: High level Pin status: High level Port 1 output latch Port 1 output latch 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1-bit manipulation instruction for P10 bit <1> Port register 1 (P1) is read in 8-bit units. * In the case of P10, an output port, the value of the port output latch (0) is read. * In the case of P11 to P17, input ports, the pin status (1) is read. <2> Set the P10 bit to 1. <3> Write the results of <2> to the output latch of port register 1 (P1) in 8-bit units. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 360 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS 4.6.2 Notes on specifying the pin settings For an output pin to which multiple functions are assigned, the output of the unused alternate functions must be set to its initial state so as to prevent conflicting outputs. This also applies to the functions assigned by using the peripheral I/O redirection register (PIOR). For details about the alternate function output, see 4.5 Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function. No specific setting is required for input pins because the output of their alternate functions is disabled (the buffer output is Hi-Z). Disabling the unused functions, including blocks that are only used for input or do not have I/O, is recommended for lower power consumption. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 361 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Use the clock generator within a range that satisfies the values stipulated in CHAPTER 34 to CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS. The presence or absence of connecting resonator pin for subsystem clock and external clock input pin for subsystem clock depends on the product. 20-, 30-, and 32-pin products 48-, 64-, 80-, and 100-pin products X1, X2 pins EXCLK pin XT1, XT2 pins EXCLKS pin Cautions 1. 2. The 20-, 30-, and 32-pin products don't have the subsystem clock. Do not use the XT1 and XT2 pin functions in grade-Y products. 5.1 Functions of Clock Generator The clock generator generates the clock to be supplied to the CPU and peripheral hardware. The following three kinds of system clocks and clock oscillators are selectable. (1) Main system clock <1> X1 oscillator This circuit oscillates a clock of fX = 1 to 20 MHz by connecting a resonator to X1 and X2. Oscillation can be stopped by executing the STOP instruction or setting of the MSTOP bit (bit 7 of the clock operation status control register (CSC)). <2> High-speed on-chip oscillator (High-speed OCO) The frequency at which to oscillate can be selected from among fIH = 64, 48, 32, 24, 16, 12, 8, 4, or 1 MHz (TYP.) by using the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H). When 64 MHz or 48 MHz is selected as fIH, fCLK is set to 32 MHz or 24 MHz, respectively, after a reset release. The CPU always starts operating with this high-speed on-chip oscillator clock . Oscillation can be stopped by executing the STOP instruction or setting of the Note HIOSTOP bit (bit 0 of the CSC register). The frequency set by using the user option byte can be changed by the high-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV). For the frequency, see Figure 5-15 Format of High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV). An external main system clock (fEX = 1 to 20 MHz) can also be supplied from the EXCLK/X2/P122 pin. An external main system clock input can be disabled by executing the STOP instruction or setting of the MSTOP bit. As the high-speed system clock, an X1 clock or external main system clock can be selected by setting of the OSCSEL bit (bit 6 of the clock operation mode control register (CMC)) and the EXCLK bit (bit 7 of the clock operation mode control register (CMC)). As the main system clock, a high-speed system clock (X1 clock or external main system clock) or high-speed onchip oscillator clock can be selected by setting of the MCM0 bit (bit 4 of the system clock control register (CKC)). Note When selecting 64 MHz or 48 MHz, the selected clock (fIH) is supplied to timer RD. When supplying 64 MHz or 48 MHz to timer RD, set fCLK to fIH. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 362 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR (2) PLL clock This clock oscillates the clock whose fPLL is 24 MHz, 32 MHz, or 64 MHz by oscillating the main system clock at 4 MHz or 8 MHz and multiplying by 3, 4, 6, or 8 times. When setting fPLL to 64 MHz or 48 MHz, the division of fCLK should be set to 32 MHz or 24 MHz by the MDIV2 to MDIV0 bits in the fMP clock division register (MDIV). Oscillation can be stopped by setting the PLLON bit (bit 0 of the PLLCTL register). Before entering STOP mode, the PLLON bit should be cleared to 0 (Stops PLL operation). Remarks 1. The PLL input clock frequency can be set to 4 MHz or 8 MHz. When setting the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock as the PLL input clock, the on-chip oscillator clock can be set to 4 MHz or 8 MHz depending on the setting of bits 4 to 0 (FRQSEL4 to FRQSEL0) of the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H). For details of the user option byte, see CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE. 2. Set the multiplier of the PLL clock by bits 1 (PLLMUL) and 4 (PLLDIV0) in the PLL control register (PLLCTL). (3) Subsystem clock XT1 clock oscillator This circuit oscillates a clock of fXT = 32.768 kHz by connecting a 32.768 kHz resonator to XT1 and XT2. Oscillation can be stopped by setting the XTSTOP bit (bit 6 of the clock operation status control register (CSC)). An external subsystem clock (fEXS = 32.768 kHz) can also be supplied from the EXCLKS/XT2/P124 pin. An external subsystem clock input can be disabled by setting the XTSTOP bit (bit 6 of the clock operation status control register (CSC)). As the subsystem clock, an XT1 clock or external subsystem clock can be selected by setting of the OSCSELS bit (bit 4 of the clock operation mode control register (CMC)), the EXCLKS bit (bit 5 of the clock operation mode control register (CMC)), and the SELLOSC bit (bit 0 of the clock select register (CKSEL)). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 363 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR (4) Low-speed on-chip oscillator (Low-speed OCO) This circuit oscillates a clock of fIL = 15 kHz (TYP.). The low-speed on-chip oscillator clock can be used as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock. Only the following hardware circuits operate by the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock. Clock monitor (fIL) Timer RJ (fIL and fSL) Timer RD (fSL) Clock output/buzzer output control circuit (fSL) This circuit operates when at least bit 4 in the operation speed mode control register (OSMC) or bit 6 in the clock select register (SELLOSC) is 1. When stopping the oscillation of the low-speed on-chip oscillator, set the WUTMMCK0 and SELLOSC bits to 0. As the main/PLL select clock (fMP), a main system clock (fMAIN) or PLL clock (fPLL) can be selected by setting of the SELPLL bit (bit 2 of the PLL control register (PLLCTL)). As the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock (fSL), a subsystem clock (fSUB) or low-speed on-chip oscillator (fIL) can be selected by setting of the CKSEL bit (bit 0 of the clock select register (CKSEL)). Remark fX: X1 clock oscillation frequency fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency (64 MHz max.) Note fEX: External main system clock frequency fXT: XT1 clock oscillation frequency fEXS: External subsystem clock frequency fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency fSL: Subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock frequency fPLL: PLL clock frequency (64 MHz max.) Notes 2 and 3 fMP: Notes 1. Main/PLL select clock frequency (64 MHz max.) fIH is controlled by hardware so that the MDIV register is set to 01H (fMP = two frequency division) when fIH is set to 64 MHz or 48 MHz after a reset release. When supplying 64 MHz or 48 MHz to timer RD, set fCLK to fIH. 2. When setting fPLL to 64 MHz or 48 MHz, the division of fMP should be set within the range of 1 MHz to 32 MHz (or 1 MHz to 24 MHz for grade-K and grade-Y products) by the MDIV2 to MDIV0 bits in the fMP clock division register (MDIV). When supplying 64 MHz or 48 MHz to timer RD, set fCLK to fPLL. 3. When supplying 64 MHz or 48 MHz to timer RD, set the MDIV register to 01H (fMP/2 is selected). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 364 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.2 Configuration of Clock Generator The clock generator includes the following hardware. Table 5-1. Configuration of Clock Generator Item Control registers Configuration Clock operation mode control register (CMC) System clock control register (CKC) Clock operation status control register (CSC) Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) Peripheral enable registers 0, 1, 2 (PER0, PER1, PER2) Operation speed mode control register (OSMC) High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV) High-speed on-chip oscillator trimming register (HIOTRM) CAN clock select register (CANCKSEL) LIN clock select register (LINCKSEL) Clock select register (CKSEL) PLL control register (PLLCTL) PLL status register (PLLSTS) fMP clock division register (MDIV) Oscillators R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 X1 oscillator XT1 oscillator High-speed on-chip oscillator clock Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock 365 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 External input clock Crystal/ceramic oscillation SELLOSC (64 MHz (TYP.)) (48 MHz (TYP.)) 3 External input clock fEXS Clock operation mode control register (CMC) X1 oscillation stabilization time counter 3 OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 Controller High-speed on-chip oscillator trimming register (HIOTRM) HIOTRM5 HIOTRM4 HIOTRM3 HIOTRM2 HIOTRM1 HIOTRM0 6 Controller Selector Real-time clock CAN module LIN module 0 LIN module 1 Real-time clock fMAIN fMP fMP /2 fMP /4 fMP /8 f SL Internal bus IICA0 EN SAU0 EN TAU1 EN fCLK TAU0 EN Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) SAU1 EN Real-time clock Clock output/buzzer output, Timer RJ, timer RD ADC EN Operation speed mode control register (OSMC) CPU clock and peripheral hardware clock source selection MDIV2 MDIV1 MDIV0 DTC EN TRJ0 EN Peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) DAC CMPEN TRD0 EN EN Controller CPU f CLK f MP f SL Controller Clock select register (CKSEL) f MX CAN module CAN clock select register (CANCKSEL) CAN0MCKE Controller PLLDIV1 SELPLLS User option byte (000C2H/020C2H) FRQSEL4 LIN module 1 Timer RD TRD_CKSEL Controller Controller LIN0 MCK f CLK f MX LIN module 0 LIN clock select register (LINCKSEL) LIN1 LIN0 LIN1 MCKE MCKE MCK Peripheral enable register 2 (PER2) LIN1EN LIN0EN CAN0 EN f CLK f MX Watchdog timer User option byte (000C0H/020C0H) WDTON User option byte (000C0H/020C0H) WDSTBYON HALT/STOP mode signal Timer array unit 0 Timer array unit 1 Serial array unit 0 Serial array unit 1 Serial interface IICA0 A/D converter Timer RJ DTC Comparator D/A converter LIN module 0 LIN module 1 CAN module On-chip oscillator f WDT for WDT only TimerRD LIN module 0, LIN module 1 Normal operation mode HALT mode STOP mode Standby controller fMP clock division register (MDIV) Clock monitor, channel 1 of timer array unit Timer RJ Timer RD RTC EN fMP fMP /16 fMP /32 fMP /64 Clock output/ buzzer output CSS MCS MCM0 System clock control register (CMC) Internal bus CLS PLL (see figure 5-2) RTCLPC WUTMMCK0 Main system clock source selector Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST 9 10 11 13 15 17 18 8 Clock operation status control register (CSC) XTSTOP HIOSTOP CLS (15 kHz (TYP.)) fIL STOP mode signal Low-speed on-chip oscillator MSTOP HOCODIV2 HOCODIV1 HOCODIV0 fSUB fIH High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV) AMPHS1 AMPHS0 EXCLKS OSCSELS XT2/EXCLKS /P124 XT1/P123 Subsystem clock oscillator Crystal fXT oscillation (1 MHz (TYP.)) (8 MHz (TYP.)) (4 MHz (TYP.)) (16 MHz (TYP.)) (12 MHz (TYP.)) (32 MHz (TYP.)) (24 MHz (TYP.)) fMX (Remark is listed on the next page.) Clock select register (CKSEL) fX fEX High-speed on-chip oscillator User option byte (000C2H/020C2H) FRQSEL0 to FRQSEL4 X2/EXCLK /P122 X1/P121 High-speed system clock oscillator AMPH EXCLK OSCSEL Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) Prescaler Clock operation status control register (CSC) Selector Clock operation mode control register (CMC) Figure 5-1. Block Diagram of Clock Generator RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 366 RL78/F13, F14 Remark Note CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR fX: X1 clock oscillation frequency fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency (64 MHz max.) Note fEX: External main system clock frequency fMX: High-speed system clock frequency fMAIN: Main system clock frequency fXT: XT1 clock oscillation frequency fEXS: External subsystem clock frequency fSUB: Subsystem clock frequency fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency fSL: Subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock frequency fMP: Main system/PLL select clock frequency fPLL: PLL clock frequency fIH is controlled by hardware so that the MDIV register is set to 01H (fMP = two frequency division) when fIH is set to 64 MHz or 48 MHz. When supplying 64 MHz or 48 MHz to timer RD, set fCLK to fIH. Figure 5-2. Block Diagram of PLL Circuit PLL status register (PLLSTS) PLL control register (PLLCTL) PLL control register (PLLCTL) SELPLLS LCKSEL0 LCKSEL1 SELPLL PLL control register (PLLCTL) PLLON fPLLI fMAIN PLL control register (PLLCTL) PLLDIV0 PLLMUL PLL circuit (x12, x16) Clock output/buzzer output fPLLO Divider (x1/2, x1/4) PLL status register (PLLSTS) Counter fIL fPLL fMP Prescaler Selector LOCK Clock monitor control circuit CSS CLKMB System clock control register (CKC) User option byte (000C1H/020C1H) (Remark is listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 367 RL78/F13, F14 Remark CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR fMAIN: Main system clock fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock fPLLI: PLL input clock fPLLO: PLL output clock fMP: Main system/PLL select clock fPLL: PLL clock R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 368 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3 Registers Controlling Clock Generator The following registers are used to control the clock generator. Clock operation mode control register (CMC) System clock control register (CKC) Clock operation status control register (CSC) Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) Peripheral enable registers 0, 1, 2 (PER0, PER1, PER2) Operation speed mode control register (OSMC) High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV) High-speed on-chip oscillator trimming register (HIOTRM) CAN clock select register (CANCKSEL) LIN clock select register (LINCKSEL) Clock select register (CKSEL) PLL control register (PLLCTL) PLL status register (PLLSTS) fMP clock division register (MDIV) 5.3.1 Clock Operation Mode Control Register (CMC) This register is used to set the operation mode of the X1/P121, X2/EXCLK/P122, XT1/P123, and XT2/EXCLKS/P124 pins, and to select a gain of the oscillator. The CMC register can be written only once by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction after reset release. This register can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the CMC register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 369 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-3. Format of Clock Operation Mode Control Register (CMC) Address: FFFA0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMC EXCLK OSCSEL EXCLKS OSCSELS 0 AMPHS1 AMPHS0 AMPH Note 1 EXCLK OSCSEL 0 0 Input port mode Input port 0 1 X1 oscillation mode Crystal/ceramic resonator connection 1 0 Input port mode Input port 1 1 External clock input mode Input port CKSEL register SELLOSC High-speed system clock pin operation mode CMC register EXCLKS Note 1, 2 X1/P121 pin Subsystem clock pin operation mode X2/EXCLK/P122 pin External clock input XT1/P123 pin XT2/EXCLKS/ P124 pin OSCSELS Note 1 x 0 0 Input port mode Input port 0 0 1 XT1 oscillation mode Crystal/ceramic resonator connection 1 0 1 Input port mode (low-speed onchip oscillator operation mode) Input port x 1 0 Input port mode Input port 0 1 1 External clock input mode Input port 1 1 1 Input port mode (low-speed onchip oscillator operation mode) Input port AMPHS1 AMPHS0 0 0 Low power consumption oscillation (default) Oscillation margin: Medium 0 1 Normal oscillation Oscillation margin: high 1 0 Ultra-low power consumption oscillation Oscillation margin: Low 1 1 Setting prohibited XT1 oscillator oscillation mode selection Note 3 AMPH Control of X1 clock oscillation frequency 0 1 MHz fX 10 MHz 1 1 MHz fX 20 MHz Notes External clock input 1. The 20-, 30-, and 32-pin products do not have a subsystem clock (fSUB). If the low-speed onchip oscillator is selected as the source of the clock signal for the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) or for a peripheral function, set the SELLOSC bit to 1. 2. When the SELLOSC bit is set to 1, the subsystem clock (fSUB) cannot be supplied to the input clock (fRTC) of the real-time clock. 3. As the XT oscillator becomes oscillation mode with lower power consumption, then its oscillation margin becomes smaller. Cautions 1. The CMC register can be written only once after reset release, by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When the CMC register is used at the default value (00H), be sure to set 00H to this register after reset release in order to prevent malfunctioning during a program loop. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 370 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 2. After reset release, set the CMC register before X1 or XT1 oscillation is started as set by the clock operation status control register (CSC). 3. Be sure to set the AMPH bit to 1 if the X1 clock oscillation frequency exceeds 10 MHz. When the X1 clock oscillation frequency is in the range from 1 to 10 MHz, setting the AMPH bit to 1 improves the oscillation margin. 4. The XT1 oscillator is a circuit with low amplification in order to achieve low-power consumption. Note the following points when designing the circuit. Pins and circuit boards include parasitic capacitance. Therefore, perform oscillation evaluation using a circuit board to be actually used and confirm that there are no problems. Make the wiring between the XT1 and XT2 pins and the resonators as short as possible, and minimize the parasitic capacitance and wiring resistance. Note this particularly when the ultra-low power consumption oscillation (AMPHS1, AMPHS0 = 1, 0) is selected. Configure the circuit of the circuit board, using material with little parasitic capacitance and wiring resistance. Place a ground pattern that has the same potential as VSS as much as possible near the XT1 oscillator. Be sure that the signal lines between the XT1 and XT2 pins, and the resonators do not cross with the other signal lines. Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. The impedance between the XT1 and XT2 pins may drop and oscillation may be disturbed due to moisture absorption of the circuit board in a high-humidity environment or dew condensation on the board. When using the circuit board in such an environment, take measures to damp-proof the circuit board, such as by coating. When coating the circuit board, use material that does not cause capacitance or leakage between the XT1 and XT2 pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 371 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.2 System Clock Control Register (CKC) This register is used to select a CPU/peripheral hardware clock and a main system clock. Set the CKC register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the CKC register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Figure 5-4. Format of System Clock Control Register (CKC) Address: FFFA4H After reset: 00H R/W Note 1 Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 2 1 0 CKC CLS CSS MCS MCM0 0 0 0 0 CLS Status of CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) 0 Main system/PLL select clock (fMP) 1 Subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock (fSL) CSS Selection of CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) Notes 2, 3 0 Main system/PLL select clock (fMP) 1 Subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock (fSL) MCS Status of main system clock (fMAIN) 0 High-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH) 1 High-speed system clock (fMX) MCM0 Main system clock (fMAIN) operation control Notes 2, 4, 5 0 Selects the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH) as the main system clock (fMAIN) 1 Selects the high-speed system clock (fMX) as the main system clock (fMAIN) Notes 1. Bits 7 and 5 are read-only. 2. Changing the value of the MCM0 bit is prohibited while the CSS bit is set to 1. 3. When setting the CSS bit in the 20-, 30-, or 32-pin products, set bit 0 (SELLOSC) in the clock select register (CKSEL) to 1 (Selects fIL). 4. Changing the value of the MCM0 bit is prohibited while the PLLON bit is set to 1. 5. To change the MCM0 bit from 0 to 1 while FRQSEL4 = 1 in the corresponding user option byte (at 000C2H or 020C2H), stop counting by the timer RD (setting the TSTART0 and TSTART1 bits in the TRDSTR register to 0) and disable clock or buzzer output (by setting the PCLOE0 bit in the CKS0 register to 0) before changing the MCM0 bit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 372 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Cautions 1. Be sure to set bits 0 to 3 of the CKC register to 0. 2. The clock set by the CSS bit is supplied to the CPU and peripheral hardware. If the CPU clock is changed, therefore, the clock supplied to peripheral hardware (except the real-time clock, clock output/buzzer output, and watchdog timer) is also changed at the same time. Consequently, stop each peripheral function when changing the CPU/peripheral hardware clock. 3. If the subsystem clock or low-speed on-chip oscillator clock is used as the peripheral hardware clock, the operations of the A/D converter and IICA are not guaranteed. For the operating characteristics of the peripheral hardware, refer to the chapters describing the various peripheral hardware as well as CHAPTER 34 to CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS. 4. When selecting fIH as the count source for timer RD, set fCLK to fMP before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). When changing fCLK to a clock other than fMP, clear bit 4 (TRD0EN) in peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) before changing. Remark For setting of the PLL clock, refer to 5.6.4 Examples of Setting PLL Circuit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 373 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.3 Clock Operation Status Control Register (CSC) This register is used to control the operations of the high-speed system clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and subsystem clock (except the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock). Set the CSC register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the CSC register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Reset signal generation sets this register to C0H. Figure 5-5. Format of Clock Operation Status Control Register (CSC) Address: FFFA1H After reset: C0H R/W Symbol <7> <6> 5 4 3 2 1 <0> CSC MSTOP XTSTOP 0 0 0 0 0 HIOSTOP MSTOP High-speed system clock operation control X1 oscillation mode 0 X1 oscillator operating External clock from EXCLK pin is valid 1 X1 oscillator stopped External clock from EXCLK pin is invalid XTSTOP Input port mode Input port Subsystem clock operation control Note XT1 oscillation mode External clock input mode 0 XT1 oscillator operating External clock from EXCLKS pin is valid 1 XT1 oscillator stopped External clock from EXCLKS pin is invalid HIOSTOP Note External clock input mode Input port mode Input port High-speed on-chip oscillator clock operation control 0 High-speed on-chip oscillator operating 1 High-speed on-chip oscillator stopped When setting the CSC register in the 20-, 30-, or 32-pin products, use the register with the XTSTOP bit set to 1 without changing from the default. Cautions 1. After reset release, set the clock operation mode control register (CMC) before setting the CSC register. 2. Set the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) before setting the MSTOP bit to 0 after releasing reset. Note that if the OSTS register is being used with its default settings, the OSTS register is not required to be set here. 3. To start X1 oscillation as set by the MSTOP bit, check the oscillation stabilization time of the X1 clock by using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). 4. When starting XT1 oscillation by setting the XTSTOP bit, wait for oscillation of the subsystem clock to stabilize by setting a wait time using software. 5. Do not stop the clock selected for the CPU peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) with the OSC register. 6. The setting of the flags of the register to stop clock oscillation (invalidate the external clock input) and the condition before clock oscillation is to be stopped are as Table 5-2. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 374 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Table 5-2. Condition Before Stopping Clock Oscillation and Flag Setting Clock X1 clock External main system clock Condition Before Stopping Clock (Invalidating External Clock Input) CPU and peripheral hardware clocks operate with a clock other than the high-speed system clock or PLL clock (source clock = high-speed system clock). Setting of CSC Register Flags MSTOP = 1 (CLS (bit 7 of the CKC register) = 0 and MCS (bit 5 of the CKC register) = 0, or CLS = 1) XT1 clock External subsystem clock High-speed on-chip oscillator clock CPU and peripheral hardware clocks operate with a clock other than the subsystem clock. XTSTOP = 1 (CLS = 0, or CLS = 1 and SELLOSC (bit 0 of the CKSEL register) = 1) CPU and peripheral hardware clocks operate with a clock other than the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock or PLL clock (source clock = high-speed on-chip oscillator clock). HIOSTOP = 1 (CLS = 0 and MCS = 1, or CLS = 1) 5.3.4 Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC) This is the register that indicates the count status of the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time counter. The X1 clock oscillation stabilization time can be checked in the following case, If the X1 clock starts oscillation while the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock or subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is being used as the CPU clock. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is being used as the CPU clock with the X1 clock oscillating. The OSTC register can be read by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. The generation of reset signal, the STOP instruction and MSTOP (bit 7 of clock operation status control register (CSC)) = 1 clear the OSTC register to 00H. Remark The oscillation stabilization time counter starts counting in the following cases. When oscillation of the X1 clock starts (when EXCLK of the CMC register = 0 and OSCSEL of the CMC register = 1, MSTOP of the CSC register = 0) When the STOP mode is released R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 375 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-6. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC) Address: FFFA2H Symbol OSTC 7 After reset: 00H 6 5 R 4 3 2 1 0 MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST 8 9 10 11 13 15 17 18 MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST 8 9 10 11 13 15 17 18 Oscillation stabilization time status fX = 10 MHz fX = 20 MHz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 /fX max. 25.6 s max. 12.8 s max. 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 28/fX min. 8 9 25.6 s min. 12.8 s min. 51.2 s min. 25.6 s min. 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 /fX min. 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 210/fX min. 102.4 s min. 51.2 s min. 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 211/fX min. 204.8 s min. 102.4 s min. 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 213/fX min. 819.2 s min. 409.6 s min. 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 215/fX min. 3.27 ms min. 1.63 ms min. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 217/fX min. 13.10 ms min. 6.55 ms min. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 218/fX min. 26.21 ms min. 13.10 ms min. Cautions 1. After the above time has elapsed, the bits are set to 1 in order from the MOST8 bit and remain 1. 2. The oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation stabilization time set by the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS). In the following cases, set the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTS register to the value equal to or greater than the count value which is to be checked by the OSTC register. If the X1 clock starts oscillation while the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock or subsystem clock is being used as the CPU clock. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is being used as the CPU clock with the X1 clock oscillating. (Note, therefore, that only the status up to the oscillation stabilization time set by the OSTS register is set to the OSTC register after the STOP mode is released.) 3. The X1 clock oscillation stabilization wait time does not include the time until clock oscillation starts ("a" below). STOP mode release X1 pin voltage waveform a R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 376 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.5 Oscillation Stabilization Time Select Register (OSTS) This register is used to select the X1 clock oscillation stabilization wait time. When the X1 clock is oscillated, the operation automatically waits for the time set using the OSTS register. When oscillation of the X1 clock starts, confirm with the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) that the desired oscillation stabilization time has elapsed. The oscillation stabilization time can be checked up to the time set using the OSTC register. Set the OSTS register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the OSTS register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Reset signal generation sets the OSTS register to 07H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 377 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-7. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Select Register (OSTS) Address: FFFA3H After reset: 07H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OSTS 0 0 0 0 0 OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 0 0 0 28/fX 0 0 1 29/fX 51.2 s 25.6 s 0 1 0 210/fX 102.4 s 51.2 s 0 1 1 211/fX 204.8 s 102.4 s Oscillation stabilization time selection fX = 10 MHz 25.6 s fX = 20 MHz 12.8 s 1 0 0 2 /fX 819.2 s 409.6 s 1 0 1 215/fX 3.27 ms 1.63 ms 1 1 0 217/fX 13.10 ms 6.55 ms 26.21 ms 13.10 ms 1 1 1 13 18 2 /fX Cautions 1. To set the STOP mode when the X1 clock is used as the CPU clock, set the OSTS register before executing the STOP instruction. 2. Change the setting of the OSTS register before setting the MSTOP bit of the clock operation status control register (CSC) to 0. 3. Do not change the value of the OSTS register during the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time. 4. The oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation stabilization time set by the OSTS register. In the following cases, set the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTS register to the value equal to or greater than the count value which is to be checked by the OSTC register after the oscillation starts. If the X1 clock starts oscillation while the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock or subsystem clock is being used as the CPU clock. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is being used as the CPU clock with the X1 clock oscillating. (Note, therefore, that only the status up to the oscillation stabilization time set by the OSTS register is set to the OSTC register after the STOP mode is released.) 5. The X1 clock oscillation stabilization wait time does not include the time until clock oscillation starts ("a" below). STOP mode release X1 pin voltage waveform a R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 378 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.6 Peripheral Enable Registers 0, 1, 2 (PER0, PER1, PER2) These registers are used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to the hardware that is not used is also stopped so as to decrease the power consumption and noise. To use the peripheral functions below, which are controlled by these registers, set (1) the bit corresponding to each function before specifying the initial settings of the peripheral functions. Real-time clock A/D converter Serial interface IICA0 Serial array unit 1 Serial array unit 0 Timer array unit 1 Timer array unit 0 D/A converter Comparator Timer RD DTC Timer RJ LIN0 LIN1 CAN The PER0, PER1, and PER2 registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the PER0, PER1, and PER2 registers is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H. Figure 5-8. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 0 (PER0) (1/3) Address: F00F0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PER0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN IICA0EN SAU1EN SAU0EN TAU1EN TAU0EN Note 1 RTCEN Control of supplying input clock Note 2 for real-time clock (RTC) Note 1 Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by the real-time clock (RTC) cannot be written. The real-time clock (RTC) is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by the real-time clock (RTC) can be read and written. Notes 1. The RTCCL register should be set before setting the RTCEN bit to 1. 2. The input clock that can be controlled by the RTCEN bit is used when the register that is used by the real-time clock (RTC) is accessed from the CPU. The RTCEN bit cannot control supply of the operating clock to the RTC. Caution Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. Bits 1, 3, 4, and 6 in the 20-, 30-, 32-, 48-, and 64-pin products of the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) whose code flash memory is in the range from 16 Kbytes and 64 Kbytes Bits 4 and 6 in the 30-pin products of the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and 30pin products of the RL78/F14 Bit 6 in the products other than above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 379 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-9. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 0 (PER0) (2/3) Address: F00F0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PER0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN IICA0EN SAU1EN SAU0EN TAU1EN TAU0EN Notes 1, 2 Note 1 ADCEN Control of A/D converter input clock supply Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by the A/D converter cannot be written. The A/D converter is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by the A/D converter can be read and written. IICA0EN Control of serial interface IICA0 input clock supply Notes 1, 2 Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by the serial interface IICA0 cannot be written. The serial interface IICA0 is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by the serial interface IICA0 can be read and written. SAU1EN Control of serial array unit 1 input clock supply Note 1 Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by the serial array unit 1 cannot be written. The serial array unit 1 is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by the serial array unit 1 can be read and written. SAU0EN Control of serial array unit 0 input clock supply Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by the serial array unit 0 cannot be written. The serial array unit 0 is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by the serial array unit 0 can be read and written. Notes 1. Not available in the 20-, 30-, 32-, 48-, and 64-pin products of the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) whose code flash memory is in the range from 16 Kbytes and 64 Kbytes. 2. Not available in the 30-pin products of the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and the 30-pin products of the RL78/F14. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 380 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-10. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 0 (PER0) (3/3) Address: F00F0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PER0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN IICA0EN SAU1EN SAU0EN TAU1EN TAU0EN Note TAU1EN Note Control of timer array unit 1 input clock supply Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by timer array unit 1 cannot be written. Timer array unit 1 is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by timer array unit 1 can be read and written. TAU0EN Control of timer array unit 0 input clock supply Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by timer array unit 0 cannot be written. Timer array unit 0 is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by timer array unit 0 can be read and written. Note Not available in the 20-, 30-, 32-, 48-, and 64-pin products of the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) whose code flash memory is in the range from 16 Kbytes and 64 Kbytes. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 381 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-11. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 1 (PER1) (1/2) Address: F02C0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> 2 1 <0> PER1 DACEN 0 CMPEN TRD0EN DTCEN 0 0 TRJ0EN Note 1 Note 2 Note 1 DACEN Control of D/A converter input clock supply Note 1 Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by the D/A converter cannot be written. The D/A converter is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by the D/A converter can be read and written. CMPEN Control of comparator input clock supply Note 1 Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by comparator cannot be written. Comparator is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by comparator can be read and written. TRD0EN Control of timer RD input clock supply Note 2 Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by timer RD cannot be written. Timer RD is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by timer RD can be read and written. Notes 1. Only in the RL78/F14. 2. When FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H), set fCLK to fIH before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). When changing fCLK to a clock other than fIH, clear bit 4 (TRD0EN) of peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) before changing. Caution Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. Bits 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F13 products Bits 1, 2, and 6 in the RL78/F14 products R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 382 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-12. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 1 (PER1) (2/2) Address: F02C0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> 6 <5> <4> <3> 2 1 <0> PER1 DACEN 0 CMPEN TRD0EN DTCEN 0 0 TRJ0EN DTCEN 0 Control of DTC input clock supply Stops input clock supply. DTC cannot run. 1 Enables input clock supply. DTC can run. TRJ0EN 0 Control of timer RJ0 input clock supply Stops input clock supply. SFR used by timer RJ0 cannot be written. Timer RJ0 is in the reset status. 1 Enables input clock supply. SFR used by timer RJ0 can be read and written. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 383 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-13. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 2 (PER2) Address: F02C1H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0> PER2 0 0 0 0 LIN1EN LIN0EN 0 CAN0EN Note 1 LIN1EN Note 2 Control of LIN1 input clock supply Note 1 0 Stops input clock supply. Disables writing to the SFR used by LIN1. LIN1 is in the reset state. 1 Enables input clock supply. Enables reading from and writing to the SFR used by LIN1. LIN0EN Control of LIN0 input clock supply 0 Stops input clock supply. Disables writing to the SFR used by LIN0. LIN0 is in the reset state. 1 Enables input clock supply. Enables reading from and writing to the SFR used by LIN0. CAN0EN Control of CAN input clock supply/control of CANi wakeup interrupt Note 2 0 Stops input clock supply. Disables writing to the SFR used by CAN. CAN is in the reset state. Disables CANi wakeup interrupt. 1 Enables input clock supply. Enables reading from and writing to the SFR used by CAN. Enables CANi wakeup interrupt. Notes 1. Only in the RL78/F14 products with at least 128 Kbytes of code flash memory and the 100pin products of the RL78/F14. 2. Only in the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and RL78/F14 products. Caution Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. Bits 0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products Bits 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products and the RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and up to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Bits 1, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F14 products with at least 128 Kbytes of code flash memory and the 100-pin products of the RL78/F14 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 384 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.7 Operation Speed Mode Control Register (OSMC) This register is used to reduce power consumption by stopping unnecessary clock functions. If the RTCLPC bit is set to 1, power consumption can be reduced, because clock supply to the peripheral functions is stopped in STOP mode or HALT mode while subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is selected as CPU clock. Set the OSMC register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the OSMC register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 5-14. Format of Operation Speed Mode Control Register (OSMC) Address: F00F3H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OSMC RTCLPC 0 0 WUTMMCK0 0 0 0 0 Note RTCLPC Setting in STOP mode or HALT mode while subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is selected as CPU clock Enables supply of subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock to peripheral 0 functions (See Table 23-1 for peripheral functions whose operations are enabled.) 1 Stops supply of subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock to peripheral functions WUTMMCK0 Low-speed on-chip oscillator operation control Note Note 0 Low-speed on-chip oscillator stopped 1 Low-speed on-chip oscillator operating To stop the low-speed on-chip oscillator, set bit 4 (WUTMMCK0) to 0 and bit 1 (SELLOSC) of the clock select register (CKSEL) to 0. Caution The STOP mode current or HALT mode current when the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is used can be reduced by setting the RTCLPC bit to 1. However, no clock can be supplied to the peripheral functions during HALT mode while subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is selected as CPU clock. Set bit 7 (RTCEN) of peripheral enable registers 0 (PER0) to 1 and bits 0 to 6 of the PER0 register to 0 before setting HALT mode while the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator clock is selected as CPU clock. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 385 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.8 High-Speed On-Chip Oscillator Frequency Select Register (HOCODIV) The frequency of the high-speed on-chip oscillator which is set by a user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) can be changed by using high-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV). However, the selectable frequency depends on the FRQSEL4 and FRQSEL3 bits of the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H). Set the HOCODIV register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to default value (the value set with the FRQSEL2 to FRQSEL0 bits of the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H)). Figure 5-15. Format of High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV) Address: F00A8H After reset: value set with the FRQSEL2 to FRQSEL0 bits of the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 HOCODIV 0 0 0 0 0 HOCODIV2 HOCODIV1 HOCODIV0 2 1 0 HOCODIV2 HOCODIV1 HOCODIV0 Selection of high-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency 24-MHz base 32-MHz base 48-MHz base FRQSEL4 = 0 FRQSEL3 = 0 64-MHz base FRQSEL4 = 1 FRQSEL3 = 1 FRQSEL3 = 0 FRQSEL3 = 1 fIH = 64 MHz 0 0 0 fIH = 24 MHz fIH = 32 MHz fIH = 48 MHz 0 0 1 fIH = 12 MHz fIH = 16 MHz fIH = 24 MHz fIH = 32 MHz 0 1 0 fIH = 6 MHz fIH = 8 MHz fIH = 12 MHz fIH = 16 MHz fIH = 3 MHz fIH = 4 MHz fIH = 6 MHz fIH = 8 MHz Setting fIH = 2 MHz Setting fIH = 4 MHz 0 1 1 1 0 0 prohibited 1 0 1 R/W Setting prohibited fIH = 1 MHz prohibited Other than above Setting fIH = 2 MHz prohibited Setting prohibited Cautions 1. When setting of high-speed on-chip oscillator clock as system clock, the device operates at the old frequency for the duration of 3 clocks after the frequency value has been changed by using the HOCODIV register. 2. To change the frequency of the high-speed on-chip oscillator when X1 oscillation, external oscillation input, subsystem clock, or low-speed on-chip oscillator clock is set for the system clock, stop the high-speed on-chip oscillator by setting bit 0 (HIOSTOP) of the CSC register to 1 and then change the frequency. 3. To change the frequency of the high-speed on-chip oscillator when X1 oscillation or external oscillation input is set for the clock source of the PLL clock, and PLL clock is set for the system clock, stop the high-speed on-chip oscillator by setting bit 0 (HIOSTOP) of the CSC register to 1 and then change the frequency. 4. Do not change the setting of the HOCODIV register when the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is used as the clock source of the PLL clock and the PLL clock is used as the system clock. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 386 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.9 High-Speed On-Chip Oscillator Trimming Register (HIOTRM) This register is used to adjust the accuracy of the high-speed on-chip oscillator. With self-measurement of the high-speed on-chip oscillator frequency via a timer using high-accuracy external clock input, and so on, the accuracy can be adjusted. Set the HIOTRM register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Caution The frequency will vary if the temperature and VDD pin voltage change after accuracy adjustment. When the temperature and VDD voltage change, accuracy adjustment must be executed regularly or before the frequency accuracy is required. Figure 5-16. Format of High-Speed On-Chip Oscillator Trimming Register (HIOTRM) Address: F00A0H After reset: Note R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HIOTRM 0 0 HIOTRM5 HIOTRM4 HIOTRM3 HIOTRM2 HIOTRM1 HIOTRM0 HIOTRM5 HIOTRM4 HIOTRM3 HIOTRM2 HIOTRM1 HIOTRM0 High-speed on-chip Minimum speed oscillator 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum speed Note The reset value differs for each chip. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 387 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.10 CAN Clock Select Register (CANCKSEL) This register is used to control the X1 clock (fx) supplied to the CAN. Set the CANCKSEL register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the CANCKSEL register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Figure 5-17. Format of CAN Clock Select Register (CANCKSEL) Address: F02C2H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0> CANCKSEL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CAN0MCKE Note CAN0MCKE Control of supplying or stopping CAN X1 clock (fx) Note Note 0 Stops CAN X1 clock (fx) supply. 1 Enables CAN X1 clock (fx) supply. Only in the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and RL78/F14 products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 388 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.11 LIN Clock Select Register (LINCKSEL) This register is used to control the communication clock source supplied to the LIN. Set the LINCKSEL register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the LINCKSEL register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Figure 5-18. Format of LIN Clock Select Register (LINCKSEL) Address: F02C3H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 <5> <4> 3 2 <1> <0> LINCKSEL 0 0 LIN1MCKE LIN0MCKE 0 0 LIN1MCK LIN0MCK Note LIN1MCKE Note Control of supplying or stopping LIN1 communication clock source Note 0 Stops LIN communication clock source supply. 1 Enables LIN communication clock source supply. LIN0MCKE Control of supplying or stopping LIN0 communication clock source 0 Stops LIN communication clock source supply. 1 Enables LIN communication clock source supply. LIN1MCK Control of selecting LIN1 communication clock source Note 0 Selects the fCLK clock. 1 Selects the fMX clock. LIN0MCK Note Control of selecting LIN0 communication clock source 0 Selects the fCLK clock. 1 Selects the fMX clock. Only in the RL78/F14 products with 48 pins and at least 128 Kbytes of code flash memory and the 100-pin products of the RL78/F14. Cautions 1. Select the LINn operating clock with the LINnMCK bit before setting the LINnMCKE (n = 0, 1) bit to 1. 2. When operating LINn in SNOOZE mode, set the LINnMCK bit to 0. 3. In case of LINnMCK is set to 1, do not use the timeout error detection. <R> In that case, set at least 1.2 times the frequency of the LIN communication clock source to the fCLK clock. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 389 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.12 Clock Select Register (CKSEL) This register is used to select the CPU clock (fSUB/fIL) and the clocks for the timer RJ, the timer RD, and clock output/buzzer output. Together with the CMC register, the SELLOSC bit is used to set the operation mode of the subsystem clock. For details, see Figure 5-3 Format of Clock Operation Mode Control Register (CMC). Set the CKSEL register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the CKSEL register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Figure 5-19. Format of Clock Select Register (CKSEL) Address: F02C4H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 CKSEL 0 0 0 0 0 <2> 1 <0> TRD_ 0 SELLOSC CKSEL TRD_CKSEL Note 5, 6, 7 Control of TDR clock selection 0 Selects fCLK or fMP 1 Selects fSL Note 2 SELLOSC Note 1 Control of subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator selection clock (fSL) selection Note 5, 6, 7 0 Selects fSUB Note 3 and stopping the low-speed on-chip oscillator 1 Selects fIL Note 4 and running the low-speed on-chip oscillator Notes 1. When FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and PLLDIV1 = 1 (fPLL 32 MHz) in the PLLCTL register, set the TRD_CKSEL bit to 0. When FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) or PLLDIV1 = 1 (fPLL 32 MHz) in the PLLCTL register, the timer RD clock becomes fMP. 2. When fSL is selected as the timer RD clock, fSL should be selected as the CPU clock (set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 1) before setting the TRD0EN bit in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) to 1. 3. When setting fSUB as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock, first set the SELLOSC bit in the CKSEL register to 0 and then set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 1 . 4. When setting fIL as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock, first set the SELLOSC bit in the CKSEL register to 1 and then set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 1. 5. When the SELLOSC bit is set to 1, the low-speed on-chip oscillator operates. To stop the lowspeed on-chip oscillator, set the WUTMMCK0 bit in the OSMC register to 0 and the SELLOSC bit to 0. 6. The 20-, 30-, and 32-pin products do not have a subsystem clock (fSUB). If the low-speed onchip oscillator is selected as the source of the clock signal for the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) or for a peripheral function, set the SELLOSC bit to 1. 7. When the SELLOSC bit is set to 1, the subsystem clock (fSUB) cannot be supplied to the input clock (fRTC) of the real-time clock. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 390 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.13 PLL Control Register (PLLCTL) This register is used to control the PLL function. The system clock multiplied by 3, 4, 6, or 8 times or not multiplied at all can be selected as the CPU clock and peripheral hardware clock. Set the PLLCTL register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the PLLCTL register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Figure 5-20. Format of PLL Control Register (PLLCTL) Address: F02C5H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 <2> <1> <0> PLLCTL LCKSEL1 LCKSEL0 PLLDIV1 PLLDIV0 0 SELPLL PLLMUL PLLON LCKSEL1 LCKSEL0 Control of setting lock-up wait counter 0 0 Selects 128/fMAIN. 0 1 Selects 256/fMAIN. 1 0 Selects 512/fMAIN. 1 1 Setting prohibited PLLDIV1 Control of PLL output clock selection 0 When fPLL 32 MHz 1 When fPLL 32 MHz PLLDIV0 Control of PLL division selection 0 Divides the clock frequency by 2. 1 Divides the clock frequency by 4. SELPLL Control of clock mode selection 0 Clock through mode (fMAIN) 1 PLL-clock-selected mode (fPLL) PLLMUL Control of PLL multiplication selection 0 Multiplies the clock frequency by 12. 1 Multiplies the clock frequency by 16. PLLON Control of PLL operation 0 Stops PLL operation. 1 Starts PLL operation. After PLL operation starts, the lock-up wait time for frequency stabilization is required. Cautions 1. Writing to the SELPLL bit is disabled when the PLL output is not stable (LOCK bit of the PLLSTS register = 0). 2. When the clock monitor detects that the main system/PLL select clock has been stopped, the SELPLL bit is not automatically cleared. 3. When the clock monitor detects that the main system/PLL select clock has been stopped, the SELPLLS bit in the PLLSTS register is automatically cleared. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 391 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 4. When the clock monitor detects that the main system/PLL select clock has been stopped, even if the SELPLL bit is set to 1 (SELPLL = 1), the clock through mode is entered. 5. The counter for the lock-up wait time should be set to a period of at least 40 s. 6. When PLL operation starts, a wait time for the PLL to be locked is required. 7. When the PLL circuit is used, the PLL input clock and multiplication value can be set only in the combinations shown in the following. When the PLL circuit is not used (PLLON = 0 or SELPLL = 0), an input clock of any frequency between 1 to 32 MHz can be selected. Multiplication Division Outputtable PLLCTL Register Inputtable PLLMUL PLLDIV1 PLLDIV0 Frequency (fMAIN) 0 0 0 4MHz 2% 12 1/2 24MHz 2% 0 0 1 8MHz 2% 12 1/4 24MHz 2% 0 1 0 8MHz 2% 12 1/2 48MHz 2% 1 0 0 4MHz 2% 16 1/2 32MHz 2% 1 0 1 8MHz 2% 16 1/4 32MHz 2% 1 0 8MHz 2% 16 1/2 64MHz 2% 1 Other than above Frequency (fPLL) Setting prohibited 8. When PLLON = 0, simultaneously changing the PLLON bit and SELPLL bit through 8-bit access is disabled. 9. When the PLLON bit is cleared (becomes 0), the SELPLL bit is also automatically cleared (clock through mode). 10. Before entering STOP mode, the PLLON bit should be cleared to 0. 11. Do not change the value of the MCM0 bit of the CKC register while the PLLON bit is set to 1. 12. When FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H), set the PLLDIV1 bit to 0 (fPLL 32 MHz). 13. To change the SELPLL bit from 1 to 0 while PLLDIV1 = 1 (fPLL > 32 MHz), stop counting by the timer RD (setting the TSTART0 and TSTART1 bits in the TRDSTR register to 0) before changing the SELPLL bit. Remark When the PLLON and SELPLL bits are set, the clock selected for fPLL is determined according to the state of the LOCK and SELPLLS bits of the PLLSTS register. fPLL for each state of the PLLON, SELPLL, LOCK, and SELPLL bits is shown in the following. PLLON SELPLL LOCK SELPLLS Selected Clock (fPLL) 0 0 0 0 Main system clock (fMAIN) 1 0 0 0 Main system clock (fMAIN) 1 0 1 0 Main system clock (fMAIN) 1 1 1 0 Main system clock (fMAIN) State in which after the SELPLL bit is set to 1, the clock has not switched to the multiplied clock. 1 1 1 Other than above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1 PLL clock (fPLL) Setting prohibited 392 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.14 PLL Status Register (PLLSTS) This register is used to indicate the operation status of the PLL clock. Read the PLLSTS register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Figure 5-21. Format of PLL Status Register (PLLSTS) Address: F02C6H After reset: 00H R Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> 2 1 0 PLLSTS LOCK 0 0 0 SELPLLS 0 0 0 LOCK 1 PLL locked state 0 Unlocked state Note Locked state This bit is set to 1 when the lock-up wait counter overflows. SELPLLS Note CLock mode state 0 Clock through mode (fMAIN) 1 PLL-clock-selected mode (fPLL) When PLL operation starts, a wait time for the PLL to be locked (LOCK = 1) is required. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 393 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.3.15 fMP Clock Division Register (MDIV) This register is used to divide the frequency of the fMP clock (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, or 1/64). Set the MDIV register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the MDIV register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Figure 5-22. Format of fMP Clock Division Register (MDIV) Address: F02C7H After reset: 00H/01H Note R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MDIV 0 0 0 0 0 MDIV2 MDIV1 MDIV0 MDIV2 MDIV1 MDIV0 0 0 0 Selects fMP. 0 0 1 Selects fMP/2. 0 1 0 Selects fMP/4. 0 1 1 Selects fMP/8. 1 0 0 Selects fMP/16. 1 0 1 Selects fMP/32. 1 1 0 Selects fMP/64. Other than above Note Setting prohibited The value of the FRQSEL4 bit in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) becomes the initial value of the MDIV0 bit in the MDIV register. Cautions 1. When setting the MDIV register, make the frequency after division of fMP be within the range of 1 MHz to 32 MHz (or 1 MHz to 24 MHz for grade-K and grade-Y products). 2. When FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H), set the MDIV2 to MDIV0 bits to 001 (division by 2). Setting these bits to 001 (division by 2) is unnecessary in the clock through mode by PLL oscillation stop detection. 3. When the PLLDIV1 bit in the PLLCTL register is 1 (fPLL 32 MHz), set the MDIV2 to MDIV0 bits to 001 (division by 2). Setting these bits to 001 (division by 2) is unnecessary in the clock through mode by PLL oscillation stop detection. 4. When 64 MHz or 48 MHz is selected as fIH, the initial setting of the MDIV register is "division by 2" so that fCLK is set to 32 MHz or 24 MHz, respectively. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 394 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.4 System Clock Oscillator 5.4.1 X1 Oscillator The X1 oscillator oscillates with a crystal resonator or ceramic resonator (1 to 20 MHz) connected to the X1 and X2 pins. An external clock can also be input. In this case, input the clock signal to the EXCLK pin. To use the X1 oscillator, set bits 7 and 6 (EXCLK, OSCSEL) of the clock operation mode control register (CMC) as follows. Crystal or ceramic oscillation: EXCLK, OSCSEL = 0, 1 External clock input: EXCLK, OSCSEL = 1, 1 When the X1 oscillator is not used, set the input port mode (EXCLK, OSCSEL = 0, 0). When the pins are not even used as input port pins, see 2.3 Processing of Unused Pins. Figure 5-23 shows an example of the external circuit of the X1 oscillator. Figure 5-23. Example of External Circuit of X1 Oscillator (a) Crystal or ceramic oscillation (b) External clock VSS X1 X2 External clock EXCLK Crystal resonator or ceramic resonator Cautions are listed on the next page. 5.4.2 XT1 Oscillator The XT1 oscillator oscillates with a crystal resonator (standard: 32.768 kHz) connected to the XT1 and XT2 pins. To use the XT1 oscillator, set bit 4 (OSCSELS) of the clock operation mode control register (CMC) to 1. An external clock can also be input. In this case, input the clock signal to the EXCLKS pin. To use the XT1 oscillator, set bits 5 and 4 (EXCLKS, OSCSELS) of the clock operation mode control register (CMC) as follows. Crystal oscillation: EXCLKS, OSCSELS = 0, 1 External clock input: EXCLKS, OSCSELS = 1, 1 When the XT1 oscillator is not used, set the input port mode (EXCLKS, OSCSELS = 0, 0). When the pins are not even used as input port pins, see 2.3 Processing of Unused Pins. Figure 5-24 shows an example of the external circuit of the XT1 oscillator. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 395 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-24. Example of External Circuit of XT1 Oscillator (a) Crystal oscillation (b) External clock VSS XT1 32.768 kHz XT2 Caution External clock EXCLKS When using the X1 oscillator and XT1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in Figures 5-23 and 5-24 to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. * Keep the wiring length as short as possible. * Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. * Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. * Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. The XT1 oscillator is a circuit with low amplification in order to achieve low-power consumption. Note the following points when designing the circuit. Pins and circuit boards include parasitic capacitance. Therefore, perform oscillation evaluation using a circuit board to be actually used and confirm that there are no problems. Make the wiring between the XT1 and XT2 pins and the resonators as short as possible, and minimize the parasitic capacitance and wiring resistance. Note this particularly when the ultralow power consumption oscillation (AMPHS1, AMPHS0 = 1, 0) is selected. Configure the circuit of the circuit board, using material with little wiring resistance. Place a ground pattern that has the same potential as VSS as much as possible near the XT1 oscillator. Be sure that the signal lines between the XT1 and XT2 pins, and the resonators do not cross with the other signal lines. Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. The impedance between the XT1 and XT2 pins may drop and oscillation may be disturbed due to moisture absorption of the circuit board in a high-humidity environment or dew condensation on the board. When using the circuit board in such an environment, take measures to damp-proof the circuit board, such as by coating. When coating the circuit board, use material that does not cause capacitance or leakage between the XT1 and XT2 pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 396 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-25 shows examples of incorrect resonator connection. Figure 5-25. Examples of Incorrect Resonator Connection (1/2) (a) Too long wiring (b) Crossed signal line PORT VSS X1 X2 VSS X1 X2 NG NG NG (c) The X1 and X2 signal line wires cross. (d) A power supply/GND pattern exists under the X1 and X2 wires. VSS VSS X1 X1 X2 X2 Note Power supply/GND pattern Note Do not place a power supply/GND pattern under the wiring section (section indicated by a broken line in the figure) of the X1 and X2 pins and the resonators in a multi-layer board or double-sided board. Do not configure a layout that will cause capacitance elements and affect the oscillation characteristics. Remark When using the subsystem clock, replace X1 and X2 with XT1 and XT2, respectively. Also, insert resistors in series on the XT2 side. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 397 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-25. Examples of Incorrect Resonator Connection (2/2) (e) Wiring near high alternating current (f) Current flowing through ground line of oscillator (potential at points A, B, and C fluctuates) VDD Pmn X1 X2 High current VSS VSS A X1 B X2 C High current (g) Signals are fetched VSS Caution X1 X2 When X2 and XT1 are wired in parallel, the crosstalk noise of X2 may increase with XT1, resulting in malfunctioning. Remark When using the subsystem clock, replace X1 and X2 with XT1 and XT2, respectively. Also, insert resistors in series on the XT2 side. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 398 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.4.3 High-Speed On-Chip Oscillator The high-speed on-chip oscillator is incorporated in the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14. The frequency can be selected from among 64, 48, 32, 24, 16, 12, 8, 4, or 1 MHz by using the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H). When 64 MHz or 48 MHz is selected, the frequency obtained by dividing the selected clock by 2 by the fMP clock division register (MDIV) is supplied as the CPU clock after a reset release. Oscillation can be controlled by bit 0 (HIOSTOP) of the clock operation status control register (CSC). The high-speed on-chip oscillator automatically starts oscillating after reset release. 5.4.4 PLL Circuit The PLL circuit is incorporated in the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14. Operation of the PLL circuit can be controlled by bit 0 (PLLON) of the PLL control register (PLLCTL). 5.4.5 Low-Speed On-Chip Oscillator The low-speed on-chip oscillator which can be used for the CPU/peripheral hardware clock is incorporated in the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14. 5.4.6 WDT-Dedicated Low-Speed On-Chip Oscillator The WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator is incorporated in the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14. The WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator clock is used as the watchdog timer clock. This clock cannot be used as the CPU clock. The WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator operates when bit 4 (WDTON) of the user option byte (000C0H/020C0H) is set to 1. The WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator continues oscillating while the watchdog timer is operating. The WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator does not stop while the watchdog timer is operating even though the program goes out of control. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 399 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.5 Clock Generator Operation The clock generator generates the following clocks and controls the operation modes of the CPU, such as standby mode (see Figure 5-1). Main system clock fMAIN High-speed system clock fMX X1 clock fX External main system clock fEX High-speed on-chip oscillator clock fIH Subsystem clock fSUB XT1 clock fXT External subsystem clock fEXS PLL clock fPLL Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock fIL CPU/peripheral hardware clock fCLK Caution The subsystem clock is only in products with at least 48 pins. The CPU starts operation when the high-speed on-chip oscillator starts outputting after a reset release in the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14. When the power supply voltage is turned on, the clock generator operation is shown in Figure 5-26. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 400 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Figure 5-26. Clock Generator Operation When Power Supply Voltage Is Turned On 2.7 V Power supply voltage (VDD) 1.56 V (TYP.) 0V <1> Internal reset signal Note 3 Switched by software Reset processing <5> <3> CPU clock High-speed on-chip oscillator clock <5> High-speed system clock Subsystem clock <2> High-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH) High-speed system clock (fMX) (when X1 oscillation selected) Note 1 <4> X1 clock Note 2 oscillation stabilization time Starting X1 oscillation <4> is specified by software. Subsystem clock (fSUB) (when XT1 oscillation selected) Starting XT1 oscillation is specified by software. <4> PLL clock (fPLL) Starting PLL oscillation is specified by software. PLL clock Note 4 oscillation stabilization time <1> When the power is turned on, an internal reset signal is generated by the power-on-reset (POR) circuit. <2> When the power supply voltage exceeds 1.56 V (TYP.), the reset is released and the high-speed on-chip oscillator automatically starts oscillation. <3> The CPU starts operation on the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock after a reset processing such as waiting for the voltage of the power supply or regulator to stabilize has been performed after reset release. <4> Set the start of oscillation of the X1 clock, XT1 clock, low-speed on-chip oscillator, or PLL clock via software (see 5.6.2 Example of Setting X1 Oscillator, 5.6.3 Example of Setting XT1 Oscillator, 5.6.4 Examples of Setting PLL Circuit, or 5.6.5 Example of Setting Low-Speed On-Chip Oscillator). <5> When switching the CPU clock to the X1 or XT1 clock, wait for the clock oscillation to stabilize, and then set switching via software (see 5.6.2 Example of Setting X1 Oscillator and 5.6.3 Example of Setting XT1 Oscillator). Notes 1. The internal reset processing time includes the oscillation accuracy stabilization time of the high-speed onchip oscillator clock. 2. When releasing a reset, confirm the oscillation stabilization time for the X1 clock using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). 3. For details about the reset processing time, see CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET (POR) CIRCUIT. 4. When the PLL circuit starts operation, time is required so that the PLL circuit becomes locked (LOCK = 1). Caution It is not necessary to wait for the oscillation stabilization time when an external clock input from the EXCLK pin is used. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 401 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.6 Controlling Clock 5.6.1 Example of Setting High-Speed On-Chip Oscillator After a reset release, the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) always starts operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock. The frequency of the high-speed on-chip oscillator can be selected from 64, 48, 32, 24, 16, 12, 8, 4, and 1 MHz by using FRQSEL0 to FRQSEL4 of the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H). In addition, Oscillation can be changed by the internal high-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV). [User option byte setting] Address: 000C2H/020C2H 7 Option byte 1 FRQSEL4 After reset: - (user setting value) 6 1 FRQSEL3 5 4 3 2 1 0 RESOUTB FRQSEL4 FRQSEL3 FRQSEL2 FRQSEL1 FRQSEL0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 FRQSEL2 FRQSEL1 FRQSEL0 Frequency of the high-speed on-chip oscillator fIH 1 1 0 0 0 64 MHz 1 0 0 0 0 48 MHz 0 1 0 0 0 32 MHz 0 0 0 0 0 24 MHz 0 1 0 0 1 16 MHz 0 0 0 0 1 12 MHz 0 1 0 1 0 8 MHz 0 1 0 1 1 4 MHz 0 1 1 0 1 1 MHz Other than above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Setting prohibited 402 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR [High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV) setting] Address: F00A8H HOCODIV 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 HOCODIV2 HOCODIV1 HOCODIV0 HOCODIV2 HOCODIV1 HOCODIV0 Selection of high-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency 24-MHz base 32-MHz base 48-MHz base FRQSEL4 = 0 FRQSEL3 = 0 64-MHz base FRQSEL4 = 1 FRQSEL3 = 1 FRQSEL3 = 0 FRQSEL3 = 1 fIH = 64 MHz 0 0 0 fIH = 24 MHz fIH = 32 MHz fIH = 48 MHz 0 0 1 fIH = 12 MHz fIH = 16 MHz fIH = 24 MHz fIH = 32 MHz 0 1 0 fIH = 6 MHz fIH = 8 MHz fIH = 12 MHz fIH = 16 MHz 0 1 1 fIH = 3 MHz fIH = 4 MHz fIH = 6 MHz fIH = 8 MHz 1 0 0 Setting fIH = 2 MHz Setting fIH = 4 MHz prohibited 1 0 1 Setting prohibited Other than above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 prohibited fIH = 1 MHz Setting fIH = 2 MHz prohibited Setting prohibited 403 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.6.2 Example of Setting X1 Oscillator After a reset release, the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) always starts operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock. To subsequently change the clock to the X1 oscillation clock, set the oscillator and start oscillation by using the clock operation mode control register (CMC) and clock operation status control register (CSC) and wait for oscillation to stabilize by using the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). After the oscillation stabilizes, set the X1 oscillation clock to fCLK by using the system clock control register (CKC). [Register settings] Set the registers in the following order. <1> Set the OSCSEL bit of the CMC register to 1, except for the cases where the frequency is equal or more than 10MHz, in such cases set the AMPH bit to 1, to operate the X1 oscillator. CMC 7 6 5 4 EXCLK OSCSEL EXCLKS OSCSELS 0 1 0 0 3 2 1 0 AMPHS1 AMPHS0 AMPH 0 0 1 0 <2> Using the OSTS register, select the oscillation stabilization time of the X1 oscillator at releasing of the STOP mode. Example: Setting values when a wait of at least 102.4 s is set based on a 10 MHz resonator. OSTS 7 6 5 4 3 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 0 1 0 0 <3> Clear (0) the MSTOP bit of the CSC register to start oscillating the X1 oscillator. CSC 7 6 MSTOP XTSTOP 0 1 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 HIOSTOP 0 <4> Use the OSTC register to wait for oscillation of the X1 oscillator to stabilize. Example: Wait until the bits reach the following values when a wait of at least 102.4 s is set based on a 10 MHz resonator. OSTC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MOST8 MOST9 MOST10 MOST11 MOST13 MOST15 MOST17 MOST18 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 <5> Use the MCM0 bit of the CKC register to specify the X1 oscillation clock as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock. CKC 7 6 5 4 CLS CSS MCS MCM0 0 0 0 1 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 <6> Use the MCS bit of the CKC register to confirm that fMX (X1 oscillation clock) is selected as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (MCS = 1). CKC 7 6 5 4 CLS CSS MCS MCM0 0 0 1 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 404 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.6.3 Example of Setting XT1 Oscillator After a reset release, the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) always starts operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock. To subsequently change the clock to the XT1 oscillation clock, set the oscillator and start oscillation by using the operation speed mode control register (OSMC), clock select register (CKSEL), clock operation mode control register (CMC), and clock operation status control register (CSC), set the XT1 oscillation clock to fCLK by using the system clock control register (CKC). [Register settings] Set the registers in the following order. <1> The RTCLPC bit in the OSMC register can be used to enable or disable supply of the clock to the peripheral functions in STOP mode or HALT mode while sub/low-speed on-chip oscillator selection clock is selected as CPU clock. When RTCLPC = 0, the supply of the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock to peripheral functions is enabled. When RTCLPC = 1, the supply of the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock to peripheral functions except for the real-time clock is stopped. 7 OSMC 6 5 0 0 RTCLPC 0/1 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 WUTMMCK0 0 <2> Select fSUB with the SELLOSC bit of the CKSEL register. Clear the SELLOSC bit to 0 to set fSL to the XT1 oscillation clock. CKSEL 7 6 5 4 3 0 0 0 0 0 TRD_CKSEL 0 SELLOSC 0 0 <3> Select the operation mode of the subsystem clock with the OSCSELS bit of the CMC register. Set the OSCSELS bit to 1 to select the XT1 oscillation mode or external clock input mode. CMC 7 6 5 4 EXCLK OSCSEL EXCLKS OSCSELS 0 0 0 1 3 0 2 1 0 AMPHS1 AMPHS0 AMPH 0/1 0/1 0 AMPHS0 and AMPHS1 bits: These bits are used to specify the oscillation mode of the XT1 oscillator. <4> Clear the XTSTOP bit of the CSC register to 0 to start oscillating the XT1 oscillator. CSC 7 6 MSTOP XTSTOP 0 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 HIOSTOP 0 <5> Use the timer function or another function to wait for oscillation of the subsystem clock to stabilize by using software. <6> Select the CPU/peripheral hardware clock with the CSS bit of the CKC register. Set the CSS bit to 1 to specify CPU clock = fSL (XT1 oscillation clock). CKC 7 6 5 4 CLS CSS MCS MCM0 0 1 0 0 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 <7> Confirm that fSL (XT1 oscillation clock) is selected as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (CLS = 1) with the CLS bit of the CKC register. CKC 7 6 5 4 CLS CSS MCS MCM0 1 1 0 0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 405 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.6.4 Examples of Setting PLL Circuit The following PLL setting procedures are described here. Oscillating the PLL clock and setting it as the CPU clock Stopping the PLL clock [Register settings] Set the registers in the following order. (1) Example of procedure for setting oscillation of PLL clock <1> Select the frequency of the PLL output clock with the PLLDIV1 bit of the PLLCTL register. When PLL clock 32 MHz, clear the PLLDIV1 bit to 0. When PLL clock 32 MHz, set the PLLDIV1 bit to 1. PLLCTL 7 6 5 4 LCKSEL1 LCKSEL0 PLLDIV1 PLLDIV0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 3 0 2 1 0 SELPLL PLLMUL PLLON 0 0/1 0 <2> Set the PLL lock-up wait counter with the LCKSEL1 and LCKSEL0 bits of the PLLCTL register. The counter for the PLL lock-up wait time is set to a period of at least 40 s. When the PLL source clock (fMAIN) is 4 MHz, set the LCKSEL1 and LCKSEL0 bits to 01 or 10. When the PLL source clock (fMAIN) is 8 MHz, set the LCKSEL1 and LCKSEL0 bits to 10. <3> Select the frequency division of the PLL clock with the PLLDIV0 bit of the PLLCTL register. When PLLDIV0 = 0, the PLL division ratio is 2. When PLLDIV0 = 1, the PLL division ratio is 4. <4> Select the multiplication value of the PLL clock with the PLLMUL bit of the PLLCTL register. When PLLMUL = 0, the PLL multiplication value is 12. When PLLMUL = 1, the PLL multiplication value is 16. <5> Wait for the selection of the PLL multiplication value to become effective. After setting the PLLMUL bit, wait for at least 1 s. <6> Set the PLLON bit of the PLLCTL register to 1 to start oscillation of the PLL clock. PLLCTL 7 6 5 4 LCKSEL1 LCKSEL0 PLLDIV1 PLLDIV0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 3 0 2 1 0 SELPLL PLLMUL PLLON 0 0/1 1 <7> Confirm that the PLL circuit is locked (LOCK = 1) with the LOCK bit of the PLLSTS register. 7 PLLSTS 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 MDIV2 MDIV1 MDIV0 0 0 1 2 1 0 SELPLL PLLMUL PLLON 1 0/1 1 LOCK 1 <8> Set the PLL clock between 1 MHz and 32 MHz with the MDIV bits of the MDIV register. Example: To select fMP/2, set the following value. MDIV 7 6 5 4 3 0 0 0 0 0 <9> Select the PLL clock mode with the SELPLL bit of the PLLCTL register. Set the SELPLL bit to 1 to select the PLL-clock-selected mode (fMP = fPLL). PLLCTL 7 6 5 4 LCKSEL1 LCKSEL0 PLLDIV1 PLLDIV0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 3 0 406 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR <10> Confirm that the PLL-clock-selected mode is selected (SELPLLS = 1) with the SELPLLS bit of the PLLSTS register. 7 PLLSTS 6 5 4 0 0 0 LOCK 1 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 SELPLL PLLMUL PLLON 0 0/1 1 SELPLLS 1 (2) Examples of procedure for stopping PLL clock There is the following method to stop the PLL clock. Set the PLLON bit to 0 to stop the PLL clock. <1> Select the PLL clock mode with the SELPLL bit of the PLLCTL register. Clear the SELPLL bit to 0 to select the clock through mode (fPLL = fMAIN). PLLCTL 7 6 5 4 LCKSEL1 LCKSEL0 PLLDIV1 PLLDIV0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 3 0 <2> Confirm that the clock through mode is selected (SELPLLS = 0) with the SELPLLS bit of the PLLSTS register. 7 PLLSTS 6 5 4 0 0 0 LOCK 0/1 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 SELPLL PLLMUL PLLON 0 0/1 0 SELPLLS 0 <3> Clear the PLLON bit of the PLLCTL register to 0 to stop oscillation of the PLL clock. PLLCTL 7 6 5 4 LCKSEL1 LCKSEL0 PLLDIV1 PLLDIV0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 3 0 (3) Caution when restarting the PLL clock after being stopped In a case of restarting the PLL clock after it has been stopped, wait for at least 4 s after the PLL circuit was stopped before restarting operation. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 407 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.6.5 Example of Setting Low-Speed On-Chip Oscillator An example of setting the low-speed on-chip oscillator as the CPU clock is shown below. <1> Select fIL with the SELLOSC bit of the CKSEL register. Set the SELLOSC bit to 1 to set fSL for the low-speed on-chip oscillator. CKSEL 7 6 5 4 3 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 TRD_CKSEL 0 0 SELLOSC 0 1 <2> Select the operation mode of the subsystem clock with the OSCSELS bit of the CMC register. Set the OSCSELS bit to 1 to select the input port mode (low-speed on-chip oscillator operation mode). CMC 7 6 5 4 EXCLK OSCSEL EXCLKS OSCSELS 0 0 0 1 3 0 2 1 0 AMPHS1 AMPHS0 AMPH 0/1 0/1 0 <3> Select the CPU/peripheral hardware clock with the CSS bit of the CKC register. Set the CSS bit to 1 to specify CPU clock = fSL (low-speed on-chip oscillator). CKC 7 6 5 4 CLS CSS MCS MCM0 0 1 0 1 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 <4> Confirm that fSL (low-speed on-chip oscillator) is selected as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (CLS = 1) with the CLS bit of the CKC register. CKC 7 6 5 4 CLS CSS MCS MCM0 1 1 0 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 408 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.6.6 CPU Clock Status Transition Diagram Figure 5-27 shows the CPU clock status transition diagram of this product. Figure 5-27. CPU Clock Status Transition Diagram High-speed on-chip oscillator: Woken up X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Stops (input port mode) XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Stops (input port mode) Power ON VDD 1.56 V (Typ.) (A) Reset release VDD 1.56 V (Typ.) High-speed on-chip oscillator: Operating X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Stops (input port mode) XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Stops (input port mode) (B) High-speed on-chip oscillator: Operating X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Selectable by CPU XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Selectable by CPU VDD 2.7 V (H) CPU: Operating with high-speed on-chip oscillator (M) (N) CPU: Low-speed on-chip oscillator HALT (J) CPU: Operating with low-speed on-chip oscillator (G) High-speed on-chip oscillator: Oscillatable X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Oscillatable XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Operating (E) CPU: High-speed on-chip oscillator HALT CPU: Operating with XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input XT1 oscillation/EXCLK input (C) High-speed on-chip oscillator: Selectable by CPU X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Selectable by CPU CPU: Operating with X1 oscillation or EXCLK input (K) High-speed on-chip oscillator: Oscillatable X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Operating XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Selectable by CPU High-speed on-chip oscillator: Oscillatable X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Operating XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Selectable by CPU High-speed on-chip oscillator: Operating X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Stops XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Oscillatable CPU: High-speed on-chip oscillator SNOOZE (D) CPU: XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input HALT High-speed on-chip oscillator: Stops X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Stops XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Oscillatable CPU: High-speed on-chip oscillator STOP CPU: Operating with PLL (CLS, MCM0 = 0, 1) High-speed on-chip oscillator: Operating X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Oscillatable XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Oscillatable (I) CPU: X1 oscillation/EXCLK input STOP High-speed on-chip oscillator: Stops X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Stops XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Oscillatable (F) High-speed on-chip oscillator: Selectable by CPU X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Operating XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Selectable by CPU CPU: X1 oscillation/EXCLK input HALT (L) High-speed on-chip oscillator: Oscillatable X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Operating XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Oscillatable CPU: PLL operating (CLS, MCM0 = 0, 1) HALT Caution Transitions in the order of (B) (D) (C) or (C) (D) (B) are prohibited. The following shows an example of changing the CPU clock and setting the SFR register. (1) After reset release (A), change the CPU to operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (B). (A)(B): Setting the SFR register is not required (initial status after reset release). (2) Change the CPU from operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (B) to operating with the highspeed system clock (C). Set the CMC register (EXCLK = 0, OSCSEL = 1, AMPH = x). Note 1 Set the OSTS register. Note 2 Set the MSTOP bit of the CSC register to 0. Check the oscillation stabilization time by using the OSTC register. Note 2 Set the MCM0 bit of the CKC register to 1. Set the MCS bit of the CKC register to 1. Notes 1. The clock operation mode control register (CMC) can be written only once by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction after reset release. 2. Set the oscillation stabilization time of the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) as shown below: OSTS register setting value Expected oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 409 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR (3) Change the CPU from operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (B) or operating with the highspeed system clock (C) to operating with the subsystem clock (D). Set the RTCLPC bit of the OSMC register. Set the SELLOSC bit of the CKSEL register to 0. Set the CMC register (EXCLKS = x, OSCSELS = 1, AMPHS[1:0] = xx). Note Set the XTSTOP bit of the CSC register to 0. Wait for oscillation stabilization. Set the CSS bit of the CKC register to 1. Confirm that the CLS bit of the CKC register is set to 1. Note The clock operation mode control register (CMC) can be written only once by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction after reset release. (4) Change the CPU from operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (B) or operating with the highspeed system clock (C) to operating with the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (M). Set the SELLOSC bit of the CKSEL register to 1. Set the CMC register (EXCLKS = x, OSCSELS = 1). Note Set the CSS bit of the CKC register to 1. Confirm that the CLS bit of the CKC register is set to 1. Note The clock operation mode control register (CMC) can be written only once by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction after reset release. (5) Change the CPU from operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (B) or operating with the highspeed system clock (C) to operating with the PLL clock (K). Set the PLLCTL register (PLLDIV1 = x, LCKSEL[1:0] = xx, PLLDIV0 = x, PLLMUL = x). Wait for the selection of the PLL multiplication value to become effective (After setting the PLLMUL bit, wait for at least 1 s). Set the PLLON bit of the PLLCTL register to 1. Confirm that the LOCK bit of the PLLSTS register is set to 1 (checking PLL locked state). Set the MDIV [2:0] bits of the MDIV register. Set the SELPLL bit of the PLLCTL register to 1. Confirm that the SELPLLS bit of the PLLSTS register is set to 1. (6) Change the CPU from operating with the high-speed system clock (C) to operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (B). Set the HIOSTOP bit of the CSC register to 0. Note Set the MCM0 bit of the CKC register to 0. Confirm that the MCS bit of the CKC register is set to 0. Note When oscillation starts from a high-speed on-chip oscillator clock stop state (HIOSTOP = 1), have the software wait for the following oscillation accuracy stabilization time, and then change the clock. FRQSEL4 of the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) = 0: 18 s to 65 s FRQSEL4 of the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) = 1: 18 s to 105 s R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 410 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR (7) Change the CPU from operating with the subsystem clock (D) or operating with the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (M) to operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (B). Set the HIOSTOP bit of the CSC register to 0. Note Set the CSS bit of the CKC register to 0. Confirm that the CLS bit of the CKC register is set to 0. Note When oscillation starts from a high-speed on-chip oscillator clock stop state (HIOSTOP = 1), have the software wait for the following oscillation accuracy stabilization time, and then change the clock. FRQSEL4 of the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) = 0: 18 s to 65 s FRQSEL4 of the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) = 1: 18 s to 105 s (8) Change the CPU from operating with the PLL clock (K) to operating with the high-speed system clock (C) or operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (B). Set the SELPLL bit of the PLLCTL register to 0. Confirm that the SELPLLS bit of the PLLSTS register is set to 0. (9) Change the CPU from operating with the subsystem clock (D) or operating with the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (M) to operating with the high-speed system clock (C). Set the CMC register (EXCLK = 0, OSCSEL = 1, AMPH = x). Note 1 Set the OSTS register. Note 2 Check the oscillation stabilization time by using the OSTC register. Note 2 Set the CSS bit of the CKC register to 0. Confirm that the CLS bit of the CKC register is set to 0. Notes 1. The clock operation mode control register (CMC) can be written only once by an 8-bit memory manipulation 2. Set the oscillation stabilization time of the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) as shown below: instruction after reset release. OSTS register setting value > Expected oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) (10) Change the CPU from each operation mode to HALT mode. The CPU changes from operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (B) to HALT mode (E). The CPU changes from operating with the high-speed system clock (C) to HALT mode (F). The CPU changes from operating with the subsystem clock (D) to HALT mode (G). The CPU changes from operating with the PLL clock (K) to HALT mode (L). The CPU changes from operating with the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (M) to HALT mode (N). - Execute the HALT instruction. (11) The CPU changes from operating with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (B) to STOP mode (H). Stop peripheral functions that are not operated in STOP mode. Execute the STOP instruction. (12) The CPU changes from operating with the high-speed system clock (C) to STOP mode (I). Stop peripheral functions that are not operated in STOP mode. Set the OSTS register. Note Execute the STOP instruction. Note Set the oscillation stabilization time of the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) as shown below: OSTS register setting value > Expected oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) (13) Change the CPU from STOP mode (H) to SNOOZE mode (J). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 411 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR For details about the settings for entering SNOOZE mode, see 23.3.3 SNOOZE Mode and peripheral functions that are used. Remarks 1. "x" shown in the settings of the SFR register for changing each mode represents an arbitrary value (the settings to be used). 2. For details about transition and recovery to the standby function (HALT mode, STOP mode, and SNOOZE mode), see CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION and peripheral functions that are used. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 412 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.6.7 Conditions before Changing CPU Clock and Processing after Changing CPU Clock The following table shows the conditions before changing the CPU clock and the processing after changing the CPU clock. Table 5-3. Changing CPU Clock (1/7) CPU Clock Before Change After Change High-speed on-chip X1 clock oscillator clock Conditions before Change Processing after Change X1 oscillation is stable. Stopping the high-speed on- OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 0, MSTOP = 0 chip oscillator (HIOSTOP = 1) After elapse of oscillation stabilization time can reduce the operating External main system External clock input from the EXCLK pin is clock enabled. current. OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 1, MSTOP = 0 XT1 clock XT1 oscillation is stable, and the subsystem clock is selected as the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock. OSCSELS = 1, EXCLKS = 0, XTSTOP = 0 SELLOSC = 0 After elapse of oscillation stabilization time External subsystem External clock input from the EXCLKS pin is clock enabled, and the subsystem clock is selected as the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock. OSCSELS = 1, EXCLKS = 1, XTSTOP = 0 SELLOSC = 0 Low-speed on-chip The low-speed on-chip oscillator starts oscillator clock oscillation, and the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock is selected as the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock. OSCSELS = 1, SELLOSC = 1 PLL clock PLL oscillation is stable. The high-speed on-chip LOCK = 1, PLLON = 1 oscillator cannot be stopped because it is the PLL input clock. Remark For details about the register flag settings for stopping the target clock during the processing after change and conditions before the clock is stopped, see 5.6.9 Conditions Before Clock Oscillation Is Stopped. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 413 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Table 5-3. Changing CPU Clock (2/7) CPU Clock Conditions before Change Processing after Change Before Change After Change X1 clock High-speed on-chip The high-speed on-chip oscillator starts X1 oscillation can be stopped. oscillator clock oscillation. (MSTOP = 1) HIOSTOP = 0 External main system Prohibited to change. (To change the CPU clock clock, clear the settings first and then reset the settings.) XT1 clock XT1 oscillation is stable, and the subsystem X1 oscillation can be stopped. clock is selected as the subsystem/low-speed (MSTOP = 1) on-chip oscillator select clock. OSCSELS = 1, EXCLKS = 0, XTSTOP = 0 SELLOSC = 0 After elapse of oscillation stabilization time External subsystem External clock input from the EXCLKS pin is clock enabled, and the subsystem clock is selected as the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock. OSCSELS = 1, EXCLKS = 1, XTSTOP = 0 SELLOSC = 0 Low-speed on-chip The low-speed on-chip oscillator starts oscillator clock oscillation, and the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock is selected as the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock. OSCSELS = 1, SELLOSC = 1 PLL clock PLL oscillation is stable. The X1 clock cannot be LOCK = 1, PLLON = 1 stopped because it is the PLL input clock. Remark For details about the register flag settings for stopping the target clock during the processing after change and conditions before the clock is stopped, see 5.6.9 Conditions Before Clock Oscillation Is Stopped. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 414 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Table 5-3. Changing CPU Clock (3/7) CPU Clock Conditions before Change Processing after Change Before Change After Change External main system High-speed on-chip The high-speed on-chip oscillator starts The external main system clock clock oscillator clock oscillation. input can be disabled. HIOSTOP = 0 (MSTOP = 1) Prohibited to change. (To change the CPU X1 clock clock, clear the settings first and then reset the settings.) XT1 clock XT1 oscillation is stable, and the subsystem The external main system clock clock is selected as the subsystem/low-speed input can be disabled. on-chip oscillator select clock. (MSTOP = 1) OSCSELS = 1, EXCLKS = 0, XTSTOP = 0 SELLOSC = 0 After elapse of oscillation stabilization time External subsystem External clock input from the EXCLKS pin is clock enabled, and the subsystem clock is selected as the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock. OSCSELS = 1, EXCLKS = 1, XTSTOP = 0 SELLOSC = 0 Low-speed on-chip The low-speed on-chip oscillator starts oscillator clock oscillation, and the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock is selected as the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock. OSCSELS = 1, SELLOSC = 1 PLL clock PLL oscillation is stable. The external main system clock LOCK = 1, PLLON = 1 cannot be stopped because it is the PLL input clock. Remark For details about the register flag settings for stopping the target clock during the processing after change and conditions before the clock is stopped, see 5.6.9 Conditions Before Clock Oscillation Is Stopped. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 415 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Table 5-3. Changing CPU Clock (4/7) CPU Clock Conditions before Change Processing after Change Before Change After Change XT1 clock High-speed on-chip The high-speed on-chip oscillator starts XT1 oscillation can be stopped. oscillator clock oscillation, and the high-speed on-chip (XTSTOP = 1) oscillator clock is selected as the main system clock. HIOSTOP = 0, MCS = 0 X1 clock X1 oscillation is stable, and the high-speed system clock is selected as the main system clock. OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 0, MSTOP = 0 After elapse of oscillation stabilization time MCS = 1 External main system External clock input from the EXCLK pin is clock enabled, and the high-speed system clock is selected as the main system clock. OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 1, MSTOP = 0 SELLOSC = 0, MCS = 1 External subsystem Prohibited to change. (To change the CPU clock clock, clear the settings first and then reset the settings.) Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock Prohibited to change. (To change the CPU clock, specify the main system/PLL select clock as the CPU clock first and then reset the settings.) Remark For details about the register flag settings for stopping the target clock during the processing after change and conditions before the clock is stopped, see 5.6.9 Conditions Before Clock Oscillation Is Stopped. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 416 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Table 5-3. Changing CPU Clock (5/7) CPU Clock Conditions before Change Processing after Change Before Change After Change External subsystem High-speed on-chip The high-speed on-chip oscillator starts The external subsystem clock clock oscillator clock oscillation, and the high-speed on-chip input can be disabled. oscillator clock is selected as the main system (XTSTOP = 1) clock. HIOSTOP = 0, MCS = 0 X1 clock X1 oscillation is stable, and the high-speed system clock is selected as the main system clock. OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 0, MSTOP = 0 After elapse of oscillation stabilization time MCS = 1 External main system External clock input from the EXCLK pin is clock enabled, and the high-speed system clock is selected as the main system clock. OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 1, MSTOP = 0 SELLOSC = 0, MCS = 1 XT1 clock Prohibited to change. (To change the CPU clock, clear the settings first and then reset the settings.) Low-speed on-chip Prohibited to change. (To change the CPU oscillator clock clock, specify the main system/PLL select clock as the CPU clock first and then reset the settings.) Remark For details about the register flag settings for stopping the target clock during the processing after change and conditions before the clock is stopped, see 5.6.9 Conditions Before Clock Oscillation Is Stopped. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 417 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Table 5-3. Changing CPU Clock (6/7) CPU Clock Conditions before Change Processing after Change Before Change After Change Low-speed on-chip High-speed on-chip The high-speed on-chip oscillator starts The low-speed on-chip oscillator clock oscillator clock oscillation, and the high-speed on-chip oscillator can be stopped. oscillator clock is selected as the main system (SELLOSC = 0, WUTMMCK0 = clock. 0) HIOSTOP = 0, MCS = 0 X1 clock X1 oscillation is stable, and the high-speed system clock is selected as the main system clock. OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 0, MSTOP = 0 After elapse of oscillation stabilization time MCS = 1 External main system External clock input from the EXCLK pin is clock enabled, and the high-speed system clock is selected as the main system clock. OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 1, MSTOP = 0 SELLOSC = 0, MCS = 1 XT1 clock Prohibited to change. (To change the CPU clock, specify the main system/PLL select clock as the CPU clock first and then reset the settings.) External subsystem Prohibited to change. (To change the CPU clock clock, specify the main system/PLL select clock as the CPU clock first and then reset the settings.) Remark For details about the register flag settings for stopping the target clock during the processing after change and conditions before the clock is stopped, see 5.6.9 Conditions Before Clock Oscillation Is Stopped. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 418 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Table 5-3. Changing CPU Clock (7/7) CPU Clock Conditions before Change Processing after Change Before Change After Change PLL clock High-speed on-chip The high-speed on-chip oscillator starts The PLL clock can be stopped. oscillator clock oscillation, and the high-speed on-chip (PLLON = 0) oscillator clock is selected as the main system clock. HIOSTOP = 0, MCS = 0 X1 clock X1 oscillation is stable, and the high-speed system clock is selected as the main system clock. OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 0, MSTOP = 0 After elapse of oscillation stabilization time MCS = 1 External main system External clock input from the EXCLK pin is clock enabled, and the high-speed system clock is selected as the main system clock. OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 1, MSTOP = 0 SELLOSC = 0, MCS = 1 Remark For details about the register flag settings for stopping the target clock during the processing after change and conditions before the clock is stopped, see 5.6.9 Conditions Before Clock Oscillation Is Stopped. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 419 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.6.8 Time Required for Switchover of CPU Clock, Main System/PLL Select Clock, and Main System Clock By setting bits 4 and 6 (MCM0, CSS) of the system clock control register (CKC), bits 0 to 2 (MDIV0 to MDIV2) of the fMP clock division register (MDIV), and bit 0 (SELLOSC) of the clock select register (CKSEL), the CPU clock can be switched (between the main system/PLL select clock and the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock), the main system/PLL select clock can be switched (between the main system clock and the PLL clock), the main system clock can be switched (between the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock and the high-speed system clock), the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock can be switched (between the subsystem clock and the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock), and the frequency division ratio of the main system/PLL select clock can be changed. The actual switchover operation is not performed immediately after rewriting to the CKC or MDIV register; operation continues on the pre-switchover clock for several clocks. The subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is switched immediately after rewriting to the CKSEL register. Whether the CPU is operating on the main system/PLL select clock or the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock can be ascertained using bit 7 (CLS) of the CKC register. Whether the main system/PLL select clock is operating on the main system clock or the PLL clock can be ascertained using bit 3 (SELPLLS) of the PLL status register (PLLSTS). Whether the main system clock is operating on the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock or the high-speed system clock can be ascertained using bit 5 (MCS) of the CKC register. When the CPU clock is switched, the peripheral hardware clock is also switched. Table 5-4. Maximum Time Required for Clock Switchover Clock A Switching directions Clock B Type fMP Type 1 (Table 5-5) fIH fMX Type 2 (Table 5-6) fMP fSL Type 3 (Table 5-7) fMAIN fPLL Type 4 (Table 5-8) fMP (change of the frequency division ratio) Table 5-5. Maximum Time Required for Type 1 Set Value Before Switchover Set Value After Switchover Clock A Clock B Clock A 1 + fA/fB clock Clock B 1 + fB/fA clock Table 5-6. Maximum Time Required for Type 2 (1)Note1 Set Value Before Switchover Set Value After Switchover MCM0 MCM0 0 1 (fMAIN = fIH) (fMAIN = fMX) 0 fMX fIH 3 clocks (fMAIN = fIH) fMX fIH 3 fIH/fMX clock 1 fMX fIH 3 fMX/fIH clock (fMAIN = fMX) fMX fIH 3 clocks Note 1. For fIH 32 MHz (Remarks are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 420 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR Table 5-6. Maximum Time Required for Type 2 (2)Note 1 Set Value Before Switchover Set Value After Switchover MCM0 MCM0 0 1 (fMAIN = fIH) (fMAIN = fMX) 6 fIH/fMX clock 0 (fMAIN = fIH) 3 clocks 1 (fMAIN = fMX) Note 1. For fIH 32 MHz Table 5-7. Maximum Time Required for Type 3 Set Value Before Switchover Set Value After Switchover CSS CSS 0 1 (fCLK = fMP) (fCLK = fSL) 1 + 2 fMP/fSL clock 0 (fCLK = fMP) 3 clocks 1 (fCLK = fSL) Table 5-8. Maximum Time Required for Type 4 Set Value Before Switchover Set Value After Switchover SELPLL SELPLL 0 1 (fMP = fMAIN) (fMP = fPLL) 2 clocks 0 (fMP = fMAIN) 1 2 fPLL/fMAIN clock (fMP = fPLL) Remarks 1. The number of clocks listed in Tables 5-5 to 5-8 is the number of CPU clocks before switchover. 2. Calculate the number of clocks in Tables 5-5 to 5-8 by removing the decimal portion. Example When switching the main system clock from the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (with 16 MHz) to the high-speed system clock (@ oscillation with fIH = 16 MHz, fMX = 10 MHz) 3 fIH/fMX = 3 1.6 = 4.8 5 clocks R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 421 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.6.9 Conditions Before Clock Oscillation Is Stopped The following lists the register flag settings for stopping the clock oscillation (disabling external clock input) and conditions before the clock oscillation is stopped. Table 5-9. Conditions Before the Clock Oscillation Is Stopped and Flag Settings Clock High-speed on-chip oscillator clock Conditions Before Clock Oscillation Is Stopped Flag Settings of SFR (External Clock Input Disabled) Register MCS = 1 or CLS = 1 HIOSTOP = 1 (The CPU is operating on a clock other than the highspeed on-chip oscillator clock.) X1 clock MCS = 0 or CLS = 1 External main system clock (The CPU is operating on a clock other than the high- MSTOP = 1 speed system clock.) PLL clock SELPLLS = 0 PLLON = 0 (The CPU is operating on a clock other than the PLL clock.) XT1 clock CLS = 0 External subsystem clock (The CPU is operating on a clock other than the XTSTOP = 1 subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator clock.) Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock CLS = 0 SELLOSC = 0 and (The CPU is operating on a clock other than the WUTMMCK0 = 0 subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator clock.) Remark MCS: Bit 5 of the system clock control register (CKC) CLS: Bit 7 of the system clock control register (CKC) HIOSTOP: Bit 0 of the clock operation status control register (CSC) XTSTOP: Bit 6 of the clock operation status control register (CSC) MSTOP: Bit 7 of the clock operation status control register (CSC) SELPLLS: Bit 3 of the PLL status register (PLLSTS) PLLON: Bit 0 of the PLL control register (PLLCTL) SELLOSC: Bit 1 of the clock select register (CKSEL) WUTMMCK0: Bit 4 of the operation speed mode control register (OSMC) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 422 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR 5.7 Usage Notes 5.7.1 CPU/Peripheral Hardware Clock The clock set by the CSS, MCM0, SELPLL, and MDIV2 to MDIV0 bits is supplied to the CPU and peripheral hardware modules. If the CPU clock is changed, the clock supplied to the peripheral hardware modules is simultaneously changed. Therefore, when changing the CPU/peripheral hardware clock, operation of the peripheral hardware modules needs to be stopped before the change. 5.7.2 High-Speed On-Chip Oscillator <R> When the FRQSEL3 bit is set to 0 (high-speed on-chip oscillator = 48/24/12/6/3 MHz), and moreover the CPU/peripheral hardware clock is selected as the PLL clock, the CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency (fCLK) must not be set to 32 MHz. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 423 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT The number of units or channels of the timer array unit differs, depending on the product. Units Channels Group A Groups B, C, and D Group E Unit 0 Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Unit 1 Remark Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C: RL78/F13 (CAN incorporated) products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group D: RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or RL78/F14 products with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory Cautions 1. The presence or absence of timer I/O pins depends on the product. See Table 6-2 Timer I/O Pins provided in Each Product for details. 2. Most of the following descriptions in this chapter use the Group E products as an example. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 424 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT The timer array unit has eight 16-bit timers. Each 16-bit timer is called a channel and can be used as an independent timer. In addition, two or more "channels" can be used to create a high-accuracy timer. TIMER ARRAY UNIT channel 0 16-bit timers channel 1 channel 2 channel 6 channel 7 For details about each function, see the table below. Independent channel operation function Simultaneous channel operation function Interval timer ( refer to 6.7.1) One-shot pulse output( refer to 6.8.1) Square wave output ( refer to 6.7.1) PWM output( refer to 6.8.2) Multiple PWM output( refer to 6.8.3) External event counter ( refer to 6.7.2) Divider function ( refer to 6.7.3) Input pulse interval measurement ( refer to 6.7.4) Measurement of high-/low-level width of input signal ( refer to 6.7.5) Delay counter ( refer to 6.7.6) It is possible to use the 16-bit timer of channels 1 and 3 of the units 0 and 1 as two 8-bit timers (higher and lower). The functions that can use channels 1 and 3 as 8-bit timers are as follows: Interval timer External event counter (lower 8-bit timer only) Delay counter (lower 8-bit timer only) Channel 7 of timer array unit 0 can be used to realize LIN-bus communication operating in combination with UART0 of the serial array unit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 425 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.1 Functions of Timer Array Unit Timer array unit has the following functions. 6.1.1 Independent channel operation function By operating a channel independently, it can be used for the following purposes without being affected by the operation mode of other channels. (1) Interval timer Each timer of a unit can be used as a reference timer that generates an interrupt (INTTMmn) at fixed intervals. Operation clock Compare operation Channel n Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) (2) Square wave output A toggle operation is performed each time INTTMmn interrupt is generated and a square wave with a duty factor of 50% is output from a timer output pin (TOmn). Operation clock Compare operation Channel n Timer output (TOmn) (3) External event counter Each timer of a unit can be used as an event counter that generates an interrupt when the number of the valid edges of a signal input to the timer input pin (TImn) has reached a specific value. Timer input (TImn) Edge detection Compare operation Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) Channel n (4) Divider function A clock input from a timer input pin (TImn) is divided and output from an output pin (TOmn). Timer input (TI00) Compare operation Channel n Timer output (TO00) Set the TImn and TOmn pins so that they are different from each other by the peripheral I/O redirection registers 0, 1, 2, and 3 (PIOR0, PIOR1, PIOPR2, and PIOR3). (5) Input pulse interval measurement Counting is started by the valid edge of a pulse signal input to a timer input pin (TImn). The count value of the timer is captured at the valid edge of the next pulse. In this way, the interval of the input pulse can be measured. Timer input (TImn) Edge detection Capture operation Channel n xxH 00H Start Capture (Remarks are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 426 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT (6) Measurement of high-/low-level width of input signal Counting is started by a single edge of the signal input to the timer input pin (TImn), and the count value is captured at the other edge. In this way, the high-level or low-level width of the input signal can be measured. Edge detection Timer input (TImn) Capture operation Channel n 00H xxH Start Capture (7) Delay counter Counting is started at the valid edge of the signal input to the timer input pin (TImn), and an interrupt is generated after any delay period. Edge detection Timer input (TImn) Compare operation Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) Channel n Start Remarks 1 m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. The presence or absence of timer I/O pins of channels 0 to 7 depends on the product. See Table 6-2 Timer I/O Pins provided in Each Product for details. 6.1.2 Simultaneous channel operation function By using the combination of a master channel (a reference timer mainly controlling the cycle) and slave channels (timers operating according to the master channel), channels can be used for the following purposes. (1) One-shot pulse output Two channels are used as a set to generate a one-shot pulse with a specified output timing and a specified pulse width. Timer input (TImn) Edge detection Compare operation Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) Channel n (master) Compare operation Channel p (slave) Output timing Timer output (TOmp) Toggle (Master) Start (Master) Pulse width Toggle (Slave) (2) PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) output Two channels are used as a set to generate a pulse with a specified period and a specified duty factor. Operation clock Compare operation Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) Channel n (master) Compare operation Channel p (slave) Timer output (TOmp) Duty Period (Caution and Remark are is listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 427 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT (3) Multiple PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) output By extending the PWM function and using one master channel and two or more slave channels, up to seven types of PWM signals that have a specific period and a specified duty factor can be generated. Operation clock Compare operation Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) Channel n (master) Compare operation Channel p (slave) Timer output (TOmp) Duty Period Compare operation Channel q (slave) Timer output (TOmq) Duty Period Caution There are several rules for using simultaneous channel operation function. For details, see 6.4.1 Basic rules of simultaneous channel operation function. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7), p, q: Slave channel number (n < p < q 7) 6.1.3 8-bit timer operation function (channels 1 and 3 only) The 8-bit timer operation function makes it possible to use a 16-bit timer channel in a configuration consisting of two 8bit timer channels. This function can only be used for channels 1 and 3. Caution There are several rules for using 8-bit timer operation function. For details, see 6.4.2 Basic rules of 8-bit timer operation function (channels 1 and 3 only). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 428 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.1.4 LIN-bus supporting function (channel 7 of unit 0 only) Timer array unit is used to check whether signals received in LIN-bus communication match the LIN-bus communication format. (1) Detection of wakeup signal The timer starts counting at the falling edge of a signal input to the serial data input pin (RxD0) of UART0 and the count value of the timer is captured at the rising edge. In this way, a low-level width can be measured. If the lowlevel width is greater than a specific value, it is recognized as a wakeup signal. (2) Detection of sync break field The timer starts counting at the falling edge of a signal input to the serial data input pin (RxD0) of UART0 after a wakeup signal is detected, and the count value of the timer is captured at the rising edge. In this way, a low-level width is measured. If the low-level width is greater than a specific value, it is recognized as a sync break field. (3) Measurement of pulse width of sync field After a sync break field is detected, the low-level width and high-level width of the signal input to the serial data input pin (RxD0) of UART0 are measured. From the bit interval of the sync field measured in this way, a baud rate is calculated. Remark For details about setting up the operations used to implement the LIN-bus, see 6.7.5 Operation as input signal high-/low-level width measurement. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 429 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.2 Configuration of Timer Array Unit Timer array unit includes the following hardware. Table 6-1. Configuration of Timer Array Unit Item Timer/counter Configuration Timer count register mn (TCRmn) Register Timer data register mn (TDRmn) Timer input TI00 to TI07, TI10 to TI17 Note 1, RxD0 pin (for LIN-bus) Timer output TO00 to TO07, TO10 to TO17 pinsNote 1, output controller Control registers <Registers of unit setting block> Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) Timer clock select register m (TPSm) Timer channel enable status register m (TEm) Timer channel start register m (TSm) Timer channel stop register m (TTm) Timer input select register 0 (TIS0) Timer input select register 1 (TIS1) Timer input select register 2 (TIS2) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Timer output register m (TOm) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) PWM output delay control register 1 (PWMDLY1) PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) Note 3 <Registers of each channel> Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) Timer status register mn (TSRmn) Noise filter enable registers 1, 2 (NFEN1, NFEN2) Port mode register (PMxx) Note 2 Port register (Pxx) Note 2 Notes 1. The presence or absence of timer I/O pins of channel 0 to 7 of the unit depends on the product. See Table 62 Timer I/O Pins provided in Each Product for details. 2. The port mode registers (PMxx) and port registers (Pxx) to be set differ depending on the product. For details, see 6.3.16 Port mode registers 1, 3, 4, 7, 12 (PM1, PM3, PM4, PM7, PM12). 3. Bit allocation differs depending on the group. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 430 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT The presence or absence of timer I/O pins in each timer array unit channel depends on the product. Table 6-2. Timer I/O Pins provided in Each Product Timer array unit channels I/O Pins of Each Product Group E Products Unit 0 Unit 1 Group B, C, and D Products Channel 0 P17/TI00/TO00 Channel 1 P30/TI01/TO01 Channel 2 P16/TI02/TO02 Channel 3 P125/TI03/TO03 Channel 4 P13/TI04/TO04 Channel 5 P15/TI05/TO05 Channel 6 P14/TI06/TO06 Channel 7 P120/TI07/TO07 Group A Products Channel 0 P41/TI10/TO10 Channel 1 P12/TI11/TO11 Channel 2 P11/TI12/TO12 Channel 3 P10/TI13/TO13 Channel 4 P31/TI14/TO14 Channel 5 P70/TI15/TO15 Channel 6 P32/TI16/TO16 Channel 7 P71/TI17/TO17 Remarks 1. When timer input and timer output are shared by the same pin, either only timer input or only timer output can be used. 2. : The channel is not available. 3. For details on Groups A to E, see the first page of CHAPTER 6. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 431 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figures 6-1 to 6-3 show the block diagrams of the timer array unit. Figure 6-1. Entire Configuration of Timer Array Unit 0 (Example: 100-pin products) Timer clock select register 0 (TPS0) PRS033 PRS032PRS031 PRS030PRS023 PRS022PRS021 PRS020 PRS013PRS012PRS011 PRS010PRS003PRS002 PRS001 PRS000 Timer input select register 0 (TIS0) TIS07 TIS06 TIS04 TIS02 TIS01 4 TIS00 4 4 fCLK 4 Prescaler fCLK/20 - fCLK/215 fCLK/20 - fCLK/215 fCLK/20 - fCLK/215 fCLK/20 - fCLK/215 Selector Peripheral enable TAU0EN register 0 (PER0) Selector Selector CK03 TI00 CK01 CK00 Slave/master controller Selector Event input from ELC Selector CK02 TO00 INTTM00 Channel 0 TI01 Event input from ELC Selector TO011 fSL fIL Delay controller Channel 1 Slave/master controller TO021 Selector Event input from ELC TI02 TIS14 TIS12 Selector TIS17 TIS16 Event input from ELC TIS10 TI03 Channel 2 Selector TI04 Selector TI05 Selector RTC1HZ Delay controller RXD0 Remark Delay controller TO060 Delay controller Sub/low-speed on-chip oscillator clock fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency TO02 Timer RJ INTTM02 PWM output delay control register 1 (PWMDLY1) TO03 PWM output delay control register 1 (PWMDLY1) TO04 PWM output delay control register 1 (PWMDLY1) TO05 PWM output delay control register 1 (PWMDLY1) TO06 INTTM06 TO070 Delay controller Channel 7 (LIN-bus supported) INTTM01 INTTM01H PWM output delay control register 1 (PWMDLY1) INTTM05 Channel 6 fSL: R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 TO050 Channel 5 Selector RTC1HZ TO01 INTTM04 TO071 TI07 TO040 Channel 4 TO061 TI06 PWM output delay control register 1 (PWMDLY1) Timer RJ INTTM03 INTTM03H Channel 3 TO051 TI03 TO030 Delay controller TO041 TI03 TO020 Delay controller TO031 Timer input select register 1 (TIS1) TO010 PWM output delay control register 1 (PWMDLY1) TO07 INTTM07 432 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-2. Entire Configuration of Timer Array Unit 1 (Example: Groups B, C, and D) Timer clock select register 1 (TPS1) PRS131 PRS130 PRS121 PRS120 PRS113 PRS112 PRS111 PRS110 PRS103PRS102 PRS101 PRS100 2 4 2 4 fCLK Prescaler fCLK/21, fCLK/22, 4 6 fCLK/2 , fCLK/2 , fCLK/2 , fCLK/2 12 14 fCLK/2 , fCLK/2 8 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) fCLK/20 - fCLK/215 fCLK/20 - fCLK/215 10 Selector TAU1EN Selector Selector CK13 Selector CK12 CK11 CK10 Slave/master controller TO10 TI10 INTTM10 Channel 0 TO111 TO110 Delay controller TI11 Channel 1 Slave/master controller TO120 Delay controller Channel 2 TO131 TO130 Delay controller TI13 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Channel 3 TO11 INTTM11 INTTM11H TO121 TI12 PWM output delay control register 2 2 (PWMDLY2) PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) TO12 INTTM12 PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) TO13 INTTM13 INTTM13H 433 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-3. Entire Configuration of Timer Array Unit 1 (Example: Group E) Timer clock select register 1 (TPS1) PRS133 PRS132PRS131 PRS130PRS123 PRS122PRS121 PRS120 PRS113 PRS112 PRS111 PRS110 PRS103PRS102 PRS101 PRS100 4 4 4 4 Prescaler fCLK fCLK/20 - fCLK/215 fCLK/20 - fCLK/215 fCLK/20 - fCLK/215 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) fCLK/20 - fCLK/215 Selector TAU1EN Selector Selector Selector CK13 CK12 CK11 CK10 Slave/master controller TO10 INTTM10 TI10 Channel 0 TO111 TO110 Delay controller TI11 Channel 1 Slave/master controller TO121 TO120 Delay controller TI12 Channel 2 TO130 Delay controller TO140 Delay controller TI14 Channel 4 TIS23 TIS22 TO150 Delay controller Channel 5 Selector RTC1HZ Selector RTC1HZ R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 TO160 Delay controller Channel 6 TO170 Delay controller Channel 7 TO13 PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) TO14 PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) TO15 PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) TO16 INTTM16 TO171 TI17 PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) INTTM15 TO161 TI16 TO12 INTTM14 TO151 TI15 INTTM11 INTTM11H PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) INTTM13 INTTM13H Channel 3 TO141 Timer input select register 2 (TIS2) TO11 INTTM12 TO131 TI13 PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) TO17 INTTM17 434 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-4. Internal Block Diagram of Channel of Timer Array Unit 0 Master channel Slave/master controller Operating clock selection CK03 CK02 CK01 CK00 Count clock selection Trigger signal to slave channel Clock signal to slave channel Interrupt signal to slave channel fMCK Timer controller Output controller TO0n Output latch (Pxx) Mode selection Trigger selection Edge detection TI0n fTCLK PMxx Interrupt controller INTTM0n (Timer interrupt) Timer counter register 0n (TCR0n) Timer status register 0n (TSR0n) Timer data register 0n (TDR0n) Slave/master controller CKS0n CCS0n OVF 0n MAS STS0n2 STS0n1 STS0n0 CIS0n1 CIS0n0 MD0n3 MD0n2 MD0n1 MD0n0 TER0n Channel n Remark Overflow Timer mode register 0n (TMR0n) n = 0, 2, 4, 6 Figure 6-5. Internal Block Diagram of Channel of Timer Array Unit 0 Slave channel Slave/mater controller CK01 CK02 CK03 Count clock selection CK00 Operating clock selection Trigger signal from master channel Clock signal from master channel Interrupt signal from master channel fMCK Trigger selection Edge selection TI0n fTCLK Interrupt controller Timer counter register 0n (TCR0n) TO0n Output latch (Pxx) 8-bit timer controller Mode selection PMxx INTTM0n (Timer interrupt) Timer status register 0n (TSR0n) Overflow CKS0n CCS0n Remark Mode selection Output controller Timer data register 0n (TDR0n) Slave/mater controller Channel n Timer controller OVF 0n Interrupt controller INTTM0nH (Timer interrupt) SPLIT STS0n2 STS0n1 STS0n0 CIS0n1 CIS0n0 MD0n3 MD0n2 MD0n1 MD0n0 0n Timer mode register 0n (TMR0n) n = 1, 3 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 435 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-6. Internal Block Diagram of Channel of Timer Array Unit 0 Slave channel Slave/mater controller CK01 CK02 CK03 Count clock selection CK00 Operating clock selection Trigger signal from master channel Clock signal from master channel Interrupt signal from master channel fMCK TI0n Output controller Timer controller Mode selection Trigger selection Edge detection fTCLK Interrupt controller PMxx INTTM0n (Timer interrupt) Timer counter register 0n (TCR0n) Timer data register 0n (TDR0n) Slave/mater controller TO0n Output latch (Pxx) Timer status register 0n (TSR0n) Overflow OVF 0n CKS0n CCS0n STS0n2 STS0n1 STS0n0 CIS0n1 CIS0n0 MD0n3 MD0n2 MD0n1 MD0n0 Channel n Remark Timer mode register 0n (TMR0n) n = 5, 7 6.2.1 Timer count register mn (TCRmn) The TCRmn register is a 16-bit read-only register and is used to count clocks. The value of this counter is incremented or decremented in synchronization with the rising edge of a count clock. Whether the counter is incremented or decremented depends on the operation mode that is selected by the MDmn3 to MDmn0 bits of timer mode register mn (TMRmn) (refer to 6.3.3 Timer mode register mn (TMRmn)). Figure 6-7. Format of Timer Count Register mn (TCRmn) Address: F0180H, F0181H (TCR00) to F018EH, F018FH (TCR07), After reset: FFFFH R F01C0H, F01C1H (TCR10) to F01CEH, F01CFH (TCR17) F0181H (TCR00) 15 14 13 12 11 F0180H (TCR00) 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TCRmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 436 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT The count value can be read by reading timer count register mn (TCRmn). The count value is set to FFFFH in the following cases. When the reset signal is generated When the TAUmEN bit of peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) is cleared When counting of the slave channel has been completed in the PWM output mode When counting of the slave channel has been completed in the delay count mode When counting of the master/slave channel has been completed in the one-shot pulse output mode When counting of the slave channel has been completed in the multiple PWM output mode The count value is cleared to 0000H in the following cases. When the start trigger is input in the capture mode When capturing has been completed in the capture mode Caution The count value is not captured to timer data register mn (TDRmn) even when the TCRmn register is read. The TCRmn register read value differs as follows according to operation mode changes and the operating status. Table 6-3. Timer Count Register mn (TCRmn) Read Value in Various Operation Modes Operation Mode Count Mode Timer count register mn (TCRmn) Read ValueNote Value if the operation mode was changed after releasing reset Interval timer mode Count down Value if the operation mode was changed after count operation paused (TTmn = 1) Value if the Operation was restarted after count operation paused (TTmn = 1) Value when waiting for a start trigger after one count FFFFH Undefined Stop value Capture mode Count up 0000H Undefined Stop value Event counter mode Count down FFFFH Undefined Stop value One-count mode Count down FFFFH Undefined Stop value FFFFH Capture & onecount mode Count up 0000H Undefined Stop value Capture value of TDRmn register + 1 Note This indicates the value read from the TCRmn register when channel n has stopped operating as a timer (TEmn = 0) and has been enabled to operate as a counter (TSmn = 1). The read value is held in the TCRmn register until the count operation starts. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 437 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.2.2 Timer data register mn (TDRmn) This is a 16-bit register from which a capture function and a compare function can be selected. The capture or compare function can be switched by selecting an operation mode by using the MDmn3 to MDmn0 bits of timer mode register mn (TMRmn). <R> When the TDRmn register is used for compare function, the value can be changed at any time. This register can be read or written in 16-bit units. In addition, for the TDRm1 and TDRm3 registers, while in the 8-bit timer mode (when the SPLIT bits of timer mode registers 01 and 03 (TMRm1, TMRm3) are 1), it is possible to rewrite the data in 8-bit units, with TDRm1H and TDRm3H used as the higher 8 bits, and TDRm1L and TDRm3L used as the lower 8 bits. However, reading is only possible in 16-bit units. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Figure 6-8. Format of Timer Data Register mn (TDRmn) (n = 0, 2, 4 to 7) Address: FFF18H, FFF19H (TDR00), FFF64H, FFF65H (TDR02), After reset: 0000H R/W FFF68H, FFF69H (TDR04) to FFF6EH, FFF6FH (TDR07) FFF70H, FFF71H (TDR10), FFF74H, FFF75H (TDR12) FFF78H, FFF79H (TDR14) to FFF7EH, FFF7FH (TDR17) FFF18H (TDR00) FFF19H (TDR00) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 1 0 TDRmn Figure 6-9. Format of Timer Data Register mn (TDRmn) (n = 1, 3) Address: FFF1AH, FFF1BH (TDR01), FFF66H, FFF67H (TDR03), After reset: 0000H R/W FFF72H, FFF73H (TDR11), FFF76H, FFF77H (TDR13) FFF1BH (TDR01H) 15 14 13 12 11 10 FFF1AH (TDR01L) 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 TDRmn (i) When timer data register mn (TDRmn) is used as compare register Counting down is started from the value set to the TDRmn register. When the count value reaches 0000H, an interrupt signal (INTTMmn) is generated. The TDRmn register holds its value until it is rewritten. Caution The TDRmn register does not perform a capture operation even if a capture trigger is input, when it is set to the compare function. (ii) When timer data register mn (TDRmn) is used as capture register The count value of timer count register mn (TCRmn) is captured to the TDRmn register when the capture trigger is input. A valid edge of the TImn pin can be selected as the capture trigger. This selection is made by timer mode register mn (TMRmn). Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 438 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3 Registers Controlling Timer Array Unit Timer array unit is controlled by the following registers. Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) Timer clock select register m (TPSm) Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) Timer status register mn (TSRmn) Timer channel enable status register m (TEm) Timer channel start register m (TSm) Timer channel stop register m (TTm) Timer input select register 0 (TIS0) Timer input select register 1 (TIS1) Timer input select register 2 (TIS2) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Timer output register m (TOm) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) PWM output delay control register 1 (PWMDLY1) PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) Note 2 Noise filter enable registers 1, 2 (NFEN1, NFEN2) Port mode register (PMxx) Note 1 Port register (Pxx) Note 1 Notes 1. The port mode registers (PMxx) and port registers (Pxx) to be set differ depending on the product. For details, see 6.3.16 Port mode registers 1, 3, 4, 7, 12 (PM1, PM3, PM4, PM7, PM12). 2. Bit allocation differs depending on the number of pins. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 (m = 1) is not provided in the Group A products. 3. Channel numbers 7 to 4 (n = 7 to 4) of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 439 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) This registers is used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to a hardware macro that is not used is stopped in order to reduce the power consumption and noise. When the timer array unit 0 is used, be sure to set bit 0 (TAU0EN) of this register to 1. When the timer array unit 1 is used, be sure to set bit 1 (TAU1EN) of this register to 1. Set the PER0 register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 6-10. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 0 (PER0) Address: F00F0H Symbol PER0 After reset: 00H <7> 6 RTCEN 0 R/W <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> ADCEN IICA0EN Notes1, SAU1EN SAU0EN TAU1EN TAU0EN 2 Note1 TAU1EN Note1 Control of timer array unit 1 input clock Stops supply of input clock. 0 SFR used by the timer array unit 1 cannot be written. The timer array unit 1 is in the reset status. Supplies input clock. 1 SFR used by the timer array unit 1 can be read/written. TAU0EN 0 Control of timer array 0 unit input clock Stops supply of input clock. SFR used by the timer array unit 0 cannot be written. The timer array unit 0 is in the reset status. 1 Supplies input clock. SFR used by the timer array unit 0 can be read/written. Notes 1. Not provided in RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory. 2. Not provided in RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) with 30 pins and RL78/F14 with 30 pins. Cautions 1. When setting the timer array unit, be sure to set the TAUmEN bit to 1 first. If TAUmEN = 0, writing to a control register of timer array unit is ignored, and all read values are default values (except for the timer input select registers 0, 1, 2 (TIS0, TIS1, TIS2), noise filter enable registers 1, 2 (NFEN1, NFEN2), port mode registers 1, 3, 4, 7, 12 (PM1, PM3, PM4, PM7, PM12), port registers 1, 3, 4, 7, 12 (P1, P3, P4, P7, P12), and PWM output delay control registers 1, 2 (PWMDLY1, PWMDLY2)). 2. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. Bits 1, 3, 4, and 6 in RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Bits 4 and 6 in the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30 pins, or in the RL78/F14 products with 30 pins Bit 6 in the products other than above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 440 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.2 Timer clock select register m (TPSm) The TPSm register is a 16-bit register that is used to select the operation clocks that are supplied to each channel (CKm0, CKm1, CKm2, and CKm3) from the external prescaler. For unit 0 of the Group A, B, C, and D products, the clock frequency of CK00 is selected by using bits 3 to 0 of the TPS0 register, that of CK01 is selected by using bits 7 to 4, that of CK02 is selected by using bits 11 to 8, and that of CK03 is selected by using bits 15 to 12. For unit 1 of the Group B, C, and D products, the clock frequency of CK10 is selected by using bits 3 to 0 of the TPS1 register, that of CK11 is selected by using bits 7 to 4, that of CK12 is selected by using bits 9 and 8, and that of CK13 is selected by using bits 13 and 12. For the Group E products, the clock frequency of CKm0 is selected by using bits 3 to 0 of the TPSm register, that of CKm1 is selected by using bits 7 to 4, that of CKm2 is selected by using bits 11 to 8, and that of CKm3 is selected by using bits 15 to 12. Rewriting of the TPSm register during timer operation is possible only in the following cases. If the PRSm00 to PRSm03 bits can be rewritten (n = 0 to 7): All channels for which CKm0 is selected as the operation clock (CKSmn1, CKSmn0 = 0, 0) are stopped (TEmn = 0). If the PRSm10 to PRSm13 bits can be rewritten (n = 0 to 7): All channels for which CKm1 is selected as the operation clock (CKSmn1, CKSmn0 = 1, 0) are stopped (TEmn = 0). If the PRSm20 to PRSm23 bits can be rewritten (n = 0 to 7): All channels for which CKm2 is selected as the operation clock (CKSmn1, CKSmn0 = 0, 1) are stopped (TEmn = 0). If the PRSm30 to PRSm33 bits can be rewritten (n = 0 to 7): All channels for which CKm3 is selected as the operation clock (CKSmn1, CKSmn0 = 1, 1) are stopped (TEmn = 0). The TPSm register can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 441 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-11. Format of Timer Clock Select Register m (TPSm) (8-ch version) Address: F01B6H, F01B7H (TPS0), F01F6H, F01F7H (TPS1) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TPSm PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS m33 m32 m31 m30 m23 m22 m21 m20 m13 m12 m11 m10 m03 m02 m01 m00 PRS PRS PRS PRS mk3 mk2 mk1 mk0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Selection of operation clock (CKmk) Note(k = 0 to 3) fCLK = 2 MHz fCLK = 5 MHz fCLK = 10 MHz fCLK = 20 MHz fCLK = 32 MHz fCLK 2 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 32 MHz fCLK/2 1 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 16 MHz fCLK/22 500 kHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz fCLK/2 3 250 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz 4 MHz fCLK/2 4 125 kHz 312.5 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz 2 MHz fCLK/2 5 62.5 kHz 156.2 kHz 312.5 kHz 625 kHz 1 MHz fCLK/2 6 31.25 kHz 78.1 kHz 156.2 kHz 312.5 kHz 500 kHz fCLK/2 7 15.62 kHz 39.1 kHz 78.1 kHz 156.2 kHz 250 kHz 8 1 0 0 0 fCLK/2 7.81 kHz 19.5 kHz 39.1 kHz 78.1 kHz 125 kHz 1 0 0 1 fCLK/29 3.91 kHz 9.76 kHz 19.5 kHz 39.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 1 0 1 0 fCLK/210 1.95 kHz 4.88 kHz 9.76 kHz 19.5 kHz 31.25 kHz 1 fCLK/2 11 976 Hz 2.44 kHz 4.88 kHz 9.76 kHz 15.63 kHz fCLK/2 12 488 Hz 1.22 kHz 2.44 kHz 4.88 kHz 7.81 kHz fCLK/2 13 244 Hz 610 Hz 1.22 kHz 2.44 kHz 3.91 kHz fCLK/2 14 122 Hz 305 Hz 610 Hz 1.22 kHz 1.95 kHz fCLK/2 15 61 Hz 153 Hz 305 Hz 610 Hz 976 Hz 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Note When changing the clock selected for fCLK (by changing the system clock control register (CKC) value), stop timer array unit (TTm = 00FFH). Cautions 1. TPS1 is not provided in the Group A products, because the timer array unit 1 is not provided. This format cannot be applied to unit 1 of the Group B, C, and D products (see the specifications of 4-channel version in Figure 6-12). 2. When selecting fCLK (not divided) as the operation clock (CKmk) and setting TDRnm = 0000H (n = 0, 1; m = 0 to 7), set the interrupt mask flag to "interrupt processing disabled" (TMMKnm = 1). Remarks 1. fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency 2. The above clock becomes high level for one period of fCLK from its rising edge (m = 0, 1). For details, see 6.5.1 Count clock (fTCLK). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 442 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-12. Format of Timer Clock Select Register 1 (TPS1) (4-ch version) Address: F01F6H, F01F7H After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TPSm 0 0 PRS PRS 0 0 PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS 131 130 121 120 113 112 111 110 103 102 101 100 PRS PRS 121 120 0 0 0 Selection of operation clock (CK12) Note fCLK/2 1 1 0 1 1 PRS PRS 131 130 fCLK = 2 MHz fCLK = 5 MHz fCLK = 10 MHz fCLK = 20 MHz fCLK = 32 MHz 1 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 16 MHz fCLK/2 2 500 kHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz fCLK/2 4 125 kHz 312.5 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz 2 MHz fCLK/2 6 31.25 kHZ 78.1 kHz 156.2 kHz 312.5 kHz 500 kHZ Selection of operation clock (CK13) Note fCLK = 2 MHz 8 fCLK = 5 MHz fCLK = 10 MHz fCLK = 20 MHz fCLK = 32 MHz 0 0 fCLK/2 7.81 kHz 19.5 kHz 39.1 kHz 78.1 kHz 125 kHz 0 1 fCLK/210 1.95 kHz 4.88 kHz 9.76 kHz 19.5 kHz 31.25 kHz 1 0 fCLK/212 488 Hz 1.22 kHz 2.44 kHz 4.88 kHz 7.81 kHz 1 14 122 HZ 305 Hz 610 Hz 1.22 kHz 1.95 kHZ 1 fCLK/2 Note The above format is applied to the TPS1 of the Group B, C, and D products. When changing the clock selected for fCLK (by changing the system clock control register (CKC) value), stop timer array unit (TTm = 00FFH). The timer array unit must also be stopped if the operating clock (fMCK) specified by using the CKSmn0, and CKSmn1 bits or the valid edge of the signal input from the TImn pin is selected as the count clock (fTCLK). Cautions 1. This format cannot be applied to the Group A and E products and unit 0 of the Group B, C, and D products (see the specifications of 8-channel version in Figure 6-11). 2. When selecting fCLK (not divided) as the operation clock (CKmk) and setting TDRnm = 0000H (n = 0, 1; m = 0 to 7), set the interrupt mask flag to "interrupt processing disabled" (TMMKnm = 1). By using channels 1 and 3 in the 8-bit timer mode and specifying CKm2 or CKm3 as the operation clock, the interval times shown in Table 6-4 can be achieved by using the interval timer function. Table 6-4. Interval Times Available for Operation Clock CKSm2 or CKSm3 Interval time (fCLK = 32 MHz) Note Clock CKm2 1 ms 10 ms fCLK/24 6 fCLK/28 10 fCLK/212 14 fCLK/2 fCLK/2 fCLK/2 Note 100s 2 fCLK/2 fCLK/2 CKm3 10 s The margin is within 5 %. Remarks 1. fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency 2. For details of a signal of fCLK/2i selected with the TPSm register, see 6.5.1 Count clock (fTCLK). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 443 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.3 Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) The TMRmn register sets an operation mode of channel n. This register is used to select the operation clock (fMCK), select the count clock, select the master/slave, select the 16 or 8-bit timer (only for channels 1 and 3), specify the start trigger and capture trigger, select the valid edge of the timer input, and specify the operation mode (interval, capture, event counter, one-count, or capture and one-count). Rewriting the TMRmn register is prohibited when the register is in operation (when TEmn = 1). However, bits 7 and 6 (CISmn1, CISmn0) can be rewritten even while the register is operating with some functions (when TEmn = 1) (for details, see 6.7 Independent Channel Operation Function of Timer Array Unit and 6.8 Simultaneous Channel Operation Function of Timer Array Unit. Set the TMRmn register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Caution The bits mounted depend on the channels in the bit 11 of TMRmn register. TMRm2, TMRm4, TMRm6: MASTERmn bit (n = 2, 4, 6) TMRm1, TMRm3: TMRm0, TMRm5, TMRm7: R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 SPLITmn bit (n = 1, 3) Fixed to 0 (n = 0, 5, 7) 444 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-13. Format of Timer Mode Register mn (TMRmn) (1/4) Address: F0190H, F0191H (TMR00) to F019EH, F019FH (TMR07), After reset: 0000H R/W F01D0H, F01D1H (TMR10) to F01DEH, F01DFH (TMR17) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 CCS MAST STS STS STS mn ERmn mn2 mn1 mn0 CIS CIS 0 0 mn1 mn0 7 6 5 4 0 0 TMRmn CKS CKS (n = 2, 4, 6) mn1 mn0 Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0 CCS SPLIT STS STS STS CIS CIS mn mn mn2 mn1 mn0 mn1 mn0 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 STS STS STS CIS CIS 0 0 mn2 mn1 mn0 mn1 mn0 TMRmn CKS CKS (n = 1, 3) mn1 mn0 Symbol 15 14 13 12 TMRmn CKS CKS 0 CCS (n = 0, 5, 7) mn1 mn0 mn CKS CKS 0 Note 3 2 1 0 MD MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 3 2 1 0 MD MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 3 2 1 0 MD MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 Selection of operation clock (fMCK) of channel n mn1 mn0 0 0 Operation clock CKm0 set by timer clock select register m (TPSm) 0 1 Operation clock CKm2 set by timer clock select register m (TPSm) 1 0 Operation clock CKm1 set by timer clock select register m (TPSm) 1 1 Operation clock CKm3 set by timer clock select register m (TPSm) Operation clock (fMCK ) is used by the edge detector. A count clock (fTCLK) and a sampling clock are generated depending on the setting of the CCSmn bit. CCS Selection of count clock (fTCLK) of channel n mn 0 Operation clock (fMCK) specified by the CKSmn0 and CKSmn1 bits 1 Valid edge of input signal input from the TImn pin Valid edge of input signal selected by TIS0 in channel 5 Count clock (fTCLK) is used for the timer/counter, output controller, and interrupt controller. Note Bit 11 is a read-only bit and fixed to 0. Writing to this bit is ignored. Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 13, 5, and 4 to "0". 2. The timer array unit must be stopped (TTm = 00FFH) if the clock selected for fCLK is changed (by changing the value of the system clock control register (CKC)), even if the operating clock specified by using the CKSmn0 and CKSmn1 bits (fMCK) or the valid edge of the signal input from the TImn pin is selected as the count clock (fTCLK). 3. Be sure to clear CKS1n0 (n = 0, 2) to "0" in the Group B, C, and D products. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. TMR1n is not provided in the Group A products. TMR17 to TMR14 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 445 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-13. Format of Timer Mode Register mn (TMRmn) (2/4) Address: F0190H, F0191H (TMR00) to F019EH, F019FH (TMR07), After reset: 0000H R/W F01D0H, F01D1H (TMR10) to F01DEH, F01DFH (TMR17) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 CCS MAST STS STS STS mn ERmn mn2 mn1 mn0 CIS CIS 0 0 mn1 mn0 7 6 5 4 0 0 TMRmn CKS CKS (n = 2, 4, 6) mn1 mn0 Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0 CCS SPLIT STS STS STS CIS CIS mn mn mn2 mn1 mn0 mn1 mn0 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 STS STS STS CIS CIS 0 0 mn2 mn1 mn0 mn1 mn0 TMRmn CKS CKS (n = 1, 3) mn1 mn0 Symbol 15 14 13 12 TMRmn CKS CKS 0 CCS (n = 0, 5, 7) mn1 mn0 0 Note mn 3 2 1 0 MD MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 3 2 1 0 MD MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 3 2 1 0 MD MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 (Bit 11 of TMRmn (n = 2, 4, 6)) MAS Selection between using channel n independently or TER simultaneously with another channel(as a slave or master) mn Operates in independent channel operation function or as slave channel in simultaneous channel operation 0 function. 1 Operates as master channel in simultaneous channel operation function. Only channels 2, 4, and 6 can be set as a master channel (MASTERmn = 1). Channels 0, 5, and 7 are fixed to 0 (channel 0 always operates as master regardless of the bit setting, because it is the highest channel). Clear the MASTERmn bit to 0 for a channel that is used with the independent channel operation function. (Bit 11 of TMRmn (n = 1, 3)) SPLI Selection of 8 or 16-bit timer operation for channels 1 and 3 Tmn 0 Operates as 16-bit timer. (Operates in independent channel operation function or as slave channel in simultaneous channel operation function.) 1 Operates as 8-bit timer. STS STS STS mn2 mn1 mn0 0 0 0 Only software trigger start is valid (other trigger sources are unselected). 0 0 1 Valid edge of the TImn pin input is used as both the start trigger and capture trigger. 0 1 0 Both the edges of the TImn pin input are used as a start trigger and a capture trigger. 1 0 0 Setting of start trigger or capture trigger of channel n Interrupt signal of the master channel is used (when the channel is used as a slave channel with the simultaneous channel operation function). Other than above Setting prohibited Note Bit 11 is a read-only bit and fixed to 0. Writing to this bit is ignored. In addition, channel 0 operates as master. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. TMR1n is not provided in the Group A products. TMR17 to TMR14 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 446 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-13. Format of Timer Mode Register mn (TMRmn) (3/4) Address: F0190H, F0191H (TMR00) to F019EH, F019FH (TMR07), After reset: 0000H R/W F01D0H, F01D1H (TMR10) to F01DEH, F01DFH (TMR17) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 CCS MAST STS STS STS mn ERmn mn2 mn1 mn0 CIS CIS 0 0 mn1 mn0 7 6 5 4 0 0 TMRmn CKS CKS (n = 2, 4, 6) mn1 mn0 Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0 CCS SPLIT STS STS STS CIS CIS mn mn mn2 mn1 mn0 mn1 mn0 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 STS STS STS CIS CIS 0 0 mn2 mn1 mn0 mn1 mn0 TMRmn CKS CKS (n = 1, 3) mn1 mn0 Symbol 15 14 13 12 TMRmn CKS CKS 0 CCS (n = 0, 5, 7) mn1 mn0 mn 0 Note CIS CIS mn1 mn0 0 0 Falling edge 0 1 Rising edge 1 0 Both edges (when low-level width is measured) 3 2 1 0 MD MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 3 2 1 0 MD MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 3 2 1 0 MD MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 Selection of TImn pin input valid edge Start trigger: Falling edge, Capture trigger: Rising edge 1 1 Both edges (when high-level width is measured) Start trigger: Rising edge, Capture trigger: Falling edge If both the edges are specified when the value of the STSmn2 to STSmn0 bits is other than 010B, set the CISmn1 to CISmn0 bits to 10B. Note Bit 11 is a read-only bit and fixed to 0. Writing to this bit is ignored. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. TMR1n is not provided in the Group A products. TMR17 to TMR14 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 447 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-13. Format of Timer Mode Register mn (TMRmn) (4/4) Address: F0190H, F0191H (TMR00) to F019EH, F019FH (TMR07), After reset: 0000H R/W F01D0H, F01D1H (TMR10) to F01DEH, F01DFH (TMR17) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 CCS MAST STS STS STS mn ERmn mn2 mn1 mn0 CIS CIS 0 0 mn1 mn0 7 6 5 4 0 0 TMRmn CKS CKS (n = 2, 4, 6) mn1 mn0 Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0 CCS SPLIT STS STS STS CIS CIS mn mn mn2 mn1 mn0 mn1 mn0 11 7 6 5 4 0 0 TMRmn CKS CKS (n = 1, 3) mn1 mn0 Symbol 15 14 13 12 TMRmn CKS CKS 0 CCS (n = 0, 5, 7) mn1 mn0 0 mn MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 0 0 0 10 9 8 Note STS STS STS CIS CIS 1 mn2 mn1 mn0 mn1 mn0 Operation mode of channel n 3 2 1 0 MD MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 3 2 1 0 MD MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 3 2 1 0 MD MD MD MD mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 Corresponding function Count operation of TCR Interval timer / Square wave Interval timer mode Counting down output / Divider function / PWM output (master) 0 1 0 Input pulse interval Capture mode Counting up measurement 0 1 1 Event counter mode External event counter Counting down 1 0 0 One-count mode Delay counter / One-shot pulse Counting down output / PWM output (slave) 1 1 0 Capture & one-count mode Measurement of high-/low-level Counting up width of input signal Other than above Setting prohibited Each operation mode varies depending on the MDmn0 bit (see table below). Operation mode MD (Value set by the MDmn3 to MDmn1 bits mn0 Setting of starting counting and interrupt (see table above)) Interval timer mode 0 (0, 0, 0) Timer interrupt is not generated when counting is started (timer output does not change, either). Capture mode 1 (0, 1, 0) Timer interrupt is generated when counting is started (timer output also changes). Event counter mode 0 (0, 1, 1) Timer interrupt is not generated when counting is started (timer output does not change, either). One-count mode Note 2 0 (1, 0, 0) Start trigger is invalid during counting operation. At that time, interrupt is not generated, either. 1 Start trigger is valid during counting operationNote 3. At that time, interrupt is also generated. Capture & one-count mode (1, 1, 0) 0 Timer interrupt is not generated when counting is started (timer output does not change, either). Start trigger is invalid during counting operation. At that time interrupt is not generated, either. Other than above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Setting prohibited 448 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Notes 1. Bit 11 is a read-only bit and fixed to 0. Writing to this bit is ignored. 2. In one-count mode, interrupt output (INTTMmn) when starting a count operation and TOmn output are not controlled. 3. If the start trigger (TSmn = 1) is issued during operation, the counter is initialized and recounting is started (no interrupt request is generated). Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. TMR1n is not provided in the Group A products. 3. TMR17 to TMR14 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 449 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.4 Timer status register mn (TSRmn) The TSRmn register indicates the overflow status of the counter of channel n. The TSRmn register is valid only in the capture mode (MDmn3 to MDmn1 = 010B) and capture & one-count mode (MDmn3 to MDmn1 = 110B). See Table 6-5 for the operation of the OVF bit in each operation mode and set/clear conditions. The TSRmn register can be read by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. The lower 8 bits of the TSRmn register can be set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with TSRmnL. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Figure 6-14. Format of Timer Status Register mn (TSRmn) Address: F01A0H, F01A1H (TSR00) to F01AEH, F01AFH (TSR07), After reset: 0000H R F01E0H, F01E1H (TSR10) to F01EEH, F01EFH (TSR17) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TSRmn 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OVF OVF Counter overflow status of channel n 0 Overflow does not occur. 1 Overflow occurs. When OVF = 1, this flag is cleared (OVF = 0) when the next value is captured without overflow. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. TSR1n is not provided in the Group A products. 3. TSR17 to TSR14 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. Table 6-5. OVF Bit Operation and Set/Clear Conditions in Each Operation Mode Timer operation mode OVF bit Set/clear conditions Capture mode clear When no overflow has occurred upon capturing Capture & one-count mode set When an overflow has occurred upon capturing Interval timer mode clear Event counter mode One-count mode Remark set (Use prohibited) The OVF bit does not change immediately after the counter has overflowed, but changes upon the subsequent capture. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 450 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.5 Timer channel enable status register m (TEm) The TEm register is used to enable or stop the timer operation of each channel. Each bit of the TEm register corresponds to each bit of the timer channel start register m (TSm) and the timer channel stop register m (TTm). When a bit of the TSm register is set to 1, the corresponding bit of this register is set to 1. When a bit of the TTm register is set to 1, the corresponding bit of this register is cleared to 0. The TEm register can be read by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. The lower 8 bits of the TEm register can be set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with TEmL. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Figure 6-15. Format of Timer Channel Enable Status Register m (TEm) Address: F01B0H, F01B1H (TE0), F01F0H, F01F1H (TE1) After reset: 0000H R Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TEm 0 0 0 0 TEHm 0 TEHm 0 TEm TEm TEm TEm TEm TEm TEm TEm 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 1 TEH Indication of whether operation of the higher 8-bit timer is enabled or stopped when channel 3 is in the 8-bit m3 timer mode 0 Operation is stopped. 1 Operation is enabled. TEH Indication of whether operation of the higher 8-bit timer is enabled or stopped when channel 1 is in the 8-bit m1 timer mode 0 Operation is stopped. 1 Operation is enabled. TEmn Indication of operation enable/stop status of channel n 0 Operation is stopped. 1 Operation is enabled. This bit displays whether operation of the lower 8-bit timer for TEm1 and TEm3 is enabled or stopped when channel 1 or 3 is in the 8-bit timer mode. Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 15 to 12, 10, and 8 to "0". 2. Be sure to clear TE1n (n = 7 to 4) to "0" in the Group B, C, and D products. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. TE1n is not provided in the Group A products. TE17 to TE14 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 451 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.6 Timer channel start register m (TSm) The TSm register is a trigger register that is used to initialize timer count register mn (TCRmn) and start the counting operation of each channel. When a bit of this register is set to 1, the corresponding bit of timer channel enable status register m (TEm) is set to 1. The TSmn, TSHm1, TSHm3 bits are immediately cleared when operation is enabled (TEmn, TEHm1, TEHm3 = 1), because they are trigger bits. The TSm register can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the lower 8 bits of the TSm register with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with TSmL. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Figure 6-16. Format of Timer Channel Start Register m (TSm) Address: F01B2H, F01B3H (TS0), F01F2H, F01F3H (TS1) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TSm 0 0 0 0 TSHm 0 TSHm 0 TSm TSm TSm TSm TSm TSm TSm TSm 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 1 TSH Trigger to enable operation (start operation) of the higher 8-bit timer when channel 3 is in the 8-bit timer mode m3 0 No trigger operation 1 The TEHm3 bit is set to 1 and the count operation becomes enabled. The TCRm3 register count operation start in the interval timer mode in the count operation enabled state (see Table 6-6 in 6.5.2 Start timing of counter). TSH Trigger to enable operation (start operation) of the higher 8-bit timer when channel 1 is in the 8-bit timer mode m1 0 No trigger operation 1 The TEHm1 bit is set to 1 and the count operation becomes enabled. The TCRm1 register count operation start in the interval timer mode in the count operation enabled state (see Table 6-6 in 6.5.2 Start timing of counter). TSm Operation enable (start) trigger of channel n n 0 No trigger operation 1 The TEmn bit is set to 1 and the count operation becomes enabled. The TCRmn register count operation start in the count operation enabled state varies depending on each operation mode (see Table 6-6 in 6.5.2 Start timing of counter). This bit is the trigger to enable operation (start operation) of the lower 8-bit timer for TSm1 and TSm3 when channel 1 or 3 is in the 8-bit timer mode. Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 15 to 12, 10, and 8 to "0". 2. Be sure to clear TS1n (n = 7 to 4) to "0" in the Group B, C, and D products. 3. When switching from a function that does not use TImn pin input to one that does, the following wait period is required from when timer mode register mn (TMRmn) is set until the TSmn (TSHm1, TSHm3) bit is set to 1. When the TImn pin noise filter is enabled (TNFENmn = 1): Four cycles of the operation clock (fMCK) When the TImn pin noise filter is disabled (TNFENmn = 0): Two cycles of the operation clock (fMCK) Remarks 1. When the TSm register is read, 0 is always read. 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 3. TS1n is not provided in the Group A products. TS17 to TS14 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 452 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.7 Timer channel stop register m (TTm) The TTm register is a trigger register that is used to stop the counting operation of each channel. When a bit of this register is set to 1, the corresponding bit of timer channel enable status register m (TEm) is cleared to 0. The TTmn, TTHm1, TTHm3 bits are immediately cleared when operation is stopped (TEmn, TTHm1, TTHm3 = 0), because they are trigger bits. The TTm register can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the lower 8 bits of the TTm register with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with TTmL. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Figure 6-17. Format of Timer Channel Stop Register m (TTm) Address: F01B4H, F01B5H (TT0), F01F4H, F01F5H (TT1) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TTm 0 0 0 0 TTHm 0 TTHm 0 TTm TTm TTm TTm TTm TTm TTm TTm 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 TTH 1 Trigger to stop operation of the higher 8-bit timer when channel 3 is in the 8-bit timer mode m3 0 No trigger operation 1 Operation is stopped (stop trigger is generated). TTH Trigger to stop operation of the higher 8-bit timer when channel 1 is in the 8-bit timer mode m1 0 No trigger operation 1 Operation is stopped (stop trigger is generated). TTm Operation stop trigger of channel n n 0 No trigger operation 1 Operation is stopped (stop trigger is generated). This bit is the trigger to stop operation of the lower 8-bit timer for TTm1 and TTm3 when channel 1 or 3 is in the 8-bit timer mode. Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 15 to 12, 10, and 8 of the TTm register to "0". 2. Be sure to clear TT1n (n = 7 to 4) to "0" in the Group B, C, and D products. Remarks 1. When the TTm register is read, 0 is always read. 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1),n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 3. TT1n is not provided in the Group A products. TT17 to TT14 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 453 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.8 Timer input select register 0 (TIS0) The TIS0 register selects an input source of the timer array unit 0. Set the TIS0 register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 6-18. Format of Timer Input Select Register 0 (TIS0) Address: F0074H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TIS0 TIS07 Note 1 TIS06 Note 1 0 TIS04 Note 2 0 TIS02 TIS01 TIS00 TIS07 Note 1 Selection of timer input used with channel 3 of timer array unit 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI03) 1 Event input signal from ELC Note 3 TIS06 Note 1 Selection of timer input used with channel 2 of timer array unit 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI02) 1 Event input signal from ELC Note 3 TIS04 Note 2 Selection of timer input used with channel 0 of timer array unit 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI00) 1 Event input signal from ELC Note 3 TIS02 TIS01 TIS00 0 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI01) 0 0 1 Event input signal from ELC Note 3 0 1 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI01) 0 1 1 1 0 0 Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIL) 1 0 1 Sub/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock (fSL) Other than above Selection of timer input used with channel 1 of timer array unit 0 Setting prohibited Notes 1. Provided only in products of group E. Write "0" when writing to the timer input select register 0 (TIS0) of the other products. 2. Provided only in products of groups D and E. Write "0" when writing to the timer input select register 0 (TIS0) of the other products. 3. Provided only in products of groups D and E. Do not set in the other products. Cautions 1. When selecting an event input signal from the ELC using timer input select register 0 (TIS0), select fCLK using timer clock select register 0 (TPS0). 2. Do not change the select bit of the timer input while inputting data to the TImn pin (m = 0, 1; n = 0 to 7). 3. Each of the high-level and low-level widths of the timer input to be selected should be (1/fMCK + 10 ns) or more. So, the TIS02 bit cannot be set to 1 when fSL is selected as fCLK (the CSS bit in the CKC register is set to 1). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 454 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.9 Timer input select register 1 (TIS1) The TIS1 register selects an input source of the timer array unit 0. The TIS17 and TIS16 bits in the TIS1 register are used in conjunction with the serial array unit to implement the LIN-bus communication operation in channel 7. When the TIS17 and TIS16 bits are set to 1 and 0 respectively, the input signal on the serial data input pin (RxD0) is selected as the timer input. Set the TIS17 and TIS16 bits at the same time as setting the ISC0 bit in the ISC register (input switch control register). Set the TIS1 register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 6-19. Format of Timer Input Select Register 1 (TIS1) Address: F0075H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TIS1 TIS17 TIS16 0 TIS14 0 TIS12 0 TIS10 TIS17 TIS16 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI07) 0 1 RTC1HZ output signal 1 0 RxD0 pin (detection of the wake-up signal and measurement of the low-level width of Selection of timer input used with channel 7 of timer array unit 0 the sync break field and the pulse width of the sync field) 1 1 Setting prohibited TIS14 Selection of timer input used with channel 6 of timer array unit 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI06) 1 RTC1HZ output signal TIS12 Selection of timer input used with channel 5 of timer array unit 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI05) 1 Input signal of timer input pin (TI03) TIS10 Selection of timer input used with channel 4 of timer array unit 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI04) 1 Input signal of timer input pin (TI03) Cautions 1. Do not change the select bit of the timer input while inputting data to the TImn pin (m = 0, 1; n = 0 to 7). 2. When selecting the RTC1HZ output signal for the clock source of the timer input used in channels 7 and 6 in the TAU, set the TIS17, TIS16, and TIS14 bits to 0, 1, and 1, respectively, and select the RTC1HZ output signal for the timer input of channels 7 and 6. Remark Set the TIS17 and TIS16 bits to 1 and 0 respectively and select the input signal of the RxD0 pin before using the LIN-bus communication. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 455 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.10 Timer input select register 2 (TIS2) The TIS2 register selects an input source of the timer array unit 1. Set the TIS2 register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. This function is valid only for the Group E products. Figure 6-20. Format of Timer Input Select Register 2 (TIS2) Address: F007AH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TIS2 0 0 0 0 TIS23 TIS22 0 0 TIS22 Selection of timer input used with channel 6 of timer array unit 1 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI16) 1 RTC1HZ output signal TIS23 Selection of timer input used with channel 7 of timer array unit 1 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI17) 1 RTC1HZ output signal Cautions 1. Do not change the select bit of the timer input while inputting data to the TImn pin (m = 0, 1; n = 0 to 7). 2. When selecting the RTC1HZ output signal for the clock source of the timer input used in channels 7 and 6 in the TAU, set the TIS23 and TIS22 bits to 1 and select the RTC1HZ output signal for the timer input of channels 7 and 6. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 456 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.11 Timer output enable register m (TOEm) The TOEm register is used to enable or disable timer output of each channel. Channel n for which timer output has been enabled becomes unable to rewrite the value of the TOmn bit of timer output register m (TOm) described later by software, and the value reflecting the setting of the timer output function through the count operation is output from the timer output pin (TOmn). The TOEm register can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the lower 8 bits of the TOEm register with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with TOEmL. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Figure 6-21. Format of Timer Output Enable Register m (TOEm) Address: F01BAH, F01BBH (TOE0), F01FAH, F01FBH (TOE1) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TOEm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOE TOE TOE TOE TOE TOE TOE TOE m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 TOE Timer output enable/disable of channel n mn 0 Timer output is disabled. Timer operation is not applied to the TOmn bit and the output is fixed. Writing to the TOmn bit is enabled. 1 Timer output is enabled. Timer operation is applied to the TOmn bit and an output waveform is generated. Writing to the TOmn bit is ignored. Caution Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8 to "0". (unit 1, 0: Group E products, unit 0: Group A products) Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8 of unit 0 and bits 15 to 4 of unit 1 to "0". (Group B, C, and D products) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. TOE1n is not provided in the Group A products. TOE17 to TOE14 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 457 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.12 Timer output register m (TOm) The TOm register is a buffer register of timer output of each channel. The value of each bit in this register is output from the timer output pin (TOmn) of each channel. The TOmn bit oh this register can be rewritten by software only when timer output is disabled (TOEmn = 0). When timer output is enabled (TOEmn = 1), rewriting this register by software is ignored, and the value is changed only by the timer operation. Due to pin arrangement, when using the pins shared by TImn and TOmn as port pins, set the corresponding TOmn bit to "0". The TOm register can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the lower 8 bits of the TOm register with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with TOmL. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Figure 6-22. Format of Timer Output Register m (TOm) Address: F01B8H, F01B9H (TO0), F01F8H, F01F9H (TO1) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TOm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOm TOm TOm TOm TOm TOm TOm TOm 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TOmn Caution Timer output of channel n 0 Timer output value is "0". 1 Timer output value is "1". Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8 to "0". (unit 1, 0: Group E products, unit 0: Group A products) Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8 of unit 0 and bits 15 to 4 of unit 1 to "0". (Group B, C, and D products) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. TO1n is not provided in the Group A products. TO17 to TO14 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 458 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.13 Timer output level register m (TOLm) The TOLm register is a register that controls the timer output level of each channel. The setting of the inverted output of channel n by this register is reflected at the timing of set or reset of the timer output signal while the timer output is enabled (TOEmn = 1) in the Slave channel output mode (TOMmn = 1). In the master channel output mode (TOMmn = 0), this register setting is invalid. The TOLm register can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the lower 8 bits of the TOLm register with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with TOLmL. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Figure 6-23. Format of Timer Output Level Register m (TOLm) Address: F01BCH, F01BDH (TOL0), F01FCH, F01FDH (TOL1) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TOLm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOL TOL TOL TOL TOL TOL TOL 0 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 TOL Control of timer output level of channel n mn Caution 0 Non-inverted output (active-high) 1 Inverted output (active-low) Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8 and 0 to "0". (unit 1, 0: Group E products, unit 0: Group A products) Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8 and 0 of unit 0 and bits 15 to 4 and 0 of unit 1 to "0". (Group B, C, and D products) Remarks 1. If the value of this register is rewritten during timer operation, the timer output logic is inverted when the timer output signal changes next, instead of immediately after the register value is rewritten. 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 3. TOL1n is not provided in the Group A products. TOL17 to TOL14 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 459 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.14 Timer output mode register m (TOMm) The TOMm register is used to control the timer output mode of each channel. When a channel is used for the independent channel operation function, set the corresponding bit of the channel to be used to 0. When a channel is used for the simultaneous channel operation function (PWM output, one-shot pulse output, or multiple PWM output), set the corresponding bit of the master channel to 0 and the corresponding bit of the slave channel to 1. The setting of each channel n by this register is reflected at the timing when the timer output signal is set or reset while the timer output is enabled (TOEmn = 1). The TOMm register can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the lower 8 bits of the TOMm register with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with TOMmL. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Figure 6-24. Format of Timer Output Mode Register m (TOMm) Address: F01BEH, F01BFH (TOM0), F01FEH, F01FFH (TOM1) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TOMm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOM TOM TOM TOM TOM TOM TOM 0 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 TOM Control of timer output mode of channel n mn 0 Master channel output mode (to produce toggle output by timer interrupt request signal (INTTMmn)) 1 Slave channel output mode (output is set by the timer interrupt request signal (INTTMmn) of the master channel, and reset by the timer interrupt request signal (INTTM0p) of the slave channel) Caution Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8 and 0 to "0". (unit 1, 0: Group E products, unit 0: Group A products) Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8 and 0 of unit 0 and bits 15 to 4 and 0 of unit 1 to "0". (Group B, C, and D products) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1) n: Channel number n = 0 to 7 (n = 0, 2, 4, 6 for master channel) p: Slave channel number n < p 7 (For details of the relation between the master channel and slave channel, refer to 6.4.1 Basic rules of simultaneous channel operation function.) 2. TOM1n is not provided in the Group A products. TOM17 to TOM14 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 460 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.15 Noise filter enable registers 1, 2 (NFEN1, NFEN2) The NFEN1, NFEN2 registers is used to set whether the noise filter can be used for the timer input signal to each channel. Enable the noise filter by setting the corresponding bits to 1 on the pins in need of noise removal. When the noise filter is ON, match detection and synchronization of the 2 clocks is performed with the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fMCK). When the noise filter is OFF, only synchronization is performed with the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fMCK) Note. Set the NFEN1 and NFEN2 registers by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Note For details, see 6.5.1 (2) When valid edge of input signal via the TImn pin is selected (CCSmn = 1) and 6.5.2 Start timing of counter. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 461 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-25. Format of Noise Filter Enable Register 1 (NFEN1) (1/2) Address: F0071H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NFEN1 TNFEN07 TNFEN06 TNFEN05 TNFEN04 TNFEN03 TNFEN02 TNFEN01 TNFEN00 TNFEN07 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI07 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN06 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI06 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN05 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI05 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN04 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI04 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN03 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI03 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN02 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI02 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN01 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI01 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN00 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI00 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON Caution The pin to be used can be changed by setting the TIS17 and TIS16 bits in the timer input select register 1 (TIS1). When TIS17, TIS16 = 0, 0: The use of the noise filter of the TI07 pin can be enabled or disabled. When TIS17, TIS16 = 1, 0: The use of the noise filter of the RxD0 pin can be enabled or disabled. Remark The presence or absence of timer I/O pins of channel 0 to 7 depends on the product. See Table 6-2 Timer I/O Pins provided in Each Product for details. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 462 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-25. Format of Noise Filter Enable Register 2 (NFEN2) (2/2) Address: F0072H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NFEN2 TNFEN17 TNFEN16 TNFEN15 TNFEN14 TNFEN13 TNFEN12 TNFEN11 TNFEN10 TNFEN17 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI17 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN16 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI16 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN15 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI15 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN14 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI14 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN13 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI13 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN12 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI12 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN11 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI11 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON TNFEN10 Enable/disable using noise filter of TI00 pin input signal 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON Remarks 1. The presence or absence of timer I/O pins of channel 0 to 7 depends on the product. See Table 6-2 Timer I/O Pins provided in Each Product for details. 2. NFEN2 is not provided in the Group A products. Bits 7 to 4 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 463 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.16 Port mode registers 1, 3, 4, 7, 12 (PM1, PM3, PM4, PM7, PM12) These registers set input/output of ports 1, 3, 4, 7, 12 in 1-bit units. The presence or absence of timer I/O pins depends on the product. When using the timer array unit, set the following port mode registers according to the product used. Group A and B products: PM1, PM3, PM12 Group C and D products: PM1, PM3, PM4, PM12 Group E products: PM1, PM3, PM4, PM7, PM12 When using the ports (such as P17/TO00/TI00 and P16/TO2/TI02) to be shared with the timer output pin for timer output, set the port mode register (PMxx) bit and port register (Pxx) bit corresponding to each port to "0". Example: When using P16/TO02/TI02 for timer output Set the PM16 bit of port mode register 1 to 0. Set the P16 bit of port register 1 to 0. When using the ports (such as P17/TO00/TI00 and P16/TO2/TI02) to be shared with the timer output pin for timer input, set the port mode register (PMxx) bit corresponding to each port to 1. At this time, the port register (Pxx) bit may be 0 or 1. Example: When using P16/TO02/TI02 for timer input Set the PM16 bit of port mode register 1 to 1. P16 bit of port register may be 0 or 1. Set the PM1, PM3, PM4, PM7, and PM12 registers by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 464 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-26. Format of Port Mode Registers 1, 3, 4, 7, 12 (PM1, PM3, PM4, PM7, PM12) (100-pin products) Address: FFF21H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10 Address: FFF23H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM3 1 1 1 PM34 PM33 PM32 PM31 PM30 Address: FFF24H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM4 PM47 PM46 PM45 PM44 PM43 PM42 PM41 PM40 Address: FFF27H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM7 PM77 PM76 PM75 PM74 PM73 PM72 PM71 PM70 Address: FFF2CH After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM12 PM127 PM126 PM125 1 1 1 1 PM120 PMmn Remark Pmn pin I/O mode selection (m = 1, 3, 4, 7, 12; n = 0 to 7) 0 Output mode (output buffer on) 1 Input mode (output buffer off) The figure shown above presents the format of port mode registers 1, 3, 4, 7, and 12 of the 100-pin products. The format of the port mode register of other products, see CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 465 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.17 PWM output delay control register 1 (PWMDLY1) This register controls output delay of PWM output signal output from the TO0n pin. Set the PWMDLY1 register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Address: F022BH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 PWMDLY1 TO071 TO070 TO061 TO060 TO051 TO050 TO041 TO040 5 4 3 2 1 0 TO011 TO010 0 0 Address: F022AH Symbol PWMDLY1 After reset: 00H 7 6 TO031 Note R/W Note Note Note TO030 TO021 Note TO020 TO0n1 TO0n0 PWM output delay control of timer array unit 0 TO0n 0 0 No delay 0 1 Delayed by one cycle of the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK). 1 0 Delayed by two cycles of the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK). 1 1 Delayed by three cycles of the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK). If this register is set for a delay, this affects PWM output of TO0n, but doesn't affect the operation of the timer output signal to peripheral functions. Remark n: Channel number (n = 1 to 7) Cautions 1. Set this register before outputting a PWM output signal (do not change the setting during operation). 2. Set this register with a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Do not set this register with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. 3. If this register is not used for PWM output, it should be cleared to 0. This is because the timer output is delayed. 4. When setting this register after the PWM output is stopped, wait for four cycles of the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) before the setting. 5. Even if this register is set for a delay, this doesn't affect the operation of other pin functions multiplexed on the same pin as the TO0n pin function (n = 1 to 7). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 466 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.3.18 PWM output delay control register 2 (PWMDLY2) This register controls output delay of PWM output signal output from the TO1n pin. Set the PWMDLY2 register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Address: F022DH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 PWMDLY2 TO171 TO170 TO161 TO160 TO151 TO150 TO141 TO140 Address: F022CH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PWMDLY2 TO131 TO130 TO121 TO120 TO111 TO110 0 0 TO1n1 TO1n0 PWM output delay control of timer array unit 1 TO1n 0 0 No delay 0 1 Delayed by one cycle of the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK). 1 0 Delayed by two cycles of the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK). 1 1 Delayed by three cycles of the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK). Remarks 1. n: Channel number (n = 1 to 7) 2. Bits 15 to 0 are not provided in the Group A products. Bits 15 to 8 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. Cautions 1. Set this register before outputting a PWM output signal (do not change the setting during operation). 2. Set this register with a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Do not set this register with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. 3. If this register is not used for PWM output, it should be cleared to 0. This is because the timer output is delayed. 4. When setting this register after the PWM output is stopped, wait for four cycles of the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) before the setting. 5. Even if this register is set for a delay, this doesn't affect the operation of other pin functions multiplexed on the same pin as the TO1n pin function (n = 1 to 7). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 467 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.4 Basic Rules of Timer Array Unit 6.4.1 Basic rules of simultaneous channel operation function When simultaneously using multiple channels, namely, a combination of a master channel (a reference timer mainly counting the cycle) and slave channels (timers operating according to the master channel), the following rules apply. (1) Only an even channel (channel 0, 2, 4, 6) can be set as a master channel. (2) Any channel, except channel 0, can be set as a slave channel. (3) The slave channel must be lower than the master channel. Example: If channel 2 is set as a master channel, channel 3 or those that follow (channels 3, 4, 5, ...) can be set as a slave channel. (4) Two or more slave channels can be set for one master channel. (5) When two or more master channels are to be used, slave channels with a master channel between them may not be set. Example: If channels 0 and 4 are set as master channels, channels 1 to 3 can be set as the slave channel of master channel 0. Channels 5 to 7 cannot be set as the slave channel of master channel 0. (6) The operating clock for a slave channel in combination with a master channel must be the same as that of the master channel. The CKSmn0, CKSmn1 bits (bit 15, 14 of timer mode register mn (TMRmn)) of the slave channel that operates in combination with the master channel must be the same value as that of the master channel. (7) A master channel can transmit INTTMmn (interrupt), start software trigger, and count clock to the lower channels. (8) A slave channel can use INTTMmn (interrupt), a start software trigger, or the count clock of the master channel as a source clock, but cannot transmit its own INTTMmn (interrupt), start software trigger, or count clock to channels with lower channel numbers. (9) A master channel cannot use INTTMmn (interrupt), a start software trigger, or the count clock from the other higher master channel as a source clock. (10) To simultaneously start channels that operate in combination, the channel start trigger bit (TSmn) of the channels in combination must be set at the same time. (11) During the counting operation, a TSmn bit of a master channel or TSmn bits of all channels which are operating simultaneously can be set. It cannot be applied to TSmn bits of slave channels alone. (12) To stop the channels in combination simultaneously, the channel stop trigger bit (TTmn) of the channels in combination must be set at the same time. (13) Timer mode register m0 (TMRm0) has no master bit (it is fixed as "0"). However, as channel 0 is the highest channel, it can be used as a master channel during simultaneous operation. The rules of the simultaneous channel operation function are applied in a channel group (a master channel and slave channels forming one simultaneous channel operation function). If two or more channel groups that do not operate in combination are specified, the basic rules described above do not apply to the channel groups. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 468 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Example 1 TAU0 CK00 Channel 0: Master Channel group 1 (Simultaneous channel operation function) Channel 1: Slave Channel group 2 (Simultaneous channel operation function) CK01 Channel 2: Master Channel 3: Slave * The operating clock of channel group 1 may be different from that of channel group 2. Example 2 TAU0 CK00 CK01 Channel 0: Master Channel group 1 (Simultaneous channel operation function) Channel 1: Independent channel operation function Channel 2: Slave CK00 Channel 3: Independent channel operation function R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 * A channel that operates independent channel operation function may be between a master and a slave of channel group 1. Furthermore, the operating clock may be set separately. 469 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.4.2 Basic rules of 8-bit timer operation function (channels 1 and 3 only) The 8-bit timer operation function makes it possible to use a 16-bit timer channel in a configuration consisting of two 8bit timer channels. This function can only be used for channels 1 and 3, and there are several rules for using it. The basic rules for this function are as follows: (1) The 8-bit timer operation function applies only to channels 1 and 3. (2) When using 8-bit timers, set the SPLIT bit of timer mode register mn (TMRmn) to 1. (3) The higher 8 bits can be operated as the interval timer function. (4) At the start of operation, the higher 8 bits output INTTMm1H/INTTMm3H (an interrupt) (which is the same operation performed when MDmn0 is set to 1). (5) The operation clock of the higher 8 bits is selected according to the CKSmn1 and CKSmn0 bits of the lower-bit TMRmn register. (6) For the higher 8 bits, the TSHm1/TSHm3 bit is manipulated to start channel operation and the TTHm1/TTHm3 bit is manipulated to stop channel operation. The channel status can be checked using the TEHm1/TEHm3 bit. (7) The lower 8 bits operate according to the TMRmn register settings. The following three functions support operation of the lower 8 bits: Interval timer function External event counter function Delay count function (8) For the lower 8 bits, the TSm1/TSm3 bit is manipulated to start channel operation and the TTm1/TTm3 bit is manipulated to stop channel operation. The channel status can be checked using the TEm1/TEm3 bit. (9) During 16-bit operation, manipulating the TSHm1, TSHm3, TTHm1, and TTHm3 bits is invalid. The TSm1, TSm3, TTm1, and TTm3 bits are manipulated to operate channels 1 and 3. The TEHm3 and TEHm1 bits are not changed. (10) For the 8-bit timer function, the simultaneous operation functions (one-shot pulse, PWM, and multiple PWM) cannot be used. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 1, 3) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 470 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.5 Operation Timing of Counter 6.5.1 Count clock (fTCLK) The count clock (fTCLK) of the timer array unit can be selected between following by CCSmn bit of timer mode register mn (TMRmn). Operation clock (fMCK) specified by the CKSmn0 and CKSmn1 bits Valid edge of input signal input from the TImn pin Because the timer array unit is designed to operate in synchronization with fCLK, the timings of the count clock (fTCLK) are shown below. (1) When operation clock (fMCK) specified by the CKSmn0 and CKSmn1 bits is selected (CCSmn = 0) The count clock (fTCLK) is between fCLK to fCLK /215 by setting of timer clock select register m (TPSm). When a divided fCLK is selected, however, the clock is a signal which becomes high level for one period of fCLK from its rising edge. When fCLK is selected, the clock is fixed high. Counting of timer count register mn (TCRmn) delayed by one period of fCLK from rising edge of the count clock, because of synchronization with fCLK. But, this is described as "counting at rising edge of the count clock", as a matter of convenience. Figure 6-27. Timing of fCLK and count clock (fTCLK) (When CCSmn = 0) fCLK fCLK/2 fCLK/4 fTCLK ( = fMCK = CKmn) fCLK/8 fCLK/16 Remarks 1. : Rising edge of the count clock : Synchronization, increment/decrement of counter 2. fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 471 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT (2) When valid edge of input signal via the TImn pin is selected (CCSmn = 1) The count clock (fTCLK) becomes the signal that detects valid edge of input signal via the TImn pin and synchronizes next rising fMCK. The count clock (fTCLK) is delayed for 1 to 2 period of fMCK from the input signal via the TImn pin (when a noise filter is used, the delay becomes 3 to 4 clock). Counting of timer count register mn (TCRmn) delayed by one period of fCLK from rising edge of the count clock, because of synchronization with fCLK. But, this is described as "counting at valid edge of input signal via the TImn pin", as a matter of convenience. Figure 6-28. Timing of count clock (fTCLK) (When CCSmn = 1, noise filter unused) fCLK fMCK TSmn(Write) <1> TEmn TImn input <2> Sampling wave Edge detection <3> Edge detection Rising edge detection signal (fTCLK) <1> Setting TSmn bit to 1 enables the timer to be started and to become wait state for valid edge of input signal via the TImn pin. <2> The rise of input signal via the TImn pin is sampled by fMCK. <3> The edge is detected by the rising of the sampled signal and the detection signal (count clock) is output. Remarks 1. : Rising edge of the count clock : Synchronization, increment/decrement of counter 2. fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock fMCK: Operation clock of channel n 3. The waveform of the input signal via TImn pin of the input pulse interval measurement, the measurement of high/low width of input signal, and the delay counter, and the one-shot pulse output are the same as that shown in Figure 6-28. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 472 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.5.2 Start timing of counter Timer count register mn (TCRmn) becomes enabled to operation by setting of TSmn bit of timer channel start register m (TSm). Operations from count operation enabled state to timer count Register mn (TCRmn) count start is shown in Table 6-6. Table 6-6. Operations from Count Operation Enabled State to Timer count Register mn (TCRmn) Count Start Timer operation mode Interval timer mode Operation when TSmn = 1 is set No operation is carried out from start trigger detection (TSmn=1) until count clock generation. The first count clock loads the value of the TDRmn register to the TCRmn register and the subsequent count clock performs count down operation (see 6.5.3 (1) Start timing in interval timer mode). Event counter mode Writing 1 to the TSmn bit loads the value of the TDRmn register to the TCRmn register. The subsequent count clock performs count down operation. The external trigger detection selected by the STSmn2 to STSmn0 bits in the TMRmn register does not start count operation (see 6.5.3 (2) Start timing in event counter mode). Capture mode No operation is carried out from start trigger detection until count clock generation. The first count clock loads 0000H to the TCRmn register and the subsequent count clock performs count up operation (see 6.5.3 (3) Start timing in capture mode). One-count mode The waiting-for-start-trigger state is entered by writing 1 to the TSmn bit while the timer is stopped (TEmn = 0). No operation is carried out from start trigger detection until count clock generation. The first count clock loads the value of the TDRmn register to the TCRmn register and the subsequent count clock performs count down operation (see 6.5.3 (4) Start timing in one-count mode). Capture & one-count mode The waiting-for-start-trigger state is entered by writing 1 to the TSmn bit while the timer is stopped (TEmn = 0). No operation is carried out from start trigger detection until count clock generation. The first count clock loads 0000H to the TCRmn register and the subsequent count clock performs count up operation (see 6.5.3 (5) Start timing in capture & one-count mode (when high-level width is measured)). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 473 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.5.3 Operation of counter Here, the counter operation in each mode is explained. (1) Start timing in interval timer mode <1> Operation is enabled (TEmn = 1) by writing 1 to the TSmn bit. Timer count register mn (TCRmn) holds the initial value until count clock generation. <2> A start trigger is generated at the first count clock after operation is enabled. <3> When the MDmn0 bit is set to 1, INTTMmn is generated by the start trigger. <4> By the first count clock after the operation enable, the value of timer data register mn (TDRmn) is loaded to the TCRmn register and counting starts in the interval timer mode. <5> When the TCRmn register counts down and its count value is 0000H, INTTMmn is generated and the value of timer data register mn (TDRmn) is loaded to the TCRmn register and counting keeps on. Figure 6-29. Start Timing (In Interval Timer Mode) fMCK (fTCLK) TSmn(Write) <1> TEmn <2> Start trigger detection signal TCRmn Initial value TDRmn <3> m 0001 m-1 <4> 0000 m m <5> INTTMmn When MDmn0 = 1 setting Caution In the first cycle operation of count clock after writing the TSmn bit, an error at a maximum of one clock is generated since count start delays until count clock has been generated. When the information on count start timing is necessary, an interrupt can be generated at count start by setting MDmn0 = 1. Remark fMCK, the start trigger detection signal, and INTTMmn become active between one clock in synchronization with fCLK. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 474 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT (2) Start timing in event counter mode <1> Timer count register mn (TCRmn) holds its initial value while operation is stopped (TEmn = 0). <2> Operation is enabled (TEmn = 1) by writing 1 to the TSmn bit. <3> As soon as 1 has been written to the TSmn bit and 1 has been set to the TEmn bit, the value of timer data register mn (TDRmn) is loaded to the TCRmn register to start counting. <4> After that, the TCRmn register value is counted down according to the count clock of the valid edge of the TImn input . Figure 6-30. Start Timing (In Event Counter Mode) fMCK TSmn(Write) <1> TEmn <2> TImn input Edge detection Edge detection Count clock Start trigger detection signal <4> <1> TCRmn <3> Initial value m-1 m m-2 <3> TDRmn m Remark The timing is shown in Figure 6-30 indicates while the noise filter is not used. By making the noise filter on-state, the edge detection becomes 2 fMCK cycles (it sums up to 3 to 4 cycles) later than the normal cycle of TImn input. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 475 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT (3) Start timing in capture mode <1> Operation is enabled (TEmn = 1) by writing 1 to the TSmn bit. <2> Timer count register mn (TCRmn) holds the initial value until count clock generation. <3> A start trigger is generated at the first count clock after operation is enabled. And the value of 0000H is loaded to the TCRmn register and counting starts in the capture mode. (When the MDmn0 bit is set to 1, INTTMmn is generated by the start trigger.) <4> On detection of the valid edge of the TImn input, the value of the TCRmn register is captured to timer data register mn (TDRmn) and INTTMmn is generated. However, this capture value is no meaning. The TCRmn register keeps on counting from 0000H. <5> On next detection of the valid edge of the TImn input, the value of the TCRmn register is captured to timer data register mn (TDRmn) and INTTMmn is generated. Figure 6-31. Operation Timing (In Capture Mode : Input Pulse Interval Measurement) fMCK (fTCLK) TSmn(Write) <1> TEmn <3> TImn input Note <4> Start trigger detection signal <2> TCRmn Edge detection Edge detection Rising edge Initial value <5> <3> 0000 0001 TDRmn 0000 0001 m-1 m 0000 m INTTMmn When MDmn0=1 setting Note If a clock has been input to TImn (the trigger exists) when capturing starts, counting starts when a trigger is detected, even if no edge is detected. Therefore, the first captured value (<4>) does not determine a pulse interval (in the above figure, 0001 just indicates two clock cycles but does not determine the pulse interval) and so the user can ignore it. Caution In the first cycle operation of count clock after writing the TSmn bit, an error at a maximum of one clock is generated since count start delays until count clock has been generated. When the information on count start timing is necessary, an interrupt can be generated at count start by setting MDmn0 = 1. Remark The timing is shown in Figure 6-31 indicates while the noise filter is not used. By making the noise filter on-state, the edge detection becomes 2 fMCK cycles (it sums up to 3 to 4 cycles) later than the normal cycle of TImn input. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 476 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT (4) Start timing in one-count mode <1> Operation is enabled (TEmn = 1) by writing 1 to the TSmn bit. <2> Timer count register mn (TCRmn) holds the initial value until start trigger generation. <3> Rising edge of the TImn input is detected. <4> On start trigger detection, the value of timer data register mn (TDRmn) is loaded to the TCRmn register and count starts. <5> When the TCRmn register counts down and its count value is 0000H, INTTMmn is generated and the value of the TCRmn register becomes FFFFH and counting stops . Figure 6-32. Start Timing (In One-count Mode) fMCK (fTCLK) TSmn(Write) <1> TEmn TImn input <3> Edge detection Rising edge <4> Start trigger detection signal <5> <2> TCRmn Initial value m 1 0 FFFF INTTMmn Start trigger input wait status Remark The timing is shown in Figure 6-32 indicates while the noise filter is not used. By making the noise filter on-state, the edge detection becomes 2 fMCK cycles (it sums up to 3 to 4 cycles) later than the normal cycle of TImn input. The error per one period occurs be the asynchronous between the period of the TImn input and that of the count clock (fMCK). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 477 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT (5) Start timing in capture & one-count mode (when high-level width is measured) <1> Operation is enabled (TEmn = 1) by writing 1 to the TSmn bit of timer channel start register m (TSm). <2> Timer count register mn (TCRmn) holds the initial value until start trigger generation. <3> Rising edge of the TImn input is detected. <4> On start trigger detection, the value of 0000H is loaded to the TCRmn register and count starts. <5> On detection of the falling edge of the TImn input, the value of the TCRmn register is captured to timer data register mn (TDRmn) and INTTMmn is generated. Figure 6-33. Start Timing (In Capture & One-count Mode) fMCK (fTCLK) TSmn(Write) <1> TEmn TImn input <3> Edge detection Edge detection Rising edge <4> Falling edge <5> Start trigger detection signal <2> TCRmn TDRmn Initial value 0000 0000 m-1 m 0000 m INTTMmn Remark The timing is shown in Figure 6-33 indicates while the noise filter is not used. By making the noise filter on-state, the edge detection becomes 2 fMCK cycles (it sums up to 3 to 4 cycles) later than the normal cycle of TImn input. The error per one period occurs because of the asynchronous relationship between the period of the TImn input and that of the count clock (fMCK). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 478 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.6 Channel Output (TOmn pin) Control 6.6.1 TOmn pin output circuit configuration Figure 6-34. Output Circuit Configuration <5> TOmn register Controller Interrupt signal of the master channel (INTTMmn) Interrupt signal of the slave channel (INTTMmp) Set TOmn pin Reset/toggle <1> <2> <3> <4> TOLmn TOMmn Internal bus TOEmn TOmn write signal The following describes the TOmn pin output circuit. <1> When TOMmn = 0 (master channel output mode), the set value of timer output level register m (TOLm) is ignored and only INTTM0p (slave channel timer interrupt) is transmitted to timer output register m (TOm). <2> When TOMmn = 1 (slave channel output mode), both INTTMmn (master channel timer interrupt) and INTTM0p (slave channel timer interrupt) are transmitted to the TOm register. At this time, the TOLm register becomes valid and the signals are controlled as follows: When TOLmn = 0: Forward operation (INTTMmn set, INTTM0p reset) When TOLmn = 1: Reverse operation (INTTMmn reset, INTTM0p set) When INTTMmn and INTTM0p are simultaneously generated, (0% output of PWM), INTTM0p (reset signal) takes priority, and INTTMmn (set signal) is masked. <3> While timer output is enabled (TOEmn = 1), INTTMmn (master channel timer interrupt) and INTTM0p (slave channel timer interrupt) are transmitted to the TOm register. Writing to the TOm register (TOmn write signal) becomes invalid. When TOEmn = 1, the TOmn pin output never changes with signals other than interrupt signals. To initialize the TOmn pin output level, it is necessary to set timer operation is stopped (TOEmn = 0) and to write a value to the TOm register. <4> While timer output is disabled (TOEmn = 0), writing to the TOmn bit to the target channel (TOmn write signal) becomes valid. When timer output is disabled (TOEmn = 0), neither INTTMmn (master channel timer interrupt) nor INTTM0p (slave channel timer interrupt) is transmitted to the TOm register. <5> The TOm register can always be read, and the TOmn pin output level can be checked. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1) n: Channel number n = 0 to 7 (n = 0, 2, 4, 6 for master channel) p: Slave channel number n<p7 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 479 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.6.2 TOmn Pin Output Setting The following figure shows the procedure and status transition of the TOmn output pin from initial setting to timer operation start. Figure 6-35. Status Transition from Timer Output Setting to Operation Start TCRmn (Counter) Undefined value (FFFFH after reset) Hi-Z Timer alternate-function pin Timer output signal TOmn TOEmn Write operation enabled period to TOmn <1> Set TOMmn Set TOLmn <2> Set TOmn Write operation disabled period to TOmn <3> Set TOEmn <4> Set the port <6> Timer operation start to digital I/O <5> Set the port to output mode <1> The operation mode of timer output is set. TOMmn bit (0: Master channel output mode, 1: Slave channel output mode) TOLmn bit (0: Non-inverted output, 1: Inverted output) <2> The timer output signal is set to the initial status by setting timer output register m (TOm). <3> The timer output operation is enabled by writing 1 to the TOEmn bit (writing to the TOm register is disabled). <4> The port mode control registers (PMCxx) are used to set the use of port pins for digital I/O (see 4.3.6 Port mode control registers 7, 9, 12 (PMC7, PMC9, PMC12)). <5> The port I/O setting is set to output (see 6.3.16 Port mode registers 1, 3, 4, 7, 12 (PM1, PM3, PM4, PM7, PM12)). <6> The timer operation is enabled (TSmn = 1). Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 480 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.6.3 Cautions on Channel Output Operation (1) Changing values set in the registers TOm, TOEm, TOLm, and TOMm during timer operation Since the timer operations (operations of timer count register mn (TCRmn) and timer data register mn (TDRmn)) are independent of the TOmn output circuit and changing the values set in timer output register m (TOm), timer output enable register m (TOEm), timer output level register m (TOLm), and timer output mode register m (TOMm) does not affect the timer operation, the values can be changed during timer operation. To output an expected waveform from the TOmn pin by timer operation, however, set the TOm, TOEm, TOLm, and TOMm registers to the values stated in the register setting example of each operation shown by 6.7 and 6.8. When the values set to the TOEm, TOLm, and TOMm registers (but not the TOm register) are changed close to the occurrence of the timer interrupt (INTTMmn) of each channel, the waveform output to the TOmn pin might differ, depending on whether the values are changed immediately before or immediately after the timer interrupt (INTTMmn) occurs. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 481 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT (2) Default level of TOmn pin and output level after timer operation start The change in the output level of the TOmn pin when timer output register m (TOm) is written while timer output is disabled (TOEmn = 0), the initial level is changed, and then timer output is enabled (TOEmn = 1) before port output is enabled, is shown below. (a) When operation starts with master channel output mode (TOMmn = 0) setting The setting of timer output level register m (TOLm) is invalid when master channel output mode (TOMmn = 0). When the timer operation starts after setting the default level, the toggle signal is generated and the output level of the TOmn pin is reversed. Figure 6-36. TOmn Pin Output Status at Toggle Output (TOMmn = 0) Default status TOmn bit = 0 (Default status : Low) TOmn bit = 1 (Default status : High) TOmn bit = 0 (Active high) TOmn bit = 0 (Default status : Low) TOmn bit = 1 (Default status : High) TOmn bit = 1 (Active low) Port output is enabled Bold : Active level Toggle Remarks 1. Toggle: Toggle Toggle Toggle Toggle Reverse TOmn pin output status 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 3. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 482 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT (b) When operation starts with slave channel output mode (TOMmn = 1) setting (PWM output)) When slave channel output mode (TOMmn = 1), the active level is determined by timer output level register m (TOLm) setting. Figure 6-37. TOmn Pin Output Status at PWM Output (TOMmn = 1) TOEmn Hi -Z Default status Active Active Active TOmn bit = 0 (Default status : Low) TOmn bit = 1 (Default status : High) TOmn (output) TOLmn bit = 0 (Active high) TOmn bit = 0 (Default status : Low) TOmn bit = 1 (Default status : High) TOLmn bit = 1 (Active low) Port output is enabled Reset Set Remarks 1. Set: Reset: Reset Set Set The output signal of the TOmn pin changes from inactive level to active level. The output signal of the TOmn pin changes from active level to inactive level. 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 3. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 483 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT (3) Operation of TOmn pin in slave channel output mode (TOMmn = 1) (a) When timer output level register m (TOLm) setting has been changed during timer operation When the TOLm register setting has been changed during timer operation, the setting becomes valid at the generation timing of the TOmn pin change condition. Rewriting the TOLm register does not change the output level of the TOmn pin. The operation when TOMmn is set to 1 and the value of the TOLm register is changed while the timer is operating (TEmn = 1) is shown below. Figure 6-38. Operation when TOLm Register Has Been Changed during Timer Operation TOmn (output) Reset Set Remarks 1. Set: Reset: Reset Set Reset Set Reset Set The output signal of the TOmn pin changes from inactive level to active level. The output signal of the TOmn pin changes from active level to inactive level. 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 3. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. (b) Set/reset timing To realize 0%/100% output at PWM output, the TOmn pin/TOmn bit set timing at master channel timer interrupt (INTTMmn) generation is delayed by 1 count clock by the slave channel. If the set condition and reset condition are generated at the same time, a higher priority is given to the latter. Figure 6-39 shows the set/reset operating statuses where the master/slave channels are set as follows. Master channel: TOEmn = 1, TOMmn = 0, TOLmn = 0 Slave channel: TOEmp = 1, TOMmp = 1, TOLmp = 0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 484 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-39. Set/Reset Timing Operating Statuses (1) Basic operation timing fTCLK INTTMmn Master channel Internal reset signal TOmn pin/ TOmn Toggle Toggle Internal set signal 1 clock delay INTTMmp Slave channel Internal reset signal TOmp pin/ TOmp Set Set Reset (2) Operation timing when 0 % duty fTCLK INTTMmn Master channel Internal reset signal TOmn pin/ Toggle Toggle Internal set signal 1 clock delay TCRmp Slave channel 0000 0001 0000 0001 INTTMmp Set Internal reset signal TOmp pin/ TOmp Reset Set Reset has priority. Reset Reset has priority. Remarks 1. Internal reset signal: TOmn pin reset/toggle signal Internal set signal: TOmn pin set signal 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1) n: Channel number n = 0 to 7 (n = 0, 2, 4, 6 for master channel) p: Slave channel number n<p7 3. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 485 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.6.4 Collective manipulation of TOmn bit In timer output register m (TOm), the setting bits for all the channels are located in one register in the same way as timer channel start register m (TSm). Therefore, the TOmn bit of all the channels can be manipulated collectively. Only the desired bits can also be manipulated by enabling writing only to the TOmn bits (TOEmn = 0) that correspond to the relevant bits of the channel used to perform output (TOmn). Figure 6-40. Example of TO0n Bit Collective Manipulation Before writing TO0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TO07 TO06 TO05 TO04 TO03 TO02 TO01 TO00 0 TOE0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 TOE07 TOE06 TOE05 TOE04 TOE03 TOE02 TOE01 TOE00 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 x O x x x Data to be written 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O After writing TO0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TO07 TO06 TO05 TO04 TO03 TO02 TO01 TO00 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 Writing is done only to the TOmn bit with TOEmn = 0, and writing to the TOmn bit with TOEmn = 1 is ignored. TOmn (channel output) to which TOEmn = 1 is set is not affected by the write operation. Even if the write operation is done to the TOmn bit, it is ignored and the output change by timer operation is normally done. Figure 6-41. TO0n Pin Statuses by Collective Manipulation of TO0n Bit Two or more TO0n output can be changed simultaneously TO07 Output does not change when value does not change TO06 TO05 TO04 TO03 Writing to the TO0n bit is ignored when TOE0n = 1 TO02 TO01 TO00 Before writing Writing to the TO0n bit (Caution and Remarks are given on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 486 RL78/F13, F14 Caution CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT While timer output is enabled (TOEmn = 1), even if the output by timer interrupt of each timer (INTTMmn) contends with writing to the TOmn bit, output is normally done to the TOmn pin. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. 6.6.5 Timer Interrupt and TOmn Pin Output at Operation Start In the interval timer mode or capture mode, the MDmn0 bit in timer mode register mn (TMRmn) sets whether or not to generate a timer interrupt at count start. When MDmn0 is set to 1, the count operation start timing can be known by the timer interrupt (INTTMmn) generation. In the other modes, neither timer interrupt at count operation start nor TOmn output is controlled. Figures 6-36 show operation examples when the interval timer mode (TOEmn = 1, TOMmn = 0) is set. Figure 6-42. Operation examples of timer interrupt at count operation start and TOmn output (a) When MDmn0 is set to 1 TCRmn TEmn INTTMmn TOmn Count operation start (b) When MDmn0 is set to 0 TCRmn TEmn INTTMmn TOmn Count operation start When MDmn0 is set to 1, a timer interrupt (INTTMmn) is output at count operation start, and TOmn performs a toggle operation. When MDmn0 is set to 0, a timer interrupt (INTTMmn) is not output at count operation start, and TOmn does not change either. After counting one cycle, INTTMmn is output and TOmn performs a toggle operation. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 487 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.7 Independent Channel Operation Function of Timer Array Unit 6.7.1 Operation as interval timer/square wave output (1) Interval timer The timer array unit can be used as a reference timer that generates INTTMmn (timer interrupt) at fixed intervals. The interrupt generation period can be calculated by the following expression. Generation period of INTTMmn (timer interrupt) = Period of count clock (Set value of TDRmn + 1) (2) Operation as square wave output TOmn performs a toggle operation as soon as INTTMmn has been generated, and outputs a square wave with a duty factor of 50%. The period and frequency for outputting a square wave from TOmn can be calculated by the following expressions. Period of square wave output from TOmn = Period of count clock (Set value of TDRmn + 1) 2 Frequency of square wave output from TOmn = Frequency of count clock/{(Set value of TDRmn + 1) 2} Timer count register mn (TCRmn) operates as a down counter in the interval timer mode. The TCRmn register loads the value of timer data register mn (TDRmn) at the first count clock after the channel start trigger bit (TSmn, TSHm1, TSHm3) of timer channel start register m (TSm) is set to 1. If the MDmn0 bit of timer mode register mn (TMRmn) is 0 at this time, INTTMmn is not output and TOmn is not toggled. If the MDmn0 bit of the TMRmn register is 1, INTTMmn is output and TOmn is toggled. After that, the TCRmn register count down in synchronization with the count clock. When TCRmn = 0000H, INTTMmn is output and TOmn is toggled at the next count clock. At the same time, the TCRmn register loads the value of the TDRmn register again. After that, the same operation is repeated. The TDRmn register can be rewritten at any time. The new value of the TDRmn register becomes valid from the next period. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 488 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Clock selection Figure 6-43. Block Diagram of Operation as Interval Timer/Square Wave Output CKm3 Operation clock CKm2 CKm1 Trigger selection CKm0 TSmn Timer counter register mn (TCRmn) Output controller Timer data register mn(TDRmn) Interrupt controller TOmn pin Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) Figure 6-44. Example of Basic Timing of Operation as Interval Timer/Square Wave Output (MDmn0 = 1) TSmn TEmn TCRmn 0000H TDRmn a b TOmn INTTMmn a+1 Remarks 1. m: 2. TSmn: TEmn: a+1 a+1 b+1 b+1 b+1 Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) Bit n of timer channel start register m (TSm) Bit n of timer channel enable status register m (TEm) TCRmn: Timer count register mn (TCRmn) TDRmn: Timer data register mn (TDRmn) TOmn: TOmn pin output signal 3. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 489 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-45. Example of Set Contents of Registers During Operation as Interval Timer/Square Wave Output (1/2) (a) Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) 15 TMRmn 14 13 CKSmn1 CKSmn0 1/0 1/0 12 11 CCSmn M/S 0 0 Note 0/1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 0 STSmn2 STSmn1 STSmn0 CISmn1 CISmn0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 MDmn3 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0 1/0 Operation mode of channel n 000B: Interval timer Setting of operation when counting is started 0: Neither generates INTTMmn nor inverts timer output when counting is started. 1: Generates INTTMmn and inverts timer output when counting is started. Selection of TImn pin input edge 00B: Sets 00B because these are not used. Start trigger selection 000B: Selects only software start. Setting of MASTERmn bit (channels 2, 4, 6) 0: Independent channel operation function. Setting of SPLITmn bit (channels 1, 3) 1: 8-bit timer mode Count clock selection 0: Selects operation clock (fMCK). Operation clock (fMCK) selection 00B: Selects CKm0 as operation clock of channel n. 10B: Selects CKm1 as operation clock of channel n. 01B: Selects CKm2 as operation clock of channel n. 11B: Selects CKm3 as operation clock of channel n. (b) Timer output register m (TOm) Bit n TOm TOmn 0: Outputs 0 from TOmn. 1/0 1: Outputs 1 from TOmn. (c) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Bit n TOEm TOEmn 1/0 0: Stops the TOmn output operation by counting operation. 1: Enables the TOmn output operation by counting operation. Note TMRm2, TMRm4, TMRm6: MASTERmn bit TMRm1, TMRm3: SPLITmn bit TMRm0, TMRm5, TMRm7: Fixed to 0 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 490 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-45. Example of Set Contents of Registers During Operation as Interval Timer/Square Wave Output (2/2) (d) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Bit n TOLm TOLmn 0: Cleared to 0 when TOMmn = 0 (master channel output mode) 0 (e) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) Bit n TOMm TOMmn 0: Sets master channel output mode. 0 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 491 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-46. Operation Procedure of Interval Timer/Square Wave Output Function (1/2) Software Operation Hardware Status Power-off status (Clock supply is stopped and writing to each register is disabled.) TAU default setting Sets the TAUmEN bit of peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) to 1. Power-on status. Each channel stops operating. (Clock supply is started and writing to each register is enabled.) Sets timer clock select register m (TPSm). Determines clock frequencies of CKm0 to CKm3. Channel default setting Operation is resumed. Operation start Sets timer mode register mn (TMRmn) (determines operation mode of channel). Sets interval (period) value to timer data register mn (TDRmn). Channel stops operating. (Clock is supplied and some power is consumed.) To use the TOmn output Clears the TOMmn bit of timer output mode register m (TOMm) to 0 (master channel output mode). Clears the TOLmn bit to 0. Sets the TOmn bit and determines default level of the TOmn output. The TOmn pin goes into Hi-Z output state. Sets the TOEmn bit to 1 and enables operation of TOmn. Clears the port register and port mode register to 0. TOmn does not change because channel stops operating. The TOmn pin outputs the TOmn set level. (Sets the TOEmn bit to 1 only if using TOmn output and resuming operation.). Sets the TSmn (TSHm1, TSHm3) bit to 1. The TSmn (TSHm1, TSHm3) bit automatically returns to 0 because it is a trigger bit. The TOmn default setting level is output when the port mode register is in the output mode and the port register is 0. TEmn (TEHm1, TEHm3) = 1, and count operation starts. Value of the TDRmn register is loaded to timer count register mn (TCRmn) at the count clock input. INTTMmn is generated and TOmn performs toggle operation if the MDmn0 bit of the TMRmn register is 1. During operation Set values of the TMRmn register, TOMmn, and TOLmn bits cannot be changed. Set value of the TDRmn register can be changed. The TCRmn register can always be read. The TSRmn register is not used. Set values of the TOm and TOEm registers can be changed. Counter (TCRmn) counts down. When count value reaches 0000H, the value of the TDRmn register is loaded to the TCRmn register again and the count operation is continued. By detecting TCRmn = 0000H, INTTMmn is generated and TOmn performs toggle operation. After that, the above operation is repeated. Operation stop The TTmn (TTHm1, TTHm3) bit is set to 1. The TTmn (TTHm1, TTHm3) bit automatically returns to 0 because it is a trigger bit. TEmn (TEHm1, TEHm3), and count operation stops. The TCRmn register holds count value and stops. The TOmn output is not initialized but holds current status. The TOEmn bit is cleared to 0 and value is set to the TOmn bit. The TOmn pin outputs the TOmn bit set level. (Remarks are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 492 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-46. Operation Procedure of Interval Timer/Square Wave Output Function (2/2) Software Operation TAU stop To hold the TOmn pin output level Clears the TOmn bit to 0 after the value to be held is set to the port register. When holding the TOmn pin output level is not necessary Setting not required. The TAUmEN bit of the PER0 register is cleared to 0. Hardware Status The TOmn pin output level is held by port function. Power-off status All circuits are initialized and SFR of each channel is also initialized. (The TOmn bit is cleared to 0 and the TOmn pin is set to port mode.) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 493 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.7.2 Operation as external event counter The timer array unit can be used as an external event counter that counts the number of times the valid input edge (external event) is detected in the TImn pin. When a specified count value is reached, the event counter generates an interrupt. The specified number of counts can be calculated by the following expression. Specified number of counts = Set value of TDRmn + 1 Timer count register mn (TCRmn) operates as a down counter in the event counter mode. The TCRmn register loads the value of timer data register mn (TDRmn) by setting any channel start trigger bit (TSmn, TSHm1, TSHm3) of timer channel start register m (TSm) to 1. The TCRmn register counts down each time the valid input edge of the TImn pin has been detected. When TCRmn = 0000H, the TCRmn register loads the value of the TDRmn register again, and outputs INTTMmn. After that, the above operation is repeated. An irregular waveform that depends on external events is output from the TOmn pin. Stop the output by setting the TOEmn bit of timer output enable register m (TOEm) to 0. The TDRmn register can be rewritten at any time. The new value of the TDRmn register becomes valid during the next count period. Noise filter NFEN1 and NFEN2 registers TSmn Edge detection Trigger selection TImn pin Clock selection Figure 6-47. Block Diagram of Operation as External Event Counter Timer counter register mn (TCRmn) Timer data register mn (TDRmn) Interrupt controller Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 494 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-48. Example of Basic Timing of Operation as External Event Counter TSmn TEmn TImn 3 TCRmn 0000H TDRmn 2 3 1 2 0 1 2 0 0003H 1 2 0 1 0002H INTTMmn 4 events 4 events 3 events Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. TSmn: Bit n of timer channel start register m (TSm) TEmn: Bit n of timer channel enable status register m (TEm) TImn: TImn pin input signal TCRmn: Timer count register mn (TCRmn) TDRmn: Timer data register mn (TDRmn) 3. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 495 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-49. Example of Set Contents of Registers in External Event Counter Mode (1/2) (a) Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) 15 TMRmn 14 13 CKSmn1 CKSmn0 1/0 1/0 12 11 CCSmn M/S 0 1 Note 0/1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 0 STSmn2 STSmn1 STSmn0 CISmn1 CISmn0 0 0 0 1/0 3 2 1 0 MDmn3 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 1/0 0 1 1 0 Operation mode of channel n 011B: Event counter mode Setting of operation when counting is started 0: Neither generates INTTMmn nor inverts timer output when counting is started. Selection of TImn pin input edge 00B: Detects falling edge. 01B: Detects rising edge. 10B: Detects both edges. 11B: Setting prohibited Start trigger selection 000B: Selects only software start. Setting of MASTERmn bit (channels 2, 4, 6) 0: Independent channel operation function. Setting of SPLITmn bit (channels 1, 3) 0: 16-bit timer mode 1: 8-bit timer mode Count clock selection 1: Selects the TImn pin input valid edge. Operation clock (fMCK) selection 00B: Selects CKm0 as operation clock of channel n. 10B: Selects CKm1 as operation clock of channel n. 01B: Selects CKm2 as operation clock of channel n. 11B: Selects CKm3 as operation clock of channel n. (b) Timer output register m (TOm) Bit n TOm TOmn 0: Outputs 0 from TOmn. 0 (c) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Bit n TOEm TOEmn 0: Stops the TOmn output operation by counting operation. 0 Note TMRm2, TMRm4, TMRm6: TMRm1, TMRm3: MASTERmn bit SPLITmn bit TMRm0, TMRm5, TMRm7: Fixed to 0 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 496 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-49. Example of Set Contents of Registers in External Event Counter Mode (2/2) (d) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Bit n TOLm TOLmn 0: Cleared to 0 when TOMmn = 0 (master channel output mode). 0 (e) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) Bit n TOMm TOMmn 0: Sets master channel output mode. 0 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 497 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-50. Operation Procedure When External Event Counter Function Is Used Software Operation TAU Hardware Status Power-off status default (Clock supply is stopped and writing to each register is setting disabled.) Sets the TAUmEN bit of peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) to 1. Power-on status. Each channel stops operating. (Clock supply is started and writing to each register is enabled.) Sets timer clock select register m (TPSm). Determines clock frequencies of CKm0 to CKm3. Channel Sets timer mode register mn (TMRmn) (determines Channel stops operating. default operation mode of channel). (Clock is supplied and some power is consumed.) setting Sets number of counts to timer data register mn (TDRmn). Clears the TOEmn bit of timer output enable register m (TOEm) to 0. Operation Operation is resumed. start Sets the TSmn bit to 1. TEmn = 1, and count operation starts. The TSmn bit automatically returns to 0 because it is a Value of the TDRmn register is loaded to timer count trigger bit. register mn (TCRmn) and detection of the TImn pin input edge is awaited. During Set value of the TDRmn register can be changed. Counter (TCRmn) counts down each time input edge of operation Sets corresponding bit of noise filter enable registers 1 the TImn pin has been detected. When count value and 2 (NFEN1 and NFEN2) to 1. reaches 0000H, the value of the TDRmn register is loaded The TCRmn register can always be read. to the TCRmn register again, and the count operation is The TSRmn register is not used. continued. By detecting TCRmn = 0000H, the INTTMmn Set values of the TMRmn register, TOMmn, TOLmn, output is generated. TOmn, and TOEmn bits cannot be changed. After that, the above operation is repeated. The TTmn bit is set to 1. TEmn = 0, and count operation stops. Operation stop The TTmn bit automatically returns to 0 because it is a The TCRmn register holds count value and stops. trigger bit. TAU The TAUmEN bit of the PER0 register is cleared to 0. stop Power-off status All circuits are initialized and SFR of each channel is also initialized. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 498 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.7.3 Operation as frequency divider The timer array unit can be used as a frequency divider that divides a clock input to the TImn pin and outputs the result from the TOmn pin. Set the TImn and TOmn pins so that they are different from each other by the peripheral I/O redirection registers 0, 1, 2, and 3 (PIOR0, PIOR1, PIOPR2, and PIOR3). The divided clock frequency output from TOmn can be calculated by the following expression. When rising edge/falling edge is selected: Divided clock frequency = Input clock frequency/{(Set value of TDR00 + 1) 2} When both edges are selected: Divided clock frequency Input clock frequency/(Set value of TDR00 + 1) Timer count register m (TCRm) operates as a down counter in the interval timer mode. After the channel start trigger bit (TS00) of timer channel start register 0 (TS0) is set to 1, the TCR00 register loads the value of timer data register 00 (TDR00) when the TI00 valid edge is detected. If the MNmn0 bit of timer mode register 00 (TMR00) is 0 at this time, INTTM00 is not output and TO00 is not toggled. If the MNmn0 bit of timer mode register 00 (TMR00) is 1, INTTM00 is output and TO00 is toggled. After that, the TCR00 register counts down at the valid edge of the TI00 pin. When TCR00 = 0000H, it toggles TO00. At the same time, the TCR00 register loads the value of the TDR00 register again, and continues counting. If detection of both the edges of the TI00 pin is selected, the duty factor error of the input clock affects the divided clock period of the TO00 output. The period of the TO00 output clock includes a sampling error of one period of the operation clock. Clock period of TO00 output = Ideal TO00 output clock period Operation clock period (error) The TDR00 register can be rewritten at any time. The new value of the TDR00 register becomes valid during the next count period. Figure 6-51. Block Diagram of Operation as Frequency Divider Edge detection Noise filter TS00 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Trigger selection TImn pin Clock selection TNFEN00 Timer counter register 00 (TCR00) Output controller TOmn pin Timer data register 00 (TDR00) 499 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-52. Example of Basic Timing of Operation as Frequency Divider (MDmn0 = 1) TS00 TE00 TI00 2 2 1 TCR00 0000H TDR00 2 1 0 1 0 1 0 0002H 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0001H TO00 INTTM00 Divided by 6 Remark TS00: Divided by 4 Bit n of timer channel start register m (TSm) TE00: Bit n of timer channel enable status register m (TEm) TI00: TI00 pin input signal TCR00: Timer count register 00 (TCR00) TDR00: Timer data register 00 (TDR00) TO00: R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 TO00 pin output signal 500 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-53. Example of Set Contents of Registers During Operation as Frequency Divider (a) Timer mode register 00 (TMR00) 15 TMR00 14 13 CKS0n1 CKS0n0 1/0 1/0 0 12 11 CCS00 MAS TER00 1 0 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 0 STS002 STS001 STS000 CIS001 CIS000 0 0 0 1/0 3 2 1 0 MD003 MD002 MD001 MD000 1/0 0 1 1 1/0 Operation mode of channel n 000B: Interval timer Setting of operation when counting is started 0: Neither generates INTTM00 nor inverts timer output when counting is started. 1: Generates INTTM00 and inverts timer output when counting is started. Selection of TI00 pin input edge 00B: Detects falling edge. 01B: Detects rising edge. 10B: Detects both edges. 11B: Setting prohibited Start trigger selection 000B: Selects only software start. Slave/master selection 0: Independent channel operation function. Count clock selection 1: Selects the TI00 pin input valid edge. Operation clock (fMCK) selection 00B: Selects CKm0 as operation clock of channel n. 01B: Selects CKm2 as operation clock of channel n. 10B: Selects CKm1 as operation clock of channel n. 11B: Selects CKm3 as operation clock of channel n. (b) Timer output register m (TOm) Bit n TOm TO00 0: Outputs 0 from TO00. 1/0 1: Outputs 1 from TO00. (c) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Bit n TOEm TOE00 1/0 0: Stops the TO00 output operation by counting operation. 1: Enables the TO00 output operation by counting operation. (d) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Bit n TOLm TOL00 0: Cleared to 0 when TOM00 = 0 (master channel output mode) 0 (e) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) Bit n TOMm TOM00 0: Sets master channel output mode. 0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 501 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-54. Operation Procedure When Frequency Divider Function Is Used Software Operation Hardware Status Power-off status (Clock supply is stopped and writing to each register is disabled.) TAU default setting Sets the TAUmEN bit of peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) to 1. Power-on status. Each channel stops operating. (Clock supply is started and writing to each register is enabled.) Sets timer clock select register m (TPSm). Determines clock frequencies of CKm0 to CKm3. Channel default setting Sets timer mode register 0n (TMR0n) (determines operation mode of channel and selects the detection edge). Sets interval (period) value to timer data register 00 (TDR00). Channel stops operating. (Clock is supplied and some power is consumed.) Clears the TOM00 bit of timer output mode register m (TOMm) to 0 (master channel output mode). Clears the TOL00 bit to 0. Sets the TO00 bit and determines default level of the TO00 output. The TO00 pin goes into Hi-Z output state. Operation is resumed. Sets the TOE00 bit to 1 and enables operation of TO00. Clears the port register and port mode register to 0. The TO00 default setting level is output when the port mode register is in output mode and the port register is 0. TO00 does not change because channel stops operating. The TO00 pin outputs the TO00 set level. Operation start Sets the TOE00 bit to 1 (only when operation is resumed). Sets the TS00 bit to 1. The TS00 bit automatically returns to 0 because it is a trigger bit. During operation Set value of the TDR00 register can be changed. Sets corresponding bit of noise filter enable registers 1 and 2 (NFEN1 and NFEN2) to 1. The TCR00 register can always be read. The TSR00 register is not used. Set values of the TOm and TOEm registers can be changed. Set values of the TMR00 register, TOM00, and TOL00 bits cannot be changed. Counter (TCR00) counts down. When count value reaches 0000H, the value of the TDR00 register is loaded to the TCR00 register again, and the count operation is continued. By detecting TCR00 = 0000H, INTTM00 is generated and TO00 performs toggle operation. After that, the above operation is repeated. Operation stop The TT00 bit is set to 1. The TT00 bit automatically returns to 0 because it is a trigger bit. TE00 = 0, and count operation stops. The TCR00 register holds count value and stops. The TO00 output is not initialized but holds current status. The TOE00 bit is cleared to 0 and value is set to the TO00 bit. The TO00 pin outputs the TO00 set level. TAU stop To hold the TO00 pin output level Clears the TO00 bit to 0 after the value to be held is set to the port register. When holding the TO00 pin output level is not necessary Setting not required. The TAUmEN bit of the PER0 register is cleared to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 TE00 = 1, and count operation starts. Value of the TDR00 register is loaded to timer count register 00 (TCR00) at the count clock input. INTTM00 is generated and TO00 performs toggle operation if the MD000 bit of the TMR00 register is 1. The TO00 pin output level is held by port function. Power-off status All circuits are initialized and SFR of each channel is also initialized. (The TO00 bit is cleared to 0 and the TO00 pin is set to port mode). 502 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.7.4 Operation as input pulse interval measurement The count value can be captured at the TImn valid edge and the interval of the pulse input to TImn can be measured. The pulse interval can be calculated by the following expression. TImn input pulse interval = Period of count clock ((10000H TSRmn: OVF) + (Capture value of TDRmn + 1)) Caution The TImn pin input is sampled using the operating clock selected with the CKSmn bit of timer mode register mn (TMRmn), so an error of up to one operating clock cycle occurs. Timer count register mn (TCRmn) operates as an up counter in the capture mode. When the channel start trigger bit (TSmn) of timer channel start register m (TSm) is set to 1, the TCRmn register counts up from 0000H in synchronization with the count clock. When the TImn pin input valid edge is detected, the count value of the TCRmn register is transferred (captured) to timer data register mn (TDRmn) and, at the same time, the TCRmn register is cleared to 0000H, and the INTTMmn is output. If the counter overflows at this time, the OVF bit of timer status register mn (TSRmn) is set to 1. If the counter does not overflow, the OVF bit is cleared. After that, the above operation is repeated. As soon as the count value has been captured to the TDRmn register, the OVF bit of the TSRmn register is updated depending on whether the counter overflows during the measurement period. Therefore, the overflow status of the captured value can be checked. If the counter reaches a full count for two or more periods, it is judged to be an overflow occurrence, and the OVF bit of the TSRmn register is set to 1. However, a normal interval value cannot be measured for the OVF bit, if two or more overflows occur. Set the STSmn2 to STSmn0 bits of the TMRmn register to 001B to use the valid edges of TImn as a start trigger and a capture trigger. When TEmn = 1, a software operation (TSmn = 1) can be used as a capture trigger, instead of using the TImn pin input. CKm3 Operation clock CKm2 CKm1 CKm0 TImn pin Noise filter NFEN1 and NFEN2 registers TSmn Edge detection Trigger selection Clock selection Figure 6-55. Block Diagram of Operation as Input Pulse Interval Measurement Timer counter register mn (TCRmn) Timer data register mn (TDRmn) Interrupt controller Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 503 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-56. Example of Basic Timing of Operation as Input Pulse Interval Measurement (MDmn0 = 0) TSmn TEmn TImn FFFFH b a TCRmn d c 0000H TDRmn 0000H a b c d INTTMmn OVF Remarks 1. m: 2. TSmn: Unit number (m = 0, 1)n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) Bit n of timer channel start register m (TSm) TEmn: Bit n of timer channel enable status register m (TEm) TImn: TImn pin input signal TCRmn: Timer count register mn (TCRmn) TDRmn: Timer data register mn (TDRmn) OVF: Bit 0 of timer status register mn (TSRmn) 3. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 504 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-57. Example of Set Contents of Registers to Measure Input Pulse Interval (a) Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) 15 TMRmn 14 13 1/0 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 0 CCSmn M/S Note STSmn2 STSmn1 STSmn0 CISmn1 CISmn0 CKSmn1 CKSmn0 1/0 12 0 0 0 0 0 1 1/0 1/0 3 2 1 0 MDmn3 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 1 0 1/0 Operation mode of channel n 010B: Capture mode Setting of operation when counting is started 0: Does not generate INTTMmn when counting is started. 1: Generates INTTMmn when counting is started. Selection of TImn pin input edge 00B: Detects falling edge. 01B: Detects rising edge. 10B: Detects both edges. 11B: Setting prohibited Capture trigger selection 001B: Selects the TImn pin input valid edge. Setting of MASTERmn bit (channels 2, 4, and 6) 0: Independent channel operation function. Setting of SPLITmn bit (channels 1 and 3) 0: 16-bit timer function. Count clock selection 0: Selects operation clock (fMCK). Operation clock (fMCK) selection 00B: Selects CKm0 as operation clock of channel n. 10B: Selects CKm1 as operation clock of channel n. 01B: Selects CKm2 as operation clock of channel n. 11B: Selects CKm3 as operation clock of channel n. (b) Timer output register m (TOm) Bit n TOm TOmn 0: Outputs 0 from TOmn. 0 (c) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Bit n TOEm TOEmn 0: Stops TOmn output operation by counting operation. 0 (d) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Bit n TOLm TOLmn 0: Cleared to 0 when TOMmn = 0 (master channel output mode). 0 (e) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) Bit n TOMm TOMmn 0: Sets master channel output mode. 0 Note TMRm2, TMRm4, TMRm6: TMRm1, TMRm3: R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 MASTERmn bit SPLITmn bit 505 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT TMRm0, TMRm5, TMRm7: Fixed to 0 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 506 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-58. Operation Procedure When Input Pulse Interval Measurement Function Is Used Software Operation TAU Hardware Status Power-off status default (Clock supply is stopped and writing to each register is setting disabled.) Sets the TAUmEN bit of peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) to 1. Power-on status. Each channel stops operating. (Clock supply is started and writing to each register is enabled.) Sets timer clock select register m (TPSm). Determines clock frequencies of CKm0 to CKm3. Channel Sets timer mode register mn (TMRmn) (determines Channel stops operating. default operation mode of channel). (Clock is supplied and some power is consumed.) Sets TSmn bit to 1. TEmn = 1, and count operation starts. setting Operation start The TSmn bit automatically returns to 0 because it is a Timer count register mn (TCRmn) is cleared to 0000H trigger bit. at the count clock input. When the MDmn0 bit of the TMRmn register is 1, Operation is resumed. INTTMmn is generated. During Set values of only the CISmn1 and CISmn0 bits of the Counter (TCRmn) counts up from 0000H. When the TImn operation TMRmn register can be changed. pin input valid edge is detected, the count value is Sets corresponding bit of noise filter enable registers 1 transferred (captured) to timer data register mn (TDRmn). and 2 (NFEN1 and NFEN2) to 1. At the same time, the TCRmn register is cleared to The TDRmn register can always be read. 0000H, and the INTTMmn signal is generated. The TCRmn register can always be read. If an overflow occurs at this time, the OVF bit of timer The TSRmn register can always be read. status register mn (TSRmn) is set; if an overflow does not Set values of the TOMmn, TOLmn, TOmn, and TOEmn occur, the OVF bit is cleared. bits cannot be changed. After that, the above operation is repeated. The TTmn bit is set to 1. TEmn = 0, and count operation stops. Operation stop TAU The TTmn bit automatically returns to 0 because it is a The TCRmn register holds count value and stops. trigger bit. The OVF bit of the TSRmn register is also held. The TAUmEN bit of the PER0 register is cleared to 0. stop Power-off status All circuits are initialized and SFR of each channel is also initialized. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 507 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.7.5 Operation as input signal high-/low-level width measurement Caution When using a channel to implement the LIN-bus, set bit 7 (TIS17) to 1 and bit 6 (TIS16) to 0 of the timer input select register 1 (TIS1). In the following descriptions, read TImn as RxD0. By starting counting at one edge of the TImn pin input and capturing the number of counts at another edge, the signal width (high-level width/low-level width) of TImn can be measured. The signal width of TImn can be calculated by the following expression. Signal width of TImn input = Period of count clock ((10000H TSRmn: OVF) + (Capture value of TDRmn + 1)) Caution The TImn pin input is sampled using the operating clock selected with the CKSmn bit of timer mode register mn (TMRmn), so an error equivalent to one operation clock occurs. Timer count register mn (TCRmn) operates as an up counter in the capture & one-count mode. When the channel start trigger bit (TSmn) of timer channel start register m (TSm) is set to 1, the TEmn bit is set to 1 and the TImn pin start edge detection wait status is set. When the TImn pin input start edge (rising edge of the TImn pin input when the high-level width is to be measured) is detected, the counter counts up from 0000H in synchronization with the count clock. When the valid capture edge (falling edge of the TImn pin input when the high-level width is to be measured) is detected later, the count value is transferred to timer data register mn (TDRmn) and, at the same time, INTTMmn is output. If the counter overflows at this time, the OVF bit of timer status register mn (TSRmn) is set to 1. If the counter does not overflow, the OVF bit is cleared. The TCRmn register stops at the value "value transferred to the TDRmn register + 1", and the TImn pin start edge detection wait status is set. After that, the above operation is repeated. As soon as the count value has been captured to the TDRmn register, the OVF bit of the TSRmn register is updated depending on whether the counter overflows during the measurement period. Therefore, the overflow status of the captured value can be checked. If the counter reaches a full count for two or more periods, it is judged to be an overflow occurrence, and the OVF bit of the TSRmn register is set to 1. However, a normal interval value cannot be measured for the OVF bit, if two or more overflows occur. Whether the high-level width or low-level width of the TImn pin is to be measured can be selected by using the CISmn1 and CISmn0 bits of the TMRmn register. Because this function is used to measure the signal width of the TImn pin input, the TSmn bit cannot be set to 1 while the TEmn bit is 1. CISmn1, CISmn0 of TMRmn register = 10B: Low-level width is measured. CISmn1, CISmn0 of TMRmn register = 11B: High-level width is measured. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 508 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-59. Block Diagram of Operation as Input Signal High-/Low-Level Width Measurement CKm1 CKm0 TImn pin NFEN1 and NFEN2 registers Noise filter Edge detection Trigger selection Operation clock Clock selection CKm3 CKm2 Timer counter register mn (TCRmn) Timer data register mn (TDRmn) Interrupt controller Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) Figure 6-60. Example of Basic Timing of Operation as Input Signal High-/Low-Level Width Measurement TSmn TEmn TImn FFFFH a b TCRmn c 0000H TDRmn 0000H a b c INTTMmn OVF Remarks 1. m: 2. TSmn: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) Bit n of timer channel start register m (TSm) TEmn: Bit n of timer channel enable status register m (TEm) TImn: TImn pin input signal TCRmn: Timer count register mn (TCRmn) TDRmn: Timer data register mn (TDRmn) OVF: Bit 0 of timer status register mn (TSRmn) 3. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 509 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-61. Example of Set Contents of Registers to Measure Input Signal High-/Low-Level Width (a) Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) 15 TMRmn 14 13 CKSmn1 CKSmn0 1/0 1/0 12 11 CCSmn M/S 0 0 Note 0 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 0 STSmn2 STSmn1 STSmn0 CISmn1 CISmn0 0 1 0 1 3 2 1 0 MDmn3 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 1/0 1 1 0 1/0 Operation mode of channel n 110B: Capture & one-count Setting of operation when counting is started 0: Does not generate INTTMmn when counting is started. Selection of TImn pin input edge 10B: Both edges (to measure low-level width) 11B: Both edges (to measure high-level width) Start trigger selection 010B: Selects the TImn pin input valid edge. Setting of MASTERmn bit (channels 2, 4, 6) 0: Independent channel operation function. Setting of SPLITmn bit (channels 1, 3) 0: 16-bit timer mode Count clock selection 0: Selects operation clock (fMCK). Operation clock (fMCK) selection 00B: Selects CKm0 as operation clock of channel n. 01B: Selects CKm2 as operation clock of channel n. 10B: Selects CKm1 as operation clock of channel n. 11B: Selects CKm3 as operation clock of channel n. (b) Timer output register m (TOm) Bit n TOm TOmn 0: Outputs 0 from TOmn. 0 (c) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Bit n TOEm TOEmn 0: Stops the TOmn output operation by counting operation. 0 (d) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Bit n TOLm TOLmn 0: Cleared to 0 when TOMmn = 0 (master channel output mode). 0 (e) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) Bit n TOMm TOMmn 0: Sets master channel output mode. 0 Note TMRm2, TMRm4, TMRm6: MASTERmn bit TMRm1, TMRm3: SPLITmn bit TMRm0, TMRm5, TMRm7: Fixed to 0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 510 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 511 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-62. Operation Procedure When Input Signal High-/Low-Level Width Measurement Function Is Used Software Operation TAU Hardware Status Power-off status default (Clock supply is stopped and writing to each register is setting disabled.) Sets the TAUmEN bit of peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) to 1. Power-on status. Each channel stops operating. (Clock supply is started and writing to each register is enabled.) Sets timer clock select register m (TPSm). Determines clock frequencies of CKm0 to CKm3. Channel Sets timer mode register mn (TMRmn) (determines Channel stops operating. default operation mode of channel). (Clock is supplied and some power is consumed.) setting Clears the TOEmn bit to 0 and stops operation of TOmn. Operation Sets the TSmn bit to 1. start The TSmn bit automatically returns to 0 because it is a TEmn = 1, and the TImn pin start edge detection wait status is set. trigger bit. Operation is resumed. Detects the TImn pin input count start valid edge. Clears timer count register mn (TCRmn) to 0000H and starts counting up. During Set value of the TDRmn register can be changed. When the TImn pin start edge is detected, the counter operation Sets corresponding bit of noise filter enable registers 1 (TCRmn) counts up from 0000H. If a capture edge of the and 2 (NFEN1 and NFEN2) to 1. TImn pin is detected, the count value is transferred to The TCRmn register can always be read. timer data register mn (TDRmn) and INTTMmn is The TSRmn register is not used. generated. Set values of the TMRmn register, TOMmn, TOLmn, If an overflow occurs at this time, the OVF bit of timer TOmn, and TOEmn bits cannot be changed. status register mn (TSRmn) is set; if an overflow does not occur, the OVF bit is cleared. The TCRmn register stops the count operation until the next TImn pin start edge is detected. Operation stop TAU The TTmn bit is set to 1. TEmn = 0, and count operation stops. The TTmn bit automatically returns to 0 because it is a The TCRmn register holds count value and stops. trigger bit. The OVF bit of the TSRmn register is also held. The TAUmEN bit of the PER0 register is cleared to 0. stop Power-off status All circuits are initialized and SFR of each channel is also initialized. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 512 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.7.6 Operation as delay counter It is possible to start counting down when the valid edge of the TImn pin input is detected (an external event), and then generate INTTMmn (a timer interrupt) after any specified interval. It can also generate INTTMmn (timer interrupt) at any interval by making a software set TSmn = 1 and the count down start during the period of TEmn = 1. The interrupt generation period can be calculated by the following expression. Generation period of INTTMmn (timer interrupt) = Period of count clock (Set value of TDRmn + 1) Timer count register mn (TCRmn) operates as a down counter in the one-count mode. When the channel start trigger bit (TSmn, TSHm1, TSHm3) of timer channel start register m (TSm) is set to 1, the TEmn, TEHm1, TEHm3 bits are set to 1 and the TImn pin input valid edge detection wait status is set. Timer count register mn (TCRmn) starts operating upon TImn pin input valid edge detection and loads the value of timer data register mn (TDRmn). The TCRmn register counts down from the value of the TDRmn register it has loaded, in synchronization with the count clock. When TCRmn = 0000H, it outputs INTTMmn and stops counting until the next TImn pin input valid edge is detected. The TDRmn register can be rewritten at any time. The new value of the TDRmn register becomes valid from the next period. Figure 6-63. Block Diagram of Operation as Delay Counter CKm2 CKm1 CKm0 TSmn TImn pin Noise filter NFEN1 and NFEN2 registers Edge detection Trigger selection Operation clock Clock selection CKm3 Timer counter register mn (TCRmn) Timer data register mn (TDRmn) Interrupt controller Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 513 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-64. Example of Basic Timing of Operation as Delay Counter TSmn TEmn TImn FFFFH TCRmn 0000H TDRmn a b INTTMmn a+1 Remarks 1. m: 2. TSmn: b+1 Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) Bit n of timer channel start register m (TSm) TEmn: Bit n of timer channel enable status register m (TEm) TImn: TImn pin input signal TCRmn: Timer count register mn (TCRmn) TDRmn: Timer data register mn (TDRmn) 3. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 514 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-65. Example of Set Contents of Registers to Delay Counter (1/2) (a) Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) 15 TMRmn 14 13 1/0 1/0 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 CCSmn M/S Note STSmn2 STSmn1 STSmn0 CISmn1 CISmn0 CKSmn1 CKSmn0 0 0 0/1 0 0 1 1/0 3 2 1 0 MDmn3 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 1/0 0 0 1 0 0 1/0 Operation mode of channel n 100B: One-count mode Start trigger during operation 0: Trigger input is invalid. 1: Trigger input is valid. Selection of TImn pin input edge 00B: Detects falling edge. 01B: Detects rising edge. 10B: Detects both edges. 11B: Setting prohibited Start trigger selection 001B: Selects the TImn pin input valid edge. Setting of MASTERmn bit (channels 2, 4, 6) 0: Independent channel operation function. Setting of SPLITmn bit (channels 1, 3) 1: 8-bit timer mode Count clock selection 0: Selects operation clock (fMCK). Operation clock (fMCK) selection 00B: Selects CKm0 as operation clock of channel n. 10B: Selects CKm1 as operation clock of channel n. 01B: Selects CKm2 as operation clock of channel n. 11B: Selects CKm3 as operation clock of channel n. (b) Timer output register m (TOm) Bit n TOm TOmn 0: Outputs 0 from TOmn. 0 (c) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Bit n TOEm TOEmn 0: Stops the TOmn output operation by counting operation. 0 Note TMRm2, TMRm4, TMRm6: MASTERmn bit TMRm1, TMRm3: SPLITmn bit TMRm0, TMRm5, TMRm7: Fixed to 0 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 515 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-65. Example of Set Contents of Registers to Delay Counter (2/2) (d) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Bit n TOLm TOLmn 0: Cleared to 0 when TOMmn = 0 (master channel output mode). 0 (e) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) Bit n TOMm TOMmn 0: Sets master channel output mode. 0 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 516 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-66. Operation Procedure When Delay Counter Function Is Used Software Operation TAU Hardware Status Power-off status default (Clock supply is stopped and writing to each register is setting disabled.) Sets the TAUmEN bit of peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) to 1. Power-on status. Each channel stops operating. (Clock supply is started and writing to each register is enabled.) Sets timer clock select register m (TPSm). Determines clock frequencies of CKm0 to CKm3. Channel Sets timer mode register mn (TMRmn) (determines Channel stops operating. default operation mode of channel). (Clock is supplied and some power is consumed.) setting INTTMmn output delay is set to timer data register mn (TDRmn). Clears the TOEmn bit to 0 and stops operation of TOmn. Operation start Sets the TSmn bit to 1. The TSmn bit automatically returns to 0 because it is a TEmn = 1, and the TImn pin input valid edge detection wait status is set. trigger bit. Operation is resumed. Detects the TImn pin input valid edge. Value of the TDRmn register is loaded to the timer count register mn (TCRmn). During Set value of the TDRmn register can be changed. The counter (TCRmn) counts down. When TCRmn operation Sets corresponding bit of noise filter enable registers 1 counts down to 0000H, INTTMmn is output, and counting and 2 (NFEN1 and NFEN2) to 1. stops (which leaves TCRmn at 0000H) until the next TImn The TCRmn register can always be read. pin input. The TSRmn register is not used. Operation stop The TTmn bit is set to 1. The TTmn bit automatically returns to 0 because it is a TEmn = 0, and count operation stops. The TCRmn register holds count value and stops. trigger bit. TAU The TAUmEN bit of the PER0 register is cleared to 0. stop Power-off status All circuits are initialized and SFR of each channel is also initialized. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0 to 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 517 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.8 Simultaneous Channel Operation Function of Timer Array Unit 6.8.1 Operation as one-shot pulse output function By using two channels as a set, a one-shot pulse having any delay pulse width can be generated from the signal input to the TImn pin. The delay time and pulse width can be calculated by the following expressions. Delay time = {Set value of TDRmn (master) + 2} Count clock period Pulse width = {Set value of TDRmp (slave)} Count clock period The master channel operates in the one-count mode and counts the delays. Timer count register mn (TCRmn) of the master channel starts operating upon start trigger detection and loads the value of timer data register mn (TDRmn). The TCRmn register counts down from the value of the TDRmn register it has loaded, in synchronization with the count clock. When TCRmn = 0000H, it outputs INTTMmn and stops counting until the next start trigger is detected. The slave channel operates in the one-count mode and counts the pulse width. The TCRmp register of the slave channel starts operation using INTTMmn of the master channel as a start trigger, and loads the value of the TDRmp register. The TCRmp register counts down from the value of The TDRmp register it has loaded, in synchronization with the count value. When count value = 0000H, it outputs INTTMmp and stops counting until the next start trigger (INTTMmn of the master channel) is detected. The output level of TOmp becomes active one count clock after generation of INTTMmn from the master channel, and inactive when TCRmp = 0000H. Instead of using the TImn pin input, a one-shot pulse can also be output using the software operation (TSmn = 1) as a start trigger. Caution The timing of loading of timer data register mn (TDRmn) of the master channel is different from that of the TDRmp register of the slave channel. If the TDRmn and TDRmp registers are rewritten during operation, therefore, an illegal waveform is output. Rewrite the TDRmn register after INTTMmn is generated and the TDRmp register after INTTMmp is generated. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4, 6) p: Slave channel number (n < p 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 518 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Operation clock CKm3 CKm2 CKm1 CKm0 TSmn TImn pin Noise filter NFEN1 and NFEN2 registers Edge detection Trigger selection Master channel (one-count mode) Clock selection Figure 6-67. Block Diagram of Operation as One-Shot Pulse Output Function Timer counter register mn (TCRmn) Timer data register mn (TDRmn) Interrupt controller Timer counter register mp (TCRmp) Output controller Timer data register mp (TDRmp) Interrupt controller Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) CKm3 Operation clock CKm2 CKm1 Trigger selection CKm0 Clock selection Slave channel (one-count mode) TOmp pin Interrupt signal (INTTMmp) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4, 6) p: Slave channel number (n < p 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 519 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-68. Example of Basic Timing of Operation as One-Shot Pulse Output Function TSmn TEmn TImn Master channel FFFFH TCRmn 0000H TDRmn a TOmn INTTMmn TSmp TEmp FFFFH TCRmp Slave channel 0000H TDRmp b TOmp INTTMmp a+2 b a+2 b Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4, 6) p: Slave channel number (n < p 7) 2. TSmn, TSmp: Bit n, p of timer channel start register m (TSm) TEmn, TEmp: Bit n, p of timer channel enable status register m (TEm) TImn, TImp: TImn and TImp pins input signal TCRmn, TCRmp:Timer count registers mn, mp (TCRmn, TCRmp) TDRmn, TDRmp:Timer data registers mn, mp (TDRmn, TDRmp) TOmn, TOmp: TOmn and TOmp pins output signal 3. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 520 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-69. Example of Set Contents of Registers When One-Shot Pulse Output Function Is Used (Master Channel) (a) Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) 15 TMRmn 14 13 CKSmn1 CKSmn0 1/0 1/0 12 CCSmn 0 0 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 MAS STSmn2 STSmn1 STSmn0 CISmn1 CISmn0 TERmn 1 0 0 1 1/0 4 3 2 1 0 MDmn3 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 1/0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Operation mode of channel n 100B: One-count mode Start trigger during operation 0: Trigger input is invalid. Selection of TImn pin input edge 00B: Detects falling edge. 01B: Detects rising edge. 10B: Detects both edges. 11B: Setting prohibited Start trigger selection 001B: Selects the TImn pin input valid edge. Slave/master selection 1: Master channel. Count clock selection 0: Selects operation clock (fMCK). Operation clock (fMCK) selection 00B: Selects CKm0 as operation clock of channel n. 01B: Selects CKm2 as operation clock of channel n. 10B: Selects CKm1 as operation clock of channel n. 11B: Selects CKm3 as operation clock of channel n. (b) Timer output register m (TOm) Bit n TOm TOmn 0: Outputs 0 from TOmn. 0 (c) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Bit n TOEm TOEmn 0: Stops the TOmn output operation by counting operation. 0 (d) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Bit n TOLm TOLmn 0: Cleared to 0 when TOMmn = 0 (master channel output mode). 0 (e) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) Bit n TOMm TOMmn 0: Sets master channel output mode. 0 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4, 6) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 521 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-70. Example of Set Contents of Registers When One-Shot Pulse Output Function Is Used (Slave Channel) (a) Timer mode register mp (TMRmp) 15 TMRmp 14 13 CKSmp1 CKSmp0 1/0 12 11 CCSmp M/S 0 0 0 Note 0 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 0 3 STSmp2 STSmp1 STSmp0 CISmp1 CISmp0 1 0 0 0 2 1 0 MDmp3 MDmp2 MDmp1 MDmp0 0 1 0 0 0 Operation mode of channel p 100B: One-count mode Start trigger during operation 0: Trigger input is invalid. Selection of TImp pin input edge 00B: Sets 00B because these are not used. Start trigger selection 100B: Selects INTTMmn of master channel. Setting of MASTERmp, MASTERmq bits (channels 2, 4, 6) 0: Slave channel. Setting of SPLITmp, SPLITmq bits (channels 1, 3) 0: 16-bit timer mode. Count clock selection 0: Selects operation clock (fMCK). Operation clock (fMCK) selection 00B: Selects CKm0 as operation clock of channel p. 01B: Selects CKm2 as operation clock of channel p. 10B: Selects CKm1 as operation clock of channel p. 11B: Selects CKm3 as operation clock of channel p. * Make the same setting as master channel. (b) Timer output register m (TOm) Bit p TOm TOmp 0: Outputs 0 from TOmp. 1/0 1: Outputs 1 from TOmp. (c) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Bit p TOEm TOEmp 1/0 0: Stops the TOmp output operation by counting operation. 1: Enables the TOmp output operation by counting operation. (d) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Bit p TOLm TOLmp 0: Positive logic output (active-high) 1/0 1: Negative logic output (active-low) (e) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) Bit p TOMm TOMmp 1: Sets the slave channel output mode. 1 Note TMRm2, TMRm4, TMRm6: MASTERmp bit TMRm1, TMRm3: SPLITmp bit TMRm5, TMRm7: Fixed to 0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 522 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4, 6) p: Slave channel number (n < p 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 523 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-71. Operation Procedure of One-Shot Pulse Output Function (1/2) Software Operation TAU Hardware Status Power-off status default (Clock supply is stopped and writing to each register is setting disabled.) Sets the TAUmEN bit of peripheral enable registers 0 (PER0) to 1. Power-on status. Each channel stops operating. (Clock supply is started and writing to each register is enabled.) Sets timer clock select register m (TPSm). Determines clock frequencies of CKm0 to CKm3. Channel Sets timer mode register mn, mp (TMRmn, TMRmp) of Channel stops operating. default two channels to be used (determines operation mode of (Clock is supplied and some power is consumed.) setting channels). An output delay is set to timer data register mn (TDRmn) of the master channel, and a pulse width is set to the TDRmp register of the slave channel. Sets slave channel. The TOmp pin goes into Hi-Z output state. The TOMmp bit of timer output mode register m (TOMm) is set to 1 (slave channel output mode). Sets the TOLmp bit. Sets the TOmp bit and determines default level of the TOmp output. The TOmp default setting level is output when the port mode register is in output mode and the port register is 0. Sets the TOEmp bit to 1 and enables operation of TOmp. TOmp does not change because channel stops operating. Clears the port register and port mode register to 0. The TOmp pin outputs the TOmp set level. (Remarks are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 524 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-71. Operation Procedure of One-Shot Pulse Output Function (2/2) Software Operation Sets the TOEmp bit (slave) to 1 (only when operation is resumed). The TSmn (master) and TSmp (slave) bits of timer channel start register m (TSm) are set to 1 at the same time. The TSmn and TSmp bits automatically return to 0 because they are trigger bits. The TEmn and TEmp bits are set to 1 and the master channel enters the TImn input edge detection wait status. Counter stops operating. Detects the TImn pin input valid edge of master channel. Master channel starts counting. During operation Set values of only the CISmn1 and CISmn0 bits of the TMRmn register can be changed. Sets corresponding bit of noise filter enable registers 1 and 2 (NFEN1 and NFEN2) to 1. Set values of the TMRmp, TDRmn, TDRmp registers, TOMmn, TOMmp, TOLmn, and TOLmp bits cannot be changed. The TCRmn and TCRmp registers can always be read. The TSRmn and TSRmp registers are not used. Set values of the TOm and TOEm registers of slave channel can be changed. Master channel loads the value of the TDRmn register to timer count register mn (TCRmn) when the TImn pin valid input edge is detected, and the counter starts counting down. When the count value reaches TCRmn = 0000H, the INTTMmn output is generated, and the counter stops until the next valid edge is input to the TImn pin. The slave channel, triggered by INTTMmn of the master channel, loads the value of the TDRmp register to the TCRmp register, and the counter starts counting down. The output level of TOmp becomes active one count clock after generation of INTTMmn from the master channel. It becomes inactive when TCRmp = 0000H, and the counting operation is stopped. After that, the above operation is repeated. Operation stop The TTmn (master) and TTmp (slave) bits are set to 1 at the same time. The TTmn and TTmp bits automatically return to 0 because they are trigger bits. Operation is resumed. Operation start Hardware Status TAU stop TEmn, TEmp = 0, and count operation stops. The TCRmn and TCRmp registers hold count value and stop. The TOmp output is not initialized but holds current status. The TOEmp bit of slave channel is cleared to 0 and value is set to the TOmp bit. The TOmp pin outputs the TOmp set level. To hold the TOmp pin output level Clears the TOmp bit to 0 after the value to be held is set to the port register. The TOmp pin output level is held by port function. When holding the TOmp pin output level is not necessary Setting not required. The TAUmEN bit of the PER0 register is cleared to 0. Power-off status All circuits are initialized and SFR of each channel is also initialized. (The TOmp bit is cleared to 0 and the TOmp pin is set to port mode.) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4, 6) p: Slave channel number (n < p 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 525 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.8.2 Operation as PWM function Two channels can be used as a set to generate a pulse of any period and duty factor. The period and duty factor of the output pulse can be calculated by the following expressions. Pulse period = {Set value of TDRmn (master) + 1} Count clock period Duty factor [%] = {Set value of TDRmp (slave)}/{Set value of TDRmn (master) + 1} 100 0% output: Set value of TDRmp (slave) = 0000H 100% output: Set value of TDRmp (slave) {Set value of TDRmn (master) + 1} Remark The duty factor exceeds 100% if the set value of TDRmp (slave) > (set value of TDRmn (master) + 1), it summarizes to 100% output. The master channel operates in the interval timer mode. If the channel start trigger bit (TSmn) of timer channel start register m (TSm) is set to 1, an interrupt (INTTMmn) is output, the value set to timer data register mn (TDRmn) is loaded to timer count register mn (TCRmn), and the counter counts down in synchronization with the count clock. When the counter reaches 0000H, INTTMmn is output, the value of the TDRmn register is loaded again to the TCRmn register, and the counter counts down. This operation is repeated until the channel stop trigger bit (TTmn) of timer channel stop register m (TTm) is set to 1. If two channels are used to output a PWM waveform, the period until the master channel counts down to 0000H is the PWM output (TOmp) cycle. The slave channel operates in one-count mode. By using INTTMmn from the master channel as a start trigger, the TCRmp register loads the value of the TDRmp register and the counter counts down to 0000H. When the counter reaches 0000H, it outputs INTTMmp and waits until the next start trigger (INTTMmn from the master channel) is generated. If two channels are used to output a PWM waveform, the period until the slave channel counts down to 0000H is the PWM output (TOmp) duty. PWM output (TOmp) goes to the active level one clock after the master channel generates INTTMmn and goes to the inactive level when the TCRmp register of the slave channel becomes 0000H. Caution To rewrite both timer data register mn (TDRmn) of the master channel and the TDRmp register of the slave channel, a write access is necessary two times. The timing at which the values of the TDRmn and TDRmp registers are loaded to the TCRmn and TCRmp registers is upon occurrence of INTTMmn of the master channel. Thus, when rewriting is performed split before and after occurrence of INTTMmn of the master channel, the TOmp pin cannot output the expected waveform. To rewrite both the TDRmn register of the master and the TDRmp register of the slave, therefore, be sure to rewrite both the registers immediately after INTTMmn is generated from the master channel. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4, 6) p: Slave channel number (n < p 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 526 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Operation clock CKm3 CKm2 CKm1 CKm0 TSmn Trigger selection Master channel (interval timer mode) Clock selection Figure 6-72. Block Diagram of Operation as PWM Function Timer counter register mn (TCRmn) Timer data register mn (TDRmn) Interrupt controller Timer counter register mp (TCRmp) Output controller Timer data register mp (TDRmp) Interrupt controller Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) CKm3 Operation clock CKm2 CKm1 Trigger selection CKm0 Clock selection Slave channel (one-count mode) TOmp pin Interrupt signal (INTTMmp) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4, 6) p: Slave channel number (n < p 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 527 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-73. Example of Basic Timing of Operation as PWM Function TSmn TEmn FFFFH Master channel TCRmn 0000H TDRmn a b TOmn INTTMmn TSmp TEmp FFFFH TCRmp Slave channel 0000H TDRmp c d TOmp INTTMmp a+1 c a+1 c b+1 d Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4 6) p: Slave channel number (n < p 7) 2. TSmn, TSmp: TEmn, TEmp: Bit n, p of timer channel start register m (TSm) Bit n, p of timer channel enable status register m (TEm) TCRmn, TCRmp: Timer count registers mn, mp (TCRmn, TCRmp) TDRmn, TDRmp: Timer data registers mn, mp (TDRmn, TDRmp) TOmn, TOmp: TOmn and TOmp pins output signal 3. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 528 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-74. Example of Set Contents of Registers When PWM Function (Master Channel) Is Used (a) Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) 15 TMRmn 14 13 CKSmn1 CKSmn0 1/0 1/0 0 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 MAS CCSmn STSmn2 STSmn1 STSmn0 CISmn1 CISmn0 TERmn 0 1 0 0 0 0 5 4 0 0 3 2 1 0 MDmn3 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0 1 Operation mode of channel n 000B: Interval timer Setting of operation when counting is started 1: Generates INTTMmn when counting is started. Selection of TImn pin input edge 00B: Sets 00B because these are not used. Start trigger selection 000B: Selects only software start. Slave/master selection 1: Master channel. Count clock selection 0: Selects operation clock (fMCK). Operation clock (fMCK) selection 00B: Selects CKm0 as operation clock of channel n. 01B: Selects CKm2 as operation clock of channel n. 10B: Selects CKm1 as operation clock of channel n. 11B: Selects CKm3 as operation clock of channel n. (b) Timer output register m (TOm) Bit n TOm TOmn 0: Outputs 0 from TOmn. 0 (c) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Bit n TOEm TOEmn 0: Stops the TOmn output operation by counting operation. 0 (d) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Bit n TOLm TOLmn 0: Cleared to 0 when TOMmn = 0 (master channel output mode). 0 (e) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) Bit n TOMm TOMmn 0: Sets master channel output mode. 0 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4, 6) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 529 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-75. Example of Set Contents of Registers When PWM Function (Slave Channel) Is Used (a) Timer mode register mp (TMRmp) 15 TMRmp 14 13 CKSmp1 CKSmp0 1/0 12 11 CCSmp M/S 1/0 0 0 Note 0 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 0 STSmp2 STSmp1 STSmp0 CISmp1 CISmp0 1 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 MDmp3 MDmp2 MDmp1 MDmp0 0 1 0 0 1 Operation mode of channel p 100B: One-count mode Start trigger during operation 1: Trigger input is valid. Selection of TImp pin input edge 00B: Sets 00B because these are not used. Start trigger selection 100B: Selects INTTMmn of master channel. Setting of MASTERmp or SPLITmp bit 0: Slave channel. Count clock selection 0: Selects operation clock (fMCK). Operation clock (fMCK) selection 00B: Selects CKm0 as operation clock of channel p. 01B: Selects CKm2 as operation clock of channel p. 10B: Selects CKm1 as operation clock of channel p. 11B: Selects CKm3 as operation clock of channel p. * Make the same setting as master channel. (b) Timer output register m (TOm) Bit p TOm TOmp 0: Outputs 0 from TOmp. 1/0 1: Outputs 1 from TOmp. (c) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Bit p TOEm TOEmp 1/0 0: Stops the TOmp output operation by counting operation. 1: Enables the TOmp output operation by counting operation. (d) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Bit p TOLm TOLmp 0: Positive logic output (active-high) 1/0 1: Negative logic output (active-low) (e) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) Bit p TOMm TOMmp 1: Sets the slave channel output mode. 1 Note TMRm5, TMRm7: TMRm1, TMRm3: Fixed to 0 SPLITmp bit Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4, 6) p: Slave channel number (n < p 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 530 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-76. Operation Procedure When PWM Function Is Used (1/2) Software Operation TAU Hardware Status Power-off status default (Clock supply is stopped and writing to each register is setting disabled.) Sets the TAUmEN bit of peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) to 1. Power-on status. Each channel stops operating. (Clock supply is started and writing to each register is enabled.) Sets timer clock select register m (TPSm). Determines clock frequencies of CKm0 to CKm3. Channel Sets timer mode registers mn, mp (TMRmn, TMRmp) of Channel stops operating. default two channels to be used (determines operation mode of (Clock is supplied and some power is consumed.) setting channels). An interval (period) value is set to timer data register mn (TDRmn) of the master channel, and a duty factor is set to the TDRmp register of the slave channel. Sets slave channel. The TOmp pin goes into Hi-Z output state. The TOMmp bit of timer output mode register m (TOMm) is set to 1 (slave channel output mode). Sets the TOLmp bit. Sets the TOmp bit and determines default level of the TOmp output. The TOmp default setting level is output when the port mode register is in output mode and the port register is 0. Sets the TOEmp bit to 1 and enables operation of TOmp. TOmp does not change because channel stops operating. Clears the port register and port mode register to 0. The TOmp pin outputs the TOmp set level. (Remarks are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 531 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-76. Operation Procedure When PWM Function Is Used (2/2) Software Operation Operation Sets the TOEmp bit (slave) to 1 (only when operation is start resumed). Hardware Status The TSmn (master) and TSmp (slave) bits of timer channel start register m (TSm) are set to 1 at the same TEmn = 1, TEmp = 1 When the master channel starts counting, INTTMmn is time. The TSmn and TSmp bits automatically return to 0 generated. Triggered by this interrupt, the slave because they are trigger bits. channel also starts counting. Set values of the TMRmn and TMRmp registers, The counter of the master channel loads the TDRmn operation TOMmn, TOMmp, TOLmn, and TOLmp bits cannot be register value to timer count register mn (TCRmn), and changed. counts down. When the count value reaches TCRmn = Set values of the TDRmn and TDRmp registers can be 0000H, INTTMmn output is generated. At the same time, changed after INTTMmn of the master channel is the value of the TDRmn register is loaded to the TCRmn generated. register, and the counter starts counting down again. The TCRmn and TCRmp registers can always be read. At the slave channel, the value of the TDRmp register is The TSRmn and TSRmp registers are not used. loaded to the TCRmp register, triggered by INTTMmn of Operation is resumed. During the master channel, and the counter starts counting down. The output level of TOmp becomes active one count clock after generation of the INTTMmn output from the master channel. It becomes inactive when TCRmp = 0000H, and the counting operation is stopped. After that, the above operation is repeated. Operation The TTmn (master) and TTmp (slave) bits are set to 1 at stop the same time. TEmn, TEmp = 0, and count operation stops. The TTmn and TTmp bits automatically return to 0 The TCRmn and TCRmp registers hold count value and because they are trigger bits. stop. The TOmp output is not initialized but holds current status. The TOEmp bit of slave channel is cleared to 0 and value is set to the TOmp bit. TAU stop The TOmp pin outputs the TOmp set level. To hold the TOmp pin output level Clears the TOmp bit to 0 after the value to The TOmp pin output level is held by port function. be held is set to the port register. When holding the TOmp pin output level is not necessary Setting not required. The TAUmEN bit of the PER0 register is cleared to 0. Power-off status All circuits are initialized and SFR of each channel is also initialized. (The TOmp bit is cleared to 0 and the TOmp pin is set to port mode.) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4, 6) p: Slave channel number (n < p 7) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 532 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.8.3 Operation as multiple PWM output function By extending the PWM function and using multiple slave channels, many PWM waveforms with different duty values can be output. For example, when using two slave channels, the period and duty factor of an output pulse can be calculated by the following expressions. Pulse period = {Set value of TDRmn (master) + 1} Count clock period Duty factor 1 [%] = {Set value of TDRmp (slave 1)}/{Set value of TDRmn (master) + 1} 100 Duty factor 2 [%] = {Set value of TDRmq (slave 2)}/{Set value of TDRmn (master) + 1} 100 Remark Although the duty factor exceeds 100% if the set value of TDRmp (slave 1) > {set value of TDRmn (master) + 1} or if the {set value of TDRmq (slave 2)} > {set value of TDRmn (master) + 1}, it is summarized into 100% output. Timer count register mn (TCRmn) of the master channel operates in the interval timer mode and counts the periods. The TCRmp register of the slave channel 1 operates in one-count mode, counts the duty factor, and outputs a PWM waveform from the TOmp pin. The TCRmp register loads the value of timer data register mp (TDRmp), using INTTMmn of the master channel as a start trigger, and starts counting down. When TCRmp = 0000H, TCRmp outputs INTTMmp and stops counting until the next start trigger (INTTMmn of the master channel) has been input. The output level of TOmp becomes active one count clock after generation of INTTMmn from the master channel, and inactive when TCRmp = 0000H. In the same way as the TCRmp register of the slave channel 1, the TCRmq register of the slave channel 2 operates in one-count mode, counts the duty factor, and outputs a PWM waveform from the TOmq pin. The TCRmq register loads the value of the TDRmq register, using INTTMmn of the master channel as a start trigger, and starts counting down. When TCRmq = 0000H, the TCRmq register outputs INTTMmq and stops counting until the next start trigger (INTTMmn of the master channel) has been input. The output level of TOmq becomes active one count clock after generation of INTTMmn from the master channel, and inactive when TCRmq = 0000H. When channel 0 is used as the master channel as above, up to three types of PWM signals can be output at the same time. Caution To rewrite both timer data register mn (TDRmn) of the master channel and the TDRmp register of the slave channel 1, write access is necessary at least twice. Since the values of the TDRmn and TDRmp registers are loaded to the TCRmn and TCRmp registers after INTTMmn is generated from the master channel, if rewriting is performed separately before and after generation of INTTMmn from the master channel, the TOmp pin cannot output the expected waveform. To rewrite both the TDRmn register of the master and the TDRmp register of the slave, be sure to rewrite both the registers immediately after INTTMmn is generated from the master channel (This applies also to the TDRmq register of the slave channel 2). Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4) p: Slave channel number 1, q: Slave channel number 2 n < p < q 7 (Where p and q are integers greater than n) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 533 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Operation clock CKm3 CKm2 CKm1 CKm0 TSmn Trigger selection Master channel (interval timer mode) Clock selection Figure 6-77. Block Diagram of Operation as Multiple PWM Output Function (output two types of PWMs) Timer counter register mn (TCRmn) Timer data register mn (TDRmn) Interrupt controller Timer counter register mp (TCRmp) Output controller Timer data register mp (TDRmp) Interrupt controller Timer counter register mq (TCRmq) Output controller Timer data register mq (TDRmq) Interrupt controller Interrupt signal (INTTMmn) CKm3 Operation clock CKm2 CKm1 Trigger selection CKm0 Clock selection Slave channel 1 (one-count mode) TOmp pin Interrupt signal (INTTMmp) CKm3 Operation clock CKm2 CKm1 Trigger selection CKm0 Clock selection Slave channel 2 (one-count mode) TOmq pin Interrupt signal (INTTMmq) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4) p: Slave channel number 1, q: Slave channel number 2 n < p < q 7 (Where p and q are integers greater than n) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 534 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-78. Example of Basic Timing of Operation as Multiple PWM Output Function (Output two types of PWMs) TSmn TEmn FFFFH Master channel TCRmn 0000H TDRmn a b TOmn INTTMmn TSmp TEmp FFFFH Slave channel 1 TCRmp 0000H TDRmp c d TOmp INTTMmp a+1 a+1 c c b+1 d d TSmq TEmq FFFFH Slave channel 2 TCRmq 0000H TDRmq e f TOmq INTTMmq a+1 e a+1 e b+1 f f (Remarks are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 535 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4) p: Slave channel number 1, q: Slave channel number 2 n < p < q 7 (Where p and q are integers greater than n) 2. TSmn, TSmp, TSmq: TEmn, TEmp, TEmq: Bit n, p, q of timer channel start register m (TSm) Bit n, p, q of timer channel enable status register m (TEm) TCRmn, TCRmp, TCRmq: Timer count registers mn, mp, mq (TCRmn, TCRmp, TCRmq) TDRmn, TDRmp, TDRmq: Timer data registers mn, mp, mq (TDRmn, TDRmp, TDRmq) TOmn, TOmp, TOmq: TOmn, TOmp, and TOmq pins output signal 3. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 536 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-79. Example of Set Contents of Registers When Multiple PWM Output Function (Master Channel) Is Used (a) Timer mode register mn (TMRmn) 15 TMRmn 14 13 CKSmn1 CKSmn0 1/0 1/0 0 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 MAS CCSmn STSmn2 STSmn1 STSmn0 CISmn1 CISmn0 TERmn 0 1 0 0 0 0 5 4 0 0 3 2 1 0 MDmn3 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0 1 Operation mode of channel n 000B: Interval timer Setting of operation when counting is started 1: Generates INTTMmn when counting is started. Selection of TImn pin input edge 00B: Sets 00B because these are not used. Start trigger selection 000B: Selects only software start. Slave/master selection 1: Master channel. Count clock selection 0: Selects operation clock (fMCK). Operation clock (fMCK) selection 00B: Selects CKm0 as operation clock of channel n. 01B: Selects CKm2 as operation clock of channel n. 10B: Selects CKm1 as operation clock of channel n. 11B: Selects CKm3 as operation clock of channel n. (b) Timer output register m (TOm) Bit n TOm TOmn 0: Outputs 0 from TOmn. 0 (c) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Bit n TOEm TOEmn 0: Stops the TOmn output operation by counting operation. 0 (d) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Bit n TOLm TOLmn 0: Cleared to 0 when TOMmn = 0 (master channel output mode). 0 (e) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) Bit n TOMm TOMmn 0: Sets master channel output mode. 0 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 537 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-80. Example of Set Contents of Registers When Multiple PWM Output Function (Slave Channel) Is Used (output two types of PWMs) (a) Timer mode register mp, mq (TMRmp, TMRmq) 15 TMRmp TMRmq 14 13 1/0 1/0 0 15 14 13 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 MDmp3 MDmp2 MDmp1 MDmp0 0 CCSmq M/S Note STSmq2 STSmq1 STSmq0 CISmq1 CISmq0 CKSmq1 CKSmq0 1/0 11 CCSmp M/S Note STSmp2 STSmp1 STSmp0 CISmp1 CISmp0 CKSmp1 CKSmp0 1/0 12 1 0 0 1 3 2 1 0 MDmq3 MDmq2 MDmq1 MDmq0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Operation mode of channel p, q 100B: One-count mode Start trigger during operation 1: Trigger input is valid. Selection of TImp and TImq pins input edge 00B: Sets 00B because these are not used. Start trigger selection 100B: Selects INTTMmn of master channel. Setting of MASTERmp, MASTERmq bits (channels 2, 4, 6) 0: Slave channel. Setting of SPLITmp, SPLITmq bits (channels 1, 3) 0: 16-bit timer mode. Count clock selection 0: Selects operation clock (fMCK). Operation clock (fMCK) selection 00B: Selects CKm0 as operation clock of channel p, q. 01B: Selects CKm2 as operation clock of channel p, q. 10B: Selects CKm1 as operation clock of channel p, q. 11B: Selects CKm3 as operation clock of channel p, q. * Make the same setting as master channel. (b) Timer output register m (TOm) TOm Bit q Bit p TOmq TOmp 1/0 1/0 0: Outputs 0 from TOmp or TOmq. 1: Outputs 1 from TOmp or TOmq. (c) Timer output enable register m (TOEm) Bit q TOEm Bit p TOEmq TOEmp 1/0 1/0 0: Stops the TOmp or TOmq output operation by counting operation. 1: Enables the TOmp or TOmq output operation by counting operation. (d) Timer output level register m (TOLm) Bit q TOLm Bit p TOLmq TOLmp 1/0 1/0 0: Positive logic output (active-high) 1: Negative logic output (active-low) (e) Timer output mode register m (TOMm) Bit q TOMm Bit p TOMmq TOMmp 1 1: Sets the slave channel output mode. 1 Note TMRm5, TMRm7: TMRm1, TMRm3: R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Fixed to 0 SPLITmp, SPLITmq bit 538 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4) p: Slave channel number 1, q: Slave channel number 2 n < p < q 7 (Where p and q are integers greater than n) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 539 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-81. Operation Procedure When Multiple PWM Output Function Is Used (output two types of PWMs) (1/2) Software Operation TAU Hardware Status Power-off status default (Clock supply is stopped and writing to each register is setting disabled.) Sets the TAUmEN bit of peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) to 1. Power-on status. Each channel stops operating. (Clock supply is started and writing to each register is enabled.) Sets timer clock select register m (TPSm). Determines clock frequencies of CKm0 to CKm3. Channel Sets timer mode registers mn, mp, mq (TMRmn, Channel stops operating. default TMRmp, TMRmq) of each channel to be used (Clock is supplied and some power is consumed.) setting (determines operation mode of channels). An interval (period) value is set to timer data register mn (TDRmn) of the master channel, and a duty factor is set to the TDRmp and TDRmq registers of the slave channels. Sets slave channels. The TOmp and TOmq pins go into Hi-Z output state. The TOMmp and TOMmq bits of timer output mode register m (TOMm) are set to 1 (slave channel output mode). Clears the TOLmp and TOLmq bits to 0. Sets the TOmp and TOmq bits and determines default level of the TOmp and TOmq outputs. The TOmp and TOmq default setting levels are output when the port mode register is in output mode and the port register is 0. Sets the TOEmp and TOEmq bits to 1 and enables operation of TOmp and TOmq. TOmp and TOmq do not change because channels stop operating. Clears the port register and port mode register to 0. The TOmp and TOmq pins output the TOmp and TOmq set levels. (Remarks are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 540 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT Figure 6-81. Operation Procedure When Multiple PWM Output Function Is Used (output two types of PWMs) (2/2) Software Operation Operation (Sets the TOEmp and TOEmq (slave) bits to 1 only when resuming operation.) start The TSmn bit (master), and TSmp and TSmq (slave) bits of timer channel start register m (TSm) are set to 1 at the same time. The TSmn, TSmp, and TSmq bits automatically return to 0 because they are trigger bits. Set values of the TMRmn, TMRmp, TMRmq registers, TOMmn, TOMmp, TOMmq, TOLmn, TOLmp, and TOLmq bits cannot be changed. Set values of the TDRmn, TDRmp, and TDRmq registers can be changed after INTTMmn of the master channel is generated. The TCRmn, TCRmp, and TCRmq registers can always be read. The TSRmn, TSRmp, and TSRmq registers are not used. Operation stop The TTmn bit (master), TTmp, and TTmq (slave) bits are set to 1 at the same time. The TTmn, TTmp, and TTmq bits automatically return to 0 because they are trigger bits. Operation is resumed. During operation The TOEmp and TOEmq bits of slave channels are cleared to 0 and value is set to the TOmp and TOmq bits. TAU stop To hold the TOmp and TOmq pin output levels Clears the TOmp and TOmq bits to 0 after the value to be held is set to the port register. When holding the TOmp and TOmq pin output levels are not necessary Setting not required The TAUmEN bit of the PER0 register is cleared to 0. Hardware Status TEmn = 1, TEmp, TEmq = 1 When the master channel starts counting, INTTMmn is generated. Triggered by this interrupt, the slave channel also starts counting. The counter of the master channel loads the TDRmn register value to timer count register mn (TCRmn) and counts down. When the count value reaches TCRmn = 0000H, INTTMmn output is generated. At the same time, the value of the TDRmn register is loaded to the TCRmn register, and the counter starts counting down again. At the slave channel 1, the values of the TDRmp register are transferred to the TCRmp register, triggered by INTTMmn of the master channel, and the counter starts counting down. The output levels of TOmp become active one count clock after generation of the INTTMmn output from the master channel. It becomes inactive when TCRmp = 0000H, and the counting operation is stopped. At the slave channel 2, the values of the TDRmq register are transferred to TCRmq register, triggered by INTTMmn of the master channel, and the counter starts counting down. The output levels of TOmq become active one count clock after generation of the INTTMmn output from the master channel. It becomes inactive when TCRmq = 0000H, and the counting operation is stopped. After that, the above operation is repeated. TEmn, TEmp, TEmq = 0, and count operation stops. The TCRmn, TCRmp, and TCRmq registers hold count value and stop. The TOmp and TOmq output are not initialized but hold current status. The TOmp and TOmq pins output the TOmp and TOmq set levels. The TOmp and TOmq pin output levels are held by port function. Power-off status All circuits are initialized and SFR of each channel is also initialized. (The TOmp and TOmq bits are cleared to 0 and the TOmp and TOmq pins are set to port mode.) Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Master channel number (n = 0, 2, 4) p: Slave channel number 1, q: Slave channel number 2 n < p < q 7 (Where p and q are a consecutive integer greater than n) 2. Unit 1 is not provided in the Group A products. Channels 7 to 4 of unit 1 are not provided in the Group B, C, and D products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 541 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT 6.9 Cautions When Using Timer Array Unit 6.9.1 Cautions When Using Timer output (1) When the PCLK (not divided) is selected as the operating clock for the timer array unit and TDRnm (n = 0, 1; m = 0 to 7) are set to 0000H, an interrupt signal from the timer array unit is fixed to high, and an interrupt request cannot be detected. To use this setting, the interrupt function should be masked. (2) Do not change the input source for the timer set by the TIS0, TIS1, and TIS2 registers while the timer operates. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 542 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ Timer RJ is a 16-bit timer that can be used for pulse output, external pulse width or period measurement, and counting external events. 7.1 Overview This 16-bit timer consists of a reload register and a down counter. The reload register and the down counter are allocated to the same address, and they can be accessed by accessing the TRJ0 register. Table 7-1 lists the Timer RJ Specifications. Figure 7-1 shows the Timer RJ Block Diagram. Table 7-1. Timer RJ Specifications Item Operating Timer mode modes Pulse output mode Note Description The count source is counted. The count source is counted and the output is inverted at each underflow of the timer. Event counter mode Note An external event is counted. Operation is possible in STOP mode. Pulse width measurement An external pulse width is measured. mode Note Pulse period measurement An external pulse period is measured. mode Note Count source (Operating clock) fCLK, fCLK/2, fCLK/8, fIL, fSL, or event input from the event link controller (ELC) selectable Interrupt * When the counter underflows. * When the measurement of the active width of the external input (TRJIO0) is completed in pulse width measurement mode. * When the set edge of the external input (TRJIO0) is input in pulse period measurement mode. Selectable functions * Coordination with the event link controller (ELC). Event input from the ELC is selectable as a count source. Note The 20-pin products do not have TRJIO0 and TRJO0 pins. Thus, the pulse output mode, event counter mode, pulse width measurement mode, and pulse period measurement mode cannot be used. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 543 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ Figure 7-1. Timer RJ Block Diagram TCK2 to TCK0 = 000B = 001B fCLK fCLK/8 = 011B fCLK/2 = 100B fIL Event input from event link controller (ELC) SELLOSC=0 fSL fSUB = 101B = 110B fIL = 00B = 01B = 10B Event is always counted Event is counted during polarity period specified for INTP4 Event is counted during polarity period specified for timer output signal TRDIOD1 TRDIOC1 TO02 TO03 TIPF1 and TIPF0 fCLK fCLK/8 fCLK/32 = 01B = 10B = 11B Data bus TIOGT1 and TIOGT0 SELLOSC=1 = 00B = 01B = 10B = 11B TMOD2 to TMOD0 = other than 010B RCCPSEL1 and RCCPSEL0 Digital filter = 00B TSTART 16-bit counter TRJ0 counter = 010B TIPF1 and TIPF0 = 01B or 10B 16-bit reload register Underflow signal Timer RJ0 interrupt TMOD2 to TMOD0 = 011B or 100B One edge/ both edges switching Polarity selection TEDGPL TEDGSEL Counter control circuit Measurement complete signal TRJIO0 pin TMOD2 to TMOD0 = 001B TEDGSEL = 1 TEDGSEL = 0 TRJO0 pin Q Toggle flip-flop Q CLR TOENA CK Write to TRJMR0 register Write 1 to TSTOP TSTART, TSTOP: Bits in TRJCR0 register TEDGSEL, TOENA, TIPF0, TIPF1, TIOGT0, TIOGT1: Bits in TRJIOC0 register TMOD0 to TMOD2, TEDGPL, TCK0 to TCK2: Bits in TRJMR0 register RCCPSEL0, RCCPSEL1: Bits in TRJISR0 register SELLOSC: Bit in CKSEL register Notes 1. When selecting fIL as the count source, set the WUTMMCK0 bit in the operation speed mode control register (OSMC) to 1. 2. The polarity can be selected by the RCCPSEL2 bit in the TRJISR0 register. 3. fSUB cannot be selected as the count source for timer RJ when fSL (fIL) is selected as the count source for timer RD or the output clock for clock output/buzzer output. 4. The 20-pin products do not have TRJIO0 and TRJO0 pins. 7.2 I/O Pins Table 7-2 lists the Timer RJ Pin Configuration. Table 7-2. Timer RJ Pin Configuration Pin Name I/O Function INTP4 Input External input for timer RJ TRJIO0 Note Input/output External event input and pulse output for timer RJ TRJO0 Note Output Pulse output for timer RJ Note The 20-pin products do not have TRJIO0 and TRJO0 pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 544 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.3 Registers Table 7-3 lists the Timer RJ Register Configuration. Table 7-3. Timer RJ Register Configuration Register Name Symbol After Reset Address Access Size Peripheral Enable Register 1 PER1 00H F02C0H 1, 8 Operation speed mode control register OSMC 00H F00F3H 8 Clock select register CKSEL 00H F02C4H 1, 8 TRJ0 FFFFH F06F0H 16 Timer RJ Control Register 0 TRJCR0 00H F0240H 8 Timer RJ I/O Control Register 0 Note 2 TRJIOC0 00H F0241H 1, 8 Timer RJ Mode Register 0 TRJMR0 00H F0242H 8 Timer RJ Event Pin Select Register 0 Note 2 Timer RJ Counter Register 0 Note 1 TRJISR0 00H F0243H 8 Port Register 1 P1 00H FFF01H 8 Port Register 4 P4 00H FFF04H 8 Port Mode Register 1 PM1 FFH FFF21H 8 Port Mode Register 4 PM4 FFH FFF24H 8 Notes 1. When the TRJ0 register is accessed, the CPU does not proceed to the next instruction processing but enters the wait state for CPU processing. For this reason, if this wait state occurs, the number of instruction execution clocks is increased by the number of wait clocks. The number of wait clocks for access to the TRJ0 register is one clock for both writing and reading. 2. The 20-pin products do not have the timer RJ I/O control register 0 (TRJIOC0) and timer RJ event pin select register 0 (TRJISR0). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 545 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.3.1 Peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) The PER1 register is used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to the hardware that is not used is also stopped so as to decrease the power consumption and noise. To use Timer RJ, be sure to set bit 0 (TRJ0EN) to 1. Set the PER1 register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 7-2. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 1 (PER1) Address: F02C0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> 2 1 <0> PER1 DACENNote 0 CMPENNote TRD0EN DTCEN 0 0 TRJ0EN TRJ0EN Control of timer RJ0 input clock supply Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by timer RJ0 cannot be written. Timer RJ0 is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by timer RJ0 can be read and written. Note Only on the RL78/F14. Cautions 1. When setting timer RJ, be sure to set the TRJ0EN bit to 1 first. If TRJ0EN = 0, writing to a control register of timer RJ is ignored, and all read values are default values (except for port mode registers 1, 4 (PM1, PM4) and port registers 1, 4 (P1, P4)). 2. Be sure to set the following bits to 0: RL78/F13: bits 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7 RL78/F14: bits 1, 2, and 6 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 546 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.3.2 Operation speed mode control register (OSMC) The low-speed on-chip oscillator can be operated by setting the WUTMMCK0 bit in the OSMC register. To select the low-speed on-chip oscillator as the count source of the timer RJ, set the bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the timer RJ mode register 0 (TRJMR0). The RTCLPC bit is used to reduce power consumption by stopping unnecessary clock functions. For the setting of the RTCLPC bit, see CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR. Set the OSMC register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 7-3. Format of Operation Speed Mode Control Register (OSMC) Address: F00F3H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OSMC RTCLPC 0 0 WUTMMCK0 0 0 0 0 WUTMMCK0 Low-speed on-chip oscillator operation control 0 Low-speed on-chip oscillator operating 1 Low-speed on-chip oscillator stopped 7.3.3 Clock Select Register (CKSEL) This register is used to select the CPU clock (fSUB/fIL) the clocks for the timer RJ, timer RD, and clock output/buzzer output. Together with the CMC register, the SELLOSC bit is used to set the operation mode of the subsystem clock. For details, see Figure 5-3 Format of Clock Operation Mode Control Register (CMC). Set the CKSEL register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the CKSEL register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Figure 7-4. Format of Clock Select Register (CKSEL) Address: F02C4H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 <2> 1 <0> CKSEL 0 0 0 0 0 TRD_CKS 0 SELLOSC EL SELLOSC Notes 3, 4 Control of sub/low-speed on-chip oscillator selection clock (fSL) selection Notes 3, 4 0 Selects fSUB Note 1 1 Selects fIL Note 2 Notes 1. When setting fSUB as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock, first set the SELLOSC bit to 0 and then set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 1. 2. When setting fIL as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock, first set the SELLOSC bit to 1 and then set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 1. 3. When the SELLOSC bit is set to 1, the low-speed on-chip oscillator operates. 4. When setting the CKSEL register in the 20-, 30-, or 32-pin products, set the SELLOSC bit to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 547 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.3.4 Timer RJ Counter Register 0 (TRJ0), Timer RJ Reload Register TRJ0 is a 16-bit register. The write value is written to the reload register and the read value is read from the counter. The states of the reload register and the counter are changed depending on the TSTART bit in the TRJCR0 register. For details, see 7. 4. 1 Reload Register and Counter Rewrite Operation. Figure 7-5. Format of Timer RJ Counter Register 0 (TRJ0), Timer RJ Reload Register Address : F06F0H After Reset: FFFFH Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRJ0 -- Function 16-bit counter and reload register Notes 1, 2, 3 Bits Setting Range 0000H to FFFFH R/W R/W 15 to 0 Notes 1. When 1 is written to the TSTOP bit in the TRJCR0 register, the 16-bit counter is forcibly stopped and set to FFFFH. 2. The TRJ0 register must be accessed in 16-bit units. Do not access this register in 8-bit units. 3. When the setting of bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRJMR0 register is other than 001B (fCLK/8) or 011B (fCLK/2), if the TRJ0 register is set to 0000H, a request signal to the data transfer controller (DTC) and the event link controller (ELC) is generated only once immediately after the count starts. However, the TRJO0 and TRJIO0 output is toggled. When the TRJ0 register is set to 0000H in event counter mode, regardless of the value of bits TCK2 to TCK0, a request signal to the DTC, ELC, and interrupt functions is generated only once immediately after the count starts. In addition, the TRJO0 output is toggled even during a period other than the specified count period. When the TRJ0 register is set to 0000H or a higher value, a request signal is generated each time TRJ underflows. Caution When the TRJ0 register is accessed, the CPU does not proceed to the next instruction processing but enters the wait state for CPU processing. For this reason, if this wait state occurs, the number of instruction execution clocks is increased by the number of wait clocks. The number of wait clocks for access to the TRJ0 register is one clock for both writing and reading. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 548 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.3.5 Timer RJ Control Register 0 (TRJCR0) Figure 7-6. Format of Timer RJ Control Register 0 (TRJCR0) Address : F0240H After Reset: 00H Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRJCR0 -- -- TUNDF TEDGF -- TSTOP TCSTF TSTART Bits Nothing is assigned R/W 7 to 6 -- The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. Timer RJ underflow flag Note 1 TUNDF 0 No underflow 1 Underflow R R/W R/W [Condition for setting to 0] * When 0 is written to this bit by a program. [Condition for setting to 1] * When the counter underflows. Active edge judgement flag Notes 1, 2 TEDGF 0 No active edge received 1 Active edge received R/W R/W [Condition for setting to 0] * When 0 is written to this bit by a program. [Conditions for setting to 1] * When the measurement of the active width of the external input (TRJIO0) is completed in pulse width measurement mode. * The set edge of the external input (TRJIO0) is input in pulse period measurement mode. Bit 3 -- Nothing is assigned The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. Timer RJ count forced stop Note 3 TSTOP When 1 is written to this bit, the count is forcibly stopped. The read value is 0. Timer RJ count status flag Note 4 TCSTF 0 Count stops 1 Count in progress R/W R R/W W R/W R [Conditions for setting to 0] * When 0 is written to the TSTART bit (the TCSTF bit is set to 0 in synchronization with the count source). * When 1 is written to the TSTOP bit. [Condition for setting to 1] * When 1 is written to the TSTART bit (the TCSTF bit is set to 1 in synchronization with the count source). (Notes are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 549 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ Timer RJ count start Note 4 TSTART 0 Count stops 1 Count starts R/W R/W Count operation is started by writing 1 to the TSTART bit and stopped by writing 0. When the TSTART bit is set to 1 (count starts), the TCSTF bit is set to 1 (count in progress) in synchronization with the count source. Also, after 0 is written to the TSTART bit, the TCSTF bit is set to 0 (count stops) in synchronization with the count source. For details, see 7. 5. 1 Count Operation Start and Stop Control. Notes 1. Set the TRJCR0 register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. 2. The 20-pin products do not have the active edge judgement flag. 3. When 1 (count is forcibly stopped) is written to the TSTOP bit, bits TSTART and TCSTF are initialized at the same time. The pulse output level is also initialized. 4. For notes on using bits TSTART and TCSTF, see 7. 5. 1 Count Operation Start and Stop Control. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 550 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.3.6 Timer RJ I/O Control Register 0 (TRJIOC0) Figure 7-7. Format of Timer RJ I/O Control Register 0 (TRJIOC0) Address : F0241H After Reset: 00H Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRJIOC0 TIOGT1 TIOGT0 TIPF1 TIPF0 -- TOENA -- TEDGSEL TRJIO0 count control Notes 1, 2 TIOGT1 TIOGT0 0 0 Event is always counted 0 1 Event is counted during polarity period specified for INTP4 1 0 Event is counted during polarity period specified for timer output signal 1 1 Do not set. R/W R/W Notes 1. When INTP4 or the timer output signal is used, the polarity to count an event can be selected by the RCCPSEL2 bit in the TRJISR0 register. 2. Bits TIOGT0 and TIOGT1 are enabled only in event counter mode. TIPF1 TIPF0 0 0 No filter TRJIO0 input filter select 0 1 Filter sampled at fCLK 1 0 Filter sampled at fCLK/8 1 1 Filter sampled at fCLK/32 R/W R/W These bits are used to specify the sampling frequency of the filter for the TRJIO0 input. If the input to the TRJIO0 pin is sampled and the value matches three successive times, that value is taken as the input value. Bit 3 Nothing is assigned The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. -- TOENA TRJO0 output enable 0 TRJO0 output disabled (port) 1 TRJO0 output enabled Bit 1 -- R R/W R/W Nothing is assigned The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. TEDGSEL R/W I/O polarity switch Function varies depending on the operating mode (see Table 7-4 and Table 7-5). The TEDGSEL bit is used R/W R R/W R/W to switch the TRJO0 output polarity and the TRJIO0 I/O edge and polarity. In pulse output mode, only the inversion/non-inversion of toggle flip-flop is controlled. The toggle flip-flop is initialized when the TRJMR0 register is written or 1 is written to the TSTOP bit in the TRJCR0 register. Caution The 20-pin products do not have the timer RJ I/O control register 0 (TRJIOC0). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 551 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ Table 7-4. TRJIO0 I/O Edge and Polarity Switching Operating Mode Function Timer mode Not used (I/O port) Pulse output mode 0: Output is started at high (Initialization level: High) Event counter mode 0: Count at rising edge 1: Output is started at low (Initialization level: Low) 1: Count at falling edge Pulse width measurement mode 0: Low-level width is measured 1: High-level width is measured Pulse period measurement mode 0: Measure from one rising edge to the next rising edge 1: Measure from one falling edge to the next falling edge Table 7-5. TRJO0 Output Polarity Switching Operating Mode All modes Function 0: Output is started at low (Initialization level: Low) 1: Output is started at high (Initialization level: High) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 552 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.3.7 Timer RJ Mode Register 0 (TRJMR0) Figure 7-8. Format of Timer RJ Mode Register 0 (TRJMR0) Address : F0242H After Reset: 00H Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRJMR0 -- TCK2 TCK1 TCK0 TEDGPL TMOD2 TMOD1 TMOD0 Bit 7 Nothing is assigned -- The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. Timer RJ count source select Notes 1, 2 TCK2 TCK1 TCK0 0 0 0 fCLK 0 0 1 fCLK/8 0 1 1 fCLK/2 1 0 0 fIL Note 4 1 0 1 Event input from event link controller (ELC) Note 5 1 0 fSL 1 Other than above One edge Both edges R/W R/W TRJIO0 edge polarity select Note 6 1 R Setting prohibited TEDGPL 0 R/W R/W R/W Timer RJ operating mode select Note 3 TMOD2 TMOD1 TMOD0 0 0 0 Timer mode 0 0 1 Pulse output mode Note 7 0 1 0 Event counter mode Note 7 0 1 1 Pulse width measurement mode Note 7 1 0 0 Pulse period measurement mode Note 7 Other than above R/W R/W Setting prohibited Notes 1. When event counter mode is selected, the external input (TRJIO0) is selected as the count source regardless of the setting of bits TCK0 to TCK2. 2. Do not switch count sources during count operation. When switching count sources, set the TSTART and TCSTF bits in the TRJCR0 register to 0 (count stops). 3. The operating mode can be changed only when the count is stopped while both the bits TSTART and TCSTF in the TRJCR0 register are set to 0 (count stops). Do not change the operating mode during count operation. 4. When selecting fIL as the count source, set the WUTMMCK0 bit in the operation speed mode register (OSMC) to 1. However, fSUB cannot be selected as the count source for timer RJ when the SELLOSC bit in the CKSEL register is set to 1. 5. Only available in the RL78/F14. Do not make the setting in other products. 6. The TEDGPL bit is enabled only in event counter mode. 7. The 20-pin products do not have TRJIO0 and TRJO0 pins. Thus, the pulse output mode, event counter mode, pulse width measurement mode, and pulse period measurement mode cannot be used. Caution Write access to the TRJMR0 register initializes the output from pins TRJO0 and TRJIO0 of timer RJ. For details on the output level at initialization, refer to the description shown below Figure 7-7 Format of Timer RJ I/O Control Register 0 (TRJIOC0). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 553 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.3.8 Timer RJ Event Pin Select Register 0 (TRJISR0) Figure 7-9. Format of Timer RJ Event Pin Select Register 0 (TRJISR0) Address : F0243H After Reset: 00H Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRJISR0 -- -- -- -- -- RCCPSEL2 RCCPSEL1 RCCPSEL0 Note Note Note Bit 7 to Nothing is assigned R/W 3 -- The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. RCCPS Timer output signal and INTP4 polarity selection R R/W EL2 0 An event is counted during the low-level period 1 An event is counted during the high-level period RCCPS RCCPS EL1 EL0 Timer output signal selection 0 0 TRDIOD1 0 1 TRDIOC1 1 0 TO02 1 1 TO03 R/W R/W R/W Note Bits RCCPSEL0 to RCCPSEL2 are enabled only in event counter mode. Caution The 20-pin products do not have the timer RJ event pin select register 0 (TRJISR0). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 554 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.3.9 Port mode registers 1, 4 (PM1, PM4) These registers set input/output of ports 1 and 4 in 1-bit units. When using the ports (such as P41/TRJIO0 and P10/TRJO0) to be shared with the timer output pin for timer output, set the port mode register (PMxx) bit and the port register (Pxx) bit corresponding to each port to 0. Example: When using P41/TRJIO0 for timer output Set the PM41 bit of port mode register 4 to 0. Set the P41 bit of port register 4 to 0. When using the ports (such as P41/TRJIO0) to be shared with the timer input pin for timer input, set the port mode register (PMxx) bit corresponding to each port to 1. At this time, the port register (Pxx) bit may be 0 or 1. Example: When using P41/TRJIO0 for timer input Set the PM41 bit of port mode register 4 to 1. Set the P41 bit of port register 4 to 1. The PM1 and PM4 registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH. Figure 7-10. Format of Port Mode Registers 1, 4 (PM1, PM4) (100-pin products) Address: FFF21H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10 Address: FFF24H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM4 PM47 PM46 PM45 PM44 PM43 PM42 PM41 PM40 PMmn Remark Pmn pin I/O mode selection (m = 1, 4 ; n = 0 to 7) 0 Output mode (output buffer on) 1 Input mode (output buffer off) The figure shown above presents the format of port mode registers 1 and 4 of the 100-pin products. The format of the port mode register of other products, see 4.5 Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 555 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.4 Operation 7.4.1 Reload Register and Counter Rewrite Operation Regardless of the operating mode, the timing of the rewrite operation to the reload register and the counter differs depending on the value in the TSTART bit in the TRJCR0 register. When the TSTART bit is 0 (count stops), the count value is directly written to the reload register and the counter. When the TSTART bit is 1 (count starts), the value is written to the reload register in synchronization with the count source, and then to the counter in synchronization with the next count source. Figure 7-11 shows the Timing of Rewrite Operation with TSTART Bit Value. Figure 7-11. Timing of Rewrite Operation with TSTART Bit Value Write 1 to TSTART bit in TRJCR0 register by a program Write 1234H to TRJ0 register by a program Write 5678H to TRJ0 register by a program Register write clock Count source TSTART bit in TRJCR0 register TRJ0 register FFFFH 5678H 1234H Reload register load signal Reload register load clock Counter load signal Counter load clock Reload register FFFFH Timer RJ0 counter FFFFH R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 5678H 5678H 1234H 5677H 5676H 5675H 5674H 5673H 5672H 5671H 5670H566FH1234H 1233H 1232H 1231H1230H 556 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.4.2 Timer Mode In this mode, the counter is decremented by the count source selected by bits TCK0 to TCK2 in the TRJMR0 register. In timer mode, the count value is decremented by 1 each time the count source is input. When the count value reaches 0000H and the next count source is input, an underflow occurs and an interrupt request is generated. Figure 7-12 shows the Operation Example in Timer Mode. Figure 7-12. Operation Example in Timer Mode Count source Reload register Previous value (0300H) New value (1010H) Counter reloading occurs Timer RJ0 counter 02FAH02F9H02F8H02F7H1010H100FH100EH ***** ***** 0000H 1010H100FH100EH100DH100CH100BH TUNDF bit in TRJCR0 register An underflow occurs Set to 0 by a program IF bit in INTC register Acknowledgement of an interrupt request R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 557 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.4.3 Pulse Output Mode In this mode, the counter is decremented by the count source selected by bits TCK0 to TCK2 in the TRJMR0 register, and the output level of pins TRJIO0 and TRJO0 pin is inverted each time an underflow occurs. In pulse output mode, the count value is decremented by 1 each time the count source is input. When the count value reaches 0000H and the next count source is input, an underflow occurs and an interrupt request is generated. In addition, a pulse can be output from pins TRJIO0 and TRJO0. The output level is inverted each time an underflow occurs. The pulse output from the TRJO0 pin can be stopped by the TOENA bit in the TRJIOC0 register. Also, the output level can be selected by the TEDGSEL bit in the TRJIOC0 register. Figure 7-13 shows the Operation Example in Pulse Output Mode. Caution The 20-pin products do not have TRJIO0 and TRJO0 pins. Thus, the pulse output mode cannot be used. Figure 7-13. Operation Example in Pulse Output Mode Write 1 to TSTART bit in TRJCR0 register by a program Write 0002H to TRJ0 register by a program Write 0004H to TRJ0 register by a program Write 1 to port mode register (PMxx) bit corresponding to port multiplexed with TRJIO0 function Count source TSTART bit in TRJCR0 register TRJ0 register FFFFH Reload register FFFFH Timer RJ0 counter FFFFH 0002H 0004H 0002H 0002H 0004H 0001H 0000H 0002H 0001H 0000H 0002H 0001H 0000H 0002H 0001H 0004H 0003H 0002H 0001H 0000H 0004H 0003H TEDGSEL bit in TRJIOC0 register 0 Port mode register (PMxx) bit corresponding to port multiplexed with TRJIO0 function TRJO0 pin output TRJIO0 pin output High-impedance state (Note 1) TUNDF bit in TRJCR0 register Set to 0 by a program IF bit in INTC register Acknowledgement of an interrupt request Note 1: The TRJIO0 pin becomes high impedance by output enable control on the port selected as the TRJIO0 function. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 558 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.4.4 Event Counter Mode In this mode, the counter is decremented by an external event signal (count source) input to the TRJIO0 pin. Various periods for counting events can be set by bits TIOGT0 and TIOGT1 in the TRJIOC0 register and the TRJISR0 register. In addition, the filter function for the TRJIO0 input can be specified by bits TIPF0 and TIPF1 in the TRJIOC0 register. Also, the output from the TRJO0 pin can be toggled even in event counter mode. When event counter mode is used, see 7. 5. 5 Procedure for Setting Pins TRJO0 and TRJIO0. Figure 7-14 shows the Operation Example in Event Counter Mode. Caution The 20-pin products do not have TRJIO0 and TRJO0 pins. Thus, the event counter mode cannot be used. Figure 7-14. Operation Example 1 in Event Counter Mode Event counter mode is entered Bits TMOD2 to TMOD0 in TRJMR0 register 010B Event is counted at rising edge Control bit in TRJIOC0 register 00H TSTART bit in TRJCR0 register Event input is started Event input is completed TRJIO0 pin event input Timer RJ0 counter TUNDF bit in TRJCR0 register FFFFH FFFEH FFFDH 0000H FFFFH FFFEH Counter initial value is set Set to 0 by a program IF bit in INTC register Acknowledgement of an interrupt request Figure 7-15 shows an operation example for counting during the specified period in event counter mode (bits TlOGT1 and TlOGT0 in the TRJIO0 register are set to 01B or 10B). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 559 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ Figure 7-15. Operation Example 2 in Event Counter Mode Timing example when the setting of operating mode is as follows: TRJMR0 register: TMOD2, 1, 0 = 010B (event counter mode) TRJIOC0 register: TIOGT1, 0 = 01B (event is counted during specified period for external interrupt pin) TIPF1, 0 = 00B (no filter) TEDGSEL = 0 (count at rising edge) TRJISR0 register: RCCPSEL2 = 1 (high-level period is counted) TSTART bit in TRJCR0 register Event input starts Note 2 Event input to TRJIO0 pin Note 1 INTP4 or timer output signal FFFFH Timer RJ0 counter FFFEH FFFDH FFFCH FFFBH FFFAH FFF9H FFF8H The counter initial value is set The following notes apply only when bits TIOGT1 and TIOGT0 in the TRJIOC0 register are 01B or 10B for the setting of operating mode in event count mode. Notes 1. To control synchronization, there is a delay of two cycles of the count source until count operation is affected. 2. Count operation may be performed for two cycles of the count source immediately after the count is started, depending on the previous state before the count is stopped. To disable the count for two cycles immediately after the count is started, write 1 to the TSTOP bit in the TRJCR0 register to initialize the internal circuit, and then make operation settings before starting count operation. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 560 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.4.5 Pulse Width Measurement Mode In this mode, the pulse width of an external signal input to the TRJIO0 pin is measured. When the level specified by the TEDGSEL bit in the TRJIOC0 register is input to the TRJIO0 pin, the decrement is started with the selected count source. When the specified level on the TRJIO0 pin ends, the counter is stopped, the TEDGF bit in the TRJCR0 register is set to 1 (active edge received), and an interrupt request is generated. The measurement of pulse width data is performed by reading the count value while the counter is stopped. Also, when the counter underflows during measurement, the TUNDF bit in the TRJCR0 register is set to 1 (underflow) and an interrupt request is generated. Figure 7-16 shows the Operation Example in Pulse Width Measurement Mode. When accessing bits TEDGF and TUNDF in the TRJCR0 register, see 7. 5. 2 Access to Flags (Bits TEDGF and TUNDF in TRJCR0 Register). Caution The 20-pin products do not have TRJIO0 pin. Thus, the pulse width measurement mode cannot be used. Figure 7-16. Operation Example in Pulse Width Measurement Mode This example applies when the high-level width of the measurement pulse is measured (TEDGSEL bit in TRJIOC0 register = 1) n = TRJ0 register content FFFFH Measurement is started Underflow Counter content (hex) n Measurement is stopped Measurement is stopped Measurement is started 0000H Measurement is started Time TSTART bit in TRJCR0 register Set to 1 by a program Measurement pulse input to TRJIO0 pin IF bit in INTC register Acknowledgement of an interrupt request TEDGF bit in TRJCR0 register Set to 0 by a program Set to 0 by a program TUNDF bit in TRJCR0 register Set to 0 by a program R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 561 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.4.6 Pulse Period Measurement Mode In this mode, the pulse period of an external signal input to the TRJIO0 pin is measured. The counter is decremented by the count source selected by bits TCK0 to TCK2 in the TRJMR0 register. When a pulse with the period specified by the TEDGSEL bit in the TRJIOC0 register is input to the TRJIO0 pin, the count value is transferred to the read-out buffer at the rising edge of the count source. The value in the reload register is loaded to the counter at the next rising edge. Simultaneously, the TEDGF bit in the TRJCR0 register is set to 1 (active edge received) and an interrupt request is generated. The read-out buffer (TRJ0 register) is read at this time and the difference from the reload value is the period data of the input pulse. The period data is retained until the read-out buffer is read. When the counter underflows, the TUNDF bit in the TRJCR0 register is set to 1 (underflow) and an interrupt request is generated. Figure 7-17 shows the Operation Example in Pulse Period Measurement Mode. Only input pulses with a period longer than twice the period of the count source. Also, the low-level and high-level widths must be both longer than the period of the count source. If a pulse period shorter than these conditions is input, the input may be ignored. Caution The 20-pin products do not have TRJIO0 pin. Thus, the pulse period measurement mode cannot be used. Figure 7-17. Operation Example in Pulse Period Measurement Mode Count source TSTART bit in TRJCR0 register Measurement pulse input Counter is reloaded Timer RJ0 counter Content of read-out buffer 0300H 0300H 02FFH02FEH0300H02FFH02FEH 02FDH 02FFH 02FCH 02FBH02FAH02F9H02F8H02F7H02FFH02FEH 02FEH 02FBH02FAH02F9H02F8H 02F7H **** **** 0001H 0000H 0300H02FFH02FEH **** **** 0001H 0000H 0300H 02FFH Counter value is read (Note 1) Read signal of counter (Note 2) 02FEH (Note 2) 02F7H Read data TEDGF bit in TRJCR0 register TUNDF bit in TRJCR0 register IF bit in INTC register (Note 3) (Note 3) Set to 0 by a program (Note 4) Set to 0 by a program (Note 5) Acknowledgement of an interrupt request This example applies when the initial value of the TRJ0 register is set to 0300H, the TEDGSEL bit in the TRJIOC0 register is set to 0, and the period from one rising edge to the next edge of the measurement pulse is measured. Notes: 1. Reading from the TRJ0 register must be performed during the period from when the TEDGF bit is set to 1 (active edge received) until the next active edge is input. The content of the read-out buffer is retained until the TRJ0 register is read. If it is not read before the active edge is input, the measurement result of the previous period is retained. 2. When the TRJ0 register is read in pulse period measurement mode, the content of the read-out buffer is read. 3. When the active edge of the measurement pulse is input and then the set edge of an external pulse is input, the TEDGF bit in the TRJCR0 register is set to 1 (active edge received). 4. To set to 0 by a program, write 0 to the TEDGF bit in the TRJCR0 register using an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. 5. To set to 0 by a program, write 0 to the TUNDF bit in the TRJCR0 register using an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 562 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.4.7 Coordination with Event Link Controller (ELC) The ELC is only available in the RL78/F14. Through coordination with the ELC, event input from the ELC can be set to be the count source. Bits TCK0 to TCK2 in the TRJMR0 register count at the rising edge of event input from the ELC. However, ELC input does not function in event counter mode. The ELC setting procedure is shown below: * Procedure for starting operation (1) Set the event output destination select register (ELSELRn) for the event link controller (ELC). (2) Set the operating mode for the event generation source. (3) Set the mode for timer RJ. (4) Start the count operation of timer RJ. (5) Start the operation of the event generation source. * Procedure for stopping operation (1) Stop the operation of the event generation source. (2) Stop the count operation of timer RJ. (3) Set the event output destination select register (ELSELRn) for the event link controller (ELC) to 0. 7.4.8 Output Settings for Each Mode Table 7-6 and Table 7-7 list the states of pins TRJO0 and TRJIO0 in each mode. Table 7-6. TRJO0 Pin Setting Operating Mode All modes TRJIOC0 Register TRJO0 Pin Output TOENA Bit TEDGSEL Bit 1 1 Inverted output 0 Normal output 0 0 or 1 Output disabled Table 7-7. TRJIO0 Pin Setting Operating Mode TRJIOC0 Register PMXX Bit Note Timer mode Pulse output mode TRJIO0 Pin I/O TEDGSEL Bit 0 or 1 0 or 1 Input (Not used) 1 0 or 1 Output disabled (Hi-z output) 0 1 1 0 or 1 0 Event counter mode Normal output Inverted output Input Pulse width measurement mode Pulse period measurement mode Note The port mode register (PMxx) bit corresponding to port multiplexed with TRJIO0 function. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 563 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.5 Notes on Timer RJ 7.5.1 Count Operation Start and Stop Control When event counter mode is set or the count source is set to other than the ELC After 1 (count starts) is written to the TSTART bit in the TRJCR0 register while the count is stopped, the TCSTF bit in the TRJCR0 register remains 0 (count stops) for three cycles of the count source. Do not access the registers associated with timer RJ Note other than the TCSTF bit until this bit is set to 1 (count in progress). After 0 (count stops) is written to the TSTART bit during a count operation, the TCSTF bit remains 1 for three cycles of the count source. When the TCSTF bit is set to 0, the count is stopped. Do not access the registers associated with timer RJ Note other than the TCSTF bit until this bit is set to 0. Clear the interrupt register before changing the TSTART bit from 0 to 1. Refer to CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS for details. Note Registers associated with timer RJ: TRJ0, TRJCR0, TRJIOC0, TRJMR0, and TRJISR0 When event counter mode is set or the count source is set to the ELC After 1 (count starts) is written to the TSTART bit in the TRJCR0 register while the count is stopped, the TCSTF bit in the TRJCR0 register remains 0 (count stops) for two cycles of the CPU clock. Do not access the registers associated with timer RJ Note other than the TCSTF bit until this bit is set to 1 (count in progress). After 0 (count stops) is written to the TSTART bit during a count operation, the TCSTF bit remains 1 for two cycles of the CPU clock. When the TCSTF bit is set to 0, the count is stopped. Do not access the registers associated with timer RJ Note other than the TCSTF bit until this bit is set to 0. Clear the interrupt register before changing the TSTART bit from 0 to 1. Refer to CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS for details. The ELC is only available in the RL78/F14. Note Registers associated with timer RJ: TRJ0, TRJCR0, TRJIOC0, TRJMR0, and TRJISR0 7.5.2 Access to Flags (Bits TEDGF and TUNDF in TRJCR0 Register) Bits TEDGF and TUNDF in the TRJCR0 register are set to 0 by writing 0 by a program, but writing 1 to these bits has no effect. If a read-modify-write instruction is used to set the TRJCR0 register, bits TEDGF and TUNDF may be erroneously set to 0 depending on the timing, even when the TEDGF bit is set to 1 (active edge received) and the TUNDF bit is set to 1 (underflow) during execution of the instruction. Use an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction to access to the TRJCR0 register. 7.5.3 Access to Counter Register When bits TSTART and TCSTF in the TRJCR0 register are both 1 (count starts), allow at least three cycles of the count source clock between writes when writing to the TRJ0 register successively. 7.5.4 When Changing Mode The registers associated with timer RJ operating mode (TRJIOC0, TRJMR0, and TRJISR0) can be changed only when the count is stopped with both the TSTART and TCSTF bits set to 0 (count stops). Do not change these registers during count operation. When the registers associated with timer RJ operating mode are changed, the values of bits TSTART and TCSTF are undefined. Write 0 (no active edge received) to the TEDGF bit and 0 (no underflow) to the TUNDF bit before starting the count. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 564 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.5.5 Procedure for Setting Pins TRJO0 and TRJIO0 After a reset, the I/O ports multiplexed with pins TRJO0 and TRJIO0 function as input ports. To output from pins TRJO0 and TRJIO0, use the following setting procedure. The 20-pin products do not have TRJO0 and TRJIO0 pins. Changing procedure (1) Set the mode. (2) Set the initial value/output enabled. (3) Set the port register bits corresponding to pins TRJO0 and TRJIO0 to 0. (4) Set the port mode register bits corresponding to pins TRJO0 and TRJIO0 to output mode. (Output is started from pins TRJO0 and TRJIO0) (5) Start the count (TSTART in TRJCR0 register = 1). To input from the TRJIO0 pin, use the following setting procedure: (1) Set the mode. (2) Set the initial value/edge selected. (3) Set the port mode register bit corresponding to TRJIO0 pin to input mode. (Input is started from the TRJIO0 pin) (4) Start the count (TSTART in TRJCR0 register = 1). (5) Wait until the TCSTF bit in the TRJCR0 register is set to 1 (count in progress). (In event counter mode only) (6) Input an external event from the TRJIO0 pin. (7) The processing on completion of the first measurement is invalid (the measured value is valid for the second and subsequent times). (In pulse width measurement mode and pulse period measurement mode only) 7.5.6 When Timer RJ is not Used When timer RJ is not used, set bits TMOD2 to TMOD0 in the TRJMR0 register to 000B (timer mode) and set the TOENA bit in the TRJIOC0 register to 0 (TRJO output disabled). 7.5.7 When Timer RJ Operating Clock is Stopped Supplying or stopping the timer RJ clock can be controlled by the TRJ0EN bit in the PER1 register. Note that the following SFRs cannot be accessed while the timer RJ clock is stopped. Make sure the timer RJ clock is supplied before accessing any of these registers. Registers TRJ0, TRJCR0, TRJMR0, TRJIOC0, and TRJISR0. 7.5.8 Procedure for Setting STOP Mode (Event Counter Mode) To perform event counter mode operation during STOP mode, first supply the timer RJ clock and then use the following procedure to enter STOP mode. Setting procedure (1) Set the operating mode. (2) Start the count (TSTART = 1, TCSTF = 1). (3) Stop supplying the timer RJ clock. To stop event counter mode operation during STOP mode, use the following procedure to stop operation. (1) Supply the timer RJ clock. (2) Stop the count (TSTART = 0, TCSTF = 0) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 565 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 7 TIMER RJ 7.5.9 Functional Restriction in STOP Mode (Event Counter Mode Only) When event counter mode operation is performed during STOP mode, the digital filter function cannot be used. 7.5.10 When Count is Forcibly Stopped by TSTOP Bit After the counter is forcibly stopped by the TSTOP bit in the TRJCR0 register, do not access the following SFRs for one cycle of the count source. Registers TRJ0, TRJCR0, and TRJMR0 7.5.11 Digital Filter When the digital filter is used, do not start timer operation for five cycles of the digital filter clock after setting bits TIPF1 and TIPF0. Also, do not start timer operation for five cycles of the digital filter clock when the TEDGSEL bit in the TRJIOC register is changed while the digital filter is used. 7.5.12 When Selecting fIL as Count Source When selecting fIL as the count source, set the WUTMMCK0 bit in the operation speed mode control register (OSMC) to 1. However, fSUB cannot be selected as the count source for timer RJ when fSL (fIL) is selected as the count source for timer RD or the output clock for clock output/buzzer output. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 566 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Timer RD contains two 16-bit timer units (timer RD0 and timer RD1). 8.1 Overview Each of timer RD0 and timer RD1 has four I/O pins. The timer RD operating clock (fTRD) is selectable from fCLK, fMP, or fSL. Figure 8-1 shows the Timer RD Block Diagram and Table 8-1 lists the Timer RD Pin Configuration. Timer RD has four modes: Timer mode - Input capture function Transfer the counter value to a register with an external signal as the trigger - Output compare function Detect register value matches with a counter (Pin output can be changed at detection) - PWM function Output pulse of any width continuously The following three modes use the PWM function. Reset synchronous PWM mode Output three-phase waveforms (6) without sawtooth wave modulation and dead time Complementary PWM mode Output three-phase waveforms (6) with triangular wave modulation and dead time PWM3 mode Output PWM waveforms (2) with a fixed period The timer mode input capture function, output compare function, and PWM function are equivalent in timer RD0 and timer RD1, and these functions can be selected individually for each pin. Also, a combination of these functions can be used in timer RD0 and timer RD1. In reset synchronous PWM mode, complementary PWM mode, and PWM3 mode, a waveform is output with a combination of counters and registers in timer RD0 and timer RD1. Pin functions depend on the mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 567 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-1. Timer RD Block Diagram fCLK, fPLL, fIH, fSUB, fIL Note Timer RDi TRDi register TRDGRAi register INTP0 TRDGRBi register Count source select circuit TRDGRCi register TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 TRDGRDi register TRDIOB0 TRDDFi register Timer RD control circuit Data bus TRDCRi register TRDIOC0 TRDIOD0 TRDIORAi register TRDIOA1 TRDIORCi register TRDIOB1 TRDSRi register TRDIOC1 TRDIERi register TRDIOD1 TRDPOCRi register Timer RD0 interrupt request Timer RD1 interrupt request TRDELC register TRDSTR register TRDMR register TRDPMR register TRDFCR register TRDOER1 register TRDOER2 register TRDOCR register Remark i = 0 or 1 Note fIH can be selected when it is 64 MHz or 48 MHz. fPLL can be selected when it is over 32 MHz. Remark i = 0 or 1 Table 8-1. Timer RD Pin Configuration Pin Name Assigned Pin TRDIOA0/TRDCLK0 P13 (P15) TRDIOB0 P125 (P11) Input/Output TRDIOC0 P14 Input/Output TRDIOD0 P120 (P12) Input/Output TRDIOA1 P15 Input/Output TRDIOB1 P17 Input/Output TRDIOC1 P16 Input/Output TRDIOD1 P30 Input/Output R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 I/O Input/Output Function Function varies depending on the mode. Refer to descriptions of individual modes for details. 568 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2 Registers Table 8-2 lists the Timer RD Register Configuration. Table 8-2. Timer RD Register Configuration Register Name Symbol After Reset Address Access Size PER1 00H F02C0H 1, 8 CKSEL 00H F02C4H 1, 8 TRDELC 00HNote F0260H 1, 8 Timer RD Start Register TRDSTR 0CHNote F0263H 8 Timer RD Mode Register TRDMR 00HNote F0264H 1, 8 Timer RD PWM Function Select Register TRDPMR 00HNote F0265H 1, 8 Timer RD Function Control Register TRDFCR 80HNote F0266H 1, 8 Timer RD Output Master Enable Register 1 TRDOER1 FFHNote F0267H 1, 8 Timer RD Output Master Enable Register 2 TRDOER2 00HNote F0268H 1, 8 Timer RD Output Control Register TRDOCR 00HNote F0269H 1, 8 Timer RD Digital Filter Function Select Register 0 TRDDF0 00HNote F026AH 1, 8 Timer RD Digital Filter Function Select Register 1 TRDDF1 00HNote F026BH 1, 8 Peripheral Enable Register 1 Clock Select Register Timer RD ELC Register TRDCR0 00HNote F0270H 1, 8 Timer RD I/O Control Register A0 TRDIORA0 00HNote F0271H 1, 8 Timer RD I/O Control Register C0 TRDIORC0 88HNote F0272H 1, 8 Timer RD Status Register 0 TRDSR0 00HNote F0273H 1, 8 Timer RD Interrupt Enable Register 0 TRDIER0 00HNote F0274H 1, 8 TRDPOCR0 00HNote F0275H 1, 8 TRD0 0000HNote F0276H 16 Timer RD General Register A0 TRDGRA0 FFFFHNote F0278H 16 Timer RD General Register B0 TRDGRB0 FFFFHNote F027AH 16 Timer RD General Register C0 TRDGRC0 FFFFHNote FFF58H 16 Timer RD General Register D0 TRDGRD0 FFFFHNote FFF5AH 16 TRDCR1 00HNote F0280H 1, 8 Timer RD I/O Control Register A1 TRDIORA1 00HNote F0281H 1, 8 Timer RD I/O Control Register C1 TRDIORC1 88HNote F0282H 1, 8 TRDSR1 00HNote F0283H 1, 8 TRDIER1 00HNote F0284H 1, 8 TRDPOCR1 00HNote F0285H 1, 8 TRD1 0000HNote F0286H 16 Timer RD General Register A1 TRDGRA1 FFFFHNote F0288H 16 Timer RD General Register B1 TRDGRB1 FFFFHNote F028AH 16 Timer RD General Register C1 TRDGRC1 FFFFHNote FFF5CH 16 Timer RD General Register D1 TRDGRD1 FFFFHNote FFF5EH 16 PWM output delay control register 0 PWMDLY0 0000H F0228H 16 Timer RD Control Register 0 Timer RD PWM Function Output Level Control Register 0 Timer RD Counter 0 <R> Timer RD Control Register 1 Timer RD Status Register 1 Timer RD Interrupt Enable Register 1 Timer RD PWM Function Output Level Control Register 1 Timer RD Counter 1 Port Register 1 Port Mode Register 1 Port Register 3 Port Mode Register 3 Port Register 12 Port Mode Register 12 P1 00H FFF01H 1, 8 PM1 FFH FFF21H 1, 8 P3 00H FFF03H 1, 8 PM3 FFH FFF23H 1, 8 P12 - FFF0CH 1, 8 PM12 FFH FFF2CH 1, 8 PLL Control Register PLLCTL 00H F02C5H 1, 8 PLL Status Register PLLSTS 00H F02C6H 1, 8 fMP Clock Division Register MDIV 00H/01H F02C7H 8 System Clock Control Register CKC 00H FFFA4H 1, 8 Note The timer RD SFRs are undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 569 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.1 Peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) The PER1 register is used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to the hardware that is not used is also stopped so as to decrease the power consumption and noise. To use timer RD, be sure to set bit 4 (TRD0EN) to 1. Set the PER1 register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 8-2. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 1 (PER1) Address: F02C0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> 6 <5> <4> <3> 2 1 <0> PER1 DACENNote 0 CMPENNote TRD0EN DTCEN 0 0 TRJ0EN TRD0EN Control of timer RD input clock supply Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by timer RD cannot be written. Timer RD is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by timer RD can be read and written. Note Only for RL78/F14. Cautions 1. When setting timer RD, be sure to set the TRD0EN bit to 1 first. If TRD0EN = 0, writing to a control register of timer RD is ignored, and all read values are default values (except for port mode registers 1, 3, and 12 (PM1, PM3, and PM12) and port registers 1, 3, and 12 (P1, P3, and P12). 2. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. RL78/F13: bits 1, 2, and 5 to 7 RL78/F14: bits 1, 2, and 6 3. When selecting fIF (64 MHz or 48 MHz) as the count source, set fCLK to fIH. When selecting fPLL (over 32 MHz) as the count source, set fCLK to fPLL. When selecting fSUB or fIL as the count source to access the timer RD-related registers, set fCLK to fSUB or fIL, respectively. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 570 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.2 Clock Select Register (CKSEL) This register is used to select the CPU clock (fSUB/fIL) and the clocks for the timer RJ, timer RD, and clock output/buzzer output. Together with the CMC register, the SELLOSC bit is used to set the operation mode of the subsystem clock. For details, see Figure 5-3 Format of Clock Operation Mode Control Register (CMC). Set the CKSEL register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the CKSEL register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Figure 8-3. Format of Clock Select Register (CKSEL) Address: F02C4H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 CKSEL 0 0 0 0 0 <2> 1 <0> TRD_ 0 SELLOSC CKSEL TRD_ Notes 5, 6 Control of TRD clock selection CKSEL 0 Selects fCLK or fMP Note 1. 1 Selects fSL Note 2. SELLOSC Control of sub/low-speed on-chip oscillator selection clock (fSL) selection Notes 5, 6 0 Selects fSUB Note 3 1 Selects fIL Note 4 Notes 1. When FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and PLLDIV1 = 1 (fPLL > 32 MHz) in the PLLCTL register, set the TRD_CKSEL bit to 0. When FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) or PLLDIV1 = 1 (fPLL > 32 MHz) in the PLLCTL register, the timer RD operating clock (fTRD) becomes fMP. 2. When fSL is selected as the timer RD operating clock (fTRD), fSL should be selected as the CPU clock (set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 1). 3. When setting fSUB as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock, first set the SELLOSC bit to 0 and then set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 1. 4. When setting fIL as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock, first set the SELLOSC bit to 1 and then set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 1. 5. When the SELLOSC bit is set to 1, the low-speed on-chip oscillator operates. 6. When setting the CKSEL register in the 20-, 30-, or 32-pin products, set the SELLOSC bit to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 571 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.3 Timer RD ELC Register (TRDELC) Figure 8-4. Format of Timer RD ELC Register (TRDELC) Address: F0260H After Reset: 00H Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDELC -- -- ELCOBE1 ELCICE1 -- -- ELCOBE0 ELCICE0 Bits 7 to 6 -- Nothing is assigned The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. ELC event input 1 enable for timer RD pulse output forced cutoff ELCOBE1 0 Forced cutoff is disabled 1 Forced cutoff is enabled 0 Input capture D1 is selected 1 Event input 1 from the event link controller (ELC) is selected Bits 3 to 2 -- The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. ELC event input 0 enable for timer RD pulse output forced cutoff 0 Forced cutoff is disabled 1 Forced cutoff is enabled ELC event input 0 select for timer RD input capture D0 ELCICE0 0 Input capture D0 is selected 1 Event input 0 from the event link controller (ELC) is selected Caution R/W R/W R/W Nothing is assigned ELCOBE0 R R/W ELC event input 1 select for timer RD input capture D1 ELCICE1 R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W The timer RD ELC register (TRDELC) is only available in the RL78/F14. Do not access the register in other products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 572 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.4 Timer RD Start Register (TRDSTR) Set the TRDSTR register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. See 8. 5. 1 (1) TRDSTR Register in 8.5 Notes on Timer RD. Figure 8-5. Format of Timer RD Start Register (TRDSTR) Address: F0263H After Reset: 0CH Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDSTR -- -- -- -- CSEL1 CSEL0 TSTART1 TSTART0 Bits 7 to 4 Nothing is assigned R/W The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. -- R TRD1 count operation select Note 2 CSEL1 Count stops at compare match with TRDGRA1 register 0 Count continues after compare match with TRDGRA1 register 1 CSEL0 R/W Note 3 TRD0 count operation select R/W Count stops at compare match with TRDGRA0 register 0 Count continues after compare match with TRDGRA0 register 1 TRD1 count start flag Notes 4, 5 TSTART1 0 Count stops 1 Count starts 0 Count stops 1 Count starts R/W Note 3 R/W R/W TRD0 count start flag Notes 6, 7 TSTART0 R/W R/W R/W Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. Do not use in PWM3 mode. 3. Set to 1 for the input capture function. 4. Write 0 to the TSTART1 bit while the CSEL1 bit is set to 1. 5. When the CSEL1 bit is 0 and a compare match signal (TRDIOA1) is generated, this flag is set to 0 (count stops). 6. Write 0 to the TSTART0 bit while the CSEL0 bit is set to 1. 7. When the CSEL0 bit is 0 and a compare match signal (TRDIOA0) is generated, this flag is set to 0 (count stops). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 573 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.5 Timer RD Mode Register (TRDMR) Figure 8-6. Format of Timer RD Mode Register (TRDMR) Address: F0264H After Reset:00H Note 1 Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 2 1 <0> TRDMR TRDBFD1 TRDBFC1 TRDBFD0 TRDBFC0 0 0 0 TRDSYNC TRDGRD1 register function select Note 2 TRDBFD1 0 General register 1 Buffer register for TRDGRB1 register TRDGRC1 register function select Note 2 TRDBFC1 0 General register 1 Buffer register for TRDGRA1 register 0 General register 1 Buffer register for TRDGRB0 register 0 General register 1 Buffer register for TRDGRA0 register Bits 3 to1 Nothing is assigned Timer RD synchronous Note 4 TRDSYNC R/W R/W The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. -- R/W R/W TRDGRC0 register function select Notes 2, 3 TRDBFC0 R/W R/W TRDGRD0 register function select Note 2 TRDBFD0 R/W R/W 0 TRD0 and TRD1 operate independently 1 TRD0 and TRD1 operate synchronously R/W R R/W R/W Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. In the output compare function, if 0 (TRDGRji register output pin is changed) is selected for the IOj3 (j = C or D) bit in the TRDIORCi (i = 0 or 1) register, set the TRDBFji bit in the TRDMR register to 0. 3. Set to 0 (general register) in complementary PWM mode. 4. Set to 0 (TRD0 and TRD1 operate independently) in reset synchronous PWM mode, complementary PWM mode, and PWM3 mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 574 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.6 Timer RD PWM Function Select Register (TRDPMR) Figure 8-7. Format of Timer RD PWM Function Select Register (TRDPMR) [Timer Mode] Address: F0265H After Reset:00H Note Symbol 7 <6> TRDPMR 0 TRDPWMD1 Bit 7 -- <5> <4> TRDPWMC1 TRDPWMB1 <2> <1> <0> 0 TRDPWMD0 TRDPWMC0 TRDPWMB0 Nothing is assigned The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. TRDPWMD1 PWM function of TRDIOD1 select 0 Input capture function or output compare function 1 PWM function TRDPWMC1 PWM function of TRDIOC1 select 0 Input capture function or output compare function 1 PWM function TRDPWMB1 PWM function of TRDIOB1 select 0 Input capture function or output compare function 1 PWM function Bit 3 -- 3 Nothing is assigned The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. TRDPWMD0 PWM function of TRDIOD0 select 0 Input capture function or output compare function 1 PWM function TRDPWMC0 PWM function of TRDIOC0 select 0 Input capture function or output compare function 1 PWM function TRDPWMB0 PWM function of TRDIOB0 select 0 Input capture function or output compare function 1 PWM function R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 575 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.7 Timer RD Function Control Register (TRDFCR) Figure 8-8. Format of Timer RD Function Control Register (TRDFCR) Address: F0266H After Reset: 80H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDFCR PWM3 STCLK 0 0 OLS1 OLS0 CMD1 CMD0 PWM3 mode select Note 2 PWM3 In the timer mode, set to 1 (other than PWM3 mode). R/W R/W In PWM3 mode, set to 0 (PWM3 mode). Disabled in reset synchronous and complementary PWM modes. STCLK External clock input select In the timer mode, the reset synchronous PWM mode, and the complementary PWM mode, R/W R/W 0: External clock input disabled 1: External clock input enabled In PWM3 mode, set to 0 (external clock input disabled). Reserved Bits 5 to 4 0 Set to 0. R/W R/W OLS1 Counter-phase output level select R/W (in reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary PWM mode) In reset synchronous and complementary PWM modes, R/W 0: High initial output and low active level 1: Low initial output and high active level Disabled in timer and PWM3 modes. OLS0 Phase output level select R/W (in reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary PWM mode) In reset synchronous and complementary PWM modes, R/W 0: High initial output and low active level 1: Low initial output and high active level Disabled in timer and PWM3 modes. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 576 RL78/F13, F14 CMD1 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD CMD0 Combination mode select Notes 3, 4 In timer and PWM3 modes, set to 00B (timer mode or PWM3 mode). R/W R/W In reset synchronous PWM mode, set to 01B (reset synchronous PWM mode). In complementary PWM mode, CMD1 CMD0 1 0: Complementary PWM mode (transfer from the buffer register to the general register when TRD1 1 1: Complementary PWM mode (transfer from the buffer register to the general register at compare underflows) match between registers TRD0 and TRDGRA0) Other than the above: Do not set. Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. When bits CMD1 and CMD0 are set to 00B (timer mode or PWM3 mode), the setting of the PWM3 bit is enabled. 3. Set bits CMD0 and CMD1 when both the TSTART0 and TSTART1 bits in the TRDSTR register are set to 0 (count stops). 4. When bits CMD1 and CMD0 are set to 01B, 10B, or 11B, the MCU enters reset synchronous PWM mode or complementary PWM mode regardless of the settings of the TRDPMR register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 577 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.8 Timer RD Output Master Enable Register 1 (TRDOER1) Figure 8-9. Format of Timer RD Output Master Enable Register 1 (TRDOER1) [Output Compare Function, PWM Function, Reset Synchronous PWM Mode, Complementary PWM Mode, and PWM3 Mode] Address: F0267H After Reset: FFH Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDOER1 ED1 EC1 EB1 EA1 ED0 EC0 EB0 EA0 TRDIOD1 output disable Note 2 ED1 0 Output enabled 1 Output disabled (TRDIOD1 pin functions as an I/O port.) R/W TRDIOC1 output disable Note 2 EC1 0 Output enabled 1 Output disabled (TRDIOC1 pin functions as an I/O port.) 0 Output enabled 1 Output disabled (TRDIOB1 pin functions as an I/O port.) 0 Output enabled 1 Output disabled (TRDIOA1 pin functions as an I/O port) 0 Output enabled 1 Output disabled (TRDIOD0 pin functions as an I/O port.) 0 Output enabled 1 Output disabled (TRDIOC0 pin functions as an I/O port.) EB0 R/W R/W TRDIOB0 output disable 0 Output enabled 1 Output disabled (TRDIOB0 pin functions as an I/O port.) R/W R/W TRDIOA0 output disable Notes 3, 4 EA0 R/W R/W TRDIOC0 output disable Note 2 EC0 R/W R/W TRDIOD0 output disable Note 2 ED0 R/W R/W TRDIOA1 output disable Notes 2, 3 EA1 R/W R/W TRDIOB1 output disable Note 2 EB1 R/W 0 Output enabled 1 Output disabled (TRDIOA0 pin functions as an I/O port) R/W R/W Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. Set to 1 in PWM3 mode. 3. Set to 1 in PWM function. 4. Set to 1 in reset synchronous PWM mode and complementary PWM mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 578 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.9 Timer RD Output Master Enable Register 2 (TRDOER2) Figure 8-10. Format of Timer RD Output Master Enable Register 2 (TRDOER2) [PWM Function, Reset Synchronous PWM Mode, Complementary PWM Mode, and PWM3 Mode] Address: F0268H After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0> TRDOER2 TRDPTO 0 0 0 0 0 0 TRDSHUTS INTP0 of pulse output forced cutoff signal input enabled Note 2 TRDPTO 0 Pulse output forced cutoff input disabled 1 Pulse output forced cutoff input enabled R/W R/W (The TRDSHUTS bit is set to 1 when a low level is applied to the INTP0 pin.) Bits 6 to 1 -- Nothing is assigned The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. TRDSHUTS Forced cutoff flag 0 Not forcibly cut off 1 Forcibly cut off R/W R R/W R/W This bit is set to 1 when the pulse is forcibly cut off by an INTP0 or ELC Note 3 input event. This bit is not automatically cleared. To stop the forced cutoff of the pulse, write 0 to this bit while the count is stopped (TSTARTi = 0). The pulse is also forcibly cut off when 1 is written to the TRDSHUTS bit in an enabled mode. Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. See 8.3.1 (4) Pulse Output Forced Cutoff. 3. The ELC is only available in the RL78/F14. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 579 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.10 Timer RD Output Control Register (TRDOCR) Write to the TRDOCR register when bits TSTART0 and TSTART1 in the TRDSTR register are both 0 (count stops). Figure 8-11. Format of Timer RD Output Control Register (TRDOCR) [Output Compare Function] Address: F0269H After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDOCR TOD1 TOC1 TOB1 TOA1 TOD0 TOC0 TOB0 TOA0 TRDIOD1 initial output level select Note 2 TOD1 0 Low initial output 1 High initial output TRDIOC1 initial output level select Note 2 TOC1 0 Low initial output 1 High initial output 0 Low initial output 1 High initial output TOA1 Low initial output 1 High initial output 0 Low initial output 1 High initial output 0 Low initial output 1 High initial output 0 Low initial output 1 High initial output TOA0 Low initial output 1 High initial output Notes 1. R/W R/W TRDIOA0 initial output level select 0 R/W R/W TRDIOB0 initial output level select Note 2 TOB0 R/W R/W TRDIOC0 initial output level select Note 2 TOC0 R/W R/W TRDIOD0 initial output level select Note 2 TOD0 R/W R/W TRDIOA1 initial output level select 0 R/W R/W TRDIOB1 initial output level select Note 2 TOB1 R/W R/W R/W R/W The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. If the pin function is set for waveform output, the initial output level is output when the TRDOCR register is set. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 580 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-12. Format of Timer RD Output Control Register (TRDOCR) [PWM Function] Address: F0269H After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDOCR TOD1 TOC1 TOB1 TOA1 TOD0 TOC0 TOB0 TOA0 TRDIOD1 initial output level select Note 2 TOD1 0 Initial output is not active level 1 Initial output is active level R/W TRDIOC1 initial output level select Note TOC1 0 Initial output is not active level 1 Initial output is active level 2 0 Initial output is not active level 1 Initial output is active level TOA1 R/W R/W TRDIOB1 initial output level select Note 2 TOB1 R/W R/W R/W TRDIOA1 initial output level select Set to 0. R/W R/W TRDIOD0 initial output level select Note 2 TOD0 0 Initial output is not active level 1 Initial output is active level TRDIOC0 initial output level select Note 2 TOC0 0 Initial output is not active level 1 Initial output is active level R/W R/W R/W R/W Enabled in reset synchronous and complementary PWM modes. TRDIOB0 initial output level select Note 2 TOB0 0 Initial output is not active level 1 Initial output is active level TOA0 R/W TRDIOA0 initial output level select Set to 0. Notes 1. R/W R/W R/W The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. If the pin function is set for waveform output, the initial output level is output when the TRDOCR register is set. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 581 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-13. Format of Timer RD Output Control Register (TRDOCR) [PWM3 Mode] Address: F0269H After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDOCR TOD1 TOC1 TOB1 TOA1 TOD0 TOC0 TOB0 TOA0 TOD1 TRDIOD1 initial output level select Disabled in PWM3 mode. TOC1 R/W TRDIOC1 initial output level select Disabled in PWM3 mode. TOB1 TRDIOB1 initial output level select Disabled in PWM3 mode. TRDIOD0 initial output level select Disabled in PWM3 mode. 0 R/W R/W TRDIOC0 initial output level select R/W R/W TRDIOB0 initial output level select Note 2 TOB0 R/W R/W Disabled in PWM3 mode. TOC0 R/W R/W TRDIOA1 initial output level select TOD0 R/W R/W Disabled in PWM3 mode. TOA1 R/W Low initial output, high active level, high output at TRDGRB1 compare match, and low R/W R/W output at TRDGRB0 compare match 1 High initial output, low active level, low output at TRDGRB1 compare match, and high output at TRDGRB0 compare match TOA0 0 TRDIOA0 initial output level select Low initial output, high active level, high output at TRDGRA1 compare match, and low R/W R/W output at TRDGRA0 compare match 1 High initial output, low active level, low output at TRDGRA1 compare match, and high output at TRDGRA0 compare match Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. If the pin function is set for waveform output, the initial output level is output when the TRDOCR register is set. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 582 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.11 Timer RD Digital Filter Function Select Register i (TRDDFi) (i = 0 or 1) Figure 8-14. Format of Timer RD Digital Filter Function Select Register i (TRDDFi) (i = 0 or 1) [Input Capture Function] Address: F026AH (TRDDF0), F026BH (TRDDF1) After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDDFi DFCK1 DFCK0 PENB1 PENB0 DFD DFC DFB DFA Clock select for digital filter function Note 2 DFCK1 DFCK0 0 0 fTRD/32 0 1 fTRD/8 1 0 fTRD 1 1 Count source (clock selected by bits TCK0 to TCK2 in the TRDCRi register) PENB1 PENB0 0 0 TRDIOBi pin pulse forced cutoff control Set to 00B. DFD Function is not used 1 Function is used R/W R/W TRDIODi pin digital filter function select 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W If the digital filter is enabled, edge detection is performed after five or more cycles of the digital filter sampling clock have elapsed. DFC TRDIOCi pin digital filter function select 0 Function is not used 1 Function is used R/W R/W If the digital filter is enabled, edge detection is performed after five or more cycles of the digital filter sampling clock have elapsed. DFB TRDIOBi pin digital filter function select 0 Function is not used 1 Function is used R/W R/W If the digital filter is enabled, edge detection is performed after five or more cycles of the digital filter sampling clock have elapsed. DFA TRDIOAi pin digital filter function select 0 Function is not used 1 Function is used R/W R/W If the digital filter is enabled, edge detection is performed after five or more cycles of the digital filter sampling clock have elapsed. Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. Set bits DFCK0 and DFCK1 before starting count operation. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 583 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-15. Format of Timer RD Digital Filter Function Select Register i (TRDDFi) (i = 0 or 1) [PWM Function, Reset Synchronous PWM Mode, Complementary PWM Mode, and PWM3 Mode] Address: F026AH (TRDDF0), F026BH (TRDDF1) After Reset: 00H Note Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDDFi DFCK1 DFCK0 PENB1 PENB0 DFD DFC DFB DFA DFCK1 DFCK0 0 0 TRDIOAi pin pulse forced cutoff control Forced cutoff disabled 0 1 High-impedance output 1 0 Low output 1 1 High output R/W R/W Set these bits to 00B (forced cutoff disabled) if the corresponding pin is not used as a timer RD output port in these modes. Also, set these bits while the count is stopped. PENB1 PENB0 0 0 TRDIOBi pin pulse forced cutoff control Forced cutoff disabled 0 1 High-impedance output 1 0 Low output 1 1 High output R/W R/W Set these bits to 00B (forced cutoff disabled) if the corresponding pin is not used as a timer RD output port in these modes. Also, set these bits while the count is stopped. DFD DFC 0 0 Forced cutoff disabled TRDIOCi pin pulse forced cutoff control 0 1 High-impedance output 1 0 Low output 1 1 High output R/W R/W Set these bits to 00B (forced cutoff disabled) if the corresponding pin is not used as a timer RD output port in these modes. Also, set these bits while the count is stopped. DFB DFA 0 0 Forced cutoff disabled TRDIODi pin pulse forced cutoff control 0 1 High-impedance output 1 0 Low output 1 1 High output R/W R/W Set these bits to 00B (forced cutoff disabled) if the corresponding pin is not used as a timer RD output port in these modes. Also, set these bits while the count is stopped. Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 584 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.12 Timer RD Control Register i (TRDCRi) (i = 0 or 1) The TRDCR1 register is not used in reset synchronous PWM mode or PWM3 mode. Figure 8-16. Format of Timer RD Control Register i (TRDCRi) (i = 0 or 1) [Input Capture Function and Output Compare Function] Address: F0270H (TRDCR0), F0280H (TRDCR1) After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDCRi CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TCK2 TCK1 TCK0 CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 0 0 0 Clear disabled (free-running operation) TRDi counter clear select 0 0 1 Clear by input capture/compare match with TRDGRAi 0 1 0 Clear by input capture/compare match with TRDGRBi 0 1 1 R/W R/W Synchronous clear (clear simultaneously with other timer RDi counter) Note 2 1 0 0 Do not set. 1 0 1 Clear by input capture/compare match with TRDGRCi 1 1 0 Clear by input capture/compare match with TRDGRDi 1 1 1 Do not set. External clock edge select Note 3 CKEG1 CKEG0 0 0 Count at the rising edge 0 1 Count at the falling edge 1 0 Count at both edges 1 1 Do not set. TCK2 TCK1 R/W TCK0 Count source select 0 0 0 fTRD Note 4 0 0 1 fTRD/2 Notes 4, 6 0 1 0 fTRD/4 Notes 4, 6 0 1 1 fTRD/8 Notes 4, 6 1 0 0 fTRD/32 Notes 4, 6 1 0 1 TRDCLK input 1 1 0 Do not set. 1 1 1 Do not set. R/W R/W R/W Note 5 Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. Enabled when the TRDSYNC bit in the TRDMR register is 1 (TRD0 and TRD1 operate synchronously). 3. Valid when bits TCK2 to TCK0 are set to 101B (TRDCLK input) and the STCLK bit is set to 1 (external clock input enabled). 4. As the timer RD operating clock (fTRD), fCLK is selected when FRQSEL4 = 0 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H), (PLLDIV1 = 0 or SELPLLS = 0), and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fIH is selected when FRQSEL4 = 1 and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fPLL is selected when (PLLDIV1 = 1 and SELPLLS = 1) and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fSUB is selected when SELLOSC = 0 and TRD_CKSEL = 1. fIL is selected when SELLOSC = 1 and TRD_CKSEL = 1. For details, see Figure 8-40. When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). 5. Valid when the STCLK bit in the TRDFCR register is set to 1 (external clock input enabled). 6. With this setting, select fCLK as the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 585 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-17. Format of Timer RD Control Register i (TRDCRi) (i = 0 or 1) [PWM Mode] Address: F0270H (TRDCR0), F0280H (TRDCR1) After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDCRi CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TCK2 TCK1 TCK0 CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 TRDi counter clear select Set to 001B (TRDi register is cleared at compare match with TRDGRAi register). CKEG1 CKEG0 0 0 R/W R/W External clock edge select Note 2 R/W Count at the rising edge R/W 0 1 Count at the falling edge 1 0 Count at both edges 1 1 Do not set. TCK2 TCK1 TCK0 0 0 0 fCLK, fIH, fPLL, fSUB, fIL Note 3 0 0 1 fCLK/2 0 1 0 fCLK/4 0 1 1 fCLK/8 1 0 0 fCLK/32 1 0 1 TRDCLK input 1 1 0 Do not set. 1 1 1 Do not set. Count source select R/W R/W Note 4 Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. Valid when bits TCK2 to TCK0 are set to 101B (TRDCLK input) and the STCLK bit is set to 1 (external clock input enabled). 3. fCLK is selected when FRQSEL4 = 0 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H), (PLLDIV1 = 0 or SELPLLS = 0), and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fIH is selected when FRQSEL4 = 1 and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fPLL is selected when (PLLDIV1 = 1 and SELPLLS = 1) and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fSUB is selected when SELLOSC = 0 and TRD_CKSEL = 1. fIL is selected when SELLOSC = 1 and TRD_CKSEL = 1. For details, see Figure 8-40. When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). 4. Valid when the STCLK bit in the TRDFCR register is set to 1 (external clock input enabled). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 586 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-18. Format of Timer RD Control Register 0 (TRDCR0) [Reset Synchronous PWM Mode] Address: F0270H (TRDCR0) After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDCR0 CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TCK2 TCK1 TCK0 CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 TRD0 counter clear select Set to 001B (TRD0 register is cleared at compare match with TRDGRA0 register). CKEG1 CKEG0 0 0 R/W R/W External clock edge select Note 2 R/W Count at the rising edge R/W 0 1 Count at the falling edge 1 0 Count at both edges 1 1 Do not set. TCK2 TCK1 TCK0 0 0 0 fCLK, fIH, fPLL, fSUB, fIL Note 3 0 0 1 fCLK/2 0 1 0 fCLK/4 0 1 1 fCLK/8 1 0 0 fCLK/32 1 0 1 TRDCLK input 1 1 0 Do not set. 1 1 1 Do not set. Count source select R/W R/W Note 4 Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. Valid when bits TCK2 to TCK0 are set to 101B (TRDCLK input) and the STCLK bit is set to 1 (external clock input enabled). 3. fCLK is selected when FRQSEL4 = 0 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H), (PLLDIV1 = 0 or SELPLLS = 0), and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fIH is selected when FRQSEL4 = 1 and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fPLL is selected when (PLLDIV1 = 1 and SELPLLS = 1) and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fSUB is selected when SELLOSC = 0 and TRD_CKSEL = 1. fIL is selected when SELLOSC = 1 and TRD_CKSEL = 1. For details, see Figure 840. When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). 4. Valid when the STCLK bit in the TRDFCR register is set to 1 (external clock input enabled). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 587 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-19. Format of Timer RD Control Register 0 (TRDCR0) [Complementary PWM Mode] Address: F0270H (TRDCR0) After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDCR0 CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TCK2 TCK1 TCK0 CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 TRD0 counter clear select Set to 000B (clear disabled (free-running operation)). CKEG1 CKEG0 0 0 R/W R/W External clock edge select Notes 2, 3 R/W Count at the rising edge R/W 0 1 Count at the falling edge 1 0 Count at both edges 1 1 Do not set. TCK2 TCK1 TCK0 0 0 0 fCLK, fIH, fPLL, fSUB, fIL Note 4 0 0 1 fCLK/2 0 1 0 fCLK/4 0 1 1 fCLK/8 1 0 0 fCLK/32 1 0 1 TRDCLK input 1 1 0 Do not set. 1 1 1 Do not set. Count source select R/W R/W Note 5 Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. Valid when bits TCK2 to TCK0 are set to 101B (TRDCLK input) and the STCLK bit is set to 1 (external clock input enabled). 3. Set the same value to bits TCK0 to TCK2, CKEG0, and CKEG1 in registers TRDCR0 and TRDCR1. 4. fCLK is selected when FRQSEL4 = 0 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H), (PLLDIV1 = 0 or SELPLLS = 0), and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fIH is selected when FRQSEL4 = 1 and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fPLL is selected when (PLLDIV1 = 1 and SELPLLS = 1) and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fSUB is selected when SELLOSC = 0 and TRD_CKSEL = 1. fIL is selected when SELLOSC = 1 and TRD_CKSEL = 1. For details, see Figure 8-40. When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). 5. Valid when the STCLK bit in the TRDFCR register is set to 1 (external clock input enabled). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 588 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-20. Format of Timer RD Control Register 0 (TRDCR0) [PWM3 Mode] Address: F0270H (TRDCR0) After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDCR0 CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TCK2 TCK1 TCK0 CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 TRD0 counter clear select R/W Set to 001B (TRD0 register is cleared at compare match with TRDGRA0 register). R/W CKEG1 R/W CKEG0 External clock edge select Disabled in PWM3 mode. R/W TCK2 TCK1 TCK0 0 0 0 fCLK, fIH, fPLL, fSUB, fIL Note 2 Count source select 0 0 1 fCLK/2 0 1 0 fCLK/4 0 1 1 fCLK/8 1 0 0 fCLK/32 1 0 1 Do not set. 1 1 0 Do not set. 1 1 1 Do not set. R/W R/W Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. fCLK is selected when FRQSEL4 = 0 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H), (PLLDIV1 = 0 or SELPLLS = 0), and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fIH is selected when FRQSEL4 = 1 and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fPLL is selected when (PLLDIV1 = 1 and SELPLLS = 1) and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fSUB is selected when SELLOSC = 0 and TRD_CKSEL = 1. fIL is selected when SELLOSC = 1 and TRD_CKSEL = 1. For details, see Figure 8-40. When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 589 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.13 Timer RD I/O Control Register Ai (TRDIORAi) (i = 0 or 1) Figure 8-21. Format of Timer RD I/O Control Register Ai (TRDIORAi) (i = 0 or 1) [Input Capture Function] Address: F0271H (TRDIORA0), F0281H (TRDIORA1) After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDIORAi -- IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 0 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Bit 7 -- Nothing is assigned R/W The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. TRDGRBi mode select Note IOB2 R 2 Set to 1 (input capture) in the input capture function. IOB1 IOB0 TRDGRBi control 0 0 Input capture to TRDGRBi at the rising edge 0 1 Input capture to TRDGRBi at the falling edge 1 0 Input capture to TRDGRBi at both edges 1 1 Do not set. Bit 3 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Reserved R/W Set to 0. R/W TRDGRAi mode select Note IOA2 3 Set to 1 (input capture) in the input capture function. R/W R/W IOA1 IOA0 TRDGRAi control 0 0 Input capture to TRDGRAi at the rising edge 0 1 Input capture to TRDGRAi at the falling edge 1 0 Input capture to TRDGRAi at both edges 1 1 Do not set. R/W R/W Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. If 1 (buffer register for TRDGRBi register) is selected for the TRDBFDi bit in the TRDMR register, set the same value to the IOB2 bit in the TRDIORAi register and the IOD2 bit in the TRDIORCi register. 3. If 1 (buffer register for TRDGRAi register) is selected for the TRDBFCi bit in the TRDMR register, set the same value to the IOA2 bit in the TRDIORAi register and the IOC2 bit in the TRDIORCi register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 590 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-22. Format of Timer RD I/O Control Register Ai (TRDIORAi) (i = 0 or 1) [Output Compare Function] Address: F0271H (TRDIORA0), F0281H (TRDIORA1) After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDIORAi -- IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 0 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Bit 7 -- Nothing is assigned R/W The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. TRDGRBi mode select Note IOB2 R 2 Set to 0 (output compare) in the output compare function. IOB1 IOB0 0 0 TRDGRBi control Pin output by compare match is disabled (TRDIOBi pin functions as an I/O port) 0 1 Low output by compare match with TRDGRBi 1 0 High output by compare match with TRDGRBi 1 1 Toggle output by compare match with TRDGRBi Bit 3 0 R/W R/W Reserved R/W R/W R/W Set to 0. R/W TRDGRAi mode select Note IOA2 3 Set to 0 (output compare) in the output compare function. R/W R/W IOA1 IOA0 0 0 TRDGRAi control Pin output by compare match is disabled (TRDIOAi pin functions as an I/O port) 0 1 Low output by compare match with TRDGRAi 1 0 High output by compare match with TRDGRAi 1 1 Toggle output by compare match with TRDGRAi R/W R/W Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. If 1 (buffer register for TRDGRBi register) is selected for the TRDBFDi bit in the TRDMR register, set the same value to the IOB2 bit in the TRDIORAi register and the IOD2 bit in the TRDIORCi register. 3. If 1 (buffer register for TRDGRAi register) is selected for the TRDBFCi bit in the TRDMR register, set the same value to the IOA2 bit in the TRDIORAi register and the IOC2 bit in the TRDIORCi register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 591 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.14 Timer RD I/O Control Register Ci (TRDIORCi) (i = 0 or 1) Figure 8-23. Format of Timer RD I/O Control Register Ci (TRDIORCi) [Input Capture Function] Address: F0272H (TRDIORC0), F0282H (TRDIORC1) After Reset: 88H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDIORCi IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 IOD3 TRDGRDi register function select Set to 1 (general register or buffer register) in the input capture function. TRDGRDi mode select Note IOD2 2 Set to 1 (input capture) in the input capture function. IOD0 0 0 Input capture to TRDGRDi at the rising edge TRDGRDi control 0 1 Input capture to TRDGRDi at the falling edge 1 0 Input capture to TRDGRDi at both edges 1 1 Do not set. Set to 1 (general register or buffer register) in the input capture function. TRDGRCi mode select Note R/W R/W TRDGRCi register function select IOC2 R/W R/W IOD1 IOC3 R/W R/W R/W R/W 3 Set to 1 (input capture) in the input capture function. R/W R/W IOC1 IOC0 TRDGRCi control 0 0 Input capture to TRDGRCi at the rising edge 0 1 Input capture to TRDGRCi at the falling edge 1 0 Input capture to TRDGRCi at both edges 1 1 Do not set. R/W R/W Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. If 1 (buffer register for TRDGRBi register) is selected for the TRDBFDi bit in the TRDMR register, set the same value to the IOB2 bit in the TRDIORAi register and the IOD2 bit in the TRDIORCi register. 3. If 1 (buffer register for TRDGRAi register) is selected for the TRDBFCi bit in the TRDMR register, set the same value to the IOA2 bit in the TRDIORAi register and the IOC2 bit in the TRDIORCi register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 592 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-24. Format of Timer RD I/O Control Register Ci (TRDIORCi) (i = 0 or 1) [Output Compare Function] Address: F0272H (TRDIORC0), F0282H (TRDIORC1) After Reset: 88H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDIORCi IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 IOD3 TRDGRDi register function select TRDIOBi output register 0 R/W R/W (see 8.3.3 (2) Changing Output Pins in Registers TRDGRCi (i = 0 or 1) and TRDGRDi) General register or buffer register 1 TRDGRDi mode select Note IOD2 2 Set to 0 (output compare) in the output compare function. IOD1 IOD0 TRDGRDi control 0 0 Pin output by compare match is disabled 0 1 Low output by compare match with TRDGRDi 1 0 High output by compare match with TRDGRDi 1 1 Toggle output by compare match with TRDGRDi IOC3 R/W R/W TRDGRCi register function select TRDIOAi output register 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W (see 8.3.3 (2) Changing Output Pins in Registers TRDGRCi (i = 0 or 1) and TRDGRDi) General register or buffer register 1 TRDGRCi mode select Note IOC2 3 Set to 0 (output compare) in the output compare function. R/W R/W IOC1 IOC0 0 0 TRDGRCi control Pin output by compare match is disabled 0 1 Low output by compare match with TRDGRCi 1 0 High output by compare match with TRDGRCi 1 1 Toggle output by compare match with TRDGRCi R/W R/W Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. If 1 (buffer register for TRDGRBi register) is selected for the TRDBFDi bit in the TRDMR register, set the same value to the IOB2 bit in the TRDIORAi register and the IOD2 bit in the TRDIORCi register. 3. If 1 (buffer register for TRDGRAi register) is selected for the TRDBFCi bit in the TRDMR register, set the same value to the IOA2 bit in the TRDIORAi register and the IOC2 bit in the TRDIORCi register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 593 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.15 Timer RD Status Register i (TRDSRi) (i = 0 or 1) Figure 8-25. Format of Timer RD Status Register i (TRDSRi) (i = 0 or 1) [Input Capture Function] Address: F0273H (TRDSR0), F0283H (TRDSR1) After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDSRi -- -- UDF OVF IMFD IMFC IMFB IMFA Bits 7 to 6 -- Nothing is assigned R/W The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. Underflow flag Note UDF R 2 R/W Disabled in the input capture function. Overflow flag Note OVF [Source for setting to 0] Write 0 after reading. Note R/W 3 R/W R/W 4 [Source for setting to 1] When the TRDi register overflows Input capture/compare match flag D Note IMFD [Source for setting to 0] Write 0 after reading. Note 7 R/W R/W 4 [Source for setting to 1] Input edge of TRDIODi pin Note 5 Input capture/compare match flag C Note IMFC [Source for setting to 0] Write 0 after reading. Note 7 R/W R/W 4 [Source for setting to 1] Input edge of TRDIOCi pin Note 5 Input capture/compare match flag B Note IMFB [Source for setting to 0] Write 0 after reading. Note 7 R/W R/W 4 [Source for setting to 1] Input edge of TRDIOBi pin Note 6 Input capture/compare match flag A Note IMFA [Source for setting to 0] Write 0 after reading. Note 7 R/W R/W 4 [Source for setting to 1] Input edge of TRDIOAi pin Note 6 (Notes are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 594 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. Nothing is assigned to bit 5 in the TRDSR0 register. The write value must be 0 for bit 5. The read value is 0. 3. When the counter value of timer RDi changes from FFFFH to 0000H, the overflow flag is set to 1. Also, if the counter value of timer RDi changes from FFFFH to 0000H due to an input capture/compare match during operation according to the settings of bits CCLR0 to CCLR2 in the TRDCRi register, the overflow flag is set to 1. 4. The writing results are as follows: Writing 1 has no effect. If the read value is 0, the bit remains unchanged even if 0 is written to it. (Even if the bit is changed from 0 to 1 after reading and then 0 is written to it, it remains 1.) If the read value is 1, writing 0 to the bit sets it to 0. Use either (a) or (b) described below to clear each bit of the TRDSRi register. (a) Set the TRDIERi register to 00H (disabling all interrupts) and then write 0 to all of the status flags. (b) When at least one bit in the TRDIERi register has the setting 1 and the status flag of an interrupt source enabled by the corresponding bit is 1, write 0 to all of the status flag bits whose settings are 1 in the TRDSRi register. 5. Edge selected by bits IOk1 and IOk0 (k = C or D) in the TRDIORCi register. Including when the TRDBFki bit in the TRDMR register is 1 (TRDGRki is buffer register). 6. Edge selected by bits IOj1 and IOj0 (j = A or B) in the TRDIORAi register. 7. When the DTC is used, bits IMFA, IMFB, IMFC, and IMFD are set to 1 after DTC transfer is completed. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 595 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-26. Format of Timer RD Status Register i (TRDSRi) (i = 0 or 1) [Functions Other Than Input Capture Function] Address: F0273H (TRDSR0), F0283H (TRDSR1) After Reset: 00H Note 1 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDSRi -- -- UDF OVF IMFD IMFC IMFB IMFA Bits 7 to 6 -- Nothing is assigned R/W The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. Underflow flag Note UDF R 2 R/W R/W In complementary PWM mode [Source for setting to 0] Write 0 after reading. Note 3 [Sources for setting to 1] When TRDi underflows. Enabled only in complementary PWM mode. Overflow flag Note OVF [Source for setting to 0] Write 0 after reading. Note 4 R/W R/W 3 [Source for setting to 1] When the TRDi register overflows Input capture/compare match flag D Note IMFD [Source for setting to 0] Write 0 after reading. Note R/W 5 Input capture/compare match flag C Note IMFC 6 R/W R/W 3 [Source for setting to 1] When the values of TRDi and TRDGRCi match. Note 5 Input capture/compare match flag B Note IMFB [Source for setting to 0] Write 0 after reading. Note R/W 3 [Source for setting to 1] When the values of TRDi and TRDGRDi match. Note [Source for setting to 0] Write 0 after reading. Note 6 6 R/W R/W 3 [Source for setting to 1] When the values of TRDi and TRDGRBi match. Input capture/compare match flag A Note IMFA [Source for setting to 0] Write 0 after reading. Note 6 R/W R/W 3 [Source for setting to 1] When the values of TRDi and TRDGRAi match. (Notes are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 596 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Notes 1. The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 2. Nothing is assigned to bit 5 in the TRDSR0 register. The write value must be 0 for bit 5. The read value is 0. 3. The writing results are as follows: Writing 1 has no effect. If the read value is 0, the bit remains unchanged even if 0 is written to it. (Even if the bit is changed from 0 to 1 after reading and then 0 is written to it, it remains 1.) If the read value is 1, writing 0 to the bit sets it to 0. Use either (a) or (b) described below to clear each bit of the TRDSRi register. (a) Set the TRDIERi register to 00H (disabling all interrupts) and then write 0 to all of the status flags. (b) When at least one bit in the TRDIERi register has the setting 1 and the status flag of an interrupt source enabled by the corresponding bit is 1, write 0 to all of the status flag bits whose settings are 1 in the TRDSRi register. 4. When the counter value of timer RDi changes from FFFFH to 0000H, the overflow flag is set to 1. Also, if the counter value of timer RDi changes from FFFFH to 0000H due to an input capture/compare match during operation according to the settings of bits CCLR0 to CCLR2 in the TRDCRi register, the overflow flag is set to 1. 5. Including when the TRDBFki bit (k = C or D) in the TRDMR register is set to 1 (TRDGRKi is buffer register). 6. When the DTC is used, bits IMFA, IMFB, IMFC, and IMFD are set to 1 after DTC transfer is completed. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 597 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.16 Timer RD Interrupt Enable Register i (TRDIERi) (i = 0 or 1) Figure 8-27. Format of Timer RD Interrupt Enable Register i (TRDIERi) (i = 0 or 1) Address: F0274H (TRDIER0), F0284H (TRDIER1) After Reset: 00H Note Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDIERi -- -- -- OVIE IMIED IMIEC IMIEB IMIEA Bits 7 to 5 -- Nothing is assigned The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. OVIE Overflow/underflow interrupt enable 0 Interrupt (OVI) by bits OVF and UDF disabled 1 Interrupt (OVI) by bits OVF and UDF enabled IMIED Input capture/compare match interrupt enable D 0 Interrupt (IMID) by the IMFD bit is disabled 1 Interrupt (IMID) by the IMFD bit is enabled IMIEC Input capture/compare match interrupt enable C 0 Interrupt (IMIC) by the IMFC bit is disabled 1 Interrupt (IMIC) by the IMFC bit is enabled IMIEB Input capture/compare match interrupt enable B 0 Interrupt (IMIB) by the IMFB bit is disabled 1 Interrupt (IMIB) by the IMFB bit is enabled IMIEA Input capture/compare match interrupt enable A 0 Interrupt (IMIA) by the IMFA bit is disabled 1 Interrupt (IMIA) by the IMFA bit is enabled R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 598 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.17 Timer RD PWM Function Output Level Control Register i (TRDPOCRi) (i = 0 or 1) Settings to the TRDPOCRi register are enabled only in PWM function. When not in PWM function, they are disabled. Figure 8-28. Format of Timer RD PWM Function Output Level Control Register i (TRDPOCRi) (i= 0 or 1) [PWM Function] Address: F0275H (TRDPOCR0), F0285H (TRDPOCR1) After Reset: 00H Note Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDPOCRi -- -- -- -- -- POLD POLC POLB Bits 7 to 3 -- Nothing is assigned The write value must be 0. The read value is 0. POLD PWM function output level control D 0 TRDIODi output level is low active 1 TRDIODi output level is high active POLC PWM function output level control C 0 TRDIOCi output level is low active 1 TRDIOCi output level is high active POLB PWM function output level control B 0 TRDIOBi output level is low active 1 TRDIOBi output level is high active R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 599 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.18 Timer RD Counter i (TRDi) (i = 0 or 1) [Timer Mode] Access the TRDi register in 16-bit units. Do not access it in 8-bit units. [Reset Synchronous PWM Mode and PWM3 Mode] Access the TRD0 register in 16-bit units. Do not access it in 8-bit units. The TRD1 register is not used in reset synchronous PWM mode and PWM3 mode. [Complementary PWM Mode (TRD0)] Access the TRD0 register in 16-bit units. Do not access it in 8-bit units. [Complementary PWM Mode (TRD1)] Access the TRD1 register in 16-bit units. Do not access it in 8-bit units. Figure 8-29. Format of Timer RD Counter i (TRDi) (i = 0 or 1) [Timer Mode] Address: F0276H (TRD0), F0286H (TRD1) After Reset: 0000H Note Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bits 15 to 0 Function Setting Range Count the count source. Count operation is incremented. R/W 0000H to FFFFH R/W When an overflow occurs, the OVF bit in the TRDSRi register is set to 1. Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. Figure 8-30. Format of Timer RD Counter i (TRDi) (i = 0 or 1) [Reset Synchronous PWM Mode and PWM3 Mode] Address: F0276H (TRD0), F0286H (TRD1) After Reset: 0000H Note Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bits 15 to 0 Function Count the count source. Count operation is incremented. Setting Range 0000H to FFFFH R/W R/W When an overflow occurs, the OVF bit in the TRDSR0 register is set to 1. Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 600 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-31. Format of Timer RD Counter i (TRDi) (i = 0 or 1) [Complementary PWM Mode (TRD0)] Address: F0276H (TRD0), F0286H (TRD1) After Reset: 0000H Note Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bits 15 to 0 Function Setting Range Dead time must be set. R/W 0001H to FFFFH R/W Count the count source. Count operation is incremented or decremented. When an overflow occurs, the OVF bit in the TRDSR0 register is set to 1. Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. Figure 8-32. Format of Timer RD Counter i (TRDi) (i = 0 or 1) [Complementary PWM Mode (TRD1)] Address: F0276H (TRD0), F0286H (TRD1) After Reset: 0000H Note Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Bits 15 to 0 Function Set to 0000H. Setting Range 0000H to FFFFH R/W R/W Count the count source. Count operation is incremented or decremented. When an underflow occurs, the UDF bit in the TRDSR1 register is set to 1. Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 601 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.19 Timer RD General Registers Ai, Bi, Ci, and Di (TRDGRAi, TRDGRBi,TRDGRCi, TRDGRDi) (i = 0 or 1) [Input Capture Function] Access registers TRDGRAi to TRDGRDi in 16-bit units. Do not access them in 8-bit units. The following registers are disabled in the input capture function: TRDOER1, TRDOER2, TRDOCR, TRDPOCR0, and TRDPOCR1 Set the pulse width of the input capture signal applied to the TRDIOji pin to three or more cycles of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD) when no digital filter is used (j = A, B, C, or D) (when no digital filter is used). [Output Compare Function] Access registers TRDGRAi to TRDGRDi in 16-bit units. Do not access them in 8-bit units. The following registers are disabled in the output compare function: TRDDF0, TRDDF1, TRDPOCR0, and TRDPOCR1 [PWM Function] Access registers TRDGRAi to TRDGRDi in 16-bit units. Do not access them in 8-bit units. The following registers are disabled in PWM function: TRDDF0, TRDDF1, TRDIORA0, TRDIORC0, TRDIORA1, and TRDIORC1 [Reset Synchronous PWM Mode] Access registers TRDGRAi to TRDGRDi in 16-bit units. Do not access them in 8-bit units. The following registers are disabled in reset synchronous PWM mode: TRDPMR, TRDOCR Note, TRDDF0, TRDDF1,TRDIORA0, TRDIORC0, TRDPOCR0, TRDIORA1, TRDIORC1, and TRDPOCR1 Note The TOC0 bit in the TRDOCR register is enabled as an initial output setting of TRDIOC0 in reset synchronous PWM mode and complementary PWM mode. [Complementary PWM Mode] Access registers TRDGRAi to TRDGRDi in 16-bit units. Do not access them in 8-bit units. The TRDGRC0 register is not used in complementary PWM mode. The following registers are disabled in complementary PWM mode. <R> TRDPMR, TRDOCR Note, TRDIORA0, TRDIORC0, TRDPOCR0, TRDIORA1, TRDIORC1, and TRDPOCR1 Note The TOC0 bit in the TRDOCR register is enabled as an initial output setting of TRDIOC0 in reset synchronous PWM mode and complementary PWM mode. Since values cannot be written to the TRDGRB0, TRDGRA1, or TRDGRB1 register directly after count operation starts (prohibited item), use the TRDGRD0, TRDGRC1, or TRDGRD1 register as a buffer register. However, to write data to the TRDGRD0, TRDGRC1, or TRDGRD1 register, set bits TRDBFD0, TRDBFC1, and TRDBFD1 to 0 (general register). After this, bits TRDBFD0, TRDBFC1, and TRDBFD1 may be set to 1 (buffer register). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 602 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD [PWM3 Mode] Access registers TRDGRAi to TRDGRDi in 16-bit units. Do not access them in 8-bit units. The following registers are disabled in PWM3 mode: TRDPMR, TRDDF0, TRDDF1, TRDIORA0, TRDIORC0, TRDPOCR0, TRDIORA1, TRDIORC1, and TRDPOCR1 Registers TRDGRC0, TRDGRC1, TRDGRD0, and TRDGRD1 are not used in PWM3 mode. To use them as buffer registers, set bits TRDBFC0, TRDBFC1, TRDBFD0, and TRDBFD1 to 0 (general register) and write a value to the TRDGRC0, TRDGRC1, TRDGRD0, or TRDGRD1 register. After this, bits TRDBFC0, TRDBFC1, TRDBFD0, and TRDBFD1 may be set to 1 (buffer register). Figure 8-33. Format of Timer RD General Registers Ai, Bi, Ci, and Di (TRDGRAi, TRDGRBi,TRDGRCi, TRDGRDi) (i = 0 or 1) [Input Capture Function] Address: F0278H (TRDGRA0), F027AH (TRDGRB0), After Reset: FFFFH Note FFF58H (TRDGRC0), FFF5AH (TRDGRD0), F0288H (TRDGRA1), F028AH (TRDGRB1), FFF5CH (TRDGRC1), FFF5EH (TRDGRD1) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDGRAi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TRDGRBi TRDGRCi TRDGRDi -- Function Bits 15 to 0 R/W See Table 8-3 TRDGRji Register Functions in Input Capture Function. R/W Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. Table 8-3. TRDGRji Register Functions in Input Capture Function Register TRDGRAi Setting Register Function Input-Capture Input Pin -- General register. The value of the TRDi register can be read at input capture. TRDIOBi TRDGRCi TRDBFCi = 0 General register. The value of the TRDi register can be read at TRDIOCi TRDGRDi TRDBFDi = 0 input capture. TRDIODi TRDGRCi TRDBFCi = 1 Buffer register. The value of the TRDi register can be read at TRDIOAi TRDGRDi TRDBFDi = 1 input capture (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). TRDIOBi TRDGRBi Remark TRDIOAi i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D TRDBFCi, TRDBFDi: Bits in TRDMR register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 603 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-34. Format of Timer RD General Registers Ai, Bi, Ci, and Di (TRDGRAi, TRDGRBi, TRDGRCi, TRDGRDi) (i = 0 or 1) [Output Compare Function] Address: F0278H (TRDGRA0), F027AH (TRDGRB0), After Reset: FFFFH Note FFF58H (TRDGRC0), FFF5AH (TRDGRD0), F0288H (TRDGRA1), F028AH (TRDGRB1), FFF5CH (TRDGRC1), FFF5EH (TRDGRD1) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDGRAi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TRDGRBi TRDGRCi TRDGRDi -- Function Bits 15 to 0 R/W See Table 8-4 TRDGRji Register Functions in Output Compare Function. R/W Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. Table 8-4. TRDGRji Register Functions in Output Compare Function Register TRDGRAi Setting Register Function Output Pin IOj3 -- -- General register. Write the compare value. TRDIOAi 0 1 General register. Write the compare value. TRDIOCi 1 1 Buffer register. Write the next compare value TRDIOAi (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). TRDIOBi TRDIOAi TRDGRBi TRDGRCi TRDIOBi TRDGRDi TRDGRCi TRDIODi TRDGRDi TRDGRCi Output-Compare TRDBFji 0 TRDGRDi 0 TRDIOAi output (See 8. 3. 3 (2) Changing Output Pins control in Registers TRDGRCi (i = 0 or 1) and TRDIOBi output TRDGRDi.) TRDIOBi control Caution When the setting of bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCRi register is 000B (fCLK, fIH, fPLL, fSUB, and fIL) and the compare value is set to 0000H, a request signal to the data transfer controller (DTC) and the event link controller (ELC) is generated only once immediately after the count starts. When the compare value is 0001H or higher, a request signal is generated each time a compare match occurs. Remark i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D TRDBFji: Bit in TRDMR register, IOj3: Bit in TRDIORCi register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 604 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-35. Format of Timer RD General Registers Ai, Bi, Ci, and Di (TRDGRAi, TRDGRBi,TRDGRCi, TRDGRDi) (i = 0 or 1) [PWM Mode] Address: F0278H (TRDGRA0), F027AH (TRDGRB0), After Reset: FFFFH Note FFF58H (TRDGRC0), FFF5AH (TRDGRD0), F0288H (TRDGRA1), F028AH (TRDGRB1), FFF5CH (TRDGRC1), FFF5EH (TRDGRD1) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDGRAi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TRDGRBi TRDGRCi TRDGRDi -- Function Bits 15 to 0 R/W See Table 8-5 TRDGRji Register Functions in PWM Function. R/W Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. Table 8-5. TRDGRji Register Functions in PWM Function Register Setting Register Function PWM Output Pin TRDGRAi -- General register. Set the PWM period. -- TRDGRBi -- General register. Set the changing point of PWM output. TRDIOBi TRDGRCi TRDBFCi = 0 General register. Set the changing point of PWM output. TRDIOCi TRDGRDi TRDBFDi = 0 TRDGRCi TRDBFCi = 1 TRDIODi Buffer register. Set the next PWM period -- (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). TRDGRDi TRDBFDi = 1 Buffer register. Set the changing point of the next PWM output TRDIOBi (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). Caution When the setting of bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCRi register is 000B (fCLK, fIH, fPLL, fSUB, and fIL) and the compare value is set to 0000H, a request signal to the data transfer controller (DTC) and the event link controller (ELC) is generated only once immediately after the count starts. When the compare value is 0001H or higher, a request signal is generated each time a compare match occurs. Remark i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D TRDBFCi, TRDBFDi: Bits in TRDMR register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 605 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-36. Format of Timer RD General Registers Ai, Bi, Ci, and Di (TRDGRAi, TRDGRBi,TRDGRCi, TRDGRDi) (i = 0 or 1) [Reset Synchronous PWM Mode] Address: F0278H (TRDGRA0), F027AH (TRDGRB0), After Reset: FFFFH Note FFF58H (TRDGRC0), FFF5AH (TRDGRD0), F0288H (TRDGRA1), F028AH (TRDGRB1), FFF5CH (TRDGRC1), FFF5EH (TRDGRD1) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDGRAi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TRDGRBi TRDGRCi TRDGRDi -- Function Bits 15 to 0 R/W See Table 8-6 TRDGRji Register Functions in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode. R/W Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. Table 8-6. TRDGRji Register Functions in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Register TRDGRA0 Setting -- Register Function General register. Set the PWM period. PWM Output Pin (TRDIOC0, output inverted every PWM period) TRDGRB0 -- General register. Set the changing point of PWM1 output. TRDIOB0 TRDGRC0 TRDBFC0 = 0 (Not used in reset synchronous PWM mode.) -- General register. Set the changing point of PWM2 output. TRDIOA1 TRDIOD0 TRDGRD0 TRDBFC0 = 0 TRDGRA1 -- TRDIOC1 TRDGRB1 -- General register. Set the changing point of PWM3 output. TRDIOB1 TRDGRC1 TRDBFC1= 0 (Not used in reset synchronous PWM mode.) -- TRDGRD1 TRDBFD1 = 0 TRDGRC0 TRDBFC0 = 1 Buffer register. Set the next PWM period (TRDIOC0, output (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). inverted every TRDIOD1 PWM period) TRDGRD0 TRDGRC1 TRDGRD1 TRDBFD0 = 1 TRDBFC1 = 1 TRDBFD1 = 1 Buffer register. Set the changing point of the next PWM1 TRDIOB0 (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). TRDIOD0 Buffer register. Set the changing point of the next PWM2 TRDIOA1 (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). TRDIOC1 Buffer register. Set the changing point of the next PWM3 TRDIOB1 (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). TRDIOD1 Caution When the setting of bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCR0 register is 000B (fCLK, fIH, fPLL, fSUB, and fIL) and the compare value is set to 0000H, a request signal to the data transfer controller (DTC) and the event link controller (ELC) is generated only once immediately after the count starts. When the compare value is 0001H or higher, a request signal is generated each time a compare match occurs. Remark i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D TRDBFC0, TRDBFD0, TRDBFC1, TRDBFD1: Bits in TRDMR register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 606 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-37. Format of Timer RD General Registers Ai, Bi, Ci, and Di (TRDGRAi, TRDGRBi,TRDGRCi, TRDGRDi) (i = 0 or 1) [Complementary PWM Mode] Address: F0278H (TRDGRA0), F027AH (TRDGRB0), After Reset: FFFFH Note FFF58H (TRDGRC0), FFF5AH (TRDGRD0), F0288H (TRDGRA1), F028AH (TRDGRB1), FFF5CH (TRDGRC1), FFF5EH (TRDGRD1) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDGRAi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TRDGRBi TRDGRCi TRDGRDi -- Bits 15 to 0 Function See Table 8-7 TRDGRji Register Functions in Complementary PWM Mode. R/W R/W Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 607 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Table 8-7. TRDGRji Register Functions in Complementary PWM Mode Register Setting TRDGRA0 -- TRDGRB0 -- TRDGRA1 -- TRDGRB1 -- TRDGRC0 -- TRDGRD0 TRDBFD0 = 1 TRDGRC1 TRDBFC1 = 1 TRDGRD1 TRDBFD1 = 1 Register Function General register. Set the PWM period at initialization. Setting range: Value set in TRD0 register FFFFh - value set in TRD0 register Do not write to this register when bits TSTART0 and TSTART1 in the TRDSTR register are set to 1 (count starts). General register. Set the changing point of PWM1 output at initialization. Setting range: Value set in TRD0 register Value set in TRDGRA0 register - value set in TRD0 register Do not write to this register when bits TSTART0 and TSTART1 in the TRDSTR register are set to 1 (count starts). General register. Set the changing point of PWM2 output at initialization. Setting range: Value set in TRD0 register Value set in TRDGRA0 register - value set in TRD0 register Do not write to this register when bits TSTART0 and TSTART1 in the TRDSTR register are set to 1 (count starts). General register. Set the changing point of PWM3 output at initialization. Setting range: Value set in TRD0 register Value set in TRDGRA0 register - value set in TRD0 register Do not write to this register when bits TSTART0 and TSTART1 in the TRDSTR register are set to 1 (count starts). (Not used in complementary PWM mode.) Buffer register. Set the changing point of next PWM1 output (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). Setting range: Value set in TRD0 register Value set in TRDGRA0 register - value set in TRD0 register Set this register to the same value as the TRDGRB0 register for initialization. Buffer register. Set the changing point of next PWM2 output (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). Setting range: Value set in TRD0 register Value set in TRDGRA0 register - value set in TRD0 register Set this register to the same value as the TRDGRA1 register for initialization. Buffer register. Set the changing point of next PWM3 output (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). Setting range: Value set in TRD0 register Value set in TRDGRA0 register - value set in TRD0 register Set this register to the same value as the TRDGRB1 register for initialization. PWM Output Pin (TRDIOC0, output inverted every half period) TRDIOB0 TRDIOD0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOD1 -- TRDIOB0 TRDIOD0 TRDIOA1 TRDIOC1 TRDIOB1 TRDIOD1 Caution When the setting of bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCRi register is 000B (fCLK, fIH, fPLL, fSUB, and fIL) and the compare value is set to 0000H, a request signal to the data transfer controller (DTC) and the event link controller (ELC) is generated only once immediately after the count starts. When the compare value is 0001H or higher, a request signal is generated each time a compare match occurs. Remark i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D TRDBFD0, TRDBFC1, TRDBFD1: Bits in TRDMR register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 608 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-38. Format of Timer RD General Registers Ai, Bi, Ci, and Di (TRDGRAi, TRDGRBi,TRDGRCi, TRDGRDi) (i = 0 or 1) [PWM3 Mode] Address: F0278H (TRDGRA0), F027AH (TRDGRB0), After Reset: FFFFH Note FFF58H (TRDGRC0), FFF5AH (TRDGRD0), F0288H (TRDGRA1), F028AH (TRDGRB1), FFF5CH (TRDGRC1), FFF5EH (TRDGRD1) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRDGRAi -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TRDGRBi TRDGRCi TRDGRDi -- Bits 15 to 0 Function See Table 8-8 TRDGRji Register Functions in PWM3 Mode. R/W R/W Note The value after reset is undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 609 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Table 8-8. TRDGRji Register Functions in PWM3 Mode Register Setting Register Function General register. Set the PWM period . Setting range: Value set in TRDGRA1 register General register. Set the changing point (active level timing) of PWM output Setting range: Value set in TRDGRA0 register PWM Output Pin TRDIOA0 TRDGRA0 -- TRDGRA1 -- TRDGRB0 -- General register. Set the changing point (the timing for returning to initial output level) of PWM output. Setting range: Value set in TRDGRB1 register and Value set in TRDGRA0 register TRDIOB0 TRDGRB1 -- General register. Set the changing point (active level timing) of PWM output Setting range: Value set in TRDGRB0 register -- TRDGRC0 TRDBFC0 = 0 (Not used in PWM3 mode.) -- TRDGRC1 TRDBFC1 = 0 TRDGRD0 TRDBFD0 = 0 TRDGRD1 TRDBFD1 = 0 TRDGRC0 TRDBFC0 = 1 TRDIOA0 TRDGRC1 TRDBFC1 = 1 Buffer register. Set the next PWM period (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). Setting range: Value set in TRDGRC1 register Buffer register. Set the changing point of next PWM output (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). Setting range: Value set in TRDGRC0 register TRDGRD0 TRDBFD0 = 1 Buffer register. Set the changing point of next PWM output (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). Setting range: Value set in TRDGRD1 register and Value set in TRDGRC0 register TRDIOB0 TRDGRD1 TRDBFD1 = 1 Buffer register. Set the changing point of next PWM output (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation). Setting range: Value set in TRDGRD0 register -- -- -- Caution When the setting of bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCR0 register is 000B (fCLK, fIH, fPLL, fSUB, and fIL) and the compare value is set to 0000H, a request signal to the data transfer controller (DTC) and the event link controller (ELC) is generated only once immediately after the count starts. When the compare value is 0001H or higher, a request signal is generated each time a compare match occurs. Remark i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D TRDBFC0, TRDBFD0, TRDBFC1, TRDBFD1: Bits in TRDMR register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 610 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.20 PWM Output Delay Control Register 0 (PWMDLY0) This register controls output delay of PWM output signal output from the TRDIOj0 and TRDIOj1 pins. Set the PWMDLY0 register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. PWMDLY0 register Address: F0229H After Reset: 00H 15 PWMDLY0 TRDD11 14 Note R/W 13 Note TRDD10 12 Note TRDC11 Note TRDC10 11 10 9 8 TRDB11 TRDB10 TRDA11 TRDA10 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Address: F0228H After Reset: 00H R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PWMDLY0 TRDD01 TRDD00 TRDC01 TRDC00 TRDB01 TRDB00 TRDA01 TRDA00 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Table 8-9. PWM Output Delay Period Control by TRDIOj1 of Timer RD1 TRDj11 TRDj10 PWM Output Delay Control by TRDIOj1 of Timer RD1 0 0 No delay. 0 1 TRDIOj1 signal delayed by one cycle of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). 1 0 TRDIOj1 signal delayed by two cycles of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). 1 1 TRDIOj1 signal delayed by three cycles of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). j = A, B, C, or D Table 8-10. PWM Output Delay Period Control by TRDIOj0 of Timer RD0 TRDj01 TRDj00 PWM Output Delay Control by TRDIOj0 of Timer RD0 0 0 No delay. 0 1 TRDIOj0 signal delayed by one cycle of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). 1 0 TRDIOj0 signal delayed by two cycles of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). 1 1 TRDIOj0 signal delayed by three cycles of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). j = A, B, C, or D Note If this register is set for a delay, this affects PWM outputs of TRDIOC1 and TRDIOD1, but doesn't affect the operation of the timer output signal to internally connected peripheral functions. Cautions 1. Set the PWMDLY0 register before outputting a PWM signal. 2. Access the PWMDLY0 register in 16 bits. 1-bit access and 8-bit access are prohibited. 3. If this register is not used for PWM output, it should be cleared to 0. This is because the timer output is delayed by the output delay setting shown above even when the timer output mode other than PWM output mode is selected. 4. When setting this register after the PWM output is stopped, wait for four cycles of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD) before the setting. 5. When using SNZOUT, set TRDC0n to 0 before entering STOP mode (n = 0, 1). 6. Even if this register is set for a delay, this doesn't affect the operation of other pin functions multiplexed on the same pin as the TRDIOji pin function (j = A, B, C, D, i = 0, 1). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 611 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.2.21 Port mode registers (PM1, PM3, PM12) These registers set input/output of port in 1-bit units. PM1, PM3, and PM12 are used in timer RD. When using the ports (P13/TRDIOA0, P16/TRDIOC1, etc.) to be shared with the timer output pin for timer output, set the bit in the port mode register (PMxx) and the bit in the port register (Pxx) corresponding to each port to 0. Example: When using P13/TRDIOA0 for timer output Set the PM13 bit of port mode register 1 to 0. Set the P13 bit of port register 1 to 0. When using the ports (P13/TRDIOA0, P16/TRDIOC1, etc.) to be shared with the timer input pin for timer input, set the bit in the port mode register (PMxx) corresponding to each port to 1. At this time, the bit in the port register (Pxx) may be 0 or 1. Example: When using P13/TRDIOA0 for timer input Set the PM13 bit of port mode register 1 to 1. Set the P13 bit of port register 1 to 0 or 1. The PM1, PM3, and PM12 registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH. Figure 8-39. Format of Port Mode Registers (PM1, PM3, PM12) (100-pin products) Address: FFF21H After reset: FFH Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10 Address: FFF23H Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM3 1 1 1 PM34 PM33 PM32 PM31 PM30 Address: FFF2CH Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM12 PM127 PM126 PM125 1 1 1 1 PM120 After reset: FFH After reset: FFH R/W R/W R/W Pmn pin I/O mode selection PMmn (m = 1, 3, 12; n = 0 to 7) 0 Output mode (output buffer on) 1 Input mode (output buffer off) Remark The figure shown above presents the format of port mode registers of the 100-pin products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 612 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.3 Operation 8.3.1 Items Common to Multiple Modes (1) Count Sources The count source selection method is the same in all modes. However, the external clock cannot be selected in PWM3 mode. Table 8-11. Count Source Selection Count Source fCLK, fCLK/2, fCLK/4, fCLK/8, fCLK/32 Selection The FRQSEL4 bit in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) is cleared to 0 and the PLLDIV1 bit in the PLL control register (PLLCTL) is cleared to 0, or the SELPLLS bit in the PLL status register (PLLSTS) is cleared to 0 and the TRD_CKSEL bit in the clock select register (CKSEL) is cleared to 0. A count source is selected by bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCRi register. fIH The MCM0 bit in the clock system control register (CKC) is cleared to 0, the SELPLL bit in the PLL control register (PLLCTL) is cleared to 0, the FRQSEL4 bit in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) is set to 1, and the TRD_CKSEL bit in the clock select register (CKSEL) is cleared to 0. A count source is selected by bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCRi register. fPLL The SELPLL bit in the PLL control register (PLLCTL) is set to 1, the PLLDIV1 bit in the PLL control register (PLLCTL) is set to 1, the SELPLLS bit in the PLL status register (PLLSTS) is set to 1, and the TRD_CKSEL bit in the clock select register (CKSEL) is cleared to 0. The count source is selected by bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCRi register. fSUB The SELLOSC bit in the clock select register (CKSEL) is cleared to 0 and the TRD_CKSEL bit in the clock select register (CKSEL) is set to 1. A count source is selected by bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCRi register. fIL The SELLOSC bit in the clock select register (CKSEL) is set to 1 and the TRD_CKSEL bit in clock select register (CKSEL) is set to 1. A count source is selected by bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCRi register. External signal input to The STCLK bit in the TRDFCR register is set to 1 (external clock input enabled). TRDCLK0 pin Bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCRi register are set to 101B. The active edge is selected by bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in the TRDCRi register. The PM bit in the PM register of the port used as a TRDCLK0 pin is set to 1 (input mode). Remark i = 0 or 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 613 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Notes on count source setting is described below. Notes on Count Source Setting of Timer RD Count Source Notes on Setting fCLK, fCLK/2, fCLK/4, fCLK/8, Set the TRD_CKSEL bit in the CKSEL register to 0 (fCLK/fMP is selected), the FRQSEL4 bit in the fCLK/32 user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) to 0 (fIH32 MHz), and the PLLDIV1 bit in the PLLCTL register to 0 (fPLL32 MHz). Do not set fCLK/2, fCLK/4, fCLK/8, or fCLK/32 when FRQSEL4 = 1. The count sources cannot be used when SNOOZE status is output. fIH, fPLL When fIH/fPLL (64 MHz or 48 MHz) or fPLL (over 32 MHz) is used, set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 0 (fCLK = fMP is selected). When fIH/fPLL (64 MHz or 48 MHz) is used, set bits MDIV2 to MDIV0 in the MDIV register to 001B (fMP/2 is selected) When fIH/fPLL (64 MHz or 48 MHz) or fPLL (over 32 MHz) is used, set the TRD_CKSEL bit in the CKSEL register to 0 (fCLK/fMP is selected). When fIH/fPLL (64 MHz or 48 MHz) or fPLL (over 32 MHz) is used, set the CSS bit, MDIV2 to MDIV0 bits, and TRD_CKSEL bit before setting the TRD0EN bit in the PER1 register. Set the fCLK to the clock source which is same as the count source before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). Setting the FRQSEL4 bit in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) to 1 (fIH = 64 MHz/48 MHz) and the PLLDIV bit in the PLLCTL register to 1 (fPLL > 32 MHz) is prohibited. The count sources cannot be used when SNOOZE status is output. fSUB, fIL When the CPU accesses the timer RD register, set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 1 (fCLK = fSL is selected). Set the fCLK to the clock source which is same as the count source before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). The count sources should be set when SNOOZE status is output. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 614 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-40. Count Source Block Diagram fSUB SELLOSC = 0 fSL fIL SELLOSC = 1 FRQSEL4 = 0 and (PLLDIV1 = 0 or SELPLLS = 0) MCM0 = 0 fIH SELPLL = 0 fMAIN MCM0 = 1 fPLL PLL fTRD fCLK fMP Note 1 fMX TRD_CKSEL = 1 TRD_CKSEL = 0 FRQSEL4 = 1 or (PLLDIV1 = 1 and SELPLLS = 1) SELPLL = 1 = 000B = 001B fTRD / 2 Note 2 fTRD / 4 = 010B Note 2 Count source = 011B fTRD / 8 Note 2 TRDCLK0/ TRDIOA0 TRDi register TRDi = 100B fTRD / 32 Note 2 STCLK = 1 TCK2 to TCK0 CKEG0, CKEG1 Active edge selection = 101B TRDIOA0 I/O or I/O port STCLK = 0 Notes 1. fIH cannot be selected when it is 64 MHz or 48 MHz. fPLL can be selected when it is over 32 MHz. 2. With this setting, select fCLK as the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). Remark i = 0 or 1 TCK0 to TCK2, CKEG0, CKEG1: Bits in TRDCRi register STCLK: Bit in TRDFCR register FREQSEL4: Bit in user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) MCM0: Bit in CKC register SELPLL: Bit in PLLCTL register PLLDIV1: Bit in PLLCTL register SELPLLS: Bit in PLLSTS register SELLOSC: Bit in CKSEL register TDC_CKSEL: Bit in CKSEL register Set the pulse width of the external clock applied to the TRDCLK0 pin to three or more cycles of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 615 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (2) Buffer Operation The TRDGRCi register (i = 0 or 1) can be used as the buffer register for the TRDGRAi register, and the TRDGRDi register can be used as the buffer register for the TRDGRBi register by means of bits TRDBFCi and TRDBFDi in the TRDMR register. TRDGRAi buffer register: TRDGRCi register TRDGRBi buffer register: TRDGRDi register Buffer operation depends on the mode. Table 8-12 lists the Buffer Operation in Each Mode. Table 8-12. Buffer Operation in Each Mode Function and Mode Timer Transfer Timing Transfer Register Input capture function Input capture signal input Transfer content of TRDGRAi Output compare function Compare match with TRDi register and Transfer content of buffer register to mode (TRDGRBi) register to buffer register PWM function Reset synchronous PWM mode Complementary PWM mode PWM3 mode TRDGRAi (TRDGRBi) register TRDGRAi (TRDGRBi) register Compare match with TRD0 register and Transfer content of buffer register to TRDGRA0 register TRDGRAi (TRDGRBi) register Compare match with TRD0 register and Transfer content of buffer register to TRDGRA0 register registers TRDGRB0, TRDGRA1, and TRD1 register underflow TRDGRB1 Compare match with TRD0 register and Transfer content of buffer register to TRDGRA0 register TRDGRAi (TRDGRBi) register Remark i = 0 or 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 616 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-41. Buffer Operation in Input Capture Function TRDIOAi input (input capture signal) TRDGRCi register (buffer) TRDGRAi register TRDi TRDIOAi input TRDi register n n-1 n+1 Transfer TRDGRAi register m n Transfer TRDGRCi register (buffer) m Remark i = 0 or 1 The above diagram applies under the following conditions: * The TRDBFCi bit in the TRDMR register is set to 1 (TRDGRCi register is buffer register for TRDGRAi register). * Bits IOA2 to IOA0 in the TRDIORAi register are set to 100B (input capture at the rising edge). Figure 8-42. Buffer Operation in Output Compare Function Compare match signal TRDGRAi register TRDGRCi register (buffer) TRDi register TRDGRAi register Comparator m m-1 TRDi m+1 m n Transfer TRDGRCi register (buffer) n TRDIOAi output Remark i = 0 or 1 The above diagram applies under the following conditions: * The TRDBFCi bit in the TRDMR register is set to 1 (TRDGRCi register is buffer register for TRDGRAi register). * Bits IOA2 to IOA0 in the TRDIORAi register are set to 001B (low output by compare match). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 617 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Perform the following for the timer mode (input capture and output compare functions). When using the TRDGRCi (i = 0 or 1) register as the buffer register for the TRDGRAi register Set the IOC3 bit in the TRDIORCi register to 1 (general register or buffer register). Set the IOC2 bit in the TRDIORCi register to the same value as the IOA2 bit in the TRDIORAi register. When using the TRDGRDi register as the buffer register for the TRDGRBi register Set the IOD3 bit in the TRDIORCi register to 1 (general register or buffer register). Set the IOD2 bit in the TRDIORCi register to the same value as the IOB2 bit in the TRDIORAi register. In the input capture function, when the TRDGRCi register or TRDGRDi register is used as a buffer register, the IMFC bit or IMFD bit in the TRDSRi register is set to 1 at the input edge of the TRDIOCi pin or TRDIODi pin. When also using registers TRDGRCi and TRDGRDi as buffer registers for the output compare function, PWM function, reset synchronous PWM mode, complementary PWM mode, and PWM3 mode, bits IMFC and IMFD in the TRDSRi register are set to 1 by a compare match with the TRDi register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 618 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (3) Synchronous Operation The TRD1 register is synchronized with the TRD0 register Synchronous preset When the TRDSYNC bit in the TRDMR register is set to 1 (synchronous operation), the data is written to both the TRD0 and TRD1 registers after writing to the TRDi register. Synchronous clear When the TRDSYNC bit is 1 and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in the TRDCR0 register are 011B (synchronous clear), the TRD0 register is set to 0000H at the same time as the TRD1 register is set to 0000H. Also, when the TRDSYNC bit is 1 and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 are 011B (synchronous clear), the TRD1 register is set to 0000H at the same time as the TRD0 register is set to 0000H. Figure 8-43. Synchronous Operation TRDIOA0 input Set to 0000H by input capture Value in TRD0 register n n writing n is set Value in TRD1 register n n is set Set to 0000H in synchronization with TRD0 The above diagram applies under the following conditions: * The TRDSYNC bit in the TRDMR register is set to 1 (synchronous operation). * Bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in the TRDCR0 register are set to 001B (TRD0 is set to 0000H by input capture). Bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in the TRDCR1 register are set to 011B (TRD1 is set to 0000H in synchronization with TRD0). * Bits IOA2 to IOA0 in the TRDIORA0 register are set to 100B. (Input capture at the rising edge of TRDIOA0 input) * Bits CMD1 to CMD0 in the TRDFCR register are set to 00B. The PWM 3 bit in the TRDFCR register is set to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 619 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (4) Pulse Output Forced Cutoff In the PWM function, reset synchronous PWM mode, complementary PWM mode, and PWM3 mode, the TRDIOji output pin (i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D) can be forcibly set to an I/O port by the INTP0 pin input, and pulse output can be cut off. The pins used for output in these functions or modes can function as the output pin of timer RD when the corresponding bit in the TRDOER1 register is set to 0 (timer RD output enabled). When the TRDPTO bit in the TRDOER2 register is 1 (pulse output forced cutoff signal input INTP0 enabled), the output pin used as a timer RD output port outputs the output value set by the DFCK1, DFCK0, PENB1, PENB0, DFD, DFC, DFB, or DFA bit in the TRDDF0 or TRDDF1 register. Make the following settings to use this function: Set the pin state when the pulse output is forcibly cut off (high impedance, low output, or high output) using TRDDFi. Refer to 8.3.1 (5) Event Input from Event Link Controller (ELC) for details on pulse forced cutoff by ELC Note event input. When pulse output is forcibly cut out, the TRDSHUTS bit in the TRDOER2 register is set to 1. To suspend the forced cutoff of the pulse output, set the TRDSHUTS bit to 0 while the count is stopped (TSTARTi = 0). Set the TRDPTO bit in the TRDOER2 register to 1 (pulse output forced cutoff signal input INTP0 enabled). Note The ELC is only available in the RL78/F14. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 620 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-44. Pulse Output Forced Cutoff <R> ELCOBE0 Event input 0 from ELC DFCK1, DFCK0 TRDSHUTS bit INTP0 input TRDPTO Timer RD output data Output data of alternate I/O port ELCOBE1 Event input 1 from ELC TRDIOA0 Hi-Z selection signal PM13 Input data PENB1, PENB0 Timer RD output data Output data of alternate I/O port TRDIOB0 Hi-Z selection signal PM125 Input data DFD, DFC Timer RD output data Output data of alternate I/O port TRDIOC1 Hi-Z selection signal PM16 Input data DFB, DFA Timer RD output data Output data of alternate I/O port TRDIOD1 Hi-Z selection signal ELCOBE0, ELCOBE1: TRDPTO, TRDSHUTS: PM13, PM16, PM30, PM125: DFCK1, DFCK0, PENB1, PENB0, DFD, DFC, DFB, DFA: R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Bits in TRDELC register Bits in TRDOER2 register Bits in PM1, PM3, and PM12 register Bits in TRDDF0, and TRDDF1 register PM30 Input data 621 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (5) Event Input from Event Link Controller (ELC) Timer RD performs two operations by event input from the ELC. The ELC is only available in the RL78/F14. (a) Input capture operation D0/D1 Timer RD performs input capture operation D0/D1 by event input from the ELC. The IMFD bit in the TRDSRi register is set to 1 at this time. To use this function, select the input capture function in timer mode and set the ELCICE0 or ELCICE1 bit in the TRDELC register to 1. This function is disabled in any other modes (for the output compare function in timer mode, PWM function, reset synchronous PWM mode, complementary PWM mode, and PWM3 mode). (b) Pulse output forced cutoff operation Note The pulse output is forcibly cutoff by event input from the ELC. To use this function, select pulse output mode (PWM function, reset synchronous PWM mode, complementary PWM mode, or PWM3 mode) and set the ELCOBE0 or ELCOBE1 bit to 1. This function is disabled for the input capture function in timer mode. Note The pulse output is cutoff during the low input period for forced cutoff from the INTP0 pin, but the pulse output is cutoff once by a single event input from the ELC for forced cutoff by the ELC event. [Setting Procedure] (1) Set timer RD as the ELC event link destination. (2) Set bits ELCICEi (i = 0 or 1) and ELCOBEi (i = 0 or 1) to 1 in the TRDELC register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 622 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (6) Event Output to Event Link Controller (ELC)/DTC/A/D Converter Trigger Select Register 0 (ADTRGS0) Table 8-13 lists the Timer RD Modes and Event Output to ELC/DTC/ADTRGS0 register. Table 8-13. Timer RD Modes and Event Output to ELC/DTC/ADTRGS0 Register Used Mode Output Source ELC Note 1 DTC ADTRGS0 register Note 2 Input capture function TRDIOA0 edge detection set by bits IOA1 and IOA0 in the Available Available - Available Available Available - Available - - Available - Available Available - Available Available - - Available - - Available - Available - TRDIORA0 register TRDIOB0 edge detection set by bits IOB1 and IOB0 in the TRDIORA0 register TRDIOC0 edge detection set by bits IOC1 and IOC0 in the TRDIORC0 register TRDIOD0 edge detection set by bits IOD1 and IOD0 in the TRDIORC0 register TRDIOA1 edge detection set by bits IOA1 and IOA0 in the TRDIORA1 register TRDIOB1 edge detection set by bits IOB1 and IOB0 in the TRDIORA1 register TRDIOC1 edge detection set by bits IOC1 and IOC0 in the TRDIORC1 register TRDIOD1 edge detection set by bits IOD1 and IOD0 in the TRDIORC1 register Output compare function, Compare match between registers TRD0 and TRDGRA0 Available PWM function, reset Compare match between registers TRD0 and TRDGRB0 Available Available Available synchronous PWM mode, Compare match between registers TRD0 and TRDGRC0 - Available - Compare match between registers TRD0 and TRDGRD0 - Available - Compare match between registers TRD1 and TRDGRA1 Available Available - Compare match between registers TRD1 and TRDGRB1 Available Available - Compare match between registers TRD1 and TRDGRC1 - Available - - Available - Available - - complementary PWM mode, and PWM3 mode Compare match between registers TRD1 and TRDGRD1 Complementary PWM mode TRD1 register underflow Notes 1. The ELC is only available in the RL78/F14. 2. The A/D converter trigger select register 0 (ADTRGS0) is only available in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) and RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 623 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.3.2 Input Capture Function The input capture function measures the external signal width and period. The content of the TRDi register (counter) is transferred to the TRDGRji register as a trigger of the TRDIOji pin (i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D) external signal (input capture). Since this function is enabled with a combination of the TRDIOji pin and TRDGRji register, the input capture function, or any other mode or function, can be selected for each individual pin. Figure 8-45 shows the Block Diagram of Input Capture Function, Table 8-14 lists the Input Capture Function Specifications, and Figure 8-46 shows an Operation Example of Input Capture Function. Figure 8-45. Block Diagram of Input Capture Function Input capture signal TRDIOAi Edge selection (Note 1) TRDGRAi register TRDiregister TRDGRCi register TRDIOCi Edge selection TRDIOBi Edge selection Input capture signal Input capture signal (Note 2) TRDGRBi register TRDGRDi register TRDIODi Edge selection Input capture signal Remark i = 0 or 1 Notes: 1. When the TRDBFCi bit in the TRDMR register is set to 1 (TRDGRCi register is buffer register for TRDGRAi register). 2. When the TRDBFDi bit in the TRDMR register is set to 1 (TRDGRDi register is buffer register for TRDGRBi register). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 624 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Table 8-14. Input Capture Function Specifications Item Count sources Note 1 Specification fCLK, fPLL, fIH, fSUB, fPL External signal input to the TRDCLK0 pin (active edge selected by a program) Count operations Count period Increment When bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in the TRDCRi register are set to 000B (freerunning operation). 1/fk x 65536 fk: Frequency of count source Count start condition 1 (count starts) is written to the TSTARTi bit in the TRDSTR register. Count stop condition 0 (count stops) is written to the TSTARTi bit in the TRDSTR register when the CSELi bit in the TRDSTR register is set to 1. Interrupt request generation timing * Input capture (active edge of TRDIOji input) * TRDi register overflow TRDIOA0 pin function I/O port, input-capture input, or TRDCLK (external clock) input TRDIOB0, TRDIOC0, TRDIOD0, I/O port or input-capture input (selectable for each pin) TRDIOA1 to TRDIOD1 pin function INTP0 pin function Not used (port or INTP0 interrupt input) Read from timer The count value can be read by reading the TRDi register. Write to timer * When the TRDSYNC bit in the TRDMR register is 0 (timer RD0 and timer RD1 operate independently). Data can be written to the TRDi register. * When the TRDSYNC bit in the TRDMR register is 1 (timer RD0 and timer RD1 operate synchronously). Data can be written to both the TRD0 and TRD1 registers by writing to the TRDi register. Selectable functions * Input-capture input pin selection Either one pin or multiple pins of TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi. * Input-capture input active edge selection Rising edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges * Timing for setting the TRDi register to 0000H. At overflow or input capture * Buffer operation (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation) * Synchronous operation (see 8. 3. 1 (3) Synchronous Operation) * Digital filter. The TRDIOji input is sampled, and when the sampled input level match three times, that level is determined. * Input capture operation by event input from event link controller (ELC). Note 2 Notes 1. When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). 2. The ELC is only available in the RL78/F14. Remark i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 625 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (1) Operation Example By setting bits CCLR0 to CCLR2 in the TRDCRi register (i = 0 or 1), the timer RDi counter value is reset by an input capture/compare match. Figure 8-46 shows an operation example with bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 set to 001B. If the input capture operation has been set to clear the count during operation and is performed when the timer count value is FFFFH, depending on the timing between the count source and input capture operation interrupt flags bits IMFA to IMFD and OVF in the TRDSRi register may be set to 1 simultaneously. Figure 8-46. Operation Example of Input Capture Function TRDCLK input count source Count value in TRDi register FFFFH 0009H 0006H 0000H Time TSTARTi bit in TRDSTR register 65536 TRDIOAi input TRDGRAi register 0006H Transfer TRDGRCi register 0009H Transfer 0006H IMFA bit in TRDSRi register OVF bit in TRDSRi register Set to 0 by a program Remark i = 0 or 1 The above diagram applies under the following conditions: Bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in the TRDCRi register are set to 001B (TRDi register is set to 0000H by TRDGRAi register input capture). Bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCRi register are set to 101B (TRDCLK input for the count source). Bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in the TRDCRi register are set to 01B (count at the falling edge for the count source). Bits IOA2 to IOA0 in the TRDIORAi register are set to 101B (input capture at the falling edge of TRDIOAi input). The TRDBFCi bit in the TRDMR register is set to 1 (TRDGRCi register is buffer register for TRDGRAi register). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 626 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (2) Digital Filter The TRDIOji input (i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D) is sampled, and when the sampled input level matches three times, its level is determined. Select the digital filter function and sampling clock using the TRDDFi register. Figure 8-47 shows the Block Diagram of Digital Filter. Figure 8-47. Block Diagram of Digital Filter TCK2 to TCK0 fCLK/32 fCLK/8 fCLK/4 fCLK/2 DFCK1 and DFCK0 = 101B TRDCLK = 00B fCLK/32 = 100B = 01B fCLK/8 = 10B fCLK = 011B = 11B = 010B Count source = 001B Synchronized by two flip-flops = 000B fCLK, fIH, fPLL, fSUB, and fIL Note Sampling clock Timer RD operating clock fCLK C TRDIOji input signal D C Q Latch D Latch D DFj C C Q Q Latch D Q Match detection circuit (flip-flop output) Edge detection circuit 1 Latch IOA2 to IOA0 IOB2 to IOB0 IOC3 to IOC0 IOD3 to IOD0 0 Edge detection circuit Clock period selected by bits TCK2 to TCK0 or bits DFCK1 and DFCK0 Sampling clock TRDIOji input signal Matched three times, so recognized as a signal change Input signal through digital filtering Signal transmission delayed up to five sampling clocks If fails to match three times, is assumed to be noise and not transmitted Remark i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D TCK0 to TCK2: Bits in TRDCRi register DFCK0, DFCK1, DFj: Bits in TRDDF register IOA0 to IOA2, IOB0 to IOB2: Bits in TRDIORAi register IOC0 to IOC3, IOD0 to IOD3: Bits in TRDIORCi register Notes 1. As the timer RD operating clock (fTRD), fCLK is selected when FRQSEL4 = 0 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H), (PLLDIV1 = 0 or SELPLLS = 0), and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fIH is selected when FRQSEL4 = 1 and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fPLL is selected when (PLLDIV1 = 1 and SELPLLS = 1) and TRD_CKSEL = 0. fSUB is selected when SELLOSC = 0 and TRD_CKSEL = 1. fIL is selected when SELLOSC = 1 and TRD_CKSEL = 1. For details, see Figure 8-40. When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). 2. With this setting, select fCLK as the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 627 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.3.3 Output Compare Function This function detects matches (compare match) between the content of the TRDGRji register (j = A, B, C, or D) and the content of the TRDi register (counter) (i = 0 or 1). When the contents match, an arbitrary level is output from the TRDIOji pin. Since this function is enabled with a combination of the TRDIOji pin and TRDGRji register, the output compare function, or any other mode or function, can be selected for each individual pin. Figure 8-48 shows the Block Diagram of Output Compare Function, Table 8-13 lists the Output Compare Function Specifications, and Figure 8-49 shows an Operation Example of Output Compare Function. Figure 8-48. Block Diagram of Output Compare Function Timer RD0 TRD0 TRDIOA0 Output control Compare match signal IOC3 = 0 in TRDIORC0 register Comparator TRDGRA0 Comparator TRDGRC0 Comparator TRDGRB0 Comparator TRDGRD0 Compare match signal TRDIOC0 TRDIOB0 Output control Output control IOC3 = 1 Compare match signal IOD3 = 0 in TRDIORC0 register Compare match signal TRDIOD0 Output control IOD3 = 1 Timer RD1 TRD1 TRDIOA1 Output control Compare match signal IOC3 = 0 in TRDIORC1 register Comparator TRDGRA1 Comparator TRDGRC1 Comparator TRDGRB1 Comparator TRDGRD1 Compare match signal TRDIOC1 TRDIOB1 Output control Output control IOC3 = 1 Compare match signal IOD3 = 0 in TRDIORC1 register Compare match signal TRDIOD1 Output control R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 IOD3 = 1 628 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Table 8-15. Output Compare Function Specifications Item Count sources Note Specification fCLK, fPLL, fIH, fSUB, fIL External signal input to the TRDCLK0 pin (active edge selected by a program) Count operations Increment Count period * When bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in the TRDCRi register are set to 000B (free-running operation). 1/fk x 65536 fk: Frequency of count source * When bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in the TRDCRi register are set to 01B or 10B (TRDi register is set to 0000H at compare match with TRDGRji register). 1/fk x (n + 1) n: Value set in the TRDGRji register Waveform output timing Compare match (contents of registers TRDi and TRDGRji match) Count start condition 1 (count starts) is written to the TSTARTi bit in the TRDSTR register. Count stop conditions * 0 (count stops) is written to the TSTARTi bit in the TRDSTR register when the CSELi bit in the TRDSTR register is set to 1. The output compare output pin holds the output level before the count stops. * When the CSELi bit in the TRDSTR register is set to 0, the count stops at the compare match with the TRDGRAi register. The output compare output pin holds the level after output change by compare match. Interrupt request generation timing * Compare match (contents of registers TRDi and TRDGRji match) TRDIOA0 pin function I/O port, output-compare output, or TRDCLK (external clock) input TRDIOB0, TRDIOC0, TRDIOD0, I/O port or output-compare output (selectable for each pin) * TRDi register overflow TRDIOA1 to TRDIOD1 pin function INTP0 pin function Port or INTP0 interrupt input Read from timer The count value can be read by reading the TRDi register. Write to timer * When the TRDSYNC bit in the TRDMR register is set to 0 (timer RD0 and timer RD1 operate independently). Data can be written to the TRDi register. * When the TRDSYNC bit in the TRDMR register is set to 1 (timer RD0 and timer RD1 operate synchronously). Data can be written to both the TRD0 and TRD1 registers by writing to the TRDi register. Selectable functions * Output-compare output pin selection Either one pin or multiple pins of TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi. * Output level selection at compare match Low output, high output, or inverted output level * Initial output level selection The level can be set for the period from the count start to the compare match. * Timing for setting the TRDi register to 0000H Overflow or compare match in the TRDGRAi register * Buffer operation (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation) * Synchronous operation (see 8. 3. 1 (3) Synchronous Operation) * Changing output pins for registers TRDGRCi and TRDGRDi The TRDGRCi register can be used as output control of the TRDIOAi pin and the TRDGRDi register can be used as output control of the TRDIOBi pin. * Pulse output forced cutoff signal input (see 8. 3. 1 (4) Pulse Output Forced Cutoff) * Timer RD can be used as the internal timer without output. Note When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). Remark i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 629 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (1) Operation Example By setting bits CCLR0 to CCLR2 in the TRDCRi register (i = 0 or 1), the timer RDi counter value is reset by an input capture/compare match. If the expected compare value is FFFFH at this time, FFFFH changes to 0000H, same as the overflow operation, and the overflow flag is set to 1. Figure 8-49. Operation Example of Output Compare Function Count source Value in TRDi register m n p Count restarts Count stops TSTARTi bit in TRDSTR register m+1 Time m+1 Output level held TRDIOAi output Output inverted by compare match Initial output is low IMFA bit in TRDSRi register Set to 0 by a program n+1 TRDIOBi output High output by compare match Initial output is low Output level held IMFB bit in TRDSRi register Set to 0 by a program p+1 Low output by compare match TRDIOCi output Output level held Initial output is high IMFC bit in TRDSRi register Set to 0 by a program Remark i = 0 or 1 M: Value set in TRDGRAi register n: Value set in TRDGRBi register p: Value set in TRDGRCi register The above diagram applies under the following conditions : The CSELi bit in the TRDSTR register is set to 1 (TRDi is not stopped by compare match). Bits TRDBFCi and TRDBFDi in the TRDMR register are set to 0 (TRDGRCi and TRDGRDi do not operate as buffers). Bits EAi, EBi, and ECi in the TRDOER1 register are set to 0 (TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi and TRDIOCi output enabled). Bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in the TRDCRi register are set to 001B (TRDi is set to 0000H by compare match with TRDGRAi). Bits TOAi and TOBi in the TRDOCR register is set to 0 (initial output is low until compare match), the TOCi bit is set to 1 (initial output is high until compare match). Bits IOA2 to IOA0 in the TRDIORAi register are set to 011B (TRDIOAi output inverted at TRDGRAi compare match). Bits IOB2 to IOB0 in the TRDIORAi register are set to 010B (TRDIOBi high output at TRDGRBi compare match). Bits IOC3 to IOC0 in the TRDIORCi register are set to 1001B (TRDIOCi low output at TRDGRCi register compare match). Bits IOD3 to IOD0 in the TRDIORCi register are set to 1000B (TRDGRDi register does not control TRDIOBi pin output. Pin output by compare match is disabled). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 630 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (2) Changing Output Pins in Registers TRDGRCi (i = 0 or 1) and TRDGRDi The TRDGRCi register can be used for output control of the TRDIOAi pin, and the TRDGRDi register can be used for output control of the TRDIOBi pin. Therefore, each pin output can be controlled as follows: TRDIOAi output is controlled by the values in registers TRDGRAi and TRDGRCi. TRDIOBi output is controlled by the values in registers TRDGRBi and TRDGRDi. Figure 8-50. Changing Output Pins in Registers TRDGRCi and TRDGRDi Timer RD0 TRD0 TRDIOA0 Output control Compare match signal IOC3 = 0 in TRDIORC0 register Comparator TRDGRA0 Comparator TRDGRC0 Comparator TRDGRB0 Comparator TRDGRD0 Compare match signal TRDIOC0 TRDIOB0 Output control Output control IOC3 = 1 Compare match signal IOD3 = 0 in TRDIORC0 register Compare match signal TRDIOD0 Output control IOD3 = 1 Timer RD1 TRD1 TRDIOA1 Output control Compare match signal IOC3 = 0 in TRDIORC1 register Comparator TRDGRA1 Comparator TRDGRC1 Comparator TRDGRB1 Comparator TRDGRD1 Compare match signal TRDIOC1 TRDIOB1 Output control Output control IOC3 = 1 Compare match signal IOD3 = 0 in TRDIORC1 register Compare match signal TRDIOD1 Output control IOD3 = 1 Change output pins in registers TRDGRCi and TRDGRDi as follows: * Select 0 (TRDGRji register output pin is changed) using the IOj3 (j = C or D) bit in the TRDIORCi register. * Set the TRDBFji bit in the TRDMR register to 0 (general register). * Set different values in registers TRDGRCi and TRDGRAi. Also, set different values in registers TRDGRDi and TRDGRBi. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 631 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-51 shows an Operation Example When TRDGRCi Register is Used for Output Control of TRDIOAi Pin and TRDGRDi Register is Used for Output Control of TRDIOBi Pin. Figure 8-51. Operation Example When TRDGRCi Register is Used for Output Control of TRDIOAi Pin and TRDGRDi Register is Used for Output Control of TRDIOBi Pin Count source Value in TRDi register FFFFH m n p q 0000H Time m+1 n+1 m-n p+1 q+1 p-q Initial output is low TRDIOAi output Output inverted by compare match IMFA bit in TRDSRi register Set to 0 by a program Set to 0 by a program IMFC bit in TRDSRi register Initial output is low TRDIOBi output Output inverted by compare match IMFB bit in TRDSRi register Set to 0 by a program Set to 0 by a program IMFD bit in TRDSRi register Remark i = 0 or 1 m: Value set in TRDGRAi register n: Value set in TRDGRCi register p: Value set in TRDGRBi register q: Value set in TRDGRDi register The above diagram applies under the following conditions : The CSELi bit in the TRDSTR register is set to 1 (TRDi register is not stopped by compare match). Bits TRDBFCi and TRDBFDi in the TRDMR register are set to 0 (TRDGRCi and TRDGRDi do not operate as buffers). Bits EAi and EBi in the TRDOER1 register are set to 0 (TRDIOAi and TRDIOBi output enabled). Bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in the TRDCRi register are set to 001B (TRDi is set to 0000H by compare match with TRDGRAi). Bits TOAi and TOBi in the TRDOCR register are set to 0 (initial output is low until compare match). Bits IOA2 to IOA0 in the TRDIORAi register are set to 011B (TRDIOAi output inverted at TRDGRAi compare match). Bits IOB2 to IOB0 in the TRDIORAi register are set to 011B (TRDIOBi output inverted at TRDGRBi compare match). Bits IOC3 to IOC0 in the TRDIORCi register are set to 0011B (TRDIOAi output inverted at TRDGRCi compare match). Bits IOD3 to IOD0 in the TRDIORCi register are set to 0011B (TRDIOBi output inverted at TRDGRDi compare match). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 632 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.3.4 PWM Function In PWM function, a PWM waveform is output. Up to three PWM waveforms with the same period can be output by timer RDi (i = 0 or 1). Also, up to six PWM waveforms with the same period can be output by synchronizing timer RD0 and timer RD1. Since this mode functions by a combination of the TRDIOji pin (i = 0 or 1, j = B, C, or D) and TRDGRji register, PWM function, or any other mode or function, can be selected for each individual pin. (However, since the TRDGRAi register is used when using any pin for PWM function, the TRDGRAi register cannot be used for other modes.) Figure 8-52 shows the Block Diagram of PWM function, Table 8-16 lists the PWM Function Specifications, and Figure 853 and Figure 8-54 show Operation Examples in PWM Function. Figure 8-52. Block Diagram of PWM Function TRDi Compare match signal TRDIOBi Compare match signal Comparator TRDGRAi (Note 1) TRDIOCi Output control TRDIODi Comparator TRDGRBi Comparator TRDGRCi Compare match signal Compare match signal (Note 2) Comparator TRDGRDi Remark i = 0 or 1 Notes: 1. When the TRDBFCi bit in the TRDMR register is set to 1 (TRDGRCi register is buffer register for TRDGRAi register). 2. When the TRDBFDi bit in the TRDMR register is set to 1 (TRDGRDi register is buffer register for TRDGRBi register). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 633 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Table 8-16. PWM Mode Specifications Item Count sources Note Specification fCLK, fPLL, fIH, fSUB, fIL External signal input to the TRDCLK0 pin (active edge selected by a program) Count operations Increment PWM waveform PWM period: 1/fk x (m + 1) Active level width: 1/fk x (m - n) Inactive level width: 1/fk x (n + 1) fk: Frequency of count source m: Value set in the TRDGRAi register n: Value set in the TRDGRji register m+1 n+1 m-n (When low is selected as the active level) Count start condition 1 (count starts) is written to the TSTARTi bit in the TRDSTR register. Count stop conditions * 0 (count stops) is written to the TSTARTi bit in the TRDSTR register when the CSELi bit in the TRDSTR register is set to 1. The PWM output pin holds the output level before the count stops. * When the CSELi bit in the TRDSTR register is set to 0, the count stops at the compare match with the TRDGRAi register. The PWM output pin holds the level after output change by compare match. Interrupt request generation timing * Compare match (content of the TRDi register matches content of the TRDGRhi register) * TRDi register overflow TRDIOA0 pin function I/O port or TRDCLK (external clock) input TRDIOA1 pin function I/O port TRDIOB0, TRDIOC0, TRDIOD0, I/O port or pulse output (selectable for each pin) TRDIOB1, TRDIOC1, TRDIOD1 pin function INTP0 pin function Pulse output forced cutoff signal input (port or INTP0 interrupt input) Read from timer The count value can be read by reading the TRDi register. Write to timer The value can be written to the TRDi register. Selectable functions * One to three PWM output pins selectable with timer RDi Either one pin or multiple pins of TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi. * Active level selectable for each pin. * Initial output level selectable for each pin. * Synchronous operation (see 8. 3. 1 (3) Synchronous Operation) * Buffer operation (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation) * Pulse output forced cutoff signal input (see 8. 3. 1 (4) Pulse Output Forced Cutoff) Note When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). Remark i = 0 or 1, j = B, C, or D, h = A, B, C, or D R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 634 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (1) Operation Example Figure 8-53. Operation Example in PWM Function Count source Value in TRDi register m n p q 0000H Time m+1 n+1 TRDI OBi output Active level is high Inactive level is low p+1 Init ial output is low until compare mat ch TRDIOCi output m-n m-p Inactive level is high Initial output is high until compare mat ch q+1 m-q Active level is low TRDI ODi output Inactive level is high IMFA bit in TRDSRi register Init ial output is low until compare mat ch Set to 0 by a program IMFB bit in TRDSRi register Set to 0 by a program IMFC bit in TRDSRi register IMFD bit in TRDSRi register Set to 0 by a program Set to 0 by a program Remark i = 0 or 1 m: Value set in TRDG RAi register n: Value set in TRDGRBi register p: Value set in TRDGRCi register q: Value set in TRDGRDi register The above diagram applies under t he following conditions: Bits TRDBFCi and TRDBFDi in the TRDMR register are set t o 0 (TRDG RCi and TRDGRDi do not operate as buffers). Bits EBi, ECi and EDi in the TRDOER1 regist er are set to 0 (TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi and TRDIODi output enabled). Bits TOBi and TO Ci in the TRDOCR register are set to 0 (inactive level), the TODi bit is set to 1 (active level). The PO LB bit in the TRDPOCRi register is set t o 1 (act ive level is high), bits POLC and POLD are set to 0 (act ive level is low). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 635 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-54. Operation Example in PWM Function (Duty Cycle 0%, Duty Cycle 100%) Value in TRDi register p m q n 0000H Time 1 TSTARTi bit in TRDSTR register Since no compare match in the TRDGRBi register is generated, a low level is not applied to the TRDIOBi output. TRDIOBi output Duty cycle 100% n TRDGRBi register p (p>m) q Rewrite by a program IMFA bit in TRDSRi register Set to 0 by a program Set to 0 by a program IMFB bit in TRDSRi register Value in TRDi register m p n 0000H TSTARTi bit in TRDSTR register Time 1 When compare matches with registers TRDGRAi and TRDGRBi are generated simultaneously, the compare match with the TRDGRBi register has priority. A low level is applied to the TRDIOBi output without any change . Duty cycle 100% TRDIOBi output A low level is applied to TRDIOBi output by compare match with the TRDGRBi register with no change. TRDGRBi register n m p Rewrite by a program IMFA bit in TRDSRi register Set to 0 by a program Set to 0 by a program IMFB bit in TRDSRi register Remark i = 0 or 1 m: Value set in TRDGRAi register The above diagram applies under the following conditions : The EBi bit in the TRDOER1 register is set to 0 (TRDIOBi output enabled). The POLB bit in the TRDPOCRi register is set to 0 (active level is low). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 636 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.3.5 Reset Synchronous PWM Mode In this mode, three normal-phases and three counter-phases of the PWM waveform are output with the same period (three-phase, sawtooth wave modulation, and no dead time). Figure 8-55 shows the Block Diagram of Reset Synchronous PWM Mode, Table 8-17 lists the Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Specifications, Figure 8-56 shows an Operation Example in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode. See Figure 8-54 Operation Example in PWM Function (Duty Cycle 0%, Duty Cycle 100%) for an operation example in PWM Mode with duty cycle 0% and duty cycle 100%. Figure 8-55. Block Diagram of Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Buffer (1) TRDGRC0 register Waveform control TRDGRA0 register Period TRDIOC0 Normal-phase TRDGRD0 register TRDGRB0 register PWM1 TRDGRC1 register TRDGRA1 register PWM2 TRDGRD1 register TRDGRB1 register PWM3 TRDIOB0 Counter-phase TRDIOD0 Normal-phase TRDIOA1 Counter-phase TRDIOC1 Normal-phase TRDIOB1 Counter-phase TRDIOD1 Note: 1. When bits TRDBFC0, TRDBFD0, TRDBFC1, and TRDBFD1 in the TRDMR register are set to 1 (buffer register). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 637 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Table 8-17. Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Specifications Item Count sources Note Specification fCLK, fPLL, fIH, fSUB, fIL External signal input to the TRDCLK0 pin (active edge selected by a program) Count operations The TRD0 register is incremented (the TRD1 register is not used). PWM waveform PWM period: 1/fk x (m + 1) Active level of normal-phase: 1/fk x (m - n) Inactive level of counter-phase: 1/fk x (n + 1) fk: Frequency of count source m: Value set in the TRDGRA0 register n: Value set in the TRDGRB0 register (PWM1 output) Value set in the TRDGRA1 register (PWM2 output) Value set in the TRDGRB1 register (PWM3 output) m+1 Normal-phase m-n Counter-phase n+1 (When low is selected as the active level) Count start condition 1 (count starts) is written to the TSTART0 bit in the TRDSTR register. Count stop conditions * 0 (count stops) is written to the TSTART0 bit when the CSEL0 bit in the TRDSTR register is set to 1. The PWM output pin outputs the initial output level selected by bits OLS0 and OLS1 in the TRDFCR register. * When the CSEL0 bit in the TRDSTR register is set to 0, the count stops at the compare match with the TRDGRA0 register. The PWM output pin outputs the initial output level selected by bits OLS0 and OLS1 in the TRDFCR register. Interrupt request generation timing * Compare match (content of the TRD0 register matches content of registers TRDGRj0, TRDGRA1, and TRDGRB1) * TRD0 register overflow TRDIOA0 pin function I/O port or TRDCLK (external clock) input TRDIOB0 pin function PWM1 output normal-phase output TRDIOD0 pin function PWM1 output counter-phase output TRDIOA1 pin function PWM2 output normal-phase output TRDIOC1 pin function PWM2 output counter-phase output TRDIOB1 pin function PWM3 output normal-phase output TRDIOD1 pin function PWM3 output counter-phase output TRDIOC0 pin function Output inverted every PWM period INTP0 pin function Pulse output forced cutoff signal input (port or INTP0 interrupt input) Read from timer The count value can be read by reading the TRD0 register. Write to timer The value can be written to the TRD0 register. Selectable functions *The normal-phase and counter-phase active level and initial output level are selected individually. * Buffer operation (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation) * Pulse output forced cutoff signal input (see 8. 3. 1 (4) Pulse Output Forced Cutoff) Note When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). Remark j = A, B, C, or D R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 638 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (1) Operation Example Figure 8-56. Operation Example in Reset Synchronous PWM Mode Count source Value in TRD0 register m n p q 0000H Time TSTART0 bit in TRDSTR register m+1 m-n TRDIOB0 output n+1 TRDIOD0 output m-p TRDIOA1 output p+1 TRDIOC1 output m-q TRDIOB1 output Initial output is high q+1 Active level is low TRDIOD1 output Initial output is high Active level is low TRDIOC0 output IMFA bit in TRDSR0 register Set to 0 by a program IMFB bit in TRDSR0 register Set to 0 by a program IMFA bit in TRDSR1 register IMFB bit in TRDSR1 register Set to 0 by a program Transfer from the buffer register to the general register during buffer operation Set to 0 by a program Transfer from the buffer register to the general register during buffer operation Remark i = 0 or 1 m: Value set in TRDGRA0 register n: Value set in TRDGRB0 register p: Value set in TRDGRA1 register q: Value set in TRDGRB1 register The above diagram applies under the following condition : Bits OLS1 and OLS0 in the TRDFCR register are set to 0 (initial output level is high, active level is low). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 639 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.3.6 Complementary PWM Mode In this mode, three normal-phases and three counter-phases of the PWM waveform are output with the same period (three-phase, triangular wave modulation, and with dead time). Figure 8-57 shows the Block Diagram of Complementary PWM Mode, Table 8-18 lists the Complementary PWM Mode Specifications, and Figure 8-58 shows the Output Model of Complementary PWM Mode, and Figure 8-59 shows an Operation Example in Complementary PWM Mode. Figure 8-57. Block Diagram of Complementary PWM Mode Waveform control Buffer TRDGRA0 register Period TRDGRD0 register TRDGRB0 register PWM1 TRDGRC1 register TRDGRA1 register PWM2 TRDIOC0 Normal-phase TRDGRD1 register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 TRDGRB1 register PWM3 Counter-phase TRDIOB0 TRDIOD0 Normal-phase TRDIOA1 Counter-phase TRDIOC1 Normal-phase TRDIOB1 Counter-phase TRDIOD1 640 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Table 8-18. Complementary PWM Mode Specifications Item Count sources Note 1 Specification fCLK, fPLL, fIH, fSUB, fIL External signal input to the TRDCLK0 pin (active edge selected by a program) Set bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCR1 register to the same value (same count source) as bits TCK2 to TCK0 in the TRDCR0 register. Count operations Increment or decrement. Registers TRD0 and TRD1 are decremented with the compare match with registers TRD0 and TRDGRA0 during increment operation. When the TRD1 register changes from 0000H to FFFFH during decrement operation, and registers TRD0 and TRD1 are incremented. PWM waveform PWM period: 1/fk x (m + 2 - p) x 2 Note 2 Dead time: p Active level width of normal-phase: 1/fk x (m - n - p + 1) x 2 Active level width of counter-phase: 1/fk x (n + 1 - p) x 2 fk: Frequency of count source m: Value set in the TRDGRA0 register n: Value set in the TRDGRB0 register (PWM1 output) Value set in the TRDGRA1 register (PWM2 output) Value set in the TRDGRB1 register (PWM3 output) p: Value set in the TRD0 register m+2-p n+1 Normal-phase Counter-phase n+1-p p m-p-n+1 (When low is selected as the active level ) Count start condition 1 (count starts) is written to bits TSTART0 and TSTART1 in the TRDSTR register. Count stop condition 0 (count stops) is written to bits TSTART0 and TSTART1 in the TRDSTR register when the CSEL0 bit in the TRDSTR register is set to 1. (The PWM output pin outputs the initial output level selected by bits OLS0 and OLS1 in the TRDFCR register.) Interrupt request generation timing * Compare match (content of the TRDi register matches content of the TRDGRji register) * TRD1 register underflow TRDIOA0 pin function I/O port or TRDCLK (external clock) input TRDIOB0 pin function PWM1 output normal-phase output TRDIOD0 pin function PWM1 output counter-phase output TRDIOA1 pin function PWM2 output normal-phase output TRDIOC1 pin function PWM2 output counter-phase output TRDIOB1 pin function PWM3 output normal-phase output TRDIOD1 pin function PWM3 output counter-phase output TRDIOC0 pin function Output inverted every 1/2 period of PWM INTP0 pin function Pulse output forced cutoff signal input (port or INTP0 interrupt input) Read from timer The count value can be read by reading the TRDi register. Write to timer The value can be written to the TRDi register. Selectable functions * Pulse output forced cutoff signal input (see 8. 3. 1 (4) Pulse Output Forced Cutoff) * The normal-phase and counter-phase active level and initial output level are selected individually. * Transfer timing from the buffer register selection Notes 1. 2. When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). After a count starts, the PWM period is fixed. Remark i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 641 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (1) Operation Example Figure 8-58. Output Model of Complementary PWM Mode Value in TRDi register Value in TRD0 register Value in TRDGRA0 register Value in TRD1 register Value in TRDGRB0 register Value in TRDGRA1 register Value in TRDGRB1 register Time 0000H TRDIOB0 output TRDIOD0 output TRDIOA1 output TRDIOC1 output TRDIOB1 output TRDIOD1 output TRDIOC0 output Remark i = 0 or 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 642 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-59. Operation Example in Complementary PWM Mode Count source Value in TRDi register m+1 m Value in TRD0 register n Value in TRD1 register p 0000H Set to FFFFH Time Bits TSTART0 and TSTART1 in TRDSTR register TRDIOB0 output Initial output is high Active level is low TRDIOD0 output TRDIOC0 output Initial output is high m+2-p m-p-n+1 n+1 n+1-p p p (m-p-n+1) x 2 Width of normalphase active level Dead time n+1-p (n + 1 - p) x 2 Width of counter-phase active level UDF bit in TRDSR1 register Set to 0 by a program IMFA bit in TRDSR0 register TRDGRB0 register n n Transfer (when bits CMD1 and CMD0 are set to 11B) TRDGRD0 register Transfer (when bits CMD1 and CMD0 are set to 10B) Following data n Modify with a program IMFB bit in TRDSR0 register Set to 0 by a program Set to 0 by a program Remark CMD0, CMD1: Bits in TRDFCR register i = 0 or 1 m: Value set in TRDGRA0 register n: Value set in TRDGRB0 register p: Value set in TRD0 register The above diagram applies under the following condition : Bits OLS1 and OLS0 in TRDFCR are set to 0 (initial output level is high, active level is low for normal-phase and counter-phase). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 643 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (2) Transfer Timing from Buffer Register Transfer from the TRDGRD0, TRDGRC1, or TRDGRD1 register to the TRDGRB0, TRDGRA1, or TRDGRB1 register. When bits CMD1 and CMD0 in the TRDFCR register are set to 10B, the content is transferred when the TRD1 register underflows. When bits CMD1 and CMD0 are set to 11B, the content is transferred at compare match between registers TRD0 and TRDGRA0. 8.3.7 PWM3 Mode In this mode, two PWM waveforms are output with the same period. Figure 8-60 shows the Block Diagram of PWM3 Mode, Table 8-19 lists the PWM3 Mode Specifications, and Figure 8-61 shows an Operation Example in PWM3 Mode. Figure 8-60. Block Diagram of PWM3 Mode Compare match signal TRD0 TRDIOA0 Output control Buffer Comparator TRDGRA0 TRDGRC0 Comparator TRDGRA1 TRDGRC1 Comparator TRDGRB0 TRDGRD0 Comparator TRDGRB1 TRDGRD1 Compare match signal Compare match signal TRDIOB0 Output control R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Compare match signal 644 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Table 8-19. PWM3 Mode Specifications Item Count sources Note Specification fCLK, fPLL, fIH, fSUB, fIL Count operations The TRD0 register is incremented (the TRD1 register is not used). PWM waveform PWM period: 1/fk x (m + 1) Active level width of TRDIOA0 output: 1/fk x (m - n) Active level width of TRDIOB0 output: 1/fk x (p - q) fk: Frequency of count source m: Value set in the TRDGRA0 register n: Value set in the TRDGRA1 register p: Value set in the TRDGRB0 register q: Value set in the TRDGRB1 register m+1 n+1 p+1 q+1 TRDIOA0 output m-n TRDIOB0 output p-q (When high is selected as the active level ) Count start condition 1 (count starts) is written to the TSTART0 bit in the TRDSTR register. Count stop conditions * 0 (count stops) is written to the TSTART0 bit in the TRDSTR register when the CSEL0 bit in the TRDSTR register is set to 1. The PWM output pin holds the output level before the count stops. * When the CSEL0 bit in the TRDSTR register is set to 0, the count stops at compare match with the TRDGRA0 register. The PWM output pin holds the level after output change by compare match. Interrupt request generation timing * Compare match (content of the TRDi register matches content of the TRDGRji register) * TRD0 register overflow TRDIOA0, TRDIOB0 pin function PWM output TRDIOA0, TRDIOD0, and I/O port TRDIOA1 to TRDIOD1 pin function INTP0 pin function Pulse output forced cutoff signal input (port or INTP0 interrupt input) Read from timer The count value can be read by reading the TRD0 register. Write to timer The value can be written to the TRD0 register. Selectable functions * Pulse output forced cutoff signal input (see 8. 3. 1 (4) Pulse Output Forced Cutoff) * Active level selectable for each pin. * Buffer operation (see 8. 3. 1 (2) Buffer Operation) Note When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). Remark i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 645 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD (1) Operation Example Figure 8-61. Operation Example in PWM3 Mode Count source Value in TRD0 register FFFFH m n p q Time 0000H TSTART0 bit in TRDSTR register Count stops Set to 0 by a program CSEL0 bit in TRDSTR register m+1 n+1 m-n p+1 q+1 High output by compare match with TRDGRA1 register TRDIOA0 output TRDIOB0 output p-q Low output by compare match with TRDGRA0 register Initial output is low Initial output is low Set to 0 by a program Set to 0 by a program IMFB bit in TRDSR0 register Set to 0 by a program 0TRDGRA0 register Set to 0 by a program m m Transfer TRDGRC0 register Remark j = A or B m: Value set in TRDGRA0 register n: Value set in TRDGRA1 register p: Value set in TRDGRB0 register q: Value set in TRDGRB1 register m Transfer Following data Transfer from buffer register to general register Transfer from buffer register to general register The above diagram applies under the following conditions : The above diagram applies under the following conditions : * Both the TOA0 and TOB0 bits in the TRDOCR register are set to 0 (initial output is low, high output by compare match with TRDGRj1 register, low output by compare match with TRDGRj0 register). * The TRDBFC0 bit in the TRDMR register is set to 1 (TRDGRC0 register is buffer register for TRDGRA0 register). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 646 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.4 Timer RD Interrupt Timer RD generates the timer RDi (i = 0 or 1) interrupt request from six sources for each timer RD0 and timer RD1. Table 8-20 lists the Registers Associated with Timer RD Interrupt and Figure 8-62 shows the Timer RD Interrupt Block Diagram. Table 8-20. Registers Associated with Timer RD Interrupt Timer RD Timer RD Interrupt Request Flag Interrupt Mask Flag Priority Specification Flag Status Interrupt Enable (Register) (Register) (Register) Register Register Timer RD0 TRDSR0 TRDIER0 TRDIF0 (IF0H) TRDMK0 (MK0H) TRDPR00 (PR00H) Timer RD1 TRDSR1 TRDIER1 TRDIF1 (IF0H) TRDMK1 (MK0H) TRDPR01 (PR00H) TRDPR10 (PR10H) TRDPR11 (PR10H) Figure 8-62. Timer RD Interrupt Block Diagram Timer RDi IMFA bit IMIEA bit Timer RDi interrupt request IMFB bit IMIEB bit IMFC bit IMIEC bit IMFD bit IMIED bit UDF bit OVF bit OVIE bit i = 0 to 1 IMFA, IMFB, IMFC, IMFD, OVF, UDF : IMIEA, IMIEB, IMIEC, IMIED, OVIE : TRDSRi register bit TRDIERi register bit Since the interrupt source (timer RD interrupt) is generated by a combination of multiple interrupt request sources for timer RD, the following differences from other maskable interrupts apply: When a bit in the TRDSRi register is 1 and the corresponding bit in the TRDIERi register is 1 (interrupt enabled), the TRDIFi bit in the IF0H register is set to 1 (interrupt requested). If multiple bits in the TRDIERi register are set to 1, use the TRDSRi register to determine the source of the interrupt request. Since the bits in the TRDSRi register are not automatically set to 0 even if the interrupt is acknowledged, set the corresponding bit to 0 in the interrupt routine. Use either (a) or (b) described below to clear each bit of the TRDSRi register. (a) Set the TRDIERi register to 00H (disabling all interrupts) and then write 0 to all of the status flags. (b) When at least one bit in the TRDIERi register has the setting 1 and the status flag of an interrupt source enabled by the corresponding bit is 1, write 0 to all of the status flag bits whose settings are 1 in the TRDSRi register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 647 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD While multiple bits in the TRDIERi register are set to 1, if the first request source is met and the TRDIFi bit is set to 1, and then the next request source is met, the TRDIFi bit is cleared to 0 when the interrupt is acknowledged. However, if the previously met request source is cleared, the TRDIFi bit is set to 1 by the next generated request source. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 648 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.5 Notes on Timer RD 8.5.1 SFR Read/Write Access The timer RD SFRs are undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. When setting timer RD, set the TRD0EN bit in the PER1 register to 1 first. If the TRD0EN bit is 0, writes to the timer RD control registers are ignored and all the read values are the initial values (except for the port registers and the port mode registers). The following registers must not be rewritten during count operation: TRDELC, TRDMR, TRDPMR, TRDFCR, TRDOER1, TRDPTO bit in TRDOER2, TRDDFi, TRDCRi, TRDIORAi, TRDIORCi, TRDPOCRi (1) TRDSTR Register Set the TRDSTR register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When the CSELi bit (i = 0 or 1) in the TRDSTR register is set to 0 (count stops at compare match between registers TRDi and TRDGRAi), the count does not stop and the TSTARTi bit remains unchanged even if 0 (count stops) is written to the TSTARTi bit. The TSTARTi bit is set to 0 (count stops) only by a compare match with the TRDGRAi register. If the CSELi bit is 0 when rewriting the TRDSTR register, write 0 to the TSTARTi bit to change the CSELi bit to 1 without affecting count operation. If 1 is written to the TSTARTi bit while the counter is stopped, count may be started. To stop counting by a program, set the TSTARTi bit after setting the CSELi bit to 1. Even if 1 is written to the CSELi bit and 0 is written to the TSTARTi bit at the same time (using one instruction), the count cannot be stopped. Table 8-21 lists the TRDIOji (j = A, B, C, or D) Pin Output Level When Count Stops while using the TRDIOji (j = A, B, C, or D) pin for timer RD output. Table 8-21. TRDIOji (j = A, B, C, or D) Pin Output Level When Count Stops Count Stop TRDIOji Pin Output When Count Stops When the CSELi bit is set to 1, write 0 to the The pin holds the output level immediately before the count stops. TSTARTi bit and the count stops. (The pin outputs the initial output level selected by bits OLS0 and OLS1 in the TRDFCR register in timer RD complementary and reset synchronous PWM modes.) When the CSELi bit is set to 0, the count stops at The pin holds the output level after the output changes by compare compare match with registers TRDi and TRDGRAi. match. (The pin outputs the initial output level selected by bits OLS0 and OLS1 in the TRDFCR register in timer RD complementary and reset synchronous PWM modes.) Remark i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D (2) TRDDFi Register (i = 0 or 1) Set bits DFCK0 and DFCK1 in the TRDDFi register before starting count operation. 8.5.2 Mode Switching Set the count to stopped (set bits TSTART0 and TSTART1 to 0) before switching modes during operation. Set bits TRDIF0 and TRDIF1 to 0 before changing bits TSTART0 and TSTART1 from 0 to 1. Refer to CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS for details. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 649 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.5.3 Count Source Switch the count source after the count stops. [Changing procedure] (1) Set the TSTARTi bit (i = 0 or 1) in the TRDSTR register to 0 (count stops). (2) Change bits TCK0 to TCK2 in the TRDCRi register. When selecting the count source for the timer RD, set the same clock source as the count source for fCLK before setting bit 4 (TRD0EN) in the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). 8.5.4 Input Capture Function Set the pulse width of the input capture signal to three or more cycles of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). The value of the TRDi register is transferred to the TRDGRji register two to three cycles of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD) after the input capture signal is applied to the TRDIOji pin (i = 0 or 1, j = A, B, C, or D) (when no digital filter is used). In input capture mode, an input capture interrupt request for the active edge of the TRDIOji input is also generated when the TRDTSTARTi bit in the TRDSTR register is 0 (count stops) if the edge selected by bits TRDIOj0 and TRDIOj1 in the TRDIORji register is input to the TRDIOji pin (i = 0 or 1; j = A, B, C, or D). Set the pulse width of the input capture signal to three or more cycles of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). 8.5.5 Procedure for Setting Pins TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi (i = 0 or 1) After a reset, the I/O ports multiplexed with pins TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi function as input ports. To output from pins TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi, use the following setting procedure: Changing procedure (1) Set the mode and the initial value. (2) Enable output from pins TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi (TRDOER1 register). (3) Set the port register bits corresponding to pins TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi to 0. (4) Set the port mode register bits corresponding to pins TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi to output mode. (Output is started from pins TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi) (5) Start the count (set bits TSTART0 and TSTART1 to 1). To change the port mode register bits corresponding to pins TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi from output mode to input mode, use the following setting procedure: (1) Set the port mode register bits corresponding to pins TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi to input mode (input is started from pins TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi). (2) Set to the input capture function. (3) Start the count (set bits TSTART0 and TSTART1 to 1). When switching pins TRDIOAi, TRDIOBi, TRDIOCi, and TRDIODi from output mode to input mode, input capture operation may be performed depending on the pin states. When the digital filter is not used, edge detection is performed after two or more cycles of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD) have elapsed. When the digital filter is used, edge detection is performed after five or more cycles of the sampling clock have elapsed. 8.5.6 External clock TRDCLK0 Set the pulse width of the external clock applied to the TRDCLK0 pin to three or more cycles of the timer RD operating clock (fTRD). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 650 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD 8.5.7 Reset Synchronous PWM Mode When reset synchronous PWM mode is used for motor control, make sure OLS0 = OLS1. Set to reset synchronous PWM mode by the following procedure: [Changing procedure] (1) Set the TSTART0 bit in the TRDSTR register to 0 (count stops). (2) Set bits CMD1 and CMD0 in the TRDFCR register to 00B (timer mode, PWM mode, and PWM3 mode). (3) Set bits CMD1 and CMD0 to 01B (reset synchronous PWM mode). (4) Set the other registers associated with timer RD again. 8.5.8 Complementary PWM Mode When complementary PWM mode is used for motor control, make sure OLS0 = OLS1. Change bits CMD0 and CMD1 in the TRDFCR register in the following procedure. Changing procedure: When setting to complementary PWM mode (including re-set), or changing the transfer timing from the buffer register to the general register in complementary PWM mode. (1) Set both the TSTART0 and TSTART1 bits in the TRDSTR register to 0 (count stops). (2) Set bits CMD1 and CMD0 in the TRDFCR register to 00B (timer mode, PWM mode, and PWM3 mode). (3) Set bits CMD1 and CMD0 to 10B or 11B (complementary PWM mode). (4) Set the registers associated with other timer RD again. Changing procedure: When stopping complementary PWM mode (1) Set both the TSTART0 and TSTART1 bits in the TRDSTR register to 0 (count stops). (2) Set bits CMD1 to CMD0 to 00B (timer mode, PWM mode, and PWM3 mode). Do not write to the TRDGRA0, TRDGRB0, TRDGRA1, or TRDGRB1 register during operation. When changing the PWM waveform, transfer the values written to registers TRDGRD0, TRDGRC1, and TRDGRD1 to registers TRDGRB0, TRDGRA1, and TRDGRB1 using the buffer operation. However, to write data to the TRDGRD0, TRDGRC1, or TRDGRD1 register, set bits TRDBFD0, TRDBFC1, and TRDBFD1 to 0 (general register). After this, bits TRDBFD0, TRDBFC1, and TRDBFD1 may be set to 1 (buffer register). The PWM period cannot be changed. If the value set in the TRDGRA0 register is assumed to be m, the TRD0 register counts m - 1, m, m + 1, m, m - 1, in that order, when changing from increment to decrement operation. When changing from m to m + 1, the IMFA bit in the TRDSRi register is set to 1. Also, bits CMD1 and CMD0 in the TRDFCR register are set to 11B (complementary PWM mode, buffer data transferred at compare match between registers TRD0 and TRDGRA0), the content of the buffer registers (TRDGRD0, TRDGRC1, and TRDGRD1) is transferred to the general registers (TRDGRB0, TRDGRA1, and TRDGRB1). During operation of m + 1, m, and m - 1, the IMFA bit remains unchanged and data is not transferred to registers such as the TRDGRA0 register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 651 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD Figure 8-63. Operation at Compare Match between Registers TRD0 and TRDGRA0 in Complementary PWM Mode Count value in TRD0 register m+1 Value set in TRDGRA0 register m Time Set to 0 by a program No change IMFA bit in TRDSR0 register Transferred from buffer register TRDGRB0 register TRDGRA1 register TRDGRB1 register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Not transferred from buffer register When bits CMD1 and CMD0 in the TRDFCR register are set to 11B (transfer from the buffer register to the general register at compare match between registers TRD0 and TRDGRA0). 652 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD The TRD1 register counts 1, 0, FFFFH, 0, 1, in that order, when changing from decrement to increment operation. Counting from 1, to 0, to FFFFH causes the UDF bit in the TRDSRi register to be set to 1. Also, when bits CMD1 and CMD0 in the TRDFCR register are set to 10B (complementary PWM mode, buffer data transferred at underflow of the TRD1 register), the content of the buffer registers (TRDGRD0, TRDGRC1, and TRDGRD1) is transferred to the general registers (TRDGRB0, TRDGRA1, and TRDGRB1). During operation of FFFFH, 0, and 1, data is not transferred to registers such as the TRDGRB0 register. Also, at this time, the OVF bit in the TRDSRi register remains unchanged. Figure 8-64. Operation When TRD1 Register Underflows in Complementary PWM Mode Count value in TRD1 register 1 0 FFFFH Time Set to 0 by a program UDF bit in TRDSR1 register OVF bit in TRDSR1 register No change 0 TRDGRB0 register TRDGRA1register TRDGRB1register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Transferred from buffer register Not transferred from buffer register When bits CMD1 and CMD0 in the TRDFCR register are set to 10B (transfer from the buffer register to the general register when the TRD1 register underflows). 653 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD The timing of data transfer from the buffer register to the general register should be selected using bits CMD0 and CMD1 in the TRDFCR register. However, regardless of the values of bits CMD0 and CMD1, transfer takes place with the following timing when duty cycle is 0% and duty cycle is 100%. Value in buffer register value in TRDGRA0 register (duty cycle is 0%): Transfer take place at underflow of the TRD1 register. After this, when the buffer register is set to 0001H or above and a smaller value than the value of the TRDGRA0 register, and the TRD1 register underflows for the first time after setting, the value is transferred to the general register. After that, the value is transferred with the timing selected by bits CMD1 and CMD0. A direct change of the duty from 0% to 100% is not possible. However, no waveform with duty cycle 0% can be generated while the initial value of the buffer register is FFFFH. To generate a waveform with duty cycle 0%, set the value of the buffer register TRDGRA0 by writing to the buffer register. Figure 8-65. Operation When Value in Buffer Register Value in TRDGRA0 Register in Complementary PWM Mode Value in TRDi register n3 m+1 Count value in TRD0 n2 n1 Count value in TRD1 Time 0000H n2 TRDGRD0 register n3 Transfer TRDGRB0 register n1 Transfer with timing set by bits CMD1 and CMD0 n1 n2 Transfer n2 Transfer at underflow of TRD1 register because of n3 > m Transfer n3 Transfer n2 Transfer at underflow of TRD1 register because of first setting to n2 < m n1 Transfer with timing set by bits CMD1 and CMD0 TRDIOB0 output TRDIOD0 output Remark m: Value set in TRDGRA0 register The above diagram applies under the following conditions : * Bits CMD1 and CMD0 in the TRDFCR register are set to 11B (data in the buffer register is transferred at compare match between registers TRD 0 and TRDGRA0 in complementary PWM mode). * Both the OSL0 and OLS1 bits in the TRDFCR register are set to 1 (active high for normal-phase and counter-phase). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 654 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD When the value in the buffer register is set to 0000H (duty cycle is 100%): Transfer takes place at compare match between registers TRD0 and TRDGRA0. After this, when the buffer register is set to 0001H or above and a smaller value than the value of the TRDGRA0 register, and a compare match occurs between registers TRD0 and TRDGRA0 for the first time after setting, the value is transferred to the general register. After that, the value is transferred with the timing selected by bits CMD0 and CMD1. A direct change of the duty from 100% to 0% is not possible. Figure 8-66. Operation When Value in Buffer Register is Set to 0000H in Complementary PWM Mode Value in TRDi register m+1 n2 Count value in TRD0 n1 Count value in TRD1 Time 0000H 0000H n1 TRDGRD0 register Transfer TRDGRB0 register n2 n1 Transfer n1 Transfer with timing set by bits CMD1 and CMD0 Transfer 0000H Transfer at compare match between registers TRD0 and TRDGRA0 because content in TRDGRD0 register is set to 0000H Transfer n1 Transfer at compare match between registers TRD0 and TRDGRA0 because of first setting to 0001H n1 < m Transfer with timing set by bits CMD1 and CMD0 TRDIOB0 output TRDIOD0 output Remark m: Value set in TRDGRA0 register The above diagram applies under the following conditions : * Bits CMD1 and CMD0 in the TRDFCR register are set to 10B (data in the buffer register is transferred at underflow of the TRD1 register in PWM mode). * Both the OLS0 and OLS1 bits in the TRDFCR register are set to 1 (active high for normal-phase and counter-phase). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 655 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.1 Functions of Real-time Clock The real-time clock has the following features. Having counters of year, month, week, day, hour, minute, and second, and can count up to 99 years. Constant-period interrupt function (period: 0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1 minute, 1 hour, 1 day, 1 month) Alarm interrupt function (alarm: week, hour, minute) Pin output function of 1 Hz Watch error correction register Caution The count of year, month, week, day, hour, minutes and second can only be performed when a subsystem clock (fSUB = 32.768 kHz), high-speed on-chip oscillator (fIH = 4 MHz or 8 MHz), or high-speed system clock (fMX = 4 MHz, 8 MHz, 4.19 MHz, 8.38 MHz) is selected as the operation clock of the realtime clock. When selecting the high-speed on-chip oscillator or high-speed system clock, use the RTC clock select register (RTCCL) to select the clock and the frequency divisor. 9.2 Configuration of Real-time Clock The real-time clock includes the following hardware. Table 9-1. Configuration of Real-time Clock Item Configuration Counter Internal counter (16 bits) Control registers Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) Operation speed mode control register (OSMC) Timer input select register 1 (TIS1) Timer input select register 2 (TIS2) RTC clock select register (RTCCL) Real-time clock control register 0 (RTCC0) Real-time clock control register 1 (RTCC1) Second count register (SEC) Minute count register (MIN) Hour count register (HOUR) Day count register (DAY) Week count register (WEEK) Month count register (MONTH) Year count register (YEAR) Watch error correction register (SUBCUD) 16-bit watch error correction register (SUBCUDW) Alarm minute register (ALARMWM) Alarm hour register (ALARMWH) Alarm week register (ALARMWW) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 656 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK Figure 9-1. Block Diagram of Real-time Clock Real-time clock control register 1 WALE WALIE WAFG RIFG RTC clock select register (RTCCL) Real-time clock control register 0 RTCE RCLOE1 AMPM RWST RWAIT Alarm week register (ALARMWW) (7-bit) Alarm hour register (ALARMWH) (6-bit) CT2 CT1 RTCCL_7 RTCCL_6 RTCCKS1 RTCCKS0 CT0 Timer input select register 2 (TIS2) TIS23 TIS22 Timer input select register 1 (TIS1) TIS17 TIS16 Output controller Alarm minute register (ALARMWM) (7-bit) TIS14 RTC1HZ Timer array units 0 and 1 INTRTC CT0 to CT2 Selector RIFG AMPM Week count register (WEEK) (3-bit) Day count register (DAY) (6-bit) 1 hour Hour count register (HOUR) (6-bit) 1 minute Minute count register (MIN) (7-bit) RWST RWAIT 0.5 seconds 1 seconds Second Internal count counter register Wait control (SEC) (16 bits) (7-bit) Count enable/ disable circuit Buffer Buffer Buffer Buffer Buffer Buffer Buffer RTCE Watch error correction register (SUBCUD) (8-bit) fRTC fSUB 16-bit watch error correction register (SUBCUDW) (16-bit) RTCCKS1 Selector Month count register (MONTH) (5-bit) Division control Year count register (YEAR) (8-bit) 1 day 1 month Selector 1 year RTCCL_6, RTCCKS0 RTCCL_7 fMX fIH Internal bus R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 657 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3 Registers Controlling Real-time Clock The real-time clock is controlled by the following registers. * Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) * Operation speed mode control register (OSMC) * Timer input select register 1 (TIS1) * Timer input select register 2 (TIS2) * RTC clock select register (RTCCL) * Real-time clock control register 0 (RTCC0) * Real-time clock control register 1 (RTCC1) * Second count register (SEC) * Minute count register (MIN) * Hour count register (HOUR) * Day count register (DAY) * Week count register (WEEK) * Month count register (MONTH) * Year count register (YEAR) * Watch error correction register (SUBCUD) * 16-bit watch error correction register (SUBCUDW) * Alarm minute register (ALARMWM) * Alarm hour register (ALARMWH) * Alarm week register (ALARMWW) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 658 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) This register is used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to a hardware macro that is not used is stopped in order to reduce the power consumption and noise. When the real-time clock is used, be sure to set the operation clock of the real-time clock by the RTCCL register before setting bit 7 (RTCEN) of this register to 1. Set the PER0 register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Writing to the PER0 register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Figure 9-2. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 0 (PER0) Address: F00F0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> 6 <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PER0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN IICA0EN SAU1EN SAU0EN TAU1EN TAU0EN Notes 1, 2 Note 1 RTCEN Note 1 Control of input clock supply to real-time clock (RTC) Stops input clock supply. 0 SFR used by the real-time clock (RTC) cannot be written. The real-time clock (RTC) is in the reset status. Enables input clock supply. 1 SFR used by the real-time clock (RTC) can be read/written. Notes 1. Not provided in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory. 2. Not provided in 30-pin products of the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and 30-pin products of the RL78/F14. Cautions 1. When using the real-time clock, first set the RTCEN bit to 1, while oscillation of the input clock (fRTC) is stable. If RTCEN = 0, writing to a control register of the real-time clock is ignored, and, even if the register is read, only the default value is read (except for the operation speed mode control register (OSMC), timer input select registers 1 and 2 (TIS1 and TIS2), and RTC clock select register (RTCCL). 2. Clock supply to peripheral functions other than the real-time clock can be stopped in HALT mode when the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is used, by setting the RTCLPC bit of the operation speed mode control register (OSMC) to 1. In this case, set the RTCEN bit of the PER0 register to 1 and the other bits (bits 0 to 6) to 0. 3. Be sure to set the operating clock of the real-time clock by RTCCL register before setting bit 7 (RTCEN) of this register to 1. 4. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. Bits 1, 3, 4, and 6 in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Bits 4 and 6 in 30-pin products of the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and in 30-pin products of the RL78/F14 Bit 6 in the products other than above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 659 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.2 Operation speed mode control register (OSMC) The RTCLPC bit can be used to reduce power consumption by stopping clock functions that are unnecessary. For details about setting the RTCLPC bit, see CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR. Set the OSMC register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 9-3. Format of Operation Speed Mode Control Register (OSMC) Address: F00F3H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OSMC RTCLPC 0 0 WUTMMCK0 0 0 0 0 RTCLPC Setting in STOP mode or HALT mode while subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is selected as CPU clock 0 Enables supply of subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock to peripheral functions (See Table 23-1 for peripheral functions whose operations are enabled.) 1 Stops supply of subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock to peripheral functions other than real-time clock. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 660 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.3 Timer input select register 1 (TIS1) The TIS1 register selects an input source of the timer array unit 0. The TIS17, TIS16, and TIS14 bits in the TIS1 register are used in conjunction with the real time clock to implement the watch error correction in channels 7 and 6. When the TIS17 and TIS16 bits are set to 0 and 1 respectively, the RTC1HZ output signal is selected for the timer input of channel 7. When the TIS14 bit is set to 1, the RTC1HZ output signal is selected for the timer input of channel 6. Set the TIS1 register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 9-4. Format of Timer Input Select Register 1 (TIS1) Address: F0075H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TIS1 TIS17 TIS16 0 TIS14 0 TIS12 0 TIS0 TIS17 TIS16 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI07) 0 1 RTC1HZ output signal 1 0 RxD0 pin (detection of the wake-up signal and measurement of the low-level width of Selection of timer input used with channel 7 of timer array unit 0 the sync break field and the pulse width of the sync field) 1 1 TIS14 Setting prohibited Selection of timer input used with channel 6 of timer array unit 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI06) 1 RTC1HZ output signal TIS12 Selection of timer input used with channel 5 of timer array unit 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI05) 1 Input signal of timer input pin (TI03) TIS10 Selection of timer input used with channel 4 of timer array unit 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI04) 1 Input signal of timer input pin (TI03) Cautions 1. Do not change the select bit of the timer input while inputting data to the TImn pin (m = 0, 1; n = 0 to 7). 2. When selecting the RTC1HZ output signal for the clock source of the timer input used in channels 7 and 6 in the TAU, set the TIS17, TIS16, and TIS14 bits to 0, 1, and 1 respectively and select the RTC1HZ output signal for the timer input of channels 7 and 6. Remark Set the TIS17 and TIS16 bits to 1 and 0 respectively and select the input signal of the RxD0 pin before using the LIN-bus communication. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 661 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.4 Timer input select register 2 (TIS2) The TIS2 register selects an input source of the timer array unit 1. The TIS23 and TIS22 bits in the TIS2 register are used in conjunction with the real time clock to implement the watch error correction in channels 7 and 6. When the TIS23 bit is set to 1, the RTC1HZ output signal is selected for the timer input of channel 7. When the TIS22 bit is set to 1, the RTC1HZ output signal is selected for the timer input of channel 6. Set the TIS2 register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. This function is valid only for the Group E products. Figure 9-5. Format of Timer Input Select Register 2 (TIS2) Address: F007AH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TIS2 0 0 0 0 TIS23 TIS22 0 0 TIS22 Selection of timer input used with channel 6 of timer array unit 1 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI16) 1 RTC1HZ output signal TIS23 Selection of timer input used with channel 7 of timer array unit 1 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI17) 1 RTC1HZ output signal Cautions 1. Do not change the select bit of the timer input while inputting data to the TImn pin (m = 0, 1; n = 0 to 7). 2. When selecting the RTC1HZ output signal for the clock source of the timer input used in channels 7 and 6 in the TAU, set the TIS23 and TIS22 bits to 1 and select the RTC1HZ output signal for the timer input of channels 7 and 6. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 662 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.5 RTC clock select register (RTCCL) The RTCCL register is used to select the operation clock of the real-time clock. Set the RTCCL register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 9-6. Format of RTC clock select register (RTCCL) Address: F02C8H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RTCCL RTCCL_7 RTCCL_6 - - - - RTCCKS1 RTCCKS0 RTCCL_7 Control over operation of the low-speed on-chip oscillator 0 High-speed system clock (fMX) 1 High-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH) RTCCKS1 RTCCKS0 RTCCL_6 Control of RTC operating clock selection 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 fMX or fIH / 128 Note 2 1 0 1 fMX or fIH / 122 Note 2 1 1 0 fMX or fIH / 256 Note 2 1 1 1 fMX or fIH / 244 Note 2 Note 3 Subsystem clock (fSUB) Note 1 Notes 1. When the SELLOSC bit in the CKSEL register is 1, the subsystem clock (fSUB) cannot be supplied to the input clock (fRTC) of the real time clock. 2. Switch after selecting RTCCL_7. 3. When setting the RTCCKS1 bit to 1, first set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 0 to select the main system/PLL select clock (fMP) as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK). Cautions 1. 20, 30, or 32-pin products do not have a subsystem clock (fSUB), so it should not be selected. 2. Set bits 2 to 5 to 0. Remark : don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 663 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.6 Real-time clock control register 0 (RTCC0) The RTCC0 register is an 8-bit register that is used to start or stop the real-time clock operation, control the RTC1HZ pin, and set a 12- or 24-hour system and the constant-period interrupt function. Set the RTCC0 register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 9-7. Format of Real-time Clock Control Register 0 (RTCC0) Address: FFF9DH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> 6 <5> 4 3 2 1 0 RTCC0 RTCE 0 RCLOE1 0 AMPM CT2 CT1 CT0 RTCE Real-time clock operation control 0 Stops counter operation. 1 Starts counter operation. RCLOE1 RTC1HZ pin output control 0 Disables output of the RTC1HZ pin (1 Hz). 1 Enables output of the RTC1HZ pin (1 Hz). AMPM Selection of 12-/24-hour system 0 12-hour system (a.m. and p.m. are displayed.) 1 24-hour system Rewrite the AMPM bit value after setting the RWAIT bit (bit 0 of real-time clock control register 1 (RTCC1)) to 1. If the AMPM bit value is changed, the values of the hour count register (HOUR) change according to the specified time system. Table 9-2 shows the displayed time digits that are displayed. CT2 CT1 CT0 Constant-period interrupt (INTRTC) selection 0 0 0 Does not use fixed-cycle interrupt function. 0 0 1 Once per 0.5 s (synchronized with second count up) 0 1 0 Once per 1 s (same time as second count up) 0 1 1 Once per 1 m (second 00 of every minute) 1 0 0 Once per 1 hour (minute 00 and second 00 of every hour) 1 0 1 Once per 1 day (hour 00, minute 00, and second 00 of every day) 1 1 Once per 1 month (Day 1, hour 00 a.m., minute 00, and second 00 of every month) When changing the values of the CT2 to CT0 bits while the counter operates (RTCE = 1), rewrite the values of the CT2 to CT0 bits after disabling interrupt servicing INTRTC by using the interrupt mask flag register. Furthermore, after rewriting the values of the CT2 to CT0 bits, enable interrupt servicing after clearing the RIFG and RTCIF flags. Caution Do not change the value of the RTCLOE1 bit when RTCE = 1. Remark : don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 664 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.7 Real-time clock control register 1 (RTCC1) The RTCC1 register is an 8-bit register that is used to control the alarm interrupt function and the wait time of the counter. Set the RTCC1 register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 9-8. Format of Real-time Clock Control Register 1 (RTCC1) (1/2) Address: FFF9EH After reset: 00H R/W Note Symbol <7> <6> 5 <4> <3> 2 <1> <0> RTCC1 WALE WALIE 0 WAFG RIFG 0 RWST RWAIT WALE Alarm operation control 0 Match operation is invalid. 1 Match operation is valid. When setting a value to the WALE bit while the counter operates (RTCE = 1) and WALIE = 1, rewrite the WALE bit after disabling interrupt servicing INTRTC by using the interrupt mask flag register. Furthermore, clear the WAFG and RTCIF flags after rewriting the WALE bit. When setting each alarm register (WALIE flag of real-time clock control register 1 (RTCC1), the alarm minute register (ALARMWM), the alarm hour register (ALARMWH), and the alarm week register (ALARMWW)), set match operation to be invalid ("0") for the WALE bit. WALIE Control of alarm interrupt (INTRTC) function operation 0 Does not generate interrupt on matching of alarm. 1 Generates interrupt on matching of alarm. WAFG Alarm detection status flag 0 Alarm mismatch 1 Detection of matching of alarm This is a status flag that indicates detection of matching with the alarm. It is valid only when WALE = 1 and is set to "1", one operating clock (fRTC) after matching of the alarm is detected. This flag is cleared when "0" is written to it. Writing "1" to it is invalid. Note Bit 1 is read-only. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 665 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK Figure 9-8. Format of Real-time Clock Control Register 1 (RTCC1) (2/2) RIFG Constant-period interrupt status flag 0 Fixed-cycle interrupt is not generated. 1 Fixed-cycle interrupt is generated. This flag indicates the status of generation of the fixed-cycle interrupt. When the fixed-cycle interrupt is generated, it is set to "1". This flag is cleared when "0" is written to it. Writing "1" to it is invalid. RWST Wait status flag of real-time clock 0 Counter is operating. 1 Mode to read or write counter value This status flag indicates whether the setting of the RWAIT bit is valid. Before reading or writing the counter value, confirm that the value of this flag is 1. RWAIT Wait control of real-time clock 0 Sets counter operation. 1 Stops SEC to YEAR counters. Mode to read or write counter value This bit controls the operation of the counter. Be sure to write "1" to it to read or write the counter value. As the internal counter (16 bits) is continuing to run, complete reading or writing within one second and turn back to 0. When RWAIT = 1, it takes up to 1 operating clock (fRTC) until the counter value can be read or written (RWST = 1). Notes 1, 2 When the internal counter (16 bits) overflowed while RWAIT = 1, it keeps the event of overflow until RWAIT = 0, then counts up. However, when it wrote a value to second count register, it will not keep the overflow event. <R> Notes 1. When setting RWAIT=1 during 1 operating clock (fRTC) after setting RTCE=1, it may take <R> Notes 2. When setting RWAIT=1 during 1 operating clock (fRTC) after returning from a stand-by two clock time of the operation clock(fRTC) until RWST bit becomes "1". (HALT mode, STOP mode, SNOOZE mode), it may take two clock time of the operation clock(fRTC) until RWST bit becomes "1". Caution If writing is performed to the RTCC1 register with a 1-bit manipulation instruction, the RIFG flag and WAFG flag may be cleared. Therefore, to perform writing to the RTCC1 register, be sure to use an 8-bit manipulation instruction. To prevent the RIFG flag and WAFG flag from being cleared during writing, disable writing by setting 1 to the corresponding bit. If the RIFG flag and WAFG flag are not used and the value may be changed, the RTCC1 register may be written by using a 1-bit manipulation instruction. Remarks 1. Fixed-cycle interrupts and alarm match interrupts use the same interrupt source (INTRTC). When using these two types of interrupts at the same time, which interrupt occurred can be judged by checking the fixed-cycle interrupt status flag (RIFG) and the alarm detection status flag (WAFG) upon INTRTC occurrence. 2. If writing is performed to the second count register (SEC), the internal counter (16 bits) is cleared. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 666 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.8 Second count register (SEC) The SEC register is an 8-bit register that takes a value of 0 to 59 (decimal) and indicates the count value of seconds. It counts up when the internal counter (16 bits) overflows. When data is written to this register, it is written to a buffer and then to the counter up to 2 operating clocks (fRTC) later. Set a decimal value of 00 to 59 to this register in BCD code. Set the SEC register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 9-9. Format of Second Count Register (SEC) Address: FFF92H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SEC 0 SEC40 SEC20 SEC10 SEC8 SEC4 SEC2 SEC1 Caution When it reads or writes from/to the register while the counter is in operation (RTCE = 1), see 9.4.3 Reading/writing real-time clock and follow the described procedures. Remark If writing is performed to the second count register (SEC), the internal counter (16 bits) is cleared. 9.3.9 Minute count register (MIN) The MIN register is an 8-bit register that takes a value of 0 to 59 (decimal) and indicates the count value of minutes. It counts up when the second counter overflows. When data is written to this register, it is written to a buffer and then to the counter up to 2 operating clocks (fRTC) later. Even if the second count register overflows while this register is being written, this register ignores the overflow and is set to the value written. Set a decimal value of 00 to 59 to this register in BCD code. Set the MIN register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 9-10. Format of Minute Count Register (MIN) Address: FFF93H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MIN 0 MIN40 MIN20 MIN10 MIN8 MIN4 MIN2 MIN1 Caution When it reads or writes from/to the register while the counter is in operation (RTCE = 1), see 9.4.3 Reading/writing real-time clock and follow the described procedures. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 667 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.10 Hour count register (HOUR) The HOUR register is an 8-bit register that takes a value of 00 to 23 or 01 to 12 and 21 to 32 (decimal) and indicates the count value of hours. It counts up when the minute counter overflows. When data is written to this register, it is written to a buffer and then to the counter up to 2 operating clocks (fRTC) later. Even if the minute count register overflows while this register is being written, this register ignores the overflow and is set to the value written. Specify a decimal value of 00 to 23, 01 to 12, or 21 to 32 by using BCD code according to the time system specified using bit 3 (AMPM) of real-time clock control register 0 (RTCC0). If the AMPM bit value is changed, the values of the HOUR register change according to the specified time system. Set the HOUR register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 12H. However, the value of this register is 00H if the AMPM bit (bit 3 of the RTCC0 register) is set to 1 after reset. Figure 9-11. Format of Hour Count Register (HOUR) Address: FFF94H After reset: 12H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HOUR 0 0 HOUR20 HOUR10 HOUR8 HOUR4 HOUR2 HOUR1 Cautions 1. Bit 5 (HOUR20) of the HOUR register indicates AM(0)/PM(1) if AMPM = 0 (if the 12-hour system is selected). 2. When it reads or writes from/to the register while the counter is in operation (RTCE = 1), follow the procedures described in 9.4.3 Reading/writing real-time clock. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 668 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK Table 9-2 shows the relationship between the setting value of the AMPM bit, the hour count register (HOUR) value, and time. Table 9-2. Displayed Time Digits 24-Hour Display (AMPM = 1) 12-Hour Display (AMPM = 1) Time HOUR Register Time HOUR Register 0 00H 12 a.m. 12H 1 01H 1 a.m. 01H 2 02H 2 a.m. 02H 3 03H 3 a.m. 03H 4 04H 4 a.m. 04H 5 05H 5 a.m. 05H 6 06H 6 a.m. 06H 7 07H 7 a.m. 07H 8 08H 8 a.m. 08H 9 09H 9 a.m. 09H 10 10H 10 a.m. 10H 11 11H 11 a.m. 11H 12 12H 12 p.m. 32H 13 13H 1 p.m. 21H 14 14H 2 p.m. 22H 15 15H 3 p.m. 23H 16 16H 4 p.m. 24H 17 17H 5 p.m. 25H 18 18H 6 p.m. 26H 19 19H 7 p.m. 27H 20 20H 8 p.m. 28H 21 21H 9 p.m. 29H 22 22H 10 p.m. 30H 23 23H 11 p.m. 31H The HOUR register value is set to 12-hour display when the AMPM bit is "0" and to 24-hour display when the AMPM bit is "1". In 12-hour display, the fifth bit of the HOUR register displays 0 for AM and 1 for PM. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 669 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.11 Day count register (DAY) The DAY register is an 8-bit register that takes a value of 1 to 31 (decimal) and indicates the count value of days. It counts up when the hour counter overflows. This counter counts as follows. 01 to 31 (January, March, May, July, August, October, December) 01 to 30 (April, June, September, November) 01 to 29 (February, leap year) 01 to 28 (February, normal year) When data is written to this register, it is written to a buffer and then to the counter up to 2 operating clocks (fRTC) later. Even if the hour count register overflows while this register is being written, this register ignores the overflow and is set to the value written. Set a decimal value of 01 to 31 to this register in BCD code. Set the DAY register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 01H. Figure 9-12. Format of Day Count Register (DAY) Address: FFF96H After reset: 01H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DAY 0 0 DAY20 DAY10 DAY8 DAY4 DAY2 DAY1 Caution When it reads or writes from/to the register while the counter is in operation (RTCE = 1), see 9.4.3 Reading/writing real-time clock and follow the described procedures. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 670 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.12 Week count register (WEEK) The WEEK register is an 8-bit register that takes a value of 0 to 6 (decimal) and indicates the count value of weekdays. It counts up in synchronization with the day counter. When data is written to this register, it is written to a buffer and then to the counter up to 2 operating clocks (fRTC) later. Set a decimal value of 00 to 06 to this register in BCD code. Set the WEEK register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 9-13. Format of Week Count Register (WEEK) Address: FFF95H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WEEK 0 0 0 0 0 WEEK4 WEEK2 WEEK1 Cautions 1. The value corresponding to the month count register (MONTH) or the day count register (DAY) is not stored in the week count register (WEEK) automatically. After reset release, set the week count register as follow. Day WEEK Sunday 00H Monday 01H Tuesday 02H Wednesday 03H Thursday 04H Friday 05H Saturday 06H 2. When it reads or writes from/to the register while the counter is in operation (RTCE = 1), see 9.4.3 Reading/writing real-time clock and follow the described procedures. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 671 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.13 Month count register (MONTH) The MONTH register is an 8-bit register that takes a value of 1 to 12 (decimal) and indicates the count value of months. It counts up when the day counter overflows. When data is written to this register, it is written to a buffer and then to the counter up to 2 operating clocks (fRTC) later. Even if the day count register overflows while this register is being written, this register ignores the overflow and is set to the value written. Set a decimal value of 01 to 12 to this register in BCD code. Set the MONTH register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 01H. Figure 9-14. Format of Month Count Register (MONTH) Address: FFF97H After reset: 01H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MONTH 0 0 0 MONTH10 MONTH8 MONTH4 MONTH2 MONTH1 Caution When it reads or writes from/to the register while the counter is in operation (RTCE = 1), see 9.4.3 Reading/writing real-time clock and follow the described procedures. 9.3.14 Year count register (YEAR) The YEAR register is an 8-bit register that takes a value of 0 to 99 (decimal) and indicates the count value of years. It counts up when the month count register (MONTH) overflows. Values 00, 04, 08, ..., 92, and 96 indicate a leap year. When data is written to this register, it is written to a buffer and then to the counter up to 2 operating clocks (fRTC) later. Even if the MONTH register overflows while this register is being written, this register ignores the overflow and is set to the value written. Set a decimal value of 00 to 99 to this register in BCD code. Set the YEAR register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 9-15. Format of Year Count Register (YEAR) Address: FFF98H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 YEAR YEAR80 YEAR40 YEAR20 YEAR10 YEAR8 YEAR4 YEAR2 YEAR1 Caution When it reads or writes from/to the register while the counter is in operation (RTCE = 1), see 9.4.3 Reading/writing real-time clock and follow the described procedures. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 672 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.15 Watch error correction register (SUBCUD) This register is used to correct the watch with high accuracy when it is slow or fast by changing the value that overflows from the internal counter (16 bits) to the second count register (SEC) (reference value: 7FFFH). Set the SUBCUD register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 9-16. Format of Watch Error Correction Register (SUBCUD) Address: FFF99H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SUBCUD DEV F12 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0 DEV Setting of watch error correction timing 0 Corrects watch error when the second digits are at 00, 20, or 40 (every 20 seconds). 1 Corrects watch error only when the second digits are at 00 (every 60 seconds). Writing to the SUBCUD register at the following timing is prohibited. When DEV = 0 is set: For a period of SEC = 00H, 20H, 40H When DEV = 1 is set: For a period of SEC = 00H F12 Setting of watch error correction value 0 Increases by {(F5, F4, F3, F2, F1, F0) - 1} 2. 1 Decreases by {(/F5, /F4, /F3, /F2, /F1, /F0) + 1} 2. When (F12, F5, F4, F3, F2, F1, F0) = (*, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, *), the watch error is not corrected. Range of correction value: (when F12 = 0) 2, 4, 6, 8, ... , 120, 122, 124 (when F12 = 1) -2, -4, -6, -8, ... , -120, -122, -124 Cautions 1. / of /Fn (n = 0 to 5) means invert. 2. * means 0 or 1. The range of value that can be corrected by using the watch error correction register (SUBCUD) is shown below. DEV = 0 (correction every 20 seconds) DEV = 1 (correction every 60 seconds) Correctable range -189.2 ppm to 189.2 ppm -63.1 ppm to 63.1 ppm Maximum excludes 1.53 ppm 0.51 ppm 3.05 ppm 1.02 ppm quantization error Minimum resolution Remark If a correctable range is -63.1 ppm or lower and 63.1 ppm or higher, set 0 to DEV. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 673 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.16 16-bit watch error correction register (SUBCUDW) This register is used to correct the watch with high accuracy when it is slow or fast by changing the value that overflows from the internal counter (16 bits) to the second count register (SEC) (reference value: 7FFFH). Set the SUBCUDW register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Figure 9-17. Format of 16-Bit Watch Error Correction Register (SUBCUDW) Address: FFF54H After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 SUBCUDW DEV - - F12 F11 F10 F9 F8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0 DEV Setting of watch error correction timing 0 Corrects watch error when the second digits are at 00, 20, or 40 (every 20 seconds). 1 Corrects watch error only when the second digits are at 00 (every 60 seconds). Writing to the SUBCUDW register at the following timing is prohibited. When DEV = 0 is set: For a period of SEC = 00H, 20H, 40H When DEV = 1 is set: For a period of SEC = 00H F12 Setting of watch error correction value 0 Increases by {(F11, F10, F9, F8, F7, F6, F5, F4, F3, F2, F1, F0) - 1} 2. 1 Decreases by {(/F11, /F10, /F9, /F8, /F7, /F6, /F5, /F4, /F3, /F2, /F1, /F0) + 1} 2. When (F12, F11, F10, F9, F8, F7, F6, F5, F4, F3, F2, F1, F0) = (*, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, *), the watch error is not corrected. Range of correction value: (when F12 = 0) 2, 4, 6, 8, ... , 8184, 8186, 8188 (when F12 = 1) -2, -4, -6, -8, ... , -8184, -8186, -8188 Cautions 1. / of /Fn (n = 0 to 11) means invert. 2. * means 0 or 1. The range of value that can be corrected by using the 16-bit watch error correction register (SUBCUDW) is shown below. DEV = 0 (correction every 20 seconds) DEV = 1 (correction every 60 seconds) Correctable range -12496.9 ppm to 12496.9 ppm -4165.6 ppm to 4165.6 ppm Maximum excludes 1.53 ppm 0.51 ppm 3.05 ppm 1.02 ppm quantization error Minimum resolution Remark If a correctable range is -4165.6 ppm or lower and 4165.6 ppm or higher, set DEV to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 674 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.3.17 Alarm minute register (ALARMWM) This register is used to set minutes of alarm. Set the ALARMWM register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Caution Set a decimal value of 00 to 59 to this register in BCD code. If a value outside the range is set, the alarm is not detected. Figure 9-18. Format of Alarm Minute Register (ALARMWM) Address: FFF9AH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ALARMWM 0 WM40 WM20 WM10 WM8 WM4 WM2 WM1 9.3.18 Alarm hour register (ALARMWH) This register is used to set hours of alarm. Set the ALARMWH register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 12H. However, the value of this register is 00H if the AMPM bit is set to 1 after reset. Caution Set a decimal value of 00 to 23, 01 to 12, or 21 to 32 to this register in BCD code. If a value outside the range is set, the alarm is not detected. Figure 9-19. Format of Alarm Hour Register (ALARMWH) Address: FFF9BH After reset: 12H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ALARMWH 0 0 WH20 WH10 WH8 WH4 WH2 WH1 Caution Bit 5 (WH20) of the ALARMWH register indicates AM(0)/PM(1) if AMPM = 0 (if the 12-hour system is selected). 9.3.19 Alarm week register (ALARMWW) This register is used to set date of alarm. Set the ALARMWW register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 9-20. Format of Alarm Week Register (ALARMWW) Address: FFF9CH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ALARMWW 0 WW6 WW5 WW4 WW3 WW2 WW1 WW0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 675 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK Here is an example of setting the alarm. Time of Alarm Day 12-Hour Display Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Hour Hour 24-Hour Display Hour Hour 10 1 Minute Minute 10 1 10 1 Minute Minute 10 1 W W W W W W W W W W W W W W 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Every day, 0:00 a.m. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 Every day, 1:30 a.m. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 0 0 1 3 0 Every day, 11:59 a.m. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 9 1 1 5 9 Monday through 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 3 2 0 0 1 2 0 0 Sunday, 1:30 p.m. 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 3 0 1 3 3 0 Monday, Wednesday, 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 3 1 5 9 2 3 5 9 Friday, 0:00 p.m. Friday, 11:59 p.m. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 676 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.4 Real-time Clock Operation 9.4.1 Starting operation of real-time clock Figure 9-21. Procedure for Starting Operation of Real-time Clock Start Setting RTCCL RTCEN = 1 Note 1 RTCE = 0 Setting AMPM, CT2 to CT0 Supplies input clock. Stops counter operation. Selects 12-/24-hour system and interrupt (INTRTC). Setting SEC Sets second count register. Setting MIN Sets minute count register. Setting HOUR Sets hour count register. Setting WEEK Sets week count register. Setting DAY Setting MONTH Setting YEAR Setting SUBCUD or SUBCUDW Note 2 Sets day count register. Sets month count register. Sets year count register. Sets watch error correction register. Clearing IF flags of interrupt Clears interrupt request flags (RTCIF). Clearing MK flags of interrupt Clears interrupt mask flags (RTCMK). RTCE = 1Note 3 No Sets fRTC. Starts counter operation. INTRTC = 1? Yes End Notes 1. First set the RTCEN bit to 1, while oscillation of the input clock (fRTC) is stable. 2. Set up the SUBCUD register only if the watch error must be corrected. Set up the SUBCUDW register if the watch must be corrected with high accuracy. For details about how to calculate the correction value, see 9.4.6 Example of watch error correction of real-time clock. 3. Confirm the procedure described in 9.4.2 Shifting to HALT/STOP mode after starting operation when shifting to HALT/STOP mode without waiting for INTRTC = 1 after RTCE = 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 677 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.4.2 Shifting to HALT/STOP mode after starting operation Perform one of the following processing when shifting to HALT/STOP mode immediately after setting the RTCE bit to 1. However, after setting the RTCE bit to 1, this processing is not required when shifting to HALT/STOP mode after INTRTC interrupt has occurred. Shifting to HALT/STOP mode when at least two operating clocks (fRTC) have elapsed after setting the RTCE bit to 1 (see Figure 9-20, Example 1). Checking by polling the RWST bit to become 1, after setting the RTCE bit to 1 and then setting the RWAIT bit to 1. Afterward, setting the RWAIT bit to 0 and shifting to HALT/STOP mode after checking again by polling that the RWST bit has become 0 (see Figure 9-20, Example 2). Figure 9-22. Procedure for Shifting to HALT/STOP Mode After Setting RTCE bit to 1 Example 1 RTCE = 1 Example 2 RTCE = 1 Sets to counter operation start counters, reads the counter value, write mode fRTC clocks execution start Sets to stop the SEC to YEAR RWAIT = 1 Waiting at least for 2 HALT/STOP instruction Sets to counter operation Shifts to HALT/STOP No mode RWST = 1 ? Checks the counter wait status Yes RWAIT = 0 No Sets the counter operation RWST = 0 ? Yes HALT/STOP instruction execution R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Shifts to HALT/STOP mode 678 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.4.3 Reading/writing real-time clock Read or write the counter after setting 1 to RWAIT first. Set RWAIT to 0 after completion of reading or writing the counter. Figure 9-23. Procedure for Reading Real-time Clock Start No RWAIT = 1 Stops SEC to YEAR counters. Mode to read and write count values RWST = 1? Checks wait status of counter. Yes Reading SEC Reads second count register. Reading MIN Reads minute count register. Reading HOUR Reads hour count register. Reading WEEK Reads week count register. Reading DAY Reading MONTH Reading YEAR RWAIT = 0 No Reads day count register. Reads month count register. Reads year count register. Sets counter operation. RWST = 0?Note Yes End Note Be sure to confirm that RWST = 0 before setting HALT/STOP mode. Caution Complete the series of process of setting the RWAIT bit to 1 to clearing the RWAIT bit to 0 within 1 second. Remark The second count register (SEC), minute count register (MIN), hour count register (HOUR), week count register (WEEK), day count register (DAY), month count register (MONTH), and year count register (YEAR) may be read in any sequence. All the registers do not have to read and only some registers may be read. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 679 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK Figure 9-24. Procedure for Writing Real-time Clock Start No RWAIT = 1 Stops SEC to YEAR counters. Mode to read and write count values RWST = 1? Checks wait status of counter. Yes Writing SEC Writes second count register. Writing MIN Writes minute count register. Writing HOUR Writes hour count register. Writing WEEK Writes week count register. Writing DAY Writing MONTH No Writes day count register. Writes month count register. Writing YEAR Writes year count register. RWAIT = 0 Sets counter operation. RWST = 0?Note Yes End Note Be sure to confirm that RWST = 0 before setting HALT/STOP mode. Cautions 1. Complete the series of operations of setting the RWAIT bit to 1 to clearing the RWAIT bit to 0 within 1 second. 2. When changing the values of the SEC, MIN, HOUR, WEEK, DAY, MONTH, and YEAR register while the counter operates (RTCE = 1), rewrite the values of the MIN register after disabling interrupt servicing INTRTC by using the interrupt mask flag register. Furthermore, clear the WAFG, RIFG and RTCIF flags after rewriting the MIN register. Remark The second count register (SEC), minute count register (MIN), hour count register (HOUR), week count register (WEEK), day count register (DAY), month count register (MONTH), and year count register (YEAR) may be written in any sequence. All the registers do not have to be set and only some registers may be written. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 680 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.4.4 Setting alarm of real-time clock Set time of alarm after setting 0 to WALE first. Figure 9-25. Alarm Setting Procedure Start WALE = 0 Match operation of alarm is invalid. WALIE = 1 Interrupt is generated when alarm matches. Setting ALARMWM Sets alarm minute register. Setting ALARMWH Sets alarm hour register. Setting ALARMWW Sets alarm week register. WALE = 1 No Match operation of alarm is valid. INTRTC = 1? Yes WAFG = 1? No Match detection of alarm Yes Alarm processing Constant-period interrupt servicing Remarks 1. The alarm week register (ALARMWW), alarm hour register (ALARMWH), and alarm week register (ALARMWW) may be written in any sequence. 2. Fixed-cycle interrupts and alarm match interrupts use the same interrupt source (INTRTC). When using these two types of interrupts at the same time, which interrupt occurred can be judged by checking the fixed-cycle interrupt status flag (RIFG) and the alarm detection status flag (WAFG) upon INTRTC occurrence. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 681 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.4.5 1 Hz output of real-time clock Figure 9-26. 1 Hz Output Setting Procedure Start PMxx = 0 Pxx = 0 RTCE = 0 TIS14 = 0 TIS17, TIS16 = 0, 0 or 1, 0 TIS22 = 0 Note TIS23 = 0 Note RCLOE1 = 1 RTCE = 1 Sets the port mode register so that the pin is an output. Sets the port register for the output of 0. Stops counter operation. Enables output of the RTC1HZ pin (1 Hz). Starts counter operation. Output start from RTC1HZ pin Note The timer input select register 2 (TIS2) is only available in the RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory. Caution First set the RTCEN bit to 1 while oscillation of the input clock (fRTC) is stable. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 682 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 9.4.6 Example of watch error correction of real-time clock The watch can be corrected with high accuracy when it is slow or fast, by setting a value to the 16-bit watch error correction register (SUBCUDW). (1) Example of calculating the correction value The correction value used when correcting the count value of the internal counter (16 bits) is calculated by using the following expression. Set the DEV bit to 0 when the correction range is 4165.6 ppm or less, or 4165.6 ppm or more. (When DEV = 0) Correction valueNote = Number of correction counts in 1 minute 3 = (Oscillation frequency Target frequency 1) 32768 60 3 (When DEV = 1) Correction valueNote = Number of correction counts in 1 minute = (Oscillation frequency Target frequency 1) 32768 60 Note The correction value is the watch error correction value calculated by using bits 12 to 0 of the 16-bit watch error correction register (SUBCUDW). (When F12 = 0) Correction value = {(F11, F10, F9, F8, F7, F6, F5, F4, F3, F2, F1, F0) 1} 2 (When F12 = 1) Correction value = {(/F11, /F10, /F9, /F8, /F7, /F6, /F5, /F4, /F3, /F2, /F1, /F0) + 1} 2 When (F12, F11, F10, F9, F8, F7, F6, F5, F4, F3, F2, F1, F0) is (*, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, *), watch error correction is not performed. "*" is 0 or 1. /F11 to /F0 are bit-inverted values (000000000011 when 111111111100). Remarks 1. 2. The correction value is 2, 4, 6, 8, ... 8186, 8188 or 2, 4, 6, 8, ... 8186, 8188. The oscillation frequency is the input clock (fRTC). It can be calculated from the output frequency of the RTC1HZ pin 32768 when the 16-bit watch error correction register (SUBCUDW) is set to its initial value (0000H). 3. The target frequency is the frequency resulting after correction performed by using the 16-bit watch error correction register (SUBCUDW). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 683 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK (2) Correction example Example of correcting from 32767.4 Hz to 32768 Hz (32767.4 Hz + 18.3 ppm) [Measuring the oscillation frequency] The oscillation frequency Note 1 of each product is measured by outputting about 1 Hz from the RTC1HZ pin when the watch error correction register (SUBCUD, SUBCUDW) is set to its initial value (0000H). The frequency can also be measured by selecting Note 2 RTC1HZ for the input of timer array unit. Notes 1. See 9.4.5 1 Hz output of real-time clock for the setting procedure of outputting about 1 Hz from the RTC1HZ pin. For input selection of timer array unit, see 6.3.9 Timer input select register 1 (TIS1) and 6.3.10 Timer input select register 2 (TIS2). 2. The RTC1HZ signal is not output from the RTC1HZ pin when the RTC1HZ output signal is selected for the input to timer array unit by the setting of the timer input select register 1 or 2 (TIS1 or TIS2). [Calculating the correction value] (When the output frequency from the RTCCL pin is 0.9999817 Hz) Oscillation frequency = 32768 0.9999817 32767.4 Hz Assume the target frequency to be 32768 Hz (32767.4 Hz + 18.3 ppm) and DEV to be 1. The expression for calculating the correction value when DEV is 1 is applied. Correction value = Number of correction counts in 1 minute = (Oscillation frequency Target frequency 1) 32768 60 = (32767.4 32768 1) 32768 60 = 36 [Calculating the values to be set to (F12 to F0)] (When the correction value is 36) If the correction value is 0 or less (when quickening), assume F12 to be 1. Calculate (F11, F10, F9, F8, F7, F6, F5, F4, F3, F2, F1, F0) from the correction value. {(/F11, /F10, /F9, /F8, /F7, /F6, /F5, /F4, /F3, /F2, /F1, /F0) 1} 2 = 36 (/F11, /F10, /F9, /F8, /F7, /F6, /F5, /F4, /F3, /F2, /F1, /F0) = 17 (/F11, /F10, /F9, /F8, /F7, /F6, /F5, /F4, /F3, /F2, /F1, /F0) = (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 1) (F11, F10, F9, F8, F7, F6, F5, F4, F3, F2, F1, F0) = (1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 0) Consequently, when correcting from 32767.4 Hz to 32768 Hz (32767.4 Hz + 18.3 ppm), setting the correction register such that DEV is 1 and the correction value is 36 (bits 12 to 0 of the SUBCUDW register: 1111111101110) results in 32768 Hz (0 ppm). Figure 9-25 shows the operation when (DEV, F12, F11, F10, F9, F8, F7, F6, F5, F4, F3, F2, F1, F0) is (1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 0). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 684 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 SEC 16-bit counter count value 0000H Count start 00 01 8054H 8055H 0000H 0001H 7FFFH + 56H (86) 7FFFH 19 0000H 0001H 7FFFH 0000H 20 8054H 8055H 39 0000H 0001H 7FFFH + 56H (86) 7FFFH 0000H 40 8054H 8055H 59 0000H 0001H 7FFFH + 56H (86) 7FFFH 0000H 00 8054H 8055H 7FFFH + 56H (86) Figure 9-27. Operation when (DEV, F12, F11, F10, F9, F8, F7, F6, F5, F4, F3, F2, F1, F0) = (1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 0) RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK 685 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 10 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER CHAPTER 10 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER Whether the output pin for the clock and buzzer output controller is present depends on the product. Output pin 20, 30, and 32-pin products 48, 64, 80, and 100-pin products PCLBUZ0 Caution Most of the following descriptions in this chapter use the 80-pin as an example. 10.1 Functions of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller The clock output controller is intended for carrier output during remote controlled transmission and clock output for supply to peripheral ICs. Buzzer output is a function to output a square wave of buzzer frequency. One pin can be used to output a clock or buzzer sound. The PCLBUZ0 pin outputs a clock selected by clock output select register 0 (CKS0). Figure 10-1 shows the block diagram of clock output/buzzer output controller. Caution In the low-consumption RTC mode (when the RTCLPC bit of the operation speed mode control register (OSMC) = 1), it is not possible to output the sub/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock (fSL) from the PCLBUZ0 pin. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 686 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 10 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER Figure 10-1. Block Diagram of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller MCM0 = 0 fIH fMAIN Prescaler fMX MCM0 = 1 5 3 fMAIN-fMAIN/24 fSL-fSL/27 fIL Clock/buzzer controller PCLBUZ0 Note /P140 8 SELLOSC = 0 fSUB Selector fMAIN/211-fMAIN/213 fSL Output latch (P141) Prescaler PM140 SELLOSC = 1 PCLOE0 0 0 0 CSEL0 CCS02 CCS01 CCS00 Clock output select register 0 (CKS0) Internal bus Note For output frequencies available from PCLBUZ0, refer to the AC characteristics in CHAPTER 34 to CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 687 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 10 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER 10.2 Configuration of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller The clock output/buzzer output controller includes the following hardware. Table 10-1. Configuration of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller Item Control registers Configuration Clock output select registers 0 (CKS0) Port mode register 14 (PM14) Port register 14 (P14) 10.3 Registers Controlling Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller The following registers are used to control the clock output/buzzer output controller. Clock output select registers 0 (CKS0) Port mode register 14 (PM14) Port register 14 (P14) 10.3.1 Clock output select register 0 (CKS0) These registers set output enable/disable for clock output or for the buzzer frequency output pin (PCLBUZ0), and set the output clock. Select the clock to be output from the PCLBUZ0 pin by using the CKS0 register. The CKS0 register are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 688 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 10 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER Figure 10-2. Format of Clock Output Select Register 0 (CKS0) Address: FFFA5H (CKS0), FFFA6H (CKS1) Symbol CKS0 After reset: 00H R/W <7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PCLOE0 0 0 0 CSEL0 CCS02 CCS01 CCS00 PCLOE0 PCLBUZ0 pin output enable/disable specification 0 Output disable (default) 1 Output enable CSEL0 CCS02 0 0 CCS01 0 CCS00 0 PCLBUZ0 pin output clock selection fMAIN fMAIN = fMAIN = fMAIN = fMAIN = fMAIN = fMAIN = 5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 32 MHz 48 MHz 64 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz Setting Note prohibited prohibited prohibited prohibited Note 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 fMAIN/2 2.5 MHz fMAIN/22 5 MHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz Note Note 10 MHz 16 MHz Setting Setting Note Note prohibited prohibited 5 MHz Note 12 MHz 16 MHz Note 4 MHz 6 MHz 8 MHz 3 MHz 4 MHz 0 4 312.5 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz 2 MHz 11 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz Note Note 8 MHz fMAIN/23 fMAIN/2 Setting Note 1 625 kHz Setting 0 1 0 1 fMAIN/2 2.44 kHz 4.88 kHz 9.76 kHz 15.62 kHz 23.43 kHz 31.25 kHz 0 1 1 0 fMAIN/212 1.22 kHz 2.44 kHz 4.88 kHz 7.81 kHz 11.71 kHz 15.12 kHz 0 1 1 1 fMAIN/213 610 Hz 1.22 kHz 2.44 kHz 3.90 kHz 5.85 kHz 1 0 0 0 fSL 1 0 0 1 fSL/2 1 1 1 Note 0 Setting 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 7.81 kHz 32.768 kHz (fSUB) or 15 kHz (fIL) 16.384 kHz (fSUB) or 7.5 kHz (fIL) 2 8.192 kHz (fSUB) or 3.75 kHz (fIL) 3 4.096 kHz (fSUB) or 1.87 kHz (fIL) 4 2.048 kHz (fSUB) or 937.5 Hz (fIL) 5 fSL/2 fSL/2 fSL/2 1 1 0 1 fSL/2 1.024 kHz (fSUB) or 468.75 Hz (fIL) 1 1 1 0 fSL/26 512 Hz (fSUB) or 234.37 Hz (fIL) 1 1 1 1 fSL/27 256 Hz (fSUB) or 117.18 Hz (fIL) Use the output clock within a range of 16 MHz. See the AC characteristics in CHAPTER 34 to CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS for details. Cautions 1. Change the output clock and the CSEL0 and CCS02 to CCS00 bits after disabling clock output (PCLOE0 = 0). 2. To shift to STOP mode when the main system clock is selected (CSEL0 = 0), set PCLOE0 = 0 before executing the STOP instruction. When the subsystem clock is selected (CSEL0 = 1), PCLOE0 = 1 can be set because the clock can be output in STOP mode. 3. In the low-consumption RTC mode (when the RTCLPC bit of the operation speed mode control register (OSMC) = 1), it is not possible to output the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock (fSL) from the PCLBUZ0 pin. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 689 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 10 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER 4. The high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH) and the high-speed system clock (fMX) can be selected as the main system clock (fMAIN) by the setting of the MCM0 bit (bit 4 of the system clock control register (CKC)). For details, refer to CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR. 5. The subsystem clock (fSUB) and the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIL) can be selected as the sub/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock by the setting of the SELLOSC bit (bit 0 of the clock select register (CKSEL)). For details, refer to CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR. 10.3.2 Clock Select Register (CKSEL) This register is used to select the CPU clock (fSUB/fIL) the clocks for the timer RJ, timer RD, and clock output/buzzer output. Together with the CMC register, the SELLOSC bit is used to set the operation mode of the subsystem clock. For details, see Figure 5-3 Format of Clock Operation Mode Control Register (CMC). Set the CKSEL register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the CKSEL register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Figure 10-3. Format of Clock Select Register (CKSEL) Address: F02C4H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 <2> 1 <0> CKSEL 0 0 0 0 0 TRD_CKS 0 SELLOSC EL SELLOSC Notes 3, 4 Control of sub/low-speed on-chip oscillator selection clock (fSL) selection Notes 3, 4 0 Selects fSUB Note 1 1 Selects fIL Note 2 Notes 1. When setting fSUB as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock, first set the SELLOSC bit to 0 and then set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 1. 2. When setting fIL as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock, first set the SELLOSC bit to 1 and then set the CSS bit in the CKC register to 1. 3. When the SELLOSC bit is set to 1, the low-speed on-chip oscillator operates. 4. When setting the CKSEL register in the 20-, 30-, or 32-pin products, set the SELLOSC bit to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 690 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 10 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER 10.3.3 Port mode register 14 (PM14) These registers set input/output of port in 1-bit units. When using the P140/PCLBUZ0 pins for clock output and buzzer output, clear PM140 bit and the output latch of P140 to 0. The PM14 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH. Figure 10-4. Format of Port Mode Register 14 (PM14) Address: FFF2EH After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PM140 PMmn R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Pmn pin I/O mode selection (mn = 140) 0 Output mode (output buffer on) 1 Input mode (output buffer off) 691 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 10 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER 10.4 Operations of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller One pin can be used to output a clock or buzzer sound. The PCLBUZ0 pin outputs a clock/buzzer selected by the clock output select register 0 (CKS0). 10.4.1 Operation as output pin The PCLBUZ0 pin is output as the following procedures. <1> Set the bit in the port mode register 14 (PM14) and the bit in the port register 14 (P14) corresponding to the port used as a PCLBUZ0 pin. <2> Clear the output latches of PM140 and P140 to 0. <3> Select the output clock with bits 0 to 3 (CCS00 to CCS02, CSEL0) of the clock output select register 0 (CKS0) of the PCLBUZ0 pin (output in disabled status). <4> Set bit 7 (PCLOE0) of the CKS0 register to 1 to enable clock/buzzer output. Remark The controller used for outputting the clock starts or stops outputting the clock one clock after enabling or disabling clock output (PCLOE0 bit) is switched. At this time, pulses with a narrow width are not output. Figure 10-5 shows enabling or stopping output using the PCLOE0 bit and the timing of outputting the clock. Figure 10-5. Remote Control Output Application Example PCLOE0 1 clock elapsed Clock output Narrow pulses are not recognized 10.5 Notes on Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller When the CPU enters STOP mode within 1.5 clock cycles of main system clock after the setting to disable output is made (PCLOE0 = 0) while the main system clock is selected for PCLBUZ0 output (CSEL0 = 0), the pulse width of the PCLBUZ0 output is narrowed. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 692 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER 11.1 Functions of Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer operates on the WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fWDT). The watchdog timer is used to detect an inadvertent program loop. If a program loop is detected, an internal reset signal is generated. Program loop is detected in the following cases. If the watchdog timer counter overflows If a 1-bit manipulation instruction is executed on the watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) If data other than "ACH" is written to the WDTE register If data is written to the WDTE register during a window close period When a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer, bit 4 (WDCLRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1. For details of the RESF register, see CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION. When 75% of the overflow time + 1/2 fWDT is reached, an interval interrupt can be generated. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 693 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER 11.2 Configuration of Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer includes the following hardware. Table 11-1. Configuration of Watchdog Timer Item Configuration Counter Internal counter (17 bits) Control register Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) How the internal counter (17 bits) operation is controlled, overflow time, window open period, and interval interrupt are set by the option byte. Caution Set the same value as 000C0H to 020C0H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C0H is replaced by 020C0H. Table 11-2. Setting of Option Bytes and Watchdog Timer Setting of Watchdog Timer Option Byte (000C0H) Watchdog timer interval interrupt Bit 7 (WDTINT) Window open period Bits 6 and 5 (WINDOW1, WINDOW0) Controlling counter operation of watchdog timer Bit 4 (WDTON) Overflow time of watchdog timer Bits 3 to 1 (WDCS2 to WDCS0) Controlling counter operation of watchdog timer Bit 0 (WDSTBYON) (in HALT/STOP/SNOOZE mode) Remark For the option byte, see CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE. Figure 11-1. Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer WDTINT of option byte (000C0H) Interval time controller (Count value overflow time x 3/4) Interval time interrupt WDCS2 to WDCS0 of option byte (000C0H) fWDT Clock input controller Internal fWDT/26 to fWDT/216 Overflow signal counter Selector (17 bits) Count clear signal WINDOW1 and WINDOW0 of option byte (000C0H) WDTON of option byte (000C0H) Reset output controller Internal reset signal Window size decision signal Window size check Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) Write detector to WDTE except ACH Internal bus R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 694 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER 11.3 Register Controlling Watchdog Timer The watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer enable register (WDTE). 11.3.1 Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) When the WDTON bit in the option byte (000C0H) is 1, writing ACH to the WDTE register clears the watchdog timer counter and starts counting again. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 1AH or 9AHNote. Figure 11-2. Format of Watchdog Timer Enable Register (WDTE) Address: FFFABH Symbol After reset: 1AH/9AHNote 7 6 R/W 5 4 3 2 1 0 WDTE Note The WDTE register reset value differs depending on the WDTON bit setting value of the option byte (000C0H). To operate watchdog timer, set the WDTON bit to 1. WDTON Bit Setting Value WDTE Register Reset Value 0 (watchdog timer count operation disabled) 1AH 1 (watchdog timer count operation enabled) 9AH Cautions 1. When the WDTON bit in the option byte (000C0H) is 1, if a value other than "ACH" is written to the WDTE register, an internal reset signal is generated. 2. When the WDTON bit in the option byte (000C0H) is 1, if a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction is executed for the WDTE register, an internal reset signal is generated. 3. The value read from the WDTE register is 1AH/9AH (this differs from the written value (ACH) as specified in the WDTON bit of the option byte (000C0H)). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 695 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER 11.4 Operation of Watchdog Timer 11.4.1 Controlling operation of watchdog timer 1. When the watchdog timer is used, its operation is specified by the option byte (000C0H). Enable counting operation of the watchdog timer by setting bit 4 (WDTON) of the option byte (000C0H) to 1 (the counter starts operating after a reset release) (for details, see CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE). WDTON Watchdog Timer Counter 0 Counter operation disabled (counting stopped after reset) 1 Counter operation enabled (counting started after reset) Set an overflow time by using bits 3 to 1 (WDCS2 to WDCS0) of the option byte (000C0H) (for details, see 11.4.2 Setting overflow time of watchdog timer and CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE). Set a window open period by using bits 6 and 5 (WINDOW1 and WINDOW0) of the option byte (000C0H) (for details, see 11.4.3 Setting window open period of watchdog timer and CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE). 2. After a reset release, the watchdog timer starts counting. 3. By writing "ACH" to the watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) after the watchdog timer starts counting and before the overflow time set by the option byte, the watchdog timer counter is cleared and starts counting again. 4. After that, write the WDTE register the second time or later after a reset release during the window open period. If the WDTE register is written during a window close period, an internal reset signal is generated. 5. If the overflow time expires without "ACH" written to the WDTE register, an internal reset signal is generated. An internal reset signal is generated in the following cases. If a 1-bit manipulation instruction is executed on the WDTE register If data other than "ACH" is written to the WDTE register Cautions 1. When data is written to the watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) for the first time after reset release, the watchdog timer counter is cleared in any timing regardless of the window open time, as long as the register is written before the overflow time, and the watchdog timer counter starts counting again. 2. If the watchdog timer counter is cleared by writing "ACH" to the WDTE register, the actual overflow time may be different from the overflow time set by the option byte by up to 2/fIL seconds. 3. The watchdog timer counter can be cleared immediately before the count value overflows. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 696 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER 4. The operation of the watchdog timer in the HALT, STOP, and SNOOZE modes differs as follows depending on the set value of bit 0 (WDSTBYON) and bit 4 (WDTON) of the option byte (000C0H). WDTON = 1 and WDSTBYON = 0 In HALT mode Watchdog timer operation stops. WDTON = 1 and WDSTBYON = 1 Watchdog timer operation continues. In STOP mode In SNOOZE mode If WDSTBYON = 0, the watchdog timer resumes counting after the HALT, STOP, or SNOOZE modes is released. At this time, the counter is cleared to 0 and counting starts. When operating with the X1 oscillation clock after releasing the STOP mode, the CPU starts operating after the oscillation stabilization time has elapsed. Therefore, if the period between the STOP mode release and the watchdog timer overflow is short, an overflow occurs during the oscillation stabilization time, causing a reset. Consequently, set the overflow time in consideration of the oscillation stabilization time when operating with the X1 oscillation clock and when the watchdog timer counter is to be cleared after the STOP mode release by an interval interrupt. 11.4.2 Setting overflow time of watchdog timer Set the overflow time of the watchdog timer by using bits 3 to 1 (WDCS2 to WDCS0) of the option byte (000C0H). If an overflow occurs, an internal reset signal is generated. The present count is cleared and the watchdog timer starts counting again by writing "ACH" to the watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) during the window open period before the overflow time. The following overflow times can be set. Table 11-3. Setting of Overflow Time of Watchdog Timer WDCS2 WDCS1 WDCS0 Overflow Time of Watchdog Timer (fWDT = 17.25 kHz (MAX.)) <R> 0 0 0 26/fWDT (3.71 ms) 0 0 1 27/fWDT (7.42 ms) 0 1 0 28/fWDT (14.84 ms) 0 1 1 29/fWDT (29.68 ms) 1 0 0 211/fWDT (118.72 ms) 1 0 1 213/fWDT Note (474.89 ms) 1 1 0 214/fWDT Note (949.79 ms) 1 1 1 216/fWDT Note (3799.18 ms) Note When the interval interrupt of watchdog timer is used, do not set the overflow time to 213/fWDT, 214/fWDT or 216/fWDT. Remark fWDT: WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 697 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER 11.4.3 Setting window open period of watchdog timer Set the window open period of the watchdog timer by using bits 6 and 5 (WINDOW1, WINDOW0) of the option byte (000C0H). The outline of the window is as follows. If "ACH" is written to the watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) during the window open period, the watchdog timer counter is cleared and starts counting again. Even if "ACH" is written to the WDTE register during the window close period, an abnormality is detected and an internal reset signal is generated. Example: If the window open period is 50% Counting starts Overflow time Window close period (50%) Window open period (50%) Internal reset signal is generated if "ACH" is written to WDTE. Counter value is cleared and counting starts again when "ACH" is written to WDTE. Caution When data is written to the WDTE register for the first time after reset release, the watchdog timer counter is cleared in any timing regardless of the window open time, as long as the register is written before the overflow time, and the watchdog timer counter starts counting again. The window open period can be set is as follows. Table 11-4. Setting Window Open Period of Watchdog Timer WINDOW1 WINDOW0 Window Open Period of Watchdog Timer 0 0 Setting prohibited 0 1 50% 1 0 75% 1 1 100% Caution When bit 0 (WDSTBYON) of the option byte (000C0H) = 0, the window open period is 100% regardless of the values of the WINDOW1 and WINDOW0 bits. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 698 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER Remark If the overflow time is set to 29/fWDT, the window close time and open time are as follows. Setting of Window Open Period 50% 75% 100% Window close time 0 to 20.08 ms 0 to 10.04 ms None Window open time 20.08 to 29.68 ms 10.04 to 29.68 ms 0 to 29.68 ms <When window open period is 50%> Overflow time: 29/fWDT (MAX.) = 29/17.25 kHz (MAX.) = 29.68 ms Window close time: 0 to 29/fWDT (MIN.) (1 0.5) = 0 to 29/12.75 kHz 0.5 = 0 to 20.08 ms Window open time: 29/fWDT (MIN.) (1 0.5) to 29/fWDT (MAX.) = 29/12.75 kHz 0.5 to 29/17.25 kHz = 20.08 to 29.68 ms 11.4.4 Setting watchdog timer interval interrupt Setting bit 7 (WDTINT) of an option byte (000C0H) can generate an interval interrupt (INTWDTI) when 75% of the overflow time is reached. Table 11-5. Setting of Watchdog Timer Interval Interrupt WDTINT Use of Watchdog Timer Interval Interrupt 0 Interval interrupt is not used. 1 Interval interrupt is generated when 75% of overflow time + 1/2 fWDT is reached. Caution When operating with the X1 oscillation clock after releasing the STOP mode, the CPU starts operating after the oscillation stabilization time has elapsed. Therefore, if the period between the STOP mode release and the watchdog timer overflow is short, an overflow occurs during the oscillation stabilization time, causing a reset. Consequently, set the overflow time in consideration of the oscillation stabilization time when operating with the X1 oscillation clock and when the watchdog timer is to be cleared after the STOP mode release by an interval interrupt. Remark The watchdog timer continues counting even after INTWDTI is generated (until ACH is written to the watchdog timer enable register (WDTE)). If ACH is not written to the WDTE register before the overflow time, an internal reset signal is generated. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 699 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER The number of analog input channels of the A/D converter differs, depending on the product. Pin Count 100 Pins 80 Pins 48 Pins 32 Pins 30 Pins 20 Pins RL78/F13 20 ch 19 ch 12 ch 15 ch 12 ch 8 ch 10 ch 4 ch (LIN ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI11 ANI12, ANI11 ANI7 ANI9 ANI3 -- -- -- incorporated) Code Analog input channel 64 Pins ANI15, ANI15, ANI24 to ANI24 to ANI24, ANI27 ANI26 ANI25 64 KB or 96 KB or 64 KB or 96 KB or 64 KB or flash more more less more less RL78/F13 20 ch 19 ch 15 ch 10 ch 12 ch (CAN and ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to LIN ANI15, ANI15, ANI12, ANI7, ANI9, incorporated) ANI24 to ANI24 to ANI24, ANI24, ANI24, ANI27 ANI26 ANI25 ANI25 ANI25 Code -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 31 ch 25 ch 20 ch 20 ch 19 ch 18 ch 15 ch 10 ch 12 ch ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI0 to ANI23, ANI17, ANI15, ANI16, ANI15, ANI12, ANI12, ANI7, ANI9, ANI24 to ANI24 to ANI24 to ANI24 to ANI24 to ANI24 to ANI24, ANI24, ANI24, ANI30 ANI30 ANI27 ANI26 ANI26 ANI28 ANI25 ANI25 ANI25 -- 128 KB or 96 KB or 128 KB or 96 KB or 128 KB or 96 KB or -- -- more less more less more less -- flash RL78/F14 Code flash R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 -- 700 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.1 Function of A/D Converter The A/D converter is a 10-bit resolutionNote converter that converts analog input signals into digital values, and is configured to control analog inputs, including up to 31 channels of A/D converter analog inputs (ANI0 to ANI23 and ANI24 to ANI30). The A/D converter has the following function. 10-bit resolution A/D conversionNote 10-bit resolution A/D conversion is carried out repeatedly for one analog input channel selected from ANI0 to ANI23 and ANI24 to ANI30. Each time an A/D conversion operation ends, an interrupt request (INTAD) is generated (when in the select mode). Note 8-bit resolution can also be selected by using the ADTYP bit of A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2). Various A/D conversion modes can be specified by using the mode combinations below. Trigger Mode Software trigger Channel Selection Mode Select mode Conversion Operation Mode One-shot conversion mode Conversion is started by specifying a A/D conversion is performed on A/D conversion is performed on software trigger. the analog input of one channel. the selected channel once. Hardware trigger no-wait mode Scan mode Sequential conversion mode Conversion is started by detecting a A/D conversion is performed on A/D conversion is sequentially hardware trigger. the analog input of four channels performed on the selected in order. channels until it is stopped by Hardware trigger wait mode The power is turned on by detecting a software. hardware trigger while the system is off and in the conversion standby state, and conversion is then started automatically after the stabilization wait time passes. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 701 Port mode control register 12 (PMC12) PMC125 PMC120 2 ANI26/P70/KR0/TI15/TO15/INTP8/SI11/SDA11/SNZOUT4 ANI27/P71/KR1/TI17/TO17/INTP6/SCK11/SCL11/SNZOUT5 ANI28/P72/KR2/(CTXD0)/SO11/SNZOUT6 ANI29/P73/KR3/(CRXD0)/SSI11/SNZOUT7 ANI30/P74/KR4/(SO10)/(TXD1) 5 5 Port mode control register 7 (PMC7) ADISS ADS4 Internal reference voltage (1.45 V) Temperature sensor PMC74 PMC73 PMC72 PMC71 PMC70 ANI24/P125/TI03/TO03/TRDIOB0/SSI01/INTP1/SNZOUT1 ANI25/P120/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/SO01/INTP4 ANI21/P103 ANI22/P104 ANI23/P105 ANI0/AVREFP/P33 ANI1/AVREFM/P34 ANI2/P80 Analog/digital switcher Analog/digital switcher Analog/digital switcher ADS2 6 Selector ADS1 ADS0 Internal bus 2 ADTYP ADCS ADMD Controller FR2 Successive approximation register (SAR) A/D converter mode register 1 (ADM1) ADTMD1 ADTMD0 ADSCM ADTRS1 ADTRS0 A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2) AWC VSS FR1 FR0 6 Conversion result comparison lower limit setting register (ADLL) A/D voltage comparator Conversion result comparison upper limit setting register (ADUL) Sample & hold circuit ADREFP1 ADREFP0 ADREFPM ADRCK Analog input channel specification register (ADS) ADS3 A/D test register (ADTES) ADTES1 ADTES0 Selector ADPC4 ADPC3 ADPC2 ADPC1 ADPC0 Internal bus LV0 ADCE Comparison voltage generator A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) LV1 ADCS bit ADREFM bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR) INTAD INTRTC INTTM01 Event signalNote1 selected by ELC or trigger signalNote2 generated by ADTRGS0 and ADTRGS1 registers A/D conversion result upper limit/lower limit comparator VSS P34/AVREFM/ANI1 Internal reference voltage (1.45 V) VDD P33/AVREFP/ANI0 ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 bits Selector R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Selector A/D port configuration register (ADPC) RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Figure 12-1. Block Diagram of A/D Converter Notes 1. Only available in the RL78/F14. 2. Only available in the RL78/F13. Remark Analog input pin for figure 12-1 when a 100-pin product of RL78/F14 is used. 702 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.2 Configuration of A/D Converter The A/D converter includes the following hardware. (1) ANI0 to ANI23 (VDD) and ANI24 to ANI30 (EVDD) pins These are the analog input pins of the twenty channels of the A/D converter. They input analog signals to be converted into digital signals. Pins other than the one selected as the analog input pin can be used as I/O port pins. <R> Caution If the supply setting other than AVREFP, AVREFM is used as the reference voltage of the A/D converter, the conversion accuracy decreases. In addition, since the EVDD system analog pins have lower accuracy than the VDD system analog pins, the VDD analog pins should be used for highly accurate conversion. (2) Sample & hold circuit The sample & hold circuit samples each of the analog input voltages sequentially sent from the input circuit, and sends them to the A/D voltage comparator. This circuit also holds the sampled analog input voltage during A/D conversion. (3) A/D voltage comparator This A/D voltage comparator compares the voltage generated from the voltage tap of the comparison voltage generator with the analog input voltage. If the analog input voltage is found to be greater than the reference voltage (1/2 AVREF) as a result of the comparison, the most significant bit (MSB) of the successive approximation register (SAR) is set. If the analog input voltage is less than the reference voltage (1/2 AVREF), the MSB bit of the SAR is reset. After that, bit 8 of the SAR register is automatically set, and the next comparison is made. The voltage tap of the comparison voltage generator is selected by the value of bit 9, to which the result has been already set. Bit 9 = 0: (1/4 AVREF) Bit 9 = 1: (3/4 AVREF) The voltage tap of the comparison voltage generator and the analog input voltage are compared and bit 8 of the SAR register is manipulated according to the result of the comparison. Analog input voltage Voltage tap of comparison voltage generator: Bit 8 = 1 Analog input voltage Voltage tap of comparison voltage generator: Bit 8 = 0 Comparison is continued like this to bit 0 of the SAR register. When performing A/D conversion at a resolution of 8 bits, the comparison continues until bit 2 of the SAR register. Remark AVREF: The + side reference voltage of the A/D converter. This can be selected from AVREFP, the internal reference voltage (1.45 V), and VDD. (4) Comparison voltage generator The comparison voltage generator generates the comparison voltage input from an analog input pin. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 703 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (5) Successive approximation register (SAR) The SAR register is a register that sets voltage tap data whose values from the comparison voltage generator match the voltage values of the analog input pins, 1 bit at a time starting from the most significant bit (MSB). If data is set in the SAR register all the way to the least significant bit (LSB) (end of A/D conversion), the contents of the SAR register (conversion results) are held in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR). When all the specified A/D conversion operations have ended, an A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. (6) 10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR) The A/D conversion result is loaded from the successive approximation register to this register each time A/D conversion is completed, and the ADCR register holds the A/D conversion result in its higher 10 bits (the lower 6 bits are fixed to 0). (7) 8-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH) The A/D conversion result is loaded from the successive approximation register to this register each time A/D conversion is completed, and the ADCRH register stores the higher 8 bits of the A/D conversion result. (8) Controller This circuit controls the conversion time of an input analog signal that is to be converted into a digital signal, as well as starting and stopping of the conversion operation. When A/D conversion has been completed, this controller generates INTAD. (9) AVREFP pin This pin inputs an external reference voltage (AVREFP). If using AVREFP as the + side reference voltage of the A/D converter, set the ADREFP1 bit of A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2) to 0 and the ADREFP0 bit to 1. The analog signals input to ANI0 to ANI23 and ANI24 to ANI30 are converted to digital signals based on the voltage applied between AVREFP and the side reference voltage (AVREFM/VSS). In addition to AVREFP, it is possible to select VDD or the internal reference voltage (1.45 V) as the + side reference voltage of the A/D converter. (10) AVREFM pin This pin inputs an external reference voltage (AVREFM). If using AVREFM as the side reference voltage of the A/D converter, set the ADREFM bit of the ADM2 register to 1. In addition to AVREFM, it is possible to select VSS as the side reference voltage of the A/D converter. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 704 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3 Registers Used in A/D Converter The A/D converter uses the following registers. Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) A/D converter mode register 1 (ADM1) A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2) 10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR) 8-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH) Analog input channel specification register (ADS) Conversion result comparison upper limit setting register (ADUL) Conversion result comparison lower limit setting register (ADLL) A/D test register (ADTES) A/D port configuration register (ADPC) A/D converter trigger select registers 0, 1 (ADTRGS0, ADTRGS1) Port mode control registers 7, 9, and 12 (PMC7, PMC9, PMC12) Port mode registers 3, 7 to 10, 12 (PM3, PM7 to PM10, PM12) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 705 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) This register is used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to a hardware macro that is not used is stopped in order to reduce the power consumption and noise. When the A/D converter is used, be sure to set bit 5 (ADCEN) of this register to 1. The PER0 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-2. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 0 (PER0) Address: F00F0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> 6 <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PER0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN IICA0EN SAU1EN SAU0EN TAU1EN TAU0EN ADCEN 0 Control of A/D converter input clock supply Stops input clock supply. SFR used by the A/D converter cannot be written. The A/D converter is in the reset status. 1 Enables input clock supply. SFR used by the A/D converter can be read/written. Cautions 1. When setting the A/D converter, be sure to set the ADCEN bit to 1 first. If ADCEN = 0, writing to a control register of the A/D converter is ignored, and, even if the register is read, only the default value is read (except for port mode registers 3, 7 to 10, 12 (PM3, PM7 to PM10, PM12), port mode control registers 7, 9, and 12 (PMC7, PMC9, PMC12), and A/D port configuration register (ADPC)). 2. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. Bits 1, 3, 4, and 6 in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Bits 4 and 6 in 30-pin products of the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and in 30-pin products of the RL78/F14 Bit 6 in the products other than above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 706 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.2 A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) This register sets the conversion time for analog input to be A/D converted, and starts/stops conversion. The ADM0 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-3. Format of A/D Converter Mode Register 0 (ADM0) Address: FFF30H Symbol ADM0 After reset: 00H <7> 6 ADCS ADMD R/W 5 FR2 ADCS FR1 Note 1 3 FR0 Note 1 2 LV1 Note 1 A/D conversion operation control 0 1 4 Note 1 1 LV0 Note 1 <0> ADCE Note 4 Stops conversion operation [When read] Conversion stopped/standby status Note 3 Enables conversion operation [When read Note 2] While in the software trigger mode: Conversion operation status While in the hardware trigger wait mode: Stabilization wait status + conversion operation status ADMD Specification of the A/D conversion channel selection mode 0 Select mode 1 Scan mode A/D voltage comparator operation control Note 2 ADCE 0 Note 3 1 Stops A/D voltage comparator operation Enables A/D voltage comparator operation Notes 1. For details of the FR2 to FR0, LV1, LV0 bits, and A/D conversion, see Table 12-3 A/D Conversion Time Selection. 2. While in the software trigger mode or hardware trigger no-wait mode, the operation of the A/D voltage comparator is controlled by the ADCS and ADCE bits, and it takes 1 s from the start of operation for the operation to stabilize. Therefore, when the ADCS bit is set to 1 after 1 s or more has elapsed from the time ADCE bit is set to 1, the conversion result at that time has priority over the first conversion result. Otherwise, ignore data of the first conversion. 3. The ADCS bit is not set when 1 is written to it and 0 is written to the ADCE bit. The ADCS bit is read as 0. 4. The ADCS bit cannot be used as the flag of conversion operation status in the hardware trigger no-wait mode. Cautions 1. Change the ADMD, FR2 to FR0, LV1, LV0, and ADCE bits in the conversion stopped/standby status (ADCS = 0). 2. Do not change the ADCS and ADCE bits from 0 to 1 by using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. Be sure to set these bits in the order described in 12.7 A/D Converter Setup Flowchart. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 707 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Table 12-1. Settings of ADCS and ADCE Bits ADCS ADCE A/D Conversion Operation 0 0 Stop status (DC power consumption path does not exist) 0 1 Conversion standby mode (only A/D voltage comparator consumes power Note) 1 0 Setting prohibited 1 1 Conversion mode (A/D voltage comparator: enables operation) Note In hardware trigger wait mode, there is no DC power consumption path even during conversion standby mode. Table 12-2. Setting and Clearing Conditions for ADCS Bit A/D Conversion Mode Software Select mode trigger Set Conditions Sequential conversion When 1 is mode written to ADCS Clear Conditions When 0 is written to ADCS One-shot conversion When 0 is written to ADCS mode The bit is automatically cleared to 0 when A/D conversion ends. Scan mode Sequential conversion When 0 is written to ADCS mode One-shot conversion When 0 is written to ADCS mode The bit is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends on the specified four channels. Hardware Select mode Sequential conversion trigger no-wait mode mode One-shot conversion When 0 is written to ADCS When 0 is written to ADCS mode Scan mode Sequential conversion When 0 is written to ADCS mode One-shot conversion When 0 is written to ADCS mode Hardware Sequential conversion When a trigger wait mode hardware trigger mode One-shot conversion is input Select mode mode When 0 is written to ADCS When 0 is written to ADCS The bit is automatically cleared to 0 when A/D conversion ends. Scan mode Sequential conversion When 0 is written to ADCS mode One-shot conversion When 0 is written to ADCS mode The bit is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends on the specified four channels. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 708 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Figure 12-4. Timing Chart When A/D Voltage Comparator Is Used A/D voltage comparator: enables operation ADCE A/D voltage comparator Software trigger mode Conversion start time Note 2 Conversion Conversion operation standby Conversion standby ADCS Note 1 1 is written to ADCS. Conversion standby Hardware trigger no-wait mode ADCS Trigger standby 0 is written to ADCS. This bit is automatically cleared to 0 after A/D conversion ends. Conversion start time Note 2 Conversion Conversion Conversion stopped operation standby Note 1 Hardware trigger detection 0 is written 1 is written to ADCS. to ADCS. Conversion start time Note 2 A/D power stabilization wait time Conversion operation Conversion standby Hardware trigger wait mode Conversion stopped Conversion standby Conversion stopped ADCS Hardware trigger detection 0 is written to ADCS. This bit is automatically cleared to 0 after A/D conversion ends. Notes 1. While in the software trigger mode or hardware trigger no-wait mode, the time from the rising of the ADCE bit to the falling of the ADCS bit must be 1 s or longer to stabilize the internal circuit. 2. The following time is the maximum amount of time necessary to start conversion. ADM0 Conversion Conversion Start Time (Number of fCLK Clocks) FR2 FR1 FR0 Clock Software trigger mode/ (fAD) Hardware trigger no wait mode 0 0 0 fCLK/64 63 0 0 1 fCLK/32 31 0 1 0 fCLK/16 15 0 1 1 fCLK/8 7 1 0 0 fCLK/6 5 1 0 1 fCLK/5 4 1 1 0 fCLK/4 3 1 1 1 fCLK/2 1 Hardware trigger wait mode 1 However, for the second and subsequent conversion in sequential conversion mode and for conversion of the channel specified by scan 1, 2, and 3 in scan mode, the conversion start time and stabilization wait time for A/D power supply do not occur after a hardware trigger is detected. Remark fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 709 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Cautions 1. If using the hardware trigger wait mode, setting the ADCS bit to 1 is prohibited (but the bit is automatically switched to 1 when the hardware trigger signal is detected). However, it is possible to clear the ADCS bit to 0 to specify the A/D conversion standby status. 2. While in the one-shot conversion mode of the hardware trigger no-wait mode, the ADCS flag is not automatically cleared to 0 when A/D conversion ends. Instead, 1 is retained. 3. Only rewrite the value of the ADCE bit when ADCS = 0 (while in the conversion stopped/conversion standby status). 4. To complete A/D conversion, specify at least the following time as the hardware trigger interval: Hardware trigger no wait mode: 2 fCLK clocks + A/D conversion time Hardware trigger wait mode: 2 fCLK clocks + stabilization wait time + A/D conversion time R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 710 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Table 12-3. A/D Conversion Time Selection (1/4) (1) 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V When there is stabilization wait time (hardware trigger wait mode) A/D Converter Mode Mode Conversion Number of Register 0 (ADM0) Clock (fAD) FR2 FR1 FR0 LV1 LV0 A/D Power Supply Stabilization Number A/D Power of Supply conversion Stabilization clocks Wait Time + Conversion Wait Clocks Conversion Time Selection fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = 1 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz 16 MHz 32 MHz Time 0 0 0 0 0 Normal fCLK/64 8 fAD 1 0 0 1 19 fAD 1728/fCLK (number of sampling fCLK/32 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting prohibited prohibited prohibited prohibited prohibited prohibited 27 s 864/fCLK clocks: 27 s 13.5 s 27 s 13.5 s 6.75 s 20.25 s 10.125 s 5.0625 s 0 1 0 fCLK/16 0 1 1 fCLK/8 216/fCLK 1 0 0 fCLK/6 162/fCLK 1 0 1 fCLK/5 135/fCLK 33.75 s 1 1 0 fCLK/4 108/fCLK 27 s 13.5 s 6.75 s 3.375 s 1 1 1 fCLK/2 54/fCLK 13.5 s 6.75 s 3.375 s Setting 7 fAD) 432/fCLK 27 s 16.875 s 8.4375 s 4.21875 s prohibited 0 0 0 0 1 Normal fCLK/64 0 1 17 fAD 1600/fCLK (number of 2 0 8 fAD fCLK/32 sampling Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting prohibited prohibited prohibited prohibited prohibited prohibited 25 s 800/fCLK clocks: 25 s 12.5 s 25 s 12.5 s 6.25 s 37.5 s 18.75 s 9.375 s 4.6875 s 125/fCLK 31.25 s 15.625 s 7.8125 s 3.90625 s fCLK/4 100/fCLK 25 s 12.5 s 6.25 s 3.125 s fCLK/2 50/fCLK 12.5 s 6.25 s 3.125 s Setting 0 1 0 fCLK/16 0 1 1 fCLK/8 200/fCLK 1 0 0 fCLK/6 150/fCLK 1 0 1 fCLK/5 1 1 0 1 1 1 5 fAD) 400/fCLK 25 s prohibited Other than above Setting prohibited Cautions 1. When rewriting the FR2 to FR0, LV1, and LV0 bits to other than the same data, stop A/D conversion once (ADCS = 0) beforehand. 2. The above conversion time does not include clock frequency errors. Select conversion time, taking clock frequency errors into consideration. 3. In the hardware trigger wait mode, the conversion time includes the time spent waiting for stabilization after the hardware trigger is detected. 4. These are the numbers of clock cycles when conversion is with 10-bit resolution. When eight-bit resolution is selected, the values are shorter by two cycles of the conversion clock (fAD). Remark fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 711 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Table 12-3. A/D Conversion Time Selection (2/4) (2) 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V When there is stabilization wait time (hardware trigger wait mode) A/D Converter Mode Mode Conversio Number of Register 0 (ADM0) n Clock (fAD) FR2 FR1 FR0 LV1 LV0 Number of A/D Power A/D Power conversion Supply Supply clocks Stabilization Stabilization Wait Time + Wait Clocks Conversion Conversion Time Selection fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = 1 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz 16 MHz 32 MHz Setting Setting Setting Setting Time 0 0 0 0 0 Normal fCLK/64 8 fAD 1 0 0 1 19 fAD 1728/fCLK prohibited prohibited prohibited prohibited (number of sampling fCLK/32 Setting Setting prohibited prohibited 27 s 864/fCLK clocks: 7 fAD) 0 1 0 fCLK/16 432/fCLK 0 1 1 fCLK/8 216/fCLK 1 0 0 fCLK/6 162/fCLK 1 0 1 fCLK/5 135/fCLK 1 1 0 fCLK/4 108/fCLK 1 1 1 27 s 54/fCLK fCLK/2 27 s 13.5 s 27 s 13.5 s 6.75 s 20.25 s 10.125 s 5.0625 s 33.75 s 16.875 s 8.4375 s 4.2188 s 27 s 13.5 s 6.75 s 13.5 s 6.75 s Setting prohibited Setting prohibited 0 0 0 0 1 Normal fCLK/64 8 fAD 17 fAD 1600/fCLK 2 (number of 0 0 1 fCLK/32 sampling 800/fCLK 0 1 0 fCLK/16 clocks: 5 fAD) 400/fCLK 0 1 1 fCLK/8 200/fCLK 1 0 0 fCLK/6 150/fCLK 1 0 1 fCLK/5 1 1 0 fCLK/4 1 1 1 fCLK/2 Setting Setting Setting Setting prohibited prohibited prohibited prohibited Setting Setting prohibited prohibited 25 s 25 s 12.5 s 25 s 12.5 s 6.25 s 37.5 s 18.75 s 9.375 s 4.6875 s 125/fCLK 31.25 s 15.625 s 7.8125 s 3.9063 s 100/fCLK 25 s 12.5 s 6.25 s 50/fCLK 25 s 12.5 s 6.25 s Setting prohibited Setting prohibited Other than above Setting prohibited Cautions 1. When rewriting the FR2 to FR0, LV1, and LV0 bits to other than the same data, stop A/D conversion once (ADCS = 0) beforehand. 2. The above conversion time does not include clock frequency errors. Select conversion time, taking clock frequency errors into consideration. 3. While in the hardware trigger wait mode, the conversion time includes the time spent waiting for stabilization after the hardware trigger is detected. 4. These are the numbers of clock cycles when conversion is with 10-bit resolution. When eight-bit resolution is selected, the values are shorter by two cycles of the conversion clock (fAD). Remark fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 712 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Table 12-3. A/D Conversion Time Selection (3/4) (3) 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V When there is no stabilization wait time (software trigger mode/hardware trigger no-wait mode) A/D Converter Mode Mode Register 0 (ADM0) Conversion Number of Conversion Clock (fAD) conversion 0 0 0 0 0 Time clocks FR2 FR1 FR0 LV1 LV0 Normal fCLK/64 1 Conversion Time Selection fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = 1 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz 16 MHz 32 MHz 38 s Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting (number of prohibite prohibite prohibite prohibite prohibite sampling d d d d d 19 fAD 1216/fCLK 0 0 1 fCLK/32 clocks: 7 608/fCLK 0 1 0 fCLK/16 fAD) 304/fCLK 0 1 1 fCLK/8 152/fCLK 1 0 0 fCLK/6 114/fCLK 38 s 19 s 38 s 19 s 9.5 s 38 s 19 s 9.5 s 4.75 s 28.5 s 14.25 s 7.125 s 3.5625 s 1 0 1 fCLK/5 23.75 s 95/fCLK 11.875 5.938 s s 1 1 0 fCLK/4 76/fCLK 1 1 1 fCLK/2 38/fCLK 38 s 2.9688 s 38 s 19 s 9.5 s 4.75 s 2.375 s 19 s 9.5 s 4.75 s 2.375 s Setting prohibite d 0 0 0 0 1 Normal fCLK/64 2 34 s Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting (number of prohibite prohibite prohibite prohibite prohibite sampling d d d d d 34 s 17 s 34 s 17 s 8.5 s 17 fAD 1088/fCLK 0 0 1 fCLK/32 0 1 0 fCLK/16 clocks: 5 544/fCLK fAD) 272/fCLK 0 1 1 fCLK/8 136/fCLK 34 s 17 s 8.5 s 4.25 s 1 0 0 fCLK/6 102/fCLK 25.5 s 12.75 s 6.375 s 3.1875 s 1 0 1 fCLK/5 85/fCLK 1 1 0 fCLK/4 68/fCLK 34 s 21.25 s 10.625 s s s 17 s 8.5 s 4.25 s 2.125 s 5.3125 2.6563 Note 1 1 1 fCLK/2 34/fCLK 34 s 17 s 8.5 s 4.25 s 2.125 s Setting Note prohibite d Other than above Note Setting prohibited This value is prohibited when using the temperature sensor. Cautions 1. When rewriting the FR2 to FR0, LV1, and LV0 bits to other than the same data, stop A/D conversion once (ADCS = 0) beforehand. 2. The above conversion time does not include clock frequency errors. Select conversion time, taking clock frequency errors into consideration. 3. These are the numbers of clock cycles when conversion is with 10-bit resolution. When eight-bit resolution is selected, the values are shorter by two cycles of the conversion clock (fAD). Remark fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 713 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Table 12-3. A/D Conversion Time Selection (4/4) (4) 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V When there is no stabilization wait time (software trigger mode/hardware trigger no-wait mode) A/D Converter Mode Mode Register 0 (ADM0) Conversion Number of Conversio Clock (fAD) conversion n Time FR2 FR1 FR0 LV1 LV0 0 0 0 0 0 clocks Normal fCLK/64 1 19 fAD 1216/fCLK (number of sampling 0 0 1 fCLK/32 0 1 0 fCLK/16 0 1 1 fCLK/8 152/fCLK 1 0 0 fCLK/6 114/fCLK clocks: 7 fAD) Conversion Time Selection fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = fCLK = 1 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz 16 MHz 32 MHz 38 s Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting prohibite prohibite prohibite prohibite prohibite d d d d d 38 s 19 s 38 s 19 s 9.5 s 38 s 19 s 9.5 s 4.75 s 28.5 s 14.25 s 7.125 s 3.5625 608/fCLK 304/fCLK s 1 0 1 fCLK/5 95/fCLK 1 1 0 fCLK/4 76/fCLK 1 1 1 fCLK/2 38/fCLK 23.75 s 11.875 5.938 s 38 s 19 s 9.5 s 4.75 s 19 s 9.5 s 4.75 s Setting s 38 s Setting prohibite d prohibite d 0 0 0 0 1 Normal fCLK/64 2 17 fAD 1088/fCLK (number of sampling 0 0 1 fCLK/32 0 1 0 fCLK/16 0 1 1 fCLK/8 136/fCLK 1 0 0 fCLK/6 102/fCLK clocks: 5 fAD) Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting prohibite prohibite prohibite prohibite prohibite d d d d 34 s d 34 s 17 s 34 s 17 s 8.5 s 34 s 17 s 8.5 s 4.25 s 25.5 s 12.75 s 6.375 s 3.1875 544/fCLK 272/fCLK s Note 1 0 1 fCLK/5 85/fCLK 1 1 0 fCLK/4 68/fCLK 1 1 1 fCLK/2 34/fCLK 34 s 21.25 s 10.625 34 s 17 s 17 s 8.5 s 4.25 s Setting 5.3125 Setting s s prohibite 8.5 s 4.25 s d prohibite d Other than above Note Setting prohibited This value is prohibited when using the temperature sensor. Cautions 1. When rewriting the FR2 to FR0, LV1, and LV0 bits to other than the same data, stop A/D conversion once (ADCS = 0) beforehand. 2. The above conversion time does not include clock frequency errors. Select conversion time, taking clock frequency errors into consideration. 3. These are the numbers of clock cycles when conversion is with 10-bit resolution. When eight-bit resolution is selected, the values are shorter by two cycles of the conversion clock (fAD). Remark fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 714 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Figure 12-5. A/D Converter Sampling and A/D Conversion Timing (Example for Software Trigger Mode) ADCS 1 or ADS rewrite ADCS Sampling timing INTAD SAR clear Sampling Successive conversion Transfer SAR to ADCR, clear INTAD generation Conversion time R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Sampling Conversion time 715 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.3 A/D converter mode register 1 (ADM1) This register is used to specify the A/D conversion trigger, conversion mode, and hardware trigger signal. The ADM1 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-6. Format of A/D Converter Mode Register 1 (ADM1) Address: FFF32H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADM1 ADTMD1 ADTMD0 ADSCM 0 0 0 ADTRS1 ADTRS0 ADTMD1 ADTMD0 0 Software trigger mode 1 0 Hardware trigger no-wait mode 1 1 Hardware trigger wait mode Selection of the A/D conversion trigger mode ADSCM Specification of the A/D conversion mode 0 Sequential conversion mode 1 One-shot conversion mode ADTRS1 ADTRS0 Selection of the hardware trigger signal 0 0 End of TAU0 channel 1 count or capture interrupt signal (INTTM01) 0 1 Trigger signal generated by the ADTRGS0 and ADTRGS1 registers Note 1 Event signal selected by ELC Note 2 1 0 Pretimed signal/alarm interrupt signal (INTRTC) 1 1 Setting prohibited Notes 1. Only in the RL78/F13. 2. Only in the RL78/F14. Cautions 1. Only rewrite the value of the ADM1 register while conversion operation is stopped (which is indicated by the ADCS bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) being 0). 2. To complete A/D conversion, specify at least the following time as the hardware trigger interval: Hardware trigger no wait mode: 2 fCLK clocks + A/D conversion time Hardware trigger wait mode: 2 fCLK clocks + stabilization wait time + A/D conversion time 3. In modes other than SNOOZE mode, input of the next INTRTC will not be recognized as a valid hardware trigger for up to four fCLK cycles after the first INTRTC is input. Remarks 1. : don't care 2. fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 716 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.4 A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2) This register is used to select the A/D converter reference voltage, check the upper limit and lower limit A/D conversion result values, select the resolution, and specify whether to use the SNOOZE mode. The ADM2 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-7. Format of A/D Converter Mode Register 2 (ADM2) (1/2) Address: F0010H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0> ADM2 ADREFP1 ADREFP0 ADREFM 0 ADRCK AWC 0 ADTYP ADREFP1 ADREFP0 0 0 Supplied from VDD 0 1 Supplied from P33/AVREFP/ANI0 1 0 Supplied from the internal reference voltage (1.45 V) 1 1 Setting prohibited Selection of the + side reference voltage source of the A/D converter When ADREFP1 or ADREFP0 bit is rewritten, this must be configured in accordance with the following procedures. (1) Set ADCE = 0 (2) Change the values of ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 (3) Stabilization wait time (A) (4) Set ADCE = 1 (5) Stabilization wait time (B) When ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 are set to 1 and 0, the setting is changed to A = 5 s, B = 1 s. When ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 are set to 0 and 0 or 0 and 1, A needs no wait and B = 1 s. Start A/D conversion after the wait time (5) specified above). When ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 are set to 1 and 0, respectively, A/D conversion cannot be performed on the temperature sensor output and internal reference voltage output. Be sure to perform A/D conversion while ADISS = 0. Selection of the side reference voltage source of the A/D converter ADREFM 0 Supplied from VSS 1 Supplied from P34/AVREFM/ANI1 ADRCK 0 Checking the upper limit and lower limit conversion result values The interrupt signal (INTAD) is output when the ADLL register the ADCR register the ADUL register (<1>). 1 The interrupt signal (INTAD) is output when the ADCR register < the ADLL register (<2>) or the ADUL register < the ADCR register (<3>). Figure 12-8 shows the generation range of the interrupt signal (INTAD) for <1> to <3>. Cautions 1. Only rewrite the value of the ADM2 register while conversion operation is stopped (which is indicated by the ADCS bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) being 0). 2. When entering STOP mode or HALT mode while the CPU is operating on the subsystem/lowspeed on-chip oscillator select clock, do not set ADREFP1 to 1. When the internal reference voltage is selected (ADREFP1, ADREFP0 = 1, 0), the current value defined in the supply current characteristics in CHAPTER 34 to CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS must be added. 3. When using AVREFP and AVREFM, specify ANI0 and ANI1 as the analog input channels and specify input mode by using the port mode register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 717 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Figure 12-7. Format of A/D Converter Mode Register 2 (ADM2) (2/2) Address: F0010H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0> ADM2 ADREFP1 ADREFP0 ADREFM 0 ADRCK AWC 0 ADTYP AWC Specification of the SNOOZE mode 0 Do not use the SNOOZE mode function. 1 Use the SNOOZE mode function. When there is a hardware trigger signal in the STOP mode, the STOP mode is exited, and A/D conversion is performed without operating the CPU (the SNOOZE mode). The SNOOZE mode function can only be specified when the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is selected for the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK). If any other clock is selected, specifying this mode is prohibited. Using the SNOOZE mode function in the software trigger mode or hardware trigger no-wait mode is prohibited. Using the SNOOZE mode function in the sequential conversion mode is prohibited. When using the SNOOZE mode function, specify a hardware trigger interval of at least "shift time to SNOOZE mode Note + A/D power supply stabilization wait time + A/D conversion time + 2 fCLK clocks". Even when using SNOOZE mode, be sure to set the AWC bit to 0 in normal operation mode and change it to 1 just before shifting to STOP mode. Also, be sure to change the AWC bit to 0 after returning from STOP mode to normal operation mode. If the AWC bit is left set to 1, A/D conversion will not start normally in spite of the subsequent SNOOZE or normal operation mode. ADTYP Note Selection of the A/D conversion resolution 0 10-bit resolution 1 8-bit resolution Refer to "From STOP to SNOOZE" in 23.3.3 SNOOZE mode. Caution Only rewrite the value of the ADM2 register while conversion operation is stopped (which is indicated by the ADCS bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) being 0). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 718 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Figure 12-8. ADRCK Bit Interrupt Signal Generation Range ADCR register value (A/D conversion result) 1111111111 <3> (ADUL < ADCR) INTAD is generated when ADRCK = 1. ADUL register setting <1> (ADLL ADCR ADUL) INTAD is generated when ADRCK = 0. ADLL register setting 0000000000 Remark <2> (ADCR < ADLL) INTAD is generated when ADRCK = 1. If INTAD does not occur, the A/D conversion result is not stored in the ADCR or ADCRH register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 719 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.5 10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR) This register is a 16-bit register that stores the A/D conversion result in the select mode. The lower 6 bits are fixed to 0. Each time A/D conversion ends, the conversion result is loaded from the successive approximation register (SAR). The higher 8 bits of the conversion result are stored in FFF1FH and the lower 2 bits are stored in the higher 2 bits of FFF1EH Note. The ADCR register can be read by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Note If the A/D conversion result is outside the range specified by using the A/D conversion result comparison function (the value specified by the ADRCK bit of the ADM2 register and ADUL/ADLL registers; see Figure 12-8), the result is not stored. Figure 12-9. Format of 10-bit A/D Conversion Result Register (ADCR) Address: FFF1FH, FFF1EH After reset: 0000H R FFF1FH Symbol ADCR FFF1EH 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cautions 1. When writing to the A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0), analog input channel specification register (ADS), and A/D port configuration register (ADPC), the contents of the ADCR register may become undefined. Read the conversion result following conversion completion before writing to the ADM0, ADS, and ADPC registers. Using timing other than the above may cause an incorrect conversion result to be read. 2. When 8-bit resolution A/D conversion is selected (when the ADTYP bit of A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2) is 1) and the ADCR register is read, 0 is read from the lower two bits (ADCR1 and ADCR0). 3. When the ADCR register is accessed in 16-bit units, the higher 10 bits of the conversion result are read in order starting at bit 15. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 720 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.6 8-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH) This register is an 8-bit register that stores the A/D conversion result. The higher 8 bits of 10-bit resolution are stored Note. The ADCRH register can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Note If the A/D conversion result is outside the range specified by using the A/D conversion result comparison function (the value specified by the ADRCK bit of the ADM2 register and ADUL/ADLL registers; see Figure 12-8), the result is not stored. Figure 12-10. Format of 8-bit A/D Conversion Result Register (ADCRH) Address: FFF1FH Symbol 7 After reset: 00H 6 5 R 4 3 2 1 0 ADCRH Caution When writing to the A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0), analog input channel specification register (ADS), and A/D port configuration register (ADPC), the contents of the ADCRH register may become undefined. Read the conversion result following conversion completion before writing to the ADM0, ADS, and ADPC registers. Using timing other than the above may cause an incorrect conversion result to be read. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 721 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.7 Analog input channel specification register (ADS) This register specifies the input channel of the analog voltage to be A/D converted. The ADS register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-11. Format of Analog Input Channel Specification Register (ADS) (1/2) Address: FFF31H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADS ADISS 0 0 ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Select mode (ADMD = 0) ADISS ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Analog input channel Input source 0 0 0 0 0 0 ANI0 P33/AVREFP/ANI0 0 0 0 0 0 1 ANI1 P34/AVREFM/ANI1 0 0 0 0 1 0 ANI2 P80/ANI2/ANO0 0 0 0 0 1 1 ANI3 P81/ANI3/IVCMP00 0 0 0 1 0 0 ANI4 P82/ANI4/IVCMP01 0 0 0 1 0 1 ANI5 P83/ANI5/IVCMP02 0 0 0 1 1 0 ANI6 P84/ANI6/IVCMP03 0 0 0 1 1 1 ANI7 P85/ANI7/IVREF0 0 0 1 0 0 0 ANI8 P86/ANI8 0 0 1 0 0 1 ANI9 P87/ANI9 0 0 1 0 1 0 ANI10 P90/ANI10 0 0 1 0 1 1 ANI11 P91/ANI11 0 0 1 1 0 0 ANI12 P92/ANI12 0 0 1 1 0 1 ANI13 P93/ANI13 0 0 1 1 1 0 ANI14 P94/ANI14 0 0 1 1 1 1 ANI15 P95/ANI15 0 1 0 0 0 0 ANI16 P96/ANI16 Note 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 ANI17 P97/ANI17 Note 2 0 1 0 0 1 0 ANI18 P100/ANI18 0 1 0 0 1 1 ANI19 P101/ANI19 0 1 0 1 0 0 ANI20 P102/ANI20 0 1 0 1 0 1 ANI21 P103/ANI21 0 1 0 1 1 0 ANI22 P104/ANI22 0 1 0 1 1 1 ANI23 P105/ANI23 0 1 1 0 0 0 ANI24 P125/ANI24 0 1 1 0 0 1 ANI25 P120/ANI25 0 1 1 0 1 0 ANI26 P96/ANI26 Note 3, P70/ANI26 Note 4 0 1 1 0 1 1 ANI27 P97/ANI27 Note 5, P71/ANI27 Note 6 0 1 1 1 0 0 ANI28 P72/ANI28 0 1 1 1 0 1 ANI29 P73/ANI29 0 1 1 1 1 0 ANI30 P74/ANI30 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- Temperature sensor output 1 0 0 0 0 1 -- Internal reference voltage output (1.45 V) Other than above Setting prohibited (Notes are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 722 RL78/F13, F14 Notes 1. CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER RL78/F14 products with 64 or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F14 products with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory. 2. RL78/F14 products with 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F14 products with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory. 3. RL78/F14 products with 64 or 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory, RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 64 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory. 4. RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F14 products with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory. 5. RL78/F14 products with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory, RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) or RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory. 6. RL78/F14 products with 48 or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F14 products with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 723 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Figure 12-11. Format of Analog Input Channel Specification Register (ADS) (2/2) Address: FFF31H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADS ADISS 0 0 ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Scan mode (ADMD = 1) ADISS ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Analog input channel Scan 0 Scan 1 Scan 2 Scan 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 ANI0 ANI1 ANI2 ANI3 0 0 0 0 0 1 ANI1 ANI2 ANI3 ANI4 0 0 0 0 1 0 ANI2 ANI3 ANI4 ANI5 0 0 0 0 1 1 ANI3 ANI4 ANI5 ANI6 0 0 0 1 0 0 ANI4 ANI5 ANI6 ANI7 0 0 0 1 0 1 ANI5 ANI6 ANI7 ANI8 0 0 0 1 1 0 ANI6 ANI7 ANI8 ANI9 0 0 0 1 1 1 ANI7 ANI8 ANI9 ANI10 0 0 1 0 0 0 ANI8 ANI9 ANI10 ANI11 0 0 1 0 0 1 ANI9 ANI10 ANI11 ANI12 0 0 1 0 1 0 ANI10 ANI11 ANI12 ANI13 0 0 1 0 1 1 ANI11 ANI12 ANI13 ANI14 0 0 1 1 0 0 ANI12 ANI13 ANI14 ANI15 0 1 0 0 0 0 ANI16 ANI17 ANI18 ANI19 0 1 0 0 0 1 ANI17 ANI18 ANI19 ANI20 0 1 0 0 1 0 ANI18 ANI19 ANI20 ANI21 0 1 0 0 1 1 ANI19 ANI20 ANI21 ANI22 0 1 0 1 0 0 ANI20 ANI21 ANI22 ANI23 Other than the above Setting prohibited Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 to 0. 2. Set the port that is set to analog input by the ADPC and PMCxx registers to the input mode by using port mode registers 3, 7 to 10, or 12 (PM3, PM7 to PM10, PM12). 3. Do not set the pin that is set by the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) as digital I/O by the ADS register. 4. Do not set the pin that is set by port mode control registers 7, 9, or 12 (PMC7, PMC9, PMC12) as digital I/O by the ADS register. 5. Only rewrite the value of the ADISS bit while A/D voltage comparator operation is stopped (which is indicated by the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) being 0). 6. If using AVREFP as the + side reference voltage source of the A/D converter, do not select ANI0 as an A/D conversion channel. 7. If using AVREFM as the - side reference voltage source of the A/D converter, do not select ANI1 as an A/D conversion channel. 8. If ADISS is set to 1, the internal reference voltage (1.45 V) cannot be used for the + side reference voltage source. In addition, the result of the first conversion after ADISS has been set to 1 is not usable. 9. When entering STOP mode or HALT mode while the CPU is operating on the subsystem/lowspeed on-chip oscillator select clock, do not set ADISS to 1. When ADISS is set to 1, the current value defined in the supply current characteristics in CHAPTER 34 to CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS must be added. 10. Ignore the conversion result if the corresponding ANI pin does not exist in the product used. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 724 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.8 Conversion result comparison upper limit setting register (ADUL) This register is used to specify the setting for checking the upper limit of the A/D conversion results. The A/D conversion results and ADUL register value are compared, and interrupt signal (INTAD) generation is controlled in the range specified for the ADRCK bit of A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2) (shown in Figure 12-8). The ADUL register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH. Figure 12-12. Format of Conversion Result Comparison Upper Limit Setting Register (ADUL) Address: F0011H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADUL ADUL7 ADUL6 ADUL5 ADUL4 ADUL3 ADUL2 ADUL1 ADUL0 Cautions 1. When A/D conversion with 10-bit resolution is selected, the higher eight bits of the 10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR) are compared with the value in the ADUL register. 2. Writing new values to the ADUL and ADLL registers is prohibited while conversion is enabled. Write new values to these registers while conversion is stopped (ADCE = 0). 3. The setting of the ADUL registers must be greater than that of the ADLL register. 12.3.9 Conversion result comparison lower limit setting register (ADLL) This register is used to specify the setting for checking the lower limit of the A/D conversion results. The A/D conversion results and ADLL register value are compared, and interrupt signal (INTAD) generation is controlled in the range specified for the ADRCK bit of A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2) (shown in Figure 12-8). The ADLL register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-13. Format of Conversion Result Comparison Lower Limit Setting Register (ADLL) Address: F0012H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADLL ADLL7 ADLL6 ADLL5 ADLL4 ADLL3 ADLL2 ADLL1 ADLL0 Cautions 1. When A/D conversion with 10-bit resolution is selected, the higher eight bits of the 10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR) are compared with the value in the ADLL register. 2. Writing new values to the ADUL and ADLL registers is prohibited while conversion is enabled. Write new values to these registers while conversion is stopped (ADCE = 0). 3. The setting of the ADUL registers must be greater than that of the ADLL register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 725 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.10 A/D test register (ADTES) This register is used to select the + side reference voltage (AVREFP) or - side reference voltage (AVREFM) of the A/D converter, or the analog input channel (ANIxx) as the A/D conversion target for the A/D test function. The ADTES register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-14. Format of A/D Test Register (ADTES) Address: F0013H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADTES 0 0 0 0 0 0 ADTES1 ADTES0 ADTES1 ADTES0 0 0 ANIxx (This is specified using the analog input channel specification register (ADS).) 1 0 AVREFM 1 1 AVREFP Other than the above A/D conversion target Setting prohibited Caution For details of the A/D test function, see CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 726 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.11 A/D port configuration register (ADPC) This register switches the ANI0/P33 to ANI23/P105 pins to analog input of A/D converter or digital I/O of port. The ADPC register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-15. Format of A/D Port Configuration Register (ADPC) Address: F0076H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 ADPC 0 0 0 4 ADPC4 Note 3 2 1 0 ADPC3 ADPC2 ADPC1 ADPC0 ANI0/AVREFP/P33 ANI1/AVREFM/P34 ANI2/ANO0/P80 ANI3/IVCMP00/P81 ANI4/IVCMP01/P82 ANI5/IVCMP02/P83 ANI6/IVCMP03/P84 ANI7/IVREF0/P85 ANI8/P86 ANI9/P87 ANI10/P90 ANI11/P91 ANI12/P92 ANI13/P93 ANI14/P94 ANI15/P95 ANI16/P96 ANI17/P97 ANI18/P100 ANI19/P101 ANI20/P102 ANI21/P103 ANI22/P104 ANI23/P105 ADPC0 ADPC1 ADPC2 ADPC3 ADPC4 Analog input (A)/digital I/O (D) switching 0 0 0 0 0 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 0 0 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 0 0 0 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A 0 0 0 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A 0 0 1 0 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A 0 0 1 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A 0 0 1 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A 0 0 1 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A 0 1 0 0 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A 0 1 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A 0 1 0 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A 0 1 0 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 0 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 0 0 D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 1 0 D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 1 1 D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 0 0 D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 0 1 D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 1 0 D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 1 1 D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 1 0 0 0 D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Other than above Setting prohibited (Note and Cautions are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 727 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Note Not provided in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory. Cautions 1. Set the port that is set to analog input by the ADPC register to the input mode by using port mode registers 3, 8 to 10, or 12 (PM3, PM8 to PM10, PM12). 2. Do not set the pin set by the ADPC register as digital I/O by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). 3. When using AVREFP and AVREFM, specify ANI0 and ANI1 as the analog input channels and specify input mode by using the port mode register. 12.3.12 A/D converter trigger select register 0 (ADTRGS0) (RL78/F13 only) This register is used to enable or disable operation trigger generation of the A/D converter when the timer RD0 input capture B/compare match B interrupt request is generated. Set this register while the timer RD0 input capture B/compare match B interrupt request is not generated. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-16. Format of A/D Converter Trigger Select Register 0 (ADTRGS0) Address: F0789H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADTRGS0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ADTRGS00 ADTRGS00 Selection of the operation trigger of the A/D converter when the timer RD0 input capture B/compare match B interrupt request is generated 0 The operation trigger of the A/D converter is not generated when the interrupt request is generated. 1 The operation trigger of the A/D converter is generated when the interrupt request is generated (A/D conversion is started). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 728 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.13 A/D converter trigger select register 1 (ADTRGS1) (RL78/F13 only) This register is used to enable or disable operation trigger generation of the A/D converter when the timer RJ0 interrupt request is generated. Set this register while the timer RJ0 interrupt request is not generated. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 12-17. Format of A/D Converter Trigger Select Register 1 (ADTRGS1) Address: F078DH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADTRGS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ADTRGS10 ADTRGS10 Selection of the operation trigger of the A/D converter when the timer RJ0 interrupt request is generated 0 The operation trigger of the A/D converter is not generated when the interrupt request is generated. 1 The operation trigger of the A/D converter is generated when the interrupt request is generated (A/D conversion is started). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 729 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.14 Port mode control registers 7, 9, and 12 (PMC7, PMC9, PMC12) These registers are used to switch the ANI24 to ANI30 pins between the analog input of the A/D converter and the digital I/O of the port. The PMC7, PMC9, and PMC12 registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH. Figure 12-18. Formats of Port Mode Control Registers 7, 9, and 12 (PMC7, PMC9, PMC12) Address: F0067H Symbol 7 PMC7 Symbol 7 Address: F006CH 5 1 After reset: FFH PMC97 R/W 6 1 Address: F0069H PMC9 After reset: FFH 1 PMC96 After reset: FFH Note 2 PMC73 2 Note 1 PMC72 1 Note 1 PMC71 0 Note 1 PMC70 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PMC12 1 1 PMC125 1 1 1 1 PMC120 PMC <R> PMC74 3 Note 1 R/W 6 Note 2 4 Digital I/O/analog input selection 0 Digital I/O (dual-use function other than analog input) 1 Analog input Notes 1. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. PMC71 to PMC74 bits in the RL78/F14 products with 64 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory. PMC73 bit in the RL78/F14 products with 48 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory. 2. The ADPC and PMC9 registers are used to select the digital I/O or analog input functions for the P96/ANI16 and P97/ANI17 pins and for the P96/ANI26 and P97/ANI27 pins, respectively. For details on pin functions allocated to each product, see 1.5 Pin Configurations. Cautions 1. Set port pins specified as analog input pins to input mode by using port mode register x (PMx). <R> 2. Be sure to set bits for pins that are not present to their initial values , and see Note 1 for PMC71 to PMC74. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 730 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.3.15 Port mode registers 3, 7 to 10, and 12 (PM3, PM7 to PM10, PM12) When using the ANI0/P33 to ANI23/P105 and ANI24/P125 to ANI30/P74 pins for an analog input port, set the PMmn bit to 1. The output latches of PMmn at this time may be 0 or 1. If the PMmn bits are set to 0, they cannot be used as analog input port pins. The PMm registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH. Cautions 1. Available pins differ depending on the products. For details, see CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS. 2. If a pin is set as an analog input port, not the pin level but 0 is always read. Remark m = 3, 7 to 10, 12; n = 0 to 7 Figure 12-19. Formats of Port Mode Registers 3, 7 to 10, and 12 (PM3, PM7 to PM10, PM12) (100-pin Products in the RL78/F14) Address: FFF23H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM3 1 1 1 PM34 PM33 1 1 1 Address: FFF27H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM7 1 1 1 PM74 PM73 PM72 PM71 PM70 Address: FFF28H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM8 PM87 PM86 PM85 PM84 PM83 PM82 PM81 PM80 Address: FFF29H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM9 PM97 PM96 PM95 PM94 PM93 PM92 PM91 PM90 Address: FFF2AH After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM10 1 1 PM105 PM104 PM103 PM102 PM101 PM100 Address: FFF2CH After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM12 1 1 PM125 1 1 1 1 PM120 PM bit I/O mode selection 0 Output mode (output buffer on) 1 Input mode (output buffer off) Caution When using AVREFP and AVREFM, specify ANI0 and ANI1 as the analog input channels and specify input mode by using the port mode register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 731 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER The ANI0/P33 to ANI23/P105 pins are as shown below depending on the settings of the A/D port configuration register (ADPC), analog input channel specification register (ADS), PM3, PM8, PM9, and PM10 registers. Table 12-4. Setting Functions of ANI0/P33 to ANI23/P105 Pins ADPC Digital I/O selection Analog input selection PM3, PM8, PM9, PM10 ADS ANI0/P33 to ANI23/P105 Pins Input mode Digital input Output mode Digital output Input mode Output mode Selects ANI. Analog input (to be converted) Does not select ANI. Analog input (not to be converted) Selects ANI. Setting prohibited Does not select ANI. The ANI24 to ANI30 pins are as shown below depending on the settings of port mode control registers 7, 9, and 12 (PMC7, PMC9, PMC12), analog input channel specification register (ADS), PM7, PM9, and PM12 registers. Table 12-5. Setting Functions of ANI24 to ANI30 Pins PMC7, PMC9, and PM7, PM9, and PM12 ADS ANI24 to ANI30 Pins PMC12 Digital I/O selection Analog input selection Input mode Digital input Output mode Digital output Input mode Output mode Selects ANI. Analog input (to be converted) Does not select ANI. Analog input (not to be converted) Selects ANI. Setting prohibited Does not select ANI. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 732 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.4 A/D Converter Conversion Operations The A/D converter conversion operations are described below. <1> The voltage input to the selected analog input channel is sampled by the sample & hold circuit. <2> When sampling has been done for a certain time, the sample & hold circuit is placed in the hold state and the sampled voltage is held until the A/D conversion operation has ended. <3> Bit 9 of the successive approximation register (SAR) is set. The series resistor string voltage tap is set to (1/2) AVREF by the tap selector. <4> The voltage difference between the series resistor string voltage tap and sampled voltage is compared by the voltage comparator. If the analog input is greater than (1/2) AVREF, the MSB bit of the SAR register remains set to 1. If the analog input is smaller than (1/2) AVREF, the MSB bit is reset to 0. <5> Next, bit 8 of the SAR register is automatically set to 1, and the operation proceeds to the next comparison. The series resistor string voltage tap is selected according to the preset value of bit 9, as described below. Bit 9 = 1: (3/4) AVREF Bit 9 = 0: (1/4) AVREF The voltage tap and sampled voltage are compared and bit 8 of the SAR register is manipulated as follows. Sampled voltage Voltage tap: Bit 8 = 1 Sampled voltage < Voltage tap: Bit 8 = 0 <6> Comparison is continued in this way up to bit 0 of the SAR register. <7> Upon completion of the comparison of 10 bits, an effective digital result value remains in the SAR register, and the result value is transferred to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) and then latched Note 1. At the same time, the A/D conversion end interrupt request (INTAD) can also be generated Note 1. <8> Repeat steps <1> to <7>, until the ADCS bit is cleared to 0 Note 2. To stop the A/D converter, clear the ADCS bit to 0. Notes 1. If the A/D conversion result is outside the range specified by using the A/D conversion result comparison function (the value specified by the ADRCK bit of the ADM2 register and ADUL/ADLL registers; see Figure 12-8), the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is not generated and no A/D conversion results are stored in the ADCR and ADCRH registers. 2. While in the sequential conversion mode, the ADCS flag is not automatically cleared to 0. This flag is not automatically cleared to 0 while in the one-shot conversion mode of the hardware trigger no-wait mode, either. Instead, 1 is retained. Remarks 1. Two types of the A/D conversion result registers are available. ADCR register (16 bits): Store 10-bit A/D conversion value ADCRH register (8 bits): Store 8-bit A/D conversion value 2. AVREF: The + side reference voltage of the A/D converter. This can be selected from AVREFP, the internal reference voltage (1.45 V), and VDD. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 733 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Figure 12-20. Conversion Operation of A/D Converter (Software Trigger Mode) ADCS 1 or ADS rewrite Conversion time Sampling time A/D converter operation SAR SAR clear Sampling A/D conversion Undefined ADCR Conversion result Conversion result INTAD A/D conversion operations are performed continuously until bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is reset (0) by software. If a write operation is performed to the analog input channel specification register (ADS) during an A/D conversion operation, the conversion operation is initialized, and if the ADCS bit is set (1), conversion starts again from the beginning. Reset signal generation clears the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) to 0000H or 00H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 734 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.5 Input Voltage and Conversion Results The relationship between the analog input voltage input to the analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI23, ANI24 to ANI30) and the theoretical A/D conversion result (stored in the 10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR)) is shown by the following expression. SAR = INT ( VAIN AVREF 1024 + 0.5) ADCR = SAR 64 or ( ADCR 64 0.5) where, INT( ): AVREF 1024 VAIN < ( ADCR 64 + 0.5) AVREF 1024 Function which returns integer part of value in parentheses VAIN: Analog input voltage AVREF: AVREF pin voltage ADCR: A/D conversion result register (ADCR) value SAR: Successive approximation register Figure 12-21 shows the relationship between the analog input voltage and the A/D conversion result. Figure 12-21 Relationship Between Analog Input Voltage and A/D Conversion Result SAR ADCR 1023 FFC0H 1022 FF80H 1021 FF40H 3 00C0H 2 0080H 1 0040H A/D conversion result 0 0000H 1 1 3 2 5 3 2048 1024 2048 1024 2048 1024 2043 1022 2045 1023 2047 1 2048 1024 2048 1024 2048 Input voltage/AVREF Remark AVREF: The + side reference voltage of the A/D converter. This can be selected from AVREFP, the internal reference voltage (1.45 V), and VDD. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 735 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6 A/D Converter Operation Modes The operation of each A/D converter mode is described below. In addition, the procedure for specifying each mode is described in 12.7 A/D Converter Setup Flowchart. 12.6.1 Software trigger mode (select mode, sequential conversion mode) <1> In the stop status, the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <2> After the software counts up to the stabilization wait time (1 s), the ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set to 1 to perform the A/D conversion of the analog input specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). <3> When A/D conversion ends, the conversion result is stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH), and the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. After A/D conversion ends, the next A/D conversion immediately starts. <4> When ADCS is overwritten with 1 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is discarded. <5> When the value of the ADS register is rewritten or overwritten during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and A/D conversion is performed on the analog input respecified by the ADS register. The partially converted data is discarded. <6> Even if a hardware trigger is input during conversion operation, A/D conversion does not start. <7> When ADCS is cleared to 0 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <8> When ADCE is cleared to 0 while in the A/D conversion standby status, the A/D converter enters the stop status. When ADCE = 0, specifying 1 for ADCS is ignored and A/D conversion does not start. Figure 12-22. Example of Software Trigger Mode (Select Mode, Sequential Conversion Mode) Operation Timing <1> ADCE is set to 1. ADCE ADCS The trigger is not acknowledged. ADCE is cleared to 0. <8> <2> ADCS is set to 1 while in the conversion standby status. <4> <3> A/D conversion <3> ends and the next conversion starts. Stop Conversion status standby Data 1 (ANI0) ADCR, ADCRH Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) <6> ADCS is cleared to <7> 0 during A/D conversion operation. A hardware trigger is generated (and ignored). ADS is rewritten during <5> A/D conversion operation (from ANI0 to ANI1). Data 2 (ANI1) <3> Data 1 (ANI0) ADS A/D conversion status ADCS is overwritten with 1 during A/D conversion operation. Conversion is <3> interrupted and restarts. Data 1 Data 1 (ANI0) (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 2 (ANI1) The trigger is not acknowledged. Conversion is interrupted. <3> Data 2 (ANI1) Conversion Stop standby status Data 2 (ANI1) INTAD R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 736 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6.2 Software trigger mode (select mode, one-shot conversion mode) <1> In the stop status, the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <2> After the software counts up to the stabilization wait time (1 s), the ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set to 1 to perform the A/D conversion of the analog input specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). <3> When A/D conversion ends, the conversion result is stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH), and the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. <4> After A/D conversion ends, the ADCS bit is automatically cleared to 0, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <5> When ADCS is overwritten with 1 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is discarded. <6> When the value of the ADS register is rewritten or overwritten during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and A/D conversion is performed on the analog input respecified by the ADS register. The partially converted data is discarded. <7> When ADCS is cleared to 0 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <8> When ADCE is cleared to 0 while in the A/D conversion standby status, the A/D converter enters the stop status. When ADCE = 0, specifying 1 for ADCS is ignored and A/D conversion does not start. In addition, A/D conversion does not start even if a hardware trigger is input while in the A/D conversion standby status. Figure 12-23. Example of Software Trigger Mode (Select Mode, One-Shot Conversion Mode) Operation Timing ADCE is cleared to 0. <8> <1> ADCE is set to 1. ADCE The trigger is not acknowledged. ADCS is ADCS is set to <2> 1 while in the <4> automatically <2> cleared to conversion 0 after standby status. <2> conversion ends. ADCS Stop Conversion status standby Data 1 (ANI0) A/D <3> conversion ends. Conversion Data 1 standby (ANI0) ADCR, ADCRH <4> <6> ADS is rewritten during A/D conversion operation (from ANI0 to ANI1). Data 2 (ANI1) Data 1 (ANI0) ADS A/D conversion status ADCS is overwritten <4> <5> with 1 during A/D conversion operation. Data 1 (ANI0) Conversion is interrupted and restarts. Data 1 (ANI0) <2> ADCS is <7> cleared to 0 during A/D conversion operation. Conversion is interrupted. <3> <3> Conversion standby Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) The trigger is not acknowledged. Conversion Data 2 standby (ANI1) Conversion standby Stop status Data 2 (ANI1) INTAD R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 737 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6.3 Software trigger mode (scan mode, sequential conversion mode) <1> In the stop status, the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <2> After the software counts up to the stabilization wait time (1 s), the ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set to 1 to perform A/D conversion on the four analog input channels specified by scan 0 to scan 3, which are specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). A/D conversion is performed on the analog input channels in order, starting with that specified by scan 0. <3> A/D conversion is sequentially performed on the four analog input channels, the conversion results are stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) each time conversion ends, and the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. After A/D conversion of the four channels ends, the A/D conversion of the channel following the specified channel automatically starts (until all four channels are finished). <4> When ADCS is overwritten with 1 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts at the first channel. The partially converted data is discarded. <5> When the value of the ADS register is rewritten or overwritten during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and A/D conversion is performed on the first channel respecified by the ADS register. The partially converted data is discarded. <6> Even if a hardware trigger is input during conversion operation, A/D conversion does not start. <7> When ADCS is cleared to 0 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <8> When ADCE is cleared to 0 while in the A/D conversion standby status, the A/D converter enters the stop status. When ADCE = 0, specifying 1 for ADCS is ignored and A/D conversion does not start. Figure 12-24. Example of Software Trigger Mode (Scan Mode, Sequential Conversion Mode) Operation Timing <1> ADCE is set to 1. ADCE The trigger is not acknowledged. ADCS ADCE is cleared to 0. <8> <2> ADCS is set to 1 while in the conversion standby status. <4> ADCS is overwritten with 1 during A/D conversion operation. ADCS is cleared A hardware trigger is <6> <7> to 0 during A/D generated (and ignored). conversion operation. The trigger is not acknowledged. <5> ADS is rewritten during A/D conversion operation. ADS ANI0 to ANI3 ANI4 to ANI7 A/D conversion ends and the <3> next conversion starts. A/D conversion status Stop Conversion Data 1 Data 2 status standby (ANI0) (ANI1) Data 3 (ANI2) Data 4 (ANI3) Data 1 (ANI0) ADCR, ADCRH Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 3 (ANI2) Data 4 (ANI3) <3> Conversion is interrupted and restarts. Data 2 (ANI1) Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI2) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 4 Data 1 (ANI3) (ANI0) Conversion is interrupted and restarts. Data 2 (ANI1) Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 (ANI1) (ANI2) (ANI3) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 1 (ANI0) Conversion is interrupted. <3> Data 6 (ANI5) Data 7 (ANI6) Data 8 (ANI7) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 6 (ANI5) Data 7 (ANI6) Data 8 (ANI7) Data 6 (ANI5) Conversion standby Stop status Data 5 (ANI4) INTAD The interrupt is generated four times. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 The interrupt is generated four times. The interrupt is generated four times. 738 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6.4 Software trigger mode (scan mode, one-shot conversion mode) <1> In the stop status, the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <2> After the software counts up to the stabilization wait time (1 s), the ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set to 1 to perform A/D conversion on the four analog input channels specified by scan 0 to scan 3, which are specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). A/D conversion is performed on the analog input channels in order, starting with that specified by scan 0. <3> A/D conversion is sequentially performed on the four analog input channels, the conversion results are stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) each time conversion ends, and the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. <4> After A/D conversion of the four channels ends, the ADCS bit is automatically cleared to 0, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <5> When ADCS is overwritten with 1 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts at the first channel. The partially converted data is discarded. <6> When the value of the ADS register is rewritten or overwritten during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and A/D conversion is performed on the first channel respecified by the ADS register. The partially converted data is discarded. <7> When ADCS is cleared to 0 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <8> When ADCE is cleared to 0 while in the A/D conversion standby status, the A/D converter enters the stop status. When ADCE = 0, specifying 1 for ADCS is ignored and A/D conversion does not start. In addition, A/D conversion does not start even if a hardware trigger is input while in the A/D conversion standby status. Figure 12-25. Example of Software Trigger Mode (Scan Mode, One-Shot Conversion Mode) Operation Timing <1> ADCE is set to 1. ADCE ADCS The trigger is not acknowledged. ADCE is cleared to 0. <8> <2> ADCS is set to 1 while in the conversion standby status. <4> ADCS is automatically<2> cleared to 0 after conversion ends. <5> ADCS is overwritten with 1 during A/D conversion operation. <4> ADCS is cleared <7> to 0 during A/D conversion operation. <2> The trigger is not acknowledged. <6> ADS is rewritten during A/D conversion operation. ADS ANI4 to ANI7 ANI0 to ANI3 <3> A/D conversion A/D conversion status Stop Conversion Data 1 Data 2 status standby (ANI0) (ANI1) Data 3 (ANI2) Data 4 (ANI3) ADCR, ADCRH Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 3 (ANI2) ends. Conversion Data 1 Data 2 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Conversion Data 1 standby (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI2) (ANI3) standby (ANI0) Data 4 (ANI3) Conversion is interrupted and restarts. Conversion is <3> interrupted and restarts. Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 Data 3 (ANI1) (ANI2) Data 4 (ANI3) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 6 (ANI5) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 7 (ANI6) Data 6 (ANI5) Conversion is interrupted. Data 8 (ANI7) Conversion Stop standby status Data 7 (ANI6) INTAD The interrupt is generated four times. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 The interrupt is generated four times. 739 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6.5 Hardware trigger no-wait mode (select mode, sequential conversion mode) <1> In the stop status, the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <2> After the software counts up to the stabilization wait time (1 s), the ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set to 1 to place the system in the hardware trigger standby status (and conversion does not start at this stage). Note that, while in this status, A/D conversion does not start even if ADCS is set to 1. <3> If a hardware trigger is input while ADCS = 1, A/D conversion is performed on the analog input specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). <4> When A/D conversion ends, the conversion result is stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH), and the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. After A/D conversion ends, the next A/D conversion immediately starts. <5> If a hardware trigger is input during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is discarded. <6> When the value of the ADS register is rewritten or overwritten during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and A/D conversion is performed on the analog input respecified by the ADS register. The partially converted data is discarded. <7> When ADCS is overwritten with 1 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is discarded. <8> When ADCS is cleared to 0 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. However, the A/D converter does not stop in this status. <9> When ADCE is cleared to 0 while in the A/D conversion standby status, the A/D converter enters the stop status. When ADCS = 0, inputting a hardware trigger is ignored and A/D conversion does not start. Figure 12-26. Example of Hardware Trigger No-Wait Mode (Select Mode, Sequential Conversion Mode) Operation Timing ADCE is cleared to 0. <9> <1> ADCE is set to 1. ADCE <2> ADCS is set to 1. <5> A hardware trigger is generated during A/D conversion operation. <3> A hardware trigger is generated. Hardware trigger Trigger The trigger is not standby acknowledged. status ADCS Data 1 (ANI0) <4> A/D conversion ends and the next conversion<4> starts. ADS A/D conversion status Stop status Conversion standby Data 1 (ANI0) ADCR, ADCRH Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) The trigger is not acknowledged. ADCS is overwritten <7> ADCS is cleared <8> with 1 during A/D to 0 during A/D conversion operation. conversion operation. <6> ADS is rewritten during A/D conversion operation (from ANI0 to ANI1). Data 2 (ANI1) Conversion is interrupted and Conversion Conversion is Conversion is is interrupted. restarts. <4> interrupted <4> interrupted <4> and restarts. and restarts. Data 2 Data 2 Data 2 Data 1 Data 2 Conversion Data 1 (ANI1) (ANI1) (ANI1) (ANI0) (ANI1) standby (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Stop status Data 2 (ANI1) INTAD R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 740 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6.6 Hardware trigger no-wait mode (select mode, one-shot conversion mode) <1> In the stop status, the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <2> After the software counts up to the stabilization wait time (1 s), the ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set to 1 to place the system in the hardware trigger standby status (and conversion does not start at this stage). Note that, while in this status, A/D conversion does not start even if ADCS is set to 1. <3> If a hardware trigger is input while ADCS = 1, A/D conversion is performed on the analog input specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). <4> When A/D conversion ends, the conversion result is stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH), and the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. <5> After A/D conversion ends, the ADCS bit remains set to 1, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <6> If a hardware trigger is input during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is discarded. <7> When the value of the ADS register is rewritten or overwritten during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and A/D conversion is performed on the analog input respecified by the ADS register. The partially converted data is discarded. <8> When ADCS is overwritten with 1 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is discarded. <9> When ADCS is cleared to 0 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. However, the A/D converter does not stop in this status. <10> When ADCE is cleared to 0 while in the A/D conversion standby status, the A/D converter enters the stop status. When ADCS = 0, inputting a hardware trigger is ignored and A/D conversion does not start. Figure 12-27. Example of Hardware Trigger No-Wait Mode (Select Mode, One-Shot Conversion Mode) Operation Timing ADCE is cleared to 0. <10> <1> ADCE is set to 1. <2> ADCS is set to 1. ADCE <3>A hardware trigger <3> is generated. Hardware trigger <6> A hardware trigger is generated during A/D conversion operation. The trigger is not Trigger ADCS retains<5> acknowledged. standby the value 1. status <3> <5> ADCS <3> <3> ADCS is overwritten with 1 during <8> A/D conversion <5> operation. <5> <7>ADS is rewritten during A/D conversion operation (from ANI0 to ANI1). Data 1 (ANI0) ADS Stop status Conversion standby <9> ADCS is cleared to 0 during A/D conversion operation. Data 2 (ANI1) <4> A/D conversion ends. A/D conversion status Trigger standby status Data 1 (ANI0) ADCR, ADCRH Conversion standby Conversion is interrupted and restarts. Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) <4> Conversion standby Conversion is interrupted and restarts. <4> Conversion is interrupted and restarts. <4> Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Conversion Data 2 standby (ANI1) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 2 (ANI1) Conversion standby Conversion is interrupted. Data 2 Conversion Stop (ANI1) standby status Data 2 (ANI1) INTAD R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 741 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6.7 Hardware trigger no-wait mode (scan mode, sequential conversion mode) <1> In the stop status, the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <2> After the software counts up to the stabilization wait time (1 s), the ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set to 1 to place the system in the hardware trigger standby status (and conversion does not start at this stage). Note that, while in this status, A/D conversion does not start even if ADCS is set to 1. <3> If a hardware trigger is input while ADCS = 1, A/D conversion is performed on the four analog input channels specified by scan 0 to scan 3, which are specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). A/D conversion is performed on the analog input channels in order, starting with that specified by scan 0. <4> A/D conversion is sequentially performed on the four analog input channels, the conversion results are stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) each time conversion ends, and the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. After A/D conversion of the four channels ends, the A/D conversion of the channel following the specified channel automatically starts. <5> If a hardware trigger is input during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts at the first channel. The partially converted data is discarded. <6> When the value of the ADS register is rewritten or overwritten during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and A/D conversion is performed on the first channel respecified by the ADS register. The partially converted data is discarded. <7> When ADCS is overwritten with 1 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is discarded. <8> When ADCS is cleared to 0 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. However, the A/D converter does not stop in this status. <9> When ADCE is cleared to 0 while in the A/D conversion standby status, the A/D converter enters the stop status. When ADCE = 0, specifying 1 for ADCS is ignored and A/D conversion does not start. Figure 12-28. Example of Hardware Trigger No-Wait Mode (Scan Mode, Sequential Conversion Mode) Operation Timing <1> ADCE is set to 1. ADCE ADCE is cleared to 0. <9> <2> ADCS is set to 1. <5> A hardware trigger is generated during A/D conversion operation. <3> A hardware trigger is generated. Hardware trigger The trigger is not acknowledged. Trigger The trigger standby is not status acknowledged. Trigger standby status ADCS is overwritten <7> with 1 during A/D conversion operation. ADCS is cleared to 0 <8> during A/D conversion operation. ADCS <6> ADS is rewritten during A/D conversion operation. A/D conversion status ADCR, ADCRH ANI4 to ANI7 ANI0 to ANI3 ADS A/D conversion <4> ends and the next conversion starts. Stop status Conversion Data 1 standby (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 3 (ANI2) Data 4 (ANI3) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 3 (ANI2) Data 4 (ANI3) Data 2 (ANI1) Conversion is interrupted and restarts. <4> Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI2) Data 4 Data 1 (ANI3) (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Conversion is interrupted and restarts. Data 2 (ANI1) Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 (ANI1) (ANI2) (ANI3) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 1 (ANI0) Conversion is interrupted and restarts. <4> Data 6 (ANI5) Data 7 (ANI6) Data 8 (ANI7) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 6 (ANI5) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 6 (ANI5) Data 7 (ANI6) Data 8 (ANI7) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 7 (ANI6) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 6 (ANI5) Data 6 (ANI5) <4> Data 7 Data 8 (ANI6) (ANI7) Data 5 Data 6 (ANI4) (ANI5) Data 7 (ANI6) Conversion is interrupted. Data 5 Conversion Stop (ANI4) standby status Data 8 (ANI7) INTAD The interrupt is generated four times. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 The interrupt is generated four times. The interrupt is generated four times. The interrupt is generated four times. 742 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6.8 Hardware trigger no-wait mode (scan mode, one-shot conversion mode) <1> In the stop status, the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <2> After the software counts up to the stabilization wait time (1 s), the ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set to 1 to place the system in the hardware trigger standby status (and conversion does not start at this stage). Note that, while in this status, A/D conversion does not start even if ADCS is set to 1. <3> If a hardware trigger is input while ADCS = 1, A/D conversion is performed on the four analog input channels specified by scan 0 to scan 3, which are specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). A/D conversion is performed on the analog input channels in order, starting with that specified by scan 0. <4> A/D conversion is sequentially performed on the four analog input channels, the conversion results are stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) each time conversion ends, and the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. <5> After A/D conversion of the four channels ends, the ADCS bit remains set to 1, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <6> If a hardware trigger is input during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts at the first channel. The partially converted data is discarded. <7> When the value of the ADS register is rewritten or overwritten during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and A/D conversion is performed on the first channel respecified by the ADS register. The partially converted data is discarded. <8> When ADCS is overwritten with 1 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts at the first channel. The partially converted data is discarded. <9> When ADCS is cleared to 0 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. However, the A/D converter does not stop in this status. <10> When ADCE is cleared to 0 while in the A/D conversion standby status, the A/D converter enters the stop status. When ADCS = 0, inputting a hardware trigger is ignored and A/D conversion does not start. Figure 12-29. Example of Hardware Trigger No-Wait Mode (Scan Mode, One-Shot Conversion Mode) Operation Timing <1> ADCE is set to 1. ADCE Hardware trigger ADCE is cleared to 0. <10> <2> ADCS is set to 1. <3> A hardware trigger is generated. The trigger is not Trigger acknowledged. standby status <3> <6> A hardware trigger is generated during A/D conversion operation. <5> ADCS retains <5> the value 1. ADS is rewritten <7> during A/D conversion operation. ANI0 to ANI3 ANI4 to ANI7 <4> A/D Conversion is interrupted and restarts. conversion ends. A/D conversion status ADCR, ADCRH Stop Conversion status standby Conversion standby status <8> ADCS is overwritten <9> ADCS is cleared with 1 during A/D to 0 during A/D conversion operation. conversion operation. <5> ADCS ADS <3> <3> Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Conversion Data 1 (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI2) (ANI3) standby (ANI0) Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI2) Data 4 (ANI3) Data 2 (ANI1) Conversion is interrupted and restarts. <4> Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Conversion Data 1 (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI2) (ANI3) standby (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 Data 3 (ANI1) (ANI2) Data 4 (ANI3) Data 2 (ANI1) Conversion is Conversion is interrupted. interrupted and restarts. <4> Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data 8 Conversion Data 5 (ANI4) (ANI5) (ANI6) (ANI7) standby (ANI4) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 (ANI4) (ANI5) (ANI6) Data 8 (ANI7) Data 6 (ANI5) Data 5 Data 6 (ANI4) (ANI5) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 7 (ANI6) Conversion Stop standby status Data 6 (ANI5) INTAD The interrupt is generated four times. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 The interrupt is generated four times. The interrupt is generated four times. 743 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6.9 Hardware trigger wait mode (select mode, sequential conversion mode) <1> In the stop status, the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1, and the system enters the hardware trigger standby status. <2> If a hardware trigger is input while in the hardware trigger standby status, A/D conversion is performed on the analog input specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). The ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is automatically set to 1 according to the hardware trigger input. <3> When A/D conversion ends, the conversion result is stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH), and the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. After A/D conversion ends, the next A/D conversion immediately starts. (At this time, no hardware trigger is necessary.) <4> If a hardware trigger is input during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is discarded. <5> When the value of the ADS register is rewritten or overwritten during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and A/D conversion is performed on the analog input respecified by the ADS register. The partially converted data is discarded. <6> When ADCS is overwritten with 1 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is discarded. <7> When ADCS is cleared to 0 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, the system enters the hardware trigger standby status, and the A/D converter enters the stop status. When ADCE = 0, inputting a hardware trigger is ignored and A/D conversion does not start. Figure 12-30. Example of Hardware Trigger Wait Mode (Select Mode, Sequential Conversion Mode) Operation Timing <1> ADCE is set to 1. ADCE <2> A hardware trigger is generated. Hardware trigger The trigger is not acknowledged. ADCS Trigger standby status Data 1 (ANI0) ADS A/D conversion status <4> A hardware trigger is generated during A/D conversion operation. <3> A/D conversion ends and the next conversion<3> starts. Stop status Data 1 (ANI0) ADCR, ADCRH Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Trigger The trigger standby is not status acknowledged. ADCS is overwritten <6> ADCS is cleared <7> to 0 during A/D with 1 during A/D conversion operation. conversion operation. <5> ADS is rewritten during A/D conversion operation (from ANI0 to ANI1). Data 2 (ANI1) Conversion is Conversion is Conversion is interrupted and Conversion is interrupted interrupted. restarts. interrupted <3> and restarts.<3> <3> and restarts. Data 1 Data 2 Data 2 Data 1 Data 2 Data 2 Stop status (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI1) (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI1) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 2 (ANI1) INTAD R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 744 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6.10 Hardware trigger wait mode (select mode, one-shot conversion mode) <1> In the stop status, the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1, and the system enters the hardware trigger standby status. <2> If a hardware trigger is input while in the hardware trigger standby status, A/D conversion is performed on the analog input specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). The ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is automatically set to 1 according to the hardware trigger input. <3> When A/D conversion ends, the conversion result is stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH), and the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. <4> After A/D conversion ends, the ADCS bit is automatically cleared to 0, and the A/D converter enters the stop status. <5> If a hardware trigger is input during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is discarded. <6> When the value of the ADS register is rewritten or overwritten during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and A/D conversion is performed on the analog input respecified by the ADS register. The partially converted data is discarded. <7> When ADCS is overwritten with 1 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is initialized. <8> When ADCS is cleared to 0 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, the system enters the hardware trigger standby status, and the A/D converter enters the stop status. When ADCE = 0, inputting a hardware trigger is ignored and A/D conversion does not start. Figure 12-31. Example of Hardware Trigger Wait Mode (Select Mode, One-Shot Conversion Mode) Operation Timing <1> ADCE is set to 1. ADCE <2> A hardware trigger is generated. Hardware trigger <2> <5> A hardware trigger is generated during A/D conversion operation. Trigger ADCS is automatically The trigger is not standby <4> acknowledged. status cleared to 0 after conversion ends. ADCS <2> <2> <4> <7> ADCS is overwritten<4> <4> Trigger standby status <2> with 1 during A/D conversion operation. is rewritten <6> ADS during A/D conversion <8> ADCS is cleared to 0 during A/D conversion operation. operation (from ANI0 to ANI1). ADS <3> A/D conversion ends. A/D conversion status Data 2 (ANI1) Conversion is interrupted and restarts.<3> Data 1 (ANI0) Stop status Data 1 (ANI0) ADCR, ADCRH Stop status Data 1 (ANI0) Conversion is interrupted <3> and restarts. Stop Data 1 status (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Stop status Conversion is interrupted and restarts. <3> Data 2 (ANI1) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 2 (ANI1) Conversion is interrupted. Stop Data 2 status (ANI1) Stop status Data 2 (ANI1) INTAD R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 745 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6.11 Hardware trigger wait mode (scan mode, sequential conversion mode) <1> In the stop status, the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <2> If a hardware trigger is input while in the hardware trigger standby status, A/D conversion is performed on the four analog input channels specified by scan 0 to scan 3, which are specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). The ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is automatically set to 1 according to the hardware trigger input. A/D conversion is performed on the analog input channels in order, starting with that specified by scan 0. <3> A/D conversion is sequentially performed on the four analog input channels, the conversion results are stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) each time conversion ends, and the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. After A/D conversion of the four channels ends, the A/D conversion of the channel following the specified channel automatically starts. <4> If a hardware trigger is input during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts at the first channel. The partially converted data is discarded. <5> When the value of the ADS register is rewritten or overwritten during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and A/D conversion is performed on the first channel respecified by the ADS register. The partially converted data is discarded. <6> When ADCS is overwritten with 1 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is discarded. <7> When ADCS is cleared to 0 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, the system enters the hardware trigger standby status, and the A/D converter enters the stop status. When ADCE = 0, inputting a hardware trigger is ignored and A/D conversion does not start. Figure 12-32. Example of Hardware Trigger Wait Mode (Scan Mode, Sequential Conversion Mode) Operation Timing <1> ADCE is set to 1. ADCE <4> A hardware trigger is generated during A/D conversion operation. <2> A hardware trigger is generated. Hardware trigger The trigger is not acknowledged. Trigger The trigger standby is not status acknowledged. Trigger standby status ADCS is overwritten <6> with 1 during A/D conversion operation. ADCS is cleared <7> to 0 during A/D conversion operation. ADCS <5> ADS is rewritten during A/D conversion operation. ADS A/D conversion status ADCR, ADCRH ANI4 to ANI7 ANI0 to ANI3 A/D conversion <3> ends and the next conversion starts. Stop status Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 3 (ANI2) Data 4 (ANI3) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 3 (ANI2) Data 4 (ANI3) <3> Conversion is interrupted and restarts. <3> Conversion is interrupted and restarts. Data 2 (ANI1) Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI2) Data 1 (ANI0) Data 4 Data 1 (ANI3) (ANI0) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 (ANI1) (ANI2) (ANI3) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 1 (ANI0) <3> Conversion is interrupted and restarts. Data 6 (ANI5) Data 7 (ANI6) Data 8 (ANI7) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 6 (ANI5) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 6 (ANI5) Data 7 (ANI6) Data 8 (ANI7) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 7 (ANI6) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 6 (ANI5) Data 6 (ANI5) Data 7 Data 8 (ANI6) (ANI7) Data 5 Data 6 (ANI4) (ANI5) Data 7 (ANI6) Conversion is interrupted. Data 5 (ANI4) Stop status Data 8 (ANI7) INTAD The interrupt is generated four times. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 The interrupt is generated four times. The interrupt is generated four times. The interrupt is generated four times. 746 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.6.12 Hardware trigger wait mode (scan mode, one-shot conversion mode) <1> In the stop status, the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1, and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. <2> If a hardware trigger is input while in the hardware trigger standby status, A/D conversion is performed on the four analog input channels specified by scan 0 to scan 3, which are specified by the analog input channel specification register (ADS). The ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is automatically set to 1 according to the hardware trigger input. A/D conversion is performed on the analog input channels in order, starting with that specified by scan 0. <3> A/D conversion is sequentially performed on the four analog input channels, the conversion results are stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) each time conversion ends, and the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. <4> After A/D conversion ends, the ADCS bit is automatically cleared to 0, and the A/D converter enters the stop status. <5> If a hardware trigger is input during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts at the first channel. The partially converted data is discarded. <6> When the value of the ADS register is rewritten or overwritten during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and A/D conversion is performed on the first channel respecified by the ADS register. The partially converted data is discarded. <7> When ADCS is overwritten with 1 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, and conversion restarts. The partially converted data is discarded. <8> When ADCS is cleared to 0 during conversion operation, the current A/D conversion is interrupted, the system enters the hardware trigger standby status, and the A/D converter enters the stop status. When ADCE = 0, inputting a hardware trigger is ignored and A/D conversion does not start. Figure 12-33. Example of Hardware Trigger Wait Mode (Scan Mode, One-Shot Conversion Mode) Operation Timing <1> ADCE is set to 1. ADCE <2> A hardware trigger is generated. <2> Hardware trigger The trigger is not Trigger acknowledged. standby ADCS status ADS <5> A hardware trigger is generated during A/D conversion operation. ADCS is automatically <4> cleared to 0 after conversion ends. <4> ANI0 to ANI3 ADCR, ADCRH Stop status <7> ADCS is overwritten<8> ADCS is cleared with 1 during A/D conversion operation. to 0 during A/D conversion operation. <4> ADS is rewritten <6> during A/D conversion operation. ANI4 to ANI7 Conversion is interrupted and restarts. <3> A/D conversion ends. A/D conversion status Conversion standby The trigger is not status acknowledged. <2> <2> Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI2) (ANI3) Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI2) Stop status Data 1 (ANI0) Data 4 (ANI3) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 (ANI0) (ANI1) (ANI2) (ANI3) Data 1 (ANI0) Conversion is interrupted and restarts. <4> Data 2 Data 3 (ANI1) (ANI2) Stop status Data 1 (ANI0) Data 4 (ANI3) Data 2 (ANI1) Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data 8 (ANI4) (ANI5) (ANI6) (ANI7) Data 1 (ANI0) Conversion is Conversion is interrupted. interrupted and restarts. <4> Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 (ANI4) (ANI5) (ANI6) Stop status Data 5 (ANI4) Data 8 (ANI7) Data 6 (ANI5) Data 5 Data 6 (ANI4) (ANI5) Data 5 (ANI4) Data 7 (ANI6) Stop status Data 6 (ANI5) INTAD The interrupt is generated four times. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 The interrupt is generated four times. The interrupt is generated four times. 747 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.7 A/D Converter Setup Flowchart The A/D converter setup flowchart in each operation mode is described below. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 748 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.7.1 Setting up software trigger mode Figure 12-34. Setting up Software Trigger Mode Start of setup PER0 register setting The ADCEN bit of the PER0 register is set (1), and supplying the clock starts. The ports are set to analog input. Note 1 ADPC and PMCxx register settings ANI0 to ANI23 pins: Set using the ADPC register ANI24 to ANI30 pins: Set using the PMCxx register PM register setting The ports are set to the input mode. * ADM0 register FR2 to FR0, LV1, and LV0 bits: These are used to specify the A/D conversion time. ADMD bit: Select mode/scan mode * ADM1 register ADTMD1 and ADTMD0 bits: These are used to specify the software trigger mode. ADSCM bit: Sequential conversion mode/one-shot conversion mode * ADM0 register setting * ADM1 register setting * ADM2 register setting * ADUL/ADLL register setting * ADS register setting (The order of the settings is irrelevant.) * ADM2 register ADREFP1, ADREFP0, and ADREFM bits: These are used to select the reference voltage source. ADRCK bit: This is used to select the range of values for comparison with the result of A/D conversion in the generation of interrupt signals in response to results being in either area 1 or areas 3 and 2. ADTYP bit: 8-bit/10-bit resolution * ADUL/ADLL register These are used to specify the upper limit and lower limit A/D conversion result comparison values. * ADS register ADS4 to ADS0 bits: These are used to select the analog input channels. Stabilization wait time count A ADCE bit setting Stabilization wait time count B ADCS bit setting Waiting for the time indicated by A below may be required for the results of conversion to become stable after a change to the values of the ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 bits if the given condition holds. If the values of ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 are changed to 1 and 0, respectively: A = 5 s A wait is not required if the values of ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 are changed to 0 and 0 or 0 and 1, respectively. The ADCE bit of the ADM0 register is set (1), and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. The software counts up to the stabilization wait time (1 s). After counting up to the stabilization wait time B ends, the ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set (1), and A/D conversion starts. Start of A/D conversion The A/D conversion operations are performed. End of A/D conversion Storage of conversion results in the ADCR and ADCRH registers Notes 1. 2. The A/D conversion end interrupt (INTAD) is generated. Note 2 The conversion results are stored in the ADCR and ADCRH registers. Depends on the products. Depending on the settings of the ADRCK bit and ADUL/ADLL registers, there is a possibility of no interrupt signal being generated. In this case, the results are not stored in the ADCR and ADCRH registers. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 749 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.7.2 Setting up hardware trigger no-wait mode Figure 12-35. Setting up Hardware Trigger No-Wait Mode Start of setup PER0 register setting The ADCEN bit of the PER0 register is set (1), and supplying the clock starts. The ports are set to analog input. Note 1 A D P C and P M C x x reg ister settings PM register setting ANI0 to ANI23 pins: Set using the ADPC register ANI24 to ANI30 pins: Set using the PMCxx register The ports are set to the input mode. * ADM0 register FR2 to FR0, LV1, and LV0 bits: These are used to specify the A/D conversion time. ADMD bit: Select mode/scan mode * * * * * ADM0 register setting ADM1 register setting ADM2 register setting ADUL/ADLL register setting ADS register setting (The order of the settings is irrelevant.) * ADM1 register ADTMD1 and ADTMD0 bits: These are used to specify the hardware trigger no-wait mode. ADSCM bit: Sequential conversion mode/one-shot conversion mode * ADM2 register ADREFP1, ADREFP0, and ADREFM bits: These are used to select the reference voltage source. ADRCK bit: This is used to select the range of values for comparison with the result of A/D conversion in the generation of interrupt signals in response to results being in either area 1 or areas 3 and 2. ADTYP bit: 8-bit/10-bit resolution * ADUL/ADLL register These are used to specify the upper limit and lower limit A/D conversion result comparison values. * ADS register ADS4 to ADS0 bits: These are used to select the analog input channels. Stabilization wait time count A ADCE bit setting S tabilization w ait tim e count B ADCS bit setting Waiting for the time indicated by A below may be required for the results of conversion to become stable after a change to the values of the ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 bits if the given condition holds. If the values of ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 are changed to 1 and 0, respectively: A = 5 s A wait is not required if the values of ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 are changed to 0 and 0 or 0 and 1, respectively. The ADCE bit of the ADM0 register is set (1), and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. The software counts up to the stabilization wait time (1 s). After counting up to the stabilization wait time B ends, the ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set (1), and the system enters the hardware trigger standby status. Hardware trigger standby status Start of A/D conversion by generating a hardware trigger The A/D conversion operations are performed. End of A/D conversion S torage of conversion results in the AD C R and AD C R H registers Notes 1. 2. The A/D conversion end interrupt (INTAD) is generated. Note 2 The conversion results are stored in the ADCR and ADCRH registers. Depends on the products. Depending on the settings of the ADRCK bit and ADUL/ADLL registers, there is a possibility of no interrupt signal being generated. In this case, the results are not stored in the ADCR and ADCRH registers. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 750 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.7.3 Setting up hardware trigger wait mode Figure 12-36. Setting up Hardware Trigger Wait Mode Start of setup P E R 0 register se ttin g The ADCEN bit of the PER0 register is set (1), and supplying the clock starts. The ports are set to analog input. Note 1 A D P C and P M C x x reg ister settings PM register setting ANI0 to ANI23 pins: Set using the ADPC register ANI24 to ANI30 pins: Set using the PMCxx register The ports are set to the input mode. * ADM0 register FR2 to FR0, LV1, and LV0 bits: These are used to specify the A/D conversion time. ADMD bit: Select mode/scan mode * * * * * ADM0 register setting ADM1 register setting ADM2 register setting ADUL/ADLL register setting ADS register setting (The order of the settings is irrelevant.) * ADM1 register ADTMD1 and ADTMD0 bits: These are used to specify the hardware trigger wait mode. ADSCM bit: Sequential conversion mode/one-shot conversion mode ADTRS1 and ADTRS0 bits: These are used to select the hardware trigger signal. * ADM2 register ADREFP1, ADREFP0, and ADREFM bits: These are used to select the reference voltage source. ADRCK bit: This is used to select the range of values for comparison with the result of A/D conversion in the generation of interrupt signals in response to results being in either area 1 or areas 3 and 2. AWC bit: This is used to set up the SNOOZE mode function. ADTYP bit: 8-bit/10-bit resolution * ADUL/ADLL register These are used to specify the upper limit and lower limit A/D conversion result comparison values. * ADS register ADS4 to ADS0 bits: These are used to select the analog input channels. Stabilization wait time count ADCE bit setting Waiting for the time indicated by A below may be required for the results of conversion to become stable after a change to the values of the ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 bits if the given condition holds. If the values of ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 are changed to 1 and 0, respectively: A = 5 s A wait is not required if the values of ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 are changed to 0 and 0 or 0 and 1, respectively. The ADCE bit of the ADM0 register is set (1), and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. Hardware trigger generation Stabilization wait time for A/D power supply Start of A/D conversion The system automatically counts up to the stabilization wait time for A/D power supply. After counting up to the stabilization wait time ends, A/D conversion starts. The A/D conversion operations are performed. End of A/D conversion Storage of conversion results in the ADCR and ADCRH registers Notes 1. 2. The A/D conversion end interrupt (INTAD) is generated.Note 2 The conversion results are stored in the ADCR and ADCRH registers. Depends on the products. Depending on the settings of the ADRCK bit and ADUL/ADLL registers, there is a possibility of no interrupt signal being generated. In this case, the results are not stored in the ADCR and ADCRH registers. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 751 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.7.4 Setup when using temperature sensor (example for software trigger mode and one-shot conversion mode) Figure 12-37. Setup When Using Temperature Sensor Start of setup PER0 register setting The ADCEN bit of the PER0 register is set (1), and supplying the clock starts. * ADM0 register FR2 to FR0, LV1, and LV0 bits: These are used to specify the A/D conversion time. ADMD bit: This is used to specify the select mode. * ADM1 register ADTMD1 and ADTMD0 bits: These are used to specify the software trigger mode. ADSCM bit: One-shot conversion mode * ADM0 register setting * ADM1 register setting * ADM2 register setting * ADUL/ADLL register setting * ADS register setting * ADM2 register ADREFP1, ADREFP0, and ADREFM bits: These are used to select the reference voltage source. ADRCK bit: This is used to select the range of values for comparison with the result of A/D conversion in the generation of interrupt signals in response to results being in either area 1 or areas 3 and 2. ADTYP bit: 8-bit/10-bit resolution * ADUL/ADLL register These are used to specify the upper limit and lower limit A/D conversion result comparison values. * ADS register ADISS and ADS4 to ADS0 bits: These are used to select temperature sensor output or internal reference voltage output. Stabilization wait time count A ADCE bit setting The ADCE bit of the ADM0 register is set (1), and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. Stabilization wait time count B If a temperature sensor output/internal reference voltage output (ADISS bit of ADS register = 1) is selected as the analog input channel: B = 1 s ADCS bit setting First A/D conversion time After counting up to the stabilization wait time B ends, the ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set (1), and A/D conversion starts. Start of A/D conversion End of A/D conversion ADCS bit setting Second A/D conversion time Waiting for the time indicated by A below may be required for the results of conversion to become stable after a change to the values of the ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 bits if the given condition holds. A wait is not required if the values of ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 are changed to 0 and 0 or 0 and 1, respectively. Setting the values of ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 to 1 and 0, respectively is prohibited. The A/D conversion end interrupt (INTAD) will be generated. After ADISS is set (1), the initial conversion result cannot be used. The ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set (1), and A/D conversion starts. Start of A/D conversion End of A/D conversion Storage of conversion results in the ADCR and ADCRH registers The A/D conversion end interrupt (INTAD) is generated. Note The conversion results are stored in the ADCR and ADCRH registers. Note Depending on the settings of the ADRCK bit and ADUL/ADLL registers, there is a possibility of no interrupt signal being generated. In this case, the results are not stored in the ADCR and ADCRH registers. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 752 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.7.5 Setting up test mode Figure 12-38. Setting up Test Trigger Mode Start of setup P E R 0 register se ttin g A D P C and P M C x x register settings PM register setting The ADCEN bit of the PER0 register is set (1), and supplying the clock starts. The ports are set to analog input. Note 1 ANI0 to ANI23 pins: Set using the ADPC register ANI24 to ANI30 pins: Set using the PMCxx register The ports are set to the input mode. * ADM0 register FR2 to FR0, LV1, and LV0 bits: These bits are used to specify the A/D conversion time. ADMD bit: This is used to specify the select mode. * ADM1 register ADTMD1 and ADTMD0 bits: These are used to specify the software trigger mode. ADSCM bit: This is used to specify the one-shot conversion mode. * * * * * * ADM0 register setting ADM1 register setting ADM2 register setting ADUL/ADLL register setting ADS register setting ADTES register setting (The order of the settings is irrelevant.) * ADM2 register ADREFP1, ADREFP0, and ADREFM bits: These are used to select VDD and VSS for the reference voltage source. ADRCK bit: This is used to set the range of values for comparison with the result of A/D conversion in the generation of interrupt signals in response to results being in area 2. ADTYP bit: This is used to specify 10-bit resolution. * ADUL/ADLL register The ADUL and ADLL registers are set to FFH and 00H, respectively (initial values). * ADS register ADS4 to ADS0 bits: These are used to specify ANI0. * ADTES register ADTES1, ADTES0 bits: AVREFM/AVREFP Stabilization wait time count A ADCE bit setting Stabilization wait time count B ADCS bit setting Waiting for the time indicated by A below may be required for the results of conversion to become stable after a change to the values of the ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 bits if the given condition holds. If the values of ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 are changed to 1 and 0, respectively: A = 5 s A wait is not required if the values of ADREFP1 and ADREFP0 are changed to 0 and 0 or 0 and 1, respectively. The ADCE bit of the ADM0 register is set (1), and the system enters the A/D conversion standby status. The software counts up to the stabilization wait time (1 s). After counting up to the stabilization wait time B ends, the ADCS bit of the ADM0 register is set (1), and A/D conversion starts. Start of A/D conversion The A/D conversion operations are performed. End of A/D conversion S torage of conversion results in the AD CR and AD CRH registers Notes 1. 2. The A/D conversion end interrupt (INTAD) is generated.Note 2 The conversion results are stored in the ADCR and ADCRH registers. Depends on the products. Depending on the settings of the ADRCK bit and ADUL/ADLL registers, there is a possibility of no interrupt signal being generated. In this case, the results are not stored in the ADCR and ADCRH registers. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 753 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.8 SNOOZE Mode Function In the SNOOZE mode, A/D conversion is triggered by inputting a hardware trigger in the STOP mode. Normally, A/D conversion is stopped while in the STOP mode, but, by using the SNOOZE mode, A/D conversion can be performed without operating the CPU by inputting a hardware trigger. This is effective for reducing the operation current. If the A/D conversion result range is specified using the ADUL and ADLL registers, A/D conversion results can be judged at a certain interval of time in SNOOZE mode. Using this function enables power supply voltage monitoring and input key judgment based on A/D inputs. In the SNOOZE mode, only the following two conversion modes can be used: Hardware trigger wait mode (select mode, one-shot conversion mode) Hardware trigger wait mode (scan mode, one-shot conversion mode) Caution The SNOOZE mode can only be specified when the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is selected for fCLK. Figure 12-39. Block Diagram When Using SNOOZE Mode Function Real-time clock (RTC), event link controller (ELC) Hardware trigger input Clock request signal (internal signal) Clock generator A/D converter A/D conversion end interrupt request signalNote 1 (INTAD) High-speed on-chip oscillator clock When using the SNOOZE mode function, the initial setting of each register is specified before switching to the STOP mode. (For details about these settings, see 12.7.3 Setting up hardware trigger wait modeNote 2.) At this time, bit 2 (AWC) of A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2) is set to 1. After the initial settings are specified, bit 0 (ADCE) of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) is set to 1. If a hardware trigger is input after switching to the STOP mode, the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is supplied to the A/D converter. After supplying this clock, the system automatically counts up to the stabilization wait time, and then A/D conversion starts. The SNOOZE mode operation after A/D conversion ends differs depending on whether an interrupt signal is generatedNote 1. Notes 1. Depending on the setting of the A/D conversion result comparison function (ADRCK bit, ADUL/ADLL register), there is a possibility of no interrupt signal being generated. 2. Be sure to set the ADM1 register to E1H, E2H, or E3H. Remark The hardware trigger is event selected by ELC, INTRTC, or INTTM01. Specify the hardware trigger by using the A/D converter mode register 1 (ADM1). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 754 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.8.1 If an interrupt is generated after A/D conversion ends If the A/D conversion result value is inside the range of values specified by the A/D conversion result comparison function (which is set up by using the ADRCK bit and ADUL/ADLL register), the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. While in the select mode When A/D conversion ends and an A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated, the A/D converter returns to normal operation mode from SNOOZE mode. At this time, be sure to clear bit 2 (AWC = 0: SNOOZE mode release) of the A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2). If the AWC bit is left set to 1, A/D conversion will not start normally in the subsequent SNOOZE or normal operation mode. While in the scan mode If even one A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated during A/D conversion of the four channels, the A/D converter switches from the SNOOZE mode to the normal operation mode. At this time, be sure to clear bit 2 (AWC = 0: SNOOZE mode release) of the A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2). If the AWC bit is left set to 1, A/D conversion will not start normally in the subsequent SNOOZE or normal operation mode. Figure 12-40. Operation Example When Interrupt Is Generated After A/D Conversion Ends (While in Scan Mode) INTRTC Clock request signal (internal signal) The clock request signal remains at the high level. ADCS Conversion channels Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Interrupt signal (INTAD) An interrupt is generated when conversion on one of the channels ends. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 755 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.8.2 If no interrupt is generated after A/D conversion ends If the A/D conversion result value is outside the range of values specified by the A/D conversion result comparison function (which is set up by using the ADRCK bit and ADUL/ADLL register), the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is not generated. While in the select mode If the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is not generated after A/D conversion ends, the clock request signal (an internal signal) is automatically set to the low level, and supplying the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock stops. If a hardware trigger is input later, A/D conversion work is again performed in the SNOOZE mode. While in the scan mode If the A/D conversion end interrupt request signal (INTAD) is not generated even once during A/D conversion of the four channels, the clock request signal (an internal signal) is automatically set to the low level after A/D conversion of the four channels ends, and supplying the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock stops. If a hardware trigger is input later, A/D conversion work is again performed in the SNOOZE mode. Figure 12-41. Operation Example When No Interrupt Is Generated After A/D Conversion Ends (While in Scan Mode) INTRTC Clock request signal (internal signal) The clock request signal is set to the low level. ADCS Conversion channels Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Interrupt signal (INTAD) No interrupt is generated when conversion ends for any channel. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 756 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.9 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table Here, special terms unique to the A/D converter are explained. (1) Resolution This is the minimum analog input voltage that can be identified. That is, the percentage of the analog input voltage per bit of digital output is called 1LSB (Least Significant Bit). The percentage of 1LSB with respect to the full scale is expressed by %FSR (Full Scale Range). 1LSB is as follows when the resolution is 10 bits. 1LSB = 1/210 = 1/1024 = 0.098%FSR Accuracy has no relation to resolution, but is determined by overall error. (2) Overall error This shows the maximum error value between the actual measured value and the theoretical value. Zero-scale error, full-scale error, integral linearity error, and differential linearity errors that are combinations of these express the overall error. Note that the quantization error is not included in the overall error in the characteristics table. (3) Quantization error When analog values are converted to digital values, a 1/2LSB error naturally occurs. In an A/D converter, an analog input voltage in a range of 1/2LSB is converted to the same digital code, so a quantization error cannot be avoided. Note that the quantization error is not included in the overall error, zero-scale error, full-scale error, integral linearity error, and differential linearity error in the characteristics table. Figure 12-42. Overall Error Figure 12-43. Quantization Error 1......1 1......1 Overall error Digital output Digital output Ideal line 1/2LSB Quantization error 1/2LSB 0......0 AVREF 0 0......0 Analog input 0 Analog input AVREF (4) Zero-scale error This shows the difference between the actual measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical value (1/2LSB) when the digital output changes from 0......000 to 0......001. If the actual measurement value is greater than the theoretical value, it shows the difference between the actual measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical value (3/2LSB) when the digital output changes from 0......001 to 0......010. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 757 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (5) Full-scale error This shows the difference between the actual measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical value (Full-scale 3/2LSB) when the digital output changes from 1......110 to 1......111. (6) Integral linearity error This shows the degree to which the conversion characteristics deviate from the ideal linear relationship. It expresses the maximum value of the difference between the actual measurement value and the ideal straight line when the zeroscale error and full-scale error are 0. (7) Differential linearity error While the ideal width of code output is 1LSB, this indicates the difference between the actual measurement value and the ideal value. Figure 12-44. Zero-Scale Error Figure 12-45. Full-Scale Error Full-scale error Ideal line 011 010 001 Zero-scale error Digital output (Lower 3 bits) Digital output (Lower 3 bits) 111 111 110 101 Ideal line 000 000 0 1 2 3 AVREF-3 0 AVREF AVREF-2 AVREF-1 AVREF Analog input (LSB) Analog input (LSB) Figure 12-46. Integral Linearity Error Figure 12-47. Differential Linearity Error 1......1 1......1 Ideal 1LSB width Digital output Digital output Ideal line Integral linearity error 0......0 0 Analog input Differential linearity error 0......0 0 AVREF Analog input AVREF (8) Conversion time This expresses the time from the start of sampling to when the digital output is obtained. The sampling time is included in the conversion time in the characteristics table. (9) Sampling time This is the time the analog switch is turned on for the analog voltage to be sampled by the sample & hold circuit. Sampling time R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Conversion time 758 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER 12.10 Cautions for A/D Converter (1) Operating current in STOP mode Shift to STOP mode after stopping the A/D converter (by setting bit 7 (ADCS) of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) to 0). The operating current can be reduced by setting bit 0 (ADCE) of the ADM0 register to 0 at the same time. To restart from the standby status, clear bit 0 (ADIF) of interrupt request flag register 1H (IF1H) to 0 and start operation. (2) Input range of ANI0 to ANI23 and ANI24 to ANI30 pins Observe the rated range of the ANI0 to ANI23 and ANI24 to ANI30 pins input voltage. If a voltage higher than VDD and AVREFP and less than VSS and AVREFM (even in the range of absolute maximum ratings) is input to an analog input channel, the converted value of that channel becomes undefined. In addition, the converted values of the other channels may also be affected. When internal reference voltage (1.45 V) is selected reference voltage source for the + side of the A/D converter, do not input a voltage higher than the internal reference voltage to a pin selected by the ADS register. However, it is no problem that a voltage higher than the internal reference voltage is input to a pin not selected by the ADS register. (3) Conflicting operations <1> Conflict between the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) write and the ADCR or ADCRH register read by instruction upon the end of conversion The ADCR or ADCRH register read has priority. After the read operation, the new conversion result is written to the ADCR or ADCRH registers. <2> Conflict between the ADCR or ADCRH register write and the A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) write, the analog input channel specification register (ADS), or A/D port configuration register (ADPC) write upon the end of conversion The ADM0, ADS, or ADPC registers write has priority. The ADCR or ADCRH register write is not performed, nor is the conversion end interrupt signal (INTAD) generated. (4) Noise countermeasures To maintain the 10-bit resolution, attention must be paid to noise input to the AVREFP, VDD, ANI0 to ANI23, and ANI24 to ANI30 pins. <1> Connect a capacitor with a low equivalent resistance and a good frequency response to the power supply. <2> The higher the output impedance of the analog input source, the greater the influence. To reduce the noise, connecting external C as shown in Figure 12-48 is recommended. <3> Do not switch these pins with other pins during conversion. <4> The accuracy is improved if the HALT mode is set immediately after the start of conversion. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 759 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER Figure 12-48. Analog Input Pin Connection If there is a possibility that noise equal to or higher than AVREFP and VDD or equal to or lower than AVREFM and VSS may enter, clamp with a diode with a small VF value (0.3 V or lower). Reference voltage input AVREFP or VDD ANI0 to ANI23, ANI24 to ANI30 C = 100 to 1,000 pF (5) Analog input (ANIn) pins <1> The analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI23, ANI24 to ANI30) are also used as input port pins (P33, P34, P70 to P74, P80 to P87, P90 to P97, P100 to P105, P120, P125). Do not change the output values for the port-pin functions P33, P34, P70 to P74, P80 to P87, P90 to P97, P100 to P105, P120, and P125 while A/D conversion of the signals on the ANI0 to ANI23 or ANI24 to ANI30 pins is selected and conversion is in progress, since doing so may lower the precision of the results of conversion. <2> When a pin adjacent to one on which A/D conversion is in progress is used as a digital I/O port pin, coupling may lead to noise that causes the results of A/D conversion to differ from the expected values. Be sure to prevent the input or output of pulses on such pins while conversion is in progress. (6) Input impedance of analog input (ANIn) pins This A/D converter charges a sampling capacitor for sampling during sampling time. Therefore, only a leakage current flows when sampling is not in progress, and a current that charges the capacitor flows during sampling. Consequently, the input impedance fluctuates depending on whether sampling is in progress, and on the other states. To make sure that sampling is effective, however, it is recommended to keep the output impedance of the analog input source to within 1 k, and to connect a capacitor of about 100 pF to the ANI0 to ANI23 and ANI24 to ANI30 pins (see Figure 12-48). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 760 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (7) Interrupt request flag (ADIF) The interrupt request flag (ADIF) is not cleared even if the analog input channel specification register (ADS) is changed. Therefore, if an analog input pin is changed during A/D conversion, the A/D conversion result and ADIF flag for the prechange analog input may be set just before the ADS register rewrite. Caution is therefore required since, at this time, when ADIF flag is read immediately after the ADS register rewrite, ADIF flag is set despite the fact A/D conversion for the post-change analog input has not ended. When A/D conversion is stopped and then resumed, clear ADIF flag before the A/D conversion operation is resumed. Figure 12-49. Timing of A/D Conversion End Interrupt Request Generation ADS rewrite (start of ANIn conversion) A/D conversion ANIn ADCR ADS rewrite (start of ANIm conversion) ANIn ANIn ADIF is set but ANIm conversion has not ended. ANIm ANIn ANIm ANIm ANIm ADIF (8) Conversion results just after A/D conversion start While in the software trigger mode or hardware trigger no-wait mode, the first A/D conversion value immediately after A/D conversion starts may not fall within the rating range if the ADCS bit is set to 1 within 1 s after the ADCE bit was set to 1. Take measures such as polling the A/D conversion end interrupt request (INTAD) and removing the first conversion result. (9) A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) read operation When a write operation is performed to A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0), analog input channel specification register (ADS), A/D port configuration register (ADPC), and port mode control register xx (PMCxx), the contents of the ADCR and ADCRH registers may become undefined. Read the conversion result following conversion completion before writing to the ADM0, ADS, ADPC, or PMC register. Using a timing other than the above may cause an incorrect conversion result to be read. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 761 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER (10) Internal equivalent circuit The equivalent circuit of the analog input block is shown below. Figure 12-50. Internal Equivalent Circuit of ANIn Pin R1 ANIn C1 C2 Table 12-6. Resistance and Capacitance Values of Equivalent Circuit (Reference Values) AVREFP, VDD ANIn Pins R1 [k] C1 [pF] C2 [pF] 3.6 V VDD 5.5 V ANI0 to ANI23 14 8 2.5 ANI24 to ANI30 18 8 7.0 ANI0 to ANI23 39 8 2.5 ANI24 to ANI30 53 8 7.0 2.7 V VDD < 3.6 V Remark The resistance and capacitance values shown in Table 12-6 are not guaranteed values. (11) Starting the A/D converter Start the A/D converter after the AVREFP and VDD voltages stabilize. (12) Temperature sensor output If the internal reference voltage (1.45 V) is selected as the reference voltage of comparator 0 or comparator 1 in RL78/F14, the temperature sensor output cannot be selected. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 762 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) The D/A converter is an 8-bit resolution R-2R type unit used to control analog outputs. 13.1 Function of D/A Converter The D/A converter has the following features. 8-bit resolution R-2R ladder type Analog output voltage 8-bit resolution: VDD x m8/256 (m8: Value set to DACS0 register) Operation mode Normal mode Real-time output mode R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 763 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) 13.2 Configuration of D/A Converter Figure 13-1 shows the block diagram of the D/A converter. Figure 13-1. Block Diagram of D/A Converter ANO0EN bit (DAM2) ANO0/P80/ANI2 pin VDD pin Sele ctor VS S pin Inte rnal reference vo ltag e (comparator) DACE0 (DAM) Write signa l o f DA CS0 regi ster DAMD0 (DAM) ELCREQ0 D/A co nverte r mode regi ster 2 (DAM2) D/A co nverte r mode regi ster (DAM) Inte rnal bus Remarks 1. ELCREQ0 is a trigger signal (request signal from the ELC) that is used in the real-time output mode. 2. The internal reference voltage (comparator) is used to select the reference voltage of the comparator. When setting bits 5 and 4 (CVRS1 and CVRS0) in the comparator I/O select register (CMPSEL) to 10B (internal reference voltage (DAC output) is selected), set the ANO0EN bit in this register to 0 (analog output is disabled). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 764 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) 13.3 Registers of D/A Converter The D/A converter uses the following six registers. A/D port configuration register (ADPC) Peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) D/A converter mode register (DAM) D/A converter mode register 2 (DAM2) D/A conversion value setting register 0 (DACS0) Port mode register 8 (PM8) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 765 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) 13.3.1 A/D Port Configuration Register (ADPC) This register switches the ANI0/P33 to ANI23/P105 pins to either analog input or port digital I/O. When the D/A converter is used, this register should be used to set the ANI2/ANO0/P80 pin to analog input. Set the ADPC register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 13-2. Format of A/D Port Configuration Register (ADPC) Address: F0076H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADPC 0 0 0 ADPC4 ADPC3 ADPC2 ADPC1 ADPC0 Switching between analog input (A) and digital input/output (D) ANI21/P103 ANI20/P102 ANI18/P100 ANI17/P97 ANI15/P95 ANI14/P94 ANI12/P92 ANI11/P91 ANI8/P86 ANI7/IVREF0/P85 ANI6/IVCMP03/P84 ANI5/IVCMP02/P83 ANI4/IVCMP01/P82 ANI2/ANO0/P80 ANI1/P34 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 0 0 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 0 0 0 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A 0 0 0 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A 0 0 1 0 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A 0 0 1 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A 0 0 1 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A 0 0 1 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A 0 1 0 0 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A 0 1 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A 0 1 0 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A 0 1 0 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 0 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 0 0 D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 1 0 D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 1 1 D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 0 0 D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 0 1 D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 1 0 D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 1 1 D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 1 0 0 0 D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 ANI0/P33 ANI22/P104 A Other than the above ANI3/IVCMP00/P81 ANI23/P105 A ANI9/P87 ADPC0 0 ANI10/P90 ADPC1 0 ANI13/P93 ADPC2 0 ANI16/P96 ADPC3 0 ANI19/P101 ADPC4 0 Setting prohibited 766 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) Cautions 1. Set a channel to be used for D/A conversion to the input mode by using port mode register 8 (PM8). 2. Do not set the pin that is set by the ADPC register as digital I/O to D/A conversion operation enable by using the D/A converter mode register (DAM). 13.3.2 Peripheral Enable Register 1 (PER1) The PER1 register enables or disables clock supply to each peripheral hardware unit. Clock supply to a hardware unit that is not used is stopped in order to reduce the power consumption and noise. When the D/A converter is used, be sure to set bit 7 (DACEN) of this register to 1. Set the PER1 register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 13-3. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 1 (PER1) Address: F007AH Symbol PER1 After reset: 00H <7> DACEN <6> Note TRGEN <5> CMPEN Note DACEN Note 0 <4> <3> 2 1 <0> TRD0EN DTCEN 0 0 TRJ0EN Control of D/A converter input clock Stops input clock supply. R/W R/W * SFR used by the D/A converter cannot be written to. * The D/A converter is in the reset state. 1 Supplies input clock. * SFR used by the D/A converter can be read/written to. Note Only for RL78/F14. Cautions 1. When setting the D/A converter, be sure to set the DACEN bit to 1 first. If DACEN = 0, writing to a control register of the D/A converter is ignored, and all read values are default values (except for port mode register 8 (PM8), port register 8 (P8), A/D port configuration register (ADPC), and D/A converter mode register 2 (DAM2)). 2. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. RL78/F13: bits 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7 RL78/F14: bits 1, 2, and 6 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 767 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) 13.3.3 D/A Converter Mode Register (DAM) This register controls the operation of the D/A converter. Set the DAM register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 13-4. Format of D/A Converter Mode Register (DAM) Address: FFF36H After reset: 00H Symbol 7 6 <5> <4> 3 2 1 0 DAM DACE0 DAMD0 DACE0 D/A conversion operation control 0 Stops D/A conversion operation. 1 Enables D/A conversion operation. DAMD0 D/A converter operation mode selection 0 Normal mode 1 Real-time output mode R/W R/W R/W R/W When the D/A converter is not used, set the DACE0 bit to 0 (output disable) and set the DACS0 register to 00H to prevent current from flowing into the R-2R resistor ladder to reduce unnecessary current consumption. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 768 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) 13.3.4 D/A Converter Mode Register 2 (DAM2) When the P80/ANO0 pin is in use to output analog signal from the D/A converter, this register is used to control the output from the ANO0 pin. When setting bits 5 and 4 (CVRS1 and CVRS0) in the comparator I/O select register (CMPSEL) to 10B (internal reference voltage (DAC output) is selected), set the ANO0EN bit in this register to 0 (analog output is disabled). Set the DAM2 register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 13-5. Format of D/A Converter Mode Register 2 (DAM2) Address: F0227H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 <5> <4> 3 2 1 0 DAM2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ANO0EN ANO0EN Analog output (ANO0) control 0 Disables analog output (ANO0). 1 Enables analog output (ANO0). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 R/W R/W 769 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) 13.3.5 D/A Conversion Value Setting Register 0 (DACS0) This register is used to set the analog voltage value to be output to the ANO0 pin when the D/A converter is used. Set the DACS0 register by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 13-6. Format of D/A Conversion Value Setting Register 0 (DACS0) Address: FFF34H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DACS0 DACS07 DACS06 DACS05 DACS04 DACS03 DACS02 DACS01 DACS00 Remark The analog output voltage (VANO0) of the D/A converter is defined as follows. VANO0 = Reference voltage for D/A converter x (DACS0)/256 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 770 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) 13.3.6 Port Mode Register 8 (PM8) When using the ANO0/ANI2/P80 pin as an analog input port, set bit PM80 to 1. If bit PM80 is set to 0, this pin cannot be used as an analog input port. Set the PM8 register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH. Caution If a pin is set as an analog input port, not the pin level but 0 is always read. Figure 13-7. Format of Port Mode Register 8 (PM8) Address: FFF22H After reset: FFH Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM8 PM87 PM86 PM85 PM84 PM83 PM82 PM81 PM80 PM8n P8n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7) 0 Output mode (output buffer on) 1 Input mode (output buffer off) R/W R/W The function of the ANO0/ANI2/P80 pin can be selected by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC), the D/A converter mode register (DAM), D/A converter mode register 2 (DAM2), the analog input channel specification register (ADS), and the PM8 register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 771 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) Table 13-1. Setting Functions of ANO0/ANI2/P80 Pin <R> ADPC Register PM8 Register Digital I/O Input mode DAM Register DAM2 Register Enables analog ADS Register Functions of ANO0/ANI2/P80 Pin Setting prohibited output Disables analog Digital input output Output mode Enables analog Setting prohibited output Disables analog Digital input output Analog I/O Input mode Enables D/A Enables analog Selects ANI Setting prohibited conversion output Does not selects ANI Analog output (D/A conversion output) Disables analog Selects ANI Analog input (to be converted) Does not selects ANI Analog input (not to be converted) Note operation output Stops D/A Enables analog Selects ANI Setting prohibited conversion output Does not selects ANI Setting prohibited Disables analog Selects ANI Analog input (to be converted) output Does not selects ANI Analog input (not to be converted) operation Output mode Note Setting prohibited This is a setting that the D/A converter is used for internal reference voltage of comparator. In this case, set CVRS1, CVRS0 bits of CMPSEL register to 10b (internal reference voltage (DAC output) is selected). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 772 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) 13.4 Operations of D/A Converter 13.4.1 Operation in Normal Mode D/A conversion is performed using write operation to the DACS0 register as the trigger. The setting method is described below. <1> Set the DACEN bit of the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) to 1 to start the supply of the input clock to the D/A converter. <2> Use the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) to set the ports to analog pins. <3> Set the ANO0EN bit of the D/A converter mode register 2 (DAM2) to 1 (analog output enable). When setting bits 5 and 4 (CVRS1 and CVRS0) in the comparator I/O select register (CMPSEL) to 10B (internal reference voltage (DAC output) is selected), set the ANO0EN bit in this register to 0 (analog output is disabled). <4> Set the DAMD0 bit of the D/A converter mode register (DAM) to 0 (normal mode). <5> Set the analog voltage value to be output to the ANO0 pin to the D/A conversion value setting register 0 (DACS0). Steps <1> to <5> above constitute the initial settings. <6> Set the DACE0 bit of the DAM register to 1 (D/A conversion enable). D/A conversion starts, and then, after the settling time elapses, the analog voltage set in step <5> is output to the ANO0 pin. <7> To perform subsequent D/A conversions, write to the DACS0 register. The previous D/A conversion result is held until the next D/A conversion is performed. When the DACE0 bit of the DAM register is set to 0 (D/A conversion operation stop), D/A conversion stops. If the ports are set to digital pins using the ADPC register, the ANO0 pin goes into a high-impedance state when the PM80 bit of the PM8 register for the port = 1 (input mode), and the ANO0 pin outputs the set value of the P8 register when the PM80 bit = 0 (output mode). Cautions 1. Even if 1, 0, and then 1 is set to the DACE0 bit, there is a wait after 1 is set for the last time. 2. If the DACS0 register is rewritten during the settling time, D/A conversion is aborted and reconversion by using the newly written values starts. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 773 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) 13.4.2 Operation in Real-Time Output Mode D/A conversion is performed on each channel using the individual interrupt request signals from the ELC as triggers. The setting method is described below. <1> Set the DACEN bit of the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) to 1 to start the supply of the input clock to the D/A converter. <2> Use the port configuration register (ADPC) to set the ports to analog pins. <3> Set the ANO0EN bit of the D/A converter mode register 2 (DAM2) to 1 (analog output enable). When setting bits 5 and 4 (CVRS1 and CVRS0) in the comparator I/O select register (CMPSEL) to 10B (internal reference voltage (DAC output) is selected), set the ANO0EN bit in this register to 0 (analog output is disabled). <4> Set the DAMD0 bit of the D/A converter mode register (DAM) to 0 (normal mode). <5> Set the analog voltage value to be output to the ANO0 pin to the D/A conversion value setting register 0 (DACS0). <6> Set the DACE0 bit of the DAM register to 1 (D/A conversion enable). D/A conversion starts, and then, after the settling time elapses, the analog voltage set in step <5> is output to the ANO0 pin. <7> Use the event output destination select register (ELSELRn) to set the real-time trigger signal. <8> Set the DAMD0 bit of the DAM register to 1 (real-time output mode). <9> Start the operation of the ECL request source. Steps <1> to <9> above constitute the initial settings. <10> Generation of the real-time output triggers starts D/A conversion and the analog voltage set in step <5> will be output to the ANO0 pin after a settling time has elapsed. Set the analog voltage value to be output to the ANO0 pin, to the DACS0 register before performing the next D/A conversion (real-time output trigger is generated). When the DACE0 bit of the DAM register is set to 0 (D/A conversion operation stop), D/A conversion stops. If the ports are set to digital pins by using the ADPC register, the ANO0 pin goes into a high-impedance state when the PM80 bit of the PM8 register for the port = 1 (input mode), and the ANO0 pin outputs the set value of the P8 register when the PM80 bit = 0 (output mode). Cautions 1. Even if 1, 0, and then 1 is set to the DACE0 bit, there is a wait after 1 is set for the last time. 2. Make the interval between each generation of the ELC event request trigger signal longer than the settling time. If an ELC event request trigger signal is generated during the settling time, D/A conversion is aborted and reconversion starts. 3. Even if the generation of the ELC event request trigger signal and rewriting of the DACS0 register conflict, the correct D/A conversion result is output. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 774 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) 13.5 Cautions for D/A Converter Observe the following cautions when using the D/A converter. (1) The digital port I/O function, which is the alternate function of the ANO0 pin, does not operate if the ports are set to analog pins by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC). When the P8 register is read while the ports are set to analog pins by using the ADPC register, 0 is read in the input mode and the set value of the P8 register is read in the output mode. If the digital output mode is set, no data is output to the pins. (2) The operation of the D/A converter continues in the HALT and STOP modes. To lower the power consumption, therefore, clear the DACE0 bit to 0, and execute the HALT or STOP instruction after stopping the operation of the D/A converter. (3) To stop the real-time output mode (including when changing to normal mode), one of the following procedures must be used: * Wait for at least three clocks after stopping the trigger output source and then set bits DACE0 and DAMD0 to 0. * After setting bits DACE0 and DAMD0, set the DACEN bit of the PER1 register to 0 (DAC stop). * When the DACEN bit is set to 0, all the registers in the DAC are cleared, so the settings of the SFRs are required to start the operation again. (4) When D/A conversion operation is enabled, do not perform A/D conversions from the analog input pin multiplexed with the ANO0 pin. (5) In the real-time output mode, set the value of the DACS0 register before a timer trigger is generated. Do not change the set value of the DACS0 register while the trigger signal is output. (6) Since the output impedance of the D/A converter is high, no current can be taken out from the ANO0 pin. If the input impedance of the load is low, insert a follower amplifier between the load and the ANO0 pin before use. In addition, the wiring length between the follower amplifier and the load must be as short as possible due to the high output impedance. If the wiring length is long, take measures such as placing a ground pattern around the wiring area. (7) When entering the STOP state while the real-time output mode for D/A conversion is enabled, disable linking of ELC events before entering STOP. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 775 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 14.1 Overview The comparator compares a reference voltage to an analog input voltage. The results of a comparison of reference voltage and analog input voltage can be read by software. The comparison result is output externally and an interrupt or ELC event is requested upon detection of a change between the two voltages. The reference input voltage can be either the input from the IVREF0 pin or the output from the on-chip D/A converter. There are four analog input pins, one of which is to be selected. Table 14-1 lists the comparator specifications and figure 14-1 shows the Comparator Block Diagram. Table 14-1. Comparator Specifications Item Specification Number of channels One (comparator 0) Analog input voltage Input voltage from the IVCMP00 to IVCMP03 pins (one of them to be selected) Reference voltage Internal reference voltage (output from on-chip D/A converter) Input voltage from the external reference voltage input pin (IVREF0) Comparison result Comparator output Generation of ELC event output Monitor output from register Interrupt request signal An interrupt request is generated on detecting a valid edge of comparison result. Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected. Digital filter function One of three sampling frequencies can be selected. Not using the filter function can be selected. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 776 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) Figure 14-1. Comparator Block Diagram Table 14-2. Comparator Pin Configuration Pin Name IVCMP00 to I/O Function Input Analog voltage input pins IVREF0 Input External reference voltage input pin VCOUT0 Output Comparator output pin IVCMP03 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 777 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 14.2 Registers to Control the Comparator The comparator is controlled by using the following registers. Table 14-3. Registers to Control the Comparator Register Name Symbol After Reset Address Access Size Peripheral Enable Register 1 PER1 00H F02C0H 8 Comparator Control Register CMPCTL 00H F02A0H 1, 8 Comparator I/O Select Register CMPSEL 00H F02A1H 1, 8 Comparator Output Monitor Register CMPMON 00H F02A3H 1, 8 A/D port configuration register ADPC 00H F0076H 8 D/A converter mode register 2 DAM2 00H F0227H 1, 8 Port mode register 4 PM4 FFH FFF24H 1, 8 Port mode register PM8 FFH FFF28H 1, 8 14.2.1 Peripheral Enable Register 1 (PER1) The PER1 register enables or disables clock supply to each peripheral hardware unit. Clock supply to a hardware unit that is not used is stopped in order to reduce the power consumption and noise. When the comparator is used, be sure to set bit 5 (CMPEN) of this register to 1. The PER1 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 14-2. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 1 (PER1) Address: F007AH Symbol PER1 After reset: 00H <7> DACEN <6> Note TRGEN <5> CMPEN Note CMPEN Note 0 <4> <3> 2 1 <0> TRD0EN DTCEN 0 0 TRJ0EN Control of comparator input clock Stops input clock supply. R/W R/W * SFR used by the comparator cannot be written to. * The comparator is in the reset state. 1 Note Supplies input clock. * SFR used by the comparator can be read/written to. Only for the RL78/F14. Cautions 1. When setting the comparator, be sure to set the CMPEN bit to 1 first. If CMPEN = 0, writing to a control register of the comparator is ignored, and all read values are default values (except for port mode registers 4 and 8 (PM4 and PM8), and port registers 4 and 8 (P4 and P8)). 2. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. RL78/F13: bits 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7 RL78/F14: bits 1, 2, and 6 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 778 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 14.2.2 Comparator Control Register (CMPCTL) This register is used to control the comparator operation, enable or disable the comparator output, select the noise filter, select the valid edge of the interrupt signal, and enable/disable release from the STOP mode. Set the CMPCTL register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Figure 14-3. Format of Comparator Control Register (CMPCTL) Address: F0341H After reset: 00H Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 <1> 0 CMPCTL HCMPON CDFS1 CDFS0 CEGN CEGP CSTEN COE CINV HCMPON Comparator operation control Note 1 0 Operation stopped (the comparator outputs a low-level signal) 1 Operation enabled (input to the comparator pins is enabled) CDFS1 CDFS0 0 0 Noise filter selection Notes 2, 3, 4 Noise filter not used R/W R/W R/W R/W 3 0 1 Noise filter sampling frequency is 2 /fCLK. 1 0 Noise filter sampling frequency is 24fCLK. 1 1 Noise filter sampling frequency is 25fCLK. CEGN CEGP 0 0 No edge selection 0 1 Falling edge selection 1 0 Rising edge selection 1 1 Both-edge selection Selection of valid edge of INTCMP interrupt signal R/W R/W The valid edge is set for the signal after the comparator polarity is selected by using the CINV bit and the filter is selected by using CDFS1 and CDFS0 bits. CSTEN STOP mode release enable Notes 5, 6 0 Releasing STOP mode by comparator interrupt disabled 1 Releasing STOP mode by comparator interrupt enabled COE Comparator output enable 0 Comparator output disabled (the output signal is low level) 1 Comparator output enabled CINV Comparator output polarity selection Notes 2, 3, 6 0 Comparator output not inverted 1 Comparator output inverted R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Notes 1. Do not modify bits HCMPON and COE simultaneously. The operation stabilization wait time (1 s when 3.3 V VDD 5.5 V or 3 s when 2.7 V VDD < 3.3 V) is required after enabling comparator operation (HCMPON = 1). 2. Change bits CDFS1, CDFS0, CEGN, CEGP, CSTEN and CINV only after disabling the comparator output (COE = 0). 3. Changes to the values of the CDFS1, CDFS0, CEGN, CEGP, CSTEN, and CINV bits may lead to a comparator interrupt request, ELC event request, DTC transfer request, or setting of the INTFLG06 bit in the interrupt source determination flag register 0. Change these bits only after R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 779 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) setting the ELSELR19 register to 00H (no linking of the comparator output 0) and the DTCEN44 bit in the DTCEN4 register to 0 (disabling DTC activation by the comparator detection 0 signal). Also, after changing these bits, initialize the CMPIF0 bit in the interrupt request flag register and the INTFLG06 bit in the interrupt source determination flag register 0 (INTFLG0) to 0 (clearing interrupt request flags). 4. If bits CDFS1 and CDFS0 are changed from 00B (noise filter not used) to a value other than 00B (noise filter used), perform sampling four times and update the filter output, and then use the comparator interrupt request or the ELC event. 5. To enable releasing STOP mode by the comparator interrupt, set this bit to 0 and also set bits CDFS1, CDFS0, and CINV to 00B (noise filter not used). 6. To enable releasing STOP mode by the comparator interrupt and to release from STOP mode by the falling edge of the comparator output, set the CSTEN bit to 1 and CINV bit to 1 (comparator output inverted). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 780 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 14.2.3 Comparator I/O Select Register (CMPSEL) This register is used to select the comparator input, reference voltage, and to enable or disable the VCOUT0 output. The CMPSEL register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Figure 14-4. Format of Comparator I/O Select Register (CMPSEL) Address: F0340H After reset: 00H Symbol 7 <6> 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMPSEL 0 Note 4 CPOE CVRS1 CVRS0 CMPSEL3 CMPSEL2 CMPSEL1 CMPSEL0 CPOE VCOUT0 pin output enable 0 VCOUT0 pin output of the comparator is disabled (the output signal is low level). 1 VCOUT0 pin output of the comparator is enabled. CVRS1 CVRS0 Reference voltage selection 0 0 No reference voltage 0 1 External reference voltage (IVREF0) selected 1 0 Internal reference voltage (D/A converter output) selected Note 1 1 1 Setting prohibited Note 2 CMPSEL3 CMPSEL2 CMPSEL1 CMPSEL0 0 0 0 0 No input 0 0 0 1 IVCMP00 selected 0 0 1 0 IVCMP01 selected 0 1 0 0 IVCMP02 selected 1 0 0 0 IVCMP03 selected R/W R/W R/W R/W Comparator input selection R/W R/W Setting the other values is prohibited. For details, see note 3. Notes 1. When the internal reference voltage is used, set the D/A converter to be used for generating the internal reference voltage before enabling comparator operation (HCMPON = 1). For details on setting the internal reference voltage, see CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only). 2. Modify bits CVRS1 and CVRS0 in the following procedure. Particularly, be sure to set bits CVRS1 and CVRS0 to 00B before changing the set value. Writing a value other than 00B while the value of these bits is not 00B is invalid and the previous value is retained. 1. Set bit COE in CMPCTL register to 0. 2. Set bits CVRS1 and CVRS0 to 00B. 3. Set a new value to bits CVRS1 and CVRS0 (with 1 set in only one of the bits). 4. Wait for the input switching stabilization wait time (300 ns) 5. Set bit COE in CMPCTL register to 1. 6. Clear flag bit CMPIF0 in the control register. 3. Modify bits CMPSEL3 to CMPSEL0 in the following procedure. Writing a value other than 0000B while the value of these bits is not 0000B is invalid. Writing 1 to two or more bits is also invalid. In both cases, the previous value is retained. 1. Set bit COE in CMPCTL register to 0. 2. Set bits CMPSEL3 to CMPSEL0 to 0000B. 3. Set a new value to bits CMPSEL3 to CMPSEL0 (with 1 set in only one of the bits). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 781 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 4. Wait for the input switching stabilization wait time (300 ns) 5. Set bit COE in CMPCTL register to 1. 6. Clear flag bit CMPIF0 in the control register. 4. Be sure to set bit 7 to 0. 14.2.4 Comparator Output Monitor Register (CMPMON) This register is used to monitor the comparator output. The CMPMON register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Figure 14-5. Format of Comparator Output Monitor Register (CMPMON) Address: F02A2H After reset: 00H Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMPMON 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CMPMON0 CMPMON0 0 Comparator output monitor value When CINV = 0 (comparator output is not inverted) R/W R/W Comparator input voltage (IVCMP0n) < reference voltage Comparator operation disabled (HCMPON = 0) Comparator output is disabled (COE = 0) When CINV = 1 (converter output is inverted) 1 Comparator input voltage (IVCMP0n) > reference voltage When CINV = 0 (comparator output is not inverted) Comparator input voltage (IVCMP0n) > reference voltage When CINV = 1 (comparator output is inverted) Comparator input voltage (IVCMP0n) < reference voltage Comparator operation disabled (HCMPON = 0) Comparator output is disabled (COE = 0) Cautions 1. When comparator operation is enabled (HCMPON = COE = 1) but the noise filter is not in use (CDFS1 and CDFS0 = 00B), write the software so that the CMPMON0 bit is read twice and the values are only used after the two consecutive values match. 2. Be sure to set bits 7 to 1 to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 782 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 14.2.5 A/D port configuration register (ADPC) This register switches the ANI0/P33 to ANI23/P105 pins to digital I/O of port or analog input. When the comparator is in use, set the pins selected from among P81/ANI3/IVCMP00, P82/ANI4/IVCMP01, P83/ANI5/IVCMP02, P84/ANI6/IVCMP03, and P85/ANI7/IVREF0 to analog input by using the ADPC register. The ADPC register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Figure 14-6. Format of A/D Port Configuration Register (ADPC) Address: F0076H After reset: 00H Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADPC 0 0 0 ADPC4 ADPC3 ADPC2 ADPC1 ADPC0 ANI0/P33 ANI1/P34 ANI2/ANO0/P80 ANI3/IVCMP00/P81 ANI4/IVCMP01/P82 ANI5/IVCMP02/P83 ANI6/IVCMP03/P84 ANI7/IVREF0/P85 ANI8/P86 ANI9/P87 ANI10/P90 ANI11/P91 ANI12/P92 ANI13/P93 ANI14/P94 ANI15/P95 ANI16/P96 ANI17/P97 ANI18/P100 ANI19/P101 ANI20/P102 ANI21/P103 ANI22/P104 ANI23/P105 ADPC0 ADPC1 ADPC2 ADPC3 ADPC4 Analog input (A)/digital I/O (D) switching 0 0 0 0 0 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 0 0 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 0 0 0 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A 0 0 0 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A 0 0 1 0 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A 0 0 1 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A 0 0 1 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A 0 0 1 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A 0 1 0 0 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A 0 1 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A 0 1 0 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A 0 1 0 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 0 0 D D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 0 1 D D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 1 0 D D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A 0 1 1 1 1 D D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 0 0 D D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 1 0 D D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 0 1 1 D D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 0 0 D D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 0 1 D D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 1 0 D D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 0 1 1 1 D D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A 1 1 0 0 0 D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Other than above Setting prohibited Caution Set the pins to be used for the comparator (P81/ANI3/IVCMP00, P82/ANI4/IVCMP01, P83/ANI5/IVCMP02, P84/ANI6/IVCMP03, and P85/ANI7/IVREF0) to the input mode by using port mode registers 8 (PM8). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 783 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 14.2.6 D/A converter mode register 2 (DAM2) When the P80/ANO0 pin is in use to output analog signal from the D/A converter, this register is used to control the output from the ANO0 pin. When setting bits 5 and 4 (CVRS1 and CVRS0) in the comparator I/O select register (CMPSEL) to 10B (internal reference voltage (DAC output) is selected), set the ANO0EN bit in this register to 0 (analog output is disabled). The DAM2 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Figure 14-7. Format of D/A Converter Mode Register (DAM2) Address: F0227H After reset: 00H Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0> DAM2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ANO0EN ANO0EN Analog output (ANO0) control 0 Analog output (ANO0) is disabled. 1 Analog output (ANO0) is enabled. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 R/W R/W 784 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 14.2.7 Port mode register 4 (PM4) This register is used to set input/output of port 4 in 1-bit units. When using the port (P41/VCOUT0) to be shared with the comparator output pin, set the corresponding bit in the port mode register 4 (PM4) and port mode register 4 (P4) to 0. Example) When P41/VCOUT0 is used for comparator output pin Set the PM41 bit in the port mode register 4 to 0. Set the P41 bit in the port register 4 to 0. The PM4 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Figure 14-8. Format of Port Mode Register 4 (PM4) (100-Pin Products) Address: FFF24H After reset: FFH Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM4 PM47 PM46 PM45 PM44 PM43 PM42 PM41 PM40 PM4n P4n pin input/output mode selection (n = 0 to 7) 0 0: Output mode (output buffer on) 1 1: Input mode (output buffer off) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 R/W R/W 785 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 14.2.8 Port mode register (PM8) When using the P81/ANI3/IVCMP00, P82/ANI4/IVCMP01, P83/ANI5/IVCMP02, P84/ANI6/IVCMP03, or P85/ANI7/IVREF0 pin for an analog input port of the comparator, set the PM81, PM82, PM84, or PM85 bit to 1 corresponding to the port to be used. If the PM81 to PM85 bits are set to 0, they cannot be used as analog input port pins. The PM8 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH. Caution If a pin is set as an analog input port, not the pin level but "0" is always read. Figure 14-9. Format of Port Mode Register 8 (PM8) Address: FFF28H After reset: FFH Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM8 PM87 PM86 PM85 PM84 PM83 PM82 PM81 PM80 PM8n P8n pin input/output mode selection (n = 0 to 7) 0 0: Output mode (output buffer on) 1 1: Input mode (output buffer off) R/W R/W The P81/ANI3/IVCMP00, P82/ANI4/IVCMP01, P83/ANI5/IVCMP02, P84/ANI6/IVCMP03, and P85/ANI7/IVREF0 pins are as shown below depending on the settings of the A/D port configuration register (ADPC), analog input channel specification register (ADS), and PM8 registers. Table 14-4. Setting Functions of P81/ANI3/IVCMP00 to P85/ANI7/IVREF0 Pins ADPC Register Digital I/O selection Analog I/O selection PM8 Register ADS Register P81/ANI3/IVCMP00 to P85/ANI7/IVREF0 Input mode Digital input Output mode Digital output Input mode Selects ANI. Analog input (to be converted) Does not select ANI. Analog input (not to be converted) Selects ANI. Setting prohibited Output mode Does not select ANI. Reset signal generation sets all the P81/ANI3/IVCMP00 to P85/ANI7/IVREF0 pins to analog input. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 786 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 14.3 Operation Figure 14-10 shows a comparator operation example. The VCOUT0 output becomes 1 when the analog input voltage is higher than the comparator input voltage voltage, and the VCOUT0 output becomes 0 when the analog input voltage is lower than the reference voltage. When the comparator output changes, an interrupt request and an ELC event are output. Figure 14-10. Comparator Operation Example Reference input voltage (external reference voltage or D/A converter output voltage) After VCOUT0 output, an interrupt request generated with a delay of 3 operation clock cycles. ELC event output "1" "0" Comparator interrupt request output (A) CMPIF0 bit in interrupt "1" control register "0" (B) (A) (A) (B) (A) Set to 0 by software VCOUT output (B) (B) "1" "0" Caution The above diagram applies when CPOE = 1 (pin output enabled), CDFS1 and CDFS0 = 00B (filter not used), and CEGP = CEGN = 1 (both-edge selection). When CINV = 0, CEGP = 1, and CEGN = 0 (risingedge selection for non-inversion output signal from the comparator), CMPIF0 changes as shown by (A) only. When CINV = 0, CEGP = 0, and CEGN = 1 (falling-edge selection for non-inversion output signal from the comparator), CMPIF0 changes as shown by (B) only. When CPOE = 1, VCOUT0 directly outputs the ELC event output. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 787 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 14.3.1 Noise Filter The comparator contains a noise filter. The sampling clock can be selected by bits CDFS1 and CDFS0 in the CMPCTL register. The comparator signal is sampled every sampling clock and if the same value is sampled three times, the noise filter output at the next sampling clock cycle is used as the comparator output. Figure 14-11 shows the configuration of the noise filter and edge detector and figure 14-12 shows an example of noise filter and interrupt operation. Figure 14-11. Noise Filter and Edge Detection Configuration Figure 14-12. Noise Filter and Interrupt Operation Example Caution The above operation example applies when bits CDFS1 and CDFS0 in the CMPCTL register is 01B, 10B, or 11B (noise filter used). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 788 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 14.3.2 Comparator Interrupts The comparator generates an interrupt request. The comparator interrupt functions provide priority specification flag, interrupt mask flag, interrupt request flag, and interrupt vector. When using the comparator interrupt, set at least one of bits CEGP and CEGN in the CMPCTL register to 1 (to a value other than 00B (no edge selection)). For details on the register setting related to comparator interrupt request, refer to 14.2.2 Comparator Control Register (CMPCTL). To use the comparator interrupt in STOP mode, set the CSTEN bit in CMPCTL register to 1 (releasing STOP mode by comparator interrupt enabled) and set the CDFS1 and CDFS0 bits to 00 (digital noise filter not used). 14.3.3 Comparator ELC Event Output An ELT event is generated in accord to settings of the comparator output inversion control (CINV bit) and noise filter output (CDFS1 and CDFS0 bits) in the CMPCTL register. Use the ELSELR19 register of the ELC for selection of event output destination and disabling the event link operation. 14.3.4 Comparator Pin Output The comparison result from the comparator can be output to external pins. Bits CINV and CPOE in the CMPSEL register can be used to set the output polarity (output is inverted or not) and to enable or disable the output. For the correspondence between the register setting and the comparator pin output, refer to 14.2.2 Comparator Control Register (CMPCTL). 14.3.5 Stopping or Supplying Comparator Clock To stop the comparator by setting peripheral enable register 1 (PER1), use the following procedure: <1> Set the HCMPON bit in the CMPCTL register to 0 (stop the comparator input). <2> Set the CMPEN bit in the PER1 register to 0. <3> Set the interrupt flag (CMPIF0 bit in the IF0L register) to 0 (clear any unnecessary interrupt before stopping the comparator). When the clock is stopped by setting PER1, all the internal registers in the comparator are initialized. To use the comparator again, follow the procedure in table 14-13 to set the registers. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 789 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) 14.3.6 Comparator Setting Flowchart Figure 14-13 shows the flowchart for setting the comparator-related registers. Figure 14-13. Comparator Operation Setting Flowchart (when Using the timer RD Operation Triggered by Internal Reference Voltage (D/A Converter Output), INTCMP0 Interrupt, or ELC Event) Notes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. This is not required when the external reference voltage is used. This is not required when the comparator output is not output to the external pin. Set the registers assigned to interrupt control. This is not required when the ELC event is not used. This is not required when the timer RD by the ELC event is not used. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 790 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 14 COMPARATOR (RL78/F14 Only) Figure 14-14. Comparator Operation Termination Flowchart (when Using the Timer RD Operation by the ELC Event) Operation termination start Set timer RD to stop. Cancel ELC link. Set CEGP and CEGN. CPOE COE 0 0 Stop timer RD operation. Cancel ELC link from comparator to timer RD. Set comparator operation at rising/falling edges. Disable edge detection. Disable comparator pin output. Disable comparator output. End R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 791 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Serial array unit has two serial channels. Each channel can achieve 3-wire serial (CSI), UART, and simplified I2C communication. Function assignment of each channel supported by the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 is as shown below. * Group A products Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI UART0 (supporting LIN-bus) IIC00 function) Note 2 1 CSI01 (supporting SPI IIC01 function) Note 2 * Products of Groups C-1 and D-1 Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI UART0 (supporting LIN-bus) IIC00 function) Note 2 1 CSI01(supporting SPI IIC01 function) Note 2 1 0 CSI10 (supporting SPI UART1 IIC10 function)Note 1, 2 1 - - * Products of Groups B, C-2, D-2, and E Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI UART0 (supporting LIN-bus) IIC00 function) Note 2 1 CSI01(supporting SPI IIC01 function) Note 2 1 0 CSI10(supporting SPI UART1 IIC10 function)Note 1, 2 1 CSI11 (supporting SPI IIC11 function) Note 2 ___________ Notes 1. 48-pin, 32-pin and 30-pin products do not have SSI10 pin. ____________ 2. Set CKPmn bit of SCRmn register to 1, when SSEmn = 1 (Enables SSImn pin input). (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1) When "UART0" is used for channels 0 and 1 of the unit 0, CSI00 and CSI01 cannot be used. Caution Most of the following descriptions in this chapter use the units and channels of the 80-pin products of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) as an example. Remark Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C-1: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30 or 32 pins Group C-2: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 48, 64, or 80 pins Group D-1: RL78/F14 products with 30 or 32 pins Group D-2: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 792 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.1 Functions of Serial Array Unit Each serial interface supported by the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 has the following features. 15.1.1 3-wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) Data is transmitted or received in synchronization with the serial clock (SCK) output from the master channel. 3-wire serial communication is clocked communication performed by using three communication lines: one for the serial clock (SCK), one for transmitting serial data (SO), one for receiving serial data (SI). For details about the settings, see 15.5 Operation of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) Communication. [Data transmission/reception] * Data length of 7 to 16 bits * Phase control of transmit/receive data * MSB/LSB first selectable * Level setting of transmit/receive data [Clock control] * Master/slave selection * Phase control of I/O clock * Setting of transfer period by prescaler and internal counter of each channel * Maximum transfer rate During master communication: Max. fMCK/4 Note During slave communication: Max. fMCK/6 Note [Interrupt function] * Transfer end interrupt/buffer empty interrupt [Error detection flag] * Overrun error CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, and CSI11 support the SPI function. [Extended function] * Slave select function of the SPI function Note Use the clocks within a range satisfying the SCK cycle time (tKCY) characteristics (see CHAPTER 34 to CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 793 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.1.2 UART (UART0, UART1) This is a start-stop synchronization function using two lines: serial data transmission (TXD) and serial data reception (RXD) lines. By using these two communication lines, each data frame, which consist of a start bit, data, parity bit, and stop bit, is transferred asynchronously (using the internal baud rate) between the microcontroller and the other communication party. Full-duplex UART communication can be performed by using a channel dedicated to transmission (even-numbered channel) and a channel dedicated to reception (odd-numbered channel). The LIN-bus can be implemented by using timer array unit with an external interrupt (INTP0). For details about the settings, see 15.7 Operation of UART (UART0, UART1) Communication. [Data transmission/reception] * Data length of 7, 8, 9, 16 bits * Select the MSB/LSB first * Level setting of transmit/receive data and select of reverse * Parity bit appending and parity check functions * Stop bit appending [Interrupt function] * Transfer end interrupt/buffer empty interrupt [Error detection flag] * Framing error, parity error, or overrun error The LIN-bus is accepted in UART0 (0 and 1 channels of unit 0). [LIN-bus functions] * Wakeup signal detection * Break field (BF) detection * Sync field measurement, baud rate calculation R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Using the external interrupt (INTP0) and timer array unit 794 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.1.3 Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) This is a clocked communication function to communicate with two or more devices by using two lines: serial clock (SCL) and serial data (SDA). This simplified I2C is designed for single communication with a device such as EEPROM, flash memory, or A/D converter, and therefore, it functions only as a master. Make sure by using software, as well as operating the control registers, that the AC specifications of the start and stop conditions are observed. For details about the settings, see 15.9 Operation of Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) Communication. [Data transmission/reception] * Master transmission, master reception (only master function with a single master) * ACK output functionNote and ACK detection function * Data length of 8 bits (When an address is transmitted, the address is specified by the higher 7 bits, and the least significant bit is used for R/W control.) * Manual generation of start condition and stop condition [Interrupt function] * Transfer end interrupt [Error detection flag] * ACK error, or overrun error * [Functions not supported by simplified I2C] * Slave transmission, slave reception * Arbitration loss detection function * Wait detection functions Note When receiving the last data, ACK will not be output if 0 is written to the SOEmn bit (serial output enable register m (SOEm)) and serial communication data output is stopped. See 15.9.3 (2) Processing flow for details. Remarks 1. To use an I2C bus of full function, see CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA. 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 795 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.2 Configuration of Serial Array Unit The serial array unit includes the following hardware. Table 15-1. Configuration of Serial Array Unit Item Configuration Shift register 16 bits Buffer register Serial data register mn (SDRmn)Note Serial clock I/O SCK00, SCK01, SCK10, SCK11 pins (for 3-wire serial I/O), SCL00, SCL01, SCL10, SCL11 pins (for simplified I2C) Serial data input SI00, SI01, SI10, SI11 pins (for 3-wire serial I/O), RXD0 pin (for UART supporting LIN-bus), RxD1 pin (for UART) Serial data output SO00, SO01, SO10, SO11 pins (for 3-wire serial I/O), TXD0 pin (for UART supporting LIN-bus), TxD1 pin (for UART), output controller Serial data I/O SDA00, SDA01, SDA10, SDA11 pins (for simplified I2C) Slave select input SSI00, SSI01, SSI10, SSI11 pin (for 3-wire serial I/O) Control registers <Registers of unit setting block> * Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) * Serial clock select register m (SPSm) * Serial channel enable status register m (SEm) * Serial channel start register m (SSm) * Serial channel stop register m (STm) * Serial output enable register m (SOEm) * Serial output register m (SOm) * Serial output level register m (SOLm) * Serial slave select enable register m (SSEm) * Input switch control register (ISC) * Noise filter enable register 0 (NFEN0) <Registers of each channel> * Serial data register mn (SDRmn) * Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) * Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) * Serial status register mn (SSRmn) * Serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn) * Port input mode registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, 12 (PIM1, PIM3, PIM5 to PIM7, PIM12) * Port output mode registers 1, 6, 7, 12 (POM1, POM6, POM7, POM12) * Port mode registers 1, 3 to 7, 12 (PM1, PM3 to PM7, PM12) * Port registers 1, 3 to 7, 12 (P1, P3 to P7, P12) (Notes and Remark are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 796 RL78/F13, F14 Note CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT When SEmn is 1, the lower 8 bits of serial data register mn (SDRmn) can be read or written as the following SFR, depending on the communication mode. * CSIp communication ... SDRpL (CSIp data register) * UARTq reception ... SDRmmL (UARTq receive data register) * UARTq transmission ... SDRmnL (UARTq transmit data register) * IICr communication ... SDRrL (IICr data register) Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), q: UART number (q = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 797 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-1 shows the block diagram of the serial array unit 0. Figure 15-1. Block Diagram of Serial Array Unit 0 Noise filter enable register 0 (NFEN0) Serial output register 0 (SO0) 0 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) 0 0 0 0 CKO01 CKO00 0 0 0 0 Serial clock select register 0 (SPS0) PRS 013 SAU0EN 0 PRS 012 PRS 011 PRS 003 PRS 010 PRS 002 4 PRS 001 PRS 000 4 Prescaler fCLK fCLK/20 to fCLK/211 fCLK/20 to fCLK/211 Selector Selector SNFEN 00 0 0 SO01 SO00 0 0 SE01 SE00 Serial channel enable status register 0 (SE0) 0 0 SS01 SS00 Serial channel start register 0 (SS0) 0 0 ST01 ST00 Serial channel stop register 0 (ST0) 0 0 Serial output SOE01 SOE00 enable register 0 (SOE0) 0 0 SOL01 SOL00 Serial output level register 0 (SOL0) 0 0 SSE01 SSE00 Serial slave select enable register 0 (SSE0) Note Serial data register 00 (SDR00) CK00 (Clock division setting block) Selector CK01 fSCK Edge detection Synchronous circuit Selector Serial clock I/O pin (when CSI00: SCK00) (when IIC00: SCL00) Output latch (Pxx) (Buffer register block) Serial data output pin (when CSI00: SO00) (when IIC00: SDA00) (when UART0: TXD0) fTCLK Shift register Output controller Interrupt controller Communication controller Noise elimination enabled/ disabled Synchronous circuit Edge/level detection SNFEN00 Slave selection input pin (when CSI00: SSI00) Edge detection Serial flag clear trigger register 00 (SIR00) CKS00 CCS00 STS00 MD002 MD001 Serial mode register 00 (SMR00) Serial transfer end interrupt (when CSI00: INTCSI00) (when IIC00: INTIIC00) (when UART0: INTST0) PECT OVCT 00 00 Clear Communication status Serial data input pin (when CSI00: SI00) (when IIC00: SDA00) (when UART0: RxD0) Mode selection CSI00 or IIC00 or UART0 (for transmission) Output latch (P30) PM30 PMxx fMCK Clock controller Channel 0 (LIN-bus supported) Error controller Error information SSIE00 Input switch control register (ISC) TXE 00 RXE 00 DAP 00 CKP 00 When UART0 Serial data input pin (when CSI01: SI01) (when IIC01: SDA01) PTC 000 DIR 00 SLC 001 SLC 000 DLS 001 Serial communication operation setting register 00 (SCR00) CK01 Serial clock I/O pin (when CSI01: SCK01) (when IIC01: SCL01) PTC 001 0 Selector TSF 00 BFF 00 OVF 00 Serial data output pin (when CSI01: SO01) (when IIC01: SDA01) Communication controller Edge/level detection PEF 00 Serial status register 00 (SSR00) CK00 Channel 1 (LIN-bus supported) Synchronous circuit DLS 000 Mode selection CSI01 or IIC01 or UART0 (for reception) Serial transfer end interrupt (when CSI01: INTCSI01) (when IIC01: INTIIC01) (when UART0: INTSR0) Slave select input pin (when CSI01: SSI01) Caution: If operation is stopped (SEmn = 0), the upper 7 bits set the clock division, and the lower bits have no meaning. If operation is in progress (SEmn = 1), the serial data register 10 functions as the buffer register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 798 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-2 shows the block diagram of the serial array unit 1. Figure 15-2. Block Diagram of Serial Array Unit 1 Noise filter enable register 0 (NFEN0) Serial output register 1 (SO1) 0 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) 0 0 0 0 0 CKO11 CKO10 0 0 0 0 Serial clock select register 1 (SPS1) PRS 113 SAU1EN PRS 112 PRS 111 PRS 110 PRS 103 PRS 102 PRS 101 0 SO11 SO10 0 0 SE11 SE10 Serial channel enable status register 1 (SE1) 0 0 SS11 SS10 Serial channel start register 1 (SS1) 0 0 ST11 ST10 Serial channel stop register 1 (ST1) 0 Serial output SOE11 SOE10 enable register 1 (SOE1) 0 0 SOL11 SOL10 Serial output level register 1 (SOL1) 0 0 SSE11 SSE10 Serial slave select enable register 1 (SSE1) PRS 100 Prescaler fCLK fCLK/20 to fCLK/211 fCLK/20 to fCLK/211 Selector Selector SNFEN 10 0 Serial data register 10 (SDR10) Note Selector Serial clock I/O pin CSI10: SCK10) (when IIC10: SCL10) (Buffer register block) (Clock division setting block) CK10 Synchronous circuit Clock controller CK11 Selector Channel 0 Serial data output pin (when CSI10: SO10) (when IIC10: SDA10) (when UART1: TxD1) Shift register Output controller Interrupt controller Communication controller Mode selection CSI20 or IIC20 or UART2 (for transmission) PM15 Synchronous circuit Noise elimination enabled/ disabled Edge/level detection SNFEN20 CKS10 CCS10 MD102 MD101 Serial mode register 10 (SMR10) TXE 10 RXE 10 DAP 10 When UART1 CKP 10 Serial data input pin (when CSI11: SI11) (when IIC11: SDA11) PTC 100 DIR 10 SLC 101 DLS 101 DLS 100 Serial communication operation setting register 10 (SCR10) CK11 Serial clock I/O pin (when CSI11: SCK11) (when IIC11: SCL11) PTC 101 0 Selector TSF 10 BFF 10 PEF 10 OVF 10 Serial data output pin (when CSI11: SO11) (when IIC11: SDA11) Communication controller Edge/level detection Error controller Serial status register 10 (SSR10) CK10 Channel 1 Synchronous circuit PECT OVCT 10 10 Communication status Serial data input pin (when CSI10: SI10) (when IIC10: SDA10) (when UART1: RxD1) Serial flag clear trigger register 10 (SIR10) Serial transfer end interrup (when CSI10: INTCSI10) (when IIC10: INTIIC10) (when UART1: INTST1) Mode selection CSI11 or IIC11 or UART1 (for reception) Serial transfer end interrup (when CSI11: INTCSI11) (when IIC11: INTIIC11) (when UART1: INTSR1) Slave select input pin (when CSI11: SSI11) Caution: If operation is stopped (SEmn = 0), the upper 7 bits set the clock division, and the lower bits have no meaning. If operation is in progress (SEmn = 1), the serial data register 10 functions as the buffer register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 799 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Shift register This is a 16-bit register that converts parallel data into serial data or vice versa. During reception, it converts data input to the serial pin into parallel data. When data is transmitted, the value set to this register is output as serial data from the serial output pin. The shift register cannot be directly manipulated by program. To read or write the shift register, use the serial data register mn (SDRmn) when operation is in progress (SEmn = 1). 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Shift register (2) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) The SDRmn register is the transmit/receive data register (16 bits) of channel n. If operation is stopped (SEmn = 0), bits 15 to 9 are used as a register that sets the division ratio of the operation clock (fMCK). If operation is in progress (SEmn = 1), the SDRmn register functions as a transmit/receive buffer register. When data is received, parallel data converted by the shift register is stored. When data is to be transmitted, set transmit data to be transferred to the shift register . The data to be stored is as follows, depending on the setting of bits 4 to 0 (DLSmn4 to DLSmn0) of serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn), regardless of the output sequence of the data. * 7-bit data length (stored in bits 0 to 6 of SDRmn register) * 8-bit data length (stored in bits 0 to 7 of SDRmn register) * 9-bit data length (stored in bits 0 to 8 of SDRmn register) : * 16-bit data length (stored in bits 0 to 15 of SDRmn register) The SDRmn register can be read or written in 16-bit units. The lower 8 bits of the SDRmn register can be read or written as the following SFR when operation is in progress (SEmn = 1). The following SDRmnL registers are available, depending on the communication mode. * CSIp communication ... SDRpL * UARTq reception ... SDRmnL * UARTq transmission ... SDRmnL * IICr communication ... SDRrL Reset signal generation clears the SDRmn register to 0000H. Note Writing in 8-bit units is prohibited when the operation is stopped (SEmn = 0). Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), q: UART number (q = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 800 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-3. Format of Serial Data Register mn (SDRmn) (mn = 00, 01, 10, 11) Address: FFF10H, FFF11H (SDR00), FFF12H, FFF13H (SDR01) After reset: 0000H R/W FFF48H, FFF49H (SDR10), FFF4AH, FFF4BH (SDR11) FFF10H (SDR00) FFF11H (SDR00) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SDRmn Shift register Remark For the function of the higher 7 bits of the SDRmn register, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 801 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit Serial array unit is controlled by the following registers. * Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) * Serial clock select register m (SPSm) * Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) * Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) * Serial data register mn (SDRmn) * Serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn) * Serial status register mn (SSRmn) * Serial channel start register m (SSm) * Serial channel stop register m (STm) * Serial channel enable status register m (SEm) * Serial output enable register m (SOEm) * Serial output level register m (SOLm) * Serial output register m (SOm) * Serial slave select enable register m (SSEm) * Input switch control register (ISC) * Noise filter enable register 0 (NFEN0) * Port input mode registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, 12 (PIM1, PIM3, PIM5 to PIM7, PIM12) * Port output mode registers 1, 6, 7, 12 (POM1, POM6, POM7, POM12) * Port mode registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, 12 (PM1, PM3, PM5 to PM7, PM12) * Port registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, 12 (P1, P3, P5 to P7, P12) * Port mode control register 12 (PMC12) * Port input threshold control registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, and 12 (PITHL1, PITHL3, PITHL5 to PITHL7, PITHL12) * Port output slew rate select register (PSRSEL) Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 802 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) PER0 is used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to a hardware macro that is not used is stopped in order to reduce the power consumption and noise. When serial array unit 0 is used, be sure to set bit 2 (SAU0EN) of this register to 1. When serial array unit 1 is used, be sure to set bit 3 (SAU1EN) of this register to 1. Set the PER0 register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears the PER0 register to 00H. Figure 15-4. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 0 (PER0) Address: F00F0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> 6 <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PER0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN IICA0EN SAU1EN SAU0EN TAU1EN TAU0EN SAUmEN 0 Control of serial array unit m input clock supply Stops supply of input clock. * SFR used by serial array unit m cannot be written. * Serial array unit m is in the reset status. 1 Enables input clock supply. * SFR used by serial array unit m can be read/written. Cautions 1. When setting serial array unit m, be sure to set the SAUmEN bit to 1 first. If SAUmEN = 0, writing to a control register of serial array unit m is ignored, and, even if the register is read, only the default value is read (except for the input switch control register (ISC), noise filter enable register 0 (NFEN0), port input mode registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, 12 (PIM1, PIM3, PIM5 to PIM7, PIM12), port output mode registers 1, 6, 7, 12 (POM1, POM6, POM7, POM12), port mode registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, 12 (PM1, PM3, PM5 to PM7, PM12), port registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, 12 (P0, P1, P3, P5 to P7, P12), port mode control register 12 (PMC12), port input threshold control registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, and 12 (PITHL1, PITHL3, PITHL5 to PITHL7, and PITHL12), and port output slew rate select register (PSRSEL)). 2. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. Bits 1, 3, 4, and 6 in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Bits 4 and 6 in 30-pin products of the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and in 30-pin products of the RL78/F14 Bit 6 in the products other than above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 803 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.2 Serial clock select register m (SPSm) The SPSm register is a 16-bit register that is used to select two types of operation clocks (CKm0, CKm1) that are commonly supplied to each channel. CKm1 is selected by bits 7 to 4 of the SPSm register, and CKm0 is selected by bits 3 to 0. Rewriting the SPSm register is prohibited when the register is in operation (when SEmn = 1). The SPSm register can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the lower 8 bits of the SPSm register with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with SPSmL. Reset signal generation clears the SPSm register to 0000H. Figure 15-5. Format of Serial Clock Select Register m (SPSm) Address: F0116H, F0117H (SPS0), F0156H, F0157H (SPS1) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SPSm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS m13 m12 m11 m10 m03 m02 m01 m00 Section of operation clock (CKmk) Note PRS PRS PRS PRS mk3 mk2 mk1 mk0 0 0 0 0 fCLK 0 0 0 1 fCLK/2 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 fCLK = 2 MHz fCLK = 5 MHz fCLK = 10 MHz fCLK = 20 MHz fCLK = 32 MHz 2 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 32 MHz 1 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 16 MHz fCLK/2 2 500 kHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz fCLK/2 3 250 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz 4 MHz 4 0 1 0 0 fCLK/2 125 kHz 313 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz 2 MHz 0 1 0 1 fCLK/25 62.5 kHz 156 kHz 313 kHz 625 kHz 1 MHz 0 1 1 0 fCLK/26 31.3 kHz 78.1 kHz 156 kHz 313 kHz 500 kHz 1 fCLK/2 7 15.6 kHz 39.1 kHz 78.1 kHz 156 kHz 250 kHz fCLK/2 8 7.81 kHz 19.5 kHz 39.1 kHz 78.1 kHz 125 kHz fCLK/2 9 3.91 kHz 9.77 kHz 19.5 kHz 39.1 kHz 62.5 kHz fCLK/2 10 1.95 kHz 4.88 kHz 9.77 kHz 19.5 kHz 31.3 kHz fCLK/2 11 977 Hz 2.44 kHz 4.88 kHz 9.77 kHz 15.6 kHz 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Other than above Note Setting prohibited When changing the clock selected for fCLK (by changing the system clock control register (CKC) value), do so after having stopped (serial channel stop register m (STm) = 0003H) the operation of the serial array units (SAUs). Caution Be sure to clear bits 15 to 8 to 0. Remarks 1. fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency fSUB: Subsystem clock frequency 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), k = 0, 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 804 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.3 Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) The SMRmn register is a register that sets an operation mode of channel n. It is also used to select an operation clock (fMCK), specify whether the serial clock (fSCK) may be input or not, set a start trigger, an operation mode (CSI, UART, or simplified I2C), and an interrupt source. This register is also used to invert the level of the receive data only in the UART mode. Rewriting the SMRmn register is prohibited when the register is in operation (when SEmn = 1). However, the MDmn0 bit can be rewritten during operation. Set the SMRmn register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets the SMRmn register to 0020H. Figure 15-6. Format of Serial Mode Register mn (SMRmn) (1/2) Address: F0108H, F0109H (SMR00), F010AH, F010BH (SMR01), After reset: 0020H R/W F0148H, F0149H (SMR10), F014AH, F014BH (SMR11) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 SMRmn CKS CCS 0 0 0 0 0 STS 0 mn mn CKS mn 6 5 4 3 SIS 1 0 0 mn0 2 1 0 MD MD MD mn2 mn1 mn0 Selection of operation clock (fMCK) of channel n mn 0 Operation clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1 Operation clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register Operation clock (fMCK) is used by the edge detector. In addition, depending on the setting of the CCSmn bit and the higher 7 bits of the SDRmn register, a transfer clock (fTCLK) is generated. CCS Selection of transfer clock (fTCLK) of channel n mn 0 Divided operation clock fMCK specified by the CKSmn bit 1 Clock input fSCK from the SCKp pin (slave transfer in CSI mode) Transfer clock fTCLK is used for the shift register, communication controller, output controller, interrupt controller, and error controller. When CCSmn = 0, the division ratio of operation clock (fMCK) is set by the higher 7 bits of the SDRmn register. STS Selection of start trigger source mn 0 Only software trigger is valid (selected for CSI, UART transmission, and simplified I2C). 1 Valid edge of the RXDq pin (selected for UART reception) Transfer is started when the above source is satisfied after 1 is set to the SSm register. Caution Be sure to clear bits 13 to 9, 7, 4, and 3 to 0. Be sure to set bit 5 to 1. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), q: UART number (q = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 805 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-6. Format of Serial Mode Register mn (SMRmn) (2/2) Address: F0108H, F0109H (SMR00), F010AH, F010BH (SMR01), After reset: 0020H R/W F0148H, F0149H (SMR10), F014AH, F014BH (SMR11) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 SMRmn CKS CCS 0 0 0 0 0 STS 0 mn mn mn SIS 6 5 4 3 SIS 1 0 0 mn0 2 1 0 MD MD MD mn2 mn1 mn0 Controls inversion of level of receive data of channel n in UART mode mn0 Falling edge is detected as the start bit. 0 The input communication data is captured as is. Rising edge is detected as the start bit. 1 The input communication data is inverted and captured. MD MD mn2 mn1 0 0 CSI mode 0 1 UART mode 1 0 Simplified I2C mode 1 1 Setting prohibited Setting of operation mode of channel n MD Selection of interrupt source of channel n mn0 0 Transfer end interrupt 1 Buffer empty interrupt (Occurs when data is transferred from the SDRmn register to the shift register.) For successive transmission, the next transmit data is written by setting the MDmn0 bit to 1 when SDRmn data has run out. Caution Be sure to clear bits 13 to 9, 7, 4, and 3 to 0. Be sure to set bit 5 to 1. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), q: UART number (q = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 806 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.4 Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) The SCRmn register is a communication operation setting register of channel n. It is used to set a data transmission/reception mode, phase of data and clock, whether an error signal is to be masked or not, parity bit, start bit, stop bit, and data length. Rewriting the SCRmn register is prohibited when the register is in operation (when SEmn = 1). Set the SCRmn register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets the SCRmn register to 0087H. Figure 15-7. Format of Serial Communication Operation Setting Register mn (SCRmn) (1/3) Address: F010CH, F010DH (SCR00), F010EH, F010FH (SCR01), After reset: 0087H R/W F014CH, F014DH (SCR10), F014EH, F014FH (SCR11) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SCRmn TXE RXE DAP CKP 0 0 PTC PTC DIR 0 SLC SLC DLS DLS DLS DLS mn mn mn mn mn1 mn0 mn mn1 mn0 mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 TXE RXE mn mn 0 0 Disable communication. 0 1 Reception only 1 0 Transmission only 1 1 Transmission/reception DAP CKP mn mn 0 0 Setting of operation mode of channel n Selection of data and clock phase in CSI mode Type SCKp SOp 1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 SIp input timing 0 1 SCKp SOp 2 SIp input timing 1 0 SCKp SOp 3 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 SIp input timing 1 1 SCKp SOp 4 SIp input timing Be sure to set DAPmn, CKPmn = 0, 0 in the UART mode and simplified I2C mode. ___________ Set CKPmn to 1, when SSEmn = 1 (Enables SSImn pin input). Caution Be sure to clear bits 6, 10, and 11 to 0. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 807 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-7. Format of Serial Communication Operation Setting Register mn (SCRmn) (2/3) Address: F010CH, F0110DH (SCR00), F010EH, F010FH (SCR01), After reset: 0087H R/W F014CH, F014DH (SCR10), F014EH, F014FH (SCR11) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SCRmn TXE RXE DAP CKP 0 0 PTC PTC DIR 0 SLC SLC DLS DLS DLS DLS mn mn mn mn mn1 mn0 mn mn1 mn0 mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 PTC PTC mn1 mn0 0 0 Setting of parity bit in UART mode Transmission Reception Does not output the parity bit. Receives without parity Note 0 1 Outputs 0 parity 1 0 Outputs even parity. . No parity judgment Judged as even parity. 1 1 Outputs odd parity. Judges as odd parity. Be sure to set PTCmn1, PTCmn0 = 0, 0 in the CSI mode and simplified I2C mode. DIR Selection of data transfer sequence in CSI and UART modes mn 0 Inputs/outputs data with MSB first. 1 Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Be sure to clear DIRmn = 0 in the simplified I2C mode. SLCm SLC Setting of stop bit in UART mode n1 mn0 0 0 No stop bit 0 1 Stop bit length = 1 bit 1 0 Stop bit length = 2 bits (mn = 00, 10 only) 1 1 Setting prohibited When the transfer end interrupt is selected, the interrupt is generated when all stop bits have been completely transferred. Set 1 bit (SLCmn1, SLCmn0 = 0, 1) during UART reception and in the simplified I2C mode. Set no stop bit (SLCmn1, SLCmn0 = 0, 0) in the CSI mode. Note "0" is always added regardless of the contents of data. Caution Be sure to clear bits 6, 10, and 11 to 0. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 808 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-7. Format of Serial Communication Operation Setting Register mn (SCRmn) (3/3) Address: F010CH, F0110DH (SCR00), F010EH, F010FH (SCR01), After reset: 0087H R/W F014CH, F014DH (SCR10), F014EH, F014FH (SCR11) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SCRmn TXE RXE DAP CKP 0 0 PTC PTC DIR 0 SLC SLC DLS DLS DLS DLS mn mn mn mn mn1 mn0 mn mn1 mn0 mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 DLS DLS DLS DLS mn3 mn2 mn1 mn0 0 1 1 0 7 bits (stored in bits 0 to 6 of SDRmn register) - 0 1 1 1 8 bits (stored in bits 0 to 7 of SDRmn register) 1 0 0 0 9 bits (stored in bits 0 to 8 of SDRmn register) - 1 0 0 1 10 bits (stored in bits 0 to 9 of SDRmn register) - - 1 0 1 0 11 bits (stored in bits 0 to 10 of SDRmn register) - - 1 0 1 1 12 bits (stored in bits 0 to 11 of SDRmn register) - - 1 1 0 0 13 bits (stored in bits 0 to 12 of SDRmn register) - - 1 1 0 1 14 bits (stored in bits 0 to 13 of SDRmn register) - - 1 1 1 0 15 bits (stored in bits 0 to 14 of SDRmn register) - - 1 1 1 1 16 bits (stored in bits 0 to 15 of SDRmn register) - Other than above Setting of data length in CSI, UART mode Serial function CSI UART IIC Setting prohibited Set DLSmn3 to DLSmn0 to 0111B in the simplified I2C mode. Caution Be sure to clear bits 6, 10, and 11 to 0. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 809 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.5 Higher 7 bits of the serial data register mn (SDRmn) The SDRmn register is the transmit/receive data register (16 bits) of channel n. If operation is stopped (SEmn = 0), bits 15 to 9 are used as a register that sets the division ratio of the operation clock (fMCK). If operation is in progress (SEmn = 1), the SDRmn register functions as a transmit/receive buffer register. If the CCSmn bit of the serial mode register mn (SMRmn) is cleared to 0, the clock set by dividing the operating clock by the higher 7 bits of the SDRmn register is used as the transfer clock. For the function of the SDR register when operation is in progress, see 15.2 Configuration of Serial Array Unit. SDRmn can be read or written in 16-bit units. Reset signal generation clears the SDRmn register to 0000H. Figure 15-8. Format of Serial Data Register mn (SDRmn) Address: FFF10H, FFF11H (SDR00), FFF12H, FFF13H (SDR01) After reset: 0000H R/W FFF48H, FFF49H (SDR10), FFF4AH, FFF4BH (SDR11) FFF11H (SDR00) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 FFF10H (SDR00) 10 9 SDRmn SDRmn[15:9] 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Transfer clock set by dividing the operating clock (fMCK) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 fMCK/2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 fMCK/4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 fMCK/6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 fMCK/8 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 fMCK/254 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 fMCK/256 (Cautions and Remarks are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 810 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 8 to 0 to 0 if operation is stopped (SEmn = 0). 2. Setting SDRmn[15:9] = (0000000B, 0000001B) is prohibited when UART is used. 3. Setting SDRmn[15:9] = 0000000B is prohibited when simplified I2C is used. Set SDRmn[15:9] to 0000001B or greater. 4. Do not write eight bits to the lower eight bits if operation is stopped (SEmn = 0). (If these bits are written to, the higher seven bits are cleared to 0.) Remarks 1. For the function of the SDRmn register when operation is in progress (SEmn = 1), see 15.2 Configuration of Serial Array Unit. 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 811 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.6 Serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn) The SIRmn register is a trigger register that is used to clear each error flag of channel n. When each bit (FECTmn, PECTmn, OVCTmn) of this register is set to 1, the corresponding bit (FEFmn, PEFmn, OVFmn) of the serial status register mn is cleared to 0. Because the SIRmn register is a trigger register, it is cleared immediately when the corresponding bit of the SSRmn register is cleared. Set the SIRmn register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the lower 8 bits of the SIRmn register with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with SIRmnL. Reset signal generation clears the SIRmn register to 0000H. Figure 15-9. Format of Serial Flag Clear Trigger Register mn (SIRmn) Address: F0104H, F0105H (SIR00), F0106H, F0107H (SIR01), After reset: 0000H R/W F0144H, F0145H (SIR10), F0146H, F0147H (SIR11) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 SIRmn 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 FECT PEC mn FEC 1 Tmn 0 OVC Tmn Clear trigger of framing error of channel n Tmn 0 Not cleared 1 Clears the FEFmn bit of the SSRmn register to 0. PEC Clear trigger of parity error flag of channel n Tmn 0 Not cleared 1 Clears the PEFmn bit of the SSRmn register to 0. OVC Clear trigger of overrun error flag of channel n Tmn 0 Not cleared 1 Clears the OVFmn bit of the SSRmn register to 0. Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 15 to 3 to 0. 2. Use the SIRmn register to clear only the error flag set in the SSRn register. If the error flag not set in this register is cleared, the flag may be erased when an error is detected from reading to clearing this error flag. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) 2. When the SIRmn register is read, 0000H is always read. 3. If the clear trigger bit is set to 1 and the corresponding error flag is set to 1 at the same time, the error flag setting is prioritized. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 812 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.7 Serial status register mn (SSRmn) The SSRmn register is a register that indicates the communication status and error occurrence status of channel n. The errors indicated by this register are a framing error, parity error, and overrun error. The SSRmn register can be read by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. The lower 8 bits of the SSRmn register can be read with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with SSRmnL. Reset signal generation clears the SSRmn register to 0000H. Figure 15-10. Format of Serial Status Register mn (SSRmn) (1/2) Address: F0100H, F0101H (SSR00), F0102H, F0103H (SSR01), After reset: 0000H R F0140H, F0141H (SSR10), F0142H, F0143H (SSR11) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SSRmn 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TSF BFF 0 0 FEF PEF OVF mn mn mn mn mn TSF Communication status indication flag of channel n mn 0 Communication is stopped or suspended. 1 Communication is in progress. <Clear conditions> * The STmn bit of the STm register is set to 1 (communication is stopped) or the SSmn bit of the SSm register is set to 1 (communication is suspended). * Communication ends. <Set condition> * Communication starts. BFF Buffer register status indication flag of channel n mn 0 Valid data is not stored in the SDRmn register. 1 Valid data is stored in the SDRmn register. <Clear conditions> * Transferring transmit data from the SDRmn register to the shift register ends during transmission. * Reading receive data from the SDRmn register ends during reception. * The STmn bit of the STm register is set to 1 (communication is stopped) or the SSmn bit of the SSm register is set to 1 (communication is enabled). <Set conditions> * Transmit data is written to the SDRmn register while the TXEmn bit of the SCRmn register is set to 1 (transmission or transmission and reception mode in each communication mode). * Receive data is stored in the SDRmn register while the RXEmn bit of the SCRmn register is set to 1 (reception or transmission and reception mode in each communication mode). * A reception error occurs. Caution If data is written to the SDRmn register when BFFmn = 1, the transmit/receive data stored in the register is discarded and an overrun error (OVEmn = 1) is detected. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 813 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-10. Format of Serial Status Register mn (SSRmn) (2/2) Address: F0100H, F0101H (SSR00), F0102H, F0103H (SSR01), After reset: 0000H R F0140H, F0141H (SSR10), F0142H, F0143H (SSR11) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SSRmn 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TSF BFF 0 0 FEF PEF OVF mn mn mn mn mn FEFm Framing error detection flag of channel n n 0 No error occurs. 1 An error occurs (during UART reception). <Clear condition> * 1 is written to the FECTmn bit of the SIRmn register. <Set condition> * A stop bit is not detected when UART reception ends. PEF Parity error detection flag of channel n mn 0 No error occurs. 1 An error occurs (during UART reception) or ACK is not detected (during I2C transmission). <Clear condition> * 1 is written to the PECTmn bit of the SIRmn register. <Set condition> * The parity of the transmit data and the parity bit do not match when UART reception ends (parity error). * No ACK signal is returned from the slave channel at the ACK reception timing during I2C transmission (ACK is not detected). OVF Overrun error detection flag of channel n mn 0 No error occurs. 1 An error occurs. <Clear condition> * 1 is written to the OVCTmn bit of the SIRmn register. <Set condition> * Even though receive data is stored in the SDRmn register, that data is not read and transmit data or the next receive data is written while the RXEmn bit of the SCRmn register is set to 1 (reception or transmission and reception mode in each communication mode). * Transmit data is not ready for slave transmission or transmission and reception in CSI mode. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 814 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.8 Serial channel start register m (SSm) The SSm register is a trigger register that is used to enable starting communication/count by each channel. When 1 is written a bit of this register (SSmn), the corresponding bit (SEmn) of serial channel enable status register m (SEm) is set to 1 (Operation is enabled). Because the SSmn bit is a trigger bit, it is cleared immediately when SEmn = 1. Set the SSm register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the lower 8 bits of the SSm register with an 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with SSmL. Reset signal generation clears the SSm register to 0000H. Figure 15-11. Format of Serial Channel Start Register m (SSm) Address: F0112H, F0113H (SS0) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 SS0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 After reset: 0000H R/W Address: F0152H, F0153H (SS1) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 SS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSmn 1 0 SS01 SS00 1 0 SS11 SS10 Operation start trigger of channel n 0 No trigger operation 1 Sets the SEmn bit to 1 and enters the communication wait status Note. Note If a communication operation is already under execution, the operation is stopped. The value of the control register and shift register, and the status of the serial clock I/O pin, serial data output pin, and each error flag (FEFmn: framing error flag, PEFmn: parity error flag, OVFmn: overrun error flag) are held. Cautions 1. 2. Be sure to clear bits 15 to 2 of the SS0 register and bits 15 to 2 of the SS1 register to 0. For the UART reception, set the RXEmn bit of SCRmn register to 1, and then be sure to set SSmn to 1 after 4 or more fMCK clocks have elapsed. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) 2. When the SSm register is read, 0000H is always read. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 815 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.9 Serial channel stop register m (STm) The STm register is a trigger register that is used to enable stopping communication/count by each channel. When 1 is written a bit of this register (STmn), the corresponding bit (SEmn) of serial channel enable status register m (SEm) is cleared to 0 (operation is stopped). Because the STmn bit is a trigger bit, it is cleared immediately when SEmn = 0. Set the STm register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the lower 8 bits of the STm register with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with STmL. Reset signal generation clears the STm register to 0000H. Figure 15-12. Format of Serial Channel Stop Register m (STm) Address: F0114H, F0115H (ST0) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 ST0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 After reset: 0000H R/W Address: F0154H, F0155H (ST1) Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 ST1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STm 1 0 ST01 ST00 1 0 ST11 ST10 Operation stop trigger of channel n n 0 No trigger operation 1 Clears the SEmn bit to 0 and stops the communication operationNote. Note Communication stops while holding the value of the control register and shift register, and the status of the serial clock I/O pin, serial data output pin, and each error flag (FEFmn: framing error flag, PEFmn: parity error flag, OVFmn: overrun error flag). Caution Be sure to clear bits 15 to 2 of the ST0 register and bits 15 to 2 of the ST1 register to 0. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) 2. When the STm register is read, 0000H is always read. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 816 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.10 Serial channel enable status register m (SEm) The SEm register indicates whether data transmission/reception operation of each channel is enabled or stopped. When 1 is written a bit of serial channel start register m (SSm), the corresponding bit of this register is set to 1. When 1 is written a bit of serial channel stop register m (STm), the corresponding bit is cleared to 0. Channel n that is enabled to operate cannot rewrite by software the value of the CKOmn bit (serial clock output of channel n) of serial output register m (SOm) to be described below, and a value reflected by a communication operation is output from the serial clock pin. Channel n that stops operation can set the value of the CKOmn bit of the SOm register by software and output its value from the serial clock pin. In this way, any waveform, such as that of a start condition/stop condition, can be created by software. Read the SEm register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Read the lower 8 bits of the SEm register with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with SFmL. Reset signal generation clears the SEm register to 0000H. Figure 15-13. Format of Serial Channel Enable Status Register m (SEm) Address: F0110H, F0111H (SE0) After reset: 0000H R Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 SE0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Address: F0150H, F0151H (SE1) After reset: 0000H 0 SE01 SE00 R Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 SE1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEm 1 1 0 SE11 SE10 Indication of operation enable/stop status of channel n n 0 Operation stops Note 1 Operation is enabled. Note The control register, shift register value, serial clock I/O pin, serial data output pin, and error flags (FEFmn: framing error flag, PEFmn: parity error flag, OVFmn: over error flag)) are stopped with the state retained. Bits 6 and 5 (TSFmn and BFFmn) in the SSRmn register are cleared. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 817 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.11 Serial output enable register m (SOEm) The SOEm register is a register that is used to enable or stop output of the serial communication operation of each channel. Channel n that enables serial output cannot rewrite by software the value of the SOmn bit of serial output register m (SOm) to be described below, and a value reflected by a communication operation is output from the serial data output pin. For channel n, whose serial output is stopped, the SOmn bit value of the SOm register can be set by software, and that value can be output from the serial data output pin. In this way, any waveform of the start condition and stop condition can be created by software. Set the SOEm register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the lower 8 bits of the SOEm register with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with SOEmL. Reset signal generation clears the SOEm register to 0000H. Figure 15-14. Format of Serial Output Enable Register m (SOEm) Address: F011AH, F011BH After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SOE0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOE SOE 01 00 Address: F015AH, F015BH After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SOE1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOE SOE 11 10 SOE Serial output enable/stop of channel n mn Caution 0 Stops output by serial communication operation. 1 Enables output by serial communication operation. Be sure to clear bits 15 to 2 of the SOE0 register and bits 15 to 2 of the SOE1 register to 0. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 818 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.12 Serial output register m (SOm) The SOm register is a buffer register for serial output of each channel. The value of the SOmn bit of this register is output from the serial data output pin of channel n. The value of the CKOmn bit of this register is output from the serial clock output pin of channel n. The SOmn bit of this register can be rewritten by software only when serial output is disabled (SOEmn = 0). When serial output is enabled (SOEmn = 1), rewriting by software is ignored, and the value of the register can be changed only by a serial communication operation. The CKOmn bit of this register can be rewritten by software only when the channel operation is stopped (SEmn = 0). While channel operation is enabled (SEmn = 1), rewriting by software is ignored, and the value of the CKOmn bit can be changed only by a serial communication operation. To use the pin for serial interface as a port function pin, set the corresponding CKOmn and SOmn bits to 1. Set the SOm register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears the SOm register to 0303H. Figure 15-15. Format of Serial Output Register m (SOm) Address: F0118H, F0119H After reset: 0303H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SO0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKO CKO 0 0 0 0 0 0 SO SO 01 00 01 00 Address: F0158H, F0159H After reset: 0303H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SO1 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKO CKO 0 0 0 0 0 0 SO SO 11 10 11 10 CKO Serial clock output of channel n mn 0 Serial clock output value is 0. 1 Serial clock output value is 1. SO Serial data output of channel n mn Caution 0 Serial data output value is 0. 1 Serial data output value is 1. Be sure to clear bits 15 to 12 and 7 to 2 of the SOm register to 0. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 819 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.13 Serial output level register m (SOLm) The SOLm register is a register that is used to set inversion of the data output level of each channel. This register can be set only in the UART mode. Be sure to set 0 for corresponding bit in the CSI mode and simplifies I2C mode. Inverting channel n by using this register is reflected on pin output only when serial output is enabled (SOEmn = 1). When serial output is disabled (SOEmn = 0), the value of the SOmn bit is output as is. Rewriting the SOLm register is prohibited when the register is in operation (when SEmn = 1). Set the SOLm register by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the lower 8 bits of the SOLm register with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction with SOLmL. Reset signal generation clears the SOLm register to 0000H. Figure 15-16. Format of Serial Output Level Register m (SOLm) Address: F0120H, F0121H (SOL0) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SOL0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOL SOL 01 00 Address: F0160H, F0161H (SOL1) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SOL1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOL SOL 11 10 SOL Selects inversion of the level of the transmit data of channel n in UART mode mn Caution 0 Communication data is output as is. 1 Communication data is inverted and output. Be sure to clear bits 15 to 2 of the SOL0 register and bits 15 to 2 of the SOL1 register to 0. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 820 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.14 Serial slave select enable register m (SSEm) The SSEm register controls the SSImn pin input of the channel during CSI communication and in slave mode. While a high-level signal is being input to the SSImn pin, no transmission/reception operation is performed even if a serial clock is input. While a low-level signal is being input to the SSImn pin, a transmission/reception operation is performed according to each mode setting if a serial clock is input. Reset signal generation clears the SSEm register to 0000H. Cautions 1. 2. Writing is prohibited other than during CSI communication and in slave mode. Can be set only when the SAU is stopped (SEmn = 0). Figure 15-17. Format of Serial Slave Select Enable Register m (SSEm) Address: F0122H, F0123H (SSE0) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SSE0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSE SSE 01 00 Address: F0162H, F0163H (SSE1) After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SSE1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSE SSE 11 10 SSEmnNote Channel n SSImn input setting in CSI communication and slave mode 0 Disables SSImn pin input. 1 Enables SSImn pin input. Note Set CKPmn bit of SCRmn register to 1, when SSEmn = 1. Caution Be sure to clear bits 15 to 2 to 0. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 821 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.15 Input switch control register (ISC) The ISC0 bit of the ISC register is used to realize a LIN-bus communication operation by UART0. Set the ISC0 bit at the same time as setting the TIS17 and TIS16 bits in the TIS1 register (timer input select register 1). When bit 0 is set to 1, the input signal of the serial data input (RXD0) pin is selected as an external interrupt (INTP0) that can be used to detect a wakeup signal by an INTP0 interrupt. Set the ISC register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears the ISC register to 00H. Figure 15-18. Format of Input Switch Control Register (ISC) Address: F0073H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ISC 0 0 0 0 ISC3 ISC2 0 ISC0 ISC3 Switching external input (INTP12) 0 Uses the input signal of the INTP12 pin as an external interrupt input. 1 Uses the input signal of the LRxD1 pin as an external interrupt input. ISC2 Switching external input (INTP11) 0 Uses the input signal of the INTP11 pin as an external interrupt input. 1 Uses the input signal of the LRxD0 pin as an external interrupt input. ISC0 Caution Switching external interrupt (INTP0) input 0 Uses the input signal of the INTP0 pin as an external interrupt (normal operation). 1 Uses the input signal of the RXD0 pin as an external interrupt (wakeup signal detection). Be sure to clear bits 7 to 4 and 1 to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 822 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.16 Noise filter enable register 0 (NFEN0) The NFEN0 register is used to set whether the noise filter can be used for the input signal from the serial data input pin to each channel. Disable the noise filter of the pin used for CSI or simplified I2C communication, by clearing the corresponding bit of this register to 0. Enable the noise filter of the pin used for UART communication, by setting the corresponding bit of this register to 1. When the noise filter is enabled, CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) is synchronized with 2-clock match detection. When the noise filter is OFF, only synchronization is performed with the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fMCK) Note. Set the NFEN0 register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears the NFEN0 register to 00H. Note For details, see 6.5.1 (2) When valid edge of input signal via the TImn pin is selected (CCSmn = 1) and 6.5.2 Start timing of counter. Figure 15-19. Format of Noise Filter Enable Register 0 (NFEN0) Address: F0070H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NFEN0 0 0 0 0 0 SNFEN10 0 SNFEN00 Note SNFEN10 Use of noise filter of RXD1 pin 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON Set the SNFEN10 bit to 1 to use the RXD1 pin. Clear the SNFEN10 bit to 0 to use the other than RxD1 pin. SNFEN00 Use of noise filter of RXD0 pin 0 Noise filter OFF 1 Noise filter ON Set the SNFEN00 bit to 1 to use the RXD0 pin. Clear the SNFEN00 bit to 0 to use the other than RxD0 pin. Note Not provided in the Group A products. Caution Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. * Bits 7 to 1 in the Group A products * Bits 7 to 3 and 1 in the products other than above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 823 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.17 Port input mode registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, 12 (PIM1, PIM3, PIM5 to PIM7, PIM12) These registers set the input buffer of ports 1, 3, 5 to 7, and 12 in 1-bit units. Set the PIM1, PIM3, PIM5 to PIM7, and PIM12 registers by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears the PIM1, PIM3, PIM5 to PIM7, and PIM12 registers to 00H. Figure 15-20. Format of Port Input Mode Registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, and 12 (PIM1, PIM3, PIM5 to PIM7, PIM12) Address F0041H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIM1 PIM17 PIM16 0 PIM14 PIM13 0 PIM11 PIM10 Address F0043H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIM3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PIM30 Address F0045H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIM5 0 0 0 PIM54 0 0 0 0 Address F0046H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIM6 0 0 0 0 PIM63 PIM62 0 0 Address F0047H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIM7 0 0 0 0 PIM73 0 PIM71 PIM70 Address F004CH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIM12 0 0 PIM125 0 0 0 0 0 PIMmn Pmn pin input buffer selection (m = 1, 3, 5 to 7, 12; n = 0, to 7) 0 Normal input buffer 1 TTL input buffer R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 824 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.18 Port output mode registers 1, 6, 7, 12 (POM1, POM6, POM7, POM12) These registers set the output mode of ports 1, 6, 7, and 12 in 1-bit units. Set the POM1, POM6, POM7, and POM12 registers by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears the POM1, POM6, POM7, and POM12 registers to 00H. Figure 15-21. Format of Port Output Mode Registers 1, 6, 7, and 12 (POM1, POM6, POM7, POM12) Address F0051H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 POM1 POM17 POM16 POM15 POM14 POM13 POM12 POM11 POM10 Address F0056H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 POM6 0 0 0 0 POM63 POM62 POM61 POM60 Address F0057H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 POM7 0 0 0 0 0 POM72 POM71 POM70 Address F005CH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 POM12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 POM120 POMmn Pmn pin output buffer selection (m = 1, 6, 7, 12; n = 0 to 7) 0 Normal output mode 1 N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode Caution Be sure to set bits for pins that are not present to their initial values. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 825 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.3.19 Port mode registers 1, 3 to 7, 12 (PM1, PM3 to PM7, PM12) These registers set input/output of ports1, 3 to 7, and 12 in 1-bit units. When using the port (P12) to be shared with the serial data output pin or serial clock output pin for serial data output or serial clock output, set the bit in the port mode register (PMxx) corresponding to each port to 0. And set the bit in the port register (Pxx) corresponding to each port to 1 Example: When using P12/TI11/TO11/(TRDI0D0)/INTP5/SO10/TXD1/SNZOUT3 for serial data output or serial clock output Set the PM12 bit of the port mode register 1 to 0. Set the P12 bit of the port register 1 to 1. When using the ports to be shared with the serial data input pin or serial clock input pin for serial data input or serial clock input, set the bit in the port mode register (PMxx) corresponding to each port to 1. At this time, the bit in the port register (Pxx) may be 0 or 1. Example: When using P16/TI02/TO02/TRDI0C1/SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD for serial data input or serial clock input Set the PM16 bit of port mode register 1 to 1. Set the P16 bit of port register 1 to 0 or 1. Set the PM1, PM3 to PM7, and PM12 registers by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets the PM1, PM3 to PM7, and PM12 registers to FFH. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 826 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-22. Format of Port Mode Registers 1, 3 to 7, 12 (PM1, PM3 to PIM7, PIM12) Address: FFF21H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM1 OM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10 Address: FFF23H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM3 1 1 1 PM34 PM33 PM32 PM31 PM30 Address: FFF24H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM4 PM47 PM46 PM45 PM44 PM43 PM42 PM41 PM40 Address: FFF25H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM5 PM57 PM56 PM55 PM54 PM53 PM52 PM51 PM50 Address: FFF26H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM6 PM67 PM66 PM65 PM64 PM63 PM62 PM61 PM60 Address: FFF27H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM7 PM77 PM76 PM75 PM74 PM73 PM72 PM71 PM70 Address: FFF27H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM12 PM127 PM126 PM125 1 1 1 1 PM120 PMmn Pmn pin I/O mode selection (m = 1, 3 to 7, 12; n = 0 to 7) 0 Output mode (output buffer on) 1 Input mode (output buffer off) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 827 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.4 Operation stop mode Each serial interface of serial array unit has the operation stop mode. In this mode, serial communication cannot be executed, thus reducing the power consumption. In addition, the pin for serial interface can be used as port function pins in this mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 828 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.4.1 Stopping the operation by units The stopping of the operation by units is set by using peripheral enable register 0 (PER0). The PER0 register is used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to a hardware macro that is not used is stopped in order to reduce the power consumption and noise. To stop the operation of serial array unit 0, set bit 2 (SAU0EN) to 0. To stop the operation of serial array unit 1, set bit 3 (SAU1EN) to 0. Figure 15-23. Peripheral Enable Register 0 (PER0) Setting When Stopping the Operation by Units (a) Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) ... Set only the bit of SAUm to be stopped to 0. PER0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN IICA0EN SAU1EN SAU0EN TAU1EN TAU0EN x x 0/1 0/1 x x x Control of SAUm input clock 0: Stops supply of input clock 1: Supplies input clock Cautions 1. If SAUmEN = 0, writing to a control register of serial array unit m is ignored, and, even if the register is read, only the default value is read Note that this does not apply to the following registers. * Input switch control register (ISC) * Noise filter enable register 0 (NFEN0) * Port input mode registers 1, 3, 5 to 7, 12 (PIM1, PIM3, PIM5 to PIM7, PIM12) * Port output mode registers 1, 6, 7, 12 (POM1, POM6, POM7, POM12) * Port mode registers 1, 3 to 7, 12 (PM1, PM3 to PM7, PM12) * Port registers 1, 3 to 7, 12 (P1, P3 to P7, P12) 2. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. Bits 1, 3, 4, and 6 in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Bits 4 and 6 in 30-pin products of the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and in 30-pin products of the RL78/F14 Bit 6 in the products other than above Remark x: Bits not used with serial array units (depending on the settings of other peripheral functions) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user m: Unit number (m = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 829 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.4.2 Stopping the operation by channels The stopping of the operation by channels is set using each of the following registers. Figure 15-24. Each Register Setting When Stopping the Operation by Channels (1/2) (a) Serial channel stop register m (STm) ... This register is a trigger register that is used to enable stopping communication/count by each channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STm 1 0 STm1 STm0 0/1 0/1 1: Clears the SEmn bit to 0 and stops the communication operation * Because the STmn bit is a trigger bit, it is cleared immediately when SEmn = 0. (b) Serial channel enable status register m (SEm) ... This register indicates whether data transmission/reception operation of each channel is enabled or stopped. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEm 1 0 SEm1 SEm0 0/1 0/1 0: Operation stops * The SEmn register is a read-only status register, whose operation is stopped by using the STm register. With a channel whose operation is stopped, the value of the CKOmn bit of the SOm register can be set by software. (c) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ... This register is a register that is used to enable or stop output of the serial communication operation of each channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 0/1 0/1 0: Stops output by serial communication operation * For channel n, whose serial output is stopped, the SOmn bit value of the SOm register can be set by software. (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ...This register is a buffer register for serial output of each channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 0/1 0/1 1: Serial clock output value is 1 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 0/1 0/1 1: Serial data output value is 1 * When using pins corresponding to each channel as port function pins, set the corresponding CKOmn, SOmn bits to 1. Remarks 1. 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 830 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-24. Each Register Setting When Stopping the Operation by Channels (2/2) (e) Serial slave select enable register (SSEm) ... This register controls the SSImn pin in each slave channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSEm 1 0 SSEm1 SSEm0 0/1 0/1 0: Disables the input value of the SSImn pin Remarks 1. 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 831 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.5 Operation of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) Communication This is a clocked communication function that uses three lines: serial clock (SCK) and serial data (SI and SO) lines. [Data transmission/reception] * Data length of 7 to 16 bits * Phase control of transmit/receive data * MSB/LSB first selectable * Level setting of transmit/receive data [Clock control] * Master/slave selection * Phase control of I/O clock * Setting of transfer period by prescaler and internal counter of each channel * Maximum transfer rate During master communication: Max. fMCK/4 Note During slave communication: Max. fMCK/6 Note [Interrupt function] * Transfer end interrupt/buffer empty interrupt [Error detection flag] * Overrun error In addition, CSI00m, CSI01, CSI10, and CSI11 support the slave select input function. For details, refer to 15.6 Clock Synchronous Serial Communication with SPI Function. Note Use the clocks within a range satisfying the SCK cycle time (tKCY) characteristics (see CHAPTER 34 to CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 832 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT The channels supporting 3-wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) are channels 0 and 1 of SAU0 and channels 0 and 1 of SAU1. * Group A products Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI UART0 (supporting LIN-bus) IIC00 function) Note2 1 CSI01 (supporting SPI IIC01 function) Note2 * Products of Groups C-1 and D-1 Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI UART0 (supporting LIN-bus) IIC00 function) Note2 1 CSI01 (supporting SPI IIC01 function) Note2 1 0 CSI10 (supporting SPI UART1 IIC10 function) Note1, 2 1 - - * Products of Groups B, C-2, D-2, and E Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI UART0 (supporting LIN-bus) IIC00 function) Note2 1 CSI01 (supporting SPI IIC01 function) Note2 1 0 CSI10 (supporting SPI UART1 IIC10 function) Note1, 2 1 CSI11 (supporting SPI IIC11 function) Note2 ___________ <R> Notes 1. 48-pin, 32-pin and 30-pin products do not have SSI10 pin. ____________ 2. Set CKPmn bit of SCRmn register to 1, when SSEmn = 1 (Enables SSImn pin input). (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1) Remark Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C-1: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30 or 32 pins Group C-2: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 48, 64, or 80 pins Group D-1: RL78/F14 products with 30 or 32 pins Group D-2: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory 3-wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) performs the following six types of communication operations. * Master transmission (See 15.5.1 Master transmission.) * Master reception (See 15.5.2 Master reception.) * Master transmission/reception (See 15.5.3 Master transmission/reception.) * Slave transmission (See 15.5.4 Slave transmission.) * Slave reception (See 15.5.5 Slave reception.) * Slave transmission/reception (See 15.5.6 Slave transmission/reception.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 833 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.5.1 Master transmission Master transmission is an operation wherein this MCU outputs a transfer clock and transmits data to another device. 3-Wire Serial I/O CSI00 CSI01 CSI10 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 0 of SAU1 Pins used SCK00, SO00 SCK01, SO01 SCK10, SO10 Interrupt INTCSI00 INTCSI01 INTCSI10 CSI11 Channel 1 of SAU1 SCK11, SO11 INTCSI11 Transfer end interrupt (in single-transfer mode) or buffer empty interrupt (in continuous transfer mode) can be selected. Error detection flag None Transfer data length 7 to 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/4 [Hz] Min. fCLK/(2 x 211 x 128) [Hz] Note Data phase fCLK: System clock frequency Selectable by the DAPmn bit of the SCRmn register * DAPmn = 0: Data output starts from the start of the serial clock operation. * DAPmn = 1: Data output starts half a clock before the start of the serial clock operation. Clock phase Selectable by the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn register * CKPmn = 0: Forward * CKPmn = 1: Reverse Data direction Note MSB or LSB first Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 834 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-25. Example of Contents of Registers for Master Transmission of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 STSmn CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 8 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 2 SISmn0 0 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt 1: Buffer empty interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 1 9 0 0 0/1 5 4 3 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Selection of the data and clock phase (For details about the setting, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.) 2 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 SDRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 Baud rate setting (division setting of operation clock (fMCK) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 0/1 0/1 (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRpL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 SDRmn 9 8 7 6 5 4 Transmit data setting SDRpL (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 0/1 0/1 Communication starts when these bits are 1 if the clock phase is forward (the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn = 0). If the clock phase is reversed (CKPmn = 1), communication starts when these bits are 0. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI master transmission mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 835 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-25. Example of Contents of Registers for Master Transmission of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (2/2) (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 0/1 0/1 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI master transmission mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 836 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-26. Initial Setting Procedure for Master Transmission Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Setting the SPSm register Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Setting the SDRmn register Set a transfer baud rate. Setting the SOm register Set the initial output level of the serial clock (CKOmn) and serial data (SOmn). Changing setting of the SOEm register Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable data output of the target channel. Enable data output and clock output of Setting port the target channel by setting a port register and port mode register. Writing to the SSm register Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Starting communication Remark Set transmit data to the SDRmn register and start communication. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 837 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-27. Procedure for Stopping Master Transmission Starting setting to stop No (Selective) TSFmn = 0? If there is any data being transferred, wait for their completion. (If there is an urgent must stop, do not wait) Yes (Essential) Writing the STm register Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. (SEmn = 0 : (Essential) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOm register to operation stop status) Set the SOEmn bit to 0 and stop the output of the target channel. The levels of the serial clock (CKOmn) and serial data (SOmn) on the target channel can be changed if necessitated by an emergency. (Selective) Remark Setting the PER0 register To use the STOP mode, reset the serial array unit by stopping the clock supply to it. Stop setting is completed The master transmission is stopped. Go to the next processing. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 838 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-28. Procedure for Resuming Master Transmission Starting setting for resumption Disable data output and clock output of Port manipulation (Essential) the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. (Selective) Re-set the register to change the operation Changing setting of the SPSm register clock setting. Re-set the register to change the (Selective) Changing setting of the SDRmn register transfer baud rate setting (setting the transfer clock by dividing the operation clock (fMCK)). (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn register Re-set the register to change serial mode register mn (SMRmn) setting. Re-set the register to change serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. (Selective) Clearing error flag (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register If the FEF, PEF, or OVF flag remains set, clear this using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 0 to stop output from the target channel. Set the initial output level of the serial clock (CKOmn) and serial data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable output from the target channel. Enable data output and clock output of (Essential) Port manipulation the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to (Essential) Writing to the SSm register 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). (Essential) Remark Starting communication Set transmit data to the SDRmn register and start communication. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 839 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-transmission mode) Figure 15-29. Timing Chart of Master Transmission (in Single-Transmission Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 Transmit data 3 SCKp pin SOp pin Transmit data 1 Shift register mn INTCSIp Transmit data 2 Transmit data 3 Shift operation Shift operation Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Data transmission (8-bit length) Data transmission (8-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 840 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-30. Flowchart of Master Transmission (in Single-Transmission Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting operation clock with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm, SOEm: Setting output and SCKp output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Starting transmission/reception Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Reading the SDRmn register Transmission/reception completed? No Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 841 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (4) Processing flow (in continuous transmission mode) Figure 15-31. Timing Chart of Master Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 Transmit data 3 SCKp pin SOp pin Transmit data 2 Transmit data 1 Shift register mn INTCSIp Shift operation Transmit data 3 Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Data transmission (8-bit length) MDmn0 TSFmn BFFmn <1> <2> <3> (Note) <2> <3> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> Note If transmit data is written to the SDRmn register while the BFFmn bit of serial status register mn (SSRmn) is 1 (valid data is stored in serial data register mn (SDRmn)), the transmit data is overwritten. Caution The MDmn0 bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn) can be rewritten even during operation. However, rewrite it before transfer of the last bit is started, so that it will be rewritten before the transfer end interrupt of the last transmit data. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 842 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-32. Flowchart of Master Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting operation clock with the SPSm register , SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm, SOEm: Setting output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. <1> Select the buffer empty interrupt. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Buffer empty interrupt generated? <2> No Yes <3> Transmitting next data? No Writing 0 to the MDmn0 bit No Yes <4> TSFmn = 1? Yes Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes <5> Writing 1 to the MDmn0 bit Yes Communication continued? No Writing 1 to the STmn bit <6> Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remarks 1. <1> to <6> in the figure correspond to <1> to <6> in Figure 15-31 Timing Chart of Master Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 843 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.5.2 Master reception Master reception is an operation wherein this MCU outputs a transfer clock and receives data from other device. 3-Wire Serial I/O CSI00 CSI01 CSI10 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 0 of SAU1 Pins used SCK00, SI00 SCK01, SI01 SCK10, SI10 Interrupt INTCSI00 INTCSI01 INTCSI10 CSI11 Channel 1 of SAU1 SCK11, SI11 INTCSI11 Transfer end interrupt (in single-transfer mode) or buffer empty interrupt (in continuous transfer mode) can be selected. Error detection flag Overrun error detection flag (OVFmn) only Transfer data length 7 to 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/4 [Hz] Min. fCLK/(2 x 211 x 128) [Hz]Note Data phase fCLK: System clock frequency Selectable by the DAPmn bit of the SCRmn register * DAPmn = 0: Data input starts from the start of the serial clock operation. * DAPmn = 1: Data input starts half a clock before the start of the serial clock operation. Clock phase Selectable by the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn register * CKPmn = 0: Forward * CKPmn = 1: Reverse Data direction Note MSB or LSB first Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 844 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-33. Example of Contents of Registers for Master Reception of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 STSmn CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 8 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 SISmn0 0 2 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt 1: Buffer empty interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 0 1 0/1 0/1 9 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn 0 0 0/1 5 4 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Selection of the data and clock phase (For details about the setting, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.) 3 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 SDRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 Baud rate setting (division setting of operation clock (fMCK) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 x x (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRpL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 SDRmn 9 8 7 6 5 4 Receive data (Write FFH as dummy data.) SDRpL (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 0/1 0/1 Communication starts when these bits are 1 if the clock phase is forward (the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn = 0). If the clock phase is reversed (CKPmn = 1), communication starts when these bits are 0. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI master reception mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 845 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-33. Example of Contents of Registers for Master Reception of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (2/2) (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ...The register that not used in this mode. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 x x 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI master reception mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 846 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-34. Initial Setting Procedure for Master Reception Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Setting the SPSm register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Setting the SDRmn register Set a transfer baud rate. Set the initial output level of the serial clock Setting the SOm register (CKOmn). Enable clock output of the target channel Setting port by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 Writing to the SSm register and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Set dummy data to the SDRmn register Starting communication and start communication. Figure 15-35. Procedure for Stopping Master Reception Starting setting to stop Setting the STm register Stopping communication Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. Stop communication in midway. Remarks 1. Even after communication is stopped, the pin level is retained. To resume the operation, re-set serial output register m (SOm) (see Figure 15-36 Procedure for Resuming Master Reception). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 847 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-36. Procedure for Resuming Master Reception Starting setting for resumption Disable clock output of the target Port manipulation (Essential) channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. (Selective) Re-set the register to change the operation Changing setting of the SPSm register clock setting. Re-set the register to change the (Selective) Changing setting of the SDRmn register (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn register transfer baud rate setting. Re-set the register to change serial mode register mn (SMRmn) setting. Re-set the register to change serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. (Selective) Changing setting of the SOm register (Selective) Clearing error flag Set the initial output level of the serial clock (CKOmn). If the FEF, PEF, or OVF flag remains set, clear this using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). Enable clock output of the target channel Port manipulation (Essential) by setting a port register and a port mode register. (Essential) Writing to the SSm register Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). (Essential) Remark Set dummy data to the SDRmn register and Starting communication start communication. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 848 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-reception mode) Figure 15-37. Timing Chart of Master Reception (in Single-Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Dummy data for reception Write Receive data 1 Dummy data Write Read Receive data 3 Receive data 2 Dummy data Write Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Shift register mn INTCSIp Receive data 1 Reception & shift operation Data reception (8-bit length) Receive data 2 Receive data 3 Reception & shift operation Reception & shift operation Data reception (8-bit length) Data reception (8-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 849 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-38. Flowchart of Master Reception (in Single-Reception Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm: Setting SCKp output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing dummy data to the SDRmn register Starting reception Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Reading the SDRmn register No Reception completed? Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 850 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (4) Processing flow (in continuous reception mode) Figure 15-39. Timing Chart of Master Reception (in Continuous Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Receive data 3 Dummy data Write Dummy data Write Receive data 1 Dummy data Write Read Receive data 2 Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Receive data 1 Shift register mn Receive data 3 Receive data 2 Reception & shift operation Reception & shift operation Data reception (8-bit length) Data reception (8-bit length) Reception & shift operation INTCSIp Data reception (8-bit length) MDmn0 TSFmn BFFmn <1> <2> <3> Caution <2> <3> <4> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8> The MDmn0 bit can be rewritten even during operation. However, rewrite it before receive of the last bit is started, so that it has been rewritten before the transfer end interrupt of the last receive data. Remarks 1. <1> to <8> in the figure correspond to <1> to <8> in Figure 15-40 Flowchart of Master Reception (in Continuous Reception Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 851 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-40. Flowchart of Master Reception (in Continuous Reception Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting operation clock with the SPSm register Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. <1> Select the buffer empty interrupt. SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm: Setting SCKp output Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit <2> Writing dummy data to the SDRmn register <3> Buffer empty interrupt generated? No Yes Reading receive data from the SDRmn register <4> Is the next receive data the last one? Yes <5> No Writing 0 to the MDmn0 bit TSFmn = 1? No Yes Transfer end interrupt generated? <6> No Yes Reading receive data from the SDRmn register <7> Writing 1 to the MDmn0 bit Yes Reception continued? No <8> Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication (Caution and Remarks are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 852 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Remarks 1. <1> to <8> in the figure correspond to <1> to <8> in Figure 15-39 Timing Chart of Master Reception (in Continuous Reception Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 853 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.5.3 Master transmission/reception Master transmission/reception is an operation wherein this MCU outputs a transfer clock and transmits/receives data to/from other device. 3-Wire Serial I/O CSI00 CSI01 CSI10 CSI11 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 0 of SAU1 Channel 1 of SAU1 Pins used SCK00, SI00, SO00 SCK01, SI01, SO01 SCK10, SI10, SO10 SCK11, SI11, SO11 Interrupt INTCSI00 INTCSI01 INTCSI10 INTCSI11 Transfer end interrupt (in single-transfer mode) or buffer empty interrupt (in continuous transfer mode) can be selected. Error detection flag Overrun error detection flag (OVFmn) only Transfer data length 7 to 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/4 [Hz] Min. fCLK/(2 x 211 x 128) [Hz] Note Data phase fCLK: System clock frequency Selectable by the DAPmn bit of the SCRmn register * DAPmn = 0: Data I/O starts at the start of the serial clock operation. * DAPmn = 1: Data I/O starts half a clock before the start of the serial clock operation. Clock phase Selectable by the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn register * CKPmn = 0: Forward * CKPmn = 1: Reverse Data direction Note MSB or LSB first Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 854 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-41. Example of Contents of Registers for Master Transmission/Reception of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 STSmn CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 8 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 SISmn0 0 2 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt 1: Buffer empty interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 1 0/1 0/1 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 1 9 0 0 0/1 5 4 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Selection of the data and clock phase (For details about the setting, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.) 3 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 SDRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 Baud rate setting (division setting of operation clock (fMCK) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 0/1 0/1 (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRpL) 15 14 13 12 11 SDRmn 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Transmit data setting/receive data register SDRpL (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 0/1 0/1 Communication starts when these bits are 1 if the clock phase is forward (the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn = 0). If the clock phase is reversed (CKPmn = 1), communication starts when these bits are 0. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI master transmission/reception mode : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 855 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-41. Example of Contents of Registers for Master Transmission/Reception of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (2/2) (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 0/1 0/1 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI master transmission/reception mode : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 856 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-42. Initial Setting Procedure for Master Transmission/Reception Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Setting the SPSm register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Setting the SDRmn register Set a transfer baud rate. Set the initial output level using the Setting the SOm register SOmn and CKOmn bits. Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable data Changing setting of the SOEm register output of the target channel. Enable data output and clock output of Setting port the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Writing to the SSm register Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1. This sets the SEmn bit to 1. Set transmit data to the SDRmn register Starting communication and start communication. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 857 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-43. Procedure for Stopping Master Transmission/Reception Starting setting to stop Setting the STm register Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. Set the SOEmn bit to 0 and stop the Changing setting of the SOEm register Stopping communication output of the target channel. Stop communication in midway. Remarks 1. Even after communication is stopped, the pin level is retained. To resume the operation, re-set serial output register m (SOm) (see Figure 15-44 Procedure for Resuming Master Transmission/ Reception). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 858 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-44. Procedure for Resuming Master Transmission/Reception Starting setting for resumption Disable data output of the target channel Port manipulation (Essential) by setting a port register and a port mode register. Re-set the register to change the operation (Selective) Changing setting of the SPSm register clock setting. Re-set the register to change the Changing setting of the SDRmn register (Selective) transfer baud rate setting. Re-set the register to change the serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn register mode register mn (SMRmn) register setting. Re-set the register to change serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. If the FEF, PEF, or OVF flag remains (Selective) Clearing error flag set, clear this using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 0 to stop output (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register from the target channel. Set the initial output level of the serial clock (CKOmn) and serial data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable output from the target channel. Enable data output and clock output of (Essential) Port manipulation (Essential) Writing to the SSm register the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). (Essential) Starting communication Set transmit data to the SDRmn register and start communication. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 859 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-transmission/reception mode) Figure 15-45. Timing Chart of Master Transmission/Reception (in Single-Transmission/Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 Write Receive data 1 Transmit data 2 Write Read Receive data 3 Receive data 2 Transmit data 3 Write Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Shift register mn SOp pin Receive data 1 Reception & shift operation Transmit data 1 Receive data 2 Reception & shift operation Transmit data 2 Receive data 3 Reception & shift operation Transmit data 3 INTCSIp Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 860 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-46. Flowchart of Master Transmission/Reception (in Single- Transmission/Reception Mode) Starting SCI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting the operation clock with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm, SOEm: Setting output and SCKp output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Starting transmission/reception Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Reading the SDRmn register Transmission/reception completed? No Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 861 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (4) Processing flow (in continuous transmission/reception mode) Figure 15-47. Timing Chart of Master Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn Receive data 3 SDRmn Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 Receive data 1 Transmit data 3 Write Write Write Read Receive data 2 Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Receive data 1 Shift register mn SOp pin Receive data 3 Receive data 2 Reception & shift operation Reception & shift operation Reception & shift operation Transmit data 2 Transmit data 1 Transmit data 3 INTCSIp Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) MDmn0 TSFmn BFFmn <1> <2> <3> (Note 1) <2> (Note 2) <3> <4> <2> (Note 2) <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8> Notes 1. If transmit data is written to the SDRmn register while the BFFmn bit of serial status register mn (SSRmn) is 1 (valid data is stored in serial data register mn (SDRmn)), the transmit data is overwritten. 2. The transmit data can be read by reading the SDRmn register during this period. At this time, the transfer operation is not affected. Caution The MDmn0 bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn) can be rewritten even during operation. However, rewrite it before transfer of the last bit is started, so that it has been rewritten before the transfer end interrupt of the last transmit data. Remarks 1. <1> to <8> in the figure correspond to <1> to <8> in Figure 15-48 Flowchart of Master Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 862 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-48. Flowchart of Master Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm, SOEm: Setting output and SCKp output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. <1> Select buffer empty interrupt. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit <2> Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Buffer empty interrupt generated? Yes <3> <4> No Reading receive data from the SDRmn register Yes Communication data exists? No <5> Writing 0 to the MDmn0 bit TSFmn = 1? No Yes Transfer end interrupt generated? <6> No Yes <7> Reading receive data from the SDRmn register Yes Communication continued? Writing 1 to the MDmn0 bit No <8> Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remarks 1. <1> to <8> in the figure correspond to <1> to <8> in Figure 15-47 Timing Chart of Master Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 863 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.5.4 Slave transmission Slave transmission is an operation wherein this MCU transmits data to another device in the state of a transfer clock being input from another device. 3-Wire Serial I/O CSI00 CSI01 CSI10 CSI11 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 0 of SAU1 Channel 1 of SAU1 Pins used SCK00, SO00 SCK01, SO01 SCK10, SO10 SCK11, SO11 Interrupt INTCSI00 INTCSI01 INTCSI10 INTCSI11 Transfer end interrupt (in single-transfer mode) or buffer empty interrupt (in continuous transfer mode) can be selected. Error detection flag Overrun error detection flag (OVFmn) only Transfer data length 7 to 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/6 [Hz]Notes 1, 2. Data phase Selectable by the DAPmn bit of the SCRmn register * DAPmn = 0: Data output starts from the start of the serial clock operation. * DAPmn = 1: Data output starts half a clock before the start of the serial clock operation. Clock phase Selectable by the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn register * CKPmn = 0: Forward * CKPmn = 1: Reverse Data direction MSB or LSB first Notes 1. Because the external serial clock input to the SCK00, SCK01, SCK10, and SCK11 pins is sampled internally and used, the fastest transfer rate is fMCK/6 [Hz]. 2. Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remarks 1. fMCK: Operation clock frequency of target channel 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 864 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-49. Example of Contents of Registers for Slave Transmission of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 1 7 STSmn CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 8 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 SISmn0 0 2 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt 1: Buffer empty interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 1 9 0 0 0/1 5 4 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Selection of the data and clock phase (For details about the setting, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.) 3 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 0/1 0/1 SDRmn Baud rate setting (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRpL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 SDRmn Transmit data setting SDRpL (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 x x Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI slave transmission mode : : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x : Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1 : Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 865 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-49. Example of Contents of Registers for Slave Transmission of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (2/2) (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 0/1 0/1 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI slave transmission mode : : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x : Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1 : Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 866 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-50. Initial Setting Procedure for Slave Transmission Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Setting the SPSm register Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Setting the SDRmn register Set bits 15 to 9 to any value for baud rate setting. Setting the SOm register Changing setting of the SOEm register Set the initial output level of the serial data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable data output of the target channel. Setting port Writing to the SSEm register Writing to the SSm register Starting communication Remark Enable data output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSEm bit of the target channel to 1 to enable operation of slave select input function for the target channel. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Set transmit data to the SDRmn register and wait for a clock from the master. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 867 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-51. Procedure for Stopping Slave Transmission Starting setting to stop Setting the STm register Changing setting of the SOEm register Stopping communication Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. Set the SOEmn bit to 0 and stop the output of the target channel. Stop communication in midway. Remarks 1. Even after communication is stopped, the pin level is retained. To resume the operation, re-set serial output register m (SOm) (see Figure 15-52 Procedure for Resuming Slave Transmission). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 868 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-52. Procedure for Resuming Slave Transmission Starting setting for resumption Stop the target for communication or wait until (Essential) Manipulating target for communication (Selective) Port manipulation the target completes its operation. Disable data output and clock output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Re-set the register to change the operation (Selective) Changing setting of the SPSm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn register (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register clock setting. Re-set the register to change serial mode register mn (SMRmn) setting. Re-set the register to change serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. (Selective) Clearing error flag (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Essential) Port manipulation If the OVF flag remains set, clear this using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 0 to stop output from the target channel. Set the initial output level of the serial data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable output from the target channel. Enable data output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. (Essential) Remark Writing to the SSm register (Essential) Starting communication (Essential) Starting target for communication Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Set transmit data to the SDRmn register and wait for a clock from the master. Start the target for communication. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 869 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-transmission mode) Figure 15-53. Timing Chart of Slave Transmission (in Single-Transmission Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 Transmit data 3 SCKp pin SOp pin Transmit data 1 Shift register mn INTCSIp Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Transmit data 2 Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Transmit data 3 Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 870 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-54. Flowchart of Slave Transmission (in Single-Transmission Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. SDRmn[15:9]: Setting 0000000B SOm, SOEm: Setting output Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Transmission completed? No Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of transmission Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 871 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (4) Processing flow (in continuous transmission mode) Figure 15-55. Timing Chart of Slave Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 Transmit data 3 Transmit data 2 SCKp pin SOp pin Transmit data 1 Shift register mn INTCSIp Transmit data 3 Transmit data 2 Shift operation Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Data transmission (8-bit length) MDmn0 TSFmn BFFmn <1> <2> <3> (Note) <2> <3> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> Note If transmit data is written to the SDRmn register while the BFFmn bit of serial status register mn (SSRmn) is 1 (valid data is stored in serial data register mn (SDRmn)), the transmit data is overwritten. Caution The MDmn0 bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn) can be rewritten even during operation. However, rewrite it before transfer of the last bit is started. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 872 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-56. Flowchart of Slave Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting 0000000B SOm, SOEm: Setting output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. <1> Select buffer empty interrupt. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Buffer empty interrupt generated? Yes <2> No <3> Transmitting next data? Yes No Writing 0 to the MDmn0 bit <4> TSFmn = 1? No Yes Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes <5> Writing 1 to the MDmn0 bit Yes Communication continued? No Writing 1 to the STmn bit <6> Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remarks 1. <1> to <6> in the figure correspond to <1> to <6> in Figure 15-55 Timing Chart of Slave Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 873 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.5.5 Slave reception Slave reception is an operation wherein this MCU receives data from another device in the state of a transfer clock being input from another device. 3-Wire Serial I/O CSI00 CSI01 CSI10 CSI11 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 0 of SAU1 Channel 1 of SAU1 Pins used SCK00, SI00 SCK01, SI01 SCK10, SI10 SCK11, SI11 Interrupt INTCSI00 INTCSI01 INTCSI10 INTCSI11 Transfer end interrupt only (Setting the buffer empty interrupt is prohibited.) Error detection flag Overrun error detection flag (OVFmn) only Transfer data length 7 to 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/6 [Hz] Notes 1, 2 Data phase Selectable by the DAPmn bit of the SCRmn register * DAPmn = 0: Data input starts from the start of the serial clock operation. * DAPmn = 1: Data input starts half a clock before the start of the serial clock operation. Clock phase Selectable by the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn register * CKPmn = 0: Forward * CKPmn = 1: Reverse Data direction MSB or LSB first Notes 1. Because the external serial clock input to the SCK00, SCK01, SCK10, and SCK11 pins is sampled internally and used, the fastest transfer rate is fMCK/6 [Hz]. 2. Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remarks 1. fMCK: Operation clock frequency of target channel 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 874 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-57. Example of Contents of Registers for Slave Reception of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 1 8 7 STSmn 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 2 SISmn0 0 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 0 1 0/1 0/1 9 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn 0 0 0/1 5 4 3 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Selection of the data and clock phase (For details about the setting, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.) 2 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn 13 12 11 10 9 0000000 (baud rate setting) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRpL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 SDRmn Transmit data setting/receive data register SDRpL Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI slave reception mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 875 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-57. Example of Contents of Registers for Slave Reception of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (2/2) (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ...The register that not used in this mode. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 x x 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 x x 1 0 (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ...The register that not used in this mode. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm SOEm1 SOEm0 x x 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI slave reception mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 876 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-58. Initial Setting Procedure for Slave Reception Starting initial settings Release the serial array unit from the reset Setting the PER0 register Setting the SPSm register status and start clock supply. Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Setting the SDRmn register Set bits 15 to 9 to any value for baud rate setting. Enable data input and clock input of the Setting port target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and Writing to the SSm register Starting communication set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Wait the clock from the master. Figure 15-59. Procedure for Stopping Slave Reception Starting setting to stop Setting the STm register Stopping communication Remark Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. Stop communication in midway. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 877 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-60. Procedure for Resuming Slave Reception Starting setting for resumption Stop the target for communication or wait until (Essential) Manipulating target for communication (Essential) Port manipulation the target completes its operation. Disable clock output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Re-set the register to change the operation (Selective) Changing setting of the SPSm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn register register mn (SMRmn) setting. (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register communication operation setting register mn clock setting. Re-set the register to change serial mode Re-set the register to change serial (SCRmn) setting. Clearing error flag (Selective) If the FEF, PEF, or OVF flag remains set, clear this using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). Port manipulation (Essential) Enable data output and clock output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Remark (Essential) Writing to the SSm register (Essential) Starting communication Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Wait for a clock from the master. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 878 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-reception mode) Figure 15-61. Timing Chart of Slave Reception (in Single-Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Receive data 3 Receive data 2 Receive data 1 Read Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Shift register mn INTCSIp Receive data 1 Reception & shift operation Data reception (8-bit length) Receive data 2 Reception & shift operation Data reception (8-bit length) Receive data 3 Reception & shift operation Data reception (8-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 879 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-62. Flowchart of Slave Reception (in Single-Reception Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAUmEN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting 0000000B Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Starting reception Transfer end interrupt generated? Yes No Reading the SDRmn register No Reception completed? Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 880 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.5.6 Slave transmission/reception Slave transmission/reception is an operation wherein this MCU transmits/receives data to/from another device in the state of a transfer clock being input from another device. 3-Wire Serial I/O CSI00 CSI01 CSI10 CSI11 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 0 of SAU1 Channel 1 of SAU1 Pins used SCK00, SI00, SO00 SCK01, SI01, SO01 SCK10, SI10, SO10 SCK11, SI11, SO11 Interrupt INTCSI00 INTCSI01 INTCSI10 INTCSI11 Transfer end interrupt (in single-transfer mode) or buffer empty interrupt (in continuous transfer mode) can be selected. Error detection flag Overrun error detection flag (OVFmn) only Transfer data length 7 to 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/6 [Hz]Notes 1, 2. Data phase Selectable by the DAPmn bit of the SCRmn register * DAPmn = 0: Data I/O starts from the start of the serial clock operation. * DAPmn = 1: Data I/O starts half a clock before the start of the serial clock operation. Clock phase Selectable by the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn register * CKPmn = 0: Forward * CKPmn = 1: Reverse Data direction MSB or LSB first Notes 1. Because the external serial clock input to the SCK00, SCK01, SCK10, and SCK11 pins is sampled internally and used, the fastest transfer rate is fMCK/6 [Hz]. 2. Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remarks 1. fMCK: Operation clock frequency of target channel 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 881 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-63. Example of Contents of Registers for Slave Transmission/Reception of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 1 7 STSmn CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 8 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 SISmn0 0 2 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt 1: Buffer empty interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 1 0/1 0/1 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 1 9 0 0 0/1 5 4 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Selection of the data and clock phase (For details about the setting, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.) 3 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn (2) 13 12 11 10 9 0000000 (baud rate setting) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 0/1 0/1 When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRpL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 SDRmn Transmit data setting/receive data register SDRpL (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 x x Caution Be sure to set transmit data to the SDRpL register before the clock from the master is started. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI slave transmission/reception mode : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 882 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-63. Example of Contents of Registers for Slave Transmission/Reception of 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 0/1 0/1 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI slave transmission/reception mode : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 883 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-64. Initial Setting Procedure for Slave Transmission/Reception Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Setting the SPSm register Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Set bits 15 to 9 to any value for baud Setting the SDRmn register Setting the SOm register rate setting. Set the initial output level of the serial data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable data Changing setting of the SOEm register output of the target channel. Enable data output of the target channel Setting port by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 Writing to the SSm register and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Starting communication Set transmit data to the SDRmn register and wait for a clock from the master. Caution Be sure to set transmit data to the SDRpL register before the clock from the master is started. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 884 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-65. Procedure for Stopping Slave Transmission/Reception Starting setting to stop Setting the STm register Changing setting of the SOEm register Stopping communication Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. Set the SOEmn bit to 0 and stop the output of the target channel. Stop communication in midway. Remarks 1. Even after communication is stopped, the pin level is retained. To resume the operation, re-set serial output register m (SOm) (see Figure 15-66 Procedure for Resuming Slave Transmission/Reception). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 885 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-66. Procedure for Resuming Slave Transmission/Reception Starting setting for resumption (Essential) Manipulating target for communication (Essential) Port manipulation Stop the target for communication or wait until the target completes its operation. Disable data output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. (Selective) Changing setting of the SPSm register Re-set the register to change the operation clock setting. (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn register Re-set the register to change serial mode register mn (SMRmn) setting. Re-set the register to change serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. If the FEF, PEF, or OVF flag remains set, Clearing error flag (Selective) clear this using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register Set the SOEmn bit to 0 to stop output from the target channel. Set the initial output level of the serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SOm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Essential) Port manipulation data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable output from the target channel. Enable data output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and (Essential) Writing to the SSm register (Essential) Starting communication (Essential) Starting target for communication set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Sets transmit data to the SDRmn register and wait for a clock from the master. Starts the target for communication. Caution Be sure to set transmit data to the SDRpL register before the clock from the master is started. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 886 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-transmission/reception mode) Figure 15-67. Timing Chart of Slave Transmission/Reception (in Single-Transmission/Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn Receive data 1 SDRmn Transmit data 1 Write Receive data 2 Receive data 3 Transmit data 3 Transmit data 2 Write Read Write Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Shift register mn SOp pin Receive data 1 Reception & shift operation Transmit data 1 Receive data 2 Reception & shift operation Transmit data 2 Receive data 3 Reception & shift operation Transmit data 3 INTCSIp Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 887 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-68. Flowchart of Slave Transmission/Reception (in Single-Transmission/Reception Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting 0000000B SOm, SOEm: Setting output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transfer data to the SDRmn register Starting transmission/reception Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Reading the SDRmn register Transmission/reception completed? No Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Caution Be sure to set transmit data to the SDRpL register before the clock from the master is started. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 888 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (4) Processing flow (in continuous transmission/reception mode) Figure 15-69. Timing Chart of Slave Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 Write Write Receive data 1 Transmit data 3 Write Read Receive data 3 Receive data 2 Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Receive data 2 Receive data 1 Shift register mn SOp pin Reception & shift operation Receive data 3 Reception & shift operation Reception & shift operation Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 Transmit data 3 INTCSIp Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) MDmn0 TSFmn BFFmn <1> <2> <3> (Note 1) <2> (Note 2) <3> <4> <2> (Note 2) <3> <4> <5> <6> <7><8> Notes 1. If transmit data is written to the SDRmn register while the BFFmn bit of serial status register mn (SSRmn) is 1 (valid data is stored in serial data register mn (SDRmn)), the transmit data is overwritten. 2. The transmit data can be read by reading the SDRmn register during this period. At this time, the transfer operation is not affected. Caution The MDmn0 bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn) can be rewritten even during operation. However, rewrite it before transfer of the last bit is started, so that it has been rewritten before the transfer end interrupt of the last transmit data. Remarks 1. <1> to <8> in the figure correspond to <1> to <8> in Figure 15-70 Flowchart of Slave Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 889 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-70. Flowchart of Slave Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode) Caution Be sure to set transmit data to the SDRpL register before the clock from the master is started. Remarks 1. <1> to <8> in the figure correspond to <1> to <8> in Figure 15-69 Timing Chart of Slave Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 890 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.5.7 Calculating transfer clock frequency The transfer clock frequency for 3-wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) communication can be calculated by the following expressions. (1) Master (Transfer clock frequency) = {Operation clock (fMCK) frequency of target channel} / (SDRmn[15:9] + 1) / 2 [Hz] (2) Slave (Transfer clock frequency) = {Frequency of serial clock (fSCK) supplied by master}Note [Hz] Note The permissible maximum transfer clock frequency is fMCK/6. Remark The value of SDRmn[15:9] is the value of bits 15 to 9 of serial data register mn (SDRmn) (0000000B to 1111111B) and therefore is 0 to 127. The operation clock (fMCK) is determined by serial clock select register m (SPSm) and bit 15 (CKSmn) of serial mode register mn (SMRmn). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 891 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Table 15-2. Selection of Operation Clock For 3-Wire Serial I/O SMRmn Register CKSmn Operation Clock (fMCK) Note SPSm Register PRS m13 0 1 PRS m12 PRS m11 PRS m10 PRS m03 PRS m02 PRS m01 PRS m00 fCLK = 32 MHz X X X X 0 0 0 0 fCLK X X X X 0 0 0 1 fCLK/2 32 MHz 16 MHz 2 8 MHz X X X X 0 0 1 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 0 0 1 1 fCLK/23 4 MHz 4 2 MHz 1 MHz X X X X 0 1 0 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 0 1 0 1 fCLK/25 6 500 kHz X X X X 0 1 1 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 0 1 1 1 fCLK/27 250 kHz 8 125 kHz X X X X 1 0 0 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 1 0 0 1 fCLK/29 62.5 kHz X X X X 1 0 1 0 fCLK/210 31.25 kHz X X X X 1 0 1 1 fCLK/211 15.63 kHz 0 0 0 0 X X X X fCLK 32 MHz 0 0 0 1 X X X X fCLK/2 16 MHz 0 0 1 0 X X X X fCLK/22 8 MHz 0 0 1 1 X X X X fCLK/23 4 MHz 0 1 0 0 X X X X fCLK/24 2 MHz 0 1 0 1 X X X X fCLK/25 1 MHz 6 500 kHz 0 1 1 0 X X X X fCLK/2 0 1 1 1 X X X X fCLK/27 250 kHz 8 125 kHz 1 0 0 0 X X X X fCLK/2 1 0 0 1 X X X X fCLK/29 31.25 kHz 15.63 kHz 1 0 1 0 X X X X fCLK/2 1 0 1 1 X X X X fCLK/211 Other than above 62.5 kHz 10 Setting prohibited Note When changing the clock selected for fCLK (by changing the system clock control register (CKC) value), do so after having stopped (serial channel stop register m (STm) = 0003H) the operation of the serial array unit (SAU). Remarks 1. X: Don't care 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 892 RL78/F13, F14 15.5.8 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Procedure for processing errors that occurred during 3-wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) communication The procedure for processing errors that occurred during 3-wire serial I/O (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) communication is described in Figure 15-71. Figure 15-71. Processing Procedure in Case of Overrun Error Software Manipulation Hardware Status Remark Reads serial data register mn (SDRmn). The BFFmn bit of the SSRmn register is This is to prevent an overrun error if the set to 0 and channel n is enabled to receive data. next reception is completed during error processing. Reads serial status register mn Error type is identified and the read (SSRmn). value is used to clear error flag. Writes 1 to serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). Error flag is cleared. Error can be cleared only during reading, by writing the value read from the SSRmn register to the SIRmn register without modification. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 893 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.6 Clock Synchronous Serial Communication with SPI Function All the channels (channels 0 and 1 of SAU0 and channels 0 and 1 of SAU1) correspond to the clock synchronous serial communication with SPI function. [Data transmission/reception] * Data length of 7 to 16 bits * Phase control of transmit/receive data * MSB/LSB first selectable * Level setting of transmit/receive data [Clock control] * Master/slave selection * Phase control of I/O clock * Setting of transfer period by prescaler and internal counter of each channel [Interrupt function] * Transfer end interrupt/buffer empty interrupt [Error detection flag] * Overrun error [Expansion function] * Slave select function R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 894 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT * Group A products Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI UART0 (supporting LIN-bus) IIC00 function) Note2 CSI01 (supporting SPI 1 IIC01 function) Note2 * Products of Groups C-1 and D-1 Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI UART0 (supporting LIN-bus) IIC00 function) Note2 CSI01 (supporting SPI 1 IIC01 function) Note2 1 CSI10 (supporting SPI 0 UART1 IIC10 function) Note1, 2 1 - - * Products of Groups B, C-2, D-2, and E Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI UART0 (supporting LIN-bus) IIC00 function) Note2 CSI01 (supporting SPI 1 IIC01 function) Note2 1 CSI10 (supporting SPI 0 UART1 IIC10 function) Note1, 2 CSI11 (supporting SPI 1 IIC11 function) Note2 ___________ Notes 1. 48-pin, 32-pin and 30-pin products do not have SSI10 pin. ____________ <R> 2. Set CKPmn bit of SCRmn register to 1, when SSEmn = 1 (Enables SSImn pin input). (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1) Remark Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C-1: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30 or 32 pins Group C-2: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 48, 64, or 80 pins Group D-1: RL78/F14 products with 30 or 32 pins Group D-2: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 895 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT SPI function performs the following three types of communication operations. * Master transmission (See 15.6.1 Master transmission.) * Master reception (See 15.6.2 Master reception.) * Master transmission/reception (See 15.6.3 Master transmission/reception.) * Slave transmission (See 15.6.4 Slave transmission.) * Slave reception (See 15.6.5 Slave reception.) * Slave transmission/reception (See 15.6.6 Slave transmission/reception.) Multiple slaves can be connected to a master and communication can be performed by using the slave select input function. The master outputs a slave select signal to the slave (one) that is the other party of communication, and each slave judges whether it has been selected as the other party of communication and controls the SO pin output. When a slave is selected, the SO pin is set to output state and transmit data can be communicated from the SO pin to the master. When a slave is not selected, the SO pin is set to Hi-Z state and prevents the short circuit with the output from the SO pin of other slaves. Therefore, in an environment where multiple slaves are connected, it is necessary set the SO pin to N-ch open-drain and pull up the node. Furthermore, when a slave is not selected, no transmission/reception operation is performed even if a serial clock is input from the master. Caution Output the slave select signal by port manipulation. Figure 15-72. Example of Slave Select Input Function Configuration Master Slave SAU SAU SCK SCK SSI SSI SI SI SO SO Port Slave SAU SCK SSI SI SO R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 896 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-73. Slave Select Input Function Timing Diagram DAPmn = 0 Transmit data is set BFFmn TSFmn SSEmn SCKmn (CKPmn = 0) SImn bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 Sampling timing SOnm x SSImn While SSImn is at high level, transmission is not performed even if the falling edge of SCKmn (serial clock) arrives, and neither is receive data sampled in synchronization with the rising edge. When SSImn goes to low level, data is output (shifted) in synchronization with the falling edge of the serial clock and a reception operation is performed in synchronization with the rising edge. DAPmn = 1 Transmit data is set BFFmn TSFmn SSEmn SCKmn (CKPmn = 0) bit7 SImn bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 Sampling timing bit7 SOmn SSImn If DAPmn = 1, when transmit data is set while SSImn is at high level, the first data (bit 7) is output to the data output. However, no shift operation is performed even if the rising edge of SCKmn (serial clock) arrives, and neither is receive data sampled in synchronization with the falling edge. When SSImn goes to low level, data is output (shifted) in synchronization with the next rising edge and a reception operation is performed in synchronization with the falling edge. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 897 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.6.1 Master transmission Master transmission is an operation wherein this MCU outputs a transfer clock and transmits data to another device. SPI Function CSI00 CSI01 CSI10 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 0 of SAU1 Pins used SCK00, SO00 SCK01, SO01 SCK10, SO10 Interrupt INTCSI00 INTCSI01 INTCSI10 CSI11 Channel 1 of SAU1 SCK11, SO11 INTCSI11 Transfer end interrupt (in single-transfer mode) or buffer empty interrupt (in continuous transfer mode) can be selected. Error detection flag None Transfer data length 7 to 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/4 [Hz], Min. fCLK/(2 x 211 x 128) [Hz] Note Data phase Selectable by the DAPmn bit of the SCRmn register fCLK: System clock frequency * DAPmn = 0: Data output starts from the start of the serial clock operation. * DAPmn = 1: Data output starts half a clock before the start of the serial clock operation. Clock phase Selectable by the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn register * CKPmn = 0: Forward * CKPmn = 1: Reverse Data direction Note MSB or LSB first Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 898 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-74. Example of Contents of Registers for Master Transmission of SPI Function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 STSmn CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 8 0 6 5 4 3 0 0 0 2 SISmn0 0 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt 1: Buffer empty interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 1 9 0 0 0/1 5 4 3 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Selection of the data and clock phase (For details about the setting, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.) 2 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn 13 12 11 10 9 Baud rate setting 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRpL) 15 14 13 12 SDRmn 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Transmit data setting SDRpL Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI master transmission mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 899 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-74. Example of Contents of Registers for Master Transmission of SPI Function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (2/2) (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 0/1 0/1 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 0/1 0/1 Communication starts when these bits are 1 if the clock phase is forward (the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn = 0). If the clock phase is reversed (CKPmn = 1), communication starts when these bits are 0. (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 0/1 0/1 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI master transmission mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 900 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-75. Initial Setting Procedure for Master Transmission Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Setting the SPSm register Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Setting the SDRmn register Set a transfer baud rate. Setting the SOm register Set the initial output level of the serial clock (CKOmn) and serial data (SOmn). Changing setting of the SOEm register Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable data output of the target channel. Enable data output and clock output of Setting port the target channel by setting a port register and port mode register. Writing to the SSm register Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Starting communication Remark Set transmit data to the SDRmn register and start communication. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 901 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-76. Procedure for Stopping Master Transmission Starting setting to stop Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target Setting the STm register Changing setting of the SOEm register Stopping communication channel. Set the SOEmn bit to 0 and stop the output of the target channel. Stop communication in midway. Remarks 1. Even after communication is stopped, the pin level is retained. To resume the operation, re-set the SOm register (see Figure 15-77 Procedure for Resuming Master Transmission). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 902 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-77. Procedure for Resuming Master Transmission Starting setting for resumption Disable data output and clock output of Port manipulation (Essential) the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. (Selective) Re-set the register to change the operation Changing setting of the SPSm register clock setting. Re-set the register to change the (Selective) Changing setting of the SDRmn register transfer baud rate setting (setting the transfer clock by dividing the operation clock (fMCK)). (Selective) Re-set the register to change serial Changing setting of the SMRmn register mode register mn (SMRmn) setting. Re-set the register to change serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. If the FEF, PEF, or OVF flag remains (Selective) Clearing error flag set, clear this using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 0 to stop output (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register from the target channel. Set the initial output level of the serial clock (CKOmn) and serial data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable output from the target channel. Enable data output and clock output of (Essential) Port manipulation the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to (Essential) Writing to the SSm register 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). (Essential) Remark Starting communication Set transmit data to the SDRmn register and start communication. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 903 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-transmission mode) Figure 15-78. Timing Chart of Master Transmission (in Single-Transmission Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 Transmit data 3 SCKp pin SOp pin Transmit data 1 Shift register mn INTCSIp Transmit data 2 Transmit data 3 Shift operation Shift operation Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Data transmission (8-bit length) Data transmission (8-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 904 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-79. Flowchart of Master Transmission (in Single-Transmission Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting operation clock with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm, SOEm: Setting output and SCKp output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Starting transmission/reception Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Reading the SDRmn register Transmission/reception completed? No Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 905 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (4) Processing flow (in continuous transmission mode) Figure 15-80. Timing Chart of Master Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 Transmit data 3 SCKp pin SOp pin Transmit data 2 Transmit data 1 Shift register mn INTCSIp Shift operation Transmit data 3 Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Data transmission (8-bit length) MDmn0 TSFmn BFFmn <1> <2> <3> (Note) <2> <3> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> Note If transmit data is written to the SDRmn register while the BFFmn bit of serial status register mn (SSRmn) is 1 (valid data is stored in serial data register mn (SDRmn)), the transmit data is overwritten. Caution The MDmn0 bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn) can be rewritten even during operation. However, rewrite it before transfer of the last bit is started, so that it will be rewritten before the transfer end interrupt of the last transmit data. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 906 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-81. Flowchart of Master Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting operation clock with the SPSm register , SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm, SOEm: Setting output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. <1> Select the buffer empty interrupt. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Buffer empty interrupt generated? <2> No Yes <3> Transmitting next data? No Writing 0 to the MDmn0 bit No Yes <4> TSFmn = 1? Yes Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes <5> Writing 1 to the MDmn0 bit Yes Communication continued? No Writing 1 to the STmn bit <6> Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remarks 1. <1> to <6> in the figure correspond to <1> to <6> in Figure 15-80 Timing Chart of Master Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 907 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.6.2 Master reception Master reception is an operation wherein this MCU outputs a transfer clock and receives data from other device. SPI Function CSI00 CSI01 CSI10 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 0 of SAU1 Pins used SCK00, SI00 SCK01, SI01 SCK10, SI10 Interrupt INTCSI00 INTCSI01 INTCSI10 CSI11 Channel 1 of SAU1 SCK11, SI11 INTCSI11 Transfer end interrupt (in single-transfer mode) or buffer empty interrupt (in continuous transfer mode) can be selected. Error detection flag Overrun error detection flag (OVFmn) only Transfer data length 7 to 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/4 [Hz], Min. fCLK/(2 x 211 x 128) [Hz]Note Data phase Selectable by the DAPmn bit of the SCRmn register fCLK: System clock frequency * DAPmn = 0: Data input starts from the start of the serial clock operation. * DAPmn = 1: Data input starts half a clock before the start of the serial clock operation. Clock phase Selectable by the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn register * CKPmn = 0: Forward * CKPmn = 1: Reverse Data direction Note MSB or LSB first Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 908 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-82. Example of Contents of Registers for Master Reception of SPI Function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 STSmn CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 8 0 6 5 4 3 0 0 0 SISmn0 0 2 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt 1: Buffer empty interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 0 1 0/1 0/1 9 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn 0 0 0/1 5 4 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Selection of the data and clock phase (For details about the setting, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.) 3 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn 13 12 11 10 9 Baud rate setting 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRpL) 15 14 13 12 SDRmn 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Receive data (Write FFH as dummy data.) SDRpL Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI master reception mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 909 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-82. Example of Contents of Registers for Master Reception of SPI Function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (2/2) (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 0/1 0/1 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 x x Communication starts when these bits are 1 if the clock phase is forward (the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn = 0). If the clock phase is reversed (CKPmn = 1), communication starts when these bits are 0. (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ...The register that not used in this mode. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 x x 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI master reception mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 910 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-83. Initial Setting Procedure for Master Reception Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Setting the SPSm register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Setting the SDRmn register Set a transfer baud rate. Set the initial output level of the serial clock Setting the SOm register (CKOmn). Enable clock output of the target channel Setting port by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 Writing to the SSm register and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Set dummy data to the SDRmn register Starting communication and start communication. Figure 15-84. Procedure for Stopping Master Reception Starting setting to stop Setting the STm register Stopping communication Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. Stop communication in midway. Remarks 1. Even after communication is stopped, the pin level is retained. To resume the operation, re-set serial output register m (SOm) (see Figure 15-85 Procedure for Resuming Master Reception). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 911 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-85. Procedure for Resuming Master Reception Starting setting for resumption Disable clock output of the target Port manipulation (Essential) channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. (Selective) Re-set the register to change the operation Changing setting of the SPSm register clock setting. Re-set the register to change the (Selective) Changing setting of the SDRmn register (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn register transfer baud rate setting. Re-set the register to change serial mode register mn (SMRmn) setting. Re-set the register to change serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. (Selective) Changing setting of the SOm register (Selective) Clearing error flag Set the initial output level of the serial clock (CKOmn). If the FEF, PEF, or OVF flag remains set, clear this using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). Enable clock output of the target channel Port manipulation (Essential) by setting a port register and a port mode register. (Essential) Writing to the SSm register Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). (Essential) Remark Set dummy data to the SDRmn register and Starting communication start communication. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 912 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-reception mode) Figure 15-86. Timing Chart of Master Reception (in Single-Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Dummy data for reception Write Receive data 1 Dummy data Write Read Receive data 3 Receive data 2 Dummy data Write Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Shift register mn INTCSIp Receive data 1 Reception & shift operation Data reception (8-bit length) Receive data 2 Receive data 3 Reception & shift operation Reception & shift operation Data reception (8-bit length) Data reception (8-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 913 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-87. Flowchart of Master Reception (in Single-Reception Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm: Setting SCKp output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing dummy data to the SDRmn register Starting reception Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Reading the SDRmn register No Reception completed? Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 914 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (4) Processing flow (in continuous reception mode) Figure 15-88. Timing Chart of Master Reception (in Continuous Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Receive data 3 Dummy data Write Dummy data Write Receive data 1 Dummy data Write Read Receive data 2 Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Receive data 1 Shift register mn Receive data 3 Receive data 2 Reception & shift operation Reception & shift operation Data reception (8-bit length) Data reception (8-bit length) Reception & shift operation INTCSIp Data reception (8-bit length) MDmn0 TSFmn BFFmn <1> <2> <3> Caution <2> <3> <4> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8> The MDmn0 bit can be rewritten even during operation. However, rewrite it before receive of the last bit is started, so that it has been rewritten before the transfer end interrupt of the last receive data. Remarks 1. <1> to <8> in the figure correspond to <1> to <8> in Figure 15-89 Flowchart of Master Reception (in Continuous Reception Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 915 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-89. Flowchart of Master Reception (in Continuous Reception Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting operation clock with the SPSm register Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. <1> Select the buffer empty interrupt. SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm: Setting SCKp output Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit <2> Writing dummy data to the SDRmn register <3> Buffer empty interrupt generated? No Yes Reading receive data from the SDRmn register <4> Is the next receive data the last one? Yes <5> No Writing 0 to the MDmn0 bit TSFmn = 1? No Yes Transfer end interrupt generated? <6> No Yes Reading receive data from the SDRmn register <7> Writing 1 to the MDmn0 bit Yes Reception continued? No <8> Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication (Remarks are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 916 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Remarks 1. <1> to <8> in the figure correspond to <1> to <8> in Figure 15-88 Timing Chart of Master Reception (in Continuous Reception Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 917 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.6.3 Master transmission/reception Master transmission/reception is an operation wherein this MCU outputs a transfer clock and transmits/receives data to/from other device. SPI Function CSI00 CSI01 CSI10 CSI11 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 0 of SAU1 Channel 1 of SAU1 Pins used SCK00, SI00, SO00 SCK01, SI01, SO01 SCK10, SI10, SO10 SCK11, SI11, SO11 Interrupt INTCSI00 INTCSI01 INTCSI10 INTCSI11 Transfer end interrupt (in single-transfer mode) or buffer empty interrupt (in continuous transfer mode) can be selected. Error detection flag Overrun error detection flag (OVFmn) only Transfer data length 7 to 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/4 [Hz], Min. fCLK/(2 x 211 x 128) [Hz] Note Data phase Selectable by the DAPmn bit of the SCRmn register fCLK: System clock frequency * DAPmn = 0: Data I/O starts at the start of the serial clock operation. * DAPmn = 1: Data I/O starts half a clock before the start of the serial clock operation. Clock phase Selectable by the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn register * CKPmn = 0: Forward * CKPmn = 1: Reverse Data direction Note MSB or LSB first Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 918 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-90. Example of Contents of Registers for Master Transmission/Reception of SPI Function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 STSmn CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 8 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 SISmn0 0 2 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt 1: Buffer empty interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 1 0/1 0/1 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 1 9 0 0 0/1 5 4 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Selection of the data and clock phase (For details about the setting, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.) 3 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn 13 12 11 10 9 Baud rate setting 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRpL) 15 14 13 12 SDRmn 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Transmit data setting/Receive data setting SDRpL Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI master transmission/reception mode : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 919 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-90. Example of Contents of Registers for Master Transmission/Reception of SPI Function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (2/2) (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 0/1 0/1 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 0/1 0/1 Communication starts when these bits are 1 if the clock phase is forward (the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn = 0). If the clock phase is reversed (CKPmn = 1), communication starts when these bits are 0. (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 0/1 0/1 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI master transmission/reception mode : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 920 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-91. Initial Setting Procedure for Master Transmission/Reception Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Setting the SPSm register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Setting the SDRmn register Set a transfer baud rate. Set the initial output level using the Setting the SOm register SOmn and CKOmn bits. Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable data Changing setting of the SOEm register output of the target channel. Enable data output and clock output of Setting port the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Writing to the SSm register Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1. This sets the SEmn bit to 1. Set transmit data to the SDRmn register Starting communication and start communication. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 921 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-92. Procedure for Stopping Master Transmission/Reception Starting setting to stop Setting the STm register Changing setting of the SOEm register Stopping communication Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. Set the SOEmn bit to 0 and stop the output of the target channel. Stop communication in midway. Remarks 1. Even after communication is stopped, the pin level is retained. To resume the operation, re-set serial output register m (SOm) (see Figure 15-93 Procedure for Resuming Master Transmission/ Reception). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 922 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-93. Procedure for Resuming Master Transmission/Reception Starting setting for resumption Disable data output of the target channel Port manipulation (Essential) (Selective) by setting a port register and a port mode register. Changing setting of the SPSm register Re-set the register to change the operation clock setting. Re-set the register to change the Changing setting of the SDRmn register (Selective) transfer baud rate setting. Re-set the register to change the serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn register mode register mn (SMRmn) register setting. Re-set the register to change serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. If the FEF, PEF, or OVF flag remains (Selective) Clearing error flag set, clear this using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register Set the SOEmn bit to 0 to stop output from the target channel. Set the initial output level of the serial clock (CKOmn) and serial data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable output from the target channel. Enable data output and clock output of (Essential) Port manipulation (Essential) Writing to the SSm register the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). (Essential) Starting communication Set transmit data to the SDRmn register and start communication. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 923 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-transmission/reception mode) Figure 15-94. Timing Chart of Master Transmission/Reception (in Single-Transmission/Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 Write Receive data 1 Transmit data 2 Write Read Receive data 3 Receive data 2 Transmit data 3 Write Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Shift register mn SOp pin Receive data 1 Reception & shift operation Transmit data 1 Receive data 2 Reception & shift operation Transmit data 2 Receive data 3 Reception & shift operation Transmit data 3 INTCSIp Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 924 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-95. Flowchart of Master Transmission/Reception (in Single- Transmission/Reception Mode) Starting SCI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting the operation clock with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm, SOEm: Setting output and SCKp output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Starting transmission/reception Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Reading the SDRmn register Transmission/reception completed? No Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 925 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (4) Processing flow (in continuous transmission/reception mode) Figure 15-96. Timing Chart of Master Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn Receive data 3 SDRmn Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 Receive data 1 Transmit data 3 Write Write Write Read Receive data 2 Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Receive data 1 Shift register mn SOp pin Receive data 3 Receive data 2 Reception & shift operation Reception & shift operation Reception & shift operation Transmit data 2 Transmit data 1 Transmit data 3 INTCSIp Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) MDmn0 TSFmn BFFmn <1> <2> <3> (Note 1) <2> (Note 2) <3> <4> <2> (Note 2) <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8> Notes 1. If transmit data is written to the SDRmn register while the BFFmn bit of serial status register mn (SSRmn) is 1 (valid data is stored in serial data register mn (SDRmn)), the transmit data is overwritten. 2. The transmit data can be read by reading the SDRmn register during this period. At this time, the transfer operation is not affected. Caution The MDmn0 bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn) can be rewritten even during operation. However, rewrite it before transfer of the last bit is started, so that it has been rewritten before the transfer end interrupt of the last transmit data. Remarks 1. <1> to <8> in the figure correspond to <1> to <8> in Figure 15-97 Flowchart of Master Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 926 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-97. Flowchart of Master Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm, SOEm: Setting output and SCKp output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. <1> Select buffer empty interrupt. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit <2> Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Buffer empty interrupt generated? Yes <3> <4> No Reading receive data from the SDRmn register Yes Communication data exists? No <5> Writing 0 to the MDmn0 bit TSFmn = 1? No Yes Transfer end interrupt generated? <6> No Yes <7> Reading receive data from the SDRmn register Yes Communication continued? Writing 1 to the MDmn0 bit No <8> Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remarks 1. <1> to <8> in the figure correspond to <1> to <8> in Figure 15-96 Timing Chart of Master Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 927 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.6.4 Slave transmission Slave transmission is an operation wherein this MCU transmits data to another device in the state of a transfer clock being input from another device. SPI Function CSI00 CSI01 CSI10 CSI11 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 0 of SAU1 Channel 1 of SAU1 Pins used SCK00, SO00, SSI00 SCK01, SO01, SSI01 SCK10, SO10, SSI10 SCK11, SO11, SSI11 Interrupt INTCSI00 INTCSI01 INTCSI10 INTCSI11 Transfer end interrupt (in single-transfer mode) or buffer empty interrupt (in continuous transfer mode) can be selected. Error detection flag Overrun error detection flag (OVFmn) only Transfer data length 7 to 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/6 [Hz]Notes 1, 2. Data phase Selectable by the DAPmn bit of the SCRmn register * DAPmn = 0: Data output starts from the start of the serial clock operation. * DAPmn = 1: Data output starts half a clock before the start of the serial clock operation. Clock phase Selectable by the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn register * CKPmn = 0: Forward * CKPmn = 1: Reverse Data direction MSB or LSB first SPI function The operation of the slave select function can be selected. Notes 1. Because the external serial clock input to the SCK00, SCK01, SCK10, and SCK11 pins is sampled internally and used, the fastest transfer rate is fMCK/6 [Hz]. 2. Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remarks 1. fMCK: Operation clock frequency of target channel 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 928 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-98. Example of Contents of Registers for Slave Transmission of SPI Function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 1 7 STSmn CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 8 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 SISmn0 0 2 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt 1: Buffer empty interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 1 9 0 0 0/1 5 4 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Selection of the data and clock phase (For details about the setting, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.) 3 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn 13 12 11 10 9 0000000 (baud rate setting) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRpL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 SDRmn Transmit data setting SDRpL Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI slave transmission mode : : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x : Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1 : Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 929 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-98. Example of Contents of Registers for Slave Transmission of SPI Function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (2/2) (d) Serial slave select enable register m (SSEm) ... Controls the SSI00, SSI01, SSI10, and SSI11 pin inputs of the target channel in slave mode. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 0/1 0/1 SSEm 1 0 SSEm1 SSEm0 (e) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 x x (f) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 0/1 0/1 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 (g) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI slave transmission mode : : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x : Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1 : Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 930 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-99. Initial Setting Procedure for Slave Transmission Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Setting the SPSm register Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Setting the SDRmn register Set bits 15 to 9 to any value for baud rate setting. Setting the SOm register Changing setting of the SOEm register Set the initial output level of the serial data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable data output of the target channel. Setting port Writing to the SSEm register Writing to the SSm register Starting communication Remark Enable data output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSEm bit of the target channel to 1 to enable operation of slave select input function for the target channel. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Set transmit data to the SDRmn register and wait for a clock from the master. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 931 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-100. Procedure for Stopping Slave Transmission Starting setting to stop Setting the STm register Changing setting of the SOEm register Stopping communication Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. Set the SOEmn bit to 0 and stop the output of the target channel. Stop communication in midway. Remarks 1. Even after communication is stopped, the pin level is retained. To resume the operation, re-set serial output register m (SOm) (see Figure 15-101 Procedure for Resuming Slave Transmission). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 932 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-101. Procedure for Resuming Slave Transmission Starting setting for resumption Stop the target for communication or wait until (Essential) Manipulating target for communication (Selective) Port manipulation the target completes its operation. Disable data output and clock output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Re-set the register to change the operation (Selective) Changing setting of the SPSm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn register (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register clock setting. Re-set the register to change serial mode register mn (SMRmn) setting. Re-set the register to change serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. (Selective) Clearing error flag (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Essential) Port manipulation If the OVF flag remains set, clear this using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 0 to stop output from the target channel. Set the initial output level of the serial data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable output from the target channel. Enable data output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. (Essential) (Essential) Writing to the SSm register Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Set the SSEmn bit and enable the operation of Changing setting of the SSEm register the slave select function of the target channel. Remark (Essential) Starting communication (Essential) Starting target for communication Sets transmit data to the SDRmn register and wait for a clock from the master. Starts the target for communication. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 933 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-transmission mode) Figure 15-102. Timing Chart of Slave Transmission (in Single-Transmission Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 Transmit data 3 SCKp pin SOp pin Transmit data 1 Shift register mn INTCSIp Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Transmit data 2 Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Transmit data 3 Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 934 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-103. Flowchart of Slave Transmission (in Single-Transmission Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. SDRmn[15:9]: Setting 0000000B SOm, SOEm: Setting output Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Transmission completed? No Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of transmission Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 935 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (4) Processing flow (in continuous transmission mode) Figure 15-104. Timing Chart of Slave Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 Transmit data 3 Transmit data 2 SCKp pin SOp pin Transmit data 1 Shift register mn INTCSIp Transmit data 3 Transmit data 2 Shift operation Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Shift operation Data transmission (8-bit length) Data transmission (8-bit length) MDmn0 TSFmn BFFmn <1> <2> <3> (Note) <2> <3> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> Note If transmit data is written to the SDRmn register while the BFFmn bit of serial status register mn (SSRmn) is 1 (valid data is stored in serial data register mn (SDRmn)), the transmit data is overwritten. Caution The MDmn0 bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn) can be rewritten even during operation. However, rewrite it before transfer of the last bit is started. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 936 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-105. Flowchart of Slave Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting 0000000B SOm, SOEm: Setting output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. <1> Select buffer empty interrupt. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Buffer empty interrupt generated? Yes <2> No <3> Transmitting next data? Yes No Writing 0 to the MDmn0 bit <4> TSFmn = 1? No Yes Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes <5> Writing 1 to the MDmn0 bit Yes Communication continued? No Writing 1 to the STmn bit <6> Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remarks 1. <1> to <6> in the figure correspond to <1> to <6> in Figure 15-104 Timing Chart of Slave Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 937 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.6.5 Slave reception Slave reception is an operation wherein this MCU receives data from another device in the state of a transfer clock being input from another device. SPI Function CSI00 CSI01 CSI10 CSI11 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 2 of SAU0 Channel 3 of SAU0 Pins used SCK00, SI00, SII00 SCK01, SI01, SII01 SCK10, SI10, SII10 SCK11, SI11, SII11 Interrupt INTCSI00 INTCSI01 INTCSI10 INTCSI11 Transfer end interrupt only (Setting the buffer empty interrupt is prohibited.) Error detection flag Overrun error detection flag (OVFmn) only Transfer data length 7 to 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/6 [Hz] Notes 1, 2 Data phase Selectable by the DAPmn bit of the SCRmn register * DAPmn = 0: Data input starts from the start of the serial clock operation. * DAPmn = 1: Data input starts half a clock before the start of the serial clock operation. Clock phase Selectable by the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn register * CKPmn = 0: Forward * CKPmn = 1: Reverse Data direction MSB or LSB first SPI function The operation of the slave select function can be selected. Notes 1. Because the external serial clock input to the SCK00, SCK01, SCK10, and SCK11 pins is sampled internally and used, the fastest transfer rate is fMCK/6 [Hz]. 2. Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remarks 1. fMCK: Operation clock frequency of target channel 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 938 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-106. Example of Contents of Registers for Slave Reception of SPI Function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 1 8 7 STSmn 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 2 SISmn0 0 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 0 1 0/1 0/1 9 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn 0 0 0/1 5 4 3 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Selection of the data and clock phase (For details about the setting, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.) 2 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn 13 12 11 10 9 0000000 (baud rate setting) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 x x (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRpL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 SDRmn Receive data setting SDRpL (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ...The register that not used in this mode. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 x x Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI slave reception mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 939 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-106. Example of Contents of Registers for Slave Reception of SPI Function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (2/2) (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ...The register that not used in this mode. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 x x 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm (g) Serial slave select enable register m (SSEm) ... Controls the SSI00, SSI01, SSI10, and SSI11 pin inputs of the target channel in slave mode. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm 1 0 SSEm1 SSEm0 0/1 0/1 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI slave reception mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 940 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-107. Initial Setting Procedure for Slave Reception Starting initial settings Release the serial array unit from the reset Setting the PER0 register Setting the SPSm register status and start clock supply. Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Setting the SDRmn register Set bits 15 to 9 to any value for baud rate setting. Enable data input and clock input of the Setting port target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSEm bit of the target channel to 1 Writing to the SSEm register and enable operation of slave select input function for the target channel. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and Writing to the SSm register set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Set dummy data to the SDRmn register and Starting communication start communication. Figure 15-108. Procedure for Stopping Slave Reception Starting setting to stop Setting the STm register Stopping communication Remark Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. Stop communication in midway. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 941 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-109. Procedure for Resuming Slave Reception Starting setting for resumption Stop the target for communication or wait until (Essential) Manipulating target for communication (Essential) Port manipulation the target completes its operation. Disable clock output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Re-set the register to change the operation (Selective) Changing setting of the SPSm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn register (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register clock setting. Re-set the register to change serial mode register mn (SMRmn) setting. Re-set the register to change serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. (Selective) Clearing error flag If the FEF, PEF, or OVF flag remains set, clear this using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). (Essential) Port manipulation Enable data output and clock output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSEmn bit of the target channel to 1 (Essential) Writing to the SSEm register and enable operation of slave select input function. (Essential) Writing to the SSm register Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). (Essential) Remark Starting communication Wait for a clock from the master. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 942 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-reception mode) Figure 15-110. Timing Chart of Slave Reception (in Single-Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Receive data 3 Receive data 2 Receive data 1 Read Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Shift register mn INTCSIp Receive data 1 Reception & shift operation Data reception (8-bit length) Receive data 2 Reception & shift operation Data reception (8-bit length) Receive data 3 Reception & shift operation Data reception (8-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 943 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-111. Flowchart of Slave Reception (in Single-Reception Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting 0000000B Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Starting reception Transfer end interrupt generated? Yes No Reading the SDRmn register No Reception completed? Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 944 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.6.6 Slave transmission/reception Slave transmission/reception is an operation wherein this MCU transmits/receives data to/from another device in the state of a transfer clock being input from another device. SPI Function CSI00 CSI01 CSI10 CSI11 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 0 of SAU1 Channel 1 of SAU1 Pins used SCK00, SI00, SO00, SSI00 SCK01, SI01, SO01, SSI01 SCK10, SI10, SO10, SSI10 SCK11, SI11, SO11, SSI11 Interrupt INTCSI00 INTCSI01 INTCSI10 INTCSI11 Transfer end interrupt (in single-transfer mode) or buffer empty interrupt (in continuous transfer mode) can be selected. Error detection flag Overrun error detection flag (OVFmn) only Transfer data length 7 to 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/6 [Hz]Notes 1, 2. Data phase Selectable by the DAPmn bit of the SCRmn register * DAPmn = 0: Data I/O starts from the start of the serial clock operation. * DAPmn = 1: Data I/O starts half a clock before the start of the serial clock operation. Clock phase Selectable by the CKPmn bit of the SCRmn register * CKPmn = 0: Forward * CKPmn = 1: Reverse Data direction MSB or LSB first SPI function The operation of the slave select function can be selected. Notes 1. Because the external serial clock input to the SCK00, SCK01, SCK10, and SCK11 pins is sampled internally and used, the fastest transfer rate is fMCK/6 [Hz]. 2. Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remarks 1. fMCK: Operation clock frequency of target channel 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 945 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-112. Example of Contents of Registers for Slave Transmission/Reception of SPI Function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 1 7 STSmn CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 8 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 SISmn0 0 2 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 0 0/1 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt 1: Buffer empty interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 1 0/1 0/1 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 1 9 0 0 0/1 5 4 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Selection of the data and clock phase (For details about the setting, see 15.3 Registers Controlling Serial Array Unit.) 3 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn (2) 13 12 11 10 9 0000000 (baud rate setting) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 0/1 0/1 When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRpL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 SDRmn Transmit data setting/receive data register SDRpL (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 x x Caution Be sure to set transmit data to the SDRpL register before the clock from the master is started. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI slave transmission/reception mode : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 946 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-112. Example of Contents of Registers for Slave Transmission/Reception of SPI Function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) (2/2) (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 0/1 0/1 1 0 (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm SSEm1 SSEm0 0/1 0/1 (g) Serial slave select enable register m (SSEm) ... Controls the SSI00, SSI01, SSI10, and SSI11 pin inputs of the target channel in slave mode. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSEm 1 0 SSEm1 SSEm0 0/1 0/1 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the CSI slave transmission/reception mode : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 947 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-113. Initial Setting Procedure for Slave Transmission/Reception Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Setting the SPSm register Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Set bits 15 to 9 to any value for baud Setting the SDRmn register Setting the SOm register rate setting. Set the initial output level of the serial data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable data Changing setting of the SOEm register output of the target channel. Enable data output of the target channel Setting port by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSEm bit of the target channel to Writing to the SSEm register 1 and enable operation of slave select input function of the target channel. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 Writing to the SSm register and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Starting communication Set transmit data to the SDRmn register and wait for a clock from the master. Caution Be sure to set transmit data to the SDRpL register before the clock from the master is started. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 948 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-114. Procedure for Stopping Slave Transmission/Reception Starting setting to stop Setting the STm register Changing setting of the SOEm register Stopping communication Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. Set the SOEmn bit to 0 and stop the output of the target channel. Stop communication in midway. Remarks 1. Even after communication is stopped, the pin level is retained. To resume the operation, re-set serial output register m (SOm) (see Figure 15-115 Procedure for Resuming Slave Transmission/Reception). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 949 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-115. Procedure for Resuming Slave Transmission/Reception Starting setting for resumption (Essential) Manipulating target for communication (Essential) Port manipulation Stop the target for communication or wait until the target completes its operation. Disable data output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. (Selective) Changing setting of the SPSm register Re-set the register to change the operation clock setting. (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn register Re-set the register to change serial mode register mn (SMRmn) setting. Re-set the register to change serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. If the FEF, PEF, or OVF flag remains set, Clearing error flag (Selective) clear this using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register Set the SOEmn bit to 0 to stop output from the target channel. Set the initial output level of the serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SOm register (Selective) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Essential) Port manipulation data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable output from the target channel. Enable data output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and (Essential) Writing to the SSm register (Essential) Starting communication (Essential) Starting target for communication set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Set transmit data to the SDRmn register and wait for a clock from the master. Start the target for communication. Caution Be sure to set transmit data to the SDRpL register before the clock from the master is started. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 950 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-transmission/reception mode) Figure 15-116. Timing Chart of Slave Transmission/Reception (in Single-Transmission/Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn Receive data 1 SDRmn Transmit data 1 Write Receive data 2 Receive data 3 Transmit data 3 Transmit data 2 Write Read Write Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Shift register mn SOp pin Receive data 1 Reception & shift operation Transmit data 1 Receive data 2 Reception & shift operation Transmit data 2 Receive data 3 Reception & shift operation Transmit data 3 INTCSIp Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 951 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-117. Flowchart of Slave Transmission/Reception (in Single- Transmission/Reception Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting 0000000B SOm, SOEm: Setting output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transfer data to the SDRmn register Starting transmission/reception Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Reading the SDRmn register Transmission/reception completed? No Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Cautions 1. Be sure to set transmit data to the SDRpL register before the clock from the master is started. 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 952 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (4) Processing flow (in continuous transmission/reception mode) Figure 15-118. Timing Chart of Slave Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode) (Type 1: DAPmn = 0, CKPmn = 0) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 Write Write Receive data 1 Transmit data 3 Write Read Receive data 3 Receive data 2 Read Read SCKp pin SIp pin Receive data 2 Receive data 1 Shift register mn SOp pin Reception & shift operation Receive data 3 Reception & shift operation Reception & shift operation Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 Transmit data 3 INTCSIp Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) Data transmission/reception (8-bit length) MDmn0 TSFmn BFFmn <1> <2> <3> (Note 1) <2> (Note 2) <3> <4> <2> (Note 2) <3> <4> <5> <6> <7><8> Notes 1. If transmit data is written to the SDRmn register while the BFFmn bit of serial status register mn (SSRmn) is 1 (valid data is stored in serial data register mn (SDRmn)), the transmit data is overwritten. 2. The transmit data can be read by reading the SDRmn register during this period. At this time, the transfer operation is not affected. Caution The MDmn0 bit of serial mode register mn (SMRmn) can be rewritten even during operation. However, rewrite it before transfer of the last bit is started, so that it has been rewritten before the transfer end interrupt of the last transmit data. Remarks 1. <1> to <8> in the figure correspond to <1> to <8> in Figure 15-119 Flowchart of Slave Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 953 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-119. Flowchart of Slave Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode) Starting CSI communication Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate with the SPSm register Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit is 0. <1> Select buffer empty interrupt. SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOm, SOEm: Setting output Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit <2> Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Buffer empty interrupt generated? Yes <3> <4> No Reading receive data from the SDRmn register Yes Communication data exists? No <5> Writing 0 to the MDmn0 bit TSFmn = 1? No Yes Transfer end interrupt generated? <6> No Yes <7> Reading receive data from the SDRmn register Yes Communication continued? Writing 1 to the MDmn0 bit No <8> Writing 1 to the STmn bit Setting the SAU1EN and SAU0EN bits of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Caution Be sure to set transmit data to the SDRpL register before the clock from the master is started. Remarks 1. <1> to <8> in the figure correspond to <1> to <8> in Figure 15-118 Timing Chart of Slave Transmission/Reception (in Continuous Transmission/Reception Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 954 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.6.7 Calculating transfer clock frequency The transfer clock frequency for SPI function (CSI00, CSI01, CSI10, CSI11) communication can be calculated by the following expressions. (1) Master (Transfer clock frequency) = {Operation clock (fMCK) frequency of target channel} / (SDRmn[15:9] + 1) / 2 [Hz] (2) Slave (Transfer clock frequency) = {Frequency of serial clock (fSCK) supplied by master}Note [Hz] Note The permissible maximum transfer clock frequency is fMCK/6. Remark 1. The value of SDRmn[15:9] is the value of bits 15 to 9 of serial data register mn (SDRmn) (0000000B to 1111111B) and therefore is 0 to 127. 2. The operation clock (fMCK) is determined by serial clock select register m (SPSm) and bit 15 (CKSmn) of serial mode register mn (SMRmn). 3. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), p: CSI number (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 955 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Table 15-3. Selection of Operation Clock For SPI Function Operation Clock (fMCK) Note SMRmn Register SPSm Register CKSmn PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS m13 m12 m11 m10 m03 m02 m01 m00 0 fCLK = 32 MHz X X X X 0 0 0 0 fCLK X X X X 0 0 0 1 fCLK/2 32 MHz 16 MHz 2 8 MHz X X X X 0 0 1 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 0 0 1 1 fCLK/23 4 MHz 4 2 MHz 1 MHz X X X X 0 1 0 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 0 1 0 1 fCLK/25 6 500 kHz X X X X 0 1 1 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 0 1 1 1 fCLK/27 250 kHz 8 125 kHz X X X X 1 0 0 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 1 0 0 1 fCLK/29 62.5 kHz X X X X 1 0 1 0 fCLK/210 31.25 kHz 11 X X X X 1 0 1 1 fCLK/2 15.63 kHz 0 0 0 0 X X X X fCLK 32 MHz 0 0 0 1 X X X X fCLK/2 16 MHz 0 0 1 0 X X X X fCLK/22 8 MHz 0 0 1 1 X X X X fCLK/23 4 MHz 0 1 0 0 X X X X fCLK/24 2 MHz 0 1 0 1 X X X X fCLK/25 1 MHz 6 500 kHz 1 0 1 1 0 X X X X fCLK/2 0 1 1 1 X X X X fCLK/27 250 kHz 8 125 kHz 1 0 0 0 X X X X fCLK/2 1 0 0 1 X X X X fCLK/29 31.25 kHz 15.63 kHz 1 0 1 0 X X X X fCLK/2 1 0 1 1 X X X X fCLK/211 Other than above 62.5 kHz 10 Setting prohibited Note When changing the clock selected for fCLK (by changing the system clock control register (CKC) value), do so after having stopped (serial channel stop register m (STm) = 0003H) the operation of the serial array unit (SAU). Remarks 1. X: Don't care 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 956 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.6.8 Procedure for processing errors that occurred during clock synchronous serial communication with SPI function The procedure for processing errors that occurred during clock synchronous serial communication with SPI function is described in Figure 15-120. Figure 15-120. Processing Procedure in Case of Overrun Error Software Manipulation Hardware Status Remark Reads serial data register mn (SDRmn). The BFFmn bit of the SSRmn register is This is to prevent an overrun error if the set to 0 and channel n is enabled to receive data. next reception is completed during error processing. Reads serial status register mn Error type is identified and the read (SSRmn). value is used to clear error flag. Writes 1 to serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). Error flag is cleared. Error can be cleared only during reading, by writing the value read from the SSRmn register to the SIRmn register without modification. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 957 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.7 Operation of UART (UART0, UART1) Communication This is a start-stop synchronization function using two lines: serial data transmission (TXD) and serial data reception (RXD) lines. By using these two communication lines, each data frame, which consist of a start bit, data, parity bit, and stop bit, is transferred asynchronously (using the internal baud rate) between the microcontroller and the other communication party. Full-duplex UART communication can be performed by using a channel dedicated to transmission (even-numbered channel) and a channel dedicated to reception (odd-numbered channel). The LIN-bus can be implemented by using timer array unit 0 with an external interrupt (INTP0). [Data transmission/reception] * Data length of 7, 8, 9, or 16 bits * Select the MSB/LSB first * Level setting of transmit/receive data and select of reverse * Parity bit appending and parity check functions * Stop bit appending [Interrupt function] * Transfer end interrupt/buffer empty interrupt [Error detection flag] * Framing error, parity error, or overrun error The LIN-bus is accepted in UART0 (channels 0 and 1 of unit 0). [LIN-bus functions] * Wakeup signal detection Using the external interrupt (INTP0) and * Break field (BF) detection timer array unit 0 * Sync field measurement, baud rate calculation R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 958 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT UART0 uses channels 0 and 1 of SAU0. UART1 uses channels 0 and 1 of SAU1. * Group A products Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI function) UART0 (supporting LIN- IIC00 Note2 bus) 1 CSI01 (supporting SPI function) IIC01 Note2 * Products of Groups C-1 and D-1 Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI function) UART0 (supporting LIN- IIC00 Note2 bus) 1 CSI01 (supporting SPI function) IIC01 Note2 1 0 CSI10 (supporting SPI function) UART1 IIC10 Note1, 2 1 - - * Products of Groups B, C-2, D-2, and E Unit Channel 0 0 1 Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C CSI00 UART0 (supporting LIN- IIC00 (supporting SPI function) Note2 bus) CSI01 IIC01 (supporting SPI function) Note2 1 0 CSI10 UART1 IIC10 (supporting SPI function) Note1, 2 1 CSI11 IIC11 (supporting SPI function) Note2 ___________ Notes 1. 48-pin, 32-pin and 30-pin products do not have SSI10 pin. ____________ <R> 2. Set CKPmn bit of SCRmn register to 1, when SSEmn = 1 (Enables SSImn pin input). (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1) Caution When using serial array unit as UARTs, the channels of both the transmitting side (even-number channel) and the receiving side (odd-number channel) can be used only as UARTs. Remark Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C-1: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30 or 32 pins Group C-2: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 48, 64, or 80 pins Group D-1: RL78/F14 products with 30 or 32 pins Group D-2: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 959 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT UART performs the following four types of communication operations. * UART transmission (See 15.7.1 UART transmission.) * UART reception (See 15.7.2 UART reception.) * LIN transmission (UART0 only) (See 15.8.1 LIN transmission.) * LIN reception (UART0 only) (See 15.8.2 LIN reception.) 15.7.1 UART transmission UART transmission is an operation to transmit data from this MCU to another device asynchronously (start-stop synchronization). Of two channels used for UART, the even channel is used for UART transmission. UART UART0 UART1 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 2 of SAU0 Pins used TxD0 TxD1 Interrupt INTST0 INTST1 Transfer end interrupt (in single-transfer mode) or buffer empty interrupt (in continuous transfer mode) can be selected. Error detection flag None Transfer data length 7 to 9 or 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/6 [bps] (SDRmn [15:9] = 2 or more), Min. fCLK/(2 x 215 x 128) [bps] Note Data phase Forward output (default: high level) Reverse output (default: low level) Parity bit The following selectable * No parity bit * Appending 0 parity * Appending even parity * Appending odd parity Stop bit The following selectable * Appending 1 bit * Appending 2 bits Data direction Note MSB or LSB first Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remarks 1. fMCK: fCLK: Operation clock frequency of target channel System clock frequency 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 01), mn = 00, 10 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 960 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-121. Example of Contents of Registers for UART Transmission of UART (UART0, UART1) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 0 8 7 STSmn 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 2 SISmn0 0 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 0 1 0/1 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt 1: Buffer empty interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 1 0 0 0 9 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn 0/1 0/1 0/1 Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Setting of parity bit 00B: No parity 01B: Appending 0 parity 10B: Appending Even parity 11B: Appending Odd parity 5 4 3 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of stop bit 01B: Appending 1 bit 10B: Appending 2 bits 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of data length 0110B: 7 bits 0111B: 8 bits 1000B: 9 bits 1111B: 10 bits (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn 13 12 11 10 9 Baud rate setting 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 0 (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRmnL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Transmit data setting SDRmn SDRmnL (d) Serial output level register m (SOLm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOLm SOLm0 0/1 0: Forward (normal) transmission 1: Reverse transmission Note Before transmission is started, be sure to set to 1 when the SOLmn bit of the target channel is set to 0, and set to 0 when the SOLmn bit of the target channel is set to 1. The value varies depending on the communication data during communication operation. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0), mn = 00, 10 2. : Setting is fixed in the UART transmission mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 961 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-121. Example of Contents of Registers for UART Transmission of UART (UART0, UART1) (2/2) (e) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 x x 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 x 0/1 Note 0: Serial data output value is 0 1: Serial data output value is 1 (f) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 x 0/1 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 x 0/1 (g) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm Note Before transmission is started, be sure to set to 1 when the SOLmn bit of the target channel is set to 0, and set to 0 when the SOLmn bit of the target channel is set to 1. The value varies depending on the communication data during communication operation. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0), mn = 00, 10 2. : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 962 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-122. Initial Setting Procedure for UART Transmission Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Setting the SPSm register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Set a transfer baud rate (setting the Setting the SDRmn register transfer clock by dividing the operation clock (fMCK)). Set an output data level. Setting the SOm register Set the initial output level of the serial data (SOmn). Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable data output of the target channel. Enable data output of the target channel Setting port by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 Writing to the SSm register and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Set transmit data to the SDRmn register Starting communication Remark and start communication. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0), mn = 00, 10 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 963 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-123. Procedure for Stopping UART Transmission Starting setting to stop Setting the STm register Setting the SOEm register Stopping communication Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. Set the SOEmn bit to 0 and stop the output. Stop communication in midway. Remarks 1. Even after communication is stopped, the pin level is retained. To resume the operation, re-set serial output register m (SOm) (see Figure 15-124 Procedure for Resuming UART Transmission). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0), mn = 00, 10 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 964 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-124. Procedure for Resuming UART Transmission Starting setting for resumption Disable data output of the target channel (Essential) Port manipulation by setting a port register and a port mode register. (Selective) Re-set the register to change the Changing setting of the SPSm register operation clock setting. Re-set the register to change the (Selective) Changing setting of the SDRmn register transfer baud rate setting (setting the transfer clock by dividing the operation clock (fMCK)). (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn register (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register Re-set the register to change serial mode register mn (SMRmn) setting. Re-set the register to change the serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. (Selective) Changing setting of the SOLm register (Essential) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Essential) Changing setting of the SOm register Re-set the register to change serial output level register m (SOLm) setting. Clear the SOEmn bit to 0 and stop output. Set the initial output level of the serial data (SOmn). (Essential) Changing setting of the SOEm register (Essential) Port manipulation Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable output. Enable data output of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. (Essential) Writing to the SSm register Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Set transmit data to the SDRmn register (Essential) Remark Starting communication and start communication. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0), mn = 00, 10 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 965 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow (in single-transmission mode) Figure 15-125. Timing Chart of UART Transmission (in Single-Transmission Mode) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn TxDq pin Shift register mn Transmit data 1 ST Transmit data 1 Transmit data 2 P SP Shift operation ST Transmit data 2 Transmit data 3 P SP Shift operation ST Transmit data 3 P SP Shift operation INTSTq Data transmission (7-bit length) Data transmission (7-bit length) Data transmission (7-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0), q: UART number (q = 0, 1) mn = 00, 10 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 966 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-126. Flowchart of UART Transmission (in Single-Transmission Mode) Starting UART communication Setting the SAUmEN bit of the PER0 register to 1 Setting operation clock by the SPSm register SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate SOLmn: Setting output data level SOm, SOEm: Setting output Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit of serial channel enable status register m (SEm) is 0 (operation is stopped). Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transmit data to the SDRmn register Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Transmission No Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Clearing the SAUmEN bit of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0), mn = 00, 10 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 967 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (4) Processing flow (in continuous transmission mode) Figure 15-127. Timing Chart of UART Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode) SSmn STmn SEmn SDRmn Transmit data 1 TxDq pin ST Shift register mn Transmit data 3 Transmit data 2 Transmit data 1 P SP ST Shift operation Transmit data 2 P SP ST Shift operation Transmit data 3 P SP Shift operation INTSTq Data transmission (7-bit length) Data transmission (7-bit length) Data transmission (7-bit length) MDmn0 TSFmn BFFmn <1> <2> <3> (Note) <2> <3> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> Note If transmit data is written to the SDRmn register while the BFFmn bit of serial status register mn (SSRmn) is 1 (valid data is stored in serial data register mn (SDRmn)), the transmit data is overwritten. Caution The MDmn0 bit of serial mode register mn (SSRmn) can be rewritten even during operation. However, rewrite it before transfer of the last bit is started, so that it will be rewritten before the transfer end interrupt of the last transmit data. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0), q: UART number (q = 0, 1) mn = 00, 10 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 968 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-128. Flowchart of UART Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode) Starting UART communication Setting the SAUmEN bit of the PER0 register to 1 Setting operation clock by the SPSm register Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit of serial channel enable status register m (SEm) is 0 (operation is stopped). SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: <1> Select the buffer empty interrupt. Setting transfer rate SOLmn: Setting output data level SOm, SOEm: Setting output Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing transmit data to the <2> SDRmn register No Buffer empty interrupt generated? Yes <3> Yes Transmitting next data? No Clearing the MDmn0 bit to 0 <4> No TSFmn = 1? Yes No Transfer end interrupt generated? Yes <5> Writing 1 to the MDmn0 bit Yes Communication continued? No Writing 1 to the STmn bit <6> Clearing the SAUmEN bit of the PER0 register to 0 End of communication Remarks 1. <1> to <6> in the figure correspond to <1> to <6> in Figure 15-127 Timing Chart of UART Transmission (in Continuous Transmission Mode). 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 1), mn = 00, 10 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 969 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.7.2 UART reception UART reception is an operation wherein this MCU asynchronously receives data from another device (start-stop synchronization). For UART reception, the odd-number channel of the two channels used for UART is used. The SMR register of both the odd- and even-numbered channels must be set. UART UART0 UART1 Target channel Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU1 Pins used RxD0 RxD1 Interrupt INTSR0 INTSR1 Transfer end interrupt only (Setting the buffer empty interrupt is prohibited.) * Framing error detection flag (FEFmn) Error detection flag * Parity error detection flag (PEFmn) * Overrun error detection flag (OVFmn) Transfer data length 7 to 9 or 16 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/6 [bps] (SDRmn [15:9] = 3 or more), Min. fCLK/(2 x 215 x 128) [bps] Note Data phase Forward output (default: high level) Reverse output (default: low level) Parity bit The following selectable * No parity bit (no parity check) * Appending 0 parity (no parity check) * Appending even parity * Appending odd parity Stop bit Appending 1 bit Data direction MSB or LSB first Note Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remarks 1. fMCK: fCLK: Operation clock frequency of target channel System clock frequency 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 1), mn = 01, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 970 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-129. Example of Contents of Registers for UART Reception of UART (UART0, UART1) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 7 STSmn CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 8 0 Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 SISmn0 1 0 0/1 2 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 1 0 Interrupt source of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt 0: Forward (normal) reception 1: Reverse reception (b) Serial mode register mr (SMRmr) 15 SMRmr 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 CKSmr CCSmr 0/1 0 8 7 STSmr 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 SISmr0 0 0 2 1 0 MDmr2 MDmr1 MDmr0 0 1 0/1 Interrupt source of channel r 0: Transfer end interrupt 1: Buffer empty interrupt Same setting value as CKSmn bit (c) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 0 1 0 0 9 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn 0/1 0/1 0/1 5 4 3 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Setting of parity bit 00B: No parity 01B: No parity judgment 10B: Appending Even parity 11B: Appending Odd parity Selection of data transfer sequence 0: Inputs/outputs data with MSB first 1: Inputs/outputs data with LSB first. Setting of data length 0110B: 7 bits 0111B: 8 bits 1000B: 9 bits 1111B: 10 bits (d) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn 13 12 11 10 9 Baud rate setting 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRmnL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Receive data register SDRmn SDRmnL Caution For the UART reception, be sure to set the SMRmr register of channel r that is to be paired with channel n. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 1), mn = 01, 11 r: Channel number (r = n - 1), q: UART number (q = 0, 1) 2. : Setting is fixed in the UART reception mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 971 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-129. Example of Contents of Registers for UART Reception of UART (UART0, UART1) (2/2) (e) Serial output register m (SOm) ... The register that not used in this mode. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 x x 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 x x 1 0 (f) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ...The register that not used in this mode. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm SOEm1 SOEm0 x x 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 x (g) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm Caution For the UART reception, be sure to set the SMRmr register of channel r that is to be paired with channel n. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 1), mn = 01, 11 r: Channel number (r = n - 1), q: UART number (q = 0, 1) 2. : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 972 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-130. Initial Setting Procedure for UART Reception Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Setting the SPSm register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Set the operation clock. Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Set a transfer baud rate (setting the Setting the SDRmn register transfer clock by dividing the operation clock (fMCK)). Setting port Enable data input of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Writing to the SSm register Starting communication Caution Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). The start bit is detected. For the UART reception, set the RXEmn bit of SCRmn register to 1, and then be sure to set SSmn to 1 after 4 or more fMCK clocks have elapsed. Figure 15-131. Procedure for Stopping UART Reception Starting setting to stop Setting the STm register Stopping communication Remark Write 1 to the STmn bit of the target channel. Stop communication in midway. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 1), mn = 00, 10, r: Channel number (r = n - 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 973 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-132. Procedure for Resuming UART Reception Starting setting for resumption Stop the target for communication or wait (Essential) Manipulating target for communication (Selective) Changing setting of the SPSm register until the target completes its operation. Re-set the register to change the operation (Selective) Changing setting of the SDRmn register clock setting. Re-set the register to change the transfer baud rate setting (setting the transfer clock by dividing the operation clock (fMCK)). Re-set the registers to change serial mode (Selective) Changing setting of the SMRmn registers mn, mr (SMRmn, SMRmr) and SMRmr registers setting. Re-set the register to change serial (Selective) Changing setting of the SCRmn register communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) setting. If the FEF, PEF, and OVF flags remain (Selective) Clearing error flag set, clear them using serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). (Essential) Setting port (Essential) Writing to the SSm register (Essential) Start communication Enable data input of the target channel by setting a port register and a port mode register. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set Caution the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). The start bit is detected. For the UART reception, set the RXEmn bit of SCRmn register to 1, and then be sure to set SSmn to 1 after 4 or more fMCK clocks have elapsed. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 1), mn = 00, 10, r: Channel number (r = n - 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 974 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow Figure 15-133. Timing Chart of UART Reception SSmn STmn SEmn Receive data 3 SDRmn RxDq pin Shift register mn Receive data 2 Receive data 1 ST Receive data 1 P SP Shift operation ST Receive data 2 P SP Shift operation ST Receive data 3 P SP Shift operation INTSRq Data reception (7-bit length) Data reception (7-bit length) Data reception (7-bit length) TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 1), mn = 01, 11, r: Channel number (r = n - 1), q: UART number (q = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 975 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-134. Flowchart of UART Reception Starting UART communication Setting the SAUmEN bit of the PER0 register to 1 Setting transfer rate by the SPSm register Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit of serial channel enable status register m (SEm) is 0 (operation is stopped). SMRmn, SMRmr, SCRmn: Setting communication SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate Port manipulation Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Detecting start bit Starting reception Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Yes Error occurred? No Reading the SDRmn register Reception completed? Error processing No Yes Writing 1 to the STmn bit Clearing the SAUmEN bit of the PER0 register to 0 End of UART communication Caution For the UART reception, set the RXEmn bit of SCRmn register to 1, and then be sure to set SSmn to 1 after 4 or more fMCK clocks have elapsed. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 1), mn = 01, 11, r: Channel number (r = n - 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 976 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.7.3 Calculating baud rate (1) Baud rate calculation expression The baud rate for UART (UART0, UART1) communication can be calculated by the following expressions. (Baud rate) = {Operation clock (fMCK) frequency of target channel} / (SDRmn[15:9] + 1) / 2 [bps] Caution Setting serial data register mn (SDRmn) SDRmn[15:9] = (0000000B, 0000001B) is prohibited. Remarks 1. When UART is used, the value of SDRmn[15:9] is the value of bits 15 to 9 of the SDRmn register (0000010B to 1111111B) and therefore is 2 to 127. 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 The operation clock (fMCK) is determined by serial clock select register m (SPSm) and bit 15 (CKSmn) of serial mode register mn (SMRmn). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 977 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Table 15-4. Selection of Operation Clock For UART Operation Clock (fMCK) Note SMRmn Register SPSm Register CKSmn PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS m13 m12 m11 m10 m03 m02 m01 m00 0 fCLK = 32 MHz X X X X 0 0 0 0 fCLK X X X X 0 0 0 1 fCLK/2 32 MHz 16 MHz 2 8 MHz X X X X 0 0 1 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 0 0 1 1 fCLK/23 4 MHz 4 2 MHz 1 MHz X X X X 0 1 0 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 0 1 0 1 fCLK/25 6 500 kHz X X X X 0 1 1 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 0 1 1 1 fCLK/27 250 kHz 8 125 kHz X X X X 1 0 0 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 1 0 0 1 fCLK/29 62.5 kHz X X X X 1 0 1 0 fCLK/210 31.25 kHz 11 X X X X 1 0 1 1 fCLK/2 0 0 0 0 X X X X fCLK 1 15.63 kHz 32 MHz 0 0 0 1 X X X X fCLK/2 16 MHz 0 0 1 0 X X X X fCLK/22 8 MHz 0 0 1 1 X X X X fCLK/23 4 MHz 0 1 0 0 X X X X fCLK/24 2 MHz 5 1 MHz 0 1 0 1 X X X X fCLK/2 0 1 1 0 X X X X fCLK/26 500 kHz 0 1 1 1 X X X X fCLK/27 250 kHz 8 125 kHz 1 0 0 0 X X X X fCLK/2 1 0 0 1 X X X X fCLK/29 31.25 kHz 15.63 kHz 1 0 1 0 X X X X fCLK/2 1 0 1 1 X X X X fCLK/211 Other than above 62.5 kHz 10 Setting prohibited Note When changing the clock selected for fCLK (by changing the system clock control register (CKC) value), do so after having stopped (serial channel stop register m (STm) = 0003H) the operation of the serial array unit (SAU). Remarks 1. X: Don't care 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 978 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Baud rate error during transmission The baud rate error of UART (UART0, UART1) communication during transmission can be calculated by the following expression. Make sure that the baud rate at the transmission side is within the permissible baud rate range at the reception side. (Baud rate error) = (Calculated baud rate value) / (Target baud rate) x 100 - 100 [%] Here is an example of setting a UART baud rate at fCLK = 32 MHz. UART Baud Rate (Target Baud Rate) fCLK = 32 MHz Operation Clock (fMCK) Calculated Baud Rate Error from Target Baud Rate 103 300.48 bps +0.16 % 103 600.96 bps +0.16 % fCLK/27 103 1201.92 bps +0.16 % 2400 bps fCLK/26 103 2403.85 bps +0.16 % 4800 bps fCLK/25 103 4807.69 bps +0.16 % 9600 bps fCLK/2 4 103 9615.38 bps +0.16 % fCLK/2 3 103 19230.8 bps +0.16 % fCLK/2 3 63 31250.0 bps 0.0 % 38400 bps fCLK/2 2 103 38461.5 bps +0.16 % 76800 bps fCLK/2 103 76923.1 bps +0.16 % 153600 bps fCLK 103 153846 bps +0.16 % 312500 bps fCLK 50 313725.5 bps +0.39 % fCLK/2 9 600 bps fCLK/2 8 1200 bps 300 bps 19200 bps 31250 bps Remark SDRmn[15:9] m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0), mn = 00, 10 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 979 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Permissible baud rate range for reception The permissible baud rate range for reception during UART (UART0, UART1) communication can be calculated by the following expression. Make sure that the baud rate at the transmission side is within the permissible baud rate range at the reception side. 2 x k x Nfr (Maximum receivable baud rate) = x Brate 2 x k x Nfr - k + 2 2 x k x (Nfr - 1) (Minimum receivable baud rate) = x Brate 2 x k x Nfr - k - 2 Brate: Calculated baud rate value at the reception side (See 15.7.3 (1) Baud rate calculation expression.) k: SDRmn[15:9] + 1 Nfr: 1 data frame length [bits] = (Start bit) + (Data length) + (Parity bit) + (Stop bit) Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 1), mn = 01, 11 Figure 15-135. Permissible Baud Rate Range for Reception (1 Data Frame Length = 11 Bits) Latch timing Data frame length of SAU Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Stop bit Parity bit FL 1 data frame (11 x FL) Permissible minimum data frame length Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Parity bit Bit 7 Stop bit (11 x FL) min. Permissible maximum data frame length Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit (11 x FL) max. As shown in Figure 15-135, the timing of latching receive data is determined by the division ratio set by bits 15 to 9 of serial data register mn (SDRmn) after the start bit is detected. If the last data (stop bit) is received before this latch timing, the data can be correctly received. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 980 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.7.4 Procedure for processing errors that occurred during UART (UART0, UART1) communication The procedure for processing errors that occurred during UART (UART0, UART1) communication is described in Figures 15-136 and 15-137. Figure 15-136. Processing Procedure in Case of Parity Error or Overrun Error Software Manipulation Hardware Status Remark Reads serial data register mn The BFFmn bit of the SSRmn register This is to prevent an overrun error if the (SDRmn). is set to 0 and channel n is enabled to receive data. next reception is completed during error processing. Reads serial status register mn Error type is identified and the read (SSRmn). value is used to clear error flag. Writes 1 to serial flag clear trigger Error flag is cleared. register mn (SIRmn). Error can be cleared only during reading, by writing the value read from the SSRmn register to the SIRmn register without modification. Figure 15-137. Processing Procedure in Case of Framing Error Software Manipulation Hardware Status Remark Reads serial data register mn The BFFmn bit of the SSRmn register This is to prevent an overrun error if the (SDRmn). is set to 0 and channel n is enabled to receive data. next reception is completed during error processing. Reads serial status register mn (SSRmn). Writes serial flag clear trigger register mn (SIRmn). Error type is identified and the read value is used to clear error flag. Error flag is cleared. Error can be cleared only during reading, by writing the value read from the SSRmn register to the SIRmn register without modification. Sets the STmn bit of serial channel stop register m (STm) to 1. The SEmn bit of serial channel enable status register m (SEm) is set to 0 and channel n stops operating. Synchronization with other party of communication Synchronization with the other party of communication is re-established and communication is resumed because it is considered that a framing error has occurred because the start bit has been shifted. Sets the SSmn bit of serial channel start register m (SSm) to 1. Remark The SEmn bit of serial channel enable status register m (SEm) is set to 1 and channel n is enabled to operate. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 981 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.8 LIN Communication Operation 15.8.1 LIN transmission Of UART transmission, UART0 support LIN communication. For LIN transmission, channel 0 of unit 0 is used. UART UART0 UART1 Support of LIN communication Supported Not supported Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 - Pins used TxD0 - Interrupt INTST0 - Transfer end interrupt (in single-transfer mode) or buffer empty interrupt (in continuous transfer mode) can be selected. Error detection flag None Transfer data length 8 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/6 [bps] (SDR00 [15:9] = 2 or more), Min. fCLK/(2 x 211 x 128) [bps] Note Data phase Forward output (default: high level) Reverse output (default: low level) Parity bit No parity bit Stop bit Appending 1 bit Data direction MSB or LSB first Note Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. The transfer rate of LIN communication is usually set to 2.4, 9.6, or 9.2 kbps. Remark fMCK: Operation clock frequency of target channel fCLK: System clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 982 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT LIN stands for Local Interconnect Network and is a low-speed (1 to 20 kbps) serial communication protocol designed to reduce the cost of an automobile network. Communication of LIN is single-master communication and up to 15 slaves can be connected to one master. The slaves are used to control switches, actuators, and sensors, which are connected to the master via LIN. Usually, the master is connected to a network such as CAN (Controller Area Network). A LIN bus is a single-wire bus to which nodes are connected via transceiver conforming to ISO9141. According to the protocol of LIN, the master transmits a frame by attaching baud rate information to it. A slave receives this frame and corrects a baud rate error from the master. If the baud rate error of a slave is within 15%, communication can be established. Figure 15-138 outlines a transmission operation of LIN. Figure 15-138. Transmission Operation of LIN Wakeup signal frame Break field Sync field 13-bit BF transmissionNote 2 55H transmission Identification Data field field Data field Checksum field LIN Bus 8 bitsNote 1 Data Data Data Data transmission transmission transmission transmission TXD0 (output) INTST0Note 3 Notes 1. Data of 80H is transmitted. 2. A break field is defined to have a width of 13 bits and output a low level. Where the baud rate for main transfer is N [bps], therefore, the baud rate of the break field is calculated as follows. (Baud rate of break field) = 9/13 x N By transmitting data of 00H at this baud rate, a break field is generated. 3. INTST0 is output upon completion of transmission. Remark The interval between fields is controlled by software. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 983 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-139. Flowchart for LIN Transmission Starting LIN communication Operation of the hardware (reference) Transmitting wakeup signal frame (80H TxD0) No TSF00 = 0? Yes UART0 stop (1 ST00 bit) Wakeup signal frame generation Transmitting wakeup signal frame Note TxD0 8 bits Waiting for completion of transmission Transmit data Changing baud rate for BF Changing UART0 baud rate (zz SDR [15:9]) UART0 restart (1 SS00 bit) BF transmission 00 TxD0 BF generation No Waiting for completion of BF transmission TSF00 = 0? Yes UART0 stop (1 ST00 bit) Changing UART0 baud rate (xx SDR[15:9]) TxD0 13-bit length Transmit data Return the baud rate UART0 restart (1 SS00 bit) Transmitting sync field 55H TxD0 BFF00 = 0? Yes Transmitting sync field Waiting for buffer empty No TxD0 55H Transmitting ID to checksum Data TxD0 BFF00 = 0? Sync field data generation No Waiting for buffer empty Yes No Waiting for transmission ID to checksum Completing all data transmission? Yes TSF00 = 0? Yes No Waiting for completion of transmission (transmission completed to the LIN bus) End of LIN communication Note When LIN-bus start from sleep status only Remark Default setting of the UART is complete, and the flow from the transmission enable status. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 984 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.8.2 LIN reception Of UART reception, UART0 support LIN communication. For LIN reception, channel 1 of unit 0 is used. UART UART0 UART1 Support of LIN communication Supported Not supported Target channel Channel 1 of SAU0 - Pins used RxD0 - Interrupt INTSR0 - Transfer end interrupt only (Setting the buffer empty interrupt is prohibited.) Error detection flag * Framing error detection flag (FEF01) * Overrun error detection flag (OVF01) Transfer data length 8 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/6 [bps] (SDR01 [15:9] = 2 or more), Min. fCLK/(2 x 211 x 128) [bps] Note Data phase Forward output (default: high level) Reverse output (default: low level) Parity bit No parity bit (The parity bit is not checked.) Stop bit The first bit is checked. Data direction MSB or LSB first Note Use this operation within a range that satisfies the conditions above and the AC characteristics in the electrical specifications. Remark fMCK: Operation clock frequency of target channel fCLK: System clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 985 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-140 outlines a reception operation of LIN. Figure 15-140. Reception Operation of LIN Wakeup signal frame Break field Sync field Identification Data filed Data filed Checksum field field LIN Bus BF reception Message header SF reception ID reception Data reception Message Data reception Data reception <5> <2> RXD0 UART0 STOP Reception stop INTSR0 <1> Edge detection (INTP0) <3> TM07 STOP Pulse width measurement <4> Pulse width measurement INTTM07 Here is the flow of signal processing. <1> The wakeup signal is detected by detecting an interrupt edge (INTP0) on a pin. When the wakeup signal is detected, change TM07 to pulse width measurement upon detection of the wakeup signal to measure the low-level width of the BF signal. Then wait for BF signal reception. <2> TM07 starts measuring the low-level width upon detection of the falling edge of the BF signal, and then captures the data upon detection of the rising edge of the BF signal. The captured data is used to judge whether it is the BF signal. <3> When the BF signal has been received normally, change TM07 to pulse interval measurement and measure the interval between the falling edges of the RxD0 signal in the Sync field four times. <4> When BF reception has been correctly completed, start channel 7 of the timer array unit and measure the bit interval (pulse width) of the sync field (see 6.7.4 Operation as input pulse interval measurement). <5> Calculate a baud rate error from the bit interval of sync field (SF). Stop UART0 once and adjust (re-set) the baud rate. <6> The checksum field should be distinguished by software. In addition, processing to initialize UART0 after the checksum field is received and to wait for reception of BF should also be performed by software. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 986 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-141. Flowchart for LIN Reception Status of LIN bus signal and operation of the hardware Starting LIN communication Generate INTP0? No Yes Starting in low-level width measurement mode for TM07 Generate INTTM07? No Wait for wakeup frame signal Note The low-level width of RxD0 is measured using TM07 and BF is detected. Yes 11 bit lengths or more? No If the detected pulse width is 11 bits or more, it is judged as BF. Wakeup signal frame RxD0 pin Edge detection INTP0 Break field RxD0pin Channel 7 of TAU0 INTTM07 Pulse width measurement Channel 7 Yes Set up TM07 to measure the interval between the falling edges. Changing TM07 to pulse width measurement Generate INTTM07? No Ignore the first INTTM07 because the first capture value is incorrect. Sync field Yes Generate INTTM07? No Yes Capture value cumulative Completed 4 times? Measure the intervals between five falling edges of SF, and accumulate the four captured values. RxD0 pin Channel 7 of TAU0 INTTM07 Pulse interval measurement Cumulative four times No Yes Change TM07 to low-level width measurement to detect a Sync break field. Changing TM07 to low-level width measurement Divide the accumulated value by 8 to obtain the bit width. Use this value to determine the setting values of SPS1, SDR10, and SDR11. Calculate the baud rate UART0 default setting L Set up the initial setting of UART0according to the LIN communication conditions. Starting UART0 reception (1 SS01) Receive the ID, data, and checksum fields (if the ID matches). Data reception Completing all data transmission? No Yes Stop UART0 reception (1 ST01) End of LIN communication Note Required in the sleep status only. Caution For the UART reception, set the RXEmn bit of SCRmn register to 1, and then be sure to set SSmn to 1 after 4 or more fMCK clocks have elapsed. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 987 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-142 shows the configuration of a port that manipulates reception of LIN. The wakeup signal transmitted from the master of LIN is received by detecting an edge of an external interrupt (INTP0). The length of the sync field transmitted from the master can be measured by using the external event capture operation of the timer array unit 0 to calculate a baud-rate error. By controlling switch of port input (ISC0/TIS1), the input source of port input (RxD0) for reception can be input to the external interrupt pin (INTP0) and timer array unit 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 988 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-142. Port Configuration for Manipulating Reception of LIN Selector P16/TI02/TO02/TRDIOC1/ SI00/SDA00/RXD0/TOOLRXD RXD0 input Port mode (PM16) Output latch (P16) Selector P137/INTP0 INTP0 input Port input switch control (ISC0) <ISC0> 0: Selects INTP0 (P137) 1: Selects RxD0 (P16) Selector Selector P120/ANI25/TI07/TO07/TRDIOD0/ SO01/INTP4 Channel 7 input of timer array unit 0 Port mode (PM120) Timer input select control (TIS1) <TIS17, TIS16> 00: Selects TI07 (P120) 01: Selects RTC1Hz (P15) 10: Selects RxD0 (P16) 11: Setting prohibited Output latch (P120) Selector P15/TI05/TO5/TRDIOA1/ (TRDIOA0)/(TRDCLK0)/SI00/ TXD0/TOOLTXD/RTC1HZ Port mode (PM15) Output latch (P15) Remark ISC0: Bit 0 of the input switch control register (ISC) (See Figure 15-18.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 989 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT The peripheral functions used for the LIN communication operation are as follows. <Peripheral functions used> * External interrupt (INTP0); Wakeup signal detection Usage: To detect an edge of the wakeup signal and the start of communication * Channel 7 of timer array unit; Baud rate error detection and break field (BF) detection Usage: To detect the length of the sync field (SF) and divide it by the number of bits in order to detect an error (The interval of the edge input to RxD0 is measured in the capture mode.) To measure a low-level width and determine whether the field is a break field (BF) * Channels 0 and 1 (UART0) of serial array unit 0 (SAU0) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 990 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.9 Operation of Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) Communication This is a clocked communication function to communicate with two or more devices by using two lines: serial clock (SCL) and serial data (SDA). This communication function is designed to execute single communication with devices such as EEPROM, flash memory, and A/D converter, and therefore, can be used only by the master. Make sure by using software, as well as operating the control registers, that the AC specifications of the start and stop conditions are observed. [Data transmission/reception] * Master transmission, master reception (only master function with a single master) * ACK output functionNote and ACK detection function * Data length of 8 bits (When an address is transmitted, the address is specified by the higher 7 bits, and the least significant bit is used for R/W control.) * Manual generation of start condition and stop condition [Interrupt function] * Transfer end interrupt [Error detection flag] * Overrun error * Parity error (ACK error) * [Functions not supported by simplified I2C] * Slave transmission, slave reception * Arbitration loss detection function * Wait detection function Note When receiving the last data, ACK will not be output if 0 is written to the SOEmn (SOEm register) bit and serial communication data output is stopped. See 15.9.3 (2) Processing flow for details. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 991 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT The channel supporting simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) is channels 0 and 1 of SAU0 and channels 0 and 1 of SAU1. * Group A products Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI UART0 (supporting LIN-bus) IIC00 function) Note2 1 CSI01 (supporting SPI IIC01 function) Note2 * Products of Groups C-1 and D-1 Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI UART0 (supporting LIN-bus) IIC00 function) Note2 1 CSI01 (supporting SPI IIC01 function) Note2 1 0 CSI10 (supporting SPI UART1 IIC10 function) Note1, 2 1 - - * Products of Groups B, C-2, D-2, and E Unit Channel Used as CSI Used as UART Used as Simplified I2C 0 0 CSI00 (supporting SPI UART0 (supporting LIN-bus) IIC00 function) Note2 1 CSI01 (supporting SPI IIC01 function) Note2 1 0 CSI10 (supporting SPI UART1 IIC10 function) Note1, 2 1 CSI11 (supporting SPI IIC11 function) Note2 ___________ Notes 1. 48-pin, 32-pin and 30-pin products do not have SSI10 pin. ____________ <R> 2. Set CKPmn bit of SCRmn register to 1, when SSEmn = 1 (Enables SSImn pin input). (m = 0, 1, n = 0, 1) Remark Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C-1: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30 or 32 pins Group C-2: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 48, 64, or 80 pins Group D-1: RL78/F14 products with 30 or 32 pins Group D-2: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 992 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) performs the following four types of communication operations. * Address field transmission (See 15.9.1 Address field transmission.) * Data transmission (See 15.9.2 Data transmission.) * Data reception (See 15.9.3 Data reception.) * Stop condition generation (See 15.9.4 Stop condition generation.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 993 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.9.1 Address field transmission Address field transmission is a transmission operation that first executes in I2C communication to identify the target for transfer (slave). After a start condition is generated, an address (7 bits) and a transfer direction (1 bit) are transmitted in one frame. Simplified I2C IIC00 IIC01 IIC10 IIC11 Target channel Channel 0 of SAU0 Channel 1 of SAU0 Channel 0 of SAU1 Channel 1 of SAU1 Pins used SCL00, SDA00 Note SCL01, SDA01 Note SCL10, SDA10 Note SCL11, SDA11 Note Interrupt INTIIC00 INTIIC01 INTIIC10 INTIIC11 Transfer end interrupt only (Setting the buffer empty interrupt is prohibited.) Error detection flag Parity error detection flag (PEFmn) Transfer data 8 bits (transmitted with specifying the higher 7 bits as address and the least significant bit as R/W control) length Transfer rate Max. fMCK/4 [Hz] (SDRmn[15:9] = 1 or more) fMCK: Operation clock frequency of target channel However, the following condition must be satisfied in each mode of I2C. * Max. 400 kHz (first mode) * Max. 100 kHz (standard mode) Data level Forward output (default: high level) Parity bit No parity bit Stop bit Appending 1 bit (for ACK reception timing) Data direction MSB first Note To perform communication via simplified I2C, set the N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode (POMxx = 1) for the port output mode registers (POMxx) (see 4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function for details). When IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11 communicating with an external device with a different potential, set the N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode (POMxx = 1) also for the clock input/output pins (SCL00, SCL01, SCL10, SCL11) (see 4.4.4 Connecting to external device with different potential (3 V) for details). Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 994 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-143. Example of Contents of Registers for Address Field Transmission of Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 0 8 7 STSmn 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 SISmn0 0 2 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 0 1 0 0 Operation mode of channel n 0: Transfer end interrupt Operation clock (fMCK) of channel n 0: Prescaler output clock CKm0 set by the SPSm register 1: Prescaler output clock CKm1 set by the SPSm register (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 1 0 0 0 9 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn 0 0 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 1 Setting of parity bit 00B: No parity 0 1 1 1 Setting of stop bit 01B: Appending 1 bit (ACK) (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn 13 12 11 10 9 Baud rate setting 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 0/1 0/1 (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRrL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 Transmit data setting (address + R/W) SDRmn SDRrL (d) Serial output register m (SOm) *** Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 0/1 0/1 Start condition is generated by manipulating the SOmn bit. (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) *** Sets only the bits of the target channel. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 0/1 0/1 SOEmn = 0 until the start condition is generated, and SOEmn = 1 after generation. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the IIC mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 995 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-143. Example of Contents of Registers for Address Field Transmission of Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) (2/2) (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Sets only the bits of the target channel to 1. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 996 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Operation procedure Figure 15-144. Initial Setting Procedure for Address Field Transmission Starting initial setting Setting the PER0 register Setting the SPSm register Release the serial array unit from the reset status and start clock supply. Set the operation clock. Setting the SMRmn register Set an operation mode, etc. Setting the SCRmn register Set a communication format. Set a transfer baud rate (setting the Setting the SDRmn register transfer clock by dividing the operation clock (fMCK)). Setting the SOm register Setting port Setting the SOm register Wait Set the initial output level of the serial data (SOmn) and serial clock (CKOmn). Enable data output, clock output, and N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode of the target channel by setting the port register, port mode register, and port output mode register. Clear the SOmn bit to 0 to generate the start condition. Secure a wait time so that the specifications of I2C on the slave side are satisfied. Clear the CKOmn bit to 0 to lower the Setting the SOm register Changing setting of the SOEm register Writing to the SSm register clock output level. Set the SOEmn bit to 1 and enable data output of the target channel. Set the SSmn bit of the target channel to 1 and set the SEmn bit to 1 (to enable operation). Set address and R/W to the SDRmn Starting communication Remark register and start communication. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 997 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (3) Processing flow Figure 15-145. Timing Chart of Address Field Transmission SSmn SEmn SOEmn Address field transmission SDRmn SCLr output CKOmn bit manipulation SDAr output D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 SOmn bit manipulation R/W Address D7 SDAr input Shift register mn D6 D5 D4 D0 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK Shift operation INTIICr TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 998 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-146. Flowchart of Address Field Transmission Starting IIC communication SMRmn, SCRmn: Setting communication SPSm, SDRmn[15:9]: Setting transfer rate Specify the initial settings while the SEmn bit of serial channel enable status register m (SEm) is 0 (operation is stopped). Writing 0 to the SOmn bit Writing 0 to the CKOmn bit Writing 1 to the SOEmn bit Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Writing address and R/W data to the SDRmn register Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Parity error (ACK error) flag PEFmn = 1 ? Yes No ACK reception error Address field transmission completed To data transmission flow and data reception flow Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 999 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.9.2 Data transmission Data transmission is an operation to transmit data to the target for transfer (slave) after transmission of an address field. After all data are transmitted to the slave, a stop condition is generated and the bus is released. Simplified I2C Target channel IIC00 IIC01 Channel 0 of SAU0 Pins used SCL00, SDA00 Interrupt INTIIC00 Note IIC10 Channel 1 of SAU0 SCL01, SDA01 Note INTIIC01 IIC11 Channel 0 of SAU1 SCL10, SDA10 Note INTIIC10 Channel 1 of SAU1 SCL11, SDA11 Note INTIIC11 Transfer end interrupt only (Setting the buffer empty interrupt is prohibited.) Error detection flag Parity error detection flag (PEFmn) Transfer data length 8 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/4 [Hz] (SDRmn[15:9] = 1 or more) fMCK: Operation clock frequency of target channel However, the following condition must be satisfied in each mode of I2C. * Max. 400 kHz (first mode) * Max. 100 kHz (standard mode) Data level Forward output (default: high level) Parity bit No parity bit Stop bit Appending 1 bit (for ACK reception timing) Data direction MSB first Note To perform communication via simplified I2C, set the N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode (POMxx = 1) for the port output mode registers (POMxx) (see 4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function for details). When IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11 communicating with an external device with a different potential, set the N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode (POMxx = 1) also for the clock input/output pins (SCL00, SCL01, SCL10, SCL11) (see 4.4.4 Connecting to external device with different potential (3 V) for details). Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1000 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-147. Example of Contents of Registers for Data Transmission of Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) ... Do not manipulate this register during data transmission/reception. 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 0 8 7 STSmn 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 SISmn0 0 0 2 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 1 0 0 (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) ... Do not manipulate the bits of this register, except the TXEmn and RXEmn bits, during data transmission/reception. 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 1 0 0 0 9 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn 13 12 11 10 9 Baud rate setting Note 1 (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRrL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 Transmit data setting SDRmn SDRrL (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Do not manipulate this register during data transmission/reception. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 0/1Note 0/1Note 2 2 0/1Note 0/1Note 2 2 (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ... Do not manipulate this register during data transmission/reception. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 0/1 0/1 Notes 1. Setting these bits is unnecessary because they are set for transmission of an address field. 2. The value varies depending on the communication data during communication operation. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the IIC mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1001 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-147. Example of Contents of Registers for Data Transmission of Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) (2/2) (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Do not manipulate this register during data transmission/reception. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1002 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Processing flow Figure 15-148. Timing Chart of Data Transmission SSmn SEmn SOEmn "L" "H" "H" Transmit data 1 SDRmn SCLr output SDAr output D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 SDAr input D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Shift register mn ACK Shift operation INTIICr TSFmn Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1003 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-149. Flowchart of Data Transmission Address field transmission completed Starting data transmission Writing data to the SDRmn register Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Parity error (ACK error) flag PEFmn = 1 ? Yes No ACK reception error No Data transfer completed? Yes Data transmission completed Stop condition generation Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1004 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.9.3 Data reception Data reception is an operation to receive data to the target for transfer (slave) after transmission of an address field. After all data are received to the slave, a stop condition is generated and the bus is released. Simplified I2C Target channel IIC00 IIC01 Channel 0 of SAU0 Pins used SCL00, SDA00 Interrupt INTIIC00 Note IIC10 Channel 1 of SAU0 SCL01, SDA01 Note INTIIC01 IIC11 Channel 0 of SAU1 SCL10, SDA10 Note INTIIC10 Channel 1 of SAU1 SCL11, SDA11 Note INTIIC11 Transfer end interrupt only (Setting the buffer empty interrupt is prohibited.) Error detection flag Overrun error detection flag (OVFmn) only Transfer data length 8 bits Transfer rate Max. fMCK/4 [Hz] (SDRmn[15:9] = 1 or more) fMCK: Operation clock frequency of target channel However, the following condition must be satisfied in each mode of I2C. * Max. 400 kHz (first mode) * Max. 100 kHz (standard mode) Data level Forward output (default: high level) Parity bit No parity bit Stop bit Appending 1 bit (ACK transmission) Data direction MSB first Note To perform communication via simplified I2C, set the N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode (POMxx = 1) for the port output mode registers (POMxx) (see 4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function for details). When IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11 communicating with an external device with a different potential, set the N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode (POMxx = 1) also for the clock input/output pins (SCL00, SCL01, SCL10, SCL11) (see 4.4.4 Connecting to external device with different potential (3 V) for details). Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1005 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (1) Register setting Figure 15-150. Example of Contents of Registers for Data Reception of Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) (1/2) (a) Serial mode register mn (SMRmn) ... Do not manipulate this register during data transmission/reception. 15 SMRmn 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 0 0 0 0 CKSmn CCSmn 0/1 0 8 7 STSmn 0 6 5 4 3 1 0 0 SISmn0 0 0 2 1 0 MDmn2 MDmn1 MDmn0 1 0 0 (b) Serial communication operation setting register mn (SCRmn) ... Do not manipulate the bits of this register, except the TXEmn and RXEmn bits, during data transmission/reception. 15 SCRmn 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 TXEmn RXEmn DAPmn CKPmn 0 1 0 0 9 8 7 6 PTCmn1 PTCmn0 DIRmn 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 SLCmn1 SLCmn0 DLSmn3 DLSmn2 DLSmn1 DLSmn0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 SOm1 SOm0 (c) Serial data register mn (SDRmn) (1) When operation is stopped (SEmn = 0) 15 14 SDRmn 13 12 11 10 9 Baud rate setting Note 1 (2) When operation is in progress (SEmn = 1) (Lower 8 bits: SDRrL) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 Dummy transmit data setting (FFH) SDRmn (d) Serial output register m (SOm) ... Do not manipulate this register during data transmission/reception. 15 14 13 12 11 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOm 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 CKOm1 CKOm0 0/1 0/1 Note 2 Note 2 0/1 0/1 Note 2 Note 2 (e) Serial output enable register m (SOEm) ... Do not manipulate this register during data transmission/reception. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SOEm 1 0 SOEm1 SOEm0 0/1 0/1 Notes 1. Setting these bits is unnecessary because they are set for transmission of an address field. 2. The value varies depending on the communication data during communication operation. Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting is fixed in the IIC mode, : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) x: Bit that cannot be used in this mode (set to the initial value when not used in any mode) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1006 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-150. Example of Contents of Registers for Data Reception of Simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) (2/2) (f) Serial channel start register m (SSm) ... Do not manipulate this register during data transmission/reception. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SSm 1 0 SSm1 SSm0 0/1 0/1 Remarks 1. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 2. : Setting disabled (set to the initial value) 0/1: Set to 0 or 1 depending on the usage of the user R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1007 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT (2) Processing flow Figure 15-151. Timing Chart of Data Reception (a) When starting data reception SSmn STmn SEmn SOEmn "H" TXEmn, TXEmn = 1 / RXEmn = 0 RXEmn TXEmn = 0 / RXEmn = 1 SDRmn Dummy data (FFH) Receive data SCLr output SDAr output ACK D7 SDAr input D6 D5 D4 Shift register mn D3 D2 D1 D0 Shift operation INTIICr TSFmn (b) When receiving last data STmn SEmn SOEmn TXEmn, RXEmn Output is enabled by serial communication operation Output is stopped by serial communication operation TXEmn = 0 / RXEmn = 1 SDRmn Dummy data (FFH) Dummy data (FFH) Receive data Receive data SCLr output SDAr output SDAr input Shift register mn ACK D2 D1 D0 Shift operation NACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Shift operation INTIICr TSFmn Reception of last byte SOmn bit SOmn bit manipulation manipulation IIC operation stop CKOmn bit manipulation Stop condition Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1008 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-152. Flowchart of Data Reception Address field transmission completed Writing 1 to the STmn bit Writing 0 to the TXEmn bit, and 1 to the RXEmn bit Writing 1 to the SSmn bit Starting data reception Last byte received? No Yes Writing 0 to the SOEmn bit (Output stop by serial communication operation) Writing dummy data (FFH) to the SDRmn register Transfer end interrupt generated? No Yes Reading the SDRmn register No Data transfer completed? Yes Data reception completed Stop condition generation Caution ACK is not output when the last data is received (NACK). Communication is then completed by setting 1 to the STmn bit of serial channel stop register m (STm) to stop operation and generating a stop condition. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1009 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.9.4 Stop condition generation After all data are transmitted to or received from the target slave, a stop condition is generated and the bus is released. (1) Processing flow Figure 15-153. Timing Chart of Stop Condition Generation STmn SEmn SOEmn Note SCLr output SDAr output Operation stop SOmn CKOmn SOmn bit manipulation bit manipulation bit manipulation Stop condition Note During a receive operation, the SOEmn bit of serial output enable register m (SOEm) is cleared to 0 before receiving the last data. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1010 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Figure 15-154. Flowchart of Stop Condition Generation Completion of data transmission/data reception Starting generation of stop condition. Operation is stopped Writing 0 to the SOEmn bit Writing 0 to the SOmn bit Writing 1 to the CKOmn bit Secure a wait time so that the specifications of Wait I2C on the slave side are satisfied. Writing 1 to the SOmn bit End of IIC communication Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1011 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.9.5 Calculating transfer rate The transfer rate for simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11, IIC20, IIC21, IIC30, IIC31) communication can be calculated by the following expressions. (Transfer rate) = {Operation clock (fMCK) frequency of target channel} / (SDRmn[15:9] + 1) / 2 Caution Setting SDRmn[15:9] = 0000000B is prohibited. Setting SDRmn[15:9] = 0000001B or more. Remarks 1. The value of SDRmn[15:9] is the value of bits 15 to 9 of the SDRmn register (0000001B to 1111111B) and therefore is 1 to 127. 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 The operation clock (fMCK) is determined by serial clock select register m (SPSm) and bit 15 (CKSmn) of serial mode register mn (SMRmn). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1012 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Table 15-5. Selection of Operation Clock For Simplified I2C Operation Clock (fMCK) Note SMRmn Register SPSm Register CKSmn PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS PRS m13 m12 m11 m10 m03 m02 m01 m00 0 fCLK = 32 MHz X X X X 0 0 0 0 fCLK X X X X 0 0 0 1 fCLK/2 32 MHz 16 MHz 2 8 MHz X X X X 0 0 1 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 0 0 1 1 fCLK/23 4 MHz 4 2 MHz 1 MHz X X X X 0 1 0 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 0 1 0 1 fCLK/25 6 500 kHz X X X X 0 1 1 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 0 1 1 1 fCLK/27 250 kHz 8 125 kHz X X X X 1 0 0 0 fCLK/2 X X X X 1 0 0 1 fCLK/29 62.5 kHz X X X X 1 0 1 0 fCLK/210 31.25 kHz 11 X X X X 1 0 1 1 fCLK/2 0 0 0 0 X X X X fCLK 1 15.63 kHz 32 MHz 0 0 0 1 X X X X fCLK/2 16 MHz 0 0 1 0 X X X X fCLK/22 8 MHz 0 0 1 1 X X X X fCLK/23 4 MHz 0 1 0 0 X X X X fCLK/24 2 MHz 5 1 MHz 0 1 0 1 X X X X fCLK/2 0 1 1 0 X X X X fCLK/26 500 kHz 0 1 1 1 X X X X fCLK/27 250 kHz 8 125 kHz 1 0 0 0 X X X X fCLK/2 1 0 0 1 X X X X fCLK/29 31.25 kHz 15.63 kHz 1 0 1 0 X X X X fCLK/2 1 0 1 1 X X X X fCLK/211 Other than above 62.5 kHz 10 Setting prohibited Note When changing the clock selected for fCLK (by changing the system clock control register (CKC) value), do so after having stopped (serial channel stop register m (STm) = 0003H) the operation of the serial array unit (SAU). Remarks 1. X: Don't care 2. m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1013 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT Here is an example of setting an I2C transfer rate where fMCK = fCLK = 32 MHz. I2C Transfer Mode (Desired Transfer Rate) fCLK = 32 MHz Operation Clock (fMCK) SDRmn[15:9] Calculated Transfer Rate Error from Desired Transfer Rate 100 kHz fCLK/2 79 100 kHz 0.0% 400 kHz fCLK 39 400 kHz 0.0% Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1014 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT 15.9.6 Procedure for processing errors that occurred during simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) communication The procedure for processing errors that occurred during simplified I2C (IIC00, IIC01, IIC10, IIC11) communication is described in Figure 15-155 and 15-156. Figure 15-155. Processing Procedure in Case of Overrun Error Software Manipulation Hardware Status Remark Reads serial data register mn The BFFmn bit of the SSRmn register This is to prevent an overrun error if the (SDRmn). is set to 0 and channel n is enabled to receive data. next reception is completed during error processing. Reads serial status register mn Error type is identified and the read (SSRmn). value is used to clear error flag. Writes 1 to serial flag clear trigger Error flag is cleared. register mn (SIRmn). Error can be cleared only during reading, by writing the value read from the SSRmn register to the SIRmn register without modification. Figure 15-156. Processing Procedure in Case of Parity Error (ACK error) in Simplified I2C Mode Software Manipulation Hardware Status Remark Reads serial data register mn The BFFmn bit of the SSRmn register is This is to prevent an overrun error if the (SDRmn). set to 0 and channel n is enabled to receive data. next reception is completed during error processing. Reads serial status register mn (SSRmn). Error type is identified and the read value is used to clear error flag. Writes serial flag clear trigger register mn Error flag is cleared. (SIRmn). Error can be cleared only during reading, by writing the value read from the SSRmn register to the SIRmn register without modification. Sets the STmn bit of serial channel stop The SEmn bit of serial channel enable Slave is not ready for reception register m (STm) to 1. status register m (SEm) is set to 0 and channel n stops operation. because ACK is not returned. Therefore, a stop condition is created, the bus is released, and communication is started again from the start condition. Or, a restart condition is generated and Creates stop condition. transmission can be redone from address transmission. Creates start condition. Sets the SSmn bit of serial channel start The SEmn bit of serial channel enable register m (SSm) to 1. status register m (SEm) is set to 1 and channel n is enabled to operate. Remark m: Unit number (m = 0, 1), n: Channel number (n = 0, 1), r: IIC number (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) mn = 00, 01, 10, 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1015 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA The number of channels of the serial Interface IICA differs, depending on the product. Groups A, C-1, and D-1 Groups B, C-2, D-2, and E - 1 Channel Remark Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C-1: RL78/F13 (CAN incorporated) products with 30 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C-2: RL78/F13 (CAN incorporated) products with 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group D-1: 30-pin products of the RL78/F14 Group D-2: RL78/F14 products with 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory Cautions 1. Most of the following descriptions in this chapter use the Group E products as an example. 2. Products of Groups A and C-1 do not have this function. 16.1 Functions of Serial Interface IICA Serial interface IICA has the following three modes. (1) Operation stop mode This mode is used when serial transfers are not performed. It can therefore be used to reduce power consumption. (2) I2C bus mode (multimaster supported) This mode is used for 8-bit data transfers with several devices via two lines: a serial clock (SCLA0) line and a serial data bus (SDAA0) line. This mode complies with the I2C bus format and the master device can generated "start condition", "address", "transfer direction specification", "data", and "stop condition" data to the slave device, via the serial data bus. The slave device automatically detects these received status and data by hardware. This function can simplify the part of application program that controls the I2C bus. Since the SCLA0 and SDAA0 pins are used for open drain outputs, serial interface IICA requires pull-up resistors for the serial clock line and the serial data bus line. (3) Wakeup mode The STOP mode can be released by generating an interrupt request signal (INTIICA0) when an extension code from the master device or a local address has been received while in STOP mode. This can be set by using the WUP0 bit of IICA control register 01 (IICCTL01). Figure 16-1 shows a block diagram of serial interface IICA. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1016 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-1. Block Diagram of Serial Interface IICA Internal bus IICA status register 0 (IICS0) WUP0 MSTS0 ALD0 EXC0 COI0 TRC0 ACKD0 STD0 SPD0 IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) Controller for STOP mode IICE0 LREL0 WREL0 SPIE0 WTIM0 ACKE0 STT0 SPT0 Filter Slave address register 0 (SVA0) SDAA0/ P63 DFC0 IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) TRC0 PM63 POM63 Output latch (P63) Set Match signal Noise eliminator Start condition generator Clear D Q Stop condition generator SO latch IICWL0 Data hold time correction circuit ACK generator Output control Wakeup controller ACK detector Start condition detector Filter Stop condition detector SCLA0/ P62 Noise eliminator Interrupt request signal generator Serial clock counter INTIICA0 IICS0.MSTS0, EXC0, COI0 DFC0 fCLK PM62 POM62 Output latch (P62) Alternate function fCLK/2 Selector Serial clock controller Serial clock wait controller IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) IICCTL00.STT0, SPT0 Counter Bus status detector IICS0.MSTS0, EXC0, COI0 Match signal IICCTL01.PRS0 IICA low-level width setting register 0 (IICWL0) IICA high-level width setting register 0 (IICWH0) WUP0 CLD0 DAD0 SMC0 DFC0 PRS0 IICA control register 01 (IICCTL01) STCF0 IICBSY0 STCEN0 IICRSV0 IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) Internal bus R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1017 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-2 shows a serial bus configuration example. Figure 16-2. Serial Bus Configuration Example Using I2C Bus + VDD + VDD Master CPU1 SDAA0 Slave CPU1 Address 0 SCLA0 Serial data bus Serial clock SDAA0 Slave CPU2 SCLA0 SDAA0 SCLA0 SDAA0 SCLA0 SDAA0 SCLA0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Master CPU2 Address 1 Slave CPU3 Address 2 Slave IC Address 3 Slave IC Address N 1018 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.2 Configuration of Serial Interface IICA Serial interface IICA includes the following hardware. Table 16-1. Configuration of Serial Interface IICA Item Configuration Registers IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) Slave address register 0 (SVA0) Control registers Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) IICA status register 0 (IICS0) IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) IICA control register 01 (IICCTL01) IICA low-level width setting register 0 (IICWL0) IICA high-level width setting register 0 (IICWH0) Port mode register 6 (PM6) Port register 6 (P6) Port output mode register 6 (POM6) (1) IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) The IICA0 register is used to convert 8-bit serial data to 8-bit parallel data and vice versa in synchronization with the serial clock. The IICA0 register can be used for both transmission and reception. The actual transmit and receive operations can be controlled by writing and reading operations to the IICA0 register. Cancel the wait state and start data transfer by writing data to the IICA0 register during the wait period. The IICA0 register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears IICA0 to 00H. Figure 16-3. Format of IICA Shift Register 0 (IICA0) Address: FFF50H Symbol After reset: 00H 7 6 R/W 5 4 3 2 1 0 IICA0 Cautions 1. Do not write data to the IICA0 register during data transfer. 2. Write or read the IICA0 register only during the wait period. Accessing the IICA0 register in a communication state other than during the wait period is prohibited. When the device serves as the master, however, the IICA0 register can be written only once after the communication trigger bit (STT0) is set to 1. 3. When communication is reserved, write data to the IICA0 register after the interrupt triggered by a stop condition is detected. (2) Slave address register 0 (SVA0) This register stores seven bits of local addresses {A6, A5, A4, A3, A2, A1, A0} when in slave mode. The SVA0 register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. However, rewriting to this register is prohibited while STD0 = 1 (while the start condition is detected). Reset signal generation clears the SVA0 register to 00H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1019 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-4. Format of Slave Address Register 0 (SVA0) Address: F0234H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SVA0 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 0 0 Note Note Bit 0 is fixed to 0. (3) SO latch The SO latch is used to retain the SDAA0 pin's output level. (4) Wakeup controller This circuit generates an interrupt request (INTIICA0) when the address received by this register matches the address value set to the slave address register 0 (SVA0) or when an extension code is received. (5) Serial clock counter This counter counts the serial clocks that are output or input during transmit/receive operations and is used to verify that 8-bit data was transmitted or received. (6) Interrupt request signal generator This circuit controls the generation of interrupt request signals (INTIICA0). An I2C interrupt request is generated by the following two triggers. * Falling edge of eighth or ninth clock of the serial clock (set by the WTIM0 bit) * Interrupt request generated when a stop condition is detected (set by the SPIE0 bit) Remark WTIM0 bit: Bit 3 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) SPIE0 bit: Bit 4 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) (7) Serial clock controller In master mode, this circuit generates the clock output via the SCLA0 pin from a sampling clock. (8) Serial clock wait controller This circuit controls the wait timing. (9) ACK generator, stop condition detector, start condition detector, and ACK detector These circuits generate and detect each status. (10) Data hold time correction circuit This circuit generates the hold time for data corresponding to the falling edge of the serial clock. (11) Start condition generator This circuit generates a start condition when the STT0 bit is set to 1. However, in the communication reservation disabled status (IICRSV bit = 1), when the bus is not released (IICBSY bit = 1), start condition requests are ignored and the STCF bit is set to 1. (12) Stop condition generator This circuit generates a stop condition when the SPT0 bit is set to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1020 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (13) Bus status detector This circuit detects whether or not the bus is released by detecting start conditions and stop conditions. However, as the bus status cannot be detected immediately following operation, the initial status is set by the STCEN0 bit. Remark STT0 bit: Bit 1 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) SPT0 bit: Bit 0 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) IICRSV0 bit: Bit 0 of IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) IICBSY0 bit: Bit 6 of IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) STCF0 bit: Bit 7 of IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) STCEN0 bit: Bit 1 of IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1021 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface IICA Serial interface IICA is controlled by the following eight registers. * Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) * IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) * IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) * IICA status register 0 (IICS0) * IICA control register 01 (IICCTL01) * IICA low-level width setting register 0 (IICWL0) * IICA high-level width setting register 0 (IICWH0) * Port mode register 6 (PM6) * Port register 6 (P6) * Port output mode register 6 (POM6) 16.3.1 Peripheral enable register 0 (PER0) This register is used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to a hardware macro that is not used is stopped in order to reduce the power consumption and noise. When serial interface IICA0 is used, be sure to set bit 4 (IICA0EN) of this register to 1. The PER0 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 16-5. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 0 (PER0) Address: F00F0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> 6 <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PER0 RTCEN 0 ADCEN IICA0EN SAU1EN SAU0EN TAU1EN TAU0EN Notes1, 2 Note1 IICA0EN 0 Note1 Control of serial interface IICA0 input clock supply Stops input clock supply. SFR used by serial interface IICA0 cannot be written. Serial interface IICA0 is in the reset status. 1 Enables input clock supply. SFR used by serial interface IICA0 can be read/written. Notes 1. Not provided in the products of the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory. 2. Not provided in the 30-pin products of the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and the 30-pin products of the RL78/F14. Cautions 1. When setting serial interface IICA0, be sure to set the IICA0EN bit to 1 first. If IICA0EN = 0, writing to a control register of serial interface IICA0 is ignored, and, even if the register is read, only the default value is read (except for port mode register 6 (PM6) and port register 6 (P6)). 2. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. Bits 1, 3, 4, and 6 in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory. Bits 4 and 6 in the 30-pin products of the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and 30pin products of the RL78/F14 Bit 6 in the products other than above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1022 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.3.2 IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) This register is used to enable/stop I2C operations, set wait timing, and set other I2C operations. The IICCTL00 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. However, set the SPIE0, WTIM0, and ACKE0 bits while IICE0 = 0 or during the wait period. These bits can be set at the same time when the IICE0 bit is set from "0" to "1". Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1023 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-6. Format of IICA Control Register 00 (IICCTL00) (1/4) Address: F0230H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> IICCTL00 IICE0 LREL0 WREL0 SPIE0 WTIM0 ACKE0 STT0 SPT0 I2C operation enable IICE0 0 Stop operation. Reset the IICA status register 0 (IICS0) Note 1. Stop internal operation. 1 Enable operation. Be sure to set this bit (1) while the SCLA0 and SDAA0 lines are at high level. Condition for clearing (IICE0 = 0) Condition for setting (IICE0 = 1) Cleared by instruction Reset Set by instruction Exit from communications LREL0 Notes 2, 3 0 1 Normal operation This exits from the current communications and sets standby mode. This setting is automatically cleared to 0 after being executed. Its uses include cases in which a locally irrelevant extension code has been received. The SCLA0 and SDAA0 lines are set to high impedance. The following flags of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) and the IICA status register 0 (IICS0) are cleared to 0. * STT0 * SPT0 * MSTS0 * EXC0 * COI0 * TRC0 * ACKD0 * STD0 The standby mode following exit from communications remains in effect until the following communications entry conditions are met. After a stop condition is detected, restart is in master mode. An address match or extension code reception occurs after the start condition. Condition for clearing (LREL0 = 0) Condition for setting (LREL0 = 1) Automatically cleared after execution Reset Set by instruction Wait cancellation WREL0 Notes 2, 3 0 Do not cancel wait 1 Cancel wait. This setting is automatically cleared after wait is canceled. When the WREL0 bit is set (wait canceled) during the wait period at the ninth clock pulse in the transmission status (TRC0 = 1), the SDAA0 line goes into the high impedance state (TRC0 = 0). Condition for clearing (WREL0 = 0) Condition for setting (WREL0 = 1) Automatically cleared after execution Reset Set by instruction Notes 1. The IICA status register 0 (IICS0), the STCF0 and IICBSY0 bits of the IICA flag register 0 (IICF0), and the CLD0 and DAD0 bits of IICA control register 01 (IICCTL01) are reset. 2. The signal of this bit is invalid while IICE0 is 0. 3. When the LREL0 and WREL0 bits are read, 0 is always read. Caution If the operation of I2C is enabled (IICE0 = 1) when the SCLA0 line is high level, the SDAA0 line is low level, and the digital filter is turned on (DFC0 bit of IICCTL01 register = 1), a start condition will be inadvertently detected immediately. In this case, set (1) the LREL0 bit by using a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction immediately after enabling operation of I2C (IICE0 = 1). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1024 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-6. Format of IICA Control Register 00 (IICCTL00) (2/4) SPIE0 Enable/disable generation of interrupt request when stop condition is detected Note 1 0 Disable 1 Enable If the WUP0 bit of IICA control register 01 (IICCTL01) is 1, no stop condition interrupt will be generated even if SPIE0 = 1. Condition for clearing (SPIE0 = 0) Condition for setting (SPIE0 = 1) Cleared by instruction Set by instruction Reset Control of wait and interrupt request generation WTIM0 Note 1 0 Interrupt request is generated at the eighth clock's falling edge. Master mode: After output of eight clocks, clock output is set to low level and wait is set. Slave mode: After input of eight clocks, the clock is set to low level and wait is set for master device. 1 Interrupt request is generated at the ninth clock's falling edge. Master mode: After output of nine clocks, clock output is set to low level and wait is set. Slave mode: After input of nine clocks, the clock is set to low level and wait is set for master device. An interrupt is generated at the falling edge of the ninth clock during address transfer independently of the setting of this bit. The setting of this bit is valid when the address transfer is completed. When in master mode, a wait is inserted at the falling edge of the ninth clock during address transfers. For a slave device that has received a local address, a wait is inserted at the falling edge of the ninth clock after an acknowledge (ACK) is issued. However, when the slave device has received an extension code, a wait is inserted at the falling edge of the eighth clock. Condition for clearing (WTIM0 = 0) Condition for setting (WTIM0 = 1) Cleared by instruction Set by instruction Reset Acknowledgment control ACKE0 Notes 1, 2 0 Disable acknowledgment. 1 Enable acknowledgment. During the ninth clock period, the SDAA0 line is set to low level. Condition for clearing (ACKE0 = 0) Condition for setting (ACKE0 = 1) Cleared by instruction Set by instruction Reset Notes 1. The signal of this bit is invalid while IICE0 is 0. Set this bit during that period. 2. The set value is invalid during address transfer and if the code is not an extension code. When the device serves as a slave and the addresses match, an acknowledgment is generated regardless of the set value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1025 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-6. Format of IICA Control Register 00 (IICCTL00) (3/4) Start condition trigger STT0 Note 0 Do not generate a start condition. 1 When bus is released (in standby state, when IICBSY0 = 0): If this bit is set (1), a start condition is generated (startup as the master). When a third party is communicating: When communication reservation function is enabled (IICRSV0 = 0) Functions as the start condition reservation flag. When set to 1, automatically generates a start condition after the bus is released. When communication reservation function is disabled (IICRSV0 = 1) Even if this bit is set (1), the STT0 bit is cleared and the STT0 clear flag (STCF0) is set (1). No start condition is generated. In the wait state (when master device): Generates a restart condition after releasing the wait. Cautions concerning set timing For master reception: Cannot be set to 1 during transfer. Can be set to 1 only in the waiting period when the ACKE0 bit has been cleared to 0 and slave has been notified of final reception. For master transmission: A start condition cannot be generated normally during the acknowledge period. Set to 1 during the wait period that follows output of the ninth clock. Cannot be set to 1 at the same time as stop condition trigger (SPT0). Once STT0 is set (1), setting it again (1) before the clear condition is met is not allowed. Condition for clearing (STT0 = 0) Condition for setting (STT0 = 1) Cleared by setting the STT0 bit to 1 while Set by instruction communication reservation is prohibited. Cleared by loss in arbitration Cleared after start condition is generated by master device Cleared by LREL0 = 1 (exit from communications) When IICE0 = 0 (operation stop) Reset Note The signal of this bit is invalid while IICE0 is 0. Remarks 1. Bit 1 (STT0) becomes 0 when it is read after data setting. 2. IICRSV0: STCF0: R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Bit 0 of IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) Bit 7 of IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) 1026 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-6. Format of IICA Control Register 00 (IICCTL00) (4/4) SPT0 Stop condition trigger 0 Stop condition is not generated. 1 Stop condition is generated (termination of master device's transfer). Cautions concerning set timing For master reception: Cannot be set to 1 during transfer. Can be set to 1 only in the waiting period when the ACKE0 bit has been cleared to 0 and slave has been notified of final reception. For master transmission: A stop condition cannot be generated normally during the acknowledge period. Therefore, set it during the wait period that follows output of the ninth clock. Cannot be set to 1 at the same time as start condition trigger (STT0). The SPT0 bit can be set to 1 only when in master mode. When the WTIM0 bit has been cleared to 0, if the SPT0 bit is set to 1 during the wait period that follows output of eight clocks, note that a stop condition will be generated during the high-level period of the ninth clock. The WTIM0 bit should be changed from 0 to 1 during the wait period following the output of eight clocks, and the SPT0 bit should be set to 1 during the wait period that follows the output of the ninth clock. Once STT0 is set (1), setting it again (1) before the clear condition is met is not allowed. Condition for clearing (SPT0 = 0) Condition for setting (SPT0 = 1) Cleared by loss in arbitration Set by instruction Automatically cleared after stop condition is detected Cleared by LREL0 = 1 (exit from communications) When IICE0 = 0 (operation stop) Reset Caution When bit 3 (TRC0) of the IICA status register 0 (IICS0) is set to 1 (transmission status), bit 5 (WREL0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) is set to 1 during the ninth clock and wait is canceled, after which the TRC0 bit is cleared (reception status) and the SDAA0 line is set to high impedance. Release the wait performed while the TRC0 bit is 1 (transmission status) by writing to the IICA shift register 0. Remark Bit 0 (SPT0) becomes 0 when it is read after data setting. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1027 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.3.3 IICA status register 0 (IICS0) This register indicates the status of I2C. The IICS0 register is read by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction only when STT0 = 1 and during the wait period. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Caution Reading the IICS0 register while the address match wakeup function is enabled (WUP0 = 1) in STOP mode is prohibited. When the WUP0 bit is changed from 1 to 0 (wakeup operation is stopped), regardless of the INTIICA0 interrupt request, the change in status is not reflected until the next start condition or stop condition is detected. To use the wakeup function, therefore, enable (SPIE0 = 1) the interrupt generated by detecting a stop condition and read the IICS0 register after the interrupt has been detected. Remark STT0: bit 1 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) WUP0: bit 7 of IICA control register 01 (IICCTL01) Figure 16-7. Format of IICA Status Register 0 (IICS0) (1/3) Address: FFF51H After reset: 00H R Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> IICS0 MSTS0 ALD0 EXC0 COI0 TRC0 ACKD0 STD0 SPD0 MSTS0 Master status check flag 0 Slave device status or communication standby status 1 Master device communication status Condition for clearing (MSTS0 = 0) Condition for setting (MSTS0 = 1) When a stop condition is detected When ALD0 = 1 (arbitration loss) Cleared by LREL0 = 1 (exit from communications) When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) Reset When a start condition is generated ALD0 Detection of arbitration loss 0 This status means either that there was no arbitration or that the arbitration result was a "win". 1 This status indicates the arbitration result was a "loss". The MSTS0 bit is cleared. Condition for clearing (ALD0 = 0) Condition for setting (ALD0 = 1) Automatically cleared after the IICS0 register is read When the arbitration result is a "loss". Note When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) Reset Note This register is also cleared when a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction is executed for bits other than the IICS0 register. Therefore, when using the ALD0 bit, read the data of this bit before the data of the other bits. Remark LREL0: Bit 6 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) IICE0: Bit 7 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1028 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-7. Format of IICA Status Register 0 (IICS0) (2/3) EXC0 Detection of extension code reception 0 Extension code was not received. 1 Extension code was received. Condition for clearing (EXC0 = 0) Condition for setting (EXC0 = 1) When a start condition is detected When a stop condition is detected Cleared by LREL0 = 1 (exit from communications) When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) Reset When the higher four bits of the received address COI0 data is either 0000 or 1111 (set at the rising edge of the eighth clock). Detection of matching addresses 0 Addresses do not match. 1 Addresses match. Condition for clearing (COI0 = 0) Condition for setting (COI0 = 1) When a start condition is detected When a stop condition is detected Cleared by LREL0 = 1 (exit from communications) When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) Reset When the received address matches the local TRC0 0 1 address (slave address register 0 (SVA0)) (set at the rising edge of the eighth clock). Detection of transmit/receive status Receive status (other than transmit status). The SDAA0 line is set for high impedance. Transmit status. The value in the SO0 latch is enabled for output to the SDAA0 line (valid starting at the falling edge of the first byte's ninth clock). Condition for clearing (TRC0 = 0) Condition for setting (TRC0 = 1) <Both master and slave> <Master> When a stop condition is detected Cleared by LREL0 = 1 (exit from communications) When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) Cleared by WREL0 = 1 Note (wait cancel) When the ALD0 bit changes from 0 to 1 (arbitration loss) Reset When not used for communication (MSTS0, EXC0, COI0 = 0) <Master> When 1 is output to the LSB (transfer direction specification bit) of the first byte <Slave> When a start condition is detected When 0 is input to the LSB (transfer direction specification bit) of the first byte. When a start condition is generated When 0 (master transmission) is output to the LSB (transfer direction specification bit) of the first byte (during address transfer). <Slave> When 1 (slave transmission) is input to the LSB (transfer direction specification bit) of the first byte (during address transfer) from the master. Note When bit 3 (TRC0) of the IICA status register 0 (IICS0) is set to 1 (transmission status), bit 5 (WREL0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) is set to 1 during the ninth clock and wait is canceled, after which the TRC0 bit is cleared (reception status) and the SDAA0 line is set to high impedance. Release the wait performed while the TRC0 bit is 1 (transmission status) by writing to the IICA shift register 0. Remark LREL0: IICE0: R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Bit 6 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) Bit 7 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) 1029 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-7. Format of IICA Status Register 0 (IICS0) (3/3) ACKD0 Detection of acknowledge (ACK) 0 Acknowledge was not detected. 1 Acknowledge was detected. Condition for clearing (ACKD0 = 0) Condition for setting (ACKD0 = 1) When a stop condition is detected After the SDAA0 line is set to low level at the rising At the rising edge of the next byte's first clock edge of SCLA0 line's ninth clock Cleared by LREL0 = 1 (exit from communications) When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) Reset STD0 Detection of start condition 0 Start condition was not detected. 1 Start condition was detected. This indicates that the address transfer period is in effect. Condition for clearing (STD0 = 0) Condition for setting (STD0 = 1) When a stop condition is detected When a start condition is detected At the rising edge of the next byte's first clock following address transfer Cleared by LREL0 = 1 (exit from communications) When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) Reset SPD0 Detection of stop condition 0 Stop condition was not detected. 1 Stop condition was detected. The master device's communication is terminated and the bus is released. Condition for clearing (SPD0 = 0) Condition for setting (SPD0 = 1) At the rising edge of the address transfer byte's first clock following setting of this bit and detection of a start condition When a stop condition is detected When the WUP0 bit changes from 1 to 0 When the IICE0 bit changes from 1 to 0 (operation stop) Reset Remark LREL0: Bit 6 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) IICE0: Bit 7 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) 16.3.4 IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) This register sets the operation mode of I2C and indicates the status of the I2C bus. The IICF0 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. However, the STT0 clear flag (STCF0) and I2C bus status flag (IICBSY0) bits are read-only. The IICRSV0 bit can be used to enable/disable the communication reservation function. The STCEN0 bit can be used to set the initial value of the IICBSY bit. The IICRSV0 and STCEN0 bits can be written only when the operation of I2C is disabled (bit 7 (IICE0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) = 0). When operation is enabled, the IICF0 register can be read. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1030 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-8. Format of IICA Flag Register 0 (IICF0) Address: FFF52H After reset: 00H R/WNote Symbol <7> <6> 5 4 3 2 IICF0 STCF0 IICBSY0 0 0 0 0 STCF0 <1> <0> STCEN0 IICRSV0 STT0 clear flag 0 Generate start condition 1 Start condition generation unsuccessful: clear the STT0 flag Condition for clearing (STCF0 = 0) Condition for setting (STCF0 = 1) * Cleared by STT0 = 1 * When IICE0 = 0 (operation stop) * Reset * Generating start condition unsuccessful and the STT0 bit cleared to 0 when communication reservation is disabled (IICRSV0 = 1). I2C bus status flag IICBSY0 0 Bus release status (communication initial status when STCEN0 = 1) 1 Bus communication status (communication initial status when STCEN0 = 0) Condition for clearing (IICBSY0 = 0) Condition for setting (IICBSY0 = 1) * Detection of stop condition * When IICE0 = 0 (operation stop) * Reset * Detection of start condition * Setting of the IICE0 bit when STCEN0 = 0 STCEN0 Initial start enable trigger 0 After operation is enabled (IICE0 = 1), enable generation of a start condition upon detection of a stop condition. 1 After operation is enabled (IICE0 = 1), enable generation of a start condition without detecting a stop condition. Condition for clearing (STCEN0 = 0) Condition for setting (STCEN0 = 1) * Cleared by instruction * Detection of start condition * Reset * Set by instruction IICRSV0 Communication reservation function disable bit 0 Enable communication reservation 1 Disable communication reservation Condition for clearing (IICRSV0 = 0) Condition for setting (IICRSV0 = 1) * Cleared by instruction * Reset * Set by instruction Note Bits 6 and 7 are read-only. Cautions 1. Write to the STCEN bit only when the operation is stopped (IICE0 = 0). 2. As the bus release status (IICBSY0 = 0) is recognized regardless of the actual bus status when STCEN0 = 1, when generating the first start condition (STT0 = 1), it is necessary to verify that no third party communications are in progress in order to prevent such communications from being destroyed. 3. Write to IICRSV0 only when the operation is stopped (IICE0 = 0). Remark STT0: Bit 1 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) IICE0: Bit 7 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1031 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.3.5 IICA control register 01 (IICCTL01) This register is used to set the operation mode of I2C and detect the statuses of the SCLA0 and SDAA0 pins. The IICCTL01 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. However, the CLD0 and DAD0 bits are read-only. Set the IICCTL01 register, except the WUP0 bit, while operation of I2C is disabled (bit 7 (IICE0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) is 0). Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 16-9. Format of IICA Control Register 01 (IICCTL01) (1/2) Address: F0231H R/W Note 1 After reset: 00H Symbol <7> 6 <5> <4> <3> <2> 1 <0> IICCTL01 WUP0 0 CLD0 DAD0 SMC0 DFC0 0 PRS0 WUP0 Control of address match wakeup 0 Stops operation of address match wakeup function in STOP mode. 1 Enables operation of address match wakeup function in STOP mode. To shift to STOP mode when WUP0 = 1, execute the STOP instruction at least three cycles of the operation clock (fMCK) after setting (1) the WUP0 bit (see Figure 16-23 Flow When Setting WUP0 = 1). Clear (0) the WUP0 bit after the address has matched or an extension code has been received. The subsequent communication can be entered by the clearing (0) WUP0 bit. (The wait must be released and transmit data must be written after the WUP0 bit has been cleared (0).) The interrupt timing when the address has matched or when an extension code has been received, while WUP0 = 1, is identical to the interrupt timing when WUP0 = 0. (A delay of the difference of sampling by the clock will occur.) Furthermore, when WUP0 = 1, a stop condition interrupt is not generated even if the SPIE0 bit is set to 1. When WUP0 = 0 is set by a source other than an interrupt from serial interface IICA, operation as the master device cannot be performed until the subsequent start condition or stop condition is detected. Do not output a start condition by setting (1) the STT0 bit, without waiting for the detection of the subsequent start condition or stop condition. Condition for clearing (WUP0 = 0) Condition for setting (WUP0 = 1) Cleared by instruction (after address match or Set by instruction (when the MSTS0, EXC0, and extension code reception) COI0 bits are "0", and the STD0 bit also "0" (communication not entered)) Note 2 Notes 1. Bits 4 and 5 are read-only. 2. The status of the IICA status register 0 (IICS0) must be checked and the WUP0 bit must be set during the period shown below. <1> <2> SCLA0 SDAA0 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 R/W The maximum time from reading IICS0 to setting WUP0 is the period from <1> to <2>. Check the IICS0 operation status and set WUP0 during this period. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1032 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-9. Format of IICA Control Register 01 (IICCTL01) (2/2) CLD0 Detection of SCLA0 pin level (valid only when IICE0 = 1) 0 The SCLA0 pin was detected at low level. 1 The SCLA0 pin was detected at high level. Condition for clearing (CLD0 = 0) Condition for setting (CLD0 = 1) When the SCLA0 pin is at low level When the SCLA0 pin is at high level When IICE0 = 0 (operation stop) Reset DAD0 Detection of SDAA0 pin level (valid only when IICE0 = 1) 0 The SDAA0 pin was detected at low level. 1 The SDAA0 pin was detected at high level. Condition for clearing (DAD0 = 0) Condition for setting (DAD0 = 1) When the SDAA0 pin is at low level When the SDAA0 pin is at high level When IICE0 = 0 (operation stop) Reset SMC0 0 Operation mode switching Operates in standard mode (fastest transfer rate: 100 kbps). 1 Operates in fast mode (fastest transfer rate: 400 kbps) or fast mode plus (fastest transfer rate: 1 Mbps). DFC0 Digital filter operation control 0 Digital filter off. 1 Digital filter on. Digital filter can be used only in fast mode. In fast mode and fast mode plus, the transfer clock does not vary, regardless of the DFC0 bit being set (1) or cleared (0). The digital filter is used for noise elimination in fast mode and fast mode plus. PRS0 Control of the operation clock for IICA (fMCK) 0 Selects fCLK (1 MHz fCLK 20 MHz). 1 Selects fCLK/2 (20 MHz < fCLK). Cautions 1. The fastest operation frequency of the operation clock for IICA (fMCK) is 20 MHz (max.). Set bit 0 (PRS0) of the IICA control register 01 (IICCTL01) to 1 only when the fCLK exceeds 20 MHz. 2. Note the minimum fCLK operation frequency when setting the transfer clock. The minimum fCLK operation frequency for serial interface IICA is determined according to the mode. Fast mode: fCLK = 3.5 MHz (min.) Fast mode plus: fCLK = 10 MHz (min.) Normal mode: Remark fCLK = 1 MHz (min.) IICE0: Bit 7 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1033 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.3.6 IICA low-level width setting register 0 (IICWL0) This register is used to set the low-level width (tLOW) of the SCLA0 pin signal that is output by serial interface IICA. The IICWL0 register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the IICWL0 register while operation of I2C is disabled (bit 7 (IICE0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) is 0). Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH. For details about setting the IICWL0 register, see 16.4.2 Setting transfer clock by using IICWL0 and IICWH0 registers. Figure 16-10. Format of IICA Low-Level Width Setting Register 0 (IICWL0) Address: F0232H Symbol After reset: FFH R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IICWL0 16.3.7 IICA high-level width setting register 0 (IICWH0) This register is used to set the high-level width of the SCLA0 pin signal that is output by serial interface IICA. The IICWH0 register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Set the IICWH0 register while operation of I2C is disabled (bit 7 (IICE0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) is 0). Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH. Figure 16-11. Format of IICA High-Level Width Setting Register 0 (IICWH0) Address: F0233H Symbol After reset: FFH R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IICWH0 Remark For how to set the transfer clock by using the IICWL0 and IICWH0 registers, see 16.4.2 Setting transfer clock by using IICWL0 and IICWH0 registers. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1034 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.3.8 Port mode register 6 (PM6) This register sets the input/output of port 6 in 1-bit units. When using the P62/SCLA0 pin as clock I/O and the P63/SDAA0 pin as serial data I/O, clear P62, P63, and the output latches of P62 and P63 to 0. Set the IICE0 bit (bit 7 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00)) to 1 before setting the output mode because the P62/SCLA0 and P63/SDAA0 pins output a low level (fixed) when the IICE0 bit is 0. The PM6 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH. Figure 16-12. Format of Port Mode Register 6 (PM6) Address: FFF26H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PM6 1 1 1 1 PM63 PM62 PM61 PM60 PM6n Caution P6n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 3) 0 Output mode (output buffer on) 1 Input mode (output buffer off) PM62 and PM63 are used for the IICA serial interface. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1035 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.3.9 Port output mode register (POM6) This register sets the output mode of P60 to P63 in 1-bit units. N-ch open drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode can be selected for the SCLA0 and SDAA0 pins during I2C communication. When using the P62/SCLA0 pin as clock I/O and the P63/SDAA0 pin as serial data I/O, set POM62 and POM63 to 1. Set the IICE0 bit (bit 7 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00)) to 1 before setting the output mode because the P62/SCLA0 and P63/SDAA0 pins output a low level (fixed) when the IICE0 bit is 0. The POM6 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 16-13. Format of Port Output Mode Register 6 (POM6) Address: F0056H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 POM6 0 0 0 0 POM63 POM62 POM61 POM60 POMmn P6n pin output mode selection (n = 0 to 3) 0 Normal output mode 1 N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode Caution POM62 and POM63 are used for the IICA serial interface. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1036 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.4 I2C Bus Mode Functions 16.4.1 Pin configuration The serial clock pin (SCLA0) and the serial data bus pin (SDAA0) are configured as follows. (1) SCLA0 .... This pin is used for serial clock input and output. This pin is an N-ch open-drain output for both master and slave devices. Input is Schmitt input. (2) SDAA0 .... This pin is used for serial data input and output. This pin is an N-ch open-drain output for both master and slave devices. Input is Schmitt input. Since outputs from the serial clock line and the serial data bus line are N-ch open-drain outputs, an external pull-up resistor is required. Figure 16-14. Pin Configuration Diagram Slave device VDD Master device SCLA0 SCLA0 (Clock output) Clock output VDD VSS VSS Clock input (Clock input) SDAA0 SDAA0 Data output Data output VSS Data input R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 VSS Data input 1037 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.4.2 Setting transfer clock by using IICWL0 and IICWH0 registers (1) Setting transfer clock on master side fMCK Transfer clock = IICWL0 + IICWH0 + fMCK (tR + tF) At this time, the optimal setting values of the IICWL0 and IICWH0 registers are as follows. (The fractional parts of all setting values are rounded up.) When the fast mode 0.52 IICWL0 = Transfer clock fMCK 0.48 IICWH0 = ( Transfer clock tR tF) fMCK When the normal mode 0.47 IICWL0 = Transfer clock fMCK 0.53 IICWH0 = ( Transfer clock tR tF) fMCK When the fast mode plus 0.50 IICWL0 = Transfer clock fMCK 0.50 IICWH0 = ( Transfer clock tR tF) fMCK (2) Setting IICWL0 and IICWH0 registers on slave side (The fractional parts of all setting values are truncated.) When the fast mode IICWL0 = 1.3 s fMCK IICWH0 = (1.2 s tR tF) fMCK When the normal mode IICWL0 = 4.7 s fMCK IICWH0 = (5.3 s tR tF) fMCK When the fast mode plus IICWL0 = 0.50 s fMCK IICWH0 = (0.50 s tR tF) fMCK (Cautions and Remarks are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1038 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Cautions 1. The fastest operation frequency of the operation clock for IICA (fMCK) is 20 MHz (max.). Set bit 0 (PRS0) of the IICA control register 01 (IICCTL01) to 1 only when the fCLK exceeds 20 MHz. 2. Note the minimum fCLK operation frequency when setting the transfer clock. The minimum fCLK operation frequency for serial interface IICA is determined according to the mode. Fast mode: fCLK = 3.5 MHz (min.) Fast mode plus: fCLK = 10 MHz (min.) Normal mode: Remarks 1. fCLK = 1 MHz (min.) Calculate the rise time (tR) and fall time (tF) of the SDAA0 and SCLA0 signals separately, because they differ depending on the pull-up resistance and wire load. 2. IICWL0: IICA low-level width setting register 0 IICWH0: IICA high-level width setting register 0 tF: SDAA0 and SCLA0 signal falling times tR: SDAA0 and SCLA0 signal rising times fMCK: Frequency of the IICA operation clock R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1039 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5 I2C Bus Definitions and Control Methods The following section describes the I2C bus's serial data communication format and the signals used by the I2C bus. Figure 16-15 shows the transfer timing for the "start condition", "address", "data", and "stop condition" output via the I2C bus's serial data bus. Figure 16-15. I2C Bus Serial Data Transfer Timing SCLA0 1-7 8 9 1-8 9 1-8 9 ACK Data ACK SDAA0 Start condition Address R/W ACK Data Stop condition The master device generates the start condition, slave address, and stop condition. The acknowledge (ACK) can be generated by either the master or slave device (normally, it is output by the device that receives 8-bit data). The serial clock (SCLA0) is continuously output by the master device. However, in the slave device, the SCLA0 pin low level period can be extended and a wait can be inserted. 16.5.1 Start conditions A start condition is met when the SCLA0 pin is at high level and the SDAA0 pin changes from high level to low level. The start conditions for the SCLA0 pin and SDAA0 pin are signals that the master device generates to the slave device when starting a serial transfer. When the device is used as a slave, start conditions can be detected. Figure 16-16. Start Conditions SCLA0 H SDAA0 A start condition is output when bit 1 (STT0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) is set (1) after a stop condition has been detected (SPD0: Bit 0 of the IICA status register 0 (IICS0) = 1). When a start condition is detected, bit 1 (STD0) of the IICS0 register is set (1). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1040 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5.2 Addresses The address is defined by the 7 bits of data that follow the start condition. An address is a 7-bit data segment that is output in order to select one of the slave devices that are connected to the master device via the bus lines. Therefore, each slave device connected via the bus lines must have a unique address. The slave devices include hardware that detects the start condition and checks whether or not the 7-bit address data matches the data values stored in the slave address register 0 (SVA0). If the address data matches the SVA0 register values, the slave device is selected and communicates with the master device until the master device generates a start condition or stop condition. Figure 16-17. Address SCLA0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SDAA0 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 R/W 9 Address Note INTIICA0 Note INTIICA0 is not issued if data other than a local address or extension code is received during slave device operation. Addresses are output when a total of 8 bits consisting of the slave address and the transfer direction described in 16.5.3 Transfer direction specification are written to the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0). The received addresses are written to the IICA0 register. The slave address is assigned to the higher 7 bits of the IICA0 register. 16.5.3 Transfer direction specification In addition to the 7-bit address data, the master device sends 1 bit that specifies the transfer direction. When this transfer direction specification bit has a value of "0", it indicates that the master device is transmitting data to a slave device. When the transfer direction specification bit has a value of "1", it indicates that the master device is receiving data from a slave device. Figure 16-18. Transfer Direction Specification SCLA0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SDAA0 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 R/W 9 Transfer direction specification INTIICA0 Note Note INTIICA0 is not issued if data other than a local address or extension code is received during slave device operation. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1041 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5.4 Acknowledge (ACK) ACK is used to check the status of serial data at the transmission and reception sides. The reception side returns ACK each time it has received 8-bit data. The transmission side usually receives ACK after transmitting 8-bit data. When ACK is returned from the reception side, it is assumed that reception has been correctly performed and processing is continued. Whether ACK has been detected can be checked by using bit 2 (ACKD0) of the IICA status register 0 (IICS0). When the master receives the last data item, it does not return ACK and instead generates a stop condition. If a slave does not return ACK after receiving data, the master outputs a stop condition or restart condition and stops transmission. If ACK is not returned, the possible causes are as follows. <1> Reception was not performed normally. <2> The final data item was received. <3> The reception side specified by the address does not exist. To generate ACK, the reception side makes the SDAA0 line low at the ninth clock (indicating normal reception). Automatic generation of ACK is enabled by setting bit 2 (ACKE0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) to 1. Bit 3 (TRC0) of the IICS0 register is set by the data of the eighth bit that follows 7-bit address information. Usually, set the ACKE0 bit to 1 for reception (TRC0 = 0). If a slave can receive no more data during reception (TRC0 = 0) or does not require the next data item, then the slave must inform the master, by clearing the ACKE0 bit to 0, that it will not receive any more data. When the master does not require the next data item during reception (TRC0 = 0), it must clear the ACKE0 bit to 0 so that ACK is not generated. In this way, the master informs a slave at the transmission side that it does not require any more data (transmission will be stopped). Figure 16-19. ACK SCLA0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SDAA0 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 R/W ACK When the local address is received, ACK is automatically generated, regardless of the value of the ACKE0 bit. When an address other than that of the local address is received, ACK is not generated (NACK). When an extension code is received, ACK is generated if the ACKE0 bit is set to 1 in advance. How ACK is generated when data is received differs as follows depending on the setting of the wait timing. When 8-clock wait state is selected (bit 3 (WTIM0) of IICCTL00 register = 0): By setting the ACKE0 bit to 1 before releasing the wait state, ACK is generated at the falling edge of the eighth clock of the SCLA0 pin. When 9-clock wait state is selected (bit 3 (WTIM0) of IICCTL00 register = 1): ACK is generated by setting the ACKE0 bit to 1 in advance. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1042 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5.5 Stop condition When the SCLA0 pin is at high level, changing the SDAA0 pin from low level to high level generates a stop condition. A stop condition is a signal that the master device generates to the slave device when serial transfer has been completed. When the device is used as a slave, stop conditions can be detected. Figure 16-20. Stop Condition SCLA0 H SDAA0 A stop condition is generated when bit 0 (SPT0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) is set to 1. When the stop condition is detected, bit 0 (SPD0) of the IICA status register 0 (IICS0) is set to 1 and INTIICA0 is generated when bit 4 (SPIE0) of the IICCTL00 register is set to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1043 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5.6 Wait The wait is used to notify the communication partner that a device (master or slave) is preparing to transmit or receive data (i.e., is in a wait state). Setting the SCLA0 pin to low level notifies the communication partner of the wait state. When wait state has been canceled for both the master and slave devices, the next data transfer can begin. Figure 16-21. Wait (1/2) (1) When master device has a nine-clock wait and slave device has an eight-clock wait (master transmits, slave receives, and ACKE0 = 1) Master Master returns to high impedance but slave is in wait state (low level). IICA0 Wait after output of ninth clock IICA0 data write (cancel wait) SCLA0 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 Slave Wait after output of eighth clock FFH is written to IICA0 or WREL0 is set to 1 IICA0 SCLA0 ACKE0 H Transfer lines Wait from slave SCLA0 6 7 8 SDAA0 D2 D1 D0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Wait from master 9 ACK 1 2 3 D7 D6 D5 1044 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-21. Wait (2/2) (2) When master and slave devices both have a nine-clock wait (master transmits, slave receives, and ACKE0 = 1) Master Master and slave both wait after output of ninth clock IICA0 data write (cancel wait) IICA0 6 SCLA0 7 8 9 1 2 3 Slave FFH is written to IICA0 or WREL0 is set to 1 IICA0 SCLA0 ACKE0 H Wait from master and slave Transfer lines SCLA0 6 7 8 9 SDAA0 D2 D1 D0 ACK Wait from slave 1 D7 2 3 D6 D5 Generate according to previously set ACKE0 value Remark ACKE0: Bit 2 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) WREL0: Bit 5 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) A wait may be automatically generated depending on the setting of bit 3 (WTIM0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00). Normally, the receiving side cancels the wait state when bit 5 (WREL0) of the IICCTL00 register is set to 1 or when FFH is written to the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0), and the transmitting side cancels the wait state when data is written to the IICA0 register. The master device can also cancel the wait state via either of the following methods. * By setting bit 1 (STT0) of the IICCTL00 register to 1 * By setting bit 0 (SPT0) of the IICCTL00 register to 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1045 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5.7 Canceling wait The I2C usually cancels a wait state by the following processing. Writing data to the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) Setting bit 5 (WREL0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) (canceling wait) Setting bit 1 (STT0) of the IICCTL00 register (generating start condition) Note Setting bit 0 (SPT0) of the IICCTL00 register (generating stop condition) Note Note Master only When the above wait canceling processing is executed, the I2C cancels the wait state and communication is resumed. To cancel a wait state and transmit data (including addresses), write the data to the IICA0 register. To receive data after canceling a wait state, or to complete data transmission, set bit 5 (WREL0) of the IICCTL00 register to 1. To generate a restart condition after canceling a wait state, set bit 1 (STT0) of the IICCTL00 register to 1. To generate a stop condition after canceling a wait state, set bit 0 (SPT0) of the IICCTL00 register to 1. Execute the canceling processing only once for one wait state. If, for example, data is written to the IICA0 register after canceling a wait state by setting the WREL0 bit to 1, an incorrect value may be output to SDAA0 line because the timing for changing the SDAA0 line conflicts with the timing for writing the IICA0 register. In addition to the above, communication is stopped if the IICE0 bit is cleared to 0 when communication has been aborted, so that the wait state can be canceled. If the I2C bus has deadlocked due to noise, processing is saved from communication by setting bit 6 (LREL0) of the IICCTL00 register, so that the wait state can be canceled. Caution If a processing to cancel a wait state is executed when WUP0 = 1, the wait state will not be canceled. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1046 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5.8 Interrupt request (INTIICA0) generation timing and wait control The setting of bit 3 (WTIM0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) determines the timing by which INTIICA0 is generated and the corresponding wait control, as shown in Table 16-2. Table 16-2. INTIICA0 Generation Timing and Wait Control WTIM0 During Slave Device Operation Address 0 9 Notes 1, 2 1 9 Notes 1, 2 Data Reception During Master Device Operation Data Transmission 8 Note 2 8 Note 2 9 Note 2 9 Note 2 Address Data Reception Data Transmission 9 8 8 9 9 9 Notes 1. The slave device's INTIICA0 signal and wait period occurs at the falling edge of the ninth clock only when there is a match with the address set to the slave address register 0 (SVA0). At this point, ACK is generated regardless of the value set to the IICCTL00 register's bit 2 (ACKE0). For a slave device that has received an extension code, INTIICA0 occurs at the falling edge of the eighth clock. However, if the address does not match after restart, INTIICA0 is generated at the falling edge of the 9th clock, but wait does not occur. 2. If the received address does not match the contents of the slave address register 0 (SVA0) and extension code is not received, neither INTIICA0 nor a wait occurs. Remark The numbers in the table indicate the number of the serial clock's clock signals. Interrupt requests and wait control are both synchronized with the falling edge of these clock signals. (1) During address transmission/reception * Slave device operation: Interrupt and wait timing are determined depending on the conditions described in Notes 1 and 2 above, regardless of the WTIM0 bit. * Master device operation: Interrupt and wait timing occur at the falling edge of the ninth clock regardless of the WTIM0 bit. (2) During data reception * Master/slave device operation: Interrupt and wait timing are determined according to the WTIM0 bit. (3) During data transmission * Master/slave device operation: Interrupt and wait timing are determined according to the WTIM0 bit. (4) Wait cancellation method The four wait cancellation methods are as follows. Writing data to the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) Setting bit 5 (WREL0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) (canceling wait) Setting bit 1 (STT0) of IICCTL00 register (generating start condition)Note Setting bit 0 (SPT0) of IICCTL00 register (generating stop condition)Note Note Master only. When an 8-clock wait has been selected (WTIM0 = 0), the presence/absence of ACK generation must be determined prior to wait cancellation. (5) Stop condition detection INTIICA0 is generated when a stop condition is detected (only when SPIE0 = 1). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1047 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5.9 Address match detection method In I2C bus mode, the master device can select a particular slave device by transmitting the corresponding slave address. Address match can be detected automatically by hardware. An interrupt request (INTIICA0) occurs when the address set to the slave address register 0 (SVA0) matches the slave address sent by the master device, or when an extension code has been received. 16.5.10 Error detection In I2C bus mode, the status of the serial data bus (SDAA0) during data transmission is captured by the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) of the transmitting device, so the IICA data prior to transmission can be compared with the transmitted IICA data to enable detection of transmission errors. A transmission error is judged as having occurred when the compared data values do not match. 16.5.11 Extension code (1) When the higher 4 bits of the receive address are either 0000 or 1111, the extension code reception flag (EXC0) is set to 1 for extension code reception and an interrupt request (INTIICA0) is issued at the falling edge of the eighth clock. The local address stored in the slave address register 0 (SVA0) is not affected. (2) The settings below are specified if 11110xx0 is transferred from the master by using a 10-bit address transfer when the SVA0 register is set to 11110xx0. Note that INTIICA0 occurs at the falling edge of the eighth clock. * Higher four bits of data match: EXC0 = 1 * Seven bits of data match: Remark COI0 = 1 EXC0: Bit 5 of IICA status register 0 (IICS0) COI0: Bit 4 of IICA status register 0 (IICS0) (3) Since the processing after the interrupt request occurs differs according to the data that follows the extension code, such processing is performed by software. If the extension code is received while a slave device is operating, then the slave device is participating in communication even if its address does not match. For example, after the extension code is received, if you do not wish to operate the target device as a slave device, set bit 6 (LREL0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) to 1 to set the standby mode for the next communication operation. Table 16-3. Bit Definitions of Major Extension Codes Slave Address R/W Bit 0000 000 0 1111 0xx 0 Description General call address 10-bit slave address specification (during address authentication) 1111 0xx 1 10-bit slave address specification (after address match, when read command is issued) Remark See the I2C bus specifications issued by NXP Semiconductors for details of extension codes other than those described above. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1048 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5.12 Arbitration When several master devices simultaneously generate a start condition (when the STT0 bit is set to 1 before the STD0 bit is set to 1), communication among the master devices is performed as the number of clocks are adjusted until the data differs. This kind of operation is called arbitration. When one of the master devices loses in arbitration, an arbitration loss flag (ALD0) in the IICA status register 0 (IICS0) is set (1) via the timing by which the arbitration loss occurred, and the SCLA0 and SDAA0 lines are both set to high impedance, which releases the bus. The arbitration loss is detected based on the timing of the next interrupt request (the eighth or ninth clock, when a stop condition is detected, etc.) and the ALD0 = 1 setting that has been made by software. For details of interrupt request timing, see 16.5.8 Interrupt request (INTIICA0) generation timing and wait control. Remark STD0: Bit 1 of IICA status register 0 (IICS0) STT0: Bit 1 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) Figure 16-22. Arbitration Timing Example Master 1 SCLA0 SDAA0 Master 2 Hi-Z Hi-Z Master 1 loses arbitration SCLA0 SDAA0 Transfer lines SCLA0 SDAA0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1049 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Table 16-4. Status During Arbitration and Interrupt Request Generation Timing Status During Arbitration During address transmission Interrupt Request Generation Timing At falling edge of eighth or ninth clock following byte transfer Note 1 Read/write data after address transmission During extension code transmission Read/write data after extension code transmission During data transmission During ACK transfer period after data transmission When restart condition is detected during data transfer When stop condition is detected during data transfer When stop condition is generated (when SPIE0 = 1) Note 2 When data is at low level while attempting to generate a restart condition At falling edge of eighth or ninth clock following byte transfer Note 1 When stop condition is detected while attempting to generate a restart condition When stop condition is generated (when SPIE0 = 1) Note 2 When data is at low level while attempting to generate a stop condition At falling edge of eighth or ninth clock following byte transfer Note 1 When SCLA0 is at low level while attempting to generate a restart condition Notes 1. When the WTIM0 bit (bit 3 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00)) = 1, an interrupt request occurs at the falling edge of the ninth clock. When WTIM0 = 0 and the extension code's slave address is received, an interrupt request occurs at the falling edge of the eighth clock. 2. When there is a chance that arbitration will occur, set SPIE0 = 1 for master device operation. Remark SPIE0: Bit 4 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1050 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5.13 Wakeup function The I2C bus slave function is a function that generates an interrupt request signal (INTIICA0) when a local address and extension code have been received. This function makes processing more efficient by preventing unnecessary INTIICA0 signal from occurring when addresses do not match. When a start condition is detected, wakeup standby mode is set. This wakeup standby mode is in effect while addresses are transmitted due to the possibility that an arbitration loss may change the master device (which has generated a start condition) to a slave device. To use the wakeup function in the STOP mode, set the WUP0 bit to 1. Addresses can be received regardless of the operation clock. An interrupt request signal (INTIICA0) is also generated when a local address and extension code have been received. Operation returns to normal operation by using an instruction to clear (0) the WUP0 bit after this interrupt has been generated. Figure 16-23 shows the flow for setting WUP0 = 1 and Figure 16-24 shows the flow for setting WUP0 = 0 upon an address match. Figure 16-23. Flow When Setting WUP0 = 1 START MSTS0 = STD0 = EXC0 = COI0 =0? No Yes WUP0 = 1 Wait Wait for three cycles of the operation clock (fMCK) STOP instruction execution R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1051 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-24. Flow When Setting WUP0 = 0 upon Address Match (Including Extension Code Reception) STOP mode state No INTIICA0 = 1? Yes WUP0 = 0 Wait Wait for five cycles of the operation clock (fMCK) Reading IICS0 Executes processing corresponding to the operation to be executed after checking the operation state of serial interface IICA. Use the following flows to perform the processing to release the STOP mode other than by an interrupt request (INTIICA0) generated from serial interface IICA. * Master device operation: Flow shown in Figure 16-25 * Slave device operation: Same as the flow in Figure 16-24. The value of WUP0 must be kept 1 until the INTIICA0 is set to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1052 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-25. When Operating as Master Device after Releasing STOP Mode other than by INTIICA0 START SPIE0 = 1 WUP0 = 1 Wait Wait for three cycles of the operation clock (fMCK) STOP instruction STOP mode state Releasing STOP mode Releases STOP mode by an interrupt other than INTIICA0. WUP0 = 0 No INTIICA0 = 1? Yes Generates a STOP condition or selects as a slave device. Reading IICS0 Executes processing corresponding to the operation to be executed after checking the operation state of serial interface IICA. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1053 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5.14 Communication reservation (1) When communication reservation function is enabled (bit 0 (IICRSV0) of IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) = 0) To start master device communications when not currently using a bus, a communication reservation can be made to enable transmission of a start condition when the bus is released. There are two modes under which the bus is not used. * When arbitration results in neither master nor slave operation * When an extension code is received and slave operation is disabled (ACK is not returned and the bus was released by setting bit 6 (LREL0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) to 1 and saving communication). If bit 1 (STT0) of the IICCTL00 register is set to 1 while the bus is not used (after a stop condition is detected), a start condition is automatically generated and wait state is set. If an address is written to the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) after bit 4 (SPIE0) of the IICCTL00 register was set to 1, and it was detected by generation of an interrupt request signal (INTIICA0) that the bus was released (detection of the stop condition), then the device automatically starts communication as the master. Data written to the IICA0 register before the stop condition is detected is invalid. When the STT0 bit has been set to 1, the operation mode (as start condition or as communication reservation) is determined according to the bus status. * If the bus has been released ........................................ a start condition is generated * If the bus has not been released (standby mode) ........ communication reservation Check whether the communication reservation operates or not by using the MSTS0 bit (bit 7 of the IICA status register 0 (IICS0)) after the STT0 bit is set to 1 and the wait time elapses. Use software to secure the wait time calculated by the following expression. Wait time from setting STT0 = 1 to checking the MSTS0 flag: (IICWL0 setting value + IICWH0 setting value + 4) / fMCK + tF 2 Remark IICWL0: IICA low-level width setting register 0 IICWH0: IICA high-level width setting register 0 tF: SDAA0 and SCLA0 signal falling times fMCK: Frequency of the IICA operation clock R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1054 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-26 shows the communication reservation timing. Figure 16-26. Communication Reservation Timing Program processing Write to IICA0 STT0 = 1 CommuniHardware processing cation reservation SCLA0 1 2 3 4 Set SPD0 and INTIICA0 5 6 7 8 9 Set STD0 1 2 3 4 5 6 SDAA0 Generate by master device with bus mastership Remark IICA0: IICA shift register 0 STT0: Bit 1 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) STD0: Bit 1 of IICA status register 0 (IICS0) SPD0: Bit 0 of IICA status register 0 (IICS0) Communication reservations are accepted via the timing shown in Figure 16-27. After bit 1 (STD0) of the IICA status register 0 (IICS0) is set to 1, a communication reservation can be made by setting bit 1 (STT0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) to 1 before a stop condition is detected. Figure 16-27. Timing for Accepting Communication Reservations SCLA0 SDAA0 STD0 SPD0 Standby mode (Communication can be reserved by setting STT0 to 1 during this period.) Figure 16-28 shows the communication reservation protocol. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1055 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-28. Communication Reservation Protocol DI SET1 STT0 Define communication reservation Wait (Communication reservation)Note 2 Yes MSTS0 = 0? Sets STT0 flag (communication reservation) Defines that communication reservation is in effect (defines and sets user flag to any part of RAM) Secures wait timeNote 1 by software. Confirmation of communication reservation No (Generate start condition) Cancel communication reservation MOV IICA0, #xxH Clear user flag IICA0 write operation EI Notes 1. The wait time is calculated as follows. (IICWL0 setting value + IICWH0 setting value + 4) / fMCK + tF 2 2. The communication reservation operation executes a write to the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) when a stop condition interrupt request occurs. Remark STT0: Bit 1 of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) MSTS0: Bit 7 of IICA status register 0 (IICS0) IICA0: IICA shift register 0 IICWL0: IICA low-level width setting register 0 IICWH0: IICA high-level width setting register 0 tF: SDAA0 and SCLA0 signal falling times fMCK: Frequency of the IICA operation clock R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1056 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (2) When communication reservation function is disabled (bit 0 (IICRSV0) of IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) = 1) When bit 1 (STT0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) is set to 1 when the bus is not used in a communication during bus communication, this request is rejected and a start condition is not generated. The following two statuses are included in the status where bus is not used. When arbitration results in neither master nor slave operation When an extension code is received and slave operation is disabled (ACK is not returned and the bus was released by setting bit 6 (LREL0) of the IICCTL00 register to 1 and saving communication) To confirm whether the start condition was generated or request was rejected, check STCF0 (bit 7 of the IICF0 register). It takes up to 5 cycles of the operation clock (fMCK) until the STCF0 bit is set to 1 after setting STT0 = 1. Therefore, secure the time by software. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1057 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5.15 Cautions (1) When STCEN0 = 0 Immediately after I2C operation is enabled (IICE0 = 1), the bus communication status (IICBSY0 = 1) is recognized regardless of the actual bus status. When changing from a mode in which no stop condition has been detected to a master device communication mode, first generate a stop condition to release the bus, then perform master device communication. When using multiple masters, it is not possible to perform master device communication when the bus has not been released (when a stop condition has not been detected). Use the following sequence for generating a stop condition. <1> Set IICA control register 01 (IICCTL01). <2> Set bit 7 (IICE0) of IICA control register 00 (IICCTL00) to 1. <3> Set bit 0 (SPT0) of the IICCTL00 register to 1. (2) When STCEN0 = 1 Immediately after I2C operation is enabled (IICE0 = 1), the bus released status (IICBSY0 = 0) is recognized regardless of the actual bus status. To generate the first start condition (STT0 = 1), it is necessary to confirm that the bus has been released, so as to not disturb other communications. (3) If other I2C communications are already in progress If I2C operation is enabled and the device participates in communication already in progress when the SDAA0 pin is low and the SCLA0 pin is high, the macro of I2C recognizes that the SDAA0 pin has gone low (detects a start condition). If the value on the bus at this time can be recognized as an extension code, ACK is returned, but this interferes with other I2C communications. To avoid this, start I2C in the following sequence. <1> Clear bit 4 (SPIE0) of the IICCTL00 register to 0 to disable generation of an interrupt request signal (INTIICA0) when the stop condition is detected. <2> Set bit 7 (IICE0) of the IICCTL00 register to 1 to enable the operation of I2C. <3> Wait for detection of the start condition. <4> Set bit 6 (LREL0) of the IICCTL00 register to 1 before ACK is returned (4 to 80 cycles of the operation clock (fMCK) after setting the IICE0 bit to 1), to forcibly disable detection. (4) Setting the STT0 and SPT0 bits (bits 1 and 0 of the IICCTL00 register) again after they are set and before they are cleared to 0 is prohibited. (5) When transmission is reserved, set the SPIE0 bit (bit 4 of the IICTL0 register) to 1 so that an interrupt request is generated when the stop condition is detected. Transfer is started when communication data is written to the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) after the interrupt request is generated. Unless the interrupt is generated when the stop condition is detected, the device stops in the wait state because the interrupt request is not generated when communication is started. However, it is not necessary to set the SPIE0 bit to 1 when the MSTS0 bit (bit 7 of the IICA status register 0 (IICS0)) is detected by software. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1058 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.5.16 Communication operations The following shows three operation procedures with the flowchart. (1) Master operation in single master system The flowchart when using the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 as the master in a single master system is shown below. This flowchart is broadly divided into the initial settings and communication processing. Execute the initial settings at startup. If communication with the slave is required, prepare the communication and then execute communication processing. (2) Master operation in multimaster system In the I2C bus multimaster system, whether the bus is released or used cannot be judged by the I2C bus specifications when the bus takes part in a communication. Here, when data and clock are at a high level for a certain period (1 frame), the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 take part in a communication with bus released state. This flowchart is broadly divided into the initial settings, communication waiting, and communication processing. The processing when the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 lose in arbitration and is specified as the slave is omitted here, and only the processing as the master is shown. Execute the initial settings at startup to take part in a communication. Then, wait for the communication request as the master or wait for the specification as the slave. The actual communication is performed in the communication processing, and it supports the transmission/reception with the slave and the arbitration with other masters. (3) Slave operation An example of when the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 are used as the I2C bus slave is shown below. When used as the slave, operation is started by an interrupt. Execute the initial settings at startup, then wait for the INTIICA0 interrupt occurrence (communication waiting). When an INTIICA0 interrupt occurs, the communication status is judged and its result is passed as a flag over to the main processing. By checking the flags, necessary communication processing is performed. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1059 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (1) Master operation in single-master system Figure 16-29. Master Operation in Single-Master System START Initializing I2C busNote Setting of the port used alternatively as the pin to be used. First, set the port to input mode and the output latch to 0 (see 16.3.8 Port mode register 6 (PM6)). Initial setting Setting port IICWL0, IICWH0 XXH Sets a transfer clock. SVA0 XXH Sets a local address. IICF0 0XH Setting STCEN0, IICRSV0 = 0 Sets a start condition. Setting IICCTL01 IICCTL00 0XX111XXB ACKE0 = WTIM0 = SPIE0 = 1 IICCTL00 1XX111XXB IICE0 = 1 2 Set the port from input mode to output mode and enable the output of the I C bus (see 16.3.8 Port mode register 6 (PM6)). Setting port STCEN0 = 1? Yes No SPT0 = 1 INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? Prepares for starting communication (generates a stop condition). No Waits for detection of the stop condition. Yes STT0 = 1 Prepares for starting communication (generates a start condition). Writing IICA0 Starts communication (specifies an address and transfer direction). INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? No Waits for detection of acknowledge. Yes No ACKD0 = 1? Yes TRC0 = 1? No ACKE0 = 1 WTIM0 = 0 Communication processing Yes Writing IICA0 Starts transmission. WREL0 = 1 INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? No Waits for data transmission. INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? Yes Yes ACKD0 = 1? No Starts reception. No Waits for data reception. Reading IICA0 Yes No End of transfer? No End of transfer? Yes Yes Restart? Yes ACKE0 = 0 WTIM0 = WREL0 = 1 No SPT0 = 1 INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? Yes No Waits for detection of acknowledge. END Note Release (SCLA0 and SDAA0 pins = high level) the I2C bus in conformance with the specifications of the product that is communicating. If EEPROM is outputting a low level to the SDAA0 pin, for example, set the SCLA0 pin in the output port mode, and output a clock pulse from the output port until the SDAA0 pin is constantly at high level. Remark Conform to the specifications of the product that is communicating, with respect to the transmission and reception formats. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1060 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (2) Master operation in multi-master system Figure 16-30. Master Operation in Multi-Master System (1/3) START Setting of the port used alternatively as the pin to be used. First, set the port to input mode and the output latch to 0 (see 16.3.8 Port mode register 6 (PM6)). Setting port IICWL0, IICWH0 XXH Selects a transfer clock. SVA0 XXH Sets a local address. IICF0 0XH Setting STCEN0 and IICRSV0 Sets a start condition. Setting IICCTL01 IICCTL00 0XX111XXB ACKE0 = WTIM0 = SPIE0 = 1 IICCTL00 1XX111XXB IICE0 = 1 Set the port from input mode to output mode and enable the output of the I2C bus (see 16.3.8 Port mode register 6 (PM6)). Initial setting Setting port Checking bus statusNote Releases the bus for a specific period. Bus status is being checked. No No STCEN0 = 1? INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? Prepares for starting communication (generates a stop condition). SPT0 = 1 Yes Yes SPD0 = 1? INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? No Yes Yes Slave operation SPD0 = 1? No Waits for detection of the stop condition. No Yes 1 Waits for a communication Slave operation * Waiting to be specified as a slave by other master * Waiting for a communication start request (depends on user program) Master operation starts? No (No communication start request) Yes (Communication start request) SPIE0 = 0 INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? SPIE0 = 1 No Waits for a communication request. Yes IICRSV0 = 0? No Slave operation Yes A B Enables reserving Disables reserving communication. communication. Note Confirm that the bus is released (CLD0 bit = 1, DAD0 bit = 1) for a specific period (for example, for a period of one frame). If the SDAA0 pin is constantly at low level, decide whether to release the I2C bus (SCLA0 and SDAA0 pins = high level) in conformance with the specifications of the product that is communicating. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1061 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-30. Master Operation in Multi-Master System (2/3) A Enables reserving communication. STT0 = 1 Secure wait timeNote by software. Wait Communication processing Prepares for starting communication (generates a start condition). MSTS0 = 1? No Yes INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? No Waits for bus release (communication being reserved). Yes No Wait state after stop condition was detected and start condition was generated by the communication reservation function. EXC0 = 1 or COI0 =1? Yes C Slave operation B Disables reserving communication. IICBSY0 = 0? No Yes D Communication processing STT0 = 1 Wait STCF0 = 0? Prepares for starting communication (generates a start condition). Wait for five cycles of the operation clock (fMCK) No Yes INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? No Waits for bus release Yes C EXC0 = 1 or COI0 =1? No Detects a stop condition. Yes Slave operation D Note The wait time is calculated as follows. (IICWL0 setting value + IICWH0 setting value + 4) / fMCK + tF 2 Remark IICWL0: IICA low-level width setting register 0 IICWH0: IICA high-level width setting register 0 tF: SDAA0 and SCLA0 signal falling times fMCK: Frequency of the IICA operation clock R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1062 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-30. Master Operation in Multi-Master System (3/3) C Writing IICA0 INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? Starts communication (specifies an address and transfer direction). No Waits for detection of ACK. Yes MSTS0 = 1? No Yes No 2 ACKD0 = 1? Yes TRC0 = 1? No ACKE0 = 1 WTIM0 = 0 Yes Communication processing WTIM0 = 1 WREL0 = 1 Writing IICA0 Starts transmission. INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? No Waits for data transmission. Yes MSTS0 = 1? No Waits for data reception. Yes MSTS0 = 1? No No Yes Yes ACKD0 = 1? Starts reception. 2 2 Reading IICA0 No Transfer end? No Yes Yes No WTIM0 = WREL0 = 1 ACKE0 = 00 Transfer end? Yes Restart? INTIICA0 interrupt occurs? No No Waits for detection of ACK. Yes SPT0 = 1 Yes MSTS0 = 1? STT0 = 1 END Yes No 2 Communication processing C 2 EXC0 = 1 or COI0 = 1? Yes Slave operation No 1 Does not participate in communication. Remarks 1. Conform to the specifications of the product that is communicating, with respect to the transmission and reception formats. 2. To use the device as a master in a multi-master system, read the MSTS0 bit each time interrupt INTIICA0 has occurred to check the arbitration result. 3. To use the device as a slave in a multi-master system, check the status by using the IICA status register 0 (IICS0) and IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) each time interrupt INTIICA0 has occurred, and determine the processing to be performed next. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1063 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (3) Slave operation The processing procedure of the slave operation is as follows. Basically, the slave operation is event-driven. Therefore, processing by the INTIICA0 interrupt (processing that must substantially change the operation status such as detection of a stop condition during communication) is necessary. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the extension code is not supported for data communication. It is also assumed that the INTIICA0 interrupt servicing only performs status transition processing, and that actual data communication is performed by the main processing. INTIICA0 Flag Interrupt servicing Setting Main processing IICA0 Data Setting Therefore, data communication processing is performed by preparing the following three flags and passing them to the main processing instead of INTIICA0. <1> Communication mode flag This flag indicates the following two communication statuses. Clear mode: Status in which data communication is not performed Communication mode: Status in which data communication is performed (from valid address detection to stop condition detection, no detection of ACK from master, address mismatch) <2> Ready flag This flag indicates that data communication is enabled. Its function is the same as the INTIICA0 interrupt for ordinary data communication. This flag is set by interrupt servicing and cleared by the main processing. Clear this flag by interrupt servicing when communication is started. However, the ready flag is not set by interrupt servicing when the first data is transmitted. Therefore, the first data is transmitted without the flag being cleared (an address match is interpreted as a request for the next data). <3> Communication direction flag This flag indicates the direction of communication. Its value is the same as the TRC0 bit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1064 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA The main processing of the slave operation is explained next. Start serial interface IICA and wait until communication is enabled. When communication is enabled, execute communication by using the communication mode flag and ready flag (processing of the stop condition and start condition is performed by an interrupt. Here, check the status by using the flags). The transmission operation is repeated until the master no longer returns ACK. If ACK is not returned from the master, communication is completed. For reception, the necessary amount of data is received. When communication is completed, ACK is not returned as the next data. After that, the master generates a stop condition or restart condition. Exit from the communication status occurs in this way. Figure 16-31. Slave Operation Flowchart (1) START Setting of the port used alternatively as the pin to be used. First, set the port to input mode and the output latch to 0 (see 16.3.8 Port mode register 6 (PM6)). Setting port Initial setting IICWL0, IICWH0 XXH Selects a transfer clock. SVA0 XXH Sets a local address. IICF0 0XH Sets a start condition. Setting IICRSV0 Setting IICCTL01 IICCTL00 0XX011XXB ACKE0 = WTIM0 = 1, SPI0 = 0 IICCTL00 1XX011XXB IICE0 = 1 Set the port from input mode to output mode and enable the output of the I2C bus (see 16.3.8 Port mode register 6 (PM6)). Setting port No Communication mode flag = 1? Yes Communication direction flag = 1? No Yes WREL0 = 1 Writing IICA0 Communication mode flag = 1? Communication processing No Communication mode flag = 1? No Yes Yes No Starts reception. Starts transmission. Communication direction flag = 1? Communication direction flag = 1? No Yes No Yes No Ready flag = 1? Ready flag = 1? Yes Yes Reading IICA0 Clearing ready flag Yes Clearing ready flag ACKD0 = 1? No Clearing communication mode flag WREL0 = 1 Remark Conform to the specifications of the product that is in communication, regarding the transmission and reception formats. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1065 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA An example of the processing procedure of the slave with the INTIICA0 interrupt is explained below (processing is performed assuming that no extension code is used). The INTIICA0 interrupt checks the status, and the following operations are performed. <1> Communication is stopped if the stop condition is issued. <2> If the start condition is issued, the address is checked and communication is completed if the address does not match. If the address matches, the communication mode is set, wait is cancelled, and processing returns from the interrupt (the ready flag is cleared). <3> For data transmit/receive, only the ready flag is set. Processing returns from the interrupt with the I2C bus remaining in the wait state. <1> to <3> above correspond to <1> to <3> in Figure 16-31 Slave Operation Flowchart (2). Remark Figure 16-31. Slave Operation Flowchart (2) INTIICA0 generated Yes <1> Yes <2> SPD0 = 1? No STD0 = 1? No No <3> COI0 = 1? Yes Set ready flag Communication direction flag TRC0 Set communication mode flag Clear ready flag Clear communication direction flag, ready flag, and communication mode flag Interrupt servicing completed 16.5.17 Timing of I2C interrupt request (INTIICA0) occurrence The timing of transmitting or receiving data and generation of interrupt request signal INTIICA0, and the value of the IICA status register 0 (IICS0) when the INTIICA0 signal is generated are shown below. Remark ST: Start condition AD6 to AD0: Address R/W: Transfer direction specification ACK: Acknowledge D7 to D0: Data SP: Stop condition R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1066 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (1) Master device operation (a) Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Data ~ Stop (transmission/reception) (i) When WTIM0 = 0 SPT0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK D7 to D0 2 ACK SP 3 4 5 1: IICS0 = 1000x110B 2: IICS0 = 1000x000B 3: IICS0 = 1000x000B (Sets the WTIM0 bit to 1)Note 4: IICS0 = 1000xx00B (Sets the SPT0 bit to 1)Note 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Note To generate a stop condition, set the WTIM0 bit to 1 and change the timing for generating the INTIICA0 interrupt request signal. Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 SPT0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK D7 to D0 2 ACK SP 3 4 1: IICS0 = 1000x110B 2: IICS0 = 1000x100B 3: IICS0 = 1000xx00B (Sets the SPT0 bit to 1) 4: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1067 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (b) Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Stop (restart) (i) When WTIM0 = 0 SPT0 = 1 STT0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK ST 2 3 AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 4 ACK SP 5 6 7 1: IICS0 = 1000x110B 2: IICS0 = 1000x000B (Sets the WTIM0 bit to 1)Note 1 3: IICS0 = 1000xx00B (Clears the WTIM0 bit to 0Note 2, sets the STT0 bit to 1) 4: IICS0 = 1000x110B 5: IICS0 = 1000x000B (Sets the WTIM0 bit to 1)Note 3 6: IICS0 = 1000xx00B (Sets the SPT0 bit to 1) 7: IICS0 = 00000001B Notes 1. To generate a start condition, set the WTIM0 bit to 1 and change the timing for generating the INTIICA0 interrupt request signal. 2. Clear the WTIM0 bit to 0 to restore the original setting. 3. To generate a stop condition, set the WTIM0 bit to 1 and change the timing for generating the INTIICA0 interrupt request signal. Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 STT0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK 1 ST 2 SPT0 = 1 AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 3 ACK SP 4 5 1: IICS0 = 1000x110B 2: IICS0 = 1000xx00B (Sets the STT0 bit to 1) 3: IICS0 = 1000x110B 4: IICS0 = 1000xx00B (Sets the SPT0 bit to 1) 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1068 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (c) Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Data ~ Stop (extension code transmission) (i) When WTIM0 = 0 SPT0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK D7 to D0 2 ACK SP 3 4 5 1: IICS0 = 1010x110B 2: IICS0 = 1010x000B 3: IICS0 = 1010x000B (Sets the WTIM0 bit to 1)Note 4: IICS0 = 1010xx00B (Sets the SPT0 bit to 1) 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Note To generate a stop condition, set the WTIM0 bit to 1 and change the timing for generating the INTIICA0 interrupt request signal. Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 SPT0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK D7 to D0 2 ACK SP 3 4 1: IICS0 = 1010x110B 2: IICS0 = 1010x100B 3: IICS0 = 1010xx00B (Sets the SPT0 bit to 1) 4: IICS0 = 00001001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1069 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (2) Slave device operation (slave address data reception) (a) Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Data ~ Stop (i) When WTIM0 = 0 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK D7 to D0 2 1 ACK SP 3 4 1: IICS0 = 0001x110B 2: IICS0 = 0001x000B 3: IICS0 = 0001x000B 4: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK D7 to D0 2 ACK SP 3 4 1: IICS0 = 0001x110B 2: IICS0 = 0001x100B 3: IICS0 = 0001xx00B 4: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1070 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (b) Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Stop (i) When WTIM0 = 0 (after restart, matches with SVA0) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK 2 D7 to D0 3 ACK SP 4 5 1: IICS0 = 0001x110B 2: IICS0 = 0001x000B 3: IICS0 = 0001x110B 4: IICS0 = 0001x000B 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 (after restart, matches with SVA0) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK 1 ST 2 AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 3 ACK SP 4 5 1: IICS0 = 0001x110B 2: IICS0 = 0001xx00B 3: IICS0 = 0001x110B 4: IICS0 = 0001xx00B 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1071 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (c) Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Stop (i) When WTIM0 = 0 (after restart, does not match address (= extension code)) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK ST 2 1 AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 3 ACK SP 4 5 1: IICS0 = 0001x110B 2: IICS0 = 0001x000B 3: IICS0 = 0010x010B 4: IICS0 = 0010x000B 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 (after restart, does not match address (= extension code)) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK 1 ST 2 AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK 3 D7 to D0 4 ACK SP 5 6 1: IICS0 = 0001x110B 2: IICS0 = 0001xx00B 3: IICS0 = 0010x010B 4: IICS0 = 0010x110B 5: IICS0 = 0010xx00B 6: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1072 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (d) Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Stop (i) When WTIM0 = 0 (after restart, does not match address (= not extension code)) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK 2 1 D7 to D0 ACK SP 3 4 1: IICS0 = 0001x110B 2: IICS0 = 0001x000B 3: IICS0 = 00000x10B 4: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 (after restart, does not match address (= not extension code)) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK 1 ST 2 AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 3 ACK SP 4 1: IICS0 = 0001x110B 2: IICS0 = 0001xx00B 3: IICS0 = 00000x10B 4: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1073 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (3) Slave device operation (when receiving extension code) The device is always participating in communication when it receives an extension code. (a) Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Data ~ Stop (i) When WTIM0 = 0 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK D7 to D0 ACK 2 1 3 SP 4 1: IICS0 = 0010x010B 2: IICS0 = 0010x000B 3: IICS0 = 0010x000B 4: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK 1 D7 to D0 ACK 2 D7 to D0 3 ACK SP 4 5 1: IICS0 = 0010x010B 2: IICS0 = 0010x110B 3: IICS0 = 0010x100B 4: IICS0 = 0010xx00B 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1074 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (b) Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Stop (i) When WTIM0 = 0 (after restart, matches SVA0) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK 2 1 D7 to D0 3 ACK SP 4 5 1: IICS0 = 0010x010B 2: IICS0 = 0010x000B 3: IICS0 = 0001x110B 4: IICS0 = 0001x000B 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 (after restart, matches SVA0) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK 1 D7 to D0 ACK 2 ST 3 AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 4 ACK SP 5 6 1: IICS0 = 0010x010B 2: IICS0 = 0010x110B 3: IICS0 = 0010xx00B 4: IICS0 = 0001x110B 5: IICS0 = 0001xx00B 6: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1075 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (c) Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Stop (i) When WTIM0 = 0 (after restart, extension code reception) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK ST 2 1 AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 3 ACK SP 4 5 1: IICS0 = 0010x010B 2: IICS0 = 0010x000B 3: IICS0 = 0010x010B 4: IICS0 = 0010x000B 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 (after restart, extension code reception) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK 1 D7 to D0 ACK 2 ST 3 AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK 4 D7 to D0 5 ACK SP 6 7 1: IICS0 = 0010x010B 2: IICS0 = 0010x110B 3: IICS0 = 0010xx00B 4: IICS0 = 0010x010B 5: IICS0 = 0010x110B 6: IICS0 = 0010xx00B 7: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1076 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (d) Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Start ~ Address ~ Data ~ Stop (i) When WTIM0 = 0 (after restart, does not match address (= not extension code)) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK 2 1 D7 to D0 ACK SP 3 4 1: IICS0 = 0010x010B 2: IICS0 = 0010x000B 3: IICS0 = 00000x10B 4: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 (after restart, does not match address (= not extension code)) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK 1 D7 to D0 ACK 2 ST 3 AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 4 ACK SP 5 1: IICS0 = 0010x010B 2: IICS0 = 0010x110B 3: IICS0 = 0010xx00B 4: IICS0 = 00000x10B 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1077 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (4) Operation without communication (a) Start ~ Code ~ Data ~ Data ~ Stop ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK D7 to D0 ACK SP 1 1: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 (5) Arbitration loss operation (operation as slave after arbitration loss) When the device is used as a master in a multi-master system, read the MSTS0 bit each time interrupt request signal INTIICA0 has occurred to check the arbitration result. (a) When arbitration loss occurs during transmission of slave address data (i) When WTIM0 = 0 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK 2 D7 to D0 ACK 3 SP 4 1: IICS0 = 0101x110B 2: IICS0 = 0001x000B 3: IICS0 = 0001x000B 4: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1078 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK 1 D7 to D0 ACK 2 SP 3 4 1: IICS0 = 0101x110B 2: IICS0 = 0001x100B 3: IICS0 = 0001xx00B 4: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (b) When arbitration loss occurs during transmission of extension code (i) When WTIM0 = 0 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK 2 D7 to D0 ACK 3 SP 4 1: IICS0 = 0110x010B 2: IICS0 = 0010x000B 3: IICS0 = 0010x000B 4: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1079 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK 1 D7 to D0 ACK 2 D7 to D0 ACK 3 SP 4 5 1: IICS0 = 0110x010B 2: IICS0 = 0010x110B 3: IICS0 = 0010x100B 4: IICS0 = 0010xx00B 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (6) Operation when arbitration loss occurs (no communication after arbitration loss) When the device is used as a master in a multi-master system, read the MSTS0 bit each time interrupt request signal INTIICA0 has occurred to check the arbitration result. (a) When arbitration loss occurs during transmission of slave address data (when WTIM0 = 1) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK D7 to D0 ACK SP 2 1: IICS0 = 01000110B 2: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1080 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (b) When arbitration loss occurs during transmission of extension code ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK D7 to D0 ACK SP 2 1 1: IICS0 = 0110x010B Sets LREL0 = 1 by software 2: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (c) When arbitration loss occurs during transmission of data (i) When WTIM0 = 0 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK 2 D7 to D0 ACK SP 3 1: IICS0 = 10001110B 2: IICS0 = 01000000B 3: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1081 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK D7 to D0 ACK SP 2 1 3 1: IICS0 = 10001110B 2: IICS0 = 01000100B 3: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 (d) When loss occurs due to restart condition during data transfer (i) Not extension code (Example: unmatches with SVA0) ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to Dn ST 1 AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 2 ACK SP 3 1: IICS0 = 1000x110B 2: IICS0 = 01000110B 3: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care n = 6 to 0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1082 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (ii) Extension code ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to Dn ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK 1 2 D7 to D0 ACK SP 3 1: IICS0 = 1000x110B 2: IICS0 = 01100010B Sets LREL0 = 1 by software 3: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care n = 6 to 0 (e) When loss occurs due to stop condition during data transfer ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to Dn SP 1 2 1: IICS0 = 10000110B 2: IICS0 = 01000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care n = 6 to 0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1083 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (f) When arbitration loss occurs due to low-level data when attempting to generate a restart condition (i) When WTIM0 = 0 STT0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK D7 to D0 2 1 3 ACK D7 to D0 ACK SP 4 5 1: IICS0 = 1000x110B 2: IICS0 = 1000x000B (Sets the WTIM0 bit to 1) 3: IICS0 = 1000x100B (Clears the WTIM0 bit to 0) 4: IICS0 = 01000000B 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 STT0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK 1 D7 to D0 2 ACK D7 to D0 3 ACK SP 4 1: IICS0 = 1000x110B 2: IICS0 = 1000x100B (Sets the STT0 bit to 1) 3: IICS0 = 01000100B 4: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1084 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (g) When arbitration loss occurs due to a stop condition when attempting to generate a restart condition (i) When WTIM0 = 0 STT0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK 2 1 SP 3 4 1: IICS0 = 1000x110B 2: IICS0 = 1000x000B (Sets the WTIM0 bit to 1) 3: IICS0 = 1000xx00B (Sets the STT0 bit to 1) 4: IICS0 = 01000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 STT0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK SP 2 3 1: IICS0 = 1000x110B 2: IICS0 = 1000xx00B (Sets the STT0 bit to 1) 3: IICS0 = 01000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1085 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA (h) When arbitration loss occurs due to low-level data when attempting to generate a stop condition (i) When WTIM0 = 0 SPT0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 1 ACK 2 D7 to D0 ACK 3 D7 to D0 ACK SP 4 5 1: IICS0 = 1000x110B 2: IICS0 = 1000x000B (Sets the WTIM0 bit to 1) 3: IICS0 = 1000x100B (Clears the WTIM0 bit to 0) 4: IICS0 = 01000100B 5: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care (ii) When WTIM0 = 1 SPT0 = 1 ST AD6 to AD0 R/W ACK D7 to D0 ACK 1 D7 to D0 2 ACK D7 to D0 3 ACK SP 4 1: IICS0 = 1000x110B 2: IICS0 = 1000x100B (Sets the SPT0 bit to 1) 3: IICS0 = 01000100B 4: IICS0 = 00000001B Remark : Always generated : Generated only when SPIE0 = 1 x: Don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1086 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA 16.6 Timing Charts When using the I2C bus mode, the master device outputs an address via the serial bus to select one of several slave devices as its communication partner. After outputting the slave address, the master device transmits the TRC0 bit (bit 3 of the IICA status register 0 (IICS0)), which specifies the data transfer direction, and then starts serial communication with the slave device. Figures 16-32 and 16-33 show timing charts of the data communication. The IICA shift register 0 (IICA0)'s shift operation is synchronized with the falling edge of the serial clock (SCLA0). The transmit data is transferred to the SO latch and is output (MSB first) via the SDAA0 pin. Data input via the SDAA0 pin is captured into IICA0 at the rising edge of SCLA0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1087 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-32. Example of Master to Slave Communication (When 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Master, 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Slave) (1/4) (1) Start condition ~ address ~ data Master side Note 1 IICA0 <2> <5> ACKD0 (ACK detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) H ACKE0 (ACK control) H MSTS0 (communication status) STT0 (ST trigger) SPT0 (SP trigger) WREL0 (wait cancellation) <1> L L INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) Start condition Bus line SCLA0 (bus) (clock line) Note 2 SDAA0 (bus) (data line) <4> AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 Slave address AD1 AD0 W D17 ACK <3> Slave side IICA0 ACKD0 (ACK detection) STD0 (ST detection) SPD0 (SP detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) H ACKE0 (ACK control) H MSTS0 (communication status) L WREL0 (wait cancellation) INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) <6> Note 3 L : Wait state by slave device : Wait state by master and slave devices Notes 1. Write data to IICA0, not setting the WREL0 bit, in order to cancel a wait state during transmission by a master device. 2. Make sure that the time between the fall of the SDAA0 pin signal and the fall of the SCLA0 pin signal is at least 4.0 s when specifying standard mode and at least 0.6 s when specifying fast mode. 3. For releasing wait state during reception of a slave device, write "FFH" to IICA0 or set the WREL0 bit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1088 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA The meanings of <1> to <6> in (1) Start condition ~ address ~ data in Figure 16-32 are explained below. <1> The start condition trigger is set by the master device (STT0 = 1) and a start condition (i.e. SCLA0 = 1 changes SDAA0 from 1 to 0) is generated once the bus data line goes low (SDAA0). When the start condition is subsequently detected, the master device enters the master device communication status (MSTS0 = 1). The master device is ready to communicate once the bus clock line goes low (SCLA0 = 0) after the hold time has elapsed. <2> The master device writes the address + W (transmission) to the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) and transmits the slave address. <3> In the slave device if the address received matches the address (SVA0 value) of a slave deviceNote, that slave device sends an ACK by hardware to the master device. The ACK is detected by the master device (ACKD0 = 1) at the rising edge of the 9th clock. <4> The master device issues an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of address transmission) at the falling edge of the 9th clock. The slave device whose address matched the transmitted slave address sets a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) and issues an interrupt (INTIICA0: address match)Note. <5> The master device writes the data to transmit to the IICA0 register and releases the wait status that it set by the master device. <6> If the slave device releases the wait status (WREL0 = 1), the master device starts transferring data to the slave device. Note If the transmitted address does not match the address of the slave device, the slave device does not return an ACK to the master device (NACK: SDAA0 = 1). The slave device also does not issue the INTIICA0 interrupt (address match) and does not set a wait status. The master device, however, issues the INTIICA0 interrupt (end of address transmission) regardless of whether it receives an ACK or NACK. Remark <1> to <15> in Figure 16-32 represent the entire procedure for communicating data using the I2C bus. Figure 16-32 (1) Start condition ~ address ~ data shows the processing from <1> to <6>, Figure 16-32 (2) Address ~ data ~ data shows the processing from <3> to <10>, and Figure 16-32 (3) Data ~ data ~ stop condition shows the processing from <7> to <15>. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1089 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-32. Example of Master to Slave Communication (When 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Master, 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Slave) (2/4) (2) Address ~ data ~ data Master side IICA0 Note 1 Note 1 <5> <9> ACKD0 (ACK detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) ACKE0 (ACK control) H H MSTS0 (communication status) H STT0 (ST trigger) SPT0 (SP trigger) WREL0 (wait cancellation) L L L INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) H Bus line SCLA0 (bus) (clock line) <4> SDAA0 (bus) (data line) <8> D17 W ACK D16 D15 <3> D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 <7> D27 ACK Slave side IICA0 ACKD0 (ACK detection) STD0 (ST detection) SPD0 (SP detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) ACKE0 (ACK control) L H H MSTS0 (communication status) L WREL0 (wait cancellation) <6> Note 2 <10> Note 2 INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) L : Wait state by slave device : Wait state by master and slave devices Notes 1. Write data to IICA0, not setting the WREL0 bit, in order to cancel a wait state during transmission by a master device. 2. For releasing wait state during reception of a slave device, write "FFH" to IICA0 or set the WREL0 bit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1090 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA The meanings of <3> to <10> in (2) Address ~ data ~ data in Figure 16-32 are explained below. <3> In the slave device if the address received matches the address (SVA0 value) of a slave deviceNote, that slave device sends an ACK by hardware to the master device. The ACK is detected by the master device (ACKD0 = 1) at the rising edge of the 9th clock. <4> The master device issues an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of address transmission) at the falling edge of the 9th clock. The slave device whose address matched the transmitted slave address sets a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) and issues an interrupt (INTIICA0: address match)Note. <5> The master device writes the data to transmit to the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) and releases the wait status that it set by the master device. <6> If the slave device releases the wait status (WREL0 = 1), the master device starts transferring data to the slave device. <7> After data transfer is completed, because of ACKE0 = 1, the slave device sends an ACK by hardware to the master device. The ACK is detected by the master device (ACKD0 = 1) at the rising edge of the 9th clock. <8> The master device and slave device set a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) at the falling edge of the 9th clock, and both the master device and slave device issue an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of transfer). <9> The master device writes the data to transmit to the IICA0 register and releases the wait status that it set by the master device. <10> The slave device reads the received data and releases the wait status (WREL0 = 1). The master device then starts transferring data to the slave device. Note If the transmitted address does not match the address of the slave device, the slave device does not return an ACK to the master device (NACK: SDAA0 = 1). The slave device also does not issue the INTIICA0 interrupt (address match) and does not set a wait status. The master device, however, issues the INTIICA0 interrupt (end of address transmission) regardless of whether it receives an ACK or NACK. Remark <1> to <15> in Figure 16-32 represent the entire procedure for communicating data using the I2C bus. Figure 16-32 (1) Start condition ~ address ~ data shows the processing from <1> to <6>, Figure 16-32 (2) Address ~ data ~ data shows the processing from <3> to <10>, and Figure 16-32 (3) Data ~ data ~ stop condition shows the processing from <7> to <15>. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1091 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-32. Example of Master to Slave Communication (When 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Master, 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Slave) (3/4) (3) Data ~ data ~ Stop condition Master side Note 1 IICA0 <9> ACKD0 (ACK detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) ACKE0 (ACK control) H H MSTS0 (communication status) STT0 (ST trigger) L SPT0 (SP trigger) WREL0 (wait cancellation) <14> L INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) Stop condition Bus line SCLA0 (bus) (clock line) <8> SDAA0 (bus) (data line) D150 ACK <7> <12> D167 D166 D165 D164 D163 D162 D161 D160 ACK <11> Slave side Note 2 <15> IICA0 ACKD0 (ACK detection) STD0 (ST detection) L SPD0 (SP detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) ACKE0 (ACK control) H H MSTS0 (communication status) L WREL0 (wait cancellation) <10> Note 3 <13> Note 3 INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) L : Wait state by master device : Wait state by slave device : Wait state by master and slave devices Notes 1. Write data to IICA0, not setting the WREL0 bit, in order to cancel a wait state during transmission by a master device. 2. Make sure that the time between the rise of the SCLA0 pin signal and the generation of the stop condition after a stop condition has been issued is at least 4.0 s when specifying standard mode and at least 0.6 s when specifying fast mode. 3. For releasing wait state during reception of a slave device, write "FFH" to IICA0 or set the WREL0 bit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1092 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA The meanings of <7> to <15> in (3) Data ~ data ~ stop condition in Figure 16-32 are explained below. <7> After data transfer is completed, because of ACKE0 = 1, the slave device sends an ACK by hardware to the master device. The ACK is detected by the master device (ACKD0 = 1) at the rising edge of the 9th clock. <8> The master device and slave device set a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) at the falling edge of the 9th clock, and both the master device and slave device issue an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of transfer). <9> The master device writes the data to transmit to the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) and releases the wait status that it set by the master device. <10> The slave device reads the received data and releases the wait status (WREL0 = 1). The master device then starts transferring data to the slave device. <11> When data transfer is complete, the slave device (ACKE0 =1) sends an ACK by hardware to the master device. The ACK is detected by the master device (ACKD0 = 1) at the rising edge of the 9th clock. <12> The master device and slave device set a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) at the falling edge of the 9th clock, and both the master device and slave device issue an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of transfer). <13> The slave device reads the received data and releases the wait status (WREL0 = 1). <14> By the master device setting a stop condition trigger (SPT0 = 1), the bus data line is cleared (SDAA0 = 0) and the bus clock line is set (SCLA0 = 1). After the stop condition setup time has elapsed, by setting the bus data line (SDAA0 = 1), the stop condition is then generated (i.e. SCLA0 =1 changes SDAA0 from 0 to 1). <15> When a stop condition is generated, the slave device detects the stop condition and issues an interrupt (INTIICA0: stop condition). Remark <1> to <15> in Figure 16-32 represent the entire procedure for communicating data using the I2C bus. Figure 16-32 (1) Start condition ~ address ~ data shows the processing from <1> to <6>, Figure 16-32 (2) Address ~ data ~ data shows the processing from <3> to <10>, and Figure 16-32 (3) Data ~ data ~ stop condition shows the processing from <7> to <15>. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1093 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-32. Example of Master to Slave Communication (When 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Master, 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Slave) (4/4) (4) Data ~ restart condition ~ address Master side IICA0 <iii> ACKD0 (ACK detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) ACKE0 (ACK control) H H MSTS0 (communication status) H STT0 (ST trigger) <ii> SPT0 (SP trigger) L WREL0 (wait cancellation) L INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) H Bus line Restart condition SCLA0 (bus) (clock line) <8> SDAA0 (bus) (data line) D13 D12 D11 D10 ACK <7> AD6 Note 1 Slave side AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 Slave address IICA0 ACKD0 (ACK detection) STD0 (ST detection) SPD0 (SP detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) ACKE0 (ACK control) L H H MSTS0 (communication status) L WREL0 (wait cancellation) <i> Note 2 INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) L : Wait state by master device : Wait state by slave device : Wait state by master and slave devices Notes 1. Make sure that the time between the rise of the SCLA0 pin signal and the generation of the start condition after a restart condition has been issued is at least 4.7 s when specifying standard mode and at least 0.6 s when specifying fast mode. 2. For releasing wait state during reception of a slave device, write "FFH" to IICA0 or set the WREL0 bit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1094 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA The following describes the operations in Figure 16-32 (4) Data ~ restart condition ~ address. After the operations in steps <7> and <8>, the operations in steps <i> to <iii> are performed. These steps return the processing to step <iii>, the data transmission step. <7> After data transfer is completed, because of ACKE0 = 1, the slave device sends an ACK by hardware to the master device. The ACK is detected by the master device (ACKD0 = 1) at the rising edge of the 9th clock. <8> The master device and slave device set a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) at the falling edge of the 9th clock, and both the master device and slave device issue an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of transfer). <i> <ii> The slave device reads the received data and releases the wait status (WREL0 = 1). The start condition trigger is set again by the master device (STT0 = 1) and a start condition (i.e. SCLA0 =1 changes SDAA0 from 1 to 0) is generated once the bus clock line goes high (SCLA0 = 1) and the bus data line goes low (SDAA0 = 0) after the restart condition setup time has elapsed. When the start condition is subsequently detected, the master device is ready to communicate once the bus clock line goes low (SCLA0 = 0) after the hold time has elapsed. <iii> The master device writing the address + R/W (transmission) to the IICA shift register (IICA0) enables the slave address to be transmitted. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1095 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-33. Example of Slave to Master Communication (When 8-Clock Wait Is Selected for Master, 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Slave) (1/3) (1) Start condition ~ address ~ data Master side IICA0 <2> ACKD0 (ACK detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) ACKE0 (ACK control) <5> H MSTS0 (communication status) STT0 (ST trigger) <1> SPT0 (SP trigger) L WREL0 (wait cancellation) <7> Note 1 INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) Start condition Bus line SCLA0 (bus) (clock line) Note 2 SDAA0 (bus) (data line) <4> AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 Slave address AD1 AD0 R <3> ACK D17 Slave side Note 3 IICA0 <6> ACKD0 (ACK detection) STD0 (ST detection) SPD0 (SP detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) ACKE0 (ACK control) H H MSTS0 (communication status) L WREL0 (wait cancellation) L INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) : Wait state by master device : Wait state by slave device : Wait state by master and slave devices Notes 1. For releasing wait state during reception of a master device, write "FFH" to IICA0 or set the WREL0 bit. 2. Make sure that the time between the fall of the SDAA0 pin signal and the fall of the SCLA0 pin signal is at least 4.0 s when specifying standard mode and at least 0.6 s when specifying fast mode. 3. Write data to IICA0, not setting the WREL0 bit, in order to cancel a wait state during transmission by a slave device. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1096 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA The meanings of <1> to <7> in (1) Start condition ~ address ~ data in Figure 18-33 are explained below. <1> The start condition trigger is set by the master device (STT0 = 1) and a start condition (i.e. SCLA0 =1 changes SDAA0 from 1 to 0) is generated once the bus data line goes low (SDAA0). When the start condition is subsequently detected, the master device enters the master device communication status (MSTS0 = 1). The master device is ready to communicate once the bus clock line goes low (SCLA0 = 0) after the hold time has elapsed. <2> The master device writes the address + R (reception) to the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) and transmits the slave address. <3> In the slave device if the address received matches the address (SVA0 value) of a slave deviceNote, that slave device sends an ACK by hardware to the master device. The ACK is detected by the master device (ACKD0 = 1) at the rising edge of the 9th clock. <4> The master device issues an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of address transmission) at the falling edge of the 9th clock. The slave device whose address matched the transmitted slave address sets a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) and issues an interrupt (INTIICA0: address match)Note. <5> The timing at which the master device sets the wait status changes to the 8th clock (WTIM0 = 0). <6> The slave device writes the data to transmit to the IICA0 register and releases the wait status that it set by the slave device. <7> The master device releases the wait status (WREL0 = 1) and starts transferring data from the slave device to the master device. Note If the transmitted address does not match the address of the slave device, the slave device does not return an ACK to the master device (NACK: SDAA0 = 1). The slave device also does not issue the INTIICA0 interrupt (address match) and does not set a wait status. The master device, however, issues the INTIICA0 interrupt (end of address transmission) regardless of whether it receives an ACK or NACK. Remark <1> to <19> in Figure 16-33 represent the entire procedure for communicating data using the I2C bus. Figure 16-33 (1) Start condition ~ address ~ data shows the processing from <1> to <7>, Figure 16-33 (2) Address ~ data ~ data shows the processing from <3> to <12>, and Figure 16-33 (3) Data ~ data ~ stop condition shows the processing from <8> to <19>. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1097 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-33. Example of Slave to Master Communication (When 8-Clock Wait Is Selected for Master, 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Slave) (2/3) (2) Address ~ data ~ data Master side IICA0 ACKD0 (ACK detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) ACKE0 (ACK control) <5> H MSTS0 (communication status) H STT0 (ST trigger) L SPT0 (SP trigger) L WREL0 (wait cancellation) Note 1 Note 1 <7> INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) <9> L Bus line SCLA0 (bus) (clock line) <4> SDAA0 (bus) (data line) <11> <8> R ACK <3> D17 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 ACK D27 <10> Slave side IICA0 <6> ACKD0 (ACK detection) Note 2 <12> Note 2 STD0 (ST detection) SPD0 (SP detection) L WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) ACKE0 (ACK control) H H MSTS0 (communication status) L WREL0 (wait cancellation) L INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) H : Wait state by master device : Wait state by slave device : Wait state by master and slave devices Notes 1. For releasing wait state during reception of a master device, write "FFH" to IICA0 or set the WREL0 bit. 2. Write data to IICA0, not setting the WREL0 bit, in order to cancel a wait state during transmission by a slave device. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1098 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA The meanings of <3> to <12> in (2) Address ~ data ~ data in Figure 16-33 are explained below. <3> In the slave device if the address received matches the address (SVA0 value) of a slave deviceNote, that slave device sends an ACK by hardware to the master device. The ACK is detected by the master device (ACKD0 = 1) at the rising edge of the 9th clock. <4> The master device issues an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of address transmission) at the falling edge of the 9th clock. The slave device whose address matched the transmitted slave address sets a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) and issues an interrupt (INTIICA0: address match)Note. <5> The master device changes the timing of the wait status to the 8th clock (WTIM0 = 0). <6> The slave device writes the data to transmit to the IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) and releases the wait status that it set by the slave device. <7> The master device releases the wait status (WREL0 = 1) and starts transferring data from the slave device to the master device. <8> The master device sets a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) at the falling edge of the 8th clock, and issues an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of transfer). Because of ACKE0 = 1 in the master device, the master device then sends an ACK by hardware to the slave device. <9> The master device reads the received data and releases the wait status (WREL0 = 1). <10> The ACK is detected by the slave device (ACKD0 = 1) at the rising edge of the 9th clock. <11> The slave device set a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) at the falling edge of the 9th clock, and the slave device issue an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of transfer). <12> By the slave device writing the data to transmit to the IICA0 register, the wait status set by the slave device is released. The slave device then starts transferring data to the master device. Note If the transmitted address does not match the address of the slave device, the slave device does not return an ACK to the master device (NACK: SDAA0 = 1). The slave device also does not issue the INTIICA0 interrupt (address match) and does not set a wait status. The master device, however, issues the INTIICA0 interrupt (end of address transmission) regardless of whether it receives an ACK or NACK. Remark <1> to <19> in Figure 16-33 represent the entire procedure for communicating data using the I2C bus. Figure 16-33 (1) Start condition ~ address ~ data shows the processing from <1> to <7>, Figure 16-33 (2) Address ~ data ~ data shows the processing from <3> to <12>, and Figure 16-33 (3) Data ~ data ~ stop condition shows the processing from <8> to <19>. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1099 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA Figure 16-33. Example of Slave to Master Communication (When 8-Clock and 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Master, 9-Clock Wait Is Selected for Slave) (3/3) (3) Data ~ data ~ stop condition Master side IICA0 ACKD0 (ACK detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) <14> ACKE0 (ACK control) MSTS0 (communication status) STT0 (ST trigger) L SPT0 (SP trigger) WREL0 (wait cancellation) <15> <9> INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) <17> Note 1 Note 1 L Bus line Stop condition SCLA0 (bus) (clock line) <8> SDAA0 (bus) (data line) D150 <13> <11> ACK D167 D166 D165 D164 D163 D162 D161 D160 <16> Note 2 NACK <10> Slave side <19> IICA0 <12> Note 3 ACKD0 (ACK detection) STD0 (ST detection) L SPD0 (SP detection) WTIM0 (8 or 9 clock wait) ACKE0 (ACK control) H H MSTS0 (communication status) WREL0 (wait cancellation) L <18> Notes 1, 4 INTIICA0 (interrupt) TRC0 (transmit/receive) Note 4 : Wait state by master device : Wait state by slave device : Wait state by master and slave devices Notes 1. To cancel a wait state, write "FFH" to IICA0 or set the WREL0 bit. 2. Make sure that the time between the rise of the SCLA0 pin signal and the generation of the stop condition after a stop condition has been issued is at least 4.0 s when specifying standard mode and at least 0.6 s when specifying fast mode. 3. Write data to IICA0, not setting the WREL0 bit, in order to cancel a wait state during transmission by a slave device. 4. If a wait state during transmission by a slave device is canceled by setting the WREL0 bit, the TRC0 bit will be cleared. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1100 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE IICA The meanings of <8> to <19> in (3) Data ~ data ~ stop condition in Figure 16-33 are explained below. <8> The master device sets a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) at the falling edge of the 8th clock, and issues an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of transfer). Because of ACKE0 = 0 in the master device, the master device then sends an ACK by hardware to the slave device. <9> The master device reads the received data and releases the wait status (WREL0 = 1). <10> The ACK is detected by the slave device (ACKD0 = 1) at the rising edge of the 9th clock. <11> The slave device set a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) at the falling edge of the 9th clock, and the slave device issue an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of transfer). <12> By the slave device writing the data to transmit to the IICA register, the wait status set by the slave device is released. The slave device then starts transferring data to the master device. <13> The master device issues an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of transfer) at the falling edge of the 8th clock, and sets a wait status (SCLA0 = 0). Because ACK control (ACKE0 = 1) is performed, the bus data line is at the low level (SDAA0 = 0) at this stage. <14> The master device sets NACK as the response (ACKE0 = 0) and changes the timing at which it sets the wait status to the 9th clock (WTIM0 = 1). <15> If the master device releases the wait status (WREL0 = 1), the slave device detects the NACK (ACKD0 = 0) at the rising edge of the 9th clock. <16> The master device and slave device set a wait status (SCLA0 = 0) at the falling edge of the 9th clock, and both the master device and slave device issue an interrupt (INTIICA0: end of transfer). <17> When the master device issues a stop condition (SPT0 = 1), the bus data line is cleared (SDAA0 = 0) and the master device releases the wait status. The master device then waits until the bus clock line is set (SCLA0 = 1). <18> The slave device acknowledges the NACK, halts transmission, and releases the wait status (WREL0 = 1) to end communication. Once the slave device releases the wait status, the bus clock line is set (SCLA0 = 1). <19> Once the master device recognizes that the bus clock line is set (SCLA0 = 1) and after the stop condition setup time has elapsed, the master device sets the bus data line (SDAA0 = 1) and issues a stop condition (i.e. SCLA0 =1 changes SDAA0 from 0 to 1). The slave device detects the generated stop condition and slave device issue an interrupt (INTIICA0: stop condition). Remark <1> to <19> in Figure 16-33 represent the entire procedure for communicating data using the I2C bus. Figure 16-33 (1) Start condition ~ address ~ data shows the processing from <1> to <7>, Figure 16-33 (2) Address ~ data ~ data shows the processing from <3> to <12>, and Figure 16-33 (3) Data ~ data ~ stop condition shows the processing from <8> to <19>. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1101 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.1 Overview The LIN/UART module is a hardware LIN communication controller that supports LIN Specification Package Revision 1.3, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2 and SAE J2602, and automatically performs frame communication and error determination. The LIN/UART module is provided with UART mode and can also be used as a UART. Table 17-1 gives the LIN/UART module specifications and Figures 17-1 and 17-2 show block diagrams of the LIN/UART module. Table 17-1. LIN/UART Module Specifications Item Channel count Specifications RL78/F13: 1 channel RL78/F14: 1 to 2 channels LIN Protocol communication Variable frame function structure LIN Specification Package Revision 1.3, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2 and SAE J2602 Master Slave Break reception width: 9.5 or 10.5 Tbits [for fixed baud rate] Break (low) transmission width: 13 to 28 Tbits Break delimiter transmission width: 1 to 4 Tbits Inter-byte space (header): 0 to 7 Tbits (space between Sync field and ID field)Note 1 Response space: 0 to 7 TbitsNote 1 Inter-byte space: 0 to 3 Tbits (space between data bytes in response area) Wake-up: 1 to 16 Tbits : 10 or 11 Tbits [for auto baud rate] Response space: 0 to 7 Tbits Inter-byte space: 0 to 3 Tbits (space between data bytes in response area) Wake-up: 1 to 16 Tbits Checksum Response field data byte count Frame communication modes Automatic operation for both transmission and reception Classic or enhanced selectable (for each frame) Variable from 0 to 8 bytes Multi-byte (9 or more bytes) response transmission and reception also possible Master Mode in which header transmission and response transmission/reception is started with a single transmission start request Mode in which header transmission and response transmission are started with separate transmission start requests (frame separate mode) Slave Mode in which header is automatically received with fixed baud rate Mode in which header is automatically received with the baud rate set according to the sync field measurement result of the sync field and break field detected Wake-up transmission and reception Status R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 LIN wake-up mode provided Wake-up transmission (1 to 16 Tbits) Wake-up reception Low width of input signals measured Master Successful frame/wake-up transmission Successful header transmission Successful frame/wake-up receptionNote 2 Successful data 1 reception Error detection Operation mode (LIN reset mode, LIN wake-up mode, LIN operation mode, LIN self-test mode) 1102 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Item LIN Status communication function Error status Specifications Slave Successful frame/wake-up transmission Successful frame/wake-up receptionNote 2 Successful header reception Successful data 1 reception Error detection Operation mode (LIN reset mode, LIN wake-up mode, LIN operation mode, LIN self-test mode) Master Bit error Checksum error Frame timeout error/response timeout error Physical bus error Framing error Response preparation error Slave Bit error Checksum error Frame timeout error/response timeout error Sync field error ID parity error Framing error Response preparation error Baud rate selection Baud rate conforming to the LIN specifications generated using baud rate generator Test mode Self-test mode for user evaluation Interrupt function R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Master Successful header/frame/wake-up transmission Successful frame/wake-up receptionNote 2 Error detection Slave Successful frame/wake-up transmission Header/frame/wake-up receptionNote 2 Error detection 1103 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Item UART communication function Specifications Data buffer Transmission data buffer/transmission data buffer for wait (exclusively for transmission; data length of 1, 7, 8, and 9 bits supported) UART buffer (exclusively for transmission; variable data length from 1 to 9 bits; data length of 7 and 8 bits supported) Reception data buffer (exclusively for reception; data length of 1, 7, 8, and 9 bits supported) Data format Character length: 7 or 8 bits 9 bits including the expansion bit supported. Transmission stop bit: 1 or 2 bits Parity function: odd, even, 0, or none LSB- or MSB-first transfer selectable Reverse input/output of transmission/reception data Status Transmission status Reception status Successful UART buffer transmission Error SUM Expansion bit detection ID match Reset mode status Error status Bit error Framing error Parity error Overrun error Baud rate selection With the baud rate generator incorporated, any baud rate can be set. If the expected level is detected for any expansion bit, the 8 bits of the received data can be compared to the preset register data. The stop bit received is guaranteed (start of transmission can be delayed when start of transmission is attempted during reception of the stop bit). Interrupt function Notes 1. 2. Transmission start/successful transmission Successful reception Status detection Since the same register is used for setting, the inter-byte space (header) = response space. For wake-up reception, the low level width of the input signal is indicated. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1104 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Figure 17-1. LIN/UART Module Block Diagram (1) LINnMCK fCLK fMX 0 LINn baud rate generator 1 fb fc fd LINn registers Data bus fa LTXDn LINn protocol controller LRXDn LINn transmission interrupt LINn interrupt control circuit INTLINnTRM INTLINnRVC INTLINnSTA/ INTLINn Successful LINn reception interrupt LINn reception status error interrupt LINn interrupt LIN/UART module INTLINnWUP Edge detection circuit n = 0, 1 LTXDn, LRXDn: LIN/UART module I/O pins LINn baud rate generator: Generates the LIN/UART module communication clock signal. LINn registers: LIN/UART module registers LINn interrupt controller: Controls interrupt requests generated by the LIN/UART module. (n = 0, 1) Figure 17-2. LIN/UART Module Block Diagram (2) PER2 LCHSELNote 4 LINCKSEL LIN1EN LIN0EN LIN1MCKE LIN0MCKE LIN1MCK LIN0MCK LSEL0 f CLK Selector LIN/UART module channel 0 Note 4 INTLIN0TRM INTLIN0RVC INTLIN0STA/INTLIN0 LIN channel select controller Selector LIN/UART module channel 1 Note 4 LTXD1 LRXD1 Internal bus f MX LTXD0 LRXD0 INTLIN1TRM INTLIN1RVC INTLIN1STA/INTLIN1 Note 2 INTP11 Note 1 Selector Edge detector INTP11/INTLIN0WUP Note 3 INTP12 Note 1 Selector ISC3 ISC INTP12/INTLIN1WUP Edge detector ISC2 EGP12 EGP1 EGP11 EGN12 EGN11 EGN1 Notes 1. For details, see CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS. 2. INTP11 is mounted only on the 80-pin products of RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated), 64- and 80-pin products of RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated), and 64-, 80-, and 100-pin products of RL78/F14. 3. INTP12 is mounted only on 64-, 80-, and 100-pin products of RL78/F14. 4. Only the registers of the channel that is selected with the LCHSEL register can be accessed using the CPU instructions and by the DTC. For the product incorporating one channel, set the LSEL0 bit in the LCHSEL register to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1105 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Table 17-2 shows the I/O pins used in the LIN/UART module. Table 17-2. LIN/UART Module I/O Pins Module Symbol LINn Pin Name Input/Output Function LRXDn Input LIN communication function Input pin of the UART communication function LTXDn Output LIN communication function Output pin of the UART communication function (n = 0, 1) The appropriate mode should be used for the LIN/UART module according to the application: LIN master, LIN slave, or UART. LIN master - LIN reset mode - LIN mode (LIN master mode) LIN wake-up mode LIN operation mode - LIN self-test mode LIN slave - LIN reset mode - LIN mode (LIN slave mode [auto baud rate] or LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate]) LIN wake-up mode LIN operation mode - LIN self-test mode UART - LIN reset mode - UART mode R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1106 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.2 Register Descriptions Table 17-3 lists the LIN/UART module-related registers. Table 17-3. List of LIN/UART Module-Related Registers Register Name Symbol LIN Master LIN Slave UART Peripheral enable register 2 PER2 Input switch control register ISC LIN channel select register LCHSEL LIN clock select register LINCKSEL External interrupt rising edge enable registers 0, 1 EGP0, EGP1 External interrupt falling edge enable registers 0, 1 EGN0, EGN1 LIN wake-up baud rate select register LWBR0/LWBR1 LIN/UART baud rate prescaler registers LBRP0/LBRP1 -- LIN/UART baud rate prescaler 0 register LBRP00/LBRP10 LIN/UART baud rate prescaler 1 register LBRP01/LBRP11 LIN self-test control register LSTC0/LSTC1 -- UART standby control register LUSC0/LUSC1 -- -- LIN/UART mode register LMD0/LMD1 LIN break field configuration register/ UART configuration register LBFC0/LBFC1 LIN/UART space configuration register LSC0/LSC1 LIN wake-up configuration register LWUP0/LWUP1 -- LIN interrupt enable register LIE0/LIE1 -- LIN/UART error detection enable register LEDE0/LEDE1 LIN/UART control register LCUC0/LCUC1 LIN/UART transmission control register LTRC0/LTRC1 LIN/UART mode status register LMST0/LMST1 LIN/UART status register LST0/LST1 LIN/UART error status register LEST0/LEST1 LIN/UART data field configuration register LDFC0/LDFC1 LIN/UART ID buffer register LIDB0/LIDB1 LIN checksum buffer register LCBR0/LCBR1 -- UART data buffer 0 register LUDB00/LUDB10 -- -- LIN/UART data buffer 1 register LDB01/LDB11 LIN/UART data buffer 2 register LDB02/LDB12 LIN/UART data buffer 3 register LDB03/LDB13 LIN/UART data buffer 4 register LDB04/LDB14 LIN/UART data buffer 5 register LDB05/LDB15 LIN/UART data buffer 6 register LDB06/LDB16 LIN/UART data buffer 7 register LDB07/LDB17 LIN/UART data buffer 8 register LDB08/LDB18 UART operation enable register LUOER0/LUOER1 -- -- UART option register 1 LUOR01/LUOR11 -- -- R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1107 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Register Name UART transmission data register UART reception data register UART wait transmission data register Symbol LIN Master LIN Slave UART LUTDR0/LUTDR1 -- -- LUTDR0L/ LUTDR1L -- -- LUTDR0H/ LUTDR1H -- -- LURDR0/LURDR1 -- -- LURDR0L/ LURDR1L -- -- LURDR0H/ LURDR1H -- -- -- -- LUWTDR0L/ LUWTDR1L -- -- LUWTDR0H/ LUWTDR1H -- -- LUWTDR0/LUWTDR1 : Used --: Not used When writing to a register not used, write 00H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1108 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.2.1 LIN Registers for Master Mode (1) Input Switch Control Register (ISC) The ISC2 and ISC3 bits in the ISC register are used in the LIN/UART module (RLIN3). Setting bit 2 or bit 3 to 1 selects the input signal of the serial data input pin for the LIN/UART module as the external interrupt input. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Address: F0073H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ISC 0 0 0 0 ISC3 ISC2 0 ISC0 ISC3 Switching inputs for external interrupt INTP12 0 INTP12 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. 1 LRXD1 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. ISC2 Switching inputs for external interrupt INTP11 0 INTP11 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. 1 LRXD0 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. ISC0 Switching inputs for external interrupt INTP0 0 INTP0 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. (normal operation) 1 RXD0 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. (wake-up signal detection) Caution Bits 7 to 4 and 1 should always be set to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1109 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (2) LIN Channel Select Register (LCHSEL) Address: F007BH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- LSEL0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 LSEL0 LIN Channel Select 0: Selects LIN0. (LIN0 registers can be accessed.) 1: Selects LIN1. (LIN1 registers can be accessed.) R/W 7 to 1 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W LSEL0 bit (LIN channel select bit) Since the LIN/UART module registers are not directly mapped on the CPU memory map, they should be accessed via the register windows. The register windows are mapped on addresses F06C1H to F06E9H. Setting a value to the LSEL0 bit maps all the registers of the corresponding channel on the register window. Setting the LSEL0 bit to 0 maps the LIN0 registers. Setting the LSEL0 bit to 1 maps the LIN1 registers. With the product incorporating one channel, set the LSEL0 bit to 0. With the product incorporating two channels, set the LSEL0 bit to the applicable value before accessing a register of the channel to use. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1110 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (3) Peripheral Enable Register 2 (PER2) The PER2 register is used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to the hardware that is not used is also stopped so as to decrease the power consumption and noise. To use the peripheral functions which are controlled by this register, set (1) the bit corresponding to each function before specifying the initial settings of the peripheral functions. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Address: F02C1H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0> PER2 0 0 0 0 LIN1EN LIN0EN 0 CAN0EN Note 1 LIN1EN Note 2 Control of LIN1 input clock supply Note 1 0 Stops input clock supply. Disables writing to the SFR used by LIN1. LIN1 is in the reset state. 1 Enables input clock supply. Enables reading from and writing to the SFR used by LIN1. LIN0EN Control of LIN0 input clock supply 0 Stops input clock supply. Disables writing to the SFR used by LIN0. LIN0 is in the reset state. 1 Enables input clock supply. Enables reading from and writing to the SFR used by LIN0. CAN0EN Control of CAN input clock supply Note 2 0 Stops input clock supply. Disables writing to the SFR used by CAN. CAN is in the reset state. 1 Enables input clock supply. Enables reading from and writing to the SFR used by CAN. Notes 1. Only in the RL78/F14 products with at least 128 Kbytes of code flash memory and the 100-pin products of the RL78/F14. 2. Caution Only in the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and RL78/F14 products. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. Bits 0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products Bits 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products and the RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and up to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Bits 1, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F14 products with at least 128 Kbytes of code flash memory and the 100-pin products of the RL78/F14 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1111 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (4) LIN Clock Select Register (LINCKSEL) This register is used to control the communication clock source supplied to the LIN. Address: F02C3H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 <5> <4> 3 2 <1> <0> LINCKSEL 0 0 LIN1MCKE LIN0MCKE 0 0 LIN1MCK LIN0MCK Note LIN1MCKE Note Control of supplying or stopping LIN1 communication clock source Note 0 Stops LIN communication clock source supply. 1 Enables LIN communication clock source supply. LIN0MCKE Control of supplying or stopping LIN0 communication clock source 0 Stops LIN communication clock source supply. 1 Enables LIN communication clock source supply. LIN1MCK Control of selecting LIN1 communication clock source Note 0 Selects the fCLK clock. 1 Selects the fMX clock. LIN0MCK Note Control of selecting LIN0 communication clock source 0 Selects the fCLK clock. 1 Selects the fMX clock. Only in the RL78/F14 products with at least 48 pins and 128 Kbytes or more of code flash memory and the 100-pin products of the RL78/F14. Cautions 1. Select the LINn operating clock with the LINnMCK bit before setting the LINnMCKE (n = 0, 1) bit to 1 (operating clock is supplied). 2. When operating LINn in SNOOZE mode, set the LINnMCK bit to 0. <R> 3. In case of LINnMCK is set to 1, do not used the timeout error detection. In that case, set at least 1.2 times the frequency of the LIN communication clock source to the fCLK clock. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1112 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (5) External interrupt rising edge enable registers (EGP0, EGP1), external interrupt falling edge enable registers (EGN0, EGN1) For details, see 21.3.4 External interrupt rising edge enable registers (EGP0, EGP1), external interrupt falling edge enable registers (EGN0, EGN1). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1113 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (6) LIN Wake-up Baud Rate Select Register (LWBRn) Address: F06C1H 7 6 0 0 5 4 3 0 0 0 NSPB[3:0] Value after reset: Bit Symbol 2 1 LPRS[2:0] Bit Name 0 LWBR0 0 Function 0 LWBR0 Wake-up Baud Rate Select 3 to 1 LPRS [2:0] Prescaler Clock Select b3 b1 7 to 4 NSPB [3:0] Bit Sampling Count Select b7 0 0: When LIN1.3 is used 1: When LIN 2.x is used 0 0 0: 1/1 0 0 1: 1/2 0 1 0: 1/4 0 1 1: 1/8 1 0 0: 1/16 1 0 1: 1/32 1 1 0: 1/64 1 1 1: 1/128 b4 0 0 0 0: 16 sampling 1 1 1 1: 16 sampling Settings other than the above are prohibited. 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Set the LWBRn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). LWBR0 bit (wake-up baud rate select bit) When LIN Specification Package Revision 1.3 is used, set the LWBR0 bit in the LWBRn register to 0. This allows the 2.5Tbit or longer low level width of the input signal to be measured. When LIN Specification Package Revision 2.x is used, set the LWBR0 bit to 1. When the LWBR0 bit is set to 1, fa is always selected as the LIN system clock (fLIN) in LIN wake-up mode regardless of the setting of LCKS bits in the LMDn register (setting of LCKS bits not affected). This allows the 2.5-Tbit or longer low level width of the input signal to be measured. Setting the baud rate to 19200 bps with fa selected allows 130 s or longer low level width of the input signal to be detected in LIN wake-up mode regardless of the setting of LCKS bits in the LMDn register. LPRS bits (prescaler clock select bits) The LPRS bits select the frequency division ratio for the prescaler. The LIN communication clock source frequency is divided based on this prescaler. NSPB bits (bit sampling count select bits) The NSPB bits select the number of sampling in one Tbit (reciprocal of the baud rate). In LIN master mode (LIN/UART mode select bits in LIN/UART mode register = 00b), set the NSPB bits to 0000b or 1111b (16 sampling). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1114 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (7) LIN/UART Baud Rate Prescaler 0 Register (LBRPn0) Address: F06C2H Value after reset: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 to 0 Function Assuming that the value set in this register is N (0 to 255), the baud rate prescaler 0 divides the frequency of the prescaler clock by N 1. Setting Range 00H to FFH R/W R/W Set the LBRPn0 register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). The value set in this register is used to control the frequency of baud rate clock sources fa, fb, and fc. Assuming that the value set in this register is N, baud rate prescaler 0 divides the frequency of the clock that is selected by the LPRS bits by N + 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1115 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (8) LIN/UART Baud Rate Prescaler 1 Register (LBRPn1) Address: F06C3H Value after reset: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 to 0 Function Assuming that the value set in this register is M (0 to 255), the baud rate prescaler 1 divides the frequency of the prescaler clock by M1. Setting Range 00H to FFH R/W R/W Set the LBRPn1 register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). The value set in this register is used to control the frequency of baud rate clock source fd. Assuming that the value set in this register is M, baud rate prescaler 1 divides the frequency of the clock that is selected by the LPRS bits (prescaler clock select bits) by M+1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1116 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (9) LIN Self-Test Control Register (LSTCn) Address: F06C4H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSTM Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function 0 R/W 7 to 0 Writing A7H, 58H, and 01H successively to these bits places the LIN/UART module into LIN self-test mode. R/W 0 LSTM R/W LIN Self-Test Mode 0: The module is not in LIN self-test mode 1: The module is in LIN self-test mode. The LSTCn register cancels protection of LIN self-test mode. Set the LSTCn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Writing A7H, 58H, and 01H successively to the LSTCn register places the module into LIN self-test mode. When successive writing is completed thus placing LIN self-test mode to be entered, the LSTM bit is set to 1. Do not write any other value during successive writing. For making transition to LIN self-test mode, refer to 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. Reading bits 6 to 1 returns 000000b, and reading bit 7 returns the undefined value. LSTM bit (LIN self-test mode bit) When transition to LIN self-test mode is completed, the LSTM bit is set to 1. For leaving LIN self-test mode, refer to 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. Writing 1 to this bit does not affect the value of the LSTCn register if it is not a part of successive writing of A7H, 58H, and 01H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1117 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (10) LIN/UART Mode Register (LMDn) Address: F06C8H Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 -- -- LRDNFS LIOS 0 0 0 0 Symbol 3 2 1 0 0 LCKS[1:0] 0 Bit Name 0 LMD[1:0] 0 Function R/W 1, 0 LMD[1:0] LIN/UART Mode Select b1 b0 3, 2 LCKS[1:0] LIN System Clock Select b3 b2 4 LIOS LIN Interrupt Output Select 0: LIN interrupt is used. 1: Transmission interrupt, successful reception interrupt, and reception status interrupt are used. R/W 5 LRDNFS LIN Reception Data Noise Filtering Disable 0: The noise filter is enabled. 1: The noise filter is disabled. R/W 6 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0 R/W 0 0: LIN master mode 0 0 1 1 0: fa (Clock generated by baud rate prescaler 0) 1: fb (1/2 clock generated by baud rate prescaler 0) 0: fc (1/8 clock generated by baud rate prescaler 0) 1: fd (1/2 clock generated by baud rate prescaler 1) R/W R/W Set the LMDn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). LMD[1:0] bits (LIN/UART mode select bits) The LMD bits select the LIN/UART module mode. To use the LIN/UART module as a LIN master, set these bits to 00b. With 00b set, the LIN/UART module operates in LIN master mode. LCKS[1:0] bits (LIN system clock select bits) The LCKS bits select the clock to be input to the protocol controller. With 00b set, the protocol controller is provided with fa (clock generated by baud rate prescaler 0). With 01b set, the protocol controller is provided with fb (1/2 clock generated by baud rate prescaler 0). With 10b set, the protocol controller is provided with fc (1/8 clock generated by baud rate prescaler 0). With 11b set, the protocol controller is provided with fd (1/2 clock generated by baud rate prescaler 1). When the LWBR0 bit in the LWBRn register is 1 (LIN 2.x is used) and the LMSTn register is 01h (LIN wake-up mode), fa is always input to the protocol controller regardless of the setting of LCKS bits (setting of LCKS bits not affected). LIOS bit (LIN interrupt output select bit) The LIOS bit selects the number of interrupt outputs from the LIN/UART module. With 0 set, the LIN interrupt is generated from the LIN/UART module. With 1 set, the transmission interrupt, successful reception interrupt, and reception status interrupt are generated from the LIN/UART module. For each interrupt source, refer to 17.9 Interrupts. LRDNFS bit (LIN reception data noise filtering disable bit) The LRDNFS bit enables or disables the noise filter when receiving data. With 0 set, the noise filter is enabled when receiving data. With 1 set, the noise filter is disabled when receiving data. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1118 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (11) LIN Break Field Configuration Register/UART Configuration Register (LBFCn) Address: F06C9H Value after reset: 7 6 -- -- 0 0 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 BDT[1:0] 0 1 0 0 0 BLT[3:0] Bit Symbol Bit Name Function 3 to 0 BLT[3:0] Transmission Break (Low) Width Select b3 5, 4 BDT[1:0] Transmission Break Delimiter (High) Width Select b5 b4 6 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W b0 0 0 0 0: 13 Tbits 0 0 0 1: 14 Tbits 0 0 1 0: 15 Tbits 1 1 1 0: 27 Tbits 1 1 1 1: 28 Tbits 0 0 1 1 0: 1 Tbit 1: 2 Tbits 0: 3 Tbits 1: 4 Tbits R/W R/W R/W Set the LBFCn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Some combinations of the set values result in the length of a frame exceeding the frame timeout time. Set the appropriate values in this register. BLT[3:0] bits (transmission break (low) width select bits) The BLT bits set the break (low) width of the transmission frame header. 13 Tbits to 28 Tbits can be set. BDT bits (transmission break delimiter (high) width select bits) The BDT bits set the break delimiter (high) width of the transmission frame header field. 1 Tbit to 4 Tbits can be set. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1119 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (12) LIN/UART Space Configuration Register (LSCn) Address: F06CAH Value after reset: 7 6 -- -- 0 0 5 4 IBS[1:0] 0 3 2 -- 0 Bit Name 0 1 0 IBSH[2:0] 0 0 0 Bit Symbol Function 2 to 0 IBSH[2:0] Inter-Byte Space (Header)/ Response Space Select b2 b0 3 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 5, 4 IBS[1:0] Inter-Byte Space Select b5 b4 R/W 7, 6 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 0 0 0: 0 Tbit 0 0 1: 1 Tbit 0 1 0: 2 Tbits 0 1 1: 3 Tbits 1 0 0: 4 Tbits 1 0 1: 5 Tbits 1 1 0: 6 Tbits 1 1 1: 7 Tbits 0 0: 0 Tbit 0 1: 1 Tbit 1 0: 2 Tbits 1 1: 3 Tbits R/W R/W R/W Set the LSCn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Some combinations of the set values result in the length of a frame or a response exceeding the timeout time. Set the appropriate values in this register. IBSH[2:0] bits (inter-byte space (header)/response space select bits) The IBSH bits set the width of the inter-byte space (header) of the transmission frame header field and the response space. 0 Tbit to 7 Tbits can be set. The response space setting is enabled only during response transmission; setting is disabled during response reception. The inter-byte space (header) is equal to the response space. IBS[1:0] bits (inter-byte space select bits) The IBS bits set the width of the inter-byte space of the transmission frame response field. 0 Tbit to 3 Tbits can be set. These bits are enabled only during response transmission; these are disabled during response reception. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1120 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (13) LIN Wake-up Configuration Register (LWUPn) Address: F06CBH 7 6 0 0 5 4 0 0 WUTL[3:0] Value after reset: Bit Symbol 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Function R/W 3 to 0 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 to 4 WUTL[3:0] Wake-up Transmission Low Width Select b7 R/W b4 0 0 0 0: 1 Tbit 0 0 0 1: 2 Tbits 0 0 1 0: 3 Tbits 0 0 1 1: 4 Tbits : 1 1 0 0: 13 Tbits 1 1 0 1: 14 Tbits 1 1 1 0: 15 Tbits 1 1 1 1: 16 Tbits Set the LWUPn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). WUTL[3:0] bits (wake-up transmission low width select bits) The WUTL bits set the low width of the wake-up signal transmission. 1 Tbit to 16 Tbits can be set. When the LWBR0 bit in the LWBRn register is 1 (LIN 2.x is used), fa is always selectd as the LIN system clock (fLIN) regardless of the setting of LCKS bits in the LMDn register (setting of LCKS bits not affected). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1121 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (14) LIN Interrupt Enable Register (LIEn) Address: F06CCH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- SHIE ERRIE FRCIE FTCIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 FTCIE Successful Frame/Wake-up Transmission Interrupt Enable 0: Disables successful frame/wake-up transmission interrupt. 1: Enables successful frame/wake-up transmission interrupt. R/W 1 FRCIE Successful Frame/Wake-up Reception Interrupt Enable 0: Disables successful frame/wake-up reception interrupt. 1: Enables successful frame/wake-up reception interrupt. R/W 2 ERRIE Error Detection Interrupt Enable 0: Disables error detection interrupt. 1: Enables error detection interrupt. R/W 3 SHIE Successful Header Transmission Interrupt Enable 0: Disables successful header transmission interrupt. 1: Enables successful header transmission interrupt. R/W 7 to 4 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W Set the LIEn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). FTCIE bit (successful frame/wake-up transmission interrupt enable bit) The FTCIE bit enables or disables interrupt generation upon successful transmission of a frame or a wake-up signal. With 0 set, the interrupt is not generated when the FTC flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. With 1 set, the interrupt is generated when the FTC flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. FRCIE bit (successful frame/wake-up reception interrupt enable bit) The FRCIE bit enables or disables interrupt generation upon successful reception of a frame or a wake-up signal (counting of low width of the input signal). With 0 set, the interrupt is not generated when the FRC flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. With 1 set, the interrupt is generated when the FRC flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. ERRIE bit (error detection interrupt enable bit) The ERRIE bit enables or disables interrupt generation upon detection of an error. With 0 set, the interrupt is not generated when the ERR flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. With 1 set, the interrupt is generated when the ERR flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. Interrupt sources can be the bit error, physical bus error, frame/response timeout error, framing error, checksum error, and response preparation error. Detection of the bit error, physical bus error, frame/response timeout error, and framing error can be enabled or disabled using the LEDEn register. SHIE bit (successful header transmission interrupt enable bit) The SHIE bit enables or disables interrupt generation upon successful transmission of a header. With 0 set, the interrupt is not generated when the HTRC flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. With 1 set, the interrupt is generated when the HTRC flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1122 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (15) LIN/UART Error Detection Enable Register (LEDEn) Address: F06CDH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LTES -- -- -- FERE FTERE PBERE BERE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 BERE Bit Error Detection Enable 0: Disables bit error detection. 1: Enables bit error detection. R/W 1 PBERE Physical Bus Error Detection Enable 0: Disables physical bus error detection. 1: Enables physical bus error detection. R/W 2 FTERE Timeout Error Detection Enable 0: Disables frame/response timeout error detection. 1: Enables frame/response timeout error detection. R/W 3 FERE Framing Error Detection Enable 0: Disables framing error detection. 1: Enables framing error detection. R/W 4 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 5 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 6 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 LTES Timeout Error Select 0: Frame timeout error 1: Response timeout error R/W Set the LEDEn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). BERE bit (bit error detection enable bit) The BERE bit enables or disables detection of the bit error. <R> Set 1(the bit error detection enables) to this bit. The bit error detection result of the bit error is indicated in the BER flag in the LESTn register. For details of the bit error, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. PBERE bit (physical bus error detection enable bit) The PBERE bit enables or disables detection of the physical bus error. With 0 set, the physical bus error is not detected. With 1 set, the physical bus error is detected. When this bit is set to 1, the detection result is indicated in the PBER flag in the LESTn register. For details of the physical bus error, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. FTERE bit (timeout error detection enable bit) The FTERE bit enables or disables detection of the frame timeout error or the response timeout error. With 0 set, the frame timeout error or response timeout error is not detected. With 1 set, the frame timeout error or response timeout error is detected. When this bit is set to 1, the detection result is indicated in the FTER flag in the LESTn register. With the LTES bit, either the frame timeout error or response timeout error can be selected. Do not use the timeout error if response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received. For details of the timeout error, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1123 RL78/F13, F14 <R> CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) FERE bit (framing error detection enable bit) The FERE bit enables or disables detection of the framing error. Set 1(the framing error detection enables) to this bit. The framing error detection result is indicated in the FER flag in the LESTn register. For details of the framing error, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. LTES bit (timeout error select bit) The LTES bit selects the specific timeout function to be used. With 0 set, the timeout function applies to frame timeout. With 1 set, the timeout function applies to response timeout. For details of the timeout error, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1124 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (16) LIN/UART Control Register (LCUCn) Address: F06CEH Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- OM1 OM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 OM0 LIN Reset 0: LIN reset mode is caused. 1: LIN reset mode is canceled. R/W 1 OM1 LIN Mode Select 0: LIN wake-up mode is caused. 1: LIN operation mode is caused. R/W 7 to 2 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W Set the LCUCn register to 01H to cause a transition to LIN wake-up mode after canceling LIN reset mode, and set the LCUCn register to 03H to cause a transition to LIN operation mode. In LIN self-test mode, set the LCUCn register to 03H after a transition to LIN self-test mode is completed. After a value is written to this register, confirm that the value written is actually indicated in the LMSTn register before writing another value. OM0 bit (LIN reset bit) The OM0 bit selects either causing a transition to LIN reset mode or canceling LIN reset mode. With 0 set, LIN reset mode is caused. With 1 set, LIN reset mode is canceled. OM1 bit (LIN mode select bit) The OM1 bit selects the specific operation mode (either LIN wake-up mode or LIN operation mode) after canceling LIN reset mode. With 0 set, LIN wake-up mode is caused. With 1 set, LIN operation mode is caused. This register is valid only when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 1. Writing a value to this bit is disabled while the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1125 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (17) LIN/UART Transmission Control Register (LTRCn) Address: F06D0H Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- RTS FTS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 FTS Frame Transmission or Wake-up Transmission/Reception Start 0: Frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception is stopped. 1: Frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception is started. R/W 1 RTS Response Transmission/Reception Start 0: Response transmission/reception is stopped in frame separate mode. 1: Response transmission/reception is started in frame separate mode. R/W 2 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 to 3 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W FTS bit (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception start bit) Set the FTS bit to 1 to start frame or wake-up transmission. Also set this bit to 1 to allow wake-up reception (counting of the low width of the input signal). Only 1 can be written to this bit; 0 cannot be written. Writing a value to this bit is disabled when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). This bit is set to 0 upon completion of frame or wake-up communication and transition to LIN reset mode. RTS bit (response transmission/reception start bit) Set the RTS bit to 1 in frame separate mode after header transmission is started (FTS bit is 1) and response transmission data is ready. Once set, this bit is automatically cleared to 0 upon completion of frame communication or transition to LIN reset mode. Only 1 can be written to this bit; 0 cannot be written. To write 1 to this bit, write 02H to the LTRCn register by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction. Writing a value to this bit is disabled when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Writing a value to this bit is disabled when the FTS bit is 0 (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception is halted). When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received, set this bit to 1 each time a data group (variable from 0 to 8 bytes) is transmitted or received. Once set, this bit is automatically cleared to 0 upon completion of data group communication or transition to LIN reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1126 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (18) LIN/UART Mode Status Register (LMSTn) Address: F06D1H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- OMM1 OMM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 OMM0 LIN Reset Status Monitor 0: The module is in LIN reset mode. 1: The module is not in LIN reset mode. R 1 OMM1 LIN Mode Status Monitor 0: The module is in LIN wake-up mode. 1: The module is in LIN operation mode. R 7 to 2 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W OMM0 bit (LIN reset status monitor) OMM1 bit (LIN mode status monitor) The OMM0 and OMM1 bits indicate the current operation mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1127 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (19) LIN/UART Status Register (LSTn) Address: F06D2H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HTRC D1RC -- -- ERR -- FRC FTC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 FTC Successful Frame/Wake-up Transmission Flag 0: Frame or wake-up transmission has not been completed. 1: Frame or wake-up transmission has been completed. R/W 1 FRC Successful Frame/Wake-up Reception Flag 0: Frame or wake-up reception has not been completed. 1: Frame or wake-up reception has been completed. R/W 2 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 3 ERR Error Detection Flag 0: No error has been detected. 1: Error has been detected. 4, 5 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 6 D1RC Successful Data 1 Reception Flag 0: Data 1 reception has not been completed. 1: Data 1 reception has been completed. R/W 7 HTRC Successful Header Transmission Flag 0: Header transmission has not been completed. 1: Header transmission has been completed. R/W R The LSTn register is automatically cleared to 00H upon transition to LIN reset mode and start of the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1). In LIN reset mode, writing to this register is disabled. In LIN reset mode, the register retains 00H. To clear the specific bits in the register, write 0 to the bits to be cleared and write 1 to the other bits by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction. FTC flag (successful frame/wake-up transmission flag) Only 0 can be written to the FTC flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The FTC flag is set to 1 upon completion of response or wake-up transmission. Here, an interrupt is generated if the FTCIE bit in the LIEn register is 1 (interrupt is enabled). To clear the bit to 0 before the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1), write 0 to the bit in LIN operation mode or LIN wake-up mode. When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted, this bit is set to 1 each time a data group (variable from 0 to 8 bytes) is transmitted. Write 0 before starting transmission of the next data group. FRC flag (successful frame/wake-up reception flag) Only 0 can be written to the FRC flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The FRC flag is set to 1 upon completion of response or wake-up reception. Here, an interrupt is generated if the FRCIE bit in the LIEn register is 1 (interrupt is enabled). To clear the bit to 0 before the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1), write 0 to the bit in LIN operation mode or LIN wake-up mode. When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be received, this bit is set to 1 each time a data group (variable from 0 to 8 bytes) is received. Write 0 before starting reception of the next data group. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1128 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) ERR flag (error detection flag) The ERR flag is set to 1 upon detection of an error (any of the LESTn register flags is 1). Here, an interrupt is generated if the ERRIE bit in the LIEn register is 1 (interrupt is enabled). To clear the bit to 0 before the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1), write 0 to the RPER, CSER, FER, FTER, PBER, and BER flags in the LESTn register in LIN operation mode or LIN wake-up mode. This clears the ERR flag to 0. D1RC flag (successful data 1 reception flag) Only 0 can be written to the D1RC flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The D1RC flag is set to 1 upon completion of data 1 reception. Here, an interrupt is not generated. To clear the bit to 0 before the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1), write 0 to the bit in LIN operation mode. When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be received, this bit is set to 1 each time data 1 of a data group (variable from 0 to 8 bytes) is received. Write 0 before starting reception of the next data group. HTRC flag (successful header transmission flag) Only 0 can be written to the HTRC flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The HTRC flag is set to 1 upon completion of header transmission. Here, an interrupt is generated if the SHIE bit in the LIEn register is 1 (interrupt is enabled). To clear the bit to 0 before the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1), write 0 to the bit in LIN operation mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1129 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (20) LIN/UART Error Status Register (LESTn) Address: F06D3H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RPER -- CSER -- FER FTER PBER BER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 BER Bit Error Flag 0: Bit error has not been detected. 1: Bit error has been detected. R/W 1 PBER Physical Bus Error Flag 0: Physical bus error has not been detected. 1: Physical bus error has been detected. R/W 2 FTER Timeout Error Flag 0: Frame/response timeout error has not been detected. 1: Frame/response timeout error has been detected. R/W 3 FER Framing Error Flag 0: Framing error has not been detected. 1: Framing error has been detected. R/W 4 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 5 CSER Checksum Error Flag 0: Checksum error has not been detected. 1: Checksum error has been detected. R/W 6 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 RPER Response Preparation Error Flag 0: Response preparation error has not been detected. 1: Response preparation error has been detected. R/W The LESTn register is automatically cleared to 00H upon transition to LIN reset mode and start of the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1). In LIN reset mode, writing to this register is disabled. In LIN reset mode, the register retains 00H. When the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1 (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception is started), do not write a value to this register. To clear the specific bits in the register, write 0 to the bits to be cleared and write 1 to the other bits by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction. BER flag (bit error flag) Only 0 can be written to the BER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The BER flag is set to 1 upon bit error detection if the BERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (bit error detection is enabled). To clear the bit to 0 before the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1), write 0 to the bit in LIN operation mode or LIN wake-up mode. PBER flag (physical bus error flag) Only 0 can be written to the PBER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The PBER flag is set to 1 upon physical bus error detection if the PBERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (physical bus error detection is enabled). To clear the bit to 0 before the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1), write 0 to the bit in LIN operation mode or LIN wake-up mode. FTER flag (timeout error flag) Only 0 can be written to the FTER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The FTER flag is set to 1 upon frame timeout error or response timeout error detection if the FTERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (frame/response timeout error detection is enabled). To clear the bit to 0 before the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1), write 0 to the bit in LIN operation mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1130 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) FER flag (framing error flag) Only 0 can be written to the FER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The FER flag is set to 1 upon framing error detection if the FERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (framing error detection is enabled). To clear the bit to 0 before the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1), write 0 to the bit in LIN operation mode. CSER flag (checksum error flag) Only 0 can be written to the CSER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The CSER flag is set to 1 upon checksum error detection. To clear the bit to 0 before the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1), write 0 to the bit in LIN operation mode. RPER flag (response preparation error flag) Only 0 can be written to the RPER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The RPER flag is set to 1 upon response preparation error detection. To clear the bit to 0 before the next communication (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1), write 0 to the bit in LIN operation mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1131 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (21) LIN/UART Data Field Configuration Register (LDFCn) Address: F06D4H Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 LSS FSM CSM RFT 0 0 0 0 Symbol 3 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 RFDL[3:0] Bit Name Function b3 b0 R/W R/W 3 to 0 RFDL[3:0] Response Field Length Select 4 RFT Response Field Communication Direction Select 0: Reception 1: Transmission R/W 5 CSM Checksum Select 0: Classic checksum mode 1: Enhanced checksum mode R/W 6 FSM Frame Separate Mode Select 0: Frame separate mode is not set. 1: Frame separate mode is set. R/W 7 LSS Transmission/Reception Continuation Select 0: The data group to be transmitted/received next is the last one. 1: The data group to be transmitted/received next is not the last one. (Checksum is not included.) R/W 0 0 0 0: 0 byte (+ checksum) 0 0 0 1: 1 byte (+ checksum) 0 0 1 0: 2 bytes (+ checksum) : 0 1 1 1: 7 bytes (+ checksum) 1 0 0 0: 8 bytes (+ checksum) Settings other than the above are prohibited. RFDL[3:0] bits (response field length select bits) The RFDL bits set the length of the response field data. The data length can be 0 to 8 bytes excluding the checksum size. To transmit response data with the FSM bit set to 0 (not frame separate mode), set the RFDL bits before header transmission (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0). To transmit response data with the FSM bit set to 1 (frame separate mode), set the RFDL bits before response transmission (the RTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0). To receive response data, set the RFDL bits before header transmission (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0). When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received, set the RFDL bits before data group transmission/reception (RTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0). During communication of response data of 9 bytes or more, only the last data group (the LSS bit is 0) includes the checksum, and no other groups (the LSS bit is 1) include the checksum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1132 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) RFT bit (response field communication direction select bit) The RFT bits set the direction of the response field/wake-up signal communication. With 0 set, reception is performed in the response field. In LIN wake-up mode, wake-up reception is performed (low width of the input signal is counted). With 1 set, transmission is performed in the response field. In LIN wake-up mode, wake-up transmission is performed. Set this bit when the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0 (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception is halted). When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received, do not change the RFT bit setting after the first data group through the last data group. CSM bit (checksum select bit) The CSM bit sets the checksum mode. With 0 set, classic checksum mode is selected. With 1 set, enhanced checksum mode is selected. When the timeout error is used (the FTERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1), the specific timeout time depends on the setting of this bit. For details of the bit error, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. Set this bit when the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0 (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception is halted). When response of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received, do not change the CSM bit setting after the first data group through the last data group. During communication of response data of 9 bytes or more, only the last data group (the LSS bit is 0) includes the checksum, and no other groups (the LSS bit is 1) include the checksum. FSM bit (frame separate mode select bit) The FSM bit sets the response communication mode. With 0 set, frame separate mode is not selected. In this case, after header transmission is started (the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1), response is transmitted/received without the RTS bit in the LTRCn register being set. With 1 set, frame separate mode is selected. If the RTS bit in the LTRCn register is set to 1 during header transmission, response is transmitted after successful header transmission. For response reception (the RFT bit is 0), set the FSM bit to 0. When causing a transition to LIN self-test mode, set this bit to 0 before transition. For details of frame separate mode, refer to 17.4.3 (1) (a) Frame Separate Mode. Set this bit when the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0 (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception is halted). When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received, set the FSM bit to 1. LSS bit (transmission/reception continuation select bit) The LSS bit shows that the next data group to be transmitted or received is not the last one when response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received. With 0 set, data and checksum are transmitted or received because the next data group to be transmitted or received is the last one. With 1 set, only data is transmitted or received, and the checksum is not included because the next data group to be transmitted or received is not the last one. Set the LSS bit only when the FSM bit is 1 (frame separate mode) and response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received. Set this bit while the RTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0 (response transmission/reception stopped). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1133 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (22) LIN/UART ID Buffer Register (LIDBn) Address: F06D5H 7 6 5 4 3 0 0 0 0 IDP[1:0] 0 Value after reset: Bit 2 1 0 0 0 0 ID[5:0] Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 5 to 0 ID[5:0] ID Setting Sets the 6-bit ID value to be transmitted in the ID field. R/W 7, 6 IDP[1:0] Parity Setting Sets the parity bits (P) to be transmitted in the ID field. R/W Set the LIDBn register when the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0 (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception is halted). In LIN self-test mode, this register operates as follows: Write the value to be transmitted before communication. The reversed value of the value received can be read from the register after frame transmission/reception is completed (after loopback). For details of LIN self-test mode, refer to 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. ID bits (ID setting bits) The ID bit sets the 6-bit ID value to be transmitted in the ID field of the LIN frame. IDP bits (parity setting bits) The IDP bits set the parity bits (P0 and P1) to be transmitted in the ID field of the LIN frame. The IDP0 bit is P0 and the IDP1 bit is P1. Since parity is not automatically calculated, set the calculation result. Note that if the erroneous result is set, it is transmitted as is. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1134 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (23) LIN Checksum Buffer Register (LCBRn) Address: F06D6H Value after reset: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 to 0 Function Holds the checksum value transmitted or received. R/W R/W In LIN mode, this register operates as follows: When the RFT bit in the LDFCn register is 1 (transmission): The value transmitted can be read from the register. Read the value after transmission is completed. Writing to this register is invalid. When the RFT bit in the LDFCn register is 0 (reception): The value received can be read from the register. Read the value after reception is completed. Writing to this register is invalid. In LIN self-test mode, this register operates as follows: When the RFT bit in the LDFCn register is 1 (transmission): The reversed value of the value transmitted can be read from the register after frame transmission is completed (after loopback). When the RFT bit in the LDFCn register is 0 (reception): Write the value to be received before communication. The reversed value of the value received can be read from the register after frame transmission/reception is completed (after loopback). For details of LIN self-test mode, refer to 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. Set the LCBRn register when the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0 (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception is halted). When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received, the checksum is appended only to the last data group; this register is not updated for the other data groups. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1135 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (24) LIN/UART Data Buffer m Register (LDBnm) (m = 1 to 8) Address: LDBn1 F06D8H, LDBn2 F06D9H, LDBn3 F06DAH, LDBn4 F06DBH, LDBn5 F06DCH, LDBn6 F06DDH, LDBn7 F06DEH, LDBn8 F06DFH Value after reset: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 to 0 Function Sets the data to be transmitted or allows the received data to be read. Setting Range 00H to FFH R/W R/W For response transmission: These registers set the data to be transmitted in the response field. Use these registers with the following settings. RFT in LDFCn register is 1 (transmission) FSM in LDFCn register is 0 (not frame separate mode) FTS bit in LTRCn register is 0 (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception is halted) RFT in LDFCn register is 1 (transmission) FSM in LDFCn register is 1 (frame separate mode) RTS in LTRCn register is 0 (response transmission/reception is halted) or For response reception: These registers hold the data received in the response field. The received data is overwritten. If an error is detected, the data prior to reception interruption is stored in the register. Do not read these registers when the FTS bit is 1 (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception is started) For transmission of response data of 9 bytes or more: Use these registers with the following settings. RFT in LDFCn register is 1 (transmission) FSM in LDFCn register is 1 (frame separate mode) RTS in LTRCn register is 0 (response transmission/reception is halted) For reception of response data of 9 bytes or more: Do not read these registers when the RTS bit is 1 (response transmission/reception is started). In LIN self-test mode, these registers operate as follows: Write the value to be transmitted before communication. The reversed value of the value received can be read from the register after frame transmission/reception is completed (after loopback). For details of LIN self-test mode, refer to 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1136 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.2.2 LIN Registers for Slave Mode (1) Input Switch Control Register (ISC) The ISC2 and ISC3 bits in the ISC register are used in the LIN/UART module (RLIN3). Setting bit 2 or bit 3 to 1 selects the input signal of the serial data input pin for the LIN/UART module as the external interrupt input. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Address: F0073H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ISC 0 0 0 0 ISC3 ISC2 0 ISC0 ISC3 Switching inputs for external interrupt INTP12 0 INTP12 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. 1 LRXD1 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. ISC2 Switching inputs for external interrupt INTP11 0 INTP11 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. 1 LRXD0 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. ISC0 Switching inputs for external interrupt INTP0 0 INTP0 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. (normal operation) 1 RXD0 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. (wake-up signal detection) Caution Bits 7 to 4 and 1 should always be set to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1137 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (2) LIN Channel Select Register (LCHSEL) Address: F007BH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- LSEL0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 LSEL0 LIN Channel Select 0: Selects LIN0. (LIN0 registers can be accessed.) 1: Selects LIN1. (LIN1 registers can be accessed.) R/W 7 to 1 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W LSEL0 bit (LIN channel select bit) Since the LIN/UART module registers are not directly mapped on the CPU memory map, they should be accessed via the register windows. The register windows are mapped on addresses F06C1H to F06E9H. Setting a value to the LSEL0 bit maps all the registers of the corresponding channel on the register window. Setting the LSEL0 bit to 0 maps the LIN0 registers. Setting the LSEL0 bit to 1 maps the LIN1 registers. With the product incorporating one channel, set the LSEL0 bit to 0. With the product incorporating two channels, set the LSEL0 bit to the applicable value before accessing a register of the channel to use. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1138 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (3) Peripheral Enable Register 2 (PER2) The PER2 register is used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to the hardware that is not used is also stopped so as to decrease the power consumption and noise. To use the peripheral functions which are controlled by this register, set (1) the bit corresponding to each function before specifying the initial settings of the peripheral functions. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Address: F02C1H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0> PER2 0 0 0 0 LIN1EN LIN0EN 0 CAN0EN Note 1 LIN1EN Note 2 Control of LIN1 input clock supply Note 1 0 Stops input clock supply. Disables writing to the SFR used by LIN1. LIN1 is in the reset state. 1 Enables input clock supply. Enables reading from and writing to the SFR used by LIN1. LIN0EN Control of LIN0 input clock supply 0 Stops input clock supply. Disables writing to the SFR used by LIN0. LIN0 is in the reset state. 1 Enables input clock supply. Enables reading from and writing to the SFR used by LIN0. CAN0EN Control of CAN input clock supply Note 2 0 Stops input clock supply. Disables writing to the SFR used by CAN. CAN is in the reset state. 1 Enables input clock supply. Enables reading from and writing to the SFR used by CAN. Notes 1. Only in the RL78/F14 products with at least 128 Kbytes of code flash memory and the 100-pin products of the RL78/F14. 2. Caution Only in the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and RL78/F14 products. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. Bits 0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products Bits 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products and the RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and up to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Bits 1, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F14 products with at least 128 Kbytes of code flash memory and the 100-pin products of the RL78/F14 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1139 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (4) LIN Clock Select Register (LINCKSEL) This register is used to control the communication clock source supplied to the LIN. Address: F02C3H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 <5> <4> 3 2 <1> <0> LINCKSEL 0 0 LIN1MCKE LIN0MCKE 0 0 LIN1MCK LIN0MCK Note LIN1MCKE Note Control of supplying or stopping LIN1 communication clock source Note 0 Stops LIN communication clock source supply. 1 Enables LIN communication clock source supply. LIN0MCKE Control of supplying or stopping LIN0 communication clock source 0 Stops LIN communication clock source supply. 1 Enables LIN communication clock source supply. LIN1MCK Control of selecting LIN1 communication clock supply Note 0 Selects the fCLK clock. 1 Selects the fMX clock. LIN0MCK Note Control of selecting LIN0 communication clock source 0 Selects the fCLK clock. 1 Selects the fMX clock. Only in the RL78/F14 products with at least 48 pins and 128 Kbytes or more of code flash memory and the 100-pin products of the RL78/F14. Cautions 1. Select the LINn operating clock with the LINnMCK bit before setting the LINnMCKE (n = 0, 1) bit to 1 (operating clock is supplied). 2. When operating LINn in SNOOZE mode, set the LINnMCK bit to 0. <R> 3. In case of LINnMCK is set to 1, do not used the timeout error detection. In that case, set at least 1.2 times the frequency of the LIN communication clock source to the fCLK clock. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1140 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (5) External interrupt rising edge enable registers (EGP0, EGP1), external interrupt falling edge enable registers (EGN0, EGN1) For details, see 21.3.4 External interrupt rising edge enable registers (EGP0, EGP1), external interrupt falling edge enable registers (EGN0, EGN1). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1141 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (6) LIN Wake-up Baud Rate Select Register (LWBRn) Address: F06C1H 7 6 0 0 5 4 3 0 0 0 NSPB[3:0] Value after reset: Bit Symbol 2 1 LPRS[2:0] Bit Name 0 0 -- 0 0 Function R/W 0 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 3 to 1 LPRS [2:0] Prescaler Clock Select b3 b1 R/W 7 to 4 NSPB [3:0] Bit Sampling Count Select b7 0 0 0: 1/1 0 0 1: 1/2 0 1 0: 1/4 0 1 1: 1/8 1 0 0: 1/16 1 0 1: 1/32 1 1 0: 1/64 1 1 1: 1/128 b4 0 0 0 0: 16 sampling 0 0 1 1: 4 sampling 0 1 1 1: 8 sampling 1 1 1 1: 16 sampling Settings other than the above are prohibited. R/W Set the LWBRn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). LPRS[2:0] bits (prescaler clock select bits) The LPRS bits select the frequency division ratio for the prescaler. The LIN communication clock source frequency is divided based on this prescaler. In LIN slave mode with auto baud rate (LIN/UART mode select bits in LIN/UART mode register = 10b), set these bits according to the target baud rate so that the frequency of the prescaler clock is the corresponding value from the list. [Target baud rate] [Frequency of prescaler clock] 1 kbps to 20 kbps: 4 MHz Note 1 kbps to less than 2.4 kbps: 4 MHz 2.4 kbps to 20 kbps: 8 MHz to 12 MHz Note Set the NSPB bits to 0011b (4 sampling). NSPB[3:0] bits (bit sampling count select bits) The NSPB bits select the number of sampling in one Tbit (reciprocal of the baud rate). In LIN slave mode with auto baud rate (LIN/UART mode select bits in LIN/UART mode register = 10b), set the NSPB bits to 0011b (4 sampling) or 0111b (8 sampling). In LIN slave mode with fixed baud rate (LIN/UART mode select bits in LIN/UART mode register = 11b), set the NSPB bits to 0000b or 1111b (16 sampling). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1142 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (7) LIN/UART Baud Rate Prescaler Register (LBRPn) Address: F06C3H, F06C2H LBRPn1 Value after reset: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 15 to 0 LBRPn0 Function Assuming that the value set in this register is L (0 to 65535), the baud rate prescaler divides the frequency of the prescaler clock by L + 1. Setting Range 0000H to FFFFH R/W R/W Set the LBRPn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Assuming that the value set in this register is L, the baud rate prescaler divides the frequency of the clock that is selected by the LPRS bits (prescaler clock select bits) in the LWBRn register by L + 1. The LBRPn register can be accessed in 8-bit units using the following registers. Lower 8 bits: LIN/UART baud rate prescaler 0 register (LBRPn0); address F06C2H Upper 8 bits: LIN/UART baud rate prescaler 1 register (LBRPn1); address F06C3H Remark When a sync field reception succeeded in LIN slave mode [auto baud rate], baud rate correction result is set to LBRPn register automatically. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1143 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (8) LIN Self-Test Control Register (LSTCn) Address: F06C4H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LSTM Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function 0 R/W 7 to 0 Writing A7H, 58H, and 01H successively to these bits places the module into LIN self-test mode. R/W 0 LSTM R/W LIN Self-Test Mode 0: The module is not in LIN self-test mode 1: The module is in LIN self-test mode. The LSTCn register cancels protection of LIN self-test mode. Set the LSTCn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Writing A7H, 58H, and 01H successively to the LSTCn register places the module into LIN self-test mode. When successive writing is completed thus placing LIN self-test mode to be entered, the LSTM bit is set to 1. Do not write any other value during successive writing. For making transition to LIN self-test mode, refer to 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. Reading bits 6 to 1 returns 000000b, and reading bit 7 returns the undefined value. LSTM bit (LIN self-test mode bit) When transition to LIN self-test mode is completed, the LSTM bit is set to 1. For leaving LIN self-test mode, refer to 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. Writing 1 to this bit does not affect the value of the LSTCn register if it is not a part of successive writing of A7H, 58H, and 01H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1144 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (9) LIN/UART Mode Register (LMDn) Address: F06C8H Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 -- -- LRDNFS LIOS -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name 1 0 LMD[1:0] 0 0 Function b1 b0 R/W 1, 0 LMD[1:0] LIN/UART Mode Select 3, 2 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 4 LIOS LIN Interrupt Output Select 0: LIN interrupt is used. 1: Transmission interrupt, successful reception interrupt, and reception status interrupt are used. R/W 5 LRDNFS LIN Reception Data Noise Filtering Disable 0: The noise filter is enabled. 1: The noise filter is disabled. R/W 6 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 1 0: LIN slave mode (auto baud rate) 1 1: LIN slave mode (fixed baud rate) R/W Set the LMDn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). LMD[1:0] bits (LIN/UART mode select bits) The LMD bits select the LIN/UART module mode. To use the LIN/UART module as a LIN slave, set these bits to 10b or 11b. With 10b set, the LIN/UART module operates in LIN slave mode with auto baud rate. With 11b set, the LIN/UART module operates in LIN slave mode with fixed baud rate. LIOS bit (LIN interrupt output select bit) The LIOS bit selects the number of interrupt outputs from the LIN/UART module. With 0 set, the LIN interrupt is generated from the LIN/UART module. With 1 set, the transmission interrupt, successful reception interrupt, and reception status interrupt are generated from the LIN/UART module. For each interrupt source, refer to 17.9 Interrupts. LRDNFS bit (LIN reception data noise filtering disable bit) The LRDNFS bit enables or disables the noise filter when receiving data. With 0 set, the noise filter is enabled when receiving data. With 1 set, the noise filter is disabled when receiving data. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1145 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (10) LIN Break Field Configuration Register/UART Configuration Register (LBFCn) Address: F06C9H Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- BLT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 BLT Reception Break (Low) Width Select 0: Reception break (low width) of 9.5/10 or more Tbits is detected. 1: Reception break (low width) of 10.5/11 or more Tbits is detected. R/W 6 to 1 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W Set the LBFCn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). BLT bit (reception break (low) width select bit) The BLT bit sets the critical low width of the received data to be determined as break. In LIN slave mode with auto baud rate (the LMD bits in the LMDn register are 10b): With 0 set, the low width of 10 or more Tbits is detected. With 1 set, the low width of 11 or more Tbits is detected. In LIN slave mode with fixed baud rate (the LMD bits in the LMDn register are 11b): With 0 set, the low width of 9.5 or more Tbits is detected. With 1 set, the low width of 10.5 or more Tbits is detected. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1146 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (11) LIN/UART Space Configuration Register (LSCn) Address: F06CAH Value after reset: Bit 7 6 -- -- 0 0 Symbol 5 4 3 IBS[1:0] 0 2 -- 0 0 Bit Name 1 0 RS[2:0] 0 0 0 Function R/W 2 to 0 RS[2:0] Response Space Select b2 b0 3 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 5, 4 IBS[1:0] Inter-Byte Space Select b5 b4 R/W 7, 6 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 0 0 0: 0 Tbit 0 0 1: 1 Tbit 0 1 0: 2 Tbits 0 1 1: 3 Tbits 1 0 0: 4 Tbits 1 0 1: 5 Tbits 1 1 0: 6 Tbits 1 1 1: 7 Tbits 0 0 1 1 0: 0 Tbit 1: 1 Tbit 0: 2 Tbits 1: 3 Tbits R/W R/W Set the LSCn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Setting is enabled only during response transmission; setting is disabled during response reception. Some combinations of the set values result in the length of a frame or a response exceeding the timeout time. Set the appropriate values in this register. RS[2:0] bits (response space select bits) The RS bits set the width of the response space of the response transmission. 0 Tbit to 7 Tbits can be set. IBS[1:0] bits (inter-byte space select bits) The IBS bits set the width of the inter-byte space of the response transmission. 0 Tbit to 3 Tbits can be set. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1147 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (12) LIN Wake-up Configuration Register (LWUPn) Address: F06CBH 7 6 0 0 5 4 0 0 WUTL[3:0] Value after reset: Bit Symbol 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Function R/W 3 to 0 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 to 4 WUTL[3:0] Wake-up Transmission Low Width Select b7 R/W b4 0 0 0 0: 1 Tbit 0 0 0 1: 2 Tbits 0 0 1 0: 3 Tbits 0 0 1 1: 4 Tbits : 1 1 0 0: 13 Tbits 1 1 0 1: 14 Tbits 1 1 1 0: 15 Tbits 1 1 1 1: 16 Tbits Set the LWUPn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). WUTL[3:0] bits (wake-up transmission low width select bits) The WUTL bits set the low width of the wake-up frame transmission. 1 Tbit to 16 Tbits can be set. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1148 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (13) LIN Interrupt Enable Register (LIEn) Address: F06CCH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- SHIE ERRIE FRCIE FTCIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 FTCIE Successful Frame/Wake-up Transmission Interrupt Enable 0: Disables successful response/wake-up transmission interrupt. 1: Enables successful response/wake-up transmission interrupt. R/W 1 FRCIE Successful Frame/Wake-up Reception Interrupt Enable 0: Disables successful response/wake-up reception interrupt. 1: Enables successful response/wake-up reception interrupt. R/W 2 ERRIE Error Detection Interrupt Enable 0: Disables error detection interrupt. 1: Enables error detection interrupt. R/W 3 SHIE Successful Header Reception Interrupt Enable 0: Disables successful header reception interrupt. 1: Enables successful header reception interrupt. R/W 7 to 4 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W Set the LIEn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). FTCIE bit (successful frame/wake-up transmission interrupt enable bit) The FTCIE bit enables or disables interrupt generation upon successful transmission of a response or a wake-up signal. With 0 set, the interrupt is not generated when the FTC flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. With 1 set, the interrupt is generated when the FTC flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. FRCIE bit (successful frame/wake-up reception interrupt enable bit) The FRCIE bit enables or disables interrupt generation upon successful reception of a response or a wake-up signal (counting of low width of the input signal). With 0 set, the interrupt is not generated when the FRC flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. With 1 set, the interrupt is generated when the FRC flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. ERRIE bit (error detection interrupt enable bit) The ERRIE bit enables or disables interrupt generation upon detection of an error. With 0 set, the interrupt is not generated when the ERR flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. With 1 set, the interrupt is generated when the ERR flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. Interrupt sources can be the bit error, frame/response timeout error, framing error, sync field error, checksum error, ID parity error, and response preparation error. Detection of the bit error, frame/response timeout error, framing error, sync field error, and ID parity error can be enabled or disabled using the LEDEn register. SHIE bit (successful header reception interrupt enable bit) The SHIE bit enables or disables interrupt generation upon successful transmission of a header. With 0 set, the interrupt is not generated when the HTRC flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. With 1 set, the interrupt is generated when the HTRC flag in the LSTn register is set to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1149 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (14) LIN/UART Error Detection Enable Register (LEDEn) Address: F06CDH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LTES IPERE -- SFERE FERE TERE -- BERE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 BERE Bit Error Detection Enable 0: Disables bit error detection. 1: Enables bit error detection. R/W 1 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 2 TERE Timeout Error Detection Enable 0: Disables frame/response timeout error detection. 1: Enables frame/response timeout error detection. R/W 3 FERE Framing Error Detection Enable 0: Disables framing error detection. 1: Enables framing error detection. R/W 4 SFERE Sync Field Error Detection Enable 0: Disables sync field error detection. 1: Enables sync field error detection. R/W 5 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 6 IPERE ID Parity Error Detection Enable 0: Disables ID parity error detection. 1: Enables ID parity error detection. R/W 7 LTES Timeout Error Select 0: Frame timeout error 1: Response timeout error R/W Set the LEDEn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). <R> BERE bit (bit error detection enable bit) The BERE bit enables or disables detection of the bit error. Set 1(the bit error detection enables) to this bit. The bit error detection result of the bit error is indicated in the BER flag in the LESTn register. For details of the bit error, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. TERE bit (timeout error detection enable bit) The TER bit enables or disables detection of the frame timeout error or the response timeout error. With 0 set, the frame timeout error or response timeout error is not detected. With 1 set, the frame timeout error or response timeout error is detected. When this bit is set to 1, the detection result is indicated in the TER flag in the LESTn register. With the LTES bit, either the frame timeout error or response timeout error can be selected. Do not use the timeout error in LIN slave mode with auto baud rate (LIN/UART mode select bits in LIN/UART mode register = 10b). Do not use the timeout error if response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received. For details of the timeout error, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. <R> FERE bit (framing error detection enable bit) The FERE bit enables or disables detection of the framing error. Set 1(the framing error detection enables) to this bit. The framing error detection result is indicated in the FER flag in the LESTn register. For details of the framing error, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1150 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) SFERE bit (sync field error detection enable bit) The SFERE bit enables or disables detection of the sync field error. With 0 set, the sync field error is not detected. With 1 set, the sync field error is detected. Upon detection of the sync field error, the system is placed in the next header wait state, irrespective of the setting of this bit. When this bit is set to 1, the detection result is indicated in the SFER flag in the LESTn register. For details of the sync field error, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. IPERE bit (ID parity error detection enable bit) The IPERE bit enables or disables detection of the ID parity error. With 0 set, the ID parity error is not detected. With 1 set, the ID parity error is detected. When this bit is set to 1, the detection result is indicated in the IPER flag in the LESTn register. For details of the ID parity error, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. LTES bit (timeout error select bit) The LTES bit selects the specific timeout function to be used. With 0 set, the timeout function applies to frame timeout. With 1 set, the timeout function applies to response timeout. For details of the timeout error, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1151 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (15) LIN/UART Control Register (LCUCn) Address: F06CEH Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- OM1 OM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 OM0 LIN Reset 0: LIN reset mode is caused. 1: LIN reset mode is canceled. R/W 1 OM1 LIN Mode Select 0: LIN wake-up mode is caused. 1: LIN operation mode is caused. R/W 7 to 2 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W Set the LCUCn register to 01H to cause a transition to LIN wake-up mode after canceling LIN reset mode, and set the LCUCn register to 03H to cause a transition to LIN operation mode. In LIN self-test mode, set the LCUCn register to 03H after a transition to LIN self-test mode is completed. When the LIN/UART module makes a transition from the LIN operating mode to the LIN reset mode while operating as a LIN slave (at a fixed baud rate), write 1 to the LIN0EN bit (or the LIN1EN bit) in the PER2 register after having cleared the given bit to 0. After a value is written to this register, confirm that the value written is actually indicated in the LMSTn register before writing another value. OM0 bit (LIN reset bit) The OM0 bit selects either causing a transition to LIN reset mode or canceling LIN reset mode. With 0 set, LIN reset mode is caused. With 1 set, LIN reset mode is canceled. OM1 bit (LIN mode select bit) The OM1 bit selects the specific operation mode (either LIN wake-up mode or LIN operation mode) after canceling LIN reset mode. With 0 set, LIN wake-up mode is caused. With 1 set, LIN operation mode is caused. This register is valid only when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 1. Writing a value to this bit is disabled while the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1152 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (16) LIN/UART Transmission Control Register (LTRCn) Address: F06D0H Value after reset: Bit <R> 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- LNRR RTS FTS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 FTS LIN Communication Start 0: Header reception or wake-up transmission/reception is stopped. 1: Header reception or wake-up transmission/reception is started. R/W 1 RTS Response Transmission/Reception Start 0: Response transmission/reception is stopped. 1: Response transmission/reception is started. R/W 2 LNRR No-Response Request 0: Response to the reception ID is received/transmitted. 1: Response to the reception ID is not received/transmitted. R/W 7 to 3 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W FTS bit (LIN communication start bit) Set the FTS bit to 1 to start header or wake-up reception (counting of the low width of the input signal). Also set this bit to 1 to allow wake-up transmission. Only 1 can be written to this bit; 0 cannot be written. Writing a value to this bit is disabled when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). This bit is set to 0 upon completion of wake-up transmission/reception and transition to LIN reset mode. RTS bit (response transmission/reception start bit) Set the RTS bit to 1 when response transmission/reception is started after the header is received and the received ID is checked. Once set, this bit is automatically cleared to 0 upon completion of response communication or transition to LIN reset mode. Only 1 can be written to this bit; 0 cannot be written. To write 1 to this bit, write 02H to the LTRCn register by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction. Do not set this bit and the LNRR bit to 1 simultaneously. Writing a value to this bit is disabled when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Writing a value to this bit is disabled when the FTS bit is 0 (header reception or wake-up transmission/reception is stopped). When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received, set this bit to 1 each time a data group (variable from 0 to 8 bytes) is transmitted or received. Once set, this bit is automatically cleared to 0 upon completion of data group transmission/reception or transition to LIN reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1153 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) LNRR bit (no-response request bit) Set the LNRR bit to 1 when neither response transmission nor reception is started after the header is received and the received ID is checked. Once set, this bit is automatically cleared to 0 upon detection of the new sync field or transition to LIN reset mode. Only 1 can be written to this bit; 0 cannot be written. To write 1 to this bit, write 04H to the LTRCn register by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction. Do not set this bit and the RTS bit to 1 simultaneously. Writing a value to this bit is disabled when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Writing a value to this bit is disabled when the FTS bit is 0 (header reception or wake-up transmission/reception is stopped). When a 9-byte or longer response is to be transmitted or received, do not use this bit other than on completion of header reception (do not use this bit on completion of the second and subsequent data groups). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1154 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (17) LIN/UART Mode Status Register (LMSTn) Address: F06D1H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- OMM1 OMM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 OMM0 LIN Reset Status Monitor 0: The module is in LIN reset mode. 1: The module is not in LIN reset mode. R 1 OMM1 LIN Mode Status Monitor 0: The module is in LIN wake-up mode. 1: The module is in LIN operation mode. R 7 to 2 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W OMM0 bit (LIN reset status monitor) OMM1 bit (LIN mode status monitor) The OMM0 and OMM1 bits indicate the current operation mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1155 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (18) LIN/UART Status Register (LSTn) Address: F06D2H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HTRC D1RC -- -- ERR -- FRC FTC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 FTC Successful Frame/Wake-up Transmission Flag 0: Response or wake-up transmission has not been completed. 1: Response or wake-up transmission has been completed. R/W 1 FRC Successful Frame/Wake-up Reception Flag 0: Response or wake-up reception has not been completed. 1: Response or wake-up reception has been completed. R/W 2 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 3 ERR Error Detection Flag 0: No error has been detected. 1: Error has been detected. 4, 5 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 6 D1RC Successful Data 1 Reception Flag 0: Data 1 reception has not been completed. 1: Data 1 reception has been completed. R/W 7 HTRC Successful Header Reception Flag 0: Header reception has not been completed. 1: Header reception has been completed. R/W R The LSTn register is automatically cleared to 00H upon transition to LIN reset mode. In LIN reset mode, writing to this register is disabled. In LIN reset mode, the register retains 00H. To clear the specific bits in the register, write 0 to the bits to be cleared and write 1 to the other bits by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction. FTC flag (successful frame/wake-up transmission flag) Only 0 can be written to the FTC flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The FTC flag is set to 1 upon completion of response or wake-up transmission. Here, an interrupt is generated if the FTCIE bit in the LIEn register is 1 (interrupt is enabled). Note that when the response or wake-up transmission is completed with the FTC flag set to 1, an interrupt is not generated. To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted, this bit is set to 1 each time a data group (variable from 0 to 8 bytes) is transmitted. Write 0 before starting transmission of the next data group. FRC flag (successful frame/wake-up reception flag) Only 0 can be written to the FRC flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The FRC flag is set to 1 upon completion of response or wake-up reception. Here, an interrupt is generated if the FRCIE bit in the LIEn register is 1 (interrupt is enabled). Note that when the response or wake-up reception is completed with the FRC flag set to 1, an interrupt is not generated. To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be received, this bit is set to 1 each time a data group (variable from 0 to 8 bytes) is received. Write 0 before starting reception of the next data group. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1156 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) ERR flag (error detection flag) The ERR flag is set to 1 upon detection of an error (any of the LESTn register flags is 1). Here, an interrupt is generated if the ERRIE bit in the LIEn register is 1 (interrupt is enabled). Note that when an error is detected with the ERR flag set to 1, an interrupt is not generated. To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the RPER, IPER ,CSER, SFER, FER, TER, and BER flags in the LESTn register. This clears the ERR flag to 0. D1RC flag (successful data 1 reception flag) Only 0 can be written to the D1RC flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The D1RC flag is set to 1 upon completion of data 1 reception. Here, an interrupt is not generated. To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be received, this bit is set to 1 each time data 1 of a data group (variable from 0 to 8 bytes) is received. Write 0 before starting reception of the next data group. HTRC flag (successful header transmission flag) Only 0 can be written to the HTRC flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The HTRC flag is set to 1 upon completion of header transmission. Here, an interrupt is generated if the SHIE bit in the LIEn register is 1 (interrupt is enabled). Note that when header reception is completed with the HTRC flag set to 1, an interrupt is not generated. To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. After the reception of a header, clear this bit after reading it as 1 so that a new header will be detectable. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1157 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (19) LIN/UART Error Status Register (LESTn) Address: F06D3H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RPER IPER CSER SFER FER TER -- BER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 BER Bit Error Flag 0: Bit error has not been detected. 1: Bit error has been detected. R/W 1 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 2 TER Timeout Error Flag 0: Frame/response timeout error has not been detected. 1: Frame/response timeout error has been detected. R/W 3 FER Framing Error Flag 0: Framing error has not been detected. 1: Framing error has been detected. R/W 4 SFER Sync Field Error Flag 0: Sync field error has not been detected. 1: Sync field error has been detected. R/W 5 CSER Checksum Error Flag 0: Checksum error has not been detected. 1: Checksum error has been detected. R/W 6 IPER ID Parity Error Flag 0: ID parity error has not been detected. 1: ID parity error has been detected. R/W 7 RPER Response Preparation Error Flag 0: Response preparation error has not been detected. 1: Response preparation error has been detected. R/W The LESTn register is automatically cleared to 00H upon transition to LIN reset mode. In LIN reset mode, writing to this register is disabled. In LIN reset mode, the register retains 00H. To clear the specific bits in the register, write 0 to the bits to be cleared and write 1 to the other bits by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction. BER flag (bit error flag) Only 0 can be written to the BER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The BER flag is set to 1 upon bit error detection if the BERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (bit error detection is enabled). To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. TER flag (timeout error flag) Only 0 can be written to the TER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The TER flag is set to 1 upon frame timeout error or response timeout error detection if the TERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (frame/response timeout error detection is enabled). To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. FER flag (framing error flag) Only 0 can be written to the FER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The FER flag is set to 1 upon framing error detection if the FERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (framing error detection is enabled). To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. SFER flag (sync field error flag) Only 0 can be written to the SFER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The SFER flag is set to 1 upon sync field error detection if the SFERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (sync field error detection is enabled). To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1158 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) CSER flag (checksum error flag) Only 0 can be written to the CSER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The CSER flag is set to 1 upon checksum error detection. To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. IPER flag (ID parity error flag) Only 0 can be written to the IPER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The IPER flag is set to 1 upon ID parity error detection if the IPERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (ID parity error detection is enabled). To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. RPER flag (response preparation error flag) Only 0 can be written to the RPER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The RPER flag is set to 1 upon response preparation error detection. To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1159 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (20) LIN/UART Data Field Configuration Register (LDFCn) Address: F06D4H 7 6 5 4 LSS -- LCS RCDS 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol 3 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 RFDL[3:0] Bit Name Function b3 b0 R/W R/W 3 to 0 RFDL[3:0] Response Field Length Select 4 RCDS Response Field Communication Direction Select 0: Reception 1: Transmission R/W 5 LCS Checksum Select 0: Classic checksum mode 1: Enhanced checksum mode R/W 6 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 LSS Transmission/Reception Continuation Select 0: The data group to be transmitted/received next is the last one. 1: The data group to be transmitted/received next is not the last one. (Data transmission/reception is continued without waiting for the next header reception.) R/W 0 0 0 0: 0 byte (+ checksum) 0 0 0 1: 1 byte (+ checksum) 0 0 1 0: 2 bytes (+ checksum) : 0 1 1 1: 7 bytes (+ checksum) 1 0 0 0: 8 bytes (+ checksum) Settings other than the above are prohibited. RFDL[3:0] bits (response field length select bits) The RFDL bits set the length of the response field data. The data length can be 0 to 8 bytes excluding the checksum size. Set these bits when the RTS bit is 0 (response transmission/reception stopped). <R> When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted and received, only the last data group (the LSS bit is 0) includes the checksum, and no other groups (the LSS bit is 1) include the checksum. RCDS bit (response field communication direction select bit) The RCDS bit sets the direction of the response field/wake-up signal communication. With 0 set, reception is performed in the response field. In LIN wake-up mode, wake-up reception is performed (low width of the input signal is counted). With 1 set, transmission is performed in the response field. In LIN wake-up mode, wake-up transmission is performed. When the module is in the LIN operating mode, set this bit while the RTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0 (response transmission/reception stopped). When the module is in the LIN wakeup mode, set this bit while the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0 (header reception or wake-up transmission/reception stopped). When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received, do not change the RCDS bit setting after the first data group through the last data group. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1160 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) LCS bit (checksum select bit) The LCS bit sets the checksum mode. With 0 set, classic checksum mode is selected. With 1 set, enhanced checksum mode is selected. When the timeout error is used (the TERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1), the specific timeout time depends on the setting of this bit. For details, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. Do not set this bit to 1 (enhanced mode) when the response field is 0 bytes long (the RFDL bit is 0). When response of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received, do not change the LCS bit setting after the first data group through the last data group. During communication of response data of 9 bytes or more, only the last data group (the LSS bit is 0) includes the checksum, and no other groups (the LSS bit is 1) include the checksum. Set this bit while the RTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0 (response transmission/reception stopped). LSS bit (transmission/reception continuation select bit) The LSS bit shows that the next data group to be transmitted or received is not the last one. With 0 set, data and checksum are transmitted or received because the next data group to be transmitted or received is the last one. With 1 set, only data is transmitted or received, and the checksum is not included because the next data group to be transmitted or received is not the last one. During LIN communication, do not set this bit to 1. Set this bit while the RTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0 (response transmission/reception stopped). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1161 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (21) LIN/UART ID Buffer Register (LIDBn) Address: F06D5H 7 6 5 4 3 0 0 0 0 IDP[1:0] 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol 2 1 0 0 0 0 ID[5:0] Bit Name Function R/W 5 to 0 ID[5:0] ID Holds the 6-bit ID value received in the ID field. R/W 7, 6 IDP[1:0] Parity Holds the parity bits (P) received in the ID field. R/W Writing to the LIDBn register is enabled upon completion of header reception. In LIN mode (LIN operation mode or LIN wake-up mode), writing is disabled. In LIN self-test mode, this register operates as follows: Write the value to be transmitted before communication. The reversed value of the value received can be read from the register after frame transmission/reception is completed (after loopback). For details of LIN self-test mode, refer to 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. ID[5:0] bits (ID bits) The ID bits hold the 6-bit ID value received in the ID field of the LIN frame. IDP[1:0] bits (parity bits) The IDP bits hold the parity bits (P0 and P1) received in the ID field of the LIN frame. The IDP0 bit is P0 and the IDP1 bit is P1. When the IPERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (ID parity detection is enabled), the received value is checked against the internally pre-calculated value, and if they do not agree, the IPER bit (ID parity error flag) is set. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1162 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (22) LIN Checksum Buffer Register (LCBRn) Address: F06D6H Value after reset: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 to 0 Function Holds the checksum value transmitted or received. R/W R/W In LIN mode, this register operates as follows: When the RCDS bit in the LDFCn register is 1 (transmission): The value transmitted can be read from the register. Writing to this register is invalid. When the RCDS bit in the LDFCn register is 0 (reception): The value received can be read from the register. Writing to this register is invalid. When response data of 9 bytes or more is to be transmitted or received, the checksum is appended only to the last data group; this register is not updated for the other data groups. In LIN self-test mode, this register operates as follows: When the RCDS bit in the LDFCn register is 1 (transmission): The reversed value of the value received can be read from the register after frame transmission is completed (after loopback). When the RCDS bit in the LDFCn register is 0 (reception): Write the value to be received before communication. The reversed value of the value received can be read from the register after frame transmission/reception is completed (after loopback). For details of LIN self-test mode, refer to 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. Set the LCBRn register when the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 0 (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception is halted). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1163 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (23) LIN/UART Data Buffer m Register (LDBnm) (m = 1 to 8) Address: LDBn1 F06D8H, LDBn2 F06D9H, LDBn3 F06DAH, LDBn4 F06DBH, LDBn5 F06DCH, LDBn6 F06DDH, LDBn7 F06DEH, LDBn8 F06DFH Value after reset: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 to 0 Function Sets the data to be transmitted or allows the received data to be read. Setting Range 00H to FFH R/W R/W For response transmission: These registers set the data to be transmitted in the response field. Set these registers when the RTS bit is 0 (response reception/transmission is halted). For response reception: These registers hold the data received in the response field. The received data is overwritten. If an error is detected, the data prior to reception interruption is stored in the register. Do not read these registers when the RTS bit is 1 (response transmission/reception is started) In LIN self-test mode, this register operates as follows: Write the value to be transmitted before communication. The reversed value of the value received can be read from the register after frame transmission/reception is completed (after loopback). For details of LIN self-test mode, refer to 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1164 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.2.3 Registers for UART (1) Input Switch Control Register (ISC) The ISC2 and ISC3 bits in the ISC register are used in the LIN/UART module (RLIN3). Setting bit 2 or bit 3 to 1 selects the input signal of the serial data input pin for the LIN/UART module as the external interrupt input. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Address: F0073H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ISC 0 0 0 0 ISC3 ISC2 0 ISC0 ISC3 Switching inputs for external interrupt INTP12 0 INTP12 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. 1 LRXD1 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. ISC2 Switching inputs for external interrupt INTP11 0 INTP11 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. 1 LRXD0 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. ISC0 Switching inputs for external interrupt INTP0 0 INTP0 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. (normal operation) 1 RXD0 pin input signal is set as external interrupt input. (wake-up signal detection) Caution Bits 7 to 4 and 1 should always be set to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1165 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (2) LIN Channel Select Register (LCHSEL) Address: F007BH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- LSEL0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 LSEL0 LIN Channel Select 0: Selects LIN0. (LIN0 registers can be accessed.) 1: Selects LIN1. (LIN1 registers can be accessed.) R/W 7 to 1 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W LSEL0 bit (LIN channel select bit) Since the LIN/UART module registers are not directly mapped on the CPU memory map, they should be accessed via the register windows. The register windows are mapped on addresses F06C1H to F06E9H. Setting a value to the LSEL0 bit maps all the registers of the corresponding channel on the register window. Setting the LSEL0 bit to 0 maps the LIN0 registers. Setting the LSEL0 bit to 1 maps the LIN1 registers. With the product incorporating one channel, set the LSEL0 bit to 0. With the product incorporating two channels, set the LSEL0 bit to the applicable value before accessing a register of the channel to use. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1166 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (3) Peripheral Enable Register 2 (PER2) The PER2 register is used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to the hardware that is not used is also stopped so as to decrease the power consumption and noise. To use the peripheral functions which are controlled by this register, set (1) the bit corresponding to each function before specifying the initial settings of the peripheral functions. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Address: F02C1H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0> PER2 0 0 0 0 LIN1EN LIN0EN 0 CAN0EN Note 1 LIN1EN Note 2 Control of LIN1 input clock supply Note 1 0 Stops input clock supply. Disables writing to the SFR used by LIN1. LIN1 is in the reset state. 1 Enables input clock supply. Enables reading from and writing to the SFR used by LIN1. LIN0EN Control of LIN0 input clock supply 0 Stops input clock supply. Disables writing to the SFR used by LIN0. LIN0 is in the reset state. 1 Enables input clock supply. Enables reading from and writing to the SFR used by LIN0. CAN0EN Control of CAN input clock supply Note 2 0 Stops input clock supply. Disables writing to the SFR used by CAN. CAN is in the reset state. 1 Enables input clock supply. Enables reading from and writing to the SFR used by CAN. Notes 1. Only in the RL78/F14 products with at least 128 Kbytes of code flash memory and the 100-pin products of the RL78/F14. 2. Caution Only in the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) and RL78/F14 products. Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. Bits 0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products Bits 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products and the RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and up to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Bits 1, 4, 5, 6, and 7 in the RL78/F14 products with at least 128 Kbytes of code flash memory and the 100-pin products of the RL78/F14 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1167 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (4) LIN Clock Select Register (LINCKSEL) This register is used to control the communication clock source supplied to the LIN. Address: F02C3H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 <5> <4> 3 2 <1> <0> LINCKSEL 0 0 LIN1MCKE LIN0MCKE 0 0 LIN1MCK LIN0MCK Note LIN1MCKE Note Control of supplying or stopping LIN1 communication clock source Note 0 Stops LIN communication clock source supply. 1 Enables LIN communication clock source supply. LIN0MCKE Control of supplying or stopping LIN0 communication clock source 0 Stops LIN communication clock source supply. 1 Enables LIN engine clock supply. LIN1MCK Control of selecting LIN1 communication clock source Note 0 Selects the fCLK clock. 1 Selects the fMX clock. LIN0MCK Note Control of selecting LIN0 communication clock source 0 Selects the fCLK clock. 1 Selects the fMX clock. Only in the RL78/F14 products with at least 48 pins and 128 Kbytes or more of code flash memory and the 100-pin products of the RL78/F14. Cautions 1. Select the LINn operating clock with the LINnMCK bit before setting the LINnMCKE (n = 0, 1) bit to 1 (operating clock is supplied). 2. When operating LINn in SNOOZE mode, set the LINnMCK bit to 0. <R> 3. In case of LINnMCK is set to 1, set at least 1.2 times the frequency of the LIN communication clock source to the fCLK clock. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1168 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (5) External interrupt rising edge enable registers (EGP0, EGP1), external interrupt falling edge enable registers (EGN0, EGN1) For details, see 21.3.4 External interrupt rising edge enable registers (EGP0, EGP1), external interrupt falling edge enable registers (EGN0, EGN1). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1169 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (6) LIN Wake-up Baud Rate Select Register (LWBRn) Address: F06C1H 7 6 0 0 5 4 3 0 0 0 NSPB[3:0] Value after reset: Bit Symbol 2 1 LPRS[2:0] Bit Name 0 0 -- 0 0 Function R/W 0 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 3 to 1 LPRS [2:0] Prescaler Clock Select b3 b1 R/W 7 to 4 NSPB [3:0] Bit Sampling Count Select b7 0 0 0: 1/1 0 0 1: 1/2 0 1 0: 1/4 0 1 1: 1/8 1 0 0: 1/16 1 0 1: 1/32 1 1 0: 1/64 1 1 1: 1/128 b4 0 0 0 0: 16 sampling 0 1 0 1: 6 sampling 0 1 1 0: 7 sampling 0 1 1 1: 8 sampling 1 0 0 0: 9 sampling 1 0 0 1: 10 sampling 1 0 1 0: 11 sampling 1 0 1 1: 12 sampling 1 1 0 0: 13 sampling 1 1 0 1: 14 sampling 1 1 1 0: 15 sampling 1 1 1 1: 16 sampling Settings other than the above are prohibited. R/W Set the LWBRn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). LPRS[2:0] bits (prescaler clock select bits) The LPRS bits select the frequency division ratio for the prescaler. The LIN communication clock source frequency is divided based on this prescaler. NSPB[3:0] bits (bit sampling count select bits) The NSPB bits select the number of sampling in one Tbit (reciprocal of the baud rate). In UART mode (LIN/UART mode select bits in LIN/UART mode register = 01b), the NSPB bits can be set for 6 to 16 sampling. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1170 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (7) LIN/UART Baud Rate Prescaler Register (LBRPn) Address: F06C3H, F06C2H LBRPn1 Value after reset: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 15 to 0 LBRPn0 Function Assuming that the value set in this register is L (0 to 65535), the baud rate prescaler divides the frequency of the prescaler clock by L + 1. Setting Range 0000H to FFFFH R/W R/W Set the LBRPn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 ( LIN reset mode). Assuming that the value set in this register is L, the baud rate prescaler divides the frequency of the clock that is selected by the LPRS bits in the LWBRn register (prescaler clock select bits) by L + 1. The LBRPn register can be accessed in 8-bit units using the following registers. Lower 8 bits: LIN/UART baud rate prescaler 0 register (LBRPn0); address F06C2H Upper 8 bits: LIN/UART baud rate prescaler 1 register (LBRPn1); address F06C3H R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1171 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (8) UART Standby Control Register (LUSCn) Address: F06C5H Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- URDCC USEC UWC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 UWC UART Standby Wake-up Control 0: Disables start of reception from STOP mode. 1: Enables start of reception from STOP mode. R/W 1 USEC UART Standby Error Control 0: Enables error detection interrupt generation. 1: Disables error detection interrupt generation. R/W 2 URDCC UART Standby Received data Comparison Control 0: Disables comparison of the received data and the LIDBn register value in SNOOZE mode. 1: Enables comparison of the received data and the LIDBn register value in SNOOZE mode. R/W 7 to 3 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W Set the LUSCn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). UWC bit (UART standby wake-up control bit) The UWC bit enables or disables transition to SNOOZE mode upon detection of the falling edge on the reception pin in STOP mode. With 0 set, detection of the falling edge on the reception pin in STOP mode does not cause a transition to SNOOZE mode thus not initiating reception. With 1 set, detection of the falling edge on the reception pin in STOP mode causes a transition to SNOOZE mode thus initiating reception. USEC bit (UART standby error control bit) The USEC bit enables or disables interrupt generation upon detection of an error or change in status in SNOOZE mode. With 0 set, if an error (framing error or parity error) or change in status (detection of the expansion bit) is detected in SNOOZE mode, the corresponding flag is set to 1 thus generating the error detection interrupt. With 1 set, if an error (framing error or parity error) or change in status (detection of the expansion bit) is detected in SNOOZE mode, the corresponding flag is not set to 1 thus generating no error detection interrupt and the module makes a transition to STOP mode. Do not set this bit to 1 (error detection interrupt generation is disabled) when the UWC bit is 0 (start of reception from STOP mode is disabled). This bit is enabled when the UWC bit is set to 1 (start of reception from STOP mode is enabled). URDCC bit (UART standby received data comparison control bit) The URDCC bit enables or disables comparison of the data received in SNOOZE mode and the LIDBn register value. With 0 set, the data received in SNOOZE mode is not compared with the LIDBn register value and the appropriate interrupt is generated. With 1 set, the data received in SNOOZE mode is compared with the LIDBn register value, and if they agree, the successful reception interrupt is generated. If they do not agree, an interrupt is not generated but the module makes a transition to STOP mode. Do not set this bit to 1 (comparison of the received data and the LIDBn register value in SNOOZE mode is enabled) when the UWC bit is 0 (start of reception from STOP mode is disabled). When this bit should be set to 1 (comparison of the received data and the LIDBn register value in SNOOZE mode is enabled), be sure to set the bit length to 8 bits (the UBLS bit in the LBFCn register is 0; 8-bit UART communication) and set the UEBE bit in the LUORn1 register to 0; expansion bit operation is disabled). This bit is enabled when the UWC bit is set to 1 (start of reception from STOP mode is enabled). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1172 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (9) LIN/UART Mode Register (LMDn) Address: F06C8H Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 -- -- LRDNFS -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name 1 0 LMD[1:0] 0 0 Function R/W 1, 0 LMD[1:0] LIN/UART Mode Select b1 b0 4 to 2 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 5 LRDNFS LIN Reception Data Noise Filtering Disable 0: The noise filter is enabled. 1: The noise filter is disabled. R/W 6 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 0 1: UART mode R/W Set the LMDn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). LMD[1:0] bits (LIN/UART mode select bits) The LMD bits select the LIN/UART module mode. To use the LIN/UART module as UART, set these bits to 01b. With 01b set, the LIN/UART module operates as UART. LRDNFS bit (LIN reception data noise filtering disable bit) The LRDNFS bit enables or disables the noise filter when receiving data. With 0 set, the noise filter is enabled when receiving data. With 1 set, the noise filter is disabled when receiving data. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1173 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (10) LIN Break Field Configuration Register/UART Configuration Register (LBFCn) Address: F06C9H 7 6 5 -- UTPS URPS 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol 4 3 UPS[1:0] 0 0 Bit Name 2 1 0 USBLS UBOS UBLS 0 0 0 Function R/W 0 UBLS UART Character Length Select 0: 8-bit UART communication 1: 7-bit UART communication R/W 1 UBOS UART Transfer Format Select 0: LSB first 1: MSB first R/W 2 USBLS UART Stop Bit Length Select 0: One stop bit 1: Two stop bits R/W 4, 3 UPS[1:0] UART Parity Select b4 b3 R/W 5 URPS UART Input Polarity Select 0: Reception data is input as is. 1: Reception data is reversed before being input. R/W 6 UTPS UART Output Polarity Select 0: Transmission data is output as is. 1: Transmission data is reversed before being output. R/W 7 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 0 0 1 1 0: No parity 1: Even parity 0: 0-parity 1: Odd parity Set the LBFCn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). UBLS bit (UART character length select bit) The UBLS bit sets the length of a character of a UART communication frame. With 0 set, a character of a frame is 8 bits long in communication. With 1 set, a character of a frame is 7 bits long in communication. Setting this bit is invalid when a character of a UART frame for communication is 9 bits long (the UEBE bit in the LUORn1 register is 1). UBOS bit (UART transfer format select bit) The UBOS bit sets the bit order of UART communication data. With 0 set, data is transferred with the LSB first. With 1 set, data is transferred with the MSB first. USBLS bit (UART stop bit length select bit) The USBLS bit sets the stop bit length in UART communication. With 0 set, transmission is performed with 1 stop bit. With 1 set, transmission is performed with 2 stop bits. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1174 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) UPS[1:0] bit (UART parity select bit) The UPS bits set the parity for UART communication. With 00b set, no parity is used in communication. Transmission A parity bit is not appended to transmission data. Reception A parity bit is not appended to reception data, thus causing no parity error. With 01b set, an even parity is used in communication. Transmission When the number of 1s in transmission data is odd, 1 is appended as the parity bit, whereas when the number of 1s in the transmission data is even, 0 is appended as the parity bit. Reception When the number of 1s in the received data including the parity bit is odd, the parity error occurs. With 10b set, 0-parity is used in communication. Transmission A 0 is appended as the parity bit irrespective of the number of 1s in the transmission data. Reception No parity error is caused since the value of the parity bit is not checked. With 11b set, an odd parity is used in communication. Transmission When the number of 1s in transmission data is odd, 0 is appended as the parity bit, whereas when the number of 1s in the transmission data is even, 1 is appended as the parity bit. Reception When the number of 1s in the received data including the parity bit is even, the parity error occurs. URPS bit (UART input polarity select bit) The URPS bit sets the input polarity in UART communication. With 0 set, the reception data is input as is. With 1 set, the reception data is reversed before being input. The setting of this bit applies to all the bits for the UART frames. In half-duplex communication, set this bit and the UTPS bit to the same value. UTPS bit (UART output polarity select bit) The UTPS bit sets the output polarity in UART communication. With 0 set, the transmission data is output as is. With 1 set, the transmission data is reversed before being output. The setting of this bit applies to all the bits for the UART frames. In half-duplex communication, set this bit and the URPS bit to the same value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1175 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (11) LIN/UART Space Configuration Register (LSCn) Address: F06CAH Value after reset: Bit 7 6 -- -- 0 0 Symbol 5 4 IBS[1:0] 0 0 Bit Name 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 Function R/W 2 to 0 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 3 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 5, 4 IBS[1:0] Inter-Byte Space Select b5 b4 R/W 7, 6 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 0 0: 0 Tbit 0 1: 1 Tbit 1 0: 2 Tbits 1 1: 3 Tbits R/W Set the LSCn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). <R> IBS[1:0] bits (Inter-byte space select bits) The IBS bits set the width of the space between UART frames in transmission using UART buffer. 0 Tbit to 3 Tbits can be set. When transmitting from the transmission buffer(LUTDRn register) and the wait transmission buffer(LUWTDRn register),set 00b to the IBS[1:0] bit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1176 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (12) LIN/UART Error Detection Enable Register (LEDEn) Address: F06CDH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- FERE OERE -- BERE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 BERE Bit Error Detection Enable 0: Disables bit error detection. 1: Enables bit error detection. R/W 1 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 2 OERE Overrun Error Detection Enable 0: Disables overrun error detection. 1: Enables overrun error detection. R/W 3 FERE Framing Error Detection Enable 0: Disables framing error detection. 1: Enables framing error detection. R/W 4 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 5 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 6 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W Set the LEDEn register when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). BERE bit (bit error detection enable bit) The BERE bit enables or disables detection of the bit error. With 0 set, the bit error is not detected. With 1 set, the bit error is detected. When this bit is set to 1, the detection result is indicated in the BER flag in the LESTn register. Do not set this bit to 1 when the LIN/UART module is used in full-duplex mode. For details of the bit error, refer to 17.5.5 Error Status. Do not set this bit when the NSPB bits in the LWBRn register are 0101b (6 sampling) and the LRDNFS bit in the LMDn register is 0 (the noise filter is in use). OERE bit (overrun error detection enable bit) The OERE bit enables or disables detection of the overrun error. With 0 set, the overrun error is not detected. With 1 set, the overrun error is detected. When this bit is set to 1, the detection result is indicated in the OER flag in the LESTn register. For details of the overrun error, refer to 17.5.5 Error Status. FERE bit (framing error detection enable bit) The FERE bit enables or disables detection of the framing error. With 0 set, the framing error is not detected. With 1 set, the framing error is detected. When this bit is set to 1, the detection result is indicated in the FER flag in the LESTn register. For details of the framing error, refer to 17.5.5 Error Status. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1177 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (13) LIN/UART Control Register (LCUCn) Address: F06CEH Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- OM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 OM0 LIN Reset 0: LIN reset mode is caused. 1: LIN reset mode is canceled. R/W 1 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 to 2 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W After a value is written to this register, confirm that the value written is actually indicated in the LMSTn register before writing another value. OM0 bit (LIN reset bit) The OM0 bit selects either causing a transition to LIN reset mode or canceling LIN reset mode. With 0 set, LIN reset mode is caused. With 1 set, LIN reset mode is canceled. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1178 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (14) LIN/UART Transmission Control Register (LTRCn) Address: F06D0H Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- RTS -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 1 RTS UART Buffer Transmission Start 0: UART buffer transmission is disabled. 1: UART buffer transmission is enabled. R/W 2 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 7 to 3 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W RTS bit (UART buffer transmission start bit) Set the RTS bit to 1 to transmit data from UART buffer. Only 1 can be written to this bit; 0 cannot be written. Write a value to this bit when the UTOE bit in the LUOERn register is 1 (transmission is enabled) and the UTS bit in the LSTn register is 0 (transmission not in progress). Once set, whether or not an error has occurred, this bit is automatically cleared to 0 upon completion of transmission of the amount of data corresponding to the setting for the number of data units (by the MDL bits in the LDFCn register). This bit is automatically cleared to 0 upon transition to LIN reset mode. Writing a value to this bit is disabled when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). When 1 is to be written to this bit while the setting of the UTSW bit in the LDFCn register is 1 (requesting transmission from the UART buffer after the completion of waiting for stop bit reception), only do so after the reception of a stop bit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1179 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (15) LIN/UART Mode Status Register (LMSTn) Address: F06D1H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- OMM0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 OMM0 LIN Reset Status Monitor 0: The module is in LIN reset mode. 1: The module is not in LIN reset mode. R 1 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R 7 to 2 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W OMM0 bit (LIN reset status monitor bit) The OMM0 bit indicates whether or not the LIN reset mode is currently set. With 0 set, the LIN/UART module is in LIN reset mode. With 1 set, the LIN/UART module is not in LIN reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1180 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (16) LIN/UART Status Register (LSTn) Address: F06D2H Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- URS UTS ERR -- -- FTC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 FTC Successful Buffer Transmission Flag 0: Data transmission from the UART buffer has not been completed. 1: Data transmission from the UART buffer has been completed. R/W 1 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 2 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 3 ERR Error Detection Flag 0: No error has been detected. 1: Error has been detected. R 4 UTS Transmission Status Flag 0: The LIN/UART module is not transmitting data. 1: The LIN/UART module is transmitting data. R 5 URS Reception Status Flag 0: The LIN/UART module is not receiving data. 1: The LIN/UART module is receiving data. R 7, 6 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W The LSTn register is automatically cleared to 00H upon transition to LIN reset mode. In LIN reset mode, writing to this register is disabled. In LIN reset mode, the register retains 00H. To clear the specific bits in the register, write 0 to the bits to be cleared and write 1 to the other bits by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction. <R> FTC flag (successful buffer transmission flag) Only 0 can be written to the FTC flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. Whether or not an error has occurred, this bit is set to 1 upon completion of transmission of data, which is equal to the number of data units set with the MDL bits in the LDFCn register, from UART buffer. Here, an interrupt is generated. To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. ERR flag (error detection flag) The ERR flag is set to 1 upon detection of an error (any of the LESTn register flags is 1). Here, an interrupt is generated. Note that when an error, the expansion bit, or ID match is detected with the ERR flag set to 1, an interrupt is not generated. To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the UPER, IDMT, EXBT, FER, OER, and BER flags in the LESTn register. This clears the ERR flag to 0. UTS flag (transmission status flag) The UTS flag is set to 1 upon start of transmission. During transmission, the flag retains 1. Transmission is started when: transmission data is set in the LUTDRn or LUWTDRn register. 1 is set in the RTS bit in the LTRCn register. The UTS flag is cleared to 0 upon end of transmission. While transmission is halted, the flag retains 0. Transmission is ended when: transmission of the data set in the LUTDRn or LUWTDRn register is completed and the next transmission data is not set. data transmission from the UART buffer is completed (the RTS bit in the LTRCn register is set to 0 ). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1181 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) URS flag (reception status flag) The URS flag is set to 1 upon start of reception. During reception, the flag retains 1. Reception is started when: the start bit is detected. The URS flag is cleared to 0 upon end of reception. While reception is halted, the flag retains 0. Reception is ended when: the first stop bit is sampled. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1182 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (17) LIN/UART Error Status Register (LESTn) Address: F06D3H Value after reset: Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- UPER IDMT EXBT FER OER -- BER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 BER Bit Error Flag 0: Bit error has not been detected. 1: Bit error has been detected. R/W 1 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 2 OER Overrun Error Flag 0: Overrun error has not been detected. 1: Overrun error has been detected. R/W 3 FER Framing Error Flag 0: Framing error has not been detected. 1: Framing error has been detected. R/W 4 EXBT Expansion Bit Detection Flag 0: Expansion bit has not been detected. 1: Expansion bit has been detected. R/W 5 IDMT ID match flag 0: Received data does not agree with the ID value. 1: Received data agrees with the ID value. R/W 6 UPER Parity Error Flag 0: Parity error has not been detected. 1: Parity error has been detected. R/W 7 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W The LESTn register is automatically cleared to 00H upon transition to LIN reset mode. In LIN reset mode, writing to this register is disabled. In LIN reset mode, the register retains 00H. To clear the specific bits in the register, write 0 to the bits to be cleared and write 1 to the other bits by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction. BER flag (bit error flag) Only 0 can be written to the BER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The BER flag is set to 1 upon bit error detection if the BERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (bit error detection is enabled). To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. OER flag (overrun error flag) Only 0 can be written to the OER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The OER flag is set to 1 upon overrun error detection if the OERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (overrun error detection is enabled). To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. FER flag (framing error flag) Only 0 can be written to the FER flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The FER flag is set to 1 upon framing error detection if the FERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (framing error detection is enabled). In SNOOZE mode, the following conditions should also be satisfied to set this flag to 1. The UWC bit in the LUSCn register is 1 (start of reception from STOP mode is enabled). The USEC bit in the LUSCn register is 0 (error detection interrupt generation is enabled). To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1183 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) EXBT flag (expansion bit detection flag) Only 0 can be written to the EXBT flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. This flag is set to 1 when the UEBE bit in the LUORn1 register is 1 (expansion bit operation is enabled) and the received expansion bit agrees with the UEBDL bit value in the LUORn1 register. In SNOOZE mode, the following conditions should also be satisfied to set this flag to 1. The UWC bit in the LUSCn register is 1 (start of reception from STOP mode is enabled). The USEC bit in the LUSCn register is 0 (error detection interrupt generation is enabled). The UECD bit in the LUORn1 register is 0 (comparison of the expansion bit is enabled). To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. IDMT flag (ID match flag) Only 0 can be written to the IDMT flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The IDMT flag is set to 1 when all the following conditions are satisfied. The UEBE bit in the LUORn1 register is 1 (expansion bit operation is enabled). The UECD bit in the LUORn1 register is 0 (expansion bit comparison is enabled). The UEBDCE bit in the LUORn1 register is 1 (data comparison after expansion bit detection is enabled). The received expansion bit agrees with the value of the UEBDL bit in the LUORn1 register. The 8-bit received data excluding the expansion bits agrees with the LIDBn register value. To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. UPER flag (parity error flag) Only 0 can be written to the IDMT flag; when 1 is written, the bit retains the value that has been retained before 1 is written. The UPER flag is set to 1 upon parity error detection. In SNOOZE mode, the following conditions should also be satisfied to set this flag to 1. The UWC bit in the LUSCn register is 1 (start of reception from STOP mode is enabled). The USEC bit in the LUSCn register is 0 (error detection interrupt generation is enabled). To clear the bit to 0, write 0 to the bit. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1184 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (18) LIN/UART Data Field Configuration Register (LDFCn) Address: F06D4H 7 6 5 4 -- -- UTSW -- 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Name 3 2 0 0 1 0 0 0 MDL[3:0] Bit Symbol Function R/W 3 to 0 MDL[3:0] UART Buffer Data Length Select b3 b0 0 0 0 0: 9 data 0 0 0 1: 1 data 0 0 1 0: 2 data 0 0 1 1: 3 data 0 1 0 0: 4 data 0 1 0 1: 5 data 0 1 1 0: 6 data 0 1 1 1: 7 data 1 0 0 0: 8 data 1 0 0 1: 9 data Settings other than the above are prohibited. R/W 4 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W 5 UTSW Transmission Start Wait 0: When UART buffer transmission is requested, transmission is started immediately. 1: When UART buffer transmission is requested, transmission is started after waiting for stop bit reception to be completed. R/W 7, 6 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W MDL[3:0] bits (UART buffer data length select bits) The MDL bits set the data length of the UART buffer. Writing a value to these bits is disabled when the RTS bit is 1 (UART buffer transmission is enabled). UTSW bit (transmission start wait bit) The UTSW bit controls the start timing of UART buffer transmission. With 0 set, when UART buffer transmission is requested, transmission is started immediately. With 1 set, when UART buffer transmission is requested, transmission is started after waiting for reception of the stop bit to be completed. Note that the wait time is only 1 bit even if the stop bit length is set to 2 bits with the USBLS bit in the LBFCn register. This bit is enabled when 1 is set to the RTS bit in the LTRCn register. Writing a value to this bit is disabled when the RTS bit is 1 (UART buffer transmission is enabled). Do not set this bit to 1 for the purpose other than switching from reception to transmission in half-duplex communication. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1185 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (19) LIN/UART ID Buffer Register (LIDBn) Address: F06D5H Value after reset: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 to 0 Function Sets the ID value to be referenced for expansion bit/data comparison or data comparison in SNOOZE mode. R/W R/W When the UEBE bit is 1 (expansion bit operation is enabled) and the UEBDCE bit is 1 (data comparison after expansion bit detection is enabled) in the LUORn1 register, set the value to be compared with the received data to the LIDBn register. When the UWC bit is 1 (start of reception from STOP mode is enabled) and the URDCC bit is 1 (comparison of the received data and the LIDBn register value is enabled in SNOOZE mode) in the LUSCn register, set the value to be compared with the received data to the LIDBn register. Set the LIDBn register when the URS bit in the LSTn register is 0 (reception not in progress). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1186 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (20) UART Data Buffer 0 Register (LUDBn0) Address: F06D7H Value after reset: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Function 7 to 0 Sets the data to be transmitted from the UART buffer. Setting Range 00H to FFH R/W R/W The LUDBn0 register sets the data to be first transmitted from the UART buffer for nine-data-long transmission (the MDL bits in the LDFCn register is 0H or 9H). Write to the LUDBn0 register while the RTS bit is 0 (UART buffer transmission is disabled). For details of the UART buffer, refer to 17.5,3 Buffer Processing of Transmission Data. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1187 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (21) LIN/UART Data Buffer m Register (LDBnm) (m = 1 to 8) Address: LDBn1 F06D8H, LDBn2 F06D9H, LDBn3 F06DAH, LDBn4 F06DBH, LDBn5 F06DCH, LDBn6 F06DDH, LDBn7 F06DEH, LDBn8 F06DFH Value after reset: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Function 7 to 0 Sets the data to be transmitted from the UART buffer. Setting Range 00H to FFH R/W R/W These registers set the data to be transmitted from the UART buffer. Write to these registers while the RTS bit is 0 (UART buffer transmission is disabled). For details of the UART buffer, refer to 17.5,3 Buffer Processing of Transmission Data. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1188 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (22) UART Operation Enable Register (LUOERn) Address: F06E0H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- UROE UTOE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 UTOE Transmission Enable 0: Disables transmission. 1: Enables transmission. R/W 1 UROE Reception Enable 0: Disables reception. 1: Enables reception. R/W 7 to 2 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W The LUOERn register is automatically cleared to 00H upon transition to LIN reset mode. In LIN reset mode, writing to this register is disabled. In LIN reset mode, the register retains 00H. UTOE bit (transmission enable bit) The UTOE bit enables or disables transmission. With 0 set, transmission is disabled. With 1 set, transmission is enabled. Do not clear this bit during transmission. To cancel transfer while transmission is in progress, place the module in the LIN reset mode by setting the OM0 bit in the LCUCn register to 0 (LIN reset mode). Note that this operation also cancels reception. <R> UROE bit (reception enable bit) The UROE bit enables or disables reception. With 0 set, reception is disabled. With 1 set, reception is enabled. Do not clear this bit during reception. To cancel transfer while reception is in progress, place the module in the LIN reset mode by setting the OM0 bit in the LCUCn register to 0 (LIN reset mode). Note that this operation also cancels transmission. This bit must be 0 during transmitting data from UART buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1189 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (23) UART Option Register 1 (LUORn1) Address: F06E1H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -- -- -- UECD UTIGTS UEBDCE UEBDL UEBE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Value after reset: Bit Symbol Bit Name Function R/W 0 UEBE Expansion Bit Enable 0: Disables expansion bit operation. 1: Enables expansion bit operation. R/W 1 UEBDL Expansion Bit Detection Level Select 0: Selects expansion bit value 0 as the expansion bit detection level. 1: Selects expansion bit value 1 as the expansion bit detection level. R/W 2 UEBDCE Expansion Bit/Data Comparison Enable 0: Disables data comparison after detection of the expansion bit. 1: Enables data comparison after detection of the expansion bit. R/W 3 UTIGTS Transmission Interrupt Generation Timing Select 0: Transmission interrupt is generated at the start of transmission. 1: Transmission interrupt is generated at the completion of transmission. R/W 4 UECD Expansion Bit Comparison Disable 0: Enables comparison between the received expansion bit and the UEBDL bit value. 1: Disables comparison between the received expansion bit and the UEBDL bit value. R/W 7 to 5 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R/W UEBE bit (expansion bit enable bit) The UEBE bit enables or disables expansion bit operation. With 0 set, expansion bit operation is disabled. With 1 set, expansion bit operation is enabled. Set this bit when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Do not set this bit to 1 when the UART buffer is in use. UEBDL bit (expansion bit detection level select bit) The UEBDL bit sets the level to be detected as the expansion bit when the UEBE bit is 1 (expansion bit operation is enabled) and the UECD bit is 0 (comparison of the expansion bit is enabled). With 0 set, expansion bit value 0 is the level to be detected as the expansion bit. With 1 set, expansion bit value 1 is the level to be detected as the expansion bit. Set this bit when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Do not set this bit to 1 when the UART buffer is in use. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1190 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) UEBDCE bit (expansion bit/data comparison enable bit) The UEBDCE bit enables or disables comparison between the 8-bit received data excluding the expansion bits and the value of LIDBn register after detection of the expansion bit. With 0 set, comparison between the received data in the LURDRn register and the LIDBn register value is disabled after detection of the expansion bit value selected by the UEBDL bit as the expansion bit. With 1 set, comparison between the received data in the LURDRn register and the LIDBn register value is enabled after detection of the expansion bit value selected by the UEBDL bit as the expansion bit. Set this bit when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Do not set this bit to 1 with the UEBE bit set to 0 (expansion bit operation disabled). Do not set this bit to 1 with the UECD bit set to 1 (expansion bit comparison disabled). Do not set this bit to 1 when the UART buffer is in use. Do not set this bit to 1 with the UWC bit in the LUSCn register set to 1 (start of reception from STOP mode enabled). UTIGTS bit (transmission interrupt generation timing select bit) The UTIGTS bit sets the generation timing of the transmission interrupt. With 0 set, the transmission interrupt is generated at the start of transmission. With 1 set, the transmission interrupt is generated at the completion of transmission. When transmission from the UART buffer is performed with 0 set, the transmission interrupt is generated only at the start of the transmission of the last data of the data length set with the MDL bits in the LDFCn register. When transmission from the UART buffer is performed with 1 set, the transmission interrupt is generated only at the completion of the transmission of the last data of the data length set with the MDL bits in the LDFCn register. UECD bit (expansion bit comparison disable bit) The UECD bit enables or disables comparison between the received expansion bit and the UEBDL bit value when the UEBE bit is 1 (expansion bit operation is enabled). With 0 set, comparison between the received expansion bit and the UEBDL bit value is enabled when the expansion bit is received. With 1 set, comparison between the received expansion bit and the UEBDL bit value is disabled when the expansion bit is received. Set this bit when the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register is 0 (LIN reset mode). Do not set this bit to 1 when the UART buffer is in use. Do not set this bit to 1 with the UEBDCE bit set to 1 (data comparison after expansion bit detection is enabled). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1191 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (24) UART Transmission Data Register (LUTDRn) Address: F06E5H, F06E4H Value after reset: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 8 7 6 5 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 [8:0] 0 Setting Range Function R/W 8 to 0 Sets the data to be transmitted from the transmission buffer. 000H to 1FFH R/W 15 to 9 Reserved. These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. -- R/W The LUTDRn register sets the data to be transmitted from the transmission data register. Writing data to this register with the UTOE bit in the LUOERn register set to 1 starts transmission. This register can be accessed in 8 bits. In 9-bit communication mode, do not attempt 8-bit access. Do not write data to this register when data transmission from the UART buffer is in progress. Also, do not write data to this register when a transmission request is being generated due to write access to the LUWTDRn register. When transmitting multiple sets of data continuously, do not write another data item to this register before a transmission interrupt is generated. The table below shows the bit arrangement according to the set transfer format. LUTDRn Item 3 2 1 0 7-bit; LSB first -- -- Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 7-bit; MSB first -- -- Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 8-bit; LSB first -- Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 8-bit; MSB first -- Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 9-bit; LSB first Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 9-bit; MSB first Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 8 7 6 5 4 1192 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (25) UART Reception Data Register (LURDRn) Address: F06E7H, F06E6H Value after reset: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 8 7 6 5 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 [8:0] 0 Setting Range Function 8 to 0 Allows the reception data to be read from the reception buffer. 000H to 1FFH 15 to 9 Reserved. These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. -- R/W R R/W The LURDRn register allows the reception data to be read from the reception data register. When the UROE bit in the LUOERn register is 1, the reception data is stored in this register and can be read out. This register is updated at the stop bit in the reception data. This register is also updated when an error is caused by the parity or stop bit. This register is not updated upon occurrence of an overrun error if the OERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (overrun error detection is enabled). This register is updated upon occurrence of an overrun error if the OERE bit is 0 (overrun error detection is disabled). Read this register upon occurrence of a reception error (overrun error, framing error, or parity error) if the OERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (overrun error detection is enabled). Reading the next data without reading this register causes an overrun error. This register can be accessed in 8 bits. However, do not access this register in 8-bit units when the expansion bits are used (the UEBE bit in the LUORn1 register is 1 (expansion bit operation enabled)). The table below shows the bit arrangement according to the set transfer format. LURDRn Item 3 2 1 0 7-bit; LSB first -- -- Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 7-bit; MSB first -- -- Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 8-bit; LSB first -- Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 8-bit; MSB first -- Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 9-bit; LSB first Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 9-bit; MSB first Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 8 7 6 5 4 1193 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (26) UART Wait Transmission Data Register (LUWTDRn) Address: F06E9H, F06E8H Value after reset: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 8 7 6 5 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 [8:0] 0 Setting Range Function R/W 8 to 0 Sets the data to be transmitted from the UART wait transmission data register after waiting for the stop bit reception to be completed. 000H to 1FFH R/W 15 to 9 Reserved. These bits are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. -- R/W The LUWTDRn register sets the data to be transmitted from the UART wait transmission data register. Writing data to this register with the UTOE bit in the LUOERn register set to 1 starts transmission. Use this register only to switch from reception to transmission in half-duplex communication. The user should write to this register only while the stop bit is received. Note that the wait time is only 1 bit even if the stop bit length is set to 2 bits with the USBLS bit in the LBFCn register. When this register is read, the LUTDRn register value is actually read. In 9-bit communication mode, do not attempt 8-bit access. Do not write data to this register when data transmission from the UART buffer is in progress. The table below shows the bit arrangement according to the set transfer format. LUWTDRn Item 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7-bit; LSB first -- -- Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 7-bit; MSB first -- -- Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 8-bit; LSB first -- Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 8-bit; MSB first -- Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 9-bit; LSB first Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 9-bit; MSB first Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1194 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.3 Modes The LIN/UART module provides the following four modes, depending upon the specific function to be performed: LIN reset mode LIN mode (LIN master mode/LIN slave mode [auto baud rate]/LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate]) UART mode LIN self-test mode The supply of clocks to the LIN/UART module is stopped in LIN reset mode, which reduces power consumption. Figure 17-3 shows mode transitions. Table 17-4 describes mode transition conditions. Table 17-5 lists operations available in each mode. Figure 17-3. Mode Transitions CPU reset (6) LIN self-test mode LIN reset mode (5) (4) (1) (2) (3) LIN modes - LIN master mode - LIN slave mode [Auto baud rate] - LIN slave mode [Fixed baud rate] R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 UART mode 1195 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Table 17-4. Mode Transition Conditions Step (1) Mode transition LIN reset mode Transition condition LIN mode LMD bits in LMDn register = 00b (LIN master mode) and OM1 and OM0 bits in LCUCn register = 01b or 11b LIN reset mode LIN mode LMD bits in LMDn register = 10b (LIN slave mode[auto baud rate]) and OM1 and OM0 bits in LCUCn register = 01b or 11b LIN reset mode LIN mode LMD bits in LMDn register = 11b (LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate]) and OM1 and OM0 bits in LCUCn register = 01b or 11b (2) LIN mode LIN reset mode OM0 bit in LCUCn register = 0b (3) LIN reset mode UART mode LMD bits in LMDn register = 01b and OM0 bit in LCUCn register = 1b (4) UART mode LIN reset mode OM0 bit in LCUCn register = 0b (5) LIN reset mode LIN self-test mode See 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. (6) LIN self-test mode LIN reset mode See 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. Table 17-5. Operations Available in Each Mode LIN mode LIN master mode LIN slave mode [auto baud rate]/ LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate] Header transmission Response transmission Response reception Wake-up transmission Wake-up reception Error detection Header reception Response transmission Response reception Wake-up transmission Wake-up reception Error detection UART mode UART transmission UART reception Error detection LIN self-test mode Self test Whether a transition has been caused to the LIN reset mode, the LIN mode, or the UART mode can be verified by reading the LMD bits in the LMDn register or the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register. The maximum mode transition time (maximum time from when the value is set to the LSUCn register to when the value is indicated in the LMSTn register) is the sum of three CPU clock (fCLK) cycles and four cycles of the LIN communication clock source (input clock to the LIN/UART module selected by LINnMCK). For a description of the LIN self-test mode, see 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1196 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.3.1 LIN Reset Mode Setting the OM0 bit in the LCUCn register to 0b (LIN reset mode) causes a transition to LIN reset mode. The change to LIN reset mode can be verified by determining that the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register has been set to 0b (LIN reset mode). In this mode, the LIN communication and the UART communication functions are all halted, and fLIN also stops. From LIN reset mode, transitions to LIN mode, UART mode, and LIN self-test mode can be made. When the mode changes to LIN reset mode, the following registers are initialized to their reset values, and as long as LIN reset mode is in effect, they retain their initial values. LTRCn register LSTn register LESTn register LUOERn register The following registers retain their previous values even when a transition to LIN reset mode is made: LCHSEL register LWBRn register LBRPn0 register LBRPn1 register LUSCn register LMDn register LBFCn register LSCn register LWUPn register LIEn register LEDEn register LDFCn register LIDBn register LCBRn register LUDBn0 register LDBnm register (m = 1 to 8) LUORn1 register LUTDRn register LURDRn register LUWTDRn register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1197 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.3.2 LIN Mode LIN mode can operate in the following submodes: LIN master mode, LIN slave mode [auto baud rate], and LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate]. In LIN master mode, the following operations can be performed: header transmission, response transmission, response reception, wake-up transmission, wake-up reception, and error detection. In LIN reset mode, setting the LMD bits in the LMDn register to 00b (LIN master mode) and the OM1 and OM0 bits in the LCUCn register to either 01b or 11b sets LIN master mode, turning the OMM1 and OMM0 bits in the LMSTn register to either 01b to 11b. In LIN slave mode [auto baud rate] and LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate], header reception, response transmission, response reception, wake-up transmission, wake-up reception, and error detection can be performed. The LIN slave mode [auto baud rate] allows automatic detection of the break field and the sync field, and sets a baud rate based on the results of measurement of a sync field. Operation is possible with baud rates from 1 kbps to 20 kbps. Set the LPRS[2:0] bits in the LWBRn register according to the target baud rate so that the frequency of the clock (prescaler clock) obtained by dividing the LIN communication clock source frequency by the prescaler is the corresponding value from the list. [Target baud rate] 1 kbps to 20 kbps: 1 kbps to less than 2.4 kbps: 2.4 kbps to 20 kbps: Note [Frequency of prescaler clock] 4 MHz Note 4 MHz 8 MHz to 12 MHz Set the NSPB[3:0] bits in the LWBRn register to 0011b (4 sampling). In LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate] allows automatic detection of the break field, the sync field, and the ID filed at a baud rate that is set in advance by the baud rate generator. In LIN reset mode, setting the LMD bits in the LMDn register to 10b (LIN slave mode [auto baud rate] and setting the OM1 and OM0 bit in the LCUCn register to 01b or 11b sets LIN slave mode [auto baud rate]; and setting the LMD bits in the LMDn register to 11b (LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate]), and setting the OM1 and OM0 bits in the LCUCn register to 01b or 11b sets LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate], turning the OMM1 and OMM0 bits in the LMSTn register to 01b or 11b. When changing a submode to another submode within LIN mode, a transition to LIN reset mode should first be made and change the LMD bits in the LMDn register. The LIN mode provides the following two operation modes: LIN operation mode LIN wake-up mode R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1198 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Figure 17-4 shows the transition of operation modes. Table 17-6 describes the transition conditions of operation modes. Figure 17-4. Transition of Operation Modes LIN reset mode LIN modes (3) - LIN master mode - LIN slave mode [auto baud rate] - LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate] LIN operation mode (1) (4) (5) (2) LIN wake-up mode Table 17-6. Transition Conditions of Operation Modes Step Operation mode transition (1) LIN reset mode Transition condition LIN mode LMD bits in LMDn register = 00b or 10b or -LIN operation mode 11b and OM1 and OM0 bits in LCUCn register = 11b (2) LIN reset mode LIN mode LMD bits in LMDn register = 00b or 10b or -LIN wake-up mode 11b and OM1 and OM0 bits in LCUCn register = 01b (3)Note 1 LIN mode LIN reset mode OM0 bit in LCUCn register = 0b LIN mode OM1 and OM0 bits in LCUCn register = 01b -LIN operation mode -LIN wake-up mode (4)Note 2 LIN mode -LIN operation mode (5) LIN mode Note 2 -LIN wake-up mode Notes 1. -LIN wake-up mode LIN mode OM1 and OM0 bits in LCUCn register = 11b -LIN operation mode When the LIN/UART module makes a transition from the LIN operating mode to the LIN reset mode while operating as a LIN slave (at a fixed baud rate), write 1 to the LIN0EN bit (or the LIN1EN bit) in the PER2 register after having cleared the given bit to 0. 2. Transition between LIN operation mode and LIN wake-up mode cannot be made when communication is going on (when the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is 1). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1199 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (1) LIN Operation Mode In LIN operation mode, frame processing (header transmission, header reception, response transmission, response reception, and error detection) can be performed. During a transition from LIN reset mode to LIN mode, setting the OM1 and OM0 bits in the LCUCn register to 11b changes the mode to LIN operation mode, changing the OMM1 and OMM0 bits in the LMSTn register to 11b. Communication settings should be performed after the LMSTn register has become 11b. (2) LIN Wake-up Mode In LIN wake-up mode, wake-up signal processing (wake-up transmission, wake-up reception, and error detection) can be performed. During a transition from LIN reset mode to LIN mode, setting the OM1 and OM0 bits in the LCUCn register to 01b changes the mode to LIN wake-up mode, changing the OMM1 and OMM0 bits in the LMSTn register to 01b. Communication settings should be performed after the LMSTn register has become 01b. 17.3.3 UART Mode In LIN reset mode, setting the LMD bits in the LMDn register to 01b (UART mode) and the OM0 bit in the LCUCn register to 1b changes the mode to UART mode, turning the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register to 1b. Communication settings should be performed after the LMSTn register has become 01b. 17.3.4 LIN Self-Test Mode Writing to the LSTCn register changes the mode to LIN self-test mode. The LSTM bit in the LSTCn register being 1 indicates that the mode has transitioned to the LIN self-test mode. For further details of operations, see 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1200 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.4 LIN Mode 17.4.1 Operation Overview (1) LIN Master Mode (a) Header Transmission Figure 17-5 shows the operation of the LIN/UART module (LIN master mode) in header transmission. Table 177 provides processing in header transmission. Figure 17-5. Operation in Header Transmission Header Break delimiter Response Inter-byte space (header) Break Data 1 ID + parity Break field (1) Response space Sync field (2) (3) (4) ID field (5) (6) (7) Table 17-7. Processing in Header Transmission Step Software processing LIN/UART module processing (1) (2) Sets the FTS bit in the LTRCn register to 1 (start a frame transmission or wakeup transmission/reception). Transmits a break. (3) Waits for an interrupt request. Transmits a break delimiter. Sets a baud rate Sets noise filter ON/OFF Enables interrupt Enables error detection Sets frame configuration parameters Changes the LIN/UART module to the LIN master mode: LIN operation mode Sets information on the frame to be transmitted (ID, parity, data length, response direction, Checksum method, and transmission data) Waits for the setting of the FTS bit in the LTRCn register by software (idle). (4) Transmits a sync field (55H). (5) Transmits an inter-byte space (header). (6) Transmits an ID field. (7) Sets a successful header transmission flag. For information about error detection, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1201 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (b) Response Transmission Figure 17-6 shows the operation of the LIN/UART module (LIN master mode) in response transmission. Table 17-8 provides processing in response transmission. Figure 17-6. Operation in Response Transmission Response Header Response space ID + parity Inter-frame space Inter-byte space Data 1 Data 2 Checksum Data field Data field Checksum (1) (2) (3)(4) (5) (6) (7) Interrupt Table 17-8. Processing in Response Transmission Step (1) Software processing (When in frame separate mode) Sets the RTS bit in the LTRCn register to 1 (response transmission/reception started). (When not in frame separate mode) Waits for an interrupt request . (2) Waits for an interrupt request. LIN/UART module processing (When in frame separate mode) Waits for the setting of the RTS bit in the LTRCn register to 1 by software. When the bit is set to 1, sends a response space. (When not in frame separate mode) Sends a response space. Transmits the data 1. (3) Transmits an inter-byte space. (4) (5) Transmits the checksum. (6) Sets a successful frame/wake-up transmission flag. Sets the FTS bit in the LTRCn register to 0 (frame transmission or wake-up Transmits the data 2. Transmits an inter-byte space Transmits the data 3. Transmits an inter-byte space (Repeats the transmission of inter-byte spaces as many times as the data length specified in bits RFDL[3:0] in the LDFCn register, and stops the transmission when the BER flag in the LESTn register is 1 (bit error detected). If an error occurs, does not perform the Checksum transmission in item (5)). : transmission/reception stopped). (When in frame separate mode) Sets the RTS bit in the LTRCn register to 0 (response transmission/reception stopped). (7) Processing after communication Idle Checks the LSTn register and clears flags. For information about error detection, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1202 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (c) Response Reception Figure 17-7 shows the operation of the LIN/UART module (LIN master mode) on response reception. Table 179 provides processing in response reception. Figure 17-7. Operation in Response Reception Header Response Response space Inter-frame space Inter-byte space ID + parity Data 1 Data 2 Data field (1) (2) Checksum Data field (3) Checksum (4) (5) (6) Interrupt Table 17-9. Processing in Response Reception Step (1) Software processing Waits for an interrupt request (no processing). LIN/UART module processing Waits for detection of a start bit. (2) Receives the data 1 when the start bit is detected. (3) Sets the successful data 1 reception flag. (4) Receives the data 2 when the start bit is detected. Receives the data 3 when the start bit is detected. Repeats the transmission of inter-byte spaces as many times as the data length specified in bits RFDL[3:0] in the LDFCn register, and stops the transmission when any bit in the LESTn register is 1 (bit error detected). If an error occurs, the checksum determination in item (5) is not performed). : Receives the checksum when the start bit is detected. Determines the checksum. Sets the successful frame/wake-up reception flag. Sets the FTS bit in the LTRCn register to 0 (frame transmission or wake-up (5) transmission/reception stopped). (6) Processing after communication Idle Reads the received data. Checks the LSTn register and clears flags. For information about error detection, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1203 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (2) LIN Slave Mode (a) Header Reception Figure 17-8 shows the operation of the LIN/UART module (LIN slave mode) in header reception. Table 17-10 provides processing in header reception. Figure 17-8. Operation in Header Reception Response Header Inter-byte space (header) Break delimiter Break Data 1 ID + parity Break field (1) Response space ID field Sync field (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Table 17-10. Processing in Header Reception Step Software processing (1) (2) Waits for an interrupt request. Sets a baud rate. Sets noise filter ON/OFF. Enables interrupt. Enables error detection. Sets frame configuration parameters. Changes the LIN/UART module to the LIN slave mode: LIN operation mode. Sets the FTS bit in the LTRCn register to 1 (header reception or wake-up transmission/reception started). LIN/UART module processing Waits for the setting of the FTS bit in the LTRCn register by software. Waits for detection of a break field. (3) Detects a break field (in the case of LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate]; for break field detection timing in the case of LIN slave mode [auto baud rate], see (1) Auto Baud Rate Correction Function). (4) Detects a sync field (55H) Sets the baud rate generator (in the case of LIN slave mode [auto baud rate]) Clears the no-response request bit (LNRR bit). (5) Receives an ID field. Checks an ID parity bit (6) Sets a header reception complete flag. (7) Checks the LSTn register and clears flags. Checks the LIDBn register and prepares a response. Completes a header reception process. Waits for a response request. n = 0, 1 The LIN/UART module can receive a break field during transmission or reception of a frame. Here, a reception status interrupt might be generated on the detection of a framing error, bit error, etc, at the position of the stop bit of the frame preceding break field reception. For information about error detection, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1204 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (1) Auto Baud Rate Correction Function In LIN slave mode [auto baud rate], the system always measures the low-level widths that are received. If the first "Low" width is 10 times (if the BLT bit in the LBFCn register is "0") or 11 times (if the BLT bit in the LBFCn register is "1") or greater calculated from the average of the starting 2 bits (the period of the consecutive fall edges from the beginning of the sync field) of the sync field, the system concludes that the detection of a break field was successful, and verifies that the data in the sync field is 55H. When confirming that the data is 55H and the reception of the sync field is successful, the system automatically sets the baud rate correction results in the LBRPn1 and LBRPn0 registers. If data is received up to the ID field without error, a successful header reception interrupt is generated at the stop bit position. If the sync field data is not 55H, the system concludes that the detection of a sync field failed, and sets a sync field error flag, and generates an error detection interrupt. In such a case, the LIN/UART module waits for the detection of another break field ("Low") without baud rate correction. Figure 17-9. Header Reception in LIN Slave Mode [Auto Baud Rate] (in Normal Operation) LRXDn ID + parity Break detection successful LBRPn0 register LBRPn1 register Sync field detection successful Header reception successful New value after synchronization Value before synchronization HTRC bit in LSTn register SFER bit in LESTn register Figure 17-10. Header Reception in LIN Slave Mode [Auto Baud Rate] (Sync Field Error) LRXDn Break detection successful LBRPn0 register LBRPn1 register Break detection successful Value before synchronization HTRC bit in LSTn register SFER bit in LESTn register Cleared by software R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1205 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (b) Response Transmission Figure 17-11 shows the operation of the LIN/UART module (in LIN slave mode) in response transmission. Table 17-11 provides processing in response transmission. Figure 17-11. Operation in Response Transmission Header Response Response space ID + parity Inter-frame space Inter-byte space Data 1 Data 2 Checksum Data field Data field Checksum (1) (2) (4) (3) (5) (6) (7) Interrupt Table 17-11. Processing in Response Transmission Step (1) Software processing LIN/UART module processing Sets the LDFCn register. Sets the LDBnm register. Sets the RTS bit in the LTRCn register to Waits for the setting by software of the RTS bit or the LNRR bit in the LTRCn register. Sends a response space after the RTS bit in the LTRCn register is set to 1. 1 (response transmission/reception started). (2) Waits for an interrupt request. Transmits the data 1. (3) Transmits the inter-byte space. (4) (5) Transmits the checksum. (6) Sets a successful frame/wake-up transmission flag or an error flag. Sets the RTS bit in the LTRCn register to 0 (response Transmits the data 2. Transmits an inter-byte space Transmits the data 3. Transmits an inter-byte space (Repeats the transmission of inter-byte spaces as many times as the data length specified in bits RFDL[3:0] in the LDFCn register, and stops the transmission when the BER bit in the LESTn register is 1 (bit error detected). If an error occurs, the checksum transmission in item (5) is not performed). : transmission/reception stopped) (7) Processing after communication Checks the LSTn register and clears flags. Completes the response transmission process. Waits for a new break. The LIN/UART module can receive a break field during the transmission or reception of a frame. Here, a reception status interrupt might be generated on the detection of a framing error, bit error, etc, at the position of the stop bit of the frame preceding break field reception. For information about error detection, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1206 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (c) Response Reception Figure 17-12 shows the operation of the LIN/UART module (LIN slave mode) in response reception. Table 1712 provides processing in response reception. Figure 17-12. Operation in Response Reception Header Response Response space ID + parity Inter-frame space Inter-byte space Data 1 Data 2 Data field Checksum Data field (1) (2) Checksum (4) (3) (5) (6) Interrupt Table 17-12. Processing in Response Reception Step (1) Software processing Sets the LDFCn register. Sets the RTS bit in the LTRCn register to 1 (response transmission/reception started). (2) Waits for an interrupt request. LIN/UART module processing Waits for the setting by software of the RTS bit or the LNRR bit in the LTRCn register. Waits for detection of the start bit. Receives the data 1 when the start bit is detected. (3) Sets the successful data 1 reception flag. (4) Receives the data 2 when the start bit is detected. Receives the data 3 when the start bit is detected. Repeats the transmission of inter-byte spaces as many times as the data length specified in bits RFDL[3:0] in the LDFCn register, and stops the transmission when any bit in the LESTn register is 1 (bit error detected). If an error occurs, the checksum determination in item (5) is not performed). : Receives the checksum when the start bit is detected. Determines the checksum. Sets a successful frame/wake-up reception flag or an error flag. Sets the RTS bit in the LTRCn register to 0 (response transmission/reception (5) stopped). (6) Processing after communication Reads the received data. Checks the LSTn register and clears flags. Completes the response process. Waits for a new break. The LIN/UART module can receive a break field during the transmission or reception of a frame. Here, a reception status interrupt might be generated on the detection of a framing error, bit error, etc, at the position of the stop bit of the frame preceding break field reception. For information about error detection, refer to 17.4.6 Error Status. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1207 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (d) No-Response Request Figure 17-13 shows the operation of the LIN/UART module (LIN slave mode) when no response is requested. Table 17-13 shows the processing that occurs when no response is requested. Figure 17-13. Operation when No Response is Requested Header Response Inter-byte space Response space ID + parity Data 1 Data field Inter-frame space Data 2 Checksum Data field Checksum (1) Table 17-13. Processing when No Response is Requested Step Software processing LIN/UART module processing Waits for the setting of the no-response request bit (1) (LNRR bit) by software. Sets the no-response request bit (LNRR bit) to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Completes the frame reception process. Waits for a new break. 1208 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.4.2 Data Transmission/Reception (1) Data Transmission One bit of data is transmitted per 1 Tbit. The data that is transmitted returns to the reception data input pin via the LIN transceiver. The received data and the transmitted data is compared bit by bit, and the results are stored in the BER flag in the LESTn register (see 17.4.6 Error Status). In LIN master mode and LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate], 1 Tbit is generated to be 16fLIN, and thus the sampling point for received data is at the 13th clock cycle (81.25% position). In LIN slave mode [auto baud rate], if 1 Tbit is generated to be 4fLIN, the sampling point for received data is at the third clock cycle (75% position). If 1 Tbit is generated to be 8fLIN, the sampling point for received data is at the 7th clock cycle (87.5% position). Figure 17-14 shows an example of data transmission timing. Figure 17-14. Example of Data Transmission Timing (LIN Master Mode, LIN Slave Mode [Fixed Baud Rate]) ST LTXDn SP Data (8 bits) Data (8 bits) ST SP Byte field ST D0 D1 D2 Start bit D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Data (8 bits) SP Stop bit fLIN (internal signal) 1 Tbit = 16 fLIN LTXDn Dm-1 Dm+1 Dm Physical layer delay LRXDn Dm-1 Dm Sampling point for bit error detection Synchronizing LRXDn Dm-1 Dm 13/16Tbit n = 0, 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1209 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (2) Data Reception Data reception is performed by using the synchronized LRXDn signal (an internal signal) that is the input from the LRXDn pin synchronized with prescaler clock. The byte field is synchronized at the falling edge of the start bit for the synchronized LRXDn signal. After the falling edge is detected, sampling is performed again 0.5 Tbit later, and the falling edge is recognized as a start bit if the synchronized LRXDn signal is low. The falling edge is not recognized as a start bit if the LRXDn signal after the clearing of the resetting is low-fixed or if a high level is detected on re-sampling. After the start bit is detected, the system samples 1 bit per Tbit. The LIN/UART module has a noise filter function with respect to reception data. If the LRDNFS bit in the LMDn register is 0, the LIN/UART module uses a noise filter, and for a sampling value the value determined by a 3-sampling majority rule on prescaler clocks is used. If the LRDNFS bit in the LMDn register is 1, the LIN/UART module does not use a noise filter, and for a sampling value the value of the synchronized LRXDn value at the sampling position is used as is. Figure 17-15 shows an example of data reception timing. Figure 17-15. Example of Data Reception Timing (LIN Master Mode, LIN Slave Mode [Fixed Baud Rate]) Byte field LRXDn ST D0 Start bit D1 D2 D3 D5 D6 D7 Data (8 bits) Start bit LRXDn (Enlarged) D4 SP Stop bit D0 D1 Prescaler clock (internal signal) 0.5 Tbit Synchronized LRXDn (internal signal) n = 0, 1 1 Tbit (= 16 fLIN) Start bit Falling edge detection R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Confirmed to be low 0.5 Tbit after falling edge detection. 1 Tbit (= 16 fLIN) D0 Bit 0 is read 1 Tbit after confirmation of a low level. D1 After that, data bit is read every Tbit. 1210 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.4.3 Transmission/Reception Data Buffering This section explains the buffer processing that takes place when the LIN/UART module sends or receives data continuously. (1) Transmission of LIN Frames For an 8-byte transmission, the contents stored in registers LDBn1 to LDBn8 are sequentially transmitted to data areas 1 to 8 of the LIN frame. In the case of a 4-byte transmission, the contents stored in registers LDBn1 to LDBn4 are transmitted to data areas 1 to 4 of the LIN frame, but the contents of registers LDBn5 to LDBn8 are not transmitted. The transmitted checksum data is stored in the LCBRn register. Figure 17-16 depicts the LIN transmission processing and the required buffer. Figure 17-16. LIN Transmission Processing and Required Buffer Buffer LDBn1 register LDBn2 register LDBn3 register LDBn4 register LDBn5 register LDBn6 register LDBn7 register LDBn8 register LCBRn register Data 1 Data 2 Data 8 Checksum Response Header Frame (a) Frame Separate Mode Setting the FSM bit in the LDFCn register to 1 turns on the frame separate mode. In frame separate mode, a header and a response are transmitted when prompted by separate transmission start requests. When the transmission of a header is finished, the HTRC flag in the LSTn register turns 1 (successful header transmission). Use frame separate mode when sending or receiving response data of 9 bytes or greater in LIN master mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1211 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (2) Reception of LIN Frames For an 8-byte reception, the contents of data areas 1 to 8 of the LIN frame is stored in registers LDBn1 to LDBn8, respectively, upon receipt of a stop bit. In the case of a 4-byte reception, the contents of data areas 1 to 4 of the LIN frame are stored in registers LDBn1 to LDBn4, respectively; however, no data is stored in registers LDBn5 to LDBn8. Also, the received checksum data is stored in the LCBRn register. Figure 17-17 depicts the LIN reception processing and the required buffer. Figure 17-17. LIN Reception Processing and Required Buffer Frame Response Header Data 1 Data 2 Data 8 Checksum Buffer LDBn1 register LDBn2 register LDBn3 register LDBn4 register LDBn5 register LDBn6 register LDBn7 register LDBn8 register LCBRn register (a) Reception of Data 1 When the reception of the first byte of data is finished, the D1RC flag in the LSTn register turns 1 (successful data 1 reception). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1212 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (3) Multi-Byte Response Transmission/Reception Function Normally in LIN communications, a response is 9 bytes or less (including a checksum field); however, responses in 10 bytes or greater can also be sent and received. In such a case, the bit error, framing error, response preparation error detection, and auto checksum functions are enabled. If the data length is greater than 8 bytes, the LSS bit should be set to 1 (indicating that the next data group to be sent or received is not the final data group) in the first data group (variable in 0 to 8 bytes) before sending or receiving the data group. After the transmission or reception, the user should determine whether the next data group is the final data group. If it is the final data group, the LSS bit should be set to 0 (indicating that the next data group to be sent or received is the final data group), and a checksum should be appended to the final data group. By changing the RFDL bit settings when the RTS bit is 0, the user can change the data length for each data group. When performing multi-byte response transmission/reception in LIN master mode, set the FSM bit in the LDFCn register to 1 (frame separate mode). Caution In LIN slave mode, the LIN/UART module can detect a new break field during the transmission or reception of a response. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1213 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.4.4 Wake-up Transmission/Reception The wake-up transmission/reception can be used in LIN wake-up mode. (1) Wake-up Transmission In LIN wake-up mode, setting the RCDS bit in the LDFCn register to 1 (transmission) and the FTS bit in the LTRCn register to 1 (header reception or wake-up transmission/reception started) causes a wake-up signal to be output from the output pin. The low width of the wake-up signal should be set using the WUTL[3:0] bits in the LWUPn register. However, when the LWBR0 bit in the LWBRn register is 1 in LIN master mode, the low width is defined based on fa as the LIN system clock (fLIN) regardless of the setting of LCKS bits in the LMDn register. Setting the baud rate to 19200 bps with fa selected and setting the WUTL[3:0] bits in the LWUPn register to 0100b (5 Tbits) allows 260 s low level width of the signal to be output in LIN wake-up mode regardless of the setting of LCKS bits in the LMDn register. If a wake-up low is output without any bit error, the FTC flag in the LSTn register turns 1 (successful response or wake-up transmission); when the FTCIE bit in the LIEn register is 1 (successful response/wakeup transmission interrupt enabled), an interrupt request is generated. If a bit error is detected, wake-up transmission is canceled and the BER flag in the LESTn register is set to 1 (bit error detection). Figure 17-18 shows the wake-up transmission timing. Figure 17-18. Wake-up Transmission Timing LTXDn (n = 0, 1) Low width configuration (1 to 16 Tbits) FTC bit in LSTn register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1214 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (2) Wake-up Reception The detection of a wake-up signal involves the use of an input signal low width count function. The input signal low width count function measures the low width of the input signal to the LRXDn pin, using the same sampling point as data reception. The function can measure the input signal low width of 2.5 Tbits of fLIN or greater. In LIN master mode, appropriately setting the LWBR0 bit in the LWBRn register allows switching between LIN operation mode and LIN wake-up mode without changing any baud rate generator setting. Set the LWBR0 bit in the LWBRn register to 0 when LIN Specification Package Revision 1.3 is used, and set it to 1 when LIN Specification Package Revision 2.x is used. When the LWBR0 bit is set to 1, fa is always selected as the LIN system clock (fLIN) regardless of the setting of LCKS bits in the LMDn register (setting of LCKS bits not affected). Setting the baud rate to 19200 bps with fa selected allows 130 s or longer low level width of the input signal to be detected regardless of the setting of LCKS bits in the LMDn register. When using this function, in LIN wake-up mode, set the RFT bit in the LDFCn register to 0 (LIN master mode: reception), or RCDS bit to 0 (LIN slave mode: reception), and the FTS bit in the LTRCn register to 1 (LIN master mode: frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception started; LIN slave mode: header reception or wake-up transmission/reception started). When the low width to be measured is reached, the FRC flag in the LSTn register turns 1 (successful response/wake-up reception). If the FRCIE bit in the LIEn register is 1 (successful response or wake-up reception interrupt enabled), an interrupt request is generated. Figure 17-19. Input Signal Low Count Function LRXDn (n = 0, 1) FRC bit in LSTn register Wake-up detection width (2.5 Tbits) Timing for setting the FRC bit in the LSTn register (3.0 Tbits) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1215 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.4.5 Status During LIN mode operation, the LIN/UART module can detect seven types of statuses. The four statuses, successful frame/wake-up transmission, successful frame/wake-up reception, error detection, successful header transmission//header reception, can generate interrupt requests. Table 17-14 shows the types of statuses available in LIN master mode. Table 17-15 lists the types of statuses available in LIN slave mode [auto baud rate] and in LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate]. Table 17-14. Types of Statuses in LIN Master Mode Status Status set condition Status clear condition Operation mode capable of status detection Reset After the OM0 bit in the LCUCn register is set to not-LIN-resetmode, if actually the LIN/UART module is cleared from LIN reset mode. After the OM0 bit in the LCUCn register is set to LIN reset mode, if actually the LIN/UART module enters LIN reset mode. Operation mode After the OM1 bit in the LCUCn register is set to LIN operation mode, if actually the LIN/UART module enters LIN operation mode. After the OM1 bit in the LCUCn register is set to LIN wake-up mode, if actually the LIN/UART module enters LIN wake-up mode. Frame/wake-up transmission end When a frame (header transmission + response transmission), a wake-up signal, or a data group is transmitted successfully. When another LIN operation communication is started When cleared by software After transition to LIN reset mode mode LIN wake-up mode Frame/wake-up reception end When a frame (header transmission + response reception), a wake-up signal, or a data group is received successfully. When another LIN operation communication is started When cleared by software After transition to LIN reset mode mode LIN wake-up mode Error detection If any of the PRER flag, CSER flag, FER flag, FTER flag, PBER flag, and BER flags in the LESTn register turns 1 (error detected). When another LIN operation communication is started When cleared by software mode LIN wake-up mode Note 1 After transition to LIN All modes Corresponding bit Interrupt OMM0 bit in LMSTn register Not available OMM1 bit in LMSTn register Not available FTC flag in LSTn register Available FRC flag in LSTn register Available ERR flag in LSTn register Available LIN operation mode D1RC flag in LSTn register Not available LIN operation mode HTRC flag in LSTn register Available LIN operation mode LIN wake-up mode reset mode <R> Data 1 reception end The RFT bit in the LDFCn register is 0 (reception) and the first byte of the response field is receivedNote 2. When another Header reception end When a header field is received successfully. When another Notes 1. communication is started When cleared by software After transition to LIN reset mode communication is started When cleared by software After transition to LIN reset mode In LIN wake-up mode and LIN operation mode, the ERR flag in the LSTn register is cleared to 0 by writing 0 to the PRER flag, CSER flag, FER flag, FTER flag, PBER flag or BER flags in the LESTn register. 2. Not detected when the RFDL[3:0] bits in the LDFCn register are 0000b (0-byte + checksum). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1216 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Table 17-15. Types of Statuses in LIN Slave Mode Status Status set condition Status clear condition Operation mode capable of detecting a status Corresponding bit Interrupt Reset After the OM0 bit in the LCUCn register is set to not-LIN-resetmode, if actually the LIN/UART module is cleared from LIN reset mode. After the OM0 bit in the LCUCn register is set to LIN reset mode, if actually the LIN/UART module enters LIN reset mode. All modes OMM0 bit in LMSTn register Not available Operation mode After the OM1 bit in the LCUCn register is set to LIN operation mode, if actually the LIN/UART module enters LIN operation mode. After the OM1 bit in the LCUCn register is set to LIN wake-up mode, if actually the LIN/UART module enters LIN wake-up mode. LIN operation OMM1 bit in LMSTn register Not available Frame/wake-up transmission end When a response field, a wake-up signal, or a data group is transmitted successfully. When cleared by software After transition to LIN reset FTC flag in LSTn register Available Frame/wake-up reception end When a response field, a wake-up signal, or a data group is received successfully. When cleared by software After transition to LIN reset FRC flag in LSTn register Available If any of the PRER flag, IPER flag, CSER flag, SFER flag, FER flag, TER flag ,and BER flags in the LESTn register turns 1 (error detected). When cleared by software ERR flag in LSTn register Available The RCDS bit in the LDFCn register is 0 (reception) and the first byte of the response field is receivedNote 2. When cleared by software After transition to LIN reset LIN operation mode D1RC flag in LSTn register Not available When a header field is received successfully. When cleared by software After transition to LIN reset LIN operation mode HTRC flag in LSTn register Available Error detection Data 1 reception end Header reception end mode mode Note 1 After transition to LIN reset mode mode LIN wake-up mode LIN operation mode LIN wake-up mode LIN operation mode LIN wake-up mode LIN operation mode LIN wake-up mode mode mode <R> Notes 1. In LIN wake-up mode and LIN operation mode, the ERR flag in the LSTn register is cleared to 0 by writing 0 to the PRER flag, IPER flag, CSER flag, SFER flag, FER flag, TER flag or BER flags in the LESTn register. 2. Not detected when the RFDL[3:0] bits in the LDFCn register are 0000b (0-byte + checksum). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1217 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.4.6 Error Status (1) LIN Master Mode (a) Types of Error Statuses The LIN/UART module can detect six types of error statuses in LIN master mode. The condition of these error statuses can be checked by means of the corresponding bits in the LESTn register. All error statuses represent interrupt events. Table 17-16 shows the types of error statuses. Table 17-16. Types of Error Statuses in LIN Master Mode Status Bit error Error detection condition The transmitted data and the data on the LIN bus monitored by the receive pin do not matchNote 1, 2 Physical bus error Operation mode capable of error detection LIN operation mode LIN wake-up mode LIN bus is detected to be high when LIN operation sending a break LIN bus is detected to be low when sending a break delimiter LIN bus is detected to be high when sending a wake-up mode LIN wake-up mode Communication Enable/disable Corresponding detection bit Cancel O BER flag in LESTn register Cancel O PBER flag in LESTn register Timeout error A frame or response transmission/reception does not terminate within a given timeNote 3 LIN operation mode Cancel O FTER flag in LESTn register Framing error In response field reception, a stop bit of each data byte is low LIN operation mode Cancel O FER flag in LESTn register Checksum error In response field reception, the result of checksum test gives an error LIN operation mode -- x CSER flag in LESTn register Response preparation error The following conditions occur in frame separate mode: The first reception data byte is received after completion of header transmission but before a response transmission/reception request is set The first reception data byte is received after completion of the previous data group reception but before a transmission/reception request for another data group is set LIN operation mode Cancel x RPER flag in LESTn register Notes 1. <R> If a bit error is detected, the process is canceled after a stop bit is sent. If a bit error is detected in a nondata area, such as an inter-byte space, the transmission is canceled immediately after transmission of error bit. If a bit error is detected during the transmission of a wake-up, the transmission of the wake-up is canceled after the error-causing bit is sent. <R> 2. In multi-byte response transmission, a bit error can be detected between data groups. 3. The timeout time depends on the response field data length (the RFDL[3:0] bits in the LDFCn register) and the checksum selection (the CSM bit in the LDFCn register), and this can be calculated according to the following formula: Timeout time is 8 data bytes until setting of LTRCn register in frame separate mode (FSM bit of LDFCn register is set to 1). [Frame timeout] On classic selection (when the CSM bit in the LDFCn register is 0): Timeout time = 49 + (number of data bytes + 1) x 14 [Tbit] On enhanced selection (when the CSM bit in the LDFCn register is 1): Timeout time = 48 + (number of data bytes + 1) x 14 [Tbit] R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1218 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) The aforementioned timeout time is a time greater than the TFRAME_MAX of LIN Specification Package Revision 1.3 on classic selection, or the TFRAME_MAX of LIN Specification Package Revision 2.x on enhanced selection. [Response timeout] Timeout time = (number of data bytes + 1) x 14 [Tbit] Caution The error status is cleared when another communication is started, when cleared by software, or after transition to LIN reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1219 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (b) Target Time Area for LIN Error Detection Figure 17-20 shows the time domain in which the LIN/UART module in master mode performs monitoring for error detection. Figure 17-20. Target Time Area for LIN Error Detection (LIN Master Mode) <Frame transmission/reception> Frame Header Break field Sync field Response ID field Bit error Physical bus error Data 1 Data 2 Data 8 Checksum In transmission only Only in transmission of break field and break delimiter Checksum error Only in reception with enhance checksum mode selected In reception only Frame timeout error Response timeout error Framing error Only stop bit in reception Response preparation error <Wake-up transmission> Wake-up Bit error Physical bus error R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1220 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (2) LIN Slave Mode (a) Types of Error Statuses The LIN/UART module can detect seven types of error statuses in LIN slave mode [auto baud rate] or in LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate]. These error statuses can be verified by checking the corresponding bits in the LESTn register. Table 17-17 shows the types of error statuses. Table 17-17. Types of Error Statuses in LIN Slave Mode Status Error detection condition Bit error The transmitted data and the data on the LIN bus monitored by the receive pin do not matchNotes 1, 2 Operation mode capable of error detection Communication Enable/ disable detection Cancel O BER flag in LESTn register LIN operation mode LIN wake-up mode Corresponding bit Timeout error A frame or response transmission/reception does not terminate within a given timeNote 3 LIN operation mode Cancel O TER flag in LESTn register Framing error In frame reception, a stop bit of each data byte is low LIN operation mode Cancel O FER flag in LESTn register Sync field error If the width of the break low is greater than the width set by the BLT bit in the LBFCn register and the sync field is not 55H LIN operation mode Cancel O SFER flag in LESTn register In response frame reception, the result of checksum test gives an error LIN operation mode Checksum error Note 4 -- x CSER flag in LESTn register Note 5 ID parity error Response preparation error Notes 1. <R> 2. 3. If the received ID parity bit does not match the value that is automatically calculated by the LIN/UART module LIN operation mode Cancel O IPER flag in LESTn register After the reception of a header, before LIN operation mode Cancel x RPER flag in LESTn register the first reception data byte is received, response preparation is not made in time. During a multi-byte response transmission/reception, before the first reception data byte of another data group is received, preparation for another data group is not made in time. If a bit error is detected, the process is canceled after a stop bit is sent. If a bit error is detected in a non-data area, such as an inter-byte space, the transmission is canceled immediately after transmission of error bit. If a bit error is detected during the transmission of a wake-up, the transmission of the wake-up is canceled after the error-causing bit is sent. In multi-byte response transmission, a bit error can be detected between data groups. The timeout time depends on the response field data length (the RFDL[3:0] bits in the LDFCn register) and the checksum selection (the LCS bit in the LDFCn register), and this can be calculated according to the following formulae: Until the RTS or LNRR bit in the LTRCn register is set, the timeout time is set based on 8-byte data. Once the RTS bit is set, the timeout time is re-set based on the response field data length (the RFDL[3:0] bits in the LDFCn register). When the LNRR bit is set, the timeout function is stopped. [Frame timeout] On classic selection (when the CSM bit in the LDFCn register is 0) Timeout time = 49 + (number of data bytes + 1) x 14 [Tbit] On enhanced selection (when the CSM bit in the LDFCn register is 1) Timeout time = 48 + (number of data bytes + 1) x 14 [Tbit] R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1221 RL78/F13, F14 4. 5. CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) The aforementioned timeout time is a time greater than the TFRAME_MAX of LIN Specification Package Revision 1.3 on classic selection, or the TFRAME_MAX of LIN Specification Package Revision 2.x on enhanced selection. [Response timeout] Timeout time = (number of data bytes + 1) x 14 [Tbit] Only indication in the SFER flag can be enabled or disabled; error detection cannot be enabled or disabled. Checksum determination is performed after response frame reception is completed. If the result is determined as an error, the successful reception flag is not set to 1. Caution The error status is cleared when cleared by software or after transition to LIN reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1222 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (b) Target Time Area for LIN Error Detection Figure 17-21 shows the time domain in which the LIN/UART module in slave mode performs monitoring for error detection. Figure 17-21. Target Time Area for LIN Error Detection (LIN Slave Mode) <Frame transmission/reception> Frame Header Break field Sync field Response ID field Bit error Data 1 Data 2 Data 8 Checksum In transmission only Frame timeout error Response timeout error Framing error Only stop bit in reception Sync field error Only in reception with enhance checksum mode selected Checksum error In reception only ID parity error Response preparation error <Wake-up transmission> Wake-up Bit error R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1223 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.5 UART Mode 17.5.1 Operation Overview (1) Transmission Figure 17-22 shows LIN/UART module (in UART mode) transmission operations; Table 17-18 shows LIN/UART module (in UART mode) transmission processing. Figure 17-22. LIN/UART Module (in UART mode) Transmission Operation (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) LTXDn Idle Idle Start bit 0 or 1 parity bit 7, 8, or 9 data bits 1 or 2 stop bits UART frame n = 0, 1 Table 17-18. LIN/UART Module (UART Mode) Transmission Processing Step (1) (2) Software processing Sets a baud rate. Sets noise filter ON/OFF. Sets error detection enable. Sets data format Sets an interrupt generation timing. Clears the LIN/UART module from LIN reset mode Sets the transmit enable bit (UTOE bit) to 1 Waits for a transmission trigger (LUTDRn register) by software. Sets the transmission data in the UART transmission data register (LUTDRn register) or UART wait transmission data (LUWTDRn). (3) LIN/UART module processing Waits for an interrupt request. Sets the transmission status flag. Transmits a start bit (for switching between transmission and reception in half duplex communication, transmits a start bit after receiving 1 stop bit. This function is referred to in 17.5.1 (4) Transmission Start Wait Function). (4) [When the UTIGTS bit is 0 (a transmission interrupt request is output upon start of transmission)] When transmitting data continuously, sets another piece of transmission data in the UART transmission data register (LUTDRn register), waits for the generation of an interrupt request. [When the UTIGTS bit is 0 (a transmission interrupt request is output upon start of transmission)] Outputs a transmission interrupt. Transmits the data set in the UART (wait) transmission data register. (5) Transmits a parity bit when parity is used. (6) Transmits 1 or 2 stop bits. (7) [When the UTIGTS bit is 0 (a transmission interrupt request is output upon start of transmission)] If another piece of transmission data is set, goes to step (3). [When the UTIGTS bit is 0 (a transmission interrupt request is output upon start of transmission)] If another piece of transmission data is set, goes to step (3). If another piece of transmission data is not set, clears the transmission status flag. [When the UTIGTS bit is 1 (a transmission interrupt request is output upon end of transmission)] When transmitting data continuously, goes to step (2). [When the UTIGTS bit is 1 (a transmission interrupt request is output upon end of transmission)] Outputs a transmission interrupt. Clears the transmission status flag R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1224 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (a) Continuous Transmission The LIN/UART module (in UART mode) can transmit multiple sets of data continuously by using the LUTDRn register. Figure 17-23 shows an operating example where the transmission interrupt generation timing is the start of transmission. Figure 17-24 shows an operating example where the transmission interrupt generation timing is the end of transmission. Figure 17-23. LIN/UART Module (in UART mode) Continuous Transmission Operation (when UTIGTS Bit in LUORn1 Register is 0) LTXDn LUTDRn register Data 1 Data 2 Data 1 Shift register for transmission Data 2 Data 1 Data (N-1) Data 3 Data 2 Data N Data N Data (N-1) Data N INTLINnTRM UTS bit in LSTn register The next transmission data is set. n = 0, 1 Figure 17-24. LIN/UART Module (in UART mode) Continuous Transmission Operation (when UTIGTS Bit in LUORn1 Register is 1) LTXDn LUTDRn register Shift register for transmission INTLINnTRM Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 2 Data 2 Data 2 Data (N-1) Data (N-1) Data (N-1) Data N Data N Data N UTS bit in LSTn register n = 0, 1 The next transmission data is set. An interrupt can be generated at the end of a transmission by changing the UTIGTS bit in the LUORn1 register from 0 to 1 after the start of transmission of final data, provided only that the transmission interrupt generation timing is the start of transmission and the end of transmission of final data needs to be known. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1225 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (b) UART Buffer Transmission The LIN/UART module (in UART mode) has a maximum of nine bytes of UART buffers, and thus it is capable of performing continuous transmissions through the use of UART buffers. Figure 17-25 shows the UART buffer transmission operation in the LIN/UART module (in UART mode). Table 17-19 shows the UART buffer transmission processing. Figure 17-25. UART Buffer Transmission in LIN/UART Module (in UART mode) (1) (2)(3)(4) S T (5) (6) (7) Data 0 P S IBS S T P (10)(11)(12)(13) (8)(9) Data 1 P S IBS S P T P S IBS S P T Data (N-1) P SIBS S T P Data N P S P ST: Start bit P: Parity bit SP: Stop bit IBS: Inter-byte space R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1226 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Table 17-19. UART Buffer Transmission Processing in LIN/UART Module (in UART mode) Step (1) (2) Software processing LIN/UART module processing Sets a baud rate. Sets noise filter ON/OFF. Sets error detection enable. Sets data format. Sets an interrupt generation timing to the end of transmission. Clears the LIN/UART module from LIN reset mode. Sets the transmit enable bit (UTOE bit) to 1 Waits for a transmission trigger (RTS bit) by software. Sets a UART buffer data length and whether the system must wait for the start of transmission. Sets the transmission data in the UART data buffer 0 register (LUDBn0) and the LIN/UART data buffer m register (LDBnm). (3) Sets the UART buffer transmission start bit (RTS). Sets the transmission status flag. Waits for an interrupt request. Transmits a start bit (for switching between transmission and reception in half duplex communication, transmits a start bit after receiving 1 stop bit. This function is referred to in 17.5.1 (4) Transmission Start Wait Function). (4) Transmits the data set in the UART data buffer 0 register (LUDBn0) and the LIN/UART data buffer m register (LDBnm). (5) Transmits a parity bit when parity is used. (6) Transmits 1 or 2 stop bits (7) Transmits an inter-byte space (idle). Repeats steps (3) to (7) until frame count -1 that was set in the UART buffer data length select bits is reached. (8) Transmits a start bit. (9) Transmits the data set in the LIN/UART data buffer m register (LDBnm). (10) Transmits a parity bit when parity is used. (11) Transmits 1 or 2 stop bits. (12) (13) Sets the buffer transmission end flag. Clears the UART buffer transmit start (RTS) bit. Outputs a transmission interrupt. Clears the transmission status flag. Checks the LSTn register and clears flags When transmitting data continuously, goes to step (2). n = 0, 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1227 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (2) Reception Figure 17-26 shows the LIN/UART module (in UART mode) reception operation. Table 17-20 shows the LIN/UART module (in UART mode) reception processing. Figure 17-26. LIN/UART Module (in UART Mode) Reception Operation (1) LRXDn Idle (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Start bit (7) Idle 0 or 1 parity bit 7, 8, or 9 data bits stop bits UART frame n = 0, 1 Table 17-20. LIN/UART Module (in UART Mode) Reception Processing Step (1) (2) Software processing Sets a baud rate. Sets noise filter ON/OFF. Sets error detection enable. Sets data format. Clears the LIN/UART module from LIN reset mode. Sets the receive enable bit (UROE bit) to 1. Waits for an interrupt request. LIN/UART module processing Waits for reception enable state switching by software. Waits for detection of a start bit. Waits for a falling edge from the reception pin, and detects a start bit. Sets the reception status flag. (3) Receives data. (4) Receives a parity bit when parity is used. (5) Receives only 1 stop bit. Outputs a successful reception interrupt. Clears the reception status flag. (6) (7) Checks the LSTn register and clears flags. Waits for a falling edge from the reception pin. n = 0, 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1228 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (3) Expansion Bits The LIN/UART module (in UART mode) can transmit and receive 9-bit long data by setting the UEBE bit in the LUORn1 register to 1. (a) Expansion Bit Transmission The LIN/UART module (in UART mode) can transmit 9-bit long data when the expansion bit enable bit (UEBE) in UART option register 1 (LUORn1) is 1 and by writing the 9-bit data to either the UART transmission data register (LUTDRn) or the UART wait transmission data register (LUWTDRn). Figure 17-27. Transmission Example When Expansion Bit is Enabled (LSB First) 0 7 8 data 0 LTXDn 0 7 8 data 1 EB 0 7 8 data 2 EB EB INTLINnTRM (UTIGTS bit in LUORn1 register is 1) INTLINnTRM (UTIGTS bit in LUORn1 register is 0) EB: Expansion bit (b) Expansion Bit Reception With the LIN/UART module (in UART mode), 9-bit data can always be received without requiring a comparison of expansion bits, provided that the expansion bit enable bit (UEBE) in UART option register 1 (LUORn1) is 1, the expansion bit comparison disable bit (UECD) is 1, and the expansion bit/data comparison enable bit (UEBDCE) is 0. Irrespective of the particular setting of the expansion bit detection level select bit (UEBDL) in UART option register 1 (LUORn1), a successful LINn reception interrupt is generated (n = 0, 1) when 9-bit data is received. Figure 17-28. Expansion Bit Reception Example (LSB First) 0 LRXDn 7 8 data 0 1 0 7 8 data 1 0 0 7 8 data 2 1 INTLINnRVC INTLINnSTA EXBT bit in LESTn register (n = 0,, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1229 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (c) Expansion Bit Reception (with Expansion Bit Comparison) The LIN/UART module (in UART mode) can compare received expansion bits and the UEBDL bits when the expansion bit enable bit (UEBE) in UART option register 1 (LUORn1) is 1, the expansion bit comparison disable bit (UECD) is 0, and the expansion bit/data comparison enable bit (UEBDCE) is 0. If the level that was set in the expansion bit detection level select bit (UEBDL) is detected, a LINn reception status interrupt is generated upon completion of data reception, and the expansion bit detection flag (EXBT) in the LIN/UART error status register (LESTn) is set. If the reversed value of an expansion bit detection level is detected, a successful LINn reception interrupt is generated. In either case, the received data is stored in the UART reception data register (LURDRn), unless there was an overrun error. Figure 17-29 shows an example when the expansion bit detection level select bit (UEBDL) is set to 0. Figure 17-29. Expansion Bit Reception Example (with Expansion Bit Comparison) (LSB First, UEBDL = 0) 0 LRXDn data0 78 1 0 data1 78 0 0 data2 78 1 0 data3 78 0 0 data4 78 1 INTLINnRVC INTLINnSTA EXBT bit in LESTn register Cleared Cleared (n = 0, 1) Notes 1. If a reception error (parity error, framing error, or overrun error) occurs in received data 0, 2, or 4 (if a reversed value of an expansion bit detection level is detected), a LINn reception status interrupt is generated, and the error flag is updated. In this case, a successful LINn reception interrupt is not generated 2. If a reception error (parity error, framing error, or overrun error) occurs in received data 1 or 3 (if an expansion bit detection level is detected), a LINn reception status interrupt is generated, and the error flag is updated. In the case of an overrun error, the expansion bit detection flag (EXBT) is also set. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1230 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (d) Expansion Bit Reception (with Data Comparison) The LIN/UART module (in UART mode) compares the 8-bit received data excluding the expansion bits with the preset LIDBn register value if the level that was set in the expansion bit detection level select bit (UEBDL) is detected when the expansion bit enable bit (UEBE) in UART option register 1 (LUORn1) is 1, the expansion bit comparison disable bit (UECD) is 0, and the expansion bit/data comparison enable bit (UEBDCE) is 1. If the compared two values agree, the following operations are executed. A LINn reception status interrupt is generated (n = 0 or 1). The expansion bit detection flag (EXBT) is set. The ID match flag (IDMT) is set. The received data is stored in the UART reception data register (LURDRn). Even if the compared two values agree, a successful LINn reception interrupt is not generated. If the compared two values do not agree, neither successful LINn reception interrupt nor LINn reception status interrupt is generated, thus not setting the EXBT or IDMT flag to 1. Here, the received data is not stored in the UART reception data register (LURDRn). When changing the UEBDCE bit to 0, complete it before the next data is completely received. Figure 17-30 shows an example when the expansion bit detection level select bit (UEBDL) is set to 0. Figure 17-30. Expansion Bit Reception Example (with Data Comparison) (LSB First, UEBDL = 0) 0 LRXDn 7 8 data0 1 0 7 8 data0 LIDBn register 7 8 0 0 0 data1 0 7 8 data2 1 data1 Expansion bit not agree and data not compared Expansion bit agree and data not agree Expansion bit agree and data agree INTLINnRVC INTLINnSTA IDMT bit in LESTn register Cleared EXBT bit in LESTn register Cleared <R> Caution If a reception error (parity error, framing error, or overrun error) occurs, a LINn reception status interrupt is generated, and the error flag is updated. In the case of an overrun error with matching of the compare result, EXBT and IDMT flags are also set to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1231 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (4) Transmission Start Wait Function For performing half-duplex communication, the LIN/UART module (in UART mode) has the function of securing the reception stop bit when switching from reception to transmission. If it is desired to delay the start of transmission until the stop bits for the reception are completed, set data in the LUWTDRn register, which is used only for the wait function, instead of setting transmission data in the LUTDRn register as a start-oftransmission request. When transmitting from the UART buffer, set 1 (UART buffer transmission enabled) in the RST bit in the LTRCn register with 1 set in the UTSW bit in the LDFCn register. In such a case, the LIN/UART module delays the start of transmission until the stop bits of reception data are completed. It should be noted that even if the UART stop bit length select bit (USBLS) is 1 (stop bits = 2 bits), delay is made only for 1 bits. Figure 17-31 shows the operation of transmission wait function. Figure 17-31. Transmission Wait Function (if transmission data is set during the stop bits in the received data) Stop bit length is shortened in switching from reception to transmission when transmission start wait function is not used. Set transmission data in LUTDRn register, or set RTS bit to 1 with UTSW bit = 0. LTXDn Transmit bit enable (internal signal) LRXDn Start bit Bit 0 Stop bit Start bit Bit 0 Start bit Bit 0 Sampling point (internal signal) Receive bit end (internal signal) Stop bit length is shortened. Stop bit length (one bit) is not shortened in switching from reception to transmission when transmission start wait function is used. Set transmission data in LUWTDRn register, or set RTS bit to 1 with UTSW bit = 1. LTXDn Transmit bit enable (internal signal) LRXDn Start bit Bit 0 Stop bit After issuance of a transmission trigger and high to low transition of the reception bit end signal, transmission is started at the next transmission bit enable signal assertion. Start bit Bit 0 Start bit Bit 0 Sampling point (internal signal) Receive bit end (internal signal) Stop bit length (one bit) is not shortened. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1232 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (5) SNOOZE Mode Function The LIN/UART module (UART mode) is provided with SNOOZE mode during reception. The SNOOZE mode allows data reception without CPU operation when the LRXDn pin input is detected in STOP mode. To use the LIN/UART module (UART mode) in SNOOZE mode, make the following settings before entering STOP mode. In SNOOZE mode, it is necessary to set the different baud rate for UART reception from that in normal operation. Refer to tables 17-21 to 17-24 and set the LBRPn register and LPRS[2:0] bits and NSPB[3:0] bits in the LWBRn register appropriately. Set the UWC bit in the UART standby control register (LUSCn). Also set the USEC and URDCC bits in the LUSCn register to enable or disable error interrupt generation upon occurrence of a communication error and comparison of the received data and the LIDBn register value, respectively. Set the UROE bit to 1 in the UART operation enable register (LUOERn) immediately before entering STOP mode. After entering STOP mode, UART reception starts upon detection of the LRXDn edge (start bit input). Cautions 1. SNOOZE mode can be set only when the LINnMCK bit in the LINCKSEL register is 0 (fCLK selected) and the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH) is selected for fCLK. 2. The maximum transfer rate in SNOOZE mode is 4800 bps when the FRQSEL4 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) is set to 0, and 2400 bps when FRQSEL4 is set to 1. 3. With UWC = 1, the UART can be used only if reception is started during STOP mode. If another SNOOZE function or interrupt is also used and reception is started during any state other than STOP mode as described below, data is not received correctly and a framing error or parity error may occur. After setting UWC to 1, reception is started before entering STOP mode. Reception is started during another SNOOZE mode. After returning to normal operation from STOP mode upon an interrupt or other cause, reception is started before setting UWC to 0. 4. With USEC = 1, if an error (parity error or framing error) or change in status (detection of the expansion bit) is detected in SNOOZE mode, the flag is not set to 1 thus generating no error interrupt. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1233 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Table 17-21. Baud Rate Setting for UART Reception in SNOOZE Mode (LIN communication clock source = 32 MHz 2%, FRQSEL4 = 0) UART Baud Rate (target) Prescaler LPRS[2:0] Baud Rate Generators 0 and 1 LBRP0 and LBRP1 Maximum Allowable Value Minimum Allowable Value 1200 bps 1/2 828 2.45% -2.50% 2400 bps 1/2 412 2.07% -2.30% 4800 bps 1/2 203 1.81% -1.42% Table 17-22. Baud Rate Setting for UART Reception in SNOOZE Mode (LIN communication clock source = 24 MHz 2%, FRQSEL4 = 0) UART Baud Rate (target) Prescaler LPRS[2:0] Baud Rate Generators 0 and 1 LBRP0 and LBRP1 Maximum Allowable Value Minimum Allowable Value 1200 bps 1/2 621 2.41% -2.55% 2400 bps 1/2 308 2.31% -2.08% 4800 bps 1/2 152 1.81% -1.45% Table 17-23. Baud Rate Setting for UART Reception in SNOOZE Mode (LIN communication clock source = 32 MHz 2%, FRQSEL4 =1) UART Baud Rate (target) Prescaler LPRS[2:0] Baud Rate Generators 0 and 1 LBRP0 and LBRP1 Maximum Allowable Value Minimum Allowable Value 1200 bps 1/2 826 2.23% -2.26% 2400 bps 1/2 410 1.65% -1.83% Table 17-24. Baud Rate Setting for UART Reception in SNOOZE Mode (LIN communication clock source = 24 MHz 2%, FRQSEL4 =1) UART Baud Rate (target) Prescaler LPRS[2:0] Baud Rate Generators 0 and 1 LBRP0 and LBRP1 Maximum Allowable Value Minimum Allowable Value 1200 bps 1/2 619 2.28% -2.23% 2400 bps 1/2 307 1.73% -1.76% Remarks 1. The maximum and minimum allowable values are applied to the baud rates for UART reception. Set the parameters so that the baud rates for UART transmission should also fall within the allowable range. 2. The receive data length is 8 bits + a parity bit. 3. The numbers in the table are for sixteen samples per bit (i.e. when NSPB[3:0] = 0000b or 1111b). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1234 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (a) SNOOZE Mode Operation (returning to normal operation upon successful reception; UWC = 1, URDCC = 0) Figure 17-32. Timing Chart of SNOOZE Mode Operation (returning to normal operation upon successful reception; UWC = 1, URDCC = 0) CPU operation state STOP mode Normal SNOOZE mode Normal (4) OMM0 UROE UWC USEC Low URDCC Low Clock request signal (internal signal) Reception data 2 Reception data 1 LURDRn (9) Read ST LRXDn pin Reception data 1 P SP ST Reception data 1 P SP INTLINnRVC INTLINnSTA Data received. Low Data received. (7) URS (1) (2) (3) n = 0, 1 Remark (5) (6) (8) (10) (11) (1) to (11) in Figure 17-32 correspond to (1) to (11) in Figure 17-33. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1235 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Figure 17-33. Flowchart of SNOOZE Mode Operation (returning to normal operation upon successful reception; UWC = 1, URDCC = 0) Setting start Write 0 to OM0 bit. OMM0 = 0 (1) Makes transition to LIN reset mode. LBFCn, LUORn1: Set communication. LWBRn, LBRPn: Set baud rate. Set LUSCn register. (2) (3) (4) (5) Turns on SNOOZE mode. UWC = 1, USEC = 0, URDCC = 0 Write 1 to OM0 bit. OMM0 = 1 Cancels LIN reset mode. Write 1 to UROE bit. UROE = 1 Enables reception. Stops fCLK supply to LIN/UART module. Cause transition to STOP mode. LRXDn edge detected? No Yes (6) Cause transition to SNOOZE mode. (7) Error interrupt occurrence indicated by INTLINnSTA? Yes Clock request signal level goes high to request clock generator to supply fCLK (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock); clock supply to LIN/UART module is started after oscillation precision stabilization time. Supplies clock to start UART reception. No (8) Successful reception interrupt occurrence indicated by INTLINnRVC? No Yes Returns from SNOOZE mode to normal operation. Read LESTn register. (9) (10) Read LURDRn register. Write 0 to UROE bit. UROE = 0 Write 0 to OM0 bit. OMM0 = 0 Makes transition to LIN reset mode. Write 0 to UWC bit. Clock request signal level goes low. (11) Error processing LIN/UART module (UART mode) starts normal operation. Remark Normal processing LIN/UART module (UART mode) starts normal operation. n = 0, 1 (1) to (11) in Figure 17-33 correspond to (1) to (11) in Figure 17-32. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1236 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (b) SNOOZE Mode Operation (returning to normal operation upon comparison result agreement of data received; UWC = 1, URDCC = 1) Figure 17-34. Timing Chart of SNOOZE Mode Operation (returning to normal operation upon comparison result agreement of data received; UWC = 1, URDCC = 1) Normal CPU operation state STOP mode Normal SNOOZE mode (4) OMM0 UROE UWC USEC Low URDCC Clock request signal (internal signal) Reception data 2 Reception data 1 LURDRn Data compared. (9) Read Data 1 LIDBn Data comparison result: agree LRXDn pin ST INTLINnRVC Low INTLINnSTA Low Reception data 1 ST P SP Reception data 2 P SP Data received (8 bits). Data received (8 bits). (7) URS n = 0, 1 (1) (2) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 (3) (5) (6) (8) (10) (11) 1237 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Figure 17-35. Flowchart of SNOOZE Mode Operation (returning to normal operation upon comparison result agreement of data received; UWC = 1, URDCC = 1) Setting start Write 0 to OM0 bit. OMM0 = 0 (1) Makes transition to LIN reset mode. LBFCn, LUORn1: Set communication. LWBRn, LBRPn: Set transfer rate. (2) Set LUSCn register. UWC = 1, USEC = 0, URDCC = 1 Turns on SNOOZE mode. Set LIDBn register. (3) Sets data to be compared with the data received. Write 1 to OM0 bit. OMM0 = 1 Cancels LIN reset mode. Write 1 to UROE bit. UROE = 1 Enables reception. (4) Cause transition to STOP mode (5) LRXDn edge detected? Stops fCLK supply to LIN/UART module. No Yes (6) Cause transition to SNOOZE mode. (7) Error interrupt occurrence indicated by INTLINnSTA? Yes Clock request signal level goes high to request clock generator to supply fCLK (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock); clock supply to LIN/UART module is started after oscillation precision stabilization time. Supplies clock to start UART reception. No (8) Successful reception interrupt occurrence indicated by INTLINnRVC? No Yes Returns from SNOOZE mode to normal operation. Read LESTn register. Read LURDRn register. (9) (10) Write 0 to UROE bit. UROE = 0 Write 0 to OM0 bit. OMM0 = 0 Write 0 to UWC bit. (11) Error processing LIN/UART module (UART mode) starts normal operation R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Normal processing LIN/UART module (UART mode) starts normal operation. Makes transition to LIN reset mode. Clock request signal level goes low. n = 0, 1 1238 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) If it is necessary to set the URDCC bit in the LUSCn register to 1 (comparison of received data and LIDBn register data enabled in SNOOZE mode), only use SNOOZE mode with the UBLS bit in the LBFCn register set to 0 (UART 8-bit character communication) and UEBE bit in the LUORn1 register set to 0 (expansion bit operation disabled). 17.5.2 Data Transmission/Reception (1) Data Transmission One bit of data is transmitted per Tbit. In half-duplex communication, if the BERE bit in the LEDEn register is 1 (bit error detection enabled), the transmission data and the input pin level are compared bit by bit during data transmission, and the results are stored in the BER flag in the LESTn register (see 17.5.5 Error Status). The timing at which the input pin is sampled during data transmission can vary depending upon the settings of the LPRS[2:0] and NSPB[3:0] bits in the LWBRn register. The bit error detection timing in UART mode is shown in Table 17-25. Table 17-25. Error Detection Timing in UART Mode Sampling count per bit Bit error detection timing 6 samples 3rd clock cycle + one cycle of the prescaler clock 7 samples 4th clock cycle + one cycle of the prescaler clock 8 samples 4th clock cycle + one cycle of the prescaler clock 9 samples 5th clock cycle + one cycle of the prescaler clock 10 samples 5th clock cycle + one cycle of the prescaler clock 11 samples 6th clock cycle + one cycle of the prescaler clock 12 samples 6th clock cycle + one cycle of the prescaler clock 13 samples 7th clock cycle + one cycle of the prescaler clock 14 samples 7th clock cycle + one cycle of the prescaler clock 15 samples 8th clock cycle + one cycle of the prescaler clock 16 samples 8th clock cycle + one cycle of the prescaler clock Figure 17-36. Example of Data Transmission Timing (when Sampling Count is 16 in 1 Tbit) ST LTXDn SP Data (8 bits) ST SP Data (8 bits) Byte field LTXDn ST D0 D1 Start bit D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Data (8 bits) LTXDn D7 SP Stop bit Bit 3 Prescaler clock (internal signal) fLIN (internal signal) Sampling point for bit error detection (8th clock cycle + 1 prescaler clock cycle) 1 Tbit = 16 fLIN Physical layer delay LRXDn Bit 3 Sampling point for bit error detection Synchronization LRXDn (Internal signal) Bit 3 n = 0, 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1239 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) (2) Data Reception Data reception is performed by using the synchronized LRXDn (an internal signal) that is the input from the LRXDn pin synchronized with the prescaler clock. The byte field is synchronized at the falling edge of the start bit for the synchronized LRXDn signal. After the falling edge is detected, resampling is performed 0.5 Tbits later if the sampling count per 1 Tbit is even and {(sampling count + 1)/2}/(sampling count) Tbits later if odd. If the synchronized LRXDn signal is low, the bit is recognized as a start bit. The bit is not recognized as a start bit if the LRXDn signal is fixed at low after the reset is cleared or if a high level is detected during the resampling. After the start bit is detected, 1 bit is sampled per Tbit. Note that when the BERE bit in the LEDEn register is set to 1, sampling proceeds at the same time as the detection of a bit error. The LIN/UART module has a noise filter function with respect to received data. If the LRDNFS bit in the LMDn register is 0, the noise filter is used. For a sampling value, the value determined by a 3-sampling majority rule by the prescaler clock is used. If the LRDNFS bit in the LMDn register is 1, the noise filter is not used. In this case, for a sampling value, the synchronized LRXDn value at the sampling position is used as is. Figure 17-37 shows an example of data reception timing. Figure 17-37. Example of Data Reception Timing (when Sampling Count is 16 in 1 Tbit) Byte field ST LRXDn D0 D1 D2 Start bit LRXDn (Enlarged) D3 D4 D5 Data (8 bits) D6 D7 Stop bit D0 Start bit SP D1 Prescaler clock (internal signal) 0.5 Tbit Synchronized LRXDn (internal signal) n = 0, 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1 Tbit (= 16 fLIN) Start bit Falling edge detection Confirmed to be low 0.5 Tbit after falling edge detection. 1 Tbit (= 16 fLIN) D0 Bit 0 is read 1 Tbit after confirmation of a low level. D1 After that, data bit is read every Tbit. 1240 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.5.3 Buffer Processing of Transmission Data (1) Transmission of UART Buffer For a 9-byte transmission, the contents stored in the LUDBn0 and LDBn1 to LDBn8 registers are transmitted to data areas 0 to 8. The LUDBn0 register is used only if 9-byte transmission is set. In other cases, the LDBn1 to LDBn8 registers are selected depending upon the length of data involved. For a 4-byte transmission, the contents stored in the LDBn1 to LDBn4 registers are transmitted to data areas 1 to 4, but the contents of the LDBn5 to LDBn8 registers are not transmitted. A LINn transmission interrupt is generated after the transmission of the data that is set in the MDL[3:0] bits in the LDFCn register (n = 0, 1). The spaces between transmission data items can be set in the IBS bit in the LSCn register. Figure 17-38 shows a 9-byte UART buffer and the transmission processing. Figure 17-38. UART Buffer and Transmission Processing (for 9-Byte Transmission) Data 0 LUDBn0 register LDBn1 register LDBn2 register LDBn3 register LDBn4 register LDBn5 register LDBn6 register LDBn7 register LDBn8 register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Data 1 Data 8 RTS bit in the LTRCn register cleared 1241 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.5.4 Status In UART mode, the LIN/UART module can detect five types of statuses. Two statuses, successful UART buffer transmission and error detection, can generate interrupt requests. Table 17-26 shows the types of statuses available in UART mode. Table 17-26. Types of Statuses in UART Mode Status Reset Successful UART buffer transmission Error detection Transmission status Reception status Status set condition Status clear condition After the OM0 bit in the LCUCn register is set to not-LIN-reset-mode, if actually the LIN/UART module is cleared from LIN reset mode. After the OM0 bit in the LCUCn register is set to LIN reset mode, if actually the LIN/UART module enters LIN reset mode. The transmission of the last data of data equal to the length set in the MDL bits in the LDFCn register is started while the UTIGTS bit in the LUORn1 register is 0 (transmission interrupt is generated at the start of transmission). The transmission of data equal to the length set in the MDL bits in the LDFCn register is completed while the UTIGTS bit in the LUORn1 register is 1 (transmission interrupt is generated at the completion of transmission). If any of the UPER flag, IDMT flag, EXBT flag, FER flag, OER flag, and BER flags in the LESTn register turns 1 (error detected). When cleared by software After transition to LIN reset Corresponding bit OMM0 bit in LMSTn register Interrupt Not available FTC flag in LSTn register Available ERR flag in LSTn register Available UTS flag in LSTn register Not available URS flag in LSTn register Not available mode When cleared by softwareNote After transition to LIN reset mode When data is written to the LUTDRn The transmission of the data or LUWTDRn register. When a 1 is written to the RTS bit in the LTRCn register. set in the LUTDRn or LUWTDRn register is complete, but another transmission data item is not set The transmission of the data in the UART buffer is complete, and the RTS bit in the LTRCn register is cleared After transition to LIN reset mode When a start bit is detected. When a sampling point for stop bits is detected After transition to LIN reset mode Note Writing a 0 to the UPER, IDMT, EXBT, FET, OER, and BER flags in the LESTn register when the LIN reset mode is being canceled turns the ERR flag in the LSTn register to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1242 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.5.5 Error Status In UART mode, the LIN/UART module can detect four types of errors and two types of statuses. The condition of these error statuses can be checked by means of the corresponding bits in the LESTn register. Table 17-27 lists applicable error status types. Table 17-27. Types of Error Statuses in UART Mode Status Enable/disable detection Corresponding bit Error detection condition Communication Bit error The transmitted data and the data monitored on the receive pin do not match Note 1 Continues until the transmission of the set transmission data is finished. O BER flag in LESTn register Overrun error After received data is stored in the LURDRn register, another data item is received before the data is read. (In this case, no data is stored in the LURDRn register). O OER flag in LESTn register O FER flag in LESTn register Framing error When the first stop bit at the first bit is low in the reception processing. (Reception is finished by the time this error is detected) (Reception is finished by the time this error is detected) Parity error The received parity value fails to match the parity value calculated from the received data Continues until the data reception is finished. xNote 2 UPER flag in LESTn register Expansion bit detection The value of the received expansion bit matches the value of the UEBDL bit in the LUORn1 register. O EXBT flag in LESTn register ID match The value of the received expansion bit matches the value of the UEBDL bit in the LUORn1 register and the 8-bit received data excluding the expansion bit matches the value of the LIDBn register. O IDMT flag in LESTn register Notes 1. If data is transmitted from the UART buffer, a bit error is also detected in the space between UART frames (inter-byte space). 2. Setting the UPS[1:0] bits in the LBFCn register to 10b (0 parity) disables the checking of parity bit values. In this case, no parity error is generated. Caution The error status is cleared when cleared by software or after transition to LIN reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1243 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.6 LIN Self-Test Mode The LIN/UART module has a LIN self-test mode. When LIN self-testing is turned on, the LTXDn and LRXDn signals are disconnected from the external pins and connected within the LIN/UART module. Frames transferred from the internal LTXDn terminal loop back to the internal LRXDn terminal. The LIN self-test mode is exclusively for testing LIN mode operation. The following four types of tests are available: LIN master self-test mode (transmission): header transmission and response transmission LIN master self-test mode (reception): header transmission and response reception LIN slave self-test mode (transmission): header reception and response transmission LIN slave self-test mode (reception): header reception and response reception In the LIN self-test mode, the LIN/UART module operates at the highest baud rate regardless of the setting of the baud rate generator. The baud rate is <frequency of the LIN communications clock source>/16 bps regardless of the settings of the baud rate related registers (the NSPB bit in the LWBRn register must be set to 0000b or 1111b). In the LIN self-test mode, the following functions are not supported. Do not use these functions. LIN wake-up mode Frame separate mode Multi-byte response reception and transmission LIN slave mode [auto baud rate] Frame/response timeout error Figure 17-39. Connection in LIN Reset Mode, LIN Mode and UART Mode Internal LTXDn LTXDn pin LIN controller Input to or output from LIN transceiver LRXDn pin Internal LRXDn Figure 17-40. Connection in LIN Self-Test Mode Internal LTXDn LTXDn pin LIN controller Input to or output from LIN transceiver LRXDn pin Internal LRXDn R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1244 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.6.1 Change to LIN Self-Test Mode LIN self-test mode is entered by writing to the LSTCn register. The transition to LIN self-test mode can be confirmed when the LSTM bit in the LSTCn register becomes 1. When changing to LIN self-test mode, be sure to execute a specific sequence. In that sequence, information must be written three times consecutively to the LIN self-test control register, as follows: Change to LIN reset mode Set the OM0 bit in the LCUCn register to 0 (LIN reset mode). Read the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register; verify that it is 0 (LIN reset mode). Select a LIN mode LMD bits in LMDn register = 00b (LIN master mode) or 11b (LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate]) 1st write: LSTCn register = 1010 0111b (A7H) 2nd write: LSTCn register = 0101 1000b (58H) 3rd write: LSTCn register = 0000 0001b (01H) Verify the transition to LIN self-test mode Read the LSTM bit in the LSTCn register; verify that it is 1 (LIN self-test mode). If the key of the first write (A7H) is written twice by mistake, the transition to LIN self-test mode is canceled. The above sequence should be retried from the step of first write. In addition, if a write to another LIN-related register is performed during transition to LIN self-test mode (three consecutive write operations to the LSTCn register), the transition is also canceled. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1245 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.6.2 Transmission in LIN Master Self-Test Mode To execute a self-test on LIN master transmission, perform the procedure below: Set registers related to the baud rate, noise filter, and interrupt output. LWBRn register = 0000xxxxbNote 1 LBRPn0 register = xxxxxxxxbNote 1 LBRPn1 register = xxxxxxxxbNote 1 LMDn register = 00xxxx00bNote 1, 3 Set registers related to interrupt enabling and error enabling. LIEn register = 0000xxxxbNote 2, 3 LEDEn register = x000x0xxb Set registers related to the break field and spaces. LBFCn register = 00xxxxxxb LSCn register = 00xx0xxxb Cancel the reset. Write 11b to the OM1 and OM0 bits in the LCUCn register and verify that the OMM1 and OMM0 bits in the LMSTn register become 11b. Set registers related to the transmission frame. LDFCn register = 00x1xxxxb LIDBn register = xxxxxxxxb LDBn1 to LDBn8 registers = xxxxxxxxb Start header transmission followed with response transmission LDFCn register = 00x1xxxxb Set the FTS bit in the LTRCn register to 1 (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception started). <R> The LIN master self-test mode (transmission) is executed. In this mode, interrupts are generated, and status and error status are also updated appropriately. The checksum is automatically computed by the LIN/UART module. When the execution of LIN master self-test mode (transmission) is aborted, set OM0 bit of LCUCn register to 0 (LIN reset mode). When the transmission is completed, the reversed value of the looped-back frame data is stored in the LIDBn, LDBnm (m = 1 to 8), and LCBRn registers (the data is reversed before being stored because the transmitted value should be compared with the looped-back value). The FTS bit in the LTRCn register is cleared. If the transmission fails to complete due to an error, the applicable error flag is set and the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is cleared. Notes 1. The following register settings do not affect the operations in LIN self-test mode. Therefore, setting them is not mandatory. LPRS bits in LWBRn register, LBRPn0 register, LBRPn1 register, and LCKS bits in LMDn register 2. As necessary, set the related registers in CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS. 3. When the successful header transmission interrupt and successful frame transmission interrupt are used in the same interrupt, the SHIE bit in the LIEn register should not be set to 1 (successful header transmission interrupt enabled) if the software processing of the successful header transmission interrupt does not complete before the successful frame transmission interrupt is generated. The period starting from when the successful header transmission flag is set until the successful frame/wake-up transmission flag is set can be calculated as follows: 10 (number of data bytes + 1) [Tbit] 1 Tbit = LIN communication clock source 16 Remark x: Any desired value R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1246 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.6.3 Reception in LIN Master Self-Test Mode To execute a self-test on LIN master reception, perform the procedure below: Set registers related to the baud rate, noise filter, and interrupt output. LWBRn register = 0000xxxxbNote 1 LBRPn0 register = xxxxxxxxbNote 1 LBRPn1 register = xxxxxxxxbNote 1 LMDn register = 00xxxx00bNote 1, 3 Set registers related to interrupt enabling and error enabling. LIEn register = 0000xxxxbNote 2, 3 LEDEn register = x000x0xxb Set registers related to the break field and spaces. LBFCn register = 00xxxxxxb LSCn register = 00xx0xxxbNote 1 Cancel the reset. Write 11b to the OM1 and OM0 bits in the LCUCn register and verify that the OMM1 and OMM0 bits in the LMSTn register become 11b. Set registers related to the reception frame. LDFCn register = 00x0xxxxb LIDBn register = xxxxxxxxb LDBn1 to LDBn8 registers = xxxxxxxxb LCBRn register = xxxxxxxxb Since the checksum is not computed automatically, store a computed value. By intentionally setting an incorrect computation result as the checksum, a test for checksum errors can be performed. Start header transmission followed with response reception Set the FTS bit in the LTRCn register to 1 (frame transmission or wake-up transmission/reception started). <R> The LIN master self-test mode (reception) is executed. In this mode, interrupts are generated, and status and error status are also updated appropriately. When the execution of LIN master self-test mode (reception) is aborted, set OM0 bit of LCUCn register to 0 (LIN reset mode). When the reception is completed, the reversed value of the looped-back frame data is stored in the LIDBn, LDBnm (m = 1 to 8), and LCBRn registers (the data is reversed before being stored because the set value should be compared with the looped-back and received value). The FTS bit in the LTRCn register is cleared. If the reception fails to complete due to an error, the applicable error flag is set and the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is cleared. Notes 1. The following register settings do not affect the operations in LIN self-test mode. Therefore, setting them is not mandatory. LPRS bits in LWBRn register, LBRPn0 register, LBRPn1 register, LCKS bits in LMDn register, and IBS bits in LSCn register 2. 3. As necessary, set the related registers in CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS. When the successful header transmission interrupt and successful frame transmission interrupt are used in the same interrupt, the SHIE bit in the LIEn register should not be set to 1 (successful header transmission interrupt enabled) if the software processing of the successful header transmission interrupt does not complete before the successful frame transmission interrupt is generated. The period starting from when the successful header transmission flag is set until the successful frame/wake-up transmission flag is set can be calculated as follows: 10 (number of data bytes + 1) [Tbit] 1 Tbit = LIN communication clock source 16. Remark x: Any desired value R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1247 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.6.4 Transmission in LIN Slave Self-Test Mode To execute a self-test on LIN slave transmission, perform the procedure below: Set registers related to the baud rate, noise filter, and interrupt output. LWBRn register = 0000xxx0bNote 1 LBRPn0 register = xxxxxxxxbNote 1 LBRPn1 register = xxxxxxxxbNote 1 LMDn register = 00xx0011b Note 4 Set registers related to interrupt enabling and error enabling. LIEn register = 0000xxxxbNote 2, 4 LEDEn register = xx0xx00xb Set registers related to the break field and spaces. LBFCn register = 0000000xbNote 3 LSCn register = 00xx0001b Cancel the reset. Write 11b to the OM1 and OM0 bits in the LCUCn register and verify that the OMM1 and OMM0 bits in the LMSTn register become 11b. Set registers related to the transmission frame. LDFCn register = 00x1xxxxb LIDBn register = xxxxxxxxb LDBn1 to LDBn8 registers = xxxxxxxxb Start header reception followed with response transmission Set the FTS bit in the LTRCn register to 1 (header reception or wake-up transmission/reception started). (Without any operation involving the RTS bit in the LTRCn register, the reception of a header and the transmission of a response are executed, in the indicated order.) <R> The LIN slave self-test mode (transmission) is executed. In this mode, interrupts are generated, and status and error status are also updated appropriately. The checksum is automatically computed by the LIN/UART module. When the execution of LIN master self-test mode (transmission) is aborted, set OM0 bit of LCUCn register to 0 (LIN reset mode). When the transmission is completed, the reversed value of the looped-back frame data is stored in the LIDBn, LDBnm (m = 1 to 8), and LCBRn registers (the data is reversed before being stored because the transmitted value should be compared with the looped-back value). The FTS bit in the LTRCn register is cleared. If the transmission fails to complete due to an error, the applicable error flag is set and the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is cleared. Notes 1. The following register settings do not affect the operations in LIN self-test mode. Therefore, setting them is not mandatory. LPRS bits in LWBRn register, LBRPn0 register, and LBRPn1 register 2. As necessary, set the related registers in CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS. 3. A break with a width of 9.5 or 10.5 Tbits is output from the internal LTXDn pin depending on this register setting. 4. When the successful header reception interrupt and successful response transmission interrupt are used in the same interrupt, the SHIE bit in the LIEn register should not be set to 1 (successful header reception interrupt enabled) if the software processing of the successful header reception interrupt does not complete before the successful response transmission interrupt is generated. The period starting from when the successful header reception flag is set until the successful response/wake-up transmission flag is set can be calculated as follows: 10 (number of data bytes + 1) [Tbit] 1 Tbit = LIN communication clock source 16. Remark x: Any desired value R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1248 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.6.5 Reception in LIN Slave Self-Test Mode To execute a self-test on LIN slave reception, perform the procedure below: Set registers related to the baud rate, noise filter, and interrupt output. LWBRn register = 0000xxx0bNote 1 LBRPn0 register = xxxxxxxxbNote 1 LBRPn1 register = xxxxxxxxbNote 1 LMDn register = 00xx0011b Note 4 Set registers related to interrupt enabling and error enabling. LIEn register = 0000xxxxbNote 2, 4 LEDEn register = xx0xx00xb Set registers related to the break field and spaces. LBFCn register = 0000000xbNote 3 LSCn register = 00xx0001bNote 1 Cancel the reset. Write 11b to the OM1 and OM0 bits in the LCUCn register and verify that the OMM1 and OMM0 bits in the LMSTn register become 11b. Set registers related to the reception frame. LDFCn register = 00x0xxxxb LIDBn register = xxxxxxxxb LDBn1 to LDBn8 registers = xxxxxxxxb LCBRn register = xxxxxxxxb Since the checksum is not computed automatically, store a computed value. By intentionally setting an incorrect computation result as the checksum, a test for checksum errors can be performed. Start header reception followed with response reception Set the FTS bit in the LTRCn register to 1 (header reception or wake-up transmission/reception started). (Without any operation involving the RTS bit in the LTRCn register, the reception of a header and the reception of a response are executed, in the indicated order.) <R> The LIN slave self-test mode (reception) is executed. In this mode, interrupts are generated, and status and error status are also updated appropriately. When the execution of LIN master self-test mode (reception) is aborted, set OM0 bit of LCUCn register to 0 (LIN reset mode). When the reception is completed, the reversed value of the looped-back frame data is stored in the LIDBn, LDBnm (m = 1 to 8), and LCBRn registers (the data is reversed before being stored because the set value should be compared with the looped-back and received value). The FTS bit in the LTRCn register is cleared. If the reception fails to complete due to an error, the applicable error flag is set and the FTS bit in the LTRCn register is cleared. Notes 1. The following register settings do not affect the operations in LIN self-test mode. Therefore, setting them is not mandatory. LPRS bits in LWBRn register, LBRPn0 register, LBRPn1 register, and IBS bits in LSCn register 2. As necessary, set the related registers in CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS. 3. A break with a width of 9.5 or 10.5 Tbits is output from the internal LTXDn pin depending on this register setting. 4. When the successful header reception interrupt and successful response reception interrupt are used in the same interrupt, the SHIE bit in the LIEn register should not be set to 1 (successful header reception interrupt enabled) if the software processing of the successful header reception interrupt does not complete before the successful response reception interrupt is generated. The period starting from when the successful header reception flag is set until the successful response/wake-up reception flag is set can be calculated as follows: 10 (number of data bytes + 1) [Tbit] 1 Tbit = LIN communication clock source 16 Remark x: Any desired value R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1249 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.6.6 Terminating LIN Self-Test Mode To terminate LIN self-test mode, perform the procedure below: Write 0 (LIN reset mode) to the OM0 bit in the LCUCn register. If the OMM1 and OMM0 bits in the LMSTn register are not 11b, write 11b to the OM1 and OM0 bits in the LCUCn register. After confirming that the OMM1 and OMM0 bits in the LMSTn register have turned 11b, change to LIN reset mode. Verify the cancellation of LIN self-test mode. Read the LSTM bit in the LSTCn register; confirm that it is not 0 (not in LIN self-test) Verify the transition to LIN reset mode. Read the OMM0 bit in the LMSTn register; verify that it is 0 (LIN reset mode). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1250 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.7 Baud Rate Generator The prescaler clock is obtained by frequency-dividing the LIN communication clock source by the prescaler, and the LIN system clock (fLIN) is obtained by frequency-dividing the prescaler clock by the baud rate generator. The clock obtained by frequency-dividing the LIN system clock (fLIN) by the number of samples is the baud rate. The reciprocal of this baud rate is called the bit time (Tbit). The LIN/UART module has two kinds of baud rate generators. The baud rate generators switch over according to the mode used. 17.7.1 LIN Master Mode Figure 17-41 shows a block diagram of baud rate generation in LIN master mode. Figure 17-41. Block Diagram of Baud Rate Generation in LIN Master Mode Prescaler clock LIN baud rate prescaler 0 (LBRPn0 register) Note 2 LIN communication clock sourceNote 1 fa fLIN 1/2 Prescaler (LPRS[2:0] bits) 1/8 LIN baud rate prescaler 1 (LBRPn1 register) 1/2 fb Bit sampling 1/16 (NSPB[3:0] bits) Baud rate fc fd Note 3 Baud rate generator LCKS[1:0] bits in LMDn register Notes 1. For the LIN communication clock source, refer to CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR. 2. When the value in the LBRPn0 register is N (N = 0 to 255), the clock frequency is divided by N+1. 3. When the value in the LBRPn1 register is M (M = 0 to 255), the clock frequency is divided by M+1. <R> Set the LIN communications clock source as follows. LIN communications clock source = fCLKNote 1 In the range from 4 MHz to 32 MHz Note 1. When the timeout error detection is not used, the fMX clock is selectable as the LIN communication clock source. In that case, set at least 1.2 times the frequency of the LIN communication clock source to the CPU/peripheral hardware clock(fCLK). By setting the LBRPn0 register so that fa is 307200 Hz (= 19200 16), the resulting bit rates are fa = 19200 16, fb = 9600 16 and fc = 2400 16. These bit rates are frequency-divided by 16 in the bit timing generator, enabling bit rates of 19200 bps, 9600 bps and 2400 bps to be generated. Also, by setting the LBRPn1 register so that fd is 166672 Hz (= 10417 16), the resulting bit rate is fd = 10417 16. This bit rate is frequency-divided by 16 in the bit timing generator, enabling 10417 bps to be generated. Table 17-28 shows examples of baud rate (19200, 10417, 9600, and 2400 bps) generation for each LIN communication clock source frequency, and also the corresponding errors. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1251 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Table 17-28. Examples of Baud Rate (19200, 10417, 9600, and 2400 bps) Generation in LIN Master Mode LIN communication clock source 32 MHz 24 MHz 16 MHz 12 MHz 8 MHz Remark Prescaler Baud rate generator 0 N+1 frequencydivided Baud rate generator 1 M+1 frequencydivided LIN system clock 1/1 104 fa 19230.77 +0.16% 96 fd 10416.67 -0.003% 104 fb 9615.38 +0.16% 104 fc 2403.85 +0.16% 78 fa 19230.77 +0.16% 72 fd 10416.67 -0.003% 78 fb 9615.38 +0.16% 78 fc 2403.85 +0.16% 52 fa 19230.77 +0.16% 48 fd 10416.67 -0.003% 52 fb 9615.38 +0.16% 52 fc 2403.85 +0.16% 39 fa 19230.77 +0.16% 36 fd 10416.67 -0.003% 39 fb 9615.38 +0.16% 39 fc 2403.85 +0.16% 26 fa 19230.77 +0.16% 24 fd 10416.67 -0.003% 26 fb 9615.38 +0.16% 26 fc 2403.85 +0.16% 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 Baud rate Error The numbers in the table are for sixteen samples per bit (i.e. when NSPB[3:0] = 0000b or 1111b). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1252 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.7.2 LIN Slave Mode Figure 17-42 shows a block diagram of baud rate generation in LIN slave mode. Figure 17-42. Block Diagram of Baud Rate Generation in LIN Slave Mode Prescaler clock fLIN LIN communication clock source Note LIN baud rate prescaler Prescaler (LPRS[2:0] bits) fa (LBRPn0 and LBRPn1 registers) Bit sampling 1/4 or 1/8 or 1/16 (NSPB[3:0] bits) Baud rate Baud rate generator 16-bit counter b15 b0 LBRPn1 register LBRPn0 register Note For the LIN communication clock source, refer to CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR. <R> Set the LIN communications clock source as follows. LIN communications clock source = fCLKNote1 In the range from 4 MHz to 32 MHz Note 1. When the timeout error detection is not used, the fMX clock is selectable as the LIN communication clock source. In that case, set at least 1.2 times the frequency of the LIN communication clock source to the CPU/peripheral hardware clock(fCLK). In LIN slave mode [Auto Baud Rate], operation is possible with the baud rates from 1 kbps to 20 kbps. Set the prescaler clock according to the target baud rate so that its frequency is the corresponding value from the list. [Target baud rate] [Frequency of prescaler clock] 1 kbps to 20 kbps: 4 MHz Note 1 kbps to less than 2.4 kbps: 4 MHz 2.4 kbps to 20 kbps: 8 MHz to 12 MHz Note Set the NSPB[3:0] bits in the LWBRn register to 0011b (4 sampling). Table 17-29 shows the examples of baud rate (19200, 10417, 9600, and 2400 bps) generation for each LIN communication clock source frequency in LIN slave mode [fixed baud rate] and errors. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1253 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Table 17-29. Examples of Baud Rate Generation (19200 bps, 10417 bps, 9600 bps and 2400 bps) in LIN Slave Mode [Fixed Baud Rate] LIN communication clock source Prescaler Baud rate generator 0-1 N+1 frequency-divided 32 MHz 1/1 104 19230.77 +0.16% 192 10416.67 -0.003% 208 9615.38 +0.16% 833 2400.96 +0.04% 78 19230.77 +0.16% 144 10416.67 -0.003% 156 9615.38 +0.16% 625 2400 0% 52 19230.77 +0.16% 96 10416.67 -0.003% 104 9615.38 +0.16% 417 2398.08 -0.08% 39 19230.77 +0.16% 72 10416.67 -0.003% 78 9615.38 +0.16% 313 2396.17 -0.16% 26 19230.77 +0.16% 48 10416.67 -0.003% 52 9615.38 +0.16% 208 2403.85 +0.16% 24 MHz 16 MHz 12 MHz 8 MHz Remark 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 Baud rate Error The numbers in the table are for sixteen samples per bit (i.e. when NSPB[3:0] = 0000b or 1111b). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1254 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.7.3 UART Mode Figure 17-43 shows a block diagram of baud rate generation in UART mode. Figure 17-43. Block Diagram of Baud Rate Generation in UART Mode Prescaler clock fLIN LIN baud rate prescaler Prescaler (LPRS[2:0] bits) LIN communication clock source Note fa (LBRPn0 and LBRPn1 registers) Bit sampling 1/6 to 1/16 (NSPB[3:0] bits) Baud rate Baud rate generator 16-bit counter b15 b0 LBRPn1 register LBRPn0 register Note For the LIN communication clock source, refer to CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR. <R> Set the LIN communications clock source as follows. LIN communications clock source = fCLKNote1 In the range from 4 MHz to 32 MHz Note 1. It is available to select the fMX to the LIN communications clock source. In that case, set at least 1.2 times the frequency of the LIN communication clock source to the CPU/peripheral hardware clock(fCLK). Table 17-30. UART Baud Rate Setting Examples (when LIN communication clock source = 32 MHz) UART Baud Rate (Target Baud Rate) Prescaler Baud rate generator 0-1 N+1 frequency-divided 1200 bps 1/2 833 1200.48 +0.04% 2400 bps 1/2 417 2398.08 -0.08% 4800 bps 1/2 208 4807.69 +0.16% 9600 bps 1/2 104 9615.38 +0.16% 19200 bps 1/2 52 19230.77 +0.16% 31250 bps 1/2 32 31250.00 0.00% 38400 bps 1/2 26 38461.54 +0.16% Baud rate Error Remarks 1. These examples are for sixteen samples per bit (i.e. when NSPB[3:0] = 0000b or 1111b). 2. The baud rate can be calculated by the following expression. Baud rate = (LIN communications clock source (fCLK or fMX: selected by the LINnMCK bits) frequency) x (frequency divider selected by LPRS[2:0] / (LBRPn0 + (0x0100 x LBRPn1) + 1)) number selected by NSPB[3:0] bps R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1255 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.8 Noise Filter The LIN/UART module has a noise filter for reducing erroneous receiving of data due to noise. By setting the LRDNFS bit in the LMDn register to 0 (to use the noise filter), the noise filter is activated. The noise filter samples the level of the synchronized LRXDn (n = 0, 1) based on the prescaler clock, and outputs the majority among three sampled levels. The value of each bit in the received data is determined by the noise filter output. Figure 17-44 shows the configuration of the noise filter, figure 17-45 an example of a noise filter circuit, and figure 17-46 the determination of the received data when the noise filter is used. Figure 17-44. Configuration of Noise Filter Prescaler clock Noise filter output LRDNFS bit in LMDn register Noise filter (decision by majority of 3 sampling) Synchronized LRXDn (n = 0, 1) 0 1 Figure 17-45. Example of Noise Filter Circuit Noise filter Synchronized LRXDn (n = 0, 1) FF1 Majority circuit Noise filter output FF2 Prescaler clock R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1256 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) Figure 17-46. Determination of Received Data when Noise Filter is Used LRXDn Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Stop bit Start bit Synchronization LRXDn Noise filtering FF1 signal of circuit Noise filtering FF2 signal of circuit Noise filter output Start bit Start bit Start bit Start bit Prescaler clock [Determination of the received data when using noise filter] Noise filter output Start bit Prescaler clock Sampling clock Sampling point [Determination of the received data at the time of the noise filter unused] Synchronization LRXDn Start bit Prescaler clock Sampling clock (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Sampling point 1257 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) 17.9 Interrupts The LIN/UART module generates four types of interrupt requests. LINn successful transmission interrupt LINn successful reception interrupt LINn reception status interrupt LINn interrupt Setting the LIOS bit in the LMDn register to 0 allows to perform logical OR operation on all of the interrupt sources, outputting the interrupt request from the LINn interrupt. Setting the LIOS bit in the LMDn register to 1 allows to output the LINn successful transmission interrupt, LINn successful reception interrupt, or LINn reception status interrupt depending on the interrupt sources. Table 17-31 lists the sources for each interrupt. Table 17-31. Interrupt Sources LIOS bit in LMDn register is 0 Mode LIN mode LIN master mode LIN slave mode LINn Interrupt Successful frame transmission Successful frame reception Successful wake-up UART mode transmission Successful wake-up reception Successful header transmission Bit error Physical bus error Frame/response timeout error Framing error Checksum error Response preparation error Successful response transmission Successful response reception Successful wake-up transmission Successful wake-up reception Successful header reception Bit error Frame/response timeout error Framing error Sync field error Checksum error ID parity error Response preparation error LIOS bit in LMDn register is 1 Note LINn Successful Transmission Interrupt LINn Successful Reception Interrupt Successful frame Successful frame transmission Successful wakeup transmission Successful header transmission reception Successful wakeup reception LINn Reception Status Interrupt Bit error Physical bus error Frame/response timeout error Framing error Checksum error Response preparation error Successful Successful response transmission Successful wakeup transmission response reception Successful wakeup reception Successful header reception Transmission Successful start/successful transmission reception Expansion bit mismatch Bit error Frame/response timeout error Framing error Sync field error Checksum error ID parity error Response preparation error Bit error Overrun error Framing error Expansion bit detection ID match Parity error Note LIOS bit setting is enabled in LIN mode. LIOS bit setting is not required in UART mode. Each interrupt request is output when the corresponding bit in the LIEn register is 1 (interrupt is enabled) and the corresponding flag in the LSTn register is 1. In the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14, the LINn reception status interrupt and LINn interrupt are assigned to the same interrupt vector. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1258 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) The number of channels of the CAN module depends the product. RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) RL78/F13 (CAN & LIN incorporated) RL78/F14 -- 1 1 Channel 18.1 Overview The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 incorporate one channel of the Controller Area Network (CAN) module conforming to the ISO11898-1 specifications. Table 18-1 shows the CAN module specifications. Figure 18-1 shows the CAN module block diagram. In this chapter, the following variables indicate the number of channels and registers. * i (i = 0): CAN channel number * j (j = 0 to 15): CAN receive rule entry register number (GAFLIDLj, GAFLIDHj, GAFLMLj, GAFLMHj, GAFLPLj, GAFLPHj) * * * * * k (k = 0) : Transmit/receive FIFO buffer number m (m = 0, 1): Receive FIFO buffer number n (n = 0 to 15): Receive buffer number p (p = 0 to 3): Transmit buffer number r (r = 0 to 127): CAN RAM test register (RPGACCr) number R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1259 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-1. CAN Module Specifications (1/2) Item Specification Number of channels 1 Protocol ISO11898-1 compliant Communication speed * Maximum 1 Mbps Communication speed (CANi bit time clock) = 1 CANi bit time CANi bit time = CANiTq x Tq count per bit CANiTq = (BRP[9:0] bits in the CiCFGL register + 1) fCAN i=0 Tq: Time quantum fCAN: Frequency of CAN clock (selected by the DCS bit in the GCFGL register) Buffer 20 buffers in total * Individual buffers: 4 buffers (4 buffers for one channel) Transmit buffer: 4 buffers per a channel * Shared buffers: 16 buffers Receive buffer: 0 to 16 buffers Receive FIFO buffer: 2 FIFO buffers (up to 16 buffers allocatable to each) Transmit/receive FIFO buffer: A FIFO buffer per a channel (up to 16 buffers allocatable to each) Reception function * Receives data frames and remote frames. * Selects ID format (standard ID, extended ID, or both IDs) to be received. * Sets interrupt enable/disable for each FIFO. * Mirror function (to receive messages transmitted from the own CAN node) * Timestamp function (to record message reception time as a 16-bit timer value) Reception filter function * Selects receive messages according to 16 receive rules. * Sets the number of receive rules (0 to 16) for each channel. * Acceptance filter processing: Sets ID and mask for each receive rule. * DLC filter processing: Sets DLC check value for each receive rule. Receive message transfer * Routing function to transfer receive messages to arbitrary destinations function (can be transferred to up to 2 buffers). Transfer destination: Receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, and transmit/receive FIFO buffer * Label addition function Stores label information together when storing a message in a receive buffer and FIFO buffer. Transmission function * Transmits data frames and remote frames. * Selects ID format (standard ID, extended ID, or both IDs) to be transmitted. * Sets interrupt enable/disable for each transmit buffer and transmit/receive FIFO buffer. * Selects ID priority transmission or transmit buffer number priority transmission. * Transmit request can be aborted (possible to confirm with the flag) * One-shot transmission function Interval transmission Sets message transmission interval time (transmit mode of transmit/receive FIFO buffers) function Transmit history function Stores the history information of transmitted messages. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1260 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-1. CAN Module Specifications (2/2) Item Specification Bus off recovery mode Selects a method of returning from bus off state. selection * ISO11898-1 compliant * Automatic entry to channel halt mode at bus-off entry * Automatic entry to channel halt mode at bus-off end * Entry to channel halt mode by a program * Transition to the error-active state by a program (forcible return from the bus off state) Error status monitoring * Monitors CAN protocol errors (stuff error, form error, ACK error, CRC error, bit error, ACK delimiter error, and bus dominant lock). * Detects error status transitions (error warning, error passive, bus off entry, and bus off recovery) * Reads the error counter. * Monitors DLC errors. Interrupt source 6 sources * Global (2 sources) CAN global receive FIFO interrupt CAN global error interrupt * Channel (4 sources/channel) CANi channel transmit interrupt CANi transmit complete interrupt CANi transmit abort interrupt CANi transmit/receive FIFO transmit complete interrupt CANi transmit history interrupt CANi transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt CANi channel error interrupt CANi wakeup interrupt CAN stop mode Reduces power consumption by stopping clock supply to the CAN module. CAN clock source Selects the clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK by 2 (fCLK/2) or the X1 clock (fx). Test function Test function for user evaluation * Listen-only mode * Self-test mode 0 (external loopback) * Self-test mode 1 (internal loopback) * RAM test (read/write test) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1261 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Figure 18-1. CAN Module Block Diagram (i = 0) Peripheral bus CAN-related registers Receive rule table RAM CRXDi Acceptance filter Protocol controller CTXDi fCANTQi Baud rate prescaler (BRP[9:0]) ID priority transmission controller FIFO RAM CAN0EN Timer Buffer RAM CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) CAN0EN CANi wakeup interrupt 1/2 DCS CAN global receive FIFO interrupt fCAN CAN0MCKE X1 clock (fx) Interrupt generator circuit CAN global error interrupt CANi channel transmit interrupt CANi transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt CANi channel error interrupt Remark i = 0 BRP[9:0]: Bits in the CiCFGL register DCS: Bit in the GCFGL register fCANTQi: CANi Tq clock fCAN: CAN clock CAN0EN: Bit in the PER2 register CAN0MCKE: Bit in the CANCKSEL register 18.2 Input/Output Pins Table 18-2 lists the I/O pins of the CAN module. Table 18-2. I/O Pins of the CAN Module Pin Name I/O Description CRXDi Input Receive data input pins of the CAN communication function CTXDi Output Transmit data output pins of the CAN communication function R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1262 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3 Register Descriptions Table 18-3 lists the registers of the CAN module. The values after reset of the registers allocated to the CAN RAM area (F03A0H to F0681H) are those after the CAN RAM is initialized. Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (1/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit Access Size 8 bits 16 bits After Reset F02C1H Peripheral enable register 2 PER2 R/W -- F02C2H CAN clock select register CANCKSEL R/W -- 00H F0300H CAN0 bit configuration register L C0CFGLL C0CFGL R/W -- 0000H -- CAN0 bit configuration register H C0CFGHL C0CFGH R/W -- 0000H -- CAN0 control register L C0CTRLL C0CTRL R/W -- 0005H -- F0301H F0302H C0CFGLH F0303H F0304H C0CFGHH F0305H F0306H C0CTRLH CAN0 control register H F0307H F0308H CAN0 status register L F0309H F030AH C0STSHL CAN0 error flag register L C0ERFLLL CAN0 error flag register H CAN global configuration register L C0ERFLHL GCFGLL CAN global configuration register H GCFGHL CAN global control register L GCTRLL R C0ERFLL R/W C0ERFLH R GCFGL R/W GCTRHL CAN global status register GSTSL CAN global error flag register GERFLL F032EH CAN timestamp register GTSC CAN receive rule number configuration GAFLCFGL F0331H register GAFLCFGH F0332H CAN receive buffer number configuration RMNBL F0333H register -- F0334H CAN receive buffer receive complete flag RMND0L F0335H register RMND0H F0338H CAN receive FIFO control register 0 RFCC0L F0339H F033AH CAN receive FIFO control register 1 Note RFCC1L RFCC1H -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- R/W -- -- -- -- GCTRH R/W GSTS R GAFLCFG RMNB RMND0 RFCC0 RFCC1 Note 0000H 0005H Note 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0005H Note 0000H 000DH -- -- R/W -- -- 00H R -- -- 0000H -- -- 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H R/W R/W R/W R/W RFCC0H F033BH -- GCTRL F032FH F0330H -- GSTSH F032CH -- GCTRHH F032BH R/W GCTRLH CAN global control register H -- -- GCFGH GCFGHH F0329H F032AH C0STSH GCFGLH F0327H F0328H R C0ERFLHH F0325H F0326H C0STSL C0ERFLLH F0323H F0324H R/W C0STSHH F030FH F0322H C0STSLL CAN0 status register H F030DH F030EH C0CTRH C0STSLH F030BH F030CH C0CTRHL C0CTRHH 00H R/W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Note When the CAN0EN bit in the PER2 register is set to 0, the read value is undefined. When the CAN0EN bit in the PER2 register is set to 1, the read value is the initial value listed above. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1263 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (2/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F0340H CAN receive FIFO status register 0 F0341H F0342H CAN receive FIFO status register 1 RFSTS1L RFSTS1 RFSTS1H CAN receive FIFO pointer control register 0 F0349H F034AH RFSTS0 RFSTS0H F0343H F0348H RFSTS0L RFPCTR0L RFPCTR0 R/W -- R -- R/W -- R -- W RFPCTR0H CAN receive FIFO pointer control register 1 F034BH RFPCTR1L RFPCTR1 W CFCCL0 R/W RFPCTR1H F0350H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO control CFCCL0L F0351H register 0L CFCCL0H F0352H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO control CFCCH0L F0353H register 0H CFCCH0H F0358H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO status register CFSTS0L F0359H 0 CFSTS0H F035CH CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO pointer control CFPCTR0L F035DH register 0 -- F0360H Receive FIFO message lost status register F0361H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO message lost CFCCH0 CFSTS0 Access Size 8 bits 16 bits R/W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- R/W -- R -- W -- -- -- RFMSTS R -- CFMSTS R -- CFPCTR0 After Reset 0001H Note 0001H Note 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0001H Note 0000H -- 00H -- 00H status register F0362H CAN receive FIFO interrupt status register RFISTS R -- -- 00H F0363H CAN transmit/receive FIFO receive CFISTS R -- -- 00H interrupt status register F0364H CAN0 transmit buffer control register 0 TMC0 R/W -- -- 00H F0365H CAN0 transmit buffer control register 1 TMC1 R/W -- -- 00H F0366H CAN0 transmit buffer control register 2 TMC2 R/W -- -- 00H F0367H CAN0 transmit buffer control register 3 TMC3 R/W -- -- 00H F036CH CAN0 transmit buffer status register 0 TMSTS0 R/W -- -- 00H F036DH CAN0 transmit buffer status register 1 TMSTS1 R/W -- -- 00H F036EH CAN0 transmit buffer status register 2 TMSTS2 R/W -- -- 00H F036FH CAN0 transmit buffer status register 3 TMSTS3 R/W -- -- 00H F0374H CAN0 transmit buffer transmit request TMTRSTSL TMTRSTS R -- 0000H F0375H status register TMTRSTSH -- F0376H CAN0 transmit buffer transmit complete TMTCSTSL TMTCSTS R -- 0000H F0377H status register TMTCSTSH -- F0378H CAN0 transmit buffer transmit abort status TMTASTSL TMTASTS R 0000H F0379H register TMTASTSH 0000H 0000H 0001H F037AH CAN0 transmit buffer interrupt enable TMIECL F037BH register TMIECH F037CH CAN0 transmit history buffer control THLCC0L F037DH register THLCC0H F0380H CAN0 transmit history buffer status register THLSTS0L F0381H THLCC0 THLSTS0 R/W R/W R/W THLSTS0H F0384H CAN0 transmit history buffer pointer control THLPCTR0L F0385H register THLPCTR0H F0388H CAN global transmit interrupt status GTINTSTSL F0389H register GTINTSTSH Note TMIEC THLPCTR0 GTINTSTS W R -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Note 0000H 0000H When the CAN0EN bit in the PER2 register is set to 0, the read value is undefined. When the CAN0EN bit in the PER2 register is set to 1, the read value is the initial value listed above. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1264 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (3/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F038AH CAN global RAM window control register F038BH F038CH CAN global test configuration register CAN global test control register F038FH F0394H GRWCR R/W GRWCRH F038DH F038EH GRWCRL GTSTCFGL GTSTCFGH GTSTCFG GTSTCTRL -- R/W R/W -- CAN global test protection unlock register GLOCKK CAN receive rule entry register 0ALNote 1 GAFLIDL0L W F0395H F03A0H F03A1H F03A0H CAN receive buffer register 0ALNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 0AHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 0AHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 0BLNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 0BHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 0BHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 0CLNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 0CHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 0CHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 0DLNote 2 RMTS0L RMTS0 R GAFLMH0L GAFLMH0 R/W RMPTR0L RMPTR0 R GAFLPL0L GAFLPL0 R/W RMDF00L RMDF00 R GAFLPH0L GAFLPH0 R/W RMDF10L RMDF10 R GAFLIDL1L GAFLIDL1 R/W RMDF20L RMDF20 R RMDF20H CAN receive rule entry register 1AHNote 1 F03AFH F03AEH R/W GAFLIDL1H F03ADH F03AEH GAFLML0 RMDF10H CAN receive rule entry register 1ALNote 1 F03ADH F03ACH GAFLML0L GAFLPH0H F03ABH F03ACH R RMDF00H F03ABH F03AAH RMIDH0 GAFLPL0H F03A9H F03AAH RMIDH0L RMPTR0H CAN receive rule entry register 0CLNote 1 F03A9H F03A8H R/W GAFLMH0H F03A7H F03A8H GAFLIDH0 RMTS0H F03A7H F03A6H GAFLIDH0L GAFLML0H F03A5H F03A6H R RMIDH0H CAN receive rule entry register 0BLNote 1 F03A5H F03A4H RMIDL0 GAFLIDH0H F03A3H F03A4H RMIDL0L RMIDL0H F03A3H F03A2H R/W GAFLIDL0H F03A1H F03A2H GAFLIDL0 GAFLIDH1L GAFLIDH1 R/W GAFLIDH1H CAN receive buffer register 0DHNote 2 F03AFH RMDF30L RMDF30H RMDF30 R Access Size 8 bits 16 bits -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H -- 00H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1265 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (4/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F03B0H CAN receive rule entry register 1BLNote 1 F03B1H F03B0H CAN receive buffer register 1ALNote 2 F03B1H F03B2H CAN receive rule entry register 1BHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 1AHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 1BLNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 1CHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 1BHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 1CLNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 2AHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 1CHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 1DLNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 2BHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 1DHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 2ALNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 2CHNote 1 GAFLPH1L GAFLPH1 R/W RMPTR1L RMPTR1 R GAFLIDL2L GAFLIDL2 R/W RMDF01L RMDF01 R GAFLIDH2L GAFLIDH2 R/W RMDF11L GAFLML2L RMDF21L GAFLMH2L RMDF31L GAFLPL2L RMIDL2L GAFLPH2L CAN receive buffer register 2AHNote 2 RMIDH2L CAN receive rule entry register 3ALNote 1 GAFLIDL3L GAFLIDL3H -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- R -- -- GAFLML2 R/W -- -- RMDF21 R GAFLMH2 R/W RMDF31 R GAFLPL2 R/W RMIDL2 R GAFLPH2 R/W RMIDH2 R RMIDH2H F03C5H -- RMDF11 GAFLPH2H F03C3H F03C4H R RMIDL2H F03C3H F03C2H RMTS1 GAFLPL2H F03C1H F03C2H RMTS1L RMDF31H CAN receive rule entry register 2CLNote 1 F03C1H F03C0H R/W GAFLMH2H F03BFH F03C0H GAFLPL1 RMDF21H F03BFH F03BEH GAFLPL1L GAFLML2H F03BDH F03BEH R RMDF11H CAN receive rule entry register 2BLNote 1 F03BDH F03BCH RMIDH1 GAFLIDH2H F03BBH F03BCH RMIDH1L RMDF01H F03BBH F03BAH R/W GAFLIDL2H F03B9H F03BAH GAFLMH1 RMPTR1H CAN receive rule entry register 2ALNote 1 F03B9H F03B8H GAFLMH1L GAFLPH1H F03B7H F03B8H R RMTS1H F03B7H F03B6H RMIDL1 GAFLPL1H F03B5H F03B6H RMIDL1L RMIDH1H CAN receive rule entry register 1CLNote 1 F03B5H F03B4H R/W GAFLMH1H F03B3H F03B4H GAFLML1 RMIDL1H F03B3H F03B2H GAFLML1L GAFLML1H Access Size 8 bits 16 bits GAFLIDL3 R/W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1266 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (5/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F03C4H CAN receive buffer register 2BLNote 2 F03C5H F03C6H CAN receive rule entry register 3AHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 2BHNote 2 GAFLML3L CAN receive buffer register 2CLNote 2 RMDF02L CAN receive rule entry register 3BHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 2CHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 2DLNote 2 RMDF22L CAN receive buffer register 2DHNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 4ALNote 1 CAN receive rule entry register 4AHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 3AHNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 4BLNote 1 GAFLML4L CAN receive buffer register 3BLNote 2 RMTS3L F03D7H F03D8H -- -- -- -- -- GAFLMH3 R/W RMDF12 R GAFLPL3 R/W RMDF22 R GAFLPH3 R/W RMDF32 R GAFLIDL4 RMIDL3 GAFLIDH4 RMIDH3 GAFLML4 RMTS3 GAFLMH4 RMPTR3L RMPTR3 CAN receive rule entry register 4CLNote 1 GAFLPL4L CAN receive buffer register 3CLNote 2 RMDF03L RMDF03H -- -- -- -- -- R/W -- -- R -- -- R/W -- -- -- -- R/W -- -- R -- -- -- -- -- -- R R/W R GAFLPL4 R/W -- -- RMDF03 R -- -- GAFLPL4H F03D9H -- -- RMPTR3H F03D9H F03D8H GAFLMH4H CAN receive buffer register 3BHNote 2 -- RMTS3H GAFLMH4L GAFLML4H CAN receive rule entry register 4BHNote 1 -- RMIDH3H F03D7H F03D6H RMIDH3L -- -- GAFLIDH4H F03D5H F03D6H GAFLIDH4L -- RMIDL3H F03D5H F03D4H RMIDL3L R GAFLIDL4H CAN receive buffer register 3ALNote 2 F03D3H F03D4H GAFLIDL4L -- -- RMDF02 RMDF32H F03D3H F03D2H RMDF32L -- GAFLPH3H F03D1H F03D2H GAFLPH3L R/W RMDF22H CAN receive rule entry register 3CHNote 1 -- -- GAFLML3 GAFLPL3H F03D1H F03D0H RMDF12L GAFLPL3L F03CFH F03D0H GAFLMH3L CAN receive rule entry register 3CLNote 1 F03CFH F03CEH R RMDF12H F03CDH F03CEH RMPTR2 GAFLMH3H F03CDH F03CCH R/W RMDF02H F03CBH F03CCH GAFLIDH3 GAFLML3H F03CBH F03CAH RMPTR2L CAN receive rule entry register 3BLNote 1 F03C9H F03CAH GAFLIDH3L RMPTR2H F03C9H F03C8H R GAFLIDH3H F03C7H F03C8H RMTS2 RMTS2H F03C7H F03C6H RMTS2L Access Size 8 bits 16 bits After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1267 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (6/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F03DAH CAN receive rule entry register 4CHNote 1 F03DBH F03DAH CAN receive buffer register 3CHNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 5ALNote 1 RMDF23L CAN receive rule entry register 5AHNote 1 GAFLIDH5L CAN receive buffer register 3DHNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 5BLNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 4ALNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 4AHNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 5CLNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 4BLNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 4BHNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 6ALNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 4CLNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 4CHNote 2 RMIDL4L RMIDL4 R GAFLMH5L GAFLMH5 R/W RMIDH4L RMIDH4 R GAFLPL5L GAFLPL5 R/W RMTS4L RMTS4 R GAFLPH5L GAFLPH5 R/W RMPTR4L RMPTR4 R GAFLIDL6L GAFLIDL6 R/W RMDF04L RMDF04 R GAFLIDH6L GAFLIDH6 RMDF14L RMDF14 CAN receive rule entry register 6BLNote 1 GAFLML6L GAFLML6 RMDF24L RMDF24 F03EFH GAFLMH6L GAFLMH6H GAFLMH6 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- R -- -- R/W -- -- R R/W RMDF24H CAN receive rule entry register 6BHNote 1 -- -- GAFLML6H CAN receive buffer register 4DLNote 2 -- -- R/W RMDF14H F03EDH F03EEH R/W GAFLIDH6H F03EDH F03ECH GAFLML5 RMDF04H CAN receive rule entry register 6AHNote 1 F03EBH F03ECH GAFLML5L GAFLIDL6H F03EBH F03EAH R RMPTR4H F03E9H F03EAH RMDF33 GAFLPH5H F03E9H F03E8H RMDF33L RMTS4H CAN receive rule entry register 5CHNote 1 F03E7H F03E8H R/W GAFLPL5H F03E7H F03E6H GAFLIDH5 RMIDH4H F03E5H F03E6H R GAFLMH5H F03E5H F03E4H RMDF23 RMIDL4H CAN receive rule entry register 5BHNote 1 F03E3H F03E4H R/W GAFLML5H F03E3H F03E2H GAFLIDL5 RMDF33H F03E1H F03E2H R GAFLIDH5H F03E1H F03E0H RMDF13 RMDF23H F03DFH F03E0H GAFLIDL5L CAN receive buffer register 3DLNote 2 F03DFH F03DEH RMDF13L GAFLIDL5H F03DDH F03DEH R/W RMDF13H F03DDH F03DCH GAFLPH4 GAFLPH4H F03DBH F03DCH GAFLPH4L Access Size 8 bits 16 bits After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1268 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (7/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F03EEH CAN receive buffer register 4DHNote 2 F03EFH F03F0H CAN receive rule entry register 6CLNote 1 F03F1H F03F0H CAN receive buffer register 5ALNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 5AHNote 2 RMIDH5L CAN receive rule entry register 7ALNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 5BLNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 5BHNote 2 RMPTR5L CAN receive rule entry register 7BLNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 5CLNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 5CHNote 2 RMDF15L R/W -- -- R -- -- GAFLIDL7 R/W -- -- RMTS5 -- -- R/W -- -- R -- -- -- -- -- -- R/W -- -- R -- -- -- -- -- -- R GAFLIDH7 RMPTR5 GAFLML7 R/W RMDF05 R GAFLMH7 RMDF15 RMDF15H CAN receive rule entry register 7CLNote 1 GAFLPL7L GAFLPL7 R/W GAFLPL7H CAN receive buffer register 5DLNote 2 RMDF25L RMDF25 R RMDF25H CAN receive rule entry register 7CHNote 1 GAFLPH7L CAN receive buffer register 5DHNote 2 RMDF35L GAFLPH7 R/W -- -- RMDF35 R -- -- GAFLPH7H RMDF35H CAN receive rule entry register 8ALNote 1 GAFLIDL8L GAFLIDL8 R/W -- -- -- -- R/W -- -- R -- -- GAFLIDL8H CAN receive buffer register 6ALNote 2 RMIDL6L RMIDL6 R RMIDL6H CAN receive rule entry register 8AHNote 1 F0403H F0402H GAFLMH7H F0401H F0402H RMDF05L GAFLMH7L F0401H F0400H GAFLML7L CAN receive rule entry register 7BHNote 1 F03FFH F0400H -- RMDF05H F03FFH F03FEH -- R GAFLML7H F03FDH F03FEH RMPTR5H F03FDH F03FCH RMIDH5 GAFLIDH8L GAFLIDH8 GAFLIDH8H CAN receive buffer register 6AHNote 2 F0403H RMIDH6L RMIDH6H GAFLIDH7H F03FBH F03FCH RMTS5L GAFLIDH7L F03FBH F03FAH GAFLIDL7L CAN receive rule entry register 7AHNote 1 F03F9H F03FAH GAFLPH6 -- RMTS5H F03F9H F03F8H RMIDL5 -- -- -- GAFLIDL7H F03F7H F03F8H R/W RMIDH5H F03F7H F03F6H GAFLPL6 GAFLPH6H F03F5H F03F6H RMIDL5L GAFLPH6L F03F5H F03F4H GAFLPL6L CAN receive rule entry register 6CHNote 1 F03F3H F03F4H R/W RMIDL5H F03F3H F03F2H RMDF34 GAFLPL6H F03F1H F03F2H RMDF34L RMDF34H Access Size 8 bits 16 bits RMIDH6 After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1269 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (8/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F0404H CAN receive rule entry register 8BLNote 1 F0405H F0404H CAN receive buffer register 6BLNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 8BHNote 1 RMPTR6L CAN receive rule entry register 8CLNote 1 GAFLPL8L CAN receive buffer register 6CLNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 8CHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 6CHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 6DLNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 9AHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 7ALNote 2 GAFLPH8 R/W RMDF16 R GAFLIDL9 R/W RMDF26L RMDF26 R GAFLIDH9L GAFLIDH9 R/W RMIDL7L CAN receive rule entry register 9BHNote 1 GAFLMH9L RMIDH7L CAN receive rule entry register 9CLNote 1 GAFLPL9L GAFLPH9L RMPTR7L CAN receive rule entry register 10ALNote 1 GAFLIDL10L GAFLIDL10H -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RMIDL7 R GAFLMH9 R/W RMIDH7 R GAFLPL9 R/W RMTS7 R GAFLPH9 R/W RMPTR7 R RMPTR7H F0419H -- GAFLPH9H CAN receive buffer register 7BHNote 2 -- R/W RMTS7H CAN receive rule entry register 9CHNote 1 -- GAFLML9 GAFLPL9H RMTS7L -- RMIDH7H CAN receive buffer register 7BLNote 2 -- R GAFLMH9H CAN receive buffer register 7AHNote 2 -- RMDF36 RMIDL7H F0417H F0418H R GAFLML9H F0417H F0416H RMDF06 RMDF36H F0415H F0416H GAFLIDL9L GAFLML9L F0415H F0414H RMDF16L CAN receive rule entry register 9BLNote 1 F0413H F0414H GAFLPH8L RMDF36L F0413H F0412H RMDF06L CAN receive buffer register 6DHNote 2 F0411H F0412H R/W GAFLIDH9H F0411H F0410H GAFLPL8 RMDF26H F040FH F0410H R GAFLIDL9H F040FH F040EH RMPTR6 RMDF16H CAN receive rule entry register 9ALNote 1 F040DH F040EH R/W GAFLPH8H F040DH F040CH GAFLMH8 RMDF06H F040BH F040CH R GAFLPL8H F040BH F040AH RMTS6 RMPTR6H F0409H F040AH GAFLMH8L CAN receive buffer register 6BHNote 2 F0409H F0408H RMTS6L GAFLMH8H F0407H F0408H R/W RMTS6H F0407H F0406H GAFLML8 GAFLML8H F0405H F0406H GAFLML8L Access Size 8 bits 16 bits GAFLIDL10 R/W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1270 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (9/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F0418H CAN receive buffer register 7CLNote 2 F0419H F041AH CAN receive rule entry register 10AHNote 1 F041BH F041AH CAN receive buffer register 7CHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 7DLNote 2 RMDF27L CAN receive rule entry register 10BHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 7DHNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 10CLNote 1 CAN receive rule entry register 10CHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 8AHNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 11ALNote 1 CAN receive rule entry register 11AHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 8BHNote 2 RMIDL8L GAFLPH10L RMIDH8L GAFLIDL11L RMTS8L GAFLIDH11L RMPTR8L GAFLML11L CAN receive buffer register 8CLNote 2 RMDF08L -- -- R/W -- -- -- -- R/W -- -- R -- -- R GAFLPL10 RMIDL8 GAFLPH10 R/W -- -- RMIDH8 -- -- R/W -- -- R -- -- R GAFLIDL11 RMTS8 GAFLIDH11 R/W RMPTR8 R GAFLML11 RMDF08 GAFLMH11L GAFLMH11 RMDF18L RMDF18 R/W -- -- R -- -- R/W R RMDF18H CAN receive rule entry register 11CLNote 1 GAFLPL11L GAFLPL11 R/W GAFLPL11H CAN receive buffer register 8DLNote 2 F042DH RMDF28L RMDF28H RMDF28 GAFLMH11H CAN receive buffer register 8CHNote 2 -- RMDF08H CAN receive rule entry register 11BHNote 1 -- -- -- GAFLML11H F042DH F042CH GAFLPL10L CAN receive rule entry register 11BLNote 1 F042BH F042CH -- R RMPTR8H F042BH F042AH GAFLIDH11H F0429H F042AH RMDF37 -- RMTS8H F0429H F0428H RMDF37L R/W GAFLIDL11H CAN receive buffer register 8BLNote 2 F0427H F0428H GAFLMH10 -- -- RMIDH8H F0427H F0426H GAFLMH10L GAFLPH10H F0425H F0426H RMDF27 -- RMIDL8H F0425H F0424H GAFLML10 -- -- -- GAFLPL10H CAN receive buffer register 8ALNote 2 F0423H F0424H R RMDF37H F0423H F0422H RMDF17 GAFLMH10H F0421H F0422H R/W RMDF27H F0421H F0420H GAFLIDH10 GAFLML10H F041FH F0420H RMDF17L GAFLML10L F041FH F041EH GAFLIDH10L CAN receive rule entry register 10BLNote 1 F041DH F041EH R RMDF17H F041DH F041CH RMDF07 GAFLIDH10H F041BH F041CH RMDF07L RMDF07H Access Size 8 bits 16 bits R -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1271 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (10/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F042EH CAN receive rule entry register 11CHNote 1 F042FH F042EH CAN receive buffer register 8DHNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 12ALNote 1 RMIDL9L CAN receive rule entry register 12AHNote 1 GAFLIDH12L CAN receive buffer register 9AHNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 12BLNote 1 CAN receive rule entry register 12BHNote 1 GAFLMH12L CAN receive buffer register 9BHNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 12CLNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 9CLNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 9CHNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 13ALNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 9DLNote 2 RMTS9 R GAFLMH12 R/W RMPTR9L RMPTR9 R GAFLPL12L GAFLPL12 R/W RMDF09L RMDF09 R GAFLPH12L GAFLPH12 R/W RMDF19L RMDF19 R GAFLIDL13L GAFLIDL13 R/W RMDF29L RMDF29 R RMDF29H CAN receive rule entry register 13AHNote 1 GAFLIDH13L GAFLIDH13 R/W GAFLIDH13H CAN receive buffer register 9DHNote 2 RMDF39L RMDF39 R RMDF39H CAN receive rule entry register 13BLNote 1 GAFLML13L GAFLML13 R/W GAFLML13H CAN receive buffer register 10ALNote 2 RMIDL10L CAN receive rule entry register 13BHNote 1 GAFLMH13L F0441H F0442H R/W GAFLIDL13H F0441H F0440H GAFLML12 RMDF19H F043FH F0440H R GAFLPH12H F043FH F043EH RMIDH9 RMDF09H CAN receive rule entry register 12CHNote 1 F043DH F043EH R/W GAFLPL12H F043DH F043CH GAFLIDH12 RMPTR9H F043BH F043CH R GAFLMH12H F043BH F043AH RMIDL9 RMTS9H F0439H F043AH GAFLML12L RMTS9L F0439H F0438H RMIDH9L CAN receive buffer register 9BLNote 2 F0437H F0438H R/W GAFLML12H F0437H F0436H GAFLIDL12 RMIDH9H F0435H F0436H R GAFLIDH12H F0435H F0434H RMDF38 RMIDL9H F0433H F0434H GAFLIDL12L CAN receive buffer register 9ALNote 2 F0433H F0432H RMDF38L GAFLIDL12H F0431H F0432H R/W RMDF38H F0431H F0430H GAFLPH11 GAFLPH11H F042FH F0430H GAFLPH11L RMIDL10 R RMIDL10H F0443H GAFLMH13H GAFLMH13 R/W Access Size 8 bits 16 bits -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1272 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (11/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F0442H CAN receive buffer register 10AHNote 2 F0443H F0444H CAN receive rule entry register 13CLNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 10BLNote 2 GAFLPH13L CAN receive buffer register 10BHNote 2 RMPTR10L CAN receive rule entry register 14ALNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 10CLNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 14AHNote 1 CAN receive rule entry register 14BLNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 10DLNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 10DHNote 2 RMDF310L CAN receive buffer register 11ALNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 14CHNote 1 GAFLPH14L CAN receive buffer register 11AHNote 2 RMIDH11L F0455H F0456H GAFLIDL14 R/W RMDF010 R GAFLIDH14 RMDF110 GAFLML14 RMDF210 GAFLMH14 RMDF310 GAFLPL14 RMIDL11 GAFLPH14 RMIDH11 GAFLIDL15 RMTS11L RMTS11 CAN receive rule entry register 15AHNote 1 GAFLIDH15L GAFLIDH15 F0457H RMPTR11L RMPTR11H RMPTR11 -- R/W -- -- R -- -- R/W -- -- -- -- R/W -- -- R -- -- R R/W -- -- -- -- R/W -- -- R -- -- R R/W -- -- -- -- R/W -- -- R -- -- R GAFLIDH15H CAN receive buffer register 11BHNote 2 -- -- -- RMTS11H F0457H F0456H GAFLIDL15H CAN receive buffer register 11BLNote 2 -- RMIDH11H GAFLIDL15L GAFLPH14H CAN receive rule entry register 15ALNote 1 -- RMIDL11H F0455H F0454H RMIDL11L -- -- GAFLPL14H F0453H F0454H GAFLPL14L -- RMDF310H CAN receive rule entry register 14CLNote 1 R GAFLMH14H F0453H F0452H RMDF210L GAFLMH14L F0451H F0452H GAFLML14L CAN receive rule entry register 14BHNote 1 F0451H F0450H RMDF110L -- -- RMPTR10 RMDF210H F044FH F0450H GAFLIDH14L -- GAFLML14H F044FH F044EH RMDF010L -- R/W RMDF110H F044DH F044EH GAFLIDL14L -- GAFLPH13 GAFLIDH14H CAN receive buffer register 10CHNote 2 F044DH F044CH R RMDF010H F044BH F044CH RMTS10 GAFLIDL14H F044BH F044AH R/W RMPTR10H F0449H F044AH GAFLPL13 GAFLPH13H F0449H F0448H RMTS10L CAN receive rule entry register 13CHNote 1 F0447H F0448H GAFLPL13L RMTS10H F0447H F0446H R GAFLPL13H F0445H F0446H RMIDH10 RMIDH10H F0445H F0444H RMIDH10L Access Size 8 bits 16 bits After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1273 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (12/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F0458H CAN receive rule entry register 15BLNote 1 F0459H F0458H CAN receive buffer register 11CLNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 15BHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 11CHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 11DLNote 2 CAN receive rule entry register 15CHNote 1 CAN receive buffer register 12AHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 12BLNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 12BHNote 2 RMPTR12L CAN receive buffer register 12CLNote 2 RMDF012L CAN receive buffer register 12DHNote 2 RMDF312L CAN receive buffer register 13ALNote 2 RMIDL13L F0474H CAN receive buffer register 13BLNote 2 -- -- RMDF211 R GAFLPH15 R/W CAN receive buffer register 13BHNote 2 RMPTR13L CAN receive buffer register 13CLNote 2 RMDF013L RMDF013H R -- -- RMIDL12 R -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RMIDH12 R RMTS12 R RMPTR12 R RMDF012 R RMDF112 R RMDF212 R -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RMDF312 R -- -- RMIDL13 R -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RMIDH13 R RMTS13 R RMPTR13 R RMDF013 R RMPTR13H F0479H -- -- RMDF311 RMTS13H F0477H F0478H RMTS13L -- RMIDH13H F0475H F0476H RMIDH13L RMIDL13H F0473H RMDF312H CAN receive buffer register 13AHNote 2 -- -- -- RMDF212H F0471H F0472H RMDF212L -- RMDF112H CAN receive buffer register 12DLNote 2 R/W RMDF012H RMDF112L -- -- GAFLPL15 RMPTR12H CAN receive buffer register 12CHNote 2 -- RMTS12H F046FH F0470H RMTS12L R RMIDH12H F046DH F046EH RMIDH12L -- -- RMDF111 RMIDL12H F046BH F046CH R/W RMDF311H F0469H F046AH GAFLPH15L RMIDL12L F0467H F0468H RMDF211L CAN receive buffer register 12ALNote 2 F0465H F0466H GAFLPL15L RMDF311L F0463H F0464H RMDF111L CAN receive buffer register 11DHNote 2 F0461H F0462H GAFLMH15 GAFLPH15H F045FH F0460H GAFLMH15L RMDF211H F045FH F045EH R GAFLPL15H F045DH F045EH RMDF011 RMDF111H CAN receive rule entry register 15CLNote 1 F045DH F045CH RMDF011L GAFLMH15H F045BH F045CH R/W RMDF011H F045BH F045AH GAFLML15 GAFLML15H F0459H F045AH GAFLML15L Access Size 8 bits 16 bits -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1274 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (13/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F047AH CAN receive buffer register 13CHNote 2 F047BH F047CH CAN receive buffer register 13DLNote 2 F047DH F047EH CAN receive buffer register 13DHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 14AHNote 2 RMIDH14L CAN receive buffer register 14BLNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 14BHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 14CLNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 14DLNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 14DHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 15AHNote 2 RMIDH15L CAN receive buffer register 15BHNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 15CLNote 2 CAN receive buffer register 15DLNote 2 -- -- -- -- -- RMTS14 R RMPTR14 R RMDF014 R RMDF114 R RMDF214 R RMDF314 R CAN receive buffer register 15DHNote 2 RMDF315L RPGACC0L CAN RAM test register 1Note 1 RPGACC1L F0587H RPGACC3L RPGACC3H -- -- -- -- -- R -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RMTS15 R RMPTR15 R RMDF015 R RMDF115 R RMDF215 R RMDF315 R RPGACC0 R/W RPGACC1 R/W RPGACC2 R/W RPGACC2H CAN RAM test register 3Note 1 -- RMIDH15 RPGACC1H RPGACC2L -- RPGACC0H CAN RAM test register 2Note 1 -- R RMDF315H CAN RAM test register 0Note 1 -- RMIDL15 RMDF215H F0585H F0586H RMDF215L -- RMDF115H F0583H F0584H RMDF115L RMDF015H CAN receive buffer register 15CHNote 2 F0581H F0582H RMDF015L -- RMPTR15H F049FH F0580H RMPTR15L -- -- RMTS15H F049DH F049EH RMTS15L -- RMIDH15H CAN receive buffer register 15BLNote 2 -- R RMIDL15H F049BH F049CH RMDF314L RMIDL15L F0499H F049AH RMDF214L CAN receive buffer register 15ALNote 2 F0497H F0498H RMDF114L -- RMIDH14 RMDF314H F0495H F0496H RMDF014L -- RMDF214H F0493H F0494H RMPTR14L -- R RMDF114H F0491H F0492H RMTS14L -- RMIDL14 RMDF014H CAN receive buffer register 14CHNote 2 F048FH F0490H R RMPTR14H F048DH F048EH RMDF313 RMTS14H F048BH F048CH R RMIDH14H F0489H F048AH RMDF213 RMIDL14H F0487H F0488H RMDF313L RMIDL14L F0485H F0486H RMDF213L CAN receive buffer register 14ALNote 2 F0483H F0484H R RMDF313H F0481H F0482H RMDF113 RMDF213H F047FH F0480H RMDF113L RMDF113H Access Size 8 bits 16 bits RPGACC3 R/W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1275 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (14/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F0588H CAN RAM test register 4Note 1 F0589H F058AH CAN RAM test register 5Note 1 CAN RAM test register 6Note 1 RPGACC7L CAN RAM test register 8Note 1 RPGACC8L CAN RAM test register 9Note 1 CAN RAM test register 10Note 1 CAN RAM test register 12Note 1 RPGACC12L CAN RAM test register 13Note 1 CAN RAM test register 14Note 1 CAN RAM test register 16Note 1 RPGACC16L CAN receive FIFO access register 0ALNote 2 CAN RAM test register 17Note 1 CAN receive FIFO access register 0AHNote 2 RPGACC11 R/W RPGACC12 R/W RPGACC13 R/W RPGACC14 R/W RFIDL0L RPGACC17L RFIDH0L RPGACC18L RFTS0L RPGACC19L RFPTR0L RPGACC20L RFDF00L F05ABH RPGACC21L RPGACC21H -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RFIDL0 R RPGACC17 R/W RFIDH0 RPGACC18 RFTS0 RPGACC19 RFPTR0 RPGACC20 RFDF00 RPGACC21 -- -- -- -- R -- -- R/W -- -- R R/W R R/W R RFDF00H CAN RAM test register 21Note 1 -- RPGACC20H CAN receive FIFO access register 0CLNote 2 R/W RFPTR0H CAN RAM test register 20Note 1 -- -- RPGACC16 RPGACC19H CAN receive FIFO access register 0BHNote 2 -- RFTS0H CAN RAM test register 19Note 1 R/W RPGACC18H CAN receive FIFO access register 0BLNote 2 -- -- RPGACC15 RFIDH0H CAN RAM test register 18Note 1 F05A9H F05AAH R/W RPGACC17H F05A9H F05A8H RPGACC10 RFIDL0H F05A7H F05A8H R/W RPGACC16H F05A7H F05A6H RPGACC9 RPGACC15H F05A5H F05A6H RPGACC14L RPGACC15L F05A5H F05A4H RPGACC13L CAN RAM test register 15Note 1 F05A3H F05A4H R/W RPGACC14H F05A3H F05A2H RPGACC8 RPGACC13H F05A1H F05A2H R/W RPGACC12H F05A1H F05A0H RPGACC7 RPGACC11H F059FH F05A0H RPGACC10L RPGACC11L F059DH F059EH RPGACC9L CAN RAM test register 11Note 1 F059BH F059CH R/W RPGACC10H F0599H F059AH RPGACC6 RPGACC9H F0597H F0598H R/W RPGACC8H F0595H F0596H RPGACC5 RPGACC7H F0593H F0594H RPGACC6L CAN RAM test register 7Note 1 F0591H F0592H RPGACC5L RPGACC6H F058FH F0590H R/W RPGACC5H F058DH F058EH RPGACC4 RPGACC4H F058BH F058CH RPGACC4L Access Size 8 bits 16 bits R/W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1276 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (15/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F05AAH CAN receive FIFO access register 0CHNote 2 F05ABH F05ACH CAN RAM test register 22Note 1 F05ADH F05ACH CAN receive FIFO access register 0DLNote 2 CAN receive FIFO access register 0DHNote 2 RFDF30L CAN RAM test register 24Note 1 CAN receive FIFO access register 1ALNote 2 CAN RAM test register 25Note 1 CAN RAM test register 26Note 1 CAN receive FIFO access register 1BLNote 2 CAN RAM test register 27Note 1 CAN RAM test register 28Note 1 CAN receive FIFO access register 1CLNote 2 CAN RAM test register 29Note 1 CAN RAM test register 30Note 1 CAN receive FIFO access register 1DLNote 2 RPGACC25 R/W RFIDH1L RFIDH1 R RPGACC26L RPGACC26 R/W RFTS1L RFTS1 R RPGACC27L RPGACC27 R/W RFPTR1L RFPTR1 R RPGACC28L RPGACC28 R/W RFDF01L RFDF01 R RPGACC29L RPGACC29 R/W RFDF11L RFDF11 R RPGACC30L RPGACC30 R/W RFDF21L RFDF21 R RFDF21H CAN RAM test register 31Note 1 RPGACC31L CAN receive FIFO access register 1DHNote 2 RFDF31L RPGACC31 R/W RPGACC31H RFDF31 R RFDF31H CAN RAM test register 32Note 1 F05C1H F05C2H RPGACC25L RPGACC30H F05BFH F05C0H R RFDF11H F05BFH F05BEH RFIDL1 RPGACC29H CAN receive FIFO access register 1CHNote 2 F05BDH F05BEH RFIDL1L RFDF01H F05BDH F05BCH R/W RPGACC28H F05BBH F05BCH RPGACC24 RFPTR1H F05BBH F05BAH RPGACC24L RPGACC27H CAN receive FIFO access register 1BHNote 2 F05B9H F05BAH R RFTS1H F05B9H F05B8H RFDF30 RPGACC26H F05B7H F05B8H R/W RFIDH1H F05B7H F05B6H RPGACC23 RPGACC25H CAN receive FIFO access register 1AHNote 2 F05B5H F05B6H R RFIDL1H F05B5H F05B4H RFDF20 RPGACC24H F05B3H F05B4H R/W RFDF30H F05B3H F05B2H RPGACC22 RPGACC23H F05B1H F05B2H RFDF20L RPGACC23L F05B1H F05B0H RPGACC22L CAN RAM test register 23Note 1 F05AFH F05B0H R RFDF20H F05AFH F05AEH RFDF10 RPGACC22H F05ADH F05AEH RFDF10L RFDF10H RPGACC32L RPGACC32 R/W RPGACC32H CAN RAM test register 33Note 1 F05C3H RPGACC33L RPGACC33H RPGACC33 R/W Access Size 8 bits 16 bits -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1277 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (16/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F05C4H CAN RAM test register 34Note 1 F05C5H F05C6H CAN RAM test register 35Note 1 CAN RAM test register 36Note 1 RPGACC37L CAN RAM test register 38Note 1 RPGACC38L CAN RAM test register 39Note 1 CAN RAM test register 40Note 1 CAN RAM test register 42Note 1 RPGACC42L CAN RAM test register 44Note 1 CAN RAM test register 45Note 1 RPGACC45L CAN RAM test register 46Note 1 RPGACC46L F05E1H RPGACC48L CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access CFIDL0L F05E1H register 0ALNote 2 CFIDL0H F05E2H CAN RAM test register 49Note 1 RPGACC49L F05E3H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access CFIDH0L F05E3H register 0AHNote 2 CFIDH0H F05E4H CAN RAM test register 50Note 1 F05E5H RPGACC50L CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access CFTS0L F05E5H register 0BLNote 2 CFTS0H F05E6H CAN RAM test register 51Note 1 RPGACC51L F05E7H RPGACC51H -- RPGACC39 R/W RPGACC40 R/W RPGACC41 R/W RPGACC42 R/W RPGACC43 R/W RPGACC44 R/W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RPGACC45 R/W -- -- RPGACC46 R/W -- -- RPGACC47 R/W RPGACC48 R/W -- -- -- -- CFIDL0 R/W -- -- RPGACC49 R/W -- -- CFIDH0 RPGACC50 R/W R/W CFTS0 RPGACC51 -- -- -- -- R -- -- R/W -- -- RPGACC50H F05E4H RPGACC49H F05E2H RPGACC48H F05E0H -- -- -- RPGACC47H CAN RAM test register 48Note 1 -- RPGACC46H RPGACC47L R/W RPGACC45H CAN RAM test register 47Note 1 -- -- RPGACC38 RPGACC44H F05DFH F05E0H RPGACC44L -- RPGACC43H F05DDH F05DEH RPGACC43L R/W RPGACC42H CAN RAM test register 43Note 1 -- -- RPGACC37 RPGACC41H F05DBH F05DCH RPGACC40L RPGACC41L F05D9H F05DAH RPGACC39L CAN RAM test register 41Note 1 F05D7H F05D8H R/W RPGACC40H F05D5H F05D6H RPGACC36 RPGACC39H F05D3H F05D4H R/W RPGACC38H F05D1H F05D2H RPGACC35 RPGACC37H F05CFH F05D0H RPGACC36L CAN RAM test register 37Note 1 F05CDH F05CEH RPGACC35L RPGACC36H F05CBH F05CCH R/W RPGACC35H F05C9H F05CAH RPGACC34 RPGACC34H F05C7H F05C8H RPGACC34L Access Size 8 bits 16 bits After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1278 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (17/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F05E6H CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access CFPTR0L F05E7H register 0BHNote 2 CFPTR0H F05E8H CAN RAM test register 52Note 1 F05E9H RPGACC52L CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access CFDF00L F05E9H register 0CLNote 2 CFDF00H F05EAH CAN RAM test register 53Note 1 RPGACC53L F05EBH CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access CFDF10L F05EBH register 0CHNote 2 CFDF10H F05ECH CAN RAM test register 54Note 1 F05EDH RPGACC54L CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access CFDF20L F05EDH register 0DLNote 2 CFDF20H F05EEH CAN RAM test register 55Note 1 RPGACC55L F05EEH CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO access CFDF30L F05EFH register 0DHNote 2 CFDF30H F05F0H CAN RAM test register 56Note 1 RPGACC56L F05EFH CAN RAM test register 57Note 1 RPGACC58L CAN RAM test register 59Note 1 RPGACC59L CAN RAM test register 60Note 1 CAN RAM test register 61Note 1 R/W CFDF20 R/W RPGACC55 R/W CFDF30 R/W RPGACC56 R/W RPGACC57 R/W RPGACC60L RPGACC61L CAN RAM test register 62Note 1 RPGACC62L CAN RAM test register 63Note 1 RPGACC63L RPGACC64L F0601H TMIDL0L RPGACC65L CAN0 transmit buffer register 0AHNote 2 TMIDH0L F0603H TMIDH0H -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RPGACC60 R/W RPGACC61 R/W RPGACC62 R/W -- -- RPGACC63 R/W -- -- RPGACC64 R/W TMIDL0 R/W RPGACC65 R/W TMIDH0 R/W RPGACC65H F0603H R/W TMIDL0H CAN RAM test register 65Note 1 -- -- RPGACC59 RPGACC64H CAN0 transmit buffer register 0ALNote 2 -- RPGACC63H F0601H R/W RPGACC62H CAN RAM test register 64Note 1 -- -- RPGACC58 RPGACC61H F05FFH F0602H RPGACC54 RPGACC60H F05FDH F0602H R/W RPGACC59H F05FBH F0600H CFDF10 RPGACC58H F05F9H F0600H RPGACC57L CAN RAM test register 58Note 1 F05F7H F05FEH R/W RPGACC57H F05F5H F05FCH RPGACC53 RPGACC56H F05F3H F05FAH R/W RPGACC55H F05F1H F05F8H CFDF00 RPGACC54H F05ECH F05F6H R/W RPGACC53H F05EAH F05F4H RPGACC52 R/W RPGACC52H F05E8H F05F2H CFPTR0 Access Size 8 bits 16 bits -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1279 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (18/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F0604H CAN RAM test register 66Note 1 F0605H F0606H CAN RAM test register 67Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 0BHNote 2 RPGACC68L CAN0 transmit buffer register 0CLNote 2 TMDF00L CAN RAM test register 69Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 0CHNote 2 CAN0 transmit buffer register 0DLNote 2 TMDF20L CAN RAM test register 71Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 0DHNote 2 CAN0 transmit buffer register 1ALNote 2 TMIDL1L CAN RAM test register 73Note 1 TMDF10 R/W RPGACC70 R/W TMDF20 R/W RPGACC71 R/W TMDF30 R/W RPGACC72 R/W TMIDL1 R/W RPGACC73L RPGACC73 R/W RPGACC73H CAN0 transmit buffer register 1AHNote 2 TMIDH1L TMIDH1 R/W TMIDH1H CAN RAM test register 74Note 1 RPGACC74L CAN RAM test register 75Note 1 RPGACC75L RPGACC74 R/W RPGACC75 R/W RPGACC74H RPGACC75H CAN0 transmit buffer register 1BHNote 2 TMPTR1L TMPTR1 R/W TMPTR1H CAN RAM test register 76Note 1 RPGACC76L RPGACC76 R/W RPGACC76H CAN0 transmit buffer register 1CLNote 2 F0619H F061AH R/W TMIDL1H F0619H F0618H RPGACC69 RPGACC72H F0617H F0618H TMDF30L RPGACC72L F0617H F0616H RPGACC71L CAN RAM test register 72Note 1 F0615H F0616H R/W TMDF30H F0613H F0614H TMDF00 RPGACC71H F0613H F0612H R/W TMDF20H F0611H F0612H RPGACC68 RPGACC70H F0611H F0610H TMDF10L RPGACC70L F060FH F0610H RPGACC69L CAN RAM test register 70Note 1 F060FH F060EH R/W TMDF10H F060DH F060EH TMPTR0 RPGACC69H F060DH F060CH R/W TMDF00H F060BH F060CH RPGACC67 RPGACC68H F060BH F060AH TMPTR0L CAN RAM test register 68Note 1 F0609H F060AH RPGACC67L TMPTR0H F0609H F0608H R/W RPGACC67H F0607H F0608H RPGACC66 RPGACC66H F0607H F0606H RPGACC66L TMDF01L F061BH RPGACC77L RPGACC77H -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TMDF01 R/W -- -- RPGACC77 R/W -- -- TMDF01H CAN RAM test register 77Note 1 Access Size 8 bits 16 bits After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1280 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (19/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F061AH CAN0 transmit buffer register 1CHNote 2 F061BH F061CH CAN RAM test register 78Note 1 F061DH F061CH CAN0 transmit buffer register 1DLNote 2 CAN0 transmit buffer register 1DHNote 2 TMDF31L CAN RAM test register 80Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 2ALNote 2 CAN0 transmit buffer register 2AHNote 2 TMIDH2L CAN RAM test register 82Note 1 CAN RAM test register 83Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 2BHNote 2 CAN0 transmit buffer register 2CLNote 2 CAN RAM test register 85Note 1 R/W RPGACC81 R/W TMIDH2 R/W RPGACC82L RPGACC82 R/W RPGACC83L RPGACC83 R/W TMPTR2L RPGACC84L TMDF02L RPGACC85L CAN0 transmit buffer register 2CHNote 2 TMDF12L RPGACC86L TMDF22L RPGACC87L TMDF32L F0631H RPGACC88L RPGACC88H -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- R/W -- -- -- -- TMDF02 R/W RPGACC85 R/W -- -- TMDF12 R/W -- -- RPGACC86 R/W -- -- -- -- TMDF22 R/W RPGACC87 R/W -- -- TMDF32 R/W -- -- RPGACC88 R/W -- -- TMDF32H CAN RAM test register 88Note 1 RPGACC84 RPGACC87H CAN0 transmit buffer register 2DHNote 2 -- -- TMDF22H CAN RAM test register 87Note 1 -- RPGACC86H CAN0 transmit buffer register 2DLNote 2 -- R/W TMDF12H CAN RAM test register 86Note 1 -- TMPTR2 RPGACC85H F062FH F0630H TMIDL2 TMDF02H F062FH F062EH R/W RPGACC84H F062DH F062EH RPGACC80 TMPTR2H CAN RAM test register 84Note 1 F062DH F062CH R/W RPGACC83H F062BH F062CH TMDF31 RPGACC82H F062BH F062AH R/W TMIDH2H F0629H F062AH RPGACC79 RPGACC81H F0629H F0628H TMIDL2L RPGACC81L F0627H F0628H RPGACC80L CAN RAM test register 81Note 1 F0627H F0626H R/W TMIDL2H F0625H F0626H TMDF21 RPGACC80H F0623H F0624H R/W TMDF31H F0623H F0622H RPGACC78 RPGACC79H F0621H F0622H TMDF21L RPGACC79L F0621H F0620H RPGACC78L CAN RAM test register 79Note 1 F061FH F0620H R/W TMDF21H F061FH F061EH TMDF11 RPGACC78H F061DH F061EH TMDF11L TMDF11H Access Size 8 bits 16 bits After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1281 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (20/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F0630H CAN0 transmit buffer register 3ALNote 2 F0631H F0632H CAN RAM test register 89Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 3AHNote 2 RPGACC90L CAN RAM test register 91Note 1 RPGACC91L CAN0 transmit buffer register 3BHNote 2 CAN RAM test register 92Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 3CLNote 2 CAN0 transmit buffer register 3CHNote 2 CAN RAM test register 94Note 1 CAN0 transmit buffer register 3DLNote 2 CAN0 transmit buffer register 3DHNote 2 CAN RAM test register 96Note 1 TMDF13L RPGACC94L TMDF23L RPGACC95L TMDF33L RPGACC96L CAN RAM test register 98Note 1 RPGACC98L RPGACC92 R/W RPGACC99L RPGACC100L RPGACC101L F064DH RPGACC102L RPGACC102H -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- R/W -- -- TMDF13 R/W RPGACC94 R/W -- -- -- -- TMDF23 R/W -- -- RPGACC95 R/W -- -- TMDF33 R/W RPGACC96 R/W RPGACC97 R/W RPGACC98 R/W RPGACC99 R/W RPGACC100 R/W RPGACC101 R/W RPGACC102 R/W RPGACC101H CAN RAM test register 102Note 1 -- -- RPGACC93 RPGACC100H CAN RAM test register 101Note 1 -- RPGACC99H CAN RAM test register 100Note 1 R/W RPGACC98H CAN RAM test register 99Note 1 -- -- TMDF03 RPGACC97H F064BH F064CH RPGACC93L RPGACC97L F0649H F064AH TMDF03L CAN RAM test register 97Note 1 F0647H F0648H RPGACC92L RPGACC96H F0645H F0646H R/W TMDF33H F0643H F0644H TMPTR3 RPGACC95H F0641H F0642H TMPTR3L TMDF23H CAN RAM test register 95Note 1 F063FH F0640H R/W RPGACC94H F063FH F063EH RPGACC91 TMDF13H F063DH F063EH R/W RPGACC93H F063DH F063CH RPGACC90 TMDF03H CAN RAM test register 93Note 1 F063BH F063CH R/W RPGACC92H F063BH F063AH TMIDH3 TMPTR3H F0639H F063AH R/W RPGACC91H F0639H F0638H RPGACC89 RPGACC90H F0637H F0638H TMIDH3L CAN RAM test register 90Note 1 F0637H F0636H RPGACC89L TMIDH3H F0635H F0636H R/W RPGACC89H F0633H F0634H TMIDL3 TMIDL3H F0633H F0632H TMIDL3L Access Size 8 bits 16 bits -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1282 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (21/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F064EH CAN RAM test register 103Note F064FH F0650H CAN RAM test register 104Note F0651H F0652H CAN RAM test register 105Note F0653H F0654H CAN RAM test register 106Note F0655H F0656H CAN RAM test register 107Note F0657H F0658H CAN RAM test register 108Note F0659H F065AH CAN RAM test register 109Note F065BH F065CH CAN RAM test register 110Note F065DH F065EH CAN RAM test register 111Note F065FH F0660H CAN RAM test register 112Note F0661H F0662H CAN RAM test register 113Note F0663H F0664H CAN RAM test register 114Note F0665H F0666H CAN RAM test register 115Note F0667H F0668H CAN RAM test register 116Note F0669H F066AH CAN RAM test register 117Note F066BH F066CH CAN RAM test register 118Note F066DH F066EH CAN RAM test register 119Note F066FH F0670H CAN RAM test register 120Note F0671H F0672H CAN RAM test register 121Note F0673H F0674H CAN RAM test register 122Note F0675H F0676H CAN RAM test register 123Note F0677H F0678H CAN RAM test register 124Note F0679H Note RPGACC103L RPGACC10 RPGACC103H 3 RPGACC104L RPGACC10 RPGACC104H 4 RPGACC105L RPGACC10 RPGACC105H 5 RPGACC106L RPGACC10 RPGACC106H 6 RPGACC107L RPGACC10 RPGACC107H 7 RPGACC108L RPGACC10 RPGACC108H 8 RPGACC109L RPGACC10 RPGACC109H 9 RPGACC110L RPGACC11 RPGACC110H 0 RPGACC111L RPGACC11 RPGACC111H 1 RPGACC112L RPGACC11 RPGACC112H 2 RPGACC113L RPGACC11 RPGACC113H 3 RPGACC114L RPGACC11 RPGACC114H 4 RPGACC115L RPGACC11 RPGACC115H 5 RPGACC116L RPGACC11 RPGACC116H 6 RPGACC117L RPGACC11 RPGACC117H 7 RPGACC118L RPGACC11 RPGACC118H 8 RPGACC119L RPGACC11 RPGACC119H 9 RPGACC120L RPGACC12 RPGACC120H 0 RPGACC121L RPGACC12 RPGACC121H 1 RPGACC122L RPGACC12 RPGACC122H 2 RPGACC123L RPGACC12 RPGACC123H 3 RPGACC124L RPGACC12 RPGACC124H 4 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Access Size 8 bits 16 bits -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1283 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-3. List of CAN Module Registers (22/22) Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W 1 bit F067AH CAN RAM test register 125Note 1 F067BH F067CH CAN RAM test register 126Note 1 F067DH F067EH CAN RAM test register 127Note 1 F067FH RPGACC125L RPGACC12 RPGACC125H 5 RPGACC126L RPGACC12 RPGACC126H 6 RPGACC127L RPGACC12 RPGACC127H 7 THLACC0 F0680H CAN0 transmit history buffer access THLACC0L F0681H registerNote 2 THLACC0H R/W R/W R/W R Access Size 8 bits 16 bits -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- After Reset 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H Notes 1. These registers are allocated to RAM window 0 for the CAN module (receive rules and CAN RAM test register). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 0. 2. These registers are allocated to RAM window 1 for the CAN module (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, and transmit history data). When setting these registers, set the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1284 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.1 CANi Bit Configuration Register L (CiCFGL) (i = 0) Address C0CFGLL: F0300H, C0CFGLH: F0301H After Reset b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to -- b8 Reserved b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 BRP[9:0] 0 0 Bit Name 10 9 to 0 b9 0 0 0 0 Description R/W These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. BRP[9:0] Prescaler Division Ratio Set When these bits are set to P (0 to 1023), the baud rate R/W prescaler divides fCAN by P + 1. Modify the CiCFGL register only in channel reset mode or channel halt mode. Set this register in channel reset mode before making a transition to channel communication mode or channel halt mode. For setting bit timing, see 18.10 Initial Settings. * BRP[9:0] Bits The CANi Tq clock (fCANTQi) is obtained by the CAN clock (fCAN) and setting the clock division ratio with the BRP[9:0] bits and one clock cycle of the CANi Tq clock is 1 Time Quantum (Tq). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1285 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.2 CANi Bit Configuration Register H (CiCFGH) (i = 0) Address C0CFGHL: F0302H, C0CFGHH: F0303H After Reset b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b8 b7 -- -- -- -- -- -- SJW[1:0] -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 10 -- b9 0 b6 0 Bit Name Reserved b5 b4 b3 TSEG2[2:0] 0 b2 b1 b0 TSEG1[3:0] 0 0 0 Description These bits are always read as 0. The write value 0 0 R/W R should always be 0. 9, 8 7 SJW[1:0] -- Resynchronization Jump b9 b8 Width Control 0 0 : 1 Tq 0 1 : 2 Tq 1 0 : 3 Tq 1 1 : 4 Tq Reserved R/W This bit is always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 6 to 4 TSEG2 Time Segment 2 Control [2:0] 3 to 0 TSEG1 Time Segment 1 Control [3:0] b6 b5 R/W b4 0 0 0 : Setting prohibited 0 0 1 : 2 Tq 0 1 0 : 3 Tq 0 1 1 : 4 Tq 1 0 0 : 5 Tq 1 0 1 : 6 Tq 1 1 0 : 7 Tq 1 1 1 : 8 Tq b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 : Setting prohibited 0 0 0 1 : Setting prohibited 0 0 1 0 : Setting prohibited 0 0 1 1 : 4 Tq 0 1 0 0 : 5 Tq 0 1 0 1 : 6 Tq 0 1 1 0 : 7 Tq 0 1 1 1 : 8 Tq 1 0 0 0 : 9 Tq 1 0 0 1 : 10 Tq 1 0 1 0 : 11 Tq 1 0 1 1 : 12 Tq 1 1 0 0 : 13 Tq 1 1 0 1 : 14 Tq 1 1 1 0 : 15 Tq 1 1 1 1 : 16 Tq R/W Modify the CiCFGH register only in channel reset mode or channel halt mode. Set this register in channel reset mode before making a transition to channel communication mode or channel halt mode. For setting bit timing, see 18.10 Initial Settings. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1286 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) * SJW[1:0] Bits These bits are used to specify a Tq value for the resynchronization jump width. A value of 1 Tq to 4 Tq can be set. Set a value equal to or smaller than the value of the TSEG2 bits. * TSEG2[2:0] Bits These bits are used to specify a Tq value for the length of phase buffer segment 2 (PHASE_SEG2). A value of 2 Tq to 8 Tq can be set. Set a value smaller than the value of the TSEG1 bits. * TSEG1[3:0] Bits These bits are used to specify a Tq value for the total length of the propagation time segment (PROP_SEG) and phase buffer segment 1 (PHASE_SEG1). A value of 4 Tq to 16 Tq can be set. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1287 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.3 CANi Control Register L (CiCTRL) (i = 0) Address C0CTRLL: F0304H, C0CTRLH: F0305H b15 b14 ALIE BLIE 0 0 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 OLIE BORIE BOEIE EPIE EWIE b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 BEIE -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 b3 b2 RTBO CSLPR b1 b0 CHMDC [1:0] After Reset Bit Symbol 15 ALIE 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Arbitration Lost Interrupt Enable 0 1 Description 0: Arbitration lost interrupt is disabled. 0 1 R/W R/W 1: Arbitration lost interrupt is enabled. 14 BLIE Bus Lock Interrupt Enable 0: Bus lock interrupt is disabled. R/W 1: Bus lock interrupt is enabled. 13 OLIE 12 BORIE Overload Frame Transmit 0: Overload frame transmit interrupt is disabled. Interrupt Enable 1: Overload frame transmit interrupt is enabled. Bus Off Recovery Interrupt Enable 0: Bus off recovery interrupt is disabled. R/W R/W 1: Bus off recovery interrupt is enabled. 11 BOEIE Bus Off Entry Interrupt Enable 0: Bus off entry interrupt is disabled. R/W 1: Bus off entry interrupt is enabled. 10 EPIE Error Passive Interrupt Enable 0: Error passive interrupt is disabled. R/W 1: Error passive interrupt is enabled. 9 EWIE Error Warning Interrupt Enable 0: Error warning interrupt is disabled. R/W 1: Error warning interrupt is enabled. 8 BEIE Protocol Error Interrupt Enable 0: Protocol error interrupt is disabled. R/W 1: Protocol error interrupt is enabled. 7 to 4 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 3 RTBO Forcible Return from Bus-off When this bit is set to 1, forcible return from the bus off R/W state is made. This bit is always read as 0. 2 CSLPR Channel Stop Mode 0: Other than channel stop mode R/W 1: Channel stop mode 1, 0 CHMDC Mode Select [1:0] b1 b0 R/W 0 0: Channel communication mode 0 1: Channel reset mode 1 0: Channel halt mode 1 1: Setting prohibited * ALIE Bit When the ALF flag in the CiERFLL register is set to 1 with the ALIE bit set to 1, an error interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit only in channel reset mode. * BLIE Bit When the BLF flag in the CiERFLL register is set to 1 with the BLIE bit set to 1, an error interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit only in channel reset mode. * OLIE Bit When the OVLF flag in the CiERFLL register is set to 1 with the OLIE bit set to 1, an error interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit only in channel reset mode. * BORIE Bit When the BORF flag in the CiERFLL register is set to 1 with the BORIE bit set to 1, an error interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit only in channel reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1288 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) * BOEIE Bit When the BOEF flag in the CiERFLL register is set to 1 with the BOEIE bit set to 1, an error interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit only in channel reset mode. * EPIE Bit When the EPF flag in the CiERFLL register is set to 1 with the EPIE bit set to 1, an error interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit only in channel reset mode. * EWIE Bit When the EWF flag in the CiERFLL register is set to 1 with the EWIE bit set to 1, an error interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit only in channel reset mode. * BEIE Bit When the BEF flag in the CiERFLL register is set to 1 with the BEIE bit set to 1, an error interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit only in channel reset mode. * RTBO Bit Setting this bit to 1 (forcible return from the bus off state) in the bus off state forcibly returns the state from the bus off state to the error active state. This bit is automatically cleared to 0. Setting this bit to 1 clears the TEC[7:0] and REC[7:0] bits in the CiSTSH register to H'00 and also clears the BOSTS flag in the CiSTSL register to 0 (not in bus off state). The other registers remain unchanged. No bus off recovery interrupt request due to return from the bus off state is generated. Use this bit only when the BOM[1:0] bits in the CiCTRH register are B'00 (ISO11898-1 compliant). A delay of up to 1 CAN bit time occurs after the RTBO bit is set to 1 until the CAN module transitions to the error active state. Set this bit to 1 in channel communication mode. * CSLPR Bit Setting this bit to 1 places the channel in channel stop mode. Clearing this bit to 0 makes the channel leave from channel stop mode. Do not modify this bit while the CAN channel is in channel communication mode or channel halt mode. * CHMDC[1:0] Bits These bits are used to select a channel mode (channel communication mode, channel reset mode, or channel halt mode). For details, see 18.4.2 Channel Modes. Setting the CSLPR bit to 1 in channel reset mode allows transition to channel stop mode. Do not set the CHMDC[1:0] bits to B'11. When the CAN module has transitioned to channel halt mode depending on the setting of the BOM[1:0] bits, the CHMDC[1:0] bits automatically becomes B'10. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1289 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.4 CANi Control Register H (CiCTRH) (i = 0) Address C0CTRHL: F0306H, C0CTRHH: F0307H After Reset b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 11 -- b10 b9 CTMS[1:0] 0 b8 b7 CTME ERRD 0 0 0 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 BOM[1:0] -- -- -- -- TAIE 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Reserved 0 Description These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R/W R always be 0. 10, 9 8 CTMS[1:0] CTME 7 ERRD Communication Test Mode b10 b9 Select 0 0: Standard test mode 0 1: Listen-only mode 1 0: Self-test mode 0 (external loopback mode) 1 1: Self-test mode 1 (internal loopback mode) R/W Communication Test Mode 0: Communication test mode is disabled. Enable 1: Communication test mode is enabled. Error Display Mode Select 0: Only the first error is indicated after bits 14 to 8 in the R/W R/W CiERFLL register have all been cleared. 1: The error flags of all errors are indicated. 6, 5 BOM[1:0] Bus Off Recovery Mode Select R/W b6 b5 0 0: ISO11898-1 compliant 0 1: Entry to channel halt mode at bus-off entry 1 0: Entry to channel halt mode at bus-off end 1 1: Entry to channel halt mode (in the bus off state) by a program request 4 to 1 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 0 TAIE Transmit Abort Interrupt Enable 0: Transmit abort interrupt is disabled. R/W 1: Transmit abort interrupt is enabled. * CTMS[1:0] Bits These bits are used to select a communication test mode. Modify these bits only in channel halt mode. These bits are set to 0 in channel reset mode. * CTME Bit Setting this bit to 1 enables communication test mode. Modify this bit only in channel halt mode. This bit is set to 0 in channel reset mode. * ERRD Bit This bit is used to control display mode of bits 14 to 8 in the CiERFLL register. When this bit is clear to 0, only the flags of the first error are set to 1. If two or more errors occur first, all the flags of detected errors are set to 1. When this bit is set to 1, all the flags of errors that have occurred are set to 1 regardless of the error occurrence order. Modify this bit only in channel reset mode or channel halt mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1290 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) * BOM[1:0] Bits These bits are used to select a bus off recovery mode of the CAN module. When the BOM[1:0] bits are set to B'00, return to the error active state from the bus off state is compliant with the CAN specifications. That is, the CAN module reenters the CAN communication (error active state) after 11 consecutive recessive bits are detected 128 times. A bus off recovery interrupt request is generated at the time of return from the bus off state. Even if the CHMDC[1:0] bits are set to B'10 (channel halt mode) before recessive bits are detected 128 times, the CAN module does not transition to channel halt mode until recessive bits are detected 128 times. When the CAN module reaches the bus off state while the BOM[1:0] bits are set to B'01, the CHMDC[1:0] bits in the CiCTRL register are set to B'10 and the CAN module transitions to channel halt mode. No bus off recovery interrupt request is generated at the time of return from the bus off state and the TEC[7:0] and REC[7:0] bits in the CiSTSH register are cleared to H'00. When the CAN module reaches the bus off state when the BOM[1:0] bits are set to B'10, the CHMDC[1:0] bits are set to B'10 and the CAN module transitions to channel halt mode after return from the bus off state (11 consecutive recessive bits are detected 128 times). A bus off recovery interrupt request is generated at the time of return from the bus off state and the TEC[7:0] and REC[7:0] bits are cleared to H'00. When the BOM[1:0] bits are set to B'11 and the CHMDC[1:0] bits are set to B'10 while the CAN module is in the bus off state, the CAN module transitions to channel halt mode. No bus off recovery interrupt request is generated at the time of return from the bus off state and the TEC[7:0] and REC[7:0] bits are cleared to H'00. However, if 11 consecutive recessive bits are detected 128 times and the CAN module has recovered to the error active state from the bus off state before the CHMDC[1:0] bits are set to B'10, a bus off recovery interrupt request is generated. If the CPU requests transition to channel reset mode at the same time when the CAN module transitions to channel halt mode (at bus off entry when the BOM[1:0] bits are B'01 or at bus off end when the BOM[1:0] bits are B'10), the CPU's request takes precedence. Modify these bits only in channel reset mode. * TAIE Bit When transmit abort of the transmit buffer is completed with the TAIE bit set to 1, an interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit only in channel reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1291 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.5 CANi Status Register L (CiSTSL) (i = 0) Address C0STSLL: F0308H, C0STSLH: F0309H After Reset Bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- COM REC TRM BO EP CSLP CHLT CRST STS STS STS STS STS STS STS STS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Symbol 15 to 8 -- 7 COMSTS Bit Name Description R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 0. R Communication Status Flag 0: Communication is not ready. R 1: Communication is ready. 6 RECSTS Receive Status Flag 0: Bus idle, in transmission or bus off state R 1: In reception 5 TRMSTS Transmit Status Flag 0: Bus idle or in reception R 1: In transmission or bus off state 4 BOSTS Bus Off Status Flag 0: Not in bus off state R 1: In bus off state 3 EPSTS Error Passive Status Flag 0: Not in error passive state R 1: In error passive state 2 CSLPSTS Channel Stop Status Flag 0: Not in channel stop mode R 1: In channel stop mode 1 CHLTSTS Channel Halt Status Flag 0: Not in channel halt mode R 1: In channel halt mode 0 CRSTSTS Channel Reset Status Flag 0: Not in channel reset mode R 1: In channel reset mode * COMSTS Flag This bit indicates that communication is ready. This flag becomes 1 when the CAN module has detected 11 consecutive recessive bits after it has transitioned from channel reset mode or channel halt mode to channel communication mode. This flag is cleared to 0 in channel reset mode or channel halt mode. * RECSTS Flag This flag is set to 1 when reception has started, and is cleared to 0 when the bus has become idle or transmission has started. * TRMSTS Flag This flag is set to 1 when transmission has started, and is cleared to 0 when the bus has become idle or reception has started. This flag remains 1 in the bus off state. * BOSTS Flag This flag is set to 1 when the CAN module has entered the bus off state (TEC[7:0] value > 255), and is cleared to 0 when the CAN module has exited the bus off state. * EPSTS Flag This flag is set to 1 when the CAN module has entered the error passive state (128 TEC[7:0] value 255 or 128 REC[7:0] value), and is cleared to 0 when the CAN module has exited the error passive state or has entered channel reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1292 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) * CSLPSTS Flag This flag is set to 1 when the CAN module has transitioned to channel stop mode, and is cleared to 0 when the CAN module has returned from channel stop mode. * CHLTSTS Flag This flag is set to 1 when the CAN module has transitioned to channel halt mode, and is cleared to 0 when the CAN module has exited channel halt mode. * CRSTSTS Flag This flag is set to 1 when the CAN module has transitioned to channel reset mode, and is cleared to 0 when the CAN module has transitioned to channel communication mode or channel halt mode. This flag remains 1 even if the CAN module transitions from channel reset mode to channel stop mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1293 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.6 CANi Status Register H (CiSTSH) (i = 0) Address C0STSHL: F030AH, C0STSHH: F030BH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 TEC[7:0] After Reset Bit 0 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 REC[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description 0 0 Counter Value R/W 15 to 8 TEC[7:0] The transmit error counter (TEC) can be read. -- R 7 to 0 REC[7:0] The receive error counter (REC) can be read. -- R * TEC[7:0] Bits These bits indicate the transmit error counter value. For transmit error counter increment/decrement conditions, see the CAN specifications (ISO11898-1). These bits are cleared to 0 in channel reset mode. * REC[7:0] Bits These bits indicate the receive error counter value. For receive error counter increment/decrement conditions, see the CAN specifications (ISO11898-1). These bits are cleared to 0 in channel reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1294 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.7 CANi Error Flag Register L (CiERFLL) (i = 0) Address C0ERFLLL: F030CH, C0ERFLLH: F030DH b15 -- After Reset b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 ADERR B0ERR B1ERR CERR AERR FERR SERR 0 Bit Symbol 15 -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b7 b6 ALF BLF 0 0 Bit Name Reserved b5 b4 b3 OVLF BORF BOEF 0 0 0 b2 b1 b0 EPF EWF BEF 0 0 0 Description This bit is always read as 0. The write value should R/W R always be 0. 14 ADERR ACK Delimiter Error Flag 0: No ACK delimiter error is detected. 1: ACK delimiter error is detected. 13 B0ERR Dominant Bit Error Flag 0: No dominant bit error is detected. 1: Dominant bit error is detected. 12 B1ERR Recessive Bit Error Flag 0: No recessive bit error is detected. 1: Recessive bit error is detected. 11 CERR CRC Error Flag 0: No CRC error is detected. 1: CRC error is detected. 10 AERR ACK Error Flag 0: No ACK error is detected. 1: ACK error is detected. 9 FERR Form Error Flag 0: No form error is detected. 1: Form error is detected. 8 SERR Stuff Error Flag 0: No stuff error is detected. 1: Stuff error is detected. 7 ALF Arbitration Lost Flag 0: No arbitration lost is detected. 1: Arbitration lost is detected. 6 BLF Bus Lock Flag 0: No channel bus lock is detected. 1: Channel bus lock is detected. 5 OVLF Overload Flag 0: No overload is detected. 1: Overload is detected. 4 3 BORF BOEF Bus Off Recovery Flag Bus Off Entry Flag 0: No bus off recovery is detected. EPF Error Passive Flag EWF Error Warning Flag BEF Bus Error Flag <R> R/(W) Note R/(W) Note R/(W) Note R/(W) Note R/(W) Note R/(W) Note R/(W) Note R/(W) Note R/(W) Note 0: No error passive is detected. 0: No error warning is detected. 0: No channel bus error is detected. 1: Channel bus error is detected. Note Note R/(W) 1: Error warning is detected. 0 R/(W) 0: No bus off entry is detected. 1: Error passive is detected. 1 Note 1: Bus off recovery is detected. 1: Bus off entry is detected. 2 R/(W) Note R/(W) Note R/(W) Note R/(W) Note The only effective value for writing to this flag bit is 0, which clears the bit. Otherwise writing to the bit results in retention of its state. To write 0 to this flag bit, write by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction or a 16-bit data transfer instruction. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1295 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) See the CAN specifications (ISO11898-1) if you want to check error occurrence conditions. To clear each flag of this register, write 0 by the program. These flags cannot be set to 1 by the program. If any of these flags is set to 1 at the timing when the program writes 0 to the flag, the flag is set to 1. Each flag is cleared to 0 in channel reset mode. With respect to bits 14 to 8 in the CiERFLL register, if an error is detected with all flags of bits 14 to 8 set to 0 when the ERRD bit in the CiCTRH register is set to 0 (only the first error information is displayed), the corresponding flag is set to 1. * ADERR Flag This flag is set to 1 when a form error has been detected in the ACK delimiter during transmission. * B0ERR Flag This flag is set to 1 when a recessive bit has been detected though a dominant bit was transmitted. * B1ERR Flag This flag is set to 1 when a dominant bit has been detected though a recessive bit was transmitted. * CERR Flag This flag is set to 1 when a CRC error has been detected. * AERR Flag This flag is set to 1 when an ACK error has been detected. * FERR Flag This flag is set to 1 when a form error has been detected. * SERR Flag This flag is set to 1 when a stuff error has been detected. * ALF Flag This flag is set to 1 when an arbitration lost has been detected. * BLF Flag This flag is set to 1 when 32 consecutive dominant bits have been detected on the CAN bus in channel communication mode. After that, detection of the bus lock becomes possible again if either of the following conditions is met. * A recessive bit is detected after the BLF bit has been modified from 1 to 0. * The CAN module transitions to channel reset mode and returns to channel communication mode after the BLF bit has been modified from 1 to 0. * OVLF Flag This flag is set to 1 when the overload frame transmit condition has been detected when performing reception or transmission. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1296 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) * BORF Flag This flag is set to 1 when 11 consecutive recessive bits have been detected 128 times and the CAN module returns from the bus off state. However, this flag is not set to 1 if the CAN module returns from the bus off state in either of the following ways before 11 consecutive recessive bits are detected 128 times. * The CHMDC[1:0] bits in the CiCTRL register are set to B'01 (channel reset mode). * The RTBO bit in the CiCTRL register is set to 1 (forcible return from the bus off state is made). * The BOM[1:0] bits in the CiCTRH register are set to B'01 (transition to channel halt mode at bus off entry). * The CHMDC[1:0] bits in the CiCTRL register are set to B'10 (channel halt mode) before 11 consecutive recessive bits are detected 128 times with the BOM[1:0] bits set to B'11 (transition to channel halt mode upon a request from the program during bus off). * BOEF Flag This flag is set to 1 when the state becomes bus off state (TEC[7:0] value > 255). This flag is also set to 1 when the state becomes bus off state with the BOM[1:0] bits in the CiCTRH register set to B'01 (transition to channel halt mode at bus off entry). * EPF Flag This flag becomes 1 when the CAN module becomes error passive state (REC[7:0] or TEC[7:0] value > 127). This flag becomes 1 only when the REC[7:0] or TEC[7:0] value exceeds 127 for the first time. Therefore, if the program writes 0 to this flag with the REC[7:0] or TEC[7:0] value remaining over 127, this bit is not set to 1 until both REC [7:0] and TEC[7:0] values become 127 or less and then the REC[7:0] or TEC[7:0] value exceeds 127 again. * EWF Flag This flag is set to 1 only when the REC[7:0] or TEC[7:0] value exceeds 95 for the first time. Therefore, if the program writes 0 to this flag with the REC[7:0] or TEC[7:0] value remaining over 95, this bit is not set to 1 until both REC [7:0] and TEC[7:0] values become 95 or less and then the REC[7:0] or TEC[7:0] value exceeds 95 again. * BEF Flag This flag is set to 1 when any one of the ADERR, B0ERR, B1ERR, CERR, AERR, FERR, and SERR flags in the CiERFLL register is set to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1297 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.8 CANi Error Flag Register H (CiERFLH) (i = 0) Address C0ERFLHL: F030EH, C0ERFLHH: F030FH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 -- After Reset 0 Bit Symbol 15 -- b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CRCREG[14:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Reserved 0 0 Description R/W This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always R be 0. 14 to 0 CRCREG CRC Calculation Data [14:0] A CRC value calculated based on the transmit message or R receive message is indicated. * CRCREG[14:0] Bits When the CTME bit in the CiCTRH register is set to 1 (communication test mode is enabled), the CRC value calculated based on the transmit or receive message can be read. When the CTME bit is set to 0 (communication test mode is disabled), these bits are always read as 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1298 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.9 CAN Global Configuration Register L (GCFGL) Address GCFGLL: F0322H, GCFGLH: F0323H After Reset b15 b14 b13 b12 -- -- -- TSSS 0 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to -- b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- DCS MME DRE DCE TPRI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TSP[3:0] 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Reserved 13 Description These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R/W R always be 0. 12 TSSS Timestamp Clock Source Select 0: Clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK by 2 (fCLK/2) R/W 1: CANi bit time clock 11 to 8 7 to 5 TSP[3:0] -- Timestamp Clock Source Division Reserved R/W b11 b10 b9 b8 0 0 0 0 : Not divided 0 0 0 1 : Divided by 2 0 0 1 0 : Divided by 4 0 0 1 1 : Divided by 8 0 1 0 0 : Divided by 16 0 1 0 1 : Divided by 32 0 1 1 0 : Divided by 64 0 1 1 1 : Divided by 128 1 0 0 0 : Divided by 256 1 0 0 1 : Divided by 512 1 0 1 0 : Divided by 1024 1 0 1 1 : Divided by 2048 1 1 0 0 : Divided by 4096 1 1 0 1 : Divided by 8192 1 1 1 0 : Divided by 16384 1 1 1 1 : Divided by 32768 These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 4 DCS CAN Clock Source Select 0: Clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK by 2 (fCLK/2) R/W 1: X1 clock (fx) 3 MME Mirror Function Enable 0: Mirror function is disabled. R/W 1: Mirror function is enabled. 2 DRE DLC Replacement Enable 0: DLC replacement is disabled. R/W 1: DLC replacement is enabled. 1 DCE DLC Check Enable 0: DLC check is disabled. R/W 1: DLC check is enabled. 0 TPRI Transmit Priority Select 0: ID priority R/W 1: Transmit buffer number priority Modify the GCFGL register only in global reset mode. * TSSS Bit This bit is used to select a clock source of the timestamp counter. * TSP[3:0] Bits The clock obtained by dividing the clock source (selected by the TSSS bit) by the TSP[3:0] value is the count source of the timestamp counter. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1299 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) * DCS Bit When this bit is set to 0, the clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK by 2 (fCLK/2) is used as the clock source of the CAN clock (fCAN). When this bit is set to 1, the X1 clock (fx) is used as the clock source of the CAN clock. If the X1 clock (fx) is selected, make the X1 clock (fx) into the value below halfNote1, 2 of fCLK. Notes 1. When the fCLK clock source is high-speed on-chip oscillator or PLL clock sourced high-speed on-chip oscillator, the frequency must be set as "fX < fCLK/2". 2. If the high-speed system clock is to be selected as fCLK, do not select fX as fCAN. * MME Bit Setting this bit to 1 makes the mirror function available. * DRE Bit When the DRE bit is set to 1, the DLC value of the receive rule is stored in the buffer instead of the DLC value of the received message after the DLC value has passed through the DLC filter. In this case, a value of H'00 is stored in the data byte that exceeds the DLC value of the receive rule. When the DCE bit is set to 1 (DLC check is enabled), the DLC replacement function is available. * DCE Bit Setting this bit to 1 makes the DLC check function available. Set the GAFLDLC[3:0] bits in the GAFLPHj register to B'0000 before clearing the DCE bit in the GCFGL register to 0. * TPRI Bit This bit is used to set the transmit priority. When this bit is set to 0, ID priority is selected and the transmit priority complies with the CAN bus arbitration rule (ISO11898-1 specifications). When this bit is set to 1, transmit buffer number priority is selected and the minimum number of transmit buffer specified for transmission takes precedence. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1300 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.10 CAN Global Configuration Register H (GCFGH) Address GCFGHL: F0324H, GCFGHH: F0325H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ITRCP[15:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15-0 ITRCP[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Interval Timer Prescaler Set Description R/W If the set value is M, fCLK/2 is frequency-divided by M. R/W Setting H'0000 is prohibited, when the interval timer is in use. Modify the GCFGH register only in global reset mode. * ITRCP[15:0] Bits These bits are used to set a clock source division value of the interval timer for FIFO buffers. For details, see 18.6.3 (1) Interval Transmission Function. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1301 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.11 CAN Global Control Register L (GCTRL) Address GCTRLL: F0326H, GCTRLH: F0327H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 -- -- -- -- -- THL MEIE DEIE -- -- -- -- -- GS GMDC[1:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EIE After Reset Bit Symbol 15 to -- 0 b0 LPR Bit Name Reserved 11 1 0 1 Description R/W These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 10 THLEIE 9 MEIE Transmit History Buffer Overflow 0: Transmit history buffer overflow interrupt is disabled. Interrupt Enable 1: Transmit history buffer overflow interrupt is enabled. FIFO Message Lost Interrupt Enable 0: FIFO message lost interrupt is disabled. R/W R/W 1: FIFO message lost interrupt is enabled. 8 DEIE DLC Error Interrupt Enable 0: DLC error interrupt is disabled. R/W 1: DLC error interrupt is enabled. 7 to 3 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 2 GSLPR Global Stop Mode 0: Other than global stop mode R/W 1: Global stop mode 1, 0 GMDC[1:0] Global Mode Select R/W b1 b0 0 0 : Global operating mode 0 1 : Global reset mode 1 0 : Global test mode 1 1 : Setting prohibited * THLEIE Bit When the THLEIE bit is set to 1 and the THLES flag in the GERFLL register is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit only in global reset mode. * MEIE Bit When the MEIE bit is set to 1 and the MES flag in the GERFLL register is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit only in global reset mode. * DEIE Bit When the DEIE bit is set to 1 and the DEF flag in the GERFLL register is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit only in global reset mode. * GSLPR Bit Setting this bit to 1 places the CAN module in global stop mode. Clearing this bit to 0 makes the CAN module leave from global stop mode. Do not modify this bit while the CAN channel is in global operating mode or global test mode. * GMDC[1:0] Bits These bits are used to select the mode of entire CAN module (global operating mode, global reset mode, or global test mode). For details, see 18.4.1 Global Modes. Setting the GSLPR bit to 1 in global reset mode places the CAN module in global stop mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1302 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.12 CAN Global Control Register H (GCTRH) Address GCTRHL: F0328H, GCTRHH: F0329H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RST After Reset Bit Symbol 15 to 1 -- Bit Name Reserved 0 Description R/W These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 0 TSRST Timestamp Counter Reset Setting the TSRST bit to 1 resets the timestamp counter. R/W This bit is always read as 0. * TSRST Bit This bit is used to reset the timestamp counter. When this bit is set to 1, the GTSC register is cleared to H'0000. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1303 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.13 CAN Global Status Register (GSTS) Address GSTSL: F032AH, GSTSH: F032BH After Reset Bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol 15 to 4 -- 3 GRAMINIT Bit Name b3 b2 b1 b0 GRAM GSLP GHLT GRST INIT STS STS STS 1 1 0 1 Description R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 0. R CAN RAM Initialization Status Flag 0: CAN RAM initialization is completed. R 1: CAN RAM initialization is ongoing. 2 GSLPSTS Global Stop Status Flag 0: Not in global stop mode R 1: In global stop mode 1 GHLTSTS Global Test Status Flag 0: Not in global test mode R 1: In global test mode 0 GRSTSTS Global Reset Status Flag 0: Not in global reset mode R 1: In global reset mode * GRAMINIT Flag This flag indicates the initialization status of the CAN RAM. This flag is set to 1 after the CAN module is enabled, and is cleared to 0 when CAN RAM initialization is completed. * GSLPSTS Flag This flag is set to 1 when the CAN module has transitioned to global stop mode, and is cleared to 0 when the CAN module has returned from global stop mode. * GHLTSTS Flag This flag is set to 1 when the CAN module has transitioned to global test mode, and is cleared to 0 when the CAN module has exited global test mode. * GRSTSTS Flag This flag is set to 1 when the CAN module has transitioned to global reset mode, and is cleared to 0 when the CAN module has exited global reset mode. This flag remains 1 even when the CAN module has transitioned from global reset mode to global stop mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1304 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.14 CAN Global Error Flag Register (GERFLL) Address GERFLL: F032CH After Reset b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 7 to 3 -- b2 b1 THLES MES 0 0 b0 DEF 0 Bit Name Reserved Description R/W The read value is undefined. The write value should always R be 0. 2 1 THLES MES Transmit History Buffer Overflow 0: No transmit history buffer overflow is present. Status Flag 1: A transmit history buffer overflow is present. FIFO Message Lost Status Flag 0: No FIFO message lost error is present. R R 1: A FIFO message lost error is present. 0 DEF DLC Error Flag 0: No DLC error is present. 1: A DLC error is present. R/(W) Note Note The only effective value for writing to this flag bit is 0, which clears the bit. Otherwise writing to the bit results in <R> retention of its state. To write 0 to this flag bit, write by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction. All flags in the GERFLL register are cleared to 0 in global reset mode. * THLES Flag The THLES flag is set to 1 when the THLELT flag in the THLSTSi register is set to 1. This flag is cleared to 0 when the THLELT flag is set to 0. * MES Flag The MES flag is set to 1 when any one of the RFMLT flags in the RFSTSm register (m = 0, 1) or the CFMLT flag in the CFSTSk register is set to 1. This flag is cleared to 0 when all RFMLT flags and the CFMLT flag are set to 0. * DEF Flag The DEF flag is set to 1 when an error has been detected during the DLC check. This flag can be cleared to 0 by writing 0 by the program. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1305 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.15 CAN Global Transmit Interrupt Status Register (GTINTSTS) Address GTINTSTSL: F0388H, GTINTSTSH: F0389H After Reset b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 4 -- Bit Name Reserved b3 b2 b1 b0 THIF0 CFTIF0 TAIF0 TSIF0 0 0 0 Description 0 R/W The read value is undefined. The write value should R always be 0. 3 THIF0 2 CFTIF0 CANi Transmit History Interrupt 0: No transmit history interrupt request is present. Status Flag 1: A transmit history interrupt request is present. CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO 0: No transmit/receive FIFO transmit interrupt request is Interrupt Status Flag R R present. 1: A transmit/receive FIFO transmit interrupt request is present. 1 TAIF0 0 TSIF0 CANi Transmit Buffer Abort 0: No transmit buffer abort interrupt request is present. Interrupt Status Flag 1: A transmit buffer abort interrupt request is present. CANi Transmit Buffer Interrupt 0: No transmit buffer transmit complete interrupt request is Status Flag R R present. 1: A transmit buffer transmit complete interrupt request is present. All flags in the GTINTSTS register are cleared to 0 in global reset or channel reset mode. * THIF0 Flag The THIF0 flag is set to 1 when the THLIE bit in the THLCCi register is set to 1 (enabling interrupts) and the THLIF flag in the THLSTSi register is set to 1 (interrupt request present). This flag is cleared to 0 when the THLIF flag is set to 0. This flag is also cleared to 0 when the THLIE bit is set to 0. * CFTIF0 Flag The CFTIF0 flag is set to 1 when the CFTXIE bit in the CFCCLk register is set to 1 (enabling interrupts) and the CFTXIF flag in the CFSTSk register is set to 1 (interrupt request present). This flag is cleared to 0 when the CFTXIF flag is set to 0. This flag is also cleared to 0 when the CFTXIE bit is set to 0. * TAIF0 Flag The TAIF0 flag is set to 1 when the TAIE bit in the CiCTRH register is set to 1 (enabling interrupts) and the TMTRF[1:0] flag in the TMSTSp register is set to B'01 (transmit abort has been completed). This flag is cleared to 0 when the TMTRF[1:0] flag, which indicates that the abortion of transmission has been completed, is set to B'00. * TSIF0 Flag The TSIF0 flag is set to 1 when the TMIEp bit in the TMIEC register is set to 1 (enabling interrupts) and the TMTRF[1:0] flag in the corresponding TMSTSp register is set to B'10 (transmission has been completed (without transmit abort request) ) or B'11 (transmission has been completed (with transmit abort request)). This flag is cleared to 0 when all TMTRF[1:0] flags that satisfy a condition for setting the TSIF0 flag to 1 are set to B'00. This flag is also cleared to 0 when the TMIEp bit is set to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1306 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.16 CAN Timestamp Register (GTSC) Address GTSC: F032EH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TS[15:0] After Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Symbol Description Counter Value 15 to 0 TS[15:0] The timestamp counter value can be read. H'0000 to H'FFFF R/W R * TS[15:0] Bits When the TS[15:0] bits are read, the read value shows the timestamp counter (16-bit free-running counter) value at that time. The TS[15:0] value is captured when the SOF is detected and then stored in the receive buffer or the FIFO buffer. The timestamp counter is initialized in global reset mode. The timestamp counter start timing and stop timing depend on the count source. * When the TSSS value in the GCFGL register is 0 (the clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK by 2 (fCLK/2) is selected): The timestamp counter starts counting when the CAN module has transitioned to global operating mode. This counter stops counting when the CAN module has transitioned to global stop mode or global test mode. * When the TSSS value in the GCFGL register is 1 (CANi bit time clock is selected): The timestamp counter starts counting when the corresponding channel has transitioned to channel communication mode. This counter stops counting when the corresponding channel has transitioned to channel reset mode or channel halt mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1307 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.17 CAN Receive Rule Number Configuration Register (GAFLCFG) Address GAFLCFGL: F0330H, GAFLCFGH: F0331H After Reset Bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol 15 to 5 -- 4 to 0 RNC0[4:0] Bit Name b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 RNC0[4:0] 0 0 0 Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. CANi Receive Rule Number Set Set the number of receive rules of channel 0. R/W R R/W Set these bits to a value within a range of H'00 to H'10. Modify the GAFLCFG register only in global reset mode. Up to 16 rules can be registered in the receive rule table. * RNC0[4:0] Bits These bits are used to set the number of rules to be registered in the channel 0 receive rule table. Set these bits to a value within a range of H'00 to H'10. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1308 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.18 CAN Receive Rule Entry Register jAL (GAFLIDLj) (j = 0 to 15) Address GAFLIDL0L: F03A0H, GAFLIDL0H: F03A1H GAFLIDL1L: F03ACH, GAFLIDL1H: F03ADH GAFLIDL2L: F03B8H, GAFLIDL2H: F03B9H GAFLIDL3L: F03C4H, GAFLIDL3H: F03C5H GAFLIDL4L: F03D0H, GAFLIDL4H: F03D1H GAFLIDL5L: F03DCH, GAFLIDL5H: F03DDH GAFLIDL6L: F03E8H, GAFLIDL6H: F03E9H GAFLIDL7L: F03F4H, GAFLIDL7H: F03F5H GAFLIDL8L: F0400H, GAFLIDL8H: F0401H GAFLIDL9L: F040CH, GAFLIDL9H: F040DH GAFLIDL10L: F0418H, GAFLIDL10H: F0419H GAFLIDL11L: F0424H, GAFLIDL11H: F0425H GAFLIDL12L: F0430H, GAFLIDL12H: F0431H GAFLIDL13L: F043CH, GAFLIDL13H: F043DH GAFLIDL14L: F0448H, GAFLIDL14H: F0449H GAFLIDL15L: F0454H, GAFLIDL15H: F0455H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GAFLID[15:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 0 GAFLID[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name ID Set L Description Set the ID of the receive rule. R/W R/W For the standard ID, set the ID in bits 10 to 0 and set bits 15 to 11 to 0. Modify the GAFLIDLj register only when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is set to 0 in global reset mode. * GAFLID[15:0] Bits These bits are used to set the ID field of the receive rule. The ID value set by these bits is compared with the ID in the received message during the acceptance filter processing. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1309 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.19 CAN Receive Rule Entry Register jAH (GAFLIDHj) (j = 0 to 15) Address GAFLIDH0L: F03A2H, GAFLIDH0H: F03A3H GAFLIDH1L: F03AEH, GAFLIDH1H: F03AFH GAFLIDH2L: F03BAH, GAFLIDH2H: F03BBH GAFLIDH3L: F03C6H, GAFLIDH3H: F03C7H GAFLIDH4L: F03D2H, GAFLIDH4H: F03D3H GAFLIDH5L: F03DEH, GAFLIDH5H: F03DFH GAFLIDH6L: F03EAH, GAFLIDH6H: F03EBH GAFLIDH7L: F03F6H, GAFLIDH7H: F03F7H GAFLIDH8L: F0402H, GAFLIDH8H: F0403H GAFLIDH9L: F040EH, GAFLIDH9H: F040FH GAFLIDH10L: F041AH, GAFLIDH10H: F041BH GAFLIDH11L: F0426H, GAFLIDH11H: F0427H GAFLIDH12L: F0432H, GAFLIDH12H: F0433H GAFLIDH13L: F043EH, GAFLIDH13H: F043FH GAFLIDH14L: F044AH, GAFLIDH14H: F044BH GAFLIDH15L: F0456H, GAFLIDH15H: F0457H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 GAFL GAFL GAFL After Reset IDE RTR LB 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 GAFLIDE b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 GAFLID[28:16] 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name IDE Select 0 0 Description 0: Standard ID R/W R/W 1: Extended ID 14 GAFLRTR RTR Select 0: Data frame R/W 1: Remote frame 13 GAFLLB Receive Rule Target Message Select 0: When a message transmitted from another CAN node R/W is received 1: When a message transmitted from own node is received 12 to 0 GAFLID[28:16] ID Set H Set the ID of the receive rule. R/W For the standard ID, set these bits to 0. Modify the GAFLIDHj register only when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is set to 0 in global reset mode. * GAFLIDE Bit This bit is used to select the ID format (standard ID or extended ID) of the receive rule. This bit is compared with the IDE bit in the received message during the acceptance filter processing. * GAFLRTR Bit This bit is used to select the frame format (data frame or remote frame) of the receive rule. This bit is compared with the RTR bit in the received message during the acceptance filter processing. * GAFLLB Bit When this bit is set to 0, data processing using the receive rule is performed when receiving messages transmitted from another CAN node. When this bit is set to 1 when the mirror function is used, data processing using the receive rule is performed when receiving messages transmitted from the own CAN node. * GAFLID[28:16] Bits These bits are used to set the ID field of the receive rule. The ID value set by these bits is compared with the ID in the received message during the acceptance filter processing. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1310 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.20 CAN Receive Rule Entry Register jBL (GAFLMLj) (j = 0 to 15) Address GAFLML0L: F03A4H, GAFLML0H: F03A5H GAFLML1L: F03B0H, GAFLML1H: F03B1H GAFLML2L: F03BCH, GAFLML2H: F03BDH GAFLML3L: F03C8H, GAFLML3H: F03C9H GAFLML4L: F03D4H, GAFLML4H: F03D5H GAFLML5L: F03E0H, GAFLML5H: F03E1H GAFLML6L: F03ECH, GAFLML6H: F03EDH GAFLML7L: F03F8H, GAFLML7H: F03F9H GAFLML8L: F0404H, GAFLML8H: F0405H GAFLML9L: F0410H, GAFLML9H: F0411H GAFLML10L: F041CH, GAFLML10H: F041DH GAFLML11L: F0428H, GAFLML11H: F0429H GAFLML12L: F0434H, GAFLML12H: F0435H GAFLML13L: F0440H, GAFLML13H: F0441H GAFLML14L: F044CH, GAFLML14H: F044DH GAFLML15L: F0458H, GAFLML15H: F0459H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GAFLIDM[15:0] After Reset 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 0 GAFLIDM 0 0 0 0 Bit Name ID Mask L [15:0] 0 0 0 0 Description 0: The corresponding ID bit is not compared. R/W R/W 1: The corresponding ID bit is compared. Modify the GAFLMLj register only when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is set to 0 in global reset mode. * GAFLIDM[15:0] Bits These bits are used to mask the corresponding ID bit of the receive rule. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1311 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.21 CAN Receive Rule Entry Register jBH (GAFLMHj) (j = 0 to 15) Address GAFLMH0L: F03A6H, GAFLMH0H: F03A7H GAFLMH1L: F03B2H, GAFLMH1H: F03B3H GAFLMH2L: F03BEH, GAFLMH2H: F03BFH GAFLMH3L: F03CAH, GAFLMH3H: F03CBH GAFLMH4L: F03D6H, GAFLMH4H: F03D7H GAFLMH5L: F03E2H, GAFLMH5H: F03E3H GAFLMH6L: F03EEH, GAFLMH6H: F03EFH GAFLMH7L: F03FAH, GAFLMH7H: F03FBH GAFLMH8L: F0406H, GAFLMH8H: F0407H GAFLMH9L: F0412H, GAFLMH9H: F0413H GAFLMH10L: F041EH, GAFLMH10H: F041FH GAFLMH11L: F042AH, GAFLMH11H: F042BH GAFLMH12L: F0436H, GAFLMH12H: F0437H GAFLMH13L: F0442H, GAFLMH13H: F0443H GAFLMH14L: F044EH, GAFLMH14H: F044FH GAFLMH15L: F045AH, GAFLMH15H: F045BH b15 b14 b13 GAFL GAFL b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 -- b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 GAFLIDM[28:16] IDEM RTRM After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 GAFLIDEM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name IDE Mask 0 0 Description 0: The IDE bit is not compared. R/W R/W 1: The IDE bit is compared. 14 GAFLRTRM RTR Mask 0: The RTR bit is not compared. R/W 1: The RTR bit is compared 13 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 12 to 0 GAFLIDM ID Mask H [28:16] 0: The corresponding ID bit is not compared. R/W 1: The corresponding ID bit is compared. Modify the GAFLMHj register only when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is set to 0 in global reset mode. * GAFLIDEM Bit When this bit is set to 1, filter processing is performed only for messages of the ID format specified by the GAFLIDE bit in the GAFLIDHj register. When this bit is set to 0, it is regarded that all received messages have matched the specified ID format. To set the GAFLIDEM bit to 0, set the GAFLIDM[28:16] bits in the GAFLMHj register and the GAFLIDM[15:0] bits in the GAFLMLj register to all 0 at the same time. * GAFLRTRM Bit This bit is used to mask the RTR bit of the receive rule. * GAFLIDM[28:16] Bits These bits are used to mask the corresponding ID bit of the receive rule. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1312 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.22 CAN Receive Rule Entry Register jCL (GAFLPLj) (j = 0 to 15) Address GAFLPL0L: F03A8H, GAFLPL0H: F03A9H GAFLPL1L: F03B4H, GAFLPL1H: F03B5H GAFLPL2L: F03C0H, GAFLPL2H: F03C1H GAFLPL3L: F03CCH, GAFLPL3H: F03CDH GAFLPL4L: F03D8H, GAFLPL4H: F03D9H GAFLPL5L: F03E4H, GAFLPL5H: F03E5H GAFLPL6L: F03F0H, GAFLPL6H: F03F1H GAFLPL7L: F03FCH, GAFLPL7H: F03FDH GAFLPL8L: F0408H, GAFLPL8H: F0409H GAFLPL9L: F0414H, GAFLPL9H: F0415H GAFLPL10L: F0420H, GAFLPL10H: F0421H GAFLPL11L: F042CH, GAFLPL11H: F042DH GAFLPL12L: F0438H, GAFLPL12H: F0439H GAFLPL13L: F0444H, GAFLPL13H: F0445H GAFLPL14L: F0450H, GAFLPL14H: F0451H GAFLPL15L: F045CH, GAFLPL15H: F045DH b15 b14 b13 GAFL b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 GAFLRMDP[6:0] b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 -- -- -- GAFL -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 RMV After Reset 0 Bit Symbol 15 GAFLRMV FDP4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Receive Buffer Enable 0 b1 b0 GAFL GAFL FDP1 FDP0 0 Description 0: No receive buffer is used. 0 R/W R/W 1: A receive buffer is used. 14 to 8 GAFLRMDP Receive Buffer Number Select [6:0] 7 to 5 -- Set the receive buffer number to store receive R/W messages. Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 4 3, 2 GAFLFDP4 -- CAN0 Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer 0: Not select a CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO buffer 0 Select 0 1: Select a CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO buffer 0 Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R/W R always be 0. 1 GAFLFDP1 Receive FIFO Buffer Select 1 0: Not select a receive FIFO buffer 1 R/W 1: Select a receive FIFO buffer 1 0 GAFLFDP0 Receive FIFO Buffer Select 0 0: Not select a receive FIFO buffer 0 R/W 1: Select a receive FIFO buffer 0 Modify the GAFLPLj register only when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is set to 0 in global reset mode. * GAFLRMV Bit When this bit is set to 1, receive messages that have passed through the filter are stored in the receive buffer selected by the GAFLRMDP[6:0] bits. * GAFLRMDP[6:0] Bits These bits are used to select the number of the receive buffer that stores receive messages that have passed through the filter when the GAFLRMV bit is set to 1. Set these bits to a value smaller than the value set by the NRXMB[4:0] bits in the RMNB register. * GAFLFDP4, GAFLFDP1, and GAFLFDP0 Bits These bits are used to specify FIFO buffers that store receive messages that have passed through the filter. Up to two FIFO buffers are selectable. However, when the GAFLRMV bit in the GAFLPLj register is set to 1 (a receive buffer is used), up to one FIFO buffer is selectable. Only receive FIFO buffers and the transmit/receive FIFO buffer for which the CFM[1:0] bits in the CFCCHk register are set to B'00 (receive mode) are selectable. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1313 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.23 CAN Receive Rule Entry Register jCH (GAFLPHj) (j = 0 to 15) Address GAFLPH0L: F03AAH, GAFLPH0H: F03ABH GAFLPH1L: F03B6H, GAFLPH1H: F03B7H GAFLPH2L: F03C2H, GAFLPH2H: F03C3H GAFLPH3L: F03CEH, GAFLPH3H: F03CFH GAFLPH4L: F03DAH, GAFLPH4H: F03DBH GAFLPH5L: F03E6H, GAFLPH5H: F03E7H GAFLPH6L: F03F2H, GAFLPH6H: F03F3H GAFLPH7L: F03FEH, GAFLPH7H: F03FFH GAFLPH8L: F040AH, GAFLPH8H: F040BH GAFLPH9L: F0416H, GAFLPH9H: F0417H GAFLPH10L: F0422H, GAFLPH10H: F0423H GAFLPH11L: F042EH, GAFLPH11H: F042FH GAFLPH12L: F043AH, GAFLPH12H: F043BH GAFLPH13L: F0446H, GAFLPH13H: F0447H GAFLPH14L: F0452H, GAFLPH14H: F0453H GAFLPH15L: F045EH, GAFLPH15H: F045FH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 GAFLDLC[3:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 12 GAFLDLC 0 0 0 0 GAFLPTR 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Receive Rule DLC [3:0] 11 to 0 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 GAFLPTR[11:0] Receive Rule Label 0 Description R/W R/W b15 b14 b13 b12 0 0 0 0 : DLC check is disabled. 0 0 0 1 : 1 data byte 0 0 1 0 : 2 data bytes 0 0 1 1 : 3 data bytes 0 1 0 0 : 4 data bytes 0 1 0 1 : 5 data bytes 0 1 1 0 : 6 data bytes 0 1 1 1 : 7 data bytes 1 X X X : 8 data bytes Set the 12-bit label information. R/W [11:0] Modify the GAFLPHj register only when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is set to 0 in global reset mode. * GAFLDLC[3:0] Bits These bits are used to set the minimum data length necessary for receiving messages. If the data length of a message that is being filtered is equal to or larger than the value set by the GAFLDLC[3:0] bits, the message passes the DLC check. Setting these bits to B'0000 disables the DLC check function allowing messages with any data length to pass the DLC check. * GAFLPTR [11:0] Bits These bits are used to set a 12-bit label to be attached to messages that have passed through the filter. A label is attached when a message is stored in the receive buffer or the FIFO buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1314 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.24 CAN Receive Buffer Number Configuration Register (RMNB) Address RMNBL: F0332H After Reset b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 5 -- Bit Name Reserved b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 NRXMB[4:0] 0 0 0 Description These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R/W R always be 0. 4 to 0 NRXMB[4:0] Receive Buffer Number Set the number of receive buffers. Configuration Set a value of 0 to 16. R/W Modify the RMNB register only in global reset mode. * NRXMB[4:0] Bits These bits are used to set the total number of receive buffers of the CAN module. The maximum value is 16. Setting these bits to all 0 makes receive buffers unavailable. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1315 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.25 CAN Receive Buffer Receive Complete Flag Register (RMND0) Address RMND0L: F0334H, RMND0H: F0335H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RMNS[15:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 0 RMNS[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Receive Buffer Receive Complete Flag n Description 0: Receive buffer n contains no new message (n = 0 to R/W R/W 15). 1: Receive buffer n contains a new message. Write 0 to the RMND0 register in global operating mode or global test mode. * RMNS[15:0] Flags Each RMNS flag is set to 1 when the processing for storing a message in the corresponding receive buffer starts. To clear these flags to 0, write 0 to the corresponding flag by the program. In this case, write 0 to bits to be cleared and write 1 to other bits by using an 8-bit or 16-bit data transfer instruction. These bits cannot be set to 0 while a message is being stored. It takes time of ten clock cycles of fCLK for storing a message. These flags are cleared to 0 in global reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1316 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.26 CAN Receive Buffer Register nAL (RMIDLn) (n = 0 to 15) Address RMIDL0L: F03A0H, RMIDL0H: F03A1H RMIDL1L: F03B0H, RMIDL1H: F03B1H RMIDL2L: F03C0H, RMIDL2H: F03C1H RMIDL3L: F03D0H, RMIDL3H: F03D1H RMIDL4L: F03E0H, RMIDL4H: F03E1H RMIDL5L: F03F0H, RMIDL5H: F03F1H RMIDL6L: F0400H, RMIDL6H: F0401H RMIDL7L: F0410H, RMIDL7H: F0411H RMIDL8L: F0420H, RMIDL8H: F0421H RMIDL9L: F0430H, RMIDL9H: F0431H RMIDL10L: F0440H, RMIDL10H: F0441H RMIDL11L: F0450H, RMIDL11H: F0451H RMIDL12L: F0460H, RMIDL12H: F0461H RMIDL13L: F0470H, RMIDL13H: F0471H RMIDL14L: F0480H, RMIDL14H: F0481H RMIDL15L: F0490H, RMIDL15H: F0491H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RMID[15:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 0 RMID[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Receive Buffer ID Data L Description The standard ID or extended ID of received message can R/W R be read. Read bits 10 to 0 for standard ID. Bits 15 to 11 are read as 0. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * RMID[15:0] Bits These bits indicate the ID of the message stored in the receive buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1317 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.27 CAN Receive Buffer Register nAH (RMIDHn) (n = 0 to 15) Address RMIDH0L: F03A2H, RMIDH0H: F03A3H RMIDH1L: F03B2H, RMIDH1H: F03B3H RMIDH2L: F03C2H, RMIDH2H: F03C3H RMIDH3L: F03D2H, RMIDH3H: F03D3H RMIDH4L: F03E2H, RMIDH4H: F03E3H RMIDH5L: F03F2H, RMIDH5H: F03F3H RMIDH6L: F0402H, RMIDH6H: F0403H RMIDH7L: F0412H, RMIDH7H: F0413H RMIDH8L: F0422H, RMIDH8H: F0423H RMIDH9L: F0432H, RMIDH9H: F0433H RMIDH10L: F0442H, RMIDH10H: F0443H RMIDH11L: F0452H, RMIDH11H: F0453H RMIDH12L: F0462H, RMIDH12H: F0463H RMIDH13L: F0472H, RMIDH13H: F0473H RMIDH14L: F0482H, RMIDH14H: F0483H After Reset b15 b14 b13 RM RM -- IDE RTR 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 RMIDE 0 b12 b11 RMIDH15L: F0492H, RMIDH15H: F0493H b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RMID[28:16] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Receive Buffer IDE Description 0: Standard ID R/W R 1: Extended ID 14 RMRTR Receive Buffer RTR 0: Data frame R 1: Remote frame 13 -- 12 to 0 RMID[28:16] Reserved This bit is always read as 0. R Receive Buffer ID Data H The standard ID or extended ID of received message can R be read. For standard ID, these bits are read as 0. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * RMIDE Bit This bit indicates the ID format (standard ID or extended ID) of the message stored in the receive buffer. * RMRTR Bit This bit indicates the frame format (data frame or remote frame) of the message stored in the receive buffer. * RMID[28:16] Bits These bits indicate the ID of the message stored in the receive buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1318 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.28 CAN Receive Buffer Register nBL (RMTSn) (n = 0 to 15) Address RMTS0L: F03A4H, RMTS0H: F03A5H RMTS1L: F03B4H, RMTS1H: F03B5H RMTS2L: F03C4H, RMTS2H: F03C5H RMTS3L: F03D4H, RMTS3H: F03D5H RMTS4L: F03E4H, RMTS4H: F03E5H RMTS5L: F03F4H, RMTS5H: F03F5H RMTS6L: F0404H, RMTS6H: F0405H RMTS7L: F0414H, RMTS7H: F0415H RMTS8L: F0424H, RMTS8H: F0425H RMTS9L: F0434H, RMTS9H: F0435H RMTS10L: F0444H, RMTS10H: F0445H RMTS11L: F0454H, RMTS11H: F0455H RMTS12L: F0464H, RMTS12H: F0465H RMTS13L: F0474H, RMTS13H: F0475H RMTS14L: F0484H, RMTS14H: F0485H RMTS15L: F0494H, RMTS15H: F0495H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RMTS[15:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 0 RMTS[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Receive Buffer Timestamp Data Description Timestamp value of the received message can be read. R/W R This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * RMTS[15:0] Bits These bits indicate the timestamp value of the message stored in the receive buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1319 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.29 CAN Receive Buffer Register nBH (RMPTRn) (n = 0 to 15) Address RMPTR0L: F03A6H, RMPTR0H: F03A7H RMPTR1L: F03B6H, RMPTR1H: F03B7H RMPTR2L: F03C6H, RMPTR2H: F03C7H RMPTR3L: F03D6H, RMPTR3H: F03D7H RMPTR4L: F03E6H, RMPTR4H: F03E7H RMPTR5L: F03F6H, RMPTR5H: F03F7H RMPTR6L: F0406H, RMPTR6H: F0407H RMPTR7L: F0416H, RMPTR7H: F0417H RMPTR8L: F0426H, RMPTR8H: F0427H RMPTR9L: F0436H, RMPTR9H: F0437H RMPTR10L: F0446H, RMPTR10H: F0447H RMPTR11L: F0456H, RMPTR11H: F0457H RMPTR12L: F0466H, RMPTR12H: F0467H RMPTR13L: F0476H, RMPTR13H: F0477H RMPTR14L: F0486H, RMPTR14H: F0487H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 RMPTR15L: F0496H, RMPTR15H: F0497H b10 b9 b8 b7 RMDLC[3:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 12 RMDLC[3:0] 11 to 0 RMPTR 0 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 RMPTR[11:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Receive Buffer DLC Data Receive Buffer Label Data 0 Description R/W R b15 b14 b13 b12 0 0 0 0 : 0 data bytes 0 0 0 1 : 1 data byte 0 0 1 0 : 2 data bytes 0 0 1 1 : 3 data bytes 0 1 0 0 : 4 data bytes 0 1 0 1 : 5 data bytes 0 1 1 0 : 6 data bytes 0 1 1 1 : 7 data bytes 1 X X X : 8 data bytes Label information of the received message can be read. R [11:0] This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * RMDLC[3:0] Bits These bits indicate the data length of the message stored in the receive buffer. * RMPTR[11:0] Bits These bits indicate the label information of the message stored in the receive buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1320 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.30 CAN Receive Buffer Register nCL (RMDF0n) (n = 0 to 15) Address RMDF00L: F03A8H, RMDF00H: F03A9H RMDF01L: F03B8H, RMDF01H: F03B9H RMDF02L: F03C8H, RMDF02H: F03C9H RMDF03L: F03D8H, RMDF03H: F03D9H RMDF04L: F03E8H, RMDF04H: F03E9H RMDF05L: F03F8H, RMDF05H: F03F9H RMDF06L: F0408H, RMDF06H: F0409H RMDF07L: F0418H, RMDF07H: F0419H RMDF08L: F0428H, RMDF08H: F0429H RMDF09L: F0438H, RMDF09H: F0439H RMDF010L: F0448H, RMDF010H: F0449H RMDF011L: F0458H, RMDF011H: F0459H RMDF012L: F0468H, RMDF012H: F0469H RMDF013L: F0478H, RMDF013H: F0479H RMDF014L: F0488H, RMDF014H: F0489H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 RMDF015L: F0498H, RMDF015H: F0499H b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 RMDB1[7:0] After Reset 0 Bit 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 RMDB0[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 Description R/W 15 to 8 RMDB1[7:0] Receive Buffer Data Byte 1 Data in the message stored in the receive buffer can be R 7 to 0 RMDB0[7:0] Receive Buffer Data Byte 0 read. R When the RMDLC[3:0] value in the RMPTRn register is smaller than B'1000, data bytes for which no data is set are read as H'00. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1321 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.31 CAN Receive Buffer Register nCH (RMDF1n) (n = 0 to 15) Address RMDF10L: F03AAH, RMDF10H: F03ABH RMDF11L: F03BAH, RMDF11H: F03BBH RMDF12L: F03CAH, RMDF12H: F03CBH RMDF13L: F03DAH, RMDF13H: F03DBH RMDF14L: F03EAH, RMDF14H: F03EBH RMDF15L: F03FAH, RMDF15H: F03FBH RMDF16L: F040AH, RMDF16H: F040BH RMDF17L: F041AH, RMDF17H: F041BH RMDF18L: F042AH, RMDF18H: F042BH RMDF19L: F043AH, RMDF19H: F043BH RMDF110L: F044AH, RMDF110H: F044BH RMDF111L: F045AH, RMDF111H: F045BH RMDF112L: F046AH, RMDF112H: F046BH RMDF113L: F047AH, RMDF113H: F047BH RMDF114L: F048AH, RMDF114H: F048BH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 RMDF115L: F049AH, RMDF115H: F049BH b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 RMDB3[7:0] After Reset 0 Bit 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 RMDB2[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 Description R/W 15 to 8 RMDB3[7:0] Receive Buffer Data Byte 3 Data in the message stored in the receive buffer can be R 7 to 0 RMDB2[7:0] Receive Buffer Data Byte 2 read. R When the RMDLC[3:0] value in the RMTPRn register is smaller than B'1000, data bytes for which no data is set are read as H'00. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1322 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.32 CAN Receive Buffer Register nDL (RMDF2n) (n = 0 to 15) Address RMDF20L: F03ACH, RMDF20H: F03ADH RMDF21L: F03BCH, RMDF21H: F03BDH RMDF22L: F03CCH, RMDF22H: F03CDH RMDF23L: F03DCH, RMDF23H: F03DDH RMDF24L: F03ECH, RMDF24H: F03EDH RMDF25L: F03FCH, RMDF25H: F03FDH RMDF26L: F040CH, RMDF26H: F040DH RMDF27L: F041CH, RMDF27H: F041DH RMDF28L: F042CH, RMDF28H: F042DH RMDF29L: F043CH, RMDF29H: F043DH RMDF210L: F044CH, RMDF210H: F044DH RMDF211L: F045CH, RMDF211H: F045DH RMDF212L: F046CH, RMDF212H: F046DH RMDF213L: F047CH, RMDF213H: F047DH RMDF214L: F048CH, RMDF214H: F048DH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 RMDF215L: F049CH, RMDF215H: F049DH b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 RMDB5[7:0] After Reset 0 Bit 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 RMDB4[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 Description R/W 15 to 8 RMDB5[7:0] Receive Buffer Data Byte 5 Data in the message stored in the receive buffer can be R 7 to 0 RMDB4[7:0] Receive Buffer Data Byte 4 read. R When the RMDLC[3:0] value in the RMPTRn register is smaller than B'1000, data bytes for which no data is set are read as H'00. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1323 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.33 CAN Receive Buffer Register nDH (RMDF3n) (n = 0 to 15) Address RMDF30L: F03AEH, RMDF30H: F03AFH RMDF31L: F03BEH, RMDF31H: F03BFH RMDF32L: F03CEH, RMDF32H: F03CFH RMDF33L: F03DEH, RMDF33H: F03DFH RMDF34L: F03EEH, RMDF34H: F03EFH RMDF35L: F03FEH, RMDF35H: F03FFH RMDF36L: F040EH, RMDF36H: F040FH RMDF37L: F041EH, RMDF37H: F041FH RMDF38L: F042EH, RMDF38H: F042FH RMDF39L: F043EH, RMDF39H: F043FH RMDF310L: F044EH, RMDF310H: F044FH RMDF311L: F045EH, RMDF311H: F045FH RMDF312L: F046EH, RMDF312H: F046FH RMDF313L: F047EH, RMDF313H: F047FH RMDF314L: F048EH, RMDF314H: F048FH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 RMDF315L: F049EH, RMDF315H: F049FH b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 RMDB7[7:0] After Reset 0 Bit 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 RMDB6[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 Description R/W 15 to 8 RMDB7[7:0] Receive Buffer Data Byte 7 Data in the message stored in the receive buffer can be R 7 to 0 RMDB6[7:0] Receive Buffer Data Byte 6 read. R When the RMDLC[3:0] value in the RMPTRn register is smaller than B'1000, data bytes for which no data is set are read as H'00. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1324 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.34 CAN Receive FIFO Control Register m (RFCCm) (m = 0, 1) Address RFCC0L: F0338H, RFCC0H: F0339H RFCC1L: F033AH, RFCC1H: F033BH b15 b14 b13 RFIGCV[2:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to RFIGCV[2:0] 13 12 RFIM b12 b11 RFIM -- 0 0 0 b10 b9 b8 RFDC[2:0] 0 0 0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- RFIE RFE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Description Receive FIFO Interrupt b15 b14 b13 Request 0 0 0 : When FIFO is 1/8 full. Timing Select 0 0 1 : When FIFO is 2/8 full. 0 1 0 : When FIFO is 3/8 full. 0 1 1 : When FIFO is 4/8 full. 1 0 0 : When FIFO is 5/8 full. 1 0 1 : When FIFO is 6/8 full. 1 1 0 : When FIFO is 7/8 full. 1 1 1 : When FIFO is full. Receive FIFO Interrupt Source R/W 0: An interrupt occurs when the condition set by the Select R/W R/W RFIGCV[2:0] bits is met. 1: An interrupt occurs each time a message has been received. 11 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should always be R 0. 10 to 8 7 to 2 RFDC[2:0] -- Receive FIFO Buffer Depth b10 b9 b8 Configuration 0 0 0 : 0 messages 0 0 1 : 4 messages 0 1 0 : 8 messages 0 1 1 : 16 messages 1 0 0 : Setting prohibited 1 0 1 : Setting prohibited 1 1 0 : Setting prohibited 1 1 1 : Setting prohibited Reserved R/W These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 1 RFIE Receive FIFO Interrupt Enable 0: Receive FIFO interrupt is disabled. R/W 1: Receive FIFO interrupt is enabled. 0 RFE Receive FIFO Buffer Enable 0: No receive FIFO buffer is used. R/W 1: Receive FIFO buffers are used. * RFIGCV[2:0] Bits These bits are used to specify the fraction of the transmit/receive FIFO buffer (the number of messages is selected by the setting of the RFDC[2:0] bits) that must be filled for the FIFO buffer to generate a receive interrupt request when the RFIM bit is set to 0. When the RFDC[2:0] bits are set to B'001 (4 messages), set the RFIGCV[2:0] bits to B'001, B'011, B'101, or B'111. Modify these bits only in global reset mode. * RFIM Bit This bit is used to select a FIFO interrupt source. Modify this bit only in global reset mode. * RFDC[2:0] Bits These bits are used to select the number of messages that can be stored in a single receive FIFO buffer. If these bits are set to B'000, do not use any receive FIFO buffer. Modify these bits only in global reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1325 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) * RFIE Bit Setting the RFIE bit to 1 enables receive FIFO interrupts. Modify this bit when the RFE bit is set to 0 (no receive FIFO buffer is used). * RFE Bit Setting the RFE bit to 1 makes receive FIFO buffers available. Clearing this bit to 0 sets the RFEMP flag in the RFSTSm register to 1 (the receive FIFO buffer contains no unread message (buffer empty)). Modify this bit only in global operating mode or global test mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1326 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.35 CAN Receive FIFO Status Register m (RFSTSm) (m = 0, 1) Address RFSTS0L: F0340H, RFSTS0H: F0341H RFSTS1L: F0342H, RFSTS1H: F0343H After Reset b15 b14 -- -- 0 0 Bit Symbol 15, 14 -- b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 RFMC[5:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 b7 b6 b5 b4 -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Reserved b3 b2 b1 b0 RFIF RFMLT RFFLL RFEMP 0 0 Description 0 1 R/W These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 13 to 8 7 to 4 RFMC[5:0] -- Receive FIFO Unread The number of unread messages stored in the receive FIFO Message Counter buffer is displayed. Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R R always be 0. 3 RFIF 2 RFMLT 1 0 RFFLL RFEMP Receive FIFO Interrupt 0: No receive FIFO interrupt request is present. Request Flag 1: A receive FIFO interrupt request is present. Receive FIFO Message Lost 0: No receive FIFO message is lost. Flag 1: A receive FIFO message is lost. Receive FIFO Buffer Full 0: The receive FIFO buffer is not full. Status Flag 1: The receive FIFO buffer is full. Receive FIFO Buffer Empty 0: The receive FIFO buffer contains unread messages. Status Flag 1: The receive FIFO buffer contains no unread message R/(W)Note R/(W)Note R R (buffer empty). <R> Note The only effective value for writing to this flag bit is 0, which clears the bit. Otherwise writing to the bit results in retention of its state. To write 0 to this flag bit, write by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction or a 16-bit data transfer instruction. * RFMC[5:0] Flag This flag indicates the number of unread messages in the receive FIFO buffer. This flag becomes H'00 when the RFE bit in the RFCCm register is set to 0. * RFIF Flag This flag is set to 1 when the receive FIFO interrupt request generation conditions set by the RFIGCV[2:0] bits and the RFIM bit in the RFCCm register are met. This flag is cleared to 0 in global reset mode or by writing 0 to this flag. Modify this bit only in global operating mode or global test mode. * RFMLT Flag This flag is set to 1 when it is attempted to store a new message while the receive FIFO buffer is full. In this case, the new message is discarded. This flag is cleared to 0 in global reset mode or by writing 0 to this flag. Modify this bit only in global operating mode or global test mode. * RFFLL Flag This flag is set to 1 when the number of messages stored in the receive FIFO buffer matches the FIFO buffer depth set by the RFDC[2:0] bits in the RFCCm register. If the number of messages stored in the receive FIFO buffer becomes smaller than the FIFO buffer depth set by the RFDC[2:0] bits, this flag is cleared to 0. This flag is also cleared to 0 when the RFE bit in the RFCCm register is set to 0 (no receive FIFO buffer is used) or in global reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1327 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) * RFEMP Flag This flag is set to 1 when all messages in the receive FIFO buffer have been read. This flag is also set to 1 when the RFE bit in the RFCCm register is 0 or in global reset mode. This flag is cleared to 0 when even a single received message has been stored in the receive FIFO buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1328 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.36 CAN Receive FIFO Pointer Control Register m (RFPCTRm) (m = 0, 1) Address RFPCTR0L: F0348H, RFPCTR0H: F0349H RFPCTR1L: F034AH, RFPCTR1H: F034BH After Reset Bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol 15 to 8 -- 7 to 0 RFPC[7:0] Bit Name b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 RFPC[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Description R/W Reserved The write value should always be 0. R Receive FIFO Pointer When these bits are set to H'FF, the read pointer moves to W the next unread message in the receive FIFO buffer. The setting for these bits must be H'FF. * RFPC[7:0] Bits When the RFPC[7:0] bits are set to H'FF, the read pointer moves to the next unread message in the receive FIFO buffer. At this time, the RFMC[5:0] (receive FIFO unread message counter) value in the RFSTSm register is decremented. Read the RFIDLm, RFIDHm, RFTSm, RFPTRm, and RFDF0m to RFDF3m registers to read messages in the receive FIFO buffer, and then write H'FF to the RFPC[7:0] bits. Write H'FF to these bits when the RFE bit in the RFCCm register is set to 1 (receive FIFO buffers are used) and the RFEMP flag in the RFSTSm register is 0 (the receive FIFO buffer contains unread messages). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1329 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.37 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mAL (RFIDLm) (m = 0, 1) Address RFIDL0L: F05A0H, RFIDL0H: F05A1H RFIDL1L: F05B0H, RFIDL1H: F05B1H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RFID[15:0] After Reset 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 0 RFID[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Receive FIFO Buffer ID Data L Description The standard ID or extended ID of received message can be R/W R read. Read bits 10 to 0 for standard ID. Bits 15 to 11 are read as 0. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * RFID[15:0] Bits These bits indicate the ID of the message stored in the receive FIFO buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1330 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.38 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mAH (RFIDHm) (m = 0, 1) Address RFIDH0L: F05A2H, RFIDH0H: F05A3H RFIDH1L: F05B2H, RFIDH1H: F05B3H b15 b14 b13 RFIDE RFRTR -- 0 0 0 After Reset Bit Symbol 15 RFIDE b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 RFID[28:16] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Receive FIFO Buffer IDE 0 Description 0: Standard ID R/W R 1: Extended ID 14 RFRTR Receive FIFO Buffer RTR 0: Data frame R 1: Remote frame 13 -- 12 to 0 RFID[28:16] Reserved This bit is always read as 0. R Receive FIFO Buffer ID Data H The standard ID or extended ID of received message can R be read. For standard ID, these bits are read as 0. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * RFIDE Bit This bit indicates the ID format (standard ID or extended ID) of the message stored in the receive FIFO buffer. * RFRTR Bit This bit indicates the frame format (data frame or remote frame) of the message stored in the receive FIFO buffer. * RFID[28:16] Bits These bits indicate the ID of the message stored in the receive FIFO buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1331 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.39 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mBL (RFTSm) (m = 0, 1) Address RFTS0L: F05A4H, RFTS0H: F05A5H RFTS1L: F05B4H, RFTS1H: F05B5H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RFTS[15:0] After Reset 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 0 RFTS[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Receive FIFO Buffer Timestamp Description Timestamp value of the received message can be read. R/W R Data This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * RFTS[15:0] These bits indicate the timestamp value of the message stored in the receive FIFO buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1332 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.40 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mBH (RFPTRm) (m = 0, 1) Address RFPTR0L: F05A6H, RFPTR0H: F05A7H RFPTR1L: F05B6H, RFPTR1H: F05B7H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 RFDLC[3:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 12 RFDLC[3:0] 11 to 0 RFPTR[11:0] 0 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 RFPTR[11:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Receive FIFO Buffer DLC Data Receive FIFO Buffer Label Data 0 Description R/W R b15 b14 b13 b12 0 0 0 0 : 0 data bytes 0 0 0 1 : 1 data byte 0 0 1 0 : 2 data bytes 0 0 1 1 : 3 data bytes 0 1 0 0 : 4 data bytes 0 1 0 1 : 5 data bytes 0 1 1 0 : 6 data bytes 0 1 1 1 : 7 data bytes 1 X X X : 8 data bytes Label information of the received message can be read. R This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * RFDLC[3:0] Bits These bits indicate the data length of the message stored in the receive FIFO buffer. * RFPTR[11:0] Bits These bits indicate the label information of the message stored in the receive FIFO buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1333 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.41 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mCL (RFDF0m) (m = 0, 1) Address RFDF00L: F05A8H, RFDF00H: F05A9H RFDF01L: F05B8H, RFDF01H: F05B9H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 RFDB1[7:0] After Reset 0 Bit 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 RFDB0[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 Description R/W 15 to 8 RFDB1[7:0] Receive FIFO Buffer Data Byte 1 Data in the message stored in the receive FIFO buffer R 7 to 0 RFDB0[7:0] Receive FIFO Buffer Data Byte 0 can be read. R When the RFDLC[3:0] value in the RFPTRm register is smaller than B'1000, data bytes for which no data is set are read as H'00. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1334 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.42 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mCH (RFDF1m) (m = 0, 1) Address RFDF10L: F05AAH, RFDF10H: F05ABH RFDF11L: F05BAH, RFDF11H: F05BBH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 RFDB3[7:0] After Reset 0 Bit 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 RFDB2[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 Description R/W 15 to 8 RFDB3[7:0] Receive FIFO Buffer Data Byte 3 Data in the message stored in the receive FIFO buffer R 7 to 0 RFDB2[7:0] Receive FIFO Buffer Data Byte 2 can be read. R When the RFDLC[3:0] value in the RFPTRm register is smaller than B'1000, data bytes for which no data is set are read as H'00. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1335 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.43 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mDL (RFDF2m) (m = 0, 1) Address RFDF20L: F05ACH, RFDF20H: F05ADH RFDF21L: F05BCH, RFDF21H: F05BDH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 RFDB5[7:0] After Reset Bit 0 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 RFDB4[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 Description R/W 15 to 8 RFDB5[7:0] Receive FIFO Buffer Data Byte 5 Data in the message stored in the receive FIFO R 7 to 0 RFDB4[7:0] Receive FIFO Buffer Data Byte 4 buffer can be read. R When the RFDLC[3:0] value in the RFPTRm register is smaller than B'1000, data bytes for which no data is set are read as H'00. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1336 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.44 CAN Receive FIFO Access Register mDH (RFDF3m) (m = 0, 1) Address RFDF30L: F05AEH, RFDF30H: F05AFH RFDF31L: F05BEH, RFDF31H: F05BFH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 RFDB7[7:0] After Reset Bit 0 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 RFDB6[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 Description R/W 15 to 8 RFDB7[7:0] Receive FIFO Buffer Data Byte 7 Data in the message stored in the receive FIFO buffer R 7 to 0 RFDB6[7:0] Receive FIFO Buffer Data Byte 6 can be read. R When the RFDLC[3:0] value in the RFPTRm register is smaller than B'1000, data bytes for which no data is set are read as H'00. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1337 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.45 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Control Register kL (CFCCLk) (i = 0) (k = 0) Address CFCCL0L: F0350H, CFCCL0H: F0351H b15 b14 b13 CFIGCV[2:0] b12 b11 CF -- b10 b9 b8 CFDC[2:0] b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- CF CF CF TXIE RXIE E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IM After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 13 CFIGCV[2:0] 12 CFIM 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Description Transmit/Receive FIFO Receive b15 b14 b13 Interrupt Request Timing Select 0 0 0 : When FIFO is 1/8 full. 0 0 1 : When FIFO is 2/8 full. 0 1 0 : When FIFO is 3/8 full. 0 1 1 : When FIFO is 4/8 full. 1 0 0 : When FIFO is 5/8 full. 1 0 1 : When FIFO is 6/8 full. 1 1 0 : When FIFO is 7/8 full. 1 1 1 : When FIFO is full. R/W R/W Transmit/Receive FIFO Interrupt 0: Source Select * Receive mode R/W When the number of received messages has met the condition set by the CFIGCV[2:0] bits, a FIFO receive interrupt request is generated. * Transmit mode When the buffer becomes empty upon completion of message transmission, a FIFO transmit interrupt request is generated. 1: * Receive mode A FIFO receive interrupt request is generated each time a message has been received. * Transmit mode A FIFO transmit interrupt request is generated each time a message has been transmitted. 11 -- Reserved This bit is always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 10 to 8 7 to 3 CFDC[2:0] -- Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer b10 b9 b8 Depth 0 0 0 : 0 messages Configuration 0 0 1 : 4 messages 0 1 0 : 8 messages 0 1 1 : 16 messages 1 0 0 : Setting prohibited 1 0 1 : Setting prohibited 1 1 0 : Setting prohibited 1 1 1 : Setting prohibited Reserved R/W These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 2 1 0 CFTXIE CFRXIE CFE Transmit/Receive FIFO Transmit 0: Transmit/receive FIFO transmit interrupt is disabled. Interrupt Enable 1: Transmit/receive FIFO transmit interrupt is enabled. Transmit/Receive FIFO Receive 0: Transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt is disabled. Interrupt Enable 1: Transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt is enabled. Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer 0: No transmit/receive FIFO buffer is used. Enable 1: Transmit/receive FIFO buffers are used. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 R/W R/W R/W 1338 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) * CFIGCV[2:0] Bits These bits are used to specify the fraction of the transmit/receive FIFO buffer (the number of messages is selected by the setting of the CFDC[2:0] bits) that must be filled for the FIFO buffer to generate a receive interrupt request when the CFM[1:0] bits are set to B'00 (reception mode) and the CFIM bit is set to 0. When the CFDC[2:0] bits are set to B'001 (4 messages), set the CFIGCV[2:0] bits to B'001, B'011, B'101, or B'111. Modify these bits only in global reset mode. * CFIM Bit This bit is used to select a transmit/receive FIFO interrupt source. Modify this bit only in global reset mode. * CFDC[2:0] Bits These bits are used to set the number of messages that can be stored in a single transmit/receive FIFO buffer. If these bits are set to B'000, do not use any receive FIFO buffer. Modify these bits only in global reset mode. * CFTXIE Bit When this bit is set to 1 and the CFTXIF flag in the CFSTSk register is set to 1, a transmit/receive FIFO transmit interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit with the CFE bit set to 0 (no transmit/receive FIFO buffer is used). * CFRXIE Bit When this bit is set to 1 and the CFRXIF flag in the CFSTSk register is set to 1, a transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt request is generated. Modify this bit with the CFE bit set to 0. * CFE Bit Setting this bit to 1 makes transmit/receive FIFO buffers available. When this bit is set to 0 in transmit mode, if a message in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer is being transmitted or to be transmitted next, the transmit/receive FIFO buffer becomes empty after completion of transmission, CAN bus error detection, or arbitration lost. In other cases or in receive mode, the transmit/receive FIFO buffer becomes empty immediately. This bit is cleared to 0 when the following conditions are met. * Receive mode: Global reset mode * Transmit mode: Channel reset mode Modify this bit only in the following mode. * Receive mode: Global operating mode or global test mode * Transmit mode: Channel communication mode or channel halt mode R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1339 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.46 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Control Register kH (CFCCHk) (i = 0) (k = 0) Address CFCCH0L: F0352H, CFCCH0H: F0353H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 CFITT[7:0] After 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b7 b6 -- -- 0 0 b5 b4 CFTML[1:0] 0 0 b3 b2 b1 CF CF CFM[1:0] ITR ITSS 0 0 0 b0 0 Reset Bit Symbol 15 to 8 CFITT[7:0] 7, 6 -- Bit Name Description Message Transmission Interval Set a message transmission interval. Configuration Set these bits to a value within a range of H'00 to H'FF. Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R/W R/W R always be 0. 5, 4 CFTML[1:0] Transmit Buffer Link Configuration Set the transmit buffer number to be linked to the R/W transmit/receive FIFO buffer. 3 CFITR Transmit/Receive FIFO Interval 0: Clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK/2 by the Timer Resolution R/W ITRCP[15:0] value 1: Clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK/2 by the ITRCP[15:0] value x 10 2 CFITSS Interval Timer Clock Source Select 0: Clock selected by the CFITR bit R/W 1: CANi bit time clock 1, 0 CFM[1:0] Transmit/Receive FIFO Mode Select R/W b1 b0 0 0 : Receive mode 0 1 : Transmit mode 1 0 : Setting prohibited 1 1 : Setting prohibited * CFITT[7:0] Bits These bits are used to set a message transmission interval when transmitting messages continuously from a transmit/receive FIFO buffer whose CFM[1:0] bits are set to B'01 (transmit mode). Clear the CFE bit to 0 (no transmit/receive FIFO buffer is used) and then modify the CFITT[7:0] bits. * CFTML[1:0] Bits These bits are used to set the number of transmit buffer to be linked to the transmit/receive FIFO buffer when the CFM[1:0] bits are set to B'01 (transmit mode). Setting the CFDC[2:0] bits to B'001 or more enables the setting of the CFTML[1:0] bits. Modify these bits only in global reset mode. * CFITR Bit <R> This bit is valid when the setting of the CFITSS bit is 0. Setting this bit to 0 selects the clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK/2 by the ITRCP[15:0] value. Setting this bit to 1 selects the clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK/2 by the ITRCP[15:0] value x 10. Modify the CFITR bit with the CFE bit in theCFCCLk register set to 0 (no transmit/receive FIFO buffer is used). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1340 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) * CFITSS Bit Setting this bit to 0 selects the clock selected by the CFITR bit as the clock source for counting by the interval timer. Setting this bit to 1 selects the CANi bit time clock as the clock source for counting by the interval timer. Clear the CFE bit to 0 (no transmit/receive FIFO buffer is used) before modifying the CFITSS bit. * CFM[1:0] Bits These bits are used to select transmit/receive FIFO mode. Modify these bits only in global reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1341 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.47 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Status Register k (CFSTSk) (i = 0) (k = 0) Address CFSTS0L: F0358H, CFSTS0H: F0359H After Reset b15 b14 -- -- 0 0 Bit Symbol 15, 14 -- b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 CFMC[5:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- CF CF CF CF CF TXIF RXIF MLT FLL EMP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bit Name Reserved Description These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R/W R always be 0. 13 to 8 7 to 5 CFMC[5:0] -- Transmit/Receive FIFO The number of messages stored in the transmit/receive Message Counter FIFO buffer is indicated. Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R R always be 0. 4 CFTXIF Transmit/Receive FIFO Transmit Interrupt Request 0: No transmit/receive FIFO transmit interrupt request is R/(W)Note present. Flag 1: A transmit/receive FIFO transmit interrupt request is Transmit/Receive FIFO 0: No transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt request is present. 3 CFRXIF Receive Interrupt Request Flag R/(W)Note present. 1: A transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt request is present. 2 CFMLT 1 CFFLL 0 CFEMP Transmit/Receive FIFO 0: No transmit/receive FIFO message is lost. Message Lost Flag 1: A transmit/receive FIFO message is lost. Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer 0: The transmit/receive FIFO buffer is not full. Full Status Flag 1: The transmit/receive FIFO buffer is full. Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer 0: The transmit/receive FIFO buffer contains messages. Empty Status Flag 1: The transmit/receive FIFO buffer contains no message R/(W)Note R R (buffer empty). <R> Note The only effective value for writing to this flag bit is 0, which clears the bit. Otherwise writing to the bit results in retention of its state. To write 0 to this flag bit, write by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction or a 16-bit data transfer instruction. * CFMC[5:0] Bits The CFMC[5:0] bits indicate the following values that depend on the setting of the CFM[1:0] bits in the CFCCHk register. * When CFM[1:0] value is B'01 (transmit mode): Number of untransmitted messages in the buffer * When CFM[1:0] value is B'00 (receive mode): Number of unread received messages in the buffer These bits are cleared to 0 when any of the following conditions is met. * When CFM[1:0] value is B'00: In global reset mode * When CFM[1:0] value is B'01: In channel reset mode * CFTXIF Flag The CFTXIF flag is set to 1 when the following condition is met. * When CFM[1:0] value is B'01 and interrupt source setting the CFIM bit in the CFCCLk register is generated. The CFTXIF flag is cleared to 0 when any of the following conditions is met. * Write 0 to the CFTXIF flag * When CFM[1:0] value is B'00: In global reset mode * When CFM[1:0] value is B'01: In channel reset mode Clear this flag to 0 in global operating mode or global test mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1342 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) * CFRXIF Flag The CFRXIF flag is set to 1 when the following condition is met. * When CFM[1:0] value is B'00 and interrupt source setting the CFIM bit in the CFCCLk register is generated. The CFRXIF flag is cleared to 0 when any of the following conditions is met. * Write 0 to the CFRXIF flag * When CFM[1:0] value is B'00: In global reset mode * When CFM[1:0] value is B'01: In channel reset mode Clear this flag to 0 in global operating mode or global test mode. * CFMLT Flag The CFMLT flag is set to 1 when the following condition is met. * When it is attempted to store a new message while the transmit/receive FIFO buffer is full. In this case, the new message is discarded. The CFMLT flag is cleared to 0 when any of the following conditions is met. * Write 0 to the CFMLT flag * When CFM[1:0] value is B'00: In global reset mode * When CFM[1:0] value is B'01: In channel reset mode Clear this flag to 0 in global operating mode or global test mode. * CFFLL Flag The CFFLL flag is set to 1 when the following condition is met. * When the number of messages stored in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer matches the FIFO buffer depth set by the CFDC[2:0] bits in the CFCCLk register. The CFFLL flag is cleared to 0 when any of the following conditions is met. * When the number of messages stored in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer becomes smaller than the FIFO buffer depth set by the CFDC[2:0] bits. * When the CFE value in the CFCCLk register is 0 (no transmit/receive FIFO buffer is used). Note that this flag is set to 0 after transmission completion, CAN bus error detection, or arbitration lost when the message in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer is being transmitted or to be transmitted next. * When CFM[1:0] value is B'00: In global reset mode * When CFM[1:0] value is B'01: In channel reset mode * CFEMP Flag The CFEMP flag is set to 1 when any of the following conditions is met. * When the CFM[1:0] value is B'00: All messages have been read, or global reset mode. * When the CFM[1:0] value is B'01: All messages have been transmitted, or channel reset mode. * When the CFE value in the CFCCLk register is 0 (no transmit/receive FIFO buffer is used). Note that this flag is set to 1 after transmission completion, CAN bus error detection, or arbitration lost when the message in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer is being transmitted or to be transmitted next. The CFEMP flag is cleared to 0 when any of the following conditions is met. * When the CFM[1:0] value is B'00: Any one of received messages has been stored in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer. * When the CFM[1:0] value is B'01: A value H'FF has been written to the CFPCTRk register after data was written to the CFIDLk, CFIDHk, CFPTRk, and CFDF0k to CFDF3k registers. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1343 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.48 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Pointer Control Register k (CFPCTRk) (i = 0) (k = 0) Address CFPCTR0L: F035CH After Reset Bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol 15 to 8 -- 7 to 0 CFPC[7:0] b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 CFPC[7:0] 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 0 Description R/W Reserved The write value should always be 0. R CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Receive mode: W Pointer Writing H'FF to these bits moves the read pointer to the next unread message in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer. Transmit mode: Writing H'FF to these bits moves the write pointer to the next stage of the transmit/receive FIFO buffer. * CFPC[7:0] Bits Receive mode (CFM [1:0] value in the CFCCHk register is B'00): Writing H'FF to the CFPC[7:0] bits moves the read pointer to the next unread message in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer. At this time, the CFMC[5:0] value (transmit/receive FIFO message counter) in the CFSTSk register is decremented. Read the CFIDLk, CFIDHk, CFTSk, CFPTRk, and CFDF0k to CFDF3k registers to read messages in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer, and then write H'FF to the CFPC[7:0] bits. Write H'FF to these bits when the CFE bit in the CFCCLk register is set to 1 (transmit/receive FIFO buffers are used) and the CFEMP flag in the CFSTSk register is cleared to 0 (the transmit/receive FIFO buffer contains messages). Transmit mode (CFM [1:0] value in the CFCCHk register is B'01): Writing H'FF to the CFPC[7:0] bits stores the data written to the CFIDLk, CFIDHk, CFPTRk, and CFDF0k to CFDF3k registers in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer and moves the write pointer to the next stage of the transmit/receive FIFO buffer. At this time, the CFMC[5:0] value is incremented. Write transmit messages to the CFIDLk, CFIDHk, CFPTRk, and CFDF0k to CFDF3k registers and then write H'FF to the CFPC[7:0] bits. Write H'FF to these bits when the CFE bit in the CFCCLk register is set to 1 and the CFFLL flag in the CFSTSk register is cleared to 0 (the transmit/receive FIFO buffer is not full). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1344 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.49 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kAL (CFIDLk) (i = 0) (k = 0) Address CFIDL0L: F05E0H, CFIDL0H: F05E1H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CFID[15:0] After Reset 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 0 CFID[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 Description Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer When CFM[1:0] value is B'01 (transmit mode): ID Data L Set standard ID or extended ID. For standard ID, write an ID R/W R/W to bits 10 to 0 and write 0 to bits 15 to 11. When CFM[1:0] value is B'00 (receive mode): Standard ID or extended ID in the received message can be read. For standard ID, read bits 10 to 0. Bits 15 to 11 are read as 0. Modify these bits only when the CFM[1:0] value in the CFCCHk register is B'01 (transmit mode). This register is readable only when the CFM[1:0] value is B'00 (receive mode). This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * CFID[15:0] Bits These bits indicate the ID of the received message stored in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer when the CFM [1:0] value is B'00. When the CFM [1:0] value is B'01, set the ID of the message to be transmitted from the transmit/receive FIFO buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1345 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.50 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kAH (CFIDHk) (i = 0) (k = 0) Address CFIDH0L: F05E2H, CFIDH0H: F05E3H b15 b14 b13 CFIDE CFRTR THLEN 0 0 0 After Reset Bit Symbol 15 CFIDE 14 CFRTR 13 THLEN b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 CFID[28:16] 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 Description Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer 0: Standard ID IDE 1: Extended ID Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer 0: Data frame RTR 1: Remote frame Transmit History Data Store This bit is valid only when the CFM[1:0] value is B'01 Enable (transmit mode). R/W R/W R/W R/W 0: Transmit history data is not stored in the buffer. 1: Transmit history data is stored in the buffer. 12 to 0 CFID[28:16] Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer When CFM[1:0] value is B'01 (transmit mode): ID Data H Set standard ID or extended ID. For standard ID, write 0 to R/W these bits. When CFM[1:0] value is B'00 (receive mode): Standard ID or extended ID in the received message can be read. For standard ID, these bits are read as 0. Modify these bits only when the CFM[1:0] value in the CFCCHk register is B'01 (transmit mode). This register is readable only when the CFM[1:0] value is B'00 (receive mode). This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * CFIDE Bit This bit indicates the ID format (standard ID or extended ID) of the received message stored in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer when the CFM[1:0] value is B'00. When the CFM [1:0] value is B'01, set the ID format of the message to be transmitted from the transmit/receive FIFO buffer. * CFRTR Bit This bit indicates the data format (data frame or remote frame) of the received message stored in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer when the CFM [1:0] value is B'00. When the CFM [1:0] value is B'01, set the data format of the message to be transmitted from the transmit/receive FIFO buffer. * THLEN Bit When this bit is set to 1, the transmit history data (label information, buffer number, and buffer type) of transmit messages is stored in the transmit history buffer after transmission is completed. This bit is enabled when the CFM [1:0] value is B'01 (transmit mode). * CFID[28:16] Bits These bits indicate the ID of the received message stored in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer when the CFM [1:0] value is B'00. When the CFM[1:0] value is B'01, set the ID of the message to be transmitted from the transmit/receive FIFO buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1346 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.51 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kBL (CFTSk) (i = 0) (k = 0) Address CFTS0L: F05E4H, CFTS0H: F05E5H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CFTS[15:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 0 CFTS[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Description Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer These bits are valid only when the CFM[1:0] value is Timestamp Data B'00 (receive mode). R/W R The timestamp value of the received message can be read. This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * CFTS[15:0] Bits These bits indicate the timestamp value of the message stored in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer. These bits are valid when the CFM[1:0] value is B'00. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1347 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.52 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kBH (CFPTRk) (i = 0) (k = 0) Address CFPTR0L: F05E6H, CFPTR0H: F05E7H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 CFDLC[3:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 12 CFDLC[3:0] 11 to 0 CFPTR[11:0] 0 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 CFPTR[11:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 Description Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer DLC b15 b14 b13 b12 Data 0 0 0 0: 0 data bytes 0 0 0 1: 1 data byte 0 0 1 0: 2 data bytes 0 0 1 1: 3 data bytes 0 1 0 0: 4 data bytes 0 1 0 1: 5 data bytes 0 1 1 0: 6 data bytes 0 1 1 1: 7 data bytes 1 X X X: 8 data bytes R/W R/W Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer When CFM[1:0] value is B'01 (transmit mode): Label Set the label information to be stored in the transmit Data history buffer. R/W Only bits CFPTR[7:0] are valid. When CFM[1:0] value is B'00 (receive mode): The label information of the received message can be read. Modify these bits only when the CFM[1:0] value in the CFCCHk register is B'01 (transmit mode). This register is readable only when the CFM[1:0] value is B'00 (receive mode). This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * CFDLC[3:0] Bits These bits indicate the data length of the received message stored in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer when the CFM [1:0] value is B'00. When the CFM [1:0] value is B'01, set the data length of the message to be transmitted from the transmit/receive FIFO buffer. If 9-byte or more data length is set, 8 bytes of data is actually transmitted. * CFPTR[11:0] Bits These bits indicate the label information attached to the received message stored in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer when the CFM [1:0] value is B'00. When the CFM [1:0] value is B'01, the CFPTR [7:0] value is stored in the transmit history buffer when message transmission has been completed. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1348 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.53 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kCL (CFDF0k) (i = 0) (k = 0) Address CFDF00L: F05E8H, CFDF00H: F05E9H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 CFDB1[7:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 8 CFDB1[7:0] 7 to 0 CFDB0[7:0] 0 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 CFDB0[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 Description Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer Data When CFM[1:0] value is B'01 (transmit mode): Byte 1 Set the transmit/receive FIFO buffer data. Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer Data When CFM[1:0] value is B'00 (receive mode): Byte 0 The message data stored in the transmit/receive R/W R/W R/W FIFO buffer can be read. Modify these bits only when the CFM[1:0] value in the CFCCHk register is B'01. This register is readable only when the CFM[1:0] value is B'00. When the CFDLC [3:0] value in the CFPTRk register is smaller than B'1000, data bytes for which no data is set are read as H'00. This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1349 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.54 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kCH (CFDF1k) (i = 0) (k = 0) Address CFDF10L: F05EAH, CFDF10H: F05EBH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 CFDB3[7:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 8 CFDB3[7:0] 7 to 0 CFDB2[7:0] 0 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 CFDB2[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 Description Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer Data When CFM[1:0] value is B'01 (transmit mode): Byte 3 Set the transmit/receive FIFO buffer data. Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer Data When CFM[1:0] value is B'00 (receive mode): Byte 2 The message data stored in the transmit/receive R/W R/W R/W FIFO buffer can be read. Modify these bits only when the CFM[1:0] value in the CFCCHk register is B'01. This register is readable only when the CFM[1:0] value is B'00. When the CFDLC [3:0] value in the CFPTRk register is smaller than B'1000, data bytes for which no data is set are read as H'00. This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1350 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.55 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kDL (CFDF2k) (i = 0) (k = 0) Address CFDF20L: F05ECH, CFDF20H: F05EDH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 CFDB5[7:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 8 CFDB5[7:0] 7 to 0 CFDB4[7:0] 0 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 CFDB4[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 Description Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer Data When CFM[1:0] value is B'01 (transmit mode): Byte 5 Set the transmit/receive FIFO buffer data. Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer Data When CFM[1:0] value is B'00 (receive mode): Byte 4 The message data stored in the transmit/receive R/W R/W R/W FIFO buffer can be read. Modify these bits only when the CFM[1:0] value in the CFCCHk register is B'01. This register is readable only when the CFM[1:0] value is B'00. When the CFDLC [3:0] value in the CFPTRk register is smaller than B'1000, data bytes for which no data is set are read as H'00. This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1351 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.56 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Access Register kDH (CFDF3k) (i = 0) (k = 0) Address CFDF30L: F05EEH, CFDF30H: F05EFH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 CFDB7[7:0] After Reset 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 8 CFDB7[7:0] 7 to 0 CFDB6[7:0] 0 0 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 CFDB6[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name 0 0 0 Description Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer Data When CFM[1:0] value is B'01 (transmit mode): Byte 7 Set the transmit/receive FIFO buffer data. Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer Data When CFM[1:0] value is B'00 (receive mode): Byte 6 The message data stored in the transmit/receive R/W R/W R/W FIFO buffer can be read. Modify these bits only when the CFM[1:0] value in the CFCCHk register is B'01. This register is readable only when the CFM[1:0] value is B'00. When the CFDLC [3:0] value in the CFPTRk register is smaller than B'1000, data bytes for which no data is set are read as H'00. This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1352 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.57 Receive FIFO Message Lost Status Register (RFMSTS) Address RFMSTS: F0360H After Reset Bit b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- RF1 RF0 MLT MLT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol 7 to 2 -- 1 RF1MLT 0 RF0MLT Bit Name Description R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 0. R Receive FIFO Buffer 1 Message 0: No receive FIFO buffer m message is lost (m = 0, 1). R Lost Status Flag 1: A receive FIFO buffer m message is lost. Receive FIFO Buffer 0 Message R Lost Status Flag The RFMSTS register is cleared to H'00 in global reset mode. * RFmMLT Flag The RFmMLT flag is set to 1 when the RFMLT flag in the RFSTSm register is set to 1 (a receive FIFO message is lost). When the RFMLT flag is cleared to 0, the RFmMLT flag is cleared to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1353 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.58 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Message Lost Status Register (CFMSTS) (i = 0) Address CFMSTS: F0361H b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CF0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MLT After Reset Bit Symbol 7-1 -- 0 CF0MLT 0 Bit Name Description R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 0. R CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer 0: No CANi transmit/receive FIFO buffer k message is R k Message Lost Status Flag lost. 1: A CANi transmit/receive FIFO buffer k message is lost. The CFMSTS register is cleared to H'00 in global reset mode. * CF0MLT Flag The CF0MLT flag is set to 1 when the CFMLT flag in the CFSTSk register is set to 1 (a transmit/receive FIFO message is lost). When the CFMLT flag is cleared to 0, the CF0MLT flag is cleared to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1354 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.59 CAN Receive FIFO Interrupt Status Register (RFISTS) Address RFISTS: F0362H After Reset Bit b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- RF1 RF0 IF IF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol 7 to 2 -- 1 RF1IF Bit Name Description Reserved These bits are always read as 0. R Receive FIFO Buffer 1 Interrupt 0: No receive FIFO buffer m interrupt request is present R Request Status Flag 0 RF0IF R/W Receive FIFO Buffer 0 Interrupt (m = 0, 1). 1: A receive FIFO buffer m interrupt request is present. R Request Status Flag The RFISTS register is cleared to H'00 in global reset mode. * RFmIF Flag The RFmIF flag is set to 1 when the RFIF flag in the RFSTSm register is set to 1 (a receive FIFO interrupt request is present). When the RFIF flag is cleared to 0, the RFmIF flag is cleared to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1355 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.60 CAN Transmit/Receive FIFO Receive Interrupt Status Register (CFISTS) Address CFISTS: F0363H After Reset Bit b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CF0IF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol 7 to 1 -- 0 CF0IF Bit Name Description R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 0. R CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer 0: No CANi transmit/receive FIFO buffer k receive R k Receive Interrupt Request Status Flag interrupt request is present. 1: A CANi transmit/receive FIFO buffer k receive interrupt request is present. The CFISTS register is cleared to H'00 in global reset mode. * CF0IF Flag The CF0IF flag is set to 1 when the CFRXIF flag in the CFSTSk register is set to 1 (a transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt request is present). When the CFRXIF flag is cleared to 0, the CF0IF flag is cleared to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1356 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.61 CANi Transmit Buffer Control Register p (TMCp) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) Address TMC0: F0364H, TMC1: F0365H TMC2: F0366H, TMC3: F0367H After b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 b2 b1 b0 TMOM TMTAR TMTR 0 0 0 Reset Bit Symbol 7 to 3 -- Bit Name Reserved Description R/W These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 2 TMOM One-Shot Transmission Enable 0: One-shot transmission is disabled. R/W 1: One-shot transmission is enabled. 1 TMTAR 0 TMTR Transmit Abort Request 0: Transmit abort is not requested. Transmit Request 0: Transmission is not requested. R/(W)Note 1: Transmit abort is requested. R/(W)Note 1: Transmission is requested. Note The only effective value for writing to this bit is 1, which sets the bit. Otherwise writing to the bit results in retention of its state. When the TMCp register meets any of the following conditions, set it to H'00. * The TMCp register corresponds to the transmit buffer number selected by the CFTML[1:0] bits in the CFCCHk register. Bits in the TMCp register are cleared to all 0 in channel reset mode. Modify the TMCp register only in channel communication mode or channel halt mode. * TMOM Bit Setting this bit to 1 enables one-shot transmission. When transmission fails, retransmission defined in the CAN protocol is not performed. Modify the TMOM bit when the TMTRM flag in the TMSTSp register is set to 0. To set the TMOM bit to 1, also set the TMTR bit together. * TMTAR Bit Setting this bit to 1 generates a transmit abort request for the message stored in the transmit buffer. However, a message that is being transmitted or to be transmitted next cannot be aborted. When the TMTR bit is set to 1, the TMTAR bit can be set to 1. The TMTAR bit is cleared to 0 when any of the following conditions is met, but is not cleared by writing 0 by the program. * Transmission has been completed. * Transmit abort has been completed. * An error or arbitration lost has been detected. If this bit becomes 0 at the timing when the program writes 1 to this bit, this bit becomes 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1357 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) * TMTR Bit Setting this bit to 1 transmits the message stored in the transmit buffer. The TMTR bit is cleared to 0 when any of the following conditions is met, but is not cleared by writing 0 by the program. * Transmission has been completed. * Transmit abort has been completed by setting the TMTAR bit to 1. * An error or arbitration lost has been detected with the TMOM bit set to 1. Set the TMTR bit to 1 when the TMTRF[1:0] value in the TMSTSp register is B'00. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1358 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.62 CANi Transmit Buffer Status Register p (TMSTSp) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) Address TMSTS0: F036CH, TMSTS1: F036DH TMSTS2: F036EH, TMSTS3: F036FH After Reset b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 -- -- -- TMT TMT ARM RM 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 7 to 5 -- b2 b1 b0 TMTRF[1:0] TMT STS 0 0 0 Bit Name Reserved Description R/W These bits are always read as 0. The write value R should always be 0. 4 TMTARM 3 TMTRM 2, 1 TMTRF[1:0] Transmit Buffer Transmit Abort 0: No transmit abort request is present. Request Status Flag 1: A transmit abort request is present. Transmit Buffer Transmit Request 0: No transmit request is present. Status Flag 1: A transmit request is present. Transmit Buffer Transmit Result Flag b2 b1 0 0 : Transmission is in progress or no transmit 0 1 : Transmit abort has been completed. 1 0 : Transmission has been completed (without 1 1 : Transmission has been completed (with R R R/W request is present. transmit abort request). transmit abort request). 0 TMTSTS Transmit Buffer Transmit Status Flag 0: Transmission is not in progress. R 1: Transmission is in progress. The TMSTSp register is cleared to all 0 in channel reset mode. * TMTARM Flag The TMTARM flag is set to 1 when the TMTAR bit in the TMCp register is set to 1, and is cleared to 0 when the TMTAR bit is set to 0. * TMTRM Flag The TMTRM flag is set to 1 when the TMTR bit in the TMCp register is set to 1, and is cleared to 0 when the TMTR bit is set to 0. * TMTRF[1:0] Flag This flag indicates the result of transmission from the transmit buffer. B'00: Transmission is in progress or no transmit request is present. B'01: Transmission from the transmit buffer was aborted. B'10: Transmission has been completed with the TMTAR bit in the TMCp register set to 0 (transmit abort is not requested). B'11: Transmission has been completed with the TMTAR bit in the TMCp register set to 1 (transmit abort is requested). Write B'00 to the TMTRF[1:0] flag in channel communication mode or channel halt mode. Do not write any value other than B'00 to this flag. * TMTSTS Flag This flag is set to 1 when transmission from the transmit buffer starts, and is cleared to 0 when transmission from the transmit buffer has been completed or terminated due to a bus error or arbitration lost. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1359 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.63 CANi Transmit Buffer Transmit Request Status Register (TMTRSTS) (i = 0) Address TMTRSTSL: F0374H, TMTRSTSH: F0375H After b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TMTR TMTR TMTR TMTR STS3 STS2 STS1 STS0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reset Bit Symbol 15 to 4 -- 3 TMTRSTS3 2 TMTRSTS2 Bit Name Description R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 0. R CANi Transmit Buffer 3 Transmit Request Status 0: No transmit request is present. R Flag 1: A transmit request is present. CANi Transmit Buffer 2 Transmit Request Status R Flag 1 TMTRSTS1 CANi Transmit Buffer 1 Transmit Request Status R Flag 0 TMTRSTS0 CANi Transmit Buffer 0 Transmit Request Status R Flag * TMTRSTSp Flags (p = 0 to 3) These flags indicate the status of the TMTR bit in the TMCp register. When the TMTR bit is set to 1 (transmission is requested), the corresponding TMTRSTSp flag is set to 1. The corresponding TMTRSTSp flag is cleared to 0 when the TMTR bit is set to 0 (transmission is not requested) or in channel reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1360 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.64 CANi Transmit Buffer Transmit Complete Status Register (TMTCSTS) (i = 0) Address TMTCSTSL: F0376H, TMTCSTSH: F0377H After Reset Bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TMTC TMTC TMTC TMTC STS3 STS2 STS1 STS0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol 15 to 4 -- 3 TMTCSTS3 2 TMTCSTS2 Bit Name Description R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 0. R CANi Transmit Buffer 3 Transmit Complete Status 0: Transmission has not been completed. R Flag 1: Transmission has been completed CANi Transmit Buffer 2 Transmit Complete Status R Flag 1 TMTCSTS1 CANi Transmit Buffer 1 Transmit Complete Status R Flag 0 TMTCSTS0 CANi Transmit Buffer 0 Transmit Complete Status R Flag * TMTCSTSp Flags (p = 0 to 3) When the TMTRF[1:0] flag in the TMSTSp register is set to B'10 (transmission has been completed (without transmit abort request)) or B'11 (transmission has been completed (with transmit abort request)), the corresponding TMTCSTSp flag is set to 1. These flags are cleared to 0 when the corresponding TMTRF [1:0] flag is set to B'00 or in channel reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1361 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.65 CANi Transmit Buffer Transmit Abort Status Register (TMTASTS) (i = 0) Address TMTASTSL: F0378H, TMTASTSH: F0379H After Reset Bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TMTA TMTA TMTA TMTA STS3 STS2 STS1 STS0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol Bit Name Description R/W 15 to 4 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. 3 TMTASTS3 CANi Transmit Buffer 3 Transmit Abort Status Flag 0: Transmission is not aborted. R R 2 TMTASTS2 CANi Transmit Buffer 2 Transmit Abort Status Flag 1: Transmission is aborted. R 1 TMTASTS1 CANi Transmit Buffer 1 Transmit Abort Status Flag R 0 TMTASTS0 CANi Transmit Buffer 0 Transmit Abort Status Flag R * TMTASTSp Flags (p = 0 to 3) When the TMTRF[1:0] flag in the TMSTSp register is set to B'01 (transmit abort has been completed), the corresponding TMTASTSp flag is set to 1. These flags are cleared to 0 when the corresponding TMTRF[1:0] flag is set to B'00 or in channel reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1362 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.66 CANi Transmit Buffer Interrupt Enable Register (TMIEC) (i = 0) Address TMIECL: F037AH, TMIECH: F037BH After Reset b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- TMIE3 TMIE2 TMIE1 TMIE0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 4 -- Bit Name Reserved Description These bits are always read as 0. The write value R/W R should always be 0. 3 TMIE3 CANi Transmit Buffer 3 Interrupt Enable 0: Transmit buffer interrupt is disabled. R/W 2 TMIE2 CANi Transmit Buffer 2 Interrupt Enable 1: Transmit buffer interrupt is enabled. R/W 1 TMIE1 CANi Transmit Buffer 1 Interrupt Enable R/W 0 TMIE0 CANi Transmit Buffer 0 Interrupt Enable R/W * TMIEp Bits (p = 0 to 3) When any of these bits is set to 1 and the corresponding transmission has been completed, a transmit buffer interrupt request is generated. Modify these bits when the TMTRM flag in the corresponding TMSTSp register is 0 (no transmit request is present). Write 0 to bits corresponding to transmit buffers linked to transmit/receive FIFO buffers. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1363 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.67 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pAL (TMIDLp) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) Address TMIDL0L: F0600H, TMIDL0H: F0601H TMIDL1L: F0610H, TMIDL1H: F0611H TMIDL2L: F0620H, TMIDL2H: F0621H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 TMIDL3L: F0630H, TMIDL3H: F0631H b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TMID[15:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 0 TMID[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Transmit Buffer ID Data L Description Set standard ID or extended ID. R/W R/W For standard ID, write an ID to bits 10 to 0 and write 0 to bits 15 to 11. Modify this register when the TMTRM bit in the corresponding TMSTSp register is set to 0 (no transmit request is present). If this register is linked to any transmit/receive FIFO buffer, do not write data to this register. This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * TMID[15:0] Bits These bits are used to set the ID of the message to be transmitted from the transmit buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1364 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.68 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pAH (TMIDHp) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) Address TMIDH0L: F0602H, TMIDH0H: F0603H TMIDH1L: F0612H, TMIDH1H: F0613H TMIDH2L: F0622H, TMIDH2H: F0623H After Reset b15 b14 b13 TMIDE TMRTR THLEN 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 TMIDE b12 TMIDH3L: F0632H, TMIDH3H: F0633H b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 TMID[28:16] 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Transmit Buffer IDE 0 0 Description 0: Standard ID R/W R/W 1: Extended ID 14 TMRTR Transmit Buffer RTR 0: Data frame R/W 1: Remote frame 13 THLEN Transmit History Data Store Enable 0: Transmit history data is not stored in the buffer. R/W 1: Transmit history data is stored in the buffer. 12 to 0 TMID[28:16] Transmit Buffer ID Data H Set standard ID or extended ID. R/W For standard ID, write 0 to these bits. Modify this register when the TMTRM bit in the corresponding TMSTSp register is set to 0 (no transmit request is present). If this register is linked to any transmit/receive FIFO buffer, do not write data to this register. This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * TMIDE Bit This bit is used to set the ID format of the message to be transmitted from the transmit buffer. * TMRTR Bit This bit is used to set the data format of the message to be transmitted from the transmit buffer. * THLEN Bit When this bit is set to 1, the transmit history data (label information, buffer number, and buffer type) of transmit messages is stored in the transmit history buffer after transmission is completed. * TMID[28:16] Bits These bits are used to set the ID of the message to be transmitted from the transmit buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1365 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.69 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pBH (TMPTRp) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) Address TMPTR0L: F0606H, TMPTR0H: F0607H TMPTR1L: F0616H, TMPTR1H: F0617H TMPTR2L: F0626H, TMPTR2H: F0627H b15 b14 b13 b12 TMDLC[3:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 12 TMDLC[3:0] 11 to 8 -- 0 0 TMPTR3L: F0636H, TMPTR3H: F0637H b11 b10 b9 b8 -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 b7 Reserved b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 TMPTR[7:0] 0 Bit Name Transmit Buffer DLC Data b6 0 0 0 0 Description R/W R/W b15 b14 b13 b12 0 0 0 0 : 0 data bytes 0 0 0 1 : 1 data byte 0 0 1 0 : 2 data bytes 0 0 1 1 : 3 data bytes 0 1 0 0 : 4 data bytes 0 1 0 1 : 5 data bytes 0 1 1 0 : 6 data bytes 0 1 1 1 : 7 data bytes 1 X X X : 8 data bytes These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 7 to 0 TMPTR[7:0] Transmit Buffer Label Data Set the label information to be stored in the transmit history R/W buffer. Modify this register when the TMTRM bit in the corresponding TMSTSp register is set to 0 (no transmit request is present). If this register is linked to any transmit/receive FIFO buffer, do not write data to this register. This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * TMDLC[3:0] Bits These bits are used to set the data length of the message to be transmitted from the transmit buffer when the TMRTR bit in the TMIDHp register is set to 0 (data frame). If a 9-byte (or more) data length is set, 8 bytes of data is actually transmitted. When the TMRTR bit is set to 1 (remote frame), set the data length of messages to be requested. * TMPTR[7:0] Bits When message transmission has been completed, the TMPTR[7:0] value is stored in the transmit history buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1366 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.70 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pCL (TMDF0p) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) Address TMDF00L: F0608H, TMDF00H: F0609H TMDF02L: F0628H, TMDF02H: F0629H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 TMDF01L: F0618H, TMDF01H: F0619H TMDF03L: F0638H, TMDF03H: F0639H b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 TMDB1[7:0] After Reset Bit 0 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 TMDB0[7:0] 0 Bit Name 15 to 8 TMDB1[7:0] Transmit Buffer Data Byte 1 7 to 0 TMDB0[7:0] Transmit Buffer Data Byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Set transmit buffer data. R/W R/W R/W Modify this register when the TMTRM bit in the corresponding TMSTSp register is set to 0 (no transmit request is present). If this register is linked to any transmit/receive FIFO buffer, do not write data to this register. This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1367 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.71 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pCH (TMDF1p) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) Address TMDF10L: F060AH, TMDF10H: F060BH TMDF12L: F062AH, TMDF12H: F062BH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 TMDF11L: F061AH, TMDF11H: F061BH TMDF13L: F063AH, TMDF13H: F063BH b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 TMDB3[7:0] After Reset Bit 0 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 TMDB2[7:0] 0 Bit Name 15 to 8 TMDB3[7:0] Transmit Buffer Data Byte 3 7 to 0 TMDB2[7:0] Transmit Buffer Data Byte 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Set transmit buffer data. R/W R/W R/W Modify this register when the TMTRM bit in the corresponding TMSTSp register is set to 0 (no transmit request is present). If this register is linked to any transmit/receive FIFO buffer, do not write data to this register. This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1368 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.72 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pDL (TMDF2p) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) Address TMDF20L: F060CH, TMDF20H: F060DH TMDF22L: F062CH, TMDF22H: F062DH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 TMDF21L: F061CH, TMDF21H: F061DH TMDF23L: F063CH, TMDF23H: F063DH b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 TMDB5[7:0] After Reset Bit 0 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 TMDB4[7:0] 0 Bit Name 15 to 8 TMDB5[7:0] Transmit Buffer Data Byte 5 7 to 0 TMDB4[7:0] Transmit Buffer Data Byte 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Set transmit buffer data. R/W R/W R/W Modify this register when the TMTRM bit in the corresponding TMSTSp register is set to 0 (no transmit request is present). If this register is linked to any transmit/receive FIFO buffer, do not write data to this register. This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1369 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.73 CANi Transmit Buffer Register pDH (TMDF3p) (i = 0) (p = 0 to 3) Address TMDF30L: F060EH, TMDF30H: F060FH TMDF32L: F062EH, TMDF32H: F062FH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 TMDF31L: F061EH, TMDF31H: F061FH TMDF33L: F063EH, TMDF33H: F063FH b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 TMDB7[7:0] After Reset Bit 0 0 0 Symbol 0 0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 TMDB6[7:0] 0 Bit Name 15 to 8 TMDB7[7:0] Transmit Buffer Data Byte 7 7 to 0 TMDB6[7:0] Transmit Buffer Data Byte 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description Set transmit buffer data. R/W R/W R/W Modify this register when the TMTRM bit in the corresponding TMSTSp register is set to 0 (no transmit request is present). If this register is linked to any transmit/receive FIFO buffer, do not write data to this register. This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1370 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.74 CANi Transmit History Buffer Control Register (THLCCi) (i = 0) Address THLCC0L: F037CH, THLCC0H: F037DH After b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- THL THL THL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- THL DTE IM IE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E 0 Reset Bit Symbol 15 to 11 -- Bit Name Reserved Description These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R/W R always be 0. 10 THLDTE Transmit History Target Buffer 0: Entry from transmit/receive FIFO buffers Select 1: Entry from transmit buffers, transmit/receive FIFO Transmit History Interrupt Source 0: When 6 sets of data have been stored in the transmit R/W buffers 9 THLIM Select R/W history buffer 1: When a single set of transmit history data has been stored 8 THLIE Transmit History Interrupt Enable 0: Transmit history interrupt is disabled. R/W 1: Transmit history interrupt is enabled. 7 to 1 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 0 THLE Transmit History Buffer Enable 0: Transmit history buffer is not used. R/W 1: Transmit history buffer is used. * THLDTE Bit When this bit is set to 0, the transmit history data of messages transmitted from transmit/receive FIFO buffers is stored in the transmit history buffer. When this bit is set to 1, the transmit history data of messages transmitted from transmit buffers and transmit/receive FIFO buffers is stored in the transmit history buffer. Modify this bit only in channel reset mode. * THLIM Bit This bit is used to select a transmit history interrupt source. Modify this bit only in channel reset mode. * THLIE Bit When the THLIE bit is set to 1 and the source selected by the THLIM bit has occurred, a transmit history interrupt request is generated. Modify the THLIE bit with the THLE bit set to 0. * THLE Bit Setting this bit to 1 makes the transmit history buffer available. When data transmission from the buffer selected by the THLDTE bit has been completed, the transmit history data of transmit messages is stored in the transmit history buffer. Modify this bit only in channel communication mode or channel halt mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1371 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.75 CANi Transmit History Buffer Status Register (THLSTSi) (i = 0) Address THLSTS0L: F0380H, THLSTS0H: F0381H After b15 b14 b13 b12 -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 b11 b10 b9 b8 THLMC[3:0] 0 0 0 0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- THL THL THL THL IF ELT FLL EMP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Reset Bit Symbol 15 to 12 -- Bit Name Reserved Description These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R/W R always be 0. 11 to 8 7 to 4 THLMC[3:0] -- Transmit History Buffer Unread These bits indicate the number of unread data sets Data Counter stored in the transmit history buffer. Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R R always be 0. 3 THLIF 2 THLELT Transmit History Interrupt 0: No transmit history interrupt request is present. Request Flag 1: A transmit history interrupt request is present. Transmit History Buffer 0: Transmit history buffer overflow has not occurred. Overflow 1: Transmit history buffer overflow has occurred. R/(W)Note R/(W)Note Flag 1 THLFLL 0 THLEMP Transmit History Buffer Full 0: Transmit history buffer is not full. Status Flag 1: Transmit history buffer is full. Transmit History Buffer Empty 0: Transmit history buffer contains unread data. Status Flag 1: Transmit history buffer contains no unread data (buffer R R empty). <R> Note The only effective value for writing to this flag bit is 0, which clears the bit. Otherwise writing to the bit results in retention of its state. To write 0 to this flag bit, write by using an 8-bit data transfer instruction or a 16-bit data transfer instruction. * THLMC[3:0] Bits These bits indicate the number of unread data sets stored in the transmit history buffer. * THLIF Flag The THLIF flag is set to 1 when the interrupt source set by the THLIM bit in the THLCCi register has occurred. This flag is cleared to 0 in channel reset mode or by writing 0 to this flag by the program. * THLELT Flag The THLELT flag is set to 1 when it is attempted to store new transmit history data while the transmit history buffer is full. In this case, the new data is discarded. This flag becomes 0 in channel reset mode or by writing 0 to this flag by the program. * THLFLL Flag The THLFLL flag is set to 1 when 8 data sets have been stored in the transmit history buffer, and is cleared to 0 when the number of data sets stored in the transmit history buffer has decreased to less than 8. This bit is also cleared to 0 in channel reset mode or when the THLE bit in the THLCCi register is set to 0 (transmit history buffer is not used). * THLEMP Flag The THLEMP flag is cleared to 0 when even a single set of transmit history data has been stored in the transmit history buffer. This flag is set to 1 when all the data in the transmit history buffer has been read. This flag is also set to 1 in channel reset mode or when the THLE bit in the THLCCi register is set to 0 (transmit history buffer is not used). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1372 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.76 CANi Transmit History Buffer Access Register (THLACCi) (i = 0) Address THLACC0L: F0680H, THLACC0H: F0681H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 TID[7:0] After Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b7 b6 b5 -- -- -- 0 0 0 Bit Name b4 b3 BN[1:0] 0 0 b2 b1 -- 0 b0 BT[1:0] 0 Description 0 Bit Symbol R/W 15 to 8 TID[7:0] Label Data The label information of stored data can be read. R 7 to 5 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. R 4, 3 BN[1:0] Buffer Number Data The buffer number of transmit source (transmit buffer or R transmit/receive FIFO) can be read. 2 -- 1, 0 BT[1:0] Reserved This bit is always read as 0. R Buffer Type Data b1 b0 R 0 1 : Transmit buffer 1 0 : Transmit FIFO buffer This register can be read when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 1. * TID [7:0] Bits These bits indicate the label information of transmit history data stored in the transmit history buffer. * BN[1:0] Bits These bits indicate the transmit source buffer number of transmit history data stored in the transmit history buffer. * BT[1:0] Bits These bits indicate the transmit source buffer type of transmit history data stored in the transmit history buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1373 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.77 CANi Transmit History Buffer Pointer Control Register (THLPCTRi) (i = 0) Address THLPCTR0L: F0384H, THLPCTR0H: F0385H After Reset Bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symbol 15 to 8 -- 7 to 0 THLPC[7:0] Bit Name b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 THLPC[7:0] 0 0 0 0 0 Description R/W Reserved The write value should always be 0. R Transmit History Buffer Pointer Writing H'FF to these bits moves the read pointer to the W next unread data in the transmit history buffer. * THLPC [7:0] Bits When the THLPC [7:0] bits are set to H'FF, the read pointer moves to the next data in the transmit history buffer. At this time, the THLMC[3:0] (transmit history buffer unread data counter) value in the THLSTSi register is decremented. After reading the THLACCi register, write H'FF to the THLPC [7:0] bits. Write H'FF to the THLPC[7:0] bits when the THLE bit in the THLCCi register is set to 1 (transmit history buffer is used) and the THLEMP flag in the THLSTSi register is 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1374 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.78 CAN Global RAM Window Control Register (GRWCR) Address GRWCRL: F038AH, GRWCRH: F038BH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RPA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GE After Reset Bit Symbol 15 to 1 -- 0 RPAGE Bit Name Description Reserved The write value should always be 0. RAM Window Select 0: Selects window 0 (receive rule entry registers, CAN RAM test 0 R/W R R/W registers) 1: Selects window 1 (receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, transmit history data access register) * RPAGE Bit This bit is used to select a window for the switching of registers that are allocated to addresses from H'F03A0 to H'F0681. [Registers allocated when the RPAGE bit is set to 0 (window 0 selected)] * CAN receive rule entry registers: GAFLIDLj, GAFLIDHj, GAFLMLj, GAFLMHj, GAFLPLj, GAFLPHj * CAN RAM test registers: RPGACCr [Registers allocated when the RPAGE bit is set to 1 (window 1 selected)] * CAN receive buffer registers: RMIDLn, RMIDHn, RMTSn, RMPTRn, RMDF0n to RMDF3n * CAN receive FIFO access registers: RFIDLm, RFIDHm, RFTSm, RFPTRm, RFDF0m to RFDF3m * CANi transmit/receive FIFO access registers: CFIDLk, CFIDHk, CFTSk, CFPTRk, CFDF0k to CFDF3k * CANi transmit buffer registers: TMIDLp, TMIDHp, TMPTRp, TMDF0p to TMDF3p * CANi transmit history buffer access register: THLACCi R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1375 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.79 CAN Global Test Configuration Register (GTSTCFG) Address GTSTCFGL: F038CH, GTSTCFGH: F038DH After Reset b15 B14 b13 b12 b11 -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 11 -- b10 b9 b8 RTMPS[2:0] 0 0 0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Reserved Description R/W These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. 10 to 8 RTMPS[2:0] RAM Test Page Configuration Set a value within a range of page 0 (H'00) to page 2 R/W (H'02). 7 to 0 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. Modify the GTSTCFG register only in global test mode. * RTMPS[2:0] Bits These bits are used to set the RAM test target page number for RAM test. Set a value from H'00 to H'02. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1376 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.80 CAN Global Test Control Register (GTSTCTRL) Address GTSTCTRL: F038EH After Reset b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -- -- -- -- -- RTME -- -- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Symbol 7 to 3 -- Bit Name Reserved Description These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R/W R always be 0. 2 RTME RAM Test Enable 0: RAM test is disabled. R/W 1: RAM test is enabled. 1, 0 -- Reserved These bits are always read as 0. The write value should R always be 0. * RTME Bit Setting this bit to 1 enables RAM test. Modify this bit only in global test mode. (1) Set the GMDC[1:0] bits in the GCTRL register to B'10 (global test mode). (2) Release protection by successively writing H'7575 and H'8A8A to the GLOCKK register. (3) Set the RTME bit to 1. (4) Check that the RTME bit is set to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1377 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.81 CAN Global Test Protection Unlock Register (GLOCKK) Address GLOCKK: F0394H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LOCK[15:0] After Reset 0 0 Bit Symbol 15 to 0 LOCK[15:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Description Protection Unlock Data R/W Write protection unlock data to use test functions. These W bits are always read as 0. Modify the GLOCKK register only in global test mode. * LOCK[15:0] Bits Write the protection unlock data shown in Table 18-4 to the LOCK[15:0] bits in succession to allow writing 1 to the target bit. Table 18-4. Protection Unlock Data for Test Functions Test Function Protection Unlock Data 1 Protection Unlock Data 2 H'7575 H'8A8A RAM test Target Bit RTME bit in the GTSTCTRL register Writing data to the CAN's SFR area (H'F0300 to H'F039F) except the RAM area after protection is unlocked enables protection again. Protection is not enabled even by reading data from the CAN's SFR area or reading/writing data from/to other areas. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1378 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.3.82 CAN RAM Test Register r (RPGACCr) (r = 0 to 127) Address RPGACC0L: F0580H, RPGACC0H: F0581H RPGACC1L: F0582H, RPGACC1H: F0583H RPGACC2L: F0584H, RPGACC2H: F0585H RPGACC3L: F0586H, RPGACC3H: F0587H RPGACC4L: F0588H, RPGACC4H: F0589H RPGACC5L: F058AH, RPGACC5H: F058BH RPGACC6L: F058CH, RPGACC6H: F058DH RPGACC7L: F058EH, RPGACC7H: F058FH RPGACC8L: F0590H, RPGACC8H: F0591H RPGACC9L: F0592H, RPGACC9H: F0593H RPGACC10L: F0594H, RPGACC10H: F0595H RPGACC11L: F0596H, RPGACC11H: F0597H RPGACC12L: F0598H, RPGACC12H: F0599H RPGACC13L: F059AH, RPGACC13H: F059BH RPGACC14L: F059CH, RPGACC14H: F059DH RPGACC15L: F059EH, RPGACC15H: F059FH RPGACC16L: F05A0H, RPGACC16H: F05A1H RPGACC17L: F05A2H, RPGACC17H: F05A3H RPGACC18L: F05A4H, RPGACC18H: F05A5H RPGACC19L: F05A6H, RPGACC19H: F05A7H RPGACC20L: F05A8H, RPGACC20H: F05A9H RPGACC21L: F05AAH, RPGACC21H: F05ABH RPGACC22L: F05ACH, RPGACC22H: F05ADH RPGACC23L: F05AEH, RPGACC23H: F05AFH RPGACC24L: F05B0H, RPGACC24H: F05B1H RPGACC25L: F05B2H, RPGACC25H: F05B3H RPGACC26L: F05B4H, RPGACC26H: F05B5H RPGACC27L: F05B6H, RPGACC27H: F05B7H RPGACC28L: F05B8H, RPGACC28H: F05B9H RPGACC29L: F05BAH, RPGACC29H: F05BBH RPGACC30L: F05BCH, RPGACC30H: F05BDH RPGACC31L: F05BEH, RPGACC31H: F05BFH RPGACC32L: F05C0H, RPGACC32H: F05C1H RPGACC33L: F05C2H, RPGACC33H: F05C3H RPGACC34L: F05C4H, RPGACC34H: F05C5H RPGACC35L: F05C6H, RPGACC35H: F05C7H RPGACC36L: F05C8H, RPGACC36H: F05C9H RPGACC37L: F05CAH, RPGACC37H: F05CBH RPGACC38L: F05CCH, RPGACC38H: F05CDH RPGACC39L: F05CEH, RPGACC39H: F05CFH RPGACC40L: F05D0H, RPGACC40H: F05D1H RPGACC41L: F05D2H, RPGACC41H: F05D3H RPGACC42L: F05A4H, RPGACC42H: F05D5H RPGACC43L: F05D6H, RPGACC43H: F05D7H RPGACC44L: F05D8H, RPGACC44H: F05D9H RPGACC45L: F05DAH, RPGACC45H: F05DBH RPGACC46L: F05DCH, RPGACC46H: F05DDH RPGACC47L: F05DEH, RPGACC47H: F05DFH RPGACC48L: F05E0H, RPGACC48H: F05E1H RPGACC49L: F05E2H, RPGACC49H: F05E3H RPGACC50L: F05E4H, RPGACC50H: F05E5H RPGACC51L: F05E6H, RPGACC51H: F05E7H RPGACC52L: F05E8H, RPGACC52H: F05E9H RPGACC53L: F05EAH, RPGACC53H: F05EBH RPGACC54L: F05ECH, RPGACC54H: F05EDH RPGACC55L: F05EEH, RPGACC55H: F05EFH RPGACC56L: F05F0H, RPGACC56H: F05F1H RPGACC57L: F05F2H, RPGACC57H: F05F3H RPGACC58L: F05F4H, RPGACC58H: F05F5H RPGACC59L: F05F6H, RPGACC59H: F05F7H RPGACC60L: F05F8H, RPGACC60H: F05F9H RPGACC61L: F05FAH, RPGACC61H: F05FBH RPGACC62L: F05FCH, RPGACC62H: F05FDH RPGACC63L: F05FEH, RPGACC63H: F05FFH RPGACC64L: F0600H, RPGACC64H: F0601H RPGACC65L: F0602H, RPGACC65H: F0603H RPGACC66L: F0604H, RPGACC66H: F0605H RPGACC67L: F0606H, RPGACC67H: F0607H RPGACC68L: F0608H, RPGACC68H: F0609H RPGACC69L: F060AH, RPGACC69H: F060BH RPGACC70L: F060CH, RPGACC70H: F060DH RPGACC71L: F060EH, RPGACC71H: F060FH RPGACC72L: F0610H, RPGACC72H: F0611H RPGACC73L: F0612H, RPGACC73H: F0613H RPGACC74L: F0614H, RPGACC74H: F0615H RPGACC75L: F0616H, RPGACC75H: F0617H RPGACC76L: F0618H, RPGACC76H: F0619H RPGACC77L: F061AH, RPGACC77H: F061BH RPGACC78L: F061CH, RPGACC78H: F061DH RPGACC79L: F061EH, RPGACC79H: F061FH RPGACC80L: F0620H, RPGACC80H: F0621H RPGACC81L: F0622H, RPGACC81H: F0623H RPGACC82L: F0624H, RPGACC82H: F0625H RPGACC83L: F0626H, RPGACC83H: F0627H RPGACC84L: F0628H, RPGACC84H: F0629H RPGACC85L: F062AH, RPGACC85H: F062BH RPGACC86L: F062CH, RPGACC86H: F062DH RPGACC87L: F062EH, RPGACC87H: F062FH RPGACC88L: F0630H, RPGACC88H: F0631H RPGACC89L: F0632H, RPGACC89H: F0633H RPGACC90L: F0634H, RPGACC90H: F0635H RPGACC91L: F0636H, RPGACC91H: F0637H RPGACC92L: F0638H, RPGACC92H: F0639H RPGACC93L: F063AH, RPGACC93H: F063BH RPGACC94L: F063CH, RPGACC94H: F063DH RPGACC95L: F063EH, RPGACC95H: F063FH RPGACC96L: F0640H, RPGACC96H: F0641H RPGACC97L: F0642H, RPGACC97H: F0643H RPGACC98L: F0644H, RPGACC98H: F0645H RPGACC99L: F0646H, RPGACC99H: F0647H RPGACC100L: F0648H, RPGACC100H: F0649H RPGACC101L: F064AH, RPGACC101H: F064BH RPGACC102L: F064CH, RPGACC102H: F064DH RPGACC103L: F064EH, RPGACC103H: F064FH RPGACC104L: F0650H, RPGACC104H: F0651H RPGACC105L: F0652H, RPGACC105H: F0653H RPGACC106L: F0654H, RPGACC106H: F0655H RPGACC107L: F0656H, RPGACC107H: F0657H RPGACC108L: F0658H, RPGACC108H: F0659H RPGACC109L: F065AH, RPGACC109H: F065BH RPGACC110L: F065CH, RPGACC110H: F065DH RPGACC111L: F065EH, RPGACC111H: F065FH RPGACC112L: F0660H, RPGACC112H: F0661H RPGACC113L: F0662H, RPGACC113H: F0663H RPGACC114L: F0664H, RPGACC114H: F0665H RPGACC115L: F0666H, RPGACC115H: F0667H RPGACC116L: F0668H, RPGACC116H: F0669H RPGACC117L: F066AH, RPGACC117H: F066BH RPGACC118L: F066CH, RPGACC118H: F066DH RPGACC119L: F066EH, RPGACC119H: F066FH RPGACC120L: F0670H, RPGACC120H: F0671H RPGACC121L: F0672H, RPGACC121H: F0673H RPGACC122L: F0674H, RPGACC122H: F0675H RPGACC123L: F0676H, RPGACC123H: F0677H RPGACC124L: F0678H, RPGACC124H: F0679H RPGACC125L: F067AH, RPGACC125H: F067BH RPGACC126L: F067CH, RPGACC126H: F067DH RPGACC127L: F067EH, RPGACC127H: F067FH b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RDTA[15:0] After Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Description R/W Data can be read and written in CAN RAM. R/W Modify the RPGACCr register in global test mode with the RTME bit in the GTSTCTRL register set to 1 (RAM test is enabled). The RPGACCr register is readable and writable when the RTME bit is set to 1. This register can be read/written when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1379 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.4 CAN Modes The CAN module has four global modes to control entire CAN module status and four channel modes to control individual channel status. Details of global modes are described in 18.4.1, and details of channel modes are described in 18.4.2. * * * * * * * * Global stop mode : Stops clocks of entire module to achieve low power consumption. Global reset mode : Performs initial settings for entire module. Global test mode : Performs test settings and performs RAM test. Global operating mode : Makes entire module operable. Channel stop mode : Stops channel clock. Channel reset mode : Performs initial settings for channels. Channel halt mode : Stops CAN communication and enables channel test. Channel communication mode : Performs CAN communication. 18.4.1 Global Modes Figure 18-2 shows the transitions of global modes. Figure 18-2. Transitions of Global Modes CAN reset GSLPR = 0 GMDC[1:0] = B'00 Global reset mode Global stop mode Global operating mode GMDC[1:0] = B'01 GSLPR = 1 DC [1 :0 DC [1 ]= ]= B' 10 :0 B' 01 GMDC[1:0] = B'00 M M GMDC[1:0] = B'10 G G Global test mode Remark GSLPR, GMDC[1:0]: Bits in the GCTRL register Channel modes transition in some cases with transitions of global modes. Table 18-5 shows the transitions of channel modes depending on the global mode setting by the GMDC[1:0] bits and the GSLPR bit. Table 18-5. Transitions of Channel Modes Depending on Global Mode Setting (GMDC[1:0] and GSLPR Bits) Channel Mode after SettingNote Channel Mode before Setting Channel GMDC[1:0] = B'00 GMDC[1:0] = B'10 GMDC[1:0] = B'01 GSLPR = 0 GSLPR = 0 GSLPR = 0 GSLPR = 1 (Global Operation) (Global Test) (Global Reset) (Global Stop) GMDC[1:0] = B'01 Channel communication Channel halt Channel reset Transition prohibited Channel halt Channel halt Channel halt Channel reset Transition prohibited Channel reset Channel reset Channel reset Channel reset Channel stop Channel stop Channel stop Channel stop Channel stop Channel stop communication Note GMDC[1:0], GSLPR: Bits in the GCTRL register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1380 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-6 shows the global mode transition time. Table 18-6. Global Mode Transition Time Mode before Transition Mode after Transition Maximum Transition Time Global stop Global reset 3 fCLK cycles Global reset Global stop 3 fCLK cycles Global reset Global test 10 fCLK cycles Global reset Global operating 10 fCLK cycles Global test Global reset 3 fCLK cycles Global test Global operating 3 fCLK cycles Global operating Global reset 3 fCLK cycles Global operating Global test Two CAN frames (1) Global Stop Mode In global stop mode, clocks of the CAN do not run and therefore power consumption is reduced. CAN registers can be read, but writing data to them is prohibited. Register values are retained. After the operation of the CAN module is enabled, the CAN module transitions to global stop mode. Setting the GSLPR bit in the GCTRL register to 1 (in global stop mode) in global reset mode sets the CSLPR bit in each of the CiCTRL register to 1 (channel stop mode). If all channels are forcibly caused to transition to channel stop mode, the CAN module transitions to global stop mode. The GSLPR bit should not be modified in global operating mode and global test mode. (2) Global Reset Mode In global reset mode, CAN module settings are performed. When the CAN module transitions to global reset mode, some registers are initialized. Table 18-9 and Table 18-10 list the registers to be initialized. Setting the GMDC[1:0] bits in the GCTRL register to B'01 sets the CHMDC[1:0] bits in each of the CiCTRL register to B'01 (channel reset mode). If all channels are forcibly caused to transition to channel reset mode, the CAN module transitions to global reset mode. Channels that are already in channel reset mode or channel stop mode do not transition (because the CHMDC[1:0] bits have already been set to B'01). (3) Global Test Mode In global test mode, settings for test-related registers are performed. When the CAN module transitions to global test mode, all CAN communications are disabled. Setting the GMDC[1:0] bits in the GCTRL register to B'10 sets the CHMDC[1:0] bits in each of the CiCTRL register to B'10 (channel halt mode). If all channels are forcibly caused to transition to channel halt mode, the CAN module transitions to global test mode. Channels that are in channel stop mode, channel reset mode, or channel halt mode do not transition. (4) Global Operating Mode In global operating mode, entire CAN module operates. When the GMDC[1:0] bits in the GCTRL register are set to B'00, the CAN module transitions to global operating mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1381 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.4.2 Channel Modes Figure 18-3 shows a channel mode state transition chart (i = 0). Table 18-7 shows the channel mode transition time (i = 0). Figure 18-3. Channel Mode State Transition Chart (i = 0) CAN reset Channel stop mode CSLPR = 0 CSLPR = 1 CHMDC[1:0] = B'10 Channel halt mode Channel reset mode CHMDC[1:0] = B'01 CHMDC[1:0] = B'00 Note 2 CHMDC[1:0] = B'00 CHMDC[1:0] = B'01 CHMDC[1:0] = B'10 Channel communication mode Reception BOSTS = 0 TRMSTS = 0 RECSTS = 1 COMSTS = 1 Arbitration lost SOF detected n Tra Reception completed sm io iss om c ion iss Idle BOSTS = 0 TRMSTS = 0 RECSTS = 0 COMSTS = 1 t tar ns n Tra sm Transmission BOSTS = 0 TRMSTS = 1 RECSTS = 0 COMSTS = 1 ple ted TEC > 255 Note 1 11 consecutive recessive bits have been detected 128 times (BOM[1:0] bits are set to B'00) and transmission start Bus off 11 consecutive recessive bits have been detected 128 times (BOM[1:0] bits are set to B'00) BOSTS = 1 TRMSTS = 1 RECSTS = 0 COMSTS =1 Notes1. Timing of transition from bus off state to channel halt mode When BOM[1:0] = B'01: Transition to channel halt mode when TEC exceeds 255 When BOM[1:0] = B'10: Transition to channel halt mode when 11 consecutive recessive bits have been detected 128 times When BOM[1:0] = B'11: Transition to channel halt mode when the CHMDC[1:0] bits are set to B'10 2. While the CAN bus is locked at the dominant level, transition to channel halt mode is not made. In that case, enter channel reset mode. Remark CHMDC[1:0], CSLPR: Bits in the CiCTRL register (i = 0) BOM[1:0]: Bits in the CiCTRH register (i = 0) BOSTS, TRMSTS, RECSTS, COMSTS: Bits in the CiSTSL register (i = 0) Table 18-7. Channel Mode Transition Time (i = 0) Mode before Transition Mode after Transition Maximum Transition Time Channel stop Channel reset 3 fCLK cycles Channel reset Channel stop 3 fCLK cycles Channel reset Channel halt 3 CANi bit times Channel reset Channel communication 2 CANi bit times Channel halt Channel reset 3 fCLK cycles Channel halt Channel communication 3 CANi bit times Channel communication Channel reset 3 fCLK cycles Channel communication Channel halt 2 CANi frames R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1382 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) (1) Channel Stop Mode In channel stop mode, clocks are not supplied to channels and therefore power consumption is reduced. CAN registers can be read, but writing data to them is prohibited. Register values are retained. Each channel enters channel stop mode after the operation of the CAN module is enabled. The channel transitions to channel stop mode when the CSLPR bit in the CiCTRL register is set to 1 (channel stop mode) in channel reset mode. The CSLPR bit should not be modified in channel communication mode and channel halt mode. (2) Channel Reset Mode In channel reset mode, channel settings are performed. When a channel transitions to channel reset mode, some channel-related registers are initialized. Table 18-9 lists the registers to be initialized. When the CHMDC[1:0] bits in the CiCTRL register are set to B'01 (channel reset mode) during CAN communication, communication is terminated before it is completed and the channel transitions to channel reset mode. Table 18-8 shows the operation when the CHMDC[1:0] bits are set to B'01 (channel reset mode) during CAN communication. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1383 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) (3) Channel Halt Mode In channel halt mode, settings for test-related registers of channels are performed. When a channel transitions to channel halt mode, CAN communication of the channel stops. Table 18-8 shows operation when the CHMDC[1:0] bits are set to B'10 (channel halt mode) during CAN communication. Table 18-8. Operation when a Channel Transitions to Channel Reset Mode/Channel Halt Mode Mode During Reception During Transmission Bus Off State Channel reset Transitions to channel reset Transitions to channel reset Transitions to channel reset mode before (CHMDC[1:0] = B'01) mode before reception is mode before transmission is bus off recovery. completed. Note 1 completed. Note 1 Channel halt Note 3 Transitions to channel halt Transitions to channel halt [When BOM[1:0] = B'00] (CHMDC[1:0] = B'10) mode after reception is mode after transmission is Transitions to channel halt mode completed. Note 2 completed. Note 2 (CHMDC[1:0] = B'10) only after bus off recovery. [When BOM[1:0] = B'01] Transitions to channel halt mode automatically when the condition for transition to bus off state is met. [When BOM[1:0] = B'10] Transitions to channel halt mode automatically after bus off recovery. [When BOM[1:0] = B'11] Transitions to channel halt mode immediately after the CHMDC[1:0] bits are set to B'10 before bus off recovery. Notes 1. To allow transition to channel reset mode after communication is completed, set the CHMDC[1:0] bits to B'10 and confirm that communication has been completed and transition to channel halt mode has been made, and then set the CHMDC[1:0] bits to B'01. 2. While the CAN bus is locked at the dominant level, transition to channel halt mode is not made. In that case, enter channel reset mode. The CAN bus status can be confirmed with the BLF flag of the CiERFLL register that becomes 1 when dominant lock is detected. 3. In case of a transition from channel reset mode to channel halt mode, transition to channel halt mode after setting the CiCFGL and CiCFGH registers in channel reset mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1384 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) (4) Channel Communication Mode In channel communication mode, CAN communication is performed. Each channel has the following communication states during CAN communication. * * * * Idle : Neither reception nor transmission is in progress. Reception : Receiving a message sent from another node. Transmission : Transmitting a message. Bus off : Isolated from CAN communication. When the CHMDC[1:0] bits in the CiCTRL register are set to B'00, the channel transitions to channel communication mode. After that, when 11 consecutive recessive bits have been detected, the COMSTS flag in the CiSTSL register is set to 1 (communication is ready) and transmission and reception are enabled on the CAN network as an active node. At this time, transmission and reception of messages can be started. (5) Bus Off State A channel transitions to the bus off state according to the transmit/receive error counter increment/decrement rules of the CAN specifications. How to return from the bus off state is set by the BOM[1:0] bits in the CiCTRH register. * When BOM[1:0] = B'00: Bus off recovery is compliant with the CAN specifications. After 11 consecutive recessive bits have been detected 128 times, a channel returns from the bus off state to the CAN communication ready state (error active state). At that time, the TEC[7:0] and REC[7:0] bits in the CiSTSH register are initialized to H'00 and the BORF flag in the CiERFLL register is set to 1 (bus off recovery is detected). When the CHMDC[1:0] bits in the CiCTRL register are set to B'10 (channel halt mode) in the bus off state, the channel transitions to channel halt mode after bus off recovery has been completed (11 consecutive recessive bits have been detected 128 times). * When BOM[1:0] = B'01: When a channel transitions to the bus off state, the CHMDC[1:0] bits are set to B'10 and the channel transitions to channel halt mode. At that time, the TEC[7:0] and REC[7:0] bits are initialized to H'00 but the BORF flag is not set to 1. * When BOM[1:0] = B'10: When a channel has transitioned to the bus off state, the CHMDC[1:0] bits are set to B'10. After bus off recovery has been completed (11 consecutive recessive bits have been detected 128 times), the channel transitions to channel halt mode. At that time, the TEC[7:0] and REC[7:0] bits are initialized to H'00 and the BORF flag is set to 1. * When BOM[1:0] = B'11: When the CHMDC[1:0] bits are set to B'10 in the bus off state, the channel transitions to channel halt mode before bus off recovery is completed. At that time, the TEC[7:0] and REC[7:0] bits are initialized to H'00 but the BORF flag is not set to 1. However, the BORF flag becomes 1 if a CAN module transitions to error active state (by detecting 128 times of 11 consecutive recessive bits) before CHMDC[1:0] bits are set to B'10. If the channel transitions to channel halt mode simultaneously when the program writes a value to the CHMDC[1:0] bits, writing by the program takes precedence. An automatic transition to channel halt mode when the BOM[1:0] bits are set to B'01 or B'10 is made only when the CHMDC[1:0] bits are B'00 (channel communication mode). Furthermore, setting the RTBO bit in the CiCTRL register to 1 allows forcible return from the bus off state. As soon as the RTBO bit is set to 1, the state changes to the error active state. After 11 consecutive recessive bits have been detected, the condition of CAN module becomes ready for communication. In this case, the BORF flag is not set to 1 and the TEC[7:0] and REC[7:0] bits are initialized to H'00. Write 1 to the RTBO bit when the BOM[1:0] value is B'00. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1385 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-9. Registers Initialized in Global Reset Mode or Channel Reset Mode Register CiCTRL register Bit / Flag CHMDC[1:0] CiCTRH register CTMS[1:0], CTME CiSTSL register CHLTSTS, EPSTS, BOSTS, TRMSTS, RECSTS, COMSTS CiSTSH register REC[7:0], TEC[7:0] CiERFLL register ADERR, B0ERR, B1ERR, CERR, AERR, FERR, SERR, ALF, BLF, OVLF, BORF, BOEF, EPF, EWF, BEF CiERFLH register CRCREG[14:0] CFCCLk register When transmit/receive FIFO buffer is in transmit mode: CFE CFSTSk register When transmit/receive FIFO buffer is in transmit mode: CFMC[5:0], CFTXIF, CFRXIF, CFMLT, CFFLL, TMCp register TMOM, TMTAR, TMTR TMSTSp register TMTARM, TMTRM, TMTRF[1:0], TMTSTS TMTRSTS register TMTRSTSp CFEMP TMTCSTS register TMTCSTSp TMTASTS register TMTASTSp THLCCi register THLE THLSTSi register THLMC[3:0], THLIF, THLELT, THLFLL, THLEMP GTINTSTS register THIFi, CFTIFi, TAIFi, TSIFi Remark i = 0, k = 0, p = 0 to 3 Table 18-10. Registers Initialized Only in Global Reset Mode Register Bit / Flag GSTS register GHLTSTS GERFLL register THLES, MES, DEF GTSC register TS[15:0] RMND0 register RMNSn RFCCm register RFE RFSTSm register RFMC[5:0], RFIF, RFMLT, RFFLL, RFEMP CFCCLk register When transmit/receive FIFO buffer is in receive mode: CFE CFSTSk register When transmit/receive FIFO buffer is in receive mode: CFMC[5:0], CFTXIF, CFRXIF, CFMLT, CFFLL, RFMSTS register RFmMLT CFEMP CFMSTS register CFkMLT RFISTS register RFmIF CFISTS register CFkIF GTSTCFG register RTMPS[2:0] GTSTCTRL register RTME Remark k = 0, m = 0, 1, n = 0 to 15 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1386 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.5 Reception Function There are two reception types. * Reception by receive buffers: Zero to 16 receive buffers can be shared by all channels. Since messages stored in receive buffers are overwritten at each reception, the latest receive data can always be read. * Reception by receive FIFO buffers and transmit/receive FIFO buffers (receive mode): Two receive FIFO buffers can be shared by all channels and one dedicated transmit/receive FIFO buffer is provided for each channel. The FIFO buffers can hold the number of received messages set by the RFDC[2:0] bits and CFDC[2:0] bits, and massages can be read sequentially from the oldest. 18.5.1 Data Processing Using the Receive Rule Table Data processing using the receive rule table allows selected messages to be stored in the specified buffer. Data processing includes acceptance filter processing, DLC filter processing, routing processing, label addition processing, and mirror function processing. Up to 16 receive rules can be registered per channel. If receive rules are not set, no message can be received. Figure 18-4 illustrates how receive rules are registered. Figure 18-4. Entry of Receive Rules Receive rule 0 Receive rule 1 Channel 0 receive rules 0 to j j : The value of RNC0[4:0] - 1 Receive rule j Boundary is determined by the RNC0[4:0] bits Receive rule 15 Remark RNC0[4:0]: Bits in the GAFLCFG register Each receive rule consists of 12 bytes in the GAFLIDLj, GAFLIDHj, GAFLMLj, GAFLMHj, GAFLPLj, and GAFLPHj registers (j = 0 to 15). The GAFLIDLj and GAFLIDHj registers (j = 0 to 15) are used to set ID, IDE bit, RTR bit, and the mirror function, the GAFLMLj and GAFLMHj registers are used to set mask, the GAFLPLj and GAFLPHj registers are used to set label information to be added, DLC value, and storage receive buffer, and storage FIFO buffer. (1) Acceptance Filter Processing In the acceptance filter processing, the ID data, IDE bit, and RTR bit in a received message are compared with the ID data, IDE bit, and RTR bit set in the receive rule of the corresponding channel. When all these bits match, the message passes through the acceptance filter processing. The ID data, IDE bit, and RTR bit in a received message which correspond to bits that are set to 0 (bits are not compared) in the GAFLMLj and GAFLMHj registers are not compared and are regarded as matched. Check begins with the receive rule with the smallest rule number of the corresponding channel. When all the bits to be compared in a received message match the bits set in the receive rule or when all the receive rules are compared without any match, filter processing stops. If there is no matching receive rule, the received message is not stored in the receive buffer or FIFO buffer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1387 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Figure 18-5. Acceptance Filter Function ID value in received message GAFLIDHj, GAFLIDLj (CAN receive rule entry register jAH/AL) GAFL GAFL IDE RTR GAFLID GAFLMHj, GAFLMLj (CAN receive rule entry register jBH/BL) GAFL GAFL IDEM RTRM Mask bit value 0: Bits are not compared. 1: Bits are compared. GAFLIDM Acceptance determination signal Remark j = 0 to 15 GAFLIDE, GAFLRTR, GAFLID: Bits in the GAFLIDHj and GAFLIDLj registers GAFLIDEM, GAFLRTRM, GAFLIDM: Mask bits in the GAFLMHj and GAFLMLj registers Acceptance determination signal 0: Does not pass the acceptance filter processing. (Not stored in the buffer) 1: Passes the acceptance filter processing. (2) DLC Filter Processing When the DCE bit in the GCFGL register is set to 1 (DLC check is enabled), DLC filter processing is added to messages that passed through the acceptance filter processing. When the DLC value in a message is equal to or larger than the DLC value set in the receive rule, the message passes through the DLC filter processing. When a message has passed through the DLC filter processing with the DRE bit in the GCFGL register set to 0 (DLC replacement is disabled), the DLC value in the received message is stored in the buffer. In this case, all the data bytes in the received message are stored in the buffer. When a message has passed through the DLC filter processing with the DRE bit in the GCFGL register set to 1 (DLC replacement is enabled), the DLC value in the receive rule is stored in the buffer instead of the DLC value in the received message. In this case, a value of H'00 is written to data bytes that are larger than the DLC value in the receive rule. When the DLC value in the received message is smaller than that in the receive rule, the message does not pass through the DLC filter processing. In this case, the message is not stored in the receive buffer or the FIFO buffer and the DEF flag in the GERFLL register is set to 1 (a DLC error is present). (3) Routing Processing Messages that passed through the acceptance filter processing and the DLC filter processing are stored in receive buffers, receive FIFO buffers, or transmit/receive FIFO buffers (set to receive mode). Message storage destination is set by the GAFLRMV, GAFLRMDP[6:0], GAFLFDP4, and GAFLFDP[1:0] bits in the GAFLPLj register (j = 0 to 15). Messages that passed through the acceptance filter processing and the DLC filter processing can be stored in up to two buffers. (4) Label Addition Processing It is possible to add 12-bit label information to messages that passed through the filter processing and store them in buffers. This label information is set in the GAFLPTR[11:0] bits in the GAFLPHj register. (5) Mirror Function Processing The mirror function allows reception of messages transmitted from the own CAN node. The mirror function is made available by setting the MME bit in the GCFGL register to 1 (mirror function is enabled). When the mirror function is in use, receive rules for which the GAFLLB bit in the GAFLIDHj register is set to 0 are used for data processing when receiving messages transmitted from other CAN nodes. When receiving messages transmitted from the own CAN node, receive rules for which the GAFLLB bit is set to 1 are used for data processing. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1388 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.5.2 Timestamp The timestamp counter is a 16-bit free-running counter used for recording message receive time. The timestamp counter value is fetched at the start-of-frame (SOF) timing of a message and is then stored in a receive buffer or a FIFO buffer together with the message ID and data. The clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK by 2 (fCLK/2) or CANi bit time clock is selectable as a timestamp counter clock source from the TSSS bit in the GCFGL register. The clock obtained by dividing the selected clock source by the TSP[3:0] value in the GCFGL register is used as the timestamp counter count source. When the CANi bit time clock is used as a clock source, the timestamp counter stops when the corresponding channel transitions to channel reset mode or channel halt mode. When the clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK by 2 (fCLK/2) is used as a clock source, the timestamp function is not affected by channel mode. The timestamp counter value is reset to H'0000 by setting the TSRST bit in the GCTRH register to 1. Figure 18-6. Timestamp Function Block Diagram fCLK CANi bit time clock 1/2 0 TSSS bit TSP[3:0] bits Divider 1 Timestamp counter (16 bits) Remark TSSS, TSP[3:0]: Bits in the GCFGL register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1389 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.6 Transmission Functions There are two types of transmission. * Transmission using transmit buffers: Each channel has 4 buffers. * Transmission using transmit/receive FIFO buffers (transmit mode): Each channel has one FIFO buffer. Up to 16 messages can be contained in a single FIFO buffer. Each FIFO buffer is used with a link to a transmit buffer. Only the message to be transmitted next in a FIFO buffer becomes the target of transmit priority determination. Messages are transmitted sequentially on a first-in, first-out basis. Figure 18-7 shows the allocation of transmit/receive FIFO buffer link. Figure 18-7. Allocation of Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer Links Transmit buffer 0 Transmit buffer 1 Transmit buffer 2 Transmit buffer 3 Only transmit buffers are used Transmit buffer 0 Transmit/receive FIFO buffer 0 Transmit buffer 2 Transmit buffer 3 Transmit buffers and a transmit/ receive FIFO buffer are used (The transmit/receive FIFO buffer is linked to transmit buffer 1) 18.6.1 Transmit Priority Determination If transmit requests are issued from multiple buffers in the same channel, transmit priority is determined. The priority is determined by using one of the following methods. * ID priority (TPRI bit = 0) * Transmit buffer number priority (TPRI bit = 1) The setting of the TPRI bit in the GCFGL register is enabled in all CAN channels. When the TPRI bit is set to 0, messages are transmitted according to the priority of stored message IDs. Priority of IDs conforms to the CAN bus arbitration specification defined in the CAN specifications. IDs of messages stored in transmit buffers and transmit/receive FIFO buffers (set to transmit mode) are targets of priority determination. When transmit/receive FIFO buffers are used, the oldest message in a FIFO buffer becomes the target of priority determination. When a message is being transmitted from a transmit/receive FIFO buffer, the next message in the FIFO buffer becomes the target of priority determination. When the TPRI bit is set to 1, the message in the transmit buffer of the minimum number among buffers with a transmit request is transmitted first. When transmit/receive FIFO buffers are linked to transmit buffers, transmit priority is determined according to linked transmit buffer numbers. When messages are retransmitted due to an arbitration lost or an error, transmit priority determination is made again regardless of the TPRI bit setting. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1390 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.6.2 Transmission Using Transmit Buffers Setting the transmit request bit (TMTR bit in the TMCp register) in a transmit buffer to 1 (transmission is requested) allows transmission of data frames or remote frames. Transmit result is shown by the TMTRF[1:0] flag in the corresponding TMSTSp register (p = 0 to 3). When transmit completes successfully, the TMTRF[1:0] flag is set to B'10 (transmission has been completed (without transmit abort request)) or B'11 (transmission has been completed (with transmit abort request)). (1) Transmit Abort Function With respect to transmit buffers for which the TMTRM bit in the TMSTSp register is set to 1 (a transmit request is present), when the TMTAR bit in the TMCp register is set to 1 (transmit abort is requested), the transmit request is canceled. When transmit abort is completed, the TMTRF[1:0] flag in the TMSTSp register is set to B'01 (transmit abort has been completed) and the transmit request is canceled (clearing the TMTRM bit to 0). A message that is being transmitted or a message to be transmitted next according to the transmit priority determination cannot be aborted. However, when an arbitration lost or an error has occurred while a message for which the TMTAR bit is set to 1 is being transmitted, retransmission is not performed. (2) One-Shot Transmission Function (Retransmission Disabling Function) When the TMOM bit in the TMCp register is set to 1 (one-shot transmission is enabled), transmission is performed only once. Even if an arbitration lost or an error occurs, retransmission is not performed. One-shot transmit result is shown by the TMTRF[1:0] flag in the corresponding TMSTSp register. When one-shot transmit completes successfully, the TMTRF[1:0] flag is set to B'10 or B'11. When an arbitration lost or an error has occurred, the TMTRF[1:0] flag is set to B'01 (transmit abort has been completed). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1391 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.6.3 Transmission Using FIFO Buffers Messages of a volume of the FIFO buffer depth set by the CFDC[2:0] bits in the CFCCLk register can be stored in a single transmit/receive FIFO buffer. Messages are transmitted sequentially on a first-in, first-out basis. Transmit/receive FIFO buffers are linked to transmit buffers selected by the CFTML[1:0] bits in the CFCCHk register. When the CFE bit in the CFCCLk register is set to 1 (transmit/receive FIFO buffers are used), transmit/receive FIFO buffers become targets of transmit priority determination. Priority determination is made for only the message to be transmitted next in a FIFO buffer. When the CFE bit is set to 0 (no transmit/receive FIFO buffer is used), the CFEMP flag is set to 1 (the transmit/receive FIFO buffer contains no message (buffer empty)) at the timing below. * The transmit/receive FIFO buffer becomes empty immediately when the message in it is not being transmitted or is not to be transmitted next. * The transmit/receive FIFO buffer becomes empty after transmission completion, CAN bus error detection, or arbitration lost when the message in it is being transmitted or to be transmitted next. When the CFE bit is cleared to 0, all messages in transmit/receive FIFO buffers are lost and messages cannot be stored in FIFO buffers. Confirm that the CFEMP flag is set to 1 before setting the CFE bit to 1 again. (1) Interval Transmission Function To transmit messages from the same FIFO buffer while a transmit/receive FIFO buffer that is set to transmit mode is in use, message transmission interval time can be set. Immediately after the first message has been transmitted successfully from the FIFO buffer with the CFE bit in the CFCCLk register set to 1, the interval timer starts counting (after EOF7 of the CAN protocol). After that, when the interval time has passed, the next message is transmitted. The interval timer stops in channel reset mode or by clearing the CFE bit to 0. The interval time is set by the CFITT[7:0] bits in the CFCCHk register. When the interval timer is not used, set the CFITT[7:0] bits to H'00. Select an interval timer count source by the CFITR and CFITSS bits in the CFCCHk register. When the CFITR and CFITSS bits are set to B'00, the clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK/2 by the ITRCP[15:0] value is used as a count source. When the CFITR and CFITSS bits are set to B'10, the clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK/2 by the ITRCP[15:0] value x 10 is used as a count source. When the CFITR and CFITSS bits are set to B'x1, the CANi bit time clock is used as a count source. The interval time is calculated by the following equations where M is the set ITRCP[15:0] value and N is the set CFITT[7:0] value. 1. When CFITR and CFITSS = B'00 1 x2xMxN fCLK 2. When CFITR and CFITSS = B'10 1 x 2 x M x 10 x N fCLK 3. When CFITR and CFITSS = B'x1 (fCANBIT is CANi bit time clock frequency) 1 xN fCANBIT R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1392 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Figure 18-8 shows the interval timer block diagram. Figure 18-8. Interval Timer Block Diagram CFITR, CFITSS ITRCP[15:0] fCLK CFITT[7:0] B'00 Prescaler 1/2 B'10 1 10 Interval timer (Setting range: 0 to 255) B'x1 Count enable signal CANi bit time clock Remark ITRCP[15:0]: Bits in the GCFGH register CFITR, CFITSS, CFITT[7:0]: Bits in the CFCCHk register (k = 0) Figure 18-9 shows the interval timer timing chart. Figure 18-9. Interval Timer Timing Chart EOF H INT CAN bus L SOF ACK Prescaler of ITRCP[15:0] 499 . . . 0 499 . . . 499 . . . 0 0 499 . . . 0 499 . . . 0 499 . . . 499 . . . 0 499 . . . 0 0 1 Transmit complete signal 0 1 Count enable signal 0 0 Interval timer 10 9 8 ...... ... 1 0 1 FIFO transmit request 0 (1) (2) Interval time (logical value) = Remark (3) 1 fCLK Transmit priority determination and internal processing (4) x 2 x m (ITRCP[15:0] value) x CFITT[7:0] value fCLK : CPU/peripheral hardware clock ITRCP[15:0]: Bits in the GCFGH register (The set value is 500 in this figure.) CFITT[7:0]: Bits in the CFCCHk register (The set value is 10 in this figure.) (1) The interval timer starts counting upon completion of transmission. Since the prescaler is not initialized at the time of transmission completion, the first interval time contains an error of up to one count of the interval timer. (2) The interval timer is decremented by the next count enable signal. (3) When the interval timer has decreased to 0, the transmit/receive FIFO buffer issues a transmit request. (4) The transmit/receive FIFO buffer is determined for the next transmission by the priority determination, it starts transmitting data. Transmission starts with a delay of three CANi bit time clock cycles or less from the issue of transmit request. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1393 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.6.4 Transmit History Function Information of transmitted messages can be stored in the transmit history buffer. Each channel has a single transmit history buffer that can contain 8 sets of transmit history data. A message transmit source buffer type can be selected by the THLDTE bit in the THLCCi register. Whether to store transmit history data for each message can be set by the THLEN bit in the CFIDHk register. After transmit completes successfully, information of the following transmit messages is stored in the transmit history buffer as transmit history data. After successful completion of transmit, process may be delayed by up to 38 clocks of fCLK before the transmit history data is stored. * Buffer type B'01: Transmit buffer B'10: Transmit/receive FIFO buffer * Buffer number Number of source transmit buffer or transmit/receive FIFO buffer. This number depends on buffer types. See Table 18-11. * Label data Label information of transmit message Table 18-11. Transmit History Data Buffer Numbers Buffer type B'01 B'10 Buffer No. B'00 Transmit buffer 0 B'01 Transmit buffer 1 B'10 Transmit buffer 2 B'11 Transmit buffer 3 Numbers of transmit buffers linked to transmit/receive FIFO buffers by the CFTML[1:0] bits in the CFCCHk register. Label data is used to identify each message. A unique label data can be added to each message transmitted from a transmit buffer or transmit/receive FIFO buffer. Transmit history data can be read from the THLACCi register. If it is attempted to store new transmit history data while the buffer is full, the buffer overflows and the new data is discarded. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1394 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.7 Test Function The test function is classified into communication tests and global tests. Communication tests: Performed for each channel. * * * * Standard test mode Listen-only mode Self-test mode 0 (external loopback mode) Self-test mode 1 (internal loopback mode) Global tests: Performed in entire module * RAM test (read/write test) 18.7.1 Standard Test Mode Standard test mode allows CRC test. 18.7.2 Listen-Only Mode Listen-only mode allows reception of data frames and remote frames. Only recessive bits are transmitted on the CAN bus, and the ACK bit, overload flag, and active error flag are not transmitted. Listen-only mode is available for detecting the communication speed. Do not make a transmit request from any buffer in listen-only mode. Figure 18-10 shows the connection when listen-only mode is selected. Figure 18-10. Connection when Listen-Only Mode is Selected CTXDi CRXDi Recessive level CTXDi (internal) CRXDi (internal) Transmits the ACK bit, overload flag, and active error flag. Remark i = 0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1395 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.7.3 Self-Test Mode (Loopback Mode) In self-test mode, transmitted messages are compared with the receive rule of the own channel and the messages are stored in a buffer if they have passed through the filter processing. Messages transmitted from other CAN nodes are compared only with the receive rule for which the GAFLLB bit in the GAFLIDHj register (j = 0 to 15) is set to 0 (when a message transmitted from another CAN node is received). If the mirror function and self-test mode are both enabled, the self-test mode setting takes precedence. (1) Self-Test Mode 0 (External Loopback Mode) Self-test mode 0 is used to perform a loopback test within a channel including the CAN transceiver. In self-test mode 0, transmitted messages are handled as messages received through the CAN transceiver and are stored in a buffer. An ACK bit is generated to receive messages transmitted from the own CAN node. Figure 18-11 shows the connection when self-test mode 0 is selected. Figure 18-11. Connection when Self-Test Mode 0 is Selected CAN transceiver CTXDi CRXDi ACK CTXDi (internal) Remark CRXDi (internal) i=0 (2) Self-Test Mode 1 (Internal Loopback Mode) In self-test mode 1, transmitted messages are handled as received messages and are stored in a buffer. An ACK bit is generated to receive messages transmitted from the own CAN node. In self-test mode 1, internal feedback from the internal CTXDi pin to the internal CRXDi pin is performed. The external CRXDi pin input is isolated. The external CTXDi pin outputs only recessive bits. Figure 18-12 shows the connection when self-test mode 1 is selected. Figure 18-12. Connection when Self-Test Mode 1 is Selected CTXDi CRXDi Recessive level CTXDi (internal) Remark ACK CRXDi (internal) i=0 18.7.4 RAM Test The RAM test function allows accesses to all CAN RAM addresses. When the RAM test function is used, the RAM is divided into pages of 256 bytes each. RAM test page is set by the RTMPS[2:0] bits in the GTSTCFG register. Data in the set page can be read from and written to the RPGACCr register (r = 0 to 127). The available total RAM size is 544 bytes (H'0220). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1396 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.8 Interrupt The CAN module has 6 interrupts that are grouped into global interrupts and channel interrupts. Global interrupts (2 interrupts): * CAN global receive FIFO interrupt * CAN global error interrupt Channel interrupts (4 interrupts per channel): * CANi channel transmit interrupt CANi transmit complete interrupt CANi transmit abort interrupt CANi transmit/receive FIFO transmit complete interrupt (transmit mode) CANi transmit history interrupt * CANi transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt * CANi channel error interrupt * CANi wakeup interrupt * CAN interrupt except CANi wakeup interrupt When an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding CAN module interrupt request flag is set to 1 (interrupt request present). In that case, when the interrupt enable bit is set to 1 (enabling interrupts), an interrupt request is output from the CAN module. (Generation of interrupts also is controlled by an interrupt functions.) Setting the interrupt request flag to 0 (no interrupt request present) or setting the interrupt enable bit to 0 (disabling interrupts) clears the current interrupt request. The next interrupt request is not generated until the interrupt request is cleared. * CANi wakeup interrupt The CANi wakeup interrupt is generated in every mode when a falling edge in the CRXDi pin is detected. When the CANi wakeup interrupt is used, set the function of the corresponding port to CRXDi. The CANi wakeup interrupt is controlled by the interrupt function. For details on the setting of the interrupt functions, refer to CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS. Table 18-12 lists the CAN interrupt sources. Figure 18-13 shows the CAN global interrupt block diagram. Figure 18-14 shows the CAN channel interrupt block diagram. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1397 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-12. List of CAN Interrupt Sources Item Interrupt Source Corresponding Interrupt Request Flag Corresponding Interrupt Enable Bit Note Note Global CAN Receive FIFO 0 RFIF in the RFSTS0 register RFIE in the RFCC0 register interrupts global Receive FIFO 1 RFIF in the RFSTS1 register RFIE in the RFCC1 register DEF in the GERFLL register DEIE in the GCTRL register MES in the GERFLL register MEIE in the GCTRL register THLES in the GERFLL register THLEIE in the GCTRL register TMTRF[1:0] in the TMSTSp register TMIEp in the TMIEC register TMTRF[1:0] in the TMSTSp register TAIE in the CiCTRH register CFTXIF in the CFSTSk register CFTXIE in the CFCCLk register THLIF in the THLSTSi register THLIE in the THLCCi register CFRXIF in the CFSTSk register CFRXIE in the CFCCLk register BEF in the CiERFLL register BEIE in the CiCTRL register ALF in the CiERFLL register ALIE in the CiCTRL register BLF in the CiERFLL register BLIE in the CiCTRL register OVLF in the CiERFLL register OLIE in the CiCTRL register BORF in the CiERFLL register BORIE in the CiCTRL register BOEF in the CiERFLL register BOEIE in the CiCTRL register receive FIFO CAN global error Channel CANi CANi transmit interrupts channel complete transmit CANi transmit abort CANi transmit/receive FIFO transmit CANi transmit history CANi transmit/receive FIFO receive CANi channel error CANi wakeup Note EPF in the CiERFLL register EPIE in the CiCTRL register EWF in the CiERFLL register EWIE in the CiCTRL register None None For details on the interrupt request flags and interrupt enable bits, refer to CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS. i = 0, k = 0, p = 0 to 3 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1398 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Figure 18-13. CAN Global Interrupt Block Diagram RFSTS0.RFIF CAN global receive FIFO interrupt request RFCC0.RFIE RFSTS1.RFIF RFCC1.RFIE GERFLL.DEF CAN global error interrupt request GCTRL.DEIE CFSTSk.CFMLT GERFLL.MES RFSTSm.RFMLT GCTRL.MEIE THLSTSi.THLELT GERFLL.THLES GCTRL.THLEIE Remark i=0 k=0 m = 0, 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1399 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Figure 18-14. CAN Channel Interrupt Block Diagram CFSTSk.CFRXIF CANi transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt CFCCLk.CFRXIE TMIEC.TMIEp CANi channel transmit interrupt TMSTSp.TMTRF0 TMSTSp.TMTRF1 CiCTRH.TAIE CFSTSk.CFTXIF CFCCLk.CFTXIE THLSTSi.THLIF THLCCi.THLIE CiERFLL.BEF CiCTRL.BEIE CANi channel error interrupt CiERFLL.EWF CiCTRL.EWIE CiERFLL.EPF CiCTRL.EPIE CiERFLL.BOEF CiCTRL.BOEIE CiERFLL.BORF CiCTRL.BORIE CiERFLL.OVLF CiCTRL.OLIE CiERFLL.BLF CiCTRL.BLIE CiERFLL.ALF CiCTRL.ALIE CRXDi Remark Falling edge detection circuit CANi wakeup interrupt i=0 k=0 p = 0 to 3 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1400 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.9 RAM Window The CAN area from H'F03A0 to H'F0681 consists of two windows. The RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is used to switch the allocation of registers. [Registers allocated when the RPAGE bit is set to 0 (window 0 selected)] * CAN receive rule entry registers: GAFLIDLj, GAFLIDHj, GAFLMLj, GAFLMHj, GAFLPLj, GAFLPHj * CAN RAM test registers: RPGACCr [Registers allocated when the RPAGE bit is set to 1 (window 1 selected)] * * * * * CAN receive buffer registers: RMIDLn, RMIDHn, RMTSn, RMPTRn, RMDF0n to RMDF3n CAN receive FIFO access registers: RFIDLm, RFIDHm, RFTSm, RFPTRm, RFDF0m to RFDF3m CANi transmit/receive FIFO access registers: CFIDLk, CFIDHk, CFTSk, CFPTRk, CFDF0k to CFDF3k CANi transmit buffer registers: TMIDLp, TMIDHp, TMPTRp, TMDF0p to TMDF3p CANi transmit history buffer access register: THLACCi Figure 18-15. RAM Window Internal bus 0 1 Window 0 Window 1 CAN receive rule entry registers RAM window select bit CAN receive buffer registers CAN RAM test registers CAN receive FIFO access registers CANi transmit/receive FIFO access registers CANi transmit buffer registers CANi transmit history buffer access register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1401 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.10 Initial Settings The CAN module initializes the CAN RAM after the operation of the CAN module is enabled. The RAM initialization time is 276 cycles of fCLK. The GRAMINIT flag in the GSTS register is set to 1 (CAN RAM initialization is ongoing) during the RAM initialization and is cleared to 0 (CAN RAM initialization is finished) when the initialization is completed. Make CAN settings after the GRAMINIT flag is cleared to 0. Figure 18-16 shows the CAN setting procedure after the operation of the CAN module is enabled. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1402 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Figure 18-16. CAN Setting Procedure after the Operation of the CAN Module is Enabled Start Enable the CAN module. (Set the CAN0EN bit in the PER2 register to 1) * This setting is not required when fx is not in use. * When fx is to be selected, the following condition must be satisfied. fCLK fX 2 Start supply of the CAN clock. (Set the CAN0MCKE bit in the CANCKSEL register to 1) Is the GRAMINIT flag in the GSTS register 0? No Yes Transition from global stop mode to global reset mode (Set the GSLPR bit in the GCTRL register to 0) Transition from channel stop mode to channel reset mode (Set the CSLPR bit in the CiCTRL register to 0) * Clock * Bit timing * Communication speed * Timestamp * Mirror function * DLC filter * Transmit priority Setting of GCFGH and GCFGL registers Setting of CiCFGH and CiCFGL registers GAFLCFG register GAFLIDLj, GAFLIDHj, GAFLMLj, GAFLMHj, GAFLPLj, and GAFLPHj registers Receive rule setting Receive buffer, receive FIFO buffer, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, transmit buffer, transmit history buffer Buffer setting GCTRL register setting Global interrupt CiCTRL register setting Channel interrupt, bus off recovery, error indication Interrupt setting Transition to global operating mode Interrupt control registers of interrupt controller Note 1 Has the transition to global operating mode been completed? No Yes Transition to channel communication mode Has the transition to channel communication mode been completed? Notes 2, 3 Note 2 No Yes End Notes 1. If the high-speed system clock (fMX) is to be selected as the LIN communications clock source, and the highspeed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH) or the PLL clock with its source as the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is to be selected as the source of the clock signal for fCLK, make sure that the condition (LIN communications clock source) < fCLK is satisfied. 2. If the high-speed system clock is to be selected as fCLK, do not select fX as fCAN. Remark i = 0 j = 0 to 15 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1403 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.10.1 Clock Setting Set the CAN clock (fCAN) as a clock source of the CAN module. Select the clock obtained by frequency-dividing fCLK by 2 (fCLK/2) or the X1 clock (fx) with the DCS bit in the GCFGL register. 18.10.2 Bit Timing Setting In the CAN protocol, one bit of a communication frame consists of three segments, SS, TSEG1, and TSEG2. Two of the segments, TSEG1 and TSEG2, can be set by the CiCFGH register for each channel. Sample point timing can be determined by setting two segments. This timing can be adjusted in units of 1 Time Quantum (referred to as Tq hereinafter). 1 Tq equals to one CANi Tq clock cycle. The CANi Tq clock is obtained by selecting the clock source with the DCS bit in the GCFGL register and selecting the clock division ratio with the BRP[9:0] bits in the CiCFGL register. Figure 18-17 shows the bit timing chart. Table 18-13 shows an example of bit timing setting. Figure 18-17. Bit Timing Chart R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1404 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-13. Example of Bit Timing Setting Set Value (Tq) Sample Point (%) 1 Bit 8 Tq 10 Tq 16 Tq 20 Tq 24 Tq SS TSEG1 TSEG2 SJW Note: See Figure 18-17. 1 4 3 1 62.50 1 5 2 1 75.00 1 6 3 1 70.00 1 7 2 1 80.00 1 10 5 1 68.75 1 11 4 1 75.00 1 13 6 1 70.00 1 15 4 3 80.00 1 15 8 1 66.67 1 16 7 1 70.83 18.10.3 Communication Speed Setting Set the CAN communication speed for each channel using the fCAN, baud rate prescaler division value (BRP[9:0] bits in the CiCFGL register), and Tq count per bit time. Figure 18-18 shows the CAN clock control block diagram, and Table 18-14 shows an example of the communication speed setting. Figure 18-18. CAN Clock Control Block Diagram BRP[9:0] fCLK 1/2 0 1 fx Communication speed = fCAN Baud rate prescaler 1 / (P+1) DCS fCANTQi P = 0 to 1023 fCAN Baud rate prescaler division value x (Tq count of 1 bit time) Caution When fx is to be selected, the following condition must be satisfied. fX fCLK Notes 1, 2 2 Notes 1. If the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH) or the PLL clock with its source as the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is to be selected as the source of the clock signal for f CLK, make sure that the condition fX < fCLK/2 is satisfied. 2. If the high-speed system clock is to be selected as f CLK, do not select fX as fCAN. Remark i = 0 DCS: Bit in the GCFGL register BRP[9:0]: Bits in the CiCFGL register fCAN: CAN clock fCANTQi: CANi Tq clock R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1405 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Table 18-14. Example of Communication Speed Setting fCAN Note 16 MHz 8 MHz 8 Tq (2) 8 Tq (1) Communication Speed 1 Mbps 16 Tq (1) 500 Kbps 250 Kbps 83.3 Kbps 33.3 Kbps Note R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 8 Tq (4) 8 Tq (2) 16 Tq (2) 16 Tq (1) 8 Tq (8) 8 Tq (4) 16 Tq (4) 16 Tq (2) 8 Tq (24) 8 Tq (12) 16 Tq (12) 16 Tq (6) 8 Tq (60) 8 Tq (30) 10 Tq (48) 10 Tq (24) 16 Tq (30) 16 Tq (15) 20 Tq (24) 20 Tq (12) Values in ( ) are baud rate prescaler division values. 1406 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.10.4 Receive Rule Setting Receive rules can be set using receive rule-related registers. Up to 16 receive rules can be registered. Figure 18-19 shows the receive rule setting procedure. Figure 18-19. Receive Rule Setting Procedure R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1407 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.10.5 Buffer Setting Set sizes and interrupt sources of buffers. For transmit/receive FIFO buffers that are set to transmit mode, set transmit buffers to be linked. Figure 18-20 shows the buffer configuration. Figure 18-21 shows the buffer setting procedure. Figure 18-20. Buffer Configuration Receive buffer 0 Receive buffers Maximum 16 buffers Receive buffer n Receive FIFO 0 Receive FIFO buffers Receive FIFO 1 Transmit/receive FIFO 0 Transmit/receive FIFO buffer Transmit buffer 0 Transmit buffers 4 buffers fixed Transmit buffer 3 Caution Receive buffers, receive FIFO buffers, transmit/receive FIFO buffer, and transmit buffers are located in succession. Remark n = 0 to 15 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1408 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Figure 18-21. Buffer Setting Procedure R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1409 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.11 Reception Procedure 18.11.1 Receive Buffer Reading Procedure When the processing to store received messages in a receive buffer starts, the RMNSn flag (n = 0 to 15) in the RMND0 register is set to 1 (receive buffer n contains a new message). Messages can be read from the RMIDLn, RMIDHn, RMTSn, RMPTRn, and RMDF0n to RMDF3n registers. If the next message has been received before the current message is read from the receive buffer, the message is overwritten. Figure 18-22 shows the receive buffer reading procedure. Figure 18-22. Receive Buffer Reading Procedure R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1410 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Figure 18-23. Receive Buffer Reception Timing Chart (1) When the ID field in a message has been received, the acceptance filter processing starts. (2) When the message matches the receive rule of the corresponding channel and the message has been successfully received, the routing processing to transfer the message to the specified buffer starts. When the DCE bit in the GCFGL register is set to 1 (DLC check is enabled), the DLC filter processing starts at this time. (3) When the message has passed through the DLC filter processing, the processing to store the message in the specified receive buffer starts. When the message storage processing starts, the corresponding RMNSn flag in the RMND0 register is set to 1 (receive buffer n contains a new message (n = 0 to 15)). If other channels are performing filter processing or transmit priority determination processing, the routing processing and the storage processing may be delayed. (4) When the ID field of the next message has been received, the acceptance filter processing starts. (5) When the message matches the receive rule of the corresponding channel and the message has been successfully received, the routing processing to transfer the message to the specified buffer starts. When the DCE bit in the GCFGL register is set to 1 (DLC check is enabled), the DLC filter processing starts at this time. (6) When the corresponding RMNSn flag is cleared to 0 (receive buffer n contains no new message (n = 0 to 15)), this flag is set to 1 again when the message storage processing starts. Even if the RMNSn flag remains 1, a new message is overwritten to the receive buffer. The RMNSn flag should not be cleared to 0 during storage of messages. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1411 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.11.2 FIFO Buffer Reading Procedure When received messages have been stored in one or more receive FIFO buffers or a transmit/receive FIFO buffer that is set to receive mode, the corresponding message count display counter (RFMC[5:0] bits in the RFSTSm register (m = 0, 1) or CFMC[5:0] bits in the CFSTSk register) is incremented. At this time, when the RFIE bit (receive FIFO interrupt is enabled) in the RFCCm register or the CFRXIE bit (transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt is enabled) in the CFCCLk register is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated. Received messages can be read from the RFIDLm, RFIDHm, RFTSm, RFPTRm, and RFDF0m to RFDF3m registers (receive FIFO buffers) or the CFIDLk, CFIDHk, CFTSk, CFPTRk, and CFDF0k to CFDF3k registers (transmit/receive FIFO buffers). Messages in FIFO buffers can be read sequentially on a first-in, first-out basis. When the message count display counter value matches the FIFO buffer depth (a value set by the RFDC[2:0] bits in the RFCCm register or the CFDC[2:0] bits in the CFCCLk register), the RFFLL or CFFLL flag is set to 1 (the receive FIFO buffer is full). When all messages have been read out of the FIFO buffer, the RFEMP flag in the RFSTSm register or the CFEMP flag in the CFSTSk register is set to 1 (the receive FIFO buffer contains no unread message (buffer empty)). If the RFE bit or the CFE bit is cleared to 0 (no receive FIFO buffer is used) with the interrupt request flag (RFIF flag in the RFSTSm register or CFRXIF flag in the CFSTSk register) set to 1 (a receive FIFO interrupt request is present), the interrupt request flag is not automatically cleared to 0. Clear the interrupt request flag to 0 by the program. Figure 18-24. Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer Reading Procedure Start Is transmit/receive FIFO buffer empty? (Is the CFEMP bit in the CFSTSk register 1?) Yes No Read messages from registers CFIDLk, CFIDHk, CFTSk, CFPTRk, and CFDF0k to CFDF3k. Read messages when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is set to 1. Set the CFPCTRk register to H'FF. End Remark R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 k=0 1412 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) Figure 18-25. FIFO Buffer Reception Timing Chart ID H CRC delimiter EOF Control ID INT Control EOF INT CAN bus L SOF ACK Acceptance filter processing [Transmit/receive FIFO buffer (receive mode)] CFDC[2:0] bits SOF Routing and storage processing 0 ACK Acceptance filter processing Routing and storage processing 1 1 CFE bit 0 0 CFMC[5:0] bits 1 0 1 1 CFEMP flag 0 1 CFRXIF flag 0 Cleared by the program [Receive FIFO buffer] RFDC[2:0] bits 0 3 1 RFE bit 0 1 0 RFMC[5:0] bits 1 RFEMP flag 0 1 RFIF flag 0 (1) Remark (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) k = 0, m = 0, 1 CFDC[2:0], CFE: Bits in the CFCCLk register CFMC[5:0], CFEMP, CFRXIF: Flags in the CFSTSk register RFDC[2:0], RFE: Bits in the RFCCm register RFMC[5:0], RFEMP, RFIF: Flags in the RFSTSm register (1) When the ID field in a message has been received, the acceptance filter processing starts. (2) When the message matches the receive rule of the corresponding channel and the message has been successfully received, the routing processing to transfer the message to the specified buffer starts. When the DCE bit in the GCFGL register is set to 1 (DLC check is enabled), the DLC filter processing starts at this time. (3) When the message has passed through the DLC filter processing and the CFE value in the CFCCLk register is 1 (transmit/receive FIFO buffers are used) and the CFDC[2:0] value in the CFCCLk register is B'001 or more, the message is stored in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer that is set to receive mode. The CFMC[5:0] value in the CFSTSk register is incremented and becomes H'01. When the CFIM bit in the CFCCLk register is set to 1 (a FIFO receive interrupt request is generated each time a message has been received), the CFRXIF flag in the CFSTSk register is set to 1 (a transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt request is present). The CFRXIF flag can be reset to 0 by the program. (4) When the ID field of the next message has been received, the acceptance filter processing starts. (5) Read received messages from the CFIDLk, CFIDHk, CFTSk, CFPTRk, and CFDF0k to CFDF3k registers and write H'FF to the CFPCTRk register. Thereby the CFMC[5:0] bits in the CFSTSk register are decremented and become H'00, and the CFEMP flag in the CFSTSk register becomes 1 (the transmit/receive FIFO buffer contains no message (buffer empty)). (6) When the message matches the receive rule of the corresponding channel and the message has been successfully received, the routing processing to transfer the message to the specified buffer starts. When the DCE bit in the GCFGL register is set to 1 (DLC check is enabled), the DLC filter processing starts at this time. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1413 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) (7) The message is stored in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer set in receive mode, when the message has passed through the DLC filter process if the CFE bit is set to 1 (transmit/receive FIFO buffers are used) and the CFDC[2:0] bits are set to B'001 or more. The CFMC[5:0] value is incremented to H'01. When the CFIM bit is set to 1 (an interrupt occurs each time a message has been received), the CFRXIF flag is set to 1 (a transmit/receive FIFO receive interrupt request is present). The message is stored in the receive FIFO buffer, if the RFE bit in the RFCCm register is set to 1 (receive FIFO buffers are used) and RFDC[2:0] bits in the RFCCm register are set to B'001 or more. The RFMC[5:0] value in the RFSTSm register is incremented to H'01. When the RFIM bit in the RFCCm register is set to 1 (an interrupt occurs each time a message has been received), the RFIF flag in the RFSTSm register is set to 1 (a receive FIFO interrupt request is present). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1414 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.12 Transmission Procedure 18.12.1 Procedure for Transmission from Transmit Buffers Figure 18-26 shows the procedure for transmission from transmit buffers. Figure 18-27 shows a timing chart where messages are transmitted from two transmit buffers and transmission has been successfully completed. Figure 18-28 shows a timing chart where messages are transmitted from two transmit buffers and transmit abort has been completed. Figure 18-26. Procedure for Transmission from Transmit Buffers Start Store messages in transmit buffers (registers TMIDLp, TMIDHp, TMPTRp, and TMDF0p to TMDF3p) Write messages when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is set to 1. Set the TMTR bit in the corresponding TMCp register to 1 (transmission is requested). End Remark p = 0 to 3 Figure 18-27. Transmit Buffer Transmission Timing Chart (Transmission Completed Successfully) Example of transmission from transmit buffers a and b Determine next transmit priority Determine next transmit priority H CAN bus [Transmit buffer a] L SOF CRC delimiter EOF CRC delimiter EOF INT SOF INT 1 TMTR bit 0 1 TMTSTS flag 0 TMTRF[1:0] flag B'00 B'00 B'10 1 TMTCSTSa flag 0 TMTASTSa flag 1 0 [Transmit buffer b] TMTR bit 1 0 1 TMTSTS flag 0 TMTRF[1:0] flag TMTCSTSb flag B'10 B'00 1 0 TMTASTSb flag 1 0 (1) Remark (2) (3) (4) a = 0 to 3, b = 0 to 3 TMTR: Bit in the TMCa or TMCb register TMTSTS, TMTRF[1:0]: Flags in the TMSTSa or TMSTSb register TMTCSTSa, TMTCSTSb: Flag in the TMTCSTS register TMTASTSa, TMTASTSb: Flag in the TMTASTS register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1415 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) (1) When the TMTR bit in the TMCa register is set to 1 while the CAN bus is idle, the transmit priority determination processing starts to determine the highest-priority transmit buffer. If transmit buffer a is determined to be the highest-priority transmit buffer, the TMTSTS flag in the corresponding TMSTSa register is set to 1 (transmission is in progress) and the CAN channel starts transmitting data. (2) When a transmit request from a buffer is present, the priority determination starts with the CRC delimiter for the next transmission. (3) When transmit completes successfully, the TMTRF[1:0] flag in the TMSTSa register is set to B'10 (transmission has been completed (without transmit abort request)), the TMTSTS flag and the TMTR bit in the TMCa register are cleared to 0, and the TMTCSTSa bit in the TMTCSTS register is set to 1. When the TMIEa value in the TMIEC register is 1 (transmit buffer interrupt is enabled), a CANi transmit interrupt request is generated. To clear the interrupt request, set the TMTRF[1:0] flag to B'00 (transmission is in progress or no transmit request is present). (4) Before starting the next transmission, set the TMTRF[1:0] flag to B'00. Write the next message to the transmit buffer, and then set the TMTR bit to 1 (transmission is requested). The TMTR bit can be set to 1 only when the TMTRF[1:0] flag value is B'00. If an arbitration lost has occurred after transmission is started, the TMTSTS flag is cleared to 0. The transmit priority determination is reexecuted at the beginning of the CRC delimiter to search the highest-priority transmit buffer. If an error has occurred during transmission or after arbitration lost, the priority determination processing is reexecuted during transmission of an error frame. Figure 18-28. Transmit Buffer Transmission Timing Chart (Transmit Abort Completed) Example of transmission from transmit buffers a and b Determine next transmit priority Determine next transmit priority Determine next transmit priority H CAN bus L [Transmit buffer a] SOF CRC delimiter EOF INT SOF CRC delimiter EOF INT 1 TMTR bit 0 1 TMTAR bit 0 1 TMTSTS flag 0 TMTRF[1:0] flag TMTCSTSa flag B'00 B'11 B'00 1 0 1 TMTASTSa flag 0 [Transmit buffer b] 1 TMTR bit 0 1 TMTAR bit 0 1 TMTSTS flag 0 B'00 TMTRF[1:0] flag B'01 1 TMTCSTSb flag 0 1 TMTASTSb flag 0 (1) Remark (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) a = 0 to 3, b = 0 to 3 TMTR: Bit in the TMCa or TMCb register TMTSTS, TMTRF[1:0]: Flags in the TMSTSa or TMSTSb register TMTCSTSa, TMTCSTSb: Flag in the TMTCSTS register TMTASTSa, TMTASTSb: Flag in the TMTASTS register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1416 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) (1) When the TMTR bit in the TMCa register is set to 1 while the CAN bus is idle, the transmit priority determination processing starts to determine the highest-priority transmit buffer. If transmit buffer a is determined to be the highest-priority transmit buffer, the TMTSTS flag in the corresponding TMSTSa register is set to 1 (transmission is in progress) and the CAN channel starts transmitting data. (2) When it is determined that the transmit buffer is used for the next transmission or transmission is in progress, message transmission is not aborted unless an error or arbitration lost occurs even if the TMTAR bit is set to 1 (transmit abort is requested). (3) The priority determination starts with the CRC delimiter for the next transmission. In this timing chart, buffer b is not selected as the next transmit buffer. (4) When transmit completes successfully, the TMTRF[1:0] flag in the TMSTSa register is set to B'11 (transmission has been completed (with transmit abort request)), the TMTSTS flag and the TMTR bit in the TMCa register are cleared to 0, and the TMTCSTSa bit in the TMTCSTS register is set to 1. When the TMIEa value in the TMIEC register is 1 (transmit buffer interrupt is enabled), a CANi transmit interrupt request is generated. To clear the interrupt request, set the TMTRF[1:0] flag to B'00 (transmission is in progress or no transmit request is present). (5) While another CAN node is transmitting data on the CAN bus (TMTSTS flag = 0), if the TMTAR bit is set to 1 while the corresponding channel is determining transmit priority, the TMTR bit cannot be cleared to 0. (6) After the internal processing time has passed, the transmission is terminated and the TMTRF[1:0] flag is set to B'01 and the TMTASTSb bit in the TMTASTS register is set to 1. When the transmit buffer is not transmitting data and is not selected as the next transmit buffer and priority determination is not being made, an abort request is immediately accepted and the TMTRF[1:0] flag is set to B'01. At this time, the TMTR and TMTAR bits are cleared to 0. When transmit abort is completed with the TAIE bit in the CiCTRH register set to 1 (transmit abort interrupt is enabled), an interrupt request is generated. To clear the interrupt request, set the TMTRF[1:0] flag to B'00. If an arbitration lost has occurred after the CAN channel started transmission, the TMTSTS bit is cleared to 0. The transmit priority determination is reexecuted at the beginning of the CRC delimiter to search the highest-priority transmit buffer. If an error has occurred during transmission or after arbitration lost, the priority determination processing is reexecuted during transmission of an error frame. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1417 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.12.2 Procedure for Transmission from Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffers Figure 18-29 shows the procedure for transmission from transmit/receive FIFO buffers. Figure 18-30 shows a timing chart where messages are transmitted from the transmit/receive FIFO buffers and transmission has been successfully completed. Figure 18-31 shows a timing chart where messages are transmitted from the transmit/receive FIFO buffers and transmit abort has been completed. Figure 18-29. Procedure for Transmission from Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffers Start Is transmit/receive FIFO buffer full? (Is CFFLL flag in the CFSTSk register 1?) Yes No Store messages in registers CFIDLk, CFIDHk, CFPTRk, CFDF0k to CFDF3k. Write messages when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is set to 1. Set the CFPCTRk register to H'FF. End Remark k=0 Figure 18-30. Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer Transmission Timing Chart (Transmission Completed Successfully) Example of transmission from transmit/receive FIFO buffer k CRC delimiter H CAN bus EOF CRC delimiter INT EOF INT L SOF SOF Determine next transmit priority Determine next transmit priority Determine next transmit priority [Transmit/receive FIFO buffer k] 0 CFDC[2:0] bits 1 1 CFE bit 0 0 CFMC[5:0] bits 1 1 2 0 1 CFEMP flag 0 1 CFTXIF flag 0 (1) Remark (2) (3) (4) (5) k=0 CFDC[2:0], CFE: Bits in the CFCCLk register CFMC[5:0], CFEMP, CFTXIF: Flags in the CFSTSk register R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1418 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) (1) While the CAN bus is idle, when the CFE value in the CFCCLk register is 1 (transmit/receive FIFO buffer k is used) and the CFDC[2:0] value in the CFCCLk register is B'001 (4 messages) or more and the CFMC[5:0] value in the CFSTSk register is H'01 or more, the priority determination processing starts to determine the highest-priority transmit message. When the highest-priority transmit message has been determined, transmission of the message starts. (2) When a transmit request from a buffer is present, the priority determination starts with the CRC delimiter for the next transmission. (3) When transmit completes successfully, the CFMC[5:0] value in the CFSTSk register is decremented. Setting the CFIM bit in the CFCCLk register to 1 (a FIFO transmit interrupt request is generated each time a message has been transmitted) sets the CFTXIF flag in the CFSTSk register to 1 (a transmit/receive FIFO transmit interrupt request is present). (4) The CFTXIF flag can be cleared by the program. (5) Message transmission from transmit/receive FIFO buffer k has been completed and the CFMC[5:0] value in the CFSTSk register is decremented. The CFMC[5:0] bits are cleared to H'00 and therefore the CFEMP flag in the CFSTSk register is set to 1 (the transmit/receive FIFO buffer contains no message (buffer empty)). Transmission is continued until the CFEMP flag is set to 1. It is possible to continuously store transmit messages in FIFO buffers until the CFFLL flag in the CFSTSk register is set to 1 (the transmit/receive FIFO buffer is full). Figure 18-31. Transmit/Receive FIFO Buffer Transmission Timing Chart (Transmit Abort Completed) Example of transmission from transmit/receive FIFO buffer k CRC delimiter EOF H CRC delimiter EOF INT INT CAN bus L SOF SOF Determine next transmit priority Determine next transmit priority Determine next transmit priority [Transmit/receive FIFO buffer k] 0 CFDC[2:0] bits 1 1 CFE bit 0 CFMC[5:0] bits 0 2 1 0 3 0 1 CFEMP flag 0 1 CFTXIF flag 0 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Remark k = 0 CFDC[2:0], CFE: Bits in the CFCCLk register CFMC[5:0], CFEMP, CFTXIF: Flags in the CFSTSk register (1) While the CAN bus is idle, when the CFE value in the CFCCLk register is 1 (transmit/receive FIFO buffer k is used) and the CFDC[2:0] value in the CFCCLk register is B'001 (4 messages) or more and the CFMC[5:0] value in the CFSTSk register is H'01 or more, the priority determination processing starts to determine the highest-priority transmit message. When the highest-priority transmit message has been determined, transmission of the message starts. (2) When transmission is in progress or it is determined that the transmit/receive FIFO buffer is used for the next transmission, message transmission is not aborted unless an error or arbitration lost occurs even if the CFE bit is set to 0 (no transmit/receive FIFO buffer k is used). (3) When a transmit request from a buffer is present, the priority determination starts with the CRC delimiter for the next transmission. In this figure, transmit/receive FIFO buffer k is not selected as a buffer for the next transmission. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1419 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) (4) When transmit completes successfully, the CFMC[5:0] value is cleared to H'00. Setting the CFIM bit to 1 (a FIFO transmit interrupt request is generated each time a message has been transmitted) sets the CFTXIF flag in the CFSTSk register to 1 (a transmit/receive FIFO transmit interrupt request is present). The CFTXIF flag can be cleared by the program. (5) If another CAN node on the CAN bus is transmitting data (not from transmit/receive FIFO buffer k), transmit/receive FIFO buffer k cannot be disabled immediately even if the CFE bit in the CFCCLk register is cleared to 0 (no transmit/receive FIFO buffer k is used) during transmit priority determination. (The CFEMP flag in the CFSTSk register is not set to 1 (the transmit/receive FIFO buffer contains no message (buffer empty)) immediately.) (6) After the internal processing time has passed, transmit/receive FIFO buffers are disabled and the CFMC[5:0] bits in the CFSTSk register are cleared to H'00 and the CFEMP flag is set to 1. When the transmit/receive FIFO buffer k is not transmitting data and is not selected as the next transmit buffer and priority determination is not in progress, the transmit/receive FIFO buffer k is immediately disabled. (The CFMC[5:0] bits are cleared to H'00 and the CFEMP flag is set to 1.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1420 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.12.3 Transmit History Buffer Reading Procedure Transmit history data can be read from the THLACCi register. The next data can be accessed by writing H'FF to the corresponding THLPCTRi register after reading a set of data. Figure 18-32 shows the transmit history buffer reading procedure. Figure 18-32. Transmit History Buffer Reading Procedure Start Is transmit history buffer empty? (Is the THLEMP bit in the THLSTSi register 1?) Yes No Read transmit history data from the THLACCi register. Read data when the RPAGE bit in the GRWCR register is set to 1. Set the THLPCTRi register to H'FF. End Remark R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 i=0 1421 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.13 Test Settings 18.13.1 Self-Test Mode Setting Procedure Self-test mode allows communication test on a channel basis by receiving messages transmitted from the own node. Figure 18-33 shows the self-test mode setting procedure. Figure 18-33. Self-Test Mode Setting Procedure Start Set the CHMDC[1:0] bits in the CiCTRL register to B'10. Is CHLTSTS flag in the CiSTSL register 1 (in channel halt mode)? Channel halt mode No Yes Set CTME bit in the CiCTRH register to 1. Set the CTMS[1:0] bits to B'10 or B'11. Set the CHMDC[1:0] bits in the CiCTRL register to B'00. Are all CSLPSTS, CHLTSTS, and CRSTSTS flags in the CiSTSL register 0? Communication test mode is enabled. Self-test mode 0 (B'10) or 1 (B'11) is selected. Channel communication mode No Yes Perform self-test in channel i. Set the CHMDC[1:0] bits in the CiCTRL register to B'10. Is CHLTSTS flag in the CiSTSL register 1 (in channel halt mode)? Channel halt mode No Yes Set CTME bit in the CiCTRH register to 0. Set the CTMS[1:0] bits to B'00. Communication test mode is disabled. Standard test mode End Remark R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 i=0 1422 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.13.2 Protection Unlock Procedure Since the global test functions shown in Table 18-15 are protected, write unlock data 1 and unlock data 2 in succession to the LOCK[15:0] bits in the GLOCKK register, and then set each test function bit to 1. Table 18-15. Protection Unlock Data for Test Functions Test Function Protection Unlock Data 1 Protection Unlock Data 2 Target Bit RAM test H'7575 H'8A8A RTME bit in the GTSTCTRL register If an incorrect value has been written to the LOCK[15:0] bits, retry the procedure above from writing of unlock data 1. Figure 18-34 shows the protection unlock procedure. Figure 18-34. Protection Unlock Procedure R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1423 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.13.3 RAM Test Setting Procedure RAM tests include CAN RAM read/write test. The read/write test verifies that data written to the RAM is read correctly. Before closing the RAM test, write H'0000 to all pages of the CAN RAM. Figure 18-35 shows the RAM test setting procedure. Figure 18-35. RAM Test Setting Procedure R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1424 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) 18.14 Notes on the CAN Module * When changing a global mode, check the GSLPSTS, GHLTSTS, and GRSTSTS flags in the GSTS register for transitions. When changing a channel mode, check the CSLPSTS, CHLTSTS, and CRSTSTS flags in the CiSTSL register for transitions. * The acceptance filter processing checks receive rules sequentially in ascending order from the minimum rule number. If the same ID, IDE bit, or RTR bit value is set for multiple receive rules, the minimum number of receive rule is used for the acceptance filter processing. If the message does not pass through the subsequent DLC filter processing, the data processing is terminated without returning to the acceptance filter processing and the message is not stored in the buffer. * When linking transmit buffers to transmit/receive FIFO buffers, set the control register (TCMp) of the corresponding transmit buffer to H'00. The status register (TMSTSp) of the corresponding transmit buffer should not be used. Flags in other status registers (registers TMTRSTS, TMTCSTS, and TMTASTS), which correspond to transmit buffers linked to transmit/receive FIFO buffers remain unchanged. Set the enable bit in the corresponding interrupt enable register (the TMIEC register) to 0 (transmit buffer interrupt is disabled). * When the CANi bit time clock is selected as a timestamp counter clock source, the timestamp counter stops when the corresponding channel has transitioned to channel reset mode or channel halt mode. * In case of an attempt to store a new receive message when the receive FIFO buffer and the transmit/receive FIFO buffer are full, the new message is discarded. If you wish to store a new transmit message in the transmit/receive FIFO buffer, check that the transmit/receive FIFO buffer is not full. * Since an interrupt request flag in the CAN module is not automatically cleared to 0 when an interrupt is accepted, the flags must be cleared to 0 by software. After the corresponding interrupt request flag has been set to 1, an interrupt is not generated even if an interrupt source condition is satisfied. * In order to generate the CAN related interrupt that several interrupt sources are gathered, the following condition should be met: All interrupt request flags corresponding to these interrupt sources in the CAN module are set to 0 (note that this only applies to those interrupt request flags for which the corresponding interrupt enable bits shown in Table 1812 are set to 1). * The values of unused CAN receive buffer registers (RMIDLn, RMIDHn, RMTSn, RMPTRn, and RMDF0n to RMDF3n), CAN receive FIFO access registers (RFIDLm, RFIDHm, RFTSm, RFPTRm, and RFDF0m to RFDF3m), and CANi transmit/receive FIFO access registers (CFIDLk, CFIDHk, CFTSk, CFPTRk, and CFDF0k to CFDF3k) become undefined once the CAN module exits from global reset mode and enters global operation mode or global test mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1425 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC CHAPTER 19 DTC The DTC (data transfer controller) is a function that transfers data between memories without using the CPU. The DTC is activated by a peripheral function interrupt to perform data transfers. The DTC and CPU use the same bus, and the DTC takes priority over the CPU in using the bus. To control DTC data transfers, control data comprised of a transfer source address, a transfer destination address, and operating modes are allocated in the DTC control data area. Each time the DTC is activated, the DTC reads control data to perform data transfers. The DTC control data area is allocated in the RAM space set by the DTCBAR register. The high-speed transfer is realized by allocating the dedicated control data in the SFR area instead of the RAM area. 19.1 Overview Table 19-1 lists the DTC specifications. Table 19-1. DTC Specifications Item Specification Activation sources 44 sources max. Allocatable control data 24 sets/2 sets (high-speed transfer) Address space Address space which can be Sources Note 2 64 Kbytes (F0000H to FFFFFH), excluding general-purpose registers 1st SFR area, RAM area (excluding general-purpose registers), mirror areaNote 1, data flash memory areaNote 1, 2nd SFR area transferred Destinations 1st SFR area, RAM area (excluding general-purpose registers), 2nd SFR area Maximum number Normal mode 256 times of transfers Repeat mode 255 times Maximum size of Normal mode 256 bytes/1 byte (high-speed transfer) block to be (8-bit transfer) transferred Normal mode 512 bytes/2 bytes (high-speed transfer) (16-bit transfer) Repeat mode 255 bytes/1 byte at 8-bit transfer (high-speed transfer)/2 bytes at 16-bit transfer (high-speed transfer) Unit of transfers Transfer mode Normal mode Repeat mode Address control Normal mode Repeat mode Priority of activation sources Interrupt request Normal mode Repeat mode Transfer start Transfer stop Normal mode Repeat mode 8 bits/16 bits Transfers end on completion of the transfer causing the DTCCTj and HDTCCTm registers value to change from 1 to 0. On completion of the transfer causing the values of the DTCCTj and HDTCCTm registers to change from 1 to 0, the repeat area address is initialized and the DTRLDj register value is reloaded to the DTCCTj and HDTCCTm registers to continue transfers. Fixed or incremented Addresses of the area not selected as the repeat area are fixed or incremented. Refer to Table 19-5 DTC Activation Sources and DTC Vector Addresses. When the data transfer causing the DTCCTj and HDTCCTm registers value to change from 1 to 0 is performed, the activation source interrupt request is generated for the CPU, and interrupt handling is performed on completion of the data transfer. When the data transfer causing the values of the DTCCTj and HDTCCTm registers to change from 1 to 0 is performed while the RPTINT and HRPTINTm bits in the DTCCRj and HDTCCRm registers, respectively are 1 (interrupt generation enabled), the activation source interrupt request is generated for the CPU, and interrupt handling is performed on completion of the transfer. When bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 in the DTCENi registers are 1 (activation enabled), data transfer is started each time the corresponding DTC activation sources are generated. When bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 are set to 0 (activation disabled). When the data transfer causing the DTCCTj and HDTCCTm registers value to change from 1 to 0 is completed. When bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 are set to 0 (activation disabled). When the data transfer causing the values of the DTCCTj and HDTCCTm registers to change from 1 to 0 is completed while the RPTINT bit is 1 (interrupt generation enabled). Operation in HALT state DTC operates standby mode SNOOZE state DTC operates STOP state DTC stops R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1426 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC Notes 1. In the HALT, STOP, and SNOOZE modes, these areas cannot be set as the sources for DTC transfer since the flash memory is stopped. 2. High-speed transfer is enabled only for the 1st SFR area and the 2nd SFR area. Remark Products of groups A, B, C, and D: i = 0 to 4, j = 0 to 23, m = 0, 1 Products of group E: i = 0 to 5, j = 0 to 23, m = 0, 1 Figure 19-1. DTC Block Diagram ROM DTC activation request DTCCRj DTCCTj DTRLDj DTSARj Peripheral interrupt request RAM DTBLSj DTDARj Peripheral functions Internal bus DTCEN0 to DTCEN5Note Control circuit Peripheral interrupt request CPU SELHSm Interrupt controller HDTCCRm HDTCCTm HDTRLDm HDTSARm HDTDARm Note Products of groups A, B, C, and D do not have the DTCEN5 register. Remark j = 0 to 23, m = 0, 1 DTCCRj: DTC control register j DTBLSj: DTC block size register j DTCCTj: DTC transfer count register j DTRLDj: DTC transfer count reload register j DTSARj: DTC source address register j DTDARj: DTC destination address register j DTCEN0 to DTCEN5Note: DTC activation enable registers 0 to 5Note SELHSm: High-speed DTC channel select register m HDTCCRm: High-speed DTC control register m HDTCCTm: High-speed DTC transfer count register m HDTRLDm: High-speed DTC transfer count reload register m HDTSARm: High-speed DTC source address register m HDTDARm: High-speed DTC destination address register m R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1427 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2 Registers Tables 19-2 and 19-4 list the DTC register configuration. Table 19-2. DTC Register Configuration (1) Register Name Symbol After Reset Address Access Size PER1 00H F02C0H 1, 8 DTC Activation Enable Register 0 DTCEN0 00H F02E8H 1, 8 DTC Activation Enable Register 1 DTCEN1 00H F02E9H 1, 8 DTC Activation Enable Register 2 DTCEN2 00H F02EAH 1, 8 DTC Activation Enable Register 3 DTCEN3 00H F02EBH 1, 8 DTCEN4 00H F02ECH 1, 8 DTCEN5 00H F02EDH 1, 8 DTCBAR FDH F02E0H 8 Peripheral Enable Register 1 DTC Activation Enable Register 4 DTC Activation Enable Register 5 Note DTC Base Address Register Note Only in products of group E. Table 19-3 lists DTC control data. DTC control data is allocated in the DTC control data area in RAM. The DTCBAR register is used to set the 256-byte area, including the DTC control data area and the DTC vector table area where the start address for control data is stored. Table 19-3. DTC Control Data Register Name Symbol DTC Control Register j DTCCRj DTC Block Size Register j DTBLSj DTC Transfer Count Register j DTCCTj DTC Transfer Count Reload Register j DTRLDj DTC Source Address Register j DTSARj DTC Destination Address Register j DTDARj Remark j = 0 to 23 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1428 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC Table 19-4. DTC Register Configuration (2) Register Name High-speed DTC Channel Select Register 0 High-speed DTC Channel Select Register 1 Symbol After Reset Address Access Size SELHS0 3FH F02E1H 1, 8 SELHS1 3FH F02E2H 1, 8 High-speed DTC Control Register 0 HDTCCR0 00H F02D0H 1, 8 High-speed DTC Transfer Count Register 0 HDTCCT0 00H F02D2H 1, 8 High-speed DTC Transfer Count Reload HDTRLD0 00H F02D3H 1, 8 HDTSAR0 00H F02D4H, 16 Register 0 High-speed DTC Source Address Register 0 F02D5H High-speed DTC Destination Address Register HDTDAR0 00H 0 F02D6H, 16 F02D7H High-speed DTC Control Register 1 HDTCCR1 00H F02D8H 1, 8 High-speed DTC Transfer Count Register 1 HDTCCT1 00H F02DAH 1, 8 High-speed DTC Transfer Count Reload HDTRLD1 00H F02DBH 1, 8 HDTSAR1 00H F02DCH, 16 Register 1 High-speed DTC Source Address Register 1 F02DDH High-speed DTC Destination Address Register 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 HDTDAR1 00H F02DEH, 16 F02DFH 1429 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.1 Allocation of DTC Control Data Area and DTC Vector Table Area The DTCBAR register is used to set the 256-byte area where DTC control data and the vector table within the RAM area. Figure 19-2 shows a memory map example when DTCBAR register is set to FBH. In the 192-byte DTC control data area, the space not used by the DTC can be used as RAM. Figure 19-2. Memory Map Example when DTCBAR Register is Set to FBH FFFFFH FFF00H Special-function register (1st SFR) General-purpose regist er FFE E0H FFC00H FFBFFH RAM Mirror DTC control data area 192 bytes Data flash memory F100 0H Reserved F080 0H Special-function register (2nd SFR) FFB40H Reserved area 18 bytes F000 0H FFB2EH Reserved DTC vector table area FFB00H Code flash memory Value set in DTCBAR register 000 00H The areas where the DTC control data and vector table can be allocated differ depending on the usage conditions. Cautions 1. It is prohibited to use the general-purpose register (FFF00H to FFEE0H) space as the DTC control data area or DTC vector table area. 2. The 18-byte area between the DTC vector table area and the DTC control data area is reserved for use when the number of DTC activation sources is expanded. 3. The internal RAM area in the following products cannot be used as the DTC control data area or DTC vector table area when using the self-programming function and data flash function. R5F10AmE (m = 6, A, B, G, L) : FEF00H to FF2FFH R5F10PmF (m = G, L, M) : FDF00H to FE2FFH R5F10AmG (m = G, L, M), R5F10BnG (n = A, B, G, L, M) : FDF00H to FE2FFH R5F10PmJ (m = G, L, M, P) : FAF00H to FB2FFH 4. The internal RAM area in the following products cannot be used as the DTC control data area or DTC vector table area when using the tracing function of on-chip debugging. R5F10AmE (m = 6, A, B, G, L), R5F10AnD (n = 6, A, B, G, L) : FF300H to FF37FH R5F10AmG (m = G, L, M), R5F10BnG (n = A, B, G, L, M) : FE300H to FE4FFH R5F10PmF (m = G, L, M) : FE300H to FE4FFH R5F10PmJ (m = G, L, M, P) : FB300H to FB4FFH 5. The internal RAM in the following products cannot be used as stack memory when the hot plug-in function is used or when the DTC is in use for the RRM or DMM function. R5F10AmD, R5F10AmE (m = 6, A, B, G, L) : FF400H to FF42FH R5F10AmG (m = G, L, M), R5F10BnG (n = A, B, G, L, M) : FE500H to FE52FH R5F10PmF (m = G, L, M) : FE500H to FE52FH R5F10PmJ (m = G, L, M, P) : FB500H to FB52FH R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1430 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.2 DTC Control Data Allocation Control data is allocated beginning with each start address in the order: Registers DTCCRj, DTBLSj, DTCCTj, DTRLDj, DTSARj, and DTDARj (j = 0 to 23). The higher 8 bits for start addresses 0 to 23 are set by the DTCBAR register, and the lower 8 bits are separately set according to the vector table assigned to each activation source. Figure 19-3 shows an example of DTC control data allocation when the DTCBAR register is set to FBH. Cautions Change the data in registers DTCCRj, DTBLSj, DTCCTj, DTRLDj, DTSARj, and DTDARj when the corresponding bit among bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 (i = 0 to 5Note) in the DTCENi register is set to 0 (DTC activation disabled). Do not access DTCCRj, DTBLSj, DTCCTj, DTRLDj, DTSARj, or DTDARj using a DTC transfer. Note Products of groups A, B, C, and D: i = 0 to 4 Products of group E: i = 0 to 5 Figure 19-3. DTC Control Data Allocation FFFFFH DTDAR1 register DTSAR1 register DTRLD1 register DTCCT1 register DTBLS1 register DTCCR1 register FFB48H Start address of DTC control data 1 FFB40H Start address of DTC control data 0 DTDAR0 register DTSAR0 register DTRLD0 register DTCCT0 register DTBLS0 register DTCCR0 register Higher address Lower address F0000H R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1431 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.3 DTC Vector Table When the DTC is activated, one control data is selected according to the data read from the vector table which has been assigned to each activation source, and the selected control data is read from the DTC control data area. Table 19-5 lists the DTC activation sources and DTC vector addresses. A one byte of the DTC vector table is assigned to each activation source, and the lower 8 bits for the start address of the DTC control data are stored in each area to select one of the 24 sets. The higher 8 bits for the DTC vector address are set by the DTCBAR register, and 00H to 2DH are allocated to the lower 8 bits corresponding to the DTC activation source. Caution Change the start address of the DTC control data area to be set in the vector table when the corresponding bit among bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 (i = 0 to 5Note) in the DTCENi register is set to 0 (DTC activation disabled). Note Products of groups A, B, C, and D: i = 0 to 4 Products of group E: i = 0 to 5 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1432 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC Table 19-5. DTC Activation Sources and DTC Vector Addresses (1/2) Source No. DTC Vector Address Priority Reserved Interrupt Request Source 0 Address set in DTCBAR register +00H Highest INTP0 1 Address set in DTCBAR register +01H INTP1 2 Address set in DTCBAR register +02H INTP2 3 Address set in DTCBAR register +03H INTP3 4 Address set in DTCBAR register +04H INTP4 5 Address set in DTCBAR register +05H INTP5 Note 1 6 Address set in DTCBAR register +06H INTP6 Notes 1, 2 7 Address set in DTCBAR register +07H Key input 8 Address set in DTCBAR register +08H A/D conversion end 9 Address set in DTCBAR register +09H UART0 reception transfer end/CSI01 transfer end 10 or buffer empty/IIC01 transfer end UART0 transmission transfer end/CSI00 transfer 11 end or buffer empty/IIC00 transfer end UART1 reception transfer end/CSI11 transfer end 12 or buffer empty/IIC11 transfer end Notes 3, 4 UART1 transmission transfer end/CSI10 transfer 13 end or buffer empty/IIC10 transfer end Note 3 Address set in DTCBAR register +0AH Address set in DTCBAR register +0BH Address set in DTCBAR register +0CH Address set in DTCBAR register +0DH LIN0 reception end 14 LIN0 transmission start/end 15 CAN reception end Note 5 16 Address set in DTCBAR register +10H Reserved 17 Address set in DTCBAR register +11H End of channel 0 of timer array unit 0 count or 18 Address set in DTCBAR register +12H 19 Address set in DTCBAR register +13H 20 Address set in DTCBAR register +14H 21 Address set in DTCBAR register +15H 22 Address set in DTCBAR register +16H 23 Address set in DTCBAR register +17H 24 Address set in DTCBAR register +18H 25 Address set in DTCBAR register +19H Address set in DTCBAR register +0EH Address set in DTCBAR register +0FH capture End of channel 1 of timer array unit 0 count or capture End of channel 2 of timer array unit 0 count or capture End of channel 3 of timer array unit 0 count or capture End of channel 4 of timer array unit 0 count or capture End of channel 5 of timer array unit 0 count or capture End of channel 6 of timer array unit 0 count or capture End of channel 7 of timer array unit 0 count or capture (Notes and Remark are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1433 RL78/F13, F14 Remark CHAPTER 19 DTC Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C: RL78/F13 (LIN and CAN incorporated) products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group D: RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, 80, or 100 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory Notes 1. Not provided in the 20-pin products. 2. Not provided in the products with 30 or 32 pins. 3. Provided only in the products of Groups B to E. 4. RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30 or 32 pins and RL78/F14 products with 30 or 32 pins do not have CSI11 transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/IIC11 transfer end interrupt. 5. Provided only in the products of Groups C to E. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1434 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC Table 19-5. DTC Activation Sources and DTC Vector Addresses (2/2) Source No. DTC Vector Address Timer RD compare match A0 Interrupt Request Source 26 Address set in DTCBAR register +1AH Timer RD compare match B0 27 Address set in DTCBAR register +1BH Timer RD compare match C0 28 Address set in DTCBAR register +1CH Timer RD compare match D0 29 Address set in DTCBAR register +1DH Timer RD compare match A1 30 Address set in DTCBAR register +1EH Timer RD compare match B1 31 Address set in DTCBAR register +1FH Timer RD compare match C1 32 Address set in DTCBAR register +20H Timer RD compare match D1 33 Address set in DTCBAR register +21H Timer RJ0 34 Address set in DTCBAR register +22H Comparator detection 0 Note 1 35 Address set in DTCBAR register +23H End of channel 0 of timer array unit 1 count or 36 Address set in DTCBAR register +24H 37 Address set in DTCBAR register +25H 38 Address set in DTCBAR register +26H 39 Address set in DTCBAR register +27H Priority capture Note 2 End of channel 1 of timer array unit 1 count or capture Note 2 End of channel 2 of timer array unit 1 count or capture Note 2 End of channel 3 of timer array unit 1 count or capture Note 2 LIN1 reception end Note 3 40 LIN1 transmission start/end Note 3 41 End of channel 4 of timer array unit 1 count or 42 Address set in DTCBAR register +2AH 43 Address set in DTCBAR register +2BH 44 Address set in DTCBAR register +2CH 45 Address set in DTCBAR register +2DH Address set in DTCBAR register +28H Address set in DTCBAR register +29H capture Note 3 End of channel 5 of timer array unit 1 count or capture Note 3 End of channel 6 of timer array unit 1 count or capture Note 3 End of channel 7 of timer array unit 1 count or Lowest capture Note 3 Remark Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C: RL78/F13 (LIN and CAN incorporated) products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group D: RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, 80, or 100 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory Notes 1. Only in Group D and E products. 2. Only in Group B, C, D, and E products. 3. Only in Group E products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1435 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.4 Peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) The PER1 register is used to enable or disable supplying the clock to the peripheral hardware. Clock supply to the hardware that is not used is also stopped so as to decrease the power consumption and noise. When using the DTC, be sure to set bit 3 (DTCEN) to 1. The PER1 register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 19-4. Format of Peripheral Enable Register 1 (PER1) Address: F02C0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> 6 <5> <4> <3> 2 1 <0> PER1 DACEN 0 CMPEN TRD0EN DTCEN 0 0 TRJ0EN Note 1 Note 2 Note 1 DTCEN Control of DTC input clock supply Stops input clock supply. 0 DTC cannot run. Enables input clock supply. 1 DTC can run. Note 1. Only in RL78/F14. 2. When FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H), set fCLK to fIH before setting the bit 4 (TRD0EN) of the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1). When changing fCLK to a clock other than fIH, clear the bit 4 (TRD0EN) of the peripheral enable register 1 (PER1) before changing. Caution Be sure to clear the following bits to 0. RL78/F13: bits 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7 RL78/F14: bits 1, 2, and 6 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1436 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.5 DTC Activation Enable Register i (DTCENi) (i = 0 to 5) This is an 8-bit register which enables or disables DTC activation by interrupt sources. Table 19-6 lists the correspondence between interrupt sources and bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7. Set the DTCENi register by an 8-bit or 1-bit memory manipulation instruction. Notes 1. Modify bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 if an activation source corresponding to the bit has not been generated. 2. Do not access the DTCENi register using a DTC transfer. Figure 19-5. DTC Activation Enable Register i (DTCENi) (i = 0 to 5) Address: F02E8H (DTCEN0), F02E9H (DTCEN1), F02EAH (DTCEN2), After reset: 00H Note F02EBH (DTCEN3), F02ECH (DTCEN4), F02EDH (DTCEN5) Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> DTCENi DTCENi7 DTCENi6 DTCENi5 DTCENi4 DTCENi3 DTCENi2 DTCENi1 DTCENi0 DTCENi7 DTC activation enable i7 0 Activation disabled 1 Activation enabled R/W R/W The DTCENi7 bit is set to 0 (activation disabled) by a condition for generating a transfer end interrupt. DTCENi6 DTC activation enable i6 0 Activation disabled 1 Activation enabled R/W R/W The DTCENi6 bit is set to 0 (activation disabled) by a condition for generating a transfer end interrupt. DTCENi5 DTC activation enable i5 0 Activation disabled 1 Activation enabled R/W R/W The DTCENi5 bit is set to 0 (activation disabled) by a condition for generating a transfer end interrupt. DTCENi4 DTC activation enable i4 0 Activation disabled 1 Activation enabled R/W R/W The DTCENi4 bit is set to 0 (activation disabled) by a condition for generating a transfer end interrupt. DTCENi3 DTC activation enable i3 0 Activation disabled 1 Activation enabled R/W R/W The DTCENi3 bit is set to 0 (activation disabled) by a condition for generating a transfer end interrupt. (Note is listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1437 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC DTCENi2 DTC activation enable i2 0 Activation disabled 1 Activation enabled R/W R/W The DTCENi2 bit is set to 0 (activation disabled) by a condition for generating a transfer end interrupt. DTCENi1 DTC activation enable i1 0 Activation disabled 1 Activation enabled R/W R/W The DTCENi1 bit is set to 0 (activation disabled) by a condition for generating a transfer end interrupt. DTCENi0 DTC activation enable i0 0 Activation disabled 1 Activation enabled R/W R/W The DTCENi0 bit is set to 0 (activation disabled) by a condition for generating a transfer end interrupt. Note Only in products of group E. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1438 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC Table 19-6. Correspondences between Interrupt Sources and Bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 DTCENi7 DTCENi6 DTCENi5 DTCENi4 DTCENi3 DTCENi2 DTCENi1 DTCENi0 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Reserved INTP0 INTP1 INTP2 INTP3 INTP4 INTP5 INTP6 LIN0 transmissio Register DTCEN 0 DTCEN 1 A/D Key input end DTCEN CAN reception 2 end DTCEN 3 DTCEN 4 DTCEN 5 Note conversion Reserved End of End of channel 6 of channel 7 of UART0 UART0 UART1 UART1 reception transmissio reception transmissio transfer n transfer transfer n transfer end/CSI01 end/CSI00 end/CSI11 end/CSI10 transfer end transfer end transfer end transfer end or buffer or buffer or buffer or buffer empty/IIC01 empty/IIC00 empty/IIC11 empty/IIC10 transfer end transfer end transfer end transfer end LIN0 reception n end start/transmi ssion end End of End of End of End of End of End of channel 0 of channel 1 of channel 2 of channel 3 of channel 4 of channel 5 of timer array timer array timer array timer array timer array timer array unit 0 count unit 0 count unit 0 count unit 0 count unit 0 count unit 1 count or capture or capture or capture or capture or capture or capture Timer RD Timer RD Timer RD Timer RD Timer RD Timer RD timer array timer array compare compare compare compare compare compare unit 0 count unit 0 count match A0 match B0 match C0 match D0 match A1 match B1 or capture or capture Timer RD Timer RD compare compare match C1 match D1 LIN1 Timer RJ0 Comparator detection 0 End of End of channel 0 of channel 1 of timer array timer array unit 1 count unit 1 count or capture or capture LIN1 End of End of End of End of transmissio channel 4 of channel 5 of channel 6 of channel 7 of reception n timer array timer array timer array timer array end start/transmi unit 1 count unit 1 count unit 1 count unit 1 count ssion end or capture or capture or capture or capture End of channel End of channel 2 of timer array 3 of timer array unit 1 count or unit 1 count or capture capture Reserved Reserved Note Only in products of group E. Remark i = 0 to 5 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1439 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.6 DTC Base Address Register (DTCBAR) This is an 8-bit register used to set the following addresses: the vector address where the start address of the DTC control data area is stored and the address of the DTC control data area. The value of the DTCBAR register is handled as the higher 8 bits to generate a 16-bit address. Cautions 1. 2. Modify the DTCBAR register value with all DTC activation sources set to activation disabled. Do not rewrite the DTCBAR register more than once. 3. Do not access the DTCBAR register using a DTC transfer. 4. For the allocation of the DTC control data area and the DTC vector table area, refer to the notes on 19.2.1 Allocation of DTC Control Data Area and DTC Vector Table Area. Figure 19-6. Format of DTC Base Address Register (DTCBAR) Address: F02E0H After reset: FDH Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DTCBAR DTCBAR7 DTCBAR6 DTCBAR5 DTCBAR4 DTCBAR3 DTCBAR2 DTCBAR1 DTCBAR0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1440 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.7 DTC Control Register j (DTCCRj) (j = 0 to 23) The DTCCRj register is used to control the DTC operating mode. Figure 19-7. Format of DTC Control Register j (DTCCRj) Address: Refer to 19.2.2 DTC Control Data Allocation. After reset: Undefined Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DTCCRj 0 SZ RPTINT CHNE DAMOD SAMOD RPTSEL MODE Bit 7 0 Reserved Set to 0. R/W SZ Data size selection 0 8 bits 1 16 bits RPTINT R/W R/W R/W Enabling/disabling repeat mode interrupts 0 Interrupt generation disabled 1 Interrupt generation enabled R/W R/W The setting of the RPTINT bit is invalid when the MODE bit is 0 (normal mode). CHNE Enabling/disabling chain transfers 0 Chain transfers disabled 1 Chain transfers enabled R/W R/W Set the CHNE bit in the DTCCR23 register to 0 (chain transfers disabled). DAMOD Transfer destination address control 0 Fixed 1 Incremented R/W R/W The setting of the DAMOD bit is invalid when the MODE bit is 1 (repeat mode) and the RPTSEL bit is 0 (transfer destination is the repeat area). SAMOD Transfer source address control 0 Fixed 1 Incremented R/W R/W The setting of the SAMOD bit is invalid when the MODE bit is 1 (repeat mode) and the RPTSEL bit is 1 (transfer source is the repeat area). RPTSEL Repeat area selection 0 Transfer destination is the repeat area 1 Transfer source is the repeat area R/W R/W The setting of the RPTSEL bit is invalid when the MODE bit is 0 (normal mode). MODE Transfer mode selection 0 Normal mode 1 Repeat mode R/W R/W Caution Do not access the DTCCRj register using a DTC transfer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1441 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.8 DTC Block Size Register j (DTBLSj) (j = 0 to 23) This register is used to set the block size of the data to be transferred by one activation. Figure 19-8. Format of DTC Block Size Register j (DTBLSj) Address: Refer to 19.2.2 DTC Control Data Allocation. After reset: Undefined Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DTBLSj DTBLSj7 DTBLSj6 DTBLSj5 DTBLSj4 DTBLSj3 DTBLSj2 DTBLSj1 DTBLSj0 DTBLSj Transfer Block Size 8-Bit Transfer 00H 256 bytes 512 bytes 01H 1 byte 2 bytes 02H 2 bytes 4 bytes 03H 3 bytes 6 bytes * * * R/W 16-Bit Transfer R/W * * * * * * FDH 253 bytes 506 bytes FEH 254 bytes 508 bytes FFH 255 bytes 510 bytes Caution Do not access the DTBLSj register using a DTC transfer. 19.2.9 DTC Transfer Count Register j (DTCCTj) (j = 0 to 23) This register is used to set the number of DTC data transfers. The value is decremented by 1 each time DTC transfer is activated once. Figure 19-9. Format of DTC Transfer Count Register j (DTCCTj) Address: Refer to 19.2.2 DTC Control Data Allocation. After reset: Undefined Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DTCCTj DTCCTj7 DTCCTj6 DTCCTj5 DTCCTj4 DTCCTj3 DTCCTj2 DTCCTj1 DTCCTj0 DTCCTj Number of Transfers 00H 256 times 01H Once 02H 2 times 03H 3 times * * * R/W R/W * * * FDH 253 times FEH 254 times FFH 255 times Caution Do not access the DTCCTj register using a DTC transfer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1442 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.10 DTC Transfer Count Reload Register j (DTRLDj) (j = 0 to 23) This register is used to set the initial value of the transfer count register in repeat mode. Since the value of this register is reloaded to the DTCCT register in repeat mode, set the same value as the initial value of the DTCCT register. Figure 19-10. Format of DTC Transfer Count Reload Register j (DTRLDj) Address: Refer to 19.2.2 DTC Control Data Allocation. After reset: Undefined Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DTRLDj DTRLDj7 DTRLDj6 DTRLDj5 DTRLDj4 DTRLDj3 DTRLDj2 DTRLDj1 DTRLDj0 Caution Do not access the DTRLDj register using a DTC transfer. 19.2.11 DTC Source Address Register j (DTSARj) (j = 0 to 23) This register is used to specify the transfer source address for data transfer. When the SZ bit in the DTCCRj register is set to 1 (16-bit transfer), the lowest bit is ignored and the address is handled as an even address. Figure 19-11. Format of DTC Source Address Register j (DTSARj) Address: Refer to 19.2.2 DTC Control Data Allocation. DTSARj 15 14 13 12 DTS DTS DTS DTS ARj15 ARj14 ARj13 ARj12 After reset: Undefined 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DTS DTS DTS DTS DTS DTS DTS DTS DTS DTS DTS DTS ARj11 ARj10 ARj9 ARj8 ARj7 ARj6 ARj5 ARj4 ARj3 ARj2 ARj1 ARj0 Cautions 1. Do not set the general-purpose register (FFEE0H to FFEFFH) space to the transfer source address. 2. Do not access the DTSARj register using a DTC transfer. 19.2.12 DTC Destination Address Register j (DTDARj) (j = 0 to 23) This register is used to specify the transfer destination address for data transfer. When the SZ bit in the DTCCRj register is set to 1 (16-bit transfer), the lowest bit is ignored and the address is handled as an even address. Figure 19-12. Format of DTC Destination Address Register j (DTDARj) Address: Refer to 19.2.2 DTC Control Data Allocation. DTDARj 15 14 13 12 DTD DTD DTD DTD ARj15 ARj14 ARj13 ARj12 Cautions After reset: Undefined 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DTD DTD DTD DTD DTD DTD DTD DTD DTD DTD DTD DTD ARj11 ARj10 ARj9 ARj8 ARj7 ARj6 ARj5 ARj4 ARj3 ARj2 ARj1 ARj0 1. Do not set the general-purpose register (FFEE0H to FFEFFH) space to the transfer source address. 2. Do not access the DTDARj register using a DTC transfer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1443 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.13 High-speed DTC Channel Select Register 0 (SELHS0) The SELHS0 register is used to select the high-speed DTC channel. Figure 19-13. Format of High-speed DTC Channel Select Register 0 (SELHS0) Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SELHS0 0 0 SELHS05 SELHS04 SELHS03 SELHS02 SELHS01 SELHS00 The SELHS0 register can be set with an 8-bit or 1-bit memory manipulation instruction, not set with a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. After reset: 3FH Address: F02E1H Correspondence between the activation sources and SELHS0i (i = 0 to 5) bits is shown below. SELHS05 to SELHS00 Description 0 0 0 0 0 0 Activation source number 0 is selected as high-speed channel 0. 0 0 0 0 0 1 Activation source number 1 is selected as high-speed channel 0. 0 0 0 0 1 1 Activation source number 2 is selected as high-speed channel 0. : : : : 1 0 1 0 1 1 Activation source number 43 is selected as high-speed channel 0. 1 0 1 1 0 0 Activation source number 44 is selected as high-speed channel 0. 1 0 1 1 0 1 Activation source number 45 is selected as high-speed channel 0. 1 1 1 1 1 1 High-speed channel 0 is not used. Other than above Setting prohibited Cautions 1. Modify the data of the SELHS0 register when the corresponding bit among bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 in the DTCENi (i = 0 to 5Note) register is 0 (DTC activation disabled). 2. Do not access the SELHS0 register using a DTC transfer. Note Products of groups A, B, C, and D: i = 0 to 4 Products of group E: i = 0 to 5 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1444 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.14 High-speed DTC Channel Select Register 1 (SELHS1) The SELHS1 register is an 8-bit register that is used to select the high-speed DTC channel. Figure 19-14. Format of High-speed DTC Channel Select Register 1 (SELHS1) Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SELHS1 0 0 SELHS15 SELHS14 SELHS13 SELHS12 SELHS11 SELHS10 The SELHS1 register can be set with an 8-bit or 1-bit memory manipulation instruction, not set with a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. After reset: 3FH Address: F02E2H Correspondence between the activation sources and SELHS1i (i = 0 to 5) bits is shown below. SELHS15 to SELHS10 Description 0 0 0 0 0 0 Activation source number 0 is selected as high-speed channel 1. 0 0 0 0 0 1 Activation source number 1 is selected as high-speed channel 1. 0 0 0 0 1 1 Activation source number 2 is selected as high-speed channel 1. : : : : 1 0 1 0 1 1 Activation source number 43 is selected as high-speed channel 1. 1 0 1 1 0 0 Activation source number 44 is selected as high-speed channel 1. 1 0 1 1 0 1 Activation source number 45 is selected as high-speed channel 1. 1 1 1 1 1 1 High-speed channel 1 is not used. Other than above Setting prohibited Cautions 1. Modify the data of the SELHS1 register when the corresponding bit among bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 in the DTCENi (i = 0 to 5Note) register is 0 (DTC activation disabled). 2. Do not access the SELHS1 register using a DTC transfer. Note Products of groups A, B, C, and D: i = 0 to 4 Products of group E: i = 0 to 5 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1445 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.15 High-speed DTC Control Register m (HDTCCR0/1) (m = 0, 1) The HDTCCRm register is used to control the high-speed DTC transfer operating mode. Figure 19-15. Format of High-speed DTC Control Register m (HDTCCRm) Address: F02D0H (HDTCCR0), F02D8H (HDTCCR1) After reset: 00H Symbol 7 <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> HDTCCRm 0 HSZm HRPTINTm HCHNEm HDAMODm HSAMODm HRPTSELm HMODEm Bit 7 0 Reserved Set to 0. R/W HSZm Data size selection 0 8 bits 1 16 bits HRPTINTm R/W R/W R/W Enabling/disabling repeat mode interrupts 0 Interrupt generation disabled 1 Interrupt generation enabled R/W R/W The setting of the HRPTINTm bit is invalid when the HMODEm bit is 0 (normal mode). HCHNEm Enabling/disabling chain transfers 0 Chain transfers disabled 1 Chain transfers enabled R/W R/W Set the CHNE bit in the DTCCR23 register to 0 (chain transfers disabled). Set the HCHNEm bit to 0 (chain transfers disabled) when the activation source number is set to the maximum value by the SELHSm register. HDAMODm Transfer destination address control 0 Fixed 1 Incremented R/W R/W The setting of the HDAMODm bit is invalid when the HMODEm bit is 1 (repeat mode) and the HRPTSELm bit is 0 (transfer destination is the repeat area). HSAMODm Transfer source address control 0 Fixed 1 Incremented R/W R/W The setting of the HSAMODm bit is invalid when the HMODEm bit is 1 (repeat mode) and the HRPTSELm bit is 1 (transfer source is the repeat area). HRPTSELm Repeat area selection 0 Transfer destination is the repeat area 1 Transfer source is the repeat area R/W R/W The setting of the HRPTSELm bit is invalid when the HMODEm bit is 0 (normal mode). HMODEm Transfer mode selection 0 Normal mode 1 Repeat mode R/W R/W Caution Do not access the HDTCCRm register using a high-speed DTC transfer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1446 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.16 High-speed DTC Transfer Count Register m (HDTCCT0/1) (m = 0, 1) This register is used to set the number of high-speed DTC data transfers. The value is decremented by 1 each time DTC transfer is activated once. Figure 19-16. Format of High-speed DTC Transfer Count Register m (HDTCCTm) Address: F02D2H (HDTCCT0), F02DAH (HDTCCT1) After reset: 00H Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HDTCCTm HDTCCTm7 HDTCCTm6 HDTCCTm5 HDTCCTm4 HDTCCTm3 HDTCCTm2 HDTCCTm1 HDTCCTm0 HDTCCTm Number of Transfers 00H 256 times 01H Once 02H 2 times 03H 3 times * * * R/W R/W * * * FDH 253 times FEH 254 times FFH 255 times Caution Do not access the HDTCCTm register using a high-speed DTC transfer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1447 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.2.17 DTC Transfer Count Reload Register m (HDTRLD0/1) (m = 0, 1) This register is used to set the initial value of the transfer count register in repeat mode. Since the value of this register is reloaded to the HDTCCTm register in repeat mode, set the same value as the initial value of the HDTCCTm register. Figure 19-17. Format of High-speed DTC Transfer Count Reload Register m (HDTRLDm) Address: F02D3H (HDTRLD0), F02DBH (HDTRLD1) After reset: 00H Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HDTRLDm HDTRLDm7 HDTRLDm6 HDTRLDm5 HDTRLDm4 HDTRLDm3 HDTRLDm2 HDTRLDm1 HDTRLDm0 Caution Do not access the HDTRLDm register using a high-speed DTC transfer. 19.2.18 High-speed DTC Source Address Register m (HDTSAR0/1) (m = 0, 1) Only the 1st SFR area and the 2nd SFR area can be set for the source address for high-speed transfer. Set the lower 12-bit addresses of the HDTSARm. The higher 4 bits are read as 0. Figure 19-18. Format of High-speed DTC Source Address Register m (HDTSARm) Address: F02D4H, F02D5H (HDTSAR0), F02DCH, F02DDH (HDTSAR1) HDTS 15 14 13 12 0 0 0 0 ARm 11 10 9 8 After reset: 0000H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HDTS HDTS HDTS HDTS HDTS HDTS HDTS HDTS HDTS HDTS HDTS HDTS ARm11 ARm10 ARm9 ARm8 ARm7 ARm6 ARm5 ARm4 ARm3 ARm2 ARm1 ARm0 Cautions 1. Do not set the general-purpose register (FFEE0H to FFEFFH) space to the transfer source address. 2. Do not access the HDTSARm register using a high-speed DTC transfer. 19.2.19 High-speed DTC Destination Address Register m (HDTDAR0/1) (m = 0, 1) This register is used to specify the transfer destination address for data transfer. Figure 19-19. Format of High-speed DTC Destination Address Register m (HDTDARm) Address: F02D6H, F02D7H (HDTDAR0), F02DEH, F02DFH (HDTDAR1) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 After reset: 0000H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD HDTD ARm ARm15 ARm14 ARm13 ARm12 ARm11 ARm10 ARm9 ARm8 ARm7 ARm6 ARm5 ARm4 ARm3 ARm2 ARm1 ARm0 Cautions 1. Do not set the general-purpose register (FFEE0H to FFEFFH) space to the transfer destination address. 2. Do not access the HDTDARm register using a high-speed DTC transfer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1448 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.3 Operation When the DTC is activated, control data is read from the DTC control data area to perform data transfers and control data after data transfer is written back to the DTC control data area. Twenty-four sets of control data can be stored in the DTC control data area, which allows 24 types of data transfers to be performed. There are two transfer modes (normal mode and repeat mode) and two transfer sizes (8-bit transfer and 16-bit transfer). When the CHNE bit in the DTCCRj (j = 0 to 23) register is set to 1 (chain transfers enabled), multiple control data is read and data transfers are continuously performed by one activation source (chain transfers). A transfer source address is specified by the 16-bit register DTSARj, and a transfer destination address is specified by the 16-bit register DTDARj. The values in registers DTSARj and DTDARj are separately incremented or fixed according to the control data after the data transfer. This product supports high-speed transfer operation. The high-speed transfer can be realized by allocating the dedicated control data to the SFR area instead of the RAM area. To perform basic operation, normal mode requires five clock cycles to read vector and control data, while high-speed transfer requires one cycle. In addition, to write back control data, normal mode requires a maximum of three clock cycles, while high-speed transfer requires one cycle. 19.3.1 Activation Sources The DTC is activated by an interrupt signal from the peripheral functions. The interrupt signals to activate the DTC are selected with the DTCENi (i = 0 to 5Note 2) register. The DTC sets the corresponding bit among bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 in the DTCENi register to 0 (activation disabled) during operation when the setting of data transfer (the first transfer in chain transfers) is either of the following: - A transfer that causes the DTCCTj (j = 0 to 23) register value to change to 0 in normal mode - A transfer that causes the DTCCTj register value to change to 0 while the RPTINT bit in the DTCCRj register is 1 (interrupt generation enabled) in repeat mode Figure 19-20 shows the DTC internal operation flowchart. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1449 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC Figure 19-20. DTC Internal Operation Flowchart DTC activation source generation Read DTC vector Branch (1) 0 is written to the bit among bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 and an interrupt request is generated when transfer is either of the following: - A transfer that causes the DTCCTj (j = 0 to 23) register value to change from 1 to 0 in normal mode - A transfer that causes the DTCCTj register value to change from 1 to 0 while the RPTINT bit is 1 in repeat mode Remark: DTCENi0 to DTCENi7: Bits in DTCENi (i = 0 to 5Note 2) register RPTINT, CHNE: Bits in DTCCRj (j = 0 to 23) register Read control data (Note 1) Write 0 to the bit among bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 Generate an interrupt request Yes Branch (1) No Transfer data Read control data Transfer data Read control data Write back control data Transfer data Write back control data Transfer data Write back control data CHNE = 1? Yes CHNE = 1? No CHNE = 1? Yes Yes No CHNE = 1? Yes No No End Write back control data Interrupt handling Notes 1. 0 is not written to the bit among bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 for data transfers activated by the setting to enable chain transfers (the CHNE bit is 1). Also, no interrupt request is generated. 2. Products of groups A, B, C, and D: i = 0 to 4 Products of group E: i = 0 to 5 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1450 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.3.2 Normal Mode One to 256 bytes of data are transferred by one activation during 8-bit transfer and 2 to 512 bytes during 16-bit transfer. The number of transfers can be 1 to 256 times. When the data transfer causing the DTCCTj (j = 0 to 23) register value to change to 0 is performed, the DTC generates an interrupt request corresponding to the activation source to the interrupt controller during DTC operation, and sets the corresponding bit among bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 (i = 0 to 5Note) in the DTCENi register to 0 (activation disabled). Table 19-7 shows register functions in normal mode. Figure 19-21 shows data transfers in normal mode. Note Products of groups A, B, C, and D: i = 0 to 4 Products of group E: i = 0 to 5 Table 19-7. Register Functions in Normal Mode Register Name Symbol Function DTC block size register j DTBLSj Size of the data block to be transferred by one activation DTC transfer count register j DTCCTj Number of data transfers DTC transfer count reload register j DTRLDj Not used Note DTC source address register j DTSARj Data transfer source address DTC destination address register j DTDARj Data transfer destination address Note Initialize DTRLDj register with any desired value because the control data are read. Remark j = 0 to 23 Figure 19-21. Data Transfers in Normal Mode FFFFFH Transfer SRC Size of the data block to be transferred by one activation (N bytes) DST DTBLSj register = N DTSARj register = SRC DTDARj register = DST j = 0 to 23 F0000H DTCCR Register Setting DAMOD 0 0 1 1 SAMOD 0 1 0 1 RPTSEL X X X X MODE 0 0 0 0 Source Address Control Fixed Incremented Fixed Incremented Destination Address Control Fixed Fixed Incremented Incremented Source Address after Transfer SRC SRC + N SRC SRC + N Destination Address after Transfer DST DST DST + N DST + N X: 0 or 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1451 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC (1) Example 1 of using normal mode: Consecutively capturing A/D conversion results The DTC is activated by an A/D conversion end interrupt and the value of the A/D conversion result register is transferred to RAM. The vector address is FFB09H and control data is allocated at FFBA0H to FFBA7H. An A/D interrupt is assigned to source number 9. Transfers 2-byte data of the A/D conversion result register (FFF1EH, FFF1FH) to 80 bytes of FFD80H to FFDCFH of RAM. Figure 19-22. Example 1 of Using Normal Mode: Consecutively Capturing A/D Conversion Results DTCBAR = FBH Vector address (FFB09H) = A0H DTCCR12 (FFBA0H) = 48H DTBLS12 (FFBA1H) = 01H DTCCT12 (FFBA2H) = 50H DTRLD12 (FFBA3H) = 50H DTSAR12 (FFBA4H) = FF1EH DTDAR12 (FFBA6H) = FD80H FDCEH RAM A/D conversion result register FD80H DTCEN16 = 1 Starting A/D conversion A/D conversion end interrupt? No Yes Yes DTCCT12 = 01H? No Occurrence of interrupt corresponding to source number 9 DTCEN16 = 0 Data transfer Data transfer Interrupt handling The processing shown inside the dotted line is automatically executed by the DTC. The data of DTRLD12 does not affect DTC transfer operation because of normal mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1452 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.3.3 Repeat Mode One to 255 bytes of data are transferred by one activation. Either of the transfer source or destination should be specified as the repeat area. The number of transfers can be 1 to 255 times. On completion of the specified number of transfers, the DTCCTj (i = 0 to 23) register and the address specified for the repeat area are initialized to continue transfers. When the data transfer causing the DTCCTj register value to change to 0 is performed while the RPTINT bit in the DTCCRj register is 1 (interrupt generation enabled), the DTC generates an interrupt request corresponding to the activation source to the interrupt controller during DTC operation, and sets the corresponding bit among bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 (i = 0 to 5 Note) to 0 (activation disabled). When the RPTINT bit in the DTCCRj register is 0 (interrupt generation disabled), no interrupt request is generated even if the data transfer causing the DTCCTj register value to change to 0 is performed. Also, bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 are not set to 0. Table 19-8 lists register functions in repeat mode. Figure 19-23 shows data transfers in repeat mode. Note Products of groups A, B, C, and D: i = 0 to 4 Products of group E: i = 0 to 5 Table 19-8. Register Functions in Repeat Mode Register Name Symbol Function DTC block size register j DTBLSj Size of the data block to be transferred by one activation DTC transfer count register j DTCCTj Number of data transfers DTC transfer count reload register j DTRLDj This register value is reloaded to the DTCCT register (the number of transfers is initialized). DTC source address register j DTSARj Data transfer source address DTC destination address register j DTDARj Data transfer destination address Remark j = 0 to 23 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1453 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC Figure 19-23. Data Transfers in Repeat Mode DTCCTj register = 1 FFFFFH Transfer SRC Size of the data block to be transferred by one activation (N bytes) DST DTBLSj register = N DTCCTj register = 1 DTSARj register = SRC DTDARj register = DST j = 0 to 23 F0000H DTCCR Register Setting SAMOD DAMOD 0 1 X X X X 0 1 RPTSEL MODE 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 Source Address Control Repeat area Repeat area Fixed Incremented Destination Address Control Fixed Incremented Repeat area Repeat area Source Address after Transfer SRC + N SRC + N SRC SRC + N Destination Address after Transfer DST DST + N DST + N DST + N X: 0 or 1 DTCCTj register = 1 FFFFFH DTBLSj register = N DTCCTj register = 1 DTSARj register = SRC DTDARj register = DST SRC/DST j = 0 to 23 SRC0/DST0 Address of the repeat area is initialized after a data transfer F0000H DTCCR Register Setting DAMOD 0 1 X X SAMOD X X 0 1 RPTSEL 1 1 0 0 MODE 1 1 1 1 Source Address Control Repeat area Repeat area Fixed Incremented Destination Address Control Fixed Incremented Repeat area Repeat area Source Address after Transfer SRC0 SRC0 SRC SRC + N Destination Address after Transfer DST DST + N DST0 DST0 SRC0: Initial source address value DST0: Initial destination address value X: 0 or 1 Cautions 1. When repeat mode is used, the lower 8 bits of the initial value for the repeat area address must be 00H. 2. When repeat mode is used, the data size of the repeat area must be set to 255 bytes or less. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1454 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC (1) Example 1 of using repeat mode: Outputting a stepping motor control pulse using ports The DTC is activated by an interval timer interrupt and the pattern of the motor control pulse stored in the code flash memory is transferred to general-purpose ports. The vector address is FFC17H and control data is allocated at FFCD0H to FFCD7H. The timer interrupt is assigned to source number 23. Transfers 8-byte data of 02000H to 02007H of the code flash memory from the mirror space (F2000H to F2007H) to port register 1 (FFF01H). A repeat mode interrupt is disabled. Figure 19-24. Example 1 of Using Repeat Mode: Outputting a Stepping Motor Control Pulse Using Ports DTCBAR = FCH Vector address (FFC17H) = D0H DTCCR18 (FFCD0H) = 03H DTBLS18 (FFCD1H) = 01H DTCCT18 (FFCD2H) = 08H DTRLD18 (FFCD3H) = 08H DTSAR18 (FFCD4H) = 2000H DTDAR18 (FFCD6H) = FF01H 2007H Port register 1 Code flash 2000H DTCEN20 = 1 Timer setting Setting P10 to P13 to output mode No Starting timer operation P13 Interval timer interrupt? P12 Yes P10 Yes DTCCT18 = 01H? Data transfer DTCCT18 = DTRLD18 P11 Example of 1-2 phase excitation No Data transfer The processing shown inside the dotted line is automatically executed by the DTC. To stop the output, stop the timer first and then clear DTCEN20. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1455 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC (2) Example 2 of using repeat mode: Outputting a sine wave using the 8-bit D/A converter The DTC is activated by an interval timer interrupt and the table of the sine wave stored in the data flash memory is transferred to the 8-bit D/A conversion value setting register. The timer interval time is set to the D/A output setup time. The vector address is FFC17H and control data is allocated at FFCD8H to FFCDFH. The timer interrupt is assigned to source bumber 23. Transfers 255-byte data of F1200H to F12FEH of the data flash memory to the D/A conversion value setting register (FFF34H). A repeat mode interrupt is disabled. Figure 19-25. Example 2 of Using Repeat Mode: Outputting a Sine Wave Using the 8-bit D/A Converter DTCBAR = FCH Vector address (FFC17H) = D8H DTCCR19 (FFCD8H) = 03H DTBLS19 (FFCD9H) = 01H DTCCT19 (FFCDAH) = FFH DTRLD19 (FFCDBH) = FFH DTSAR19 (FFCDCH) = 1200H DTDAR19 (FFCDEH) = FF34H 12FFH Data flash DTCEN20 = 1 D/A conversion value setting register 1200H Timer setting Enabling D/A conversion Starting timer operation Interval timer interrupt? No Yes Yes DTCCT19 = 01H? Data transfer DTCCT19 = DTRLD19 No Data transfer The processing shown inside the dotted line is automatically executed by the DTC. To stop the output, stop the timer first and then clear DTCEN20. Caution A D/A converter is provided in the products with 96 Kbytes or more of code flash memory. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1456 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.3.4 Chain Transfers When the CHNE bit in the DTCCRj (j = 0 to 22) register is 1 (chain transfers enabled), multiple data transfers can be continuously performed by one activation source. When the DTC is activated, one control data is selected according to the data read from the DTC vector address corresponding to the activation source, and the selected control data is read from the DTC control data area. When the CHNE bit for the control data is 1 (chain transfers enabled), the next control data immediately following the current control data is read and transferred after the current transfer is completed. This operation is repeated until the data transfer with the control data for which the CHNE bit is 0 (chain transfers disabled) is completed. Figure 19-26 shows data transfers in chain transfers. Figure 19-26. Data Transfers during Chain Transfers FFFFFH DTC activation source generation Read DTC vector DTDAR2 register DTSAR2 register DTRLD2 register DTCCT2 register DTBLS2 register DTCCR2 register Read control data 1 Control data 2 (the CHNE bit is 0) Transfer data DTDAR1 register DTSAR1 register DTRLD1 register DTCCT1 register DTBLS1 register DTCCR1 register Higher address Lower address Write back control data 1 Control data 1 (the CHNE bit is 1) Read control data 2 Transfer data Write back control data 2 F0000H End of DTC transfers R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1457 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC (1) Example of using chain transfers: Consecutively capturing A/D conversion results and UART transmission The DTC is activated by an A/D conversion end interrupt and A/D conversion results are transferred to RAM, and then transmitted using the UART. The vector address is FFB09H. Control data of capturing A/D conversion results is allocated at FFBA0H to FFBA7H. Control data of UART transmission is allocated at FFBA8H at FFBAFH. An A/D conversion end interrupt is assigned to source number 9. Transfers 2-byte data of the A/D conversion result register (FFF1FH, FFF1EH) to FFD80H to FFDCFH of RAM, and transfers the upper 1 byte (FFF1FH) of the A/D conversion result register to the UART transmit buffer (FFF10H). Figure 19-27. Example of Using Chain Transfers: Consecutively Capturing A/D Conversion Results and UART Transmission DTCBAR = FBH Setting control data of capturing A/D conversion results Vector address (FFB09H) = A0H DTCCR12 (FFBA0H) = 58H DTBLS12 (FFBA1H) = 01H DTCCT12 (FFBA2H) = 50H DTRLD12 (FFBA3H) = 50H DTSAR12 (FFBA4H) = FF1EH DTDAR12 (FFBA6H) = FD80H FDCEH A/ D conversion result register RAM FD80H Setting control data of UART transmission Vector address (FFB11H) = A8H DTCCR13(FFBA8H) = 00H DTBLS13(FFBA9H) = 01H DTCCT13(FFBAAH) = 00H DTRLD13(FFBABH) = 00H DTSAR13(FFBACH) = FF1FH DTDAR13(FFBAEH) = FF10H A/ D conversion end interrupt? No Yes DTCEN16 = 1 DTCCT12 = 01H? UART setting No Transfer from A/ D conversion result register to RAM Starting A/ D conversion Yes Occurrence of interrupt corresponding to source number 9 DTCEN16 = 0 Transfer from A/ D conversion result register to RAM Transfer from A/ D conversion result Transfer from A/ D conversion result The processing show n inside the dotted line is autom atically executed by the DTC. Interrupt handling Cautions 1. Set the CHNE bit in the DTCCR23 register to 0 (chain transfers disabled). 2. For chain transfer, in the second and subsequent data transfers, bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 (i = 0 to 5Note) in the DTCENi register are not set to 0 (DTC activation disabled), and no interrupt request is generated. Note Products of groups A, B, C, and D: i = 0 to 4 Products of group E: i = 0 to 5 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1458 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.3.5 High-Speed Transfer Operation There are two channels for high-speed transfer. Each DTC activation source is selected by the high-speed DTC channel select register m. When the DTC is activated by the source selected by the high-speed transfer channel, the control data dedicated for high-speed transfer instead of the control data specified by the DTC vector address is read and transferred. Initialize the control data area with any desired value because the control data are read. Block transfer always transfers 1-byte data for 8-bit transfer and 2-byte data for 16-bit transfer. Chain transfer reads and transfers the control data consecutively allocated subsequent to the control data specified by the DTC vector address. During a chain transfer, when control data is for the source selected by the other high-speed transfer channel, the consecutively allocated control data instead of the control data dedicated for high-speed transfer is read and transferred. Table 19-9 shows the register functions in high-speed transfer operation. Table 19-9. Register Functions in High-speed Transfer Mode Register Name High-speed DTC channel select register 0/1 Symbol SELHS0/1 Function Channel selection High-speed DTC control register 0/1 HDTCCR0/1 Operating mode control High-speed DTC transfer count register 0/1 HDTCCT0/1 Number of data transfers High-speed DTC transfer count reload register 0/1 HDTRLD0/1 Initial value setting High-speed DTC source address register 0/1 HDTSAR0/1 Data transfer source address High-speed DTC destination address register 0/1 HDTDAR0/1 Data transfer destination address R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1459 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.4 Notes on DTC 19.4.1 Setting DTC Registers and Vector Table Do not access the DTC SFRs, the DTC control data area, the DTC vector table area, or the general-register (FFEE0H to FFEFFH) space using a DTC transfer. Modify the DTC base address register (DTCBAR) while all DTC activation sources are set to activation disabled. Do not rewrite the DTC base address register (DTCBAR) twice or more. Modify the data of the DTCCRj, DTBLSj, DTCCTj, DTRLDj, DTSARj, or DTDARj register when the corresponding bit among bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 in the DTCENi (i = 0 to 5Note) register is 0 (DTC activation disabled). Modify the start address of the DTC control data area to be set in the vector table when the corresponding bit among bits DTCENi0 to DTCENi7 in the DTCENi (i = 0 to 5Note) register is 0 (DTC activation disabled). Note Products of groups A, B, C, and D: i = 0 to 4 Products of group E: i = 0 to 5 19.4.2 Allocation of DTC Control Data Area and DTC Vector Table Area The areas where the DTC control data and vector table can be allocated differ, depending on the usage conditions. It is prohibited to use the general-purpose register (FFF00H to FFEE0H) space as the DTC control data area or DTC vector table area. The 18-byte area between the DTC vector table area and the DTC control data area is a reserved area to be used when the number of DTC activation sources is expanded. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1460 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.4.3 DTC Pending Instruction If a transfer request is generated from the DTC to the CPU, the DTC is not activated immediately after the following instructions. Also, the DTC is not activated between PREFIX instruction code and the instruction immediately after that code. Call/return instruction Unconditional branch instruction Conditional branch instruction Read access instruction for code flash memory Bit manipulation instructions for IFxx, MKxx, PRxx, and PSW, and an 8-bit manipulation instruction that has the ES register as operand Instruction for accessing the data flash memory <R> Multiply, Divide, Multiply & accumulate instruction (exclude MULU instruction) Cautions 1. On reception of a DTC transfer request, all interrupt requests are held pending until the DTC transfer is completed. 2. All interrupt requests are also held pending while a DTC transfer is suspended due to a DTC pending instruction. 19.4.4 Operations when an Instruction which Accesses an SFR Register that Requires a Wait is Executed DTC transfer is suspended while an instruction which accesses an SFR registerNote that requires a wait is executed. The DTC transfer remains suspended as long as polling of the SFR register that requires a wait continues. Note SFR registers that require a wait are registers of the CAM and LIN modules, and the TRJ0 register of the timer RJ module. 19.4.5 Operation when Accessing Data Flash Memory Space Because DTC data transfer is suspended to access the data flash space, be sure to add the DTC pending instruction. If the data flash space is accessed after an instruction execution from start of DTC data transfer, a 3-clock wait will be inserted to the next instruction. Instruction 1 DTC data transfer Instruction 2 The wait of three clock cycles occurs. MOV A, ! Data Flash space R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1461 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.4.6 Number of DTC Execution Clock Cycles Table 19-10 lists the operations following DTC activation and required number of clock cycles for each operation. Table 19-10. Operations Following DTC Activation and Required Number of Cycles Control Data Vector Read Read Write-back 4 Note 1 1 Data Read Data Write Note 2 Note 2 Notes 1. For the number of clock cycles required for control data write-back, refer to Table 19-11 Number of Clock Cycles Required for Control Data Write-Back Operation. 2. For the number of clock cycles required for data read/write, refer to Table 19-12 Number of Clock Cycles Required for Data Read/Write Operation. Table 19-11. Number of Clock Cycles Required for Control Data Write-Back Operation DTCCR Register Setting DAMO SAMO D D 0 0 0 Address Setting RPTSEL 1 DTSARj DTDARj of Clock Register Register Register Register Cycles Written Written Not Not 1 back back written written back back Written Written Written Not back back back written Incremente Written Written Not Written d back back written back Incremente Incremente Written Written Written Written d d back back back back Repeat Fixed Written Written Written Not back back back written Incremente Written Written Written Written d back back back back Repeat Written Written Not Written area back back written back Incremente Written Written Written Written d back back back back 0 X 0 Number DTRLDj E X Control Register to be Written Back DTCCTj MOD Source Destination Fixed Fixed Incremente Fixed d 2 back 1 0 X 0 Fixed 2 back 1 0 1 X X 0 1 1 area 3 2 back 1 X X 1 0 1 0 1 Fixed 3 2 back X 1 0 1 3 Remark j = 0 to 23; X: 0 or 1 Table 19-12. Number of Clock Cycles Required for Data Read/Write Operation Operation RAM Code Flash Data Flash Memory Memory SFR 2nd SFR No Wait State Wait States Data read 1 2 4 1 1 1 + number of wait states Note Data write 1 - - 1 1 1 + number of wait states Note Note The number of wait states differs depending on the specifications of the register allocated to the second SFR to be accessed. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1462 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.4.7 Number of High-speed DTC Execution Clock Cycles Table 19-13 lists the operations following high-speed DTC activation and required number of clock cycles for each operation. Table 19-13. Operations Following High-speed DTC Activation and Required Number of Cycles Control Data Vector Read Read Data Read Data Write Note 2 Note 2 Write-back 1 Note 1 1 Notes 1. For the number of clock cycles required for control data write-back, refer to Table 19-14 Number of Clock Cycles Required for Control Data Write-Back Operation. 2. For the number of clock cycles required for data read/write, refer to Table 19-15 Number of Clock Cycles Required for Data Read/Write Operation. Table 19-14. Number of Clock Cycles Required for Control Data Write-Back Operation HDTCCRm Register Setting Address Setting Control Register to be Written Back Numbe r HDAMOD HSAMOD HRPTSEL HMODE m m m m 0 0 0 1 X X 0 0 HDTCCT Source Fixed Incremente Destination Fixed Fixed d HDTRLD HDTSAR m m m m Register Register Register Register Written Not Not Not back written written written back back back Written Not Written Not back written back written back 1 1 0 1 X X 0 0 Fixed HDTDAR of Clock Cycles 1 1 back Incremente Written Not Not Written d back written written back back back Incremente Incremente Written Not Written Written d d back written back back Repeat Fixed Written Not Written Not back written back written 1 1 back 0 X 1 1 area back 1 X 1 1 1 back Incremente Written Not Written Written d back written back back Repeat Written Not Not Written area back written written back back back 1 back X X 0 1 0 0 1 1 Fixed Incremente Written Not Written Written d back written back back 1 1 back Remark m = 0, 1; X: 0 or 1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1463 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC Table 19-15. Number of Clock Cycles Required for Data Read/Write Operation Operation RAM Code Flash Data Flash Memory Memory SFR 2nd SFR No Wait State Wait States Data read - - - 1 1 1 + number of wait states Note Data write 1 - - 1 1 1 + number of wait states Note Note The number of wait states differs depending on the specifications of the register allocated to the second SFR to be accessed. 19.4.8 DTC Response Time Table 19-16 lists the DTC response time. The DTC response time is the time from when the DTC activation source is detected until DTC transfer starts, excluding the number of DTC execution clocks. The DTC response time in high-speed transfer is the same as that in the normal transfer. Table 19-16. DTC Response Time Minimum Time Maximum Time 3 clocks 19 clocks Response Time Note that the response from the DTC may be further delayed under the following cases. The number of delayed clock cycles differs depending on the conditions. When executing an instruction from the internal RAM Maximum response time: 20 clocks When executing a DTC pending instruction (refer to 19.4.3 DTC Pending Instruction) Maximum response time: Maximum response time for each condition + execution clock cycles for the instruction to be held pending under the condition. When accessing the TRJ0 register that a wait occurs Maximum response time: Maximum response time for each condition + 1 clock Remark 1 clock: 1/fCLK (fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock) 19.4.9 DTC Activation Sources After inputting a DTC activation source, do not input the same activation source again until DTC transfer is completed. While a DTC activation source is generated, do not manipulate the DTC activation enable bit corresponding to the source. If DTC activation sources conflict, their priority levels are determined in order to select the source for activation when the CPU acknowledges the DTC transfer. For details on the priority levels of activation sources, refer to 19.2.3 DTC Vector Table. When DTC activation is enabled under either of the following conditions, a DTC transfer is started and an interrupt is generated after completion of the transfer. Therefore, enable DTC activation after confirming the comparator output monitor flag (CMPMON0) as necessary. - The comparator is set to releasing STOP mode by comparator interrupt enabled (CSTEN = 1), comparator output not inverted (CINV = 0), and comparator input > reference voltage - The comparator is set to releasing STOP mode by comparator interrupt enabled (CSTEN = 1), comparator output inverted (CINV = 1), and comparator input < reference voltage R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1464 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 19 DTC 19.4.10 Operation in Standby Mode Status Status HALT mode DTC Operation Operable (Operation is disabled while in the low power consumption RTC mode) STOP mode DTC activation sources can be accepted Note 2 SNOOZE mode Operable Notes 1, 3 Notes 1. The SNOOZE mode can only be specified when the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is selected as fCLK. 2. In the STOP mode, detecting a DTC activation source enables transition to SNOOZE mode and DTC transfer. After completion of transfer, the system returns to the STOP mode. However, since the code flash memory and the data flash memory are stopped during the SNOOZE mode, the flash memory cannot be set as the transfer source. 3. When an A/D conversion end interrupt is set as a DTC activation source from the A/D converter SNOOZE mode function, release the SNOOZE mode using the A/D conversion end interrupt to start CPU processing after completion of DTC transfer, or use a chained transfer to set the A/D converter SNOOZE mode function again after clear the AWC bit. 19.4.11 Notes When the RAM Area Is the Source of the Data for Transfer Make initial settings with the desired values when the RAM area is the source of the data for transfer. RAM ECC interrupts may be produced in some cases. 19.4.12 Vector Address for High-Speed Transfer For high-speed transfer, too, a DTC vector address allocated to each activation source is read out. For chain transfer at high-speed, control data indicated by the DTC vector address are allocated to contiguous areas, and the next control data are read out. For transfer other than chain transfer at high-speed, make initial settings with the desired values in the DTC vector addresses. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1465 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 20 EVENT LINK CONTROLLER (ELC) (RL78/F14 Only) CHAPTER 20 EVENT LINK CONTROLLER (ELC) (RL78/F14 Only) The event link controller (ELC) mutually connects (links) events output from each peripheral function. By linking events, it becomes possible to coordinate operation between peripheral functions directly without going through the CPU. 20.1 Overview The ELC has the following functions. Capable of directly linking event signals from 20 (Group D products) or 26 (Group E products) types of peripheral functions to specified peripheral functions Event signals can be used as activation sources for operating any one of seven (Group D products) or nine (Group E products) types of peripheral functions Remark Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C: RL78/F13 (CAN incorporated) products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group D: RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or RL78/F14 products with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory Figure 20-1 shows the Event Link Controller Block Diagram. Figure 20-1. Event Link Controller Block Diagram Internal bus Event output destination select register ELSELRn (n = 00 to 25) Peripheral function (Event output side) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Event control (Link connection processor) Peripheral function (Event receive side) 1466 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 20 EVENT LINK CONTROLLER (ELC) (RL78/F14 Only) 20.2 Registers Table 20-1 lists the ELC register configuration. Table 20-1. ELC Register Configuration Register name Symbol After Reset Address Access size Event Output Destination Select Register 00 ELSELR00 00H F0780H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 01 ELSELR01 00H F0781H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 02 ELSELR02 00H F0782H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 03 ELSELR03 00H F0783H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 04 ELSELR04 00H F0784H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 05 ELSELR05 00H F0785H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 06 ELSELR06 00H F0786H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 07 ELSELR07 00H F0787H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 08 ELSELR08 00H F0788H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 09 ELSELR09 00H F0789H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 10 ELSELR10 00H F078AH 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 11 ELSELR11 00H F078BH 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 12 ELSELR12 00H F078CH 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 13 ELSELR13 00H F078DH 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 14 ELSELR14 00H F078EH 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 15 ELSELR15 00H F078FH 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 16 ELSELR16 00H F0790H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 17 ELSELR17 00H F0791H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 18 ELSELR18 00H F0792H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 19 ELSELR19 00H F0793H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 20 Note ELSELR20 00H F0794H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 21 Note ELSELR21 00H F0795H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 22 Note ELSELR22 00H F0796H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 23 Note ELSELR23 00H F0797H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 24 Note ELSELR24 00H F0798H 1, 8 Event Output Destination Select Register 25 Note ELSELR25 00H F0799H 1, 8 Note For Group E products only. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1467 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 20 EVENT LINK CONTROLLER (ELC) (RL78/F14 Only) 20.2.1 Event Output Destination Select Register n (ELSELRn) (n = 00 to 25) An ELSELRn register links each event signal to an operation of an event-receiving peripheral function (link destination peripheral function) after reception. Do not set multiple event inputs to the same event output destination (event receive side). The operation of the eventreceiving peripheral function will become undefined, and event signals may not be received correctly. In addition, do not set the event link generation source and the event link output destination to the same function. Set an ELSELRn register during a period when no event output peripheral functions are generating event signals. Table 20-2 lists the correspondence between ELSELRn (n = 00 to 25) registers and peripheral functions, and Table 20-3 lists the correspondence between values set to ELSELRn (n = 00 to 25) registers and operation of link destination peripheral functions at reception. Figure 20-2. Format of Event Output Destination Select Register n (ELSELRn) (n = 00 to 25) Address: F0780H (ELSELR00) to F0799H (ELSELR25) After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ELSELRn - - - - ELSELRn3 ELSELRn2 ELSELRn1 ELSELRn0 Note 1 Bits 7 to 4 - Reserved The read value is 0. ELSELRn2 ELSELRn1 ELSELRn0 0 0 0 0 Event link disabled 0 0 0 1 Select operation of peripheral function to link Note 2 0 0 1 0 Select operation of peripheral function to link Note 2 0 0 1 1 Select operation of peripheral function to link Note 2 0 1 0 0 Select operation of peripheral function to link Note 2 0 1 0 1 Select operation of peripheral function to link Note 2 0 1 1 0 Select operation of peripheral function to link Note 2 0 1 1 1 Select operation of peripheral function to link Note 2 1 0 0 0 Select operation of peripheral function to link Note 2 1 0 0 1 Select operation of peripheral function to link Note 2 ELSELRn3 Event Link Selection Note 1 Notes 1. Only for Group E products. Set this bit to 0 in Group D products. 2. See Table 20-3 Correspondence Between Values Set to ELSELRn (n = 00 to 25) Registers and Operation of Link Destination Peripheral Functions at Reception. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1468 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 20 EVENT LINK CONTROLLER (ELC) (RL78/F14 Only) Table 20-2. Correspondence Between ELSELRn (n = 00 to 25) Registers and Peripheral Functions Register Name Event Generator (Output Origin of Event Input n) Event Description ELSELR00 External interrupt edge detection 0 INTP0 ELSELR01 External interrupt edge detection 1 INTP1 ELSELR02 External interrupt edge detection 2 INTP2 ELSELR03 External interrupt edge detection 3 INTP3 ELSELR04 External interrupt edge detection 4 INTP4 ELSELR05 External interrupt edge detection 5 INTP5 ELSELR06 Key return signal detection INTKR ELSELR07 RTC fixed-cycle signal/Alarm match detection INTRTC ELSELR08 Timer RD0 Input capture A/Compare match A INTTRD0 ELSELR09 Timer RD0 Input capture B/Compare match B INTTRD0 ELSELR10 Timer RD1 Input capture A/Compare match A INTTRD1 ELSELR11 Timer RD1 Input capture B/Compare match B INTTRD1 ELSELR12 Timer RD1 Underflow TRD1 underflow signal ELSELR13 Timer RJ0 INTTRJ0 ELSELR14 TAU0 channel 0 Count end/Capture end INTTM00 ELSELR15 TAU0 channel 1 Count end/Capture end INTTM01 ELSELR16 TAU0 channel 2 Count end/Capture end INTTM02 ELSELR17 TAU0 channel 3 Count end/Capture end INTTM03 ELSELR18 TAU0 channel 4 Count end/Capture end INTTM04 ELSELR19 Comparator detection 0 INTCMP0 ELSELR20 Note TAU0 channel 5 Count end/Capture end INTTM05 ELSELR21 Note TAU0 channel 6 Count end/Capture end INTTM06 ELSELR22 Note TAU0 channel 7 Count end/Capture end INTTM07 ELSELR23 Note TAU1 channel 0 Count end/Capture end INTTM10 ELSELR24 Note TAU1 channel 1 Count end/Capture end INTTM11 ELSELR25 Note TAU1 channel 2 Count end/Capture end INTTM12 Note For Group E products only. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1469 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 20 EVENT LINK CONTROLLER (ELC) (RL78/F14 Only) Table 20-3. Correspondence Between Values Set to ELSELRn (n = 00 to 25) Registers and Operation of Link Destination Peripheral Functions at Reception Bits ELSELRn3 to Link Destination Peripheral Function ELSELRn0 in ELSELRn Operation When Receiving Event Register 0001B A/D converter 0010B Timer input of timer array unit 0 channel 0 Notes 1 and 2 0011B A/D conversion starts Delay counter, input pulse interval measurement, external event counter Timer input of timer array unit 0 channel 1 Notes 1 and 2 0100B Timer RJ0 Count source 0101B Timer RD0 TRDIOD0 input capture, pulse output cutoff 0110B Timer RD1 TRDIOD1 input capture, pulse output cutoff 0111B 1000B DA0 Note 3 Timer input of timer array unit 0 channel 2 Notes 1 and 2 1001B Real-time output Delay counter, input pulse interval measurement, external event counter (Group E products only) Timer input of timer array unit 0 channel 3 Notes 1 and 2 Notes 1. To select the timer input of timer array unit 0 channel m as the link destination peripheral function, first set the operating clock for channel m to fCLK using timer clock select register 0 (TPS0), and then set the timer output used for channel m to an event input signal from the ELC using timer input select register 0 (TIS0). 2. Before selecting the timer input of timer array unit 0 channel m as the link destination peripheral function, set the noise filter of the corresponding link destination channel in the timer array unit 0 to OFF (set the TNFEN0m bit to 0) by using the noise filter enable register 1 (NFEN1). 3. When entering the STOP status while the real-time output event mode for D/A conversion is enabled, disable linking of ELC events before entering STOP. Remark m = 0, 3 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1470 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 20 EVENT LINK CONTROLLER (ELC) (RL78/F14 Only) 20.2.2 Timer input select register 0 The timer array unit channels 0 to 3 change the event input from the ELC to the source for each channel. For details, see 6.3.8 Timer input select register 0 (TIS0). 20.2.3 A/D converter mode register 1 (ADM1) This register has the function of specifying the A/D conversion trigger. A/D conversion is performed by two-bit control and using the signal by the TAU0 channel 1, event signal by the ELC, or pretimed signal/alarm interrupt signal as triggers. For details, see 12.3.3 A/D converter mode register 1 (ADM1). 20.2.4 D/A converter mode register (DAM) This register has the real-time output function, which starts D/A conversion using the event input from the ELC as triggers. For details, see 13.3.3 D/A converter mode register (DAM). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1471 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 20 EVENT LINK CONTROLLER (ELC) (RL78/F14 Only) 20.3 Operation The path for using an event signal generated by a peripheral function as an interrupt request to the interrupt control circuit is independent from the path for using it as an ELC event. Therefore, each event signal can be used as an event signal for operation of an event-receiving peripheral function, regardless of interrupt control. In addition, event link operation can be performed without being influenced by the presence or absence of a CPU clock supply. However, the operating clock of a peripheral function needs to be supplied and be in an operational state. Figure 20-3 shows the relationship between interrupt handling and ELC. The figure show an example of an interrupt request status flag and a peripheral function possessing the enable bits that control enabling/disabling of such interrupts. A peripheral function which receives an event from the ELC will perform the operation corresponding to the eventreceiving peripheral function after reception of an event (see Table 20-3 Correspondence Between Values Set to ELSELRn (n = 00 to 25) Registers and Operation of Link Destination Peripheral Functions at Reception). Figure 20-3. Relationship Between Interrupt Handling and ELC Peripheral function (Event output side) Interrupt request (Event signal) ELC Peripheral function (Event receive side) Interrupt control circuit CPU Status flag Interrupt enable control R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1472 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS If different processing is required during the execution of one program, interrupts provide a convenient and fast way of switching to another program to handle that processing. After processing at the branch destination is completed, execution returns to the point where the original program was suspended. The number of interrupt sources differs, depending on the product. RL78/F13 (LIN) 64/80 pins 30 pins 32 pins 48 pins 64/80 pins 30 pins 32 pins 48 pins 64/80 pins 48 pins 64 pins 80/100 pins Group E 48 pins Group D 48/64 pins Group C 30/32 pins Group B RL78/F14 20 pins Group A RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN) Maskable External 7 8 10 12 13 9 9 13 14 9 9 13 14 14 15 16 interrupts Internal 26 26 26 35 35 39 40 40 40 40 41 41 41 48 48 48 Remark Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C: RL78/F13 (CAN incorporated) products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group D: RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory 21.1 Interrupt Function Types The following two types of interrupt functions are used. (1) Maskable interrupts These interrupts undergo mask control. Maskable interrupts can be divided into four priority groups by setting the priority specification flag registers (PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR03L, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H, PR12L, PR12H, PR13L). Multiple interrupt servicing can be applied to low-priority interrupts when high-priority interrupts are generated. If two or more interrupt requests, each having the same priority, are simultaneously generated, then they are processed according to the default priority of vectored interrupt servicing. For the default priority, see Table 21-1. A standby release signal is generated and STOP, HALT, and SNOOZE modes are released. External interrupt requests and internal interrupt requests are provided as maskable interrupts. (2) Software interrupt This is a vectored interrupt generated by executing the BRK instruction. It is acknowledged even when interrupts are disabled. The software interrupt does not undergo interrupt priority control. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1473 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.2 Interrupt Sources and Configuration Interrupt sources include maskable interrupts and software interrupts. In addition, they also have up to seven reset sources (see Table 21-1). The vector codes that store the program start address when branching due to the generation of a reset or various interrupt requests are two bytes each, so interrupts jump to a 64 K address of 00000H to 0FFFFH. Table 21-1. Interrupt Source List (1/4) 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin 20-pin Trigger 64-pin Name Internal/ External 80, 100-pin Interrupt Source Basic Configuration Type Note 2 Maskable Default Priority Note 1 Interrupt Type (A) 000CH Vector Table Address 0004H 0 INTWDTI Watchdog timer interval Note 3 (75% of overflow time+1/2fWDT) 1 INTLVI Voltage detection Note 4 2 INTP0 Pin input edge detection 0 3 INTP1 Pin input edge detection 1 000AH 4 INTP2 Pin input edge detection 2 Internal 0006H External 0008H (B) 5 INTP3 Pin input edge detection 3 000EH 6 INTP4 Note 7 Pin input edge detection 4 0010H Note 7 INTSPM 7 INTP5 Note 8 INTCMP0 Stack pointer overflow/underflow Internal Pin input edge detection 5 External Comparator detection 0 Internal Pin input edge detection 13 External Main clock or PLL clock stop Internal (A) 0012H (B) (A) (B) Note 6 (A) Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 Note 8 8 INTP13 Note 9 INTCLM Note 9 0014H UART0 transmission transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/CSI00 transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/IIC00 transfer end 0016H 10 INTSR0/ INTCSI01/ INTIIC01 UART0 reception transfer end/CSI01 transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/IIC01 transfer end 0018H 11 INTTRD0 Timer RD0 input capture, compare match, overflow, underflow interrupt 001AH 12 INTTRD1 Timer RD1 input capture, compare match, overflow, underflow interrupt 001CH 13 INTTRJ0 Timer RJ0 001EH 14 INTRAM RAM 1-bit correction/2-bit error detection 0020H 15 INTLIN0TRM LIN0 transmission 0022H 16 INTLIN0RVC LIN0 reception end 0024H 9 INTST0/ INTCSI00/ INTIIC00 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1474 RL78/F13, F14 Notes 1. CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS The default priority determines the sequence of interrupts if two or more maskable interrupts occur simultaneously. Zero indicates the highest priority and 55 indicates the lowest priority. 2. Basic configuration types (A) to (F) correspond to (A) to (F) in Figure 21-1. 3. When bit 7 (WDTINT) of the option byte (000C0H) is set to 1. 4. When bit 7 (LVIMD) of the voltage detection level register (LVIS) is cleared to 0. 5. Provided only in products of Groups D and E. 6. Provided only in Group E products. 7. To determine whether the actual interrupt source is INTP4 or INTSPM, read the INTFLG00 bit in the INTFLG0 register or the stack pointer. 8. To determine whether the actual interrupt source is INTP5 or INTCMP0, read the INTFLG01 and INTFLG06 bits in the INTFLG0 register. 9. To determine whether the actual interrupt source is INTP13 or INTCLM, read the INTFLG07 bit in the INTFLG0 register and SELPLLS bit in the PLLSTS register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1475 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Table 21-1. Interrupt Source List (2/4) IICA0 transfer end 19 INTP8 Note 6 INTRTC Note 6 Pin input edge detection 8 External RTC pretimed signal or alarm match detection Internal 0026H (A) 20-pin 18 INTIICA0 Internal 30-pin LIN0 reception status/LIN0 interrupt 32-pin 17 INTSTLIN0 STA/ INTLIN0 48-pin Trigger Vector Table Address 64-pin Name Internal/ External 80, 100-pin Interrupt Source Basic Configuration Type Note 2 Maskable Default Priority Note 1 Interrupt Type 0028H Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 002AH (B) (A) Note 3 Note 3 20 INTTM00 End of timer channel 0 count/capture 002CH 21 INTTM01 End of timer channel 1 count/capture 002EH 22 INTTM02 End of timer channel 2 count/capture 0030H 23 INTTM03 End of timer channel 3 count/capture 0032H 24 INTAD End of A/D conversion 0034H 25 INTP6 Note 4 INTTM11H 26 INTP7 Note 4 INTTM13H 27 INTP9 Note 4 INTTM01H Pin input edge detection 6 Upper 8-bit interval timer interrupt of TAU1 channel 1 (when 8-bit timer function is selected) Pin input edge detection 7 29 INTST1/ INTCSI10/ INTIIC10 External Internal Pin input edge detection 9 External Upper 8-bit interval timer interrupt of TAU0 channel 1 (when 8-bit timer function is selected) Internal Upper 8-bit interval timer interrupt of TAU0 channel 3 (when 8-bit timer function is selected) UART1 transmission transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/CSI10 transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/IIC10 transfer end R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 0036H Internal Upper 8-bit interval timer interrupt of TAU1 channel 3 (when 8-bit timer function is selected) 28 INTP10 Note 4 Pin input edge detection 10 INTTM03H External External 0038H 003AH 003CH Internal 003EH (B) (A) (B) (A) Note 3 Note 3 (B) Note 3 Note 3 (A) (B) (A) Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Notes 3, 5 Notes 3, 5 1476 RL78/F13, F14 Notes 1. CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS The default priority determines the sequence of interrupts if two or more maskable interrupts occur simultaneously. Zero indicates the highest priority and 55 indicates the lowest priority. 2. Basic configuration types (A) to (F) correspond to (A) to (F) in Figure 21-1. 3. Not provided in Group A products. 4. Whether the interrupt source is the detection of edge input on a pin or a TAU count end/capture end interrupt is not detectable. 5. 6. Only INTST1 is provided. To determine whether the actual interrupt source is INTP8 or INTRTC, read the INTFLG02 bit in the INTFLG0 register or the WAFG and RIFG bits in the RTCC1 register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1477 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Table 21-1. Interrupt Source List (3/4) Note 3 Note 3 20-pin 30-pin (A) 32-pin 0040H 48-pin Trigger Vector Table Address 64-pin Name Internal/ External 80, 100-pin Interrupt Source Basic Configuration Type Note 2 Maskable Default Priority Note 1 Interrupt Type INTSR1/ INTCSI11/ INTIIC11 UART1 reception transfer end/CSI11 transfer end or buffer empty interrupt/IIC11 transfer end 31 INTTM04 End of timer channel 4 count/capture 0042H 32 INTTM05 End of timer channel 5 count/capture 0044H 33 INTTM06 End of timer channel 6 count/capture 0046H 34 INTTM07 End of timer channel 7 count/capture 0048H 35 INTP11 Note 6 Pin input edge detection 11 (B) Note 3 INTLIN0WUP LIN0 reception pin input (E) 30 Internal Notes 3, 7 Notes 3, 7 External 004AH Note 6 36 37 38 INTKR Key interrupt detection INTCAN0ERR CAN0 channel error INTCAN0WUP CAN0 wakeup 39 INTCAN0CFR CAN0 transmit/receive FIFO receive 40 INTCAN0TRM CAN0 channel transmit 004CH Internal External Internal (C) (A) Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 (D) Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 (A) Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 0054H Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 004EH 0050H 0052H 41 INTCANGRFR CAN global receive FIFO 0056H 42 INTCANGERR CAN global error 0058H Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 Note 4 INTTM10 End of TAU1 channel 0 count/capture 005AH 44 INTTM11 End of TAU1 channel 1 count/capture 005CH Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 45 INTTM12 End of TAU1 channel 2 count/capture 005EH Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 46 INTTM13 End of TAU1 channel 3 count/capture 0060H Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 47 INTFL Reserved Note 5 0062H R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Note 3 Note 4 43 Note 3 Note 4 Note 3 Note 3 1478 RL78/F13, F14 Notes 1. CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS The default priority determines the sequence of interrupts if two or more maskable interrupts occur simultaneously. Zero indicates the highest priority and 55 indicates the lowest priority. <R> 2. Basic configuration types (A) to (F) correspond to (A) to (F) in Figure 21-1. 3. Not provided in Group A products. 4. Not provided in products of Groups A and B. 5. Do not use this interrupt. 6. Select INTP11 and INTLIN0WUP by the ISC2 bit in the ISC register. 7. Only INTSR1 is provided. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1479 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Table 21-1. Interrupt Source List (4/4) 32-pin 30-pin 20-pin LIN1 reception pin input 48-pin INTLIN1WUP Trigger Vector Table Address 64-pin Name Internal/ External 80, 100-pin Interrupt Source (E) Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 (A) Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 Basic Configuration Type Note 2 Default Priority Note 1 Interrupt Type Note 6 49 INTLIN1TRM LIN1 transmission Internal 0066H 50 INTLIN1RVC LIN1 reception end 0068H 51 INTLIN1STA/ INTLIN1 LIN1 reception status/LIN1 interrupt 006AH Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 52 INTTM14 End of TAU1 channel 4 count/capture 006CH Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 53 INTTM15 End of TAU1 channel 5 count/capture 006EH Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 54 INTTM16 End of TAU1 channel 6 count/capture 0070H Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 55 INTTM17 End of TAU1 channel 7 count/capture 0072H Note 5 Note 5 Note 5 Software BRK Execution of BRK instruction 007EH (F) Reset 0000H Notes 1. Note 5 Note 5 RESET RESET pin input POR Power-on-reset LVD Voltage detectionNote 3 WDT Overflow of watchdog timer TRAP Execution of illegal instructionNote 4 IAW Illegal-memory access CLM Main clock oscillation stop The default priority determines the sequence of interrupts if two or more maskable interrupts occur simultaneously. Zero indicates the highest priority and 55 indicates the lowest priority. 2. Basic configuration types (A) to (F) correspond to (A) to (F) in Figure 21-1. 3. When bit 7 (LVIMD) of the voltage detection level register (LVIS) is set to 1. 4. When the instruction code in FFH is executed. Reset by the illegal instruction execution not issued by emulation with the in-circuit emulator or on-chip debug emulator. 5. Provided only in Group E products. 6. Select INTP12 and INTLIN1WUP by the ISC3 bit in the ISC register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1480 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 21-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function (1/3) (A) Internal maskable interrupt Internal bus MK Interrupt request IE PR1 PR0 ISP1 ISP0 Vector table address generator Priority controller IF Standby release signal (B) External maskable interrupt (INTPm) Internal bus External interrupt edge enable register n (EGPn, EGNn) INTPm pin input Edge detector MK IF IE PR1 PR0 Priority controller ISP1 ISP0 Vector table address generator Standby release signal IF: Interrupt request flag IE: Interrupt enable flag ISP0: In-service priority flag 0 ISP1: In-service priority flag 1 MK: Interrupt mask flag PR0: Priority specification flag 0 PR1: Priority specification flag 1 Remark n = 0, 1 20-pin: Notes m = 0 to 4 30-, 32-pin: m = 0 to 5 48-pin: m = 0 to 9 Note 1 64-pin: m = 0 to 12 Notes 1, 2 80-, 100-pin: m = 0 to 13 Note 2 1. Group A products: m = 0 to 7 2. Products of Groups B to D: m = 0 to 11 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1481 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 21-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function (2/3) (C) External maskable interrupt (INTKR) Internal bus Key return mode register (KRM) MK Key interrupt detector KRn pin input IE PR1 PR0 ISP1 Vector table address generator Priority controller IF ISP0 Standby release signal (D) External maskable interrupt (CAN wake-up) Internal bus Bit 0 (CAN0EN) of the peripheral enable register 2 (PER2) CRXD0 pin MK Edge detector IF IE PR1 PR0 ISP1 ISP0 Priority controller Standby release signal IF: Interrupt request flag IE: Interrupt enable flag ISP0: In-service priority flag 0 ISP1: In-service priority flag 1 MK: Interrupt mask flag PR0: Priority specification flag 0 PR1: Priority specification flag 1 Remark 20-pin: n = 0, 1 30-pin: n = 0 to 7 32-pin: n = 0 to 5 48-, 64-, 80-, 100-pin: n = 0 to 7 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1482 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 21-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function (3/3) (E) External maskable interrupt (LINx wake-up) Internal bus Input switch control register (ISC) External interrupt edge enable register n (EGPn, EGNn) INTPy pin input LRXDx pin input Edge detector MK IE PR1 PR0 Priority controller IF ISP1 ISP0 Vector table address generator Standby release signal (F) Software interrupt Internal bus Interrupt request IF: Interrupt request flag IE: Interrupt enable flag ISP0: In-service priority flag 0 ISP1: In-service priority flag 1 MK: Interrupt mask flag PR0: Priority specification flag 0 PR1: Priority specification flag 1 Remark n = 0, 1 x = 0, 1 Note y = 11, 12 Note Note Except in Group E products, x = 0 and y = 11. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1483 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.3 Registers Controlling Interrupt Functions The following 9 types of registers are used to control the interrupt functions. Interrupt request flag registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H, IF2L, IF2H, IF3L) Interrupt mask flag registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H, MK2L, MK2H, MK3L) Priority specification flag registers (PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR03L, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H, PR12L, PR12H, PR13L) External interrupt rising edge enable registers (EGP0, EGP1) External interrupt falling edge enable registers (EGN0, EGN1) Interrupt source determination flag register 0 (INTFLG0) Interrupt mask register (INTMSK) Input switch control register (ISC) Program status word (PSW) Table 21-2 shows a list of interrupt request flags, interrupt mask flags, and priority specification flags corresponding to interrupt request sources. Table 21-2. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources (1/4) 64-pin 48-pin 32-pin 30-pin 20-pin Interrupt Mask Flag 80-pin Interrupt Request Flag 100-pin Interrupt WDTIPR0, WDTIPR1 PR00L, PR10L Priority Specification Flag Source Register INTWDTI WDTIIF IF0L Register WDTIMK MK0L Register INTLVI LVIIF LVIMK LVIPR0, LVIPR1 INTP0 PIF0 PMK0 PPR00, PPR10 INTP1 PIF1 PMK1 PPR01, PPR11 INTP2 PIF2 PMK2 PPR02, PPR12 INTP3 PIF3 PMK3 PPR03, PPR13 INTP4 PIF4 PMK4 PPR04, PPR14 INTSPM SPMIF SPMMK SPMPR0, SPMPR1 INTP5 PIF5 PMK5 PPR05, PPR15 INTCMP0 CMPIF0 CMPMK0 CMPPR00, CMPPR10 Note Note Note Note Note Note Note Provided only in products of Groups D and E. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1484 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Table 21-2. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources (2/4) IF0H PMK13 MK0H PPR013, PPR113 PR00H, PR10H 20-pin PIF13 Register 30-pin INTP13 Register 32-pin Register 48-pin Priority Specification Flag 64-pin Interrupt Mask Flag 80-pin Interrupt Request Flag Source 100-pin Interrupt Note Note CLMIF CLMMK CLMPR0, CLMPR1 INTST0 STIF0 STMK0 STPR00, STPR10 INTCSI00 IICIF00 CSIMK00 CSIPR000, CSIPR100 INTIIC00 IICIF00 IICMK00 IICPR000, IICPR100 INTSR0 SRIF0 SRMK0 SRPR00, SRPR10 INTCSI01 CSIIF01 CSIMK01 CSIPR001, CSIPR101 INTIIC01 IICIF01 IICMK01 IICPR001, IICPR101 INTTRD0 TRDIF0 TRDMK0 TRDPR00, TRDPR10 INTTRD1 TRDIF1 TRDMK1 TRDPR01, TRDPR11 INTTRJ0 TRJIF0 TRJMK0 TRJPR00, TRJPR10 INTRAM RAMIF RAMKK RMAMPR0, RAMPR1 INTLIN0TRM LIN0TRMIF LIN0TRMMK LIN0TRMPR0, INTCLM LIN0TRMPR1 Cautions 1. If one of the interrupt sources INTST0, INTCSI00, and INTIIC00 is generated, bit 1 of the IF0H register is set to 1. Bit 1 of the MK0H, PR00H, and PR10H registers supports these three interrupt sources. 2. If one of the interrupt sources INTSR0, INTCSI01, and INTIIC01 is generated, bit 2 of the IF0H register is set to 1. Bit 2 of the MK0H, PR00H, and PR10H registers supports these three interrupt sources. Note Provided only in Group E products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1485 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Table 21-2. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources (3/4) IF1L LIN0STAIF LIN0RVCMK MK1L LIN0STAMK LIN0RVCPR0, PR01L, LIN0RVCPR1 PR11L LIN0STAPR0, 20-pin INTLIN0STA LIN0RVCIF Register 30-pin INTLIN0RVC Register 32-pin Register 48-pin Priority Specification Flag 64-pin Interrupt Mask Flag 80-pin Interrupt Request Flag Source 100-pin Interrupt LIN0STAPR1 INTLIN0 LIN0IF LIN0MK LIN0PR0, LIN0PR1 INTIICA0 IICAIF0 IICAMK0 IICAPR00, IICAPR10 Note Note Note INTP8 PIF8 PMK8 PPR08, PPR18 Note Note INTRTC RTCIF RTCMK RTCPR0, RTCPR1 INTRM00 TMIF00 TMMK00 TMPR000, TMPR100 INTTM01 TMIF01 TMMK01 TMPR001, TMPR101 INTTM02 TMIF02 TMMK02 TMPR002, TMPR102 INTTM03 TMIF03 TMMK03 TMPR003, TMPR103 INTAD ADIF IF1H ADMK MK1H ADPR0, ADPR1 PR01H, PR11H INTP6 PIF6 PMK6 PPR06, PPR16 INTTM11H TMIF11H TMMK11H TMPR011H, TMPR111H Note Note Note Note INTP7 PIF7 PMK7 PPR07, PPR17 INTTM13H TMIF13H TMMK13H TMPR013H, TMPR113H Note Note Note Note INTP9 PIF9 PMK9 PPR09, PPR19 Note Note INTTM01H TMIF01H TMMK01H TMPR001H, TMPR101H INTP10 PIF10 PMK10 PPR10, PPR110 Note INTTM03H TMIF03H TMMK03H TMPR003H, TMPR103H INTST1 STIF1 STMK1 STPR01, STPR11 Note Note INTCSI10 CSIIF10 CSIMK10 CSIPR010, CSIPR110 Note Note INTIIC10 IICIF10 IICMK10 IICPR010, IICPR110 Note Note INTSR1 SRIF1 SRMK1 SRPR01, SRPR11 Note Note INTCSI11 CSIIF11 CSIMK11 CSIPR011, CSIPR111 Note Note INTIIC11 IICIF11 IICMK11 IICPR011, IICPR111 Note Note INTTM04 TMIF04 TMMK04 TMPR004, TMPR104 (Cautions and Note are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1486 RL78/F13, F14 Cautions 1. CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Do not use INTP6 and channel 1 of TAU1 (at 8-bit timer operation) at the same time because they share flags for the interrupt request sources. Whether the interrupt source condition that is satisfied is INTP6 or channel 1 of TAU1, bit 1 of the IF1H register is set to 1. Bit 1 of the MK1H, PR01H, and PR11H registers supports these two interrupt sources. 2. Do not use INTP7 and channel 3 of TAU1 (at 8-bit timer operation) at the same time because they share flags for the interrupt request sources. Whether the interrupt source condition that is satisfied is INTP7 or channel 3 of TAU1, bit 2 of the IF1H register is set to 1. Bit 2 of the MK1H, PR01H, and PR11H registers supports these two interrupt sources. 3. Do not use INTP9 and channel 1 of TAU0 (at 8-bit timer operation) at the same time because they share flags for the interrupt request sources. Whether the interrupt source condition that is satisfied is INTP6 or channel 1 of TAU0, bit 3 of the IF1H register is set to 1. Bit 3 of the MK1H, PR01H, and PR11H registers supports these two interrupt sources. 4. Do not use INTP10 and channel 3 of TAU0 (at 8-bit timer operation) at the same time because they share flags for the interrupt request sources. Whether the interrupt source condition that is satisfied is INTP6 or channel 3 of TAU0, bit 4 of the IF1H register is set to 1. Bit 4 of the MK1H, PR01H, and PR11H registers supports these two interrupt sources. 5. If one of the interrupt sources INTST1, INTCSI10, and INTIIC10 is generated, bit 5 of the IF1H register is set to 1. Bit 5 of the MK1H, PR01H, and PR11H registers supports these three interrupt sources. 6. If one of the interrupt sources INTSR1, INTCSI11, and INTIIC11 is generated, bit 6 of the IF1H register is set to 1. Bit 6 of the MK1H, PR01H, and PR11H registers supports these three interrupt sources. Note Not provided in Group A products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1487 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Table 21-2. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources (4/4) 32-pin 30-pin 20-pin IF2L Register 48-pin Register 64-pin Interrupt Mask Flag 80-pin Interrupt Request Flag Source 100-pin Interrupt TMPR005, TMPR105 PR02L, PR12L Priority Specification Flag Register INTTM05 TMIF05 TMMK05 MK2L INTTM06 TMIF06 TMMK06 TMPR006, TMPR106 INTTM07 TMIF07 TMMK07 TMPR007, TMPR107 INTP11 PIF11 PMK11 PPR11, PPR111 Note 1 INTLIN0WUP LIN0WUPIF LIN0WUPMK LIN0WUPPR0, LIN0WUPPR1 INTKR KRIF KRMK KRPR0, KRPR1 INTCAN0ERR CAN0ERRIF CAN0ERMK CAN0ERRPR0, Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 CA0ERRPR1 INTCAN0WUP CAN0WUPIF CAN0WUPMK CAN0WUPPR0, INTCAN0CFR CAN0CFRIF CAN0CFRMK CAN0CFRPR0, CAN0TRMIF IF2H CAN0TRMMK MK2H CAN0TRMPR0, CAN0TRMPR1 INTCANGRFR CANGRFRIF CANGRFRMK PR02H, PR12H CANGRFRPR0, CANGERRMK TMIF10 CANGERRPR0, TMMK10 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 CANGERRPR1 INTTM10 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 CANGRFRPR1 INTCANGERR CANGERRIF Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 CAN0CFRPR1 INTCAN0TRM Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 CAN0WUPPR1 TMPR010, TMPR110 Note 1 Note 1 Note 2 Note 2 INTTM11 TMIF11 TMMK11 TMPR011, TMPR111 Note 1 Note 1 Note 2 Note 2 INTTM12 TMIF12 TMMK12 TMPR012, TMPR112 Note 1 Note 1 Note 2 Note 2 INTTM13 TMIF13 TMMK13 TMPR013, TMPR113 Note 1 Note 1 Note 2 Note 2 INTFL FLIF INTP12 PIF12 FLMK IF3L PMK12 FLPR0, FLPR1 MK3L PPR012, PPR112 PR03L, PR13L INTLIN1WUP LIN1WUPIF LIN1WUPMK LIN1WUPPR0, LIN1TRMIF LIN1TRMMK LIN1TRMPR0, LIN1RVCIF LIN1RVCMK LIN1RVCPR0, LIN1STAIF LIN1STAMK LIN1STAPR0, LIN1IF LIN1MK LIN1PR0, LIN1PR1 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 LIN1STAPR1 INTLIN1 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 LIN1RVCPR1 INTLIN1STA Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 LIN1TRMPR1 INTLIN1RVC Note 3 Note 3 LIN1WUPPR1 INTLIN1TRM Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 INTTM14 TMIF14 TMMK14 TMPR014, TMPR114 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 INTTM15 TMIF15 TMMK15 TMPR015, TMPR115 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 INTTM16 TMIF16 TMMK16 TMPR016, TMPR116 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 INTTM17 TMIF17 TMMK17 TMPR017, TMPR117 Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 (Notes are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1488 RL78/F13, F14 Notes 1. CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Not provided in Group A products. 2. Not provided in products of Groups A and B. 3. Provided only in Group E products. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1489 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.3.1 Interrupt request flag registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H, IF2L, IF2H, IF3L) The interrupt request flags are set to 1 when the corresponding interrupt request is generated or an instruction is executed. They are cleared to 0 when an instruction is executed upon acknowledgment of an interrupt request or upon reset signal generation. When an interrupt is acknowledged, the interrupt request flag is automatically cleared and then the interrupt routine is entered. The IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H, IF2L, IF2H, and IF3L registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When the IF0L and IF0H registers, the IF1L and IF1H registers, and the IF2L and IF2H registers are combined to form 16bit registers IF0, IF1, and IF2, they can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H. Remark If an instruction that writes data to this register is executed, the number of instruction execution clocks increases by 2 clocks. Figure 21-2. Format of Interrupt Request Flag Registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H, IF2L, IF2H, IF3L) (1/2) Address: FFFE0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol IF0L <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PIF5 PIF4 PIF3 PIF2 PIF1 PIF0 LVIIF WDTIIF CMPIF0 SPMIF <1> <0> Address: FFFE1H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> IF0H LIN0TRMIF RAMIF TRJIIF0 TRDIF1 TRDIF0 SRIF0 STIF0 CLMIF CSIIF01 CSIIF00 PIF13 IICIF01 IICIF00 <3> <2> <1> PIF8 IICAIF0 Address: FFFE2H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> IF1L TMIF03 TMIF02 TMIF01 TMIF00 RTCIF Address: FFFE3H After reset: 00H Symbol <7> IF1H TMIF04 IF2L R/W SRIF1 STIF1 PIF10 PIF9 CSIIF10 TMIF03H TMIF01H <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PIF11 TMIF07 TMIF06 TMIF05 After reset: 00H <7> LIN0IF <5> IICIF11 Symbol LIN0STAIF LIN0RVCIF <6> CSIIF11 Address: FFFD0H <0> <6> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PIF7 PIF6 ADIF TMIF13H TMIF11H IICIF10 R/W <5> CAN0CFRIF CAN0WUPIF CAN0ERRIF KRIF LIN0WUPIF R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1490 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 21-2. Format of Interrupt Request Flag Registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H, IF2L, IF2H, IF3L) (2/2) Address: FFFD1H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> <6> 5 <4> <3> IF2H FLIF TMIF13 TMIF12 TMIF11 TMIF10 <3> Address: FFFD2H After reset: 00H <2> <1> <0> CANGERRIF CANGREFRI CAN0TRMIF F R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> IF3L TMIF17 TMIF16 TMIF15 TMIF14 <2> <1> LIN1STAIF LIN1RVCIF LIN1TRMIF LIN1IF IFxx <0> PIF12 LIN1WUPIF Interrupt request flag 0 No interrupt request signal is generated 1 Interrupt request is generated, interrupt request status Cautions 1. The above is the bit layout for the 100-pin. The available bits differ depending on the product. For details about the bits available for each product, see Table 21-2. Be sure to clear bits that are not available to 0. 2. When operating a timer, serial interface, or A/D converter after standby release, operate it once after clearing the interrupt request flag. An interrupt request flag may be set by noise. 3. When manipulating a flag of the interrupt request flag register, use a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction (CLR1). When describing in C language, use a bit manipulation instruction such as "IF0L.0 = 0;" or "_asm("clr1 IF0L, 0");" because the compiled assembler must be a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction (CLR1). If a program is described in C language using an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction such as "IF0L &= 0xfe;" and compiled, it becomes the assembler of three instructions. mov a, IF0L and a, #0FEH mov IF0L, a In this case, even if the request flag of the another bit of the same interrupt request flag register (IF0L) is set to 1 at the timing between "mov a, IF0L" and "mov IF0L, a", the flag is cleared to 0 at "mov IF0L, a". Therefore, care must be exercised when using an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction in C language. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1491 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.3.2 Interrupt mask flag registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H, MK2L, MK2H, MK3L) The interrupt mask flags are used to enable/disable the corresponding maskable interrupt servicing. The MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H, MK2L, MK2H, and MK3L registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When the MK0L and MK0H registers, the MK1L and MK1H registers, and the MK2L and MK2H registers are combined to form 16-bit registers MK0, MK1, and MK2, they can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH. Remark If an instruction that writes data to this register is executed, the number of instruction execution clocks increases by 2 clocks. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1492 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 21-3. Format of Interrupt Mask Flag Registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H, MK2L, MK2H, MK3L) Address: FFFE4H Symbol MK0L After reset: FFH <7> R/W <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PMK5 PMK4 PMK3 PMK2 PMK1 PMK0 LVIMK WDTIMK CMPMK0 SPMMK <2> <1> <0> Address: FFFE5H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> MK0H LIN0TRMMK RAMMK TRJMK0 TRDMK1 TRDMK0 Address: FFFE6H After reset: FFH SRMK0 STMK0 CLMMK CSIMK01 CSIMK00 PMK13 IICMK01 IICMK00 <3> <2> <1> PMK8 IICAMK0 R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> MK1L TMMK03 TMMK02 TMMK01 TMMK00 RTCMK Address: FFFE7H After reset: FFH Symbol <7> MK1H TMMK04 Address: FFFD4H Symbol MK2L <6> R/W <5> <4> <3> <1> <0> ADMK STMK1 PMK10 PMK9 PMK7 PMK6 TMMK03H TMMK01H TMMK13H TMMK11H IICMK11 IICMK10 <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PMK11 TMMK07 TMMK06 TMMK05 <2> <1> <0> R/W <5> K After reset: FFH KRMK K LIN0WUPMK R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> MK2H FLMK TMMK13 TMMK12 TMMK11 TMMK10 Address: FFFD6H <2> CSIMK10 CAN0CFRM CAN0WUPM CAN0ERRM Address: FFFD5H LIN0MK SRMK1 <6> K LIN0STAMK LIN0RVCMK CSIMK11 After reset: FFH <7> <0> After reset: FFH CANGERRM CANGRF CAN0TRMM K RMK K <2> <1> <0> R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> MK3L TMMK17 TMMK16 TMMK15 TMMK14 <3> LIN1STAMK LIN1RVCMK LIN1TRMMK LIN1MK MKxx PMK12 LIN1WUPMK Interrupt servicing control 0 Interrupt servicing enabled 1 Interrupt servicing disabled Caution The above is the bit layout for the 100-pin. The available bits differ depending on the product. For details about the bits available for each product, see Table 21-2. Be sure to set bits that are not available to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1493 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.3.3 Priority specification flag registers (PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR03L, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H, PR12L, PR12H, PR13L) The priority specification flag registers are used to set the corresponding maskable interrupt priority level. A priority level is set by using the PR0xy and PR1xy registers in combination (xy = 0L, 0H, 1L, 1H, 2L, 2H, or 3L). The PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR03L, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H, PR12L, PR12H, and the PR13L registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. If the PR00L and PR00H registers, the PR01L and PR01H registers, the PR02L and PR02H registers, the PR10L and PR10H registers, the PR11L and PR11H registers, and the PR12L and PR12H registers are combined to form 16-bit registers PR00, PR01, PR02, PR10, PR11, and PR12, they can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH. Remark If an instruction that writes data to this register is executed, the number of instruction execution clocks increases by 2 clocks. Figure 21-4. Format of Priority Specification Flag Registers (PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR03L, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H, PR12L, PR12H, PR13L) (1/3) Address: FFFE8H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PR00L PPR05 PPR04 PPR03 PPR02 PPR01 PPR00 LVIPR0 WDTIPR0 CMPPR00 SPMPR0 Address: FFFECH After reset: FFH R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PR10L PPR15 PPR14 PPR13 PPR12 PPR11 PPR10 LVIPR1 WDTIPR1 CMPPR10 SPMPR1 <2> <1> <0> Address: FFFE9H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> PR00H LIN0TRMPR RAMPR0 TRJPR00 TRDPR01 TRDPR00 0 Address: FFFEDH After reset: FFH SRPR00 STPR00 CLMPR0 CSIPR001 CSIPR000 PPR013 IICPR001 IICPR000 R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PR10H LIN0TRMPR RAMPR1 TRJPR10 TRDPR11 TRDPR10 SRPR10 STPR10 CLMPR1 CSIPR101 CSIPR100 PPR113 IICPR101 IICPR100 <1> 1 Address: FFFEAH After reset: FFH R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> PR01L TMPR003 TMPR002 TMPR001 TMPR000 PPR08 IICAPR00 RTCPR0 <0> LIN0STAP LIN0RVCPR R0 0 LIN0PR0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1494 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 21-4. Format of Priority Specification Flag Registers (PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR3L, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H, PR12L, PR12H, PR13L) (2/3) Address: FFFEEH After reset: FFH R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> PR11L TMPR103 TMPR102 TMPR101 TMPR100 PPR18 IICAPR10 <1> LIN0STAP LIN0RVCPR R1 RTCPR1 <0> 1 LIN0PR1 Address: FFFEBH After reset: FFH R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PR01H TMPR004 SRPR01 STPR01 PPR010 PPR09 PPR07 PPR06 ADPR0 CSIPR011 CSIPR010 IICPR011 IICPR010 Address: FFFEFH After reset: FFH TMPR003H TMPR001H TMPR013H TMPR011H R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> PR11H TMPR104 SRPR11 STPR11 PPR110 PPR19 PPR17 PPR16 ADPR1 CSIPR111 CSIPR110 IICPR111 IICPR110 Address: FFFD8H Symbol PR02L After reset: FFH <7> <6> R/W <5> CAN0CFRP CAN0WUPP CAN0ERRP R0 R0 TMPR103H TMPR101H TMPR113H TMPR111H <4> KRPR0 R0 <3> <2> <1> <0> PPR011 TMPR007 TMPR006 TMPR005 LIN0WUPPR 0 Address: FFFDCH Symbol PR12L After reset: FFH <7> <6> R/W <5> CAN0CFRP CAN0WUPP CAN0ERRP R1 R1 <4> <3> <2> <1> <0> KRPR1 PPR111 TMPR107 TMPR106 TMPR105 <2> <1> <0> R1 LIN0WUPPR 1 Address: FFFD9H After reset: FFH R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> PR02H FLPR0 TMPR013 TMPR012 TMPR011 Address: FFFDDH After reset: FFH <3> TMPR010 CANGERRP CANGRFRP CAN0TRMP R0 R0 R0 R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> PR12H FLPR1 TMPR113 TMPR112 TMPR111 <3> <2> <0> TMPR110 CANGERRP CANGRFRP CAN0TRMP R1 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 <1> R1 R1 1495 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 21-4. Format of Priority Specification Flag Registers (PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR3L, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H, PR12L, PR12H, PR13L) (3/3) Address: FFFDAH After reset: FFH R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> PR03L TMPR017 TMPR016 TMPR015 TMPR014 <3> <2> <1> LIN1STAPR LIN1RVCPR LIN1TRMPR 0 0 0 LIN1PR0 Address: FFFDEH After reset: FFH <0> PPR012 LIN1WUPPR 0 R/W Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> PR13L TMPR117 TMPR116 TMPR115 TMPR114 <3> <2> <1> LIN1STAPR LIN1RVCPR LIN1TRMPR 1 1 LIN1PR1 XXPR1X XXPR0X 0 0 Specify level 0 (high priority level) 0 1 Specify level 1 1 0 Specify level 2 1 1 Specify level 3 (low priority level) 1 <0> PPR112 LIN1WUPPR 1 Priority level selection Caution The above is the bit layout for the 100-pin. The available bits differ depending on the product. For details about the bits available for each product, see Table 21-2. Be sure to set bits that are not available to 1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1496 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.3.4 External interrupt rising edge enable registers (EGP0, EGP1), external interrupt falling edge enable registers (EGN0, EGN1) These registers specify the valid edge for INTP0 to INTP13. The EGP0, EGP1, EGN0, and EGN1 registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H. Figure 21-5. Format of External Interrupt Rising Edge Enable Registers (EGP0, EGP1) and External Interrupt Falling Edge Enable Registers (EGN0, EGN1) Address: FFF38H Symbol EGP0 After reset: 00H 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EGP7 EGP6 EGP5 EGP4 EGP3 EGP2 EGP1 EGP0 Address: FFF39H Symbol EGN0 R/W 7 After reset: 00H R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EGN7 EGN6 EGN5 EGN4 EGN3 EGN2 EGN1 EGN0 Address: FFF3AH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EGP1 0 0 EGP13 EGP12 EGP11 EGP10 EGP9 EGP8 Address: FFF3BH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EGN1 0 0 EGN13 EGN12 EGN11 EGN10 EGN9 EGN8 EGPn EGNn 0 0 Edge detection disabled 0 1 Falling edge 1 0 Rising edge 1 1 Both rising and falling edges INTPn pin valid edge selection (n = 0 to 13) Table 21-3 shows the ports corresponding to the EGPn and EGNn bits. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1497 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Table 21-3. Ports Corresponding to EGPn and EGNn bits Detection Enable Bit EGP0 EGN0 Edge Detection Interrupt 80, 100- Port Request Signal pin P137 64-pin 48-pin 30, 32- 20-pin pin INTP0 EGP1 EGN1 P125 INTP1 EGP2 EGN2 P30(P31) INTP2 EGP3 EGN3 P17 (P50) INTP3 EGP4 EGN4 P120 INTP4 EGP5 EGN5 P12 INTP5 EGP6 EGN6 P71 INTP6 EGP7 EGN7 P32 INTP7 INTP8 EGP8 EGN8 P70 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 EGP9 EGN9 P00 INTP9 EGP10 EGN10 P53 INTP10 Note 1 EGP11 EGN11 P51 INTP11/ Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 INTLIN0WUP Note 2 EGP12 EGN12 P77 INTP12/ INTLIN1WUP Note 2 EGP13 EGN13 Notes 1. 2. P47 INTP13 Not provided in Group A products. Set the EGP1 and EGN1 registers before the INTLIN0WUP and INTLIN1WUP interrupts are generated. 3. Provided only in Group E products. Caution When the input port pins used for the external interrupt functions are switched to the output mode, the INTPn interrupt might be generated upon detection of a valid edge. When switching the input port pins to the output mode, set the port mode register (PMxx) to 0 after disabling the edge detection (by setting EGPn and EGNn to 0). Remarks 1. For edge detection ports, see 2.1 Pin Function List. 2. n = 0 to 13 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1498 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.3.5 Interrupt source determination flag register 0 (INTFLG0) This register determines which of interrupt sources causes an interrupt, an external interrupt source (INTP4, 5, 8, 13) or other interrupt source that are allocated to the same vector table address as the comparator detection 0 interrupt source. The flag in this register cannot be set by software. The flags are cleared by software. To clear the flag, write 1 to the bits other than the bit desired to be cleared. Use an 8-bit data transfer instruction as a write instruction. Figure 21-6. Format of Interrupt Source Determination Flag Register 0 (INTFLG0) Address: F0079H Symbol INTFLG0 After reset: 00H R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INTFLG07 INTFLG06 0 0 0 INTFLG02 INTFLG01 INTFLG00 Note 4, 6 Notes 3, 5 Notes 1, 2, 6 Note 1, 6 Note 6 INTFLG07 Interrupt source determination flag at vector table address 00014h Note 4, 6 0 An INTP13 interrupt has not been generated. 1 An INTP13 interrupt has been generated. INTFLG06 Interrupt source determination flag at vector table address 00012h Notes 3, 5 0 A comparator detection 0 interrupt has not been generated. 1 A comparator detection 0 interrupt has been generated. INTFLG02 Interrupt source determination flag at vector table address 0002Ah Notes 1, 2, 6 0 An INTP8 interrupt has not been generated. 1 An INTP8 interrupt has been generated. INTFLG01 Interrupt source determination flag at vector table address 00012h Note 1, 6 0 An INTP5 interrupt has not been generated. 1 An INTP5 interrupt has been generated. INTFLG00, Interrupt source determination flag at vector table address 00010h Note 6 0 An INTP4 interrupt has not been generated. 1 An INTP4 interrupt has been generated. Notes 1. Not provided in Group A products. 2. Not provided in the RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30 or 32 pins and the RL78/F14 products with 30 or 32 pins. 3. 4. Only provided in products of Groups D and E. Only provided in 80-pin products of the RL78/F14 with 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory and 100-pin products of the RL78/F14 with 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1499 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 5. Even if the RPTINT bit in the DTCCRj register (j = 0 to 23) is set to 0 (disabling the interrupt while the DTC module is in repeat mode), when the comparator detection 0 interrupt source is generated, the INTFLG06 bit is set to 1. For details, see (A) Internal maskable interrupt (only comparator detection 0 interrupt) in Figure 21-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function. 6. If an INTPn interrupt is generated, the bit m in the interrupt source determination flag register 0 (INTFLG0) is set regardless of the settings of the bits in the interrupt mask flag register (MKxx) and interrupt mask register (INTMSK). m: Bit number (m = 0, 1, 2, 7), n: INTP interrupt number (n = 4, 5, 8, 13) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1500 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS The interrupt sources INTP4, INTP5, INTP8, and INTP13 are function-multiplexed with other interrupts. INTFLG0 register is used to determine which of the interrupt sources causes an interrupt. Figure 21-7 shows the flowchart of interrupt processing using the interrupt source determination flag. Figure 21-7. Flowchart of Interrupt Processing Using the Interrupt Source Determination Flag Vectored interrupt servicing starts The corresponding bit in the INTFLG0 register = 1? No Yes Clear the corresponding bit in the INTFLG0 register Interrupt processing for the corresponding bit in the INTFLG0 register Alternate interrupt source detected? No Yes Interrupt processing for the alternate interrupt source Vectored interrupt servicing ends R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1501 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.3.6 Interrupt mask register (INTMSK) The interrupt mask register in the interrupt control circuit is used to mask interrupt requests corresponding to an INTPn interrupt that is to be used as an event signal for the ELC or a source for DTC activation. Set this register when the INTP4 to INTP6 signals are used not as interrupt sources for the interrupt control circuit but as only ELC event signals or DTC activation sources. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH. Figure 21-8. Format of Interrupt Mask Register (INTMSK) Address: F007CH After reset: FFH R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INTMSK 1 1 1 1 1 INTMSK2 INTMSK1 INTMSK0 Notes 1, 2 Note 1 INTMSK2 Setting masking for INTP6 interrupt source to the interrupt control circuit Notes 1, 2 0 Requests to the interrupt control circuit and DTC are enabled. 1 Requests to the interrupt control circuit are disabled, and requests to DTC are enabled. Setting masking for INTP5 interrupt source to the interrupt control circuit Note 3 INTMSK1 Note 1 0 Requests to the interrupt control circuit, ELC, and DTC are enabled. 1 Requests to the interrupt control circuit are disabled, and requests to ELC and DTC are enabled. Setting masking for INTP4 interrupt source to the interrupt control circuit Note 3 INTMSK0 0 Requests to the interrupt control circuit, ELC, and DTC are enabled. 1 Requests to the interrupt control circuit are disabled, and requests to ELC and DTC are enabled. Notes 1. Not provided in the 20-pin products. 2. Not provided in the products with 30 or 32 pins. 3. If an INTPn interrupt is generated, the bit m in the interrupt source determination flag register 0 (INTFLG0) is set regardless of the setting of the bit in the interrupt mask register. n: INTP interrupt number (n = 4, 5), m: Bit number (m = 0,1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1502 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.3.7 Input switch control register (ISC) The ISC0 bit of the ISC register is used for the LIN-bus communication with UART0. The ISC2 and ISC3 bits are used for the LIN/UART module (RLIN3). When the ISC0 bit is set to 1, set the TIS17 and TIS16 bits in the TIS1 register (timer input select register 1) at the same time. Setting bit 0 to 1 selects the input signal of the serial data input pin (RxD0) as the external interrupt input (INTP0), which allows detection of the wakeup signal by the INTP0 interrupt. Setting bits 2 and 3 to 1 select the input signal of the serial data input pin (RxD0) for the LIN/UART module as the external interrupt input. This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation sets this register to 00H. Figure 21-9. Format of Input Switch Control Register (ISC) Address: F0073H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0> ISC 0 0 0 0 ISC3 ISC2 0 ISC0 ISC3 Input selection for external interrupt INTP12 0 INTP12 pin input signal is selected as external interrupt input. 1 LRxD1 pin input signal is selected as external interrupt input. ISC2 Input selection for external interrupt INTP11 0 INTP11 pin input signal is selected as external interrupt input. 1 LRxD0 pin input signal is selected as external interrupt input. ISC0 Input selection for external interrupt INTP0 0 INTP0 pin input signal is selected as external interrupt input. (normal operation) 1 RxD0 pin input signal is selected as external interrupt input. (wake-up signal detection) Caution Bits 7 to 4 and 1 should always be set to 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1503 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.3.8 Program status word (PSW) The program status word is a register used to hold the instruction execution result and the current status for an interrupt request. The IE flag that sets maskable interrupt enable/disable and the ISP0 and ISP1 flags that control multiple interrupt servicing are mapped to the PSW. Besides 8-bit read/write, this register can carry out operations using bit manipulation instructions and dedicated instructions (EI and DI). When a vectored interrupt request is acknowledged, if the BRK instruction is executed, the contents of the PSW are automatically saved into a stack and the IE flag is reset to 0. When a maskable interrupt request is acknowledged, if the value of the bits in the priority specification flag register which correspond to that interrupt is not 00, the value minus 1 is transferred to the ISP0 and ISP1 flags. The PSW contents are also saved into the stack with the PUSH PSW instruction. They are restored from the stack with the RETI, RETB, and POP PSW instructions. Reset signal generation sets PSW to 06H. Figure 21-10. Configuration of Program Status Word PSW <7> <6> <5> <4> IE Z RBS1 AC <3> <2> <1> 0 After reset RBS0 ISP1 ISP0 CY 06H Used when normal instruction is executed ISP1 ISP0 0 0 Priority of interrupt currently being serviced Enables interrupt of level 0 (while interrupt of level 1 or 0 is being serviced). 0 1 1 0 Enables interrupt of level 0 and 1 (while interrupt of level 2 is being serviced). Enables interrupt of level 0 to 2 (while interrupt of level 3 is being serviced). 1 1 Enables all interrupts (waits for acknowledgment of an interrupt). IE R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Interrupt request acknowledgment enable/disable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1504 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.4 Interrupt Servicing Operations 21.4.1 Maskable interrupt request acknowledgment A maskable interrupt request becomes acknowledgeable when the interrupt request flag is set to 1 and the mask (MK) flag corresponding to that interrupt request is cleared to 0. A vectored interrupt request is acknowledged if interrupts are in the interrupt enabled state (when the IE flag is set to 1). However, a low-priority interrupt request is not acknowledged during servicing of a higher priority interrupt request. The times from generation of a maskable interrupt request until vectored interrupt servicing is performed are listed in Table 21-4 below. For the interrupt request acknowledgment timing, see Figures 21-12 and 21-13. Table 21-4. Time from Generation of Maskable Interrupt Until Servicing Minimum Time Servicing time 9 clocks Maximum TimeNote 16 clocks Note Maximum time does not apply when an instruction from the internal RAM area is executed. Remark 1 clock: 1/fCLK (fCLK: CPU clock) If two or more maskable interrupt requests are generated simultaneously, the request with a higher priority level specified in the priority specification flag is acknowledged first. If two or more interrupts requests have the same priority level, the request with the highest default priority is acknowledged first. An interrupt request that is held pending is acknowledged when it becomes acknowledgeable. Figure 21-11 shows the interrupt request acknowledgment algorithm. If a maskable interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents are saved into the stacks in the order of program status word (PSW), then program counter (PC), the IE flag is reset (0), and the contents of the priority specification flag corresponding to the acknowledged interrupt are transferred to the ISP1 and ISP0 flags. The vector table data determined for each interrupt request is loaded into the PC and branched. Restoring from an interrupt is possible by using the RETI instruction. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1505 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 21-11. Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Processing Algorithm Start No xxIF = 1? Yes (interrupt request generation) xxMK = 0? No Yes Interrupt request held pending (xxPR1, xxPR0) (ISP1, ISP0) No (Low priority) Interrupt request held pending Yes (High priority) Higher priority than other interrupt requests simultaneously generated? No Interrupt request held pending Yes Higher default priorityNote than other interrupt requests simultaneously generated? No Interrupt request held pending Yes IE = 1? Yes No Interrupt request held pending Vectored interrupt servicing IF: Interrupt request flag MK: Interrupt mask flag PR0: Priority specification flag 0 PR1: Priority specification flag 1 IE: Flag that controls acknowledgment of maskable interrupt request (1 = Enable, 0 = Disable) ISP0, ISP1: Flag that indicates the priority level of the interrupt currently being serviced Note For the default priority, see Table 21-1 Interrupt Source List. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1506 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 21-12. Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Timing (Minimum Time) 6 clocks CPU processing Instruction Instruction PSW and PC saved, jump to interrupt servicing Interrupt servicing program xxIF 9 clocks Remark 1 clock: 1/fCLK (fCLK: CPU clock) Figure 21-13. Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Timing (Maximum Time) CPU processing Instruction 8 clocks 6 clocks Instruction immediately before interrupt PSW and PC saved, jump to interrupt servicing Interrupt servicing program xxIF 16 clocks Remark 1 clock: 1/fCLK (fCLK: CPU clock) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1507 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.4.2 Software interrupt request acknowledgment A software interrupt request is acknowledged by BRK instruction execution. Software interrupts cannot be disabled. If a software interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents are saved into the stacks in the order of the program status word (PSW), then program counter (PC), the IE flag is reset (0), and the contents of the vector table (0007EH, 0007FH) are loaded into the PC and branched. Restoring from a software interrupt is possible by using the RETB instruction. Caution Can not use the RETI instruction for restoring from the software interrupt. 21.4.3 Multiple interrupt servicing Multiple interrupt servicing occurs when another interrupt request is acknowledged during execution of an interrupt. Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur unless the interrupt request acknowledgment enabled state is selected (IE = 1). When an interrupt request is acknowledged, interrupt request acknowledgment becomes disabled (IE = 0). Therefore, to enable multiple interrupt servicing, it is necessary to set (1) the IE flag with the EI instruction during interrupt servicing to enable interrupt acknowledgment. Moreover, even if interrupts are enabled, multiple interrupt servicing may not be enabled, this being subject to interrupt priority control. Two types of priority control are available: default priority control and programmable priority control. Programmable priority control is used for multiple interrupt servicing. In the interrupt enabled state, if an interrupt request with a priority higher than that of the interrupt currently being serviced is generated, it is acknowledged for multiple interrupt servicing. If an interrupt with a priority equal to or lower than that of the interrupt currently being serviced is generated during interrupt servicing, it is not acknowledged for multiple interrupt servicing. However, when setting the IE flag to 1 during the interruption at level 0, other level 0 interruptions can be allowed. Interrupt requests that are not enabled because interrupts are in the interrupt disabled state or because they have a lower priority are held pending. When servicing of the current interrupt ends, the pending interrupt request is acknowledged following execution of at least one main processing instruction execution. Table 21-5 shows relationship between interrupt requests enabled for multiple interrupt servicing and Figure 21-14 shows multiple interrupt servicing examples. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1508 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Table 21-5. Relationship Between Interrupt Requests Enabled for Multiple Interrupt Servicing During Interrupt Servicing Multiple Interrupt Request Maskable Interrupt Request Priority Level 0 (PR = 00) Interrupt Being Serviced Maskable interrupt Priority Level 1 (PR = 01) Priority Level 2 (PR = 10) Priority Level 3 (PR = 11) Software Interrupt Request IE = 1 IE = 0 IE = 1 IE = 0 IE = 1 IE = 0 IE = 1 IE = 0 ISP1 = 0 ISP0 = 0 ISP1 = 0 ISP0 = 1 ISP1 = 1 ISP0 = 0 ISP1 = 1 ISP0 = 1 Software interrupt Remarks 1. : Multiple interrupt servicing enabled 2. : Multiple interrupt servicing disabled 3. ISP0, ISP1, and IE are flags contained in the PSW. ISP1 = 0, ISP0 = 0: Enables interrupt of level 0 (an interrupt of level 1 or level 0 is being serviced). ISP1 = 0, ISP0 = 1: Enables interrupt of level 0 and 1 (an interrupt of level 2 is being serviced). ISP1 = 1, ISP0 = 0: Enables interrupt of level 0 to 2 (an interrupt of level 3 is being serviced). ISP1 = 1, ISP0 = 1: Enables all interrupts (wait for an interrupt acknowledgment). IE = 0: Interrupt request acknowledgment is disabled. IE = 1: Interrupt request acknowledgment is enabled. 4. PR is a flag contained in the PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR03L, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H, PR12L, PR12H, and PR13L registers. PR = 00: Specify level 0 with PR1 = 0, PR0 = 0 (higher priority level) PR = 01: Specify level 1 with PR1 = 0, PR0 = 1 PR = 10: Specify level 2 with PR1 = 1, PR0 = 0 PR = 11: Specify level 3 with PR1 = 1, PR0 = 1 (lower priority level) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1509 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 21-14. Examples of Multiple Interrupt Servicing (1/2) Example 1. Multiple interrupt servicing occurs twice Main processing INTxx servicing IE = 0 EI INTyy servicing IE = 0 IE = 0 EI INTxx (PR = 11) INTzz servicing EI INTyy (PR = 10) INTzz (PR = 01) RETI IE = 1 IE = 1 RETI RETI IE = 1 During servicing of interrupt INTxx, two interrupt requests, INTyy and INTzz, are acknowledged, and multiple interrupt servicing takes place. Before each interrupt request is acknowledged, the EI instruction must always be issued to enable interrupt request acknowledgment. Example 2. Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur due to priority control Main processing EI INTxx servicing INTyy servicing IE = 0 EI INTxx (PR = 10) INTyy (PR = 11) RETI IE = 1 1 instruction execution IE = 0 RETI IE = 1 Interrupt request INTyy issued during servicing of interrupt INTxx is not acknowledged because its priority is lower than that of INTxx, and multiple interrupt servicing does not take place. The INTyy interrupt request is held pending, and is acknowledged following execution of one main processing instruction. PR = 00: Specify level 0 with PR1 = 0, PR0 = 0 (higher priority level) PR = 01: Specify level 1 with PR1 = 0, PR0 = 1 PR = 10: Specify level 2 with PR1 = 1, PR0 = 0 PR = 11: Specify level 3 with PR1 = 1, PR0 = 1 (lower priority level) IE = 0: Interrupt request acknowledgment is disabled IE = 1: Interrupt request acknowledgment is enabled. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1510 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 21-14. Examples of Multiple Interrupt Servicing (2/2) Example 3. Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur because interrupts are not enabled Main processing INTxx servicing INTyy servicing IE = 0 EI INTxx (PR = 11) INTyy (PR = 00) RETI IE = 1 1 instruction execution IE = 0 RETI IE = 1 Interrupts are not enabled during servicing of interrupt INTxx (EI instruction is not issued), therefore, interrupt request INTyy is not acknowledged and multiple interrupt servicing does not take place. The INTyy interrupt request is held pending, and is acknowledged following execution of one main processing instruction. PR = 00: Specify level 0 with PR1 = 0, PR0 = 0 (higher priority level) PR = 01: Specify level 1 with PR1 = 0, PR0 = 1 PR = 10: Specify level 2 with PR1 = 1, PR0 = 0 PR = 11: Specify level 3 with PR1 = 1, PR0 = 1 (lower priority level) IE = 0: Interrupt request acknowledgment is disabled IE = 1: Interrupt request acknowledgment is enabled. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1511 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.4.4 Interrupt servicing during division instruction The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 handle interrupts during the DIVHU/DIVWU instruction in order to enhance the interrupt response when a division instruction is executed. When an interrupt is generated while the DIVHU/DIVWU instruction is executed, the instruction is suspended After the instruction is suspended, the PC indicates the next instruction after DIVHU/DIVWU An interrupt is generated by the next instruction PC-3 is saved in the stack memory to execute the DIVHU/DIVWU instruction again Table 21-6. Normal Interrupt Processing and Interrupt Processing while Executing Division Instructions Normal interrupt Interrupts while Executing DIVHU/DIVWU Instruction <R> (SP-1) PSW (SP-1) PSW (SP-2) (PC)S (SP-2) (PC-3)S (SP-3) (PC)H (SP-3) (PC-3)H (SP-4) (PC)L (SP-4) (PC-3)L PCS 0000 PCS 0000 PCH (Vector) PCH (Vector) PCL (Vector) PCL (Vector) SP SP-4 SP SP-4 IE 0 IE 0 Caution Disable interrupts when executing the DIVHU or DIVWU instruction in an interrupt servicing routine. Alternatively, unless they are executed in the RAM area, note that execution of a DIVHU or DIVWU instruction is possible even with interrupts enabled as long as a NOP instruction is added immediately after the DIVHU or DIVWU instruction in the assembly language source code. The following compilers automatically add a NOP instruction immediately after any DIVHU or DIVWU instruction output during the build process. - V. 1.71 and later versions of the CA78K0R (Renesas Electronics compiler), for both C and assembly language source code - Service pack 1.40.6 and later versions of the EWRL78 (IAR compiler), for C language source code - GNURL78 (KPIT compiler), for C language source code The AX, BC, DE, and HL registers are used for DIVHU/DIVWU. For the interrupt processing, save these registers in the stack memory. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1512 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS Figure 21-15. Example of Interrupt during Division Instruction MOVW AX, #8081H Interrupt1 Interrupt2 MOVW BC, #8080H PUSH AX PUSH AX MOVW DE, #0002H PUSH BC PUSH BC MOVW HL, #0000H PUSH DE PUSH DE PUSH HL PUSH HL DIVWU DIVWU POP HL POP HL POP DE POP DE POP BC POP BC POP AX POP AX RETI RETI DIVWU MOVW !addr16, AX MOVW AX, BC MOVW !addr16, AX MOVW AX, DE MOVW !addr16, AX MOVW AX, HL MOVW !addr16, AX R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1513 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS 21.4.5 Interrupt request hold There are instructions where, even if an interrupt request is issued while the instructions are being executed, interrupt request acknowledgment is held pending until the end of execution of the next instruction. These instructions (interrupt request hold instructions) are listed below. MOV PSW, #byte MOV PSW, A MOV1 PSW. bit, CY SET1 PSW. bit CLR1 PSW. bit RETB RETI POP PSW BTCLR PSW. bit, $addr20 EI DI SKC SKNC SKZ SKNZ SKH SKNH <R> MULHU MULH MACHU MACH Manipulation instructions for the IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H, IF2L, IF2H, IF3L, MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H, MK2L, MK2H, MK3L, PR00L, PR00H, PR01L, PR01H, PR02L, PR02H, PR03L, PR10L, PR10H, PR11L, PR11H, PR12L, PR12H, and PR13L registers Caution The BRK instruction is not one of the above-listed interrupt request hold instructions. However, the software interrupt activated by executing the BRK instruction causes the IE flag to be cleared. Therefore, even if a maskable interrupt request is generated during execution of the BRK instruction, the interrupt request is not acknowledged. Figure 21-16 shows the timing at which interrupt requests are held pending. Figure 21-16. Interrupt Request Hold CPU processing Instruction N Instruction M PSW and PC saved, jump to interrupt servicing Interrupt servicing program xxIF Remarks 1. Instruction N: Interrupt request hold instruction 2. Instruction M: Instruction other than interrupt request hold instruction R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1514 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 22 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION CHAPTER 22 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION The number of key interrupt input channels differs, depending on the product. Key interrupt input channels 20-pin 32-pin 30, 48, 64, 80, 100-pin 2 ch 6 ch 8 ch 22.1 Functions of Key Interrupt A key interrupt (INTKR) can be generated by setting the key return mode register (KRM) and inputting a falling edge to the key interrupt input pins (KR0 to KR7). Table 22-1. Assignment of Key Interrupt Detection Pins Flag Caution Description KRM0 Controls KR0 signal in 1-bit units. KRM1 Controls KR1 signal in 1-bit units. KRM2 Controls KR2 signal in 1-bit units. KRM3 Controls KR3 signal in 1-bit units. KRM4 Controls KR4 signal in 1-bit units. KRM5 Controls KR5 signal in 1-bit units. KRM6 Controls KR6 signal in 1-bit units. KRM7 Controls KR7 signal in 1-bit units. The pin assignment differs depending on the products. The PIOR50 bit can specify which I/O port is assigned to each KRn function. Inputs to the A/D converter are multiplexed with P80 to P87 and P90 to P92, to which the function can be assigned. These pins are used as analog input pins in their initial state. Use the PIOR50 bit and the ADPC register to make the pins operate as digital input pins before using the key interrupt function. For details of the PIOR50 bit and the ADPC register, refer to 4.3.14 Peripheral I/O redirection register 5 (PIOR5) and 12.3.11 A/D port configuration register (ADPC). Remarks 1. n = 0 to 7 2. The available number of interrupts depends on the setting of the PIOR50 bit as shown below. When PIOR50 is set to 0 KR0 to KR3: 48-pin products KR0 to KR7: 64-pin, 80-pin, 100-pin products When PIOR50 is set to 1 KR0, KR1: 20-pin products KR0 to KR7: 30-pin, 48-pin, 64-pin products KR0 to KR5: 32-pin products R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1515 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 22 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION 22.2 Configuration of Key Interrupt Table 22-2 shows the configuration of the key interrupt. Figure 22-1 is the block diagram of the key interrupt. Table 22-2. Configuration of Key Interrupt Item Control register Configuration Key return mode register (KRM) Figure 22-1. Block Diagram of Key Interrupt KR7 KR6 KR5 KR4 INTKR KR3 KR2 KR1 KR0 KRM7 KRM6 KRM5 KRM4 KRM3 KRM2 KRM1 KRM0 Key return mode register (KRM) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1516 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 22 KEY INTERRUPT FUNCTION 22.3 Register Controlling Key Interrupt 22.3.1 Key return mode register (KRM) The KRM0 to KRM7 bits control signals KR0 to KR7. The KRM register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 22-2. Format of Key Return Mode Register (KRM) Address: FFF37H R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 KRM7 KRM6 KRM5 KRM4 KRM3 KRM2 Symbol KRM After reset: 00H KRMn 0 KRM1 KRM0 Key interrupt mode control 0 Does not detect key interrupt signal 1 Detects key interrupt signal Cautions 1. An interrupt will be generated if the target bit of the KRM register is set to 1 while the KRn pin is at low level. To ignore this interrupt, set the KRM register after disabling interrupt servicing by using the interrupt mask flag. Afterward, clear the interrupt request flag after waiting for the key interrupt input low-level width (tKR). 2. The pins not used in the key interrupt can be used as normal ports. 3. When the assignment of the key interrupt input pin is changed by using the PIOR50 bit, an interrupt may be generated. The pin assignment must be changed while the KRM register is 00H or while the key input interrupt is prohibited. 4. Set the bits of the KRM register to 0 for pins to which the key interrupt function is not to be allocated. Remark n = 0 to 7 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1517 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION 23.1 Standby Function and Configuration 23.1.1 Standby function The standby function reduces the operating current of the system, and the following three modes are available. (1) HALT mode HALT instruction execution sets the HALT mode. In the HALT mode, the CPU operation clock is stopped. If the highspeed system clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator, subsystem clock, or low-speed on-chip oscillator is operating before the HALT mode is set, oscillation of each clock continues. In this mode, the operating current is not decreased as much as in the STOP mode, but the HALT mode is effective for restarting operation immediately upon interrupt request generation and carrying out intermittent operations frequently. (2) STOP mode STOP instruction execution sets the STOP mode. In the STOP mode, the high-speed system clock and high-speed on-chip oscillator stop, stopping the whole system, thereby considerably reducing the CPU operating current. Because this mode can be cleared by an interrupt request, it enables intermittent operations to be carried out. However, because a wait time is required to secure the oscillation stabilization time after the STOP mode is released when the X1 clock is selected, select the HALT mode if it is necessary to start processing immediately upon interrupt request generation. The output from a port pin can be inverted in response to the generation of a source condition for release from the STOP mode. (3) SNOOZE mode In response to a request for A/D conversion by a timer trigger signal (INTRTC), ELE event input Note 1, or signal generated by the A/D converter trigger select register 0 (ADTRGS0) Note 2, a signal for data reception by the LIN/UART module (RLIN3) in the UART mode, or a DTC activation signal, this LSI is released from the STOP mode and A/D conversion, data reception, or DTC operation proceed without the CPU operating. This can only be specified when the high-speed on-chip oscillator is selected for the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK). There is a function for the output of a signal to indicate whether the LSI is in the SNOOZE mode or not on a specified pin when this LSI enters and is released from the SNOOZE mode. In any mode, all the contents of registers, flags and data memory just before the standby mode is set are held. The I/O port output latches and output buffer statuses are also held. Notes 1. Only in the RL78/F14. 2. Only in the RL78/F13. (Cautions are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1518 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION Cautions 1. The STOP mode can be used only when the CPU is operating on the main system clock. The STOP mode cannot be set while the CPU operates with the PLL clock or the subsystem/lowspeed on-chip oscillator select clock. The HALT mode can be used when the CPU is operating on either the main system clock or the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock. 2. When shifting to the STOP mode, be sure to stop the peripheral hardware operation operating with main system clock before executing STOP instruction (except for the setting unit of SNOOZE mode). 3. When using the A/D converter and the LIN/UART module in the SNOOZE mode, set up the A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2) and the UART standby control register (LUSCn) before switching to the STOP mode. For details, see 17.2 Register Descriptions. 4. The following sequence is recommended for operating current reduction of the A/D converter when the standby function is used: First clear bit 7 (ADCS) and bit 0 (ADCE) of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) to 0 to stop the A/D conversion operation, and then execute the STOP instruction. 5. It can be selected by the option byte whether the WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator continues oscillating or stops in the HALT or STOP mode. For details, see CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE. 23.2 Registers controlling standby function Oscillation stabilization time when this LSI is released from the STOP mode is controlled by the following two registers. Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) Output from the port when a source condition for release from the STOP mode is generated is inverted by the following register. STOP status output control register (STPSTC) Remark For the registers that start, stop, or select the clock, see CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1519 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION 23.2.1 Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) This is the register that indicates the count status of the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time counter. The X1 clock oscillation stabilization time can be checked in the following case. If the X1 clock starts oscillation while the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock or sub/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is being used as the CPU clock. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is being used as the CPU clock with the X1 clock oscillating. The OSTC register can be read by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When reset is released (reset by RESET input, POR, LVD, WDT, and executing an illegal instruction), the STOP instruction and MSTOP bit (bit 7 of clock operation status control register (CSC)) = 1 clear this register to 00H. Figure 23-1. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC) Address: FFFA2H After reset: 00H R Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OSTC MOST8 MOST9 MOST10 MOST11 MOST13 MOST15 MOST17 MOST18 MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST MOST 8 9 10 11 13 15 17 18 Oscillation stabilization time status fX = 10 MHz fX = 20 MHz 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 /fX max. 25.6 s max. 12.8 s max. 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 28/fX min. 25.6 s min. 12.8 s min. 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 29/fX min. 51.2 s min. 25.6 s min. 8 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 /fX min. 102.4 s min. 51.2 s min. 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 211/fX min. 204.8 s min. 102.4 s min. 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 213/fX min. 819.2 s min. 409.6 s min. 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 215/fX min. 3.27 ms min. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 217/fX min. 13.10 ms min. 6.55 ms min. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 218/fX min. 26.21 ms min. 13.10 ms min. 10 1.63 ms min. Cautions 1. After the above time has elapsed, the bits are set to 1 in order from the MOST8 bit and remain 1. 2. The oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation stabilization time set by the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS). In the following cases, set the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTS register to the value greater than the count value which is to be checked by the OSTC register. If the X1 clock starts oscillation while the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock or subsystem clock is being used as the CPU clock. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is being used as the CPU clock with the X1 clock oscillating. (Note, therefore, that only the status up to the oscillation stabilization time set by the OSTS register is set to the OSTC register after the STOP mode is released.) 3. The X1 clock oscillation stabilization wait time does not include the time until clock oscillation starts ("a" below). STOP mode release X1 pin voltage waveform a Remark fX: X1 clock oscillation frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1520 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION 23.2.2 Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) This register is used to select the X1 clock oscillation stabilization wait time when the STOP mode is released. When the X1 clock is made to oscillate, the operation automatically waits for the time set using the OSTS register. After the X1 clock starts oscillating, confirm with the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) that the desired oscillation stabilization time has elapsed. The oscillation stabilization time can be checked up to the time set using the OSTC register. The OSTS register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the OSTS register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Reset signal generation sets this register to 07H. Figure 23-2. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Select Register (OSTS) Address: FFFA3H After reset: 07H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OSTS 0 0 0 0 0 OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 Oscillation stabilization time selection fX = 10 MHz fX = 20 MHz 0 0 0 2 /fX 25.6 s 12.8 s 0 0 1 29/fX 51.2 s 25.6 s 10 8 0 1 0 2 /fX 102.4 s 51.2 s 0 1 1 211/fX 204.8 s 102.4 s 1 0 0 213/fX 819.2 s 409.6 s 1 0 1 215/fX 3.27 ms 1.63 ms 17 1 1 0 2 /fX 13.10 ms 6.55 ms 1 1 1 218/fX 26.21 ms 13.10 ms 1. To set the STOP mode when the X1 clock is used as the CPU clock, set the OSTS register before executing the STOP instruction. 2. Before changing the setting of the OSTS register, confirm that the count operation of the OSTC register is completed. 3. Do not change the value of the OSTS register during the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time. 4. The oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation stabilization time set by the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS). In the following cases, set the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTS register to the value greater than the count value which is to be checked by the OSTC register. If the X1 clock starts oscillation while the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock or subsystem clock is being used as the CPU clock. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is being used as the CPU clock with the X1 clock oscillating. (Note, therefore, that only the status up to the oscillation stabilization time set by the OSTS register is set to the OSTC register after the STOP mode is released.) 5. The X1 clock oscillation stabilization wait time does not include the time until clock oscillation starts ("a" below). STOP mode release X1 pin voltage waveform a Remark fX: X1 clock oscillation frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1521 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION 23.2.3 STOP status output control register (STPSTC) The port latch of P31 or P52 can be inverted in response to a source condition for release from the STOP mode being generated or a transition from SNOOZE mode to normal mode. Set the STPSTC register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Writing to the STPSTC register is disabled when the GCSC bit of the IAWCTL register is set to 1. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Cautions 1. As the 20-, 30-, and 32-pin products do not have the STOPST function, they do not have the STPSTC register. 2. When the STOP status output control register is to be used, the target port pin should be placed in the output mode and the port latch should be set to 0 beforehand. Figure 23-3. Format of STOP Status Output Control Register (STPSTC) Address: F02CAH After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> 6 5 <4> 3 2 1 <0> STPSTC STPOEN 0 0 STPLV 0 0 0 STPSEL Note 1 STPOEN Note 2 Enabling or disabling of STOPST output 0 Nothing is done when this LSI is released from the STOP mode. 1 The STPLV value is output on the pin selected by STPSEL when this LSI is released from the STOP mode. STPLVNote 1 Control of STOPST output level 0 Output low 1 Output high STPSELNote 2 Control of STOPST pin selection 0 Selects P31 1 Selects P52 Notes 1. The STPLV bit is inverted when this LSI is released from the STOP mode and when this LSI makes a transition from SNOOZE mode to normal mode. 2. Bit 0 is a read-only reserved bit in 48-pin products. When setting the register, write the initial value, 0, to this bit. Caution Be sure to set bits 1 to 3, 5, and 6 of the STPSTC register to 0. The following figure shows the timing of the STOPST pin and STPLV bit during CPU operation status. CPU status RUN STOP RUN STOP RUN STOP SNOOZE RUN P31/STOPST or P52/STOPST STPLV R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1522 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION 23.3 Standby Function Operation 23.3.1 HALT mode (1) HALT mode The HALT mode is set by executing the HALT instruction. HALT mode can be set regardless of whether the CPU clock before the setting was the high-speed system clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, PLL clock, low-speed on-chip oscillator clock, or subsystem clock. The operating statuses in the HALT mode are shown below. Caution If the interrupt mask flag is 0 (interrupt servicing enabled) and the interrupt request flag is 1 (interrupt request signal is generated), the HALT mode is released even if the HALT instruction is executed (Because the interrupt request signal is used to release the HALT mode). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1523 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION Table 23-1. Operating Statuses in HALT Mode (1/2) HALT Mode Setting When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Main System Clock When CPU Is Operating on High-speed On-chip Oscillator Clock (fIH) Item System clock Main system clock Subsystem clock When CPU Is Operating on X1 Clock (fX) When CPU Is Operating on External Main System Clock (fEX) When CPU Is Operating on PLL Clock (fPLL) Clock supply to the CPU is stopped fIH Operation continues (cannot be stopped) Operation disabled fX Operation disabled Operation continues (cannot be stopped) Cannot operate fEX Cannot operate Operation continues (cannot be stopped) fPLL Operation disabled Operation disabled fXT Only operation of the PLL clock continues (and cannot be stopped). Clocks other than the PLL clock do not operate. Operation continues (cannot be stopped) Status before HALT mode was set is retained fEXS fIL Set by bit 1 (HPIEN) of on-chip debug option byte (000C3H/020C3H), bit 0 (SELLOSC) of the CKSEL register, and bit 4 (WUTMMCK0) of the OSMC register. WUTMMCK0 = 1: Oscillates WUTMMCK0 = 0 and SELLOSC = 1: Oscillates WUTMMCK0 = 0, SELLOSC = 0, and HPIEN = 1: Oscillates WUTMMCK0 = 0, SELLOSC = 0, and HPIEN = 0: Stops fWDT Set by bits 0 (WDSTBYON) and 4 (WDTON) of user option byte (000C0H/020C0H) WDTON = 0: Stops WDTON = 1 and WDSTBYON = 1: Oscillates WDTON = 1 and WDSTBYON = 0: Stops CPU Operation stopped Code flash memory Data flash memory RAM Operation stopped (operation can continue during DTC transfer) Port (latch) Status before HALT mode was set is retained Timer array unit Operable Real-time clock (RTC) Watchdog timer See CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER Clock monitor Operable (fIL operates) Timer RJ Operable Timer RD Clock output/buzzer output A/D converter D/A converter Comparator Serial array unit (SAU) Serial interface (IICA) DTC ELC Linking between operational function blocks is possible. LIN/UART module (RLIN3) Operable CAN interface (RS-CAN lite) Power-on-reset function Voltage detection function External interrupt R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1524 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION HALT Mode Setting When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Main System Clock When CPU Is Operating on X1 Clock (fX) When CPU Is Operating on External Main System Clock (fEX) Item When CPU Is Operating on High-speed On-chip Oscillator Clock (fIH) Key interrupt function Operable CRC operation function Operation stopped (operation can continue during DTC transfer) When CPU Is Operating on PLL Clock (fPLL) High-speed CRC General-purpose CRC Illegal-memory access detection function RAM2 bit error detection function RAM guard function SFR guard function CPU stack pointer monitor function Operation stopped (operation can continue during vectored interrupt servicing) Remark Operation stopped: Operation is automatically stopped before switching to the HALT mode. Operation disabled: Operation is stopped before switching to the HALT mode. Cannot operate: Operation is not possible regardless of switching to the HALT mode. fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock fX: X1 clock fEX: External main system clock fXT: XT1 clock fEXS: External subsystem clock fPLL: PLL clock fWDT: WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator clock R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1525 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION Table 23-1. Operating Statuses in HALT Mode (2/2) HALT Mode Setting Item When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Subsystem Clock When CPU Is Operating on XT1 Clock (fXT) When CPU Is Operating on External Subsystem Clock (fEXS) System clock Main system clock When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Low-speed On-chip Oscillator Clock (fIL) Clock supply to the CPU is stopped fIH Operation disabled fX fEX fPLL Subsystem clock fXT Operation continues (cannot be stopped) Cannot operate fEXS Cannot operate Operation continues (cannot be stopped) fIL Cannot operate Set by bit 1 (HPIEN) of on-chip debug option byte (000C3H/020C3H), bit 0 (SELLOSC) of the CKSEL register, and bit 4 (WUTMMCK0) of the OSMC register. WUTMMCK0 = 1: Oscillates WUTMMCK0 = 0 and SELLOSC = 1: Oscillates WUTMMCK0 = 0, SELLOSC = 0, and HPIEN = 1: Oscillates WUTMMCK0 = 0, SELLOSC = 0, and HPIEN = 0: Stops fWDT Set by bits 0 (WDSTBYON) and 4 (WDTON) of user option byte (000C0H/020C0H) WDTON = 0: Stops WDTON = 1 and WDSTBYON = 1: Oscillates WDTON = 1 and WDSTBYON = 0: Stops CPU Operation stopped Code flash memory Data flash memory RAM Operation stopped (operation can continue during DTC transfer) Port (latch) Status before HALT mode was set is retained Timer array unit Operable (Operation is disabled while in the low consumption RTC mode) Real-time clock (RTC) Operable Watchdog timer See CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER Clock monitor Operation stopped Timer RJ Operable (Operation is disabled while in the low consumption RTC mode) Timer RD Clock output/buzzer output A/D converter Operation disabled D/A converter Comparator Serial array unit (SAU) Operable (Operation is disabled while in the low consumption RTC mode) Serial interface (IICA) Operation disabled DTC Operable ELC Linking between operational function blocks is possible. LIN/UART module (RLIN3) Operation disabled CAN interface (RS-CAN lite) Power-on-reset function Operable Voltage detection function External interrupt Key interrupt function R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1526 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION HALT Mode Setting Item When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Subsystem Clock When CPU Is Operating on XT1 Clock (fXT) When CPU Is Operating on External Subsystem Clock (fEXS) CRC operation function When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Low-speed On-chip Oscillator Clock (fIL) High-speed CRC Operation disabled General-purpose CRC Operation stopped (operation can continue during DTC transfer) Illegal-memory access detection function RAM2 bit error detection function RAM guard function SFR guard function CPU stack pointer monitor function Operation stopped (operation can continue during vectored interrupt servicing) Remark Operation stopped: Operation is automatically stopped before switching to the HALT mode. Operation disabled: Operation is stopped before switching to the HALT mode. Cannot operate: Operation is not possible regardless of switching to the HALT mode. fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock fX: X1 clock fEX: External main system clock fXT: XT1 clock fEXS: External subsystem clock fPLL: PLL clock fWDT: WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator clock R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1527 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION (2) HALT mode release The HALT mode can be released by interrupt and reset signal generation. (a) Release by unmasked interrupt request When an interrupt request with an interrupt mask flag set to 0 (interrupt servicing enabled) is generated, the HALT mode is released. If interrupt acknowledgment is enabled, vectored interrupt servicing is carried out. If interrupt acknowledgment is disabled, the next address instruction of the HALT instruction is executed. Figure 23-4. HALT Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation HALT instruction Interrupt request Standby release signal Status of CPU Operating mode High-speed system clock, High-speed on-chip oscillator clock, PLL clock, low-speed on-chip oscillator clock, or subsystem clock Note Wait Note HALT mode Operating mode Oscillation Wait time for HALT mode release When vectored interrupt servicing is carried out Main/PLL select clock: 15 to 16 clocks Subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock (RTCLPC = 0): 10 to 11 clocks Subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock (RTCLPC = 1): 11 to 12 clocks When vectored interrupt servicing is not carried out Main/PLL select clock: 9 to 10 clocks Subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock (RTCLPC = 0): 4 to 5 clocks Subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock (RTCLPC = 1): 5 to 6 clocks Remark The broken lines indicate the case when the interrupt request which has released the standby mode is acknowledged. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1528 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION (b) Release by reset signal generation When the reset signal is generated, HALT mode is released, and then, as in the case with a normal reset operation, the program branches. Figure 23-5. HALT Mode Release by Reset (1) When high-speed system clock is used as CPU clock HALT instruction Reset processing Note Reset signal Normal operation (high-speed system clock) Status of CPU High-speed system clock (X1 oscillation) HALT mode Reset period Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock) Oscillates Oscillates Starting X1 oscillation is specified by software. (2) When high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is used as CPU clock HALT instruction Reset signal Reset processing Note Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock) Status of CPU High-speed on-chip oscillator clock HALT mode Reset period Oscillates Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock) Oscillates Wait for oscillation accuracy stabilization (3) When subsystem clock or low-speed on-chip oscillator clock is used as CPU clock HALT instruction Interrupt request Standby release signal Status of CPU High-speed system clock, High-speed on-chip oscillator clock, PLL clock, low-speed on-chip oscillator clock, or subsystem clock Note Operating mode Wait Note HALT mode Operating mode Oscillation For the reset processing time, see CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1529 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION 23.3.2 STOP mode (1) STOP mode setting and operating statuses The STOP mode is set by executing the STOP instruction, and it can be set only when the CPU clock before the setting was the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, X1 clock, or external main system clock. Caution Because the interrupt request signal is used to clear the STOP mode, if the interrupt mask flag is 0 (interrupt servicing enabled) and the interrupt request flag is 1 (interrupt request signal is generated), the STOP mode is immediately cleared when the STOP instruction is executed. Accordingly, once the STOP instruction is executed, the system returns to its normal operating mode after the elapse of release time from the STOP mode. The operating statuses in the STOP mode are shown below. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1530 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION Table 23-2. Operating Statuses in STOP Mode STOP Mode Setting When STOP Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Main System Clock When CPU Is Operating on Highspeed On-chip Oscillator clock (fIH) Item System clock Main system clock When CPU Is Operating on X1 Clock (fX) When CPU Is Operating on External Main System Clock (fEX) When CPU Is Operating on PLL Clock (fPLL) Clock supply to the CPU is stopped fIH Stopped fX fEX Subsystem clock fPLL Operation disabled fXT Status before STOP mode was set is retained fEXS fIL Set by bit 0 (SELLOSC) of the CKSEL register and bit 4 (WUTMMCK0) of the OSMC register. WUTMMCK0 = 1: Oscillates WUTMMCK0 = 0 and SELLOSC = 1: Oscillates WUTMMCK0 = 0 and SELLOSC = 0: Stops fWDT Set by bits 0 (WDSTBYON) and 4 (WDTON) of user option byte (000C0H/020C0H) WDTON = 0: Stops WDTON = 1 and WDSTBYON = 1: Oscillates WDTON = 1 and WDSTBYON = 0: Stops CPU Operation stopped Code flash memory Data flash memory Operation stopped (the STOP instruction is not executed during data flash programming) RAM Operation stopped Port (latch) Status before STOP mode was set is retained Timer array unit Operation disabled Real-time clock (RTC) Operable (when the subsystem clock is selected as an input clock (fRTC)) Watchdog timer See CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER Clock monitor Operation stopped Timer RJ Operable In the event counting mode when no TRJIO0 input filters are selected. If the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is selected as the clock source for counting and the RTCLPC bit of the OSMC register is 0. If the low-speed on-chip oscillator is selected as the clock source for counting. Timer RD Operable (can only operate for output of the SNOOZE status signal when the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is selected) Clock output/buzzer output Operable only when the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is selected as the count clock A/D converter Wakeup operation is enabled (switching to the SNOOZE mode) D/A converter Operable (the state before the STOP mode was set is retained) Comparator Operable (if the settings allow release from the STOP mode and the digital filters are not in use) Serial array unit (SAU) Operation disabled Serial interface (IICA) Wakeup operation by address match is enabled DTC Reception of trigger signals from sources for DTC activation is enabled (switching to the SNOOZE mode) ELC Linking between operational function blocks is possible. LIN/UART module (RLIN3) Only wakeup operation of the UART is possible (switching to the SNOOZE mode). CAN interface (RS-CAN lite) Operation disabled Power-on-reset function Operable Voltage detection function External interrupt Key interrupt function R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1531 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION STOP Mode Setting When STOP Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Main System Clock When CPU Is Operating on Highspeed On-chip Oscillator clock (fIH) Item CRC operation function High-speed CRC When CPU Is Operating on X1 Clock (fX) When CPU Is Operating on External Main System Clock (fEX) When CPU Is Operating on PLL Clock (fPLL) Operation stopped General-purpose CRC Illegal-memory access detection function RAM2 bit error detection function RAM guard function SFR guard function CPU stack pointer monitor function Operation stopped (operation can continue during vectored interrupt servicing) Remark Operation stopped: Operation is automatically stopped before switching to the STOP mode. Operation disabled: Operation is stopped before switching to the STOP mode. fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock fX: X1 clock fEX: External main system clock fXT: XT1 clock fEXS: External subsystem clock fPLL: PLL clock fWDT: WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator clock Cautions 1. To use the peripheral hardware that stops operation in the STOP mode, and the peripheral hardware for which the clock that stops oscillating in the STOP mode after the STOP mode is released, restart the peripheral hardware. 2. To stop the watchdog timer clock in the STOP mode, set bit 0 (WDSTBYON) of a user option byte (000C0H/020C0H) to 0 (stop the watchdog timer operation in the HALT/STOP/SNOOZE mode). 3. To shorten oscillation stabilization time after the STOP mode is released when the CPU operates with the high-speed system clock (X1 oscillation), temporarily switch the CPU clock to the high-speed onchip oscillator clock before the execution of the STOP instruction. Before changing the CPU clock from the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock to the high-speed system clock (X1 oscillation) after the STOP mode is released, check the oscillation stabilization time with the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1532 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION (2) STOP mode release The STOP mode can be released by interrupt and reset signal generation. (a) Release by unmasked interrupt request When an interrupt request with an interrupt mask set to 0 (Interrupt servicing enabled) is generated, the STOP mode is released. After the oscillation stabilization time has elapsed, if interrupt acknowledgment is enabled, vectored interrupt servicing is carried out. If interrupt acknowledgment is disabled, the next address instruction of the STOP instruction is executed. Figure 23-6. STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation (1/2) (1) When high-speed system clock (X1 oscillation) is used as CPU clock STOP instruction Interrupt request Standby release signal Note 1 Status of CPU STOP mode release time Note 2 Normal operation (high-speed system clock) STOP mode Oscillates Oscillation stopped High-speed system clock (X1 oscillation) Notes Supply of the clock is stopped Wait Normal operation (high-speed system clock) Oscillates 1. For details of the standby release signal, see Figure 21-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function. 2. STOP mode release time Supply of the clock is stopped When FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H): 18 s to "whichever is longer 105 s and the oscillation stabilization time (set by STS)" When FRQSEL4 = 0 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H): 18 s to "whichever is longer 65 s and the oscillation stabilization time (set by OSTS)" Wait When vectored interrupt servicing is carried out: 10 to 11 clocks When vectored interrupt servicing is not carried out: 4 to 5 clocks Remarks 1. The clock supply stop time varies depending on the temperature conditions and STOP mode period. 2. The broken lines indicate the case when the interrupt request that has released the standby mode is acknowledged. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1533 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION Figure 23-6. STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation (2/2) (2) When high-speed system clock (external clock input) is used as CPU clock STOP instruction Interrupt request Standby release signal Note 1 Status of CPU STOP mode release time Note 2 Normal operation (high-speed system clock) STOP mode Oscillates Oscillation stopped High-speed system clock (external clock input) Supply of the clock is stopped Normal operation (high-speed system clock) Wait Oscillates (3) When high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is used as CPU clock STOP instruction Interrupt request Standby release signal Note 1 Status of CPU STOP mode release time Note 2 Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock) STOP mode Oscillates Oscillation stopped High-speed on-chip oscillator clock Supply of the clock is stopped Wait Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock) Oscillates Wait for oscillation accuracy stabilization Notes 1. For details of the standby release signal, see Figure 21-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function. 2. STOP mode release time Supply of the clock is stopped When FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H): 18 s to 105 s When FRQSEL4 = 0 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H): 18 s to 65 s Wait When vectored interrupt servicing is carried out: 7 clocks When vectored interrupt servicing is not carried out: 1 clock Remarks 1. The clock supply stop time varies depending on the temperature conditions and STOP mode period. 2. The broken lines indicate the case when the interrupt request that has released the standby mode is acknowledged. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1534 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION (b) Release by reset signal generation When the reset signal is generated, STOP mode is released, and then, as in the case with a normal reset operation, the program is executed after branching to the reset vector address. Figure 23-7. STOP Mode Release by Reset (1) When high-speed system clock is used as CPU clock STOP instruction Reset signal Status of CPU Reset processing Note Normal operation (high-speed system clock) High-speed system clock (X1 oscillation) STOP mode Oscillation stopped Oscillates Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock) Reset period Oscillation Oscillation stopped stopped Oscillates Oscillation stabilization time (Check by using OSTC register) Starting X1 oscillation is specified by software. (2) When high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is used as CPU clock STOP instruction Reset signal Reset processing Note Normal operation (high-speed on-chip Status of CPU oscillator clock) High-speed on-chip oscillator clock Oscillates STOP mode Reset period Oscillation Oscillation stopped stopped Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock) Oscillates Wait for oscillation accuracy stabilization Note For the reset processing time, see CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1535 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION 23.3.3 SNOOZE mode (1) SNOOZE mode setting and operating statuses The SNOOZE mode can only be specified for the A/D converter, LIN/UART module, or DTC. Note that this mode can only be specified if the CPU clock is the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock. When using the A/D converter in the SNOOZE mode, set up A/D converter mode register 2 (ADM2) before entering the STOP mode. For details, see 12.3 Registers Used in A/D Converter. When using the UART function of the LIN/UART module in the SNOOZE mode, set up the LUSCn register before entering the STOP mode. When DTC transfer is used in SNOOZE mode, before entering the STOP mode, allow DTC activation by interrupt to be used. During STOP mode, detecting DTC activation by interrupt enables DTC transit to SNOOZE mode, automatically. For details, see 19.2 Registers. In SNOOZE mode transition, wait status to be only following time. Transition time from STOP mode to SNOOZE mode When FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/010C2H): 18 s to 105 s When FRQSEL4 = 0 in the user option byte (000C2H/010C2H): 18 s to 65 s Remark Transition time from STOP mode to SNOOZE mode varies depending on the temperature conditions and the STOP mode period. Transition time from SNOOZE mode to normal operation: When vectored interrupt servicing is carried out: "4.99 s to 9.44 s" + 7 clocks When vectored interrupt servicing is not carried out: "4.99 s to 9.44 s" + 1 clock The operating statuses in the SNOOZE mode are shown below. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1536 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION Table 23-3. Operating Statuses in SNOOZE Mode STOP Mode Setting During a period in STOP mode, input of a timer trigger signal for the A/D converter, reception of a data signal for the LIN/UART module in the UART mode, or the generation Item of an interrupt signal for DTC activation When CPU Is Operating on High-speed On-chip Oscillator Clock (fIH) System clock Main system clock Clock supply to the CPU is stopped fIH Operation started fX Stopped fEX Subsystem clock fPLL Operation disabled fXT Use of the status while in the STOP mode continues fEXS fIL Set by bit 0 (SELLOSC) of the CKSEL register and bit 4 (WUTMMCK0) of the OSMC register. WUTMMCK0 = 1: Oscillates WUTMMCK0 = 0 and SELLOSC = 1: Oscillates WUTMMCK0 = 0 and SELLOSC = 0: Stops fWDT Set by bits 0 (WDSTBYON) and 4 (WDTON) of user option byte (000C0H/020C0H) WDTON = 0: Stops WDTON = 1 and WDSTBYON = 1: Oscillates WDTON = 1 and WDSTBYON = 0: Stops CPU Operation stopped Code flash memory Data flash memory RAM Port (latch) Use of the status while in the STOP mode continues Timer array unit Operation disabled Real-time clock (RTC) Operable (when the subsystem clock is selected as an input clock (fRTC)) Watchdog timer See CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER Clock monitor Operation stopped Timer RJ Operable In the event counting mode when no TRJIO0 input filters are selected. If the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is selected as the clock source for counting and the RTCLPC bit of the OSMC register is 0. If the low-speed on-chip oscillator is selected as the clock source for counting. Timer RD Operable (can only operate for output of the SNOOZE status signal when the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is selected) Clock output/buzzer output Operable only when the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock is selected as the count clock A/D converter Operable D/A converter Operable (the state before the STOP mode was set is retained) Comparator Operable (if the settings allow release from the STOP mode and the digital filters are not in use) Serial array unit (SAU) Operation disabled Serial interface (IICA) DTC Operable ELC Linking between operation function blocks is possible. LIN/UART module (RLIN3) Operable (only in the UART mode) CAN interface (RS-CAN lite) Operation disabled R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1537 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION During a period in STOP mode, input of a timer trigger signal for the A/D converter, STOP Mode Setting reception of a data signal for the LIN/UART module in the UART mode, or the generation Item of an interrupt signal for DTC activation When CPU Is Operating on High-speed On-chip Oscillator Clock (fIH) Power-on-reset function Operable Voltage detection function External interrupt Key interrupt function CRC operation function High-speed CRC Operation stopped General-purpose CRC Illegal-memory access detection function RAM2 bit error detection function RAM guard function SFR guard function CPU stack pointer monitor function Operation stopped (operation can continue during vectored interrupt servicing) Remark Operation stopped: Operation is automatically stopped before switching to the STOP mode. Operation disabled: Operation is stopped before switching to the STOP mode. fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock fX: X1 clock fEX: External main system clock fXT: XT1 clock fEXS: External subsystem clock fPLL: PLL clock fWDT: WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (2) SNOOZE mode status output (SNOOZEST) This function is used to output the status of the SNOOZE mode (in any mode other than the SNOOZE mode or in the SNOOZE mode) on the specified pin. This function is executed by fSL (sub/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock), timer RD0, event link controller (ELC) or A/D converter trigger select 0 control circuit Note, A/D converter, and ports simultaneously. fSL is used as the count source for the timer RD0. By using the PWM function of the timer mode, the timer RD0 sets a period in the TRDGRA0 register and generates a compare match signal in the TRDGRB0 and TRDGRC0 registers. The compare match signal of the TRDGRB0 register is used as the operation trigger of the A/D converter via the ELC or A/D converter trigger select 0 control circuit Note. After receiving this operation trigger, the A/D converter performs A/D conversion in SNOOZE mode. After the compare match signal of the TRDGRC0 register is received, SNOOZE status is output from the SNZOUTn (n = 0 to 7) pin selected by the PSNZCNT0 to PSNZCNT3 registers. Note The RL78/F14 uses the ELC and the RL78/F13 uses the A/D converter trigger select 0 control circuit. Figure 23-8 shows the configuration of the circuit for SNOOZE mode status output. Figure 23-9 shows the timing of SNOOZE mode status output. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1538 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION Figure 23-8. Configuration of Circuit for SNOOZE Mode Status Output Port assigned to TRDIOC0 Output latch Timer RD fSL TRDGRC0 register (A/D converter start wait time + A/D conversion time) Alternate function Compare match OUTENn SNZOUT/TRDIOC0 TRDGRB0 register (A/D converter start wait time) Timer RD0 compare match B Event signal Port assigned to SNZOUT Output latch TRD0 register (counter) Alternate function SNZACTn OUTENn TRDGRA0 register (SNOOZE status output interval) 1 0 ELC or A/D converter trigger select 0 control circuit Note A/D trigger signal A/D converter Hardware trigger wait mode Note The RL78/F14 uses the ELC and the RL78/F13 uses the A/D converter trigger select 0 control circuit. Figure 23-9. Timing of SNOOZE Mode Status Output TRD0 register value TRDGRA0 TRDGRC0 TRDGRB0 Time A/D trigger SNZOUT (C) (B) (A) (A): TRDGRA0 = SNOOZE status output interval (B): TRDGRB0 = A/D converter start wait time (C): TRDGRC0 = A/D converter start wait time + A/D conversion time R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1539 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION Figure 23-10. Example of Settings for SNOOZE Mode Status Output Example of setting SNOOZE mode status output Disable interrupts (DI). Initialize the A/D-related registers. Set the ELC or A/D converter trigger select 0 control circuit. Normal operation Initialize the timer RD-related registers. * PER0.ADCEN = 1. * Use the ADPC, PMCx, PMx registers to set the A/D pins as analog input pins. * Set the ADM0, ADM2, ADUL/ADLL, ADS registers. * ADM1 = 0xE1 (selecting hardware trigger wait mode, one-shot conversion mode, and the hardware trigger signal selected by the ELC module or ADTRGS0 register). Enable generation of the timer RD0 compare match B interrupt request as the trigger for A/D conversion. * RL78/F14: ELSELR09.ELSELR09[3:0] = 0001b. * RL78/F13: ADTRGS0.ADTRGS00 = 1. * PER1.TRD0EN = 1. * TRDSTR.CSEL0 = 1 (continuing counting after compare match with the TRDGRA0 register). * TRDPMR.TRDPWMB0 = 1 (selecting the PWM function of the TRDIOB0 pin). * TRDPMR.TRDPWMC0 = 1 (selecting the PWM function of the TRDIOC0 pin). * TRDOER1.EC0 = 0 (enabling TRDIOC0 output). * TRDOCR.TOC0 = 0 (setting the low level as TRDIOC0 initial output). * TRDCR0.CCLR[2:0] = 001b (clearing on compare match with the TRDGRA0 register). * TRDPOCR0.POLC = 0 (setting the TRDIOC0 output signal as active low). * Set the TRDGRA0 register (SNOOZE status output interval). * Set the TRDGRB0 register (A/D converter start wait time). * Set the TRDGRC0 register (A/D converter start wait time + A/D conversion time). Set the target port pin as a SNOOZE mode status output pin. * Set the bit for the pin selected as an SNZOUT pin in the port mode register to 0 (output mode). * Set the bit for the SNZOUT pin in the port register to 0 (output of the low level). * Set the PSNZCNTn.SNZACT[7:0] bits (selecting the active level). * Set the PSNZCNTn.OUTEN[7:0] bits (enabling output). Set A/D and timer RD interrupts. * MK1H.ADMK = 0 (enabling processing of the A/D interrupt). * MK0H.TRDMK0 = 1 (disabling processing of the timer RD0 interrupt). Enable A/D converter operations. * ADM2.AWC = 1 (using the SNOOZE mode function). * ADM0.ADCE = 1 (enabling A/D converter operation). Set a clock (fCLK = fSL). Start counting by timer RD0. * OSMC.RTCLPC = 0 (enabling supply of the fSL clock to peripheral functions). * CKC.CSS = 1, CKC.CLS = 1 (selecting fSL as the CPU clock). * CKSEL.TRD_CKSEL = 1 (selecting fSL as the timer RD clock). * TRDSTR.TSTART0 = 1 (starting counting by timer RD0). Set a clock (fCLK = fIH). CKC.CSS = 0, CKC.CLS = 0 (selecting fIH as the CPU clock). Enable interrupts (EI). When no interrupt processing is to be used in recovery, disable interrupts (DI). Enter STOP mode. STOP Use timer RD0 to generate a SNOOZE mode status output and A/D trigger (internal signal). Use timer RD0 to generate a hardware trigger. Enter SNOOZE mode. Start A/D conversion in SNOOZE mode. SNOOZE Execute A/D conversion. No Generation of an A/D conversion end interrupt (INTAD) is controlled by the settings of the ADM2. ADRCK bit, and of the ADUL and ADLL registers. The result of A/D conversion is stored in the ADCR or ADCRH register. If no INTAD has been generated, this microcontroller will return to the STOP mode. The ADCR or ADCRH register will not hold a result of conversion. INTAD generated? Yes If interrupts are enabled, the interrupt processing will proceed. If interrupts are disabled, the instruction following the STOP instruction will be executed. Normal operation Return to normal operation. Stop A/D converter operations.Note 1 Stop counting by timer RD0.Note 1 * ADM0.ADCE = 0 (stopping A/D converter operations). * ADM2.AWC = 0 (the SNOOZE mode function is not in use). * CKC.CSS = 1, CKC.CLS = 1 (selecting fSL as the CPU clock). * TRDSTR.TSTART0 = 0 (stopping counting by timer RD0). To user processing Note 1. On the transition from STOP (or SNOOZE) mode to normal operation, stop A/D converter operations and then stop counting by timer RD0 (after changing the CPU clock to fSL) as shown in the figure above. Caution For details on the settings of registers for the A/D converter, timer RD, port functions, etc., see the corresponding chapters. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1540 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION The following seven operations are available to generate a reset signal. (1) External reset input via RESET pin (2) Internal reset by watchdog timer program loop detection (3) Internal reset by comparison of supply voltage and detection voltage of power-on-reset (POR) circuit (4) Internal reset by comparison of supply voltage of the voltage detector (LVD) and detection voltage (5) Internal reset by execution of illegal instruction Note (6) Internal reset in response to the clock monitor detecting that oscillation of the main clock has stopped (7) Internal reset by illegal-memory access External and internal resets start program execution from the address at 0000H and 0001H when the reset signal is generated. When a low level is input to the RESET pin, the watchdog timer detects an overflow, a voltage is detected on the POR and LVD circuits, an illegal instruction is executed Note, the clock monitor detects that oscillation of the main clock has stopped, or memory is accessed illegally, the device is reset and the hardware is set to the status shown in Table 24-1. When a low level is input to the RESET pin, the device is reset. It is released from the reset status when a high level is input to the RESET pin and program execution is started with the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock after reset processing. A reset by the watchdog timer is automatically released, and program execution starts using the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (see Figures 24-2 to 24-4) after reset processing. Reset by POR and LVD circuit supply voltage detection is automatically released when VDD VPOR or VDD VLVD is detected after the reset, and program execution starts using the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (see CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT and CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR) after reset processing. Note The illegal instruction is generated when instruction code FFH is executed. Reset by the illegal instruction execution not issued by emulation with the in-circuit emulator or on-chip debug emulator. Cautions 1. For an external reset, input the low level to the RESET pin for at least 10 s. When an external reset is applied while the power supply voltage is rising, the period over which the voltage is below the range of operating voltage (VDD < 2.7V) is not included in the 10 s. However, continuing the input of a low level before release from the power-on reset state does not create a problem. 2. During reset input, the X1 clock, XT1 clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed onchip oscillator clock stop oscillating. External main system clock input and external subsystem clock input become invalid. 3. When reset is effected, port pin P130 is set to low-level output and other port pins become highimpedance, because each SFR and 2nd SFR are initialized. Remark VPOR: POR power supply rise detection voltage R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1541 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Clear CLKRF Set 2. LVIS: Voltage detection level register Remarks 1. LVIM: Voltage detection register Caution An LVD circuit internal reset does not reset the LVD circuit. Voltage detector reset signal Power-on reset circuit reset signal RESET RESF register read signal Reset signal by illegal-memory access Reset signal by clock monitor Reset signal by watchdog timer Reset signal by execution of illegal instruction Clear Set Clear WDCLRF Set Clear IAWRF Set Clear LVIRF POR/CLM reset confirmation register (POCRES) Internal bus POCRES0 Clear Set TRAP Reset control flag register (RESF) Internal bus Figure 24-1. Block Diagram of Reset Function Reset signal Reset signal to LVIM/LVIS register RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION 1542 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION Figure 24-2. Timing of Reset by RESET Input Wait for oscillation accuracy stabilization High-speed on-chip oscillator clock Starting X1 oscillation is specified by software. High-speed system clock (when X1 oscillation is selected) Reset period CPU status Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock) Normal operation Reset processing Note 2 RESET Internal reset signal Delay Port pin (except P130) Hi-Z Port pin (P130) Note 1 Figure 24-3. Timing of Reset by Watchdog Timer Overflow, Execution of Illegal Instruction, Clock Monitor, or Illegal-Memory Access Wait for oscillation accuracy stabilization High-speed on-chip oscillator clock Starting X1 oscillation is specified by software. High-speed system clock (when X1 oscillation is selected) CPU status Normal operation Reset period (oscillation stop) Watchdog timer overflow/ execution of illegal instruction/ clock monitor/ illegal memory access Reset processing Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock) 0.0511 ms (typ.) 0.0701 ms (max.) Internal reset signal Port pin (except P130) Port pin (P130) Hi-Z Note 1 (Notes, Caution, and Remark are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1543 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION Figure 24-4. Timing of Reset in STOP Mode by RESET Input Wait for oscillation accuracy stabilization STOP instruction execution High-speed on-chip oscillator clock Starting X1 oscillation is specified by software. High-speed system clock (when X1 oscillation is selected) CPU status Normal operation Stop status (oscillation stop) Reset period RESET Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock) Reset processing Note 2 Internal reset signal Delay Port pin (except P130) Hi-Z Port pin (P130) Notes 1. Note 1 When P130 is set to high-level output before reset is effected, the output signal of P130 can be dummyoutput as a reset signal to an external device, because P130 outputs a low level when reset is effected. To release a reset signal to an external device, set P130 to high-level output by software. 2. Reset processing time when the external reset is released is shown below. After the first release of POR: 0.672 ms (typ.), 0.832 ms (max.) (when the LVD is in use) 0.399 ms (typ.), 0.519 ms (max.) (when the LVD is off) After the second release of POR: 0.531 ms (typ.), 0.675 ms (max.) (when the LVD is in use) 0.259 ms (typ.), 0.362 ms (max.) (when the LVD is off) After power is supplied, a voltage stabilization waiting time of about 0.99 ms (typ.) and up to 2.30 ms (max.) is required before reset processing starts after release of the external reset. Remark For the reset timing of the power-on-reset circuit and voltage detector, see CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT and CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1544 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION Table 24-1. Operation Statuses During Reset Period Item During Reset Period System clock Clock supply to the CPU is stopped. Main system clock Subsystem clock fIH Operation stopped fX Operation stopped (the X1 and X2 pins are input port mode) fEX Clock input invalid (the pin is input port mode) fXT Operation stopped (the XT1 and XT2 pins are input port mode) fEXS Clock input invalid (the pin is input port mode) fIL Operation stopped fPLL fWDT CPU Operation stopped Code flash memory Data flash memory RAM Port (latch) P130 Outputs the low level P40 High impedance (by an external reset or POR reset) Pulled up (by reset other than external reset or POR reset) Other than P130 and P40 Timer array unit High impedance Operation stopped Timer RJ Timer RD Real-time clock (RTC) Watchdog timer Clock monitor Clock output/buzzer output A/D converter D/A converter Note Comparator Note Serial array unit (SAU) Serial interface (IICA) LIN/UART module (RLIN3) CAN interface (RS-CAN lite) Multiplier and Divider/MultiplyAccumulator DTC ELC Note Power-on-reset function Detection operation possible Low-voltage detection function Operation stopped External interrupt Key interrupt function CRC operation function High-speed CRC General-purpose CRC Illegal-memory access detection function RAM guard function SFR guard function R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1545 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION Note RL78/F14 only. Remark fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock fX: X1 oscillation clock fEX: External main system clock fXT: XT1 oscillation clock fEXS: External subsystem clock fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock fPLL: PLL clock fWDT: WDT-dedicated low-speed on-chip oscillator clock R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1546 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION Table 24-2. States of Hardware After Acceptance of a Reset (1/4) Hardware Program counter (PC) After Acceptance of a Reset Note 1 The contents of the reset vector table (0000H, 0001H) are set. Stack pointer (SP) Undefined Program status word (PSW) 06H RAM Data memory Undefined General-purpose registers Undefined Port mode select register (PMS) 00H Noise filter enable registers 0 to 2 (NFEN0 to NFEN2) 00H Peripheral enable registers 0 to 2 (PER0 to PER2) 00H High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency select register (HOCODIV) Undefined High-speed on-chip oscillator trimming register (HIOTRM) Note 2 Operation speed mode control register (OSMC) 00H Port register 0 (P0) 00H Port register 1 (P1) 00H Port register 3 (P3) 00H Port register 4 (P4) 00H Port register 5 (P5) 00H Port register 6 (P6) 00H Port register 7 (P7) 00H Port register 8 (P8) 00H Port register 9 (P9) 00H Port register 10 (P10) 00H Port register 12 (P12) Undefined Port register 13 (P13) Undefined Port register 14 (P14) 00H Port register 15 (P15) 00H Serial data register 00 (SDR00) 0000H Serial data register 01 (SDR01) 0000H Timer data register 00 (TDR00) 0000H Timer data register 01 (TDR01/L/H) 00H 10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR) 0000H 8-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH) 00H Port mode register 0 (PM0) FFH Port mode register 1 (PM1) FFH Port mode register 3 (PM3) FFH Port mode register 4 (PM4) FFH Port mode register 5 (PM5) FFH Port mode register 6 (PM6) FFH Port mode register 7 (PM7) FFH Port mode register 8 (PM8) FFH Port mode register 9 (PM9) FFH Port mode register 10 (PM10) FFH Port mode register 12 (PM12) FFH Port mode register 14 (PM14) FFH Port mode register 15 (PM15) FFH A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) 00H Analog input channel specification register (ADS) 00H A/D converter mode register 1 (ADM1) 00H D/A conversion value setting register 0 (DACS0) 00H D/A converter mode register (DAM) 00H Key return mode register (KRM) 00H External interrupt rising edge enable register 0 (EGP0) 00H (Notes and Remark are given below Table 24-2, States of Hardware After Acceptance of a Reset (4/4).) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1547 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION Table 24-2. States of Hardware After Acceptance of a Reset (2/4) Hardware After Acceptance of a ResetNote 1 External interrupt falling edge enable register 0 (EGN0) 00H External interrupt rising edge enable register 1 (EGP1) 00H External interrupt falling edge enable register 1 (EGN0) 00H Serial data register 10 (SDR10) 0000H Serial data register 11 (SDR11) 0000H IICA shift register 0 (IICA0) 00H IICA status register 0 (IICS0) 00H IICA flag register 0 (IICF0) 00H 16-bit watch error correction register (SUBCUDW) 0000H Timer RD general register C0 (TRDGRC0) FFFFHNote 3 Timer RD general register D0 (TRDGRD0) FFFFHNote 3 Timer RD general register C1 (TRDGRC1) FFFFHNote 3 Timer RD general register D1 (TRDGRD1) FFFFHNote 3 Timer data register 02 (TDR02) 0000H Timer data register 03 (TDR03/L/H) 00H Timer data register 04 (TDR04) 0000H Timer data register 05 (TDR05) 0000H Timer data register 06 (TDR06) 0000H Timer data register 07 (TDR07) 0000H Timer data register 10 (TDR10) 0000H Timer data register 11 (TDR11/L/H) 00H Timer data register 12 (TDR12) 0000H Timer data register 13 (TDR13/L/H) 00H Timer data register 14 (TDR14) 0000H Timer data register 16 (TDR16) 0000H Timer data register 17 (TDR17) 0000H Second count register (SEC) 00H Minute count register (MIN) 00H Hour count register (HOUR) 12HNote 4 Week count register (WEEK) 00H Day count register (DAY) 01H Month count register (MONTH) 01H Year count register (YEAR) 00H Watch error correction register (SUBCUD) 00H Alarm minute register (ALARMWM) 00H Alarm hour register (ALARMWH) 12H Alarm week register ALARMWW) Real-time clock control register 0 (RTCC0) 00H Real-time clock control register 1 (RTCC1) 00H 00H Clock operation mode control register (CMC) 00H Clock operation status control register (CSC) C0H Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) 00H Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) 07H System clock control register (CKC) 00H Clock output select register 0 (CKS0) 00H Reset control flag register (RESF) UndefinedNote 5 Voltage detection register (LVIM) 00HNote 5 Voltage detection level register (LVIS) 00H/01H/81HNote 6 Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) 1AH/9AHNote 7 CRC input register (CRCIN) 00H Interrupt request flag register 2 (IF2/L/H) 00H (Notes and Remark are given below Table 24-2, States of Hardware After Acceptance of a Reset (4/4).) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1548 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION Table 24-2. States of Hardware After Acceptance of a Reset (3/4) Hardware Interrupt request flag register 3L (IF3L) After Acceptance of a ResetNote 1 00H Interrupt mask flag register 2 (MK2/L/H) FFH Interrupt mask flag register 3 (MK3L) FFH Priority specification flag register 02 (PR02/L/H) FFH Priority specification flag register 03 (PR03L) FFH Priority specification flag register 12 (PR12/L/H) FFH Priority specification flag register 13 (PR13L) FFH Interrupt request flag register 0 (IF0/L/H) 00H Interrupt request flag register 1 (IF1/L/H) 00H Interrupt mask flag register 0 (MK0/L/H) FFH Interrupt mask flag register 1 (MK1/L/H) FFH Priority specification flag register 00 (PR00/L/H) FFH Priority specification flag register 01 (PR01/L/H) FFH Priority specification flag register 10 (PR10/L/H) FFH Priority specification flag register 11 (PR11/L/H) FFH Multiply and accumulation register (L) (MACRL) 0000H Multiply and accumulation register (H) (MACRH) 0000H Processor mode control register (PMC) 00H Comparator control register (CMPCTL) 00H Comparator input and output switching register (CMPSEL) 00H Comparator output monitor register (CMPMON) 00H CAN clock select register (CANCKSEL) 00H LIN clock select register (LINCKSEL) 00H Clock select register (CKSEL) 00H PLL control register (PLLCTL) 00H PLL status register (PLLSTS) 00H POR/CLM reset confirmation register (POCRES) Undefined High-speed DTC control register 0 (HDTCCR0) 00H High-speed DTC transfer count register 0 (HDTCCT0) 00H High-speed DTC transfer count reload register 0 (HDTRLD0) 00H High-speed DTC source address register 0 (HDTSAR0) 0000H High-speed DTC destination address register 0 (HDTDAR0) 0000H High-speed DTC control register 1 (HDTCCR1) 00H High-speed DTC transfer count register 1 (HDTCCT1) 00H High-speed DTC transfer count reload register 1 (HDTRLD1) 00H High-speed DTC source address register 1 (HDTSAR1) 0000H High-speed DTC destination address register 1 (HDTDAR1) 0000H DTC base address register (DTCBAR) FDH High-speed DTC channel select register 0 (SELHS0) 3FH High-speed DTC channel select register 1 (SELHS1) 3FH DTC activation enable register 0 (DTCEN0) 00H DTC activation enable register 1 (DTCEN1) 00H DTC activation enable register 2 (DTCEN2) 00H DTC activation enable register 3 (DTCEN3) 00H DTC activation enable register 4 (DTCEN4) 00H DTC activation enable register 5 (DTCEN5) Note 8 00H CRC operation mode control register (CRCMD) 00H CRC data register (CRCD) 0000H LIN wakeup baud rate select register (LWBR0/LWBR1) 00H (Notes and Remark are given below Table 24-2, States of Hardware After Acceptance of a Reset (4/4).) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1549 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION Table 24-2. States of Hardware After Acceptance of a Reset (4/4) Hardware After Acceptance of a Reset Note 1 LIN channel select register (LCHSEL) 00H LIN/UART baud rate prescaler 0 register (LBRP00/LBRP10) 00H LIN/UART baud rate prescaler 1 register (LBRP01/LBRP11) 00H LIN self test control register (LSTC0/LSTC1) 00H UART standby control register (LUSC0/LUSC1) 00H LIN/UART mode register (LMD0/LMD1) 00H LIN break field configuration register/UART configuration register (LBFC0/LBFC1) 00H LIN/UART space configuration register (LSC0/LSC1) 00H LIN wakeup configuration register (LWUP0/LWUP1) 00H LIN interrupt enable register (LIE0/LIE1) 00H LIN/UART error detection enable register (LEDE0/LEDE1) 00H LIN/UART control register (LCUC0/LCUC1) 00H LIN/UART transmit control register (LTRC0/LTRC1) 00H LIN/UART mode status register (LMST0/LMST1) 00H LIN/UART status register (LST0/LST1) 00H LIN/UART error status register (LEST0/LEST1) 00H LIN/UART data field configuration register (LDFC0/LDFC1) 00H LIN/UART ID buffer register (LIDB0/LIDB1) 00H LIN checksum buffer register (LCBR0/LCBR1) 00H UART data buffer 0 register (LUDB00/LUDB10) 00H LIN/UART data buffer 1 register (LDB01/LDB11) 00H LIN/UART data buffer 2 register (LDB02/LDB12) 00H LIN/UART data buffer 3 register (LDB03/LDB13) 00H LIN/UART data buffer 4 register (LDB04/LDB14) 00H LIN/UART data buffer 5 register (LDB05/LDB15) 00H LIN/UART data buffer 6 register (LDB06/LDB16) 00H LIN/UART data buffer 7 register (LDB07/LDB17) 00H LIN/UART data buffer 8 register (LDB08/LDB18) 00H UART operation enable register (LUOER0/LUOER1) 00H UART option register 1 (LUOR01/LUOR11) 00H UART transmit data register (LUTDR0/LUTDR1) 0000H UART receive data register (LURDR0/LURDR1) 0000H UART wait transmission data register (LUWTDR0/LUWTDR1) 0000H CAN-related registers See Table 3-6. Notes 1. During reset signal generation or oscillation stabilization time wait, only the PC contents among the hardware statuses become undefined. All other hardware statuses remain unchanged after reset. 2. 3. The reset value differs for each chip. The timer RD SFRs are undefined when FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/010C2H) and TRD0EN = 0 in the PER1 register. If it is necessary to read the initial value, set fCLK to fIH and TRD0EN = 1 before reading. 4. If the AMPM bit (bit 3 of the real-time clock control register 0 (RTCC0)) is set to 1 after a reset, the setting of the hour count register (HOUR) becomes 00H. 5. The values depend on the source of the reset as shown in Table 24-3. 6. The reset value of the LVIS register varies depending on the reset source and the setting of the option byte. 7. The reset value of WDTE is determined by the option byte setting. 8. Only in the RL78/F14. Remark The special function register (SFR) mounted depends on the product. See 3.1.4 Special function register (SFR) area and 3.1.5 Extended special function register (2nd SFR: 2nd Special Function Register) area. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1550 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION Table 24-3. States of Bits in RESF/LVIM/LVIS Registers When Reset Requests are Generated Reset Source RESET Input Reset by Reset by Reading Reset by Reset by clock Reset by illegal- Reset POR Execution of from RESF WDT monitor memory access by LVD Illegal Register RESF Instruction Set (1) Cleared Held Held Held Held WDCLRF TRAP Cleared (0) Cleared (0) Held (0) Set (1) Set (1) Held Held IAWRF Held Held Held Set (1) Held LVIRF Held Held Held Held Set (1) POCRES LVIM LVIS POCRES0 Held Cleared (0) Held Held Held Held Held Held CLKRF Cleared (0) Cleared (0) Held Held Held Set (1) Held Held LVISEN Cleared (0) Cleared (0) Cleared (0) Held Cleared (0) Cleared (0) Cleared (0) Held LVIOMSK Held Held Held Held Held Held Held Held LVIF Held Held Held Held Held Held Held Held Cleared Cleared Cleared Held Cleared Cleared Cleared Held (00H/01H/81H) Caution (00H/01H/81H) (00H/01H/81H) (00H/01H/81H) (00H/01H/81H) (00H/01H/81H) The generation of reset signal other than an LVD reset sets as follows. * When option byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 0: 00H * When option byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 1: 81H * When option byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 0, 1: 01H Remark The special function register (SFR) mounted depends on the product. See 3.1.4 Special function register (SFR) area and 3.1.5 Extended special function register (2nd SFR: 2nd Special Function Register) area. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1551 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION 24.1 Register for Confirming Reset Source 24.1.1 Reset control flag register (RESF) Many internal reset generation sources exist in the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14. The reset control flag register (RESF) is used to store which source has generated the reset request. The RESF register can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. RESET input, reset by power-on-reset (POR) circuit, and reading the RESF register clear TRAP, WDCLRF, IAWRF, and LVIRF flags. Figure 24-5. Format of Reset Control Flag Register (RESF) After reset: 00H Note 1 Address: FFFA8H R Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RESF TRAP 0 0 WDCLRF 0 0 IAWRF LVIRF TRAP Internal reset request by execution of illegal instructionNote 2 0 Internal reset request is not generated, or the RESF register is cleared. 1 Internal reset request is generated. WDCLRF Internal reset request by watchdog timer (WDT) or clock monitor 0 Internal reset request is not generated, or the RESF register is cleared. 1 Internal reset request by the watchdog timer or the clock monitor is generated. IAWRF Internal reset request by illegal-memory access 0 Internal reset request is not generated, or the RESF register is cleared. 1 Internal reset request is generated. LVIRF Internal reset request by voltage detector (LVD) 0 Internal reset request is not generated, or the RESF register is cleared. 1 Internal reset request is generated. Notes 1. 2. The value after reset varies depending on the reset source. The illegal instruction is generated when instruction code FFH is executed. Reset by the illegal instruction execution not issued by emulation with the in-circuit emulator or on-chip debug emulator. Caution Do not read data by a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1552 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION The states of bits in the RESF register when reset requests are generated is shown in Table 24-4. Table 24-4. States of Bits in the RESF Register When Reset Requests are Generated Reset Source Flag RESET Reset by Reset by Reading Reset by Reset by Reset by Reset by Input POR Execution of from RESF WDT clock illegal- LVD monitor memory Illegal Instruction TRAP bit Cleared (0) Cleared (0) access Set (1) Cleared (0) Held Held Held Held WDCLRF bit Held Set (1) Set (1) Held Held IAWRF bit Held Held Held Set (1) Held LVIRF bit Held Held Held Held Set (1) 24.1.2 POR/CLM reset confirmation register (POCRES) The POR/CLM reset confirmation register (POCRES) is used to check whether a reset has been generated by a poweron reset or a clock-monitor reset. When writing, the only effective value for the POCRES0 bit is 1. Writing 0 to this bit is ignored. When writing, the only effective value for the CLKRF bit is 0. Writing 1 to this bit is ignored. Set the POCRES register by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. The POCRES0 bit only becomes 0 after a reset when the reset was generated by the power-on reset (POR) circuit. The CLKRF bit becomes 0 after a reset when the reset was generated by the RESET input or power-on reset (POR) circuit. Remark For confirming whether a reset was by the power-on reset (POR) circuit, the POCRES0 must be set to 1 beforehand. Figure 24-6. Format of POR Reset Register (POCRES) Address: F02C9H After reset: 00H Note R/W Symbol 7 6 5 <4> 3 2 1 <0> POCRES 0 0 0 CLKRF 0 0 0 POCRES0 POCRES0 Internal reset request by POR reset 0 A POR request was generated or nothing has been written to this bit. 1 POR request is not generated. Note The value immediately before a reset is retained when a reset is from any source other than the POR circuit. CLKRF Internal reset request by clock monitor 0 Internal reset request is not generated, or the CLKRF bit is cleared. 1 Internal reset request was generated. Table 24-5 shows the states of bits in the POCRES register when reset requests are generated. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1553 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION Table 24-5. States of Bits in the POCRES Register When Reset Requests are Generated Reset Source Flag RESET Reset by Reset by Reading Reset Reset by Reset by Reset Input POR Execution of from by clock illegal-memory by LVD Illegal RESF WDT monitor access Instruction POCRES0 CLKRF Held Cleared (0) Held Held Held Held Held Held Cleared (0) Cleared (0) Held Held Held Set (1) Held Held R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1554 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT 25.1 Functions of Power-on-reset Circuit The power-on-reset circuit (POR) has the following functions. Generates internal reset signal at power on. The reset signal is released when the supply voltage (VDD) exceeds 1.56 V (typ.). Compares supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VPDR = 1.55 V (typ.)), generates internal reset signal when VDD < VPDR. Caution If an internal reset signal is generated in the POR circuit, the POCRES_0 and CLKRF flags of the POR/CLM reset confirmation register (POCRES) and the TRAP, WDCLRF, IAWRF, and LVIRF flags of the reset control flag register (RESF) are cleared (00H). Remark This product incorporates multiple hardware functions that generate an internal reset signal. A flag that indicates the reset source is located in the RESF and POCRES registers for when an internal reset signal is generated by the power-on reset (POR), watchdog timer (WDT), clock monitor, voltage detector (LVD), illegal instruction execution, or illegal-memory access. The RESF register is not cleared to 00H and the flag is set to 1 when an internal reset signal is generated by the watchdog timer (WDT), voltage detector (LVD), illegal instruction execution, clock monitor, or illegal-memory access. The POCRES register is not cleared to 00H and the flag is set to 1 when an internal reset signal is generated by the clock monitor. For details of the POCRES and RESF registers, see CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1555 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT 25.2 Configuration of Power-on-reset Circuit The block diagram of the power-on-reset circuit is shown in Figure 25-1. Figure 25-1. Block Diagram of Power-on-reset Circuit VDD VDD + Internal reset signal - Reference voltage source 25.3 Operation of Power-on-reset Circuit An internal reset signal is generated on power application. When the supply voltage (VDD) exceeds the detection voltage (VPOR = 1.56 V (typ.)Note), the reset status is released. The supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VPDR = 1.55 V (typ.)Note) are compared. When VDD < VPDR, the internal reset signal is generated. Note When the user option byte function is used to enable the voltage detector by default, release from the reset state does not proceed until the value set in the option byte function is exceeded. The timing of generation of the internal reset signal by the power-on-reset circuit and voltage detector is shown below. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1556 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT Figure 25-2. Timing of Generation of Internal Reset Signal by Power-on-reset Circuit and Voltage Detector (1/2) (1) When the externally input reset signal on the RESET pin is used Supply voltage (VDD) Note 5 Note 5 Operating voltage range lower limit VPOR = 1.56 V (TYP.) VPDR = 1.55 V (TYP.) 0V RESET pin 10 s or more Wait for oscillation Note 1 accuracy stabilization Wait for oscillation Note 1 accuracy stabilization High-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH) High-speed system clock (fMX) (when X1 oscillation is selected) Operation stops CPU Starting oscillation is specified by software Starting oscillation is specified by software Reset processing time when external reset is releasedNote 3 Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock)Note 2 Reset period (oscillation stop) Voltage stabilization wait 0.99 ms (TYP.), 2.30 ms (MAX.) Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock)Note 2 Reset processing time when external reset is releasedNote 4 Operation stops Internal reset signal Notes 1. The internal reset processing time includes the oscillation accuracy stabilization time of the high-speed onchip oscillator clock. 2. The high-speed on-chip oscillator clock and a high-speed system clock or subsystem clock can be selected as the CPU clock. To use the X1 clock, use the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) to confirm the lapse of the oscillation stabilization time. To use the XT1 clock, use the timer function for confirmation of the lapse of the stabilization time. 3. The time until normal operation starts includes the following reset processing time when the external reset is released (after the first release of POR) after the RESET signal is driven high (1) as well as the voltage stabilization wait time after VPOR (1.56 V, typ.) is reached. Reset processing time when the external reset is released is shown below. After the first release of POR: 0.672 ms (typ.), 0.832 ms (max.) (when the LVD is in use) 0.399 ms (typ.), 0.519 ms (max.) (when the LVD is off) 4. Reset processing time when the external reset is released after the second release of POR is shown below. After the second release of POR: 0.531 ms (typ.), 0.675 ms (max.) (when the LVD is in use) 0.259 ms (typ.), 0.362 ms (max.) (when the LVD is off) 5. After power is supplied, the reset state must be retained until the operating voltage becomes in the range defined in the AC characteristics in CHAPTER 34 to CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS. This is done by controlling the externally input reset signal. After power supply is turned off, this LSI should be placed in the STOP mode, or in the reset state by utilizing the voltage detection circuit or externally input reset signal, before the voltage falls below the operating range. When restarting the operation, make sure that the operation voltage has returned within the range of operation. Remark VPOR: POR power supply rise detection voltage VPDR: POR power supply fall detection voltage R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1557 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT Figure 25-2. Timing of Generation of Internal Reset Signal by Power-on-reset Circuit and Voltage Detector (2/2) (2) When LVD is interrupt & reset mode (option byte 000C1/020C1H: LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 0) Supply voltage (VDD) Note 4 VLVDH VLVDL Operating voltage range lower limit Note 1 VPOR = 1.56 V (TYP.) VPDR = 1.55 V (TYP.) 0V Wait for oscillation accuracy stabilizationNote 3 Wait for oscillation accuracy stabilizationNote 3 High-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH) Starting oscillation is specified by software High-speed system clock (fMX) (when X1 oscillation is selected) CPU Starting oscillation is specified by software Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock)Note 2 Operation stops LVD reset processing time Note 5 Voltage stabilization wait + POR reset processing time 1.64 ms (TYP.), 3.10 ms (MAX.) Reset period (oscillation stop) Normal operation (high-speed on-chip oscillator clock)Note 2 LVD reset processing time Note 5 Operation stops Voltage stabilization wait + POR reset processing time 1.64 ms (TYP.), 3.10 ms (MAX.) Internal reset signal INTLVI Notes 1. The guaranteed range for operation is 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V. Only proceed with normal operations after VDD has reached or exceeded 2.7 V. If an operation may be generated at lower than 2.7V when the supply voltage falls or power-on, use the reset function of the voltage detector, or input the low level to the RESET pin. 2. The high-speed on-chip oscillator clock and a high-speed system clock or subsystem clock can be selected as the CPU clock. To use the X1 clock, use the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) to confirm the lapse of the oscillation stabilization time. To use the XT1 clock, use the timer function for confirmation of the lapse of the stabilization time. 3. The internal reset processing time includes the oscillation accuracy stabilization time of the high-speed onchip oscillator clock. 4. After the first interrupt request signal (INTLVI) is generated, the LVILV and LVIMD bits of the voltage detection level register (LVIS) are automatically set to 1. After INTLVI is generated, appropriate settings should be made according to Figure 26-8 Initial Setting of Interrupt and Reset Mode, taking into consideration that the supply voltage might return to VLVDH or higher without falling below VLVDL. 5. Remark LVD reset processing time: 0 to 0.0701 ms (MAX.) VLVDH, VLVDL: LVD detection voltage VPOR: POR power supply rise detection voltage VPDR: POR power supply fall detection voltage R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1558 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT 25.4 Cautions for Power-on-reset Circuit In a system where the supply voltage (VDD) fluctuates for a certain period in the vicinity of the POR detection voltage (VPOR, VPDR), the system may be repeatedly reset and released from the reset status. In this case, the time from release of reset to the start of the operation of the microcontroller can be arbitrarily set by taking the following action. <Action> After releasing the reset signal, wait for the supply voltage fluctuation period of each system by means of a software counter that uses a timer, and then initialize the ports. Figure 25-3. Example of Software Processing After Reset Release (1/2) (1) If supply voltage fluctuation is 50 ms or less in vicinity of POR detection voltage Reset Initialization processing <1> ; Check the reset source, etc. Note 2 Power-on-reset Setting timer array unit (to measure 50 ms) ; fCLK = High-speed on-chip oscillator clock (4 MHz) Source: fMCK (4 MHz) /27, where comparison value = 789: Approx. 50 ms Timer starts (TS0n = 1). Clearing WDT Note 1 No 50 ms has passed? (TMIFmn = 1?) Yes Initialization processing <2> Notes 1. 2. Remark ; Initial setting for port. Setting of division ratio of system clock, such as setting of timer or A/D converter. If reset is generated again during this period, initialization processing <2> is not started. A flowchart is shown on the next page. m = 0, 1, n = 0 to 7 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1559 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 25 POWER-ON-RESET CIRCUIT Figure 25-3. Example of Software Processing After Reset Release (2/2) (2) Checking reset source Check reset source POCRES0 of POCRES register = 0 ? Yes Reset processing by power-on reset circuit No TRAP of RESF register = 1 ? No WDCLRF of RESF register = 1 ? Yes Reset processing by illegal instruction execution Note Yes No CLKRF of POCRES register = 1 ? Yes No Reset processing by watchdog timer IAWRF of RESF register = 1? Yes Reset processing by illegal-memory access No LVIRF of RESF register = 1 ? No Reset processing by clock monitor Yes Reset processing by voltage detector Reset processing by external reset Note The illegal instruction is generated when instruction code FFH is executed. Reset by the illegal instruction execution not issued by emulation with the in-circuit emulator or on-chip debug emulator. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1560 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR 26.1 Functions of Voltage Detector The voltage detector (LVD) has the following functions. The LVD circuit compares the supply voltage (VDD) with the detection voltage (VLVDH, VLVDL), and generates an internal reset or internal interrupt signal. The detection level for the power supply detection voltage (VLVDH, VLVDL) can be selected by using the option byte as one of 14 levels (For details, see CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE). Operable in STOP mode. The following three operation modes can be selected by using the option byte. (a) Interrupt & reset mode (option byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 0) For the two detection voltages selected by the option byte 000C1H/020C1H, the high-voltage detection level (VLVDH) is used for generating interrupts and ending resets, and the low-voltage detection level (VLVDL) is used for triggering resets. (b) Reset mode (option byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 1) The detection voltage (VLVD) selected by the option byte 000C1H/020C1H is used for triggering and ending resets. (c) Interrupt mode (option byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 0, 1) The detection voltage (VLVD) selected by the option byte 000C1H/020C1H is used for generating interrupts/reset release. Two detection voltages (VLVDH, VLVDL) can be specified in the interrupt & reset mode, and one (VLVD) can be specified in the reset mode and interrupt mode. The reset and interrupt signals are generated as follows according to the option byte (LVIMDS0, LVIMDS1) selection. Interrupt & reset mode Reset mode Interrupt mode (LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 0) (LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 1) (LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 0, 1) Generates an internal interrupt signal Generates an internal reset signal when Generates an internal interrupt signal when VDD < VLVDH, and an internal reset VDD < VLVD and releases the reset signal when VDD drops lower than VLVD (VDD < when VDD < VLVDL. when VDD VLVD. VLVD) or when VDD becomes VLVD or Releases the reset signal when VDD higher (VDD VLVD). VLVDH. Releases the reset signal when VDD VLVD at power on. While the voltage detector is operating, whether the supply voltage is more than or less than the detection level can be checked by reading the voltage detection flag (LVIF: bit 0 of the voltage detection register (LVIM)). Bit 0 (LVIRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1 if reset occurs. For details of the RESF register, see CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1561 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR 26.2 Configuration of Voltage Detector The block diagram of the voltage detector is shown in Figure 26-1. Figure 26-1. Block Diagram of Voltage Detector VDD VDD VLVDL Option byte (000C1H) LVIS1, LVIS0 Internal reset signal Controller VLVDH + Selector Voltage detection level selector N-ch - INTLVI Reference voltage source LVISEN LVIOMSK Option byte (000C1H) VPOC2 to VPOC0 LVIF Voltage detection register (LVIM) LVIMD LVILV Voltage detection level register (LVIS) Internal bus 26.3 Registers Controlling Voltage Detector The voltage detector is controlled by the following registers. Voltage detection register (LVIM) Voltage detection level register (LVIS) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1562 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR 26.3.1 Voltage detection register (LVIM) This register is used to specify whether to enable or disable rewriting the voltage detection level register (LVIS), as well as to check the LVD output mask status. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H Note 1. Figure 26-2. Format of Voltage Detection Register (LVIM) Address: FFFA9H After reset: 00H Note 1 R/W Note 2 Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 <1> <0> LVIM LVISEN 0 0 0 0 0 LVIOMSK LVIF LVISEN Specification of whether to enable or disable rewriting the voltage detection level register (LVIS) 0 Disabling rewriting 1 Enabling rewriting Note 3 LVIOMSK Mask status flag of LVD output 0 Mask is invalid 1 Mask is valid Note 4 LVIF Notes 1. Voltage detection flag 0 Supply voltage (VDD) detection voltage (VLVD), or when LVD operation is disabled 1 Supply voltage (VDD) < detection voltage (VLVD) The reset value changes depending on the reset source. If the LVIS register is reset by LVD, it is not reset but holds the current value. LVISEN is cleared to 0 by any reset other than one due to LVD. 2. Bits 0 and 1 are read-only. 3. This can only be set when LVIMDS1 and LVIMDS0 are set to 1 and 0 (interrupt and reset mode) by the option byte. 4. LVIOMSK bit is automatically set to 1 in the following periods and reset or interruption by LVD is masked. Period during LVISEN = 1 Waiting period from the time when LVD interrupt is generated until LVD detection voltage becomes stable Waiting period from the time when the value of LVILV bit changes until LVD detection voltage becomes stable R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1563 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR 26.3.2 Voltage detection level register (LVIS) This register selects the voltage detection level. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation input sets this register to 00H/01H/81H Note1. Figure 26-3. Format of Voltage Detection Level Register (LVIS) Address: FFFAAH After reset: 00H/01H/81H Note 1 R/W Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0> LVIS LVIMD 0 0 0 0 0 0 LVILV LVIMD Note Operation mode of voltage detection 2 0 Interrupt mode 1 Reset mode LVILV Note 2 Notes 1. LVD detection level 0 High-voltage detection level (VLVDH) 1 Low-voltage detection level (VLVDL or VLVD) The reset value changes depending on the reset source and the setting of the option byte. This register is not cleared (00H) by LVD reset. The generation of reset signal other than an LVD reset sets as follows. When option byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 0: 00H When option byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 1: 81H When option byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 0, 1: 01H 2. Writing 0 can only be allowed when LVIMDS1 and LVIMDS0 are set to 1 and 0 (interrupt and reset mode) by the option byte. In other cases, writing is not allowed and the value is switched automatically when reset or interrupt is generated. Cautions 1. 2. Only rewrite the value of the LVIS register after setting the LVISEN bit (bit 7 of the LVIM register) to 1. Specify the LVD operation mode and detection voltage (VLVDH, VLVDL) by using the option byte (000C1H). Table 26-1 shows the option byte (000C1H) settings. For details about the option byte, see CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1564 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR Table 26-1. LVD Operation Mode and Detection Voltage Settings for User Option Byte (000C1H/020C1H) When used as interrupt & reset mode Detection voltage VLVDH Option byte Setting Value VLVDL LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0 VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 LVIS1 LVIS0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Rising Falling Falling edge edge edge 4.42 V 4.32 V 2.75 V 4.62 V 4.52 V 2.75 V 0 1 0 3.32 V 3.15 V 2.75 V 0 1 1 4.74 V 4.64 V Other than above Setting prohibited When used as reset mode Detection voltage Option byte Setting Value VLVD LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0 VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 LVIS1 LVIS0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 2.96 V 0 0 0 0 1 3.22 V 3.15 V 0 1 1 0 1 4.42 V 4.32 V 0 0 1 0 0 4.62 V 4.52 V 0 1 0 0 0 4.74 V 4.64 V 0 1 1 0 0 Rising edge Falling edge 2.81 V 2.75 V 3.02 V Other than above Setting prohibited R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1565 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR When used as interrupt mode Detection voltage Option byte Setting Value VLVD LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0 VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 LVIS1 LVIS0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 Rising edge Falling edge 2.81 V 2.75 V 3.02 V 2.96 V 0 0 0 0 1 3.22 V 3.15 V 0 1 1 0 1 4.42 V 4.32 V 0 0 1 0 0 4.62 V 4.52 V 0 1 0 0 0 4.74 V 4.64 V 0 1 1 0 0 Other than above Setting prohibited When LVDOFF Detection voltage Option byte Setting Value VLVD Rising edge Falling edge Other than above LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0 VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 LVIS1 LVIS0 1 1 Setting prohibited Caution When the LVD is off, it is necessary to perform an external reset. For an external reset, input a low level of at least 10 s or more to the RESET pin. To perform an external reset upon power application, input a low level to the RESET pin before power-on, keep the low level for at least 10 s during the period in which the supply voltage is within the operating range, and then input a high level. After power is applied, do not input a high level to the RESET pin during a period in which the supply voltage is not within the operating range. Remark : don't care R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1566 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR 26.4 Operation of Voltage Detector 26.4.1 When used as reset mode When starting operation Start in the following initial setting state. Specify the operation mode (the reset mode (LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 1)) and the detection voltage (VLVD) by using the option byte 000C1H/020C1H. Set bit 7 (LVISEN) of the voltage detection register (LVIM) to 0 (disable rewriting of voltage detection level register (LVIS)) When the option byte LVIMDS1 and LVIMDS0 are set to 1, the initial value of the LVIS register is set to 81H. Bit 7 (LVIMD) is 1 (reset mode). Bit 0 (LVILV) is 1 (low-voltage detection level: VLVD). Figure 26-4 shows the timing of the internal reset signal generated by the voltage detector. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1567 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR Figure 26-4. Timing of Voltage Detector Internal Reset Signal Generation (Option Byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 1) Supply voltage (VDD) VLVD VPOR = 1.56 V (TYP.) VPDR = 1.55 V (TYP.) Time Cleared LVIF flag LVIMD flag H LVILV flag H Not cleared Not cleared Not cleared Not cleared Cleared LVIRF flag (RESF register ) LVD reset signal Cleared by software Cleared by software POR reset signal Internal reset signal Remark VPOR: POR power supply rise detection voltage VPDR: POR power supply fall detection voltage R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1568 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR 26.4.2 When used as interrupt mode When starting operation Specify the operation mode (the interrupt mode (LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 0, 1)) and the detection voltage (VLVD) by using the option byte 000C1H/020C1H. Do not input a high level to the RESET pin when the supply voltage is not within the operating voltage range. Start in the following initial setting state. Set bit 7 (LVISEN) of the voltage detection register (LVIM) to 0 (disable rewriting of voltage detection level register (LVIS)) When the option byte LVIMDS1 is clear to 0 and LVIMDS0 is set to 1, the initial value of the LVIS register is set to 01H. Bit 7 (LVIMD) is 0 (interrupt mode). Bit 0 (LVILV) is 1 (low-voltage detection level: VLVDL). Figure 26-5 shows the timing of the internal interrupt signal generated by the voltage detector. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1569 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR Figure 26-5. Timing of Voltage Detector Internal Interrupt Signal Generation (Option Byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 0, 1) Supply voltage (VDD) VLVD VPOR = 1.56 V (TYP.) VPDR = 1.55 V (TYP.) Time LVIMK flag (interrupt mask) (set by software) H Note Cleared by software Cleared LVIF flag LVIMD flag LVILV flag H INTLVI LVIIF flag LVD reset signal POR reset signal Internal reset signal Note The LVIMK flag is set to 1 by reset signal generation. Remark VPOR: POR power supply rise detection voltage VPDR: POR power supply fall detection voltage R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1570 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR 26.4.3 When used as interrupt and reset mode When starting operation Specify the operation mode (the interrupt and reset (LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 0)) and the detection voltage (VLVDH, VLVDL) by using the option byte 000C1H/020C1H. Start in the following initial setting state. Set bit 7 (LVISEN) of the voltage detection register (LVIM) to 0 (disable rewriting of voltage detection level register (LVIS)) When the option byte LVIMDS1 is set to 1 and LVIMDS0 is clear to 0, the initial value of the LVIS register is set to 00H. Bit 7 (LVIMD) is 0 (interrupt mode). Bit 0 (LVILV) is 0 (high-voltage detection level: VLVDH). Figures 26-6 shows the Timing of Voltage Detector Reset Signal and Interrupt Signal Generation. Perform the processing according to Figure 26-7 Processing Procedure After an Interrupt Is Generated and Figure 26-8 Initial Setting of Interrupt and Reset Mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1571 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR Figure 26-6. Timing of Voltage Detector Reset Signal and Interrupt Signal Generation (Option Byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 0) (1/2) If a reset is not generated after releasing the mask, determine that a condition of VDD becomes VDD VLVDH, clear LVIMD, and the MCU returns to normal operation. Supply voltage (VDD) VLVDH VLVDL VPOR = 1.56 V (TYP.) VPDR = 1.55 V (TYP.) Time LVIMK flag (set by software) H Note 1 Cleared by software Operation status RESET Normal operation Normal operation Save processing Cleared by software Wait for stabilization by software (400 s or 5 clocks of fIL) Note 3 RESET Normal operation RESET Save processing Cleared LVIF flag LVISEN flag (set by software) LVIOMSK flag LVIMD flag Cleared by software Note 3 LVILV flag Cleared by software Note 2 LVIRF flag Cleared LVD reset signal POR reset signal Internal reset signal INTLVI LVIIF flag (Notes and Remark are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1572 RL78/F13, F14 Notes 1. 2. CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR The LVIMK flag is set to 1 by reset signal generation. After an interrupt is generated, perform the processing according to Figure 26-7 Processing Procedure After an Interrupt Is Generated in interrupt and reset mode. 3. After a reset is released, perform the processing according to Figure 26-8 Initial Setting of Interrupt and Reset Mode in interrupt and reset mode. Remark VPOR: POR power supply rise detection voltage VPDR: POR power supply fall detection voltage R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1573 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR Figure 26-6. Timing of Voltage Detector Reset Signal and Interrupt Signal Generation (Option Byte LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 0) (2/2) When a condition of V DD is V DD < VLVDH after releasing the mask, a reset is generated because of LVIMD = 1 (reset mode). Supply voltage (VDD) VLVDH VLVDL VPOR = 1.56 V (TYP.) VPDR = 1.55 V (TYP.) LVIMK flag (set by software) Time H Note 1 Cleared by software Wait for stabilization by software (400 s or 5 clocks of fIL) Note 3 Cleared by software Operation status RESET Save Normal operation processing RESET Normal operation RESET Save processing Cleared LVIF flag LVISEN flag (set by software) LVIOMSK flag LVIMD flag Cleared by software Note 3 LVILV flag LVIRF flag Cleared by software Note 2 Cleared LVD reset signal POR reset signal Internal reset signal INTLVI LVIIF flag (Notes and Remark are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1574 RL78/F13, F14 Notes 1. 2. CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR The LVIMK flag is set to 1 by reset signal generation. After an interrupt is generated, perform the processing according to Figure 26-7 Processing Procedure After an Interrupt Is Generated in interrupt and reset mode. 3. After a reset is released, perform the processing according to Figure 26-8 Initial Setting of Interrupt and Reset Mode in interrupt and reset mode. Remark VPOR: POR power supply rise detection voltage VPDR: POR power supply fall detection voltage Figure 26-7. Processing Procedure After an Interrupt Is Generated INTLVI generated Save processing LVISEN = 1 Perform required save processing. Set the LVISEN bit to 1 to mask voltage detection (LVIOMSK = 1). LVILV = 0 Set the LVILV bit to 0 to set the high-voltage detection level (VLVDH). LVISEN = 0 Set the LVISEN bit to 0 to enable voltage detection. LVIOMSK = 0 No Yes The MCU returns to normal operation when internal Yes LVD reset generated reset by voltage detector (LVD) is not generated, since a condition of VDD becomes VDD VLVDH. No Reset R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 LVISEN = 1 Set the LVISEN bit to 1 to mask voltage detection (LVIOMSK = 1) LVIMD = 0 Set the LVIMD bit to 0 to set interrupt mode. LVISEN = 0 Set the LVISEN bit to 0 to enable voltage detection. Normal operation 1575 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR When setting an interrupt and reset mode (LVIMDS1, LVIMDS0 = 1, 0), voltage detection stabilization wait time for 400 s or 5 clocks of fIL is necessary after LVD reset is released (LVIRF = 1). After waiting until voltage detection stabilizes, (0) clear the LVIMD bit for initialization. While voltage detection stabilization wait time is being counted and when the LVIMD bit is rewritten, set LVISEN to 1 to mask a reset or interrupt generation by LVD. Figure 26-8 shows the procedure for initial setting of interrupt and reset mode. Figure 26-8. Initial Setting of Interrupt and Reset Mode Power supply started Reset source determined LVIRF = 1 ? No Refer to Figure 26-9 Checking Reset Source. Check internal reset generation by LVD circuit Yes LVISEN = 1 Set the LVISEN bit to 1 to mask voltage detection (LVIOMSK = 1) Voltage detection Count 400 s or 5 clocks of fIL by software. stabilization wait time LVIMD = 0 Set the LVIMD bit to 0 to set interrupt mode. LVISEN = 0 Set the LVISEN bit to 0 to enable voltage detection. Normal operation Remark fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1576 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR 26.5 Cautions for Voltage Detector 26.5.1 Checking reset source When a reset occurs, check the reset source by using the following method. Figure 26-9. Checking Reset Source Check reset source POCRES0 of POCRES register = 0 ? Yes Reset processing by power-on reset circuit No TRAP of RESF register = 1 ? No WDCLRF of RESF register = 1 ? Yes Reset processing by illegal instruction execution Note Yes No CLKRF of POCRES register = 1 ? Yes No Reset processing by watchdog timer IAWRF of RESF register = 1? Yes Reset processing by illegal-memory access No LVIRF of RESF register = 1 ? No Reset processing by clock monitor Yes Reset processing by voltage detector Reset processing by external reset Note When instruction code FFH is executed. Reset by the illegal instruction execution not issued by emulation with the in-circuit emulator or on-chip debug emulator. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1577 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 26 VOLTAGE DETECTOR 26.5.2 Delay from the time LVD reset source is generated until the time LVD reset has been generated or released There is some delay from the time supply voltage (VDD) < LVD detection voltage (VLVD) until the time LVD reset has been generated. In the same way, there is also some delay from the time LVD detection voltage (VLVD) supply voltage (VDD) until the time LVD reset has been released (see Figure 26-10). Figure 26-10. Delay from The Time LVD Reset Source Is Generated until The Time LVD Reset Has Been Generated or Released Supply voltage (VDD) VLVD Time <1> <1> LVD reset signal <1>: Detection delay (300 s (MAX.)) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1578 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS 27.1 Overview of Safety Functions The following safety functions are provided in the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 to comply with the IEC60730 and IEC61508 safety standards. These functions enable the microcontroller to self-diagnose abnormalities and stop operating if an abnormality is detected. (1) Flash memory CRC operation function (high-speed CRC, general-purpose CRC) This detects data errors in the flash memory by performing CRC operations. Two CRC functions are provided in the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 that can be used according to the application or purpose of use. High-speed CRC: The CPU can be stopped and a high-speed check executed on its entire code flash memory area during the initialization routine. General CRC: This can be used for checking various data in addition to the code flash memory area while the CPU is running. (2) RAM-ECC function 2-bit error detection and 1- bit error correction are available. (3) CPU stack pointer monitor function This detects underflows and overflows of the stack pointer. (4) Clock monitoring function The system clock (fMAIN) and main/PLL select clock (fMP) are monitored to detect oscillation stopping. (5) RAM guard function This prevents RAM data from being rewritten when the CPU freezes. (6) SFR guard function This prevents SFRs from being rewritten when the CPU freezes. (7) Invalid memory access detection function This detects illegal accesses to invalid memory areas (such as areas where no memory is allocated and areas to which access is restricted). (8) Frequency detection function This uses TAU to detect the oscillation frequency. (9) A/D test function This is used to perform a self-check of A/D conversion by performing A/D conversion on the internal reference voltage. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1579 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS (10) Digital output signal level detection function for I/O ports When the I/O ports are output mode in which PMm bit of the port mode register (PMm) is 0, the output level of the pin can be read. Remarks 1. m = 0, 1, 3 to 10, 12 to 15, n = 0 to 7 2. For details on usage, see Application Note (under creation). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1580 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS 27.2 Registers Used by Safety Functions The safety functions use the following registers: Register Each Function of Safety Function Flash memory CRC control register (CRC0CTL) Flash memory CRC operation function Flash memory CRC operation result register (PGCRCL) (high-speed CRC) CRC input register (CRCIN) CRC operation function CRC operation mode control register (CRCMD) (general-purpose CRC) CRC data register (CRCD) Error address store register (ERADR) RAM-ECC function 1-bit error detection interrupt enable register (ECCIER) Bit error detection register (ECCER) ECC test protect register (ECCTPR) ECC test mode register (ECCTMDR) Write data inversion register (ECCDWRVR) SPM control register (SPMCTRL) Stack pointer monitor function SP overflow address setting register (SPOFR) SP underflow setting register (SPUFR) Invalid memory access detection control register (IAWCTL) RAM guard function SFR guard function Invalid memory access detection function Timer input select register 0 (TIS0) Frequency detection function System clock control register (CKC) A/D test register (ADTES) A/D test function Analog input channel specification register (ADS) Port mode select register (PMS) Digital output signal level detection function for I/O ports The content of each register is described in 27.3 Operation of Safety Functions. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1581 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS 27.3 Operation of Safety Functions 27.3.1 Flash memory CRC operation function (high-speed CRC) The IEC60730 standard mandates the checking of data in the flash memory, and recommends using CRC to do it. The high-speed CRC provided in the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 can be used to check the entire code flash memory area during the initialization routine. The high-speed CRC can be executed only when the program is allocated on the RAM and in the HALT mode of the main system clock. High-speed CRC operations are performed by stopping the CPU and reading 32 bits of data from the flash memory in one clock cycle. The feature of this operation is the short time it takes until the end of the check (for example, 64 Kbytes of flash memory are checked in 512 s when the operating clock is at 32 MHz). The CRC generator polynomial used complies with "X16 + X12 + X5 + 1" of CRC-16-CCITT. The high-speed CRC operates in MSB first order from bit 31 to bit 0. Caution The result of the CRC operation will differ from that in on-chip debugging because of allocation of the monitor program. Remark The operation result is different between the high-speed CRC and the general CRC, because the general CRC operates in LSB first order. <Control register> (1) Flash memory CRC control register (CRC0CTL) This register is used to control the operation of the high-speed CRC ALU, as well as to specify the operation range. The CRC0CTL register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1582 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS Figure 27-1. Format of Flash Memory CRC Control Register (CRC0CTL) Address: F02F0H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CRC0CTL CRC0EN 0 FEA5 FEA4 FEA3 FEA2 FEA1 FEA0 CRC0EN Control of high-speed CRC ALU operation 0 Stop the operation. 1 Start the operation according to HALT instruction execution. FEA5 FEA4 FEA3 FEA2 FEA1 FEA0 High-speed CRC operation range 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000H to 3FFBH (16 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 0 0 0 1 00000H to 7FFBH (32 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 0 0 1 0 00000H to BFFBH (48 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 0 0 1 1 00000H to FFFBH (64 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 0 1 0 0 00000H to 13FFBH (80 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 0 1 0 1 00000H to 17FFBH (96 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 0 1 1 0 00000H to 1BFFBH (112 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 0 1 1 1 00000H to 1FFFBH (128 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 1 0 0 0 00000H to 23FFBH (144 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 1 0 0 1 00000H to 27FFBH (160 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 1 0 1 0 00000H to 2BFFBH (176 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 1 0 1 1 00000H to 2FFFBH (192 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 1 1 0 0 00000H to 33FFBH (208 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 1 1 0 1 00000H to 37FFBH (224 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 1 1 1 0 00000H to 3BFFBH (240 Kbytes - 4 bytes) 0 0 1 1 1 1 00000H to 3FFFBH (256 Kbytes - 4 bytes) Other than the above Remark Setting prohibited Input the expected CRC operation result value to be used for comparison in the lowest 4 bytes of the flash memory. Note that the operation range will thereby be reduced by 4 bytes. The lowest 4 bytes of 16 Kbytes are used to store the expected value, so operation is not performed on these bytes. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1583 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS (2) Flash memory CRC operation result register (PGCRCL) This register is used to store the high-speed CRC operation results. The PGCRCL register can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Figure 27-2. Format of Flash Memory CRC Operation Result Register (PGCRCL) Address: F02F2H After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 PGCRCL PGCRC15 PGCRC14 PGCRC13 PGCRC12 PGCRC11 PGCRC10 PGCRC9 PGCRC8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PGCRC7 PGCRC6 PGCRC5 PGCRC4 PGCRC3 PGCRC2 PGCRC1 PGCRC0 PGCRC15 to PGCRC0 0000H to FFFFH High-speed CRC operation results Store the high-speed CRC operation results. Caution The PGCRCL register can only be written if CRC0EN (bit 7 of the CRC0CTL register) = 1. Figure 27-3 shows the flowchart of flash memory CRC operation function (high-speed CRC). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1584 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS <Operation flow> Figure 27-3. Flowchart of Flash Memory CRC Operation Function (High-speed CRC) Start Set FEA5 to FEA0 bits Copied to RAM to HALT instruction and RET instruction, initialize 10 bytes All xxMKx = 1 CRC0EN = 1 PGCRCL = 0000H CALL instruction Execute the HALT instruction. ; Store the expected CRC operation result ; value in the lowest 4 bytes. ; CRC operation range setting ; Copy the HALT and RET instructions to be ; executed on the RAM to the RAM. ; Initialize the 10 bytes after the RET ; instruction. ; Masks all interrupt ; Enables CRC operation ; Initialize the CRC operation result register ; Call the address of the HALT instruction ; copied to the RAM. ; CRC operation starts by HALT instruction ; execution HALT mode Execute the RET instruction. CRC0EN = 0 Read the value of PGCRCL. ; When the CRC operation is complete, the HALT ; mode is released and control is returned from RAM ; Prohibits CRC operation ; Read CRC operation result ; Compare the value with the stored expected ; value. Not match Match Abnormal complete Correctly complete Cautions 1. The CRC operation is executed only on the code flash. 2. Store the expected CRC operation value in the area below the operation range in the code flash. 3. Boot swapping is not performed while the CRC operation is being executed. 4. The CRC operation is enabled by executing the HALT instruction in the RAM area. Be sure to execute the HALT instruction in RAM area. The expected CRC value can be calculated by using tools such as the CubeSuite+ development environment (see the CubeSuite+ user's manual for details). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1585 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS 27.3.2 CRC operation function (general-purpose CRC) In order to guarantee safety during operation, the IEC61508 standard mandates the checking of data even while the CPU is operating. In the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14, a general CRC operation can be executed as a peripheral function while the CPU is operating. The general CRC can be used for checking various data in addition to the code flash memory area. The data to be checked can be specified by using software (a user-created program). In HALT mode, CRC operations can only proceed during DTC transfer. The general CRC operation can be executed in the main system clock operation mode as well as the subsystem clock operation mode. The CRC generator polynomial used is "X16 + X12 + X5 + 1" of CRC-16-CCITT. The data to be input is inverted in bit order and then calculated to allow for LSB-first communication. For example, if the data 12345678H is sent from the LSB, values are written to the CRCIN register in the order of 78H, 56H, 34H, and 12H, enabling a value of 08F6H to be obtained from the CRCD register. This is the result obtained by executing a CRC operation on the bit rows shown below, which consist of the data 12345678H inverted in bit order. CRCIN setting data 78H Bit representation data 0111 1000 56H 34H 12H 0101 0110 0011 0100 0001 0010 Bit reverse Bit reverse data 0001 1110 0110 1010 0010 1100 0100 1000 Operation with polynomial Result data 0110 1111 0001 0000 Bit reverse CRCD data 0000 1000 1111 0110 Obtained result (08F6H) Caution Setting a software break in a target area of CRC operation alters the result of the CRC operation because the debugger changes the row where the software break is to be set into a break instruction during program execution. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1586 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS <Control register> (1) CRC input register (CRCIN) CRCIN register is an 8-bit register that is used to set the CRC operation data of general-purpose CRC. The possible setting range is 00H to FFH. The CRCIN register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 27-4. Format of CRC Input Register (CRCIN) Address: FFFACH Symbol After reset: 00H 7 R/W 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CRCIN CRCIN7 to CRCIN0 Setting the CRC operation data of general-purpose CRC 00H to FFH Data input when supporting CRC-CCITT 00H to 0FH Data input when conforming to SENT Note Note For CRCIN register write when conforming to SENT, write valid data to the lower 4 bits (bits 3 to 0) and write 0 to the other bits (if any value other than 0 is written to, the written value is read because the bits other than the lower 4 bits are not processed). (2) CRC operation mode control register (CRCMD) CRCMD register is used to select the general-purpose CRC operation mode. The CRCMD register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Figure 27-5. Format of CRC Operation Mode Control Register (CRCMD) Address: F02F9H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CRCMD - - - - - - - POLYSEL POLYSEL CRC code generation circuit select bit 16 12 0 CRC-CCITT (X + X + X5 + 1) 1 Conform to SENT (X4 + X3 + X2 + 1) Cautions 1. To generate CRC code conforming to SENT, set the POLYSEL bit in the CRCMD register. 2. Bits 7 to 1 are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1587 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS (3) CRC data register (CRCD) This register is used to store the general-purpose CRC operation result. The possible setting range is 0000H to FFFFH. After 1 clock of CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) has elapsed from the time CRCIN register is written, the CRC operation result is stored to the CRCD register. The CRCD register can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H. Figure 27-6. Format of CRC Data Register (CRCD) Address: F02FAH Symbol 15 After reset: 0000H 14 13 12 R/W 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CRCD Store the general-purpose CRC operation result Note 1, 2 CRCD15 to CRCD0 0000H to FFFFH CRC operation result when supporting CRC-CCITT 0000H to 000FH CRC operation result when conforming to SENT Note3 Notes 1. Read the value written to CRCD register before writing to CRCIN register. 2. If writing and storing operation result to CRCD register conflict, the writing is ignored. 3. For CRCD register write when conforming to SENT, write valid data to the lower 4 bits (bits 3 to 0) and write 0 to the other bits. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1588 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS <Operation flow> Figure 27-7. CRC Operation Function (General-Purpose CRC) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1589 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS 27.3.3 RAM-ECC function The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 have the RAM-ECC function. This function is used to detect erroneous data (bit errors), generate interrupt requests, and retain the addresses of bit errors. If only one bit is in error, the data are corrected. Caution The RAM-ECC function is disabled during on-chip debugging. Therefore, do not use the ECC test mode to check the on-chip debugging operation. Even if the ECC test mode is used, bit errors are not detected, error addresses are not stored, or an interrupt is not generated. In addition, even if the bit error is 1 bit, the data is not corrected. <Control register> Register Name Description Access Size ERADR Error address store register 16 bits ECCIER 1-bit error detection interrupt enable 8 bits register ECCER Bit error detection register 8 bits ECCTPR ECC test protect register 8 bits ECCTMDR ECC test mode register 8 bits ECCDWRVR Write data inversion register 16 bits R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1590 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS (1) Error address store register (ERADR) Figure 27-8. Format of Error Address Store Register (ERADR) Address: F0200H Symbol 15 After reset: 00H 14 13 12 R/W 11 10 9 8 ERADR 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ERAD ERAD Bit error address 0000H to FFFFH Address when a bit error interrupt request is generated Cautions 1. Access the ERADR register in word units. 2. The register value is updated each time a bit error interrupt request is generated. (2) 1-bit error detection interrupt enable register (ECCIER) Figure 27-9. Format of 1-bit Error Detection Interrupt Enable Register (ECCIER) Address: F0202H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ECCIER - - - - - - - IEN IEN 1-bit error detection interrupt enable bit 0 Interrupt disabled 1 Interrupt enabled Cautions 1. Bits 1 to 7 of the ECCIER register are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. <R> 2. INTRAM interrupt request occurs regardless of the value of ECCIER on two bits error. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1591 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS (3) Bit error detection register (ECCER) Figure 27-10. Format of Bit Error Detection Register (ECCER) Address: F0203H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ECCER - - - - - - - DBERR DBERR Bit error detection flag 0 A 1-bit error detected. 1 A 2-bit error detected. Cautions 1. The DBERR bit is cleared to 0 by writing 0. 2. If setting to 1 due to bit error detection and clearing to 0 by the CPU occur simultaneously, setting to 1 due to bit error detection has a priority. 3. If a bit error detection interrupt request (INTRAM) is not generated, the DBERR value is invalid. (4) ECC test protect register (ECCTPR) This register is used to prevent accidentally changing the setting of the ECCTMDR register to trigger entry to the ECC test mode. Writing a value other than 07H prevents changes to the value of the ECCTMDR register Figure 27-11. Format of ECC Test Protect Register (ECCTPR) Address: F0204H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ECCTPR - - - - - TPR2 TPR1 TPR0 TPR2 to TPR0 ECC test protect bits Other than 00000111 Access to the ECCTMDR register is disabled. 00000111 Access to the ECCTMDR register is enabled. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1592 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS (5) ECC test mode register (ECCTMDR) Figure 27-12. Format of ECC Test Mode Register (ECCTMDR) Address: F0205H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ECCTMDR - - - - - TMD2 TMD1 TMD0 TMD2 to TMD0 ECC test mode bits 000 Normal operating mode 001 ECC test mode Other than above Setting prohibited Cautions 1. Set the ECCTPR register to "07H" before accessing the ECCTMDR register. 2. Bits 3 to 7 of the ECCTMDR register are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. (6) Write data inversion register (ECCDWRVR) This register is for use in confirming that the ECC is operating correctly by inverting both the parity bit of the write data and the ECC code. Figure 27-13. Format of Write Data Inversion Register (ECCWRDR) Address: F0206H After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 ECCWRVR - - - PRTYRV ECCRV3 ECCRV2 ECCRV1 ECCRV0 Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ECCWRVR DWRV7 DWRV6 DWRV5 DWRV4 DWRV3 DWRV2 DWRV1 DWRV0 PRTYRV Parity inversion bit 0 Parity bit not inverted. 1 Parity bit inverted. ECCRV3 ECC code inversion bit 3 0 Bit 3 of ECC code not inverted. 1 Bit 3 of ECC code inverted. ECCRV2 ECC code inversion bit 2 0 Bit 2 of ECC code not inverted. 1 Bit 2 of ECC code inverted. ECCRV1 ECC code inversion bit 1 0 Bit 1 of ECC code not inverted. 1 Bit 1 of ECC code inverted. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1593 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS ECCRV0 ECC code inversion bit 0 0 Bit 0 of ECC code not inverted. 1 Bit 0 of ECC code inverted. DWRV7 Write data inversion bit 7 0 Bit 7 of write data not inverted. 1 Bit 7 of write data inverted. DWRV6 Write data inversion bit 6 0 Bit 6 of write data not inverted. 1 Bit 6 of write data inverted. DWRV5 Write data inversion bit 5 0 Bit 5 of write data not inverted. 1 Bit 5 of write data inverted. DWRV4 Write data inversion bit 4 0 Bit 4 of write data not inverted. 1 Bit 4 of write data inverted. DWRV3 Write data inversion bit 3 0 Bit 3 of write data not inverted. 1 Bit 3 of write data inverted. DWRV2 Write data inversion bit 2 0 Bit 2 of write data not inverted. 1 Bit 2 of write data inverted. DWRV1 Write data inversion bit 1 0 Bit 1 of write data not inverted. 1 Bit 1 of write data inverted. DWRV0 Write data inversion bit 0 0 Bit 0 of write data not inverted. 1 Bit 0 of write data inverted. Cautions 1. Access the ECCDWRVR register in word units. 2. Bits 13 to 15 of the ECCDWRVR register are always read as 0. The write value should always be 0. 3. All data written to the RAM, including data written to the stack, is inverted. Therefore, all peripheral functions that might rewrite the RAM must be stopped before a write data inversion bit is set. Do not set a write data inversion bit during OCD. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1594 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS <Bit error detection interrupt> When a bit error is detected, an interrupt request signal (INTRAM) is generated, and the address of the bit error is held in the error address store register (ERADR). If the bit error is 2 bits, the bit error detection flag (DBERR) in the bit error detection register (ECCER) is set to 1. The 1-bit error detection interrupt enable register (ECCIER) can be used to specify whether to output or not an interrupt request signal when the bit error is 1 bit. Since the CPU of the RL78 pre-reads the instruction code, RAM fetch area + 10 bytes should be initialized to perform RAM fetch. Even when a bit error is detected by reading instruction code, an interrupt request is not generated. Thus, the address that causes the bit error cannot be known. <ECC test function> The following two modes can be selected by the ECC test mode register (ECCTMDR). Normal operating mode Test mode (bit error correction function test) The ECC test mode register should be accessed after the protection by the ECC test protect register (ECCTPR) is cancelled. Inverting the bit may significantly affect operation of the stack. The bit must thus only be inverted at times such as power-on so that it has no effect on the application. For data read from the RAM, the existence of a bit error is detected in the 8-bit read data, 4-bit ECC code, and 1-bit parity bit. If a bit error exists, an interrupt request is output and the address of the bit error is stored in the register. If the bit error is 1 bit, the data is corrected. (a) Normal operating mode For data write, a 4-bit ECC code is generated using 8-bit write data, and a 1-bit parity bit is generated using the write data and the ECC code. The generated data is written to the RAM as 13-bit data. For data read, the existence of a bit error is detected in the 8-bit read data, 4-bit ECC code, and 1-bit parity bit. If the bit error is 1 bit, the data is corrected and then read. (b) Test mode (bit error correction function test) For data write, an ECC code is generated using write data, and a parity bit is generated using the write data and the ECC code. A given bit value of the 13-bit write data is inverted by the write data inversion register (ECCDWRVR), and the data is written to the RAM. For data read, the existence of a bit error is detected in the read data, ECC code, and parity bit. If the bit error is 1 bit, the data is corrected and then read. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1595 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS 27.3.4 CPU stack pointer monitor function The CPU stack pointer monitor is used to detect overflows and underflows of the stack pointer and to generate interrupts in response. <R> Caution The CPU stack pointer monitor function is disabled during on-chip debugging. <Configuration> This function has the following functions. SP overflow/underflow detection function SP overflow/underflow interrupt output function When the SPM enable bit (SPMEN) is 1, an interrupt signal (INTSPM) is generated if the monitored stack pointer value is greater than the specified SFR value (SPOFR) or smaller than the specified SFR value (SPUFR). When the SPM enable bit (SPMEN) is 1, writing to the SPOFR and SPUFR registers is invalid. <Register setting method> Figure 27-14 shows the register setting method of this function. Figure 27-14. Register Setting Flow [Standard usage] 1. Write the initial value to the SPOFR and SPUFR registers. 2. Set the SPMEN bit in the SPMCTRL register. <Control register> Register Name SPMCTRL Description SPM control register Access Size 8 bits SPOFR SP overflow address setting register 16 bits SPUFR SP underflow address setting register 16 bits Remarks 1. If the overflow or underflow state is retained, another overflow or underflow will not be detected. After an overflow or underflow was detected, reset the stack pointer to a value within the range of monitoring. 2. If an overflow or underflow interrupt request is received, the value obtained by subtracting 4 from the current value of the stack pointer is always used for saving the interrupt. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1596 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS (1) SPM control register (SPMCTRL) Figure 27-15. Format of SPM Control Register (SPMCTRL) Address: F00D8H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SPMCTRL SPMEN - - - - - - - SPMEN Stack pointer monitor SFR write enable/disable 0 Stack pointer monitoring disabled. 1 Stack pointer monitoring enabled. Caution Writing 1 to the SPMEN bit is only valid, and writing 0 after setting SPMEN to 1 is invalid. (2) SP overflow address setting register (SPOFR) Figure 27-16. Format of SP Overflow Address Setting Register (SPOFR) Address: F00DAH After reset: FFFEH R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SPOFR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0 Stack pointer overflow address setting Stack pointer overflow address 1 Cautions 1. The lowest bit is fixed to 0. 2. If the values of bits 15 to 1 in stack pointer are greater than the specified values of bits 15 to 1 in SPOFR, an interrupt signal (INTSPM) is generated. Stack pointer > SPOFR: INTSPM interrupt signal is generated. 3. When SPMEN = 1, writing to SPOFR is invalid. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1597 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS (3) SP underflow address setting register (SPUFR) Figure 27-17. Format of SP Underflow Address Setting Register (SPUFR) Address: F00DCH After reset: 0000H R/W Symbol 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SPUFR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0 Stack pointer underflow address setting Stack pointer underflow address 1 Cautions 1. The lowest bit is fixed to 0. 2. If the values of bits 15 to 1 in stack pointer are smaller than the specified values of bits 15 to 1 in SPUFR, an interrupt signal (INTSPM) is generated. Stack pointer < SPUFR: INTSPM interrupt signal is generated. 3. When SPMEN = 1, writing to SPUFR is invalid. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1598 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS 27.3.5 Clock monitor The clock monitor samples the main system clock (fMAIN) and main system/PLL select clock (fMP) by using the low-speed on-chip oscillator. When oscillation of the main system clock stops, a reset request signal (RESCLM) is generated. When the main system/PLL select clock (fMP) stops, the clock through mode is forcibly selected and SELPLLS is cleared (but SELPLL is not). At the same time, an interrupt request signal (INTCLM) is generated. (1) Configuration Figure 27-18 shows a block diagram of the clock monitor. Figure 27-18. Block Diagram of Clock Monitor Main system clock (fMAIN) RESCLM (internal reset signal) Main system/PLL select clock (fMP) INTCLM (internal interrupt signal) Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIL) CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK) selection CSS System clock control register (CKC) Enabling/ disabling CLKMB Option byte (000C1H) Table 27-1. Operating State of Clock Monitor fCLK = fMP/2 N Operating State of Clock Monitor State of Clock Monitor fCLK = fSUB or fIL Stopped STOP mode Stopped SNOOZE mode Stopped Oscillation stabilization time after setting of the MCM0 Stopped bit CLKMB = 1 Stopped CLKMB = 0 Operating R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1599 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS (2) Starting and stopping of operation Bit 4 (CLKMB) of the option byte (000C1H) should be set to 0 to enable operation of the clock monitor. After the oscillation of the low-speed on-chip oscillator is set, the clock monitor starts operation. The clock monitor automatically stops operating under the following conditions. In STOP mode In SNOOZE mode During counting of the oscillation stabilization time after STOP mode was released When the CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency (fCLK) is equal to the subsystem clock (fSUB) or low-speed onchip oscillator clock (fIL) When the sampling clock is stopped (low-speed on-chip oscillator is stopped) When bit 4 (CLKMB) of the option byte (000C1H) is 1 (3) Cautions for use When entering the STOP mode by stopping the PLL clock during the operation of the clock monitor, set bit 0 (PLLON) in the PLL control register (PLLCTL) before executing the STOP instruction. 27.3.6 RAM guard function This RAM guard function is used to protect data in the specified memory space. If the RAM guard function is specified, writing to the specified RAM space is disabled, but reading from the space can be carried out as usual. The area used as the stack must not be a target of the RAM guard function. <Control register> (1) Invalid memory access detection control register (IAWCTL) This register is used to control the detection of invalid memory access and RAM/SFR guard function. GRAM1 and GRAM0 bits are used in RAM guard function. The IAWCTL register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 27-19. Format of Invalid Memory Access Detection Control Register (IAWCTL) Address: F0078H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IAWCTL IAWEN 0 GRAM1 GRAM0 0 GPORT GINT GCSC GRAM1 GRAM0 0 0 Disabled. RAM can be written to. 0 1 The 128 bytes starting at the lower RAM address 1 0 The 256 bytes starting at the lower RAM address 1 1 The 512 bytes starting at the lower RAM address Note RAM guard space Note Do not set the RAM guard space to an area exceeding the size of the RAM of the product. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1600 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS 27.3.7 SFR guard function This SFR guard function is used to protect data in the control registers used by the port function, interrupt function, clock control function, and voltage detector. If the SFR guard function is specified, writing to the specified SFRs is disabled, but reading from the SFRs can be carried out as usual. <Control register> (1) Invalid memory access detection control register (IAWCTL) This register is used to control the detection of invalid memory access and RAM/SFR guard function. GPORT, GINT and GCSC bits are used in SFR guard function. The IAWCTL register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 27-20. Format of Invalid Memory Access Detection Control Register (IAWCTL) Address: F0078H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IAWCTL IAWEN 0 GRAM1 GRAM0 0 GPORT GINT GCSC GPORT Control registers of port function guard 0 Disabled. Control registers of port function can be read or written to. 1 Enabled. Writing to control registers of port function is disabled. Reading is enabled. [Guarded SFR] PMxx, PUxx, PIMxx, POMxx, PMCxx, PITHLxx, ADPC, PIOR Note GINT Registers of interrupt function guard 0 Disabled. Registers of interrupt function can be read or written to. 1 Enabled. Writing to registers of interrupt function is disabled. Reading is enabled. [Guarded SFR] IFxx, MKxx, PRxx, EGPx, EGNx GCSC 0 1 Control registers of clock control function and voltage detector guard Disabled. Control registers of clock control function and voltage detector can be read or written to. Enabled. Writing to control registers of clock control function and voltage detector is disabled. Reading is enabled. [Guarded SFR] CMC, CSC, OSTS, CKC, PERx, OSMC, LVIM, LVIS, CANCKSEL, LINCKSEL, CKSEL, PLLCTL, MDIV, RTCCL, POCRES, STPSTC <R> Note Pxx (Port register) is not guarded. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1601 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS 27.3.8 Invalid memory access detection function The IEC60730 standard mandates checking that the CPU and interrupts are operating correctly. The illegal memory access detection function triggers a reset if a memory space specified as access-prohibited is accessed. The illegal memory access detection function applies to the areas indicated by NG in Figure 27-21. Figure 27-21. Invalid access detection area Possibility access Read Write Fetching instructions (execute) FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH NG General-purpose register 32 bytes OK RAM Note 1 OK yyyyyH Mirror OK NG Data flash memory NG F1000H F0FFFH Reserved OK F0800H F07FFH OK Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 Kbytes NG F0000H EFFFFH OK EF000H EEFFFH Reserved NG NG NG Note 1 xxxxxH Code flash memory Note 1 OK OK 00000H (Notes are listed on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1602 RL78/F13, F14 Notes 1. CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS Code flash memory and RAM address of each product are as follows. RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) ROM size Code flash memory (00000H to xxxxxH) RAM size RAM(yyyyyH to FFEFFH) 16 Kbytes 16384 8 bits (00000H to 03FFFH) Note 2 1 Kbyte 1024 8 bits (FFB00H to FFEFFH) 32 Kbytes 32768 8 bits (00000H to 07FFFH) Note 2 2 Kbytes 2048 8 bits (FF700H to FFEFFH) 48 Kbytes 49152 8 bits (00000H to 0BFFFH) Note 2 3 Kbytes 3072 8 bits (FF300H to FFEFFH) 64 Kbytes 65536 8 bits (00000H to 0FFFFH) 4 Kbytes 4096 8 bits (FEF00H to FFEFFH) 96 Kbytes 98304 8 bits (00000H to 17FFFH) Note 3 6 Kbytes 6144 8 bits (FE700H to FFEFFH) 128 Kbytes 131072 8 bits (00000H to 1FFFFH) 8 Kbytes 8192 8 bits (FDF00H to FFEFFH) RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) ROM size Code flash memory (00000H to xxxxxH) RAM size RAM (yyyyyH-FFEFFH) 32 Kbytes 32768 8 bits (00000H to 07FFFH) Note 2 2 Kbytes 2048 8 bits (FF700H to FFEFFH) 48 Kbytes 49152 8 bits (00000H to 0BFFFH) 3 Kbytes 3072 8 bits (FF300H to FFEFFH) 64 Kbytes 65536 8 bits (00000H to 0FFFFH) 4 Kbytes 4096 8 bits (FEF00H to FFEFFH) 96 Kbytes 98304 8 bits (00000H to 17FFFH) 6 Kbytes 6144 8 bits (FE700H to FFEFFH) 128 Kbytes 131072 8 bits (00000H to 1FFFFH) 8 Kbytes 8192 8 bits (FDF00H to FFEFFH) Note 2 Note 3 RL78/F14 ROM size Code flash memory (00000H to xxxxxH) 48 Kbytes 49152 8 bits (00000H to 0BFFFH) 64 Kbytes 65536 8 bits (00000H to 0FFFFH) Note 2 RAM size RAM (yyyyyH to FFEFFH) 4 Kbytes 4096 8 bits (FEF00H to FFEFFH) 6 Kbytes 6144 8 bits (FE700H to FFEFFH) 96 Kbytes 98304 8 bits (00000H to 17FFFH) 8 Kbytes 8192 8 bits (FDF00H to FFEFFH) 128 Kbytes 131072 8 bits (00000H to 1FFFFH) 10 Kbytes 10240 8 bits (FD700H to FFEFFH) 192 Kbytes 196608 8 bits (00000H to 2FFFFH) 16 Kbytes 16384 8 bits (FBF00H to FFEFFH) 256 Kbytes 262144 8 bits (00000H to 3FFFFH) 20 Kbytes 20480 8 bits (FAF00H to FFEFFH) 2. Note 3 Fetching of an instruction (for execution) by illegal access to a location in the area from xxxxxH to 0FFFFH leads to the generation of a reset due to the execution of an illegal instruction rather than being handled as illegal memory access. 3. Fetching of an instruction (for execution) by illegal access to a location in the area from xxxxxH to 1FFFFH leads to the generation of a reset due to the execution of an illegal instruction rather than being handled as illegal memory access. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1603 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS <Control register> Invalid memory access detection control register (IAWCTL) This register is used to control the detection of invalid memory access and RAM/SFR guard function. IAWEN bit is used in invalid memory access detection function. The IAWCTL register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 27-22. Format of Invalid Memory Access Detection Control Register (IAWCTL) Address: F0078H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IAWCTL IAWEN 0 GRAM1 GRAM0 0 GPORT GINT GCSC IAWEN Note Control of invalid memory access detection 0 Disable the detection of invalid memory access. 1 Enable the detection of invalid memory access. Remark By specifying WDTON = 1 for the option byte, the invalid memory access function is always enabled regardless of the setting for the IAWEN bit. (For details, see CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE.) Note Only writing 1 to the IAWEN bit is valid, and writing 0 after setting the IAWEN bit to 1 is invalid. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1604 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS 27.3.9 Frequency detection function The frequency detection function can detect whether the clock is operating on an abnormal frequency by comparing the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, external X1 oscillation clock, or PLL clock with the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (15 kHz). XT1 XT2 XT1 oscillator (fSUB) TI01 Low-speed on-chip oscillator (15 kHz) fIL fSL Selector X1 oscillator (fMX) PLL Selector X1 X2 fMP fMAIN Selector High-speed on-chip oscillator (fIH) Selector Figure 27-23. Configuration of Frequency Detection Function fCLK Timer array unit 0 (TAU0) Clock monitor <Operational overview> Whether the clock frequency is correct or not can be judged by measuring the pulse width under the following conditions: The high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH), external X1 oscillation clock (fMX), or PLL clock (fPLL) is selected as the CPU/peripheral hardware clock (fCLK). The low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIL: 15 kHz) is selected as the timer input for channel 1 of timer array unit 0 (TAU0). If pulse width measurement results in an abnormal value, it can be concluded that the clock frequency is abnormal. For how to execute pulse width measurement, see 6.7.4 Operation as input pulse interval measurement. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1605 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS <Control register> Timer input select register 0 (TIS0) This register is used to select the timer input of channel 1. By selecting the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock for the timer input, its pulse width can be measured to determine whether the proportional relationship between the low-speed on-chip oscillator clock and the timer operation clock is correct. The TIS0 register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 27-24. Format of Timer Input Select Register 0 (TIS0) Address: F0074H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TIS0 TIS07 Note 1 TIS06 Note 1 0 TIS04 Note 2 0 TIS02 TIS01 TIS00 TIS07 Note 1 Selection of timer input used with channel 3 of timer array unit 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI03) 1 Event input signal from ELC Note 3 TIS06 Note 1 Selection of timer input used with channel 2 of timer array unit 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI02) 1 Event input signal from ELC Note 3 TIS04 Note 2 Selection of timer input used with channel 0 of timer array unit 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI00) 1 Event input signal from ELC Note 3 TIS02 TIS01 TIS00 0 0 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI01) 0 0 1 Event input signal from ELC Note 3 0 1 0 Input signal of timer input pin (TI01) 0 1 1 1 0 0 Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIL) 1 0 1 Sub/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock (fSL) Other than above Notes Selection of timer input used with channel 1 of timer array unit 0 Setting prohibited 1. Provided only in products of group E. When writing data to the timer input select register 0 (TIS0) of other products, always write 0. 2. Provided only in products of groups D and E. When writing data to the timer input select register 0 (TIS0) of other products, always write 0. 3. Provided only in products of groups D and E. Do not set a value for any other products. (Cautions are provided on the next page.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1606 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS Cautions 1. When selecting an event input signal from the ELC using timer input select register 0 (TIS0), select fCLK using timer clock select register 0 (TPS0). 2. Do not change the select bit of the timer input while inputting data to the TImn pin (m = 0, 1; n = 0 to 7). 3. Each of the high-level and low-level widths of the timer input to be selected should be (1/fMCK + 10 ns) or more. So, the TIS02 bit cannot be set to 1 when fSL is selected as fCLK (the CSS bit in the CKC register is set to 1). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1607 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS 27.3.10 A/D test function The A/D test function is used to check whether the A/D converter is operating normally by executing A/D conversions of an internal voltage of 0 V, the AVREF voltage, and the internal reference voltage (1.45 V). The below procedure can be used to confirm selection of the analog multiplexer and that wiring is not disconnected. <1> Perform A/D conversion of the voltage on the ANIx pin (result of conversion 1). <2> Select AVREFM with the ADTES register, perform A/D conversion, and set the potential difference between the two terminals of the sampling capacitor of the A/D converter to 0 V. <3> Perform A/D conversion of the voltage on the ANIx pin (result of conversion 2). <4> Select AVREFP with the ADTES register, perform A/D conversion, and set the potential difference between the two terminals of the sampling capacitor of the A/D converter to AVREF. <5> Perform A/D conversion of the voltage on the ANIx pin (result of conversion 3). <6> Confirm that result of conversion 1 = result of conversion 2 = result of conversion 3. The above procedure can be used to confirm selection of the analog multiplexer and that wiring is not disconnected. Remarks 1. When the analog input voltage varies during conversion in steps <1> to <5>, use a different method to check the analog multiplexer. 2. The result of conversion will include error. Therefore, take the error into consideration when comparing the results of conversion. Figure 27-25. Configuration of A/D Test Function VDD ANI0/AVREFP + side reference voltage source (AVREF+) ANI1/AVREFM ANIx ANIx A/D convertor Temperature sensor - side reference voltage source (AVREF-) Internal reference voltage (1.45 V) VSS R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1608 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS <Control register> (1) A/D test register (ADTES) This register is used to select the A/D converter's positive reference voltage AVREFP, the A/D converter's negative reference voltage AVREFM, or the analog input channel (ANIxx) as the target of A/D conversion. When using the A/D test function, specify the following settings: Select AVREFM as the target of A/D conversion when converting the internal 0 V. Select AVREFP as the target of A/D conversion when converting AVREF. The ADTES register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 27-26. Format of A/D Test Register (ADTES) Address: F0013H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADTES 0 0 0 0 0 0 ADTES1 ADTES0 ADTES1 ADTES0 0 0 A/D conversion target ANIxx/temperature sensor output/ internal reference voltage output (1.45 V) (This is specified using the analog input channel specification register (ADS).) 1 0 AVREFM 1 1 AVREFP Other than the above R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Setting prohibited 1609 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS (2) Analog input channel specification register (ADS) This register specifies the input channel of the analog voltage to be A/D converted. The ADS register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H. Figure 27-27. Format of Analog Input Channel Specification Register (ADS) (1/2) Address: FFF31H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADS ADISS 0 0 ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Select mode (ADMD = 0) ADISS ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Analog input channel ANI0 Input source P33/AVREFP/ANI0 0 0 0 0 0 1 ANI1 P34/AVREFM/ANI1 0 0 0 0 1 0 ANI2 P80/ANI2/ANO0 0 0 0 0 1 1 ANI3 P81/ANI3/IVCMP00 0 0 0 1 0 0 ANI4 P82/ANI4/IVCMP01 0 0 0 1 0 1 ANI5 P83/ANI5/IVCMP02 0 0 0 1 1 0 ANI6 P84/ANI6/IVCMP03 0 0 0 1 1 1 ANI7 P85/ANI7/IVREF0 0 0 1 0 0 0 ANI8 P86/ANI8 0 0 1 0 0 1 ANI9 P87/ANI9 0 0 1 0 1 0 ANI10 P90/ANI10 0 0 1 0 1 1 ANI11 P91/ANI11 0 0 1 1 0 0 ANI12 P92/ANI12 0 0 1 1 0 1 ANI13 P93/ANI13 0 0 1 1 1 0 ANI14 P94/ANI14 0 0 1 1 1 1 ANI15 P95/ANI15 0 1 0 0 0 0 ANI16 P96/ANI16 Note1 0 1 0 0 0 1 ANI17 P97/ANI17 Note2 0 1 0 0 1 0 ANI18 P100/ANI18 0 1 0 0 1 1 ANI19 P101/ANI19 0 1 0 1 0 0 ANI20 P102/ANI20 0 1 0 1 0 1 ANI21 P103/ANI21 0 1 0 1 1 0 ANI22 P104/ANI22 0 1 0 1 1 1 ANI23 P105/ANI23 0 1 1 0 0 0 ANI24 P125/ANI24 0 1 1 0 0 1 ANI25 P120/ANI25 0 1 1 0 1 0 ANI26 P96/ANI26 Note3, P70/ANI26 Note4 0 1 1 0 1 1 ANI27 P97/ANI27 Note5, P71/ANI27 Note6 0 1 1 1 0 0 ANI28 P72/ANI28 0 1 1 1 0 1 ANI29 P73/ANI29 0 1 1 1 1 0 ANI30 P74/ANI30 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting prohibited 1 0 0 0 0 0 - Temperature sensor output 1 0 0 0 0 1 - Internal reference voltage output (1.45 V) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1610 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS (Notes are listed on the next page.) Notes 1. RL78/F14 products with 64 or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F14 products with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory. 2. RL78/F14 products with 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F14 products with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory. 3. RL78/F14 products with 64 or 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory, RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 64 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory. 4. RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F14 products with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory. 5. RL78/F14 products with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory, RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) or RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory. 6. RL78/F14 products with 48 or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory, or RL78/F14 products with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1611 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS Figure 27-27. Format of Analog Input Channel Specification Register (ADS) (2/2) Address: FFF31H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADS ADISS 0 0 ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Scan mode (ADMD = 1) ADISS ADS4 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Analog input channel Scan 0 Scan 1 Scan 2 Scan 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 ANI0 ANI1 ANI2 ANI3 0 0 0 0 0 1 ANI1 ANI2 ANI3 ANI4 0 0 0 0 1 0 ANI2 ANI3 ANI4 ANI5 0 0 0 0 1 1 ANI3 ANI4 ANI5 ANI6 0 0 0 1 0 0 ANI4 ANI5 ANI6 ANI7 0 0 0 1 0 1 ANI5 ANI6 ANI7 ANI8 0 0 0 1 1 0 ANI6 ANI7 ANI8 ANI9 0 0 0 1 1 1 ANI7 ANI8 ANI9 ANI10 0 0 1 0 0 0 ANI8 ANI9 ANI10 ANI11 0 0 1 0 0 1 ANI9 ANI10 ANI11 ANI12 0 0 1 0 1 0 ANI10 ANI11 ANI12 ANI13 0 0 1 0 1 1 ANI11 ANI12 ANI13 ANI14 0 0 1 1 0 0 ANI12 ANI13 ANI14 ANI15 0 1 0 0 0 0 ANI16 ANI17 ANI18 ANI19 0 1 0 0 0 1 ANI17 ANI18 ANI19 ANI20 0 1 0 0 1 0 ANI18 ANI19 ANI20 ANI21 0 1 0 0 1 1 ANI19 ANI20 ANI21 ANI22 0 1 0 1 0 0 ANI20 ANI21 ANI22 ANI23 Other than the above Setting prohibited Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 to 0. 2. In port mode registers 3, 7 to 10, and 12 (PM3, PM7 to PM10, PM12), set the ADPC and PMCxx registers to the input mode for pins to be set as analog inputs. 3. In the ADS register, do not select a pin which is set as a digital I/O pin in the A/D port configuration register (ADPC). 4. In the ADS register, do not select a pin which is set as a digital I/O pin in the port mode control register 7, 9, 12 (PMC7, PMC9, PMC12) 5. Only rewrite the value of the ADISS bit while A/D voltage comparator operation is stopped (which is indicated by the ADCE bit of A/D converter mode register 0 (ADM0) being 0). 6. If using AVREFP as the + side reference voltage source of the A/D converter, do not select ANI0 as an A/D conversion channel. 7. If using AVREFM as the - side reference voltage source of the A/D converter, do not select ANI1 as an A/D conversion channel. 8. If ADISS is set to 1, the internal reference voltage (1.45 V) cannot be used for the + side reference voltage source. 9. When the CPU enters the STOP mode or HALT mode while being driven by the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator select clock, do not set the ADISS bit to 1. Setting ADISS to 1 increases the value given in 34.3.2 Supply Current Characteristics or 35.3.2 Supply Current Characteristics. 10. Ignore the result of conversion if the corresponding ANI pin is not present. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1612 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS 27.3.11 Digital output signal level detection function for I/O ports By using the digital output signal level detection function for I/O ports, the digital output level of the pin can be read when the port is set to output mode (the PMmn bit in the port mode register (PMm) is 0). This function allows the output level of the pin to be read even when the PMnm (I/O mode) bit is set to output mode. As a result, the CPU can determine the current output level is a high or low level. For details on the registers to control this function, see CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS. <Control register> (1) Port mode select register (PMS) This register is used to select the output level from output latch level or pin output level when the port is output mode in which PMm bit of port mode register (PMm) is 0. This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H. Figure 27-28. Format of Port Mode Select Register (PMS) Address: F0077H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PMS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PMS0 PMS0 Method for selecting output level to be read when port is output mode (PMmn = 0) 0 Pmn register value is read. 1 Output level of the pin is read. Remark m = 0, 1, 3 to 10, 12 to 15 n = 0 to 7 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1613 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 28 REGULATOR CHAPTER 28 REGULATOR 28.1 Regulator Overview The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 contain a circuit for operating the device with a constant voltage. At this time, in order to stabilize the regulator output voltage, connect the REGC pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1 F). Also, use a capacitor with good characteristics, since it is used to stabilize internal voltage. REGC VSS Caution Keep the wiring length as short as possible for the broken-line part in the above figure. For the regulator output voltage, see Table 28-1. Table 28-1. Regulator Output Voltage Conditions Mode High-speed main mode Output Voltage 1.86 V Condition In STOP mode When the high-speed system clock (fMX), the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH), and PLL clock (fPLL) are stopped during CPU operation with the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator clock select clock (fSL) When the high-speed system clock (fMX), the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH), and PLL clock (fPLL) are stopped during the HALT mode when the CPU operation with the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator clock select clock (fSL) has been set 2.1 V Other than above (include during OCD mode) Note Note When it shifts to the subsystem/low-speed on-chip oscillator clock select clock operation or STOP mode during the on-chip debugging, the regulator output voltage is kept at 2.1 V (not decline to 1.86 V). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1614 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE 29.1 Functions of Option Bytes Addresses 000C0H to 000C3H of the flash memory of the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 form an option byte area. Option bytes consist of user option byte (000C0H to 000C2H) and on-chip debug option byte (000C3H). Upon power application or resetting and starting, an option byte is automatically referenced and a specified function is set. When using the product, be sure to set the following functions by using the option bytes. To use the boot swap operation during self programming, 000C0H to 000C3H are replaced by 020C0H to 020C3H. Therefore, set the same values as 000C0H to 000C3H to 020C0H to 020C3H. 29.1.1 User option byte (000C0H to 000C2H/020C0H to 020C2H) (1) 000C0H/020C0H Operation of watchdog timer Operation is stopped or enabled in the HALT, STOP, or SNOOZE mode. Setting of interval time of watchdog timer Operation of watchdog timer Operation is stopped or enabled. Setting of window open period of watchdog timer Setting of interval interrupt of watchdog timer Used or not used Caution Set the same value as 000C0H to 020C0H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C0H is replaced by 020C0H. (2) 000C1H/020C1H Setting of LVD operation mode Interrupt & reset mode Reset mode Interrupt mode Setting of LVD detection level (VLVDH, VLVDL, VLVD) Operation of clock monitor Operation is stopped or enabled. Caution Set the same value as 000C1H to 020C1H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C1H is replaced by 020C1H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1615 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE (3) 000C2H/020C2H Setting of RESOUTB output function Setting of the frequency of the high-speed on-chip oscillator Select from 1 MHz, 4 MHz, 8 MHz, 12 MHz, 16 MHz, 24 MHz, 32 MHz, 48 MHz, and 64 MHz. Caution Set the same value as 000C2H to 020C2H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C2H is replaced by 020C2H. 29.1.2 On-chip debug option byte (000C3H/ 020C3H) Control of on-chip debug operation On-chip debug operation is disabled or enabled. Control of hot plug-in Hot plug-in operation is disabled or enabled. Handling of data of flash memory in case of failure in on-chip debug security ID authentication Data of flash memory is erased or not erased in case of failure in on-chip debug security ID authentication. Caution Set the same value as 000C3H to 020C3H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C3H is replaced by 020C3H. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1616 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE 29.2 Format of User Option Byte The format of user option byte is shown below. Figure 29-1. Format of User Option Byte (000C0H/020C0H) Address: 000C0H/020C0HNote 1 After reset: (user setting value Note 2) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WDTINT WINDOW1 WINDOW0 WDTON WDCS2 WDCS1 WDCS0 WDSTBYON WDTINT Use of interval interrupt of watchdog timer 0 Interval interrupt is not used. 1 Interval interrupt is generated when 75% + 1/2 fWDT of the overflow time is reached. WINDOW1 Watchdog timer window open periodNote 3 WINDOW0 0 0 Setting prohibited 0 1 50% 1 0 75% 1 1 100% WDTON Operation control of watchdog timer counter 0 Counter operation disabled (counting stopped after reset) 1 Counter operation enabled (counting started after reset) WDCS2 WDCS1 WDCS0 Watchdog timer overflow time (fWDT = 17.25 kHz (MAX.)) 0 0 0 2 /fWDT (3.71 ms) 0 0 1 27/fWDT (7.42 ms) 0 1 0 28/fWDT (14.84 ms) 0 1 1 29/fWDT (29.68 ms) 1 0 0 211/fWDT (118.72 ms) 1 0 1 213/fWDT (474.90 ms) 1 1 0 214/fWDT (949.80 ms) 1 1 1 216/fWDT (3799.19 ms) WDSTBYON Notes 1. 6 Operation control of watchdog timer counter (HALT/STOP/SNOOZE mode) 0 Counter operation stopped in HALT/STOP/SNOOZE modeNote 3 1 Counter operation enabled in HALT/STOP/SNOOZE mode Set the same value as 000C0H to 020C0H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C0H is replaced by 020C0H. 2. 3. The setting at shipment of the user option byte is FFH. The window open period is 100% when WDSTBYON = 0, regardless the value of the WINDOW1 and WINDOW0 bits. Caution The watchdog timer continues its operation during EEPROM emulation. During processing, the interrupt acknowledge time is delayed. Set the overflow time and window open period taking this delay into consideration. Remarks 1. 2. fWDT: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency By specifying WDTON = 1, the invalid memory access detection function is always enabled regardless of the setting for the IAWEN bit. (For details, see 27.3.8 Invalid memory access detection function.) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1617 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE Figure 29-2. Format of User Option Byte (000C1H/020C1H) (1/2) After reset: (user setting value Note 2) Address: 000C1H/020C1HNote 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 CLKMB LVIS1 LVIS0 LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0 LVD setting (interrupt & reset mode) Detection voltage VLVDH Option byte Setting Value VLVDL Rising edge Falling edge Falling edge 4.42 V 4.32 V 2.75 V VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 CLKMB LVIS1 LVIS0 LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0 0 0 1 Note 3 0 0 1 0 Note 3 4.62 V 4.52 V 2.75 V 0 1 0 0 0 3.32 V 3.15 V 2.75 V 0 1 1 Note 3 0 1 0 0 4.74 V 4.64 V Other than above Note 3 Setting prohibited LVD setting (reset mode) Detection voltage Option byte Setting Value VLVD VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 CLKMB LVIS1 LVIS0 LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0 2.75 V 0 1 1 Note 3 1 1 1 1 3.02 V 2.96 V 0 0 0 Note 3 0 1 3.22 V 3.15 V 0 1 1 Note 3 0 1 Note 3 Rising edge Falling edge 2.81 V 4.42 V 4.32 V 0 0 1 0 0 4.62 V 4.52 V 0 1 0 Note 3 0 0 1 0 0 4.74 V 4.64 V Other than above Notes 1. 0 1 Note 3 Setting prohibited Set the same value as 000C1H to 020C1H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C1H is replaced by 020C1H. 2. The setting at shipment of the user option byte is FFH. 3. Write the setting value of the clock monitor bit (CLKMB). Remarks 1. : Don't care 2. For details of the LVD, see 26.1 Functions of Voltage Detector. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1618 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE Figure 29-2. Format of User Option Byte (000C1H/020C1H) (2/2) After reset: (user setting value Note 2) Address: 000C1H/020C1HNote 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 CLKMB LVIS1 LVIS0 LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0 LVD setting (interrupt mode) Detection voltage Option byte Setting Value VLVD VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 CLKMB LVIS1 LVIS0 LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0 0 1 Rising edge Falling edge 2.81 V 2.75 V 0 1 1 Note 3 1 1 3.02 V 2.96 V 0 0 0 Note 3 0 1 3.22 V 3.15 V 1 Note 3 0 1 4.42 V 4.32 V 1 Note 3 0 0 4.62 V 4.52 V 0 Note 3 0 0 4.74 V 4.64 V 1 Note 3 0 0 Other than above 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 Setting prohibited LVD setting (LVD off) Detection voltage Option byte Setting Value VLVD Rising edge Falling edge Other than above VPOC2 VPOC1 VPOC0 1 CLKMB Note 3 LVIS1 LVIS0 Mode setting LVIMDS1 LVIMDS0 1 Setting prohibited Setting of clock monitor operation CLKMB Notes 1. Control of clock monitor operation 0 Operation is enabled. 1 Operation is stopped. Set the same value as 000C1H to 020C1H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C1H is replaced by 020C1H. 2. The setting at shipment of the user option byte is FFH. 3. Write the setting value of the clock monitor bit (CLKMB). Remarks 1. 2. : don't care For details of the LVD, see 26.1 Functions of Voltage Detector. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1619 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE Figure 29-3. Format of Option Byte (000C2H/020C2H) Address: 000C2H/020C2HNote 1 After reset: (user setting value Note 2) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 1 RESOUTB FRQSEL4 FRQSEL3 FRQSEL2 FRQSEL1 FRQSEL0 RESOUTB 0 RESOUTB output function Selects P130 as the RESOUT pin * The low level is output during a reset. * The high level is automatically output upon release from the reset state. * The output latch value has no effect on the output. 1 Selects P130 as a general port pin (output only) * The low level is output during a reset. * The output latch value is output upon release from the reset state. FRQSEL4 FRQSEL3 FRQSEL2 FRQSEL1 FRQSEL0 1 1 0 0 0 64 MHz 1 0 0 0 0 48 MHz 0 1 0 0 0 32 MHz 0 0 0 0 0 24 MHz 0 1 0 0 1 16 MHz 0 0 0 0 1 12 MHz 0 1 0 1 0 8 MHz 0 1 0 1 1 4 MHz 0 1 1 0 1 1 MHz Other than above Notes 1. Frequency of the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock Setting prohibited Set the same value as 000C2H to 020C2H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C2H is replaced by 020C2H. 2. The setting at shipment of the user option byte is FFH. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1620 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE 29.3 Format of On-chip Debug Option Byte The format of on-chip debug option byte is shown below. Figure 29-4. Format of On-chip Debug Option Byte (000C3H/020C3H) Address: 000C3H/020C3HNote 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OCDENSET 0 0 0 0 1 HPIEN Note 2 OCDERSD OCDENSET HPIEN Note 2 OCDERSD 0 0 0 Disables on-chip debug operation. 1 0 0 Enables on-chip debugging and disables hot plug-in operation. Control of on-chip debug operation Erases data of flash memory in case of failures in authenticating onchip debug security ID. 1 0 1 Enables on-chip debugging and disables hot plug-in operation. Does not erase data of flash memory in case of failures in authenticating on-chip debug security ID. 1 1 1 Enables on-chip debugging and hot plug-in operation. Does not erase data of flash memory in case of failures in authenticating on-chip debug security ID. Other than the above Notes 1. Setting prohibited Set the same value as 000C3H to 020C3H when the boot swap operation is used because 000C3H is replaced by 020C3H. 2. When the HPIEN bit is set to 1, the low-speed on-chip oscillator operates and cannot be stopped by the user program. The low-speed on-chip oscillator can be stopped by register setting only in standby mode. Such operation is performed because the low-speed on-chip oscillator detects hot plug-in. Caution Bits 7, 1, and 0 (OCDENSET, HPIEN, and OCDERSD) can only be specified a value. Be sure to set 00001B to bits 6 to 2. Remark The value on bits 3 and 2 will be written over when the on-chip debug function is in use and thus it will become unstable after the setting. However, be sure to set the default values (0, 1) to bits 3 and 2 at setting. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1621 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE 29.4 Setting of Option Byte The user option byte and on-chip debug option byte can be set using the assembler linker option, in addition to describing to the source. When doing so, the contents set by using the linker option take precedence, even if descriptions exist in the source, as mentioned below. A software description example of the option byte setting is shown below. OPT CSEG OPT_BYTE DB 36H ; Does not use interval interrupt of watchdog timer, ; Enables watchdog timer operation, ; Window open period of watchdog timer is 50%, ; Overflow time of watchdog timer is 29/fWDT, ; Stops watchdog timer operation during HALT/STOP/SNOOZE mode DB 22H ; Select 2.75 V for VLVDL ; Select rising edge 4.42 V, falling edge 4.32 V for VLVDH ; Select the interrupt & reset mode as the LVD operation mode ; Operation of clock monitor DB EDH ; Setting of the RESOUTB output function ; Select 1 MHz as the frequency of the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock DB 85H ; Enables on-chip debug operation, disables hot plug-in operation, does not erase flash memory data when security ID authorization fails When the boot swap function is used during self programming, 000C0H to 000C3H is switched to 020C0H to 020C3H. Describe to 020C0H to 020C3H, therefore, the same values as 000C0H to 000C3H as follows. OPT2 CSEG AT DB 020C0H 36H ; Does not use interval interrupt of watchdog timer, ; Enables watchdog timer operation, ; Window open period of watchdog timer is 50%, ; Overflow time of watchdog timer is 29/fWDT, ; Stops watchdog timer operation during HALT/STOP/SNOOZE mode DB 22H ; Select 2.75 V for VLVDL ; Select rising edge 4.42 V, falling edge 4.32 V for VLVDH ; Select the interrupt & reset mode as the LVD operation mode ; Operation of clock monitor DB EDH DB 85H ; Setting of the RESOUTB output function ; Select 1 MHz as the frequency of the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock ; Enables on-chip debug operation, disables hot plug-in operation, does not erase flash memory data when security ID authorization fails Caution To specify the option byte by using assembly language, use OPT_BYTE as the relocation attribute name of the CSEG pseudo instruction. To specify the option byte to 020C0H to 020C3H in order to use the boot swap function, use the relocation attribute AT to specify an absolute address. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1622 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 incorporate the flash memory to which a program can be written, erased, and overwritten. The flash memory includes the "code flash memory", in which programs can be executed, and the "data flash memory", an area for storing data. FFFFFH Special function register (SFR) 256 bytes FFF00H FFEFFH FFEE0H FFEDFH General-purpose register 32 bytes RAM 1 to 20 KB Mirror F1000H F0FFFH Data flash memory 4/8 KB Reserved F0800H F07FFH Special function register (2nd SFR) 2 KB F0000H EFFFFH Reserved Code flash memory 16 to 256 KB 00000H R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1623 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY The methods for programming the flash memory are shown below. The code flash memory can be rewritten to through serial programming using a flash memory programmer or external device (UART communication) or through self-programming. Serial programming using flash memory programmer Data can be written to the flash memory on-board or off-board, by using a dedicated flash memory programmer. For details, see 30.4 Serial Programming Method. Serial programming using external device (UART communication) Data can be written to the flash memory on-board through UART communication with an external device (a microcontroller or ASIC). For details, see 30.2 Serial Programming Using External Device (that Incorporates UART). Self-programming The user application can execute self-programming of the code flash memory by using the flash self-programming library. For details, see 30.6 Self-Programming. The data flash memory can be rewritten to by using the data flash library during user program execution (background operation). For details about accessing or writing to the data flash memory, see 30.8 Data Flash. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1624 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.1 Serial Programming Using Flash Memory Programmer The following dedicated flash memory programmer can be used to write data to the internal flash memory of the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14. PG-FP5, FL-PR5 E1 on-chip debugging emulator Data can be written to the flash memory on-board or off-board, by using a dedicated flash memory programmer. (1) On-board programming The contents of the flash memory can be rewritten after the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 has been mounted on the target system. The connectors that connect the dedicated flash memory programmer must be mounted on the target system. (2) Off-board programming Data can be written to the flash memory with a dedicated program adapter (FA series) before the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 is mounted on the target system. Remark FL-PR5 and FA series are products of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1625 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY Table 30-1. Wiring Between the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 and Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer Pin Configuration of Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer Signal Name I/O Pin Name Pin Function Pin No. 20-pin 30-pin 32-pin 48-pin SSOP SSOP VQFN (5x5) LQFP (7x7), PG-FP5, E1 on-chip FL-PR5 debugging emulator TOOL0 SI/RxD RESET /RESET I/O Transmit/receive signal I/O Transmit/receive signal Output Reset signal VQFN (7x7) TOOL0/ P40 3 8 3 3 RESET 4 9 4 4 VDD voltage VDD generation/ power monitoring 10 15 10 12 Ground 9 14 9 11 Output VDD I/O GND VSS EVSS REGC 8 13 8 10 10 15 10 12 Note EMVDD Driving power for TOOL0 pin Pin Configuration of Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer Signal Name VDD EVDD Pin Name Pin No. 64-pin 80-pin 100-pin LQFP (10x10) LQFP (12x12) LQFP (14x14) TOOL0/ P40 5 9 12 RESET 6 10 13 VDD voltage VDD generation/ power monitoring 15 19 22 Ground I/O Pin Function PG-FP5, E1 on-chip FL-PR5 debugging emulator TOOL0 SI/RxD RESET /RESET VDD I/O Transmit/receive signal I/O Transmit/receive signal Output Reset signal Output I/O GND VSS 13 17 20 EVSS 14 18 21, 43 REGC 12 16 19 Note EMVDD Note Driving power for TOOL0 pin VDD EVDD 16 20 23, 53 Connect REGC pin to ground via a capacitor (0.47 to 1 F). Remark Pins that are not indicated in the above table can be left open when using the flash memory programmer for flash programming. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1626 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.1.1 Programming Environment The environment required for writing a program to the flash memory of the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 is illustrated below. Figure 30-1. Environment for Writing Program to Flash Memory RS-232C PG-FP5, FL-PR5 E1 VDD EVDD0 , EVDD1 Note 2 Note 1 SS0 VSS, EV USB Note 2 , EVSS1 RESET Dedicated flash memory programmer Host machine Note 1 TOOL0 (dedicated single-line UART) RL78/F13, RL78/F14 Notes 1. 64, 80, 100-pin products only. 2. 100-pin products only. A host machine that controls the dedicated flash memory programmer is necessary. To interface between the dedicated flash memory programmer and the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14, the TOOL0 pin is used for manipulation such as writing and erasing via a dedicated single-line UART. 30.1.2 Communication Mode Communication between the dedicated flash memory programmer and the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 is established by serial communication using the TOOL0 pin via a dedicated single-line UART of the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14. Transfer rate: 1 M, 500 k, 250 k, 115.2 kbps Figure 30-2. Communication with Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer VDD PG-FP5, FL-PR5 E1 Dedicated flash memory programmer VDD EMVDD VDD/EVDD0Note 3, EVDD1Note 4 GND VSS/EVSS0Note 3, EVSS1Note 4 /REGCNote 5 RESETNote 1, /RESETNote 2 TOOL0Note 1 SI/RxDNote 2 RESET TOOL0 RL78/F13, RL78/F14 Notes 1. When using E1 on-chip debugging emulator. 2. When using PG-FP5 or FL-PR5. 3. 64, 80, 100-pin products only. 4. 100-pin products only. 5. Connect REGC pin to ground via a capacitor (0.47 to 1 F). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1627 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY The dedicated flash memory programmer generates the following signals for the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14. See the manual of PG-FP5, FL-PR5, or E1 on-chip debugging emulator for details. Table 30-2. Pin Connection RL78/F13 and Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer RL78/F14 Signal Name PG-FP5, FL-PR5 I/O Pin Function Pin Name E1 on-chip debugging emulator VDD I/O VDD voltage generation/power monitoring GND Ground VDD VSS, EVSS0 Note 1, EVSS0 Note 2, EMVDD Driving power for TOOL0 pin REGC Note 3 VDD, EVDD0 Note 1, EVDD1 Note 2 /RESET Output Reset signal RESET I/O Transmit/receive signal TOOL0 I/O Transmit/receive signal RESET Output TOOL0 SI/RxD Notes 1. 64, 80, 100-pin products only. 2. 100-pin products only. 3. Connect REGC pin to ground via a capacitor (0.47 to 1 F). Caution The connection destination pins differ depending on the product. For details, see Table 30-1. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1628 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.2 Serial Programming Using External Device (that Incorporates UART) On-board data writing to the internal flash memory is possible by using the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 and an external device (a microcontroller or ASIC) connected to a UART. On the development of flash memory programmer by user, refer to the RL78 Microcontrollers (RL78 Protocol A) Programmer Edition Application Note (R01AN0815). 30.2.1 Programming Environment The environment required for writing a program to the flash memory of the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 is illustrated below. Figure 30-3. Environment for Writing Program to Flash Memory VDD, EVDD0Note 1, EVDD1Note 2 VSS, EVSS0Note 1, EVSS1Note 2 RESET External device (such as microcontroller and ASIC) UART (TOOLTxD, TOOLRxD) RL78/F13, RL78/F14 TOOL0 Notes 1. 64, 80, 100-pin products only. 2. 100-pin products only. Processing to write data to or delete data from the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 by using an external device is performed onboard. Off-board writing is not possible. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1629 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.2.2 Communication Mode Communication between the external device and the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 is established by serial communication using the TOOLTxD and TOOLRxD pins via the dedicated UART of the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14. Transfer rate: 1 M, 500 k, 250 k, 115.2 kbps Figure 30-4. Communication with External Device VDD GND /RESET External device (such as microcontroller and ASIC) Notes 1. VDD/ EVDD0Note 1, EVDD1Note 2 VSS/EVSS0Note 1, EVSS1Note 2 /REGCNote 3 RESET RxD TOOLTxD TxD TOOLRxD PORT RL78/F13, RL78/F14 TOOL0 64, 80, 100-pin products only. 2. 100-pin products only. 3. Connect REGC pin to ground via a capacitor (0.47 to 1 F). The external device generates the following signals for the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14. Table 30-3. Pin Connection External Device Signal Name VDD I/O I/O GND RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 Pin Function Pin Name VDD voltage generation/power monitoring VDD, EVDD0 Note 1, Ground VSS, EVSS0 Note 1, EVSS1 Note 2, REGC Note 3 RESETOUT Output Reset signal output RESET RxD Input Receive signal TOOLTxD TxD Output Transmit signal TOOLRxD PORT Output Mode signal TOOL0 Notes 1. EVDD1 Note 2 64, 80, 100-pin products only. 2. 100-pin products only. 3. Connect REGC pin to ground via a capacitor (0.47 to 1 F). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1630 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.3 Connection of Pins on Board To write the flash memory on-board by using the flash memory programmer, connectors that connect the dedicated flash memory programmer must be provided on the target system. First provide a function that selects the normal operation mode or flash memory programming mode on the board. When the flash memory programming mode is set, all the pins not used for programming the flash memory are in the same status as immediately after reset. Therefore, if the external device does not recognize the state immediately after reset, the pins must be handled as described below. Remark For flash programming mode, see 30.4.2 Flash memory programming mode. 30.3.1 P40/TOOL0 pin In the flash memory programming mode, connect this pin to the dedicated flash memory programmer via an external 1 k pull-up resistor. When this pin is used as the port pin, use that by the following method. When used as an input pin: Input of low-level is prohibited for 1 ms period after the pin reset is released. However, when this pin is used via pull-down resistors, use the 500 k or more resistors. When used as an output pin: When this pin is used via pull-down resistors, use the 500 k or more resistors. Remarks 1. tHD: How long to keep the TOOL0 pin at the low level from when the external and internal resets end for setting of the flash memory programming mode. 2. The SAU and IICA pins are not used for communication between the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 and the dedicated flash memory programmer, because single-line UART (TOOL0 pin) is used. 30.3.2 RESET pin Signal conflict will occur if the reset signal of the dedicated flash memory programmer and external device are connected to the RESET pin that is connected to the reset signal generator on the board. To prevent this conflict, isolate the connection with the reset signal generator. The flash memory will not be correctly programmed if the reset signal is input from the user system while the flash memory programming mode is set. Do not input any signal other than the reset signal of the dedicated flash memory programmer and external device. Figure 30-5. Signal Conflict (RESET Pin) RL78/F13, RL78/F14 Signal conflict Input pin Dedicated flash memory programmer connection pin Another device Output pin In the flash memory programming mode, a signal output by another device will conflict with the signal output by the dedicated flash memory programmer. Therefore, isolate the signal of another device. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1631 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.3.3 Port pins When the flash memory programming mode is set, all the pins not used for flash memory programming enter the same status as that immediately after reset. If external devices connected to the ports do not recognize the port status immediately after reset, the port pin must be connected to either to VDD, EVDD0 Note1, or EVDD1 Note2, or VSS, EVSS0 Note 1, or EVSS1 Note 2, via a resistor. Notes 1. 64, 80, 100-pin products only. 2. 100-pin products only. 30.3.4 REGC pin Connect the REGC pin to GND via a capacitor (0.47 to 1 F) in the same manner as during normal operation. Also, use a capacitor with good characteristics, since it is used to stabilize internal voltage. 30.3.5 X1 and X2 pins Connect X1 and X2 in the same status as in the normal operation mode. Remark In the flash memory programming mode, the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock (fIH) is used. 30.3.6 Power supply To use the supply voltage output of the flash memory programmer, connect the VDD pin to VDD of the flash memory programmer, and the VSS pin to GND of the flash memory programmer. To use the on-board supply voltage, connect in compliance with the normal operation mode. However, when writing to the flash memory by using the flash memory programmer and using the on-board supply voltage, be sure to connect the VDD and VSS pins to VDD and GND of the flash memory programmer to use the power monitor function with the flash memory programmer. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1632 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.4 Serial Programming Method 30.4.1 Serial programming procedure The following figure illustrates the procedure to manipulate the flash memory. Figure 30-6. Code Flash Memory Manipulation Procedure Start Controlling TOOL0 pin and RESET pin Flash memory programming mode is set Manipulate code flash memory End? No Yes End R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1633 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.4.2 Flash memory programming mode To rewrite the contents of the code flash memory through serial programming, specify the flash memory programming mode. To switch to the mode, set as follows. <Serial programming using the dedicated flash memory programmer> Connect the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 to the dedicated flash memory programmer. Communication from the dedicated flash memory programmer is performed to automatically switch to the flash memory programming mode. <Serial programming using an external device (UART communication)> Set the TOOL0 pin to the low level, and then cancel the reset (see Table 30-4). Then, perform steps <1> to <4> in Figure 30-7 to enter the flash memory programming mode. For details, refer to the RL78 Microcontrollers (RL78 Protocol A) Programmer Edition Application Note (R01AN0815). Table 30-4. Relationship Between TOOL0 Pin and Operation Mode After Reset Release TOOL0 Operation Mode EVDD Normal operation mode 0V Flash memory programming mode Figure 30-7. Setting of Flash Memory Programming Mode <1> <2> <3> <4> RESET 723 s + tHD processing time 00H received in TOOLRxD or TOOLTxD mode TOOL0 tSU tSUINIT <1> The low level is input to the TOOL0 pin. <2> The external reset ends (POR and LVD reset must end before the external reset ends.). <3> The TOOL0 pin is set to the high level. <4> Baud rate setting by UART reception is completed. Remark tSUINIT: The segment shows that it is necessary to finish specifying the initial communication settings within 100 ms from when the resets end. tSU: How long from when the TOOL0 pin is placed at the low level until an external reset ends tHD: How long to keep the TOOL0 pin at the low level from when the external and internal resets end (the flash firmware processing time is excluded) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1634 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY The voltage range in which to write, erase, or verify data in flash memory programming mode is shown in Table 30-5. Table 30-5. Voltages at Which Data Can Be Written, Erased, or Verified Remark Voltages at which data can be written, erased, or verified Operating frequency 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1 MHz to 32 MHz For details about communication commands, see 30.4.4 Communication commands. 30.4.3 Selecting communication mode Communications modes of the RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 are as follows. Table 30-6. Communication Modes Standard SettingNote 1 Communication Mode 1-line mode Port UART (when flash memory programmer or an external device is used) UART0 (when external device is used) Speed Note 2 115200 bps, Pins Used Frequency Multiply Rate TOOL0 TOOLTxD, 250000 bps, 500000 bps, 1 Mbps UART 115200 bps, 250000 bps, TOOLRxD 500000 bps, 1 Mbps Notes 1. 2. Selection items for Standard settings on GUI of the flash memory programmer. Because factors other than the baud rate error, such as the signal waveform slew, also affect UART communication, thoroughly evaluate the slew as well as the baud rate error. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1635 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.4.4 Communication commands The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 executes serial programming through the commands listed in Table 30-7. The signals sent from the dedicated flash memory programmer or external device to the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 are called commands, and programming functions corresponding to the commands are executed. For details, refer to the RL78 Microcontrollers (RL78 Protocol A) Programmer Edition Application Note (R01AN0815). Table 30-7. Flash Memory Control Commands Classification Verify Command Name Function Compares the contents of a specified area of the flash memory with Verify data transmitted from the programmer. Erase Block Erase Erases a specified area in the flash memory. Blank check Block Blank Check Checks if a specified block in the flash memory has been correctly erased. Write Programming Writes data to a specified area in the flash memory.Note Getting information Silicon Signature Gets information from the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 (such as the part number, flash memory configuration, and programming firmware version). Security Others Checksum Gets the checksum data for a specified area. Security Set Sets security information. Security Get Gets security information. Security Release Release setting of prohibition of writing. Reset Used to detect synchronization status of communication. Baud Rate Set Sets baud rate when UART communication mode is selected. Note Confirm that no data has been written to the write area. Because data cannot be erased after block erase is prohibited, do not write data if the data has not been erased. Product information (such as product name and firmware version) can be obtained by executing the "Silicon Signature" command. Table 30-8 lists and describes signature data. Table 30-9 shows examples of signature data. Table 30-8. Signature Data List Field name Description Number of transmit data Device code The serial number assigned to the device 3 bytes Device name Device name (ASCII code) 10 bytes Code flash memory area last address Last address of code flash memory area 3 bytes (Sent from lower address. Example. 00000H to 0FFFFH (64 KB) FFH, 1FH, 00H) Data flash memory area last address Last address of data flash memory area 3 bytes (Sent from lower address. Example. F1000H to F1FFFH (4 KB) FFH, 1FH, 0FH) Firmware version Version information of firmware for programming 3 bytes (Sent from upper address. Example. From Ver. 1.23 01H, 02H, 03H) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1636 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY Table 30-9. Example of Signature Data Field name Description Number of transmit data Data (hexadecimal) Device code RL78 protocol A 3 bytes 10 00 06 Device name R5F10BLE 10 bytes 52 = "R" 35 = "5" 46 = "F" 31 = "1" 30 = "0" 42 = "B" 4C = "L" 45 = "E" 20 = " " 20 = " " Code flash memory area last address Code flash memory area 3 bytes FF FF 00 3 bytes FF 1F 0F 3 bytes 01 02 03 00000H to 0FFFFH (64 KB) Data flash memory area last address Data flash memory area Firmware version Ver.1.23 F1000H to F1FFFH (4 KB) 30.5 Processing Time for Each Command when PG-FP5 Is in Use (Reference Value) The following shows the processing time for each command (reference value) when PG-FP5 is used as a dedicated flash memory programmer. Table 30-10. Processing Time for Each Command When PG-FP5 Is in Use (Reference Value) PG-FP5 Command Code Flash 16 KB Remark 32 KB 48 KB 64 KB 96 KB 128 KB 192 KB 256 KB Erase 1s 1s 1s 1.5 s 1.5 s 2s 2s 2.5 s Write 1.5 s 1.5 s 2s 2.5 s 3s 3.5 s 5s 6s Verify 1.5 s 1.5 s 2s 2s 3s 3.5 s 4.5 s 5.5 s Write after erase 1.5 s 2s 2.5 s 3s 4s 4.5 s 6.5 s 8s The command processing times (reference value) shown in the table are typical values under the following conditions. Port: TOOL0 (single-line UART) Speed: 1,000,000 bps R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1637 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.6 Self-Programming The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 support self-programming functions that can be used to rewrite the code flash memory via a user program. Because this function allows a user application to rewrite the code flash memory by using the flash selfprogramming library, it can be used to upgrade the program in the field. Cautions 1. The self-programming function cannot be used when the CPU operates with the subsystem/lowspeed on-chip oscillator select clock. 2. To prohibit an interrupt during self-programming, in the same way as in the normal operation mode, execute the flash self-programming library in the state where the IE flag is cleared (0) by the DI instruction. To enable an interrupt, clear (0) the interrupt mask flag to accept in the state where the IE flag is set (1) by the EI instruction, and then execute the flash self-programming library. 3. The high-speed on-chip oscillator should be kept operating during self-programming. If this oscillator is stopped, start the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock by setting HIOSTOP to 0. Then, after 30 s has elapsed, execute the flash self-programming library. Remarks 1. For details of the self-programming function, refer to RL78 Microcontroller Flash Self Programming Library Type01 User's Manual (R01AN0350). 2. For details of the time required to execute self programming, see the notes on use that accompany the flash self-programming library tool. Note that the self-programming function has two modes for flash memory programming mode: wide voltage mode and full-speed mode. Because RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 do not have wide voltage mode, select full-speed mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1638 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.6.1 Self-programming procedure The following figure illustrates a flow of rewriting the code flash memory by using a flash self-programming library. Figure 30-8. Flow of Self Programming (Rewriting Flash Memory) Code flash memory control start Initialize flash environment Flash shield window setting Erase Inhibit access to flash memory Write Inhibit shifting STOP mode Inhibit clock stop Verify Flash information getting Flash information setting Close flash environment End R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1639 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.6.2 Boot swap function If rewriting the boot area failed by temporary power failure or other reasons, restarting a program by resetting or overwriting is disabled due to data destruction in the boot area. The boot swap function is used to avoid this problem. Before erasing boot cluster 0Note, which is a boot program area, by self-programming, write a new boot program to boot cluster 1 in advance. When the program has been correctly written to boot cluster 1, swap this boot cluster 1 and boot cluster 0 by using the set information function of the firmware of the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14, so that boot cluster 1 is used as a boot area. After that, erase or write the original area, boot cluster 0. As a result, even if a power failure occurs while the area is being rewritten, the program is executed correctly because it is booted from boot cluster 1 to be swapped when the program is reset and started next. Note A boot cluster is an 8 KB area and boot clusters 0 and 1 are swapped by the boot swap function. Figure 30-9. Boot Swap Function XXXXXH User program Self-programming to boot cluster 1 Execution of boot swap by firmware User program User program Self-programming to boot cluster 0 User program 04000H User program New boot program (boot cluster 1) Boot program (boot cluster 0) Boot program (boot cluster 0) Boot program (boot cluster 0) New boot program (boot cluster 1) 02000H 00000H Boot Boot New user program (boot cluster 0) Boot New boot program (boot cluster 1) Boot In an example of above figure, it is as follows. Boot cluster 0: Boot program area before boot swap Boot cluster 1: Boot program area after boot swap R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1640 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY Figure 30-10. Example of Executing Boot Swapping Block number Boot cluster 1 Boot cluster 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 User program User program User program User program Boot program Boot program Boot program Boot program 02000H 00000H Erasing block 4 Erasing block 5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 User program User program User program Boot program Boot program Boot program Boot program User program User program Boot program Boot program Boot program Boot program Erasing block 6 7 User program 6 5 4 3 Boot program 2 Boot program 1 Boot program 0 Boot program Erasing block 7 7 6 5 4 3 Boot program 2 Boot program 1 Boot program 0 Boot program Booted by boot cluster 0 Writing blocks 4 to 7 7 New boot program 6 New boot program 5 New boot program 4 New boot program 3 Boot program 2 Boot program 1 Boot program 0 Boot program 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Boot swap Erasing block 4 Erasing block 5 Boot program 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Boot program Boot program Boot program 02000H New boot program New boot program New boot program New boot program 00000H Boot program Boot program Boot program New boot program New boot program New boot program New boot program Boot program Boot program New boot program New boot program New boot program New boot program Booted by boot cluster 1 Erasing block 6 Erasing block 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Boot program New boot program New boot program New boot program New boot program R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 New boot program New boot program New boot program New boot program Writing blocks 4 to 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 New user program New user program New user program New user program 02000H New boot program New boot program New boot program New boot program 00000H 1641 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.6.3 Flash shield window function The flash shield window function is provided as one of the security functions for self programming. It disables writing to and erasing areas outside the range specified as a window only during self programming. The window range can be set by specifying the start and end blocks. The window range can be set or changed during both serial programming and self-programming. Writing to and erasing areas outside the window range are disabled during self programming. During serial programming, however, areas outside the range specified as a window can be written and erased. Figure 30-11. Flash Shield Window Setting Example (Target Devices: R5F10BLE, Start Block: 04H, End Block: 06H) 0FFFFH Flash shield range Block 3EH 01C00H 01BFFH Window range Flash memory area Block 3FH : Serial programming x : Self programming Block 06H (end block) : Serial programming : Self programming Block 05H 01 000H 00FFFH Block 04H (start block) Block 03H Block 02H Flash shield range : Serial programming x : Self programming Block 01H 00 000H Block 00H Cautions 1. If the rewrite-prohibited area of the boot cluster 0 overlaps with the flash shield window range, prohibition to rewrite the boot cluster 0 takes priority. 2. The flash shield window can only be used for the code flash memory (and is not supported for the data flash memory). Table 30-11. Relationship between Flash Shield Window Function Setting/Change Methods and Commands Programming conditions Window Range Execution Commands Setting/Change Methods Self-programming Block erase Write Specify the starting and Block erasing is enabled Writing is enabled only ending blocks by the only within the window within the range of flash self programming range. window range. Specify the starting and Block erasing is enabled Writing is enabled also ending blocks on GUI of also outside the window outside the window dedicated flash memory range. range. library. Serial programming programmer, etc. Remark See 30.7 Security Settings to prohibit writing or erasing during serial programming. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1642 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.7 Security Settings The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 support security functions that prohibit rewriting the user program written to the internal flash memory, so that the program cannot be changed by an unauthorized person. The operations shown below can be performed using the Security Set command. Disabling block erase Execution of the block erase command for a specific block in the flash memory is prohibited during serial programming. However, blocks can be erased by means of self programming. Disabling write Execution of the write command for entire blocks in the code flash memory is prohibited during serial programming. However, blocks can be written by means of self programming. After the setting of prohibition of writing is specified, releasing the setting by the Security Release command is enabled by a reset. Disabling rewriting boot cluster 0 Execution of the block erase command and write command on boot cluster 0 (00000H to 1FFFH) in the code flash memory is prohibited by this setting. The block erase, write commands, and rewriting boot cluster 0 are enabled by the default setting when the flash memory is shipped. Security can be set by serial programming and self programming. Each security setting can be used in combination. Table 30-12 shows the relationship between the erase and write commands when the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 security function is enabled. Caution The security functions of the dedicated flash programmer does not support self-programming. Remark To prohibit writing and erasing during self-programming, use the flash shield window function (see 30.6.3 Flash shield window function for detail). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1643 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY Table 30-12. Relationship Between Enabling Security Function and Command (1) During serial programming Valid Security Executed Command Block Erase Write Prohibition of block erase Blocks cannot be erased. Can be performed. Note Prohibition of writing Blocks can be erased. Cannot be performed. Prohibition of rewriting boot cluster 0 Boot cluster 0 cannot be erased. Boot cluster 0 cannot be written. Note Confirm that no data has been written to the write area. Because data cannot be erased after block erase is prohibited, do not write data if the data has not been erased. (2) During self programming Valid Security Executed Command Block Erase Prohibition of block erase Write Blocks can be erased. Can be performed. Boot cluster 0 cannot be erased. Boot cluster 0 cannot be written. Prohibition of writing Prohibition of rewriting boot cluster 0 Remark To prohibit writing and erasing during self-programming, use the flash shield window function (see 30.6.3 Flash shield window function for detail). Table 30-13. Setting Security in Each Programming Mode (1) Serial programming Security Security Setting How to Disable Security Setting Prohibition of block erase Set via GUI of dedicated flash memory Cannot be disabled after set. Prohibition of writing programmer, etc. Set via GUI of dedicated flash memory programmer, etc. Prohibition of rewriting boot cluster 0 Cannot be disabled after set. Caution Releasing the setting of prohibition of writing is enabled only when the security is not set as the block erase prohibition and the boot cluster 0 rewrite prohibition with code flash memory area and data flash memory area being blanks. (2) Self programming Security Security Setting How to Disable Security Setting Prohibition of block erase Set by using flash self programming Cannot be disabled after set. Prohibition of writing library. Cannot be disabled during selfprogramming. (Set via GUI of dedicated flash memory programmer, etc. during serial programming.) Prohibition of rewriting boot cluster 0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Cannot be disabled after set. 1644 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.8 Data Flash 30.8.1 Data flash overview An overview of the data flash memory is provided below. The data flash memory can be rewritten by a user program using the data flash library. For details, refer to the RL78 Family Microcontroller Data Flash Library User's Manual. The data flash memory can also be rewritten by serial programming using a dedicated flash memory programmer or an external device. Blocks in the data flash memory can be erased in 1-KB units. The data flash memory can be accessed only in 8-bit units. The data flash memory can be directly read by CPU instructions. Instructions can be executed from the code flash memory while rewriting the data flash memory (back ground operation (BGO) is supported). Because the data flash memory is an area exclusively used for data, executing instructions from the data flash memory is prohibited. Accessing the data flash memory is prohibited while rewriting the code flash memory (during self-programming) Manipulating the DFLCTL register is prohibited while rewriting the data flash memory. Transition to the STOP status is prohibited while rewriting the data flash memory. The data flash memory can be programmed by using a Renesas library while other programs are running. Cautions 1. The data flash memory is stopped after a reset is released. To use the data flash memory, the data flash control register (DFLCTL) must be set up. 2. The high-speed on-chip oscillator must be running while rewriting the data flash memory. If this oscillator is stopped, start the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock by setting HIOSTOP to 0. Then, after 30 s has elapsed, execute the data flash library. Remark For details about rewriting the code flash memory by using a user program, see 30.6 Self-Programming. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1645 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.8.2 Register controlling data flash memory 30.8.2.1 Data flash control register (DFLCTL) This register is used to enable or disable accessing to the data flash. The DFLCTL register is set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset input sets this register to 00H. Figure 30-12. Format of Data Flash Control Register (DFLCTL) Address: F0090H After reset: 00H R/W Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0> DFLCTL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DFLEN DFLEN Data flash access control 0 Disables data flash access 1 Enables data flash access Caution Manipulating the DFLCTL register is not possible while rewriting the data flash memory. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1646 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 30 FLASH MEMORY 30.8.3 Procedure for accessing data flash memory The data flash memory is stopped after a reset is released. To access the data flash memory, initial settings must be specified as described below. After the initial settings are specified, the data flash memory can be read by CPU instructions and can be read or rewritten by using a data flash library. <1> Set 1 to bit 0 (DFLEN) of the data flash control register (DFLCTL). <2> Use a software timer to wait for the setup to finish. Setup time: 5 s <3> After the wait, the data flash memory can be accessed. Cautions 1. Accessing the data flash memory is prohibited during the setup time. 2. Transition to the STOP mode is not possible during the setup time. To enter the STOP mode during the setup time, clear DFLEN to 0 and then execute the STOP instruction. 3. The high-speed on-chip oscillator should be kept operating during data flash rewrite. If it is kept stopping, the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock should be operated (HIOSTOP = 0). The data flash library should be executed after 30 s have elapsed. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1647 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 31 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION CHAPTER 31 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION 31.1 Overview of On-chip Debug Function The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 have stronger on-chip debug functions than the conventional RL78 family microcontrollers. The following three functions are stronger. For points requiring cautions in using these functions, refer to E1/E20 Emulator User's Manual (R20UT0398). Hot plug-in Real-time RAM monitor (RRM) and dynamic memory modification (DMM) by the DTC On-chip trace 31.1.1 Hot Plug-in This function is for connecting the MCU with an emulator without stopping or resetting a user program which is in execution. This function uses RAM in some products. 31.1.2 Real-time RAM Monitor (RRM) and Dynamic Memory Modification (DMM) by DTC These functions are for accessing the MCU memory during the execution of the user program after the connection between the MCU and emulator. The CPU handles all access to memory in the conventional RL78 family microcontrollers. The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 allow access to memory without using the CPU because they have a DTC for debugging. These functions use RAM in some products. Figure 31-1 shows the configuration of RRM and DMM by the DTC. Figure 31-1. Configuration of RRM and DMM by DTC RAM Debugging communication circuit CPU DTC for debugging SFR ROM R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1648 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 31 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION 31.1.3 On-chip Trace This function is for retaining the program counter values of branch sources when branches occur. This function can retain the values of branches due to the execution of branch instructions, interrupts, and resets. This function uses RAM to retain traces in some products. The RAM area used and the number of branches retained by the on-chip trace vary with the product. Table 31-1 shows the RAM area used and the number of branches retained by on-chip trace. Table 31-1. RAM Area Used and Number of Branches Retained by On-chip Trace Series Name RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) RL78/F14 Products RAM RAM Area Used R5F10A6A, R5F10AAA, R5F10ABA, R5F10AGA 1 KB R5F10A6C, R5F10AAC, R5F10ABC, R5F10AGC, R5F10ALC 2 KB R5F10A6D, R5F10AAD, R5F10ABD, R5F10AGD, R5F10ALD 3 KB R5F10A6E, R5F10AAE, R5F10ABE, R5F10AGE, R5F10ALE 4 KB R5F10AME 4 KB R5F10AGF, R5F10ALF, R5F10AMF 6 KB R5F10AGG, R5F10ALG, R5F10AMG 8 KB 0FE500H-0FE52FH (Hot plug-in/RRM and DDM by DTC) 0FE300H-0FE4FFH (On-chip trace) R5F10BAC, R5F10BBC, R5F10BGC, R5F10BLC 2 KB R5F10BAD, R5F10BBD, R5F10BGD, R5F10BLD 3 KB R5F10BAE, R5F10BBE, R5F10BGE, R5F10BLE, R5F10BME 4 KB R5F10BAF, R5F10BBF, R5F10BGF, R5F10BLF, R5F10BMF 6 KB R5F10BAG, R5F10BBG, R5F10BGG, R5F10BLG, R5F10BMG 8 KB 0FE500H-0FE52FH (Hot plug-in/RRM and DDM by DTC) 0FE300H-0FE4FFH (On-chip trace) R5F10PAD, R5F10PBD, R5F10PGD 4 KB R5F10PAE, R5F10PBE, R5F10PGE, R5F10PLE, R5F10PME 6 KB R5F10PPE 6 KB R5F10PGF, R5F10PLF, R5F10PMF 8 KB 0FE500H-0FE52FH (Hot plug-in/RRM and DDM by DTC) 0FE300H-0FE4FFH (On-chip trace) R5F10PPF 8 KB R5F10PGG, R5F10PLG, R5F10PMG, R5F10PPG 10 KB R5F10PGH, R5F10PLH, R5F10PMH, R5F10PPH 16 KB R5F10PGJ, R5F10PLJ, R5F10PMJ, R5F10PPJ 20 KB R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Number of Branches 64 0FF400H-0FF42FH (Hot plug-in/RRM and DDM by DTC) 0FF300H-0FF37FH (On-chip trace) 128 0FB500H-0FB52FH (Hot plug-in/RRM and DDM by DTC) 0FB300H-0FB4FFH (On-chip trace) 1649 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 31 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION 31.2 Connecting E1 On-chip Debugging Emulator to RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 use the VDD, EVDD0, RESET, TOOL0, and VSS pins to communicate with the host machine via an E1 on-chip debugging emulator. Serial communication is performed by using a single-line UART that uses the TOOL0 pin. The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 are provided with the hot plug-in detection function. Caution The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 have an on-chip debug function, which is provided for development and evaluation. Do not use the on-chip debug function in products designated for mass production, because the guaranteed number of rewritable times of the flash memory may be exceeded when this function is used, and product reliability therefore cannot be guaranteed. Renesas Electronics is not liable for problems occurring when the on-chip debug function is used. Figure 31-2. Connection Example of E1 On-chip Debugging Emulator and RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 E1 target connector VDD VDD VDD/EVDD0 EVDD0 RL78/F13, RL78/F14 VDD VDD EVDD0 EMVDD GND GND VSS/EVSS0 VDD/EVDD0 GND 1 k TOOL0 TOOL0 RESET RESET TRESET RESET VDD 10 k 1 k Note 2 Note 1 Reset circuit Reset signal Notes 1. Connecting the dotted line is not necessary during flash programming. 2. If the reset circuit on the target system does not have a buffer and generates a reset signal only with resistors and capacitors, this pull-up resistor is not necessary. Caution This circuit diagram is assumed that the reset signal outputs from an N-ch O.D. buffer (output resistor: 100 or less) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1650 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 31 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION 31.3 On-Chip Debug Security ID The RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 have an on-chip debug operation control bit in the flash memory at 000C3H (see CHAPTER 29 OPTION BYTE) and an on-chip debug security ID setting area at 000C4H to 000CDH, to prevent third parties from reading memory content. When the boot swap function is used, also set a value that is the same as that of 020C3H and 020C4H to 020CDH in advance, because 000C3H, 000C4H to 000CDH and 020C3H, and 020C4H to 020CDH are switched. Table 31-2. On-Chip Debug Security ID Address 000C4H to 000CDH On-Chip Debug Security ID Any ID code of 10 bytes (except for All FFH) 020C4H to 020CDH 31.4 Securing of User Resources To perform communication between the RL78/F13 or RL78/F14 and E1 on-chip debugging emulator, as well as each debug function, the securing of memory space must be done beforehand. If Renesas Electronics assembler or compiler is used, the items can be set by using linker options. 31.4.1 Securement of memory space The shaded portions in Figure 31-2 are the areas reserved for placing the debug monitor program, so user programs or data cannot be allocated in these spaces. When using the on-chip debug function, these spaces must be secured so as not to be used by the user program. Moreover, this area must not be rewritten by the user program. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1651 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 31 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION Figure 31-3. Memory Spaces Where Debug Monitor Programs Are Allocated Code flash memory Internal RAM Use prohibited SFR area FFFFH Note 1 User's stack (512 bytes or 256 bytes Note 2) Stack area Stack for debugging (4 bytes) Note 4 Internal RAM area SP Mirror area Code flash area : Area used for on-chip debugging 01000 H 000D8 H 000CE H Debug monitor area (10 bytes) 000C4 H Security ID area (10 bytes) On-chip debug option byte area (1 byte) 000C3 H 00002 H Debug monitor area (2 bytes) 00000 H Note 3 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1652 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 31 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION Notes 1. Address differs depending on products as follows. Products (code flash memory capacity) Address of Note 1 R5F10AxA (x = 6, A, B, G) 03FFFH R5F10AxC (x = 6, A, B, G, L) 07FFFH R5F10AxD (x = 6, A, B, G, L) 0BFFFH R5F10AxE (x = 6, A, B, G, L, M) 0FFFFH R5F10AxF (x = G, L, M) 17FFFH R5F10AxG (x = G, L, M) 1FFFFH R5F10BxC (x = A, B, G, L) 07FFFH R5F10BxD (x = A, B, G, L) 0BFFFH R5F10BxE (x = A, B, G, L, M) 0FFFFH R5F10BxF (x = A, B, G, L, M) 17FFFH R5F10BxG (x = A, B, G, L, M) 1FFFFH R5F10PxD (x = A, B, G) 0BFFFH R5F10PxE (x = A, B, G, L, M, P) 0FFFFH R5F10PxF (x = G, L, M, P) 17FFFH R5F10PxG (x = G, L, M, P) 1FFFFH R5F10PxH (x = G, L, M, P) 2FFFFH R5F10PxJ (x = G, L, M, P) 3FFFFH 2. When real-time RAM monitor (RRM) function and dynamic memory modification (DMM) function are not used, it is 256 bytes. 3. In debugging, reset vector is rewritten to address allocated to a monitor program. 4. Since this area is allocated just under the stack area, the address of this area varies depending on the stack increase and decrease. That is, 4 extra bytes are consumed for the stack area used. When using self-programming, 12 extra bytes are consumed for the stack area used. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1653 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 32 BCD CORRECTION CIRCUIT CHAPTER 32 BCD CORRECTION CIRCUIT 32.1 BCD Correction Circuit Function The result of addition/subtraction of the BCD (binary-coded decimal) code and BCD code can be obtained as BCD code with this circuit. The decimal correction operation result is obtained by performing addition/subtraction having the A register as the operand and then adding/ subtracting the BCD correction result register (BCDADJ). 32.2 Registers Used by BCD Correction Circuit The BCD correction circuit uses the following registers. BCD correction result register (BCDADJ) (1) BCD correction result register (BCDADJ) The BCDADJ register stores correction values for obtaining the add/subtract result as BCD code through add/subtract instructions using the A register as the operand. The value read from the BCDADJ register varies depending on the value of the A register when it is read and those of the CY and AC flags. The BCDADJ register is read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. Reset input sets this register to undefined. Figure 32-1. Format of BCD Correction Result Register (BCDADJ) Address: F00FEH Symbol After reset: undefined 7 6 R 5 4 3 2 1 0 BCDADJ R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1654 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 32 BCD CORRECTION CIRCUIT 32.3 BCD Correction Circuit Operation The basic operation of the BCD correction circuit is as follows. (1) Addition: Calculating the result of adding a BCD code value and another BCD code value by using a BCD code value <1> The BCD code value to which addition is performed is stored in the A register. <2> By adding the value of the A register and the second operand (value of one more BCD code to be added) as are in binary, the binary operation result is stored in the A register and the correction value is stored in the BCD correction result register (BCDADJ). <3> Decimal correction is performed by adding in binary the value of the A register (addition result in binary) and the BCDADJ register (correction value), and the correction result is stored in the A register and CY flag. Caution The value read from the BCDADJ register varies depending on the value of the A register when it is read and those of the CY and AC flags. Therefore, execute the instruction <3> after the instruction <2> instead of executing any other instructions. To perform BCD correction in the interrupt enabled state, saving and restoring the A register is required within the interrupt function. PSW (CY flag and AC flag) is restored by the RETI instruction. An example is shown below. Examples 1: 99 + 89 = 188 Instruction A Register CY Flag AC Flag BCDADJ Register MOV A, #99H ; <1> 99H ADD A, #89H ; <2> 22H 1 1 66H ADD A, !BCDADJ ; <3> 88H 1 0 A Register CY Flag AC Flag BCDADJ Register ; <1> 85H ADD A, #15H ; <2> 9AH 0 0 66H ADD A, !BCDADJ ; <3> 00H 1 1 A Register CY Flag AC Flag BCDADJ Register Examples 2: 85 + 15 = 100 Instruction MOV A, #85H Examples 3: 80 + 80 = 160 Instruction MOV A, #80H ; <1> 80H ADD A, #80H ; <2> 00H 1 0 60H ADD A, !BCDADJ ; <3> 60H 1 0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1655 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 32 BCD CORRECTION CIRCUIT (2) Subtraction: Calculating the result of subtracting a BCD code value from another BCD code value by using a BCD code value <1> The BCD code value from which subtraction is performed is stored in the A register. <2> By subtracting the value of the second operand (value of BCD code to be subtracted) from the A register as is in binary, the calculation result in binary is stored in the A register, and the correction value is stored in the BCD correction result register (BCDADJ). <3> Decimal correction is performed by subtracting the value of the BCDADJ register (correction value) from the A register (subtraction result in binary) in binary, and the correction result is stored in the A register and CY flag. Caution The value read from the BCDADJ register varies depending on the value of the A register when it is read and those of the CY and AC flags. Therefore, execute the instruction <3> after the instruction <2> instead of executing any other instructions. To perform BCD correction in the interrupt enabled state, saving and restoring the A register is required within the interrupt function. PSW (CY flag and AC flag) is restored by the RETI instruction. An example is shown below. Example: 91 52 = 39 Instruction A Register CY Flag AC Flag BCDADJ Register MOV A, #91H ; <1> 91H SUB A, #52H ; <2> 3FH 0 1 06H SUB A, !BCDADJ ; <3> 39H 0 0 R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1656 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET This chapter lists the instructions in the RL78 microcontroller instruction set. For details of each operation and operation code, refer to the separate document RL78 Family User's Manual Software. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1657 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET 33.1 Conventions Used in Operation List 33.1.1 Operand identifiers and specification methods Operands are described in the "Operand" column of each instruction in accordance with the description method of the instruction operand identifier (refer to the assembler specifications for details). When there are two or more description methods, select one of them. Alphabetic letters in capitals and the symbols, #, !, !!, $, $!, [ ], and ES: are keywords and are described as they are. Each symbol has the following meaning. #: Immediate data specification !: 16-bit absolute address specification !!: 20-bit absolute address specification $: 8-bit relative address specification $!: 16-bit relative address specification [ ]: Indirect address specification ES:: Extension address specification In the case of immediate data, describe an appropriate numeric value or a label. When using a label, be sure to describe the #, !, !!, $, $!, [ ], and ES: symbols. For operand register identifiers, r and rp, either function names (X, A, C, etc.) or absolute names (names in parentheses in the table below, R0, R1, R2, etc.) can be used for description. Table 33-1. Operand Identifiers and Specification Methods Identifier Description Method r X (R0), A (R1), C (R2), B (R3), E (R4), D (R5), L (R6), H (R7) rp AX (RP0), BC (RP1), DE (RP2), HL (RP3) sfr Special-function register symbol (SFR symbol) FFF00H to FFFFFH sfrp Special-function register symbols (16-bit manipulatable SFR symbol. Even addresses onlyNote) FFF00H to FFFFFH saddr FFE20H to FFF1FH Immediate data or labels saddrp FFE20H to FF1FH Immediate data or labels (even addresses onlyNote) addr20 00000H to FFFFFH Immediate data or labels addr16 0000H to FFFFH Immediate data or labels (only even addresses for 16-bit data transfer instructionsNote) addr5 0080H to 00BFH Immediate data or labels (even addresses only) word 16-bit immediate data or label byte 8-bit immediate data or label bit 3-bit immediate data or label RBn RB0 to RB3 Note Bit 0 = 0 when an odd address is specified. Remark The special function registers can be described to operand sfr as symbols. See Table 3-5 SFR List for the symbols of the special function registers. The extended special function registers can be described to operand !addr16 as symbols. See Table 3-6 Extended SFR (2nd SFR) List for the symbols of the extended special function registers. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1658 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET 33.1.2 Description of operation column The operation when the instruction is executed is shown in the "Operation" column using the following symbols. Table 33-2. Symbols in "Operation" Column Symbol Function A A register; 8-bit accumulator X X register B B register C C register D D register E E register H H register L L register ES ES register CS CS register AX AX register pair; 16-bit accumulator BC BC register pair DE DE register pair HL HL register pair PC Program counter SP Stack pointer PSW Program status word CY Carry flag AC Auxiliary carry flag Z Zero flag RBS Register bank select flag IE Interrupt request enable flag () Memory contents indicated by address or register contents in parentheses X H, X L 16-bit registers: XH = higher 8 bits, XL = lower 8 bits XS, XH, XL 20-bit registers: XS = (bits 19 to 16), XH = (bits 15 to 8), XL = (bits 7 to 0) Logical product (AND) Logical sum (OR) Exclusive logical sum (exclusive OR) Inverted data addr5 16-bit immediate data (even addresses only in 0080H to 00BFH) addr16 16-bit immediate data addr20 20-bit immediate data jdisp8 Signed 8-bit data (displacement value) jdisp16 Signed 16-bit data (displacement value) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1659 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET 33.1.3 Description of flag operation column The change of the flag value when the instruction is executed is shown in the "Flag" column using the following symbols. Table 33-3. Symbols in "Flag" Column Symbol Change of Flag Value (Blank) Unchanged 0 Cleared to 0 1 Set to 1 R Set/cleared according to the result Previously saved value is restored 33.1.4 PREFIX instruction Instructions with "ES:" have a PREFIX operation code as a prefix to extend the accessible data area to the 1 MB space (00000H to FFFFFH), by adding the ES register value to the 64 KB space from F0000H to FFFFFH. When a PREFIX operation code is attached as a prefix to the target instruction, only one instruction immediately after the PREFIX operation code is executed as the addresses with the ES register value added. A interrupt and DTC transfer are not acknowledged between a PREFIX instruction code and the instruction immediately after. Table 33-4. Use Example of PREFIX Operation Code Instruction Opcode 1 2 3 !addr16 4 5 #byte MOV !addr16, #byte CFH MOV ES:!addr16, #byte 11H CFH MOV A, [HL] 8BH MOV A, ES:[HL] 11H 8BH !addr16 #byte Caution Set the ES register value with MOV ES, A, etc., before executing the PREFIX instruction. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1660 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET 33.2 Operation List Table 33-5. Operation List (1/18) Instruction Mnemonic Group 8-bit data transfer Notes 1. MOV Operands Bytes Clocks Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Z r, #byte 2 1 r byte PSW, #byte 3 3 PSW byte CS, #byte 3 1 CS byte ES, #byte 2 1 ES byte !addr16, #byte 4 1 (addr16) byte ES:!addr16, #byte 5 2 (ES, addr16) byte saddr, #byte 3 1 (saddr) byte sfr, #byte 3 1 sfr byte [DE+byte], #byte 3 1 (DE+byte) byte ES:[DE+byte],#byte 4 2 ((ES, DE)+byte) byte [HL+byte], #byte 3 1 (HL+byte) byte ES:[HL+byte],#byte 4 2 ((ES, HL)+byte) byte [SP+byte], #byte 3 1 (SP+byte) byte word[B], #byte 4 1 (B+word) byte ES:word[B], #byte 5 2 ((ES, B)+word) byte word[C], #byte 4 1 (C+word) byte ES:word[C], #byte 5 2 ((ES, C)+word) byte word[BC], #byte 4 1 (BC+word) byte ES:word[BC], #byte 5 2 ((ES, BC)+word) byte 1 1 Ar A, r Note 3 r, A Note 3 Flag 1 1 rA A, PSW 2 1 A PSW PSW, A 2 3 PSW A A, CS 2 1 A CS CS, A 2 1 CS A A, ES 2 1 A ES ES, A 2 1 ES A A, !addr16 3 1 4 A (addr16) A, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 A (ES, addr16) !addr16, A 3 1 (addr16) A ES:!addr16, A 4 2 (ES, addr16) A A, saddr 2 1 A (saddr) saddr, A 2 1 (saddr) A AC CY x x x x x x Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. 3. Except r = A Remark Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1661 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (2/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group 8-bit data transfer Notes 1. MOV Clocks Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Flag Z A, sfr 2 1 A sfr sfr, A 2 1 sfr A A, [DE] 1 1 4 A (DE) [DE], A 1 1 (DE) A A, ES:[DE] 2 2 5 A (ES, DE) ES:[DE], A 2 2 (ES, DE) A A, [HL] 1 1 4 A (HL) [HL], A 1 1 (HL) A A, ES:[HL] 2 2 5 A (ES, HL) ES:[HL], A 2 2 (ES, HL) A A, [DE+byte] 2 1 4 A (DE + byte) [DE+byte], A 2 1 (DE + byte) A A, ES:[DE+byte] 3 2 5 A ((ES, DE) + byte) ES:[DE+byte], A 3 2 ((ES, DE) + byte) A A, [HL+byte] 2 1 4 A (HL + byte) [HL+byte], A 2 1 (HL + byte) A A, ES:[HL+byte] 3 2 5 A ((ES, HL) + byte) ES:[HL+byte], A 3 2 ((ES, HL) + byte) A A, [SP+byte] 2 1 A (SP + byte) [SP+byte], A 2 1 (SP + byte) A A, word[B] 3 1 4 A (B + word) word[B], A 3 1 (B + word) A A, ES:word[B] 4 2 5 A ((ES, B) + word) ES:word[B], A 4 2 ((ES, B) + word) A A, word[C] 3 1 4 A (C + word) word[C], A 3 1 (C + word) A A, ES:word[C] 4 2 5 A ((ES, C) + word) ES:word[C], A 4 2 ((ES, C) + word) A A, word[BC] 3 1 4 A (BC + word) word[BC], A 3 1 (BC + word) A A, ES:word[BC] 4 2 5 A ((ES, BC) + word) ES:word[BC], A 4 2 ((ES, BC) + word) A AC CY Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Remark Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1662 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (3/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group 8-bit data MOV transfer Clocks Note 1 Note 2 2 1 4 A (HL + B) [HL+B], A 2 1 (HL + B) A A, ES:[HL+B] 3 2 5 A ((ES, HL) + B) ES:[HL+B], A 3 2 ((ES, HL) + B) A A, [HL+C] 2 1 4 A (HL + C) [HL+C], A 2 1 (HL + C) A A, ES:[HL+C] 3 2 5 A ((ES, HL) + C) ES:[HL+C], A 3 2 ((ES, HL) + C) A X, !addr16 3 1 4 X (addr16) X, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 X (ES, addr16) X, saddr 2 1 X (saddr) B, !addr16 3 1 4 B (addr16) B, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 B (ES, addr16) B, saddr 2 1 B (saddr) C, !addr16 3 1 4 C (addr16) C, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 C (ES, addr16) C, saddr 2 1 C (saddr) 3 1 ES (saddr) 1 (r = X) 1 A r A, r Note 3 Flag Z A, [HL+B] ES, saddr XCH Clocks AC CY 2 (other than r = X) Notes 1. A, !addr16 4 2 A (addr16) A, ES:!addr16 5 3 A (ES, addr16) A, saddr 3 2 A (saddr) A, sfr 3 2 A sfr A, [DE] 2 2 A (DE) A, ES:[DE] 3 3 A (ES, DE) A, [HL] 2 2 A (HL) A, ES:[HL] 3 3 A (ES, HL) A, [DE+byte] 3 2 A (DE + byte) A, ES:[DE+byte] 4 3 A ((ES, DE) + byte) A, [HL+byte] 3 2 A (HL + byte) A, ES:[HL+byte] 4 3 A ((ES, HL) + byte) Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. 3. Except r = A Remark Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1663 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (4/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group 8-bit data XCH transfer ONEB CLRB MOVS 16-bit MOVW data Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Flag Z AC CY A, [HL+B] 2 2 A (HL+B) A, ES:[HL+B] 3 3 A ((ES, HL)+B) A, [HL+C] 2 2 A (HL+C) A, ES:[HL+C] 3 3 A ((ES, HL)+C) A 1 1 A 01H X 1 1 X 01H B 1 1 B 01H C 1 1 C 01H !addr16 3 1 (addr16) 01H ES:!addr16 4 2 (ES, addr16) 01H saddr 2 1 (saddr) 01H A 1 1 A 00H X 1 1 X 00H B 1 1 B 00H C 1 1 C 00H !addr16 3 1 (addr16) 00H ES:!addr16 4 2 (ES,addr16) 00H saddr 2 1 (saddr) 00H [HL+byte], X 3 1 (HL+byte) X x x ES:[HL+byte], X 4 2 (ES, HL+byte) X x x rp, #word 3 1 rp word saddrp, #word 4 1 (saddrp) word sfrp, #word transfer Notes 1. Clocks 4 1 sfrp word AX, rp Note 3 1 1 AX rp rp, AX Note 3 1 1 rp AX AX, !addr16 3 1 4 AX (addr16) !addr16, AX 3 1 (addr16) AX AX, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 AX (ES, addr16) ES:!addr16, AX 4 2 (ES, addr16) AX AX, saddrp 2 1 AX (saddrp) saddrp, AX 2 1 (saddrp) AX AX, sfrp 2 1 AX sfrp sfrp, AX 2 1 sfrp AX Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. 3. Except rp = AX Remark Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1664 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (5/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group 16-bit MOVW data Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Flag Z AX, [DE] 1 1 4 AX (DE) [DE], AX 1 1 (DE) AX AX, ES:[DE] 2 2 5 AX (ES, DE) ES:[DE], AX 2 2 (ES, DE) AX AX, [HL] 1 1 4 AX (HL) [HL], AX 1 1 (HL) AX AX, ES:[HL] 2 2 5 AX (ES, HL) ES:[HL], AX 2 2 (ES, HL) AX AX, [DE+byte] 2 1 4 AX (DE+byte) [DE+byte], AX 2 1 (DE+byte) AX AX, ES:[DE+byte] 3 2 5 AX ((ES, DE) + byte) ES:[DE+byte], AX 3 2 ((ES, DE) + byte) AX AX, [HL+byte] 2 1 4 AX (HL + byte) [HL+byte], AX 2 1 (HL + byte) AX AX, ES:[HL+byte] 3 2 5 AX ((ES, HL) + byte) ES:[HL+byte], AX 3 2 ((ES, HL) + byte) AX AX, [SP+byte] 2 1 AX (SP + byte) [SP+byte], AX 2 1 (SP + byte) AX AX, word[B] 3 1 4 AX (B + word) word[B], AX 3 1 (B+ word) AX AX, ES:word[B] 4 2 5 AX ((ES, B) + word) ES:word[B], AX 4 2 ((ES, B) + word) AX AX, word[C] 3 1 4 AX (C + word) word[C], AX 3 1 (C + word) AX AX, ES:word[C] 4 2 5 AX ((ES, C) + word) ES:word[C], AX 4 2 ((ES, C) + word) AX AX, word[BC] 3 1 4 AX (BC + word) word[BC], AX 3 1 (BC + word) AX AX, ES:word[BC] 4 2 5 AX ((ES, BC) + word) ES:word[BC], AX 4 2 ((ES, BC) + word) AX transfer Notes 1. Clocks AC CY Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Remark Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1665 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (6/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group 16-bit MOVW data Clocks Clocks Note 1 Note 2 3 1 4 BC (addr16) BC, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 BC (ES, addr16) DE, !addr16 3 1 4 DE (addr16) DE, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 DE (ES, addr16) HL, !addr16 3 1 4 HL (addr16) HL, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 HL (ES, addr16) BC, saddrp 2 1 BC (saddrp) DE, saddrp 2 1 DE (saddrp) HL, saddrp 2 1 HL (saddrp) 1 1 AX rp AX, rp ONEW AX 1 1 AX 0001H BC 1 1 BC 0001H AX 1 1 AX 0000H BC 1 1 BC 0000H A, #byte 2 1 A, CY A + byte x x x saddr, #byte 3 2 (saddr), CY (saddr)+byte x x x 2 1 A, CY A + r x x x r, A 2 1 r, CY r + A x x x A, !addr16 3 1 4 A, CY A + (addr16) x x x A, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 A, CY A + (ES, addr16) x x x A, saddr 2 1 A, CY A + (saddr) x x x A, [HL] 1 1 4 A, CY A+ (HL) x x x A, ES:[HL] 2 2 5 A,CY A + (ES, HL) x x x A, [HL+byte] 2 1 4 A, CY A + (HL+byte) x x x A, ES:[HL+byte] 3 2 5 A,CY A + ((ES, HL)+byte) x x x A, [HL+B] 2 1 4 A, CY A + (HL+B) x x x A, ES:[HL+B] 3 2 5 A,CY A+((ES, HL)+B) x x x A, [HL+C] 2 1 4 A, CY A + (HL+C) x x x A, ES:[HL+C] 3 2 5 A,CY A + ((ES, HL) + C) x x x ADD operation A, r Notes 1. Note 3 AC CY XCHW CLRW 8-bit Z BC, !addr16 transfer Flag Note 4 Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. 3. Except rp = AX 4. Except r = A Remark Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1666 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (7/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group 8-bit ADDC operation Flag Note 2 2 1 A, CY A+byte+CY x x x 3 2 (saddr), CY (saddr) +byte+CY x x x 2 1 A, CY A + r + CY x x x r, A 2 1 r, CY r + A + CY x x x A, !addr16 3 1 4 A, CY A + (addr16)+CY x x x A, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 A, CY A + (ES, addr16)+CY x x x A, saddr 2 1 A, CY A + (saddr)+CY x x x A, [HL] 1 1 4 A, CY A+ (HL) + CY x x x A, ES:[HL] 2 2 5 A,CY A+ (ES, HL) + CY x x x A, [HL+byte] 2 1 4 A, CY A+ (HL+byte) + CY x x x A, ES:[HL+byte] 3 2 5 A,CY A+ ((ES, HL)+byte) + CY x x x A, [HL+B] 2 1 4 A, CY A+ (HL+B) +CY x x x A, ES:[HL+B] 3 2 5 A,CY A+((ES, HL)+B)+CY x x x A, [HL+C] 2 1 4 A, CY A+ (HL+C)+CY x x x A, ES:[HL+C] 3 2 5 A,CY A+ ((ES, HL)+C)+CY x x x A, #byte 2 1 A, CY A byte x x x 3 2 (saddr), CY (saddr) byte x x x 2 1 A, CY A r x x x r, A 2 1 r, CY r A x x x A, !addr16 3 1 4 A, CY A (addr16) x x x A, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 A, CY A - (ES, addr16) x x x A, saddr 2 1 A, CY A - (saddr) x x x A, [HL] 1 1 4 A, CY A - (HL) x x x A, ES:[HL] 2 2 5 A,CY A - (ES, HL) x x x A, [HL+byte] 2 1 4 A, CY A - (HL+byte) x x x A, ES:[HL+byte] 3 2 5 A,CY A - ((ES, HL)+byte) x x x A, [HL+B] 2 1 4 A, CY A - (HL+B) x x x A, ES:[HL+B] 3 2 5 A,CY A - ((ES, HL)+B) x x x A, [HL+C] 2 1 4 A, CY A - (HL+C) x x x A, ES:[HL+C] 3 2 5 A,CY A - ((ES, HL)+C) x x x A, #byte A, rv Note 3 saddr, #byte A, r Notes 1. Clocks Note 1 saddr, #byte SUB Clocks Note 3 Z AC CY Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. 3. Except r = A Remark Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1667 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (8/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group 8-bit SUBC operation Flag Note 2 2 1 A, CY A - byte - CY x x x 3 2 (saddr), CY (saddr) - byte - CY x x x 2 1 A, CY A - r - CY x x x r, A 2 1 r, CY r - A - CY x x x A, !addr16 3 1 4 A, CY A - (addr16) - CY x x x A, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 A, CY A - (ES, addr16) - CY x x x A, saddr 2 1 A, CY A - (saddr) - CY x x x A, [HL] 1 1 4 A, CY A - (HL) - CY x x x A, ES:[HL] 2 2 5 A,CY A - (ES, HL) - CY x x x A, [HL+byte] 2 1 4 A, CY A - (HL+byte) - CY x x x A, ES:[HL+byte] 3 2 5 A,CY A - ((ES, HL)+byte) - CY x x x A, [HL+B] 2 1 4 A, CY A - (HL+B) - CY x x x A, ES:[HL+B] 3 2 5 A,CY A - ((ES, HL)+B) - CY x x x A, [HL+C] 2 1 4 A, CY A - (HL+C) - CY x x x A, ES:[HL+C] 3 2 5 A, CY A - ((ES:HL)+C) - CY x x x A, #byte 2 1 A A byte x 3 2 (saddr) (saddr) byte x 2 1 AAr x r, A 2 1 RrA x A, !addr16 3 1 4 A A (addr16) x A, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 A A (ES:addr16) x A, saddr 2 1 A A (saddr) x A, [HL] 1 1 4 A A (HL) x A, ES:[HL] 2 2 5 A A (ES:HL) x A, [HL+byte] 2 1 4 A A (HL+byte) x A, ES:[HL+byte] 3 2 5 A A ((ES:HL)+byte) x A, [HL+B] 2 1 4 A A (HL+B) x A, ES:[HL+B] 3 2 5 A A ((ES:HL)+B) x A, [HL+C] 2 1 4 A A (HL+C) x A, ES:[HL+C] 3 2 5 A A ((ES:HL)+C) x A, #byte A, r Note 3 saddr, #byte A, r Notes 1. Clocks Note 1 saddr, #byte AND Clocks Note 3 Z AC CY Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. 3. Except r = A Remark Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1668 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (9/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group 8-bit OR operation Flag Note 2 2 1 A Abyte x 3 2 (saddr) (saddr)byte x 2 1 A Ar x r, A 2 1 r rA x A, !addr16 3 1 4 A A(addr16) x A, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 A A(ES:addr16) x A, saddr 2 1 A A(saddr) x A, [HL] 1 1 4 A A(H) x A, ES:[HL] 2 2 5 A A(ES:HL) x A, [HL+byte] 2 1 4 A A(HL+byte) x A, ES:[HL+byte] 3 2 5 A A((ES:HL)+byte) x A, [HL+B] 2 1 4 A A(HL+B) x A, ES:[HL+B] 3 2 5 A A((ES:HL)+B) x A, [HL+C] 2 1 4 A A(HL+C) x A, ES:[HL+C] 3 2 5 A A((ES:HL)+C) x A, #byte 2 1 A Abyte x 3 2 (saddr) (saddr)byte x 2 1 A Ar x r, A 2 1 r rA x A, !addr16 3 1 4 A A(addr16) x A, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 A A(ES:addr16) x A, saddr 2 1 A A(saddr) x A, [HL] 1 1 4 A A(HL) x A, ES:[HL] 2 2 5 A A(ES:HL) x A, [HL+byte] 2 1 4 A A(HL+byte) x A, ES:[HL+byte] 3 2 5 A A((ES:HL)+byte) x A, [HL+B] 2 1 4 A A(HL+B) x A, ES:[HL+B] 3 2 5 A A((ES:HL)+B) x A, [HL+C] 2 1 4 A A(HL+C) x A, ES:[HL+C] 3 2 5 A A((ES:HL)+C) x A, #byte A, r Note 3 saddr, #byte A, r Notes 1. Clocks Note 1 saddr, #byte XOR Clocks Note 3 Z AC CY Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. 3. Except r = A Remark Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1669 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (10/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group 8-bit CMP operation CMPS Notes 1. Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Flag Z AC CY A, #byte 2 1 A - byte x x x !addr16, #byte 4 1 4 (addr16) - byte x x x ES:!addr16, #byte 5 2 5 (ES:addr16) - byte x x x saddr, #byte 3 1 (saddr) - byte x x x 2 1 A-r x x x r, A 2 1 r-A x x x A, !addr16 3 1 4 A - (addr16) x x x A, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 A - (ES:addr16) x x x A, saddr 2 1 A - (saddr) x x x A, [HL] 1 1 4 A - (HL) x x x A, ES:[HL] 2 2 5 A - (ES:HL) x x x A, [HL+byte] 2 1 4 A - (HL+byte) x x x A, ES:[HL+byte] 3 2 5 A - ((ES:HL)+byte) x x x A, [HL+B] 2 1 4 A - (HL+B) x x x A, ES:[HL+B] 3 2 5 A - ((ES:HL)+B) x x x A, [HL+C] 2 1 4 A - (HL+C) x x x A, ES:[HL+C] 3 2 5 A - ((ES:HL)+C) x x x A 1 1 A - 00H x x x X 1 1 X - 00H x x x B 1 1 B - 00H x x x C 1 1 C - 00H x x x !addr16 3 1 4 (addr16) - 00H x x x ES:!addr16 4 2 5 (ES:addr16) - 00H x x x saddr 2 1 (saddr) - 00H x x x X, [HL+byte] 3 1 4 X - (HL+byte) x x x X, ES:[HL+byte] 4 2 5 X - ((ES:HL)+byte) x x x A, r CMP0 Clocks Note3 Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. 3. Except r = A Remark Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1670 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (11/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group 16-bit ADDW operation SUBW CMPW Multiply Notes 1. MULU Clocks Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Flag Z AC CY AX, #word 3 1 AX, CY AX+word x x x AX, AX 1 1 AX, CY AX+AX x x x AX, BC 1 1 AX, CY AX+BC x x x AX, DE 1 1 AX, CY AX+DE x x x AX, HL 1 1 AX, CY AX+HL x x x AX, !addr16 3 1 4 AX, CY AX+(addr16) x x x AX, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 AX, CY AX+(ES:addr16) x x x AX, saddrp 2 1 AX, CY AX+(saddrp) x x x AX, [HL+byte] 3 1 4 AX, CY AX+(HL+byte) x x x AX, ES: [HL+byte] 4 2 5 AX, CY AX+((ES:HL)+byte) x x x AX, #word 3 1 AX, CY AX - word x x x AX, BC 1 1 AX, CY AX - BC x x x AX, DE 1 1 AX, CY AX - DE x x x AX, HL 1 1 AX, CY AX - HL x x x AX, !addr16 3 1 4 AX, CY AX - (addr16) x x x AX, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 AX, CY AX - (ES:addr16) x x x AX, saddrp 2 1 AX, CY AX - (saddrp) x x x AX, [HL+byte] 3 1 4 AX, CY AX - (HL+byte) x x x AX, ES: [HL+byte] 4 2 5 AX, CY AX - ((ES:HL)+byte) x x x AX, #word 3 1 AX - word x x x AX, BC 1 1 AX - BC x x x AX, DE 1 1 AX - DE x x x AX, HL 1 1 AX - HL x x x AX, !addr16 3 1 4 AX - (addr16) x x x AX, ES:!addr16 4 2 5 AX - (ES:addr16) x x x AX, saddrp 2 1 AX - (saddrp) x x x AX, [HL+byte] 3 1 4 AX - (HL+byte) x x x AX, ES: [HL+byte] 4 2 5 AX - ((ES:HL)+byte) x x x X 1 1 AX AxX Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Remark Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1671 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (12/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group Multiply, Divide, Multiply & accumulate Clocks Operation Flag Note 1 Note 2 Z AC CY 1 1 AX A X MULHU 3 2 BCAX AX BC (unsigned) MULH 3 2 BCAX AX BC (signed) DIVHU 3 9 AX MULU X (quotient), DE (remainder) AX / DE (unsigned) DIVWU 3 17 BCAX (quotient), HLDE (remainder) BCAX / HLDE (unsigned) Notes 1. MACHU 3 3 MACR MACR + AX BC (unsigned) MACH 3 3 MACR MACR + AX BC(signed) Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. <R> Caution Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. Disable interrupts when executing the DIVHU or DIVWU instruction in an interrupt servicing routine. Alternatively, unless they are executed in the RAM area, note that execution of a DIVHU or DIVWU instruction is possible even with interrupts enabled as long as a NOP instruction is added immediately after the DIVHU or DIVWU instruction in the assembly language source code. The following compilers automatically add a NOP instruction immediately after any DIVHU or DIVWU instruction output during the build process. - V. 1.71 and later versions of the CA78K0R (Renesas Electronics compiler), for both C and assembly language source code - Service pack 1.40.6 and later versions of the EWRL78 (IAR compiler), for C language source code - GNURL78 (KPIT compiler), for C language source code Remarks 1. Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. 2. MACR indicates the multiplication and accumulation register (MACRH, MACRL). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1672 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (13/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group Increment/ Note 1 Note 2 Flag Z AC CY 1 1 r r+1 x x !addr16 3 2 (addr16) (addr16)+1 x x ES:!addr16 4 3 (ES, addr16) (ES, addr16)+1 x x saddr 2 2 (saddr) (saddr)+1 x x [HL+byte] 3 2 (HL+byte) (HL+byte)+1 x x ES: [HL+byte] 4 3 ((ES:HL)+byte) ((ES:HL)+byte)+1 x x r 1 1 rr-1 x x !addr16 3 2 (addr16) (addr16) - 1 x x ES:!addr16 4 3 (ES, addr16) (ES, addr16) - 1 x x saddr 2 2 (saddr) (saddr) - 1 x x [HL+byte] 3 2 (HL+byte) (HL+byte) - 1 x x ES: [HL+byte] 4 3 ((ES:HL)+byte) ((ES:HL)+byte) - 1 x x rp 1 1 rp rp+1 !addr16 3 2 (addr16) (addr16)+1 ES:!addr16 4 3 (ES, addr16) (ES, addr16)+1 saddrp 2 2 (saddrp) (saddrp)+1 [HL+byte] 3 2 (HL+byte) (HL+byte)+1 ES: [HL+byte] 4 3 ((ES:HL)+byte) ((ES:HL)+byte)+1 rp 1 1 rp rp - 1 !addr16 3 2 (addr16) (addr16) - 1 ES:!addr16 4 3 (ES, addr16) (ES, addr16) - 1 saddrp 2 2 (saddrp) (saddrp) - 1 [HL+byte] 3 2 (HL+byte) (HL+byte) - 1 ES: [HL+byte] 4 3 ((ES:HL)+byte) ((ES:HL)+byte) - 1 SHR A, cnt 2 1 (CY A0, Am-1 Am, A7 0) xcnt x SHRW AX, cnt 2 1 (CY AX0, AXm-1 AXm, AX15 0) xcnt x SHL A, cnt 2 1 (CY A7, Am Am-1, A0 0) xcnt x B, cnt 2 1 (CY B7, Bm Bm-1, B0 0) xcnt x C, cnt 2 1 (CY C7, Cm Cm-1, C0 0) xcnt x AX, cnt 2 1 (CY AX15, AXm AXm-1, AX0 0) xcnt x BC, cnt 2 1 (CY BC15, BCm BCm-1, BC0 0) xcnt x SAR A, cnt 2 1 (CY A0, Am-1 Am, A7 A7) xcnt x SARW AX, cnt 2 1 (CY AX0, AXm-1 AXm, AX15 AX15) xcnt x DEC INCW DECW SHLW Notes 1. Clocks r INC decrement Shift Clocks Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. Remarks 1. Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. 2. cnt indicates the bit shift count. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1673 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (14/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group Rotate Bit Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Flag Z AC CY ROR A, 1 2 1 (CY, A7 A0, Am-1 Am)x1 x ROL A, 1 2 1 (CY, A0 A7, Am+1 Am)x1 x RORC A, 1 2 1 (CY A0, A7 CY, Am-1 Am)x1 x ROLC A, 1 2 1 (CY A7, A0 CY, Am+1 Am)x1 x ROLWC AX,1 2 1 (CY AX15, AX0 CY, AXm+1 AXm) x1 x BC,1 2 1 (CY BC15, BC0 CY, BCm+1 BCm) x1 x CY, A.bit 2 1 CY A.bit x A.bit, CY 2 1 A.bit CY CY, PSW.bit 3 1 CY PSW.bit PSW.bit, CY 3 4 PSW.bit CY CY, saddr.bit 3 1 CY (saddr).bit saddr.bit, CY 3 2 (saddr).bit CY CY, sfr.bit 3 1 CY sfr.bit sfr.bit, CY 3 2 sfr.bit CY CY,[HL].bit 2 1 4 CY (HL).bit [HL].bit, CY 2 2 (HL).bit CY CY, ES:[HL].bit 3 2 5 CY (ES, HL).bit ES:[HL].bit, CY 3 3 (ES, HL).bit CY CY, A.bit 2 1 CY CY A.bit x CY, PSW.bit 3 1 CY CY PSW.bit x CY, saddr.bit 3 1 CY CY (saddr).bit x CY, sfr.bit 3 1 CY CY sfr.bit x CY,[HL].bit 2 1 4 CY CY (HL).bit x CY, ES:[HL].bit 3 2 5 CY CY (ES, HL).bit x CY, A.bit 2 1 CY CY A.bit x CY, PSW.bit 3 1 CYX CY PSW.bit x CY, saddr.bit 3 1 CY CY (saddr).bit x CY, sfr.bit 3 1 CY CY sfr.bit x CY, [HL].bit 2 1 4 CY CY (HL).bit x CY, ES:[HL].bit 3 2 5 CY CY (ES, HL).bit x MOV1 manipulate AND1 OR1 Notes 1. Clocks x x x x x x x Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Remark Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1674 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (15/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group Bit Clocks Note 1 Note 2 Flag Z AC CY CY, A.bit 2 1 CY CY A.bit x CY, PSW.bit 3 1 CY CY PSW.bit x CY, saddr.bit 3 1 CY CY (saddr).bit x CY, sfr.bit 3 1 CY CY sfr.bit x CY, [HL].bit 2 1 4 CY CY (HL).bit x CY, ES:[HL].bit 3 2 5 CY CY (ES, HL).bit x A.bit 2 1 A.bit 1 PSW.bit 3 4 PSW.bit 1 !addr16.bit 4 2 (addr16).bit 1 ES:!addr16.bit 5 3 (ES, addr16).bit 1 saddr.bit 3 2 (saddr).bit 1 sfr.bit 3 2 sfr.bit 1 [HL].bit 2 2 (HL).bit 1 ES:[HL].bit 3 3 (ES, HL).bit 1 A.bit 2 1 A.bit 0 PSW.bit 3 4 PSW.bit 0 !addr16.bit 4 2 (addr16).bit 0 ES:!addr16.bit 5 3 (ES, addr16).bit 0 saddr.bit 3 2 (saddr.bit) 0 sfr.bit 3 2 sfr.bit 0 [HL].bit 2 2 (HL).bit 0 ES:[HL].bit 3 3 (ES, HL).bit 0 SET1 CY 2 1 CY 1 1 CLR1 CY 2 1 CY 0 0 NOT1 CY 2 1 CY CY x XOR1 manipulate SET1 CLR1 Notes 1. Clocks x x x x x x Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Remark Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1675 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (16/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group CALL Call/ rp 2 Clocks Clocks Note 1 Note 2 3 Flag Z AC CY (SP - 2) (PC+2)S, (SP - 3) (PC+2)H, (SP - 4) (PC+2)L, PC CS, rp, return SP SP - 4 $!addr20 3 3 (SP - 2) (PC+3)S, (SP - 3) (PC+3)H, (SP - 4) (PC+3)L, PC PC+3+jdisp16, SP SP - 4 !addr16 3 3 (SP - 2) (PC+3)S, (SP - 3) (PC+3)H, (SP - 4) (PC+3)L, PC 0000, addr16, SP SP - 4 !!addr20 4 3 (SP - 2) (PC+4)S, (SP - 3) (PC+4)H, (SP - 4) (PC+4)L, PC addr20, SP SP - 4 CALLT [addr5] 2 5 (SP - 2) (PC+2)S , (SP - 3) (PC+2)H, (SP - 4) (PC+2)L , PCS 0000, PCH (0000, addr5+1), PCL (0000, addr5), SP SP - 4 BRK - 2 5 (SP - 1) PSW, (SP - 2) (PC+2)S, (SP - 3) (PC+2)H, (SP - 4) (PC+2)L, PCS 0000, PCH (0007FH), PCL (0007EH), SP SP - 4, IE 0 RET - 1 6 PCL (SP), PCH (SP+1), PCS (SP+2), SP SP+4 RETI - 2 6 PCL (SP), PCH (SP+1), R R R R R R PCS (SP+2), PSW (SP+3), SP SP+4 RETB - 2 6 PCL (SP), PCH (SP+1), PCS (SP+2), PSW (SP+3), SP SP+4 Notes 1. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Remark Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1676 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (17/18) Instruction Group Stack Mnemon Operands Bytes ic PUSH PSW Clocks Clocks Note 1 Note 2 1 2 Flag Z AC CY (SP 1) PSW, (SP 2) 00H, SP SP2 manipulate rp 1 1 (SP 1) rpH, (SP 2) rpL, SP SP - 2 PSW 2 3 PSW (SP+1), SP SP + 2 rp 1 1 rpL (SP), rpH (SP+1), SP SP + 2 SP, #word 4 1 SP word SP, AX 2 1 SP AX AX, SP 2 1 AX SP HL, SP 3 1 HL SP BC, SP 3 1 BC SP DE, SP 3 1 DE SP ADDW SP, #byte 2 1 SP SP + byte SUBW SP, #byte 2 1 SP SP byte BR AX 2 3 PC CS, AX $addr20 2 3 PC PC + 2 + jdisp8 $!addr20 3 3 PC PC + 3 + jdisp16 !addr16 3 3 PC 0000, addr16 !!addr20 4 3 POP MOVW Unconditio nal branch Conditional BC branch BNC $addr20 $addr20 2 2 PC addr20 2/4 Note3 PC PC + 2 + jdisp8 if CY = 1 2/4 Note3 PC PC + 2 + jdisp8 if CY = 0 Note3 PC PC + 2 + jdisp8 if Z = 1 BZ $addr20 2 2/4 BNZ $addr20 2 2/4 Note3 PC PC + 2 + jdisp8 if Z = 0 BH $addr20 3 2/4 Note3 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (ZCY)=0 BNH $addr20 3 2/4 Note3 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (ZCY)=1 4 3/5 Note3 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (saddr).bit = 1 3/5 Note3 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 1 3/5 Note3 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 1 3/5 Note3 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 1 Note3 6/7 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 1 7/8 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (ES, HL).bit = 1 BT saddr.bit, $addr20 sfr.bit, $addr20 A.bit, $addr20 PSW.bit, $addr20 4 3 4 [HL].bit, $addr20 3 3/5 ES:[HL].bit, 4 4/6 Note3 R R R $addr20 Notes 1. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. 3. This indicates the number of clocks "when condition is not met/when condition is met". Remark Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1677 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET Table 33-5. Operation List (18/18) Instruction Mnemonic Operands Bytes Group Condition Clocks Note 1 BF saddr.bit, $addr20 al branch sfr.bit, $addr20 A.bit, $addr20 4 4 3 Clocks Note 2 Flag Z 3/5 Note3 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (saddr).bit = 0 3/5 Note3 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 0 3/5 Note3 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 0 Note3 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 0 PSW.bit, $addr20 4 3/5 [HL].bit, $addr20 3 3/5 Note3 6/7 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 0 ES:[HL].bit, 4 4/6 Note3 7/8 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (ES, HL).bit = 0 4 3/5 Note3 4 3/5 Note3 3/5 Note3 AC CY $addr20 BTCLR saddr.bit, $addr20 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (saddr).bit = 1 then reset (saddr).bit sfr.bit, $addr20 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 1 then reset sfr.bit A.bit, $addr20 3 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 1 then reset A.bit PSW.bit, $addr20 4 3/5 Note3 3 3/5 Note3 4/6 Note3 PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 1 x x x then reset PSW.bit [HL].bit, $addr20 PC PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 1 then reset (HL).bit ES:[HL].bit, 4 $addr20 Conditional skip 2 1 Next instruction skip if CY = 1 SKNC 2 1 Next instruction skip if CY = 0 SKZ 2 1 Next instruction skip if Z = 1 SKNZ 2 1 Next instruction skip if Z = 0 SKH 2 1 Next instruction skip if (ZCY)=0 2 1 Next instruction skip if (ZCY)=1 2 1 RBS[1:0] n SEL control Notes 1. then reset (ES, HL).bit SKC SKNH CPU PC PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (ES, HL).bit = 1 Note4 RBn NOP 1 1 No Operation EI 3 4 IE 1 (Enable Interrupt) DI 3 4 IE 0 (Disable Interrupt) HALT 2 3 Set HALT Mode STOP 2 3 Set STOP Mode Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the internal RAM area, SFR area, or extended SFR area is accessed, or when no data is accessed. 2. Number of CPU clocks (fCLK) when the program memory area is accessed. 3. This indicates the number of clocks "when condition is not met/when condition is met". 4. n indicates the number of register banks (n = 0 to 3) Remark Number of clock is when program exists in the internal ROM (flash memory) area. If fetching the instruction from the internal RAM area, the number becomes double number plus 3 clocks at a maximum. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1678 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) Cautions 1. RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 have an on-chip debug function, which is provided for development and evaluation. Do not use the on-chip debug function in products designated for mass production, because the guaranteed number of rewritable times of the flash memory may be exceeded when this function is used, and product reliability therefore cannot be guaranteed. Renesas Electronics is not liable for problems occurring when the on-chip debug function is used. 2. With products not provided with an EVDD0, EVDD1, EVSS0, or EVSS1 pin, replace EVDD0 and EVDD1 with VDD, or replace EVSS0 and EVSS1 with VSS. 3. The pins mounted depending on the product. For details, refer to 1.5 Pin Configurations and 2.1 Pin Function List. 4. The products are classified into the following five groups according to the product type, pin count, and code flash memory size. In this chapter, the products are referred to by group names depending on the content. In this case, refer to the following classification. Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group D: RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1679 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings (1/2) Parameter Supply voltage Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit -0.5 to +6.5 V -0.5 to +6.5 V -0.5 to +0.3 V EVSS0 = EVSS1 -0.5 to +0.3 V REGC -0.3 to +2.8 VDD EVDD0, EVDD0 = EVDD1 EVDD1 VSS EVSS0, EVSS1 REGC pin input VIREGC voltage V and -0.3 to VDD+0.3 Input voltage VI1 P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 4, P106, Note 1 -0.3 to EVDD0+0.3 and -0.3 to VDD+0.3 V Note 2 P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 VI2 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note 4, P100 to P105, -0.3 to VDD+0.3Note 2 V -0.3 to EVDD0+0.3 V P121 to P124, P137, RESET Output voltage VO1 P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 4, P106, and -0.3 to VDD+0.3 Note 2 P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 Analog input voltage VO2 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note 4, P100 to P105 VAI1 ANI24 to ANI30 -0.3 to VDD+0.3 V -0.3 to EVDD0+0.3 and V -0.3 to AVREF(+)+0.3 VAI2 ANI0 to ANI23 Notes 2, 3 -0.3 to VDD+0.3 and V -0.3 to AVREF(+)+0.3Notes 2, 3 Notes 1. Connect the REGC pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1F). This value regulates the absolute maximum rating of the REGC pin. Do not use this pin with voltage applied to it. 2. Must be 6.5 V or lower. 3. For pins to be used in A/D conversion, the voltage should not exceed the value AVREF (+) + 0.3. 4. For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1680 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (2/2) Parameter Output current, high Symbol IOH1 Conditions Per pin P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to Ratings Unit -40 mA -70 mA -100 mA -0.5 mA -2 mA 40 mA 70 mA 100 mA P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 Total of all P01, P02, P40 to P47, P92 to P97Note, pins P120, P125 to P127, P150 to P153 -170 mA P00, P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P130, P140, P154 to P157 IOH2 Per pin P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note, P100 Total of all to P105 pins Output current, low IOL1 Per pin P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 Total of all P01, P02, P40 to P47, P92 to P97Note, pins P120, P125 to P127, P150 to P153 170 mA P00, P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P130, P140, P154 to P157 IOL2 Per pin P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note, P100 1 mA Total of all to P105 5 mA -40 to +105 C -65 to +150 C pins Operating ambient TA temperature In flash memory programming mode Storage temperature Note In normal operation mode Tstg For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1681 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.2 Oscillator Characteristics 34.2.1 Main System Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Resonator Recommended Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 20.0 MHz Circuit X1 clock oscillation frequency (fx) 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V Ceramic resonator/ VSS X1 Crystal resonator C1 1.0 X2 Rd C2 Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. Keep the wiring length as short as possible. Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. Customers are requested to consult the resonator manufacturer to select an appropriate resonator and to determine the proper oscillation constant. Customers are also requested to adequately evaluate the oscillation on their system. Determine the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time using the oscillation stabilization time of the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) and the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization time with the resonator to be used. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1682 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.2.2 On-chip Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Oscillators High-speed on-chip oscillator Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit fIH 1 64 MHz - -2 +2 % clock frequencyNote High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency accuracy Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency Low-speed on-chip oscillator 15 fIL, kHz fWDT - -15 +15 % clock frequency accuracy Note High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency is selected with bits 0 to 4 of the option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and bits 0 to 2 of the HOCODIV register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1683 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.2.3 Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Resonator Recommended Item Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 29.0 32.768 35.0 kHz Circuit XT1 clock oscillation frequency 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V Crystal resonator VSS XT1 C3 XT2 Rd (fXT) C4 Cautions 1. When using the XT1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. Keep the wiring length as short as possible. Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. The XT1 oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power consumption and thus required to be adequately evaluated on the system. Customers are requested to consult the resonator manufacturer to select an appropriate resonator and to determine the proper oscillation constant. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1684 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.2.4 PLL Circuit Characteristics (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Resonator Symbol Note 1 PLL input enable clock frequency PLL output frequency (center value) fPLLI fPLL Conditions Long-term jitter tLJ TYP. MAX. Unit PLLMUL = 0 PLLDIV0 = 0 3.92 4.0 4.08 MHz PLLDIV0 = 1 7.84 8.0 8.16 MHz PLLMUL = 1 PLLDIV0 = 0 3.92 4.0 4.08 MHz PLLDIV0 = 1 7.84 8.0 8.16 MHz PLLMUL = 0 PLLMUL = 1 Notes 2, 3 MIN. PLLDIV0 = 0 fPLLI x 12/2 MHz PLLDIV0 = 1 fPLLI x 12/4 MHz PLLDIV0 = 0 fPLLI x 16/2 MHz PLLDIV0 = 1 fPLLI x 16/4 MHz fPLL = 24 MHz (480 counts) -2 +2 ns fPLL = 32 MHz (640 counts) -2 +2 ns fPLL = 48 MHz (960 counts) -2 +2 ns fPLL = 64 MHz (1280 counts) -2 +2 ns Notes 1. If the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is to be selected as the PLL input clock, the minimum and maximum values will reflect the range of accuracy of the oscillation frequency by the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock. 2. Guaranteed by design, but not tested before shipment. 3. Indicates 20 s. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1685 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.3 DC Characteristics 34.3.1 Pin Characteristics For the relationship between the port pins shown in the following tables and the products, refer to CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS. (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (1/4) Items Symbol Note Output current, high IOH1 1 Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Per pin for P00 to P03, P10 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -5.0 mA to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -3.0 mA Per pin for P10, P12, P14, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -0.6 mA P30,P120,P140 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -0.2 mA Total of P01, P02, P40 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -20.0 mA P47, P92 to P97Note 3, P120, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -10.0 mA Total of P00, P03, P10 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -30.0 mA P17, P30 to P32, P50 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -19.0 mA Total of all pins 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -50.0 mA (for duty factors 70%Note 2) 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -29.0 mA Per pin for P33, P34, P80 to 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V -0.1 mA 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V -2.0 mA P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 3, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to 157 (special slew rate) P125 to P127, P150 to P153 (for duty factors 70%Note 2) P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P130, P140, P154 to P157 (for duty factors 70%Note 2) IOH2 P87, P90 to P97Note 3, P100 to P105 Total of all pins (for duty factors 70%Note 2) <R> Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from pins EVDD0, EVDD1 and VDD to an output pin. 2. These output current values are obtained under the condition that the duty factor is no greater than 70%. The output current values when the duty factor is changed to a value greater than 70% can be calculated from the following expression (when the duty factor is changed to n%). Total output current of pins (IOH 0.7)/(n 0.01) <Example> Where n = 80% and IOH = -10.0 mA Total output current of pins = (-10.0 0.7)/(80 0.01) -8.7 mA However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor. A current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin. 3. For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 do not output high level in N-ch open-drain mode. P10 to P12 and P70 to P72 of the Group A products do not support N-ch open-drain mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1686 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (2/4) Items Symbol Note 1 Output current, low IOL1 Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Per pin for P00 to P03, P10 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 8.5 mA to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 4.0 mA Per pin for P10, P12, P14, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 0.59 mA P30, P120, P140 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 0.07 mA Total of P01, P02, P40 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 20.0 mA P47, P92 to P97Note 3, P120, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 15.0 mA Total of P00, P03, P10 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 45.0 mA P17, P30 to P32, P50 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 35.0 mA Total of all pins 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 65.0 mA (for duty factors 70%Note 2) 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 50.0 mA Per pin for P33, P34, P80 to 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.4 mA 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 5.0 mA P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 3, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to 157 (special slew rate) P125 to P127, P150 to P153 (for duty factors 70%Note 2) P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P130, P140, P154 to P157 (for duty factors 70%Note 2) IOL2 P87, P90 to P97Note 3, P100 to P105 Total of all pins (for duty factors 70%Note 2) <R> Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows to the EVSS0, EVSS1 and VSS pins from an output pin. 2. These output current values are obtained under the condition that the duty factor is no greater than 70%. The output current values when the duty factor is changed to a value greater than 70% can be calculated from the following expression (when the duty factor is changed to n%). Total output current of pins (IOL 0.7)/(n 0.01) <Example> Where n = 80% and IOL = 10.0 mA Total output current of pins = (10.0 0.7)/(80 0.01) 8.7 mA However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor. A current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin. 3. For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1687 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (3/4) Items Symbol Input voltage, high VIH1 Conditions P00 to P03, P10 to P17, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V MIN. 0.65 TYP. MAX. EV Note DD0 EVDD0 1 0.7 EVDD0 EVDD0Note Unit V V 1 P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 (Schmitt 1 mode) VIH2 P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 0.8 EVDD0 V 1 P17, P30, P43, P50, P52 to P54, P60 to P63, P70, P71, EVDD0Note 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V P73, P75 to P77, P107, 0.85 EVDD0Note EVDD0 1 2.2 EVDD0Note V P125, P150, P152, P153 (Schmitt 3 mode) VIH3 P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P70, P71, P73, P125 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 2.0 (TTL mode) VIH4Note 2 V 1 P17, P30, P54, P62, P63, EVDD0Note V 1 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0.8 VDD VDD V to P97, P100 to P105, P137 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.85 VDD VDD V RESET 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0.65 VDD VDD V (fixed to Schmitt 1 mode) 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.7 VDD VDD V P121 to P124, EXCLK, 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0.8 VDD VDD V EXCLKS 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.8 VDD VDD V (fixed to Schmitt 3 mode) VIH5 VIH6 (fixed to Schmitt 2 mode) Notes 1. The maximum value of VIH of the pins P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 is EVDD0, even in N-ch open-drain mode. 2. P92 to P96 of the Group A products are fixed to Schmitt 1 mode. P96 and P97 of the Group B, C, and D products are fixed to Schmitt 1 mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1688 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (4/4) Items Input voltage, low Symbol VIL1 Conditions MAX. Unit 0 0.35 EVDD0 V 0 0.3 EVDD0 V 0 0.5 EVDD0 V 0 0.4 EVDD0 V 0 0.8 V 0 0.5 V 0 0.5 VDD V 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0 0.4 VDD V P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V MIN. TYP. P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 (Schmitt 1 mode) VIL2 P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P17, P30, P43, P50, P52 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V P54, P60 to P63, P70, P71, P73, P75 to P77, P107, P125, P150, P152, P153 (Schmitt 3 mode) VIL3 P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P17, P30, P54, P62, P63, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V P70, P71, P73, P125 (TTL mode) VIL4 Note P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V P97, P100 to P105, P137 (fixed to Schmitt 3 mode) VIL5 VIL6 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0 0.35 VDD V (fixed to Schmitt 1 mode) 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0 0.3 VDD V P121 to P124, EXCLK, 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0 0.2 VDD V EXCLKS 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0 0.2 VDD V RESET (fixed to Schmitt 2 mode) Note P92 to P96 of the Group A products are fixed to Schmitt 1 mode. P96 and P97 of the Group B, C, and D products are fixed to Schmitt 1 mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1689 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (1/2) Items Symbol Output voltage, high VOH1 Conditions P00 to P03, P10 to P17, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, IOH1 = -5.0 mA P50 to P57, P60 to P67, 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 IOH1 = -3.0 mA 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOH1 = -1.0 mA MIN. TYP. MAX. EVDD0- Unit V 0.9 EVDD0- V 0.7 EVDD0- V 0.5 (normal slew rate) VOH2 VOH3 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V to P97Note, P100 to P105 IOH2 = -100 A P10, P12, P14, P30, P120, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P140 IOH3 = -0.6 mA (special slew rate) 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOH3 = -0.2 mA Output voltage, low VOL1 P00 to P03, P10 to P17, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, IOL1 = 8.5 mA P50 to P57, P60 to P67, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 (normal slew rate) VDD-0.5 V EVDD0- V 0.8 EVDD0- V 0.5 0.7 V 0.4 V 0.7 V 0.4 V 0.4 V 0.8 V 0.5 V IOL1 = 4.0 mA 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOL1 = 4.0 mA 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOL1 = 1.5 mA VOL2 VOL3 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V to P97Note, P100 to P105 IOL2 = 400 A P10, P12, P14, P30, P120, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P140 IOL3 = 0.6 mA (special slew rate) 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOL3 = 0.07 mA Note For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 do not output high level in N-ch open-drain mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1690 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (2/2) Items Symbol Input leakage ILIH1 current, high Conditions P00 to P03, P10 to P17, MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit VI = EVDD0 1 A VI = VDD 1 A 1 A 10 A VI = EVSS0 -1 A VI = VSS -1 A -1 A -10 A 100 k P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 ILIH2 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97 Note, P100 to P105, P137, RESET ILIH3 P121 to P124 VI = VDD In input port or (X1, X2, XT1, XT2, external clock EXCLK, EXCLKS) input In resonator connection Input leakage ILIL1 current, low P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97 Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 ILIL2 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note, P100 to P105, P137, RESET ILIL3 P121 to P124 VI = VSS In input port or (X1, X2, XT1, XT2, external clock EXCLK, EXCLKS) input In resonator connection On-chip pull-up RU resistance P00 to P03, P10 to P17, VI = EVSS0, in input port 10 20 P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97, P100 to P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 Note For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 do not output high level in N-ch open-drain mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1691 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.3.2 Supply Current Characteristics (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (1/3) Items Supply currentNote 1 Symbol IDD1 Conditions Operating Normal High-speed mode operation on-chip Note 2 oscillator clock operation MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 6.5 14.0 mA 6.1 13.0 mA 1.0 2.5 mA 4.2 9.0 mA 0.9 2.5 mA 6.4 14.0 mA 6.3 13.5 mA 6.1 13.0 mA Groups A to D 6.0 50.0 A Group E 6.0 70.0 A Groups A to D 3.0 40.0 A Group E 3.0 60.0 A fIH = 64 MHz fCLK = 32 MHz Notes 3, 4 fIH = 32 MHz fCLK = fIHNotes 3, 4 fIH = 1 MHz fCLK = fIHNotes 3, 4 Resonator fMX = 20 MHz fCLK = fMXNotes 3, 5 operation fMX = 1 MHz fCLK = fMXNotes 3, 5 Resonator operation (PLL fPLL = 64 MHz, fCLK = 32 MHz fMX = 8 MHz Notes 3, 6 fPLL = 32 MHz, fCLK = 32 MHz fMX = 8 MHz Notes 3, 6 fPLL = 32 MHz, fCLK = 32 MHz fMX = 4 MHz Notes 3, 6 Subsystem fSUB = 32.768 fCLK = fSUBNote 7 clock kHz operation) (PLL input clock = fMX) operation Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock operation fIL = 15 kHz fCLK = fILNote 8 Notes 1. Total current flowing into VDD and EVDD0, including the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin is fixed to VDD, EVDD0, VSS, or EVSS0. However, not including the current flowing into the I/O buffer and on-chip pull-up/pull-down resistors. 2. Current drawn when all the CPU instructions are executed. 3. The values below the MAX. column include the peripheral operation current (except for background operation (BGO)). However, the LVD circuit, A/D converter, D/A converter, and comparator are stopped. 4. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 5. When subsystem clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 6. When subsystem clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 7. When high-speed system clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator are stopped. 8. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, and high-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. Remarks 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. fMX: High-speed system clock frequency fSUB: Subsystem clock frequency fPLL: PLL clock frequency fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1692 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (2/3) Items Symbol Supply Conditions HALT Normal High-speed on- currentNotes 1, mode operation chip oscillator 3 Note 2 Note 4 clock operation IDD2 Resonator operation MIN. fIH = 64 MHz fCLK = 32 MHz mA fIH = 1 MHz fCLK = fIHNote 6 0.3 1.5 mA fMX = 20 MHz fCLK = fMXNote 7 0.6 6.0 mA Note 7 0.2 1.5 mA 1.1 10.0 mA 1.0 9.5 mA 0.8 9.0 mA 0.7 45.0 A 0.7 65.0 Groups A to D 0.7 35.0 Group E 0.7 55.0 fPLL = 64 MHz, fCLK = 32 MHz Note 8 (PLL fPLL = 32 MHz, fCLK = 32 MHz fMX = 8 MHz Note 8 fPLL = 32 MHz, fCLK = 32 MHz fMX = 4 MHz Note 8 Subsystem fSUB = 32.768 fCLK = fSUBNote 9 clock kHz Groups A to D Group E chip oscillator clock operation IDD3 STOP TA = +25C mode Note 5 TA = +50C TA = +70C TA = +105C mA 9.0 fMX = 8 MHz Low-speed on- 10.0 1.0 operation operation 1.2 fCLK = fIHNote 6 Resonator clock = fMX) Unit fIH = 32 MHz fCLK = fMX (PLL input MAX. Note 6 fMX = 1 MHz operation) TYP. fIL = 15 kHz fCLK = f Note 10 IL Groups A to D 0.5 Group E 0.5 A A Groups A to D 2.5 Group E 4.5 Groups A to D 4.5 Group E 8.0 Groups A to D 30.0 Group E 50.0 Notes 1. Total current flowing into VDD and EVDD0, including the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin is fixed to VDD, EVDD0, VSS, or EVSS0. However, not including the current flowing into the I/O buffer and on-chip pull-up/pull-down resistors. 2. When HALT mode is entered during fetch from the flash memory. 3. The values below the MAX. column include the peripheral operation current and STOP leakage current. However, the watchdog timer, LVD circuit, A/D converter, D/A converter, and comparator are stopped 4. Current flowing when all the instructions are executed by the CPU. 5. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and lowspeed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 6. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 7. When subsystem clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 8. When subsystem clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1693 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 9. When high-speed system clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 10. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, and high-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. Remarks 1. fMX: High-speed system clock frequency 2. fSUB: Subsystem clock frequency 3. fPLL: PLL clock frequency 4. fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency 5. fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency 6. fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1694 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (3/3) Items Symbol Supply ISNOZ Conditions SNOOZE mode currentNotes 1, MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit A/D converter During mode transition 1.0 1.2 mA operation During Low-voltage mode 2.1 2.5 mA conversion AVREFP = VDD = 5.0 V 2 DTC operation 4.5 mA Notes 1. Total current flowing into VDD and EVDD0, including the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin is fixed to VDD, EVDD0, VSS, or EVSS0. However, not including the current flowing into the I/O buffer and on-chip pull-up/pull-down resistors. 2. The values below the MAX. column include the STOP leakage current. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1695 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Window watchdog Symbol IWDT Notes 1, 2 Conditions fIL = 15 kHz MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit A 0.22 timer operating current A/D converter IADCNote 3 operating current When Normal mode, AVREFP = VDD = 5.0 V 1.3 1.7 mA conversion at maximum speed 75.0 A ILVDNote 4 0.08 A ITMPS 75.0 A When internal reference voltage is selectedNote 5 LVD operating current Temperature sensor operating current D/A converter IDAC Per channel 0.8 1.5 mA operating current Comparator operating ICMP 50.0 IBGONote 6 2.50 A current BGO operating 12.20 mA current Notes 1. When the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock and high-speed system clock are stopped. 2. Current flowing only to the watchdog timer (including the operation current of the 1.5 kHz on-chip oscillator). The current value is the sum of IDD1, IDD2, or IDD3 and IWDT when the watchdog timer operates in STOP mode. 3. Current flowing only to the A/D converter. The current value is the sum of IDD1 or IDD2 and IADC when the A/D converter operates in operation mode or HALT mode. 4. Current flowing only to the LVD circuit. The current value is the sum of IDD1, IDD2, or IDD3 and ILVD when the LVD circuit operates in operation mode, HALT mode, or STOP mode. 5. Operating current that increases when the internal reference voltage is selected. This current flows even when conversion is stopped. 6. Current increased by the BGO operation. The current value is the sum of IDD1 or IDD2 and IBGO when the BGO operates in operation mode or HALT mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1696 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.4 AC Characteristics 34.4.1 Basic Operation (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (1/2) Parameter Symbol Instruction cycle (minimum TCY instruction execution time) Conditions High-speed on-chip oscillator clock operation High-speed system clock operation PLL clock operation Subsystem clock operation MIN. MAX. Unit 0.03125 1 s 0.05 1 s 0.03125 1 s 34.5 s 28.5 Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock operation TYP. 30.5 s 66.6 0.03125 1 s fCLK 0.03125 66.6 s External system clock fEX 1.0 20.0 MHz frequency fEXS 29 35 kHz In self programming mode CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency External system clock input high-level width, low-level width tEXH, tEXL 24 ns tEXHS, 13.7 s 1/fMCK+10 ns tEXLS TI00 to TI07, TI10 to TI17 tTIH, input high-level width, low- tTIL level width TO00 to TO07, TO10 to fTO TO17 output frequency All TO pins, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 16 MHz Normal slew rate, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 8 MHz 2 MHz C = 30 pF TO01, TO06, TO07, TO11, TO13 only, Special slew rate, C = 30 pF PCLBUZ0 output frequency fPCL Normal slew rate 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 16 MHz C = 30 pF 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 8 MHz 2 MHz Special slew rate C = 30 pF Timer RJ input cycle Timer RJ input high-level width, low-level width tC TRJIO0 100 ns tWH, TRJIO0 40 ns INTP0 to INTP13 Note 1 s tWL Interrupt input high-level tINTH, width, low-level width tINTL KR0 to KR7 key interrupt tKR 250 ns tRSL 10 s tinput low-level width RESET low-level width <R> Note Pins RESET, INTP0 to INTP3, INTP12, and INTP13 have noise filters for transient levels lasting less than 100 ns. Caution Excluding the error in oscillation frequency accuracy. Remark fMCK: Timer array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1697 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Port output rise time, port Conditions tRO, tFO output fall time MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit P00 to P03, P10 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 25 ns P17, P30 to P32, P40 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 55 ns 60 ns 100 ns to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P96, P97, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to 157 (normal slew rate) C = 30 pF P10, P12, P14, P30, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P120, P140 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 25 Note (special slew rate) C = 30 pF Note TA = +25C, EVDD0 = 5.0 V Caution Excluding the error in oscillation frequency accuracy. Remark fMCK: Timer array unit operation clock frequency AC Timing Test Points VIH VIH Test points VIL VIL External System Clock Timing 1/fEX tEXL EXCLK R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 tEXH 0.8 VDD (MIN.) 0.2 VDD (MAX.) 1698 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) TI/TO Timing tTIH tTIL TI00 to TI07, TI10 to TI17 1/fTO TO00 to TO07, TO10 to TO17 Interrupt Request Input Timing tINTH tINTL INTP0 to INTP13 Key Interrupt Input Timing tKR KR0 to KR7 RESET Input Timing tRSL RESET Output Rising and Falling Timing tRO tFO Output pin R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1699 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.5 Peripheral Functions Characteristics 34.5.1 Serial Array Unit (1) During communication at same potential (UART mode) (dedicated baud rate generator output) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Transfer rate Conditions MIN. TYP. - MAX. Unit fMCK/6 bps fCLK = 32 MHz, Normal slew rate 5.3 Mbps fMCK = fCLK Special slew rate 2 Mbps UART mode connection diagram (during communication at same potential) Rx TxD0, TxD1 RL78 microcontroller User's device RxD0, RxD1 Tx UART mode bit width (during communication at same potential) (reference) 1/Transfer rate High-/low-level bit width Baud-rate tolerance TxD0, TxD1 RxD0, RxD1 Caution Select the normal input buffer for the RxD0 pin and RxD1 pin and normal output mode for the TxD0 pin and TxD1 pin. Remark fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1700 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (2) During communication at same potential (CSI mode) (master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output, normal slew rate) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Note 5 Unit SCKp cycle time tKCY1 SCKp high-level width, low- tKH1, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V tKCY1/2 - 12 ns level width tKL1 2.7 V EVDD0 4.0 V tKCY1/2 - 18 ns SIp setup time tSIK1 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 44 ns (to SCKp)Note 1 125 2.7 V EVDD0 4.0 V tKSI1 SIp hold time ns 55 ns 30 ns (from SCKp)Note 2 Delay time from SCKp to SOp output tKSO1 C = 30 pFNote 4 40 ns Note 3 Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 4. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines. 5. tKCY1 4/fCLK must also be satisfied. Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp pin and normal output mode for the SOp pin and SCKp pin. Remark p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1701 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (3) During communication at same potential (CSI mode) (master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output, special slew rate) (TA = -40 to +105C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol SCKp cycle time tKCY1 SCKp high-level width, tKH1, low-level width tKL1 SIp setup time Conditions MIN. 500 TYP. MAX. Note 5 Unit ns tKCY1/2 - 60 ns tSIK1 120 ns tKSI1 80 ns Note 1 (to SCKp) SIp hold time (from SCKp)Note 2 Delay time from SCKp to SOp output tKSO1 C = 30 pFNote 4 90 ns Note 3 Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 4. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines. 5. tKCY1 4/fCLK must also be satisfied. Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp pin and normal output mode and special slew rate for the SOp pin and SCKp pin. Remark p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1702 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (4) During communication at same potential (CSI mode) (slave mode, SCKp ... external clock input, normal slew rate) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit SCKp cycle time tKCY2 8/fMCK ns SCKp high-level width, low-level tKH2, tKCY2/2 ns width tKL2 1/fMCK + ns tSIK2 SIp setup time 20 Note 1 (to SCKp) tKSI2 SIp hold time 1/fMCK + ns 31 Note 2 (from SCKp) Delay time from SCKp to SOp tKSO2 C = 30 pFNote 4 4.0V VDD = EVDD0 = EVDD1 5.5V outputNote 3 2.7V VDD = EVDD0 = EVDD1 < 4.0V SSIp setup time tSSIK 2/fMCK + 44 ns 2/fMCK + 57 ns DAP = 0 120 ns DAP = 1 1/fMCK + ns 120 SSIp hold time tKSSI DAP = 0 1/fMCK + ns 120 DAP = 1 120 ns Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 4. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines. Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp, SCKp and SSIp pins and normal output mode for the SOp pin. Remarks 1. 2. p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1703 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (5) During communication at same potential (CSI mode) (slave mode, SCKp ... external clock input, special slew rate) (TA = -40 to +105C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter SCKp cycle time Symbol tKCY2 Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 20 MHz fMCK 10/fMCK ns 10 MHz fMCK 20 MHz 8/fMCK ns fMCK 10 MHz 6/fMCK ns tKCY2/2 ns SCKp high-level width, low-level tKH2, width tKL2 SIp setup time tSIK2 1/fMCK + 50 ns tKSI2 1/fMCK + 50 ns (to SCKp)Note1 SIp hold time Note 2 (from SCKp) tKSO2 C = 30 pFNote 4 SSIp setup time tSSIK DAP = 0 120 ns DAP = 1 1/fMCK + 120 ns SSIp hold time tKSSI DAP = 0 1/fMCK + 120 ns DAP = 1 120 ns Delay time from SCKp to SOp output 2/fMCK + 80 ns Note 3 Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 4. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines. Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp, SCKp and SSIp pins and normal output mode and special slew rate for the SOp pin. Remarks 1. 2. p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1704 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) CSI mode connection diagram (during communication at same potential) <Master> <Slave> SCK SCKp RL78 microcontroller SIp SCKp SO User's device SOp SI SSIp RL78 microcontroller SCK SIp SO SOp SI SSIp SSO User's device CSI mode serial transfer timing (during communication at same potential) (When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1) Remark p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1705 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) CSI mode serial transfer timing (during communication at same potential) (When DAPmn= 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0) tKCY1, 2 tKH1, 2 tKL1, 2 SCKp tSIK1, 2 SIp tKSI1, 2 Input data tKSO1, 2 SOp Output data tSSIK tKSSI SSIp Remark p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1706 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (6) During communication at same potential (simplified I2C mode) (SDAr: N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode, SCLr: normal output mode) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. 1000 Note Unit kHz SCLr clock frequency fSCL Hold time when SCLr = "L" tLOW 475 ns Hold time when SCLr = "H" tHIGH 475 ns Data setup time (reception) tSU:DAT 1/fMCK + 85 ns Data hold time (transmission) tHD:DAT Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 k 0 305 ns Note fCLK fMCK/4 must also be satisfied. Simplified I2C mode connection diagram (during communication at same potential) VDD Rb SDA SDAr RL78 microcontroller User's device SCLr SCL Simplified I2C mode serial transfer timing (during communication at same potential) 1/fSCL tLOW tHIGH SCLr SDAr tHD : DAT Caution tSU : DAT Select the normal input buffer and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SDAr pin and normal output mode for the SCLr pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SDAr) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SCLr, SDAr) load capacitance 2. r: IICr (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) 3. fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1707 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (7) During communication at same potential (simplified I2C mode) (SDAr and SCLr: N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol SCLr clock frequency fSCL Hold time when SCLr = "L" tLOW Conditions MIN. MAX. 400 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, Note Unit kHz 1300 ns 600 ns 1/fMCK + 120 ns 1/fMCK + 270 ns Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.7 k 2.7 V VDD 4.0 V, <R> Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Hold time when SCLr = "H" 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, tHIGH Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.7 k 2.7 V VDD 4.0 V, <R> Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Data setup time (reception) 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, tSU: DAT Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.7 k 2.7 V VDD 4.0 V, <R> Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Data hold time (transmission) 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, tHD: DAT 0 300 ns Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.7 k 2.7 V VDD 4.0 V, <R> Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Note fCLK fMCK/4 must also be satisfied. Simplified I2C mode connection diagram (during communication at same potential) Vb Vb Rb SDAr Rb SDA RL78 microcontroller User's device SCLr Caution SCL Select the normal input buffer and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SDAr pin and SCLr pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) load capacitance, Vb[V]: Communication line voltage 2. r: IICr (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) 3. fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1708 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) Simplified I2C mode serial transfer timing (during communication at same potential) 1/fSCL tLOW tHIGH SCLr SDAr tHD : DAT Remark tSU : DAT r: IICr (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1709 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (8) Communication at different potential (UART mode) (TxD output buffer: N-ch open-drain, RxD input buffer: TTL) (TA = -40 to +105C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Transfer rate Conditions Reception MIN. TYP. 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, VIH = 2.2 V, Theoretical value of the VIL = 0.8 V maximum transfer rate Note MAX. Unit fMCK/6 bps 5.3 Mbps Smaller bps (Cb = 30 pF) Transmission 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, number of the VOH = 2.2 V, values given VOL = 0.8 V by fMCK/6 and expression 1 is applicable. Theoretical value of the 5.3 Mbps maximum transfer rate Note (Cb = 30 pF) Normal slew rate Note Expression 1: Maximum transfer rate = 1 / [{Cb Rb ln (1 2.2/Vb)} 3] UART mode connection diagram (during communication at different potential) Vb Rb Rx TxD0, TxD1 RL78 microcontroller User's device RxD0, RxD1 Tx UART mode bit width (during communication at different potential) (reference) 1/Transfer rate Low-level bit width High-level bit width Baud-rate tolerance TxD0, TxD1 1/Transfer rate High-/low-level bit width Baud-rate tolerance RxD0, RxD1 Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the RxD0 pin and RxD1 pin and N-ch open-drain output mode for the TxD0 pin and TxD1 pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (TxD) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (TxD) load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage 2. fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1710 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (9) During communication at different potential (3-V supply system) (CSI mode) (master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output, normal slew rate) (TA = -40 to +105C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter SCKp cycle time Symbol tKCY1 Conditions 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, MIN. 400 TYP. MAX. Note3 Unit ns Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k SCKp high-level width tKH1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, tKCY1/2 - 75 ns tKCY1/2 - 20 ns 150 ns 70 ns 30 ns 30 ns Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k SCKp low-level width tKL1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k SIp setup time tSIK1 SIp setup time tSIK1 (to SCKp) tKSI1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Note 1 (from SCKp) tKSI1 SIp hold time 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Note 2 SIp hold time 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k (to SCKp)Note 1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Note 2 (from SCKp) Delay time from SCKp to SOp outputNote1 tKSO1 Delay time from SCKp to SOp outputNote2 tKSO1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, 120 ns 40 ns Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. tKCY1 4/fCLK must also be satisfied. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1711 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) CSI mode connection diagram (during communication at different potential) <Master> Vb Vb Rb SCKp RL78 microcontroller SIp SOp Rb SCK SO User's device SI SSIp Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the SIp pin and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SOp pin and SCKp pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SCKp, SOp) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SOp, SCKp) load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage 2. p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) 3. AC characteristics of the serial array unit during communication at different potential in CSI mode are measured with the VIH and VIL below: When 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V: VIH = 2.2 V, VIL = 0.8 V R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1712 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) CSI mode serial transfer timing (master mode) (during communication at different potential) (When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1) t KCY1 t KL1 t KH1 SCKp t SIK1 SIp t KSI1 Input data t KSO1 SOp Output data CSI mode serial transfer timing (master mode) (during communication at different potential) (When DAPmn= 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0) t KCY1 t KL1 t KH1 SCKp t SIK1 SIp t KSI1 Input data t KSO1 SOp R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Output data 1713 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (10) During communication at different potential (3-V supply system) (CSI mode) (slave mode, SCKp ... external clock input, normal slew rate) (TA = -40 to +105C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter SCKp cycle time Symbol tKCY2 Conditions 2.7 V Vb VDD 2.7 V Vb VDD MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 24 MHz < fMCK 14/fMCK ns 20 MHz < fMCK 24 MHz 12/fMCK ns 8 MHz < fMCK 20 MHz 10/fMCK ns 4 MHz < fMCK 8 MHz 8/fMCK ns fMCK 4 MHz 6/fMCK ns tKCY2/2 - 20 ns SCKp high-level width, low- tKH2, level width tKL2 SIp setup time tSIK2 90 ns tKSI2 1/fMCK + ns (to SCKp)Note 1 SIp hold time 50 Note 2 (from SCKp) Delay time from SCKp to tKSO2 SOp outputNote 3 SSIp setup time SSIp hold time 2.7 V Vb VDD, 2/fMCK + Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k tSSIK tKSSI ns 120 DAP = 0 120 ns DAP = 1 1/fMCK + 120 ns DAP = 0 1/fMCK + 120 ns DAP = 1 120 ns Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1714 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) CSI mode connection diagram (during communication at different potential) <Slave> Vb Rb SCKp RL78 microcontroller Caution SCK SIp SO SOp SI SSIp SSO User's device Select the TTL input buffer for the SIp, SCKp and SSIp pins and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SOp pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SOp) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SOp) load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage 2. p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) 3. AC characteristics of the serial array unit during communication at different potential in CSI mode are measured with the VIH and VIL below: When 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V: VIH = 2.2 V, VIL = 0.8 V R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1715 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) CSI mode serial transfer timing (slave mode) (during communication at different potential) (When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1) tKCY2 tKL2 tKH2 SCKp tSIK2 SIp tKSI2 Input data tKSO2 Output data SOp tKSSI tSSIK SSIp CSI mode serial transfer timing (slave mode) (during communication at different potential) (When DAPmn= 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0) tKCY2 tKL2 tKH2 SCKp tSIK2 SIp tKSI2 Input data tKSO2 Output data SOp tSSIK tKSSI SSIp R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1716 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (11) During communication at different potential (3-V supply system) (simplified I2C mode) (SDAr: TTL input buffer mode or N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode, SCLr: N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode) (TA = -40 to +105C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter SCLr clock frequency Symbol fSCL Conditions MIN. 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, MAX. Unit 400Note kHz Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Hold time when SCLr = "L" tLOW Hold time when SCLr = "H" tHIGH Data setup time (reception) tSU:DAT 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, 1200 ns 600 ns 135 + 1/fMCK ns Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Data hold time (transmission) tHD:DAT 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, 0 140 ns Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Note fSCL fMCK/4 must also be satisfied. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1717 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) Simplified I2C mode connection diagram (during communication at different potential) Vb Vb Rb Rb SDA SDAr RL78 microcontroller User's device SCLr SCL Simplified I2C mode serial transfer timing (during communication at different potential) 1/fSCL tLOW tHIGH SCLr SDAr tHD : DAT Caution tSU : DAT Select the TTL input buffer and the N-ch open-drain output mode for the SDAr pin and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SCLr pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage 2. fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1718 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.5.2 Serial Interface IICA (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions Normal Mode MIN. fSCL SCLA0 clock frequency MAX. Fast Mode MIN. MAX. Fast mode plus: Fast Mode Plus MIN. MAX. 0 1000 Unit kHz 10 MHz fCLK 0 Fast mode: 400 kHz 3.5 MHz fCLK 0 Normal mode: 100 kHz 1 MHz fCLK Setup time of restart conditionNote 1 tSU:STA 4.7 0.6 0.26 s Hold time tHD:STA 4.0 0.6 0.26 s Hold time when SCLA0 = "L" tLOW 4.7 1.3 0.5 s Hold time when SCLA0 = "H" tHIGH 4.0 0.6 0.26 s Data setup time (reception) tSU:DAT 250 100 50 ns Data hold time (transmission)Note 2 tHD:DAT 0 0 s Setup time of stop condition tSU:STO 4.0 0.6 0.26 s tBUF 4.7 1.3 0.5 s Bus-free time 3.45 0 0.9 Notes 1. The first clock pulse is generated after this period when the start/restart condition is detected. 2. The maximum value (MAX.) of tHD:DAT is during normal transfer and a wait state is inserted in the ACK (acknowledge) timing. Remark The maximum value of Cb (communication line capacitance) and the value of Rb (communication line pull-up resistor) at that time in each mode are as follows. Standard mode: Cb = 400 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Fast mode: Cb = 320 pF, Rb = 1.1 k Fast mode plus: Cb = 120 pF, Rb = 1.1 k IICA serial transfer timing tLOW tR SCLA0 tHD:DAT tHD:STA tHIGH tF tSU:STA tHD:STA tSU:STO tSU:DAT SDAA0 tBUF Stop condition Start condition R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Restart condition Stop condition 1719 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.5.3 On-chip Debug (UART) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Transfer rate Conditions - MIN. TYP. 115.2 k MAX. Unit 1M bps MAX. Unit 5333 kbps 34.5.4 LIN/UART Module (RLIN3) UART Mode (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Transfer rate Symbol - Conditions Operation mode, LIN communication clock source HALT mode (fCLK or fMX): MIN. TYP. 4 to 32 MHz SNOOZE mode LIN communication clock source 4.8 (fCLK): 1 to 32 MHz FRQSEL4 = 0 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) LIN communication clock source 2.4 (fCLK): 1 to 32 MHz FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1720 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.6 Analog Characteristics 34.6.1 A/D Converter Characteristics (1) When AVREF (+) = AVREFP/ANI0 (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 1), AVREF (-) = AVREFM/ANI1 (ADREFM = 1), target ANI pin: ANI2 to ANI23 (power supply: VDD) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V, Reference voltage (+) = AVREFP, Reference voltage (-) = AVREFM = 0 V) Parameter Resolution Symbol Conditions RES Overall error Note 1 Conversion time Zero-scale error Notes 1, 2 AINL tCONV EZS MIN. TYP. 8 MAX. Unit 10 bit 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 1.2 3.0 LSB AVREFP = VDD 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 1.2 3.5 LSB 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.125 39 s AVREFP = VDD 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 3.1875 39 s 10-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.25 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.25 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.5 LSB 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.5 LSB AVREFP = VDD Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EFS 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Integral linearity errorNote 1 ILE 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Differential linearity errorNote 1 DLE 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Reference voltage (+) AVREFP 2.7 VDD V Analog input voltage VAIN 0 AVREFP V Internal reference voltage (+) VBGR 1.5 V 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.38 1.45 Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1721 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (2) When AVREF (+) = AVREFP/ANI0 (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 1), AVREF (-) = AVREFM/ANI1 (ADREFM = 1), target ANI pin: ANI24 to ANI30 (power supply: EVDD0) (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V, Reference voltage (+) = AVREFP, Reference voltage (-) = AVREFM = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Resolution RES Overall errorNote 1 AINL Conversion time Zero-scale errorNotes 1, 2 tCONV EZS Conditions MIN. TYP. 8 MAX. Unit 10 bit 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 1.2 4.5 LSB AVREFP = VDD 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 1.2 5.0 LSB 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.125 39 s AVREFP = VDD 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 3.1875 39 s 10-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.35 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.35 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 3.5 LSB 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.0 LSB AVREFP = VDD Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EFS 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Integral linearity errorNote 1 ILE 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Differential linearity errorNote 1 DLE 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Reference voltage (+) AVREFP 2.7 VDD V Analog input voltage VAIN 0 AVREFP V and EVDD0 Internal reference voltage (+) VBGR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.38 1.45 1.5 V Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1722 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (3) When AVREF (+) = VDD (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 0), AVREF (-) = VSS (ADREFM = 0), target ANI pin: ANI0 to ANI23, ANI24 to ANI30 (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V, Reference voltage (+) = VDD, Reference voltage (-) = VSS) Parameter Symbol Resolution RES Overall errorNote 1 AINL Conversion time Zero-scale error Notes 1, 2 tCONV EZS Conditions MIN. TYP. 8 MAX. Unit 10 bit 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 1.2 5.0 LSB ANI0 to ANI23 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 1.2 5.5 LSB 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 1.2 6.5 LSB ANI24 to ANI30 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 1.2 7.0 LSB 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.125 39 s 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 3.1875 39 s 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.50 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.60 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.50 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.60 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 3.5 LSB 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 LSB 2.0 LSB VDD V EVDD0 V 1.5 V 10-bit resolution ANI0 to ANI23 10-bit resolution ANI24 to ANI30 Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EFS 10-bit resolution ANI0 to ANI23 10-bit resolution ANI24 to ANI30 Integral linearity errorNote 1 ILE 10-bit resolution ANI0 to ANI23 10-bit resolution ANI24 to ANI30 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V Differential linearity errorNote 1 DLE 10-bit resolution Analog input voltage VAIN ANI0 to ANI23Note 3 0 ANI24 to ANI30Note 3 EVSS 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.38 Internal reference voltage (+) VBGR 1.45 Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. 3. The number of pins depends on the product. For details, refer to 2.1 Pin Function List. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1723 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) (4) When AVREF (+) = internal reference voltage (ADREFP1 = 1, ADREFP0 = 0), AVREF (-) = AVREFM/ANI1 (ADREFM = 1), target ANI pin: ANI0 to ANI23, ANI24 to ANI30 (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V, Reference voltage (+) = VBGR, Reference voltage (-) = AVREFM = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Resolution MIN. RES Conversion time Zero-scale error Conditions Notes 1, 2 Integral linearity error Note 1 Differential linearity error Note 1 TYP. MAX. 8 Unit bit 39 s 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.60 %FSR 8-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.0 LSB 8-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.0 LSB 1.5 V VBGR V tCONV 8-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V EZS 8-bit resolution ILE DLE 17 Reference voltage (+) VBGR 1.38 Analog input voltage VAIN 0 1.45 Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1724 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.6.2 Temperatures Sensor Characteristics (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Temperature sensor output Conditions VTMPS25 MIN. Setting ADS register = 80H, TA = +25C TYP. MAX. 1.1 Unit V voltage Reference output voltage VCONST Setting ADS register = 81H Temperature coefficient FVTMPS Temperature sensor that depends on the 1.38 1.45 1.5 -3.3 V mV/C temperature Operation stabilization wait tAMP s 5 time 34.6.3 D/A Converter Characteristics (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Resolution RES Overall error AINL Settling time tSET Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 8 bit Rload = 4 M 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.5 LSB Rload = 8 M 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.5 LSB Cload = 20 pF 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 3 s TYP. MAX. Unit 5 40 mV VDD V 70 200 ns 34.6.4 Comparator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Input offset voltage Input voltage range Response time Symbol Conditions MIN. VIOCMP VICMP 0 tCR, tCF Input amplitude 100 mV tWAIT Input amplitude 100 mV tCMP Stabilization wait time 300 ns 3.3 V VDD 5.5 V 1 s 2.7 V VDD < 3.3 V 3 s during input channel switchingNote 1 Operation stabilization wait timeNote 2 Notes 1. Period of time from when the comparator input channel is switched until the comparator is switched to output 2. Period of time from when the comparator operation is enabled (HCMPON bit in CMPCTL is set to 1) until the comparator satisfies the DC/AC characteristics. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1725 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.6.5 POR Circuit Characteristics (TA = -40 to +105C, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Detection voltage Symbol Note Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit V VPOR Power supply rise time 1.48 1.56 1.62 VPDR Power supply fall time 1.47 1.55 1.61 Minimum pulse width TPW Detection delay time TPD V s 300 350 s Note This indicates the POR circuit characteristics, and normal operation is not guaranteed under the condition of less than lower limit operation voltage (2.7 V). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1726 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.6.6 LVD Circuit Characteristics (1) LVD detection voltage of interrupt mode or reset mode (TA = -40 to +105C, VPDR EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Detection Supply voltage level VLVD0 voltage VLVD1 VLVD2 VLVD3 VLVD4 VLVD5 Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Power supply rise time 4.62 4.74 4.84 V Power supply fall time 4.52 4.64 4.74 V Power supply rise time 4.50 4.62 4.72 V Power supply fall time 4.40 4.52 4.62 V Power supply rise time 4.30 4.42 4.51 V Power supply fall time 4.21 4.32 4.41 V Power supply rise time 3.13 3.22 3.29 V Power supply fall time 3.07 3.15 3.22 V Power supply rise time 2.95 3.02 3.09 V Power supply fall time 2.89 2.96 3.02 V Power supply rise time 2.74 2.81 2.87 V 2.75 2.81 V 300 s Power supply fall time Minimum pulse width tLW Detection delay time tLD 2.68 Note 300 s Note The minimum value exceeds below the lower limit operation voltage (2.7 V), however, in reset mode, normal operation (same behavior when VDD = 2.7 V) is possible until a reset is effected at the power supply falling time. (2) LVD detection voltage of interrupt reset mode (TA = -40 to +105C, VPDR EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Interrupt and reset Symbol VLVD5 Conditions VPOC2, VPOC1, VPOC0 = 0, 0, 1 MIN. Note 1 , TYP. MAX. Unit 2.75 2.81 V 4.30 4.42 4.51 V 4.21 4.32 4.41 V 2.68 Note 2.75 2.81 V 2.68 Note 2 falling reset voltage: 2.75 V mode VLVD2 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 1, 0 Rising release reset voltage Falling interrupt voltage VLVD5 VPOC2, VPOC1, VPOC0 = 0, 1, 0Note 1, 2 falling reset voltage: 2.75 V VLVD1 VLVD5 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 0, 0 Rising release reset voltage 4.50 4.62 4.72 V Falling interrupt voltage 4.40 4.52 4.62 V 2.75 2.81 V VPOC2, VPOC1, VPOC0 = 0, 1, 1 Note 1 , 2 falling reset voltage: 2.75 V VLVD3 VLVD0 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 0, 1 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 0, 0 2.68 Note Rising release reset voltage 3.13 3.22 3.29 V Falling interrupt voltage 3.07 3.15 3.22 V Rising release reset voltage 4.62 4.74 4.84 V Falling interrupt voltage 4.52 4.64 4.74 V Notes 1. These values indicate setting values of option bytes. 2. The minimum value exceeds below the lower limit operation voltage (2.7 V), however, in reset mode, normal operation (same behavior when VDD = 2.7 V) is possible until a reset is effected at the power supply falling time. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1727 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.7 Power Supply Voltage Rising Time (TA = -40 to +105C, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Maximum power supply Conditions Svrmax 0 V VDD (VPOC2 = 0 or Svrmin 0 V 2.7 V MIN. TYP. 1Note 2) MAX. Unit 50Note 3 V/ms voltage rising slope Minimum power supply voltage rising slope Note 1 6.5 V/ms Notes 1. The minimum power supply voltage rising slope is applied only under the following condition. When the voltage detection (LVD) circuit is not used (VPOC2 = 1) and an external reset circuit is not used or when a reset is not effected until VDD = 2.7 V. 2. These values indicate setting values of option bytes. 3. If the power supply drops below VPDR and a POR reset is effected, this specification is also applied when the power supply is recovered without dropping to 0 V. 34.8 STOP Mode Memory Retention Characteristics (TA = -40 to +105C, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Data retention supply voltage Conditions MIN. 1.47Note VDDDR TYP. MAX. Unit 5.5 V Note The value depends on the POR detection voltage. When the voltage drops, the data is retained before a POR reset is effected, but data is not retained when a POR reset is effected. STOP mode Operation mode Data retention mode VDD VDDDR STOP instruction execution Standby release signal (interrupt request) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1728 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) 34.9 Flash Memory Programming Characteristics (TA = -40 to +105C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol System clock frequency Number of code flash rewrites Conditions fCLK Notes 1, 2, 3 Cerwr MIN. TYP. 1 Retained for 20 years (after rewrite) 1,000 MAX. Unit 32 MHz Times TA = +85C Note 4 Number of data flash rewrites Retained for 20 years (after rewrite) Notes 1, 2, 3 TA = +85C 10,000 Note 4 Retained for 5 years (after rewrite) 100,000 TA = +85C Note 4 <R> Erase time Terasa Block erase 5 ms Write time Twrwa 1 word write 10 s Notes 1. 1 erase + 1 write after the erase is regarded as 1 rewrite. The retaining years are until next rewrite after the rewrite. 2. When using flash memory programmer and Renesas Electronics self programming library 3. These are the characteristics of the flash memory and the results obtained from reliability testing by Renesas Electronics Corporation. 4. The specified data retention time is given under the condition that the average temperature (TA) is 85C or below. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1729 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) Cautions 1. RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 have an on-chip debug function, which is provided for development and evaluation. Do not use the on-chip debug function in products designated for mass production, because the guaranteed number of rewritable times of the flash memory may be exceeded when this function is used, and product reliability therefore cannot be guaranteed. Renesas Electronics is not liable for problems occurring when the on-chip debug function is used. 2. With products not provided with an EVDD0, EVDD1, EVSS0, or EVSS1 pin, replace EVDD0 and EVDD1 with VDD, or replace EVSS0 and EVSS1 with VSS. 3. The pins mounted depending on the product. For details, refer to 1.5 Pin Configurations and 2.1 Pin Function List. 4. The products are classified into the following five groups according to the product type, pin count, and code flash memory size. In this chapter, the products are referred to by group names depending on the content. In this case, refer to the following classification. Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group D: RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1730 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings (1/2) Parameter Supply voltage Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit -0.5 to +6.5 V -0.5 to +6.5 V -0.5 to +0.3 V EVSS0 = EVSS1 -0.5 to +0.3 V REGC -0.3 to +2.8 VDD EVDD0, EVDD0 = EVDD1 EVDD1 VSS EVSS0, EVSS1 REGC pin input VIREGC voltage V and -0.3 to VDD+0.3 Input voltage VI1 P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 4, P106, Note 1 -0.3 to EVDD0+0.3 and -0.3 to VDD+0.3 V Note 2 P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 VI2 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note 4, P100 to P105, -0.3 to VDD+0.3Note 2 V -0.3 to EVDD0+0.3 V P121 to P124, P137, RESET Output voltage VO1 P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 4, P106, and -0.3 to VDD+0.3Note 2 P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 Analog input voltage VO2 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note 4, P100 to P105 VAI1 ANI24 to ANI30 -0.3 to VDD+0.3 V -0.3 to EVDD0+0.3 and V -0.3 to AVREF(+)+0.3Notes 2, 3 VAI2 ANI0 to ANI23 -0.3 to VDD+0.3 and -0.3 to AVREF(+)+0.3 V Notes 2, 3 Notes 1. Connect the REGC pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1F). This value regulates the absolute maximum rating of the REGC pin. Do not use this pin with voltage applied to it. 2. Must be 6.5 V or lower. 3. For pins to be used in A/D conversion, the voltage should not exceed the value AVREF (+) + 0.3. 4. For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1731 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (2/2) Parameter Output current, high Symbol IOH1 Conditions Per pin P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to Ratings Unit -40 mA -70 mA -100 mA -0.5 mA -2 mA 40 mA 70 mA 100 mA P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 Total of all P01, P02, P40 to P47, P92 to P97Note, pins P120, P125 to P127, P150 to P153 -170 mA P00, P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P130, P140, P154 to P157 IOH2 Per pin P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note, P100 Total of all to P105 pins Output current, low IOL1 Per pin P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 Total of all P01, P02, P40 to P47, P92 to P97Note, pins P120, P125 to P127, P150 to P153 170 mA P00, P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P130, P140, P154 to P157 IOL2 Per pin P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note, P100 1 mA Total of all to P105 5 mA -40 to +125 C -65 to +150 C pins Operating ambient TA temperature In flash memory programming mode Storage temperature Note In normal operation mode Tstg For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1732 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.2 Oscillator Characteristics 35.2.1 Main System Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Resonator Recommended Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 20.0 MHz Circuit X1 clock oscillation frequency (fx) 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V Ceramic resonator/ VSS X1 Crystal resonator C1 1.0 X2 Rd C2 Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. Keep the wiring length as short as possible. Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. Customers are requested to consult the resonator manufacturer to select an appropriate resonator and to determine the proper oscillation constant. Customers are also requested to adequately evaluate the oscillation on their system. Determine the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time using the oscillation stabilization time of the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) and the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization time with the resonator to be used. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1733 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.2.2 On-chip Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Oscillators High-speed on-chip oscillator Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit fIH 1 48 MHz - -3 +3 % clock frequencyNote High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency accuracy Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency Low-speed on-chip oscillator 15 fIL, kHz fWDT - -15 +15 % clock frequency accuracy Note High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency is selected with bits 0 to 4 of the option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and bits 0 to 2 of the HOCODIV register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1734 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.2.3 Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Resonator Recommended Item Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 29.0 32.768 35.0 kHz Circuit XT1 clock oscillation frequency 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V Crystal resonator VSS XT1 C3 XT2 Rd (fXT) C4 Cautions 1. When using the XT1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. Keep the wiring length as short as possible. Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. The XT1 oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power consumption and thus required to be adequately evaluated on the system. Customers are requested to consult the resonator manufacturer to select an appropriate resonator and to determine the proper oscillation constant. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1735 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.2.4 PLL Circuit Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Resonator Symbol Note 1 PLL input enable clock frequency PLL output frequency (center value) fPLLI fPLL Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit PLLMUL = 0 PLLDIV0 = 0 3.92 4.0 4.08 MHz PLLDIV0 = 1 7.84 8.0 8.16 MHz PLLMUL = 1 PLLDIV0 = 0 3.92 4.0 4.08 MHz PLLDIV0 = 1 7.84 8.0 8.16 MHz PLLMUL = 0 PLLDIV0 = 0 PLLDIV0 = 1 PLLMUL = 1 Note 4 PLLDIV0 = 0 Note 4 PLLDIV0 = 1 Notes 2, 3 Long-term jitter tLJ fPLLI x 12/2 MHz fPLLI x 12/4 MHz fPLLI x 16/2 MHz fPLLI x 16/4 MHz fPLL = 24 MHz (480 counts) -2 +2 ns fPLL = 32 MHz (640 counts) -2 +2 ns fPLL = 48 MHz (960 counts) -2 +2 ns Notes 1. If the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is to be selected as the PLL input clock, the minimum and maximum values will reflect the range of accuracy of the oscillation frequency by the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock. 2. Guaranteed by design, but not tested before shipment. 3. Indicates 20 s. 4. Setting of PLLMUL = 1 and PLLDIV0 = 0 is prohibited when fPLLI > 6 MHz. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1736 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.3 DC Characteristics 35.3.1 Pin Characteristics For the relationship between the port pins shown in the following tables and the products, refer to CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS. (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (1/4) Items Symbol Note Output current, high IOH1 1 Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Per pin for P00 to P03, P10 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -5.0 mA to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -3.0 mA Per pin for P10, P12, P14, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -0.6 mA P30,P120,P140 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -0.2 mA Total of P01, P02, P40 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -20.0 mA P47, P92 to P97Note 3, P120, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -10.0 mA Total of P00, P03, P10 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -30.0 mA P17, P30 to P32, P50 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -19.0 mA Total of all pins 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -42.0 mA (for duty factors 70%Note 2) 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -29.0 mA Per pin for P33, P34, P80 to 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V -0.1 mA 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V -2.0 mA P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 3, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to 157 (special slew rate) P125 to P127, P150 to P153 (for duty factors 70%Note 2) P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P130, P140, P154 to P157 (for duty factors 70%Note 2) IOH2 P87, P90 to P97Note 3, P100 to P105 Total of all pins (for duty factors 70%Note 2) <R> Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from pins EVDD0, EVDD1 and VDD to an output pin. 2. These output current values are obtained under the condition that the duty factor is no greater than 70%. The output current values when the duty factor is changed to a value greater than 70% can be calculated from the following expression (when the duty factor is changed to n%). Total output current of pins (IOH 0.7)/(n 0.01) <Example> Where n = 80% and IOH = -10.0 mA Total output current of pins = (-10.0 0.7)/(80 0.01) -8.7 mA However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor. A current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin. 3. For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 do not output high level in N-ch open-drain mode. P10 to P12 and P70 to P72 of the Group A products. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1737 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (2/4) Items Symbol Note 1 Output current, low IOL1 Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Per pin for P00 to P03, P10 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 8.5 mA to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 4.0 mA Per pin for P10, P12, P14, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 0.59 mA P30, P120, P140 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 0.07 mA Total of P01, P02, P40 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 20.0 mA P47, P92 to P97Note 3, P120, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 15.0 mA Total of P00, P03, P10 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 45.0 mA P17, P30 to P32, P50 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 35.0 mA Total of all pins 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 65.0 mA (for duty factors 70%Note 2) 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 50.0 mA Per pin for P33, P34, P80 to 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.4 mA 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 5.0 mA P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 3, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to 157 (special slew rate) P125 to P127, P150 to P153 (for duty factors 70%Note 2) P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P130, P140, P154 to P157 (for duty factors 70%Note 2) IOL2 P87, P90 to P97Note 3, P100 to P105 Total of all pins (for duty factors 70%Note 2) <R> Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows to the EVSS0, EVSS1 and VSS pins from an output pin. 2. These output current values are obtained under the condition that the duty factor is no greater than 70%. The output current values when the duty factor is changed to a value greater than 70% can be calculated from the following expression (when the duty factor is changed to n%). Total output current of pins (IOL 0.7)/(n 0.01) <Example> Where n = 80% and IOL = 10.0 mA Total output current of pins = (10.0 0.7)/(80 0.01) 8.7 mA However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor. A current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin. 3. For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1738 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (3/4) Items Symbol Input voltage, high VIH1 Conditions P00 to P03, P10 to P17, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V MIN. 0.65 TYP. MAX. EV Note DD0 EVDD0 1 0.7 EVDD0 EVDD0Note Unit V V 1 P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 (Schmitt 1 mode) VIH2 P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 0.8 EVDD0 P73, P75 to P77, P107, V 1 P17, P30, P43, P50, P52 to P54, P60 to P63, P70, P71, EVDD0Note 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V P125, P150, P152, P153 0.85 EVDD0Note EVDD0 1 2.2 EVDD0Note V (Schmitt 3 mode) VIH3 P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P70, P71, P73, P125 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 2.0 (TTL mode) VIH4Note 2 V 1 P17, P30, P54, P62, P63, EVDD0Note V 1 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0.8 VDD VDD V to P97, P100 to P105, P137 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.85 VDD VDD V (fixed to Schmitt 3 mode) VIH5 VIH6 RESET 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0.65 VDD VDD V (fixed to Schmitt 1 mode) 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.7 VDD VDD V P121 to P124, EXCLK, 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0.8 VDD VDD V EXCLKS 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.8 VDD VDD V (fixed to Schmitt 2 mode) Notes 1. The maximum value of VIH of the pins P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 is EVDD0, even in N-ch open-drain mode. 2. P92 to P96 of the Group A products are fixed to Schmitt 1 mode. P96 and P97 of the Group B, C, and D products are fixed to Schmitt 1 mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1739 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (4/4) Items Input voltage, low Symbol VIL1 Conditions MAX. Unit 0 0.35 V 0 0.3 EVDD0 V 0 0.5 EVDD0 V 0 0.4 EVDD0 V 0 0.8 V 0 0.5 V 0 0.5 VDD V 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0 0.4 VDD V P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V MIN. TYP. EVDD0 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 (Schmitt 1 mode) VIL2 P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P17, P30, P43, P50, P52 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V P54, P60 to P63, P70, P71, P73, P75 to P77, P107, P125, P150, P152, P153 (Schmitt 3 mode) VIL3 P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P17, P30, P54, P62, P63, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V P70, P71, P73, P125 (TTL mode) VIL4 Note P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V P97, P100 to P105, P137 (fixed to Schmitt 3 mode) VIL5 VIL6 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0 0.35 VDD V (fixed to Schmitt 1 mode) 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0 0.3 VDD V P121 to P124, EXCLK, 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0 0.2 VDD V EXCLKS 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0 0.2 VDD V RESET (fixed to Schmitt 2 mode) Note P92 to P96 of the Group A products are fixed to Schmitt 1 mode. P96 and P97 of the Group B, C, and D products are fixed to Schmitt 1 mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1740 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (1/2) Items Symbol Output voltage, high VOH1 Conditions P00 to P03, P10 to P17, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, IOH1 = -5.0 mA P50 to P57, P60 to P67, 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 IOH1 = -3.0 mA 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOH1 = -1.0 mA MIN. TYP. MAX. EVDD0- Unit V 0.9 EVDD0- V 0.7 EVDD0- V 0.5 (normal slew rate) VOH2 VOH3 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V to P97Note, P100 to P105 IOH2 = -100 A P10, P12, P14, P30, P120, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P140 IOH3 = -0.6 mA (special slew rate) 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOH3 = -0.2 mA Output voltage, low VOL1 P00 to P03, P10 to P17, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, IOL1 = 8.5 mA P50 to P57, P60 to P67, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 (normal slew rate) VDD-0.5 V EVDD0- V 0.8 EVDD0- V 0.5 0.7 V 0.4 V 0.7 V 0.4 V 0.4 V 0.8 V 0.5 V IOL1 = 4.0 mA 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOL1 = 4.0 mA 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOL1 = 1.5 mA VOL2 VOL3 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V to P97Note, P100 to P105 IOL2 = 400 A P10, P12, P14, P30, P120, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P140 IOL3 = 0.6 mA (special slew rate) 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOL3 = 0.07 mA Note For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 do not output high level in N-ch open-drain mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1741 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (2/2) Items Symbol Input leakage ILIH1 current, high Conditions P00 to P03, P10 to P17, MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit VI = EVDD0 1 A VI = VDD 1 A 1 A 10 A VI = EVSS0 -1 A VI = VSS -1 A -1 A -10 A 100 k P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 ILIH2 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97 Note, P100 to P105, P137, RESET ILIH3 P121 to P124 VI = VDD In input port or (X1, X2, XT1, XT2, external clock EXCLK, EXCLKS) input In resonator connection Input leakage ILIL1 current, low P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97 Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 ILIL2 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note, P100 to P105, P137, RESET ILIL3 P121 to P124 VI = VSS In input port or (X1, X2, XT1, XT2, external clock EXCLK, EXCLKS) input In resonator connection On-chip pull-up RU resistance P00 to P03, P10 to P17, VI = EVSS0, in input port 10 20 P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97, P100 to P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 Note For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 do not output high level in N-ch open-drain mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1742 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.3.2 Supply Current Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (1/3) Items Supply currentNote 1 Symbol IDD1 Conditions Operating Normal High-speed mode operation on-chip Note 2 oscillator clock operation MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 5.1 12.0 mA 4.8 11.0 mA 1.0 2.5 mA 4.2 9.0 mA 0.9 2.5 mA 5.0 12.0 mA 4.9 11.0 mA 4.7 11.0 mA Groups A to D 6.0 80.0 A Group E 6.0 120.0 A Groups A to D 3.0 70.0 A Group E 3.0 110.0 A fIH = 48 MHz fCLK = 24 MHz Notes 3, 4 fIH = 24 MHz fCLK = fIHNotes 3, 4 fIH = 1 MHz fCLK = fIHNotes 3, 4 Resonator fMX = 20 MHz fCLK = fMXNotes 3, 5 operation fMX = 1 MHz fCLK = fMXNotes 3, 5 Resonator operation (PLL fPLL = 48 MHz, fCLK = 24 MHz fMX = 8 MHz Notes 3, 6 fPLL = 24 MHz, fCLK = 24 MHz fMX = 8 MHz Notes 3, 6 fPLL = 24 MHz, fCLK = 24 MHz fMX = 4 MHz Notes 3, 6 Subsystem fSUB = 32.768 fCLK = fSUBNote 7 clock kHz operation) (PLL input clock = fMX) operation Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock operation fIL = 15 kHz fCLK = fILNote 8 Notes 1. Total current flowing into VDD and EVDD0, including the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin is fixed to VDD, EVDD0, VSS, or EVSS0. However, not including the current flowing into the I/O buffer and on-chip pull-up/pull-down resistors. 2. Current drawn when all the CPU instructions are executed. 3. The values below the MAX. column include the peripheral operation current (except for background operation (BGO)). However, the LVD circuit, A/D converter, D/A converter, and comparator are stopped. 4. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 5. When subsystem clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 6. When subsystem clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 7. When high-speed system clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator are stopped. 8. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, and high-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. Remarks 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. fMX: High-speed system clock frequency fSUB: Subsystem clock frequency fPLL: PLL clock frequency fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1743 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (2/3) Items Symbol Supply IDD2 currentNotes1, 3 Conditions HALT Normal High-speed on- mode operation chip oscillator Note 2 Note 4 clock operation Resonator operation MIN. fIH = 48 MHz fCLK = 24 MHz mA fIH = 1 MHz fCLK = fIHNote 6 0.3 1.5 mA fMX = 20 MHz fCLK = fMXNote 7 0.6 6.0 mA Note 7 0.2 1.5 mA 0.9 8.0 mA 0.8 7.0 mA 0.6 7.0 mA 0.7 75.0 A 0.7 115.0 Groups A to D 0.7 65.0 Group E 0.7 105.0 fPLL = 48 MHz, fCLK = 24 MHz Note 8 (PLL fPLL = 24 MHz, fCLK = 24 MHz fMX = 8 MHz Note 8 fPLL = 24 MHz, fCLK = 24 MHz fMX = 4 MHz Note 8 Subsystem fSUB = 32.768 fCLK = fSUBNote 9 clock kHz Groups A to D Group E chip oscillator clock operation IDD3 STOP TA = +25C mode Note 5 TA = +50C TA = +70C TA = +105C TA = +125C mA 7.0 fMX = 8 MHz Low-speed on- 8.0 0.7 operation operation 0.9 fCLK = fIHNote 6 Resonator clock = fMX) Unit fIH = 24 MHz fCLK = fMX (PLL input MAX. Note 6 fMX = 1 MHz operation) TYP. fIL = 15 kHz fCLK = f Note 10 IL Groups A to D 0.5 Group E 0.5 A A Groups A to D 2.5 Group E 4.5 Groups A to D 4.5 Group E 8.0 Groups A to D 30.0 Group E 50.0 Groups A to D 60.0 Group E 100.0 Notes 1. Total current flowing into VDD and EVDD0, including the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin is fixed to VDD, EVDD0, VSS, or EVSS0. However, not including the current flowing into the I/O buffer and on-chip pull-up/pull-down resistors. 2. When HALT mode is entered during fetch from the flash memory. 3. The values below the MAX. column include the peripheral operation current and STOP leakage current. However, the watchdog timer, LVD circuit, A/D converter, D/A converter, and comparator are stopped 4. Current flowing when all the instructions are executed by the CPU. 5. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and lowspeed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 6. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 7. When subsystem clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1744 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 8. When subsystem clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 9. When high-speed system clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 10. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, and high-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. Remarks 1. fMX: High-speed system clock frequency 2. fSUB: Subsystem clock frequency 3. fPLL: PLL clock frequency 4. fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency 5. fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency 6. fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1745 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (3/3) Items Symbol Supply ISNOZ Conditions SNOOZE mode currentNotes 1, MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit A/D converter During mode transition 1.0 1.2 mA operation During Low-voltage mode 2.1 2.5 mA conversion AVREFP = VDD = 5.0 V 2 DTC operation 4.5 mA Notes 1. Total current flowing into VDD and EVDD0, including the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin is fixed to VDD, EVDD0, VSS, or EVSS0. However, not including the current flowing into the I/O buffer and on-chip pull-up/pull-down resistors. 2. The values below the MAX. column include the STOP leakage current. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1746 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Window watchdog Symbol IWDT Notes 1, 2 Conditions fIL = 15 kHz MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit A 0.22 timer operating current A/D converter IADCNote 3 operating current When Normal mode, AVREFP = VDD = 5.0 V 1.3 1.7 mA conversion at maximum speed 75.0 A ILVDNote 4 0.08 A ITMPS 75.0 A When internal reference voltage is selectedNote 5 LVD operating current Temperature sensor operating current D/A converter IDAC Per channel 0.8 1.5 mA operating current Comparator operating ICMP 50.0 IBGONote 6 2.50 A current BGO operating 12.20 mA current Notes 1. When the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock and high-speed system clock are stopped. 2. Current flowing only to the watchdog timer (including the operation current of the 1.5 kHz on-chip oscillator). The current value is the sum of IDD1, IDD2, or IDD3 and IWDT when the watchdog timer operates in STOP mode. 3. Current flowing only to the A/D converter. The current value is the sum of IDD1 or IDD2 and IADC when the A/D converter operates in operation mode or HALT mode. 4. Current flowing only to the LVD circuit. The current value is the sum of IDD1, IDD2, or IDD3 and ILVD when the LVD circuit operates in operation mode, HALT mode, or STOP mode. 5. Operating current that increases when the internal reference voltage is selected. This current flows even when conversion is stopped. 6. Current increased by the BGO operation. The current value is the sum of IDD1 or IDD2 and IBGO when the BGO operates in operation mode or HALT mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1747 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.4 AC Characteristics 35.4.1 Basic Operation (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (1/2) Parameter Symbol Instruction cycle (minimum TCY instruction execution time) Conditions High-speed on-chip oscillator clock operation High-speed system clock operation PLL clock operation Subsystem clock operation MIN. MAX. Unit 0.04166 1 s 0.05 1 s 0.04166 1 s 34.5 s 28.5 Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock operation 30.5 s 66.6 0.04166 1 s fCLK 0.04166 66.6 s fEX 1.0 20.0 MHz 35 kHz In self programming mode CPU/peripheral hardware TYP. clock frequency External system clock frequency External system clock input high-level width, low-level width fEXS 29 tEXH, tEXL 24 ns tEXHS, 13.7 s 1/fMCK+10 ns tEXLS TI00 to TI07, TI10 to TI17 tTIH, input high-level width, low- tTIL level width TO00 to TO07, TO10 to fTO TO17 output frequency All TO pins, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 12 MHz Normal slew rate, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 6 MHz 2 MHz C = 30 pF TO01, TO06, TO07, TO11, TO13 only, Special slew rate, C = 30 pF PCLBUZ0 output frequency fPCL Normal slew rate 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 12 MHz C = 30 pF 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 6 MHz 2 MHz Special slew rate C = 30 pF Timer RJ input cycle Timer RJ input high-level width, low-level width tC TRJIO0 100 ns tWH, TRJIO0 40 ns INTP0 to INTP13 Note 1 s tWL Interrupt input high-level tINTH, width, low-level width tINTL KR0 to KR7 key interrupt tKR 250 ns tRSL 10 s tinput low-level width RESET low-level width <R> Note Pins RESET, INTP0 to INTP3, INTP12, and INTP13 have noise filters for transient levels lasting less than 100 ns. Caution Excluding the error in oscillation frequency accuracy. Remark fMCK: Timer array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1748 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Port output rise time, port Conditions tRO, tFO output fall time MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit P00 to P03, P10 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 25 ns P17, P30 to P32, P40 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 55 ns 60 ns 100 ns to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P96, P97, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to 157 (normal slew rate) C = 30 pF P10, P12, P14, P30, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P120, P140 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 25 Note (special slew rate) C = 30 pF Note TA = +25C, EVDD0 = 5.0 V Caution Excluding the error in oscillation frequency accuracy. Remark fMCK: Timer array unit operation clock frequency AC Timing Test Points VIH VIH Test points VIL VIL External System Clock Timing 1/fEX tEXL EXCLK R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 tEXH 0.8 VDD (MIN.) 0.2 VDD (MAX.) 1749 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) TI/TO Timing tTIH tTIL TI00 to TI07, TI10 to TI17 1/fTO TO00 to TO07, TO10 to TO17 Interrupt Request Input Timing tINTH tINTL INTP0 to INTP13 Key Interrupt Input Timing tKR KR0 to KR7 RESET Input Timing tRSL RESET Output Rising and Falling Timing tRO tFO Output pin R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1750 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.5 Peripheral Functions Characteristics 35.5.1 Serial Array Unit (1) During communication at same potential (UART mode) (dedicated baud rate generator output) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Transfer rate Conditions MIN. TYP. - MAX. Unit fMCK/6 bps fCLK = 24 MHz, Normal slew rate 4 Mbps fMCK = fCLK Special slew rate 2 Mbps UART mode connection diagram (during communication at same potential) Rx TxD0, TxD1 RL78 microcontroller User's device RxD0, RxD1 Tx UART mode bit width (during communication at same potential) (reference) 1/Transfer rate High-/low-level bit width Baud-rate tolerance TxD0, TxD1 RxD0, RxD1 Caution Select the normal input buffer for the RxD0 pin and RxD1 pin and normal output mode for the TxD0 pin and TxD1 pin. Remark fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1751 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (2) During communication at same potential (CSI mode) (master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output, normal slew rate) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Note 5 ns SCKp cycle time tKCY1 SCKp high-level width, low- tKH1, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V tKCY1/2 - 12 ns level width tKL1 2.7 V EVDD0 4.0 V tKCY1/2 - 18 ns SIp setup time tSIK1 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 55 ns (to SCKp)Note 1 166.6 2.7 V EVDD0 4.0 V tKSI1 SIp hold time 66 ns 30 ns (from SCKp)Note 2 Delay time from SCKp to SOp output tKSO1 C = 30 pFNote 4 40 ns Note 3 Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 4. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines. 5. tKCY1 4/fCLK must also be satisfied. Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp pin and normal output mode for the SOp pin and SCKp pin. Remark p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1752 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (3) During communication at same potential (CSI mode) (master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output, special slew rate) (TA = -40 to +125C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol SCKp cycle time tKCY1 SCKp high-level width, tKH1, low-level width tKL1 SIp setup time Conditions MIN. 500 TYP. MAX. Note 5 Unit ns tKCY1/2 - 60 ns tSIK1 120 ns tKSI1 80 ns Note 1 (to SCKp) SIp hold time (from SCKp)Note 2 Delay time from SCKp to SOp output tKSO1 C = 30 pFNote 4 90 ns Note 3 Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 4. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines. 5. tKCY1 4/fCLK must also be satisfied. Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp pin and normal output mode and special slew rate for the SOp pin and SCKp pin. Remark p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1753 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (4) During communication at same potential (CSI mode) (slave mode, SCKp ... external clock input, normal slew rate) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit SCKp cycle time tKCY2 8/fMCK ns SCKp high-level width, low-level tKH2, tKCY2/2 ns width tKL2 1/fMCK + ns tSIK2 SIp setup time 20 Note 1 (to SCKp) tKSI2 SIp hold time 1/fMCK + ns 31 Note 2 (from SCKp) Delay time from SCKp to SOp tKSO2 outputNote 3 SSIp setup time tSSIK C = 30 pF 4.0V VDD = EVDD0 = EVDD1 5.5V 2/fMCK + 44 ns Note 4 2.7V VDD = EVDD0 = EVDD1 < 4.0V 2/fMCK + 57 ns DAP = 0 120 ns DAP = 1 1/fMCK + ns 120 SSIp hold time tKSSI DAP = 0 1/fMCK + ns 120 DAP = 1 120 ns Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 4. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines. Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp, SCKp and SSIp pins and normal output mode for the SOp pin. Remarks 1. 2. p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1754 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (5) During communication at same potential (CSI mode) (slave mode, SCKp ... external clock input, special slew rate) (TA = -40 to +125C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter SCKp cycle time Symbol tKCY2 Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 20 MHz fMCK 10/fMCK ns 10 MHz fMCK 20 MHz 8/fMCK ns fMCK 10 MHz 6/fMCK ns tKCY2/2 ns SCKp high-level width, low-level tKH2, width tKL2 SIp setup time tSIK2 1/fMCK + 50 ns tKSI2 1/fMCK + 50 ns (to SCKp)Note1 SIp hold time Note 2 (from SCKp) tKSO2 C = 30 pFNote 4 SSIp setup time tSSIK DAP = 0 120 ns DAP = 1 1/fMCK + 120 ns SSIp hold time tKSSI DAP = 0 1/fMCK + 120 ns DAP = 1 120 ns Delay time from SCKp to SOp output 2/fMCK + 80 ns Note 3 Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 4. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines. Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp, SCKp and SSIp pins and normal output mode and special slew rate for the SOp pin. Remarks 1. 2. p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1755 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) CSI mode connection diagram (during communication at same potential) <Master> <Slave> SCK SCKp RL78 microcontroller SIp SCKp SO User's device SOp SI SSIp RL78 microcontroller SCK SIp SO SOp SI SSIp SSO User's device CSI mode serial transfer timing (during communication at same potential) (When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1) Remark p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1756 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) CSI mode serial transfer timing (during communication at same potential) (When DAPmn= 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0) tKCY1, 2 tKH1, 2 tKL1, 2 SCKp tSIK1, 2 SIp tKSI1, 2 Input data tKSO1, 2 SOp Output data tSSIK tKSSI SSIp Remark p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1757 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (6) During communication at same potential (simplified I2C mode) (SDAr: N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode, SCLr: normal output mode) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. 1000 Note Unit kHz SCLr clock frequency fSCL Hold time when SCLr = "L" tLOW 475 ns Hold time when SCLr = "H" tHIGH 475 ns Data setup time (reception) tSU:DAT 1/fMCK + 85 ns Data hold time (transmission) tHD:DAT Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 k 0 305 ns Note fCLK fMCK/4 must also be satisfied. Simplified I2C mode connection diagram (during communication at same potential) VDD Rb SDA SDAr RL78 microcontroller User's device SCLr SCL Simplified I2C mode serial transfer timing (during communication at same potential) 1/fSCL tLOW tHIGH SCLr SDAr tHD : DAT Caution tSU : DAT Select the normal input buffer and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SDAr pin and normal output mode for the SCLr pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SDAr) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SCLr, SDAr) load capacitance 2. r: IICr (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) 3. fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1758 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (7) During communication at same potential (simplified I2C mode) (SDAr and SCLr: N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol SCLr clock frequency fSCL Hold time when SCLr = "L" tLOW Conditions MIN. MAX. 400 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, Note Unit kHz 1300 ns 600 ns 1/fMCK + 120 ns 1/fMCK + 270 ns Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.7 k 2.7 V VDD 4.0 V, <R> Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Hold time when SCLr = "H" 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, tHIGH Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.7 k 2.7 V VDD 4.0 V, <R> Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Data setup time (reception) 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, tSU : DAT Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.7 k 2.7 V VDD 4.0 V, <R> Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Data hold time (transmission) 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, tHD : DAT 0 300 ns Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.7 k 2.7 V VDD 4.0 V, <R> Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Note fCLK fMCK/4 must also be satisfied. Simplified I2C mode connection diagram (during communication at same potential) Vb Vb Rb SDAr Rb SDA RL78 microcontroller User's device SCLr Caution SCL Select the normal input buffer and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SDAr pin and SCLr pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) load capacitance, Vb[V]: Communication line voltage 2. r: IICr (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) 3. fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1759 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) Simplified I2C mode serial transfer timing (during communication at same potential) 1/fSCL tLOW tHIGH SCLr SDAr tHD : DAT Remark tSU : DAT r: IICr (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1760 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (8) Communication at different potential (UART mode) (TxD output buffer: N-ch open-drain, RxD input buffer: TTL) (TA = -40 to +125C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Transfer rate Conditions Reception MIN. TYP. 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, VIH = 2.2 V, Theoretical value of the VIL = 0.8 V maximum transfer rate Note MAX. Unit fMCK/6 bps 4.0 Mbps Smaller bps (Cb = 30 pF) Transmission 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, number of the VOH = 2.2 V, values given VOL = 0.8 V by fMCK/6 and expression 1 is applicable. Theoretical value of the 4.0 Mbps maximum transfer rate Note (Cb = 30 pF) Normal slew rate Note Expression 1: Maximum transfer rate = 1 / [{Cb Rb ln (1 2.2/Vb)} 3] UART mode connection diagram (during communication at different potential) Vb Rb Rx TxD0, TxD1 RL78 microcontroller User's device RxD0, RxD1 Tx UART mode bit width (during communication at different potential) (reference) 1/Transfer rate Low-level bit width High-level bit width Baud-rate tolerance TxD0, TxD1 1/Transfer rate High-/low-level bit width Baud-rate tolerance RxD0, RxD1 Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the RxD0 pin and RxD1 pin and N-ch open-drain output mode for the TxD0 pin and TxD1 pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (TxD) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (TxD) load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage 2. fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1761 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (9) During communication at different potential (3-V supply system) (CSI mode) (master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output, normal slew rate) (TA = -40 to +125C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter SCKp cycle time Symbol tKCY1 Conditions 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, MIN. 400 TYP. MAX. Note3 Unit ns Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k SCKp high-level width tKH1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, tKCY1/2 - 75 ns tKCY1/2 - 20 ns 150 ns 70 ns 30 ns 30 ns Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k SCKp low-level width tKL1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k SIp setup time tSIK1 SIp setup time tSIK1 (to SCKp) tKSI1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Note 1 (from SCKp) tKSI1 SIp hold time 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Note 2 SIp hold time 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k (to SCKp)Note 1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Note 2 (from SCKp) Delay time from SCKp to SOp outputNote1 tKSO1 Delay time from SCKp to SOp outputNote2 tKSO1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, 120 ns 40 ns Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. tKCY1 4/fCLK must also be satisfied. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1762 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) CSI mode connection diagram (during communication at different potential) <Master> Vb Vb Rb SCKp RL78 microcontroller SIp SOp Rb SCK SO User's device SI SSIp Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the SIp pin and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SOp pin and SCKp pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SCKp, SOp) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SOp, SCKp) load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage 2. p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) 3. AC characteristics of the serial array unit during communication at different potential in CSI mode are measured with the VIH and VIL below: When 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V: VIH = 2.2 V, VIL = 0.8 V R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1763 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) CSI mode serial transfer timing (master mode) (during communication at different potential) (When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1) t KCY1 t KL1 t KH1 SCKp t SIK1 SIp t KSI1 Input data t KSO1 SOp Output data CSI mode serial transfer timing (master mode) (during communication at different potential) (When DAPmn= 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0) t KCY1 t KL1 t KH1 SCKp t SIK1 SIp t KSI1 Input data t KSO1 SOp R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Output data 1764 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (10) During communication at different potential (3-V supply system) (CSI mode) (slave mode, SCKp ... external clock input, normal slew rate) (TA = -40 to +125C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter SCKp cycle time Symbol tKCY2 Conditions 2.7 V Vb VDD 2.7 V Vb VDD MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 20 MHz < fMCK 24 MHz 12/fMCK ns 8 MHz < fMCK 20 MHz 10/fMCK ns 4 MHz < fMCK 8 MHz 8/fMCK ns fMCK 4 MHz 6/fMCK ns tKCY2/2 - 20 ns SCKp high-level width, low- tKH2, level width tKL2 SIp setup time tSIK2 90 ns tKSI2 1/fMCK + ns (to SCKp)Note 1 SIp hold time 50 (from SCKp)Note 2 Delay time from SCKp to tKSO2 SOp outputNote 3 SSIp setup time SSIp hold time 2.7 V Vb VDD, 2/fMCK + Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k tSSIK tKSSI ns 120 DAP = 0 120 ns DAP = 1 1/fMCK + 120 ns DAP = 0 1/fMCK + 120 ns DAP = 1 120 ns Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1765 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) CSI mode connection diagram (during communication at different potential) <Slave> Vb Rb SCKp RL78 microcontroller Caution SIp SCK SO User's device SOp SI SSIp SSO Select the TTL input buffer for the SIp, SCKp and SSIp pins and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SOp pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SOp) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SOp) load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage 2. p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) 3. AC characteristics of the serial array unit during communication at different potential in CSI mode are measured with the VIH and VIL below: When 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V: VIH = 2.2 V, VIL = 0.8 V R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1766 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) CSI mode serial transfer timing (slave mode) (during communication at different potential) (When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1) tKCY2 tKL2 tKH2 SCKp tSIK2 SIp tKSI2 Input data tKSO2 Output data SOp tKSSI tSSIK SSIp CSI mode serial transfer timing (slave mode) (during communication at different potential) (When DAPmn= 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0) tKCY2 tKL2 tKH2 SCKp tSIK2 SIp tKSI2 Input data tKSO2 Output data SOp tSSIK tKSSI SSIp R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1767 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (11) During communication at different potential (3-V supply system) (simplified I2C mode) (SDAr: TTL input buffer mode or N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode, SCLr: N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode) (TA = -40 to +125C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter SCLr clock frequency Symbol fSCL Conditions MIN. 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, MAX. Unit 400Note kHz Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Hold time when SCLr = "L" tLOW Hold time when SCLr = "H" tHIGH Data setup time (reception) tSU:DAT 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, 1200 ns 600 ns 135 + 1/fMCK ns Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Data hold time (transmission) tHD:DAT 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, 0 140 ns Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Note fSCL fMCK/4 must also be satisfied. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1768 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) Simplified I2C mode connection diagram (during communication at different potential) Vb Vb Rb Rb SDA SDAr RL78 microcontroller User's device SCLr SCL Simplified I2C mode serial transfer timing (during communication at different potential) 1/fSCL tLOW tHIGH SCLr SDAr tHD : DAT Caution tSU : DAT Select the TTL input buffer and the N-ch open-drain output mode for the SDAr pin and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SCLr pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage 2. fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1769 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.5.2 Serial Interface IICA (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions Normal Mode MIN. fSCL SCLA0 clock frequency MAX. Fast Mode MIN. MAX. Fast mode plus: Fast Mode Plus MIN. MAX. 0 1000 Unit kHz 10 MHz fCLK 0 Fast mode: 400 kHz 3.5 MHz fCLK 0 Normal mode: 100 kHz 1 MHz fCLK Setup time of restart conditionNote 1 tSU:STA 4.7 0.6 0.26 s Hold time tHD:STA 4.0 0.6 0.26 s Hold time when SCLA0 = "L" tLOW 4.7 1.3 0.5 s Hold time when SCLA0 = "H" tHIGH 4.0 0.6 0.26 s Data setup time (reception) tSU:DAT 250 100 50 ns Data hold time (transmission)Note 2 tHD:DAT 0 0 s Setup time of stop condition tSU:STO 4.0 0.6 0.26 s tBUF 4.7 1.3 0.5 s Bus-free time 3.45 0 0.9 Notes 1. The first clock pulse is generated after this period when the start/restart condition is detected. 2. The maximum value (MAX.) of tHD:DAT is during normal transfer and a wait state is inserted in the ACK (acknowledge) timing. Remark The maximum value of Cb (communication line capacitance) and the value of Rb (communication line pull-up resistor) at that time in each mode are as follows. Standard mode: Cb = 400 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Fast mode: Cb = 320 pF, Rb = 1.1 k Fast mode plus: Cb = 120 pF, Rb = 1.1 k IICA serial transfer timing tLOW tR SCLA0 tHD:DAT tHD:STA tHIGH tF tSU:STA tHD:STA tSU:STO tSU:DAT SDAA0 tBUF Stop condition Start condition R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Restart condition Stop condition 1770 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.5.3 On-chip Debug (UART) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Transfer rate Conditions - MIN. TYP. 115.2 k MAX. Unit 1M bps MAX. Unit 4000 kbps 35.5.4 LIN/UART Module (RLIN3) UART Mode (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Transfer rate Symbol - Conditions Operation mode, LIN communication clock source HALT mode (fCLK or fMX): MIN. TYP. 4 to 24 MHz SNOOZE mode LIN communication clock source 4.8 (fCLK): 1 to 24 MHz FRQSEL4 = 0 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) LIN communication clock source 2.4 (fCLK): 1 to 24 MHz FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1771 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.6 Analog Characteristics 35.6.1 A/D Converter Characteristics (1) When AVREF (+) = AVREFP/ANI0 (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 1), AVREF (-) = AVREFM/ANI1 (ADREFM = 1), target ANI pin: ANI2 to ANI23 (power supply: VDD) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V, Reference voltage (+) = AVREFP, Reference voltage (-) = AVREFM = 0 V) Parameter Resolution Symbol Conditions RES Overall error Note 1 Conversion time Zero-scale error Notes 1, 2 AINL tCONV EZS MIN. TYP. 8 MAX. Unit 10 bit 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 1.2 3.0 LSB AVREFP = VDD 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 1.2 3.5 LSB 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.125 39 s AVREFP = VDD 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 3.1875 39 s 10-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.25 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.25 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.5 LSB 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.5 LSB AVREFP = VDD Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EFS 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Integral linearity errorNote 1 ILE 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Differential linearity errorNote 1 DLE 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Reference voltage (+) AVREFP 2.7 VDD V Analog input voltage VAIN 0 AVREFP V Internal reference voltage (+) VBGR 1.5 V 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.38 1.45 Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1772 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (2) When AVREF (+) = AVREFP/ANI0 (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 1), AVREF (-) = AVREFM/ANI1 (ADREFM = 1), target ANI pin: ANI24 to ANI30 (power supply: EVDD0) (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V, Reference voltage (+) = AVREFP, Reference voltage (-) = AVREFM = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Resolution RES Overall errorNote 1 AINL Conversion time Zero-scale errorNotes 1, 2 tCONV EZS Conditions MIN. TYP. 8 MAX. Unit 10 bit 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 1.2 4.5 LSB AVREFP = VDD 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 1.2 5.0 LSB 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.125 39 s AVREFP = VDD 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 3.1875 39 s 10-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.35 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.35 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 3.5 LSB 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.0 LSB AVREFP = VDD Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EFS 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Integral linearity errorNote 1 ILE 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Differential linearity errorNote 1 DLE 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Reference voltage (+) AVREFP 2.7 VDD V Analog input voltage VAIN 0 AVREFP V and EVDD0 Internal reference voltage (+) VBGR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.38 1.45 1.5 V Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1773 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (3) When AVREF (+) = VDD (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 0), AVREF (-) = VSS (ADREFM = 0), target ANI pin: ANI0 to ANI23, ANI24 to ANI30 (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V, Reference voltage (+) = VDD, Reference voltage (-) = VSS) Parameter Symbol Resolution RES Overall errorNote 1 AINL Conversion time Zero-scale error Notes 1, 2 tCONV EZS Conditions MIN. TYP. 8 MAX. Unit 10 bit 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 1.2 5.0 LSB ANI0 to ANI23 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 1.2 5.5 LSB 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 1.2 6.5 LSB ANI24 to ANI30 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 1.2 7.0 LSB 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.125 39 s 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 3.1875 39 s 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.50 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.60 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.50 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.60 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 3.5 LSB 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 LSB 2.0 LSB VDD V EVDD0 V 1.5 V 10-bit resolution ANI0 to ANI23 10-bit resolution ANI24 to ANI30 Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EFS 10-bit resolution ANI0 to ANI23 10-bit resolution ANI24 to ANI30 Integral linearity errorNote 1 ILE 10-bit resolution ANI0 to ANI23 10-bit resolution ANI24 to ANI30 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V Differential linearity errorNote 1 DLE 10-bit resolution Analog input voltage VAIN ANI0 to ANI23Note 3 0 ANI24 to ANI30Note 3 EVSS 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.38 Internal reference voltage (+) VBGR 1.45 Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. 3. The number of pins depends on the product. For details, refer to 2.1 Pin Function List. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1774 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) (4) When AVREF (+) = internal reference voltage (ADREFP1 = 1, ADREFP0 = 0), AVREF (-) = AVREFM/ANI1 (ADREFM = 1), target ANI pin: ANI0 to ANI23, ANI24 to ANI30 (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V, Reference voltage (+) = VBGR, Reference voltage (-) = AVREFM = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Resolution MIN. RES Conversion time Zero-scale error Conditions Notes 1, 2 Integral linearity error Note 1 Differential linearity error Note 1 TYP. MAX. 8 Unit bit 39 s 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.60 %FSR 8-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.0 LSB 8-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.0 LSB 1.5 V VBGR V tCONV 8-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V EZS 8-bit resolution ILE DLE 17 Reference voltage (+) VBGR 1.38 Analog input voltage VAIN 0 1.45 Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1775 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.6.2 Temperatures Sensor Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Temperature sensor output Conditions VTMPS25 MIN. Setting ADS register = 80H, TA = +25C TYP. MAX. 1.1 Unit V voltage Reference output voltage VCONST Setting ADS register = 81H Temperature coefficient FVTMPS Temperature sensor that depends on the 1.38 1.45 1.5 -3.3 V mV/C temperature Operation stabilization wait tAMP s 5 time 35.6.3 D/A Converter Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Resolution RES Overall error AINL Settling time tSET Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 8 bit Rload = 4 M 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.5 LSB Rload = 8 M 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.5 LSB Cload = 20 pF 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 3 s TYP. MAX. Unit 5 40 mV VDD V 70 200 ns 35.6.4 Comparator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Input offset voltage Input voltage range Response time Symbol Conditions MIN. VIOCMP VICMP 0 tCR, tCF Input amplitude 100 mV tWAIT Input amplitude 100 mV tCMP Stabilization wait time 300 ns 3.3 V VDD 5.5 V 1 s 2.7 V VDD < 3.3 V 3 s during input channel switchingNote 1 Operation stabilization wait timeNote 2 Notes 1. Period of time from when the comparator input channel is switched until the comparator is switched to output 2. Period of time from when the comparator operation is enabled (HCMPON bit in CMPCTL is set to 1) until the comparator satisfies the DC/AC characteristics. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1776 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.6.5 POR Circuit Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Detection voltage Symbol Note Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit V VPOR Power supply rise time 1.48 1.56 1.62 VPDR Power supply fall time 1.47 1.55 1.61 Minimum pulse width TPW Detection delay time TPD V s 300 350 s Note This indicates the POR circuit characteristics, and normal operation is not guaranteed under the condition of less than lower limit operation voltage (2.7 V). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1777 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.6.6 LVD Circuit Characteristics (1) LVD detection voltage of interrupt mode or reset mode (TA = -40 to +125C, VPDR EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Detection Supply voltage level VLVD0 voltage VLVD1 VLVD2 VLVD3 VLVD4 VLVD5 Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Power supply rise time 4.62 4.74 4.94 V Power supply fall time 4.52 4.64 4.84 V Power supply rise time 4.50 4.62 4.82 V Power supply fall time 4.40 4.52 4.71 V Power supply rise time 4.30 4.42 4.61 V Power supply fall time 4.21 4.32 4.51 V Power supply rise time 3.13 3.22 3.39 V Power supply fall time 3.07 3.15 3.31 V Power supply rise time 2.95 3.02 3.17 V Power supply fall time 2.89 2.96 3.09 V Power supply rise time 2.74 2.81 2.95 V 2.75 2.88 V 300 s Power supply fall time Minimum pulse width tLW Detection delay time tLD 2.68 Note 300 s Note The minimum value exceeds below the lower limit operation voltage (2.7 V), however, in reset mode, normal operation (same behavior when VDD = 2.7 V) is possible until a reset is effected at the power supply falling time. (2) LVD detection voltage of interrupt reset mode (TA = -40 to +125C, VPDR EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Interrupt and reset Symbol VLVD5 Conditions VPOC2, VPOC1, VPOC0 = 0, 0, 1 MIN. Note 1 , VLVD2 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 1, 0 Rising release reset voltage Falling interrupt voltage VLVD5 VPOC2, VPOC1, VPOC0 = 0, 1, 0Note 1, VLVD5 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 0, 0 VLVD0 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 0, 0 2.88 V 4.30 4.42 4.61 V 4.21 4.32 4.51 V 2.68Note 2.75 2.88 V 4.50 4.62 4.82 V Falling interrupt voltage 4.40 4.52 4.71 V 2.75 2.88 V Note 1 , 2.68 Note 2 falling reset voltage: 2.75 V LVIS1, LVIS0 = 0, 1 2.75 2.68 Rising release reset voltage VPOC2, VPOC1, VPOC0 = 0, 1, 1 VLVD3 Unit 2 falling reset voltage: 2.75 V VLVD1 MAX. 2 falling reset voltage: 2.75 V mode TYP. Note Rising release reset voltage 3.13 3.22 3.39 V Falling interrupt voltage 3.07 3.15 3.31 V Rising release reset voltage 4.62 4.74 4.94 V Falling interrupt voltage 4.52 4.64 4.84 V Notes 1. These values indicate setting values of option bytes. 2. The minimum value exceeds below the lower limit operation voltage (2.7 V), however, in reset mode, normal operation (same behavior when VDD = 2.7 V) is possible until a reset is effected at the power supply falling time. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1778 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.7 Power Supply Voltage Rising Time (TA = -40 to +125C, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Maximum power supply Conditions Svrmax 0 V VDD (VPOC2 = 0 or Svrmin 0 V 2.7 V MIN. TYP. 1Note 2) MAX. Unit 50Note 3 V/ms voltage rising slope Minimum power supply voltage rising slope Note 1 6.5 V/ms Notes 1. The minimum power supply voltage rising slope is applied only under the following condition. When the voltage detection (LVD) circuit is not used (VPOC2 = 1) and an external reset circuit is not used or when a reset is not effected until VDD = 2.7 V. 2. These values indicate setting values of option bytes. 3. If the power supply drops below VPDR and a POR reset is effected, this specification is also applied when the power supply is recovered without dropping to 0 V. 35.8 STOP Mode Memory Retention Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Data retention supply voltage Conditions MIN. 1.47Note VDDDR TYP. MAX. Unit 5.5 V Note The value depends on the POR detection voltage. When the voltage drops, the data is retained before a POR reset is effected, but data is not retained when a POR reset is effected. STOP mode Operation mode Data retention mode VDD VDDDR STOP instruction execution Standby release signal (interrupt request) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1779 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) 35.9 Flash Memory Programming Characteristics (TA = -40 to +125C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol System clock frequency Number of code flash rewrites Conditions fCLK Notes 1, 2, 3 Cerwr MIN. TYP. 1 Retained for 20 years (after rewrite) 1,000 MAX. Unit 24 MHz Times TA = +85C Note 4 Number of data flash rewrites Retained for 20 years (after rewrite) Notes 1, 2, 3 TA = +85C 10,000 Note 4 Retained for 5 years (after rewrite) 100,000 TA = +85C Note 4 <R> Erase time Terasa Block erase 5 ms Write time Twrwa 1 word write 10 s Notes 1. 1 erase + 1 write after the erase is regarded as 1 rewrite. The retaining years are until next rewrite after the rewrite. 2. When using flash memory programmer and Renesas Electronics self programming library 3. These are the characteristics of the flash memory and the results obtained from reliability testing by Renesas Electronics Corporation. 4. The specified data retention time is given under the condition that the average temperature (TA) is 85C or below. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1780 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) Cautions 1. RL78/F13 and RL78/F14 have an on-chip debug function, which is provided for development and evaluation. Do not use the on-chip debug function in products designated for mass production, because the guaranteed number of rewritable times of the flash memory may be exceeded when this function is used, and product reliability therefore cannot be guaranteed. Renesas Electronics is not liable for problems occurring when the on-chip debug function is used. 2. With products not provided with an EVDD0, EVDD1, EVSS0, or EVSS1 pin, replace EVDD0 and EVDD1 with VDD, or replace EVSS0 and EVSS1 with VSS. 3. The pins mounted depending on the product. For details, refer to 1.5 Pin Configurations and 2.1 Pin Function List. 4. The products are classified into the following five groups according to the product type, pin count, and code flash memory size. In this chapter, the products are referred to by group names depending on the content. In this case, refer to the following classification. Group A: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 20, 30, 32, 48, or 64 pins and 16 Kbytes to 64 Kbytes of code flash memory Group B: RL78/F13 (LIN incorporated) products with 48 or 64 pins and 96 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 80 pins and 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group C: RL78/F13 (CAN and LIN incorporated) products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 32 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code flash memory Group D: RL78/F14 products with 30, 32, 48, 64, or 80 pins and 48 Kbytes to 96 Kbytes of code flash memory Group E: RL78/F14 products with 48, 64, or 80 pins and 128 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory or with 100 pins and 64 Kbytes to 256 Kbytes of code flash memory R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1781 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings (1/2) Parameter Supply voltage Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit -0.5 to +6.5 V -0.5 to +6.5 V -0.5 to +0.3 V EVSS0 = EVSS1 -0.5 to +0.3 V REGC -0.3 to +2.8 VDD EVDD0, EVDD0 = EVDD1 EVDD1 VSS EVSS0, EVSS1 REGC pin input VIREGC voltage V and -0.3 to VDD+0.3 Input voltage VI1 P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 4, P106, Note 1 -0.3 to EVDD0+0.3 and -0.3 to VDD+0.3 V Note 2 P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 VI2 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note 4, P100 to P105, -0.3 to VDD+0.3Note 2 V -0.3 to EVDD0+0.3 V P121 to P124, P137, RESET Output voltage VO1 P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 4, P106, and -0.3 to VDD+0.3Note 2 P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 Analog input voltage VO2 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note 4, P100 to P105 VAI1 ANI24 to ANI30 -0.3 to VDD+0.3 V -0.3 to EVDD0+0.3 and V -0.3 to AVREF(+)+0.3Notes 2, 3 VAI2 ANI0 to ANI23 -0.3 to VDD+0.3 and -0.3 to AVREF(+)+0.3 V Notes 2, 3 Notes 1. Connect the REGC pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1F). This value regulates the absolute maximum rating of the REGC pin. Do not use this pin with voltage applied to it. 2. Must be 6.5 V or lower. 3. For pins to be used in A/D conversion, the voltage should not exceed the value AVREF (+) + 0.3. 4. For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1782 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (2/2) Parameter Output current, high Symbol IOH1 Conditions Per pin Ratings Unit -40 mA -70 mA -100 mA -0.5 mA -2 mA 40 mA 70 mA 100 mA P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 1, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 Total of all P01, P02, P40 to P47, P92 to P97Note 1, pins P120, P125 to P127, P150 to P153 -170 mA P00, P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P130, P140, P154 to P157 IOH2 Per pin P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note 1, Total of all P100 to P105 pins Output current, low IOL1 Per pin P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 1, P106, P107, P120, P125 to <R> P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 Total of all P01, P02, P40 to P47, P92 to P97Note 1, pins P120, P125 to P127, P150 to P153 170 mA P00, P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P50 to <R> P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P130, P140, P154 to P157 IOL2 Per pin P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note 1, 1 mA Total of all P100 to P105 5 mA -40 to +150 C -65 to +150 C pins Operating ambient TA temperature In normal operation mode In flash memory programming mode Storage temperature Tstg Note 1. For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1783 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.2 Oscillator Characteristics 36.2.1 Main System Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Resonator Recommended Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 20.0 MHz Circuit X1 clock oscillation frequency (fx) 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V Ceramic resonator/ VSS X1 Crystal resonator C1 1.0 X2 Rd C2 Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance. Keep the wiring length as short as possible. Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows. Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows. Do not fetch signals from the oscillator. 2. Customers are requested to consult the resonator manufacturer to select an appropriate resonator and to determine the proper oscillation constant. Customers are also requested to adequately evaluate the oscillation on their system. Determine the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time using the oscillation stabilization time of the oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) and the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization time with the resonator to be used. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1784 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.2.2 On-chip Oscillator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Oscillators High-speed on-chip oscillator Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit fIH 1 48 MHz - -5 +5 % clock frequencyNote High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency accuracy Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency Low-speed on-chip oscillator 15 fIL, kHz fWDT - -15 +15 % clock frequency accuracy Note High-speed on-chip oscillator frequency is selected with bits 0 to 4 of the option byte (000C2H/020C2H) and bits 0 to 2 of the HOCODIV register. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1785 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.2.3 Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics Do not use the XT1 oscillator. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1786 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.2.4 PLL Circuit Characteristics (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Resonator Symbol Note 1 PLL input enable clock frequency PLL output frequency (center value) fPLLI fPLL Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit PLLMUL = 0 PLLDIV0 = 0 3.92 4.0 4.08 MHz PLLDIV0 = 1 7.84 8.0 8.16 MHz PLLMUL = 1 PLLDIV0 = 0 3.92 4.0 4.08 MHz PLLDIV0 = 1 7.84 8.0 8.16 MHz PLLMUL = 0 PLLDIV0 = 0 PLLDIV0 = 1 PLLMUL = 1 Note 4 PLLDIV0 = 0 Note 4 PLLDIV0 = 1 Notes 2, 3 Long-term jitter tLJ fPLLI x 12/2 MHz fPLLI x 12/4 MHz fPLLI x 16/2 MHz fPLLI x 16/4 MHz fPLL = 24 MHz (480 counts) -2 +2 ns fPLL = 32 MHz (640 counts) -2 +2 ns fPLL = 48 MHz (960 counts) -2 +2 ns Notes 1. If the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock is to be selected as the PLL input clock, the minimum and maximum values will reflect the range of accuracy of the oscillation frequency by the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock. 2. Guaranteed by design, but not tested before shipment. 3. Indicates 20 s. 4. Setting of PLLMUL = 1 and PLLDIV0 = 0 is prohibited when fPLLI > 6 MHz. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1787 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.3 DC Characteristics 36.3.1 Pin Characteristics For the relationship between the port pins shown in the following tables and the products, refer to CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS. (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (1/4) Items Symbol Note Output current, high IOH1 1 Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Per pin for P00 to P03, P10 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -5.0 mA to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -3.0 mA Per pin for P10, P12, P14, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -0.6 mA P30,P120,P140 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -0.2 mA Total of P01, P02, P40 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -20.0 mA P47, P92 to P97Note 3, P120, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -10.0 mA Total of P00, P03, P10 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -30.0 mA P17, P30 to P32, P50 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -19.0 mA Total of all pins 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V -32.0 mA (for duty factors 70%Note 2) 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V -29.0 mA Per pin for P33, P34, P80 to 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V -0.1 mA 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V -2.0 mA P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 3, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to 157 (special slew rate) P125 to P127, P150 to P153 (for duty factors 70%Note 2) P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P130, P140, P154 to P157 (for duty factors 70%Note 2) IOH2 P87, P90 to P97Note 3, P100 to P105 Total of all pins (for duty factors 70%Note 2) <R> Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from pins EVDD0, EVDD1 and VDD to an output pin. 2. These output current values are obtained under the condition that the duty factor is no greater than 70%. The output current values when the duty factor is changed to a value greater than 70% can be calculated from the following expression (when the duty factor is changed to n%). Total output current of pins (IOH 0.7)/(n 0.01) <Example> Where n = 80% and IOH = -10.0 mA Total output current of pins = (-10.0 0.7)/(80 0.01) -8.7 mA However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor. A current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin. 3. For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 do not output high level in N-ch open-drain mode. P10 to P12 and P70 to P72 of the Group A products. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1788 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (2/4) Items Symbol Note 1 Output current, low IOL1 Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Per pin for P00 to P03, P10 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 8.5 mA to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 4.0 mA Per pin for P10, P12, P14, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 0.59 mA P30, P120, P140 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 0.07 mA Total of P01, P02, P40 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 20.0 mA P47, P92 to P97Note 3, P120, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 15.0 mA Total of P00, P03, P10 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 35.0 mA P17, P30 to P32, P50 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 30.0 mA Total of all pins 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 55.0 mA (for duty factors 70%Note 2) 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 45.0 mA Per pin for P33, P34, P80 to 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.4 mA 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 5.0 mA P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note 3, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to 157 (special slew rate) P125 to P127, P150 to P153 (for duty factors 70%Note 2) P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, P130, P140, P154 to P157 (for duty factors 70%Note 2) IOL2 P87, P90 to P97Note 3, P100 to P105 Total of all pins (for duty factors 70%Note 2) <R> Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows to the EVSS0, EVSS1 and VSS pins from an output pin. 2. These output current values are obtained under the condition that the duty factor is no greater than 70%. The output current values when the duty factor is changed to a value greater than 70% can be calculated from the following expression (when the duty factor is changed to n%). Total output current of pins (IOL 0.7)/(n 0.01) <Example> Where n = 80% and IOL = 10.0 mA Total output current of pins = (10.0 0.7)/(80 0.01) 8.7 mA However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor. A current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin. 3. For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1789 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (3/4) Items Symbol Input voltage, high VIH1 Conditions P00 to P03, P10 to P17, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P106, P107, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V MIN. 0.65 TYP. MAX. EV Note DD0 EVDD0 1 0.7 EVDD0 EVDD0Note Unit V V 1 P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 (Schmitt 1 mode) VIH2 P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 0.8 EVDD0 P73, P75 to P77, P107, V 1 P17, P30, P43, P50, P52 to P54, P60 to P63, P70, P71, EVDD0Note 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V P125, P150, P152, P153 0.85 EVDD0Note EVDD0 1 2.2 EVDD0Note V (Schmitt 3 mode) VIH3 P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P70, P71, P73, P125 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 2.0 (TTL mode) VIH4Note 2 V 1 P17, P30, P54, P62, P63, EVDD0Note V 1 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0.8 VDD VDD V to P97, P100 to P105, P137 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.85 VDD VDD V (fixed to Schmitt 3 mode) VIH5 VIH6 RESET 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0.65 VDD VDD V (fixed to Schmitt 1 mode) 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.7 VDD VDD V P121 to P124, EXCLK, 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0.8 VDD VDD V EXCLKS 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0.8 VDD VDD V (fixed to Schmitt 2 mode) Notes 1. The maximum value of VIH of the pins P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 is EVDD0, even in N-ch open-drain mode. 2. P92 to P96 of the Group A products are fixed to Schmitt 1 mode. P96 and P97 of the Group B, C, and D products are fixed to Schmitt 1 mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1790 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (4/4) Items Input voltage, low Symbol VIL1 Conditions MAX. Unit 0 0.35 V 0 0.3 EVDD0 V 0 0.5 EVDD0 V 0 0.4 EVDD0 V 0 0.8 V 0 0.5 V 0 0.5 VDD V 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0 0.4 VDD V P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V MIN. TYP. EVDD0 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 (Schmitt 1 mode) VIL2 P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P17, P30, P43, P50, P52 to 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V P54, P60 to P63, P70, P71, P73, P75 to P77, P107, P125, P150, P152, P153 (Schmitt 3 mode) VIL3 P10, P11, P13, P14, P16, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P17, P30, P54, P62, P63, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V P70, P71, P73, P125 (TTL mode) VIL4 Note P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V P97, P100 to P105, P137 (fixed to Schmitt 3 mode) VIL5 VIL6 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0 0.35 VDD V (fixed to Schmitt 1 mode) 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0 0.3 VDD V P121 to P124, EXCLK, 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 0 0.2 VDD V EXCLKS 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 0 0.2 VDD V RESET (fixed to Schmitt 2 mode) Note P92 to P96 of the Group A products are fixed to Schmitt 1 mode. P96 and P97 of the Group B, C, and D products are fixed to Schmitt 1 mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1791 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (1/2) Items Symbol Output voltage, high VOH1 Conditions P00 to P03, P10 to P17, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, IOH1 = -5.0 mA P50 to P57, P60 to P67, 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 IOH1 = -3.0 mA 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOH1 = -1.0 mA MIN. TYP. MAX. EVDD0- Unit V 0.9 EVDD0- V 0.7 EVDD0- V 0.5 (normal slew rate) VOH2 VOH3 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V to P97Note, P100 to P105 IOH2 = -100 A P10, P12, P14, P30, P120, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P140 IOH3 = -0.6 mA (special slew rate) 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOH3 = -0.2 mA Output voltage, low VOL1 P00 to P03, P10 to P17, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, IOL1 = 8.5 mA P50 to P57, P60 to P67, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to P157 (normal slew rate) VDD-0.5 V EVDD0- V 0.8 EVDD0- V 0.5 0.7 V 0.4 V 0.7 V 0.4 V 0.4 V 0.8 V 0.5 V IOL1 = 4.0 mA 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOL1 = 4.0 mA 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOL1 = 1.5 mA VOL2 VOL3 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V to P97Note, P100 to P105 IOL2 = 400 A P10, P12, P14, P30, P120, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, P140 IOL3 = 0.6 mA (special slew rate) 2.7 V EVDD0 5.5 V, IOL3 = 0.07 mA Note For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 do not output high level in N-ch open-drain mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1792 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (2/2) Items Symbol Input leakage ILIH1 current, high Conditions P00 to P03, P10 to P17, MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit VI = EVDD0 1 A VI = VDD 1 A 1 A 10 A VI = EVSS0 -1 A VI = VSS -1 A -1 A -10 A 100 k P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 ILIH2 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97 Note, P100 to P105, P137, RESET ILIH3 P121 to P124 VI = VDD In input port or (X1, X2, EXCLK, external clock EXCLKS) input In resonator connection Input leakage ILIL1 current, low P00 to P03, P10 to P17, P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97 Note, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 ILIL2 P33, P34, P80 to P87, P90 to P97Note, P100 to P105, P137, RESET ILIL3 P121 to P124 VI = VSS In input port or (X1, X2, EXCLK, external clock EXCLKS) input In resonator connection On-chip pull-up RU resistance P00 to P03, P10 to P17, VI = EVSS0, in input port 10 20 P30 to P32, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P92 to P97, P100 to P107, P120, P125 to P127, P140, P150 to P157 Note For pin I/O buffer power supplies, refer to Table 4-1 Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies. Caution P10 to P17, P60 to P63, P70 to P72, and P120 do not output high level in N-ch open-drain mode. Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of the port pins. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1793 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.3.2 Supply Current Characteristics (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (1/3) Items Supply currentNote 1 Symbol IDD1 Conditions Operating Normal High-speed mode operation on-chip Note 2 oscillator clock operation MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 5.1 12.5 mA 4.8 11.5 mA 1.0 2.6 mA 4.2 9.5 mA 0.9 2.6 mA 5.0 12.5 mA 4.9 11.5 mA 4.7 11.5 mA Groups A to D 6.0 170.0 A Group E 6.0 270.0 A Groups A to D 3.0 160.0 A Group E 3.0 260.0 A fIH = 48 MHz fCLK = 24 MHz Notes 3, 4 fIH = 24 MHz fCLK = fIHNotes 3, 4 fIH = 1 MHz fCLK = fIHNotes 3, 4 Resonator fMX = 20 MHz fCLK = fMXNotes 3, 5 operation fMX = 1 MHz fCLK = fMXNotes 3, 5 Resonator operation (PLL fPLL = 48 MHz, fCLK = 24 MHz fMX = 8 MHz Notes 3, 6 fPLL = 24 MHz, fCLK = 24 MHz fMX = 8 MHz Notes 3, 6 fPLL = 24 MHz, fCLK = 24 MHz fMX = 4 MHz Notes 3, 6 Subsystem fSUB = 32.768 fCLK = fSUBNote 7 clock kHz operation) (PLL input clock = fMX) operation (fSUB = fEXS) Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock operation fIL = 15 kHz fCLK = fILNote 8 Notes 1. Total current flowing into VDD and EVDD0, including the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin is fixed to VDD, EVDD0, VSS, or EVSS0. However, not including the current flowing into the I/O buffer and on-chip pull-up/pull-down resistors. 2. Current drawn when all the CPU instructions are executed. 3. The values below the MAX. column include the peripheral operation current (except for background operation (BGO)). However, the LVD circuit, A/D converter, D/A converter, and comparator are stopped. 4. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 5. When subsystem clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 6. When subsystem clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 7. When high-speed system clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator are stopped. 8. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, and high-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. Remarks 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. fMX: High-speed system clock frequency fSUB: Subsystem clock frequency fEXS: External subsystem clock frequency fPLL: PLL clock frequency fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1794 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (2/3) Items Symbol Supply IDD2 currentNotes1, 3 Conditions HALT Normal High-speed on- mode operation chip oscillator Note 2 Note 4 clock operation Resonator operation fCLK = 24 MHz fIH = 1 MHz fCLK = fIHNote 6 0.3 1.6 mA fMX = 20 MHz fCLK = fMXNote 7 0.6 6.5 mA Note 7 0.2 1.6 mA 0.9 8.5 mA 0.8 7.5 mA 0.6 7.5 mA 0.7 165.0 A 0.7 265.0 Groups A to D 0.7 155.0 Group E 0.7 255.0 Note 8 (PLL fPLL = 24 MHz, fCLK = 24 MHz fMX = 8 MHz Note 8 fPLL = 24 MHz, fCLK = 24 MHz fMX = 4 MHz Note 8 Subsystem fSUB = 32.768 fCLK = fSUBNote 9 clock kHz clock operation TA = +25C mode Note 5 TA = +50C TA = +70C TA = +105C TA = +125C TA = +150C mA mA fCLK = 24 MHz chip oscillator 8.5 7.5 fPLL = 48 MHz, Low-speed on- 0.9 0.7 fMX = 8 MHz (fSUB = fEXS) Unit fCLK = fIHNote 6 operation operation MAX. fIH = 24 MHz Resonator clock = fMX) TYP. Note 6 fCLK = fMX (PLL input STOP fIH = 48 MHz fMX = 1 MHz operation) IDD3 MIN. Groups A to D Group E fIL = 15 kHz fCLK = f Note 10 IL Groups A to D 0.5 Group E 0.5 A A Groups A to D 2.5 Group E 4.5 Groups A to D 4.5 Group E 8.0 Groups A to D 30.0 Group E 50.0 Groups A to D 60.0 Group E 100.0 Groups A to D 150.0 Group E 250.0 Notes 1. Total current flowing into VDD and EVDD0, including the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin is fixed to VDD, EVDD0, VSS, or EVSS0. However, not including the current flowing into the I/O buffer and on-chip pull-up/pull-down resistors. 2. When HALT mode is entered during fetch from the flash memory. 3. The values below the MAX. column include the peripheral operation current and STOP leakage current. However, the watchdog timer, LVD circuit, A/D converter, D/A converter, and comparator are stopped 4. Current flowing when all the instructions are executed by the CPU. 5. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and lowspeed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 6. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1795 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 7. When subsystem clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 8. When subsystem clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 9. When high-speed system clock, PLL clock, high-speed on-chip oscillator clock, and low-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. 10. When high-speed system clock, subsystem clock, PLL clock, and high-speed on-chip oscillator clock are stopped. Remarks 1. fMX: High-speed system clock frequency 2. fSUB: Subsystem clock frequency 3. fEXS: External subsystem clock frequency 4. fPLL: PLL clock frequency 5. fIH: High-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency 6. fIL: Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock frequency 7. fCLK: CPU/peripheral hardware clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1796 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (3/3) Items Symbol Supply Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit A/D During mode transition 1.0 1.3 mA currentNotes 1, comparator 2 operation During Low-voltage mode 2.1 2.6 mA conversion AVREFP = VDD = 5.0 V ISNOZ SNOOZE mode DTC operation 4.5 mA Notes 1. Total current flowing into VDD and EVDD0, including the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin is fixed to VDD, EVDD0, VSS, or EVSS0. However, not including the current flowing into the I/O buffer and on-chip pull-up/pull-down resistors. 2. The values below the MAX. column include the STOP leakage current. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1797 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Window watchdog Symbol IWDT Notes 1, 2 Conditions fIL = 15 kHz MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit A 0.22 timer operating current A/D converter IADCNote 3 operating current When Normal mode, AVREFP = VDD = 5.0 V 1.3 1.7 mA conversion at maximum speed 75.0 A ILVDNote 4 0.08 A ITMPS 75.0 A When internal reference voltage is selectedNote 5 LVD operating current Temperature sensor operating current D/A converter IDAC Per channel 0.8 1.5 mA operating current Comparator operating ICMP 50.0 IBGONote 6 2.50 A current BGO operating 12.20 mA current Notes 1. When the high-speed on-chip oscillator clock and high-speed system clock are stopped. 2. Current flowing only to the watchdog timer (including the operation current of the 1.5 kHz on-chip oscillator). The current value is the sum of IDD1, IDD2, or IDD3 and IWDT when the watchdog timer operates in STOP mode. 3. Current flowing only to the A/D converter. The current value is the sum of IDD1 or IDD2 and IADC when the A/D converter operates in operation mode or HALT mode. 4. Current flowing only to the LVD circuit. The current value is the sum of IDD1, IDD2, or IDD3 and ILVD when the LVD circuit operates in operation mode, HALT mode, or STOP mode. 5. Operating current that increases when the internal reference voltage is selected. This current flows even when conversion is stopped. 6. Current increased by the BGO operation. The current value is the sum of IDD1 or IDD2 and IBGO when the BGO operates in operation mode or HALT mode. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1798 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.4 AC Characteristics 36.4.1 Basic Operation (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (1/2) Parameter Symbol Instruction cycle (minimum TCY instruction execution time) Conditions High-speed on-chip oscillator clock operation High-speed system clock operation PLL clock operation Subsystem clock operation MIN. MAX. Unit 0.04166 1 s 0.05 1 s 0.04166 1 s 34.5 s 28.5 Low-speed on-chip oscillator clock operation 30.5 s 66.6 0.04166 1 s fCLK 0.04166 66.6 s fEX 1.0 20.0 MHz 35 kHz In self programming mode CPU/peripheral hardware TYP. clock frequency External system clock frequency External system clock input high-level width, low-level width fEXS 29 tEXH, tEXL 24 ns tEXHS, 13.7 s 1/fMCK+10 ns tEXLS TI00 to TI07, TI10 to TI17 tTIH, input high-level width, low- tTIL level width TO00 to TO07, TO10 to fTO TO17 output frequency All TO pins, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 12 MHz Normal slew rate, 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 6 MHz 2 MHz C = 30 pF TO01, TO06, TO07, TO11, TO13 only, Special slew rate, C = 30 pF PCLBUZ0 output frequency fPCL Normal slew rate 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 12 MHz C = 30 pF 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 6 MHz 2 MHz Special slew rate C = 30 pF Timer RJ input cycle Timer RJ input high-level width, low-level width tC TRJIO0 100 ns tWH, TRJIO0 40 ns INTP1 to INTP13 Note 1 s tWL Interrupt input high-level tINTH, width, low-level width tINTL KR0 to KR7 key interrupt tKR 250 ns tRSL 10 s tinput low-level width RESET low-level width <R> Note Pins RESET, INTP0 to INTP3, INTP12, and INTP13 have noise filters for transient levels lasting less than 100 ns. Caution Excluding the error in oscillation frequency accuracy. Remark fMCK: Timer array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1799 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) (2/2) Parameter Symbol Port output rise time, port Conditions tRO, tFO output fall time MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit P00 to P03, P10 to 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 25 ns P17, P30 to P32, P40 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 55 ns 60 ns 100 ns to P47, P50 to P57, P60 to P67, P70 to P77, P96, P97, P106, P107, P120, P125 to P127, P130, P140, P150 to 157 (normal slew rate) C = 30 pF P10, P12, P14, P30, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V P120, P140 2.7 V EVDD0 < 4.0 V 25 Note (special slew rate) C = 30 pF Note TA = +25C, EVDD0 = 5.0 V Caution Excluding the error in oscillation frequency accuracy. Remark fMCK: Timer array unit operation clock frequency AC Timing Test Points VIH VIH Test points VIL VIL External System Clock Timing 1/fEX tEXL EXCLK R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 tEXH 0.8 VDD (MIN.) 0.2 VDD (MAX.) 1800 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) TI/TO Timing tTIH tTIL TI00 to TI07, TI10 to TI17 1/fTO TO00 to TO07, TO10 to TO17 Interrupt Request Input Timing tINTH tINTL INTP0 to INTP13 Key Interrupt Input Timing tKR KR0 to KR7 RESET Input Timing tRSL RESET Output Rising and Falling Timing tRO tFO Output pin R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1801 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.5 Peripheral Functions Characteristics 36.5.1 Serial Array Unit (1) During communication at same potential (UART mode) (dedicated baud rate generator output) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Transfer rate Conditions MIN. TYP. - MAX. Unit fMCK/6 bps fCLK = 24 MHz, Normal slew rate 4 Mbps fMCK = fCLK Special slew rate 2 Mbps UART mode connection diagram (during communication at same potential) Rx TxD0, TxD1 RL78 microcontroller User's device RxD0, RxD1 Tx UART mode bit width (during communication at same potential) (reference) 1/Transfer rate High-/low-level bit width Baud-rate tolerance TxD0, TxD1 RxD0, RxD1 Caution Select the normal input buffer for the RxD0 pin and RxD1 pin and normal output mode for the TxD0 pin and TxD1 pin. Remark fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1802 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (2) During communication at same potential (CSI mode) (master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output, normal slew rate) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Note 5 ns SCKp cycle time tKCY1 SCKp high-level width, low- tKH1, 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V tKCY1/2 - 12 ns level width tKL1 2.7 V EVDD0 4.0 V tKCY1/2 - 18 ns SIp setup time tSIK1 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V 55 ns (to SCKp)Note 1 166.6 2.7 V EVDD0 4.0 V tKSI1 SIp hold time 66 ns 30 ns (from SCKp)Note 2 Delay time from SCKp to SOp output tKSO1 C = 30 pFNote 4 40 ns Note 3 Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 4. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines. 5. tKCY1 4/fCLK must also be satisfied. Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp pin and normal output mode for the SOp pin and SCKp pin. Remark p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1803 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (3) During communication at same potential (CSI mode) (master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output, special slew rate) (TA = -40 to +150C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol SCKp cycle time tKCY1 SCKp high-level width, tKH1, low-level width tKL1 SIp setup time Conditions MIN. 500 TYP. MAX. Note 5 Unit ns tKCY1/2 - 60 ns tSIK1 120 ns tKSI1 80 ns Note 1 (to SCKp) SIp hold time (from SCKp)Note 2 Delay time from SCKp to SOp output tKSO1 C = 30 pFNote 4 90 ns Note 3 Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 4. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines. 5. tKCY1 4/fCLK must also be satisfied. Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp pin and normal output mode and special slew rate for the SOp pin and SCKp pin. Remark p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1804 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (4) During communication at same potential (CSI mode) (slave mode, SCKp ... external clock input, normal slew rate) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit SCKp cycle time tKCY2 8/fMCK ns SCKp high-level width, low-level tKH2, tKCY2/2 ns width tKL2 1/fMCK + ns tSIK2 SIp setup time 20 Note 1 (to SCKp) tKSI2 SIp hold time 1/fMCK + (from SCKp) Delay time from SCKp to SOp output ns 31 Note 2 tKSO2 Note 3 C = 30 pFNote 4.0V VDD = EVDD0 = EVDD1 5.5V 4 SSIp setup time tSSIK 2.7V VDD = EVDD0 = EVDD1 < 4.0V 2/fMCK + 44 ns 2/fMCK + 60 ns DAP = 0 120 ns DAP = 1 1/fMCK + ns 120 SSIp hold time tKSSI DAP = 0 1/fMCK + ns 120 DAP = 1 120 ns Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 4. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines. Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp, SCKp and SSIp pins and normal output mode for the SOp pin. Remarks 1. 2. p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1805 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (5) During communication at same potential (CSI mode) (slave mode, SCKp ... external clock input, special slew rate) (TA = -40 to +150C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter SCKp cycle time Symbol tKCY2 Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 20 MHz fMCK 10/fMCK ns 10 MHz fMCK 20 MHz 8/fMCK ns fMCK 10 MHz 6/fMCK ns tKCY2/2 ns SCKp high-level width, low-level tKH2, width tKL2 SIp setup time tSIK2 80 ns tKSI2 1/fMCK + 50 ns (to SCKp)Note1 SIp hold time Note 2 (from SCKp) tKSO2 C = 30 pFNote 4 SSIp setup time tSSIK DAP = 0 120 ns DAP = 1 1/fMCK + 120 ns SSIp hold time tKSSI DAP = 0 1/fMCK + 120 ns DAP = 1 120 ns Delay time from SCKp to SOp output 2/fMCK + 80 ns Note 3 Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 4. C is the load capacitance of the SCKp and SOp output lines. Caution Select the normal input buffer for the SIp, SCKp and SSIp pins and normal output mode and special slew rate for the SOp pin. Remarks 1. 2. p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1806 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) CSI mode connection diagram (during communication at same potential) <Master> <Slave> SCK SCKp RL78 microcontroller SIp SCKp SO User's device SOp SI SSIp RL78 microcontroller SCK SIp SO SOp SI SSIp SSO User's device CSI mode serial transfer timing (during communication at same potential) (When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1) Remark p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1807 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) CSI mode serial transfer timing (during communication at same potential) (When DAPmn= 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0) tKCY1, 2 tKH1, 2 tKL1, 2 SCKp tSIK1, 2 SIp tKSI1, 2 Input data tKSO1, 2 SOp Output data tSSIK tKSSI SSIp Remark p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1808 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (6) During communication at same potential (simplified I2C mode) (SDAr: N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode, SCLr: normal output mode) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. 1000 Note Unit kHz SCLr clock frequency fSCL Hold time when SCLr = "L" tLOW 475 ns Hold time when SCLr = "H" tHIGH 475 ns Data setup time (reception) tSU:DAT 1/fMCK + 85 ns Data hold time (transmission) tHD:DAT Cb = 50 pF, Rb = 2.7 k 0 305 ns Note fCLK fMCK/4 must also be satisfied. Simplified I2C mode connection diagram (during communication at same potential) VDD Rb SDA SDAr RL78 microcontroller User's device SCLr SCL Simplified I2C mode serial transfer timing (during communication at same potential) 1/fSCL tLOW tHIGH SCLr SDAr tHD : DAT Caution tSU : DAT Select the normal input buffer and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SDAr pin and normal output mode for the SCLr pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SDAr) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SCLr, SDAr) load capacitance 2. r: IICr (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) 3. fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1809 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (7) During communication at same potential (simplified I2C mode) (SDAr and SCLr: N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol SCLr clock frequency fSCL Hold time when SCLr = "L" tLOW Conditions MIN. MAX. 400 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, Note Unit kHz 1300 ns 600 ns 1/fMCK + 120 ns 1/fMCK + 270 ns Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.7 k 2.7 V VDD 4.0 V, <R> Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Hold time when SCLr = "H" 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, tHIGH Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.7 k 2.7 V VDD 4.0 V, <R> Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Data setup time (reception) 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, tSU : DAT Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.7 k 2.7 V VDD 4.0 V, <R> Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Data hold time (transmission) 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V, tHD : DAT 0 300 ns Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.7 k 2.7 V VDD 4.0 V, <R> Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Note fCLK fMCK/4 must also be satisfied. Simplified I2C mode connection diagram (during communication at same potential) Vb Vb Rb SDAr Rb SDA RL78 microcontroller User's device SCLr Caution SCL Select the normal input buffer and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SDAr pin and SCLr pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) load capacitance, Vb[V]: Communication line voltage 2. r: IICr (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) 3. fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1810 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) Simplified I2C mode serial transfer timing (during communication at same potential) 1/fSCL tLOW tHIGH SCLr SDAr tHD : DAT Remark tSU : DAT r: IICr (r = 00, 01, 10, 11) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1811 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (8) Communication at different potential (UART mode) (TxD output buffer: N-ch open-drain, RxD input buffer: TTL) (TA = -40 to +150C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Transfer rate Conditions Reception MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit fMCK/6 bps 4.0 Mbps Smaller number bps 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, VIH = 2.2 V, Theoretical value of the VIL = 0.8 V maximum transfer rate Note (Cb = 30 pF) Transmission 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, of the values VOH = 2.2 V, given by fMCK/6 VOL = 0.8 V and expression 1 is applicable. Theoretical value of the 4.0 Mbps maximum transfer rate Note (Cb = 30 pF) Normal slew rate Note Expression 1: Maximum transfer rate = 1 / [{Cb Rb ln (1 2.2/Vb)} 3] UART mode connection diagram (during communication at different potential) Vb Rb Rx TxD0, TxD1 RL78 microcontroller User's device RxD0, RxD1 Tx UART mode bit width (during communication at different potential) (reference) 1/Transfer rate Low-level bit width High-level bit width Baud-rate tolerance TxD0, TxD1 1/Transfer rate High-/low-level bit width Baud-rate tolerance RxD0, RxD1 Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the RxD0 pin and RxD1 pin and N-ch open-drain output mode for the TxD0 pin and TxD1 pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (TxD) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (TxD) load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage 2. fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1812 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (9) During communication at different potential (3-V supply system) (CSI mode) (master mode, SCKp ... internal clock output, normal slew rate) (TA = -40 to +150C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter SCKp cycle time Symbol tKCY1 Conditions 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, MIN. 400 TYP. MAX. Note3 Unit ns Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k SCKp high-level width tKH1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, tKCY1/2 - 75 ns tKCY1/2 - 20 ns 150 ns 70 ns 30 ns 30 ns Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k SCKp low-level width tKL1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k SIp setup time tSIK1 SIp setup time tSIK1 (to SCKp) tKSI1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Note 1 (from SCKp) tKSI1 SIp hold time 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Note 2 SIp hold time 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k (to SCKp)Note 1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Note 2 (from SCKp) Delay time from SCKp to SOp outputNote1 tKSO1 Delay time from SCKp to SOp outputNote2 tKSO1 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, 120 ns 40 ns Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k 2.7 V Vb EVDD0, Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. tKCY1 4/fCLK must also be satisfied. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1813 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) CSI mode connection diagram (during communication at different potential) <Master> Vb Vb Rb SCKp RL78 microcontroller SIp SOp Rb SCK SO User's device SI SSIp Caution Select the TTL input buffer for the SIp pin and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SOp pin and SCKp pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SCKp, SOp) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SOp, SCKp) load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage 2. p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) 3. AC characteristics of the serial array unit during communication at different potential in CSI mode are measured with the VIH and VIL below: When 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V: VIH = 2.2 V, VIL = 0.8 V R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1814 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) CSI mode serial transfer timing (master mode) (during communication at different potential) (When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1) t KCY1 t KL1 t KH1 SCKp t SIK1 SIp t KSI1 Input data t KSO1 SOp Output data CSI mode serial transfer timing (master mode) (during communication at different potential) (When DAPmn= 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0) t KCY1 t KL1 t KH1 SCKp t SIK1 SIp t KSI1 Input data t KSO1 SOp R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Output data 1815 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (10) During communication at different potential (3-V supply system) (CSI mode) (slave mode, SCKp ... external clock input, normal slew rate) (TA = -40 to +150C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter SCKp cycle time Symbol tKCY2 Conditions 2.7 V Vb VDD 2.7 V Vb VDD MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 20 MHz < fMCK 24 MHz 12/fMCK ns 8 MHz < fMCK 20 MHz 10/fMCK ns 4 MHz < fMCK 8 MHz 8/fMCK ns fMCK 4 MHz 6/fMCK ns tKCY2/2 - 20 ns SCKp high-level width, low- tKH2, level width tKL2 SIp setup time tSIK2 90 ns tKSI2 1/fMCK + ns (to SCKp)Note 1 SIp hold time 50 (from SCKp)Note 2 Delay time from SCKp to tKSO2 SOp outputNote 3 SSIp setup time SSIp hold time 2.7 V Vb VDD, 2/fMCK + Cb = 30 pF, Rb = 1.4 k tSSIK tKSSI ns 120 DAP = 0 120 ns DAP = 1 1/fMCK + 120 ns DAP = 0 1/fMCK + 120 ns DAP = 1 120 ns Notes 1. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The Slp setup time becomes "to SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 2. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The SIp hold time becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1 or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. 3. When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1. The delay time to SOp output becomes "from SCKp" when DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1816 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) CSI mode connection diagram (during communication at different potential) <Slave> Vb Rb SCKp RL78 microcontroller SIp SO SOp SI SSlp Caution SCK User's device SSO Select the TTL input buffer for the SIp, SCKp and SSIp pins and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SOp pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SOp) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SOp) load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage 2. p: CSIp (p = 00, 01, 10, 11), m: Unit m (m = 0, 1), n: Channel n (n = 0, 1) 3. AC characteristics of the serial array unit during communication at different potential in CSI mode are measured with the VIH and VIL below: When 4.0 V EVDD0 5.5 V, 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V: VIH = 2.2 V, VIL = 0.8 V R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1817 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) CSI mode serial transfer timing (slave mode) (during communication at different potential) (When DAPmn = 0 and CKPmn = 0, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 1) tKCY2 tKL2 tKH2 SCKp tSIK2 SIp tKSI2 Input data tKSO2 Output data SOp tKSSI tSSIK SSIp CSI mode serial transfer timing (slave mode) (during communication at different potential) (When DAPmn= 0 and CKPmn = 1, or DAPmn = 1 and CKPmn = 0) tKCY2 tKL2 tKH2 SCKp tSIK2 SIp tKSI2 Input data tKSO2 Output data SOp tSSIK tKSSI SSIp R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1818 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (11) During communication at different potential (3-V supply system) (simplified I2C mode) (SDAr: TTL input buffer mode or N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode, SCLr: N-ch open-drain output (EVDD0 tolerance) mode) (TA = -40 to +150C, 4.0 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter SCLr clock frequency Symbol fSCL Conditions MIN. 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, MAX. Unit 400Note kHz Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Hold time when SCLr = "L" tLOW Hold time when SCLr = "H" tHIGH Data setup time (reception) tSU:DAT 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, 1200 ns 600 ns 135 + 1/fMCK ns Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Data hold time (transmission) tHD:DAT 2.7 V Vb 4.0 V, 0 140 ns Cb = 100 pF, Rb = 1.4 k Note fSCL fMCK/4 must also be satisfied. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1819 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) Simplified I2C mode connection diagram (during communication at different potential) Vb Vb Rb Rb SDA SDAr RL78 microcontroller User's device SCLr SCL Simplified I2C mode serial transfer timing (during communication at different potential) 1/fSCL tLOW tHIGH SCLr SDAr tHD : DAT Caution tSU : DAT Select the TTL input buffer and the N-ch open-drain output mode for the SDAr pin and N-ch open-drain output mode for the SCLr pin. Remarks 1. Rb []: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) pull-up resistance, Cb [F]: Communication line (SDAr, SCLr) load capacitance, Vb [V]: Communication line voltage 2. fMCK: Serial array unit operation clock frequency R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1820 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.5.2 Serial Interface IICA (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Conditions Normal Mode MIN. fSCL SCLA0 clock frequency MAX. Fast Mode MIN. MAX. Fast mode plus: Fast Mode Plus MIN. MAX. 0 1000 Unit kHz 10 MHz fCLK 0 Fast mode: 400 kHz 3.5 MHz fCLK 0 Normal mode: 100 kHz 1 MHz fCLK Setup time of restart conditionNote 1 tSU:STA 4.7 0.6 0.26 s Hold time tHD:STA 4.0 0.6 0.26 s Hold time when SCLA0 = "L" tLOW 4.7 1.3 0.5 s Hold time when SCLA0 = "H" tHIGH 4.0 0.6 0.26 s Data setup time (reception) tSU:DAT 250 100 50 ns Data hold time (transmission)Note 2 tHD:DAT 0 0 s Setup time of stop condition tSU:STO 4.0 0.6 0.26 s tBUF 4.7 1.3 0.5 s Bus-free time 3.45 0 0.9 Notes 1. The first clock pulse is generated after this period when the start/restart condition is detected. 2. The maximum value (MAX.) of tHD:DAT is during normal transfer and a wait state is inserted in the ACK (acknowledge) timing. Remark The maximum value of Cb (communication line capacitance) and the value of Rb (communication line pull-up resistor) at that time in each mode are as follows. Standard mode: Cb = 400 pF, Rb = 2.7 k Fast mode: Cb = 320 pF, Rb = 1.1 k Fast mode plus: Cb = 120 pF, Rb = 1.1 k IICA serial transfer timing tLOW tR SCLA0 tHD:DAT tHD:STA tHIGH tF tSU:STA tHD:STA tSU:STO tSU:DAT SDAA0 tBUF Stop condition Start condition R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Restart condition Stop condition 1821 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.5.3 On-chip Debug (UART) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Transfer rate Conditions - MIN. TYP. 115.2 k MAX. Unit 1M bps MAX. Unit 4000 kbps 36.5.4 LIN/UART Module (RLIN3) UART Mode (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Transfer rate Symbol - Conditions Operation mode, LIN communication clock source HALT mode (fCLK or fMX): MIN. TYP. 4 to 24 MHz SNOOZE mode LIN communication clock source 4.8 (fCLK): 1 to 24 MHz FRQSEL4 = 0 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) LIN communication clock source 2.4 (fCLK): 1 to 24 MHz FRQSEL4 = 1 in the user option byte (000C2H/020C2H) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1822 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.6 Analog Characteristics 36.6.1 A/D Converter Characteristics (1) When AVREF (+) = AVREFP/ANI0 (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 1), AVREF (-) = AVREFM/ANI1 (ADREFM = 1), target ANI pin: ANI2 to ANI23 (power supply: VDD) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V, Reference voltage (+) = AVREFP, Reference voltage (-) = AVREFM = 0 V) Parameter Resolution Symbol Conditions RES Overall error Note 1 Conversion time Zero-scale error Notes 1, 2 AINL tCONV EZS MIN. TYP. 8 MAX. Unit 10 bit 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 1.2 3.0 LSB AVREFP = VDD 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 1.2 3.5 LSB 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.125 39 s AVREFP = VDD 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 3.1875 39 s 10-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.25 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.25 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.5 LSB 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.5 LSB AVREFP = VDD Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EFS 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Integral linearity errorNote 1 ILE 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Differential linearity errorNote 1 DLE 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Reference voltage (+) AVREFP 2.7 VDD V Analog input voltage VAIN 0 AVREFP V Internal reference voltage (+) VBGR 1.52 V 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.38 1.45 Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1823 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (2) When AVREF (+) = AVREFP/ANI0 (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 1), AVREF (-) = AVREFM/ANI1 (ADREFM = 1), target ANI pin: ANI24 to ANI30 (power supply: EVDD0) (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V, Reference voltage (+) = AVREFP, Reference voltage (-) = AVREFM = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Resolution RES Overall errorNote 1 AINL Conversion time Zero-scale errorNotes 1, 2 tCONV EZS Conditions MIN. TYP. 8 MAX. Unit 10 bit 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 1.2 4.5 LSB AVREFP = VDD 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 1.2 5.0 LSB 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.125 39 s AVREFP = VDD 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 3.1875 39 s 10-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.35 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.35 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 3.5 LSB 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.0 LSB AVREFP = VDD Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EFS 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Integral linearity errorNote 1 ILE 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Differential linearity errorNote 1 DLE 10-bit resolution AVREFP = VDD Reference voltage (+) AVREFP 2.7 VDD V Analog input voltage VAIN 0 AVREFP V and EVDD0 Internal reference voltage (+) VBGR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.38 1.45 1.52 V Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1824 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (3) When AVREF (+) = VDD (ADREFP1 = 0, ADREFP0 = 0), AVREF (-) = VSS (ADREFM = 0), target ANI pin: ANI0 to ANI23, ANI24 to ANI30 (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V, Reference voltage (+) = VDD, Reference voltage (-) = VSS) Parameter Symbol Resolution RES Overall errorNote 1 AINL Conversion time Zero-scale error Notes 1, 2 tCONV EZS Conditions MIN. TYP. 8 MAX. Unit 10 bit 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 1.2 5.0 LSB ANI0 to ANI23 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 1.2 5.5 LSB 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 1.2 6.5 LSB ANI24 to ANI30 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 1.2 7.0 LSB 10-bit resolution 4.0 V VDD 5.5 V 2.125 39 s 2.7 V VDD < 4.0 V 3.1875 39 s 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.50 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.60 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.50 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.60 %FSR 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 3.5 LSB 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 4.0 LSB 2.0 LSB VDD V EVDD0 V 1.52 V 10-bit resolution ANI0 to ANI23 10-bit resolution ANI24 to ANI30 Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EFS 10-bit resolution ANI0 to ANI23 10-bit resolution ANI24 to ANI30 Integral linearity errorNote 1 ILE 10-bit resolution ANI0 to ANI23 10-bit resolution ANI24 to ANI30 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V Differential linearity errorNote 1 DLE 10-bit resolution Analog input voltage VAIN ANI0 to ANI23Note 3 0 ANI24 to ANI30Note 3 EVSS 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.38 Internal reference voltage (+) VBGR 1.45 Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. 3. The number of pins depends on the product. For details, refer to 2.1 Pin Function List. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1825 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) (4) When AVREF (+) = internal reference voltage (ADREFP1 = 1, ADREFP0 = 0), AVREF (-) = AVREFM/ANI1 (ADREFM = 1), target ANI pin: ANI0 to ANI23, ANI24 to ANI30 (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V, Reference voltage (+) = VBGR, Reference voltage (-) = AVREFM = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Resolution MIN. RES Conversion time Zero-scale error Conditions Notes 1, 2 Integral linearity error Note 1 Differential linearity error Note 1 TYP. MAX. 8 Unit bit 39 s 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 0.60 %FSR 8-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 2.0 LSB 8-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 1.0 LSB 1.52 V VBGR V tCONV 8-bit resolution 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V EZS 8-bit resolution ILE DLE 17 Reference voltage (+) VBGR 1.38 Analog input voltage VAIN 0 1.45 Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (1/2 LSB). 2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1826 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.6.2 Temperatures Sensor Characteristics (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Temperature sensor output Conditions VTMPS25 MIN. Setting ADS register = 80H, TA = +25C TYP. MAX. 1.1 Unit V voltage Reference output voltage VCONST Setting ADS register = 81H Temperature coefficient FVTMPS Temperature sensor that depends on the 1.38 1.45 1.52 -3.3 V mV/C temperature Operation stabilization wait tAMP s 5 time 36.6.3 D/A Converter Characteristics (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Resolution RES Overall error AINL Settling time tSET Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit 8 bit Rload = 4 M 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V -2.5/+3.0 LSB Rload = 8 M 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V -2.5/+3.0 LSB Cload = 20 pF 2.7 V VDD 5.5 V 3 s TYP. MAX. Unit 5 90 mV VDD V 70 700 ns 36.6.4 Comparator Characteristics (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Input offset voltage Input voltage range Response time Symbol Conditions MIN. VIOCMP VICMP 0 tCR, tCF Input amplitude 100 mV tWAIT Input amplitude 100 mV tCMP Stabilization wait time 800 ns 3.3 V VDD 5.5 V 1 s 2.7 V VDD < 3.3 V 3 s during input channel switchingNote 1 Operation stabilization wait timeNote 2 Notes 1. Period of time from when the comparator input channel is switched until the comparator is switched to output 2. Period of time from when the comparator operation is enabled (HCMPON bit in CMPCTL is set to 1) until the comparator satisfies the DC/AC characteristics. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1827 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.6.5 POR Circuit Characteristics (TA = -40 to +150C, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Detection voltage Symbol Note Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit V VPOR Power supply rise time 1.48 1.56 1.67 VPDR Power supply fall time 1.47 1.55 1.66 Minimum pulse width TPW Detection delay time TPD V s 300 350 s Note This indicates the POR circuit characteristics, and normal operation is not guaranteed under the condition of less than lower limit operation voltage (2.7 V). R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1828 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.6.6 LVD Circuit Characteristics (1) LVD detection voltage of interrupt mode or reset mode (TA = -40 to +150C, VPDR EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Detection Supply voltage level VLVD0 voltage VLVD1 VLVD2 VLVD3 VLVD4 VLVD5 Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit Power supply rise time 4.62 4.74 5.22 V Power supply fall time 4.52 4.64 5.11 V Power supply rise time 4.50 4.62 5.09 V Power supply fall time 4.40 4.52 4.98 V Power supply rise time 4.30 4.42 4.87 V Power supply fall time 4.21 4.32 4.76 V Power supply rise time 3.13 3.22 3.55 V Power supply fall time 3.07 3.15 3.47 V Power supply rise time 2.95 3.02 3.33 V Power supply fall time 2.89 2.96 3.23 V Power supply rise time 2.74 2.81 3.11 V 2.75 3.00 V 300 s Power supply fall time Minimum pulse width tLW Detection delay time tLD 2.68 Note 300 s Note The minimum value exceeds below the lower limit operation voltage (2.7 V), however, in reset mode, normal operation (same behavior when VDD = 2.7 V) is possible until a reset is effected at the power supply falling time. (2) LVD detection voltage of interrupt and reset mode (TA = -40 to +150C, VPDR EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Interrupt and reset Symbol VLVD5 Conditions VPOC2, VPOC1, VPOC0 = 0, 0, 1 MIN. Note 1 , VLVD2 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 1, 0 Rising release reset voltage Falling interrupt voltage VLVD5 VPOC2, VPOC1, VPOC0 = 0, 1, 0Note 1, VLVD5 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 0, 0 VLVD0 LVIS1, LVIS0 = 0, 0 3.00 V 4.30 4.42 4.87 V 4.21 4.32 4.76 V 2.68Note 2.75 3.00 V 4.50 4.62 5.09 V Falling interrupt voltage 4.40 4.52 4.98 V 2.75 3.00 V Note 1 , 2.68 Note 2 falling reset voltage: 2.75 V LVIS1, LVIS0 = 0, 1 2.75 2.68 Rising release reset voltage VPOC2, VPOC1, VPOC0 = 0, 1, 1 VLVD3 Unit 2 falling reset voltage: 2.75 V VLVD1 MAX. 2 falling reset voltage: 2.75 V mode TYP. Note Rising release reset voltage 3.13 3.22 3.55 V Falling interrupt voltage 3.07 3.15 3.47 V Rising release reset voltage 4.62 4.74 5.22 V Falling interrupt voltage 4.52 4.64 5.11 V Notes 1. These values indicate setting values of option bytes. 2. The minimum value exceeds below the lower limit operation voltage (2.7 V), however, in reset mode, normal operation (same behavior when VDD = 2.7 V) is possible until a reset is effected at the power supply falling time. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1829 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.7 Power Supply Voltage Rising Time (TA = -40 to +150C, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Maximum power supply Conditions Svrmax 0 V VDD (VPOC2 = 0 or Svrmin 0 V 2.7 V MIN. TYP. 1Note 2) MAX. Unit 50Note 3 V/ms voltage rising slope Minimum power supply voltage rising slope Note 1 6.5 V/ms Notes 1. The minimum power supply voltage rising slope is applied only under the following condition. When the voltage detection (LVD) circuit is not used (VPOC2 = 1) and an external reset circuit is not used or when a reset is not effected until VDD = 2.7 V. 2. These values indicate setting values of option bytes. 3. If the power supply drops below VPDR and a POR reset is effected, this specification is also applied when the power supply is recovered without dropping to 0 V. 36.8 STOP Mode Memory Retention Characteristics (TA = -40 to +150C, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol Data retention supply voltage Conditions MIN. 1.47Note VDDDR TYP. MAX. Unit 5.5 V Note The value depends on the POR detection voltage. When the voltage drops, the data is retained before a POR reset is effected, but data is not retained when a POR reset is effected. STOP mode Operation mode Data retention mode VDD VDDDR STOP instruction execution Standby release signal (interrupt request) R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1830 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) 36.9 Flash Memory Programming Characteristics (TA = -40 to +150C, 2.7 V EVDD0 = EVDD1 = VDD 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS0 = EVSS1 = 0 V) Parameter Symbol System clock frequency Number of code flash rewrites Conditions fCLK Notes 1, 2, 3 Cerwr MIN. TYP. 1 Retained for 20 years (after rewrite) 1,000 MAX. Unit 24 MHz Times TA = +85C Note 4 Number of data flash rewrites Retained for 20 years (after rewrite) Notes 1, 2, 3 TA = +85C 10,000 Note 4 Retained for 5 years (after rewrite) 100,000 TA = +85C Note 4 <R> Erase time Terasa Block erase 5 ms Write time Twrwa 1 word write 10 s Notes 1. 1 erase + 1 write after the erase is regarded as 1 rewrite. The retaining years are until next rewrite after the rewrite. 2. When using flash memory programmer and Renesas Electronics self programming library 3. These are the characteristics of the flash memory and the results obtained from reliability testing by Renesas Electronics Corporation. 4. The specified data retention time is given under the condition that the average temperature (TA) is 85C or below. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1831 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 37 PACKAGE DRAWING CHAPTER 37 PACKAGE DRAWING 37.1 20-pin products 20-PIN PLASTIC SSOP (7.62 mm (300)) V 11 20 detail of lead end T I P L 10 1 U V W A W H F G J S C E D N M M K S (UNIT:mm) B ITEM A B NOTE Each lead centerline is located within 0.13 mm of its true position (T.P. ) at maximum material condition. DIMENSIONS 6.500.10 0.325 C 0.65 (T.P .) D 0.22 +0.10 -0.05 E 0.100.05 F 1.300.10 G 1.20 H 8.100.20 I 6.100.10 J 1.000.20 K 0.15 +0.05 -0.01 L 0.50 M 0.13 N 0.10 P 3 +5 -3 T 0.25(T. P) U 0.600.15 V W 0.25 MAX. 0.15 MAX. P20MC-65-CAA-1 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1832 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 37 PACKAGE DRAWING 37.2 30-pin products JEITA Package Code RENESAS Code Previous Code MASS (TYP.) [g] P-LSSOP30-6.1x9.7-0.65 PLSP0030JB-A P30MC-65-CAB-2 0.18 30 V 16 detail of lead end T I P 1 U V 15 W L W A H F G J S C E D N S B M M NOTE Each lead centerline is located within 0.13 mm of its true position (T.P.) at maximum material condition . K (UNIT:mm) ITEM A DIMENSIONS B 9.700.10 0.30 C 0.65 (T.P. ) D 0.22 +0.10 -0.05 E 0.100.05 F 1.300.10 G 1.20 H 8.100.20 I 6.100.10 J 1.000.20 K 0.15 +0.05 -0.01 L 0.50 M 0.13 N 0.10 P 3 +5 -3 T 0.25(T.P. ) U 0.600.15 V 0.25 MAX. W 0.15 MAX. 2012 Renesas Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1833 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 37 PACKAGE DRAWING 37.3 32-pin products JEITA Package code RENESAS code Previous code MASS(TYP.)[g] P-HVQFN32-5x5-0.50 PVQN0032KD-A P32K9-50A-BAH 0.058 HD D DETAIL OF 24 A PART 17 16 25 A E HE c2 A1 9 32 8 1 ZE Dimple ZD INDEX MARK A S y Referance Symbol Dimension in Millimeters D 4.75 E 4.75 Nom A S D2 EXPOSED DIE PAD A Max 0.90 A1 0.00 b 0.20 e Lp 1 Min 0.25 0.30 0.50 0.30 0.40 0.50 8 9 32 B E2 x 0.10 y 0.05 HD 4.95 HE 4.95 16 24 17 Lp 5.05 5.00 5.05 ZD 0.75 ZE 0.75 c2 25 5.00 0.19 0.20 D2 3.30 E2 3.30 0.21 e b R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 x M S AB 1834 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 37 PACKAGE DRAWING 37.4 48-pin products 37.4.1 48-pin LQFP JEITA Package Code RENESAS Code Previous Code MASS (TYP.) [g] P-LFQFP48-7x7-0.50 PLQP0048KF-A P48GA-50-8EU-1 0.16 HD D detail of lead end 36 25 37 A3 24 c E L Lp HE L1 (UNIT:mm) 13 48 12 1 ZE e ZD b x M S A ITEM D DIMENSIONS 7.000.20 E 7.000.20 HD 9.000.20 HE 9.000.20 A 1.60 MAX. A1 0.100.05 A2 1.400.05 A3 b A2 c L S y S NOTE Each lead centerline is located within 0.08 mm of its true position at maximum material condition. A1 0.25 0.220.05 0.145 +0.055 -0.045 0.50 Lp 0.600.15 L1 1.000.20 3 +5 -3 e 0.50 x 0.08 y 0.08 ZD 0.75 ZE 0.75 2012 Renesas Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1835 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 37 PACKAGE DRAWING 37.4.2 48-pin VQFN JEITA Package code RENESAS code Previous code MASS(TYP.)[g] P-HVQFN48-7x7-0.50 PVQN0048KG-A P48K9-50A-BAJ 0.13 HD D DETAIL OF 36 A PART 25 24 37 A E HE c2 A1 Dimple 13 48 12 1 ZE INDEX MARK ZD A S y Referance Symbol Dimension in Millimeters D 6.75 E 6.75 Min Nom A S D2 EXPOSED DIE PAD A 0.90 A1 0.00 b 0.20 e Lp 1 Max 0.25 0.30 0.50 0.30 0.40 0.50 12 13 48 B E2 x 0.10 y 0.05 HD 6.95 HE 6.95 24 36 25 Lp 7.05 7.00 7.05 ZD 0.75 ZE 0.75 c2 37 7.00 0.19 0.20 D2 5.40 E2 5.40 0.21 e b R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 x M S AB 1836 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 37 PACKAGE DRAWING 37.5 64-pin products JEITA Package Code RENESAS Code Previous Code MASS (TYP.) [g] P-LFQFP64-10x10-0.50 PLQP0064KF-A P64GB-50-UEU-2 0.35 HD D detail of lead end 48 33 49 A3 32 c E L Lp HE L1 (UNIT:mm) 17 64 1 16 ZE e ZD b x M S ITEM D DIMENSIONS 10.000.20 E 10.000.20 HD 12.000.20 HE 12.000.20 A 1.60 MAX. A1 0.100.05 A2 1.400.05 A3 b A A2 c L S y S NOTE Each lead centerline is located within 0.08 mm of its true position at maximum material condition. A1 0.25 0.220.05 0.145 +0.055 -0.045 0.50 Lp 0.600.15 L1 1.000.20 3 +5 -3 e 0.50 x 0.08 y 0.08 ZD 1.25 ZE 1.25 2012 Renesas Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1837 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 37 PACKAGE DRAWING 37.6 80-pin products JEITA Package Code RENESAS Code Previous Code MASS (TYP.) [g] P-LFQFP80-12x12-0.50 PLQP0080KE-A P80GK-50-8EU-2 0.53 HD D detail of lead end 41 60 61 A3 40 c E L Lp HE L1 (UNIT:mm) 21 80 1 20 ZE e ZD b x M S E 12.000.20 HD 14.000.20 HE 14.000.20 A 1.60 MAX. A1 0.100.05 A2 1.400.05 c L A2 S S DIMENSIONS 12.000.20 A3 b A y ITEM D A1 0.25 0.220.05 0.145 +0.055 -0.045 0.50 Lp 0.600.15 L1 1.000.20 3 +5 -3 e 0.50 x 0.08 y 0.08 ZD 1.25 ZE 1.25 NOTE Each lead centerline is located within 0.08 mm of its true position at maximum material condition. 2012 Renesas Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1838 RL78/F13, F14 CHAPTER 37 PACKAGE DRAWING 37.7 100-pin products JEITA Package Code RENESAS Code Previous Code MASS (TYP.) [g] P-LFQFP100-14x14-0.50 PLQP0100KE-A P100GC-50-GBR-1 0.69 HD D detail of lead end A L1 75 76 51 50 A3 c B L E HE Lp (UNIT:mm) 26 25 100 1 ZE e b ZD x M S AB A A2 ITEM D DIMENSIONS 14.000.20 E 14.000.20 HD 16.000.20 HE 16.000.20 A 1.60 MAX. A1 0.100.05 A2 1.400.05 A3 0.25 b 0.22 0.05 c 0.145 + 0.055 0.045 L 0.50 Lp 0.600.15 L1 e 1.000.20 3 + 5 3 0.50 x 0.08 y 0.08 ZD 1.00 ZE 1.00 S y S A1 2012 Renesas Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1839 RL78/F13, F14 APPENDIX A RELATED PRODUCTS APPENDIX A RELATED PRODUCTS A.1 List of Analog and Power Devices (1/2) Field of Analog and power device Related product Feature application Lightning Lamp drive IPD PD166009T1F LED headlight power switch 40 V/10 m, protection function, overcurrent sensor, battery reverse connection protection, low power supply voltage off hold PD166010T1F 40 V/10 m, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, battery reverse connection protection, low power supply voltage off hold PD166011T1J 40 V/25 m, dual channel, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, low power supply voltage off hold PD166013T1J 40 V/60 m, dual channel, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, low power supply voltage off hold PD166014T1K 40 V/60 m, quad channel, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, low power supply voltage off hold PD166017T1F 40 V/6 m, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, battery reverse connection protection, low power supply voltage off hold PD166020T1F 42 V/10 m, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, battery reverse connection protection, low power supply voltage off hold PD166021T1F 42V/10m, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, battery reverse connection protection, low power supply voltage off hold, overheating shutoff latch Interior lamp drive thermal HAF2017 60 V/43 m, LDPAK, overheating protection function FET HAF2011 60 V/20 m, LDPAK, overheating protection function HAF2007 60 V/75 m, DPAK, overheating protection function NP22N055SLE 55 V/37 m, Ciss = 1100 pF, TO-252 NP32N055SLE 55 V/24 m, Ciss = 2000 pF, TO-252 NP40N055KLE 55 V/23 m, Ciss = 1950 pF, TO-263 NP40N10VDF 100 V/26 m, Ciss = 2400 pF, TO-252 NP70N10KUF 100 V/17 m, Ciss = 3750 pF Typ.@10 V, TO-263 Battery reverse connection NP36P04SDG 40 V/17 m, TO-252 protection/ NP36P04KDG 40 V/17 m, TO-263 Battery reverse connection NP55N04SUG 40 V/6.5 m, TO-252 protection MOSFET NP55N03SUG 30 V/5.0 m, TO-252 Flyback converter drive NP82N10PUF 82 V/15 m, TO-263 MOSFET NP70N10KUF 100 V/20 m, TO-263 Voltage step-up MOSFET Abnormal current cutoff MOSFET For the sales situation and detailed specifications, contact your local sales representatives. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1840 RL78/F13, F14 APPENDIX A RELATED PRODUCTS (2/2) Field of Analog and power device Related product Feature application Motor Pre-driver and power IC R2A25111KFP On-chip 3-phase pre-driver: Drive capacity Ciss = 10000 pF, dead time function, etc., 48-pin LQFP R2A25108KFP On-chip 3-phase pre-driver: Drive capacity Ciss = 10000 pF, current sense amplifier, motor position detection, dead time function, etc., 48-pin LQFP Motor drive MOSFET for NP60N04KUG 40 V/60 A/6.1 m/TO-263 power window, wiper, power door NP60N055KUG 55 V/60 A/9.4 m/TO-263 NP82N04PLG 60 V/82 A/6.7 m/TO-263 NP90N04VUG 40 V/90 A/4.0 m/TO-252 NP52N055SUG 55 V/52 A/14 m/TO-252 NP55N055SUG 55 V/55 A/10 m/TO-252 R2J25953 H-bridge driver: Pch high-side: 16 mmax / uPA2793GR 40 V/7 A/52 m/SOP8 uPA2794GR 60 V/5.5 A/97 m/SOP8 RJM0306JSP 30 V/3.5 A/210 m/SOP8 2SK3408 For mechanical relay drive: 435 V/1.0 A/195 m/SC96 Motor drive MOSFET NP80N06MLG 60 V, 80 A, 10 m, TO-220 for blower motor NP82N06MLG 60 V, 82 A, 7.4 m, TO-220 2SK3755 40 V, 45 A, 12 m, Isolated TO-220 2SK4144 60 V, 70 A, 5.8 m, Isolated TO-220 PD166009T1F 40 V/10 m, protection function, overcurrent sensor, battery reverse connection protection, low power supply voltage off hold PD166010T1F 40 V/10 m, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, battery reverse connection protection, low power supply voltage off hold PD166017T1F 40 V/6 mprotection function, high-precision load current sensor, battery reverse connection protection, low power supply voltage off hold PD166011T1J 40 V/25 m, dual channel, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, low power supply voltage off hold PD166013T1J 40 V/60 m, dual channel, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, low power supply voltage off hold PD166014T1K 40 V/60 m, quad channel, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, low power supply voltage off hold PD166017T1F 40 V/6 m, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, battery reverse connection protection, low power supply voltage off hold PD166020T1F 42 V/10 m, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, battery reverse connection protection, low power supply voltage off hold PD166021T1F 42 V/10 m, protection function, high-precision load current sensor, battery reverse connection protection, low power supply voltage off hold, overheating shutoff latch CAN line ESD protection NNCD-ST series Bidirectional ESD protection ESD protection NNCD-DA series (200 mW) RD-FS series (1 W) Surge protection for power door Nch low-side: 11 mmax, Iout= 50 A max, HSOP36 Motor drive MOSFET for mirror Seat Heater CAN Heater driver IPD For the sales situation and detailed specifications, contact your local sales representatives. R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1841 RL78/F13, F14 APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY Major Revisions in This Edition 1/3 Page Description Classification CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW p.10 to 31 Figure 1-1 to 1-22 Block Diagram, added other products (c) CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE p.147 Table 3-5 SFR List (1/4), corrected After Reset value of P13 register (c) CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS p.256 4.2.7 Port 7, corrected PMC7 register (a) p.271 Table 4-14 Setting Functions of P80/ANI2/ANO0 Pin, corrected (c) p.321 Figure 4-75 Format of Port Register, corrected After Reset value of P13 register (c) p.325 Figure 4-79 Format of Port Mode Control Register, added Note of PMC7 register (c) CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR p.389 Figure 5-18 Format of LIN Clock Select Register (LINCKSEL), added Caution 3 (c) p.423 5.7.2 High-Speed On-Chip Oscillator, corrected high-speed on-chip oscillator frequency (a) CHAPTER 6 TIMER ARRAY UNIT p.438 6.2.2 Timer data register mn (TDRmn), added description (c) CHAPTER 8 TIMER RD p.569 Table 8-2 Timer RD Register Configuration, corrected Access Size of TRDCR1 register (a) p.602 8.2.19 Timer RD General Registers Ai, Bi, Ci, and Di (TRDGRAi, TRDGRBi, TRDGRCi, TRDGRDi) (a) p.621 Figure 8-44 Pulse Output Forced Cutoff, corrected INTP0 circuit [Complementary PWM Mode], deleted TRDDF0 and TRDDF1 register (a) CHAPTER 9 REAL-TIME CLOCK p.666 Figure 9-8 Format of Real-time Clock Control Register 1 (RTCC1), added Note 1 and 2 of RWAIT bit (b) CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER p.697 Table 11-3 Setting of Overflow Time of Watchdog Timer, added Note (b) CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER p.703 12.2 (1) ANI0 to ANI23 (VDD) and ANI24 to ANI30 (EVDD) pins, corrected Note (a) p.730 Figure 12-18 Formats of Port Mode Control Registers 7, 9 and 12, added Note of PMC7 register (c) CHAPTER 13 D/A CONVERTER (RL78/F14 Only) p.772 Table 13-1 Setting Functions of ANO0/ANI2/P80 Pin, corrected (c) CHAPTER 15 SERIAL ARRAY UNIT p.792,833,895, Note of Tables "Group A, B, C-1, C-2, D-1, D-2 and E" (b) p.807 Note of Figure 15-7. Format of Serial Communication Operation Setting Register mn (SCRmn) (b) p.821 Note of Figure 15-17. Format of Serial Slave Select Enable Register m (SSEm) (b) 959,992 Remark: "Classification" in the above table classifies revisions as follows. (a): Error correction, (b): Addition/change of specifications, (c): Addition/change of description or note, (d): Addition/change of package, part number, or management division, (e): Addition/change of related documents R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1842 RL78/F13, F14 APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY 2/3 Page Description Classification CHAPTER 17 LIN/UART MODULE (RLIN3) p.1112,1140 LIN Clock Select Register (LINCKSEL), added Note of LINnMCK (c) LIN/UART Error Detection Enable Register (LEDEn), added description of (Bit Error) and (Framing Error) (c) p.1153 LIN/UART Transmission Control Register (LTRCn), deleted description of FTS bit (c) p.1160 LIN/UART Data Field Configuration Register (LDFCn), corrected description of RFDL bits (a) p.1176 LIN/UART Space Configuration Register (LSCn), added description of IBS bits (c) p.1181 LIN/UART Status Register (LSTn), deleted description of FTC bit (c) p.1189 UART Operation Enable Register (LUOERn), added description of UROE bit (c) p.1216,1217 Table 17-14, Table 17-15 Types of Statuses in LIN Master Mode / LIN Slave Mode, and added Note 1 (c) p.1218,1221 Table 17-16, Table 17-17 Types of Error Statuses in LIN Master Mode / LIN Slave Mode, corrected Notes 1 (c) ,1168 p.1123,1124 ,1150 and 3 p.1231 Figure 17-30 Expansion Bit Reception Example (with Data Comparison), added Note (c) p.1246 17.6.2 to 17.6.5 LIN Self-Test Mode, added description when LIN self-test mode is canceled (c) p.1251,1253 Figure 17-41, Figure 17-42, Figure 17-43 Block Diagram of Baud Rate Generator, corrected of LIN (b) ,1255 communications clock source to 1249 CHAPTER 18 CAN INTERFACE (RS-CAN LITE) p.1295,1305, 18.3.7 CiERFLL, 18.3.14 GERFLL, 18.3.35 RFSTSm, 18.3.47 CFSTSk, 18.3.75 THLSTSi, corrected Note (c) 18.3.46 CANi Transmit/Receive FIFO Control Register kH (CFCCHk), corrected description of CFITR bit (a) 1327,1342, 1372 p.1340 CHAPTER 19 DTC p.1461 19.4.3 DTC Pending Instruction, added multiply, divide, and multiply-accumulate instructions (c) CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT FUCTIONS p.1479 Table 21-1 Interrupt Source List (3/4), corrected Note 5 (a) p.1512 21.4.4 Interrupt servicing during division instruction, added Caution (b) p.1514 21.4.5 Interrupt request hold, added divide, and multiply-accumulate instructions (c) CHAPTER 27 SAFETY FUNCTIONS p.1591 Figure 27-9 Format of 1-bit Error Detection Interrupt Enable Register (ECCIER), added Note 2 (c) p.1596 27.3.4 CPU stack pointer monitor function, added Caution (b) p.1601 Figure 27-20 Format of Invalid Memory Access Detection Control Register (IAWCTL), deleted Note 2 (c) CHAPTER 33 INSTRUCTION SET p.1672 Table 33-5 Operation List (12/18), added Caution (b) CHAPTER 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE L) p.1686,1687 34.3.1 Pin Characteristics (1/4) and (2/4), corrected Note 1 p.1697 34.4.1 Basic Operation (1/2), added RESET pin of Note p.1708 (c) (c) 2 34.5.1 Serial Array Unit (7) During communication at same potential (simplified I C mode), corrected (a) Conditions on Table p.1729 Remark: 34.9 Flash Memory Programming Characteristics, corrected Conditions at Erase time (c) "Classification" in the above table classifies revisions as follows. (a): Error correction, (b): Addition/change of specifications, (c): Addition/change of description or note, (d): Addition/change of package, part number, or management division, (e): Addition/change of related documents R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1843 RL78/F13, F14 APPENDIX B REVISION HISTORY 3/3 Page Description Classification CHAPTER 35 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE K) p.1737,1738 35.3.1 Pin Characteristics (1/4) and (2/4), corrected Note 1 p.1748 35.4.1 Basic Operation (1/2), added RESET pin of Note (c) (c) p.1759 35.5.1 Serial Array Unit (7) During communication at same potential (simplified I2C mode), corrected (a) Conditions on Table p.1780 35.9 Flash Memory Programming Characteristics, corrected Conditions at Erase time (c) CHAPTER 36 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GRADE Y) p.1783 36.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings (2/2), corrected P106 pin name of Output current low (IOL1) (a) p.1788,1789 36.3.1 Pin Characteristics (1/4) and (2/4), corrected Note 1 (c) p.1799 36.4.1 Basic Operation (1/2), added RESET pin of Note p.1810 (c) 2 36.5.1 Serial Array Unit (7) During communication at same potential (simplified I C mode), corrected (a) Conditions on Table p.1831 Remark: 36.9 Flash Memory Programming Characteristics, corrected Conditions at Erase time (c) "Classification" in the above table classifies revisions as follows. (a): Error correction, (b): Addition/change of specifications, (c): Addition/change of description or note, (d): Addition/change of package, part number, or management division, (e): Addition/change of related documents R01UH0368EJ0210 Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 1844 RL78/F13, F14 User's Manual: Hardware Publication Date: Rev.2.10 Dec 10, 2015 Published by: Renesas Electronics Corporation http://www.renesas.com SALES OFFICES Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/" for the latest and detailed information. Renesas Electronics America Inc. 2801 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara, CA 95050-2549, U.S.A. Tel: +1-408-588-6000, Fax: +1-408-588-6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited 1101 Nicholson Road, Newmarket, Ontario L3Y 9C3, Canada Tel: +1-905-898-5441, Fax: +1-905-898-3220 Renesas Electronics Europe Limited Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K Tel: +44-1628-585-100, Fax: +44-1628-585-900 Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10, 40472 Dusseldorf, Germany Tel: +49-211-6503-0, Fax: +49-211-6503-1327 Renesas Electronics (China) Co., Ltd. Room 1709, Quantum Plaza, No.27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District, Beijing 100191, P.R.China Tel: +86-10-8235-1155, Fax: +86-10-8235-7679 Renesas Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Unit 301, Tower A, Central Towers, 555 Langao Road, Putuo District, Shanghai, P. R. China 200333 Tel: +86-21-2226-0888, Fax: +86-21-2226-0999 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601-1613, 16/F., Tower 2, Grand Century Place, 193 Prince Edward Road West, Mongkok, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: +852-2265-6688, Fax: +852 2886-9022/9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd. 13F, No. 363, Fu Shing North Road, Taipei 10543, Taiwan Tel: +886-2-8175-9600, Fax: +886 2-8175-9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd. 80 Bendemeer Road, Unit #06-02 Hyflux Innovation Centre, Singapore 339949 Tel: +65-6213-0200, Fax: +65-6213-0300 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn.Bhd. Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No. 18, Jln Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Tel: +60-3-7955-9390, Fax: +60-3-7955-9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co., Ltd. 12F., 234 Teheran-ro, Gangnam-Ku, Seoul, 135-920, Korea Tel: +82-2-558-3737, Fax: +82-2-558-5141 (c) 2015 Renesas Electronics Corporation. All rights reserved. Colophon 3.0 RL78/F13, F14 R01UH0368EJ0210